Skip to main content

Full text of "More books"

See other formats 


MORE  BOOKS 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2015 


https://archive.org/details/morebooks1947bost 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the 
Boston  Public  Library 
Sixth  Series  Volume  XXII 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE  TRUSTEES 
BOSTON 
1947 


7;     J.  it  i  i  <  f  <*«.J'^\<- 


BOSTOH  PUBLIC  LIBRARY:  PRINTIdS  DtfARTMFNT 
12.29.47:  250t75 


Table  of  Contents 


ARTICLES: 

American  Newspapers,  The 

Bibliography  of: 
Art  of  Navigation,  The 
Barlow,  Joel  to  Monroe 
The  Book  of  Battles 
British  in  Boston,  The 

209, 

Brome,  Richard,  The  Plays  of 
Cervantes,  The  Quarter-Cen- 
tenary of 
Bulwer-Lytton,  Letters  by 

Children's  Books,  Illustra- 
tors of 

Cushing,  Dr.  Harvey,  A  Bio- 
graphy of 

Everett,  John,  The  Highway- 
man 

Fort  Bull,  The  French  Cap- 
ture of 
Gissing,  George,  Letters  by 


343 
6 

57 
64 
163. 
257 
285 

369 
123 

175 
344 
24 
137 


Graphic  Art 


83 
323. 
3/6 

Processes        22,  61. 

100,  141,  185 
Higginson,    Thomas  Went- 

worth,  lettrs  by  52 
"A  Jewes  Prophesy"  and  Caleb 

Shilock  43 
Loyalist  in  Spite  of  Himself  337 
Mallock,  W.  H.  A  Neglected 
Wit 

Jackson,  Andrew,  on  Consti- 
tutional Problems 

Melville  Defends  Typee 

Magnificant  Gift,  A 

Music  in  Boston  in  the  'Nine- 
ties ti 

Redication  Week  304 

A  Russian  Daumier  93 


FACSIMILES: 

"The  Antipodes,"  1640,  Title- 

Page  of  297 
"Arte   of    Navigation,"  1561, 

Title-Page  of  7 


243 

3 
203 

283 


Bellowes,    George   W.,  A 

Lithograph  by  227 

Brome,  Richard,  Portrait  of  289 

Bulwer-Lytton,  A  Portrait  of  129 

The  Capture  of  Fort  Bull, 

Title-Page  of  8; 

General  Gage's  Orderly  Book, 

A  Page  from  213 

"A   Jewes    Prophecy,"  1607, 

Title-Page  of  47 

Mallock,  W.  H..  Caricature 

of  247 

Nevakhovicii,  A  Cartoon  by  95 

Rowlandson,  Thomas:  "Ghost 

in  the  Wine  Cellar"  371 

Toulouse-Lautrec,  Lithogra- 
phy by  98 

EXHIBITIONS  IN  THE  PRINT  DE- 
PARTMENT: 

Cheffetz.  Asa,  Wood-En  crav- 
ings by  341 
French  Prints,  1830-1930  302 
Griggs.  Frederick  L.,  Etch- 
ings by  263 
McBey,  James,  Etchings  by  20 
Merrill,  Hiram  C,  and  his 

Contempories  59 

Pennell,  Joseph,  Etchings  by  183 

Prints  of  Children  225 
Rowlandson.  The  Watercolor 

Drawings  of  367 

Zorn,  Anders,  Etchings  by  139 

LIBRARY  NOTES: 

29,  69,  107,  148,  193,  233,  269, 
309.  349-  391 

TEN  BOOKS: 

25.  65,  103.  144.  189,  229,  265, 
305,  345.  387 

BOOKS  RECENTLY  ADDED: 

33,  73,  no.  I5i,  195.  235,  271, 
311,  352,  393 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 

Volume  XXII,  Number  i 


Contents 

Page 


ANDREW  JACKSON  ON  CONSTITUTIONAL  PROBLEMS  3 

By  Theresa  Coolidge 

THE  ART  OF  NAVIGATION  (with  facsimile)  6 

By  Margaret  Munsterberg 

MUSIC  IN  BOSTON  IN  THE  'NINETIES  11 

By  Hugo  Leiciitentritt 

ETCHINGS  AND  DRYPOINTS  BY  JAMES  McBEY  20 

By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

GRAPHIC  ARTS  PROCESSES  22 

By  Muriel  C.  Figenbaum 

A  BIOGRAPHY  OF  DR.  HARVEY  CUSHING  24 

TEN  BOOKS:  SHORT  REVIEWS 

Ernest  Simmons  :  Tolstoy  25 

Stefan  Zweig:  Balzac  25 

K.  Zilliacus:  Mirror  of  the  Past  26 

Salvador  de  Madariaga:  Victors  Beware  26 

Ruth  Benedict :  The  Chrysanthemum  and  the  Sword  26 

Don  Luigi  Sturzo:  Nationalism  and  Internationalism  27 

Charles  O.  Gregory :  Labor  and  the  Law  27 

Frederic  F.  van  de  Water:  Lake  Champlain  and  Lake  George  27 

Arthur  M.  Schlesinger:  Learning  How  to  Behave  28 

Karl  Geiringer:  Haydn  28 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

Whittier  Introduces  Elizabeth  Lloyd  Howell  29 

Blundeville  on  Maps  and  Globes  29 

Mark  Twain  Protests  about  False  German  Biography  30 

Lectures  and  Concerts  31 

Lowell  Lectures  32 

LIST  OF  RECENTLY-ACQUIRED  BOOKS  33 


*  * 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17. 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1012.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library  15-17  Blagden  St.,  January,  1947,  Vol.  XXII,  No.  1 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees,  for  free  distribution; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
JANUARY,  1947 

Andrew  Jackson  on  Constitutional  Problems 

ANDREW  JACKSON  was  defeated  for  the  Presidency  in  1824  by 
John  Quincy  Adams.  At  that  time  he  was  a  senator  from  Tennessee. 
The  following  year,  when  the  state  legislature  nominated  him  to  be  its 
candidate  for  President  in  the  next  election,  Jackson  resigned  his  seat. 
His  place  was  taken  by  his  friend  Judge  Hugh  Lawson  White,  a  promi- 
nent lawyer  and  former  state  senator.  The  Library  has  recently  acquired 
a  letter  by  Jackson  addressed  to  Senator  White,  written  on  March  16, 
1826,  at  the  "Hermitage,"  the  home  he  had  built  in  Tennessee  thirty-five 
years  before. 

The  letter,  which  is  apparently  unpublished,  opens  with  thanks  for 
Senator  White's  "prompt  attention  to  the  claim  of  Capt.  Thos.  Shields  .  .  . 
an  honorable  and  honest  man,"  wanting  "a  just  and  equitable  settlement 
with  his  gov't."  Shields  was  a  purser  in  the  United  States  Navy  during 
the  war  with  Britain.  Once  in  the  summer  of  1814  he  forestalled  an  enemy 
attack  upon  New  Orleans  by  a  cunning  deception,  thus  greatly  assisting 
the  forces  under  Jackson. 

The  writer  then  discusses  the  project  of  the  mission  to  Panama,  a 
highly  controversial  matter.  Two  years  after  the  Monroe  Doctrine  had 
been  announced,  John  Quincy  Adams  wished  to  send  two  delegates, 
Richard  Anderson  and  John  Sergeant,  to  a  convention  of  American  states 
to  be  held  at  Panama.  The  Central  American  countries  had  suggested 
the  meeting  to  strengthen  their  association  with  the  United  States.  The 
official  letter  of  instruction  to  the  delegates  emphasized  the  importance 
of  peace:  "The  true  interest  of  all  nations,  but  especially  that  of  infant 
states."  Of  trade  it  asserted:  "Nations  are  equal,  common  members  of 
an  universal  family.  Why  should  there  be  any  inequality  between  them, 
in  their  commercial  intercourse?"  Adams  urged  that  a  joint  declaration 
of  the  states,  similar  to  that  of  Monroe,  be  arranged.  Finally  the  delegates 
were  charged  to  direct  their  attention  to  "the  cause  of  free  institutions  on 
this  continent."  Jackson,  hostile  to  the  plan,  wrote  to  White : 

When  I  first  saw  the  message  of  the  President  to  Congress  and  read  from 
it  that  he  had  received  and  accepted  of  the  invitation  to  be  represented  at 
the  congress  of  Panama  —  that  ministers  would  be  appointed  and  com- 

3 


4 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


missioned  to  represent  us  there  —  I  turned  to  the  Constitution  to  find  from 
what  member  of  that  instrument  such  powers  were  derived  and  authorised 
him  to  give  such  a  pledge  without  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate  and 
of  Congress.  I  must  confess  that  after  all  my  research  I  was  compelled  to 
conclude  that  the  framers  of  the  Constitution  in  all  their  deliberations  on  the 
powers  necessary  to  be  given  to  our  confederated  government  had  never 
once  thought  of  giving  such  powers  to  the  Executive  to  appoint  and  com- 
mission ministers  to  represent  us  at  such  a  congress.  Nay,  sir,  if  we  are  to 
view  the  origin  of  that  congress  as  arising  out  of  the  Treaty  between  the 
Republics  of  Mexico  and  Columbia  —  the  objects  as  stated  in  the  North 
American  Review  —  then,  I  would  doubt  whether  the  Executive  and  Con- 
gress could  find  a  constitutional  power  to  authorise  them  to  send  repre- 
sentatives to  that  congress  of  confederated  independent  nations.  Such  a 
power  I  cannot  find  within  the  Constitution.  For  surely  the  moment  we  are 
represented  in  that  congress  we  become  a  member  of  the  confederacy,  stipu- 
lated in  the  Treaty  between  Columbia  and  Mexico,  which  appears  to  me  to 
be  the  basis  of  this  congress. 

I  therefore  rejoice  that  the  Senate  has  taken  time  seriously  to  deliberate 
upon  this  important  subject  that  may  be  fraught  with  many  evils  and  but 
few  beneficial  results  that  cannot  be  better  obtained  in  another  way.  We  the 
people  are  anxiously  awaiting  the  injunction  of  secrecy  to  be  taken  from 
your  proceedings,  when  the  whole  ground  can  be  seen.  For  I  assure  you, 
altho  we  possess  the  most  lively  feelings  for  the  liberty  and  prosperity  of 
the  Republics  of  the  South,  the  feelings  of  the  people  are  entangling  alliances 
with  no  nation.  This  is  our  safe  and  true  policy,  whatever  may  be  the  opinion 
at  Washington  to  the  contrary. 

Opposition  centered  in  the  fear  of  foreign  entanglements  which 
might  antagonize  Spain  and,  worst  of  all,  lead  us  into  war.  On  March  26 
White  delivered  a  lengthy  address  setting  forth  this  opinion.  The  Admin- 
istration obtained  a  favorable  vote,  twenty-four  against  twenty.  However, 
the  convention  came  to  naught.  One  of  the  American  delegates  died  en 
route  to  Panama;  and  the  other  arrived  too  late  for  the  spring  meeting,  and 
political  troubles  arose  so  that  no  further  meetings  were  held. 

Jackson,  embittered  by  his  defeat  and  sharing  the  suspicion  of  a 
corrupt  bargain  in  the  Adams-Clay  political  alliance,  vigorously  criticized 
the  government.  He  suggested  a  constitutional  amendment  forbidding 
the  appointment  of  members  of  Congress  to  any  office  in  the  gift  of  the 
President  during  their  congressional  term  and  for  two  years  thereafter. 
He  also  supported  a  bill  requiring  the  President  to  explain  to  the  Senate 
his  reasons  for  any  change  in  office  holders.  As  he  continues  in  his  letter 
to  White: 

The  amendments  proposed  to  the  constitution  are  thought  by  the  people 
to  be  necessary  to  keep  our  government  pure  and  uncorrupted,  and  by  that 
means  make  it  perpetual.  If  Congress  does  not  adopt  them,  I  have  no  doubt 
but  the  people  will  take  the  subject  up  and  pursue  a  course  that  will  obtain 
the  amendments  proposed. 

Another  major  issue  of  the  time  was  the  right  of  the  federal  govern- 
ment to  assist  in  local  development.  Adams  firmly  believed  in  it.  He 


ANDREW  JACKSON  ON  CONSTITUTIONAL  PROBLEMS  5 


wanted  to  use  public  funds  for  such  enterprises  as  a  national  university, 
astronomical  observatories,  and  the  promotion  of  the  arts.  Jackson  gives 
his  opinion  of  the  scheme  in  the  following  lines : 

The  power  of  internal  improvement  by  the  general  government  within  a 
state  without  its  consent  I  never  did  believe  was  conferred  by  the  Consti- 
tution —  unless  military  roads  to  a  fortress,  and  when  made,  only  the  common 
use  —  Congress  being  charged  with  the  common  defence  of  the  country, 
and  for  this  purpose  to  build  fortifications  must  have  roads  for  their  supply 
and  reinforcement.  I  have  thought  that  the  States  ought  not  to  yield  this 
power  —  the  additional  patronage  it  would  give  might  prove  dangerous.  All 
internal  improvements  should  be  made  by  the  States  respectively,  and  so 
soon  as  our  national  debt  is  paid,  the  surplus  revenue  apportioned  amongst 
the  States  for  internal  improvement  and  educating  the  poor.  Important  im- 
provements altogether  national  ought  to  be  carried  into  effect  by  the  general 
government  by  and  with  the  consent  of  the  States,  each  State  through  which 
the  improvement  passed  binding  themselves  to  keep  the  canal  or  road  in  repair. 

This  attitude  foreshadows  the  policy  which  led  to  the  decline  of  federalism 
during  Jackson's  presidency,  giving  way  to  his  concept  of  democracy,  so 
ably  described  by  Mr.  Arthur  M.  Schlesinger,  Jr.,  in  The  Age  of  Jackson. 

The  remainder  of  the  letter  is  more  personal.  There  is  a  cordial 
reference  to  Major  John  Eaton,  White's  colleague  in  the  Senate,  an  old 
friend  of  Jackson's.  Eaton  was  appointed  Secretary  of  War  by  Jackson  in 
1829,  Governor  of  Florida  in  1836,  and  minister  to  Spain  in  1838.  The  let- 
ter ends  with  a  word  of  condolence  upon  the  death  of  White's  eldest  son. 

Twice  during  his  administration  Jackson  offered  Senator  White  the 
Secretaryship  of  War.  Both  times  the  latter  refused,  maintaining  an  un- 
willingness to  accept  office  from  a  friend.  However,  when  Van  Buren  an- 
nounced his  candidacy  for  President,  White  decided  to  run  against  him. 
His  antagonism  to  Van  Buren  destroyed  his  friendship  with  Jackson. 

THERESA  COOLIDGE 


The  Art  of  Navigation 


THE  first  edition  of  The  Arte  of  Nauigation,  the  English  translation 
of  Martin  Cortes's  compendium  of  cosmography  and  navigation 
made  by  Richard  Eden  and  printed  in  London  in  1561,  has  a  threefold 
interest.  It  is  a  handsome  specimen  of  English  book-making  of  the 
period;  it  is  characteristic  of  the  exploring  spirit  and  the  consciousness 
of  the  New  World  fermenting  among  the  Elizabethans ;  and,  finally,  the 
Spanish  original  is  noted  as  the  first  work  of  its  kind  to  recognize  the 
variation  of  the  compass. 

The  volume  has  ninety-two  leaves  (A2  is  missing  in  the  Library's 
copy),  besides  the  one  on  which  the  title-page  has  been  mounted.  An 
ornamental  border  frames  the  title,  and  the  colophon  states  that  the 
book  was  printed  by  Richard  Jugge.  About  thirty  diagrams  illustrate 
the  text.  Jugge  was  appointed  royal  printer  together  with  Cawood  when 
Queen  Elizabeth  ascended  the  throne,  and  among  the  products  of  his 
press  are  an  edition  of  the  English  Bible  and  one  of  the  Book  of  Common 
Prayer,  as  well  as  the  statutes  of  the  Queen.  The  name  of  a  former 
owner,  Eduard  Castelyn,  appears  on  the  title-page  in  an  old  hand,  and 
there  are  manuscript  notes  in  the  margins.  It  is  possible  that  this  is  the 
"Maister  Edwarde  Castlen"  of  the  Merchants  Adventurers  who  is  men- 
tioned in  the  preface  as  one  of  the  men  chiefly  responsible  for  having 
the  translation  made.  The  book  was  later  part  of  the  famous  library  of 
Americana  collected  by  Samuel  L.  M.  Barlow  of  New  York. 

Richard  Eden,  the  translator,  was  renowned  as  a  scholar.  Born 
about  1 52 1  in  Herefordshire,  he  studied  at  Cambridge  under  Sir  Thomas 
Smythe.  He  was  employed  variously,  for  a  time  as  secretary  to  Sir 
William  Cecil,  and  in  1562  entered  the  service  of  the  vidame  of  Chartres. 
In  the  reign  of  Queen  Mary  he  was  cited  for  heresy  by  the  Bishop  of 
Lincoln,  but  suffered  only  the  loss  of  his  office.  Five  years  later  in  Paris, 
however,  he  narrowly  escaped  the  Massacre  of  St.  Bartholomew.  He 
returned  to  London  and  died  in  1576.  It  is  as  a  translator  that  his  repu- 
tation has  survived.  In  1553  appeared  his  English  version  of  Munster's 
Cosmographia,  and  two  years  later  his  well-known  compilation  of  travel 
accounts,  The  Decades  of  the  Newe  World,  or  West  India. 

The  preface  to  The  Arte  of  Nauigation,  which  Eden  addressed  to  the 
governors,  consuls,  and  members  of  the  Society  of  Merchants  Adven- 
turers, throws  light  on  the  origin  of  the  English  book.  He  praises  the 
liberality  of  the  Society  for  its  support  of  "many  goodly  inuentions, 
viages,  nauigations  and  discoueries  of  landes  &  Seas  heretofore  vn- 
knowen."  The  latest  expedition  was  the  seventh  voyage  to  "Muscovy," 
which  had  Stephen  Borough  as  chief  pilot.  Borough  is  famous  as  the 
only  captain  who  returned  with  his  ship  from  the  first  English  voyage 


6 


ContcTOitg  a  competing 

ous  Defcriptton  cf  tin  &>prjere, 
Uiitl)  trjemaftpng  of  certenjn* 
ftcuntentes  ana  Hulesfcj^a* 
utgattons  :  ano  cremplfffet) 
mange  SDemonfirattons . 
WLfl&ttwi  in  tfjc  &>pa* 
npHjc  tongue  bp 
Martin  Curtcsi 
Sno  Direc* 
teofo 
t&eti&ntpfi'otte 
Cfjarlestije 
fgfte. 

Tranflated  out  of  SpanyOie 
into  £ngly(heby  Ri-, 
chard  Eden, 


Titlc-Page  from  Cortes's  "Arte  of  Navigation,"  London  1561 

7 


THE  ART  OF  NAVIGATION 


9 


to  Russia  in  1553,  for  his  sighting  and  naming  of  the  North  Cape,  and 
for  his  discovery  of  the  River  Obi  and  the  strait  which  bears  his  name. 
Toward  the  close  of  Queen  Mary's  reign  he  visited  Spain,  and  it  is  pos- 
sible that  there  he  conceived  the  idea  of  making  Cortes's  work  useful 
to  English  mariners.  Eden  mentions  that  he  prompted  the  Society  to 
have  the  translation  made;  thereupon  the  latter  "not  only  desired  me, 
but  also  with  liberall  rewarde  enterteined  me,  to  take  in  hande  the  trans- 
lation." In  the  course  of  translating,  Eden  evidently  added  a  little  con- 
tribution of  his  own,  for  in  the  chapter  on  the  declination  of  the  sun  he 
inserted  two  paragraphs  in  which  he  gives  the  declination  as  it  was 
observed  on  the  20th  of  April,  1561.  He  refers  also  to  the  voyages  lately 
undertaken  by  Master  Jenkynson,  whom  he  describes  as  sent  forth  at 
the  expense  of  the  Merchant  Adventurers  "more  lyke  an  Ambassatoure 
sente  from  anye  Prince  or  Emperour,  then  from  a  companye  of  mer- 
chaunt  men."  This  Anthony  Jenkynson  was  entrusted  with  credentials 
from  Queen  Elizabeth  to  the  Shah  or  "great  Sophy"  of  Persia,  to  open 
trade  there  for  the  English.  His  own  entertaining  account  of  his  em- 
bassy appears  in  Hakluyt's  Principall  Navigations. 

Martin  Cortes  wrote  his  treatise  in  Cadiz  in  1545,  as  numerous 
references  in  the  text  show.  His  Breve  Compendio  de  Id  Esfera  y  de  la 
Arte  de  Navigar  was  printed  there  in  the  following  year.  It  is  doubtful 
whether  the  first  edition  exists  at  all;  even  the  Enciclopedia  Universal 
mentions  only  the  edition  of  1 55 1 .  Eden  might  have  used  this  second 
edition  or  the  Seville  edition  of  1556.  Cortes,  a  native  of  Aragon,  lived 
in  Cadiz  after  1 530,  a  teacher  of  navigation  and  a  geographer  of  repute. 
He  died  in  1582. 

The  Breve  Compendio  is  of  peculiar  historical  significance,  as  it 
combines  the  accepted  medieval  cosmography  with  a  newr  experimental 
spirit.  Repeatedly  the  author  mentions  "experience,"  which  he  com- 
mends as  "more  profytable  then  the  subtile  and  curious  questions  of  the 
secrete  searchers  of  natural  thynges  without  experience."  He  records 
an  experiment  of  his  own  to  determine  the  altitude  of  the  equinoctial. 

Cortes  dedicated  his  treatise  to  the  Emperor  Charles  V,  whom  he 
praises  as  an  excellent  lawgiver  to  all  Europe  as  well  as  to  the  new- 
world  lately  discovered.  The  book  itself  is  divided  into  three  parts,  of 
which  the  first  two  treat  of  the  composition  of  the  world  and  the  move- 
ments of  the  sun  and  moon.  -It  was  only  two  years  before  that  Coperni- 
cus's  De  Orbium  Coelestium  Revolutionibus  had  appeared;  its  revolution- 
ary doctrine  could  hardly  have  been  absorbed  by  an  orthodox  Spaniard 
in  so  short  a  time,  if  indeed  he  had  heard  of  it  at  all.  "The  Pithagorians," 
he  explains  on  the  page  which  contains  a  neat  chart  of  the  ten  spheres 
and  the  Empyrean,  ".  .  .  were  of  opinion  that  the  earth  dyd  moue  .  .  . 
The  which  errour,  both  Aristotle  hymselfe  and  the  Astronomers  do 
confute."   His  cosmography  follows  the  medieval  pattern,  as  it  was 


lO 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


known  from  such  text-books  as  Sacrobosco's  Sphaera  Mundi.  Cortes  re- 
fers to  this  famous  authority  and  to  its  commentator  John  Baptist  Capu- 
ano,  as  well  as  to  many  others  —  Plato  and  Aristotle,  Pliny  and  Plutarch, 
the  classic  poets,  the  Church  Fathers,  the  Arabian  Averrois,  and  such 
later  men  as  Johann  Stoffler  and  Nicholas  Cusanus.  It  is  natural  that 
he  should  have  turned  to  his  compatriot  St.  Isidore  of  Seville. 

Cortes  discusses  the  astronomical  circles,  the  terrestrial  zones,  the 
divisions  of  time  in  relation  to  planetary  movements,  the  golden  number, 
the  principle  of  the  dial,  and  the  tides  and  tempests.  As  to  whether  the 
region  between  the  tropic  and  the  antarctic  zone  is  inhabited,  he  lets 
"experience"  decide.  Those  that  sail  to  the  East  Indies,  he  pointed  out, 
touch  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  as  well  as  Brazil  and  the  confines  of  the 
Rio  de  la  Plata,  "al  the  coaste  into  the  straightes  of  Magalianes."  He 
also  mentions  that  all  this  land  was  discovered  by  Magellan  in  1520  or 
1521. 

The  third  part  is  devoted  to  the  construction  and  use  of  the  com- 
pass, the  astrolabe,  and  other  nautical  instruments.  The  history  of  the 
compass  has  given  rise  to  much  dispute,  some  historians  crediting  the 
Chinese  or  the  Arabs  with  introducing  it,  others  claiming  it  for  France, 
and  still  others  naming  Flavio  di  Gioia  of  Amalfi  as  the  inventor.  Dr. 
S.  P.  Thompson,  in  his  study  "The  Rose  of  the  Winds :  the  Origin  and 
Development  of  the  Compass"  (British  Academy  Proceedings,  1913-14), 
states  that  the  final  stage  of  development,  by  which  the  pivoted  mag- 
netic needle  was  affixed  to  the  chart  of  the  winds,  was  made  in  1302  in 
southern  Italy,  probably  at  Amalfi.  In  Cortes's  book  appears  such  a 
circular  chart  showing  the  Rose  of  the  Winds,  with  the  32  angular  com- 
partments, the  traditional  fleur-de-lis  used  to  designate  the  north,  and 
the  cross  at  the  east.  The  names  of  the  winds  are  given  by  Eden  in 
English. 

The  discovery  that  the  declination  of  the  compass  needle  varied 
according  to  location  has  been  attributed  to  Columbus.  Cortes  particu- 
larly stresses  that  phenomenon,  explaining  it  by  postulating  a  point  of 
magnetic  attraction  outside  the  pole  of  the  world  or  the  evolving 
spheres,  so  that  departure  from  the  meridian  (in  which  the  compasses 
point  to  the  pole)  causes  corresponding  declination  "northeasting"  or 
"northwesting." 

MARGARET  MUNSTERBERG 


Music  in  Boston  in  the  'Nineties 


By  HUGO  LEICHTENTRITT 

(Continued  from  the  December  1946  issue) 

A NUMBER  of  Symphony  programs  of  special  interest  for  one  reason 
or  another  may  here  be  briefly  recorded.  The  Fifth  Symphony  of 
August  Klughardt  was  performed  by  Nikisch  in  1891.  The  composer's 
name  is  utterly  unknown  nowadays.  Yet  fifty  years  ago  Klughardt,  the 
Court  Conductor  of  Dessau,  was  highly  respected  in  Germany  and  his 
numerous  symphonic  and  chamber  music  works  were  frequently  presented. 

Another  fifth  symphony  made  its  first  appearance  in  Boston  on 
October  21,  1892  —  Tschaikovsky's,  brilliantly  rendered  by  Nikisch,  who 
later  became  the  greatest  interpreter  of  Tschaikovsky's  music.  No  con- 
ductor of  the  time  could  rival  Nikisch  in  the  languor,  passion,  ecstasy, 
ferocity,  and  enchantment  he  was  able  to  evoke  from  the  Tschaikovsky 
scores,  and  his  reading  of  the  Fourth,  Fifth,  and  Sixth  Symphonies  be- 
came a  model  for  all  conductors,  a  model  equaled  by  nobody  —  save 
Koussevitzky,  a  generation  later.  Tschaikovsky's  only  visit  to  America, 
in  1891,  had  made  a  sensation  in  musical  circles  and  had  greatly  increased 
the  interest  of  the  public  in  the  work  of  the  Russian  master.  That  his 
schedule  of  concerts  comprised  only  New  York,  Philadelphia,  and  Balti- 
more, and  omitted  Boston,  must  have  hurt  the  pride  of  the  Boston  music 
enthusiasts.  Certainly  Tschaikovsky  would  have  had  to  acknowledge 
the  superiority  of  Nikisch  as  a  conductor  of  his  music,  could  he  have 
compared  that  artist's  achievements  with  his  own  half-hearted  approach 
to  the  conductor's  desk.  The  first  Boston  performance  of  the  Symphonie 
Pathetique  I  did  not  hear,  as  I  left  Boston  in  the  summer  of  1894,  too  early 
for  that  event. 

Still  a  third  fifth  symphony  had  its  first  hearing  here  at  that  time.  It 
was  From  the  Nczv  World,  still  in  manuscript,  by  Antonin  Dvorak.  The 
Boston  performance  on  December  29,  1893,  under  Emil  Paur's  direction, 
followed  closely  the  New  York  world  premiere,  a  fortnight  earlier,  under 
Anton  Seidl.  The  Bohemian  composer  had  come  to  New  York  in  1892 
to  take  over  the  directorship  of  the  newly  founded  National  Conserva- 
tory, and  to  help  American  musicians,  if  possible,  in  founding  a  national 
school.  He  believed  that  the  tunes  of  the  Indians  and  the  Negroes  might 
serve  as  the  basis  for  an  American  art,  just  as  the  Bohemian  folk  songs 
and  rustic  dance  tunes  were  the  cornerstone  of  the  music  of  Smetana, 
and  of  his  own.  Unfortunately,  American  composers  were  neither  In- 
dians nor  Negroes  but  just  plain  Americans,  and  the  idea  of  a  national 
school  on  such  a  foundation  did  not  appeal  to  them.  Still,  a  number  of 
them  profited  greatly  from  Dvorak's  thoroughly  unconventional  but  in- 
spired teaching.  Dvorak  himself  profited  still  more  from  his  three  years' 

11 


i  a 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


stay  in  America,  as  he  proclaimed  so  eloquently  in  that  admirable  score, 
in  which  he  had  taken  over  Negro  and  Indian  motives  transformed 
into  a  thoroughly  Bohemian  work.  Another  of  Dvorak's  "American" 
pieces  was  the  beautiful  string-  quartet  in  F,  Opus  96,  which  I  heard  at 
its  "first  public  performance"  by  the  Kneisel  Quartet  on  January  1,  1894, 
three  days  after  the  New  World  Symphony.  That  chamber  music  concert 
was  also  memorable  for  the  participation  of  Busoni,  in  Brahms's  G  minor 
Piano  Quartet  with  the  fiery  gypsy  finale. 

The  endeavors  of  Dvorak  found  a  curious  echo  in  Boston.  The 
Boston  Herald  of  May  28,  1893,  was  filled  with  pages  of  comment  on  the 
question  of  negro  melodies  as  basis  for  an  American  school  of  composi- 
tion. Dvorak's  opinion  given  in  an  interview  is  extensively  quoted.  Fol- 
lowing this,  there  were  longer  or  shorter  essays  by  Professor  J.  K.  Paine, 
George  E.  Whiting,  Benjamin  J.  Lang,  G.  W.  Chadwick,  Mrs.  H.  PI.  A. 
Beach,  and  Bernard  Listemann,  all  of  them  leading  musicians  of  Boston, 
besides  letters  from  less  well-known  musicians,  such  as  E.  N.  Catlin, 
J.  B.  Claus,  George  L.  Osgood,  and  Napier  Lothian.  With  a  few  ex- 
ceptions, the  Boston  tribunal  rejected  Dvorak's  demands  more  or  less 
energetically.  One  can  plainly  see  how  much  displeased  the  New  Eng- 
land composers  were  with  Dvorak's  suggestion.  Paine  stressed  the  cos- 
mopolitan character  of  the  great  masters,  asserting  that  little  real  folk 
music  is  found  in  Handel,  Bach,  Mozart,  Beethoven,  Berlioz,  and  Wag- 
ner. "As  our  civilization  is  a  fusion  of  various  European  nationalities, 
so  American  music  more  than  any  other  should  be  all-embracing  and 
universal,"  he  wrote.  B.  J.  Lang  acknowledged  the  melodic  beauty  of 
some  negro  songs,  but  is  of  the  opinion  that  "it  does  not  seem  natural 
for  a  white  man  to  write  a  symphony  using  real  plantation  melodies  .  .  . 
and  to  claim  that  his  work  is  in  consequence  something  distinctly  Ameri- 
can." It  surely  would  be  American,  but  it  was  not  born  of  "white  folks." 
Mrs.  Beach  also  conceded  the  beauty  of  Negro  melodies,  but  considered 
them  more  African  than  American.  The  Indians  and  Eskimos  have 
more  right  to  call  themselves  native  Americans.  The  war  songs  and 
ballads  of  the  North  and  South  better  represent  the  feeling  of  our  entire 
country  than  those  of  any  of  its  component  nationalities  could  possibly 
do,  whether  African,  German,  or  Chinese.  Mrs.  Beach  wrote  at  length 
about  the  use  of  folksong  by  Chopin  and  Grieg  and  came  to  the  sensible 
conclusion  that  Negro  melodies  were  the  legitimate  domain  of  a  talented 
and  sufficiently  trained  Negro  composer.  Listemann  thought  the  prob- 
lem premature.  "Why  should  the  necessity  arise  for  the  creation  of  a 
specific  American  school  at  all,  so  long  as  the  really  gifted  composers 
are  so  few,  and  the  nation  as  a  musical  people  has  to  learn  so  much  yet, 
before  it  justly  may  aspire  to  a  school  of  its  own?"  One  must,  of  course, 
remember  that  these  almost  cynical  words  apply  to  1893.  The  situation 
is  certainly  far  different  today. 


MUSIC  IN  BOSTON  IN  THE  'NINETIES 


'3 


Chachvick's  statement  was  the  shortest,  but  also  the  emptiest.  "Such 
Negro  melodies  as  I  have  heard,"  he  wrote,  "I  should  be  sorry  to  see 
become  the  basis  of  an  American  school  of  composition."  How  narrow- 
minded  and  ignorant,  besides!  George  L.  Osgood's  comment  was  the 
most  scholarly  and  gives  evidence  of  what  he  had  learned  in  his  thorough 
studies  abroad.  He  illustrated  the  problem  with  Gregorian  psalmody, 
German  chorale,  German  Volkslied  and  Kunstlied,  claiming  that  the 
classical  sonata  and  symphony  were  based  on  the  relation  of  tonic  to 
dominant,  derived  from  German  folksong,  as  also  on  the  contrast  of 
major  and  minor.  "The  adagio  of  the  modern  symphony  seems  to  be 
the  scenic  development  of  the  instrumental  Lied."  Osgood  was  the 
only  one  who  really  understood  what  Dvorak  meant  and,  not  content 
with  a  superficial  refutation,  dug  deeply  to  the  roots  of  the  problem. 
Consequently,  he  substantially  agreed  with  Dvorak. 

NIELS  GADE,  the  Danish  master  and  first  representative  of  Scan- 
dinavian music  to  win  European  acclaim,  seems  to  be  totally  for- 
gotten at  present.  Yet  there  was  a  time  when  his  Ossian  overture,  Opus  i, 
was  considered  a  masterpiece  and  when  his  symphonies  were  widely 
played.  Mendelssohn's  enthusiasm  for  Gade's  First  Symphony  in  C 
minor  was  so  great  that  he  chose  the  young  Dane  for  his  successor  as 
conductor  of  the  famous  Leipzig  Gewandhaus  concerts.  Though  Gade's 
later  works  did  not  fulfil  his  promise,  a  number  of  his  scores  would  prob- 
ably be  welcomed  again,  could  one  hear  them.  At  Boston  the  Ossian 
overture  was  played  by  Nikisch  in  1892,  and  the  melodious  B  flat  Sym- 
phony, No.  4,  charming  in  its  soft  beauty,  later  in  the  same  year.  The 
Adamowski  Quartet  also  performed  his  String  Quartet,  Opus  63,  in  that 
season. 

On  April  24,  1891,  Nikisch  presented  the  entire  first  act  of  Beetho- 
ven's Fidelio  with  chorus  and  a  cast  of  distinguished  singers :  Antonia 
Mielke,  Metropolitan  soprano;  Mrs.  Nikisch;  Emil  Fischer,  the  Hans 
Sachs  of  New  York  Metropolitan  Opera;  and  Heinrich  Meyn,  a  fine 
German  singer  and  a  resident  of  Boston.  But  a  rarer  treat  —  one  that 
I  have  never  heard  repeated  —  was  Nikisch's  performance  of  Schumann's 
Music  to  Byron's  Manfred,  on  January  8,  1892.  Mrs.  Nikisch  and  seven 
other  soloists  participated,  as  well  as  a  chorus.  Byron's  entire  poem  in 
three  acts  was  recited  by  George  Riddle,  alternating  with  the  music  at 
the  proper  places.  The  score  contains  some  of  Schumann's  most  inspired 
work,  the  magnificent  overture,  the  "Song  of  the  Spirits,"  the  arch- 
romantic  "Incantation,"  and  the  "Hymn  of  the  Spirits."  Another  great 
event  was  Emil  Paur's  performance  of  Mendelssohn's  complete  music 
to  Shakespeare's  Midsummer  Night's  Dream,  on  April  13,  1894  —  the  en- 
chanting overture  and  the  fourteen  pieces  of  incidental  music,  heard  as 
George  Riddle  recited  the  drama.   Two  soloists  and  a  chorus  partici- 


I4  MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 

pated.  Riddle,  a  favorite  with  the  Boston  public,  ventured  to  announce 
as  many  as  six  readings  of  dramas  between  February  6  and  22,  1893. 

Still  another  rare  enterprise  demands  recording.  The  singer  Hein- 
rich  Meyn  associated  himself  with  the  pianist  Clayton  Johns  to  produce 
what  has  never  been  produced  since :  the  entire  cycle  of  Brahms's  Mage- 
lone  Lieder,  together  with  the  tale  by  Ludwig  Tieck  the  poet,  which  the 
songs  illustrate.  The  story  was  recited  in  German  by  H.  W.  Ticknor. 
Few  people  have  ever  heard  this  lyric  masterpiece  of  Brahms  in  its  en- 
tirety. In  my  fifty  years'  experience  as  a  concert  goer  I  have  heard  it 
only  once,  in  Berlin,  and  then  without  Tieck's  story. 

In  1893  Nikisch  decided  to  return  to  Europe.  His  successor  was 
Emil  Paur,  of  Viennese  schooling,  with  considerable  experience  as  a 
conductor  in  Europe.  Though  in  musicianship  he  could  well  be  com- 
pared to  Nikisch,  he  lacked  that  appeal  enjoyed  by  the  latter  from  the 
start.  I  remember  distinctly  the  disappointment  of  the  Boston  Symphony 
public  when  Paur  stepped  out  on  the  platform  for  the  first  time.  The 
romantic,  fastidiously  groomed  Nikisch,  whose  very  looks  and  gestures 
had  electrified  the  Boston  ladies,  had  as  successor  a  sober,  professorial- 
looking  man  without  any  glamor.  What  a  contrast !  The  ladies  were 
quick  to  notice  the  new  man's  old-fashioned,  narrow,  cork-screw  trousers 
—  wide,  baggy  trousers  were  then  the  style  —  and  a  suppressed  giggle 
ran  through  the  hall,  as  modest,  thin  applause  timidly  greeted  the  new- 
comer. He  was  evidently  not  a  bit  concerned  with  matters  of  dress  and 
social  etiquette;  he  had  not  studied  in  advance  the  atmosphere  of  the 
Boston  blue-blooded  Yankees;  he  was  certainly  no  charmeur.  But  he 
was  a  musician  par  excellence,  and  as  a  musician  by  and  by  he  gained  re- 
spect. Besides  his  qualities  as  a  conductor,  he  also  possessed  unusual 
powers  as  a  pianist.  His  wife  also  excelled  as  a  pianist.  In  November 
1893  she  made  her  Boston  debut  as  soloist  at  the  Symphony  concert, 
playing  the  Schubert  Wanderer  Fantasy  in  Liszt's  orchestral  version.  In 
May  1894  the  couple  gave  two  recitals  with  taxing  programs,  performing 
works  for  two  pianos :  a  concerto  by  Emil  Paur,  Liszt's  Concerto  Pathe- 
tique,  and  pieces  by  Schumann,  Chopin,  and  Reinecke.  Mr.  Paur  also 
played  such  monumental  works  as  Schumann's  Carneval,  Beethoven's 
Sonata  Appassionato,  and  Liszt's  Don  Juan  Fantasie.  The  new  conductor 
certainly  showed  his  mettle  as  a  virtuoso  and  composer  of  no  mean  at- 
tainments. Mrs.  Paur  contributed  groups  of  smaller  pieces. 

Because  of  the  Boston  Symphony  Orchestra,  Boston  became  a 
center  for  chamber  music.  Two  string  quartets,  the  Kneisel  and  the 
Adamowski  Quartet,  composed  of  members  of  the  Orchestra,  for  many 
years  gave  regular  series  of  concerts.  The  Kneisel  Quartet  probably  did 
more  for  artistic  chamber  music  in  America  than  any  other  similar  or- 
ganization. Their  concerts  were  a  revelation  of  a  kind  of  music  then 
entirely  unknown  to  me.  The  programs  comprised  not  only  the  classical 


MUSIC  IN  BOSTON  IN  THE  'NINETIES 


»5 


and  romantic  repertory,  but  also  a  great  number  of  new  and  at  that  time 
"modern"  works.  Many  of  these  have  already  been  mentioned  in  con- 
nection with  the  composers  and  the  pianists  participating.  While  famous 
soloists  from  Europe  found  America  a  fine  hunting  ground  half  a  century 
back,  quartets  from  the  Old  World  did  not  expect  considerable  profits 
from  an  American  tour.  The  consequence  was  that  for  many  years  the 
Kneisel  Quartet  was  without  a  peer  in  its  class,  and,  mainly  owing  to 
the  high  standard  set  by  it  on  its  annual  tournee  through  the  States, 
American  music  lovers  acquired  a  taste  for  chamber  music.  About  1894 
the  Spiering  Quartet  in  Chicago  began  to  acquire  fame  and  to  rival  the 
Kneisels. 

IN  the  early  'nineties  the  Wagner  flood  had  reached  Boston.  The  city 
was  swept  by  a  Wagner  craze.  At  the  Symphony  at  least  one  com- 
plete Wagner  program  in  a  season  was  absolutely  demanded,  with  a 
liberal  sprinkling  of  detached  Wagner  pieces  in  many  other  programs. 
A  special  Wagner  matinee  was  conducted  by  Nikisch  on  the  last  day  of 
1890.  A  few  weeks  later  Henry  Krehbiel,  the  distinguished  music  critic 
of  the  New  York  Tribune,  gave  five  Wagner  lectures  in  Boston.  They 
were  to  instruct  the  public  for  the  —  I  believe  —  second  complete  per- 
fo  rmance  of  the  Ring  des  Nibelungen.  New  York  had  been  five  or  six 
years  in  advance  of  Boston.  There  Leopold  Damrosch  had  been  the  first 
Wagner  apostle,  and  after  his  early  death  Anton  Seidl  had  become  Bay- 
reuth's  plenipotentiary.  But  Walter  Damrosch,  Leopold's  son,  was  also 
an  heir  to  the  Wagner  tradition.  He  and  Seidl  were  missionaries  of  the 
Wagner  creed  in  Boston.  Seidl  conducted  a  number  of  concerts  with  the 
New  York  Metropolitan  Orchestra  to  awaken  and  intensify  the  Wagner 
passion  of  the  Boston  public,  and  to  prepare  the  soil  for  Boston  per- 
formances of  entire  Wagner  dramas  on  the  stage.  Thus  on  January  17, 
1893,  he  brought  his  orchestra  and  no  less  than  fourteen  well-known 
singers  with  him,  including  Emma  Juch  and  Nina  Rathbone,  a  young 
giantess  created  by  nature  for  parts  like  Ortrud  and  Brimnhilde.  I  left 
the  Boston  Theatre  dazed  after  having  heard  the  prelude  and  scenes 
from  Lohengrin,  the  Siegfried  Idyll,  the  closing  scene  from  Tristan  und 
Isolde,  the  Meistersinger  Quintet,  the  Good  Friday  Spell  from  Parsifal,  and 
the  grand  scene  of  the  Valkyries  from  the  third  act  of  Die  Walkiire.  A 
few  weeks  later  Walter  Damrosch  and  the  New  York  Symphony  Orches- 
tra gave  a  concert  on  February  10,  1893,  with  a  mixed  program  —  Mar- 
teau  as  soloist  and  several  singers  for  scenes  from  Tannhauser.  Damrosch, 
now  the  dean  of  American  conductors,  had  made  his  Boston  debut  in  the 
preceding  season,  on  December  9,  1891,  with  Paderewski  playing  Rubin- 
stein's D  minor  Concerto  and  Liszt's  Hungarian  Fantasy.  His  program 
also  contained  the  Second  Symphony  of  Tschaikovsky,  scarcely  ever 
heard  now,  which  was  a  tribute  to  the  Tschaikovsky  enthusiasm  on  the 


16 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


occasion  of  the  master's  American  visit.  A  little  later,  on  April  21,  1893, 
Nikisch  gave  the  Bostonians  their  first  taste  of  great  scenes  from  Das 
Rheingoid  (Prelude  and  the  scene  of  the  Rhine-Maidens  and  Alberich), 
Siegfried  (Fire  Music),  and  Gdtterddmmerung  (Siegfried's  Rhine  Jour- 
ney; Funeral  March;  the  grandiose  closing  scene,  with  Brunnhilde's 
dying  speech)  —  besides  the  Rienzi  Overture  and  extracts  from  Die  Meis- 
tcrsinger.  The  Viennese  Felicia  Kaschoska  thrilled  the  public  in  the 
passionate  Briinnhilde  part. 

Even  more  sensational  was  the  Wagner  program  of  January  5, 
1894,  because  the  almost  legendary  Amalia  Materna,  the  original  Briinn- 
hilde of  the  first  Bayreuth  Festival  of  1876,  sang  the  final  scene  from 
Gbtterdammerung  and  the  "Liebestod"  from  Tristan  und  Isolde.  The  cli- 
max came  when  Damrosch  in  April  1894  conducted  at  the  Boston  Thea- 
tre performances  of  Die  Walkurc  and  Gbtterdanunerung,  with  the  New 
York  Symphony  Orchestra  and  a  cast  headed  by  Amalia  Materna,  Selma 
Kort-Kronold  (as  Sieglinde),  Anton  Schott  (as  Siegmund  and  Sieg- 
fried), Emil  Fischer  (a  powerful  Wotan  and  Hagen),  Conrad  Behrens 
(a  sinister  Hunding)  and  a  dozen  others.  My  enthusiasm  was  over- 
whelming; I  was  completely  carried  away  by  the  power  of  the  music, 
the  fine  orchestra,  and  the  excellent  singers.  Nevertheless,  my  journal 
comments  critically  upon  the  shabbiness  of  the  scenery,  a  shortcoming 
that  for  decades  later  was  a  blemish  in  so  many  otherwise  brilliant  Met- 
ropolitan Opera  performances.  My  record,  probably  not  complete,  also 
mentions  six  evening  and  six  matinee  performances  of  Pegou's  French 
Opera  Comique  Company  (1891-92),  offering  charming  works  by  Paer, 
Adams,  and  others. 

A  "Grand  Italian  Opera  Night"  on  April  7,  1891,  brought  an  act 
from  Bizet's  Carmen,  the  second  act  of  Wagner's  Flying  Dutchman,  and 
the  third  and  fifth  acts  from  Gounod's  Faust,  with  "complete  scenic  ap- 
pointments." Minnie  Hauk,  Italo  Campanini,  Del  Puente,  Emil  Fischer, 
W  illiam  Ludwig,  and  others  participated.  Evidently  it  was  the  fashion 
to  present  single  acts  from  several  operas,  rather  than  an  entire  opera. 
The  public,  more  intent  on  hearing  famous  singers  than  on  a  continuous 
dramatic  story,  thus  got  more  for  its  money. 

The  New  York  Metropolitan  Opera  delegated  four  distinguished 
members  —  Antonia  Mielke,  Marie  Ritter-Goetze,  Andreas  Dippel,  and 
Theodor  Reichmann  —  to  show  the  Bostonians  the  excellence  of  New 
York's  singers.  On  May  2,  1891,  they  presented  the  entire  fourth  act 
of  Verdi's  //  Trovatorc,  with  an  ample  selection  of  arias  from  various 
operas.  Victor  Herbert  acted  as  conductor  and  as  'cello  soloist.  The 
star  of  stars,  Adelina  Patti,  delighted  a  delirious  crowd  with  the  first 
act  of  Rossini's  Semiramide,  "with  complete  stage  setting,  costumes, 
paraphernalia,  etc."  on  January  15,  1892,  offering,  besides,  "an  elaborate 
concert  program."  To  set  off  the  prima  donna's  superb  vocal  art,  Mme. 


MUSIC  IN  BOSTON  IN  THE  'NINETIES 


*7 


Fabbri,  Signor  Del  Puente,  and  Signor  Novara  participated,  and  Signor 
Arditi,  also  famous  for  his  kiss  waltz  Ii  Bacio,  wielded  the  baton.  Doni- 
zetti's Lucia  di  Lammcnnoor  was  performed  by  the  Laura  Mapleson  Com- 
pany. On  January  28,  1892,  Madame  Nordica's  farewell  appearance  took 
the  form  of  a  "Grand  Operatic  Concert"  with  orchestra;  Mme.  Scalchi, 
Campanini,  and  Mr.  Z.  Dome,  "Baritone  of  Covent  Garden,  London," 
participated. 

The  Nordica  Operatic  Concert  Company,  with  an  ensemble  of  out- 
standing singers  (Scalchi,  Campanini,  Del  Puente,  Louise  Engel,  Emil 
Fischer),  and  an  orchestra  conducted  by  Signor  Sapio  and  Mr.  F.  Luckstone, 
gave  three  performances  in  January,  February,  and  March  1893.  A  spe- 
cial feature  of  the  second  concert  was  "extensive  selections  from  Mas- 
cagni's  Cavalleria  Rusiicana."  In  "Grand  English  Opera"  Lillian  Durell 
and  her  company  were  also  heard  in  March  1893.  Faust,  The  Bohemian 
Girl,  and  Mignon  were  offered.  The  following  month  I  saw  for  the  first 
time  Mascagni's  Cavalleria  Kusticana  and  L'Amico  Fritz  in  a  mediocre 
rendering. 

Though  by  this  time  a  devout  Wagnerian,  I  did  not  by  any  means 
despise  French  and  Italian  opera,  with  which  I  made  my  opening  ac- 
quaintance on  this  occasion.  Of  the  dozen  or  so  operas  given  I  saw  one 
half,  spending  on  tickets  whatever  I  could  spare  of  my  scanty  resources. 
Mozart's  Nozze  di  Figaro,  my  first  Mozart  opera,  delighted  me  beyond 
all  expectation.  What  a  cast !  Emma  Eames,  Sigrid  Arnoldson,  Nordica, 
Edouard  de  Reszke,  and  Signor  Ancona  as  the  principals,  ably  supported 
in  the  minor  roles.  Signor  Bevignani  conducted  the  orchestra  of  the 
New  York  Metropolitan  Opera.  The  next  time  I  saw  two  sensational 
novelties :  Leoncavallo's  /  Pagliacci  (with  Sigrid  Arnoldson,  Ancona,  De 
Lucia,  and  Mancinelli  as  conductor),  and  Cavalleria  Rusticana  (with  Mme. 
Calve,  Bauermeister,  Guercia,  Vignas,  and  Bevignani  as  conductor). 
The  many  Italians  in  the  audience  intensified  the  temperate  applause 
of  Anglo-Saxons  by  their  excitement,  and  their  shouts  of  "bravo,  bravo," 
especially  at  the  close  of  the  first  act  of  Pagliacci,  when  de  Lucia  as  Canio 
brought  the  house  down  by  the  passion  of  his  singing.  The  "intermezzo 
sinfonico"  in  Cavalleria  had  to  be  repeated.  Meyerbeer's  Huguenots  im- 
pressed me  deeply  in  the  great  fourth  act,  with  its  duet  superbly  sung 
by  Nordica  and  Jean  de  Reszke.  In  the  sextet  for  male  voices  Edouard 
de  Reszke,  Ancona,  and  Lassalle  participated.  I  find  my  Wagnerian 
training  reflected  in  the  critical  remarks  of  my  journal :  "The  first  three 
acts  little  action,  mass  effects,  many  an  ingenious  and  fine  trait  but  all 
in  all  not  of  high  artistic  value.  The  last  act  magnificent."  The  culmina- 
tion of  this  operatic  fortnight  for  me  was  the  Lohengrin  performance,  in 
which  Nordica  and  Jean  de  Reszke  excelled  particularly.  Eight  or  ten 
thousand  people  filled  the  huge  auditorium.  The  Boston  Herald  pub- 
lished a  long  interview  with  Nordica  in  which  she  explained  her  attitude 


i8 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN. 


towards  Wagner,  spoke  knowingly  about  the  interrelation  of  acting  and 
singing,  and  discussed  her  preparation  for  Bayreuth,  where  she  was  to 
appear  —  the  first  American  singer  ever  engaged  by  Mme.  Wagner  — 
as  Elsa  in  Lohengrin,  Venus  in  Tannhduser,  and  Kundry  in  Parsifal.  The 
season  of  1894  was  particularly  rich  in  opera,  besides  the  Wagner  works 
mentioned  above.  The  Abbey,  Schoeffel,  and  Grau  Opera  Company  had 
hired  Mechanics  Hall  for  two  weeks  in  February  and  March.  A  galaxy 
of  the  world's  greatest  singers  helped  to  make  the  series  a  sensation. 

Besides  the  Symphony  concerts  and  opera  performances,  choral 
activities  were  also  of  high  quality.  Indeed,  the  Handel  and  Haydn  So- 
ciety and  the  Cecilia  were  in  better  form  than  fifty  years  later.  Their 
real  successors  have  been  the  combined  choral  forces  of  the  Harvard 
Glee  Club  and  the  Radcliffe  Choral  Society,  now  generally  called  upon 
whenever  Dr.  Koussevitsky  wants  to  give  one  of  the  great  classical  or 
modern  choral  works.  In  1892  the  Harvard  Glee  Club  had  not  yet  as- 
pired to  more  ambitious  music  than  popular  college  songs,  ballads,  and 
glees  for  male  voices,  and  the  Radcliffe  Choral  Society  was  not  even  in 
existence.  But  the  Handel  and  Haydn  Society,  under  its  veteran  con- 
ductor, Carl  Zerrahn,  had  reached  maturity  and  was  one  of  the  finest 
choral  bodies  in  America.  Four  concerts  were  given  regularly  each  sea- 
son. Handel's  Messiah  and  Bach's  St.  Matthew  Passion  were  fixed  num- 
bers of  each  year's  program.  The  other  half,  however,  was  different 
every  year.  In  1890-91  I  heard  the  first  performance  of  Dvorak's  much- 
admired  Stabat  Mater,  fresh  from  the  British  choral  festivals.  In  the  same 
season  Mendelssohn's  Hymn  of  Praise  and  Parker's  St.  John  were  per- 
formed. 

In  the  next  season,  1891-92,  Beethoven's  Choral  Pantasia.  Haydn's 
Creation  and  Mrs.  Beach's  Mass  in  E  flat  were  offered.  In  1892-93  Cheru- 
bim's D  minor  Mass  impressed  me  profoundly.  It  was  preceded  by  a 
smaller  work,  Chadwick's  Phoenix  Expirans.  In  my  journal  I  find  that 
I  preferred  this  to  Foote's  Skeleton  in  Armour  —  which  does  not  mean 
that  I  would  today  pass  the  same  judgment  were  I  to  hear  both  works 
again.  Handel's  Samson  was  also  included  in  that  season's  bill  of  fare. 
1893-94  brought  out  for  the  first  time  a  work  of  major  importance  by  an 
American  composer,  Horatio  W.  Parker's  Hora  Novissima,  justly  ac- 
claimed with  enthusiasm.  Mendelssohn's  Christus  fragment  and  St. 
Paul,  besides  the  obligatory  Messiah  and  Passion  music,  completed  the 
season. 

I  had  never  before  heard  any  oratorios.  They  happily  supplemented 
my  education  in  orchestral  and  chamber  music  literature,  obtained  at 
the  Symphony  and  the  Kneisel  and  other  concerts.  Handel,  Bach,  Haydn, 
Beethoven,  Cherubini,  Mendelssohn  in  their  great  choral  works  were 
a  new  world  for  me  —  and  what  a  world  of  grandeur,  monumental  tone 
structures,  and  religious  fervor  it  was,  coupled  with  lyric  beauty  and 


MUSIC  IN  BOSTON  IN  THE  'NINETIES 


19 


varied  expression  of  emotion !  My  interest  became  so  great  that  it  was 
expanded  into  a  lifelong  study  of  choral  literature.  The  chapters  on  the 
thirty-nine  Handel  oratorios  in  my  Handel  book  of  1924  were  started  at 
those  Boston  choral  concerts  of  1890-94. 

The  Cecilia  Society,  with  its  "175  selected  voices,"  had  for  its  do- 
main smaller  choral  works  —  madrigals,  motets,  part  songs,  and  cantatas 
—  though  occasionally  it  tackled  larger  tasks,  such  as  Schumann's  Para- 
dise and  the  Peri  in  1891-92,  and  in  1893-94  Edgar  Tinel's  oratorio  St. 
Francis  of  Assisi,  which  in  those  years  made  quite  a  sensation.  A  few 
years  later  I  heard  that  highly  impressive  work  again  in  Berlin.  Other 
specially  interesting  items  were  Berlioz's  cantata  Le  Cinq  Mai  and  Max 
Bruch's  choral  ballad,  Fair  Ellen.  Benjamin  J.  Lang,  that  excellent 
pianist,  organist,  teacher,  and  lecturer  was  the  Society's  competent 
conductor. 

Summing  up  all  the  activities  of  the  Boston  Symphony  Orchestra, 
the  regular  choral  productions  of  the  Handel  and  Haydn  Society  and 
the  Cecilia,  the  annual  series  of  concerts  given  by  the  Kneisel  and  Adam- 
owski  Quartets,  the  surprisingly  great  numbers  of  concerts  by  foreign 
and  domestic  artists,  the  numerous  opera  performances,  it  might  well 
be  said  that  the  Boston  of  1895  was  considerably  superior  in  its  love  of 
fine  music  and  in  its  support  of  artists  to  the  Boston  of  1945. 


Exhibitions  in  the  Print  Department 


Etchings  and  Drypoints  by  James  McBey 

J\.MES  McBEY  is  one  whose  achievement  in  the  graphic  arts  belongs  at  the 
very  pinnacle  of  the  British  contemporary  print  world,  with  such  names  as 
Muirhead  Bone,  David  Y.  Cameron,  Gerald  Brockhurst,  and  Augustus  John. 
High  and  well-deserved  praise  was  given  to  his  work  in  three  previous  ex- 
hibitions held  in  the  gallery.  The  present  show  is  a  further  selection  from  the 
Albert  H.  Wiggin  Collection,  which  is  the  best  and  most  complete  collection 
of  McBey  anywhere. 

In  the  period  just  preceding  the  First  World  War,  and  before  the  War 
Office  appointed  him  to  the  post  of  Official  Artist  in  Egypt  in  1917,  McBey  had 
produced  such  accomplished  plates  as  the  seven  Spanish  subjects  from  the  bull- 
ring: "The  Picador  Attacked,"  "The  Picador  Unhorsed,"  "The  Picador  Incites 
the  Bull,"  "Banderillas,"  "The  Fierce  Bull,"  "The  Matador,"  and  the  most  out- 
standing plate  of  the  series,  "The  Ovation  to  the  Matador."  "Sky  Lark,"  "The 
Shower,"  and  "Ebbesfleet"  revealed  great  promise  for  the  future.  Then  we  had 
the  Moroccan  Set,  full  of  life,  light,  and  movement,  of  which  we  feature  at  this 
time  "El  Soko,"  "The  Orange  Seller,"  "Beggars,  Tetuan,"  and  "The  Story 
Teller,"  an  inspired  composition. 

Following  these  came  other  remarkable  plates,  such  as  "Penzance,"  "Sun- 
rise at  Tarragona,"  and  perhaps  the  best  of  all  up  to  this  point,  "France  at 
Her  Furnaces,"  a  scene  in  the  Schneider  Munition  Works  on  the  Seine  at  Har- 
fleur,  and  the  dramatic  "The  Torpedoed  Sussex."  About  the  latter  Malcolm 
Salaman  writes :  "Of  a  solemn  beauty  .  .  .  imbued,  however,  with  tragic  signi- 
ficance, is  'The  Torpedoed  Sussex,'  a  masterpiece  of  conspicuous  distinction 
in  the  etcher's  achievement.  The  poor  shattered  hull  lies  beached  in  Boulogne 
harbour,  with  the  glow  of  sunset  upon  it,  the  object  of  pathetic  curiosity  to  a 
crowd  of  spectators  living  too  near  to  the  war's  devastation  to  be  unaccustomed 
to  awful  sights.  It  was  in  their  midst  the  artist  stood,  sketching  furtively,  and 
memorising  the  scene  and  its  emotional  import  with  his  etcher's  quick  concep- 
tion of  it.  till  he  could  give  it  graphic  life  upon  his  copper  plate.  And  how  he 
has  emphasised  the  dramatic  impressiveness  of  his  simple  and  beautifully 
balanced  design  by  the  suggestive  significance  of  the  vessel  steaming  up  close 
by  the  torpedoed  hull!" 

It  is  an  accepted  fact  that  McBey  reached  some  of  his  greatest  heights  in 
plates  done  for  the  War  Office  in  the  Desert  of  Sinai.  To  establish  an  order  of 
importance  in  these  subjects  would  be  futile,  for  much  depends  upon  the  in- 
dividual's choice,  so  equal  are  they  in  quality.  "Dawn,  The  Camel  Patrol  Set- 
ting Out,"  has  been  a  collector's  favorite  from  the  time  of  publication.  It 
depicts  a  patrol  of  nine  Australians  setting  out  at  dawn  in  the  desert  east  of 
Serapeum,  one  of  the  armed  posts  that  existed  on  the  Suez  Canal.  The  com- 
position is  given  excellent  scale  and  perspective  by  the  two  guides  in  the  dis- 
tance, who  are  followed  by  a  central  group  and  two  men  in  the  immediate 
foreground.  The  heat  of  the  coming  day  is  indicated  by  the  lines  radiating  in  the 
3ky  from  the  rising  sun  still  hidden  beyond  the  horizon.  "The  Desert  of  Sinai, 


20 


ETCHINGS  BY  JAMES  McBEY 


21 


No.  I"  and  "The  Desert  of  Sinai,  No,  II,"  are  variations  of  "Dawn,  The  Camel 
Patrol  Setting  Out." 

"Strange  Signals,"  the  most  unusual  composition  of  the  three,  possesses 
the  fascinating  mystery  of  the  distant  mirage,  and  tremendous  heat  is  reflected 
from  the  sands  upon  the  camels  and  the  two  mounted  guides.  Much  of  the 
success  of  this  plate  depends  upon  the  proper  interpretation  in  printing,  and 
only  the  artist  himself  could  have  had  the  knowledge  and  experience  to  convey 
every  possibility  of  his  subject.  There  are  an  authority  and  a  simplicity  about 
this  work,  which  combine  in  one  of  those  rare  moments  when  the  subject  is 
free  from  any  preconceived  idea  or  ordered  procedure. 

In  such  plates  as  "Gale  at  Port  Errol"  and  "The  Squall,"  McBey  reaches 
the  zenith  of  his  powers.  In  these  there  is  a  constant  sense  of  movement  and 
sound,  which  makes  the  dominant  note  of  the  storm  conform  to  all  other  de- 
tails in  the  composition.  Any  artist  who  can  create  such  an  atmosphere  of 
inclement  weather  with  needle  and  copper  has  reached  a  lofty  place  in  a  most 
difficult  field.  There  is  no  doubt  that  McBey  personally  experienced  these 
particular  scenes. 

The  Venetian  prints  give  proof  that  these  are  plates  which  only  an  in- 
stinctive etcher  of  inspired  mastery  could  have  wrought.  After  McBey's  war 
accomplishments  one  is  not  astonished  by  the  unexpectedness  of  quality  re- 
vealed in  the  Venetian  Set.  Though  earlier  in  his  career  he  was  steeped  in  the 
work  of  Whistler,  he  found  a  new  vision  of  Venice  and  added  something  of  his 
own  experience  to  the  city  of  many  an  artist's  dream. 

We  are  all  familiar  with  the  Venice  of  Canaletto,  Guardi,  Turner,  and 
Whistler,  and  McBey's  records  suffer  not  at  all  by  comparison.  He  has  cap- 
tured the  poetry  of  Venice  in  all  its  moods,  strangeness,  and  intimate  beauty. 
W e  find  detachment  from  the  rest  of  the  world  in  "Passing  Gondola,"  "Palaz- 
zo dei  Camerlenghi,"  "The  Gondolier,"  "Deserted  Palace,"  "Distant  Salute," 
and  "Farewell  to  Venice."  In  them  we  can  feel  the  magic  of  reflections  in  calm 
water  with  fine  suggestion  of  color  in  the  shadow  of  a  palace,  a  bridge,  a  passing 
gondola,  or  even  the  blue  sky  of  the  Adriatic.  "The  Bridge  by  Night,"  with 
artificial  light  cast  from  flares  penetrating  the  darkness,  is  a  great  achievement. 
The  very  spirit  of  Venice  is  found  in  "La  Fava"  and  "September  Sunset,"  with 
the  setting  sun  near  the  horizon  between  San  Giorgio  and  Salute.  The  move- 
ment of  gondolas  from  the  left  toward  distant  Venice  to  the  right  makes  this 
composition  an  impression  of  haunting  beauty. 

Up  to  the  past  few  years,  McBey  has  been  an  indefatigable  worker  with 
his  etching  and  drypoint  needle,  recording  many  types  of  subjects  from  widely 
scattered  areas.  Many  spirited  plates  have  resulted  from  these  wanderings, 
and  among  those  executed  with  convincing  success  which  are  shown  in  this 
month's  exhibition  are  :  "Antwerp,"  "The  Moray  Firth,"  "Richborough  Castle," 
"Zuider  Zee,"  and  others  of  equal  importance.  "Ely  Cathedral"  must  be  men- 
tioned especially  for  its  originality  of  conception  and  unusual  achievement. 

Of  the  American  subjects,  which  are  not  handled  with  the  freedom  of 
McBey's  middle  period,  we  have  chosen  "Ranchos  de  Taos,"  the  first  and 
published  states,  and  "California,  San  Luis  Obispo,"  which  are  a  few  of  the 
latest  publications  to  leave  the  artist's  press. 

ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 


Graphic  Arts  Processes 


Line-Engraving 

LINE-ENGRAVING  is  one  of  the  earliest  of  the  metal  plate  processes. 
Goldsmiths  had  long  been  employing  the  engraved  line  for  ornamenta- 
tion, but  it  was  not  until  the  first  part  of  the  fifteenth  century  that  an  engrav- 
ing was  actually  printed  on  paper.  Since  then  engraving  has  passed  through 
many  phases ;  it  has  been  the  creative  medium  of  such  masters  as  Durer, 
Schongauer,  and  Mantegna;  it  has  been  used  for  the  reproduction  of  portraits 
and  the  interpretation  of  paintings  by  such  as  Robert  Nanteuil ;  and  finally 
again  has  served  as  an  original  means  of  expression  by  present-day  artists 
During  these  centuries  the  technique,  as  well  as  the  results,  has  changed.  In 
the  eighteenth  century  the  engraver  was  generally  working  after  a  painting 
or  design  by  someone  else ;  in  the  twentieth  the  engraver  is  not  interpreting 
another's  composition;  he  is  creating  his  own. 

The  plate  used  is  of  highly  polished  copper,  and  the  tools  are  gravers  or 
burins  of  various  sizes.  In  order  to  transfer  the  design  to  the  copper  plate, 
the  artist  covers  the  plate  with  an  etching  ground  composed  of  waxes  and 
resins.  This  ground,  which  usually  comes  in  the  form  of  a  ball,  is  rubbed 
over  the  copper,  heated  just  enough  to  melt  the  wax.  Then  it  is  spread  evenly 
over  the  plate  by  means  of  a  dabber,  made  of  cotton  wool  covered  with  fine 
silk  and  tied  to  resemble  a  powder  puff.  When  the  ground  is  thinly  and 
evenly  laid,  it  is  smoked  with  tapers  to  blacken  the  surface. 

The  design  may  then  be  transferred  by  making  a  tracing  in  pencil  and 
then  placing  it  face  clown  on  the  ground  of  the  copper  plate ;  over  this  are 
put  a  protecting  sheet  of  paper  and  blankets  before  the  plate  is  run  through 
the  press.  The  pencil  lines  will  be  thus  transferred  to  the  smoked  surface  of 
the  copper.  There  are  several  ways  of  continuing  from  here.  One  may  draw 
through  the  wax  with  a  sharp  point  (such  as  an  etcher's  needle),  scratching 
the  surface  of  the  copper  and  so  marking  the  design ;  and  then  removing  the 
wax  ground  with  turpentine  or  benzine  and  proceeding  with  the  graver. 
Another  method  is  to  draw  the  important  lines  and  areas  with  a  needle  and 
then  bite  the  plate  lig-htly  with  nitric  acid,  so  that  when  the  ground  is  re- 
moved the  fine  guide  lines  will  be  etched  into  the  plate.  Other  methods  may 
be  used,  such  as  rubbing  a  tracing  so  that  the  lines  will  be  transferred  to  the 
wax  ground ;  or  —  as  one  artist  has  suggested  —  covering  the  plate  with  a 
thick  solution  of  gum  arabic,  tracing  the  design  on  it,  and  then  drawing 
through  the  gum  with  a  needle,  cutting  the  lines  into  the  surface  of  the  plate, 
and  finally  dissolving  the  coating  in  water. 

The  tendency  in  drawing  is  to  make  one's  strokes  towards  the  body. 
In  engraving,  either  on  wood  or  metal,  the  very  opposite  of  this  takes  place. 
The  graver  is  pushed  through  the  copper  away  from  the  body.  This  graver 
or  burin,  and  there  are  many  varieties,  has  a  rounded  handle,  which  is  cut 
away  on  the  under  side,  so  that  it  will  not  touch  the  surface  of  the  copper 
when  held  low  over  the  plate.  The  top  of  the  handle  fits  against  the  hollow 
of  the  hand,  while  the  fingers  are  curved  over,  pressing  the  tool  against  the 


22 


GRAPHIC  PROCESSES:  LINE  ENGRAVING 


23 


thumb,  which  is  extended  towards  the  point  of  the  graver.  The  copper  plate 
rests  upon  a  flat  circular  sandbag  made  of  leather,  which  facilitates  the  ac- 
tion of  the  tool.  The  graver  can  move  in  only  one  direction,  from  the  lower 
right  to  the  upper  left  of  the  plate.  Therefore,  in  order  to  get  lines  in  other 
directions,  the  plate  must  be  turned  with  the  left  hand,  while  the  burin  is 
held  steady,  being  guided  by  the  right  hand.  As  the  graver  pushes  through 
the  copper,  the  metal  will  curl  up  in  front  of  the  tool.  Any  burr  that  chances 
to  result  on  the  side  of  the  line  must  be  cut  off  with  a  scraper. 

This  manner  of  working  lends  itself  easily  to  the  type  of  parallel  lines 
used  by  the  line-engravers  of  the  seventeenth  century.  These  artists  also 
made  use  of  the  possibility  of  producing  a  line  of  varying  widths.  In  study- 
ing a  line-engraving  of  this  era,  one  will  notice  that  the  engraved  line  swells 
and  diminishes  wherever  necessary  to  obtain  texture  or  relative  values.  This 
is  done  by  varying  the  pressure  on  the  tool  and  the  angle  at  which  it  is  held. 
Certain  formulas  of  technique  were  used  by  all  engravers  at  this  period, 
and  it  was  not  until  the  contemporary  renaissance  of  engraving  that  the 
artist  again  understood  his  medium  and  its  limitations. 

The  possibilities  of  making  a  correction  are  as  great  as  in  all  other 
processes,  although  a  little  more  difficult  to  perform.  If  the  lines  are  not 
cut  too  deeply,  they  may  be  removed  by  rubbing  the  area  with  a  burnisher. 
This  tool  is  made  of  polished  steel,  and  erases  the  engraved  line  by  lowering 
that  section  of  metal.  If  the  lines  are  deep,  the  scraper,  a  three-edged  cutting 
tool,  must  be  used.  The  exact  position  of  the  correction  should  be  marked 
on  the  back  of  the  plate  with  a  pair  of  callipers,  so  that  the  hollow  in  the 
plate  resulting  from  the  scraping  can  be  knocked  up  from  the  back.  This  is 
done  by  placing  the  plate  face  down  upon  an  iron  die,  and  knocking  the  spot 
lightly  with  a  small  round-headed  hammer.  The  lines  that  have  been  scraped 
out  must  be  polished  by  rubbing  with  charcoal  and  water,  and  the  original 
surface  restored  with  the  burnisher.  If  this  is  not  done,  a  tone  will  result 
when  the  plate  is  printed. 

As  with  the  other  print  media,  trial  proofs  may  be  taken  as  the  artist 
progresses,  so  that  he  may  see  the  results  and  make  corrections  or  additions. 
Each  time  a  proof  is  pulled  and  a  change  has  been  made,  the  print  is  a  "state." 
Thus  there  may  be  a  "first  state,"  "second  state,"  and  so  on  until  the  artist 
is  finally  satisfied  with  his  work. 

The  printing  of  an  engraving  on  metal  is  done  in  much  the  same  way 
as  that  of  any  other  intaglio  plate.  The  ink,  the  consistency  of  soft  butter 
and  thinned  if  necessary,  is  rubbed  into  the  lines  with  the  fingers,  or  applied 
with  a  dabber  or  roller.  When  the  plate  is  covered  with  ink,  the  surplus  is 
wiped  off  with  tarlatan  and  finished  by  wiping  with  the  hand  or  a  soft  rag. 
The  action  of  the  hand  polishes  the  unengraved  surface  of  the  plate  and 
leaves  the  ink  in  the  lines.  The  plate  is  laid  face  up  on  the  bed  of  the  press,  the 
dampened  paper  is  placed  on  top,  and  the  felt  blankets  are  brought  down 
over  all.  The  bed  is  then  passed  through  the  rollers;  the  blankets  are  lifted 
and  the  paper  carefully  removed.  The  pressure  of  the  upper  roller  and  the 
blankets  have  forced  the  dampened  paper  into  the  engraved  lines,  giving 
them  an  embossed  effect. 

MURIEL  C.  FIGENBAUM 


A  Biography  of  Dr.  Harvey  Gushing 


NO  one  who  had  the  good  fortune 
of  knowing  Dr.  Harvey  Cushing 
will  ever  forget  the  brilliance,  charm, 
and  sense  of  power  that  emanated  from 
him.  As  a  brain  surgeon  his  fame  was  al- 
most legendary,  yet  the  impression  which 
he  conveyed  was  that  of  an  artist.  The 
truth  of  course  is  that  he  was  both. 

To  write  the  life  of  such  a  man, 
piobing  and  delineating  his  complex 
personality,  is  not  an  easy  task.  In 
composing  this  official  biography.  Dr. 
John  F.  Fulton,  professor  of  physiolo- 
gy at  Yale,  has  produced  a  remarkable 
work.  While  reflecting  the  personal 
fascination  which  Dr.  Cushing  exerted 
upon  his  friends,  the  book,  nearly  eight 
hundred  pages,  presents  an  abundance 
of  source  material  for  the  medical  stu- 
dent. At  the  same  time,  it  is  also  en- 
joyable for  lay  readers. 

Dr.  Fulton  speaks  of  himself  modest- 
ly as  a  compiler.  To  be  sure,  he  made 
extensive  use  of  the  family  papers, 
diaries,  and  case  histories  which  Dr. 
Cushing  himself  had  brought  together 
with  meticulous  care.  His  wide  and 
varied  correspondence  with  friends  is 
also  generously  drawn  upon.  But  Dr. 
Fulton's  own  narrative,  containing  in- 
numerable data,  deserves  high  praise 
for  its  order  and  clarity.  The  arrange- 
ment is  naturally  chronological.  After 
tracing  Cushing's  lineage  and  describ- 
ing his  early  days  in  Cleveland,  the 
biographer  relates  the  student  years  at 
Yale  and  at  the  Harvard  Medical  School. 
Chapters  on  his  four  years'  residence  at 
Johns  Hopkins  and  on  a  year  of  Euro- 
pean travel  follow.  By  then  the  young 
doctor  had  urgent  invitations  from 
many  colleges  and  hospitals,  but  he 
decided  to  remain  at  Baltimore,  where 
under  the  influence  of  Halsted,  Osier, 
and  Welch  he  too  rose  to  eminence. 
Finally  he  accepted  the  professorship 
of  surgery  at  Harvard  Medical  School, 
together  with  the  position  of  Surgeon- 
in-Chief  in  the  new  Peter  Bent  Brig- 
ham  Hospital. 

It  was  in  1912  that  Dr.  Cushing 


settled  in  Boston,  the  city  with  which 
his  career  was  identified  for  the  next 
twenty  years.  His  services  in  the  First 
World  War  were  brilliantly  told  in 
his  From  a  Surgeon's  Journal.  At  Bou- 
logne during  the  winter  of  1917-18  he 
operated  almost  incessantly;  for  months 
he  visited  hospital  after  hospital  ex- 
pediting the  work  of  the  various  neuro- 
surgical teams ;  and  again  operated 
steadily  after  the  battle  of  St.  Mihiel. 
Upon  his  return,  he  plunged  once 
more  into  clinical  work.  Only  doctors 
can  appreciate  his  scientific  achieve- 
ments. The  use  of  high-frequency  cur- 
rent in  neurological  surgery,  we  are 
told,  was  first  established  by  him ;  his 
technique  at  the  operating  table  — 
where  he  was  usually  surrounded  by 
young  doctors,  many  of  whom  came  to 
study  with  him  from  all  over  the  world 
—  was  inimitable.  He  performed  over 
two  thousand  operations,  and  one  of 
his  most  original  contributions  to  clin- 
ical medicine  was  made  when  he  was 
about  to  retire  —  the  recognition  of 
the  pituitary  disorder  now  generally 
known  as  Cushing's  disease. 

With  all  his  work,  he  found  time 
also  for  a  two-volume  Life  of  Sir  Wil- 
liam Osier,  which  in  1926  wron  a  Pulit- 
zer Prize.  A  bibliophile  of  rare  dis- 
crimination, he  acquired  a  very  valuable 
collection  of  rare  medical  books,  which 
now  forms  (together  with  Dr.  Fulton's 
books)  the  nucleus  of  the  Medical 
Historical  Library  at  Yale. 

Retiring  from  Harvard  in  1933,  Dr. 
Cushing  spent  four  more  years  in 
teaching  and  hospital  work  at  New 
Haven.  Academic  honors,  a  mere  list 
of  which  occupies  four  solid  pages, 
continued  to  pour  in  upon  him.  Visit- 
ing and  corresponding  with  friends  — 
the  most  intimate  of  whom  was  Dr. 
Arnold  Klebs,  the  late  distinguished 
student  of  scientific  incunabula  —  he 
was  active,  provocative,  and  stimulat- 
ing, to  the  last.  He  survived  his  seven- 
tieth birthday  in  April  1939  by  only  a 
few  months.  Z.  H. 


24 


Ten  Books 


Leo  Tolstoy.  By  Ernest  J.  Simmons. 
Little,  Brown.  1946.  790  pp. 
Few  people  have  left  so  complete  a 
record  of  their  lives  as  Leo  Tolstoy. 
In  diaries,  journals,  and  correspond- 
ence the  great  Russian  novelist  wrote 
his  own  story,  almost  as  full  and  frank 
as  the  Confessions  of  Rousseau.  In 
addition,  Russian  scholarship  has  in 
the  last  twenty  years  unearthed  an  im- 
mense amount  of  new  data.  Professor 
Simmons,  Chairman  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Slavonic  Languages  at  Colum- 
bia and  biographer  of  Pushkin  and 
Dostoevski,  has  devoted  five  years  to 
the  present  work  and  the  result  is  a 
real  achievement.  He  has  attempted 
no  explicit  interpretation  of  Tolstoy 
as  a  personality.  His  method  is  photo- 
graphic; scene  follows  scene  from  in- 
fancy to  the  eighty-two-year-old  man's 
death  at  a  railway  station.  So  much  of 
the  story  is  from  Tolstoy's  own  ac- 
count that  it  has  the  immediacy  of 
autobiography.  A  Freudian  psycholo- 
gist would  have  done  much  more  in 
tying  some  of  the  early  experiences  to 
later  conduct ;  Tolstoy's  perpetual 
moral  anguish  should  be  explained  in 
terms  other  than  the  religious  ones 
which  he  himself  used.  A  student  of 
philosophy  might  relate  the  man's  re- 
jection of  authority  and  all  systems  of 
being  to  the  anarchistic  thought  of  his 
time,  and  his  theories  of  work  to  Marx 
and  Ruskin.  But  this  is  an  assignment 
for  specialists,  to  whom  Professor 
Simmons's  study  offers  valuable  and 
heretofore  unavailable  material.  For 
the  general  reader  the  book  has  the 
charm  of  intimate  revelation.  Tolstoy 
intended  his  journals  for  posterity.  "I 
clearly  realize,"  he  wrote,  "that  my 
biography,  if  it  suppressed  all  the  Has- 
tiness and  criminality  of  my  life  —  as 
they  customarily  write  biographies  — 
would  be  a  lie,  and  that  if  one  is  going 
to  write  my  biography,  one  must 
write  the  whole  truth."  So  he  sup- 
pressed nothing:  the  follies  of  youth, 
the  frustrations  of  an  imperfect  mar- 
riage, the  spiritual  torment  of  a  com- 
plex religious  nature  are  freely  con- 


fessed. The  great  estates  at  Yasnaya 
Polyana,  the  gay  life  of  the  court  and 
literary  circles  in  which  he  moved  be- 
come incidental  to  the  terrible  struggle 
of  a  spirit  utterly  alien  to  the  world 
in  which  he  found  himself.  The  total 
impression  of  the  book  is  one  of  the 
heroism  of  a  great  but  pathetically 
human  being.    (R.  E.) 

Balzac.  By  Stefan  Zweig.  Viking  Press. 
1946.  404  pp. 

Stendhal  and  Flaubert  justly  have 
their  devotees,  yet  few  would  question 
the  fact  that  Balzac  was  the  greatest 
French  novelist  of  the  nineteenth  cen- 
tury. Others  had  written  single  works 
which  may  have  as  much  claim  to  per- 
manence, but  there  is  nothing  to  equal 
the  Comcdie  Humaine,  that  tremendous 
panorama  of  social  life  in  France  in  the 
1830's  and  1840's.  In  depth  of  under- 
standing, variety  of  types,  and  magni- 
tude of  conception  Balzac  probably 
had  only  one  rival  —  Dostoevski.  Both 
were  creative  geniuses  first,  and  artists 
only  afterwards.  There  are  flaws  in 
their  styles  and  in  the  details  of  exe- 
cution, because  niceties  and  proprieties 
are  apt  to  be  neglected  when  elemental 
forces  are  in  action.  For  this  is  how 
Balzac  worked :  far  from  being  a  de- 
tached observer,  he  wrote  with  obses- 
sion. Of  all  his  innumerable  charac- 
ters, he  himself  was  the  most  authentic 
Balzacian  hero.  There  is  no  dividing 
line  between  life  and  art;  as  in  Rodin's 
famous  statue  of  him,  the  figure,  the 
features  emerge  almost  imperceptibly 
from  the  block  of  marble.  It  is  a  pity 
that  Lc  Pere  Goriot,  Eugenie  Grandet, 
Cesar  Birotteau,  La  Peau  dc  Chagrin, 
Illusions  Perdues,  and  many  other  of 
his  masterpieces,  which  were  once 
popular  in  America,  are  almost  entire- 
ly unread  today,  chiefly  because,  they 
are  not  available  in  good  modern 
translations.  Stefan  Zweig's  recently 
published  book,  distributed  in  hun- 
dreds of  thousands  of  copies  by  the 
Book-of-the-Month-Club,  may  have  a 
salutary  effect  in  once  more  gaining 
readers  for  the  French  giant.   It  fol- 


3 


25 


26 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN. 


lows  the  novelist  from  his  birth  in  1799 
through  childhood,  the  miseries  of 
early  youth,  the  first  beginnings  in  a 
Paris  garret,  the  fantastic  business 
ventures,  speculations,  failures,  and 
love  affairs,  till  his  death  in  1850.  To 
be  sure,  this  is  only  a  biography,  with 
no  attempt  at  critical  analysis  of  the 
works;  the  author  is  satisfied  with 
placing  these  in  their  appropriate  set- 
tings. Zweig  is  an  expert  biographer, 
with  a  sensitive  style  and  a  keen  in- 
terest in  dramatic  turns,  who  usually 
avoids  the  more  vulgar  effects  of  the 
novelized  biography,  made  popular 
some  twenty  years  ago  by  Andre 
Maurois  and  Emil  Ludwig,  and  now 
happily  on  the  decline.  If  he  too  as- 
sumes a  kind  of  intimate  relationship- 
with  his  subject,  it  is  the  result  of 
many  years  of  devotion.  Zweig  had 
been  preoccupied  with  Balzac  for  a  long 
time,  worked  on  his  book  in  Vienna 
and,  since  his  exile,  in  England  and 
Brazil.  After  his  suicide  in  1942,  it  re- 
mained for  a  friend  to  finish  the  last 
chapters.   {Z.  H.) 

Mirror  of  the  Past.  By  K.  Zilliacus. 
Current  Books.  1946.  362  pp. 
The  author  —  a  Labor  member  of  Par- 
liament since  1945  and  for  ten  years  a 
member  of  the  Secretariat  of  the  League 
of  Nations  —  builds  up,  with  extensive 
quotations  from  memoirs  and  official 
documents,  the  framework  within  which 
the  powers  drifted  into  the  first  World 
War,  and  then  cemented  the  dangerous 
peace.  He  demonstrates  the  discrep- 
ancy between  the  diplomatic  "conver- 
sations" of  the  British  Foreign  Office 
and  the  official  announcements  of  poli- 
cies given  out  to  the  people.  In  the 
strategy  for  a  possible  outbreak  of  war, 
for  example,  "the  violation  of  Belgian 
neutrality  was  .  .  .  regarded  by  both 
sides  as  a  'military  truism'  " ;  yet  it 
was  by  proclaiming  the  sanctity  of 
treaties  that  the  government  drew  the 
people  to  the  colors.  This  duplicity 
was  the  natural  result  of  the  rule  of 
plutocracy  and  vested  commercial  in- 
terests, which  in  turn  made  the  states- 
men of  the  ruling  class  identify  the 
national  welfare  with  class  interests. 
This  same  motive  prompted  Allied  in- 
tervention, side  by  side  with  the  Ger- 


mans, in  the  Baltic  provinces  and  the 
Ukraine  after  the  Bolshevist  revolu- 
tion. (M.  M.) 

Victors  Beware.  By  Salvador  de  Mada- 
riaga.  London,  Cape.  1946.  304  pp. 
In  this  criticism  of  the  victorious  pow- 
ers, the  author  has  brought  into  play 
the  insight  gained  during  his  activity 
in  the  League  of  Nations.  He  applies 
his  diagnosis  to  internal  as  well  as  to 
world  affairs.  He  points  out  the  "fal- 
lacy" of  the  cult  of  the  common  man, 
which  ignores  the  desirability  of  the 
uncommon  man.  The  Communists  are 
enforcing  their  clear-cut  economic  doc- 
trine by  means  of  a  rigid  political  sys- 
tem, while  liberal  democracy,  which  is 
a  political  principle,  is  in  danger  of 
succumbing  to  economic  anxieties. 
The  author  traces  Russia's  penetra- 
tion of  Estonia,  Latvia,  and  Lithu- 
ania; her  coercion  of  Finland  and  re- 
fusal of  mediation ;  and  the  Soviet- 
German  treaty  of  1939,  settling  the 
partition  of  Poland.  He  gives  details 
of  the  moves  by  which  the  Russian 
government,  disregarding  the  efforts 
of  the  Western  allies,  installed  the 
Lublin  Committee  in  Warsaw,  and 
similarly  recounts  its  methods  of  con- 
trolling the  Balkan  countries  to  insure 
Communist  orthodoxy.  Seiior  Mada- 
riaga  believes  that  the  San  Francisco 
Charter  compares  unfavorably  with 
the  League  of  Nations.  However,  the 
atomic  bomb  has  already  made  the 
Charter  obsolete.  (M.  M.) 

The  Chrysanthemum  and  the  Sword. 

By  Ruth  Benedict.  Houghton  Mifflin. 
1946.  316  pp. 

Thts  is  a  study  of  Japanese  habits, 
made  by  a  well-known  anthropologist 
of  Columbia  University.  Mrs.  Benedict 
aims  to  explain  the  behavior  of  the 
Japanese  in  the  light  of  their  ethics, 
and  begins  by  pointing  out  that  a  be- 
lief in  the  brotherhood  of  man  should 
not  lead  one  to  deny  the  variety  of  his 
ways.  To  a  Japanese  the  supreme  task 
of  life  is  the  fulfillment  of  obligations; 
some,  like  duty  to  the  Emperor  and  to 
one's  family,  are  inherited  and  unend- 
ing; others,  like  duty  to  one's  reputa- 
tion and  toward  business  associates, 
are  individual  and  calculable.  All  de- 


TEN  BOOKS 


27 


mand  cautious  management  and  self- 
discipline.  There  follow  corollary  at- 
titudes strange  to  the  Western  mind,  for 
instance:  happiness  is  inconsequential, 
yet  man  at  least  is  naturally  good ; 
struggle  for  perfection  does  not  imply 
self-sacrifice;  a  favor  received  arouses 
hatred,  because  it  creates  indebted- 
ness ;  the  greatest  of  all  calamities  is 
to  be  put  to  shame.  All  this  explains 
why  a  soldier  will  commit  suicide  to 
prove  his  devotion  to  the  Emperor  and 
to  avoid  the  failure  implicit  in  cap- 
ture. However,  life's  burden  is  eased 
by  enjoying  the  pleasures  of  the  senses 
without  censure.  Today  Japan  is  adapting 
itself  to  foreign  control  with  good 
humor,  for  the  admission  of  national 
error  is  no  humiliation,  only  cause  for 
a  new  adjustment.   (7\  C.) 

Nationalism  and  Internationalism.  By 

Don  Luigi  Sturzo.  Roy.  1946.  308  pp. 
Don  Luigi,  the  founder  of  the  Popu- 
lar Party  in  Italy,  who  was  forced  into 
exile  twenty-two  years  ago,  represents 
the  liberal  wing  of  Catholic  social 
thinking.  He  transcends,  however, 
mere  sectarian  interest,  and  writes  for 
all  who  are  interested  in  the  different 
theories  of  the  relationship  of  persons 
to  the  State.  Nationalism,  communism, 
liberalism,  and  socialism  are  develop- 
ments —  extensions  to  excess  —  of  the 
ideas  of  nation,  community,  liberty, 
and  society.  In  nationalism  the  idea 
of  the  nation's  character  as  a  people 
organized  on  the  basis  of  its  traditions, 
language,  and  culture  becomes  per- 
verted to  mean  that  the  nation  is  the 
final  be-all  of  the  community.  A  true 
internationalism.the  author  feels,  can- 
not be  reached  with  the  United  Na- 
tions any  more  than  with  the  League 
of  Nations,  as  long  as  we  think  of  a 
union  of  the  states  rather  than  of  the 
peoples  comprising-  them.  The  posi- 
tion of  the  Catholic  Church  on  matters 
of  politics  is  shown  to  be  a  consistent 
striving  to  maintain  the  rights  of  the 
individual.  Control  of  the  atomic  bomb 
is  imperative.  Those  who  believe  that 
war  between  America  and  Russia  is 
inevitable  are  prophets  of  catastrophe. 
"A  Third  World  War,"  Don  Luigi 
writes,  "is  neither  probable  nor  pos- 
sible to  foresee."  (S.  W.  F.) 


Labor  and  the  Law.  By  Charles  O. 
Gregory.  Norton.  1946.  467  pp. 
This  study  of  the  relation  of  labor  to 
legislation  and  court  decisions  includes 
full  analyses  of  innumerable  cases. 
Through  the  mass  of  technical  detail, 
however,  runs  a  clear  thread  of  devel- 
opment from  the  time  when  combina- 
tion of  labor  was  considered  criminal 
conspiracy,  and  the  use  of  injunctions 
to  quell  strikes  was  prevalent,  to  the 
present  stage  when  unionization  of 
plants  and  the  obligation  of  employers 
to  bargain  with  a  representative  union 
are  taken  for  granted.  Notable  phases 
in  this  development  have  been  Section 
20  of  the  Clayton  Act,  called  labor's 
Magna  Charta;  the  Norris-La  Guardia 
anti-injunction  Act  of  1932,  considered 
by  some  the  most  revolutionary  labor 
measure  enacted  by  Congress ;  and, 
three  years  later,  the  National  Labor 
Relations  Act.  In  discussing  judicial 
review,  one  can  recognize  a  conserva- 
tive philosophy  in  the  Massachusetts 
courts  and  a  liberal  one  in  the  New 
York  courts  and  in  Justice  Holmes's 
dissents  in  the  review  of  the  Massa- 
chusetts cases.  The  author  traces  the 
outlawing  of  the  "yellow  dog"  con- 
tract; the  Supreme  Court's  inconsist- 
ent applications  of  the  Sherman  Act 
to  labor  cases ;  the  Court's  decisions 
pertaining  to  unfair  labor  practices ; 
and  the  problem  of  inter-union  com- 
bats, especially  since  the  rise  of  the 
CIO.  (M.M.) 

Lake  Champlain  and  Lake  George.  By 

Frederic  F.  Van  de  Water.  Bobbs- 
Merrill.  1946.  381  pp. 
This  volume,  one  of  "The  American 
Lakes  Series,"  tells  the  story  of  the  two 
lakes  which  form  part  of  the  best  natu- 
ral route  into  the  United  States  east 
of  Ontario.  Until  the  close  of  the  War 
of  1812  most  of  the  traffic  on  these 
lakes  was  of  a  warlike  nature.  Even 
before  the  coming  of  the  white  man, 
they  were  dotted  with  the  canoes  of 
marauding  Iroquois  voyaging  north  to 
prey  upon  their  Canadian  neighbors. 
Men  of  varying  temperaments  and  am- 
bitions have  played  their  part  in  the 
history  of  this  region,  from  the  day 
when  Samuel  de  Champlain  opened 
the  path  along  which,  for  a  century 


28 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN. 


and  a  half,  French  power  pushed  for- 
ward to  the  south  until  its  final  col- 
lapse at  the  hands  of  the  British.  Very 
different  from  Champlain  was  the 
saintly  Isaac  Jogues,  discoverer  of 
Lake  George.  Of  still  another  stamp 
were  Robert  Rogers  of  Rangers  fame, 
and  Ethan  Allen  with  his  Green  Moun- 
tain Boys.  The  struggle  of  the  latter 
to  uphold  their  rights  against  the  claims 
of  New  York  in  the  New  Hampshire 
Grants,  and  the  birth  therefrom  of 
Vermont,  is  an  interesting  story  — 
not  to  mention  Allen's  famous  capture  of 
Ticonderog-a  with  a  handful  of  men 
"in  the  name  of  the  Great  Jehovah  and 
the  Continental  Congress."  fS.  W.  F.) 

Learning  How  to  Behave.  By  Arthur 
M.  Schlesinger.  Macmillan.  1946.  95  pp. 
Readers  of  More  Books  will  welcome 
this  study  which  originally  appeared 
in  the  pages  of  its  January-April  1946 
issues.  In  book  form  its  impact  seems 
even  greater.  "Manners,"  the  author 
writes,  "far  from  being  apart  from  life, 
are  veritably  a  part  of  life,  revealing 
man's  hopes,  standards  and  strivings." 
And  the  work,  based  upon  the  reading 
of  innumerable  etiquette  books  pub- 
lished over  two  or  three  centuries,  is 
really  a  significant  contribution  to  the 
history  of  America.  The  first  lessons 
in  civility  the  colonists  learned  through 
legislatures,  courts,  and  the  pulpit. 
With  the  dearth  of  reading  matter,  the 
almanacs  contained  the  most  helpful 
signposts  of  behavior;  but  soon  vari- 
ous English  conduct  books  found 
their  way  to  eager  readers.  The  pros- 
perous merchant  class  in  the  North  and 
the  planting  aristocracy  of  the  South 
later  made  conscious  efforts  at  polite 
behavior.  Chesterfield's  Letters  to  his 
Son  was  particularly  popular  at  the 
end  of  the  eighteenth  century.  The  new 
republic  soon  developed  its  own  eti- 
quette. Education  became  regarded  as 
indispensable  for  good  society,  and  in- 
struction in  manners  was  an  import- 
ant subject  in  the  little  red  schoolhouses. 
Magazines,  such  as  Godey's  Lady's 
Book,  subsequently  exerted  great  in- 
fluence. A  new  era  opened  after  the 
Civil  War  when,  within  a  short  time, 
enormous  wealth  was  accumulated  by 
copper  and   oil  barons,   steel  kings, 


merchant  princes,  and  railroad  mag- 
nates. This  was  the  age  of  the  cult  of 
elegance.  Missionaries  of  etiquette 
now  had  a  wide  field  for  teaching  more 
sophisticated  styles  of  behavior.  This 
era  continued  until  the  first  World 
War,  after  which  a  relaxation  of  man- 
ners —  if  not  an  abandonment  of  all 
manners  —  set  in.  Even  such  authori- 
ties as  Emily  Post  had  to  retreat  and 
formulate  their  code  about  such  por- 
tentous subjects  as  the  good-night 
kiss.  Recognizing  the  importance  of 
good  manners,  military  commanders 
during  the  second  World  War  enjoined 
American  soldiers  to  conform  to  the 
social  usages  of  the  country  where 
they  were  located.  How  these  unoffi- 
cial ambassadors  of  good  will  realized 
the  hopes  of  their  superiors  is  another 
matter.  (Z.  H.) 

Haydn.  By  Karl  Geiringer.  Norton. 
1946.  342  pp. 

Professor  Geiringer,  formerly  libra- 
rian of  the  Society  of  the  Friends  of 
Music  in  Vienna,  and  now  Professor 
of  Music  at  Boston  University,  pres- 
ents again  the  life  of  the  "father  of  the 
symphony"  —  a  much  larger  work 
than  the  one  which  he  published  in 
German  in  1932.  The  first  part  of  the 
book  is  devoted  to  straightforward  bi- 
ography, and  contains  little  new  ma- 
terial. Indeed,  most  of  the  quotations 
and  letters  in  this  section  have  been 
used  before  either  in  Lady  Wallace's 
edition  of  Haydn's  correspondence 
(1859)  or  in  Krehbiel's  translation  of 
his  diaries  (1898).  The  second  part, 
however,  which  is  much  more  original 
and  valuable,  summarizes  the  results 
of  the  author's  years  of  research.  It 
comprehends  the  entire  achievement 
of  the  composer  in  instrumental  and 
choral  works,  with  special  attention  to 
their  chronology,  authenticity,  and 
musical  value.  "Unlike  the  precocious 
geniuses  of  the  eighteenth  century," 
Dr.  Geiringer  points  out,  "Haydn  de- 
veloped with  the  utmost  slowness." 
Hence  the  compositions  are  conven- 
iently grouped  in  five  separate  decades, 
so  that  his  evolution  in  each  field  is 
depicted  gradually.  It  is  a  good  book 
for  young  musicologists  to  cut  their 
teeth  on.  (R.  G.  A.) 


Library  Notes 


Whittier  Introduces 
Elizabeth  Lloyd  Howell 

THE  Library's  collection  of  Whittier 
manuscripts  has  recently  been  aug- 
mented by  a  letter  to  James  Fields,  the 
poet's  friend  and  publisher.  It  was 
written  on  August  31,  1 861,  from  Centre 
Harbor,  New  Hampshire,  soon  after 
Fields  had  become  editor  of  the  Atlantic 
Monthly.  Whittier,  worn  out  by  twenty- 
five  years  of  struggle  for  abolition,  was 
compelled  by  ill  health  to  rest,  but,  at 
fifty-three,  he  was  entering  the  decade 
of  his  best  poetic  achievement. 

The  letter  concerns  the  visit  of  two 
ladies  whom  Whittier  wished  the  Fieldses 
to  receive.  One  of  them  was  Elizabeth 
Lloyd  Howell,  a  Quaker  from  Phila- 
delphia, whom  Whittier  first  met  in 
their  youth  and  who  now  stayed  at 
Princeton,  Massachusetts,  each  summer. 
She  had  written  verse,  including  a  piece 
called  "Milton's  Prayer  of  Patience," 
which  gained  some  popularity  at  the 
time.  After  the  death  of  her  husband  in 
1856,  their  friendship  led  to  a  considera- 
tion of  marriage,  but  she  drew  away 
from  the  Quakers  and  gradually  the  re- 
lationship cooled. 

James  Fields  was  a  Quaker  himself. 
Whittier  wrote : 

My  dear  Fields 

I  spoke  to  thee  in  Boston  of  some 
friends  of  mine  whom  I  would  like  to 
have  an  opportunity  to  see  some  of  our 
"lions"  —  Mrs.  Howell  of  Philadelphia 
and  Miss  Lucy  Chase  of  Worcester. 
Mrs.  H.  is  the  author  of  the  much  quoted 
"Hymn  of  Milton  in  his  blindness"  which 
has  been  widely  attributed  to  the  "blind 
old  bard"  himself,  and  even  printed  as 
such  in  an  English  edition  of  his  works. 
Miss  Chase  is  a  sister  of  Prof.  Chase  of 
Haverford  College,  Pa.,  and  one  of  the 
Editors  of  the  Boston  D.  Advertiser. 
Please  let  me  know  when  thou  wilt  be 
at  home  from  Cape  Ann,  and  when  it 
would  be  in  thy  power  to  give  my 
friends  an  opportunity  of  seeing  thee, 
and  so  add  to  the  many  favors  I  have  to 
thank  thee  for. 

I  am  up  here  among  the  hills  in  the 
hope  of  gaining  a  little  of  their  strength. 


but,  so  far  as  I  am  concerned,  they  seem 
to  have  forgotten  the  Scriptural  injunc- 
tion "to  do  good  and  communicate."  I 
am  too  ill  to  climb  them,  and  so  sit  here 
before  them  like  Coleridge  before  Mt. 
Blanc. 

".  . .  upward  from  their  base 
Slow  travelling  with  dim  eyes." 
But,  I  am  happy  to  be  able  even  to 
see  them  in  this  glorious  weather.  We 
had  a  sunset  last  night  got  up  in  a  style 
of  magnificence  which  quite  took  me  by 
surprise  —  a  transfiguration  of  sky, 
water  and  mountains,  in  the  midst  of 
which  a  rainbow  stood  like  the  great 
angel  of  Revelations  with  one  foot  on 
the  water  and  one  on  the  land. 

Ever  and  truly  thy  fd 

J.  G.  Whittier 
Last  Atlantic  is  excellent. 

The  date  of  the  letter  substantiates 
the  conclusion  of  the  late  Thomas  F. 
Currier,  in  his  book  Elisabeth  Lloyd  and 
the  Whittiers,  Cambridge  1939,  that  Mrs. 
Howell's  final  letter  in  the  Pickard- 
Whittier  collection  of  Harvard  Uni- 
versity was  written  in  September  1861 
instead  of  1862.  In  it  she  refers  to  the 
possibility  of  seeing  the  Fieldses,  as  if 
following  Whittier's  suggestion.     T.  C. 

Blundeville  on  Maps  and  Globes 

THOMAS  BLUNDEVILLE,  who 
flourished  between  1561  and  1599, 
was  a  prominent  English  popularizer 
of  mathematics  and  cosmography,  as 
well  as  a  versatile  writer  on  morals. 
M.  Blundeville :  His  Exercises,  first 
printed  by  John  Windet  in  1594,  is  a 
storehouse  of  contemporary  geogra- 
phical and  astronomical  knowledge. 
To  the  Library's  Bowditch  Collection, 
which  already  included  copies  of  the 
first  and  seventh  editions,  has  been 
added  a  copy  of  the  fourth,  "corrected 
and  augmented,"  and  printed  by  Wil- 
liam Stansby  in  1613.  It  is  a  volume 
of  more  than  eight  hundred  pages  and 
has  numerous  diagrams,  including  a 
rose  of  the  winds,  a  chart  with  the  signs 
of  the  zodiac,  a  graphic  representation 
of  the  Great  and  the  Little  Bear  constel- 


29 


30 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN. 


lations,  and  others.  It  has  also  six 
folded  plates,  one  of  which  is  a  curios- 
ity, for  it  has  the  supposedly  movable 
disks  and  pointers  —  the  "volvelles" 
—  engraved  on  the  sheet  but  not  cut 
out.  The  book  consists  of  eight  treat- 
ises, each  of  which,  except  the  first, 
has  a  separate  title-page,  though  the 
paging  is  continuous. 

A  mere  glance  at  the  diagram  of  the 
eleven  celestial  spheres  illustrating 
the  treatise  on  cosmography  will  show 
that  Blundeville,  like  others  of  his 
time,  still  adhered  to  the  Ptolemaic 
system.  He  was,  however,  alert  in  rec- 
ognizing the  inventions  of  his  con- 
temporaries. Thus  in  this  treatise  he 
gives  the  way  of  determining  the  longi- 
tude of  a  place  by  means  of  watches, 
invented  by  Reinerus  Gemma-Frisius 
(1508-1555),  the  noted  professor  of 
medicine  at  Louvain.  Immediately 
afterwards  he  sets  forth  a  different 
method,  using  knowledge  of  the  dis- 
tance between  the  moon  and  fixed  stars, 
which  Peter  Apianus  had  proposed  in 
his  Cosmographia  of  1524  —  one  which 
has  been  followed  in  modern  times. 

The  treatise  "Mercator  his  two 
Globes"  was  written,  as  Blundeville 
tells,  by  the  help  of  the  two  globes, 
kindly  lent  him  by  a  scientific-minded 
knight.  The  terrestrial  globe  is  cov- 
ered "with  an  universall  Mappe  con- 
taining both  Sea  and  Land,  which  is 
diuided  by  the  later  Cosmographers 
into  four  principall  parts,  that  is  Eu- 
rope, Afrique,  Asia,  and  America," 
Earlier  cartographers  had  connected 
America  with  Asia.  Blundeville  also 
describes  two  other  great  globes  "late- 
ly sent  forth  by  M.  Molineux  at  the 
charges  of  M.  Sanderson."  The  note- 
worthy feature  of  Molineux's  terrestrial 
globe  is  its  marking  of  the  voyages  of 
Sir  Francis  Drake  and  of  Thomas  Ca- 
vendish by  means  of  two  narrow  lines, 
the  red  one  showing  the  voyage  of 
Drake  and  the  blue  one  that  of  Caven- 
dish. Blundeville  points  out  that  this 
globe  differs  greatly  from  Mercator's, 
as  "there  are  found  out  divers  new 
places  as  well  towards  the  North  pole, 
as  in  the  East  and  West  Indies,  which 
were  unknowne  to  Mercator." 

A  more  striking  divergence  is  noted 
in  tlie  treatise  on  "Petrus  Plancius  his 


universall  Map"  of  1592,  "  in  which 
Mappe  are  set  downe  many  more  places, 
as  well  of  both  the  Indies  as  of  Afrique 
.  .  .  then  are  to  be  found  eyther  in  Mer- 
cator his  Mappe  or  in  any  other  mo- 
derne  Mappe  whatsoever."  Plancius's 
division  of  the  earth,  Blundeville  points 
out,  differs  from  that  of  Mercator  and 
of  all  other  geographers,  for  while  the 
others  divide  the  earth  into  four  parts, 
Plancius  by  dividing  America  into 
three  parts  —  Mexicana.  Peruana,  and 
Magellanica  —  divides  the  earth  into 
six  parts.  Plancius's  descriptions  of 
the  flora  and  fauna  and  the  native  in- 
habitants of  the  various  regions  may 
be  read  with  curiosity.  Here  it  must 
suffice  to  name  the  provinces  of  Mexi- 
cana (North  America)  which  he  gives 
as  "Mexico,  otherwise  called  noua 
Hispania,  terra  Florida,  Norum  Bega, 
noua  Francia,  Estotiland,  Saguena, 
Chilaga,  Toconteae,  Marata,  Califor- 
nia, Tolm,  Quivira,  Agama,  and  Ani- 
an."  The  chief  islands  lying  north  and 
northeast  from  Mexicana  are  given  as 
"Groynland,  Crockland,  Island,  Frez- 
land,  Bacalaos,  and  Cuba."     M.  M. 

Mark  Twain  Protests  about 
False  German  Biography 

IN  1892  a  selection  of  Mark  Twain's 
works  in  six  volumes  was  published 
in  German  by  Robert  Lutz  at  Stutt- 
gart. A  second  edition,  also  in  six  vol- 
umes but  with  illustrations,  came  out 
in  1898.  The  last  volume  of  the  set  in- 
cluded, in  an  appendix,  a  sketch  of  the 
author's  life. 

Clemens  passed  the  winters  of  1897 
and  1898  in  Vienna,  where  he  had  a 
tremendous  success.  The  literary,  ar- 
tistic, and  social  leaders  of  the  capital 
flocked  to  see  the  author  of  Tom  Sazv- 
yer  and  Huckleberry  Finn,  overwhelm- 
ing him  with  invitations.  It  was  dur- 
ing the  last  few  months  of  his  stay  at 
Vienna  that  the  novelist  wrote  the 
following  letters  (recently  acquired  by 
the  Library)  to  his  Stuttgart  publish- 
er, asking  him  to  suppress  his  biogra- 
phy and  substitute  a  new  one : 

Feb  27/99 

Dear  Mr.  Lutz  - 

I  want  to  ask  a  favor  of  you  —  that 
you  will  suppress  the  "Mark  Twain's 


LIBRARY  NOTES 


3i 


Lebensgeschichte"  &  not  let  any  more 
copies  of  it  get  into  circulation.  Half 
of  the  history  is  true,  and  the  other 
half  is  not  —  &  but  little  of  it  is  pleas- 
ant reading'.  According  to  the  mainly- 
false  4th  Chapter,  my  wife  &  I  were 
mere  vulgar  swine  —  &  moreover  that 
chapter  is  attributed  to  we!  I  never 
wrote  a  line  of  it. 

Am  I  asking  too  much  ?  I  hope  not ; 
it  is  a  most  unpleasant  booklet. 

Very  truly  yours 
S  L  Clemens 

April  3/99 

Dear  Sir : 

1  am  sending  to  America  the  data 
for  a  Biographical  Sketch  of  me,  to  be 
written  by  my  nephew  &  published  in 
the  forthcoming  edition  de  luxe  of  my 
Complete  Works.  It  will  be  sent  to 
me  here  for  revision,  &  then  I  will 
send  you  a  copy.  I  hope  you  will  have 
it  translated,  &  that  you  will  not  any 
longer  use  that  other  Lebensgeschichte, 
either  in  brochure  form  or  in  the  books. 
For  that  one  can  in  no  way  be  changed 
into  a  presentable  form.  It  is  made  up 
of  falsities,  chiefly ;  &  when  it  states  a 
truth  it  is  usually  a  trivial  truth  &  not 
worth  the  trouble  of  printing. 

There  has  never  been  an  "author- 
ised" Biographical  Sketch  of  me,  but 
this  new  one  will  have  that  character, 
&  you  will  be  doing  me  a  favor  for 
which  I  shall  be  very  grateful  if  you 
will  use  it  &  wholly  suppress  the  other. 
Sincerely  yours,  etc. 

Early  in  the  summer  Clemens  took 
his  family  to  Sanna,  a  small  village  in 
Sweden,  so  that  his  youngest  daughter 
Jean,  then  nineteen,  might  be  treated 
at  a  well  known  clinic.  (She  was  suf- 
fering from  epilepsy.)  From  Sweden 
he  wrote  again  to  his  publisher  on 
July  14: 

Dear  Sir : 

This  is  the  biographical  sketch 
which  I  promised.  It  was  written  by 
my  nephew,  S.  E.  Moffett,  editor  of 
the  New  York  Journal,  &  is  correct. 
It  will  be  published  in  the  22-volume 
edition  of  my  Collected  Works  now- 
being  issued  by  the  American  Publish- 
ing Company  of  Hartford.  Connecti- 
cut. It  is  plenty  long  enough,  &  I  shall 
be  glad  to  see  it  take  the  place  of  the 


longer  one  which  you  are  now  pub- 
lishing. 

Very  truly  yours,  etc. 
I  shall  be  here  more  than  2  months, 
1  think. 

It  would  be  interesting  to  read  the 
objectionable  biography,  as  also  to 
see  whether  the  publisher  subsequent- 
ly complied  with  Mark  Twain's  de- 
sire and  substituted  a  new  "Lebens- 
geschichte." Unfortunately,  we  have 
not  been  able  to  locate  a  copy  of  the 
sixth  volume  in  any  edition  —  al- 
though, according  to  Edgar  Hera- 
minghaus's  Mark  Tzvain  in  Germany, 
1939,  one  edition  reached  twenty- 
eight  printings  by  1935  and  the  other 
eleven,  by  1914.  T.  C. 

Lectures  and  Concerts 

THE  entrance'  to  the  Lecture  Hall 
is  from  Boylston  Street  only.  The 
doors  will  he  opened  one  half  hour  before 
each  lecture  or  concert.  Unless  otherzvisc 
indicated,  all  programs  are  in  the  Lecture 
Hall. 

Short  Story  Writing.  William  E. 
Harris,  Director,  Writers'  Counsel 
Service.  8.00  Sun.,  Jan.  5. 

Etchings  and  Drypoints  of  James  Mc- 
Bey.  A  Gallery  Talk  in  connection  zvith 
the  exhibition  in  the  Albert  H.  Wiggin 
Gallery  through  December.  Arthur  W. 
Heintzelman,  N.A.,  Keeper  of  Prints, 
Boston  Public  Library.  3.00  Mon., 
Jan.  6. 

The  Employee  and  the  Labor  Union. 
E.  A.  Johnson,  Secretary-Treasurer, 
Building  and  Construction  Trades 
Council  of  the  Metropolitan  District, 
A.  F.  of  L.  8.00  Mon.,  Jan.  6. 

Feature  and  Magazine  Writing.  James 
J.  Canavan,  Managing  Editor  of  Fea- 
ture News  Syndicate.  8.00  Thurs., 
Jan.  9. 

Forgotten  Songs.  Lecture-Concert. 
Rulon  Y.  Robison,  tenor  soloist  and 
teacher.  Assisted  by  two  sopranos,  a 
tenor,  and  a  pianist  whose  names  will 
be  announced.  8.00  Sun.,  Jan.  12. 

Portraiture  .through  the  Ages.  Illus- 
trated. Dorothy  Adlow,  art  critic,  the 
Christian  Science  Monitor.  Introduced 
by  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman,  N.A., 
Keeper  of  Prints,  Boston  Public  Li- 
brary. 8.00  Mon.,  Jan.  13. 


32 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Historic  Buildings  of  Greater  Boston. 
Illustrated.  Frank  Chouteau  Brown, 
architect  and  editor  of  Old  Time  New 
England.  8.00  Thurs.,  Jan.  16. 

Do  You  Want  to  Write?  Forum  con- 
ducted by  William  E.  Harris  and 
James  J.  Canavan.  8.00  Sun.,  Jan.  19. 

"John  Brown's  Body"  —  a  Folk  Epic. 
Illustrated  with  recordings  of  poetic 
interpretations  of  John  Brorcn's  Body. 
Charles  R.  Morris,  Instructor  in  Eng- 
lish, Milton  Academy.  8.00  Thurs., 
Jan.  23. 

A  Great  Literature  without  a  Country. 
Illustrated.  Dr.  A.  A.  Roback,  author 
and  psychologist.  Assisted  by  Mrs. 
Mary  Holmes,  dramatic  interpreter. 
8.00  Sun.,  Jan.  26. 

The  Making  of  an  Etching.  Illus- 
trated. Arthur  W.  Heintzelman,  N.A., 
Keeper  of  Prints,  Boston  Public  Li- 
brary. 8.00  Mon.,  Jan.  27. 

Lincoln's  Reading  and  Development  of 
His  English,  Style.  Stacy  B.  South- 
worth,  Headmaster,  Thayer  Academy, 
8.00  Thurs.,  Jan.  30. 


Lowell  Lectures 


A 


COURSE 
lectures  on 


of  eight  illustrated 

The  Unsolved  Prob- 


lems of  Astronomy,  under  the  direction 
of  Harlow  Shapley,  Ph.D.,  Director  of 
the  Harvard  College  Observatory. 

Tuesdays  and  Fridays  at  eight 
o'clock  in  the  evening,  beginning  Tues- 
day, January  14. 

1.  Tues.,  Jan.  14.  The  Sun.  By  Wal- 
ter Orr  Roberts,  Ph.D.,  Research  Asso- 
ciate and  Superintendent  of  the  Climax 
Station  of  Harvard  College  Observatory. 

2.  Fri.,  Jan.  17.  The  Inosphere.  By 
Donald  H.  Menzel,  Ph.D.,  Professor 
of  Astrophysics,  Harvard  University. 

3.  Tues.,  Jan.  21.  The  Planetary  Sys- 
tem. By  Fletcher  G.  Watson,  Ph.D., 
Assistant  Professor  of  Education,  Har- 
vard University. 

4.  Fri.,  Jan.  24.  Meteors  and  Comets. 
By  Fred  L.  Whipple,  Ph.D.,  Associate 
Professor  of  Astronomy,  Harvard  Uni- 
versity. 

5.  Tues.,  Jan.  28.  Interstellar  Space. 
By  James  G.  Baker,  Ph.D.,  Associate 
Professor  of  Astronomy,  Harvard  Uni- 
versity. 

6.  Fri.,  Jan.  31.  The  Milky  Way.  By 
Bart  J.  Bok,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Profes- 
sor of  Astronomy,  Harvard  University. 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 

Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

** 
* 

This  list  should  be  used  in  conjunction  with  Books  Current,  a 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
1943.  Books  Current  is  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  and  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  are  available  for  the  whole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  are  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  the 
Business  Branch;  however,  they  may  be  borrowed  through  the  various 
branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


Anthropology 

Weidenreich,  Franz.  Apes,  giants  and  man. 
Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1946.]  vii,  122  pp. 
Illus.  GN29.W4 

The  author  believes  that  modern  man  has  des- 
cended from  a  race  of  prehistoric  giants. 
Yale  university,  Institute  of  human  relations. 
Outline  of  cultural  materials,  prepared  by 
George  P.  Murdock,  Clellan  S.  Ford,  Al- 
fred E.  Hudson  [and  others]  .  .  .  Yale, 
vii,  56  pp.  GN33.Y3  1945 

Vale  anthropological  studies,  vol.  II.  Revised  edition; 
first  edition,  1938.  Reproduced  from  typewritten 
copy. 

Bibliography 

De  Jongh,  William  F.  A  bibliography  of  the 
novel  and  short  story  in,  French  from  the 
beginning  of  printing  till  1600.  Univ.  of 
New  Mexico.  1944.  79  pp.  *Z2i74.F4D4. 

McKeon.  Newton  Felch,  and  Katharine  Con- 
over  Cowles.  Amherst,  Massachusetts,  im- 
prints, 1825-1876.  Amherst  College  Li- 
brary. 1946.  191  pp.  *Zi2g6.A5M2 

Sullivan,  Frank,  and  Marie  Padberg  Sullivan. 
Moreana,  1478-1945;  a  preliminary  check 
list  of  material  by  and  about  Saint  Thomas 
More.  Kansas  City,  Mo.,  Rockhurst  Col- 
lege. 1946.  [174]  pp.  *Z8592.8.S8 

Reproduced  from  typewritten  copy. 

Thomson,  Ruth  Gibbons.  Index  to  full  length 
plays  1926  to  1944.  Boston,  Faxon.  1946. 
ix,  306  pp.  *Z578i.T5 

Bibliography :  pp.  254-305. 

Biography 

Essays  and  Studies 

Day,  Richard  Ellsworth.  Breakfast  table  auto- 
crat; the  life  story  of  Henry  Parsons  Crow- 
ell.  Chicago,  Moody  Press.  1946.  xiv,  317 
pp.  Plates.  CT275.C888D3 
Mr.  Henry  Parsons  Crowell,  who  died  on  October 
23,  1944,  was  the  head  of  the  Quaker  Oats  Co.,  and 
President  of  the  board  of  Moody  Bible  Institute. 

Eckenrode,  H.  J.  The  Randolphs,  the  story  of 
a  Virginia  family.  Bobbs-Merrill.  [1946.] 
310  pp.  Plates.  *CS7i.Ri93  1946 


Evans,  Trevor.  Bevin  of  Britain.  Norton. 
[1946.]  282  pp.  DA585.B4E8 

G.  B.  S.  90;  aspects  of  Bernard  Shaw's  life 
and  work  [by]  Sir  Max  Beerbohm  .  .  . 
[and  others.]  Edited  by  S.  Winsten.  Uodd, 
Mead.  1946.  271  pp.  PR5366.G2 

A  highly  stimulating  gathering  of  essays  in  ap- 
preciation of  George  Bernard  Shaw  on  the  occasion 
of  his  ninetieth  birthday.  The  contributors  include 
John  Masefield,  Laurence"  Housman,  H.  G.  Wells 
(in  a  letter),  J.  B.  Priestley,  Dr.  Inge,  Aldous  Hux- 
ley, and  many  others. 

"In  this  book  you  will  read  about  Shaw's  dramas, 
his  philosophy,  his  public  work,  perhaps  even  about 
his  strange  delusion  that  he,  the  most  marked  in- 
dividualist ...  is  a  good,  obedient  Socialist  .  .  ." 
Foreword  by  Gilbert  Murray. 

Lewis,  Montgomery  S.  Legends  that  libel 
Lincoln.  Rinehart.  [1946.]  xii.  239  pp. 

E457.L67 

Particularly  a  vindication  of  Lincoln's  father  and 
wife.  Deals  also  with  the  legend  of  Ann  Rutledge. 

Norman,  Charles.  The  muses'  darling;  the 
life  of  Christopher  Marlowe.  Rinehart. 
[1946.]  xvi,  272  pp.  Plates.  PR2673.N6 

Vestal,  Stanley.  Jim  Bridger,  mountain  man. 
Morrow.   1946.  x,  333  pp.  F592.B87 

The  life  of  the  famous  explorer  and  Tndian  fighter. 

Who's  who  in  the  maritime  industry;  bio- 
graphical sketches  and  illustrations  of  in- 
terest to  and  concerning  people  in  the 
merchant  seafaring  world.  [1946-  New 
York,  74  Degrees  West  Co.  [1946-  Illus. 

*9387-973Ai35 

Memoirs.  Letters 

Lamont,  Thomas  William.  My  boyhood  in  a 
parsonage,  some  brief  sketches  of  Ameri- 
can life  toward  the  close  of  the  last  cen- 
tury'- Harper.  [1946.]  xiii,  203  pp.  Ulus. 

HG2453.L3A3 

The  well-known  financier  and  philanthropist  was 
the  son  of  a  Methodist  preacher  who  ministered  to 
small  towns  and  farms  in  the  Hudson  valley. 

Smith,  A.  Merriman.  Thank  you,  Mr.  Presi- 
dent, a  White  House  notebook.  Harper. 
[1946.]  x,  304PP.  E807.S57 
The  White  House  correspondent  for  the  United 
Press  gives  a  lively,  frank  account  of  his  work,  and 
intimate  glimpses  of  President  Roosevelt  and  Presi- 
dent Truman. 


33 


34 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN. 


Yeats,  John  Butler,  1830-1922.  J.  B.  Yeats 
letters  to  his  son,  W.  B.  Yeats,  and  others, 
1869-1922,  edited  with  a  memoir  by 
Joseph  Hone,  and  a  preface  by  Oliver 
Elton.  Dutton.  1946.  304  PP-  PR5906.Y4 

Business 

These  books  are  to  be  obtained  at  the 
Business  Branch,  20  City  Hall  Ave. 

American  booktrade  directory  .  .  .  1946.  Bow- 
ker.  1946.  407  pp.  **Z475.A5i 

Association  of  American  railroads.  Account- 
ing division.  Railway  accounting  rules  .  .  . 
Effective  Oct.  1,  1946.  Washington,  As- 
sociation of  American  Railroads.  1946.  333 
pp.  HF5686.R1A51 

Best's  digest  of  insurance  stocks.  16th  annual 
edition.  1946  New  York,  Best.  1946.  141 
pp.  **HG5i23.l5B55 

—  Safety  directory  of  safety,  hygiene,  first- 
aid  and  fire  protective  products.  1946. 
Best.  1946.  351  pp.  **HD7273.B56 

Blanchard,  Clyde  I.,  and  Charles  E.  Zoubek. 
Expert  shorthand  speed   course.  Gregg. 

1945.  436  pp.  NBS 
Bullot,  Ivan.  Air  travel  guide  to  Latin  A- 

merica.  New  York,  Franklin  Watts.  1946. 
369  pp.  **Fi4og.B93 
"Including  the  U.S.A.  territories  of  the  Canal  Zone, 
Puerto  Rico  and  the  Virgin  Islands;  Bermuda;  and 
British,  French  and  Netherlands  possessions  in  the 
West  Indies  and  the  Guianas." 

Buyers  for  export  in  New  York  city.  8th 
edition.  1946/47.  New  York,  Thomas  Ash- 
well.  1946.  304  pp.  **HF30ii.Bq9 

Canadian  trade  index;  annual  issue  of  1946 
.  .  .  Toronto,  Canadian  Manufacturers 
Ass  n.  1946.  858  pp.  **HF3223.C2i 

Dingman,  Harry.  Risk  appraisal.  Cincinnati, 
The  National  Underwriter  Co.  1946.  824 
pp.  NBS 

Dohr,  James  L.  and  H.  A.  Inghran.  Cost  ac- 
counting principles  and  practice.  Ronald 
Press.  1946.  752  pp.  NBS 

Fitzpatrick,  Clarke  J.  Fifty  years  of  surety- 
ship and  insurance.  Baltimore.  1946.  198  pp. 

NBS 

Gold  book,  the  national  directory  covering 
all  apparel  markets  from  coast  to  coast. 

1946.  New  York.  Reporter  Publications. 
1946.  872  pp.  **TT495.G6i 

Harrison,  Shelby  M.,  and  Emerson  F.  An- 
drews. American  foundations  for  social 
welfare.  Russell  Sage  Foundation.  1946. 
249  pp.  **AS25.H32 

Hayward,  Norris  L.  The  contractor's  legal 
problems.  McGraw-Hill.   1946.   175  pp. 

NBS 

Insurance  almanac  .  .  .  1946.  New  York,  Un- 
derwriter Printing  and  Publishing  Co. 
1946.  1299  pp.  *::HG8oi9.l59 

International  motion  picture  almanac.  1946/ 
47.  New  York,  Quigley  Pub.  Co.  1946.  1024 
pp.  ^PNiggs.Mgi 

James,  Herman  G.  The  protection  of  the 
public  interests  in  public  contracts.  Chi- 
cago, Public  Administration  Service.  1946. 
90  pp.  NBS 


Lasser,  Jacob  Kay.  Your  income  tax.  1947 
edition.  Simon  and  Schuster.  1946.  168  pp. 

HJ4652.L34 

Mitrany,  David.  Economic  development  in 
S.  E.  Europe.  London,  Political  and  Eco- 
nomic Planning.  1945.  165  pp.  NBS 

National  board  of  fire  underwriters.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  80th  annual  meeting.  New 
York.  1946.  190  pp.  HG9753.N27 

National  office  management  association.  Pro- 
ceedings, 27th  annual  conference.  The  As- 
sociation. 1946.  102  pp.  HF5541.N27 

Ready  reference  fur  buyers  telephone  di- 
rectorv.  New  York,  Ready  Reference 
Pub.  Co.  560  pp.  **TSio66.R28 

Saliers,  Earl  A.  Modern  practical  accounting 
advanced.  Chicago,  American  Technical 
Soc.  1946.  368  pp.  NBS 

Science  year  book.  1946.  Doubleday,  Doran. 
1946.  245  pp.  Q9-S5I 

South  American  handbook,  The.  1946.  23rd 
edition.  London,  Trade  and  Travel  Pub- 
lications. 1946.810  pp.  **HAg35.S72 

Thomas'  wholesale  grocery  and  kindred 
trades  register.  1946.  48th  annual.  New 
York,  Thomas  Pub.  Co.  1946.  181 1  pp. 

**TX345.T45 

Whittlesey,  Charles  R.  National  interest  and 
international  cartels.  Macmillan.  1946.  172 
pp.  NBS 


Economics 

Bigham,  Truman  C.  Transportation:  princi- 
ples and  problems.  McGraw-Hill.  1946. 
xviii,  626  pp.  9385.A60 

Blakey,  Roy  G,  and  Gladys  C.  Blakey.  Sales 
taxes  and  other  excises.  Chicago,  Public 
Administration  Service.  1945.  xii,  216  pp. 

9336.2A74 

Bradford,  Ernest  S.  Survey  and  directory, 
marketing  research  agencies  in  the  United 
States.  New  York,  City  College,  Bureau 
of  Business  Research.  1945.  vi,  34  pp. 
Reproduced  from  typewritten  copy.  *938l.04AlI4 

Burns,  Arthur  F.,  and  Wesley  C.  Mitchell. 

Measuring  business  cycles.  National  Bu- 
reau of  Economic  Research.  1946.  xxvii, 
56opp.  9332.75A170 
Clough,  Shepard  B.  A  century  of  American 
life  insurance;  a  history  of  the  Mutual  life 
insurance  company  of  New  York,  1843- 
1943-  Columbia  Univ.  1946.  xiii,  402  pp. 

9368.3A220 

Colombian-American  chamber  of  commerce. 
Colombia,  economic  aspects,  1945,  present 
and  future.  New  York,  Colombian-Ameri- 
can Chamber  of  Commerce.  [1945.]  35 
pp.  Illus.  9330.g86A4 

Dingman,  Harold  W.  Risk  appraisal.  Cincin- 
nati, National  Underwriter  Co.  1946.  vii, 
824  pp.  9368.3A218 

Faulkner,  Edward  H.  Uneasy  money.  Univ. 
of  Oklahoma.  1946.  114  pp.  9333.91A77 

Feier,  Richard.  Elements  of  economics  (with 
post-war  problems).  Revised  edition. 
1946.  New  York,  College  Entrance  Book 
Co.  [1946.]  371,  vipp.  HB171.5.F38  1946 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


35 


Hazlitt,   Henry.   Economics  in   one  lesson. 

Harper.  [1946.]  xi.  222  pp.  9330.1A534 
Lynch,  David.  The  concentration  of  economic 

power.  Columbia  Univ.  1946.  x,  423  pp. 

9338.77A115 

Mackenzie,  Kenneth.  The  banking  systems  of 
Great  Britain,  France,  Germany,  and  the 
United  States  of  America.  3d  edition  re- 
vised and  enlarged.  London,  Macmillan. 
1945.  xxi,  284  pp.  9332.1A89R 

Piest,  Oskar.  Towards  stability  of  world 
economy;  defense  and  criticism  of  the 
Bretton  Woods  agreements.  New  York, 
Messner.  [1945.]  61  pp.  9332.15A16 

Swanson,  Ernst  W.,  and  Emerson  P.  Schmidt. 
Economic  stagnation  or  progress;  a  criti- 
que of  recent  doctrines  on  the  mature  eco- 
nomy, oversavings,  and  deficit  spending. 
McGraw-Hill.  1946.  ix,  212pp.  9330.1A533 

U.  S.  Surplus  property  administration. 
.  .  .  Report  of  the  Surplus  property  ad- 
ministration to  the  Congress  [on  specific 
surplus  plants  and  facilities]  Sept.  21, 
1945-  [Washington.  1945-46.]  6  v. 

*9355-7iA23 

Fine  Arts 

Architecture 

Charleston,  S.  C.  Civic  services  committee. 
This  is  Charleston,  a  survey  of  the  archi- 
tectural heritage  of  a  unique  American 
city  undertaken  by  the  Charleston  civic 
services  committee;  text  by  Samuel  Gail- 
lard  Stoney,  revised  from  the  reports  of 
the  committee.  Charleston,  S.  C,  Pub.  by 
the  Carolina  Art  Ass'n  for  the  Charleston 
Civic  Services  Committee.  1944.  141  pp. 
Illus.  8094.04-606 

Mcore,  John  D.  Home  again!  Domestic 
architecture  for  the  normal  Australian. 
Sydney.  [I944-]  7~78  PP-  IUus.  8117.05-575 

Drawing 

Perard,  Victor.  Drawing  dogs.  Pitman  Pub. 
Corp.  [1945.]  [56]  pp.  Illus.  8142.05-452 

—  Drawing  trees;  introducing-  landscape 
composition.  Pitman  Pub.  Corp.  [1945.] 
54  pp.  Illus.  8142.06-112 

Toulouse-Lautrec  Monfa,  Henri  Marie  Ray- 
mond de,  1864-1901.  Twelve  drawings. 
Pantheon  Books.  [1945.]  [3]  pp.  12 
mounted  plates.  *8i4iB.2og 
Issued  in  portfolio. 

Zaidenberg,  Arthur.  Anyone  can  draw  ani- 
mals. Pitman  Pub.  Corp.  [1946.]  v,  170 
pp.  Illus.  81*42.05-118 
Mainly  a  collection  of  sketches. 

Miscellaneous 
Birnbaum,  Martin.  Jacovleff  and  other  artists. 
New  York,  Struck.  1946.  xiv,  235  pp.  60 
plates.  *4ioo.04-io9 
Alexander  Jacovleff,  William  Blake  and  other  il- 
lustrators of  Dante.  Thomas  Rov.landson,  Aubrey 
Beardsley,  Marcus  Behmer,  Arthur  Rackhani,  Her- 
mann Struck  [and]  Ar.nc  Goldthwaite. 

Klee,  Paul,  1879-1940.  Ten  reproductions  in 
facsimile  of  paintings  by  Paul  Klee;  se- 


lected and  with  an  introductory  essay  by 
Georg  Schmidt.  Now  York,  Wittenborn. 
[1946.]  8  pp.  10  colored  plates.  *8o64B.67i 
English  version  by  Robert  Allen  and  Douglas 
Cooper. 

''Printed  in  Switzerland  1946." 

Knoedier,  M.  Herbert  Haseltine  exhibition  of 
sculpture,  Thursday  July  10th  to  Saturday 
August  9th,  1930.  [London.  1930?]  [52] 
pp.  incl.  23  plates.  *8o83.04~590 
Descriptive  text  opposite  each  plate. 

F.ottmann,  Leopold,  1812-1881.  [Lithographs 
for  Vorweltliche  Landschaften  by  Franz 
Unger.]  Mi'mchen.  [1853?]  1 3  plates. 

*Cab.8o.754 

Weiss,  Harry  D.  Something  about  jumping 
jacks  and  the  jack-in-the-box.  Trenton. 
N.  J.  1945.  34  pp.  Illus.  :::8i6i.og-i32 

"Lithoprinted." 

History 

America 

Adams,  John,  President  U.  S.,  1735-1826.  The 
selected  writings  of  John  and  John  Quincy 
Adams,  edited  and  with  an  introduction 
by  Adrieime  Koch  and  William  Peden. 
New  York.  Knopf.  1946.  [41  J.  413,  xxix 
pp.  E302.A23 

Starkey,  Marion  Lena.  The  Cherokee  nation. 
Knopf.  1946.  xiv,  355,  vi  pp.  E99.C5S76 

A  history  of  the  emigration  of  the  Cherokee  Indians 
from  North  Carolina  and  Georgia  to  Oklahoma. 

War  and  Post-War 

American  Zionist  emergency  council.  The 
Jewish  case,  the  place  of  Palestine  in  the 
solution  of  the  Jewish  question.  American 
Zionist  Emergency  Council.  [1945.]  30  pp. 
Illus.  DS149.A723 

Bisscn,  Thomas  Arthur.  America's  Far  Eastern 
policy.  Institute  of  Pacific  Relations,  dis- 
tributed by  the  Macmillan  Co.  1945.  xiii, 
-'35  PP.  DS518.8.B52 

This  study  is  a  volume  in  the  Institute  of  Pacific- 
Relations  Inquiry  series.  The  author  surveys  A- 
merican  Far  Eastern  policy  from  1895,  the  first 
World  War  and  after,  the  Manchurian  crisis,  Japan- 
ese-American trade  relations,  the  Sino-Japanese 
War,  Far  Eastern  repercussions  of  the  War  in 
Europe,  the  War  in  the  Pacific,  and  postwar  policy. 

Brereton,   Lewis   Hyde,   Lieutenant  General. 

The  Brereton  diaries;  the  war  in  the  air 

in  the  Pacific,  Middle  East  and  Europe, 

3    October   1941-8   May    1945.  Morrow. 

1946.  450  pp.  D790.B67 
Carpenter,  Iris.  No  woman's  world.  Houghton 

Mifflin.  1946.  ix,  337  pp.  DG11.5.C287 
Cleveland,  Reginald  M.  Air  transport  at  war, 

foreword  by  Lt.  Gen.  Harold  L.  George. 

Harper.  [1946.]  ix,  324  pp.  Plates. 

D810.T8C5 

Hoehler,  Fred  Kenneth.  Europe's  homeless 
millions.  Foreign  Policy  Ass'n.  [1946.]  96 
pp.  Illus.  7571.96N0.54 

International  military  tribunal.  Nazi  con- 
spiracy and  aggression,  v.  3,  5.  Office  of 
United  States  Chief  of  counsel  for  pro- 
secution of  axis  criminality.  Washington. 
1946-  *D8o4.G42  I  53 

"A  collection  of  documentary  evideuce  and  guide 


36  MORE  BOOKS: 

materials  prepared  by  the  American  and  British 
prosecuting  staffs  for  presentation  before  the  Inter- 
national military  tribunal  at  Nurnberg,  Germany." 

Kinnaird,  Clark,  editor.  It  happened  in  1945. 
Essential  Books,  Duell,  Sloan  and  Pearce. 
[1946.]  464PP-  D423  I945-K5 

Marsden,  Lawrence  A.  Attack  transport; 
the  story  of  the  U.  S.  S.  Doyen.  Univ.  of 
Minnesota.  [1946.]  ix,  200  pp.  D774.D6M3 
A  history  of  the  operations  of  the  attack  transport 
Do\en  in  the  Pacific,  as  experienced  by  the  author, 
lieutenant,  Supply  corps,  U.  S.  Navy,  and  his  mates. 
Illustrated  with  noteworthy  photographs. 

Morgan,  John  Hartman.  Assize  of  arms;  the 
disarmament  of  Germany  and  her  rearma- 
ment (1919-1939)  .  •  ■  with  a  preface  by 
Lieut-General  Sir  G.  M.  W.  Macdonough. 
New  York,  Oxford  Univ.  1946-  Plates. 

DD240.M62 

General  Morgan  served  in  Germany  after  the  first 
World  War  a3  British  Member  of  the  Inter-Allied 
Council  of  the  Allied  Control  Commission  and  as 
senior  British  representative  on  the  Effectives  Sub- 
Commission.  In  this  book,  which  he  began  in  1924 
but  suspended  because  of  prevailing  public  opinion 
after  the  Pact  of  Locarno,  he  exposes  Germany's 
failure  to  disarm  and  preparation  for  war.  The 
author  dwells  with  some  detail  on  the  vices  and 
brutalities  of  the  war  and  post  war  periods,  in- 
cluding those  of  the  Nazis. 

Napa  (Attack  transport).  Napalogue  [Berke- 
ley, Calif.,  Lederer,  Street  and  Zeus  Co. 
1946.]  107  pp.  IUus.  D774.N3A5 

Pury,  Roland  de.  Journal  from  my  cell, 
translated  from  the  French  by  Barrows 
Musssey,  with  an  introduction  by  Paul 
Geren.  Harper.  [1946.]  xvi.  140  pp. 

D811.5.P842 

Pastor  de  Pury  was  a  Swiss  minister  in  France, 
imprisoned  there  by  the  Nazis.  The  original  edition 
of  the  book  was  published  by  the  Cuilde  du  Livre 
in  Lausanne. 

Roosevelt,  Elliott.  As  he  saw  it,  with  a  fore- 
word by  Eleanor  Roosevelt.  Duell,  Sloan 
and  Pearce.  [1946.]  xviii,  270  pp.  E807.R64 

Elliot  Roosevelt  was  the  aide  and  confidential 
companion  of  his  fathe;  on  many  now  historic  oc- 
casions. He  gives  first-hand  impressions  and  records 
conversations  at  the  meeting  that  resulted  in  the 
Atlantic  Charter,  the  conferences  at  Casablanca 
Cairo,  and  Teheran,  and  gives  also  an  account  of 
the  Yalta  Conference. 

Schechtman,  Joseph  B.  European  population 
transfers,  1939-1945.  New  York,  Oxford 
Univ.  1946.  xi,  532  pp.  JV6080.S3 

'"Every  effort  has  been  made  to  present  a  full 
factual  report  of  the  transfer  operations  that  oc- 
curred between  1939  and  1945."  —  Introduction. 
These  transfers  were  largely  of  German  minorities 
but  also  of  non-German  minorities,  such  as  Russians, 
Finns,  Bulgarians,  and  others. 

U.  S.  Army.  83d  division.  The  Thunderbolt 
across  Europe,  a  history  of  the  83d  in- 
fantry division,  1942-1945.  [Munich,  Ger. 
1946.]  11-119PP  D769.383d.A52 
A  remarkably  vivid  narrative,  by  Seargent  Ernie 
Hayhow,  of  the  training  and  exploits  of  the  83d 
"Thunderbolt"  Division,  which  fought  in  the 
hedgerows  of  Normandy,  the  "arctic"  cold  of  the 
Ardennes,  in  the  Hurtgen  Forest  and  the  Harz 
Mountains,  met  with  the  Russians,  swept  from 
ibe  Rhine  to  the  Elbe,  and  captured  20,000  Nazis 
;it  Beaugcncy.  The  story  includes  an  account  of 
the  occupation  after  cessation  of  fighting,  and  of 
the  work  of  the  engineer,  medical,  and  other  service 
forces.  Illustrations  by  Laszlo  Bod,  Budapest. 

U.    S.    Strategic    bombing    survey.  Japan's 
truggle  to  end  the  war.  Chairman's  office. 


A  BULLETIK 

1  July  1946.  [Washington.  1946.]  v,  36  pp. 

*D767.2.U5  1946 

"Biographies  of  Japanese  leaders" :  pp.  23-36. 

—  Over-all  report  (European  war).  [Wash- 
ington.] 1945.  x,  109  pp.  *D790.A523 

Van  Valkenburg,  Samuel.  European  jigsaw. 
Foreign  Policy  Ass'n.  [1945.]  96  pp.  Illus. 

Atlas  of  boundary  problems.       *757I-96  No.  53 

White,  Theodore  H.,  and  Annalee  Jacoby. 
Thunder  out  of  China.  New  York,  W. 
Sloane  Associates.  [1946.]  xvi,  331pp. 

DS777-53-W43 

Two  correspondents,  members  of  the  Chungking 
bureau  of  Time,  give  an  inside  account  of  China 
at  war  and  the  internal  tensions  in  China.  The 
narrative  includes  such  chapters  as  "Chiang  K'ai- 
shek  —  The  People's  Choice?"  "The  Stillwell 
Crisis,"  "The  Chinese  Communists,"  "Patrick  J. 
Hurley,"  etc. 

Literature 

Anthologies 

Lee,  Charles,  editor.  The  twin  bedside  an- 
thology. Howell,  Soskin.  [1946.]  2  v. 

PN6014.L425 

Contents.  —  V.  1.  Her  reader.  —  V.  2.  His  reader. 
Partisan  review.  The  Partisan  reader:  ten 
years  of  Partisan  review.  1934-1944:  an 
anthology,  edited  by  William  Phillips  and 
Philip  Rahv.  Introduction  by  Lionel  Tril- 
ling. Dial  Press.  1946.  xvi,  688  pp. 

PN6014.P25 

Sanderson,  Ivan  T.,  editor.  Animal  tales;  an 
anthology  of  animal  literature  of  all 
countries.  Knopf.  1946.  xviii,  510,  xiv  pp. 
Illus.  QL791.S37 

Targ,  William,  editor.  The  American  West,  a 
treasury  of  stories,  legends,  narratives,  songs 
and  ballads  of  Western  America,  edited 
with  an  introduction.  World  Pub.  Co. 
[1946.]  xii,  595  PP.  IUus.  PS561.T3 
Among  the  authors  of  the  stories  are  Mark  Twain, 
Bret  Hartc,  Jack  London,  Stephen  Crane,  Oliver 
La  Farge.  Will  James,  Irving  Cobb,  Zane  Grey, 
and  others. 

Drama.  Broadcasting 

Cott,  Ted.  How  to  audition  for  radio;  a  hand- 
book for  actors,  a  workbook  for  students. 
Greenberg.   [1946.]  xiii,  142  pp.  Illus. 

PN4193.R3C6 

Holberg,  Ludvig,  Baron,  1684-1751.  Four 
plays  by  Holberg:  The  fussy  man,  The 
masked  ladies,  The  weathercock,  Mas- 
querades. Translated  from  the  Danish  by 
Henry  Alexander.  Princeton  Univ.  for 
the  American-Scandinavian  Foundation. 
1946.  x,  202  pp.  PT8083.E5A4 

History  of  Literature 

Allen,  W.  Gore.  Renaissance  in  the  north. 
London.  Sheed  &  Ward.  1946.  viii,  9-143 
pp.  PT7067.A4 

The  renaissance  in  the  north  is  the  reaction  against 
the  spirit  of  the  "liberal  epoch"  as  represented  by 
Ibsen,  Bjornson,  and  Strindberg.  Written  from  the 
Catholic  point  of  view,  the  essays  discuss  Sigrid 
Undset,  Soren  Kierkegaard,  Selma  Lagerlof,  J.  P. 
Jacobsen,  Veraer  von  Heidenstam,  Kuut  Hamsun, 
and  the  music  of  Grieg  and  Sibelius. 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


Daele,  Rose  Marie.  Nicolas  de  Montreux 
(Ollenix  du  Mont-Sacre)  arbiter  of 
European  literary  vogues  of  the  late  re- 
naissance. New  York,  Moretus  Press. 
[1946.]  [131-362  pp.  Illus.  *PQi647-MsZ6 
Bibliography:  pp.  [283] -334. 

Dufrenoy,  Marie  Louise.  L'Orient  romanes- 
<|tie  en  France,  1704-1789.  fitude  d'histoire 
et  de  critique  litteraires.  Montreal, 
Editions  Beauchemin.  1946.  [9l~38opp. 

PQ648.D8 

Poetry 

Sackville-West,  Hon.  Victoria  Mary.  The  gar- 
den. Doubleday.  1946.  I39PP- 

PR6037.A35G3  1946 

Poems  of  the  seasms.  First  appeared  in  England. 

Sullivan,  Aloysius  Michael.  Stars  and  atoms 
have  no  size;  poems  of  science  and  in- 
dustry. Button.  1946.  159  pp. 

PS3537-U46S8 

Taggard,    Genevieve.    Slow   music.  Harper. 

1946.  x,  62  pp.  PS3539.A23S5 
Williamson,  W.  M.,  editor.  The  eternal  sea, 

an  anthology  of  sea  poetry  .  .  .  drawings 

by  Gordon  Grant.  Coward-McCann.  1946. 

x,  565  pp.  Illus.  PN6110.S4W6 

Tales 

Hsiao,  Ch'ien.  The  spinners  of  silk.  Allen  & 
Unwin.   [1946.]    102  pp. 

PL3COO.H68S7  1946 

Tales  of  modern  China,  translated  by  the  author 
himself. 

O'Flaherty,  Liam.  Land.  Random  House. 
[1946.]  356  pp.  PR6029.F5L3 

A  historical  novel  about  the  revolt  of  the  Irish 
peasants  against  British  landowners  in  the  time  of 
Parnell. 

Pushkin,  Aleksandr  S.,  1799-1S37.  Three  tales: 
The  snowstorm.  The  postmaster,  The 
undertaker  .  .  .  translated  by  R.  T.  Cur- 
rall.  Russian  text  accented  by  A.  Seme- 
onoff.  New  York,  Trans-atlantic  Arts. 
1945.  4-56  pp.  PG3340.C8  1945 

Russian  and  English  on  opposite  pages,  numbered 
in  duplicate. 

Language 

Brown,  Charles  Barrett,  and  others,  editors.  A 
graded  word  book  of  Brazilian  Portuguese, 
compiled  and  edited  by  Charles  B. 
Brown  .  .  .  Wesley  M.  Carr  .  .  .  [and] 
Milton  L.  Shane  .  .  .  Issued  by  the  Com- 
mittee on  modern  languages  of  the  Ameri- 
can council  on  education.  Crofts.  1945. 
i<.  252  pp.  *PC5348.B"7 

Doyle,  Henry  Grattan,  editor.  A  handbook  on 
the  teaching  of  Spanish  and  Portuguese, 
with  special  reference  to  Latin  America. 
Prepared  under  the  auspices  of  the  A- 
merican  association  of  teachers  of  Spanish 
and  Portuguese  and  the  Office  of  inter- 
American  affairs.  Heath.  [1945.]  395  pp. 

PC4065.D6 

Semeonoff,  Anna  H.  A  new  Russian  gram- 
mar in  two  parts.  4th  revised  edition.  Dut- 


37 

ton.  [1945  ]  xvii,  323  PP-  PG2111.S45  1945 

Contents.  —  Pt.  I.  Lessons  on  rules  of  grammar 
and  syntax,  with  exercises.  —  Pt.  II.  A  system- 
atic treatment  of  grammar.  Russian  and  English 
vocabularies. 

Local  History 

Hill,  William  Carroll.  A  century  of  genea- 
logical progress;  being  a  history  of  the 
New  England  historic  genealogical  so- 
ciety, 1845-1945.  Boston,  New  England 
Historic  Genealogical  Soc.  1945.  7-99  pp. 
Plates.  F1.N47 

Mitchell,  Edwin  Valentine.  It's  an  old  New 
England  custom.  Vanguard.  [1946.]  277  pp. 
Illus.  F5.M66 
Contents.  —  To  have  Pie  for  Breakfast.  —  To 
serve  Turkey  and  Cranberry  Sauce.  —  To  eat 
Cheese.  —  To  be  fond  of  Fish.  —  To  indulge  in 
Bundling.  —  To  talk  about  the  Weather.  —  To 
beat  the  Drum.  —  To  reach  a  ripe  Old  Age.  — 
To  excel  in  Epitaphs.  —  To  thirst  after  strange 
Gods.  —  To  have  haunted  Houses.  —  To  behold 
Phantom  Ships.  —  To  adopt  peculiar  Place  Names. 

—  To  hark  back  to  the  Past. 

Roberts,  W.  Adolphe.  Lake  Pontchartrain. 
[Bobbs-Merrill.  1946.]  376pp.  Plates. 

F377.P6R6 

This  volume  of  the  American  Lakes  series  tells  the 
rich  and  varied  history  of  the  region  of  Lake 
Pontchartrain  in  Louisiana  from  its  discovery  by 
Iberville  in  1699  to  the  performances  of  Huey  P. 
Long. 

Medicine.  Psychiatry 

Phalen,  James  Matthew.  The  blood  plasma 
program  .  .  .  Issued  by  the  Office  of  medi- 
cal information.  Washington.  1944.  67  pp. 
Reproduced  from  typewritten  copy.  *RMl7I.P5 

Richards,  Thomas  William.  Modern  clinical 
psychology.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xi,  331 
pp.  Illus.  RC602.R54 

Bibliography:  pp.  309-316.  "List  of  visual  aids": 
PP.  317-321- 

Music 

Literature 

Blesh,  Rudi.  Shining  trumpets;  a  history  of 
jazz.  Knopf.  1946.  xvi,  365,  xvii  pp.  Plates. 

ML3561.J3B47 

Cerminara,  Gina.  Italian  for  students  of  sing- 
ing. Milwaukee,  Wis.,  Cerminara.  [1940.] 
94  PP-  ,  MT883.C37  I  8 

Chase,  Gilbert,  editor.  Music  in  radio  broad- 
casting. McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xi,  152  pp. 

ML68.C5 

"Based  on  the  course  Music  for-  radio  given  by 
Columbia  university  extension  in  cooperation  with 
the  National  broadcasting  company."  —  Preface. 
Contents.  - —  Music  in  radio,  by  Samuel  Chotzinoff. 

—  Building  the  musical  program,  by  Ernest  La 
Prade.  —  Production  of  musical  programs,  by  E. 
L.  Dunham.  —  Composing  for  radio,  by  Morris 
Mamorsky.  —  Conducting  for  radio,  by  F.  J. 
Black.  —  Arranging  music  for  radio,  by  Tom 
Bennett.  • —  Musical  continuity  for  radio,  by  David 
Hall.  —  Music  rights  in  radio,  by  T.  H.  Be'.viso. 

—  Musicology  and  radio,  by  Gilbert  Chase.  — 
Opera  in  television,  by  Herbert  Graf. 

Handschin,  Jacques.  Das  Zeremonienwerk 
Kaiser  Konstantins  und  die  sangbare 
Dichtung.  Basel.  1942.  mpp. 

ML188.H35Z4 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


38 

Jewish  welfare  board.  A  manual  of  program 
suggestions  for  Jewish  music  week  .  .  . 
sponsored  by  National  Jewish  welfare 
board.  New  York.  [1945-46.]  *ML2oo-5j5 

Rich,  Arthur  Lowndes.  Lowell  Mason,  "the 
father  of  singing  among  the  children." 
Univ.  of  North  Carolina.  1946.  vii,  224  pp. 
Illus.  Music.  ML410.M398R5 

Salazar,  Adolfo.  Music  in  our  time;  trends  in 
music  since  the  romantic  era.  Translated 
from  the  Spanish  by  Isabel  Pope.  Nor- 
ton. [1946J  307  PP.  ML197.S17 

Bibliography:  pp.  [.1431-349- 

Skolsky,  Syd.  The  music  box  book  .  .  .  illus- 
trated by  Roberta  Paflin.  Button.  1946. 
79  pp.  Illus.  ML3930.A2S5 

Stories  of  musical  composition  for  children. 
Contents.  —  Scheherazade,  by  Rimsky-Korsakoff. 
—  The  bartered  bride,  by  Smetana.  —  The  nut- 
cracker suite,  by  Tschaikovsky.  —  The  sorcerers 
apprentice,  by  Dukas.  —  A  midsummer  night'* 
dream,  by  Mendelssohn.  —  Till  Eulenspiegel-'- 
merry  pranks,  by  R.  Strauss. 

Scores 

Creston,  Paul.  Prelude  and  dance  no.  2  (opus 
29)  for  piano  solo.  Providence,  R.  I.,  Axel- 
rod  Publications.  [1942.]  8  pp.  8052.1742.7 

Deseret  Sunday  school  union,  Salt  Lake  City. 
Deseret  Sunday  school  songs.  For  the 
use  of  Sunday  schools  and  suitable  for 
primary'  associations,  religion  classes, 
quorum  meetings,  social  gatherings  and 
the  home.  Independence,  M.,  Zion's 
Print.  &  Pub  Co.  1909.  [320]  pp. 

M2129.D4 

Foster,  Stephen  Collins,  1826-1864.  A  treasury 
of  Stephen  Foster;  foreword  by  Deems 
Taylor,  historical  notes  by  John  Tasker 
Howard,  arrangements  by  Ray  Lev  and 
Dorothy  Berliner  Commins,  illustrated  by 
William  Sharp.  Random  House.  [1946.] 
222  pp.  M1620.F753H65 
With  piano  accompaniment. 

Parrish,  Carl.  A  Celtic  legend  .  .  .  for  piano. 
Fischer.  [1944-1  3  PP-  M25.P37C4 

Strauss,  Johann,  1825-1809.  Memories  of 
Johann  Strauss,  famous  waltzes  .  .  .  for 
piano  solo.  Marks  Music  Corp.  [1932?]  2 
v.  in  1.  M32.S8M3 
The  titles  are  in  German.  French  and  English. 


Philosophy.  Ethics 

Flewelling,  Ralph  Tyler.  The  things  that 
matter  most,  an  approach  to  the  problems 
of  human  values.  Ronald  Press.  [1946.] 
ix,  530  pp.  BD232.F57 
"The  treatment  of  moral  problems  as  set  forth  in 
the  world's  great  literature,"  as  a  text  for  college 
students. 

Wieman,  Henry  N.  The  source  of  human 
good.  Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1946.]  vii.  311  pp. 

BD232.W52 

The  author  is  Professor  of  Christian  Theology  a; 
the  University  of  Chicago. 

Contents.  —  Part  I.  General  Nature  of  Value.  The 
Way  Go-id  increases.  The  Human  Predicament. 
Creative  Good.  Good  and  Kvil.  Kinds  of  Evil.  — 
Part  IT.  Specific  Kinds  of  Value.  Beauty.  Truth. 
Knowledge.  Morals.  Religion.  —  Technical  Post- 
script. 


Politics  and  Government 

Other  Nations 

Barker,  Sir  Ernest.  Essays  on  government. 
Oxford.  Clarendon.  1945.  vii,  269  pp. 

JC258.B3 

Essays  on  British  and  French  governments,  in- 
cluding chapters  on  Blackstone  and  Burke. 

Brecht,  Arnold.  Federalism  and  regionalism 
in  Germany;  the  division  of  Prussia.  Ox- 
ford Univ.  1945.  xvi,  202  pp.  JN3955.B7 

Belongs  to  the  Monograph  series  of  the  Institute  of 
World  Affairs. 

The  work  "issues  from  a  Research  Project  on 
Germany's  Position  in  European  Postwar  Re- 
construction. .  .  The  present  study  embodies  find- 
ings of  the  Constitutional  and  Administrative 
Section  of  the  Project,  of  which  Dr.  Brecht  was  the 
directing  principal  for  two  years."  —  Preface  by 
Adolph  Lowe,  Executive  Director  of  Research. 

P'an,  Wei-tung.  The  Chinese  Constitution; 
a  study  of  forty  years  of  constitution-mak- 
ing in  China.  Washington,  Institute  of 
Chinese  Culture.  1945.  xi,  327  pp. 

Bibliography:  pp.  314-322-     JQ15O2.P3  1945 

Saenz,  Vicente.  Paralelismo  de  la  paz  y  de  la 
democracia.  Mexico.  1946.  63  pp.  F1438.S2 

United  States 

Chamberlain,  Lawrence  H.  The  President, 
Congress  and  legislation.  Columbia  Univ. 
1946.  478  pp.  *3563.no  No.  523 

Bibliography:  pp.  465-473. 

Christensen,  A.  N.,  and  E.  M.  Kirkpatrick, 
editors.  Running  the  country;  an  an- 
thology of  American  politics  in  action. 
Holt.  [1946.]  x,  1001  pp.  JKn  1946. C5 
"Bibliographical  notes":  pp.  987-1001. 

Smith,  Harold  Dewey.  The  management  of 
your  government.  MacGraw-Hill.  [1945.] 
xiii,  179  PP-  9353-A39 

[Socialist  labor  party.]  What  is  socialism? 
Answering  questions  most  frequently 
asked.  New  York  Labor  News  Co.  1943. 
48  pp.  HX86.S646  1943 

World  Politics.  United  Nations 
Goodrich,  Leland  M.,  and  Edvard  Hambro. 

Charter  of  the  United  nations;  commentary 

and    documents.    Boston,    World  Peace 

Foundation.  1946.  400  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.JX1977.G65 
Welles,   Sumner.   Where  are  we  heading? 

Harper.  [1946.]  397  pp.  Illus.  D825.W367 

Psychical  Research 

Carrington,  Hereward.  The  invisible  world. 
New  York,  Beechhurst  Press,  B.  Acker- 
man.  [1946.1   190  pp.  BF.1031.C32 

Frederick,  James  M.  H.,  1863-IQ42,  and  Olga 
Tildes.  The  silver  cord,  or,  Life  here  and 
hereafter.  Boston,  Christopher  Pub.  House. 
[1946.]   xiv.   17-602  pp.  Plates.  XZ46.9-6 

Religion.  Theology 

Arpee,  Leon.  A  history  of  Armenian  Chris- 
tianity from  the  beginning  to  our  time. 
New  York,  Armenian  Missionary  Ass'n 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


39 


of  America.  1946.  xii,  386  pp.  BR1100.A7 
This  history  from  antiquity  to  the  present  is  written 
from  the  Prote;.tant  point  of  view.  Armenia  was  the 
first  country  to  make  Christianity  its  established 
faith  (in  302). 

Brooks,  Reginald  Thomas.  The  economic 
consequences  of  the  church.  London,  In- 
dependent Press.  [I944-]  80  pp 

BR115.E3B67 

De  Mille,  George  E.  A  history  of  the  diocese 
of  Albany,  1704-1923  .  .  .  with  foreword 
by  the  Bishop  of  Albany  .  .  .  Philadelphia, 
Church  Historical  Soc.  [  1946.1  151  PP- 

BX5918.A3D4 

The  history  of  a  diocese  of  the  Protestant  Episcopal 
Church  in  America. 

Hathaway,  Zoe.  Intuition.  Non  fiction.  La- 
guna  Beach,  Calif.  1946.  145  pp.  XZ46.9-4 
A  mystical  speculation.  The  author  considers  her- 
self directly  and  divinely  inspired. 

Kissane,  Edward  J.  The  book  of  Job;  trans- 
lated from  a  critically  revised  Hebrew 
text  with  commentary.  Sheed  &  Ward. 
1946.  briv,  298  pp.         BS1415.K45  1946 

Lunn,  Arnold.  The  third  day.  Westminster, 
Md..  Newman  Book  Shop.  1945.  xlii,  177 
pp.  BT1101.L9  1945 

A  defense  of  the  miracles  recorded  in  the  Gosp-ls 
and  of  the  traditional  authorship  of  the  Gospel 
books. 

McDermott,  Thomas.  Keeper  of  the  keys,  a 
life  of  Pope  Pius  XII.  Bruce.  [1946.]  x, 
267  pp.  Plates.  BX1378.M3 

Science 

Mathematics.  Geology 

Forrester,  James  Donald.  Principles  of  field 
and  mining  geology.  Wilev.  [  1946.]  viii, 
647  pp.  Plates.^  QE45.F6 

Harvard  university,  Computation  laboratory. 
A  manual  of  operation  for  the  automatic 
sequence  controlled  calculator,  by  the 
staff  of  the  Computation  laboratory,  with 
a  foreword  by  James  Bryant  Conant. 
Harvard.  1946.  561  pp.  Plates.  QA75.H3 
The  Annals  of  the  Computation  Laboratory  of 
Harvard  University,  vol.  1. 

Physics.  Chemistry 

Burk,  R.  E.,  and  Oliver  Grummitt,  editors. 
Advances  in  nuclear  chemistry  and  theo- 
retical organic  chemistry.  New  York.  In- 
terscience  Publishers.  1045.  165  pp.  Illus. 

8290.49 

Sproull,  Wayne  T.  X-rays  in  practice. 
McGraw-Hill.  1946.  vii,  615  pp.  8239.28 

Still,  Alfred.  Soul  of  lodestone;  the  back- 
ground of  magnetical  science.  Murray 
Hill  Books.  [1946.]  x,  233  pp.  8257.10 
A  companion  volume  to  Soul  of  Amber. 

Zoology.  Botany 

Colbert,  Edwin  Harris.  The  dinosaur  book; 
the  ruling  reptiles  and  their  relatives  .  .  . 
illustrated  by  John  C.  Germann  .  .  .  with 
additional  illustrations,  previously  pub- 
lished, by  Charles  R.  Knight  and  others 
.  .  .  New  York,  American  Museum  of 
Natural  History.  1945.  156  pp.  QE861.C75 


Johnsonia  ...  v.  1-  Oct.  25/1941-Nov.  23, 
1945.  Cambridge,  Mass.,  Botanical  Mu- 
seum of  Harvard  Univ.  [1945-  1  v.  Illus.. 

*QL403J65 

Published  by  the  Department  of  mollusks.  Museum 
of  comparative  zoology,  Harvard  university. 

Lucas,  Jannette  May.  Indian  harvest;  wild 
food  plants  of  America  .  .  .  illustrated  by 
Helene  Carter.  Lippincott.  f  1 04^-1  118  pp. 

QK98.5.L8 

The  Indians'  use  as  food  of  various  American  wild 
plants. 

Sociology 

Labor.  Employment 

Cooper,  Alfred  M.  How  to  supervise  people. 
2d  edition.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  ix,  162  pp. 

9331.113A103 

Hass,  Eric.  Socialist  industrial  unionism,  the 
workers'  power.  New  York  Labor  News 
Co.  1943.  62  pp.  Illus.     HX89.H34  1943 

On  cover:  Socialist  labor  party. 

Polanyi,  Michael.  Full  employment  and  free 
trade.  Cambridge  Univ.  1945.  x,  155  pp. 
Illus.  9330.1A531 

Smyth,  Richard  C,  and  Matthew  J.  Murphy. 
Job  evaluation  and  employee  rating. 
McGraw-Hill.  1946.  255  pp.  933i-H3Aioi 

Ward,  Roswell  Howell.  The  personnel  pro- 
gram of  Jack  &  Heinrz.  Harper.  [1946.]  x, 
146  pp.  Plates.  g33i.ii3A99 


Population.  Minorities 

Ch'en,  Ta.  Population  in  modern  China. 
Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1946.]  ix,  126  pp. 

9312.951A2 

Hubback,  Eva  M.  Population  facts  and  poli- 
cies. London,  Pub.  for  British  Social  Hy- 
giene Council  by  Allen  &  Unwin.  [  1945-1 
47  pp.  g3i2.g42A2 

Tuck,  Ruth  D.  Not  with  the  fist,  Mexican- 
Americans  in  a  southwest  city.  Harcourt, 
Brace.  [1946.]  xx,  234  pp.  F370.M5T8 
A  study  of  a  typical  Southwestern  town  with  its 
Mexican-American  settlement  or  colonia.  The 
author's  aim  was  to  give  information  on  the  subject 
of  "minority  and  race  relations,  by  showing  th';m 
in  operation  in  a  city  small  enough  to  constitute  a 
test-tube  where  forces  are  easily  discernible." — 
Introduction. 

Miscellaneous 
Cornwall,  Anna  Lloyd.  A  century  of  service: 
Massachusetts    society    for    aiding  dis- 
charged prisoners,   1846-1946.    [Boston. 1 
Published  by  the  Socictv.  [1946.]  61  pp. 

HV9303.M4C5 
Boston  society  for  aiding  discharged  convicts  be- 
came a  corporate  body,  March  4,  1867,  under  the 
name  of  The  Massachusetts  society  for  aiding  dis- 
charged convicts,  and  in  1945,  was  cal'ed  The 
Massachusetts  society  for  aiding  discharged  prison- 
ers. 

Gesell,  Arnold,  and  others.  The  child  from 
five  to  ten,  by  Arnold  Gesell  .  .  .  [and] 
Frances  L.  Ilg  ...  in  collaboration  with 
Louise  Bates  Ames  .  .  .  [and]  Glenna  E. 
Bullis.  Harper.  1946.  xii,  475  pp.  Illus. 

HQ772.G38 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


40 

LaPiere,  Richard  Tracy.  Sociology.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1946.  xiv,  572  pp.  HM66.L33 

"Supplementary  bibliographies":  pp.  541. SS2- 


Technology 

American  steel  and  wire  company.  Manual  of 
aircraft  materials,  cold-rolled  strip,  wire 
and  wire  products.  American  Steel  & 
Wire  Co.  United  States  Steel.  [I945-]  9- 
j6i  pp.  Illus.  4030B.220 

American  television  directory,  The.  1946- 
ist-  annual  edition.  New  York,  American 
Television  Soc.  1946-  Illus.  8010B.71 

Boston,  Orlan  William.  A  bibliography  on 
cutting  of  metals.  1864-1943.  New  York, 
American  Soc.  of  Mechanical  Engineers. 
1945.  xi,  547  pp.  *403gB.35 
Includes  the  material  contained  in  the  author's 
previous  work  published,  iQ3°-35,  under  the  same 
title  and  3500  additional  references.  Companion 
volume  to  the  revised  Manual  "n  cutting  of  metals, 
prepared  by  A.  S.  If.  E.  Committee  on  metal  cut' 
ting.   ef.  Foreword?. 

D'Alelio,  G.  F.  Experimental  plastics  and 
synthetic  resins.  Wiley.  [1946.]  ix,  185  pp. 
Illus.  8031D.54. 

"Extends  the  purpose  of  [the  author's]  A  labora- 
tory manual  of  plastics  and  synthetic  resins,  pub 
lished  in  1943."  —  Preface. 

Everybody's  photo  course;  20  simple  lessons 

in  picture  making.  New  enlarged  edition. 

[New  York,  U.  S.  Camera  Pub.  Corp. 

1945.]  112  pp.  Illus.  8029A.451 
Uren,  Lester  Charles.  Petroleum  production 

engineering.    3rd    edition.  McGraw-Hill. 


1946-  Illus.  8033B.24S 
First  edition  has  title:  A  textbook  of  petroleum 
production  engineering. 

Contents.  —  [v.  ij  Oil  field  development. 

Travel  and  Description 

Botero  Gonzalez,  Alejandro.  De  las  pira- 
mides  a  los  Alpes:  Paris,  Egipto,  Palestina, 
Siria,  Turquia,  Grecia,  Italia.  Manizales, 
Columbia.  [1946.]  x,  [n]-274pp.  D921.G58 

Bullot,  Ivan.  Air  travel  guide  to  Latin  Ameri- 
ca, including  the  U.  S.  A.  territories  of  the 
Canal  Zone,  Puerto  Rico  and  the  Virgin 
Islands;  Bermuda;  and  British,  French 
and  Netherlands  possessions  in  the  West 
Indies  and  the  Guianas.  New  York,  Watts. 
[1946.]  xi,  369  pp.  Illus.  F1409.B8 
"A  new  kind  of  travel  directory  adapted  to  the 
needs  of  air  travelers  and  giving  quick-reference 
practical  information  on  the  numerous  places  served 
by  air  lines  in  Middle  America  and  South  America." 

Clark,  Sydney  Aylmer.  All  the  best  in  Cuba. 
With  illustrations  and  maps.  Dodd,  Mead. 
1946.  x,  235  pp.  Plates.  F1765.C56 
An  up-to-date  travel  guide.  Includes  a  survey  of 
Cuban  history,  and  a  chapter  "The  Gourmet  at 
large." 

Martin,  Fredericka  L  The  hunting  of  the 
silver  fleece,  epic  of  the  fur  seal.  Green- 
berg,  xxiii,  328  pp.  Plates.  SH363.M3 

Snow,  Edward  Rowe.  A  pilgrim  returns  to 
Cape  Cod.  Boston,  Yankee  Pub.  Co.  1946. 
413  pp.  Plates.  F72.C3S76 

Vasse,  Lionel.  Pay  sage  azteque.  15  dessins 
de  1'auteur.  Brentano.  [1946.]  /-176  pp. 

F1227.V3 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
Volume  XXII,  Number  2 


Contents 

Page 


"THE  JEWES  PROPHESY"  AND  CALEB  SHILOCK  {with  facsimile)  43 
By  Lee  M.  Friedman 

LETTERS  BY  THOMAS  WENTWORTH  HIGGINSON  56 
By  Margaret  Munsterberg 

ARMS  FOR  VIRGINIA :  JOEL  BARLOW  TO  MONROE  57 

By  Theresa  Coolidge 

HIRAM  C.  MERRILL  AND  HIS  CONTEMPORARIES  59 

By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

GRAPHIC  ARTS  PROCESSES:  ETCHING  61 

By  Muriel  C.  Figenbaum 

THE  BOOK  OF  BATTLES  64 

TEN  BOOKS:  SHORT  REVIEWS 

Rexford  G.  Tugwell :  The  Stricken  Land  65 

Edmund  Blunden  :  Shelley  65 

Carola  Oman :  Nelson  66 

Wallace  Notestein :  The  Scot  in  History  66 

Alanson  H.  Edg-erton :  Readjustment  or  Revolution?  66 

Oliver  Wendell  Holmes :  Touched  with  Fire  67 

Howard  Haycraft,  editor:  The  Art  of  the  Mystery  Story  67 
Katharine  Butler  Hathaway:  Journals  and  Letters  of  the  Little  Locksmith  67 

Barrows  Mussey :  Old  New  England  68 

Hugo  Leichtentritt :  Serge  Koussevitzky  68 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

The  Petition  of  Four  New  Hampshire  Towns  69 

The  First  Poems  of  Robert  Bridges  70 

The  Last  Days  of  Pompeii  70 

American  Jewry  in  the  'Sixties  71 

Brigham  Young  to  a  Prospective  Convert  71 

Lowell  Lectures  72 

Lectures  and  Concerts  72 

LIST  OF  RECENTLY-ACQUIRED  BOOKS  73 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17, 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library  15-17  Blagden  St,  February,  1947,  Vol.  XXII,  No.  2 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees,  for  free  distribution; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
FEBRUARY,  1947 

"A  Jewes  Prophesy"  and  Caleb  Shilock 

By  LEE  M.  FRIEDMAN 

THE  Boston  Public  Library  owns  in  its  Barton  Collection  a  small, 
exceedingly  rare  quarto  of  fifteen  pages  in  black  letter,  published 
in  London  in  1607,  one  of  two  copies  in  America.  The  title  page  reads : 

A 

Iewes  Prophesy, 
OR, 

Newes  from  Rome. 
Of  two  mightie  Armies,  aswell  footemen  as  horsemen :  The 
first  of  the  great  Sophy,  the  other  of  an  Hebrew  people,  till  this  time  not  disco- 
uered,  coming  from  the  Mountaines  of  Caspij,  who  pretended  their  warre  is  to 
recouer  the  Land  of  Promise,  &  expell  the  Turks  out  of  Christendome. 
Translated  out  of  Italian  into  English,  by  W.W.  1607. 

[Woodcut  of  marching  soldiers] 

Printed  by  W.I.  for  Henry  Gosson,  and  are  to  be  sold 
in  Pater  noster  rowe  at  the  signe  of  the  Sunne. 

The  library's  copy  is  not  quite  perfect,  as  it  has  been  cut  down  so 
that  the  words  of  the  title  page  "in  Pater  noster  rowe  at  the  signe  of 
the  Sunne"  have  been  shaved  off.  Barton's  memorandum  notes  that  he 
acquired  it  at  Sotheby's,  the  famous  book  auctioneer  of  London,  June  13, 
1859,  f°r  £5/2/6.  The  other  copy  in  America  is  at  the  Folger  Shakes- 
peare Library  in  Washington.  This  is  the  copy  formerly  owned  by  Wil- 
liam A.  White.  He  bought  it  from  Quaritch,  who  was  the  high  bidder 
paying  £95  for  a  copy  sold  at  the  Britwell  sale  at  Sotheby's  in  June  1919. 

It  has  been  said  that  these  are  second  issues  of  the  book,  and  that  it  had 
appeared  in  the  previous  year,  1606.  This  assumption  was  based  on  the 
British  Museum  copy,  which  was  originally  owned  by  Halliwell.  The 
title  page  bears  no  date.  The  British  Museum  Catalogue  records  it  as 
1606,  and  reads: 

Newes  from  Rome  of  two  mightie  armies  the  first  of  the  great 

Sophy,  the  other  of  an  Hebrew  people  from  the  mountaines  of 

Caspij  (signed  Signior  Valesco)  also  certaine  prophecies  of  a 


43 


44  MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 

Jew  called  Caleb-Shilo(ck).    Translated  out  of  Italian  by 

W.W.  (London  1606). 1 

The  rarity  of  the  book  is  attested  by  Hazlitt,  who,  in  1867,  says  that 
he  knew  of  only  two  copies,  both  mutilated,  and  notes  a  sale  to  Halliwell 
in  1856  for  £io/5/o.2  Israel  Solomons,  late  of  London,  and  widely 
known  as  a  learned  bookman,  says  of  the  British  Museum  copy  that  the 
fore-edge  is  badly  cropped,  and  assumes  that  the  name  "Shilo"  has  been 
cut  down  from  "Shilocke".3 

The  only  other  known  copy  of  this  edition  of  1606  is  in  the  Folger 
Shakespeare  Library  in  Washington.  This  was  acquired  from  Maggs 
of  London  and  is  probably  the  copy  sold  at  auction  by  Sotheby  June  28, 
1906,  for  £14.  It  definitely  establishes  that  it  is  an  earlier  edition,  not 
a  first  issue  of  the  1607  edition.  It  was  printed  by  J.  R[oberts],  while 
the  1607  edition  was  printed  by  W.  J[aggard].  The  Short  Title  Catalogue 
is  in  error  in  stating  that  the  latter  is  a  reissue.  It  is  entirely  reprinted. 
In  Sotheby's  sale  of  the  books  of  John  Stackhouse  Pendarves,  who  had 
inherited  the  great  seventeenth  century  collection  of  Narcissus  Luttrell, 
there  was,  amongst  the  thirty  tracts,  one  described  as  The  Jewes  Prophesy, 
1607.4  This,  therefore,  supplies  a  record  for  a  fifth  copy  of  both  editions 
of  this  item. 

It  is  generally  assumed  that  there  was  no  such  person  as  Signior 
Valesco,  who  claims  to  have  written  from  Rome  under  date  of  June  1, 
1606,  what  W.  W.  is  now  translating.5  No  such  author  is  known,  and 
the  British  Museum  Catalogue  as  well  as  the  Short  Title  Catalogue  records 
the  name  as  a  pseudonym.  Was  an  Italian  origin  claimed  for  this 
"Newes"  to  take  advantage  of  the  contemporary  craze  in  literary  Eng- 
land for  Italian  translations?  Professor  Scott  of  Smith  College  has  called 
attention  to  the  fact  that  "the  Italian  renaissance  was  made  known  to 
the  Elizabethans  by  more  than  two  hundred  and  forty  English  trans- 
lators, including  directly  or  indirectly  every  considerable  writer  of  the 
period."6  They  were  the  producers  of  the  best  sellers  of  the  period. 

This  is  one  of  the  earliest  English  books  dealing  with  supposedly 
contemporary  Jews.  Although  Jews  had  been  banished  from  England 
in  1290  and  the  agitation  for  their  readmission  was  not  openly  started 
until  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century,  for  years  before  this  pub- 
lication Jews  had  been  infiltrating  into  the  country.  Towards  the  end 
of  the  sixteenth  century  there  was  a  well-recognized  Jewish  community 
settled  in  London,  and  Queen  Elizabeth  had  given  countenance  at  least 
to  its  peaceful  sojourn  there  when  she  hired  as  her  personal  physician 
the  famous  "Jew  Doctor"  Roderigo  Lopez,  then  a  member  of  London's 
College  of  Physicians,  and  house  physician  at  St.  Bartholomew's. 

With  the  rise  of  Puritanism,  as  the  historian  Green  writes,  "during 
the  years  which  parted  the  middle  of  the  reign  of  Elizabeth  from  the 
meeting  of  the  Long  Parliament  England  became  the  people  of  a  book, 


"A  JEWES  PROPHESY"  AND  CALEB  SHILOCK 


45 


and  that  book  was  the  Bible.  It  was  as  yet  the  one  English  book  which 
was  familiar  to  every  Englishman;  it  was  read  at  Churches  and  read  at 
home,  and  everywhere  its  words,  as  they  fell  on  ears  which  custom  had 
not  deadened,  kindled  a  startling  enthusiasm."7  And  of  the  Bible,  the 
Old  Testament  was  especially  favored  and  people  began  to  ask  ques- 
tions and  take  interest  in  Jews.  From  1592  onward,  Marlowe's  Jew  of 
Malta  was  so  well  received  that  its  popularity  was  supposed  to  have  in- 
duced Shakespeare's  Merchant  of  Venice  (1597-1598),  which  after  its  suc- 
cessful dramatic  presentation,  appeared  in  print  in  1600.  Modder,  in  his 
The  Jew  in  the  Literature  of  England,9  has  pointed  out  that  in  this  period 
before  1607,  at  least  five  plays9  presented  a  Jewish  character  of  such  a 
diabolical  type.  An  ancient  fear  and  suspicion  of  the  Jew  was  ever 
present.  In  1594  such  feeling  took  the  form  of  accusations  against  Dr. 
Lopez  as  the  outstanding  Jew  locally  known  to  the  English,  and,  in 
spite  of  Elizabeth's  friendship,  led  to  his  conviction  and  execution  at 
Tyburn  as  a  Spanish  spy  plotting  to  kill  the  Queen.  It  has  been  sug- 
gested that  Shakespeare's  Shylock  was  avowedly  meant  as  a  caricature 
of  Lopez.10 

A  J  ewes  Prophesy,  as  its  supposed  dedication  by  Signior  Valesco  to 
the  "Renowned  Lord,  Don  Mathias  de  Reusie  of  Venice"11  indicates, 
attempts  to  demonstrate  "the  threatnings  made  to  Christians"  by  an  up- 
rising of  armed  forces  invading  eastern  Europe.  It  tells  of  the  back- 
ground of  the  Jewish  divisions  of  this  army: 

They  say  Alexander  the  Great  did  in  times  past  driue  beyond  the  moun- 
taine  Caspe  nine  tribes  and  a  halfe  of  the  Haebrewes  which  worshipped 
the  Calfe  &  Serpent  of  gold  and  draue  them  away,  that  neuer  since  there 
was  no  newes  of  them,  neither  knew  any  man  if  they  were  in  the  worlde 
or  not .  .  .  But  now  by  the  meane  of  the  new  Navigation  that  ye  Hollanders 
haue  made,  they  are  arriued  in  their  country,  and  haue  espied  out  all  their 
dooings  .  .  . 

Theyr  language  is  bastard  Hebrew  .  .  .  The  Hebrewes  of  Constantinople 
say,  that  they  haue  certaine  prophesies,  among  the  which  one  maketh 
mention,  that  from  the  foure  parts  of  the  world,  shall  rise  a  people,  and 
come  into  Gog  and  Magog,  and  then  shall  appeare  (as  they  perswade 
themselues)  their  Messias  in  might  and  power,  and  then  they  shall  haue 
dominion  and  rule  in  the  world,  whereof  they  secretly  reioyce,  and  are 
wonderous  glad. 

Then  the  book  presents : 

The  Description  of  the  First  Annie,  conducted  by  Zoroam 
a  lew,  Captaine  generall 
of  the  Armies. 

First  of  all  a  Jew  of  verie  great  stature,  of  a  fleshlie  colour,  more  red 
then  otherwise,  with  broad  eyes,  called  Zoroam,  is  Captaine  generall  of 
all  the  Armies,  hee  leadeth  under  his  Ensigne  twelue  thousand  horse, 
and  twenty  thousand  footmen.  The  horse-men  are  armed  after  a  light 
sort,  but  very  good  Harnes,  almost  after  our  fashion :  they  carrie  Launces 


46 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


of  longe  Reedes,  very  hard  and  light,  yet  so  sharpe  pointed,  that  they 
pass  thorowe  a  thing  with  incredible  lightnesse :  they  carry  also  shields 
or  targets  of  bone,  and  in  steede  of  swords,  they  use  certaine  Courtilaxes. 

They  are  apparrelled  with  the  colour  of  their  Ensigne,  and  all  clothed 
with  silke :  the  toote-men  carrie  Pikes  of  the  same  sort,  with  Helmet  and 
Habergin:  their  Ensigne  is  of  blacke  silke  and  blewe,  with  a  Dog  following 
a  Hart,  or  Bucke.  and  a  saying  written  in  it,  which  is  in  our  language 
thus:  Either  quick  or  dead." 

The  interesting  title  page  by  the  same  artist  who  made  the  cuts 
for  several  of  Thomas  Heywood's  "Four  Ages"  deserves  more  than 
passing  attention.  The  striking  figure  of  the  Captain,  97  x  37  mm.,  cut 
off  from  the  rest  and  cracked  below  the  hilt  of  his  sword,  Mr.  F.  S.  Fer- 
guson of  London  has  identified  as  reproduced  in  later  ballad  broadsides 
as  follows: 

A  new  ballad  of  the  Souldier  and  Peggy.  F°.  London,  for  F.  Coules,  dwell- 
ing in  the  Old-Baily,  [1640?]! 

The  Lamentable  and  Tragical  History  of  Titus  Andronicus  .  .  .  S.  sh.  f°. 
(London,)  for  F.  Coles,  T.  Vere,  J.  Wright  &  J.  Clarke,  [1660?].  A 
later  edition  (1690?)  has  not  this  cut,  but  has  another  also  found  in 
the  preceding,  so  presumably  it  had  been  destroyed  or  discarded.13 

As  a  sort  of  supplement  to  embellish  the  narrative,  there  are  added 
ten  direful  prophecies  which  a  Jew,  "Caleb  Shilock,"  had  "foretold"  for 
the  then  current  year  1607,  to  frighten  all  good  Christians  into  amend- 
ing their  evil  ways. 

To  Caleb  Shillocks  Prophesies, 

Who  list  to  lend  an  eare, 
Of  griefe,  and  great  calamities, 
A  sad  Discourse  shall  heare : 

Of  Plagues  (for  sinne)  shall  soone  ensew 
Prognosticated  by  this  Jew : 
O  Lord,  Lord  in  thy  mercy, 
Hold  thy  heauy  hand.13 

Although  it  sounds  fantastic,  and  no  earlier  edition  than  that  of 
1607  or  l6o6  here  described  has  been  discovered,  there  have  been 
scholars  who  have  suggested  that  there  had  been  some  earlier  publica- 
tion of  Caleb  Shilock's  prophesy  and  that  Shakespeare  had  borrowed 
the  name  Shylock  from  it  for  his  Merchant  of  Venice. 

In  his  edition  of  Shakespeare14  Halliwell  noted  that  the  late  date 
of  this  pamphlet  would  render  the  similarity  of  names  of  no  importance 
"were  there  not  evidence  that  it  was  a  reprint  of  an  older  production, 
the  year  of  the  prophecy  being  altered  to  create  an  interest  at  the  time 
of  the  republication.  It  is  thus  alluded  to  in  a  tract  entitled  Miracle  upon 
Miracle,  or  a  true  Relation  of  the  Great  Floods  which  happened  in  Cov- 
entry, in  Lynne,  and  other  Places,  410.  Lond.  1607:  'Witness  the  Jewes 
Prophesie,  being  an  idle  vaine  pamphlet,  as  grosse  and  grosser  than  John 


A 

Icvves  Prophe 

OR, 

fr(eti>es  from  Ityne. 

Oftwomightie  Armies,  afwell  footemen  as  hor/men:TKe 

firft  of  the  great  Sophy,  the  other  of  an  Hebrew  people,  till  this  time  not  difto- 
tiered,  comming  from  the  Mountains  of  Cafpij,  who  pretend  their  warre  is  to 
recouer  the  Land  of  Promife,  &  expeil  the  Turks  out  of  Chriftendotne. 
Tranflaicd  out  of  Italian  into  Englifb.bv  W.  W.  1 6  07. 


Title-Page  of  "A  Iewes  Prophesy,"  London  1607,  from  the  Copy  in  the  Boston  Public  Library 

47 


"A  JEWES  PROPHESY"  AND  CALEB  SHILOCK 


49 


of  Calabria,  and  was  printed  many  years  agoe,  and  this  last  yeare  onely 
renewed  with  the  addition  of  1607,  yet  amongst  fooles,  women  and  chil- 
dren, retayned  for  such  an  approved  miracle  that,  as  if  the  gift  of 
prophesie  were  hereditary  to  the  Jewes  and  their  tribes,  there  are  fewe 
things  better  beleeved,  when  as  in  truth  there  was  never  any  such  Jew, 
nor  any  such  prophesie,  but  a  meere  invention.'  " 

In  his  variorum  of  the  Merchant  of  Venice,  the  learned  Shakespearian 
scholar  Furness15  in  discussing  the  origin  of  Shylock's  name,  quoted  the 
Shakespearian  critic  Steevens  as  follows:  "Our  author,  as  Dr.  Farmer 
informs  me,  took  this  name  from  an  old  pamphlet  entitled,  'Caleb  Shil- 
locke  his  prophecie,  or  the  Jewes  Prediction.'  London,  printed  for  T.  P. 
(Thomas  Pavier),  no  date."  Malone  is  then  cited  as  answering,  "If 
Shakespeare  took  the  name  Shylock  from  the  pamphlet  mentioned  by 
Dr.  Farmer,  it  certainly  was  not  printed  by  Thomas  Pavier,  to  whom 
Steevens  has  ascribed  it,  for  that  prototype  of  Curl  had  not  commenced 
a  bookseller  before  1598.  The  pamphlet  in  question,  which  was  not  in 
Dr.  Farmer's  collection  (nor  do  I  know  where  it  is  to  be  found),  may 
have  been  printed  by  Thomas  Purfoot."  On  this  Boswell  commented : 
"Mr.  Bindley  had  a  copy  of  this  pamphlet,  the  date  of  which  was  1607," 
and  Furness  adds,  "  'Therefore,'  says  Knight,  who  quotes  this  note  of 
Boswell,  'Farmer's  theory  is  worthless.'  " 

Furness  continues  his  interesting  note  with  a  discussion  of  the 
possible  sources  open  to  Shakespeare  for  the  name.  In  the  Battle  Abbey 
Deeds  the  name  Richard  Shylock  is  cited  in  connection  with  Sussex  land 
in  1435.  There  is  the  suggestion  that  in  Genesis  xlix:  10,  occurs  the  phrase 
"until  Shiloh  come,"  which  with  the  uncertainty  of  spelling  of  the  day 
may  have  been  corrupted  to  Shiloach.  Attention  is  also  called  to  Scialac's 
having  been  used  in  some  ancient  records  as  the  name  of  some  Jews.  It  is 
pointed  out  that  in  Pepys's  Collection  of  Ballads16  "is  one  with  the  title 
'Calebbe  Shillocke,  his  prophesie :  or  the  Iewes  Prediction.  To  the  tune 
of  Bragandarie.'  " 

The  second  verse,  however,  is  quoted  as  beginning: 
And  first,  within  this  present  yeere, 
Beeing  Sixteene  hundreth  seau'n : 

The  name  having  no  established  literary  or  Jewish  pedigree,  we  can 
only  conclude  from  the  coincidence  of  its  being  used  both  in  this  rare 
pamphlet  and  in  Shakespeare,  in  the  face  of  known  and  verified  dates 
and  of  the  fact  of  the  recognized  popularity  of  the  Merchant  of  Venice 
before  1607,  that  the  probabilities  are  on  the  side  of  the  claim  that  W.  W. 
borrowed  the  name  from  Shakespeare  for  his  prophet  to  give  it  a  popular 
appeal  when  showing  the  awe-inspiring  Shylock  in  a  new  line  of  business. 
The  Prophecy  proceeds  to  list  the  terrible  portents  and  afflictions  which 
are  to  come: 


50 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Caleb  Shilock  his  prophesie  for  the 
Yeere  1607. 

Be  it  knowne  unto  all  men,  that  in  the  yeare  1607,  when  as  the  Moone 
is  in  the  Watrye  signe,  the  world  is  like  to  bee  in  great  danger:  for  a 
learned  Jew,  named  Caleb  Shilock,  doth  write  that  in  the  foresaid  yeere, 
the  Sun  shall  be  couered  with  the  Dragon  in  the  morning,  from  fiue  of  the 
clocke  untill  nine,  and  will  appeare  like  fire:  therefore  it  is  not  good  that 
any  man  do  behold  the  same,  for  by  beholding  thereof,  hee  may  lose  his 
sight. 

Then  follow  the  nine  other  scourges:  secondly,  a  flood;  thirdly,  a 
great  wind;  fourthly,  about  May  another  flood  "so  great  as  no  man  hath 
seen  since  Noyes  flood,"  for  three  days  and  three  nights,  "whereby  many 
Citties  and  Townes  which  standeth  uppon  Sandie  ground  will  be  in 
great  danger";  fifthly,  infidels  and  heretics  will  gather  together  and 
make  war  upon  Christians;  sixthly,  at  the  end  of  the  year,  "great  and 
fearefull  Sicknesses" ;  seventhly,  great  trouble  and  contention  about  reli- 
gion; eighthly,  the  Turks,  in  danger,  will  seek  help  from  Christians;  ninthly, 
earthquakes;  tenthly,  upheavals  of  the  earth.  The  final  admonition  is: 

These  punishments  are  prognosticated  by  this  lerned  Jew,  to  fall  upon 
the  whole  Worlde  by  reason  of  sinne,  wherefore  it  behoueth  all  Christians 
to  amende  their  euill  Hues,  and  to  pray  earnestly  vnto  God  to  with-hold 
these  calamities  from  vs,  and  to  conuart  our  harts  wholy  to  him,  whereby 
we  may  find  fauour  in  our  time  of  neede,  through  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord. 
Amen.  Finis. 

Perhaps  we  can  only  join  in  as  a  chorus  to  an  old  ballad  of  1689 
which  began : 

Since  the  whole  World  is  so  set  upon  News, 

And  every  Tom  Farthing's  a  statist; 
Catching  at  Stories,  of  Turks  and  of  Jews  .  .  .I7 


"A  JEWES  PROPHESY"  AND  CALEB  SHILOCK 


5* 


NOTES 

1.  British  Museum  Catalogue  of  Printed  Books. 

2.  W.  Carew  Hazlitt,  Hand-Book  to  the  Popular,  Poetical,  and  Dramatic  Liter- 
ature 0}  Great  Britain,  London  1867,  p.  417. 

3.  Notes  and  Queries,  10th  Series,  Vol.  9,  p.  269. 

4.  I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  William  A.  Jackson  of  the  Houghton  Library  for  this 
information. 

5.  Halkett  &  Laing's  Dictionary  of  Anonymous  &  Pseudonymous  Literature  does 
not  list  the  name.  Nor  is  the  book  of  a  character  likely  to  have  originated  at  this  period  in 
Italy.  There  the  sixteenth  century  had  seen  Cardinal  Caraffa,  the  deadly  enemy  of  the 
Jews,  become  Pope  Pius  IV  (1555)  and  decree  drastic  anti-Jewish  regulations  which 
established  ghettos  and  promulgated  medieval  Jewish  restrictions.  The  Inquisition  was 
active.  Jews  were,  by  the  end  of  the  century,  not  considered  in  Italy  of  any  great  potential 
menace.  Cecil  Roth,  The  History  of  the  Jews  in  Italy,  Philadelphia  1946,  pp.  294  et  seq. 

6.  Mary  A.  Scott,  Elizabethan  Translations  from  the  Italian,  Boston  and  New 
York  1916. 

7.  J.  R.  Green,  A  Short  History  of  the  English  People,  London  1904,  Vol.  Ill, 

P-  935- 

8.  Montague  F.  Modder,  The  Jew  in  the  Literature  of  England  to  the  End  of  the 
19th  Century,  Philadelphia  1939,  pp.  2S-29. 

9.  1592,  The  Jew  of  Malta. 

1 597-1 598,  The  Merchant  of  Venice. 

1594,  Tragical!  Raigne  of  Selimus  Emperor  of  the  Turks,  by  Robert  Greene 
and  Thomas  Lodge. 

1601,  Jack  Drums  Entertainment,  by  John  Marston. 

1607,  Three  English  Brothers,  by  John  Day,  George  Wilkins,  and  William 
Rowley.  "In  the  fifty  years,  from  the  creation  of  Shylock  to  the  temporary  suppression  of 
the  theatres  by  the  Puritans  (1642-1656)  .  .  .  there  are  at  least  nine  plays  with  prominent 
Jewish  roles."  Modder,  The  Jew  in  the  Literature  of  England,  p.  28. 

10.  Martin  Hume,  "The  So-Called  Conspiracy  of  Dr.  Ruy  Lopes."  Jewish  Historical 
Society  of  England,  Vol.  VI,  pp.  32-52. 

11.  The  ordinary  accessible  histories  and  encyclopaedias  do  not  give  any  information 
about  any  Reusie  family  of  Venice. 

12.  Letter  to  me,  November  13,  1946. 

13.  The  first  verse  of  a  ballad  discussed  later  —  See  Note  14. 

14.  London  1853,  Vol.  V,  p.  277. 

15.  Horace  H.  Furness,  A  Neiv  Variorum  Edition  of  Shakespeare,  Philadelphia 
1888,  Vol.  VII,  p.  ix. 

16.  A  Pepysian  Garland  (H.  E.  Rollins,  ed.),  Cambridge  1922,  p.  18. 

17.  "The  Gazet  in  Metre,"  The  Pepys  Ballads  (H.  E.  Rollins,  ed.);  Cambridge  1931, 
Vol.  V,  p.  33,  No.  262. 


Letters  by  Thomas  Wentworth  Higginson 


THE  acquisition  of  fifty-five  autograph  letters  by  Colonel  Thomas 
Wentworth  Higginson  is  particularly  welcome  as  the  Boston  Public 
Library  has  many  reasons  to  remember  him  with  gratitude.  In  1896  he 
presented  the  Library  with  a  collection  of  books  relating  to  the  history 
of  women,  consisting  of  more  than  a  thousand  volumes,  which  by  1911, 
the  year  of  his  death,  was  more  than  doubled.  He  also  gave  documents 
about  the  anti-slavery  movement  and  the  Civil  War,  including  John 
Brown's  diary;  a  notable  group  of  letters  by  Margaret  Fuller;  and  about 
one  hundred  and  fifty  letters  and  poems  by  Emily  Dickinson.  The  re- 
cently-acquired letters  are  not  confined  to  the  anti-slavery  issue,  but, 
extending  from  1854  to  1908,  reflect  the  varied  interests  of  Colonel  Hig- 
ginson's  life. 

Higginson  was  born  in  Cambridge  on  December  22,  1823,  the 
youngest  of  the  ten  children  of  Stephen  and  Louisa  Storrow  Higginson. 
Growing  up  in  a  literary  atmosphere,  he  had  already  at  the  age  of  four 
read  "a  good  many  books,"  and  at  thirteen  entered  Harvard  College. 
After  graduation,  he  could  not  decide  on  a  profession.  He  read  widely, 
tried  school-teaching  and  tutoring,  and  finally  settled  down  to  a  course 
at  the  Harvard  Divinity  School.  Even  this  he  interrupted  with  a  year 
of  independent  study.  Having  been  ordained  in  September  1847,  the 
young  pastor,  newly  married,  began  his  career  in  Newburyport.  He 
preached  against  slavery,  but  opposition  obliged  him  to  resign  after  two 
years.  With  his  removal  to  Worcester,  where  he  accepted  the  pastorate 
of  the  Free  Church,  opened  the  most  active  phase  of  his  anti-slavery 
activity.  Into  this  period  falls  the  case  of  the  fugitive  slave  Anthony 
Burns,  which  figures  in  one  of  the  letters  of  the  present  collection,  and 
also  his  travel  to  Kansas,  his  contact  with  John  Brown,  and  the  aid 
which  he  rendered  Brown's  family  after  the  latter's  imprisonment.  When 
the  Civil  War  broke  out,  Higginson  not  only  recruited  but  went  him- 
self into  military  training,  and  was  Captain  of  Company  B  of  the  51st 
Massachusetts  Regiment  when  Brigadier-General  Rufus  Saxton  of  the 
Department  of  the  South  offered  him  the  command  of  a  regiment  of 
freed  slaves.  The  two  years  which  he  spent  as  Colonel  of  the  First  South 
Carolina  Volunteers  were  a  time  of  pride  in  the  success  of  his  work  and 
in  the  courage  of  his  men.  In  May  1864  he  was  invalided  because  of  an 
injury  received  from  the  concussion  of  a  shell.  On  his  return  to  civil 
life  Colonel  Higginson  did  not  resume  his  pastorate.  In  Newport,  Rhode 
Island,  and,  after  the  death  of  his  first  wife,  in  Cambridge,  which  was 
again  his  home  from  1878  to  the  end  of  his  life,  he  devoted  himself  to 
writing.  However,  he  remained  actively  interested  in  public  questions, 


52 


LETTERS  BY  THOMAS  WENTWORTH  HIGGINSON 


53 


was  an  eager  advocate  of  woman  suffrage,  served  two  years  in  the  Mas- 
sachusetts Legislature,  and  four  on  the  State  Board  of  Education. 

Six  letters  belong  to  the  Worcester  period.  One  of  these  is  dated 
from  Rockport,  and  is  the  most  valuable  of  the  series,  since  it  gives  the 
writer's  own  view  of  the  storming  of  the  Boston  Court  House  in  the  case 
of  Anthony  Burns.  A  fugitive  slave  from  Virginia,  Burns  had  been 
caught  in  Boston  and  kept  imprisoned,  whereupon  the  Abolitionists 
called  a  protest  meeting  at  Faneuil  Hall  for  May  26,  1854.  Higginson, 
arriving  as  leader  of  a  Worcester  delegation,  decided  on  more  than  ver- 
bal protests.  At  the  suggestion  of  his  friend  Martin  Stowell,  he  made  a 
plan  to  free  the  prisoner.  A  party  was  to  be  ready  and  armed  for  action; 
an  orator  was  to  shout  from  the  gallery  of  Faneuil  Hall  that  a  mob  was 
attacking  the  Court  House,  whereupon  the  whole  audience  was  to  follow 
and  rescue  Burns  by  storm.  But  when  the  time  came,  though  the  an- 
nouncement was  made,  the  plotters  found  that  they  had  no  access  to 
the  speakers  on  the  platform  in  the  crowded  hall,  and  the  friends  they 
had  relied  on  were  dispersed.  Higginson  and  his  associates  hammered 
with  a  beam  at  the  Court  House  door  till  it  gave  way;  he  and  a  stout 
negro  leaped  inside,  but  were  clubbed  by  the  police,  Higginson  receiving 
a  cut  on  his  chin.  The  killing  of  a  marshal's  officer  in  the  fray  represented, 
as  Higginson  pointed  out  later  in  his  memoirs,  the  first  act  of  violence 
in  the  anti-slavery  struggle.  The  letter,  written  to  William  Lloyd  Gar- 
rison, editor  of  the  Liberator,  is  given  here  in  full : 

Rockport.  June  28,  1854. 

Dear  Sir 

I  promised  Mr.  May  to  inform  you  whether  I  could  go  to  Framingham 
on  July  4.  I  said,  if  I  could,  but  it  is  impossible.  I  am  sick  from  overwork 
&  with  a  bad  cough ;  1  am  only  very  slowly  recruiting  here.  My  heart  is 
with  the  meeting  at  Framingham,  as  the  only  one  in  which  the  right  view 
of  our  national  condition  is  likely  to  be  taken. 

I  have  one  quarrel  with  you  Mr.  Garrison,  for  the  unjust  way  in  wh. 
you  spoke  on  the  attack  on  the  Court  House.  An  action  which  has  given 
the  greatest  impulse  to  Anti  Slavery  in  Mass.  since  the  first  number  of 
the  Liberator  was  published,  should  not  have  been  slighted  in  the  Liberator 
as  "hasty,  unpremeditated  &  ill-advised,"  (I  quote  fr.  memory).  To  be 
sure  it  is  well  enough  that  such  shld.  be  the  public  impression  now,  to 
save  those  in  prison  fr.  danger.  But  I  stand  ready  to  prove,  when  the  time 
comes,  that  the  attack  was  panned  deliberately,  cautiously,  &  (as  the  al- 
most success  proved)  most  judiciously.  That  if  it  had  not  been  made,  no  other 
would  have  been  made.  That  this  failed,  partly  thro'  the  cowardice  of  a  mob, 
&  more  thro'  the  treachery  of  some  of  the  very  men  whose  courage  zvas  most 
relied  on,  &  whose  shrinking  would  have  ruined  any  enterprise,  &  especially, 
a  daylight  one.  That  fuller  information  was  not  sent  to  the  leaders  at  Faneuil 
Hall  was  not  for  want  of  the  effort,  but  fr.  physical  impossibility  of  getting 
in.  For  the  same  reason  it  was  impossible  for  those  who  planned  the  at- 
tack to  know  that  Wendell  Phillips  took  the  course  he  did,  however  judi- 
cious the  course  under  the  circumstances  as  he  saw  them. 


54  MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 

Of  course  I  do  not  expect  you,  as  a  non-resistant,  to  sympathize  with 
such  an  attack,  but  I  am  sorry  that  the  Liberator,  wh.  will  one  day  give 
the  chief  materials  for  the  history  of  this  affair,  shld.  underrate  its'  policy 
in  a  way  wh.  the  Post  &  the  Courier  did  not  do.  At  the  same  time,  for  the 
sake  of  those  who  are  to  be  tried  for  murder,  I  do  not  desire  to  have  the 
error  corrected  now. 

Yours  with  most  cordial  respect 
T.  W.  Higginson 

The  Liberator  of  June  2  had  stated :  "The  assault  had  no  connection 
whatever  with  the  Faneuil  Hall  meeting,  and  was  the  act  of  some  half 
dozen  impulsive  and  unreasoning  persons,  without  plan  or  system  of 
any  kind."  A  similar  statement  appeared  in  the  paper  on  June  23.  The 
daily  Boston  Courier  for  May  27  had  given  a  serious,  if  hostile,  report 
of  the  attack,  concluding:  "It  is  quite  likely  that  the  mob  will  reassemble 
this  morning.  If  they  do  and  attempt  to  rescue  Burns,  the  result  will 
be  awful."  Wendell  Phillips,  according  to  the  Courier,  had  opposed  the 
attack.  It  may  be  added  that  Garrison's  biography,  written  by  his  chil- 
dren, quotes  only  a  sentence  from  this  letter,  in  a  foot-note. 

One  letter  belongs  to  the  Kansas  chapter  of  Colonel  Higginson's 
life,  and  one  to  his  military  service.  The  first,  dated  from  Worcester, 
April  8,  i860,  to  an  unnamed  addressee,  concerns  a  stranger  "represented 
as  one  of  the  Confederates  of  John  Brown,"  whom  the  writer  suspected 
of  "exciting  sympathy  under  false  pretences."  The  second  was  sent  to 
the  Reverend  Mr.  Harris,  Post  Chaplain,  on  October  13,  1863,  to  suggest 
detailing  a  certain  Thomas  Long  as  acting  chaplain  for  his  regiment. 

Four  letters  were  written  from  Newport,  two  of  them  to  Garrison. 
In  one  of  February  20,  1868  Higginson's  interest  in  women's  work  ap- 
pears. "I  am  preparing  a  brief  memoir  of  Mrs.  Child  for  a  Connecticut 
publisher,"  he  wrote.  "I  would  be  very  glad  if  you  would  give  me  your 
impression,  as  briefly  as  you  please,  of  Mrs.  C's  career  as  editor  of  which 
I  know  very  little."  Farther  on  he  added:  "I  have  a  general  impression 
that  she  succeeded  very  well."  Mrs.  Child  was,  of  course,  Lydia  Maria 
Child. 

The  bulk  of  the  correspondence  extends  from  1877  to  1908.  The 
fact  that  the  letters  both  of  the  first  and  of  the  last  date  are  addressed 
to  editors  is  characteristic  of  Higginson's  later  life.  Not  all  of  them 
were  written  from  Cambridge ;  a  number  date  from  Dublin,  New  Hamp- 
shire, where,  with  his  wife  and  daughter,  he  spent  summers  at  his  cot- 
tage Glimpsewood,  and  one  is  from  Windemere,  England. 

On  November  16,  1885,  he  wrote  to  Miss  Booth  of  Harper's  Bazar, 
asking  if  he  was  to  keep  on  writing  for  that  magazine.  "For  myself," 
he  remarked,  "I  have  been  entirely  satisfied,  have  enjoyed  writing  & 
have  always  half  a  dozen  subjects  ahead.  If  I  am  to  keep  on,  I  wish  you 
wd.  find  the  time  to  write  me  a  few  suggestions  or  criticisms,  as  to 


LETTERS  BY  THOMAS  WENTWORTH  HIGGINSON 


55 


whether  my  papers  are  too  long  or  too  short,  the  range  of  subjects  too 
great  or  too  small;  whether  you  approve  of  my  method  of  varying  the 
monotony  of  papers  addressed  especially  to  women  by  those  of  general 
interest,  such  as  that  called  'a  word  for  the  uncommonplace'  &  others. 
You  have  given  me  only  too  few  hints  &  criticisms."  Mary  Louise 
Booth,  editor  of  Harper's  Bazar  for  over  twenty  years,  was  distinguished 
also  as  a  historian  of  New  York  and  as  a  translator  of  some  twenty  vol- 
umes. 

A  letter  sent  to  Herbert  S.  Stone  on  November  i,  1893,  shows 
Colonel  Higginson's  interest  in  young  beginners  in  the  literary  field 
and  also  his  accurate  knowledge  of  American  literature.  The  addressee 
was  at  the  time  a  junior  in  Harvard.  With  the  help  of  his  college  friend 
H.  Ingalls  Kimball,  he  had  compiled  a  bibliography,  First  Editions  of 
American  Authors,  which,  with  a  preface  by  Eugene  Field  that  has  fre- 
quently been  reprinted,  was  published  in  that  year,  as  the  first  bound 
book  of  the  partners  Stone  &  Kimball.  The  partnership  developed  into 
a  prosperous  publishing  house  till  1897,  when  it  was  succeeded  by  Her- 
bert Stone  &  Co.  A  letter  quoted  in  A  History  of  Stone  &  Kimball,  by  Sid- 
ney Kramer,  1940,  throws  light  on  young  Stone's  relation  to  Colonel 
Higginson.  Having  asked  Eugene  Field  to  write  the  introduction,  Stone 
confided :  "If  I  knew  Col.  Higginson  a  little  better  I  should  have  asked 
him  but  as  it  is,  I  hardly  like  to."  Such  reticence  was  not  necessary,  as 
the  letter  in  the  Library  shows.  "I  have  really  enjoyed  your  little  book," 
Mr.  Higginson  wrote  to  the  young  man,  "&  shall  find  two  copies  need- 
ful, one  for  the  C[ambridge]  P[ublic]  Library  &  one  for  myself.  It  is 
admirably  done."  As  Stone  had  asked  for  criticism,  he  offered  it:  "There 
are  many  minor  writers  omitted,  of  course,  such  as  Hurlbut,  Smelley, 
Sanborn,  Mulford  Tilton,  Frothingham,  Bartol.  Of  course  the  line  must 
be  drawn  somewhere;  but  two  such  names  as  C harming  &  Parker  are 
serious  omissions,  especially  as  you  put  in  the  younger  W.  E.  Channing, 
often  compared  with  his  uncle."  Should  Stone  undertake  a  bibliography 
of  modern  English  authors,  Higginson  was  willing  to  put  his  own  library 
at  his  disposal,  for,  he  wrote,  he  had  probably  the  best  collection  of  re- 
cent English  poetry  in  America.  He  also  suggested  that  a  book  of  trans- 
lations would  be  as  valuable  to  librarians  as  the  bibliography  just  pub- 
lished. In  a  footnote  he  corrected  the  entries  of  women's  names.  Among 
other  errors  he  found:  "You  follow  the  execrable  practice  of  Jackson, 
Helen  Hunt,  which  she  wd.  hv.  particularly  disliked.  It  should  be  Jack- 
son, Helen  Maria  (Fiske)  (Hunt)  giving  the  successive  names." 

From  the  late  'nineties  and  the  first  decade  of  the  new  century  a 
number  of  letters  are  preserved  written  to  Francis  Jackson  Garrison, 
mostly  in  regard  to  articles  or  books  dealing  with  abolition  days.  One 
dated  September  12,  1898,  contains  a  candid  self-analysis.   Having  re- 


56 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


marked  on  "the  severity  of  tone  in  the  Life  of  your  father  towards  the 
New  Organizationists,"  he  explains:  "The  natural  instinct  of  justice  is 
very  strong  in  me  &  sometimes  makes  me  side  against  my  friends  when 
they  seem  to  me  unfair  to  those  who  are  perhaps  less  my  friends.  I 
liked  the  Garrisonians  best,  but  always  felt  that  they  were  unjust  to  the 
Liberty  Party  men;  &  that  your  book  reflected  too  minutely  &  precisely 
the  point  of  view  of  the  former."  On  November  6,  1905,  he  describes  a 
luncheon  party,  "such  as  your  father  would  have  approved,"  at  the  house 
of  Dr.  Samuel  Crothers,  the  Unitarian  minister,  where  the  guests  sat 
"at  little  round  tables,  with  color  impartially  intermingled."  In  the  same 
letter  he  mentions  the  Reverend  Dr.  King,  who  has  asked  for  material 
for  a  novel  of  the  slavery  period.  Basil  King's  The  Giant's  Strength  ap- 
peared in  1907. 

Many  other  letters  may  be  read  with  pleasure  for  the  individual 
glimpses  they  offer  of  "cheerful  yesterdays"  —  as  Higginson  named  his 
own  book  of  memoirs.  Among  the  papers  are  also  two  poems:  "Decora- 
tion," written  May  30,  1873,  a  moving  tribute  at  the  grave  of  a  coura- 
geous woman,  and  "Forward!,"  dated  November  17,  1896,  translated 
from  the  German  of  Hoffman  von  Fallersleben. 


MARGARET  MUNSTERBERG 


Arms  for  Virginia:  Joel  Barlow  to  Monroe 


A DIVERSITY  of  enthusiasms  led  Joel  Barlow,  the  American  poet,  to 
live  abroad  from  1788  till  1805.  One  of  the  "Hartford  wits"  and  author 
of  a  huge  epic  poem,  The  Vision  of  Columbus,  Barlow  sailed  for  Europe  hoping 
to  sell  holdings  of  land  in  the  West  to  Frenchmen.  He  was  thirty-three  years 
old.  The  project  failed  and  the  poet,  two  years  later,  moved  to  London  and 
wrote  topical  pieces  for  a  living.  He  made  many  friends  there,  chief  among 
whom  were  Dr.  Joseph  Priestley  and  Thomas  Paine  —  connections  which 
show  the  political  development  of  one  who  was  originally  a  Connecticut 
Yankee.  Back  in  France  in  1792,  he  was  made  a  French  citizen.  He  was 
luckier  in  his  business  ventures  and  within  a  few  years  he  became  a  rich  man. 
From  1795  till  1797  he  was  the  American  consul  at  Algiers,  being  appointed 
by  James  Monroe,  then  minister  to  France.  In  the  last  eight  years  of  his  stay 
abroad,  Barlow  lived  and  worked  mostly  in  Paris,  moving  sociably  among  the 
American  and  English  residents. 

The  Library  has  recently  acquired  a  letter  from  Barlow  to  Monroe, 
dated  March  17,  1802  and  apparently  unpublished.  It  covers  five  large  quarto 
pages.  At  the  time  of  writing  Monroe  was  serving  for  the  fourth  year  as 
Governor  of  Virginia.  William  Lee  of  Boston,  whose  appointment  as  an  agent 
in  France  Monroe  had  obtained  a  year  before  by  an  appeal  to  President  Jeffer- 
son, had  asked  Barlow  to  approach  Monroe  on  his  behalf.  The  poet  explains : 

Our  friend  Mr.  William  Lee,  commercial  agent  at  Bordeaux,  who  is  now 
with  us  for  a  few  days,  desires  me  to  take  some  information  relative  to  a 
supply  of  arms  for  your  State,  and  to  write  you  on  the  subject.  He  has 
noticed  a  late  act  of  your  legislature  authorising  and  desiring  you  to  pro- 
cure for  the  State  a  certain  quantity  of  fire-arms.  He  has  convinced  me  of 
his  ability  to  furnish  these  &  deliver  them  in  one  of  your  ports,  to  any 
quantity  for  which  you  may  choose  to  contract,  and  of  a  quality  to  be  a- 
greed  upon  &  ascertained  by  samples  previously  deposited  with  you.  He 
has  desired  me  to  aid  him  in  the  business  in  two  respects ;  first  in  procuring 
permission  from  this  Govt,  for  the  exportation  of  the  arms ;  and  second,  as 
I  am  going  soon  to  embark  for  America  &  to  land  in  your  State,  he  desires 
me  to  take  charge  of  the  samples,  and  to  propose  to  you  a  contract  in  his 
name,  which  I  may  conclude  for  him,  and  offer  you  such  guarantee  for  the 
performance  thereof  as  the  nature  of  the  business  may  require.  The  desire 
I  have  to  be  useful  to  my  country,  &  the  friendship  I  bear  to  Mr.  Lee  will 
certainly  induce  me  to  do  all  I  can  for  the  accomplishment  of  this  object. 

He  asks  Monroe  to  let  him  know:  "Whether  you  wish  to  enter  into  a 
contract ;  for  what  number  of  Arms ;  of  what  quality  &  calibre ;  whether  the 
same  as  are  used  by  the  armies  of  France,  or  in  what  respect  they  must  differ. 
All  these  particulars  can  be  regulated  according  to  your  desire,  as  Mr.  Lee 
will  deal  directly  with  the  manufacturers." 

It  was  three  more  years  before  Barlow  finally  sailed  for  America,  and 
the  present  writer  has  been  unable  to  find  any  record  of  the  outcome  of  the 
proposed  transaction. 


5 


57 


58 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Monroe,  who  after  two  years  as  envoy  was  recalled  from  France  in  1796, 
published  A  View  of  the  Conduct  of  the  Executive  in  the  Foreign  Affairs  of  the 
United  States  during  the  following  year.  The  book,  "illustrated  by  his  In- 
structions &  Correspondence,"  tells  of  his  effort  to  win  France's  confidence  in 
us  and  to  secure  redress  for  French  interference  with  our  commerce.  Barlow, 
rather  belatedly,  received  a  complimentary  copy,  which  prompted  him  to  write 
the  following  paragraph : 

I  have  received  your  obliging  letter  of  16  Oct.  as  likewise  your  Book  by 
Mr.  Tuboeuf.  I  had  seen  the  work  before,  but  am  very  glad  to  possess  it 
immediately  from  you.  The  documents  are  valuable,  as  they  will  always 
help  to  exhibit  the  striking  features  of  an  epoque  which  I  hope  will  remain 
a  singular  one  in  the  history  of  our  government,  —  an  epoque  which  will 
always  hold  up  to  view  the  danger  of  dishonesty  in  public  measures,  and 
the  fatal  effects  of  aberrations  from  principle  in  a  nation  that  means  to 
preserve  its  freedom. 

In  this  book  Monroe  hoped  to  justify  the  limited  success  which  had  oc- 
casioned his  recall.  He  blamed  the  wavering  of  official  policy  toward  France 
and  the  overtures  made  to  her  enemy,  England. 

The  remainder  of  Barlow's  letter  concerns  mutual  acquaintances,  about 
whom  Monroe  had  evidently  inquired.  "Friend  Cutting  has  married  a  French 
wife  .  .  .  Sir  Robert  Smyth  suffers  much  with  the  gout.  He  has  established  a 
banking  house  here.  .  ."  Barlow  speaks  of  Thomas  Paine,  whose  monumental 
The  Age  of  Reason  he  had  seen  through  the  press  in  1794,  while  Paine  was 
imprisoned  in  Paris,  falsely  accused  as  an  enemy  alien.  Paine,  Barlow  writes, 
"is  about  to  return  to  America,  notwithstanding  the  endeavors  of  some  of  his 
American  friends  who  wish  to  persuade  him  to  continue  longer  in  this  country." 
The  source  of  worry  was  Paine's  unpopularity.  He  had  caused  embarrass- 
ment to  Gouverneur  Morris,  the  American  minister,  by  urging  him  to  oppose 
his  detention  in  jail.  In  addition,  Paine  had  embittered  Americans  of  both 
parties  by  the  angry  criticisms  in  his  Letter  to  George  IV ashington  of  1796. 

Barlow  further  reports  that  "friend  Skipwith  intends  soon  to  pay  you  a 
visit  in  Virginia."  Fulwar  Skipwith,  an  able  civil  servant  of  Monroe's  own 
state  and  a  former  secretary  of  legation  in  France,  had  been  transferred  by 
Monroe,  during  the  trying  days  of  his  ministry,  to  the  consulate  of  the  De- 
partement  de  Paris. 

The  closing  comments  of  the  letter  reflect  the  rapid  shifts  of  the  French 
political  scene.  "The  rest  of  your  particular  friends  whom  you  left  here,"  it 
states,  "are  nearly  as  you  left  them  in  regard  to  physical  &  domestic  circum- 
stances, but  not  all  of  them  what  you  might  expect  in  political  principles." 

Upon  his  return  to  America  Barlow  established  his  home  near  Washing- 
ton, where  he  lived  the  life  of  a  literary  man.  In  1807  appeared  The  Columbiad, 
a  sequel  to  his  earlier  epic  —  nearly  as  long  and  equally  uninspired.  Beauti- 
fully printed  by  Fry  &  Kammerer  in  Philadelphia,  it  is  one  of  the  most  im- 
pressive examples  of  early  American  printing.  But  Barlow's  political  career 
was  not  yet  over.  In  181 1  President  Madison  appointed  him  minister  to  France. 
It  was  on  his  journey  to  Poland  to  meet  Napoleon,  then  on  retreat  from 
Moscow,  that  he  died  near  Cracow  in  December  1812. 

THERESA  COOLIDGE 


Exhibitions  in  the  Print  Department 


Hiram  C.  Merrill  and  his  Contemporaries 

MR.  HIRAM  C.  MERRILL,  as  far  as  we  know,  is  the  last  surviving 
member  of  the  New  School  of  American  Wood-Engraving,  which  was 
generally  considered  as  existing  from  1876  to  1910.  Mr.  Merrill  was  born  in 
Boston  on  October  25,  1866.  His  art  aspirations  were  manifested  at  an  early 
age.  His  hope  was  to  be  a  painter,  but,  lacking  funds  while  engaged  in  art 
study,  he  was  advised  to  serve  an  apprenticeship  in  wood-engraving  with  John 
Andrew  &  Son,  in  Boston. 

In  1891  Mr.  Merrill  went  to  New  York,  where  he  free-lanced  and  en- 
graved a  number  of  subjects  for  the  Harper  and  Scribner  magazines.  He  later 
entered  Harper's  as  a  full-fledged  engraver  for  both  the  weekly  and  monthly 
publications.  His  art  studies  were  carried  on  at  the  Pratt  Institute,  Brook- 
lyn, under  Herbert  Adams,  and  at  the  Art  Students'  League  during  every 
spare  moment  away  from  the  engraver's  bench.  Mr.  Merrill's  ambitions  were 
gratified  when  in  1905,  with  his  friend  Leon  Guipon,  he  took  a  trip  to  Brit- 
tany, where  the  picturesqueness  of  the  French  coastal  towns  captured  his 
interest  to  such  a  degree  that,  besides  obtaining  rich  material  for  a  number 
of  important  paintings,  he  became  an  authority  on  the  habits  of  the  people. 

His  work  has  been  exhibited  in  the  most  important  watercolor  exhibi- 
tions in  the  United  States,  and  has  won  several  awards,  among  which  are  a 
medal  for  engraving  at  the  Pan-American  Exposition  at  Buffalo,  1901,  and 
the  same  honor  at  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition,  St.  Louis,  1904.  So 
well  were  the  rudiments  of  art  instilled  in  Mr.  Merrill  as  a  young  man  that 
after  fifty-eight  years  of  interpretive  engraving  his  creative  ability  has  been 
recaptured.  In  the  past  three  years  (he  is  now  at  the  age  of  80)  he  has  pro- 
duced eighteen  engravings  that  have  received  recognition  in  the  foremost 
shows  of  the  country. 

Although  wood-engraving  was  practiced  to  an  extensive  degree  in  Eng- 
land and  Europe  during  the  time  when  the  New  School  was  at  its  height, 
Philip  Gilbert  Hamerton,  eminent  British  connoisseur  and  critic,  gave  great 
praise  to  this  group  of  Americans,  who  in  his  estimation  far  surpassed  all 
other  nations  in  achievement.  It  might  be  said  that  the  school  was  founded 
by  John  G.  Smithwick  and  Timothy  Cole,  whose  engravings  represent  the 
earliest  examples  of  the  New  School.  Old  traditions  were  discarded  for  a 
new  arrangement  and  combination  of  line,  to  give  a  more  faithful  reproduc- 
tion of  the  original  work. 

It  was  also  at  this  period,  "1875-76,  that  the  greatest  influence  activating 
the  New  School  occurred  with  the  advent  of  photographic  transfer  of  the 
original  subject  to  the  block.  Before  this  time  the  illustration  was  drawn 
upon  the  wood  by  the  artist;  once  engraved,  the  drawing  was  destroyed. 
The  photographic  process  preserved  the  drawing,  giving  the  engraver  an 
opportunity  of  comparing  his  work  with  the  original  as  it  progressed,  and  it 
was  invaluable  in  making  corrections  and  value  adjustments.  It  had  other 
advantages  also,  as  it  gave  the  artist  more  liberty  of  expression  by  not  limit- 
ing him  to  the  size  of  the  block.  The  technique,  however,  was  held  within 


59 


6o 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


the  limits  of  an  established  tradition.  Textures  and  materials  were  treated 
with  a  certain  type  of  line,  which  was  strong  and  direct,  and  when  once  en- 
graved, must  not  be  modified.  A  result  in  pure  line  was  the  dominating  pur- 
pose, and  cross-hatch  was  regarded  as  a  misuse  of  the  medium. 

Thomas  Bewick  (1753-1828),  a  graphic  artist  of  great  talent,  was  the 
first  to  recognize  the  inherent  qualities  of  the  wood  block  as  a  basis  for  wood- 
engraving,  through  an  innovation  in  technique  in  the  development  of  the 
white  line  method.  (This  method  is  fully  explained  in  More  Books  for  No- 
vember 1946,  under  the  heading  "Graphic  Arts  Processes.") 

Alex  Anderson  (1775-1870)  is  regarded  as  the  earliest  wood-engraver 
in  this  country;  his  work  began  to  appear  in  various  publications  after  1790. 
Following  him  an  English  engraver  of  note,  W.  J.  Linton,  first  visited  this 
country  in  1866,  and  finally  settled  here.  His  strong  personality  was  evi- 
denced in  the  direct  attack  of  the  block,  which,  though  not  always  a  faithful 
reproduction  of  the  artist's  work,  often  showed  much  originality. 

The  most  celebrated  member  of  the  group  was  Timothy  Cole,  who  was 
born  in  London  in  1852,  and  was  brought  to  New  York  at  the  age  of  five. 
When  his  family  moved  to  Chicago,  he  was  apprenticed  for  seven  years  in 
the  engraving  establishment  of  Bond  &  Chandler.  The  work  done  there  was 
largely  of  mechanical  subjects,  laying  a  foundation  for  the  extraordinary 
line  which  characterizes  his  technique  and  for  the  printing  quality  of  his 
blocks.  Filling  various  positions  in  New  York  after  the  Chicago  Fire,  Cole 
engraved  a  number  of  blocks  for  Scribner's  (later  the  Century),  graduating 
into  the  important  work  of  reproducing  portraits  and  paintings.  It  was  at  this 
period  of  his  development  that  A.  W.  Drake,  art  editor,  and  R.  U.  Johnson, 
editor  of  the  Century,  were  persuaded  to  send  Cole  to  Europe  to  engrave 
copies  of  paintings  in  famous  galleries.  He  spent  twenty-seven  years  abroad 
engraving  what  is  known  today  as  the  "Old  Master  Series."  In  achievement 
they  are  unsurpassed,  and  are  collectors'  items  of  great  value.  He  was  an 
expert  in  obtaining  tonal  quality,  and  one  of  the  distinctive  features  of  his 
work  was  the  introduction  of  stipple  of  various  sizes  and  shapes  to  produce 
delicate  and  colorful  results. 

About  1910  Cole  returned  to  the  United  States,  continuing  his  work 
with  the  Century,  and  also  did  some  private  portrait  commissions.  One  of  his 
last  engravings  was  done  at  the  Boston  Museum  of  Fine  Arts  of  El  Greco's 
painting,  "Fra  Felix  H.  Palavicino."  At  this  time  he  posed  for  a  demonstration 
motion  picture,  "The  Last  of  the  Wood-Engravers,"  which  was  shown  in  the 
Lecture  Hall  Series  on  Graphic  Arts  in  the  Library  last  year. 

The  work  of  the  artists  selected  for  this  exhibition  offers  an  interesting 
panorama  of  wood-engraving  of  the  period.  Such  names  as  T.  A.  Butler, 
E.  Schladitz,  R.  Staudenbaur,  F.  H.  Wellington,  Henry  Wolf,  Gustav  Kruell, 
and  others  illustrate  a  wide  range  of  subjects  and  varied  techniques.  There 
are  examples  of  blocks  which  are  the  work  of  several  artists,  and  demonstra- 
tion panels  showing  the  development  of  an  engraving  from  the  drawing  to 
the  final  state,  also  the  variour-  tools  and  materials  employed  in  the  process. 
The  prints  of  Mr.  Merrill  figure  prominently  in  the  exhibition,  which  gives 
the  visitor  an  opportunity  to  compare  both  the  early  and  the  present  phases 
of  his  work. 

ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 


Graphic  Arts  Processes 


Etching 

THE  word  "etching"  has  come  down  to  us  from  the  Dutch  '"etzen,"  mean- 
ing "to  eat."  It  indicates  the  actual  process  by  which  the  line  is  bitten 
into  the  metal  plate.  Copper  has  been  the  metal  most  successfully  used,  al- 
though the  earliest  etchings  in  the  first  half  of  the  sixteenth  century  were 
done  on  iron,  and  artists  have  often  tried  zinc  and  aluminum  plates. 

The  highly  polished  surface  of  a  copper  plate  is  covered  with  a  thin 
layer  of  etching  ground,  composed  of  various  waxes  and  resins,  and  imper- 
vious to  acid.  It  generally  comes  in  the  form  of  a  ball,  although  there  is  also 
a  liquid  preparation  preferred  by  some.  The  ball  is  rubbed  over  the  plate, 
which  has  been  heated  just  enough  to  melt  it.  The  ground  is  then  spread 
evenly  over  the  entire  surface  with  a  dabber,  made  of  cotton  wool  covered 
with  fine  silk  and  tied  to  resemble  a  powder  puff.  When  the  ground  is  thinly 
laid,  it  is  smoked  with  wax  tapers  to  blacken  the  surface,  so  that  the  artist 
may  see  his  lines  more  clearly.  The  liquid  preparation  is  composed  of  the 
same  ingredients,  but  dissolved  in  chloroform  or  ether.  The  etcher  places 
the  copper  plate  in  a  porcelain  tray,  resting  it  against  the  bottom  and  one 
side ;  the  tray  is  tipped  up,  and  the  liquid  is  poured  from  the  bottle  so  that 
it  will  flood  the  plate.  The  surplus  drains  to  the  edge  of  the  tray  and  may 
be  poured  back  into  the  bottle.  The  plate  is  left  tilted  until  almost  dry,  in 
order  to  drain  as  much  as  possible  to  the  edge.  Most  liquid  grounds  do  not 
need  to  be  smoked. 

The  artist  who  first  wishes  to  trace  his  drawing  upon  the  plate  may 
choose  one  of  several  methods.  He  may  transfer  his  design  on  paper  backed 
with  a  sanguine  or  red  powder,  which  may  be  made  by  rubbing  conte  crayon 
on  the  back  of  tracing  paper.  This  outline  is  laid  on  the  plate,  sanguine  side 
down,  and  traced  with  a  rounded  point  (taking  care  not  to  break  through 
the  paper)  which  leaves  the  design  in  red  on  the  black  ground.  The  composi- 
tion may  also  be  transferred  by  running  the  plate  and  a  tracing,  placed  face 
down,  through  the  press.  This  method  is  used  when  the  etching  is  to  print 
in  the  same  direction  as  the  original  drawing.  Many  artists,  of  course,  prefer 
to  draw  directly  upon  the  ground  with  the  etching  needle,  using  only  a  few 
guide  lines  sketched  on  the  wax  with  a  lithograph  crayon.  The  needle  may 
be  either  commercially  made,  or  fashioned  by  the  artist  himself  by  fixing  a 
sewing  needle  firmly  into  a  handle,  such  as  a  pen-holder.  This  last  has  served 
many  fine  etchers. 

An  etching  screen,  made  by  stretching  architect's  tracing  cloth  across 
a  wooden  frame,  is  arranged  between  the  source  of  light  and  the  artist  to 
diffuse  the  light  and  eliminate  the  glare  of  the  metal.  As  the  artist  draws  upon 
the  plate,  the  needle  cuts  into  the  wax,  exposing  the  copper.  Next  the  back 
of  the  copper  plate  is  covered  with  stopping-out  varnish  to  protect  it  from 
acid.  It  may  be  used  to  cover  lines  that  have  been  drawn  through  the  ground, 
and  later  have  been  found  unnecessary. 


61 


62 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


The  biting  of  the  plate  may  be  done  in  a  number  of  ways,  using  various 
acids.  The  common  method  is  to  submerge  the  plate  in  an  acid  bath  composed 
of  one-third  of  nitric  acid  and  two-thirds  of  water.  Other  acids  are  per- 
chloride  of  iron  and  Dutch  mordant.  The  use  of  each  of  these  will  result  in  a 
different  type  of  biting.  The  plate  is  left  in  the  acid  bath  until  the  lines  to 
be  etched  most  lightly  are  sufficiently  bitten,  usually  for  fifteen  or  twenty 
minutes.  These  lines  may  then  be  covered  with  the  stopping-out  varnish,  and 
the  plate  put  back  in  the  acid  in  order  to  bite  the  other  lines  more  deeply. 
The  artist  may  continue  this  process  as  many  times  as  necessary  to  obtain 
the  relative  values  he  desires.  Another  method,  which  requires  no  stopping- 
out  varnish,  is  the  use  of  pure  acid  applied  with  a  feather,  controlling  the 
action  of  the  acid  with  blotters.  When  the  biting  is  completed,  the  ground 
and  stopping-out  varnish  are  removed  with  energine  or  gasoline.  The  inking 
and  wiping  of  the  plate  are  done  in  the  same  manner  as  in  line-engraving.  The 
plate  is  often  "retroussaged"  in  order  to  give  it  a  richer  appearance.  This 
is  done  by  warming  the  plate  and  passing  a  soft  linen  rag  lightly  over  the 
lines,  bringing  up  the  ink.  The  paper  is  usually  dampened  and  left  between 
moist  white  blotters  overnight  to  be  ready  in  the  morning. 

An  all-rag  paper,  preferably  hand-made,  is  by  far  the  best.  It  is  more 
durable,  pliable,  and  brilliant  than  any  other.  The  old  Italian,  Dutch,  and 
English  papers  are  particularly  fine,  and  also  interesting  to  study  in  them- 
selves. An  old  paper  used  quite  often  for  fine  prints  is  "verdatre,"  which  is 
found  in  various  tones  of  green.  Each  plate  will  need  its  own  special  paper 
to  bring  out  the  individual  quality  in  the  print.  The  process  of  printing  is  the 
same  as  in  line  engraving. 

The  purpose  of  the  trial  proof  is  to  discover  just  what  has  been  done  on 
the  plate.  A  proof  is  often  taken  when  merely  the  bare  outline  of  the  design 
has  been  etched ;  other  times,  the  composition  is  carried  out  entirely  and 
there  may  be  no  further  work  needed.  As  the  artist  studies  his  proof,  he  is 
able  to  decide  what  additions  or  corrections  are  necessary.  He  may  draw  on 
the  proof  itself  with  pen  and  ink,  or  brush,  experimenting  with  several  ideas 
before  making  the  actual  corrections  on  the  plate.  These  touched  proofs  are 
often  extremely  interesting.  Sometimes  the  etcher  makes  a  counterproof  for 
working  purposes.  The  counterproof  is  an  impression  taken  not  from  the 
plate  but  from  a  fresh  proof,  with  which  it  is  passed  through  the  press.  It  is 
naturally  a  weaker  print  than  one  taken  directly  from  the  plate,  but  its  pur- 
pose is  fulfilled  as  it  presents  the  design  in  the  same  direction  as  the  plate 
itself.  For  this  reason  the  artist  uses  it  as  an  aid  in  making  his  corrections 
and  in  carrying  his  work  further.  In  order  to  make  an  addition  to  the  plate, 
the  artist  must  lay  a  transparent  ground,  one  that  enables  him  to  see  the 
lines  already  bitten  in  the  plate.  If  it  is  not  possible  to  obtain  this,  the  regular 
ground  may  be  used,  laid  very  thinly  and  left  unsmoked.  The  additions  are 
then  drawn  and  the  plate  is  rebitten.  The  rebiting  may  be  done  in  the  usual 
manner,  or  by  applying  pure  acid  with  a  feather  on  the  newly  drawn  areas, 
and  controlling  the  action  with  a  blotter.  This  may  be  repeated  as  often  as 
necessary,  and  proofs  taken  whenever  desired  after  removing  the  ground. 

Each  print  in  which  a  change  has  been  made  is  known  as  a  "state."  The 
first  proof  that  the  artist  takes  is  known  as  the  "first  state,"  and  all  the  im- 


GRAPHIC  ARTS  PROCESSES 


63 


pressions  taken  while  the  plate  is  in  that  condition  are  "first  states."  When 
further  changes  are  made,  the  print  becomes  the  "second  state,"  and  all  the 
proofs  taken  are  "second  states."  The  last  state,  when  published,  is  known 
as  the  "published  state."  The  corrections  are  made  in  the  same  way  as  in 
line  engraving.  Areas  may  be  reduced  in  value  by  rubbing  them  down  with 
charcoal  and  water  or  a  burnisher.  Each  print,  as  it  is  taken  from  the  press, 
is  stretched  onto  a  flat  board  with  paper  tape  to  prevent  it  from  wrinkling. 
A  proof  that  has  dried  may  be  stretched  by  redampening  and  taping  down. 
Very  delicate  prints  are  sometimes  stretched  by  placing  them  between  moist 
white  blotters  and  allowing  them  to  dry  slowly. 

"Soft  ground"  is  another  type  of  the  etching  medium.  The  copper  plate 
is  covered  with  a  thin  coating  composed  of  the  regular  ground  combined 
with  an  equal  amount  of  tallow,  usually  applied  in  the  ordinary  manner.  This 
ground  slicks  to  whatever  touches  it,  and  can  be  removed  by  this  means.  The 
drawing  is  done  on  a  thin  sheet  of  paper  laid  over  it ;  and  the  pressure  of  the 
pencil  or  crayon  causes  the  wax  to  adhere  to  the  lines.  The  copper  is  thus 
exposed  in  these  areas  and  the  plate  may  be  bitten  in  the  usual  way.  Because 
of  the  grain  of  the  paper  and  the  thickness  of  the  pencil  line,  the  print  will 
have  the  texture  of  a  crayon  drawing.  The  same  methods  of  stopping-out, 
making  corrections,  and  rebiting  may  be  applied.  If  the  plate  is  reground  and 
new  lines  are  to  be  added,  a  very  transparent  paper  must  be  used,  so  that 
the  artist  may  see  the  work  already  etched.  A  soft  ground  plate  is  printed  in 
the  same  way  as  any  other  etched  plate. 

MURIEL  C.  FIGENBAUM 


The  Book  of  Battles 


THE  Second  part  of  the  booke  of 
Battailcs,  by  John  Polemon,  printed 
for  Gabriell  Cawood  in  London  in 
1587,  is  a  sequel  to  the  compiler's  The 
book  of  Battailes,  which  had  been  printed 
by  Bynneman  in  1578.  The  Second  part, 
which  the  Library  has  recently  ac- 
quired, is  rare,  the  Short  Title  Catalogue 
listing  only  two  other  copies  in  Ameri- 
ca. The  volume  is  a  quarto  of  ninety- 
four  leaves,  bound  in  the  original  limp 
vellum.  It  is  adorned  with  a  delicate 
border  on  the  title-page,  a  vignette, 
and  ornamental  initials.  The  printing, 
in  a  heavy  gothic  type,  executed  by 
T.  East  for  Cawood,  is  pleasing.  It 
should  have  satisfied  the  author,  who 
complains  in  the  preface  that  the  first 
book  of  battles  "was  so  maimed,  mangled, 
and  marred  by  the  Printer,"  that  he 
"would  neuer  acknowledge  it  for  mine 
owne,  but  account  it  a  changeling." 

But  neither  does  his  name  appear 
on  the  sequel.  He  seems  to  be  pretty 
well  unknown,  and  all  that  can  be  con- 
jectured about  John  Polemon  —  if  that 
was  his  real  name  and  not  adopted 
from  the  Greek  sage  —  is  that  he  was 
a  Protestant  or  at  least  a  sympathizer 
with  the  Reformation,  as  in  his  book 
he  seems  to  have  drawn  by  preference 
from  Protestant  sources.  The  volume 
is  a  compilation  of  battle  narratives 
excerpted  from  contemporary  war  books, 
"for  the  profit  of  those  that  practise 
armes,  and  for  the  pleasure  of  such  as 
loue  to  be  harmlesse  hearers  of  bloudie 
broiles." 

The  first  three  extracts  narrate  en- 
counters in  the  Huguenot  wars.  They 
are  taken  from  the  French  historian 
Lancelot  Voisin,  Sieur  de  la  Popeli- 
niere  (1 540-1608),  the  scion  of  a  noble 
family  which  became  Calvinist.  He 
himself  fought  as  an  officer  on  the 
Huguenot  side  with  great  daring.  His 
V rale  et  entiere  histoire  des  derniers 
troubles  was  published  at  Cologne  in 
1571,  and  his  Histoire  de  France,  brought 
up  to  date,  ten  years  later.  Polemon's 
book  includes  the  battle  at  Dreux  be- 
tween the  Prince  of  Conde,  general  of 
the  Protestant  force,  and  Montmoren- 
cy, High  Constable  of  France,  general 
of  the  Catholic  army,  fought  in  1562; 


the  battle  of  Saint  Gemme  in  Poitou, 
in  1570  —  probably  an  eyewitness  ac- 
count; and  a  battle  waged  in  Hainault, 
where  French  forces  aided  the  revolt- 
ing Low  Countries  against  Don  Fred- 
erick, the  son  of  the  Duke  of  Alva. 

An  account  of  a  naval  battle  in  the 
same  war  against  Spain  is  taken  "out 
of  Cornelio."  This  is  the  contemporary 
Spanish  historian  Pedro  Cornejo,  whose 
Summary  of  the  Civil  War  in  Flanders 
was  published  in  1577.  The  story  of 
the  battle  of  Couwenstein  Dike,  fought 
between  the  Prince  of  Parma  and  the 
Netherlands  states  in  1582,  is  from 
another  French  Protestant  historian, 
Richard  Dimoth,  who  died  in  1590. 
The  source  for  the  account  of  the 
battle  of  Lisbon  between  Antonio, 
King  of  Portugal,  and  the  Duke  of  Alva 
in  1580  is  given  as  Comes.  Natalis 
Comes  is  the  Latin  form  for  Noel  Con- 
ti,  a  resident  of  Venice  and  author  of 
a  general  history  of  his  time. 

But  perhaps  the  most  noteworthy 
narrative  both  for  the  exactness  and 
fullness  which  makes  it  valuable  source 
material  and  for  the  fervor  with  which 
it  is  written  is  that  of  the  famous  battle 
of  Lepanto  between  the  Spanish,  Vene- 
tian, and  Papal  allies  on  the  one  side, 
and  the  Turks  on  the  other.  Peter  Con- 
tarini,  from  whom  the  account  is  taken, 
was  probably  himself  a  participant, 
for  seven  members  of  the  ancient  Con- 
tarini  family  of  Venice  were  known  to 
have  fought  at  Lepanto.  The  compiler 
names  the  story  "The  Battaile  of  Pes- 
cherias"  because,  as  he  explains,  it  was 
doubtful  if  the  great  naval  engage- 
ment was  actually  fought  in  the  Gulf 
of  Lepanto  or  "in  another  gulfe  neere 
thereunto."  The  historian  lists  the 
names  of  the  galleys  and  of  the  cap- 
tains commanding  these.  He  records 
the  words  of  the  councils  held  both 
by  the  Allies  and  by  the  Turks,  and 
traces  the  tactics  of  the  fleets  minutely. 
Among  the  soldiers  not  mentioned, 
however,  was  a  vagrant  Spaniard 
who,  though  fever-ridden,  rose  and 
fought  at  Lepanto,  was  wounded,  and 
lost  one  arm.  He  was  destined  to  excel 
even  Don  Juan  of  Austria  in  glory : 
his  name  was  Miguel  Cervantes.    M.  M. 


64 


Ten  Books 


The  Stricken  Land.  By  Rexford  Guy 
Tug-well.  Doubleday.  1947.  704  pp. 
Called  "the  story  of  Puerto  Rico," 
this  extremely  candid  record  is  rather 
the  story  of  a  Progressive  devoted  to 
the  welfare  of  a  dependent  people, 
battling  against  reaction  on  the  island 
and  hostility  and  defamation  on  the 
continent.  Mr.  Tugwell  became  Gov- 
ernor of  Puerto  Rico  in  1941  and  com- 
pleted his  memoirs  while  still  in  office, 
in  July  1945.  From  the  beginning  the 
working  people  had  confidence  in  him, 
while  the  so-called  "better  element" — 
the  sugar  interests,  the  Falangists,  and 
their  retainers  —  resisted  his  efforts 
for  improvement,  such  as  home  pro- 
duction of  food,  government  control 
of  power  plants,  sanitation,  and  eco- 
nomic planning.  The  Governor  was 
continually  between  the  two  fires  of 
the  native  legislature  and  the  Depart- 
ment of  Interior  in  Washington.  To 
be  sure,  in  Munoz,  the  leader  of  the 
people's  party,  he  had  a  faithful  friend, 
although  one  who  insisted  on  political 
rather  than  on  technically  competent 
administrative  appointments.  In  con- 
trast to  the  Independistas,  the  Popu- 
lares  agreed  with  him  on  the  absolute 
need  for  some  kind  of  union  with  the 
United  States.  Mr.  Tug-well  himself 
proposed  that  the  Governor  should 
henceforth  be  elected,  and  he  relates 
in  detail  the  negotiations  in  Washing- 
ton over  the  revision  of  the  Organic 
Act  (really  Puerto  Rico's  Constitu- 
tion), which  culminated  in  a  bill  passed 
by  the  Senate  in  February  1944.  He 
al  so  gives  a  frank  account  of  the  two 
Congressional  investigating  commit- 
tees sent  to  Puerto  Rico  as  the  result 
of  hostile  intrigue,  both  of  which  came 
to  nothing.  Mr.  Tugwell  has  a  real  un- 
derstanding for  the  grievances  of  the 
Puerto  Ricans  who,  although  citizens, 
are  conscious  of  inferior  status.  To- 
ward the  close  of  his  administration,  Mr. 
Tugwell  could  look  upon  a  reformed 
civil  service  and  budget,  an  effective 
Planning  Board,  an  enlarged  Develop- 
ment Bank,  and  other  "real  gains  for 
efficient  government."  (M.  M.) 


Shelley.  By  Edmund  Blunden.  Viking. 
1947.  388  pp. 

Probably  Mr.  Blunden,  himself  a  poet, 
has  natural  advantages  as  a  poet's  bi- 
ographer. At  any  rate,  he  has  written 
of  Shelley  with  more  grace  and  sym- 
pathy than  almost  any  of  his  predeces- 
sors. He  takes  into  account  new  ma- 
terial discovered  since  1940,  and  the 
volume  gives  throughout  an  impres- 
sion of  factual  soundness;  yet  it  is  not 
cluttered  with  detail.  The  author  has 
assimilated  and  interpreted  his  facts, 
painting  in  a  vivid  background  and 
creating  a  portrait  of  Shelley  which  is 
for  once  both  attractive  and  credible. 
Where  he  feels  doubt  about  certain 
sources,  he  states,  he  has  simply  kept 
clear  of  them — thus  avoiding  entangle- 
ment with  the  forged  documents  ex- 
posed recently  in  The  Shelley  Legend. 
He  does  not  gloss  over  Shelley's  diffi- 
culties with  Harriet  and  Mary  and  his 
philanderings  with  other  women,  though 
he  is  inclined  to  withhold  judgment  on 
some  points  until  further  evidence  is 
at  hand.  But  he  seems  most  interested 
in  stressing  his  artistic  integrity  and 
his  fidelity  to  his  own  philosophy  in 
the  midst  of  trying  circumstances.  The 
outline  of  Shelley's  legal  and  financial 
problems  does  much  to  destroy  the 
ethereal  image  which  has  been  popular 
for  so  many  years.  "To  pass  any  con- 
siderable time  in  his  company,  through 
what  is  known  of  him  now,  is  to  be 
persuaded  that  in  intellectual  or  in  ac- 
tive life  there  was  little  which  was  not 
at  his  command."  (H.  McC.) 

Nelson.  By  Carola  Oman.  Doubleday. 
1946.  748  pp. 

The  life  of  the  great  English  admiral 
has  been  told  by  livelier  narrators,  but 
has  never  been  so  adequately  docu- 
mented nor  so  competently  related  to 
its  historical  setting.  The  story  always 
reads  like  a  drama:  the  son  of  a  poor 
clergyman,  Nelson  became  command- 
er of  the  English  fleet,  hero  of  the 
great  battles  of  the  Napoleonic  Wars 
—  the  Nile  and  Copenhagen  —  was 
made  a  viscount,  and  a  duke  by  the 


6 


65 


66 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


king  of  Naples,  and  finally  died  a  hero's 
death  at  Trafalgar.  The  romantic  in- 
terest is  furnished  by  his  love  affair 
with  Lady  Hamilton,  wife  of  the  Eng- 
lish ambassador  at  Naples.  This  book, 
however,  is  more  than  a  biography ;  it 
is  a  detailed  history  of  naval  affairs 
during  Nelson's  time.  That  was  the 
England  of  impressed  sailors,  fever- 
ridden  crews,  naval  engagements  that 
depended  on  wind  and  weather,  when 
the  test  of  a  man's  strength  lay  not  in 
combat  but  in  his  ability  to  wait  month 
after  month  for  the  enemy  to  come  out 
and  fight.  It  was  a  time,  too,  when 
politics  required  an  admiral,  even  after 
great  victories,  to  solicit  his  govern- 
ment with  humiliating  address  to  re- 
compense him  and  his  brave  compan-- 
ions.  With  extraordinary  grasp  of  her 
material  Miss  Oman  has  given  the 
background.  She  is  not  concerned  with 
Nelson's  estrangement  from  his  wife 
and  his  long  attachment  to  Lady  Ham- 
ilton ;  on  the  other  hand,  she  offers  the 
original  documents  —  letters,  d'aries, 
papers  —  which  establish  the  disputed 
parentage  of  his  illegitimate  daughter. 
The  tragic  circumstances  she  allows 
to  speak  for  themselves.  The  work  is 
sometimes  repetitious,  for  the  author 
seems  to  have  felt  bound  to  present 
all  her  evidence.  However,  the  result- 
ant picture  is  entirely  authentic,  the 
character  of  Nelson  more  real  than  in 
the  earlier,  romantic  biographies.  (R.  E.) 

The  Scot  in  History.  By  Wallace  Note- 
stein.  Yale  Univ.  Press.  1946.  371  pp. 
What  is  the  national  character  of  the 
Scot?  Was  he  naturally  thrifty,  dour, 
uncompromising,  or  have  historical  cir- 
cumstances developed  that  side  of  his 
personality?  Professor  Notestein,  in 
an  interesting  and  provocative  study, 
has  attempted  to  answer  that  question. 
The  story  of  Scotland  is  one  of  lost 
causes.  The  children  are  reared  on  tales 
with  unhappy  endings :  William  Wal- 
lace, betrayed  and  hanged ;  the  Bruce, 
a  fugitive  in  a  cave ;  Bonnie  Prince 
Charlie,  in  exile.  Might  such  experi- 
ence not  leave  a  permanent  sense  of 
tragedy  and  frustration  in  a  people? 
The  Reformation  in  Scotland  com- 
bined the  rigidity  of  Calvin's  system 
with  the  intensity  of  John  Knox's  pas- 
sionate nature.  Moreover,  the  human- 


ism which  enlightened  and  moderated 
the  movement  in  other  countries  did 
not  reach  Scotland  to  any  considerable 
extent.  The  Reformation,  the  author 
asserts,  changed  the  easy-going,  un- 
ruly Scot  into  the  disciplined,  sober 
man  of  later  history.  England  had  her 
share  in  moulding  her  northern  sub- 
jects, too.  By  violence  she  subdued 
them,  by  legal  act  absorbed  their  par- 
liament, while  in  literature  she  paid 
them  gratuitous  insults.  Is  it  any  won- 
der that  a  defensiveness  appears  as 
compensation?  On  the  other  hand 
there  were  achievements.  The  list  of 
distinguished  names  in  the  chapters 
on  the  eighteenth  and  nineteenth  cen- 
turies is  cause  for  pride :  Hume,  Adam 
Smith,  Hutton.  Smollett,  Robertson, 
Watt  suggest  their  quality.  The  study 
is  at  its  best  when  it  deals  with  major 
historical  movements  and  their  prob- 
able effects.  The  author  is,  he  admits, 
on  less  certain  ground  in  contrasting 
"traits  inborn"  with  "traits  induced." 
This  is  a  subject  for  the  sociologist  and 
in  the  preface  Professor  Notestein 
states  his  limitations  in  the  field. 
Though  the  conclusions  are  frankly 
tentative,  the  opinions  of  so  eminent 
a  historian  command  respect  and  in- 
vite controversy.  (R.  E.) 

Readjustment  or  Revolution?  By  Alan- 
son  H.  Edgerton.  McGraw-Hill.  1946. 
238  pp. 

As  director  of  the  National  Guidance 
and  Evaluation  Studies,  Professor  Ed- 
gerton has  used  information  and  opin- 
ions collected  from  tens  of  thousands 
of  returned  service  men  and  women, 
war  workers,  and  youth  of  school  and 
college  age  to  appraise  both  the  em- 
ployment situation  and  the  education- 
al needs  of  the  country.  Fourteen  mil- 
lion veterans  have  to  adjust  themselves 
to  civilian  life,  including  the  more 
than  two  million  who  have  been  dis- 
charged with  physical  and  mental  dis- 
abilities ;  and  eighteen  million  tem- 
porary war  workers  have  to  face  changes 
of  occupation.  The  fact  that  even  in 
the  "near-depression"  year  of  1939-40 
more  than  a  quarter  of  a  million  jobs 
went  begging  indicates  the  inadequate 
correlation  of  training  with  occupational 
needs.  Modern  industry  demands  flexi- 
bility— the  ability  to  shift  from  one  tech- 


TEN  BOOKS 


67 


nique  to  another,  or  to  combine  various 
activities.  Rigid  technical  training  and 
over-specialization  must  be  avoided  if 
schools,  colleges,  and  vocational  schools 
are  to  benefit  the  youth  of  today.  The 
author  emphasizes  also  the  importance 
attached  to  "personality."  All  ex-ser- 
vicemen and  women  should  have  ac- 
cess to  a  community  center  for  inter- 
views. (M.  M.) 

Touched  with  Fire.  Edited  by  Mark 
DeWolfe  Howe.  Harvard.  1946.  158  pp. 
The  Civil  War  letters  and  diary  of 
Oliver  Wendell  Holmes,  Jr.,  were 
brought  to  light  last  winter  by  Mr. 
Howe,  the  Justice's  official  biographer. 
As  they  had  been  presumed  to  be  lost, 
their  discovery  was  a  pleasant  surprise. 
The  letters  run  from  May  1861  to  July 
1864;  the  diary  covers  the  Wilderness 
Campaign,  the  Battle  of  Spottsylvania, 
and  the  assault  on  Petersburg.  Some 
pages  from  an  earlier  diary,  inserted 
by  Holmes  himself  in  the  manuscript, 
describe  his  rapid  impressions  when 
he  was  wounded  at  Ball's  Bluffs.  They 
are  important  documents,  not  in  rela- 
tion to  the  War  or  even  the  20th  Regi- 
ment, but  for  the  light  they  throw  on 
a  formative  experience  of  one  of  the 
most  liberal  minds  in  America.  These 
pages  reveal  the  thoughts  of  a  young 
man  at  war  and  the  changes  that  war 
brings  to  those  that  are  in  the  midst 
of  the  fighting.  Throughout  Holmes 
was  convinced  of  the  Tightness  of  the 
cause  for  which  he  fought,  but  whereas 
at  first  he  went  forward  eagerly  to 
battle,  towards  the  end  only  his  sense 
of  duty  sustained  him  through  the 
tragedy,  boredom,  and  horror  of  the 
fighting  man's  life.  The  letters  are 
marked  by  a  great  affection  for  his 
mother,  though  also  by  some  impa- 
tience with  his  father's  opinions,  par- 
ticularly when  the  elder  Holmes  mis- 
understood his  decision  to  resign  from 
the  regiment.  (S.  W .  F.) 

The  Art  of  the  Mystery  Story.  Edited 
by  Howard  Haycraft.  Simon  and 
Schuster.  1946.  545  pp. 
Mr.  Haycraft,  who  five  years  ago 
produced  the  first  history  of  detective 
fiction,  has  now  compiled  an  anthology 
on  the  writing  of  mystery  stories.  He 
begins  with  essays  like  Chesterton's 


"Defence,"  written  in  1902,  "probably 
the  first  serious  and  perceptive  appli- 
cation of  the  critical  method  to  the 
genre,"  and  a  section  on  "The  Rules  of 
the  Game,"  among  them  Father  Knox's 
famous  decalogue.  Then  there  is  a 
group  of  articles  on  special  aspects  of 
the  "whodunit"  trade,  such  as  the  spy 
story,  the  "hard-boiled"  type,  the  locked- 
room  puzzle  (ably  analyzed  by  Dr. 
Gideon  Fell),  publishers'  problems,  and 
the  difficulties  of  adapting  book  plots 
for  the  screen  or  radio.  "The  Lighter 
Side  of  Crime"  is  devoted  to  satirists 
on  the  art,  perhaps  the  best  being  Og- 
den  Nash  and  Stephen  Leacock ;  while 
"The  Critics'  Corner"  very  sportingly 
includes  Edmund  Wilson's  now  classic 
"Who  Cares  Who  Killed  Roger  Ack- 
royd?"  and  two  professional  critiques 
on  the  dubious  medical  and  legal  in- 
formation too  often  found  in  mystery 
fiction.  Some  of  the  more  than  fifty 
contributions  might  have  been  omitted, 
since  most  of  the  detective-story  audi- 
ence would  probably  rather  read  mys- 
teries than  read  about  them.  But  in 
spite  of  its  length  the  book  is  both  di- 
verting and  informative.  (H.  McC.) 

The  Journals  and  Letters  of  the  Little 
Locksmith.  By  Katharine  Butler  Hatha- 
way. Coward-McCann.  1946.  395  pp. 
Three  years  ago  The  Little  Locksmith, 
published  a  few  months  after  its  au- 
thor's death,  aroused  wide  interest  by 
its  fine  sensibility,  beauty  of  style,  and 
its  revelation  of  an  altogether  unusual 
personality.  Katharine  Butler  Hatha- 
way was  a  native  of  Salem  who,  apart 
from  a  short  period  in  Castine,  Maine, 
and  a  year  or  two  abroad,  lived  in 
Boston.  Deformed  of  body,  she  spent 
her  childhood  in  bed  confined  by  a 
mechanical  apparatus,  and  for  the  rest 
she  hung  on  to  life  by  sheer  will.  Yet 
she  possessed  a  great  appetite  for  liv- 
ing, a  desire  for  adventure,  and  an  in- 
satiable curiosity  which  drove  her  on,  un- 
til finally  she  found  rest  in  a  simple  reli- 
gious devotion.  The  Little  Locksmith 
showed  a  consummate  literary  artist, 
who  could  depict  her  experiences,  phy- 
sical as  well  as  emotional,  with  an  un- 
canny precision.  The  letters  which 
make  up  the  larger  part  of  the  present 
volume  —  and  which  indicate  long 
accounts  of  a  winter  in  Paris,  a  sum- 


68 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


mer  in  the  French  Alps,  and  a  visit  to 
Majorca  —  were  written  to  Catharine 
Huntington,  her  closest  friend,  and  to 
her  brother  Warren,  to  her  physician, 
and  to  the  Japanese  artist  Toshihiko. 
The  book  contains  also  brief  excerpts 
from  the  journals.  The  latter  particu- 
larly are  studded  with  gems.  Here  is 
one  of  her  jottings:  "The  sense  of  dis- 
aster in  the  child,  like  a  sixth  sense  — 
awareness  of  the  element  of  disaster  in 
the  universe  —  that  most  people  take 
for  granted  only  to  shudder  at  it  when 
it  happens  near  by  —  and  forget  the 
rest  of  the  time."  Mrs.  Hathaway  kept 
her  balance  to  the  end.  mastering  her 
deep  suffering  and  fleeting  impres- 
sions with  the  same  firmness,  a  com- 
bination of  delicacy  and  strength.  She 
was  in  no  sense  "quaint."  Emily  Dick- 
inson should  be  suppressed,  she  once 
playfully  wrote,  perhaps  unconsciously 
fearing  comparison  with  the  Amherst 
recluse.  She  had  also  an  admirable 
talent  for  drawing;  a  number  of  her 
pieces  are  reproduced  in  the  volume. 
On  the  last  two  pages  is  printed  Catha- 
rine Huntington's  beautiful  poem  "The 
Beloved  House."  (Z.  H.) 

Old  New  England.  By  Barrows  Mus- 
sey.  A.  A.  Wyn.  1946.  128  pp. 
This  pictorial  record  of  New  England 
history  has  the  charm  and  vitality 
which  only  old  woodcuts  can  convey. 
The  illustrations,  selected  from  nine- 
teenth-century books  and  magazines, 
have  a  wide  variety:  buildings,  street 
scenes,  rivers,  boats,  landscapes,  horses, 
machinery,  etc.  In  the  story  of  the 
early  years  the  author  touches  only 
the  high  spots,  but  later  the  treatment 
becomes  more  detailed.  The  comments, 
interspersed  with  excerpts  from  con- 
temporary sources  on  New  England 
character,  are  lively.  The  combination 
of  text  and  pictures  makes  an  interest- 
ing volume  for  the  general  public  and 
a  useful  one  for  artists.  The  final 
chapter,  "The  Eyes  of  New  England," 
contains  notes  on  the  artists  and  en- 
gravers, and  may  be  supposed  to  be  a 
bibliography.  However,  Mr.  Mussey 
has  failed  to  include  Gleason's  Pictorial 
(later  changed  to  Ballon' s),  a  work 
from  which  he  has  drawn  a  large  por- 
tion of  his  material.  Some  of  the  best 
wood  engravers  of  the  time  contributed 


to  this  periodical,  which  furnishes  a 
rich  pictorial  mine  of  American  history 
during  the  years  1850  to  1859.  (H.  S.) 

Serge  Koussevitzky.  By  Hugo  Leich- 
tentritt.  Harvard.  1946.  199  pp. 
Readers  of  this  bulletin  are  familiar 
with  Dr.  Leichtentritt's  views  on  mod- 
ern American  music  from  his  remark- 
able essay  published  in  the  November 
and  December  1945  issues.  In  the  present 
stimulating  study  he  examines  the  im- 
portant part  which  Dr.  Koussevitzky 
and  the  Boston  Symphony  Orchestra 
have  played  in  the  development  of 
American  music.  From  his  very  start 
in  T924  the  new  conductor  sought  out 
American  works,  offering  in  his  first 
season  six  such  compositions.  In  Feb- 
ruary 1925  he  performed  the  Symphony 
for  Organ  and  Orchestra  by  Aaron 
Copland,  a  new  score  by  an  unknown 
young  man.  Since  then  the  works  of 
George  Gershwin,  Roy  Harris,  Walter 
Piston,  Randall  Thompson,  William 
Schuman,  and  others  have  been  steadi- 
ly on  his  repertoire.  In  all,  under  Dr. 
Koussevitzky's  leadership,  the  Orches- 
tra has  played  more  than  a  hundred 
and  fifty  American  works,  including 
the  premieres  of  sixty-six.  Dr.  Kousse- 
vitzky has  also  benefited  music  by 
commissioning  works  which  might 
otherwise  have  not  been  written,  such 
as  Howard  Hanson's  Romantic  Sym- 
phony. For  Dr.  Koussevitzky's  art  as 
a  conductor  the  author  has  the  highest 
admiration.  "It  takes  a  Koussevitzky," 
he  remarks,  "to  extract  from  the  Or- 
chestra that  famous  Boston  fortissimo, 
brimful  of  brilliant  sonority,  strong  as 
a  thunderclap,  yet  flexible  and  noble 
in  quality  of  sound ;  or  its  counterpart, 
a  pianissimo  like  a  thin  thread  of  shin- 
ing silk,  yet  like  a  nerve,  vibrant  with 
the  breath  of  life."  By  instinct  the 
Boston  conductor  invariably  grasps  the 
fundamental  points  of  any  style.  "It 
is  hardly  possible  to  decide,"  the  author 
writes,  "whether  he  excels  more  in 
German.  Russian,  French,  or  Ameri- 
can music."  Dr.  Koussevitzky  has  em- 
bodied his  social  and  educational  ideals 
in  the  Berkshire  Symphonic  Festivals 
and  the  Berkshire  Music  Center  at 
Tanglewood.  His  aim,  to  quote  his  own 
words,  is  "to  bring  the  wide  masses 
closer  to  music."  (M.  M.) 


Library  Notes 


The  Petition  of  Four 
New  Hampshire  Towns 

T~\IS AGREEMENT  over  property 
3  J  rights  in  New  Hampshire  arose 
early  through  the  uncertain  legality  of 
claims  to  this  territory.  Sir  Ferdinando 
Gorges  was  the  founder  and  president 
of  the  Council  of  New  England  at  Ply- 
mouth, established  in  1620  "for  the 
planting,  ruling,  and  governing"  of  the 
region.  His  friend,  Capt.  John  Mason, 
joined  the  Council  and,  being  enthu- 
siastic about  the  American  colony,  in 
162 1  procured  a  grant  from  it  of  all 
the  land  from  the  river  Naumkeag, 
now  Salem,  to  the  Merrimack.  The  fol- 
lowing year  he  and  Gorges  together 
received  a  grant  of  the  land  between 
the  Merrimack  and  Sagadehock  rivers, 
extending  back  to  "the  great  lakes  and 
river"  of  Canada.  In  1629  the  Council, 
"for  the  better  furnishing  and  further- 
ance of  the  plantations  in  those  parts," 
deeded  to  Capt.  Mason  "all  that  part 
of  the  mainland  in  New  England  lying 
upon  the  sea-coast,  beginning  from  the 
middle  part  of  the  Merrimack  river, 
and  from  thence  to  proceed  northwards 
along  the  sea-coast  to  Piscataqua  riv- 
er." This  included  all  the  intervening 
terrain  for  a  distance  inland  of  sixty 
miles,  "which  said  portions  of  land  .  .  . 
the  said  Captain  John  Mason,  with  the 
consent  of  the  President  and  Council, 
intends  to  name  New  Hampshire." 
The  deed  was  never  confirmed  by  the 
Crown,  nor  were  any  powers  of  gov- 
ernment granted  to  him. 

In  the  next  half  century  settlements 
were  established  there,  the  new  arrivals 
paying  a  small  fee  to  Mason's  agents, 
but  after  his  death  the  property  was 
not  at  once  secured  by  his  'heirs. 
Moreover,  owing  to  the  difficulties 
of  self-government,  the  local  commu- 
nities —  chiefly  the  towns  of  Dover, 
Portsmouth,  Exeter,  and  Hampton  — 
in  1641  formally  joined  the  Massachu- 
setts Bay  Colony. 

In  1675  the  heirs  of  Mason  once 
more  renewed  the  claim  to  his  proper- 
ty. The  King  was  persuaded  to  send 


out  an  agent,  Edward  Randolph,  to  in- 
vestigate the  matter.  The  man  met 
with  hostility  from  the  Massachusetts 
Governor,  John  Leverett,  and  so  he 
deliberately  misrepresented  the  facts. 
He  reported  upon  his  return  that  the 
people  of  New  Hampshire  longed  for 
a  separation  from  Massachusetts. 
Thereupon  the  Bay  Colony  hastily 
sent  out  two  agents  of  its  own,  Wil- 
liam Stoughton  and  Peter  Bulkeley, 
to  present  the  case  to  England. 

Fifteen  months*  later  the  colonists 
sent  an  appeal  to  London,  reviewing 
the  history  of  the  case.  A  contempor- 
ary unsigned  copy  of  this,  which  may 
have  been  on  file  there,  has  recently 
been  acquired  by  the  Library.  No  men- 
tion is  made  of  the  body  to  whom  it 
was  addressed,  but  as  there  is  a  refer- 
ence to  such  a  paper  in  the  Acts  of  the 
Privy  Council  for  January  23,  1678,  it 
seems  likely  that  the  colonists  appealed 
to  the  Committee  of  Trade  and  Plan- 
tations, which  was  a  part  of  the  Privy 
Council. 

First  the  writers  discuss  the  early 
settlement  of  the  territory :  "The  whole 
Tract  of  New  England,"  they  state, 
"was  granted  to  40  Persons  Lords  and 
others  by  the  name  of  the  Councill  of 
New  England  Established  at  Ply- 
mouth .  .  .  Mr.  Mason  pretends  to  the 
Soyle  and  Government  of  the  Province 
of  New  Hampshire  in  which  are  the 
Townes  of  Dover,  Portsmouth,  Exeter 
and  Hampton  by  Grant  from  the  said 
Councill."  As  to  their  present  posi- 
tion, they  point  out  that  the  whole 
matter  was  referred  to  the  Chief  Jus- 
tices, who  "after  a  solemne  Heareing 
of  Councell  on  all  sides  Reported  unto 
his  Majesty  that  as  to  the  Right  of 
the  Soyle  of  the  Provinces  of  New 
Hampshire  and  Mayne  they  could  give 
noe  Opinion."  Regarding  Mason's 
rights,  they  affirm  that  "Theire  Lord- 
ships and  indeed  his  owne  Councill 
agreed  he  had  none." 

Finally  the  colonists  set  forth  their 
request  —  namely  that  the  King  con- 
tinue the  territory  under  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Massachusetts  Colony. 


69 


70 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


They  advanced  the  following  reasons: 

1.  For  that  the  Inhabitants  of  those 
ffower  Towns  desire  it; 

2.  For  that  the  Government  there- 
of is  vested  in  his  Majesty,  neither  the 
said  Company  nor  Mr.  Mason  haveing 
Right  thereto; 

3.  That  a  Government  on  the  place  is 
absolutely  necessary  for  prevention  of 
distraction  among  themselves  and  vio- 
lence from  abroad ; 

4.  That  noe  other  Government  can 
soe  conveniently  protect  and  Governe 
them  without  oppression  to  the  In- 
habitants or  Charge  to  his  Majesty. 

No  reply  was  received  for  two 
years.  At  last  Charles  II  decided  to 
divide  the  two  areas.  On  September 
18,  1679,  was  established  a  separate 
authority  over  New  Hampshire.  A 
president  and  council  were  appointed 
to  rule  it  as  a  royal  province.        T.  C. 

The  First  Poems  of 
Robert  Bridges 

ALONG  span  of  years  elapsed  be- 
tween the  shy  appearance  of  a 
first  volume  of  Poems  by  Robert 
Bridges,  "Batchelor  of  Arts  in  the  Uni- 
versity of  Oxford,"  in  1873  and  the 
publication  of  The  Testament  of  Beauty, 
the  late  poet  laureate's  most  admired 
work,  on  his  eighty-fifth  birthday  in 
1929.  Of  the  first  volume,  published  in 
London  by  Basil  Montagu  Pickering, 
the  Library  has  recently  acquired  a 
copy  [*A.  1 157.9].  Although  the  little 
book  was  favorably  reviewed  by  An- 
drew Lang,  the  poet  refrained  from 
publishing  anything  more  than  ephemera 
under  his  name  for  the  next  ten  years. 
If  one  may  give  credence  to  a  pen- 
cilled note  on  the  inside  cover  of  the 
Library's  copy,  the  book  was  sup- 
pressed, probably  because  the  poet 
later  felt  that  this  first  gathering  of 
verse  was  lacking  in  originality. 

Most  of  the  poems  were  written  be- 
tween the  summers  of  1872  and  1873, 
although  three  are  dated  from  the  late 
sixties.  The  book  is  dedicated  to  Harry 
Ellis  Wooldridge,  a  connoisseur  of  art, 
music,  and  literature,  who  became 
Slade  Professor  of  Fine  Arts  at  Ox- 
ford. Bridges  spent  half  of  1874  with 


Wooldridge  in  Italy,  and  afterwards 
made  his  home  with  him  for  a  time  in 
London.  About  twenty  years  later 
they  collaborated  in  compiling  the 
Yattcndon  Hymnal. 

The  poems,  which  have  no  titles  ex- 
cept such  as  designate  their  forms, 
seem  to  have  been  largely  exercises — 
though  graceful  and  generally  success- 
ful ones — in  prosody.  The  poet  evi- 
dently took  pleasure  in  feminine  rhymes 
— perhaps  as  a  result  of  his  intensive 
study  of  German. 

The  Library's  copy  bears  the  ex- 
libris  of  the  publisher  Elkin  Mathews. 
On  the  fly-leaf  is  pasted  a  letter  ad- 
dressed to  him,  dated  from  Yattendon 
on  December  18,  1895,  in  which  Bridges 
requests  to  have  a  copy  of  Laurence 
Binyon's  new  volume  of  poems  sent 
"when  it  is  out."  He  probably  referred 
to  The  Praise  of  Life,  1896,  the  fourth 
book  of  the  poet  and  art  critic  who 
died  in  1943.  m.  M. 

The  Last  Days  of  Pompeii 

WHILE  he  was  tavelling  in  1833 
for  his  health,  a  picture  of 
doomed  Pompeii  at  the  Brera  Gallery  in 
Milan  struck  the  fancy  of  Edward  Bul- 
wer-Lytton.  He  was  aroused  to  visit  the 
ruined  city  and  plunge  into  research 
there.  The  result  was  The  Last  Days 
of  Pompeii,  printed  in  three  volumes 
in  the  early  autumn  of  1834.  The  pub- 
lisher, Richard  Bentley,  is  distinguished 
for  his  improvements  of  type  and  for- 
mat at  a  period  of  almost  uniform  me- 
diocrity in  English  printing.  The  copy 
which  the  Library  has  recently  ac- 
quired is  in  the  original  gray  boards 
with  the  labels  intact. 

Since  the  appearance  of  Falkland, 
his  first  novel,  in  1827,  fame  had  come 
to  the  author,  in  years  which  saw  the 
publication  of  a  number  of  novels,  in- 
cluding Devereux,  Paul  Clifford,  and 
Eugene  Aram,  besides  essays  and  poet- 
ry. The  novel,  although  bright  in  tone, 
had  been  composed  during  the  first 
of  the  clashes  which  wrecked  Bulwer's 
marriage.  Scott's  influence  upon  him 
is  evident,  although  Bulwer  main- 
tained that  the  Waverley  novels  were 
merely  "picturesque,"  whereas  his  own 
were  "intellectual."  He  dedicated  the 


LIBRARY  NOTES 


7* 


work  to  Sir  William  Gell,  an  archaeo- 
logist resident  at  Naples,  who  guided 
his  preliminary  studies.  In  a  preface 
of  twelve  pages,  he  explains  his  style, 
and  claims  that  no  one  has  yet  pro- 
duced a  successful  tale  of  the  classical 
period. 

The  book  was  received  with  im- 
mense enthusiasm.  Isaac  Disraeli,  the 
father  of  Lord  Beaconsfield,  expressed 
the  general  feeling:  "Your  last  work," 
he  wrote  to  the  novelist,  "is  the  finest 
and  the  most  interesting  we  have  had 
for  many  years."  The  author  was  as- 
tonished. "It  is  no  great  favourite  of 
mine,"  he  informed  a  friend.  "I  could 
not  be  egotistical  enough  in  it,  and 
while  I  wrote  it  I  was  longing  for  a 
confessional."  And  later  he  admitted: 
"I  have  always  found  that  one  is  never 
so  successful  as  where  one  is  least 
sanguine.  I  fell  into  the  deepest  des- 
pondency about  Pompeii."  But  if  the 
novel  did  not  please  him,  with  his 
readers  the  case  was  far  different. 

A  revised  edition  of  Pompeii  was 
produced  in  the  following  year.  In- 
terest in  it  abroad  was  awakened  be- 
cause pirated  editions  of  Bulwer's 
earlier  novels  had  had  large  sales; 
translations  into  French  and  Italian 
were  published  in  1836.  Finally,  owing 
to  the  book,  the  age  of  Rome  became  a 
popular  setting  with  writers  and  count- 
less new  pilgrims  visited  the  city.    T.  C. 

American  Jewry  in  the  'Sixties 

ISRAEL  JOSEPH  BENJAMIN,  born 
in  1 8 18  in  Moldavia,  adopted  his  last 
name  after  Benjamin  of  Tudela,  the  Jew- 
ish Marco  Polo  of  the  twelfth  century, 
obviously  because  he  wished  to  emulate 
him.  Two  motives,  as  he  explains,  deter- 
mined his  explorations — a  native  fond- 
ness for  geography,  and  a  strong  desire 
to  seek  out  his  coreligionists.  It  was 
this  spirit  that  made  him  search  for 
the  Lost  Ten  Tribes  of  Israel  in  Asia 
and  Africa.  Having  published  the  re- 
sults of  his  eight  years  of  travel,  he  de- 
cided, before  resuming  his  Oriental 
researches,  to  journey  through  Ameri- 
ca. He  arrived  in  New  York  in  July 
1859  and  embarked  on  his  return  voy- 
age in  March  1862. 

His  indefatigable  travels  and  sharp 


observations  form  the  contents  of  the 
two-volume  work,  Reise  in  den  ostlichen 
Staaten  der  Union  und  San  Francisco 
[**G.309.2ii],  privately  printed  in 
Hannover  in  1862,  with  the  endorse- 
ment of  Alexander  von  Humboldt  and 
other  scholars.  The  first  volume  be- 
gins with  New  York  and  discusses 
general  American  characteristics,  but 
is  given  over  mostly  to  California.  The 
second  volume  describes  the  interior 
of  California,  the  north-west,  and  final- 
ly the  deserts  and  the  land  of  the  Mor- 
mons. The  work,  readable  and  abound- 
ing in  information,  is  valuable  chiefly 
for  the  detailed  histories  of  the  Jewish 
congregations  in  the  United  States. 

The  author  was  critical  of  American 
life,  particularly  of  American  women. 
He  attributed  the  ills  he  observed  to 
the  frantic  pursuit  of  money  and  to 
the  lack  of  thorough  scholarship.  Two 
years  after  his  return  to  Europe, 
though  honored  by  princes,  he  died 
exhausted  and  poor.  M.  M. 

Brigham  Young 
to  a  Prospective  Convert 

THE  Library's  original  material  re- 
lating to  the  Mormons  includes  a 
copy  of  the  first  edition  of  The  Book  of 
Mormon,  Palmyra  1830,  and  the  July  3, 
1844,  issue  of  the  Nauvoo  Neighbor,  in 
which  the  arrest  and  death  of  Joseph 
Smith  are  described.  A  recent  addition 
is  a  letter  by  Brigham  Young,  the  second 
great  figure  of  this  religious  sect.  Writ- 
ing from  "Great  Salt  Lake  City"  on 
January  9,  1865,  to  George  D.  Eldridge, 
of  Skowhegan,  Maine,  who  had  inquired 
as  to  how  he  could  obtain  a  copy  of  The 
Book  of  Mormon,  Young  gave  the  address 
of  one  of  the  Elders  of  the  Church  in 
New  York.  Then  he  continued: 

"We  are  desirous  that  our  principles 
should  be  investigated  by  all  men,  and 
for  this  we  send  our  Missionaries  forth 
to  the  people.  We  know  that  the  fullness 
of  the  Everlasting  Gospel  has  been  re- 
stored to  the  earth  with  its  gifts  and 
blessings,  and  the  power  and  authority 
to  administer  the  ordinances  thereof, 
and  of  these  things  we  boldly  testify  in 
all  solemnity." 

Brigham  Young  was  himself  the  most 
successful  of  the  Mormon  missionaries. 


72 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


In  1839  he  even  went  to  England  to 
preach.  During  the  first  decade  of  the 
church's  establishment  in  Utah  no  less 
than  seventeen  thousand  converts  flocked 
there  from  abroad.  By  1865,  the  date  of 
the  above  letter,  the  church  had  changed 
from  a  loosely  formed  hierarchy  to  a  solid 
fiscal  and  social  organization.         T.  C. 

Lowell  Lectures 

THE  course  of  eight  illustrated  lec- 
tures on  The  Unsolved  Problems 
of  Astronomy,  under  the  direction  of 
Harlow  Shapley,  Ph.D.,  Director  of 
the  Harvard  College  Observatory,  will 
be  continued  on  Tuesdays  and  Fridays 
at  eight  o'clock  in  the  evening,  as  fol- 
lows : 

7.  Tues.,  Feb.  4.  Stellar  Variability. 
By  Cecilia  H.  Payne-Gaposchkin,  Ph.D., 
Phillips  Astronomer,  Harvard  Univer- 
sity. 

8.  Fri.,  Feb.  7.  The  Universe  of  Gal- 
axies. By  Harlow  Shapley,  Ph.D.,  Di- 
rector of  the  Harvard  College  Obser- 
vatory. 

A  course  of  eight  lectures  illustrated 
by  a  chorus  of  Harvard  and  Radcliffe 
students  and  members  of  the  New 
England  Conservatory  Orchestra,  on 
Choral  Music  of  the  Renaissance  and  the 
Baroque,  by  G.  Wallace  Woodworth, 
A.M.,  Professor  of  Music,  Harvard 
University. 

Mondays  and  Thursdays  at  five 
o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  beginning 
Monday,  February  10. 

1.  Mon.,  Feb.  10.  The  Renaissance 
in  Music.  Gothic  inheritances.  Basic 
principles  of  structure  and  texture. 
The  new  spirit  and  the  first  master, 
Josquin  des  Pres. 

2.  Thurs.,  Feb.  13.  The  Golden  Age. 
Palestrina,  Lassus,  Victoria. 

3.  Mon.,  Feb.  17.  Tudor  Church 
Music.  Thomas  Tallis,  William  Byrd. 
The  Dutch  internationalist,  Sweelinck. 

4.  Thurs.,  Feb.  20.  Italian  Madrigal, 
French  Chanson,  German  Lied. 


5.  Mon.,  Feb.  24.  The  English  Mad- 
rigal. 

6.  Thurs.,  Feb.  27.  Renaissance  to 
Baroque.  Venice,  San  Marco,  and  Gio- 
vanni Gabrieli.  Instruments  and  voices. 
Sacred  symphony  and  ecclesiastical 
concerto.  The  convergence  of  the  Italian 
and  German  streams.  Heinrich  Schutz. 

Lectures  and  Concerts 

LIFE  in  French  Literary  Circles. 
Simone  de  Beauvoir,  professor  of 
philosophy,  writer,  and  playwright. 
3.30  Sun.,  Feb.  2. 

The  Great  Lincoln  Collections  and 
What  Happened  to  Them.  J.  L.  McCori- 
son,  Jr.,  Regional  Director  of  the  Na- 
tional Conference  of  Christians  and 
Jews.  8.00  Thurs.,  Feb.  3. 

Contemporary  American  Poets.  Wil- 
liam Stanley  Braithwaite,  author  and 
anthologist.  8.00  Sun.,  Feb.  9. 

The  Making  of  a  Dry  Point.  Illus- 
trated. Arthur  W.  Heintzelman,  N.A., 
Keeper  of  Prints,  Boston  Public  Li- 
brary. 8.00  Mon.,  Feb.  10. 

Speech.  Dr.  Delbert  Moyer  Staley, 
President  and  founder  of  the  Staley 
College  of  the  Spoken  Word.  8.00 
Thurs.,  Feb.  13. 

The  Dream  of  the  French  Cathedrals. 
Illustrated.  J.  David  Townsend,  lec- 
turer, writer,  and  traveler.  8.00  Mon., 
Feb.  17. 

Discovery  at  Walden.  Illustrated. 
Roland  Wells  Robbins,  poet  and  lec- 
turer. 8.00  Thurs.,  Feb.  20. 

The  French  Press.  Jean  E.  Lagrange, 
assistant  North  American  manager  for 
Agence  France  Presse.  3.30  Sun.,  Feb. 

The  Making  of  a  Lithograph.  Illus- 
trated. Arthur  W.  Heintzelman,  N.A., 
Keeper  of  Prints,  Boston  Public  Li- 
brary. 8.00  Mon.,  Feb.  24. 

15,000  Miles  in  a  Modem  Covered 
Wagon.  Illustrated.  Stewart  Anderson, 
lecturer.  8.00  Thurs.,  Feb.  27. 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 

Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

** 
* 

This  list  should  be  used  in  conjunction  with  Books  Current,  c 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
1943.  Books  Current  is  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  and  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  are  available  for  the  whole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  are  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  the 
Business  Branch;  however,  they  may  be  borrozved  through  the  various 
branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


Bibliography.  Libraries 

Harrison,  Joseph  L.  Forbes  library,  the  half 
century,  1894-1944,  with  a  sketch  of 
Charles  Edward  Forbes.  Northampton 
[Mass.]  Printed  for  the  Trustees.  1945. 
55  PP.  Plates.  Z733.N8654 

Oxford  university  press.  The  first  minute 
book  of  the  delegates  of  the  Oxford 
university  press,  1668-1756.  Edited  by 
Strickland  Gibson  .  .  .  and  John  Johnson. 
Oxford.  1943.  xxxii,  104  pp. 

*Z232.0  98  O  97 
"Books  mentioned  in  the  minutes":  pp.  [72]-8S. 

Palestine  and  Zionism,  v.  1-  Jan./March 
1946-  A  bimonthly  bibliography  of  books, 
pamphlets  and  periodicals.  New  York, 
Zionist  Archives  and  Library.  [1946- 

*Z637i.R4P3 

"Supersedes  the  two  previous  lists  issued  by  the 
Zionist  archives  and  library  namely.  'Recent  ma- 
terial on  Zionism  and  Palestine'  and  'Articles  on 
Zionism  and  Palestine  in  current  periodicals.' " 

Polish  Roman  Catholic  union  of  America, 
Archives  and  museum.  Polonica  in  Eng- 
lish; annotated  catalogue  of  the  Archives 
and  museum  of  the  Polish  Roman  Catho- 
lic union  .  .  .  By  Alphonse  S.  Wolanin. 
Chicago,  Polish  Roman  Catholic  Union 
of  America.  1945.  186  pp.  Illus.  *Z2525.P53 

Powers,  Mary  Luella,  Sister.  The  Catholic 
booklist,  1942-1945.  River  Forest,  111.. 
Rosary  College.  1945.  101  pp.  *Z7837.P7 

U.  S.  Library  of  Congress,  Subject  catalog- 
ing division.  Outline  of  the  Library  of 
Congress  classification.  Revised  and  en- 
larged edition  of  "Outline  scheme  of 
classes."  Washington.  1942.  22  pp. 

Z696.U4  O  1942 

Biography 

Brent,  Harrison.  Pauline  Bonaparte,  a 
woman  of  affairs.  Toronto,  Rinehart. 
[1946.]  viii,  279  pp.  DC216.87.B7 

Colette,  Sidonie  Gabrielle.  Journal  a  rebours. 
Paris.  [1941.]  [7]-2l5  pp.  PQ2605.O  28J6 
Sketch  in  the  form  of  a  "diary  in  reverse,"  of 
which  the  fir6t  entry  is  dated  "the  end  of  June, 
1940." 


Diary  of  a  public  man,  The,  and  A  page  of 
political  correspondence,  Stanton  to  Buch- 
anan; foreword  by  Carl  Sandburg;  pre- 
fatory notes  by  F.  Lauriston  Bullard. 
New  Brunswick,  Rutgers  Univ.  Press. 
1946.   ix,   137  PP-  E440.5.D55  1946 

The  anonymous  diary  was  first  published  in  the 
North  American  Review,  August  through  Novem- 
ber. 1879,  and  A  page  of  political  corrtspondence 
appeared  in  the  November,  1879,  issue. 

Fisher,  Anne  Benson.  No  more  a  stranger. 
Stanford  Univ.  [1946.]  265  pp  PR5495.F5 

A  story  of  Robert  Louis  Stevenson  in  Monterey, 
and  his  romance  with  Fanny  Osbourne. 

Gysin,  Brion.  To  master  —  a  long  goodnight; 
the  story  of  Uncle  Tom,  a  historical  nar- 
rative. New  York,  Creative  Age  Press. 
[1946.]  276  pp.  E444.H526G9 
Bibliography:  pp.  271-274. 

Harmon,  Nolan  Bailey.  The  famous  case  of 
Myra  Clark  Gaines.  Louisiana  State  Univ. 
1946.  xi,  481  pp.  F379.N5H3 

The  lives  of  Daniel  Clark,  New  Orleans  merchant, 
and  his  daughter  Myra,  whose  claim  to  his  estate 
was  reviewed  by  the  Supreme  Court  eleven  times. 

LaVarende,  Jean  de.  Guillaume  le  batard 
conquerant.  [Paris.]  1946.  421  pp.  Illus. 

DA197.L3 

Treats  of  William  the  Conqueror,  i027?-io87. 

Luz  y  Cabeilero,  Jose  Cipriano  de  la,  1800- 
1862.  De  la  vida  intima.  [La  Habana.] 
1945-  F1783.L93 

Contents.  —  1.  Epistolario  y  diarios. 

Whitehill,  Walter  Muir.  William  Crownin- 
shield  Endicott.  Salem,  Peabody  Museum. 
1938.  8  pp.  CT275.E58W4 

Williams,  Gertrude  Marvin.  Priestess  of  the 
occult,  Madame  Blavatsky.  Knopf.  1946. 
x,  345,  ixpp.  Plates.  BP585.B6W5 
The  picturesque  career  of  Helena  Retrovna  Bla- 
vatsky, founder  of  the  Theosophical  Society. 

Woodgate,  Mildred  Violet.  The  Abbe  Edge- 
worth  (1745-1807).  Longmans,  Green. 
1946.  xii,  202  pp.  DC137.5.E4W6 

Zweig,  Friderike.  Stefan  Zweig.  Crowell. 
[1946.]  viii,  2-77  pp.  PT2653.W42Z9 
Memoirs  of  Stefan  Zweig,  who  took  his  life  in 
exile  in  Brazil  in  1942,  by  his  iirst  wife  and  com- 
panion of  his  years  of  success. 


73 


74 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Business 

These  books  are  to  be  obtained  at  the 
Business  Branch,  20  City  Hall  Ave. 
Abbott,  Charles  Cortcz.  Management  of  the 
federal  debt.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  194  pp. 

NBS 

Abraham,  Willard.  Get  the  job.  Chicago, 
Science  Research  Associates.  1946.  798  pp. 

NBS 

Aeronautical  engineering  catalog.  2d  edition. 

1945.  New  York,  Institute  of  the  Aero- 
nautical Sciences.  1945.  644  pp. 

**TL5i4.A25 

American  blue  book  of  funeral  directors;  8th 
edition.  1946/47.  New  York,  Kates-Boyls- 
ton  Publications.  1946.  500  pp. 

**RA622.A7Asi 

American  institute  of  real  estate  appraisers. 
Roster  of  members.  2d  edition.  Chicago, 
American  Institute  of  Real  Estate  Ap- 
praisers. 1946.  231  pp.  **HD25i.A5i 

Atkins,  Willard  E.,  and  others.  The  regulation 
of  the  security  markets.  Brookings  Inst. 

1946.  126  pp.  NBS 
Beling,  Oscar.  Profitable  insurance  agency 

management.  Prentice-Hall.  1946.  375  pp. 

NBS 

Better  shipping  manual  7th  edition.  1946. 
New  York,  Shipping  Management.  1946. 
626  pp.  NBS 

Bigham,  Truman  C.  Transportation  principles 
and  problems.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  626 
pp.  NBS 

Burger,  Samuel.  Careers  in  aviation.  New 
York,  Greenberg.  1946.  209  pp.  NBS 

Candy  industry  catalog  and  formula  book, 
1946/47;  edited  by  the  editors  of  Candy 
industry.  New  York,  Food  Trade  Journals. 
1946.  246  pp.  **TX7gi.C2i 

Carey,  John  L.  Professional  ethics  of  public 
accounting.  American  Inst,  of  Account- 
ants. 1946.  136  pp.  NBS 

Chain  store  age.  Directory  of  manufacturers. 
1946.  New  York,  Lebhar-Friedman  Pub- 
lications. 1946.  418  pp.  **Ti2.C34 

Chayka,  Louis.  Inventing  for  profit.  Bruce 
Humphries.  1946.  205  pp.  NBS 

Chemical  engineering  catalog.  1946/47.  31st 
edition.  New  York,  Reinhold  Pub.  Corp. 
1946.  1768  pp.  **TPi57.C5i 

Clough,  Shepard  A.  A  century  of  American 
life  insurance;  a  history  of  the  Mutual 
life  insurance  company  of  New  York  1843- 
1943-  Columbia  Univ.  1946.  402  pp.  NBS 

Dalgin,  Ben.  Advertising  production.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1946.  243  pp.  NBS 

Davison's  textile  blue  book.  v.  81.  1946. 
Ridgevvood,  N.  J.,  Davison  Pub.  Co.  1946. 
i-!42pp.  **TSi3i2.D26 

DuBois,  John  H.  Plastics.  3d  edition.  Ameri- 
can Technical  Soc.  1945.  447  pp.  NBS 

Film  daily.  Film  daily  year  book  of  motion 
pictures.  28th  annual  edition.  1946.  New 
York,  The  Film  Daily.  1946.  1056  pp. 

**PNi998.F48 

Financial  post  survey  of  corporate  securities. 
1946.  Montreal,  MacLean-Hunter  Pub. 
Co.  1946.  236  pp.  **HG496i.F49 


Finland.  Tilastollisen  paatoimiston  julkaisema. 
Suomen  tilastollinen  vuosikirja.  v.  42. 
1944/45.  Helsingfors.  1946.  368  pp. 

**HAi44i.A3 

Hamrin,  S.  A.  4-square  planning  for  your 
career.  Science  Research  Associates.  1946. 
200  pp.  NBS 

Handbook  of  the  Canadian  customs  tariff 
and  excise  duties.  1946.  Montreal,  McMul- 
Hn  Publishers.  1946.  1213  pp. 

**HJ6og2.A6H23 

Hansen,  Alvin  H.  America's  role  in  the  world 
economy.  Penguin-Books.  1945,  1946.  170 
PP-  NBS 

International  labour  office.  Inter- American 
committee  on  social  insurance  institutions. 
Montreal,  International  Labour  Office. 
1945-  187  PP-  **HD7i2i,I6i 

Jewelers'  handbook.  1946/47.  Providence, 
Frost.   1946.   144  PP-  **TS758J59 

Lynch,  David.  The  concentration  of  eco- 
nomic power.  Columbia  Univ.  1946.  423 
pp.  NBS 

Morris,  Mark,  editor.  Career  opportunities. 
Washington,  Progress  Press.  1946.  354 
PP.  NBS 

NRFA  buyer,  The;  1946  directory  issue  of 
the  National  furniture  review.  Chicago, 
National  Retail  Furniture  Ass'n.  1946.  536 
pp.  **TS842.Ns7 

National  council  of  women  of  Canada. 
Abridged  report  of  the  National  council 
of  the  women  of  Canada.  1946.  Ottawa. 
1946.  200  pp.  **HQigo7.N27 

Neuschel,  Richard  F.,  and  H.  T.  Johnson. 
How  to  take  physical  inventory.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1946.  I59PP-  NBS 
Industrial  organization  and  management  seriei. 

Pan  American  union,  Division  of  agricultural 
cooperation.  Tentative  directory  of  agri- 
cultural periodicals,  societies,  experiment 
stations,  and  schools  in  Latin  America. 
Pan  American  LTnion.  1945.  90  pp. 

**Z6956.L3.Pi8a 

Paper  and  pulp  mill  catalogue.  1946/47  edition. 
Chicago,  Fritz  Publications.  1946.  508  pp. 

**TSl205.P2I 

Plating  and  finishing  guidebook.  1946.  15th 
edition.  New  York,  Metal  Industry  Pub. 
Co.  1946.  266  pp.  **TS67o.C44 

Shadid,  M.  A.  Principles  of  cooperative  medi- 
cine; 2d  edition.  Cooperative  League  of 
the  U.  S.  A.  1946.  125  pp.  NBS 

Spectator  financial  and  underwriting  an- 
alysis of  casualty  insurance  companies  as 
of  Jan.  1,  1946.  Philadelphia,  Spectator. 
1946.48  pp.  **HG8523.l59  v.2  pt.2 

United  Nations  who's  who  in  government 
and  industry.  1945.  London,  Allied  Publi- 
cations. 1945.  240  pp.  **CT6goo.U59 

Who's  who  in  Latin  America.  Part  I.  Mexi- 
co. 3d  edition.  Stanford  Univ.  1946.  130 
pp.  **CT5oi.W63 

Wick,  Carl  I.  Ocean  harvest;  the  story  of 
commercial  fishing  in  Pacific  coast  waters. 
Seattle,  Superior  Pub.  Co.  1946.  185  pp.  NBS 

Women's  wear  daily  ready  to  wear  directory, 
v.  36,  no.  2.  Fall,  1946.  New  York,  Fair- 
child  Pub.  Co.  1946.  576  pp.  **TT495.Fi6w 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


Drama.  Stage 

Agate,  James  Evershed.  Ego  7;  even  more 
of  the  autobiography  of  James  Agate. 
London,  Harrap.  [1945.]  322  pp.  Plates. 

PR6001.G3Z59 

Iu  diary  form.  Deals  mostly  with  drama  and  the 
theatre. 

Best  film  plays,  1945-  New  York,  Crown 
Publishers.  1946-      PN1997.A1B37  1945 

Twysden,  A.  E.  Alexandra  Danilova.  London, 
Beaumont.  [I945-]  I/5PP-  GV1785.D24T9 

Alexandra  Danilova,  the  leading  lady  of  the  "Bal- 
let Russe  de  Monte  Carlo"  was  the  last  ballerina 
of  the   Diaghilev  Company. 

Vicente,  Gil,  ca.  1470  —  ca.  1536.  Obras  com- 
pletas;  com  prefacio  e  notas  do  prof.  Mar- 
ques Braga.  Lisboa.  [1942-1944.]  6  v. 

PQ9251.A1  1942 

Bibliografia :  v.  6,  pp.  3^7-336- 


Economics 

Abbott,  Charles  Cortez.  Management  of  the 
federal  debt.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  ix,  194 
PP-  9336.73AH5 

Conant,  W.  H.  Business  administration;  the 
art  of  management.  Gregg  Pub.  Co.  1945. 
vi,  339  PP-  Plates.  9381.A173 

Crum,  W.  L.,  and  Joseph  A.  Schumpeter. 
Rudimentary  mathematics  for  economists 
and  statisticians.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xi, 
183  pp  Illus.  9310.2A190 

Fellner,  William  John.  Monetary  policies  and 
full  employment.  Univ.  of  California.  1946. 
xx,  268  pp.  9332-573A62 

Gallahue,  Edward  Eugene.  Some  factors  in 
the  development  of  market  standards  with 
special  reference  to  food,  drugs,  and  cer- 
tain other  household  wares.  Catholic  Univ. 
of  America.  1942.  [i.  e.  1943.]  xiii,  209  pp. 
Illus.  HF5415.G3 

Hunnicutt,  Benjamin  H.  Brazil  looks  forward. 
Rio  de  Janeiro.  1945.  xvi,  522  pp.  Illus. 

F2508.H88 

Deals  largely  with  the  agricultural,  mineral,  and 
coal  products  of  Brazil,  but  considers  also  cultural 
developments.  The  author  has  spent  thirty-eight 
years  in  Brazil,  and  in  1934  became  president  of 
Mackenzie  College  in  Sao  Paulo. 

Katona,  George.  Price  controls  and  business; 
field  studies  among  producers  and  distri- 
butors of  consumer  goods  in  the  Chicago 
area,  1942-44.  Bloomington,  Ind.,  Principia 
Press.  1945.  xi,  246  pp.  9338.573A127 

Maxwell,  James  A.  The  fiscal  impact  of 
federalism  in  the  United  States.  Harvard. 
1946.  xvi,  427PP-  9336.'73Aii7 

Miller,  Raymond  W.  Keepers  of  the  cor- 
porate conscience.  New  York,  Island 
Press  Coop.  1946.  xv,  19  pp.  9338.7A176 
Address  given  upon  receiving  the  nineteen  forty- 
five  award  given  by  American  council  on  public 
relations  "to  the  individual  contributing  most  to 
the  educational  and  scientific  development  of  public 
relations." 

National  association  of  assessing  officers. 

Construction  and  use  of  tax  maps  .  .  .  Chi- 
cago. [I937-]  51  PP-  Ulus.  9333-3AU5 
"This  study  was  prepared  by  Ronald  B.  Welch, 
the  association's  research  consultant." — Foreword. 


75 

Peters,  Clarence  A.,  compiler.  International 
trade:  cooperative  or  competitive?  Wil- 
son. 1946.  306  pp.  *5598.3ig.i9  no.i 

Bibliography:  pp.  [2931-306. 

Shaw,  Elton  Raymond.  The  national  debt 
and  our  future;  a  look  ahead  on  the  Chase- 
Hansen-Berle  superhighway  to  deficit 
spending  prosperity.  Washington,  Shaw. 
[1946.]  189  pp.  9336.73A114 

"Deficit  spending  and  private  enterprise  ...  by 
Dr.  L.  Albert  Hahn":  pp.  [1491-189. 

U.  S.  Laws,  statutes,  etc.  The  United  States 
housing  act  of  1937  <as  amended>  and 
provisions  of  other  laws  and  executive 
documents  pertaining  to  the  United  States 
housing  authority.  Federal  works  agency. 
Washington.  1939.  v,  69  pp.  *933i.8373A72 

Wessels,  O.  Richard.  Small  business  as  a 
career.  Syracuse  Univ.  1946.  200  pp.  Illus. 

HF5351.W38 

'  [Based  on  a]  series  of  panel  discussions  sponsored 
by  the  Syracuse  university  extension  school  and 
the  New  York  state  department  of  commerce." — 
Acknowledgement. 

Wheelock,  Love  joy  &  company,  inc.  100 
years  of  continuous  service  to  industry. 
1846-1946.  [Cambridge,  Mass.?  1946.]  45, 
[2]  pp.  Illus.  *9338.4igAg4 

Woolf,  James  Davis.  Advertising  to  the  mass 
market.  Ronald  Press.  [1946.]  vii,  133  pp. 
Illus.  .  HF5823.W626 

Education 

Broady,  Lois  Pedersen,  and  Esther  French. 
Health  and  physical  education  in  small 
schools.  Introduction  by  Elizabeth  Hal- 
sey.  Univ.  of  Nebraska.  [1946.]  343  pp. 
Illus.  GV362.B7  1946 

Chamber  of  commerce  of  the  United  States 
of  America,  Committee  on  education.  Edu- 
cation, an  investment  in  people.  Commit- 
tee on  education,  United  States  Chamber 
of  Commerce.  [1944?]  55  pp.  LA230.C5 
"The  major  part  ...  is  devoted  to  a  visual  pre- 
sentation of  the  study  in  the  form  of  charts,  each 
accompanied  by  a  brief  text  emphasizing  salient 
points.  The  first  few  charts  present  state  by  state 
comparisons  of  adult  educational  level,  enroll- 
ments in  schools,  current  expense  of  school  sys- 
tems, teachers'  salaries,  and  sources  of  school 
funds.  The  remaining  charts  are  devoted  to  the 
relation  of  the  adult  educational  level  to  various 
indices  of  economic  well-being." — Introduction. 

Leidecker,  Kurt  F.  Yankee  teacher;  the  life 
of  William  Torrey  Harris.  New  York, 
Philosophical  Library.  [1946.]  xx,  648  pp. 

LB875.H25L4 

Dr  Harris  (1835-1909)  was  an  educator  and 
philosopher,  and  the  Chief  Editor  of  Webster's  New 
International  Dictionary. 

"The  history  of  American  education  and  American 
contributions  to  philosophical  thought  cannot  be 
understood  or  estimated  without  knowledge  of  the 
life  work  of  Dr.  William  Torrey  Harris." — Fore- 
word by  Nicholas  Murray  Butler. 

Muscalus,  John  Anthony.  The  use  of  bank- 
ing enterprises  in  the  financing  of  public 
education,  1796-1866.  Philadelphia.  1945. 
202  pp.  LB2825.M8 

Robinson,  Helen  Mansfield.  Why  pupils  fail 
in  reading.  Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1946.]  xiii, 
257PP.  LB1573.R57 
A  study  of  causes  and  remedial  treatment. 
Bibliography:  pp.  [2391-249. 


76 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Fine  Arts 

Antiques.  Crafts 
Clouzot,  Henri.  Ferronnerie  moderne;  nou- 
velle  serie.  Paris.  [1939?]  32  plates. 

In  portfolio.  *8l8oB.I07 

McBride,  Robert  Medell,  editor.  A  treasury  of 
antiques.  McBride.  [1946.]  160  pp.  Illus. 

8161.08-141 

Rollins,  Alice  R.  Antiques  for  the  home. 
Harper.  [1946.]  xi,  232  pp.  8161.08-142 

Bibliography:  pp.  2*1-230. 

Architecture 

Forman,     Robert.     Architectural  models. 

Studio.  [1946.]  63  pp.  Illus.  8101.07-no 
Williams,    Henry    Lionel,   and    Ottalie  K. 

Williams.  Old  American  houses  and  how 

to  restore  them  <i70o-i850>  Doubleday. 

1946.  239  pp.  Plates.  8117.02-124 

Illustrations 

Bible,  New  Testament,  Matthew  V-V1I. 
The  sermon  on  the  Mount;  Everett 
Shinn  illustrated  edition.  Winston.  [1946.] 
139]  PP-  Colored  illus.  *4og4.04-i2o 

Dance  of  death,  printed  at  Paris  in  1490;  a 
reproduction  made  from  the  copy  in  the 
Lessing  J.  Rosenwald  collection,  Library 
of  Congress.  [Washington.  1945.]  ix, 
[31]  PP.  IHus.  *4093.04-i04 
Introduction  signed:  William  M.  Ivins,  jr. 
"This  facsimile  of  the  Dance  of  death,  printed  by 
Guyot  Marchand  at  Paris,  1490,  was  printed  by 
the  United  States  Government  printing  office, 
Washington,  D.  C.,  and  published  by  the  Rare 
books  division  of  the  Library  of  Congress." 

Friend,  Donald.  Painter's  journal,  written 
and  illustrated  by  Donald  Friend.  Sydney. 
[1946.]  144  PP-  4097.09-136 

Present  day  art  in  Australia  series. 

Painting.  Drawing 

Barr,  Alfred  H.,  Jr.  Picasso;  fifty  years  of 
his  art.  New  York,  Museum  of  Modern 
Art,  distributed  by  Simon  and  Schuster. 

[1946.]  314  pp.  8063.07-846 
Bibliography :  pp.  286-308. 

Gogh,  Vincent  van,  1853-1890.  Vincent  van 
Gogh.  Phaidon  press  edition.  New  York, 
Oxford  Univ.  [1941.]  14,  [4]  pp.  120 
plates.  8063B.551R 
"This  selection  from  van  Gogh's  works  was  made 
by  Ludwig  Goldscheider." 

"The  life  and  work  of  Vincent  van  Gogh"  (pp.  [5]- 
14)   signed:  W.  Uhde. 

Pallucchini,  Rodolfo.  I  disegni  del  Guardi  al 
Museo  Correr  di  Venezia.  Venezia.  [1943.] 
251  pp.  Plates.  *8i4iB.502 
The  drawings  of  Francesco  Guardi,   171 2-1 793. 

Rouart,  Denis.  Degas  a  la  recherche  de  sa 
technique.  Paris.  1945.  7-76  pp.  Plates. 

8063.06-307 

Miscellaneous 

Meredith,  Roy.  Mr.  Lincoln's  camera  man, 
Mathew  B.  Brady.  Scribner.  1946.  xiii,  368 
pp.  Illus.  8147.08-170 


Merida,  Carlos.  Trajes  regionales  mexicanos, 
con  introduccion  y  texto  explicativo  de 
Salvador  Echeverria.  Mexico.  1945.  16  pp. 
25  colored  plates.  *8ig2B.353 
Issued  in  portfolio. 

New  York,  Metropolitan  museum  of  art.  Gar- 
dens as  illustrated  in  prints,  a  picture 
book.  New  York.  1944.  24  plates  on  12 
leaves.  8128.05-104 
Text  signed:  Margaret  Harrington  Daniels. 

Salmi,  Mario.  L'arte  italiana.  Firenze.  1942- 
44.  3  v.  Illus.  4078.07-1 15 

From  the  origins  of  Christian  art  to  modern  art. 

Thompson,  Tommy.  How  to  render  roman 
letter  forms.  American  Studio  Books.  1946. 
78  pp.  Illus.  4099.07-163 


History 


History  of  Culture  and  Knowledge 

Evans,  Bergen.  The  natural  history  of  non- 
sense. Knopf.  1946.  ix,  275,  x  pp. 
An  exposure  of  popular  fallacies.  AZ999.E8 

Feibleman,  James.  The  theory  of  human  cul- 
ture. Duell,  Sloan  and  Pearce.  [1946.]  xiv, 
361  pp.  HM101.F36 

"Culture,  in  the  sense  in  which  the  term  is  em- 
ployed in  this  work,  means  neither  social  growth 
exclusively,  nor  the  intellectual  side  of  civilization, 
but  has  a  broader  definition  which  includes  them, 
namely  the  organization  of  value  in  human  so- 
ciety."— Preface. 

United  States 

Benians,  Ernest  Alfred.  Race  and  nation  in 
the  United  States,  a  historical  sketch  of 
the  intermingling  of  the  peoples  in  the 
making  of  the  American  nation.  Cam- 
bridge Univ.  1946.  48  pp.  E184.A1B37 

Hendrick,  Burton  Jesse.  Lincoln's  war  cabi- 
net. Little,  Brown.  1946.  482  pp.  E456.H4 

Lincoln,  Abraham,  President  U.  S.,  1809-1865. 
Selections.  Abraham  Lincoln:  his  speeches 
and  writings,  edited  with  critical  and 
analytical  notes,  by  Roy  P.  Basler  .  .  .  pre- 
face by  Carl  Sandburg.  World  Pub.  Co. 
[1946.]  xxx,  843  pp.  Plates.  E457.92  1946 
"Sources  and  bibliography" :   pp.  [8051-822. 

Mowry,  George  Edwin.  Theodore  Roosevelt 
and  the  progressive  movement.  Univ.  of 
Wisconsin.  1946.  viii,  405  pp.  Illus. 

E757.M9 

"Based  in   large  part  on  the  voluminous  Roose- 
velt manuscripts  in  the  Library  of  Congress." 
"Manuscripts  and  works  cited" :  pp.  385-393. 

World  War  II 

Carson,  Julia  M.  H.  Home  away  from  home; 
the  story  of  the  USO.  Harper.  [1946.]  xiv, 
221  pp.  Plates.  D810.E8C3 

Detroit  news.  War  ...  in  headlines  from  the 
Detroit  news,  1939-1945.  [Detroit.  I945-] 
[104]  pp.  Illus.  D743.5.D47 

Road  to  Rome:  Salerno,  Naples,  Volturno, 
Cassino,  Anzio,  Rome.  [1944?]  56  pp. 

D763.I  8R6 

Scott,  Peter,  Lieutenant-Commander.  The 
battle  of  the  narrow  seas.  Scribner.  1946. 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


77 


xii.  228  pp.  Plates.  D771.S3 

A  history  of  the  light  coastal  forces  in  the  Channel 
and  North  Sea,  1939  to  1945. 

Illustrated  with  photographs,  portrait  drawings  by 
the  author,  and  colored  reproductions  of  his  oil 
paintings. 

Language 

Desk  "standard"  .  .  .  dictionary  of  the  Eng- 
lish language,  The,  designed  to  give  the 
orthography,  pronunciation,  meaning,  and 
etymology  of  about  83.000  words  and 
phrases  in  the  speech  and  literature  of  the 
English-speaking  peoples;  1,200  pictorial 
illustrations;  abridged  from  the  Funk  & 
Wagnalls  new  Standard  dictionary  of  the 
English  language.   [1946.]  viii,  918  pp. 

PEi  628.S6  1946 

McQuown,  Norman  A.,  and  Sadi  Koylan. 
Spoken  Turkish  .  .  .  Identical  with  the 
edition  prepared  by  The  United  States 
armed  forces  institute.  Holt.  [1946- 

PL127.M2 

"The  Armed  forces  edition  .  .  .  was  published  by 
the  Linguistic  society  of  America  and  the  Intensive 
language  program  of  the  American  council  of 
learned  societies  .  .  .  copyright,  1944." 

Literature 

Essays.  History  of  Literature 

Brodin,  Pierre.  Les  ecrivains  americains  de 
1'entre-deux-guerres.  Brentano.  [1945.] 
285  pp.  PS102.B76 

Contents.  — -  Robert  Frost.  —  Sinclair  Lewis.  — 
Eugene  O'Neill.  —  John  Dos  Passos.  —  Ernest 
Hemingway.  —  William  Faulkner.  —  Thomas 
Wolfe.  —  Erskine  Caldwell.  —  James  Farrell.  — 
John  Phillips  Marquand.  —  John  Steinbeck. 

Buchet,  Edmond  fidouard.  Ecrivains  intelli- 
gents  du  XXe  siecle.  Paris.  [1945.]  [9I- 
168  pp.  PQ146.B83 

Contents.  —  Introduction.  — ■  Marcel  Proust;  ou. 
La  puissance  de  l'anormal.  —  Andre  Gide  d'apnb 
son  journal ;  ou,  L'Intelligence  contre  la  vie.  — 
Paul  Valery  et   les  limites  de  l'intelligence. 

Cohen,  Gustave.  Ceux  que  j'ai  connus.  Mont- 
real, Editions  de  l'Arbre.  [1946.]  209  pp. 

PQ146.C65 

Contents.  —  Maurice  Maeterlinck;  ou,  L'Ascension 
vers  la  lumiere.  —  Anatole  France  et  la  Comedie 
de  celui  que  epousa  une  femme  muette.  —  Gabriele 
D'Annunzio  et  !e  Martyre  de  Saint  Sebastien.  — 
Maurice  Barres  et  la  Princesse  Elizabeth  Pala- 
tine. —  Mes  quatre  maitres :  Wilmotte.  Brunot, 
Lanson,  Bedier.  — -  L'Obscure  clarte  de  Paul  Val- 
ery. —  Le  regionalisme  provencal :  Jean  Giono. 
—  Appendice:  Jacques  Maintain,  notre  nouvel  am- 
bassadeur  au  Vatican. 

Gray,  James.  On  second  thought.  Univ.  of 
Minnesota.  [1946.]  264  pp.  PS221.G68 

Criticism  of  contemporary  writers,  including  the 
author's  contributions  to  the  columns  of  the  St. 
Paul  Pioneer  Press  and  Dispatch. 

Gross,  Raphael  H.,  editor.  A  century  of  the 
Catholic  essay,  edited,  with  biographical 
notes.  Lippincott.  [1946.]  352  pp. 

~  PR1369.C3G7 

Josephson,  Matthew.  Stendhal,  or  The  pur- 
suit of  happiness.  Doubleday.  1946.  xiii,  489 
pp.  PQ2436.J65 

Preston,  Raymond.  'Four  quartets'  rehearsed; 
a  commentary  on  T.  S.  Eliot's  cycle  of 
poems.  Sheed  &  Ward.  1946.  viii,  0-64 
PP-  PS3509.L43F67 


Rollins,  Hyder  Edward.  Keats'  reputation  in 
America  to  1848.  Harvard.  1946.  147  pp. 

PR4837.R6 

Bibliographical  references  in  "Notes"  (pp..  103- 
133) 

Stein,  Gertrude,  1874-1946.  Selected  writings 
of  Gertrude  Stein,  edited,  with  an  intro- 
duction and  notes,  by  Carl  Van  Vechten. 
Random  House.  [1946. 1  xv,  622  pp. 

PS3537.T323A6  1946 

Includes  "The  Autobiography  of  Alice  B.  Toklas," 
and  "The  Winner  loses :  a  Picture  of  Occupied 
France"  and  "The  Coming  nf  the  Americans" 
from   Wars  I  have  seen. 

Novels.  Short  Stories 
Hawthorne,  Nathaniel,  1804-1864.  Hawthorne's 
short  stories,  edited,  and  with  an  intro- 
duction. Knopf.  1946.  xxii,  422  pp. 
Borzoi  edition.  PS1852.A7 
Russell,  Charles  Marion,  1864-1926.  More 
rawhides  .  .  .  with  illustrations  by  the 
author.  Pasadena,  Calif.,  Trail's  End  Pub. 
Co.  1946.  [51-59PP.  F596.R93 

"In  1921  the  first  published  booklet  of  Russell's 
salty  cowboy  stories,  illustrated  by  the  artist,  was 
published  by  the  local  press  of  his  home  town, 
Great  Falls,  Montana  ...  In  1925  this  was  fol- 
lowed by  another  booklet  of  the  same  calibre  .  .  ." 
— Publisher's  Preface. 

These  booklets.  Rawhide  Rollins  Stories  and  More 
Rawhides  are  now  republished. 

—  Rawhide  Rawlins  stories.  Pasadena,  Calif., 
Trail's  End  Pub.  Co.  1946.  60  pp.  Illus. 

F596.R935 

Stern,  Selma.  The  spirit  returneth  ...  a 
novel.  Translated  from  the  German  manu- 
script by  Ludwig  Lewisohn.  Philadelphia, 
Jewish  Publication  Soc.  of  America.  "06- 
1946.  265  pp.  PT2630.T482S72 

Turgenev,  Ivan  S.,  1818-1883.  Mumu  .  .  . 
translated  by  Jessie  Domb  and  Zlata 
Shoenberg.  New  York,  London,  Trans- 
atlantic Arts.  1945.  3-47  pp. 

PG3420.M8  1945 

Russian  and  English  on  opposite  pages. 

Weiss,  Louise.  La  Marseillaise.  Brentano. 
[1946-  iv.  PQ2645-E3M3 

Contents.  —  1.  Allons,  enfants  de  la  patrie. 
Werfel,  Franz  V.,  1890-194;.  Stern  der  un- 
geboreneh;  ein  Reiseroman.  Stockholm. 
1946.  [u]-659  pp.  PJ2647.E77S7 
A  symbolic  fantasy  of  a  dream-journey  into  a 
future  world.  Werfel  finished  this  book  two  days 
before  his  death  on  August  26,  1945. 


Medicine.  Psychiatry 

Orgel,  Samuel  Zachery.  Psychiatry  today 
and  tomorrow.  New  York,  International 
Universities  Press.  [1946.]  SI4PP. 

RC341.O  7 

Peters,  Clarence  A.,  compiler.  Free  medical 
care.  New  York,  Wilson.  1946.  378  pp. 

Bibliography:  pp.   [3531-373.    *5598.3ig.I9  nO.3 

U.  S.  Office  of  war  information.  Penicillin. 
[Washington.]   1944.  [172]  pp. 

RS165.P38U55  1944 

"Reprinted  .  .  .  from  the  Journal  of  the  American 
medical  association,  the  Bulletin  of  the  New  York 
academy  of  medicine,  Science,  and  the  Medical 
times." 


78 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Vonderlehr,  R.  A.,  and  J.  R.  Heller.  The 

control  of  venereal  disease.  Reynal  & 
Hitchcock.  [1946.]  ix,  246  pp.  RC201.V68 

Music 

Literature 

Abraham,  Gerald.  Rimsky-Korsakov;  a  short 
biography.  London,  Duckworth.  [194s.] 
142  pp.  ML410.R52A2 

Previously  published  in  "Masters  of  Russian 
Music"  by  M.  D.  Calvocoressi  and  Gerald  Abra- 
ham. 

Brown,  Ralph  Morse.  The  singing  voice. 
Macmillan.  1946.  167  pp.  Illus. 

MT820.B885 

Geissmar,  Berta.  Two  worlds  of  music.  New 
York,  Creative  Age  Press.  [19.16. 1  327  pp. 

ML429.G4A3  1946 

Graf,  Max.  Modern  music;  composers  and 
music  of  our  time.  New  York,  Philosophi- 
cal Library.  [1946.]  320  pp.  ML197.G687 
Translated  by  Beatrice  R.  M.iier. 

Head'and,  Helen.  Christina  Nilsson,  the 
songbird  of  the  north  .  .  .  Illustrated  by 
the  author.  Rock  Island,  111.,  Augustina 
Book  Concern.  [1943.]  173  pr>.  Illus. 

ML420.N7HA 

"Favorite  Swedish  melodies  of  Christina  Nilsson" 
(with   piano   accompaniment)  :   pp.  [i65l-T7i. 

Krevit,  William.  Music  for  your  child.  Il- 
lustrated by  Marc  Simont.  Dodd.  Mead. 
1946.  viii,  128  pp.  Illus.  MT1.K74 

"Materials  for  making  music":  pp.  25-29. 
"Music   materials   for   students   aged   9—14":  pp. 
1 1 1-1  ig. 

Murray,  Edward,  and  Howard  Linn  Edsall. 
An  unexplored  musical  resource.  [Phila- 
delphia, Franklin  Institute.  1944.]  451-467 
pp.  Illus.  ML3850.M87 

Relates  to  coincident  rhythms. 

"Reprinted  from  the  Journal  of  the  Franklin  in- 
stitute, vol.  237.  no.  6,  June,  1944." 

Skolsky,  Syd.  Make  way  for  music.  Dutton. 
1946.  138  pp.  MT6.S57 
"The  purpose  of  this  book  is  to  provide  a  quick 
and  simple  method  of  getting  the  most  out  of  re- 
corded music." — Introduction. 

Scores 

Bach,  Johann  Sebastian.  Organ  choral  pre- 
ludes, arranged  for  strings  by  Harry 
Hodge.  Glasgow,  London  [etc.]  Pater- 
son's  Publications.   [1926.]  2v.ini. 

*Mn6o.B2-*  07 
All  are  for  string  quartet,  except  one  which  is 
for  a  trio. 

Contents.  - —  Set  t.  Schmiicke  dich,  o  liebe  Seele. 
—  Ertodt'  uns  durch  dein  Gute.  —  Ich  ruf  zu 
dir.  —  Set  2.  Nun  konim'  der  Hridcn  Heiland.  — 
Gott.  durch  deine  Cute.  —  Meine  Seele.  erhebt 
den  Herrn. 

Davison.  Archibald  T..  and  Willi  Apel,  editors. 
Historical  anthology  of  music.  Harvard. 
1946-  M2.D25H5 
Contents.  —  v.  1.  Oriental,  medieval  and  renaissance 

music. 

Shaw,  Martin  Fallas,  editor.  National  anthems 
of  the  United  nations  and  France.  (Au- 
thoritative edition.)  Edited  by  Martin 
Shaw.  [London.]  Cramer.  [1943. 1  110  pp. 

*Mi627.S<:5N3 
Principally  for  solo  voice  with  piano  accompani- 


ment :  melodies  in  both  tonic  sol-fa  and  staff  no- 
tation. 

Philosophy 

Myers,  Henry  Alonzo.  The  Spinoza-Hegel 
paradox,  a  study  of  the  choice  between 
traditional  idealism  and  systematic  plural- 
ism. Cornell  Univ.  1944.  xii,  95  pp. 

B2948.M9 

Schneider,  Herbert  W.  A  history  of  Ameri- 
can philosophv.  Columbia  Univ.  1946.  xiv, 
646  pp.  B851.S3 

Contents.  —  Platonism  and  Empiricism  in  Colonial 
America.  —  The  American  Enlightenment.  — 
Natlona'ism  and  Democracy.  —  Orthodoxy.  —  The 
Transcendental  Temper.  —  Evolution  and  Human 
Progress.  —  Idealisms.  —  Radical  Empiricism. 


Politics  and  Government 

United  States 

•Flint,  Winston  Allen.  The  progressive  move- 
ment in  Vermont;  introduction  [by]  Pau" 
F.  Douglass.  Washington,  American 
Council  on  Public  Affairs.  [1941.]  no  pp. 

F54.F55 

Kennedy,  Stetson.  Southern  exposure.  Doub- 
leday.  1946.  xii,  372  pp.  Plates.  F215.K33 

Key,  V.  O.,  Jr.  Politics,  parties  and  pressure 
groups.  Crowell.  1946.  xvii,  814  pp.  Illus. 

JF2051.K4  1946 

Tugwell,  Rexford  Guy.  Puerto  Rican  public 
papers  of  R.  C.  Tugwell,  governor.  [San 
Juan,  Government  of  Puerto  Rico.  1945.] 
378  pp.  *Ji65.N4  1945 

"Compiled  by  the  Office  of  information  for  Puerto 
Rico." — Foreword. 

World.  Other  Nations 

Bonjour,  Edgar.  Swiss  neutrality,  its  history 
and  meaning  .  .  .  translated  by  Mary  Hot- 
tinger.  Allen  &  Unwin.  [1946.]  135  pp. 

JX4033S9B57 

Brown,  William  John.  Everybody's  guide  to 
Parliament.  Allen  &  Unwin.  [1946.]  viii, 
199  pp.  JN511.B7  1946 

"Revised  second  edition." 

Brynes,  Asher.  Government  against  the  people. 
Dodd,  Mead.  1946.  265  pp.  HV7921.B7 
The  author  surveys  the  police  systems  and  govern- 
mental controls  executed  in  Russia,  England,  and 
other  nations,  and  concludes  that  in  order  to  se- 
cure peace,  there  should  be  no  political  police  of 
any  kind,  otherwise  the  people  cannot  be  really 
sovereign. 

Dolivet,  Louis.  The  United  nations;  a  hand- 
book on  the  new  world  organization  .  .  . 
preface  by  Trygve  Lie.  New  York,  Far- 
ar,  Straus.  1946.  152  pp.  JX1977.D6 

Mandel,  William.  A  guide  to  the  Soviet 
union.  Dial  Press.  1946.  xiii,  511  pp. 

DK267.M344. 

Contents.  —  The  sixteen  Republics.  —  History 
since  191 7.  —  Contemnorary  foreign  Policy.  — 
Not  by  Bread  alone.  [Education,  culture,  science, 
press] .  —  The  Soviet  Economy.  —  The  Soviet 
Government. 

Power,  Thomas  F.  Jules  Ferry  and  the  re- 
naissance of  French  imperialism.  New 
York,  King's  Crown  Press.  1944.  x,  222 
pp.  JV1817.P6  1944 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


79 


Religion.  Theology 

Brunini,  John  Gilland.  Whereon  to  stand 
.  .  .  with  an  introduction  by  Francis  Cardi- 
nal Spellman.  Harper.  [1946.]  xvii,  302  pp. 

BX1754.B745 

Callan,  Charles  J.,  Father,  editor  and  translator. 
The  Psalms,  translated  from  the  Latin 
Psalter,  in  the  light  of  the  Hebrew,  of  the 
Septuagint  and  Peshitta  versions,  and  of 
the  Psalterium  juxta  Hebraeos  of  St. 
Jerome,  with  introductions,  critical  notes 
and  spiritual  reflections.  New  York,  J.  F. 
Wagner.  [1946.]  vii,  695  pp. 

BS1430.C34  1946 

Case,  Shirley  Jackson.  The  origins  of  Christian 
supernaturalism.  Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1946.] 
vii,  230  pp.  BR128.A2C3 
The  author  is  Dean  of  the  School  of  Religion  at 
Lakewood.  Florida. 

"The  present  volume  presents  a  survey  of  historical 
data  previously  used  in  my  Experience  ztrith  the 
Supernatural  in  Early  Christian  Times,  published 
in  1929  and  long  since  out  of  print." — Author's 
Preface. 

Fite,  Warner.  Jesus,  the  man;  a  critical  es- 
say. Harvard.  1946.  vi,  152  pp.  BT304.F5 

Magaret,  Helene.  Gailhac  of  Beziers.  Long- 
mans, Green.  1946.  262  pp. 

BX4705.G117M3 

Jean  Gailhac,  Priest  of  Beziers,  in  1848  founded 
the  Religious  of  the  Sacred  Heart  of  Mary,  de- 
voted to  the  education  of  youth. 

Rubio,  David.  The  mystic  soul  of  Spain.  New 
York,  Cosmopolitan  Science  &  Art  Service 
Co.  1946.  94  pp.  BV5077.S7R8 

Thornton,  L.  S.  The  common  life  in  the  body 
of  Christ.  Westminster  [London],  Dacre 
Press.  [1946.]  xiii,  475  pp. 

BV600.T53  1946 

Torbet,  Robert  George.  A  social  history  of 
the  Philadelphia  Baptist  association.  1707- 
1940.  Philadelphia.  1944  [i.  e.  1945.I  247 
pp.  IHus.  BX6209.P5T6 

Bibliography :  pp.  234-243. 

Science 

Chemistry.  Physics 

Altieri,  Veto  Joseph.  Gas  analysis  and  testing 
of  gaseous  materials.  New  York,  American 
Gas  Ass'n.  [1945.]  xi,  567  pp.  Illus.  8278.5 

Third  of  a  series  issued  by  members  of  the  Com- 
mittee on  revision  of  the  Gas  chemists'  handbook, 
Technical  section,  American  gas  association,  as  a 
revision  of  the  1929  edition  of  the  Gas  chemists' 
handbook. 

Brillouin,  Leon.  Wave  propagation  in  periodic 
structures,  electric  filters  and  crystal  lat- 
tices. McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xii,  247  pp. 

8253.6 

International  series  in  pure  and  applied  physics. 

Morton,  Avery  A.  The  chemistry  of  hetero- 
cyclic compounds.  McGraw-  Hill.  1946.  vii, 
549  PP-  8288.9 

History  of  Science 

Baxter,  James  Phinney,  3d.  Scientists  against 
time.  Little,  Brown.  1946.  xv,  473  pp. 

Q127.U6B3 


Hornberger,  Theodore.  Scientific  thought  in 
the  American  colleges  1638--1800.  Univ.  of 
Texas.  1945.  108  pp.  Illus.  Q181.H77 

Miscellaneous 
Hart,  William  L.  The  mathematics  of  invest- 
ment. 3d  edition.  Heath.  [1946.]  vi,  304  pp. 
Illus.  QA39.H35  1946 

Kopman,  Henry  Hazlitt.  Wild  acres,  a  book 
of  the  gulf  coast  country,  with  a  foreword 
by  John  Kieran.  Dutton.  1946.  189  pp. 

QL683.K6 

Mainly  a  description  of  the  bird  life  of  the  lower 
Mississippi  River  and  the  shoves  of  Louisiana  and 
Mississippi. 

Rio  de  Janeiro,  Museu  nacional.  Boletim  do 
Museu  nacional.  Nova  serie  .  .  .  Geologia. 
n.  1-  dec.  31,  1943-  [Rio  de  Janeiro.  1943- 

*QEi.R5 

—  Boletim  do  Museu  nacional.  Nova  serie 
.  .  .  Zoologia.  n.  1-16  Jan.  30,  1942-  fev. 
19,  1944.  [Rio  de  Janeiro.  1942-44. 1 

*QLi.R5 


Sociology 

Industrial  relations  counselors,  inc.  National 
collective  bargaining  policy.  New  York. 
1945.  103  pp.  9731.116^29 

International  ladies'  garment  workers'  union. 

Highlights  of  four  years'  activit}'  of  the 
Joint  board,  cloak,  suit,  skirt  and  reefer 
makers'  unions  of  Greater  New  York  .  .  . 
[New  York.  1944  ]  [52]  pp.  9331.8873A165 
On  cover:  New  York  cloakmakers  on  the  march. 

Lapp,  John  A.  How  to  handle  problems  of 
seniority.  New  York,  Deep  River,  Conn., 
National  Foremen's  Institute.  [T946.]  xiii, 
295  pp.  9331.138A8 

Russell  Sage  foundation,  New  York.  Defi- 
nitions of  terms  and  instructions  for  re- 
porting monthly  statistics  of  family  case- 
work. 1946  edition.  [Prepared  by]  De- 
partment of  statistics,  Russell  Sage  foun- 
dation. New  York,  Russell  Saee  Foun- 
dation. 1946.  26  pp.  HV41.R85 

Uhler,  Alfred.  Your  vocational  guide  to  the 
ideal  job;  self  tests  that  reveal  your 
special  abilities.  New  York,  Funk.  [1946.] 
viii,  204  pp.  HF5381.U44 

Wyckoff,  Viola.  The  public  works  wage  rate 
and  some  of  its  economic  effects.  Columbia 
Univ.  1946.  313  pp.  *3563.no.52i 
Bibliography :  pp.  295-307. 


Technology 

Aeronautics 

Drake,  Rollen  H.,  Colonel.  Aircraft  wood- 
work. Macmillan.  1946.  ix,  197  pp.  Illus. 

4036B.163 

Glidden,  Horace  K.,  and  others.  Airports:  de- 
sign, construction  and  management  [by] 
Horace  K.  Glidden  .  .  .  Hervey  F.  Law 
.  .  .  [and]  John  E.  Cowles.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1946.  xii,  583  pp.  Plates.  4036F.19 


8o 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Electrical  Engineering 

Lincoln,  Edwin  Stoddard.  Primary  and  stor- 
age batteries.  Essential  Books,  Duell, 
Sloan  and  Pearce.  [I945-]  vii,  168  pp. 

8018.499 

Loew,  Edgar  Allan.  Direct  and  alternating 
currents,  theory  and  machinery.  3d  edition. 
McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xvi,  74&PP-  Illus. 

8010D.79S 

Manufacture.  Chemical  Technology 

Elliott,  Stanley  B.  The  alkaline-earth  and 
heavy-metal  soaps.  Reinhold  Pub.  Corp. 
1946.  x,  1 1-342  pp.  Illus..  8031H.38 

Goerl,  Stephen.  Papermaking  in  America,  a 
pictorial  account  .  .  .  illustrated  by  Robert 
Greco.  New  York,  Bulkley,  Dunton  Or- 
ganization. [1946.]  22  plates.  8037.343 
Descriptive  text  on  verso  of  preceding  plate. 

Simonds,  Herbert  R.,  and  Adolph  Bregman. 
Finishing  metal  products.  2d  edition. 
McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xii,  352  pp.  Illus. 

8035. 194R 

Smith,  Leslie.  Flour  milling  technology.  3d 
and  revised  edition.  Liverpool,  Eng., 
Northern  Pub.  Cc.  [1945.]  571  pp.  Illus. 

8039M.7 

Williams,  Clement  C.  Building  an  engineer- 
ing career.  2d  edition.  McGraw-Hill.  1946. 
xiii,  309  pp.  Illus.  8034A.33R 

Mathematics 

Dull,  Raymond  W.  Mathematical  aids  for 
engineers.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xii,  346  pp. 

4010D.152 

Pease,  Edward  M.  J.,  and  George  P.  Wads- 
worth.  Engineering  trigonometry.  Inter- 
national Textbook  Co.  1946.  xii,  479  pp. 

4010D.153 

Mechanical  Engineering 

Griswold,  John.  Fuels,  combustion  and  fur- 
naces. McGraw-Hill.  1946.  vii,  496  pp. 

4032.202 

McGraw-Hill  chemical  engineering  series. 
Steiner,   Kalman.   Fuels   and   fuel  burners. 
McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xi,  394  pp.  Illus. 

4032.203 

Walker,  James,  and  Carl  C.  Taylor.  Simpli- 
fied punch  and  diemaking.  Macmillan. 
1946.  ix,  235  pp.  Illus.  4039A.173 


Miscellaneous 

Abel,  Charles.  Professional  photography  for 
profit.  New  York,  Greenberg.  [1946.]  xii, 
466  pp.  Illus.  8029A.453 
Detailed  plans  for  the  installation,  equipping,  and 
successful  operation  of  various  types  of  photo- 
graphic studios. 

U.  S.  Forest  service,  Forest  products  labora- 
tory, Madison,  Wis.  Wood:  a  manual  for 
its  use  in  wooden  vessels;  prepared  by 
Forest  products  laboratory,  Forest  ser- 
vice, United  States  Department  of  agri- 
culture in  cooperation  with  the  Research 
and  standards  branch.  Bureau  of  ships, 
Navy  department.  [Washington.]  1945. 
v,  235  pp.  Illus.  *40igA.483 


Travel  and  Description 

Brault,  Lucien.  Ottawa,  old  and  new.  Otta- 
wa Historical  Information  Inst.  1946.  349 
pp.  F1059.5.O  9B82 

Haggard,  Lillian  Rider,  and  Henry  William- 
son. Norfolk  life.  209  pp. 

DA670.N6H17  1946 

Mee,  Arthur.  Hampshire  with  the  Isle  of 
Wight.  With  303  places  and  180  pictures. 
London,  Hodder  and  Stoughton.  [1946.] 
x,  499  pp.  Plates.       DA670.H2M4  1946 

Philby,  Harry  St.  John  B.  A  pilgrim  in 
Arabia.  London,  Hale.  1946.  198  pp. 

DS207.P523  1946 
"First  published  in  March  1943  ...  in  an  edition 
de  luxe." 

Contents.  —  The  Meccan  pilgrimage.  —  "The  city 
illumined":  Medina.  —  The  queen  of  the  desert: 
Riyadh.  —  Qarnait;  the  coronet.  —  A  Persian 
holiday. 

Richmond,  John  Milton.  Brooklyn,  U.  S.  A.; 
text  [by]  John  Richmond,  layout  and  de- 
sign [by]  Abril  Lamarque.  New  York, 
Creative  Age  Press.  [1946.]  138  pp.  Illus. 

F129.B7R5 

Wallbank,  Felix  Alan,  editor.  The  English 
scene  in  the  works  of  prose-writers  since 
1700.  Illustrated  from  contemporary  pic- 
tures and  prints.  Scribner.  1946.  xiv,  224 
pp.  Plates.  DA600.W23  1946 

First  published,  May  1941.  This  edition  is  revised. 

Zimmerman,  John  Lee.  Where  the  people 
sing;  green  land  of  the  Maoris.  Knopf. 
1946.  ix,  234  pp.  Plates.  DU423.Z5 
"A  Bcrzoi  book." 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 

Volume  XXII,  Number  3 


Contents 

Page 


THE  FRENCH  CAPTURE  FORT  BULL  (with  facsimile)  83 

By  Honor  McCusker  and  Caroline  B.  Bourland 

A  RUSSIAN  DAUMIER  (with  facsimile)  93 

By  Nicolas  Slonimsky 

LITHOGRAPHS  BY  HENRI  TOULOUSE-LAUTREC  98 

By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

GRAPHIC  ARTS  PROCESSES:  DRY  POINT  100 

By  Muriel  C.  Figenbaum 

HARVARD  LIBRARY  BULLETIN  102 

TEN  BOOKS:  SHORT  REVIEWS 

Harold  Dean  Cater,  editor:  Henry  Adams  and  His  Friends  103 

Paul  M.  Angle,  editor:  The  Lincoln  Reader  103 

Sir  Samuel  Hoare :  Complacent  Dictator  104 

D.  W.  Brogan:  French  Personalities  and  Problems  104 

David  L.  Cohn :  This  Is  the  Story  104 

Wulf  Sachs  :  Black  Anger  105 

Charles  A.  Madison:  Critics  and  Crusaders  105 

Vilhjalmur  Stefansson :  Great  Adventures  and  Explorations  105 

C.  E.  Kenneth  Mees :  The  Path  of  Science  106 

Curt  Sachs:  The  Commonwealth  of  Art  106 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

International  Book  Illustration  107 

Missionary  Reports  from  New  England  107 

The  Sarum  Missal,  London  1555  107 

Lectures  and  Concerts  108 

Lowell  Lectures  109 

LIST  OF  RECENTLY-ACQUIRED  BOOKS  no 


♦  * 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17, 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library  15-17  Blagden  St.,  March,  1947,  Vol.  XXII,  No  3 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees,  for  free  distribution; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
MARCH,  1947 

The  French  Capture  Fort  Bull 

IN  April  1941  More  Books  described  a  unique  Portuguese  pamphlet 
on  the  siege  of  Louisbourg  in  1758.  The  Library  has  now  added  to 
this  an  equally  interesting  booklet  printed  in  Lisbon  two  years  earlier, 
dealing  with  the  French  capture  of  Fort  Bull  —  a  frontier  garrison  near 
the  present  Rome,  New  York  —  in  March  1756.  It  is  entitled  Relagam  do 
Combate,  que  tiverao  os  Franceses  com  os  Inglezes  .  .  .  c  tornado  do  Forte  Bull 
(An  Account  of  the  Battle  between  the  French  and  the  English  .  .  .  and  the 
Capture  of  Fort  Bull).  Below  the  verbose  title  is  a  stiff  little  woodcut 
of  a  fortress,  certainly  as  unlike  an  American  blockhouse  as  it  could 
well  be. 

The  invasion  of  Minorca  marked  the  beginning  of  the  Seven  Years' 
War,  the  struggle  between  France  and  England  which  so  deeply  affected 
Europe  and  which  decided  the  possession  of  the  American  continent. 
The  British  declared  war  formally  on  May  18,  1756;  but  it  was  an  old 
story  to  colonial  pioneers  by  that  time.  For  over  a  year  refugees  from 
the  frontier  settlements,  which  were  practically  defenceless  against  seri- 
ous Indian  attack,  had  been  streaming  eastward  to  better  protected 
areas.  Massachusetts  —  indeed  all  New  England  —  contributed  heavily 
in  both  money  and  men  to  the  campaigns  which  were  organized  in  re- 
prisal. In  August  1755  William  Shirley,  governor  of  Massachusetts,  was 
appointed  commander  of  the  British  forces  in  the  colonies.  He  planned 
four  expeditions :  one  to  assemble  at  Oswego,  to  move  from  there  against 
the  French  Forts  Frontenac,  Niagara,  Presque  Isle,  Le  Boeuf,  and  De- 
troit; another,  to  march  against  Fort  Duquesne  in  Ohio;  a  third,  to  erect 
a  fort  at  Crown  Point;  arid  the  last,  to  go  up  the  Kennebec  and  down 
the  Chaudiere  to  Quebec.  Unfortunately  these  projects  came  to  nothing, 
largely  because  of  provincial  jealousy  and  the  efforts  of  Shirley's  personal 
enemies,  whose  pressure  on  the  government  brought  about  his  recall 
in  the  spring  of  1756. 

At  the  time  of  his  appointment  in  1755,  however,  Shirley  was  him- 
self camped  at  "the  Great  Carrying  Place  at  Oneida,"  i.e.  the  portage 
between  the  Mohawk  River  and  Wood  Creek,  which  flowed  into  Lake 


83 


84 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Oneida.  This  portage  was  a  vital  point  in  the  line  of  communication 
between  Albany  and  Oswego  on  Lake  Ontario,  and  was  guarded  at  the 
river  by  Fort  Williams  and  at  the  creek  by  Fort  Bull.  The  governor 
was  then  on  his  way  to  strengthen  Oswego,  the  importance  of  which 
he  fully  appreciated.  Writing  to  Sir  Thomas  Robinson,  one  of  the  Eng- 
lish secretaries  of  state,  he  summed  up  the  situation  admirably : 

The  securing  of  Oswego  is  of  the  last  Importance,  as  it  affords  the 
only  opening,  the  English  have  to  any  of  the  great  Lakes,  the  only  Trading 
House  they  have  with  the  Western  Indians,  and  the  only  Fort  and  Har- 
bour, which  his  Majesty  hath  upon  the  Lakes  for  the  Protection  of  his 
Vessels,  so  that  it  is  as  much  the  Key  of  these  Lakes  and  the  Southern 
and  Western  Country  lying  round  them,  to  the  English,  as  Nova  Scotia 
is  of  the  Sea  Coast  and  Eastern  parts  of  North  America;  and  the  loss  of 
it  to  the  French  (from  whom  it  would  be  extremely  difficult  to  l'etake  it) 
must  not  only  make  them  absolute  Masters  of  the  Navigation  of  all  these 
Lakes,  and  Trade  upon  them  .  .  .  but  let  them  into  the  Heart  of  the  Country 
inhabited  by  the  Six  Nations  .  .  .  ;  and  in  such  Case  we  have  the  greatest 
reason  to  expect,  the  French  will  very  speedily  have  a  strong  Fort  upon 
the  Great  Carrying  Place  at  the  Head  of  the  Mohawk's  River  which  would 
be  soon  followed  by  the  loss  of  Albany  and  Hudson's  River ;  the  Conse- 
quence of  which  must  in  a  short  time  prove  fatal  to  the  whole  Province 
of  New  York. 

Shirley  was  right  to  be  disturbed.  He  did  his  best  to  reinforce  the 
post,  but  the  fortifications  were  still  weak,  and  his  successors  in  com- 
mand apparently  did  not  think  the  matter  so  urgent.  Hence  the  de- 
struction of  Fort  Bull  on  the  following  March  28  was  an  important  step 
in  the  French  progress  towards  the  Mohawk  Valley,  since  it  cut  Os- 
wego's supply  line.  By  May  the  woods  were  infested  with  enemy  Indians, 
while  in  the  meantime  Montcalm  had  arrived  from  France  with  two 
new  battalions  of  regulars.  In  late  July  he  began  to  advance  down  Lake 
Ontario,  and  on  August  14  the  French  occupied  the  fort  of  Oswego,  thus 
gaining  control  of  the  entire  lake.  It  was  a  severe  loss,  regarded  by  some 
in  England  —  Horace  Walpole  among  them  —  as  "ten  times  more  im- 
portant" even  than  Minorca  with  its  great  harbor  and  fortress. 

The  Portuguese  journalist  has  a  fine  flamboyant  style,  and  his 
narrative  differs  in  some  respects  from  more  official  versions.  The  New 
York  Mercury  for  April  5,  1756,  wrote:  "By  an  Express  that  arrived  here 
on  Friday  last,  from  Albany,  we  are  told,  that  a  Number  of  French  & 
Indians  had  attacked  Lieutenant  Bull,  and  30  Men,  that  were  posted  at 
the  upper  End  of  the  Great  Carrying  Place;  that  he,  &  some  of  his 
People  were  killed,  and  a  small  Store,  with  some  Provisions  in  it,  burnt; 
and  that  they  were  in  Pain  for  some  of  their  Battoes,  which  they  feared 
were  cut  off  by  the  enemy." 

The  report  in  the  French  archives  in  Paris  presents  the  battle  as  a 
simple  problem  in  military  tactics: 


THE  FRENCH  CAPTURE  FORT  BULL 


85 


On  the  27  March  1756  at  four  o'clock  in  the  morning,  the  detachments 
commanded  by  M.  de  Lery,  Lieutenant  of  the  Colonial  troops,  commenced 
their  march,  very  much  weakened  by  the  fatigue  they  experienced  during 
fifteen  days  since  they  left  Montreal,  for  they  were  two  days  entirely  out 
of  provisions.  At  half-past  five  they  arrived  at  the  road  to  the  Carrying 
place,  and  the  scouts  in  advance  brought  in  two  Englishmen  who  were 
coming  from  the  fort  nearest  to  Chouaguin  [Oswego]  .  .  . 

These  prisoners  stated  that  the  Fort,  this  side  of  Chouaguin,  was  called 
Bull,  having  a  garrison  of  60  soldiers,  commanded  by  a  lieutenant,  that 
there  was  in  this  fort  a  considerable  quantity  of  munitions  of  war  and 
provisions;  that  the  fort  was  constructed  of  heavy  pickets.  15  to  18  feet 
above  ground,  doubled  inside  to  a  man's  height,  and  was  nearly  of  the 
shape  of  a  star ;  that  it  had  no  cannon,  but  a  number  of  grenadoes  which 
Colonel  Johnson  had  sent  on  intelligence  being  communicated  to  him  by 
the  Indians  of  our  march;  that  the  Commandant  of  this  Fort  was  called 
Bull;  that  15  batteaux  were  to  leave  in  the  evening  for  Chouaguin ;  that  at 
the  moment  sleighs  were  arriving  with  9  batteaux  loads ;  that  the  fort  on 
the  Corlear  side,  at  the  head  of  the  Carrying  Place  was  of  much  larger 
pickets  and  well  planked,  having  four  pieces  of  Cannon  and  a  garrison  of 
150  men,  comanded  by  Captain  Williams,  whose  name  the  fort  bore;  that 
they  did  not  know  if  there  were  any  provisions  in  the  fort  not  having 
been  in  it. 

A  few  hours  after  picking  up  this  indiscreet  pair,  the  savages  cap- 
tured the  provision  sleighs,  whose  drivers  added  that  a  hundred  men 
had  arrived  to  reinforce  the  fort.  One  man  escaped  to  Fort  Williams, 
however,  so  that  Lery  decided  to  attack  before  he  could  be  attacked  him- 
self. At  this  point  his  Indian  troops  opposed  him,  announcing  piously 
that  since  the  Master  of  Life  had  freely  bestowed  on  them  enough  Eng- 
lish meat  to  last  to  their  next  stopping  place,  to  risk  another  affair 
would  clearly  be  contrary  to  His  will;  if  Lery  was  bent  on  destruction 
he  could  take  the  French  with  him.  A  few  drams  of  brandy,  however, 
persuaded  a  number  of  them  to  join  the  expedition. 

On  approaching  the  fort,  Leroy  ordered  his  men  to  move  straight 
forward  without  noise,  and  seize  the  guard  at  the  entrance;  but  some 
of  the  Indians  let  off  a  war  whoop,  and  the  gate  was  closed  before  the 
French  could  carry  it.  As  the  report  continues,  "M.  de  Lery  set  some 
men  to  cut  down  the  gate,  and  caused  the  Commandant  to  be  summoned 
to  surrender,  promising  quarter  to  him  and  all  his  garrison;  to  which 
he  only  answered  by  a  fire  of.  musketry  and  by  throwing  a  quantity  of 
grenades  .  .  .  Great  efforts  were  made  to  batter  down  the  gate,  which 
was  finally  cut  in  pieces  in  about  an  hour.  Then  the  whole  detachment 
with  a  cry  of  Vive  le  Roi  rushed  into  the  Fort  and  put  every  one  to  the 
sword  they  could  lay  hands  on.  One  woman  and  a  few  soldiers  only 
were  fortunate  enough  to  escape  the  fury  of  our  troops."  (One  of  these 
survivors  was  Robert  Eastburn,  who  was  held  prisoner  by  the  Indians 
for  more  than  a  year,  and  whose  moving  narrative  of  his  captivity,  now 
extremely  rare,  is  in  the  Library.) 


86 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


The  French  attempted  to  throw  the  fort's  powder  into  the  creek, 
but  one  of  the  magazines  had  caught  fire,  and  they  had  barely  time  to 
retire  before  the  whole  supply  blew  up,  destroying  the  fort  completely 
and  even  wounding  two  men  at  some  distance  from  it.  Early  next  morn- 
ing they  retreated  towards  Canada,  having  been  informed  that  General 
William  Johnson  was  on  the  march  against  them. 

Probably  the  French  account  is  accurate,  since  it  was  an  official 
report,  while  the  Portuguese  pamphlet  is  frankly  a  journalist's  effort. 
Strategic  as  its  position  was,  Fort  Bull  was  scarcely  "one  of  the  best 
forts  the  English  held  in  America" ;  Parkman,  indeed,  calls  it  "a  mere 
collection  of  storehouses  surrounded  by  a  palisade."  Moreover,  ten 
cannon  and  six  mortars  would  have  been  unusually  heavy  armament 
for  such  a  post,  and  a  hundred  and  twenty  men  a  large  garrison  (these 
forts,  according  to  Shirley's  own  statement,  normally  averaged  from 
twenty  to  seventy  men).  According  to  the  French,  the  siege  did  not 
last  twelve  days  or  even  one  —  nor  could  it  have  done  so,  probably, 
since  the  attackers  were  out  of  provisions  when  they  arrived,  and  even 
the  captured  sleighs  could  not  have  fed  four  hundred  men  for  nearly  a 
fortnight.  The  governor's  noble  speech  preferring  death  to  dishonor 
is  in  all  likelihood  pure  fiction;  certainly  it  does  not  sound  like  the  cus- 
tomary language  of  British  lieutenants.  Furthermore,  the  attack  was 
a  surprise  and,  far  from  sending  a  trumpeter  to  demand  surrender,  de 
Lery  was  furious  with  the  whooping  Indians  who  gave  it  away.  How- 
ever, all  these  frills  were  in  the  interest  of  a  ready  sale,  and  to  judge 
from  the  present  rarity  of  the  little  tract,  it  found  one. 

The  rest  of  the  pamphlet  is  more  soberly  written.  Nothing  has  been 
discovered  about  the  skirmish  between  the  Josef  a  and  the  Mariamm,  or 
about  the  two  captured  French  sloops  which  the  Portuguese  author 
mentions.  But  it  was  probably  quite  true  that  the  English  had  taken 
over  two  hundred  and  thirty  French  prizes,  since  as  early  as  October 
1755  a  London  correspondent  had  written  to  New  York  that  "we  have 
near  170  French  ships  in  our  Harbours,  their  Value  considerable." 

The  Minorcan  section  is  also  strictly  factual.  The  articles  of  sur- 
render which  it  quotes  include  nearly  all  the  important  stipulations,  and 
apparently  supplement  an  earlier  publication  from  the  same  press,  now 
lost.  On  June  28,  1756,  St.  Philip's,  the  fortress  protecting  Port  Mahon, 
fell  after  a  siege  which  had  lasted  six  weeks.  Admiral  John  Byng,  sent 
with  thirteen  ships  to  aid  the  defending  garrison,  had  engaged  a  French 
squadron  and  fought  a  heavy  battle,  but  failed  to  relieve  the  island. 
Shortly  afterward  he  was  sentenced  to  death  by  court-martial.  The  ver- 
dict was  one  of  the  most  hotly  disputed  decisions  ever  pronounced.  Vol- 
taire and  the  Due  de  Richelieu,  commander  of  the  French  forces  on 
Minorca,  protested  against  it.  The  court-martial  itself  recommended 
mercy,  and  all  England  was  in  a  storm;  but  the  Ministry  and  the 


REL AC AM 

COMBAT 

que  ttverao 

>S  FR.ANCEZES  COM  OS  JNG1TZES, 

Aonde  (e  referetn  ss  proezsr  ♦  <jue  efts  3  tsro  feito  ;  ce;n 
alguss  noticiaa  da  Anoerica,  e  tcmada  do  Fofte'Bull* 

fe  dd  cabal  noitcia  do rcftdimetno  da  Praga  de  Por- 
to Maboju  expondo-fe  ye  dec  I  at  ando-fe  alguvs  Ca~ 
pitulos  de  fua  entrega ,  que  porfalta  de  nets- 
ciasfe  omtttirab  na  prime if  a  Relapzo 
c  outras  coufas  notaveis* 


e 


17 


via  Officina  de  DO  MINGOS  RODRIGUES. 
Ctm  tods?  as  lken§as  nccejpirias. 


Title-Page  of  a  Painplilet  on  the  Capture  of  Fort  Bull,  Lisbon  1756 

87 


THE  FRENCH  CAPTURE  FORT  BULL 


89 


King  would  not  relent,  and  the  Admiral  was  shot  on  March  14,  1757. 
Yet,  though  a  writer  in  the  Gentleman's  Magazine  for  July  1756  charac- 
terized Minorca  elegantly  as  "that  pearl  in  the  British  diadem,  whose 
value  can  only  be  estimated  by  its  consequences,"  those  consequences 
were  in  fact  not  so  dire  as  might  have  been  supposed.  The  island  had  a 
certain  value  as  a  naval  base  and  as  a  harbor  for  the  Mediterranean 
trade;  but  its  surrender  did  not  much  affect  the  conduct  of  the  war.  The 
British  empire  in  North  America  was  a  stake  immeasurably  greater. 

Since  the  pamphlet  appears  never  to  have  been  translated,  it  has 
been  rendered  into  English  by  Miss  Caroline  B.  Bourland,  Professor 
Emeritus  of  Spanish  at  Smith  College.   Her  translation  follows. 

HONOR  McCUSKER 


ACCOUNT  OF  THE  BATTLE  which  took  place  between  the  French  and  the 
English,  in  which  are  told  the  brave  deeds  performed  by  the  latter,  with 
some  news  of  America  and  the  capture  of  Fort  Bull.  Together  with 
complete  information  on  the  surrender  of  the  stronghold  of 
Port  Mahou,  which  discloses  and  makes  public  some  of  the 
articles  of  its  capitulation,  omitted  in  the  f  irst  account 
because  of  lack  of  advices  and  other  notable  things. 
Lisbon,  In  the  Office  of  Domingo  Rodrigues. 
With  all  necessary  licences.  1/56. 

THE  events  of  war  have  always  been  of  doubtful  issue,  and  its  victories 
equally  uncertain,  since  fortune  does  not  always  accompany  valor,  and 
it  is  luck  even  more  than  valor  that  many  a  time  changes  the  scene,  turning 
the  glory  of  the  conqueror  into  the  wretchedness  of  the  prisoner  or  the  con- 
quered. The  element  of  chance  becomes  even  more  powerful  when  the  struggle 
is  between  warlike  enemies  skilled  in  the  use  of  arms;  because  if  equality  in 
skill  and  courage  leaves  the  outcome  of  battle  undecided,  it  is  eventually  de- 
termined by  the  decree  of  fortune  or  the  occurrence  of  some  casual  incident. 
History  records  many  examples  of  such  reversals.  But  there  is  no  need  to 
recall  episodes  of  the  past,  when  in  our  own  times  we  have  positive  evidence 
of  the  truth  of  the  aforesaid ;  for  in  the  short  period  since  the  declaration  of 
war  between  France  and  England  there  have  been  various  events  in  which 
those  who  had  been  conquerors  at  first,  ended  by  being  conquered,  and  vice 
versa,  without  either  of  these  valiant  nations  suffering  any  loss  of  prestige 
because  of  her  experience  of  adverse  fortune. 

But  while  these  things  are  universally  true  of  battles,  they  are  especially 
typical  of  engagements  at  sea,  because  in  these  victory  depends  not  only  upon 


go 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


the  spirit  and  courage  of  men,  but  also  upon  favoring  winds  and  the  condition 
of  the  waters,  the  slightest  breeze  being  sufficient  to  frustrate  the  greatest 
effort,  the  greatest  daring  and  the  greatest  care,  as  is  shown  in  some  incidents 
of  recent  occurrence  between  these  two  nations  both  in  America  and  in  Eu- 
rope, which  we  shall  now  relate. 

It  was  in  America  that  the  present  dissensions  and  discords  had  their 
origin,  and  there  too  that  up  to  the  present  the  most  hostile  actions  have  taken 
place.  America  has  been  the  scene  of  continual  assaults,  ambuscades,  and  sur- 
prise attacks  carried  out  in  spite  of  the  burning  heat  of  the  sun  and  the  intense 
cold  of  winter,  which  have  alike  been  powerless  to  separate  these  two  enemies. 
And  such  has  been  the  progress  made  here  by  the  French  arms,  that  England 
has  been  almost  afraid  she  would  lose  all  her  American  possessions.  She  has 
recently  lost  to  the  French  in  America  three  forts  —  the  Giant,  the  Krevelrs 
[sic],  and  the  Royal  George  —  which  had  nineteen  pieces  of  cannon  and  a 
garrison  of  two  hundred  and  fourteen  men.  But  the  case  that  most  deserves  atten- 
tion is  that  of  Fort  Bull,  which  follows:  Monsieur  Lery  was  sent  with  600  men, 
Europeans  and  natives,  to  capture  Fort  Bull,  which  was  one  of  the  best  forts 
the  English  held  in  America.  It  was  a  regular  structure  defended  by  ten  pieces 
of  cannon  and  six  mortars,  and  garrisoned  by  sixty  Englishmen  and  sixty 
Indians,  all  trained  soldiers,  skilled  in  the  use  of  arms.  Upon  his  arrival  Lery 
sent  a  trumpeter  to  notify  the  Governor  to  surrender  the  aforesaid  fort,  to 
which  he  replied  like  the  valiant  man  he  was,  that  his  enemies  would  take  the 
fort  only  over  his  dead  body ;  that  he  and  the  others  who  were  there  were 
ready  to  defend  their  honor  and  credit  to  the  last  drop  of  their  blood,  and  that 
Lery  could  rest  assured  the  only  possible  decision  was  by  force  of  arms,  since 
assuming  that  the  defenders  were  equal  in  numbers  to  the  enemy,  they  sup- 
posed themselves  to  be  the  same  in  courage. 

The  messenger  returned  with  this  reply,  which  being  received  by  the 
besiegers,  who  considered  themselves  superior,  there  began  an  obstinate  at- 
tack and  defense  that  lasted  twelve  days,  during  which  the  beleaguered  men 
were  unable  to  get  relief.  By  this  time,  as  the  defense  was  more  daring  than 
profitable,  by  common  consent  of  all  the  officers  a  trumpeter  was  sent  to 
Lery  to  ask  for  a  truce  and  terms.  The  truce  was  agreed  upon,  but  in  respect 
to  the  terms  of  surrender  and  delivery,  the  objections  on  both  sides  were  such 
that  no  agreement  was  reached;  because  the  English  wanted  to  surrender 
with  full  military  honors,  and  this  Monsieur  Lery  refused:  wherefore  the 
battle  was  resumed  and  what  could  not  be  settled  by  words  and  reasons,  was 
determined  by  arms.  The  besieged  recognized  that  their  total  destruction  was 
imminent  and  decided  themselves  to  put  an  unhappy  and  fatal  end  to  this  ex- 
pedition. Mining  the  magazines,  which  were  well  provided  with  powder,  they 
set  a  train  of  gun  powder  which  could  be  fired  whenever  they  wished.  The 
battle  continued,  and  the  enemy  were  at  last  able  to  enter  the  fort  where  they 
put  everyone  to  the  sword,  the  Governor  being  among  the  first  to  suffer  this 
misfortune.  From  the  point  of  view  of  heroism  and  nobility  of  soul,  such  a 
defense  is  rather  to  be  condemned  than  praised ;  but  while  the  greedy  besiegers 
were  satiating  their  thirst  for  plunder,  they  noticed  there  was  fire  in  the  maga- 
zine and  fled  hastily  and  in  disorder,  thus  delivering  themselves  from  the  trap 
in  which  all  of  them  (even  though  victorious)  would  have  perished.  They 


THE  FRENCH  CAPTURE  FORT  BULL 


9' 


escaped.  The  fire  reached  the  gunpowder  almost  immediately,  and  every- 
thing blew  up.  Only  the  ruins  of  the  fort  remained  to  mark  its  site. 

In  America  things  continue  to  go  against  the  English  and  it  is  also  to 
be  noted  that  almost  all  the  natives  here  have  taken  the  part  of  France,  and 
have  risen  against  England. 

Upon  the  European  seas,  however,  this  has  not  been  the  course  of  events, 
for  here  on  several  occasions  the  fortunes  of  war  have  recently  been  diverse. 
A  few  leagues  off  the  bar  a  French  sloop  named  the  Josefa,  carrying  thirty 
cannon,  met  a  small  English  vessel  called  the  Marianna;  the  former  had  a 
crew  of  twenty  men,  the  latter  of  seventeen.  But  the  English,  knowing  that 
the  Josefa  had  a  cargo  and  could  not  defend  herself,  attacked  and  boarded  her 
with  such  good  luck  that  she  surrendered  at  once,  and  they  entered  the  bar 
with  this  prize,  so  important  that  two  hundred  and  fifty  cruzados  have  already 
been  offered  for  her.  But  on  the  high  seas  two  French  vessels  fell  in  with  an 
English  packet,  and  as  the  latter  was  not  so  well  qualified  for  battle,  after  a 
few  moments  of  fighting  she  was  overcome  by  her  enemies ;  however,  when  these 
were  already  claiming  the  victory,  an  English  privateer  appeared,  and  drawing 
up  to  the  packet  started  the  battle  again.  While  victory  still  hung  in  the 
balance  between  the  two  parties,  a  breeze  that  began  to  blow  from  the  North 
gave  such  advantage  to  the  privateer  that  its  crew  not  only  saved  their  com- 
patriots from  the  hands  of  the  enemy,  but  turned  conquerors  into  conquered 
and  seized  both  the  French  sloops,  which  were  armed  for  war. 

It  would  be  tiresome  on  my  part  to  relate  other  similar  incidents,  which 
because  they  are  less  important  do  not  merit  so  much  attention ;  suffice  it 
for  the  curious  to  know  that  the  vessels  taken  from  the  French  by  the  English 
already  number  more  than  two  hundred  and  thirty,  and  that  in  this  port  of 
Lisbon  alone  there  are  now  seven  prizes.  And  as  in  the  report  given  on  the 
capture  of  the  stronghold  of  Port  Mahon  various  circumstances  were  omitted, 
they  are  now  included  here  to  satisfy  the  curious.  Thus,  to  the  articles  given 
in  the  first  report,  the  six  following  should  be  added : 

I.  The  whole  garrison  was  to  leave  with  guns  shouldered,  drums  beating, 
banners  flying,  each  man  carrying  twenty  cartridges,  and  his  fuse  lighted. 

II.  Lieutenant  General  Blackeney.  Commandant  of  the  stronghold,  and 
his  garrison,  both  civil  and  military,  were  to  leave  carrying  all  that  belonged 
to  them,  including  their  coffers,  provided  they  paid  whatever  just  debts  they 
might  owe. 

III.  The  King  of  France  would  furnish  transport  ships  to  take  the 
garrison  to  Gibraltar  and  disembark  it  there,  but  passports  must  be  given  for 
the  return  of  these  embarkations  to  the  ports  of  France ;  meanwhile  the  hos- 
tages given  for  this  purpose  would  be  retained. 

IV.  Victuals  must  be  provided  for  the  whole  garrison  up  to  the  day  of 
departure  and  for  a  voyage  of  twelve  days  thereafter;  if  these  should  not  be 
enough,  more  must  be  given  them,  to  be  paid  for  by  the  evacuated. 

V.  All  papers  touching  the  economic  and  military  government  of  the 
stronghold  must  be  returned  reciprocally ;  and  in  the  same  way  all  prisoners 
taken  during  the  siege  must  be  exchanged. 

VI.  The  Commissaries  of  both  parties  must  go  to  work  immediately 


92 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


to  put  these  articles  into  execution,  handing  over  all  charts  of  the  galleys, 
mines,  and  subterranean  constructions. 

In  the  Forts  two  hundred  and  eleven  cannon  and  sixty-nine  mortars 
were  found.  The  surrender  took  place  on  the  28th  of  June,  on  which  day  at 
five  o'clock  in  the  morning,  a  suspension  of  fighting  was  agreed  upon  so  that 
the  dead  and  wounded  on  both  sides  might  be  removed.  Casualties  of  the 
French  were  twenty-four  officers  and  four  hundred  soldiers.  At  two  in  the 
afternoon  three  representatives  of  the  besieged  were  sent  to  ask  for  twenty- 
four  hours  for  a  capitulation,  but  only  six  hours  were  granted  them.  At  eight 
o'clock  at  night,  the  Chevalier  de  Redmond,  Marshal  General,  was  sent  to 
carry  the  written  conditions,  which  had  been  answered  by  the  Duke  of  Riche- 
lieu, to  Commandant  Blackeney,  who  signed  them.  And  thus  ended  the  famous 
siege  of  Port  Mahon. 

The  interested  reader  may  rest  assured  that  we  shall  continue  to  satisfy 
his  curiosity  with  other  true  reports  such  as  the  one  with  which  we  now  en- 
tertain him. 

Translated  from  the  Portuguese  by 
CAROLINE  B.  BOURLAND 


A  Russian  Daumier 


AN  exceptionally  rare  edition  of  nineteenth-century  Russian  cartoons 
and  caricatures  by  M.  Nevakhovitch  has  been  acquired  by  the  Li- 
brary. It  is  said  that  hitherto  only  one  complete  set  has  been  available 
in  Russia  and  none  in  the  United  States.  The  set  is  in  four  volumes, 
published  from  1846  to  1849. 

Nevakhovitch,  who  has  been  described  as  a  Russian  Daumier,  has 
a  pen  of  extraordinary  acuteness  and  penetrating  power;  stylistically, 
his  work  stems  from  European  and  particularly  French  tradition.  One 
might  say  that  his  importance  as  an  artist  is  exceeded  by  the  significance 
of  his  illustrations  as  a  mirror  of  the  times.  The  period  of  1846-1849  in 
Russia  was  one  of  political  stagnation.  The  Napoleonic  Wars  were  long 
in  the  past,  and  their  wounds  had  been  healed;  the  Crimean  War  was 
still  to  come.  The  country  was  under  the  rule  of  the  Czar  Nicholas  I; 
but  literature  and  art  were  flourishing  despite  the  reaction  that  held 
Russia  in  its  clutches.  Gogol  was  still  living  and  writing  his  satirical 
novels ;  so  was  the  great  fable  writer  Ivan  Krylov.  The  old  master  of 
Russian  poetry,  the  teacher  of  Pushkin  himself  —  Zhukovsky  —  was 
also  still  active,  although  old.  Russian  music  had  just  begun  to  assert 
itself  as  a  national  art  in  the  work  of  Glinka. 

Against  this  background  Nevakhovitch  drew  his  caricatures,  di- 
rected mainly  at  every-day  life,  topical  subjects,  and  human  frailties  in 
general.  He  entitled  his  collection  Eralash,  which  may  be  roughly  trans- 
lated as  Miscellany,  with  an  additional  suggestion  of  confusion  and  lack 
of  orderly  arrangement.  Among  the  topics  are  an  eclipse  of  the  moon, 
a  balloon  ascension,  an  epidemic  of  cholera  in  St.  Petersburg,  the  vogue 
for  Italian  opera,  drunkenness,  quack  medicine,  fake  philanthropy,  gen- 
eral incompetence  in  all  fields  of  human  activity,  as  well  as  in  education. 
The  existence  of  serfdom  in  Russia  was,  however,  never  questioned  by 
the  artist.  The  basic  social  structure  of  reactionary  Russia  was  accepted 
even  by  this  critic  of  human  imperfections. 

The  type  of  humor  is  conventional  and  nowhere  approaches  the 
high  art  of  Gogol  or  other  satirists  of  the  time.  Thus  the  hypocrisy  of 
a  professional  philanthropist  is  shown  in  a  sketch  representing  a  group 
of  men  in  top  hats  on  a  bridge,  watching  a  drowning  person  with  curi- 
osity but  without  any  desire  to  come  to  his  rescue.  There  are  several 
stock  characters,  as  for  instance,  a  German  tutor,  Karl  Ivanovitch,  who 
constantly  berates  his  pupils  for  not  attending  to  their  studies  while  he 
diverts  himself  in  a  childish  manner.  In  one  drawing,  he  blows  bubbles. 
When  a  pupil  observes,  "Ach,  Karl  Ivanovitch,  what  pretty  bubbles!", 
the  tutor  replies,  "Stop  wasting  time  on  trifles."  In  another  cartoon, 
the  tutor  consumes  the  children's  candy. 

93 


94 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Alcoholism  is  the  target  of  many  drawings.  There  is  a  set  repre- 
senting the  entrance  to  a  tavern,  marked  "First  Visit,"  "Second  Visit," 
and  "Third  Visit,"  with  progressive  degrees  of  intoxication.  The  intro- 
ductory drawing,  "Delirium  Tremens,"  is  a  remarkable  sketch  of  a  man 
seeing  little  devils  in  his  hallucinations.  St.  Petersburg  must  have  been 
visited  in  this  period  by  a  circus.  The  Belgian  giant  who  was  one  of  the 
attractions  appears  to  have  impressed  the  caricaturist's  imagination.  He 
has  drawn  him  curled  up  on  a  bed  far  too  short  for  his  long  body.  A 
bootblack  eyes  with  amazement  the  high  boots  which  he  has  to  shine. 
The  fad  of  physical  exercise  is  depicted  in  the  following  way :  an  emaci- 
ated man  is  being  congratulated  by  the  instructor,  who  proclaims :  "One 
half  of  your  illness  is  already  gone."  There  is  also  a  human  skull  with 
a  caption  reading:  "The  head  of  a  person  for  whom  gymnastics  was  a 
great  service."  Public  bathing  is  another  topic.  There  is  a  picture  of  a 
fat  man  taking  a  medicinal  bath  in  order  to  reduce,  and  a  picture  of  a 
thin  man  taking  the  same  cure  in  order  to  put  on  weight. 

Doctors  are  attacked  for  their  quackery.  Thus,  in  one  cartoon,  a 
doctor  inquires  of  the  servant  at  the  entrance  to  a  mansion,  "Is  the 
master  at  home?"  The  servant  replies:  "He  doesn't  feel  well  at  all  and 
so  told  me  not  to  receive  you,  Sir."  In  another  caricature,  the  butler 
gives  his  master  a  bottle  of  medicine,  saying:  "This  is  the  doctor's  pre- 
scription." The  master  replies :  "I  feel  under  the  weather,  so  I  had  bet- 
ter not  take  it  now."  The  caricaturist  makes  several  unfeeling  jibes  at 
the  fear  of  cholera  in  St.  Petersburg,  with  the  doctors  as  the  chief  vil- 
lains. A  skeleton  marked  "Cholera,"  riding  on  another  skeleton,  tries 
to  get  into  Russia  through  the  customs  barrier.  A  doctor  armed  with  a 
syringe  inquires,  "May  I  have  your  name,  your  rank  and  your  country 
of  origin?"  The  skeleton  replies:  "I  am  Cholera,  from  Persia."  (Ap- 
parently the  epidemic  was  blamed  on  importation  from  the  south.) 
Whereupon  the  doctor  orders  the  guards:  "Open  the  barrier!"  Then 
there  is  a  drawing  entitled :  "A  Dinner  with  Caution"  —  showing  a  group 
of  men  at  the  dinner  table  with  no  food  on  it. 

In  another  cartoon,  a  lover  proves  his  devotion  to  his  fair  lady  by 
offering  to  eat  a  portion  of  sherbet  or  take  a  peach,  for  fruit  and  cold 
water  were  regarded  as  dangerous.  Even  good  manners  suffered  from 
the  fear  of  cholera.  A  )^oung  lady  says :  "I  vomited  last  night,"  and  the 
young  swain  confesses  that  he  has  suspicious  rumblings  in  his  stomach. 
In  still  another,  the  invited  guests  flee  when  the  servant  brings  in  some 
cauliflower.  Elsewhere,  a  landowner  boasts  that  on  his  estate  there  was 
only  one  case  of  death  from  the  pestilence  among  the  peasants.  "How 
many  serfs  do  you  own?"  "One,"  replies  the  landowner.  Another 
gentleman  observes  to  a  friend:  "We  must  be  careful;  cholera  is  be- 
ginning to  reach  into  high  society."  Then  there  is  a  picture  of  a  man 
dancing  in  high  spirits.   "Wonderful !"  he  exclaims,  "On  the  fifteenth 


95 


A  RUSSIAN  DAUMIER 


97 


of  the  month  sixty-two  people  got  cholera,  but  only  sixteen  died."  Un- 
derstandable apprehension  is  expressed  in  the  face  of  another  man  who 
appeals  to  a  visiting  physician,  "Gentlemen,  I  am  ill.  Do  anything  you 
want  with  me,  treat  me  with  magnesia,  with  cream  of  tartar  ...  I  am  a 
courageous  man,  only  save  me !"  Apparently  one  of  the  curative  methods 
was  to  wear  a  warming  pad  on  the  stomach.  In  one  picture  a  man  points 
at  his  fat  wife,  saying,  "This  will  be  my  ruin.  I  cannot  afford  to  buy  a 
stomach  pad  that  large!" 

A  great  event  of  the  1847  season  in  St.  Petersburg  was  a  balloon 
ascension  performed  by  a  Frenchman.  There  are  shown  crowds  of 
people  assembling  in  Admiralty  Square  (the  famous  Admiralty  steeple 
is  recognizable  in  the  picture).  There  is  also  a  drawing  entitled:  "A 
Terrestrial  Escort  for  an  Air  Voyager,"  showing  a  group  of  Cossacks 
with  their  lances  high  in  the  air  chasing  the  balloon  in  the  expectation 
of  a  landing. 

Other  sides  of  modern  life  are  commented  upon.  A  cartoon  on  the 
new  omnibus  is  entitled  "Ironical  Conveniences  of  Life  in  the  Capital." 
The  illustrations  show  how  crowded  the  omnibus  is.  In  one  of  the  pic- 
tures several  passengers  are  falling  out  of  the  rear  vehicle  when  the 
driver  lets  his  horses  gallop  too  fast.  The  first  railway  line  in  Russia 
was  built  between  St.  Petersburg  and  Tsarskoye-Selo  in  the  1840's.  It 
is  reflected  in  a  drawing  captioned  "The  Flight  of  a  Genius,"  which 
shows  an  artist  riding  atop  a  small  locomotive,  painting  one  picture  after 
another  on  the  easels  installed  along  the  railway. 

Literary  life  is  gently  ridiculed  in  a  plate  which  pictures  the  editor 
of  the  magazine  The  Contemporary  passing  to  the  subscriber  a  copy  of 
the  magazine  and  a  roast  chicken.  The  caption  reads  "A  contemporary 
invention  with  all  sorts  of  fowl  as  a  free  supplement."  (In  Russian,  the 
word  "fowl"  has  the  same  connotation  as  "boloney"  in  collocpiial  Ameri- 
can usage.)  Nevakhovitch  had  true  appreciation  for  genuine  literature 
and  for  once  abandoned  his  biting  sarcasm  as  he  pictured  "A  Procession 
to  the  Temple  of  Glory."  We  find  Gogol  mounting  on  the  second  volume 
of  his  classic  Dead  Souls,  and  Glinka,  with  trumpets  for  legs.  The  cus- 
toms barrier  which  appears  in  many  of  these  drawings,  which  was  sym- 
bolic of  Russian  political  isolation,  is  here  lifted  to  let  the  great  writers 
pass  to  the  Temple  of  Glory. 

NICOLAS  SLONIMSKY 


8 


Exhibitions  in  the  Print  Department 


Lithographs  by  Henri  de  Toulouse-Lautrec 

A COMPREHENSIVE  exhibition  of  Toulouse-Lautrec's  lithographic  work 
was  held  in  the  Wiggin  Gallery  in  June  1944.  Since  this  was  received  with 
enthusiasm,  another  opportunity  will  be  given  to  study  this  great  artist  further 
in  work  which  for  the  most  part  was  not  previously  displayed. 

The  strangeness  and  power  revealed  in  this  first  showing  left  no  doubt 
in  the  minds  of  visitors  that  here  was  an  artist  quite  unrelated  to  any  past 
tradition  in  lithography.  Although  records  of  types  have  been  ably  put  upon  stone 
by  such  celebrated  men  as  Daumier  and  Gavarni,  rarely  has  an  artist  con- 
veyed so  much  intensity  of  life  in  a  decorative  and  colorful  manner.  Realism 
is,  of  course,  the  dominant  note  throughout  Lautrec's  work,  but  there  are  oc- 
casions when  he  ventures  into  the  realms  of  the  imaginative  with  some  sur- 
prising prints,  of  which  "Miss  Loie  Fuller,"  "Au  Pied  du  Sinai,"  a  number  of 
his  posters,  and  many  song  covers  are  excellent  examples.  It  is  in  his  litho- 
graphs particularly  rather  than  in  his  paintings  that  he  attacks  realism  and 
surpasses  the  fantastic.  He  gives  his  personalities  a  certain  material  existence 
by  introducing  new  laws  and  techniques  in  the  medium  of  lithography,  and  there- 
by accomplishes  a  keener  relationship  between  his  subjects  and  his  creative  mind. 

Lautrec  is  an  ennobler  of  the  lighter  side  of  life.  In  studying  his  vast 
oeuvre  one  finds  a  queer  blend  of  the  commonplace  and  the  highest  ideals,  which 
seem  theoretically  in  constant  battle  with  his  physical  being.  It  is  scarcely  to 
be  wondered  at  that  a  temperament  so  arbitrary,  controlled  by  his  deformity, 
should  impel  him  to  select  themes  to  fit  his  dual  personality  of  bitterness  and 
inborn  noble  quality.  This  combination  enabled  him  to  touch  his  subjects  pro- 
foundly without  being  coarse  or  meager.  His  great  talent,  so  full  of  atavisms 
from  which  he  could  not  reasonably  escape,  gives  proof  of  his  great  courage 
and  creative  ability. 

In  his  prints  of  famous  personalities,  clowns,  actors,  and  dancers  one 
feels  himself  in  the  presence  of  virile  human  beings.  Subjects  which  arrest  attention, 
such  as  the  fine  series  of  May  Belfort,  Yvette  Guilbert.  Lender,  and  Brandes 
are  only  a  few  outstanding  examples  of  line,  mass,  and  movement  that  arouse 
emotion  and  create  a  particular  mood.  Lautrec's  clean-cut  style  and  direct- 
ness is  often  considered  cruel,  but  a  close  study  of  his  work  will  reveal  this  to 
be  a  misinterpretation  of  a  seeming"  cynicism  which  is  in  truth  his  courageous 
form  of  frankness. 

In  the  matter  of  technique  he  is  original  in  the  use  of  spatter  work,  which 
is  employed  to  produce  flat  tones  both  in  color  and  in  black  and  white.  One 
sees  this  used  to  excellent  advantage  in  his  posters  of  Jane  Avril,  Aristide 
Bruant,  Reine  de  Joie,  La  Goulue  au  Moulin-Rouge,  Le  Divan  Japonais,  and 
others.  In  these  examples  one  finds  him  the  natural  designer  of  faultless  com- 
position in  both  area  and  color  arrangement.  They  also  reveal  that  in  his 
achievement  he  owes  much  of  his  success  to  the  Japanese.  However,  his  ap- 
proach to  his  subject  is  original,  and  seems  to  fit  into  the  pattern  of  the  past 
as  well  as  the  movement  of  the  present. 


98 


PRINT  DEPARTMENT 


99 


As  one  studies  the  several  hundred  examples  of  Lautrec's  work  in  the  Albert 
H.  Wig-gin  Collection,  there  is  never  monotony.  One  is  conscious  of  his  seek- 
ing always  to  satisfy  his  own  high  standard  in  themes  which,  although  at 
times  they  may  seem  trivial  realisms,  are  great  lithographs.  We  can  appreciate 
his  greatness  without  prejudice  or  limitations,  when  we  understand  that  he 
was  an  artist  of  no  circumscribed  mentality,  but  one  who  was  striving  for 
something  larger  and  deeper  than  individual  salvation.  He  creates  sympathy 
for  his  sometimes  tragic  characters  far  beyond  mere  personal  analogy.  Unlike 
most  artists,  Lautrec  had  more  than  adequate  funds  to  carry  on  his  experi- 
ments, and  the  thought  of  outside  estimation  of  his  efforts  by  an  audience  was 
of  little  concern  to  him.  His  exaggerations  were  often  trying  to  his  sitters,  for 
in  his  individual  way  he  captured  their  real  character  in  spontaneous  and 
sometimes  unusual  attitudes.  His  compositions  depicted  a  recklessness  that 
was  eloquent  of  his  impatient  and  impressive  talent. 

Any  group  or  series  of  prints  such  as  "Mile  Lender  et  Baron,"  "Au 
Moulin  Roug-e:  Un  Rude!  Un  Vrai  Rude!,"  "Folies-Bergere :  Les  Pudeurs  de 
M.  Prudhomme,"  "Au  Theatre-Libre:  Antoine  dans  l'lnquietude,"  "Miss  May 
Belfort  en  Cheveux,"  "Sarah  Bernhardt,  dans  Cleopatre,"  "Yvette  Guilbert," 
"Le  Jockey,"  gives  evidence  that  lithography  is  a  natural  medium  for  Lautrec. 
They  are  composed  in  terms  of  areas,  in  bold  masses,  silhouetted  in  luminous 
greys,  white,  or  color  against  the  tone  of  a  carefully  chosen  paper.  This 
method  produces  a  decorative  effect  of  great  simplicity  free  from  the  fatal 
mistake  of  too  many  details  and  unessentials.  When  he  attempts  an  all-over 
composition,  the  essay  is  successful  in  filling  the  entire  surface  with  close-up 
figures  in  flat  tones,  which  surprisingly  enough  give  a  clear  and  finely  subtle 
three-dimensional  achievement.  They  have  no  lack  of  power,  and  especially 
in  those  lithographs  where  more  than  one  figure  is  distributed  over  the  given 
area  there  is  maximum  force,  clarity,  and  volume. 

To  anatyze  Toulouse-Lautrec's  art  is  most  difficult,  for  his  satire  is  not 
directed  against  any  particular  social  set  or  political  background,  but  rather 
against  his  unfortunate  self.  His  statements  are  those  of  an  artist  who  turns 
the  wheel  of  his  talent  to  his  own  satisfaction.  The  spectacle  of  life  enchanted 
him  and  made  of  him  a  master,  proving  that  this  lame  little  man  advanced  in 
his  artistic  aims  with  the  determined  easy  steps  of  greatness. 

ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 


Graphic  Arts  Processes 

Dry  Point 

ITH  the  exception  of  Diirer,  Meldolla,  and  the  Master  of  the  Amster- 
dam Cabinet,  there  are  practically  no  examples  of  dry  point  before 
the  time  of  Rembrandt,  and  after  him  only  a  few  isolated  examples  until  the 
middle  of  the  nineteenth  century  when  dry  point  became  a  medium  used  by 
most  of  the  great  etchers. 

In  dry  point  no  acid  is  used  as  in  etching.  The  lines  are  drawn  directly  on 
the  copper  with  the  needle.  All  that  is  needed  is  a  polished  copper  plate,  a 
needle,  a  scraper,  a  burnisher,  and  a  little  ink.  Usually  pure  copper  is  used  for 
dry  point,  whereas  that  used  for  etching  is  mixed  with  an  alloy  which  makes 
it  harder.  The  characteristic  mark  of  a  dry  point  is  the  burr  which  is  thrown 
up  by  the  needle  as  it  goes  through  the  copper.  The  burr  is  a  small  ridge  of 
copper  on  the  side  of  the  line  —  it  is  similar  to  earth  thrown  up  on  the  side  of 
a  furrow  made  by  a  plow.  When  the  plate  is  printed  the  ink  remains  under  this 
ridge,  as  well  as  in  the  line  itself,  and  gives  the  drypoint  its  peculiar  quality. 

The  artist  sometimes  begins  his  work  with  a  wax  ground  of  the  same 
kind  used  in  etching,  so  that  he  may  trace  the  composition  on  the  blackened 
surface.  Some  artists  work  directly  on  the  ground,  digging  into  the  copper  as 
if  the  ground  were  not  there,  since  it  serves  only  to  provide  a  blackened  sur- 
face for  the  artist  to  start  upon,  making  it  easier  to  see  the  preliminary  lines 
as  copper  color  against  the  black.  Other  artists  prefer  to  make  a  lightly  bitten 
etching  of  the  subject,  building  upon  this  with  the  dry  point  technique  after 
the  ground  has  been  removed.  Perhaps  the  freest  of  all  methods  is  to  draw 
directly  on  the  copper  with  the  needle  without  any  intermediary  ground  or 
etching.  If  the  artist  desires  brief  guide  lines  he  may  sketch  on  the  surface 
with  a  lithograph  crayon.  As  soon  as  a  number  of  lines  have  been  drawn  on 
the  copper  he  ma)'  rub  a  little  printers'  ink  into  them  to  see  his  work.  In  doing 
this,  however,  he  must  be  very  careful  not  to  create  a  false  impression  of  non- 
existing  line  work  by  heavily  inking  the  burr.  Any  burr  that  seems  too  heavy 
may  be  reduced  in  value  by  the  burnisher,  a  steel  tool  with  a  smooth  rounded 
end.  When  this  end  is  rubbed  gently  but  firmly  over  the  area  to  be  reduced, 
the  burr  will  be  gradually  pushed  back  into  the  line,  thus  filling  it  up.  The  line 
may  be  completely  removed  in  this  way  if  necessary.  To  leave  a  very  fine, 
clean-cut  line,  the  burr  may  be  cut  off  with  the  scraper.  The  great  degree  of 
finesse  available  through  the  manipulation  of  the  burr  by  either  pressure  on 
the  needle,  or  the  use  of  the  burnisher  or  scraper,  makes  it  possible  to  obtain 
the  effect  of  different  textures.  This  is  particularly  noticeable  in  the  portraits 
by  Muirhead  Bone,  where  the  great  delicacy  of  a  fine  dry  point  line  is  used  in 
the  face,  and  a  heavier  stroke,  retaining  the  burr,  is  used  to  suggest  other 
sections  of  the  composition.  The  quality  of  this  fine  delicate  line  and  the  con- 
trasting rich,  velvety  line  is  not  possible  in  pure  etching. 

Although  copper  in  itself  seems  to  be  a  sturdy  material,  the  burr  that  is 
raised  is  very  delicate.  To  save  the  burr  a  dry  point  is  carried  as  far  as  possible 
before  any  printing,  and  few  states  are  made.  This  is  the  general  practice,  al- 
'  hough  dry  point  masters  such  as  Bone  have  made  as  many  as  twenty  to  thirty 


100 


GRAPHIC  ARTS  PROCESSES 


101 


states,  reworking  the  dry  point  to  retain  the  burr.  The  plate  is  inked  in  much 
the  same  manner  as  an  etching  (care  being  taken  not  to  be  too  rough  on  the  burr), 
but  with  a  slightly  thinner  ink.  Either  a  hand  or  rag  wiping  may  be  used.  With 
each  impression  taken  the  burr  wears  down  slightly  so  that  one  may  easily  dis- 
tinguish an  early  or  late  impression  by  the  comparative  richness  of  the  burr. 
There  is  more  difference,  however,  between  the  first  few  impressions  than  in 
any  of  the  others.  One  can  see,  therefore,  that  it  is  impossible  to  procure  a 
great  many  impressions  from  a  dry  point  if  one  is  to  retain  the  fine  quality  of 
an  early  proof.  This  problem  has  been  solved  in  part  by  the  use  of  steel  facing, 
a  process  for  depositing  a  thin  film  of  steel  by  electrolysis  over  the  surface  of 
the  copper,  which,  as  soon  as  it  wears  down  and  the  copper  may  be  seen,  must 
be  chemically  removed  and  the  plate  refaced.  This  layer  is  so  thin  that  all  the 
quality  of  the  burr  is  retained,  and  added  strength  to  withstand  pressui-e  is 
given.  Steel  facing  is  generally  used  for  large  editions  of  perhaps  one  hundred 
or  more  impressions,  but  many  artists  use  it  as  a  protection  to  the  surface  for 
even  more  limited  editions.  Because  copper  is  more  absorbent  than  steel,  it 
retains  ink  on  the  plate  and  makes  possible  the  rich,  warm  impressions  for 
which  the  copper  plate  is  noted.  Impressions  from  steel  are  colder  and  are  apt 
to  be  cleanly  wiped  unless  great  care  is  taken  with  each  one.  To  see  the 
difference,  if  any,  between  a  proof  printed  from  the  original  surface  and  one 
printed  from  the  steel-faced  copper,  one  should  compare  two  prints  from  the 
same  plate,  printed  by  the  same  hand. 

The  question  will  probably  arise  as  to  how  one  can  tell  the  difference 
between  a  dry  point  and  an  etching.  The  burr  of  the  dry  point  is  the  most  out- 
standing difference.  But  what  if  the  burr  has  been  cut  off?  In  that  case  the 
dry  point  line  has  a  delicate  quality  of  its  own  which  is  identified  by  a  lack  of 
sharpness,  especially  at  the  ends  of  the  lines.  This  is  self  evident  when  one 
considers  how  each  is  made.  The  etched  line  is  bitten  into  the  plate  evenly 
wherever  the  acid  attacks  the  copper  —  so  that  the  line  is  equally  sharp  and  of 
equal  width  from  one  end  to  the  other.  The  depth  and  width  of  a  dry  point  line 
are  controlled  by  the  pressure  of  one's  hand  upon  the  needle,  and  as  one  lifts 
the  needle  from  the  copper  at  the  end  of  a  stroke  the  pressure  is  lighter,  just 
as  with  a  pen  or  pencil.  In  a  mass  of  cross-hatching,  etching  will  always  pre- 
sent a  network  of  lines,  each  one  of  which  can  be  distinguished.  In  dry  point 
these  lines,  with  the  burr,  will  present  a  solid  mass  of  black. 

Although  acid  is  not  used  in  either  dry  point  or  line  engraving,  the  pro- 
cesses and  the  quality  are  quite  different.  The  burin  used  in  engraving  is 
pushed  through  the  metal,  throwing  up  a  curl  of  copper  in  front  of  the  tool, 
and  any  remaining  on  the  line  is  scraped  off.  In  dry  point  the  needle  is  handled 
like  a  pencil,  and  the  burr  is  left  on  the  side  of  the  lines  as  a  part  of  the  design. 
The  engraved  line  has  a  formality  of  technique  imposed  by  the  characteristics 
of  the  burin,  whereas  the  dry  point  line  has  the  freedom  of  a  naturally  drawn  stroke. 

Sometimes  a  diamond  or  ruby  point  is  used  instead  of  the  steel  needle. 
The  diamond  point  moves  very  freely  through  the  copper,  making  a  shallow 
line  and  throwing  more  burr  on  both  sides.  This  burr  wears  off  sooner  than 
that  made  by  a  steel  needle.  The  ruby  point  makes  a  rounded  and  more  shallow 
line  than  either  the  steel  or  diamond  point. 


MURIEL  C.  FIGENBAUM 


Harvard  Library  Bulletin 


HANDSOMELY  printed  in  an  at- 
tractive format,  the  first  issue  of 
the  Harvard  Library  Bulletin  is  out. 
Comprising-  128  pages,  the  number  in- 
cludes a  half  dozen  major  articles  and 
many  shorter  notes.  Its  rich  contents 
augur  well  for  the  future  of  the  new 
publication. 

In  a  foreword  Mr.  Keyes  D.  Met- 
calf,  Director  of  the  Harvard  Univer- 
sity Library,  describes  the  program  of 
the  bulletin : 

"As  a  publication  of  the  Harvard 
University  Library,  it  will  represent 
all  the  Harvard  libraries,  eighty-two 
in  number,  and  its  contents  will  deal 
primarily  with  those  libraries,  with  the 
results  of  research  based  upon  their 
holdings,  and  with  more  general  li- 
brary problems  in  the  light  of  Harvard 
theory  and  experience.  Its  contributors 
will  be  drawn  both  from  within  and 
from  without  the  University.  It  is  pub- 
lished in  the  belief  that  one  of  the 
great  libraries  of  the  world  cannot 
meet  in  full  the  responsibilities  inher- 
ent in  its  position  unless  it  has  a  regu- 
lar publication  which  will  make  knoAvn 
to  the  Harvard  community  and  to  the 
scholarly  world  in  general  its  collec- 
tions, its  experience,  and  its  ideas." 

Among  the  longer  articles  is  the 
first  instalment  of  "Views  of  Harvard 
to  i860"  by  Hamilton  Vaughan  Bail, 
to  be  published  in  six  consecutive  is- 
sues. The  study  will  include  a  descrip- 
tion of  all  known  views  of  Harvard 
which  appeared  before  i860.  The  date, 
as  the  writer  points  out,  is  not  purely 
arbitrary,  for  it  "marks  the  practical 
beginning  of  photography  as  a  me- 
dium for  portraying  the  historical  and 
factual  aspect,  just  as  it  marks  the  end 
of  the  original  drawing  and  print 
for  this  purpose."  Mr.  Metcalf  contrib- 
utes the  first  of  three  articles  on  "The 
Undergraduate  and  the  Harvard  Li- 
brary." It  covers  the  period  up  to  1877 
when  Justin  Winsor  became  librarian 
of  Harvard  College.  The  second  ar- 
ticle will  deal  with  the  period  from  1877 
to  1937,  and  the  third  will  tell  of  the 
development    since     1937.  Professor 


Fred  N.  Robinson  gives  an  account  of 
the  Celtic  Collection  in  the  Harvard 
Library.  The  total  number  of  volumes 
available  for  Celtic  scholarship  is  over 
8000,  and  photostats  and  facsimiles 
supply,  in  addition,  a  vast  supply  of 
unpublished  material.  The  Library  has 
none  of  the  great  medieval  codices, 
but  then  there  is  no  such  manuscript 
in  any  American  library. 

Mr.  Philip  Hofer,  Curator  of  Print- 
ing and  Graphic  Arts,  describes  a  newly 
discovered  book  from  Willibald  Pirck- 
heimer's  library  —  a  fine  Aldine  Greek 
and  Latin  Aesop,  printed  at  Venice  in 
1505,  with  Pirckheimer's  arms  embla- 
zoned on  the  first  text  page.  Mr.  E.  P. 
Goldschmidt  of  London,  who  first 
recognized  the  arms,  attributed  it  to 
Diirer,  and  Mr.  Campbell  Dodgson, 
emeritus  head  of  the  British  Museum 
Print  Room,  tends  to  agree  with  his 
opinion.  In  his  article  Mr.  Hofer  pre- 
sents the  circumstantial  and  artistic 
evidence  to  support  the  theory  of 
Diirer's  authorship.  Mr.  William  A. 
Jackson,  Director  of  the  Houghton  Li- 
brary, writes  of  the  Harvard  set  of 
Elizabethan  proclamations  put  together 
by  Humphrey  Dyson,  which  the  Li- 
brary acquired  in  1940.  But  for  Dyson's 
industry,  Mr.  Jackson  states,  "there 
would  have  been  preserved  only  a 
scattered  few  of  the  printed  procla- 
mations of  Queen  Elizabeth's  reign, 
for  very  nearly  all  that  have  come 
down  to  us  belong  to  the  seven  sur- 
viving sets  which  he  put  together  in 
1618."  The  only  other  set  in  this  coun- 
try is  in  the  Folger  Library.  Mr.  Clif- 
ford K.  Shipton,  Custodian  of  the 
University  Archives,  sets  forth  the  diffi- 
culties which  beset  the  officials  of  an 
archive  in  deciding  what  material 
should  be  accepted  or  rejected. 

Mr.  George  William  Cottrell,  Jr.  is 
the  editor  of  the  bulletin,  which  will 
he  published  three  times  a  year,  in  winter, 
spring,  and  autumn.  It  is  planned  to 
maintain  at  least  an  average  of  96 
pages  in  future  issues ;  annual  sub- 
scriptions are  at  the  rate  of  $4.00,  with 
single  numbers  priced  at  $1.50.     Z.  H. 


102 


Ten  Books 


Henry  Adams  and  his  Friends.  Edited 
by  Harold  Dean  Cater.  Houghton 
Mifflin.  1947.  797  pp. 
TiffB  name  of  Henry  Adams  always 
brings  to  mind  the  author's  autobiogra- 
phy, The  Education  of  Henry  Adorns. 
In  that  work  he  recorded  the  story  of 
his  life  in  order  to  determine,  in  his 
own  words,  "what  part  of  education 
had  in  his  personal  experience  turned 
out  to  be  useful  and  what  not."  The 
book  gives  an  intimate  picture  of  a 
distinguished  family  and  friends,  and 
the  political  scenes  in  which  they 
moved  were  significant;  but  the  cen- 
tral figure  is  unconvincing.  The  re- 
peated pattern  of  frustration  suggests 
unresolved  conflicts  in  Adams's  own 
nature  instead  of  giving  an  objective 
account  of  his  achievements.  The  au- 
thor of  The  History  of  the  United  States 
during  the  Administrations  of  Jefferson 
and  Madison,  still  definitive  for  the  peri- 
od, of  Mont-Saint-Michel  and  Chartres, 
and  of  several  other  outstanding  works 
need  not  have  apologized.  The  present 
volume  offers  in  the  hitherto  unpub- 
lished letters,  seven  hundred  and  fifty 
of  them,  a  more  realistic  picture  of 
the  man.  Here  —  writing  to  his  literary 
friends,  business  associates,  family  — 
is  the  same  introspective,  cynical  per- 
son, but  with  more  warmth  and  humor 
than  appeared  in  the  autobiography. 
He  addresses  John  Hay  as  "Dearly 
Beloved,"  Anna  Lodge  as  "My  Angel 
Sister,"  Isabella  Stewart  Gardner  as 
"Wonderful  Woman."  He  writes  whim- 
sically to  his  sister  after  a  series  of 
complaints,  "You  always  hide  your 
annoyances  and  anxieties  as  though 
they  were  kittens  and  you  the  mother- 
cat  nursing  them  ;  but  I  love  to  scream 
about  mine  and  insist  on  their  -being 
admitted  by  everybody."  Or  he  could 
be  tender,  for  the  tragic  experience  of 
his  wife's  derangement  and  suicide 
made  him  feel  deeply  for  others.  To 
the  Hays  he  wrote  on  the  death  of 
their  son,  "I  thought  that  perhaps  my 
knowledge  of  suffering  might  make 
me  more  useful  than  another  friend 
could  be."  Mr.  Cater's  long  biographi- 
cal introduction  gives  a  resume  of  the 


facts  and  a  juster  estimate.  Although 
this  is  the  third  collection  of  Adams's 
letters,  it  is  richer  and  wider  in  range 
than  the  earlier  ones.  There  are  still 
<|iiestions  to  be  answered  about  Henry 
Adams.  His  bitterness  about  Harvard 
where  he  studied  and  taught  brilliant- 
ly for  seven  years,  about  Boston, 
America,  and  the  age  in  which  he 
lived  seems  too  personal.  His  sense  of 
impending  doom  —  "Jt  is  a  queer  sen- 
sation," he  wrote,  "this  >ecret  belief 
that  one  stands  on  the  brink  of  the 
world's  greatest  catastrophe"  —  has 
something  prophetic  about  it  perhaps, 
but  was  neurotic  too.  And  his  feeling 
of  failure,  which  has  been  attributed 
to  the  weight  of  eminent  ancestry,  was 
excessive  even  in  a  man  whose  grand- 
father and  great-grandfather  had  been 
Presidents.  (R.  E.) 

The  Lincoln  Reader.  Edited  by  Paul 
M.  Angle.  Rutgers  Univ.  1947.  454  pp. 
Tins  is  a  composite  biography  of  the 
martyred  President.  In  all,  there  are 
one  hundred  seventy-nine  selections 
from  the  Avorks  of  sixty-five  authors, 
so  pieced  together  as  to  form  an  in- 
tegrated narrative  in  twenty-four  chap- 
ters. Mr.  Angle,  a  distinguished  Lin- 
coln scholar  himself,  has  written  a 
succinct  introduction  to  each  chapter, 
and  he  presents  each  selection  with  a 
few  apt  lines.  Pages  from  the  biogra- 
phies of  Carl  .Sandburg,  Ida  M.  Tar- 
bell,  Lord  Charnvvood,  Albert  J.  Bev- 
eridge,  William  H.  Herndon,  John  G. 
Nicolay  and  John  Hay  alternate  with 
excerpts  from  less-known  works  by 
James  G.  Randall,  Benjamin  P.  Thom- 
as, and  a  host  of  others.  Wisely,  the 
editor  has  also  included  portions  uf 
some  of  Lincoln's  writings  which  have 
autobiographical  significance.  Mr.  Angle 
makes  no  claim  to  have  selected  the 
"best"  from  the  works  he  drew  upon. 
"1  have  simply  taken,"  he  writes, 
"from  each  author  what  seems  to  fit 
best  at  a  given  point  in  the  book  —  a 
fine  piece  of  narrative  here,  a  vivid 
reminiscence  there,  a  penetrating  char- 
acter study  or  a  contemporary  diary 
entry  at  other  places."  His  own  role 


103 


104 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


he  modestly  compares  to  that  of  a 
"literary  midwife  to  those  who  have 
really  labored."  Whatever  the  nature 
of  his  performance,  the  book  deserves 
unstinted  praise.  It  has  a  richness 
which  no  other  single-volume  biogra- 
phy of  Lincoln  has.  The  styles  of  the 
many  authors,  in  spite  of  their  tre- 
mendous differences,  blend  without 
jarring;  and  the  whole  work  achieves 
a  remarkable  unity  and  coherence. 
One  is  glad  to  note  that  the  volume 
is  distributed  by  the  Book  of  the  Month 
Club,  for  there  could  be  no  more  suit- 
able life  of  Lincoln  to  attract  the  gen- 
eral reader.  (Z.  H.) 

Complacent  Dictator.  By  Sir  Samuel 
Hoare.  Knopf.  1947.  303  pp. 
A  mission  of  "a  few  weeks"  was  the 
phrase  Lord  Halifax  used  in  describ- 
ing the  proposed  visit  of  the  former 
Foreign  Minister  to  Madrid  for  the 
improvement  of  British  relations  with 
Spain.  Sir  Samuel  stayed  for  five  years. 
His  book,  compiled  from  his  notes  and 
correspondence,  falls  into  a  succession 
of  summaries  —  estimates  of  people, 
policies,  and  forces.  He  was  amazed, 
lie  admits,  to  find  Spain  so  utterly 
starved,  exhausted,  and  boiling  with 
popular  hatreds,  and  at  the  same  time 
throttled  by  German  agents.  Delicately 
balancing  himself  on  the  top  was 
Franco,  complacent  through  ignorance 
of  affairs  beyond  the  borders,  through 
indifference  to  the  suffering  at  home, 
and  because  his  political  enemies  were 
too  weak  to  attack  him.  The  most  vi- 
cious antagonist  of  the  democracies, 
however,  was  Foreign  Minister  Ser- 
rano Suher.  Two  facts  strengthened 
the  British  position :  the  unwillingness 
of  nine-tenths  of  the  people  to  enter 
the  war,  and  the  need  for  foreign  trade. 
With  United  States  cooperation,  cer- 
tain Spanish  commodities,  notably  the 
entire  output  of  wolfram,  were  pur- 
chased. 1942  was  the  crucial  year; 
thereafter  British  prestige  increased. 
No  understanding  with  the  Dictator 
was  ever  won,  Sir  Samuel  records.  He 
does  not  take  sides  about  the  future. 
Even  so,  this  indictment  by  so  pro- 
nounced a  Conservative  should  have 
weight  in  any  policy  toward  the  Fran- 
co regime.  (T.  C.) 


French  Personalities  and  Problems.  By 
D.  \Y.  Brogan.  Knopf.  1947.  241  pp. 
Mr.  Brogax,  well-known  Professor  of 
Political  Science  at  Cambridge  Uni- 
versity, is  the  author  of  several  distin- 
guished works,  including  the  most 
complete  history  of  the  Third  Repub- 
lic in  English.  Many  of  the  essays  in 
the  present  volume  have  already  ap- 
peared in  periodicals.  Some  are  delight- 
full}'  personal  in  tone.  The  essay  on 
Dumas  tells  how,  as  "a  bored  little  boy 
of  nine,  on  a  very  wet  afternoon  in  a 
damp  house  in  Ireland,"  he  came  upon 
an  old  book ;  this  was  his  introduction 
to  the  famous  novelist.  In  describing 
trends  in  French  thought  —  rational- 
ism, skepticism,  pessimism  —  Mr. 
Brogan  makes  the  fall  of  France  as 
well  as  the  dogged  courage  of  the  Re- 
sistance more  intelligible.  It  was  the 
"French  fault  of  seeing  through  them- 
selves" that  was  their  undoing  and,  in 
the  end,  their  source  of  strength.  The 
sections  on  politics  are  valuable  for 
those  who  would  understand  a  system 
in  which  Royalist,  Catholic,  and  Revo- 
lutionary traditions  cut  across  and  con- 
fuse class  interests.  Some  of  the  papers 
recall  poignantly  the  high  feelings  of 
their  occasions.  "News  Out  of  France" 
describes  the  sensation  in  London 
when,  after  long  silence,  French  pub- 
lications again  appeared  on  the  book- 
stands. "For  the  Fourteenth  of  July 
1945"  records  the  author's  emotions  as 
he  witnessed  preparations  for  the  first 
Bastille  Day  celebration  in  liberated 
France.  A  few  of  the  other  titles  indi- 
cate their  range :  "Tocqueville,"  "De 
Gaulle,"  "Proust  as  a  Social  Historian." 
Mr.  Brogan  loves  France,  but  he  never 
allows  his  feelings  to  distort  his  judg- 
ment. Since  so  many  recent  critics  have 
cheaply  condemned  the  French,  his 
more  balanced  appraisal  is  a  welcome 
change.  (R.  E.) 

This  Is  the  Story.  By  David  L.  Cohn. 
Houghton,  Mifflin.  1947.  563  pp. 
In  1944-45  the  author  made  a  journey 
through  Western  and  Southern  Eu- 
rope, Egypt,  and  the  Near  and  Far 
East,  for  the  purpose  of  studying  the 
organization  of  the  Army  Service 
Forces.  He  does,  indeed,  give  abundant 
information  on   engineering  exploits, 


TEN  BOOKS 


105 


salvage  operations,  and  medical  installa- 
tions. But,  while  the  record  of  such 
accomplishments  will  be  presented 
more  fully  in  a  later  work,  the  present 
book  gives  the  author's  reactions  to  his 
experiences  in  a  spontaneous,  ramb- 
ling style  that  runs  the  gamut  from 
flippant  raillery  to  profound  reflections. 
He  observed  "the  American  soldier 
dispersed  around  the  world  fighting, 
dying,  playing,  working,  talking"  — 
and  the  response  of  the  native  popula- 
tion, noting  the  G.  I.'s  higher  standard 
of  living  than  prevailed  even  among 
the  British,  his  good-natured  trust,  but 
also  his  arrogance.  Among  the  innu- 
merable interviews  and  observations 
in  foreign  countries,  the  most  notable 
are  those  in  the  East,  especially  Pales- 
tine. He  also  saw  the  feudal  Middle  East 
— Iraq.  Saudi  Arabia,  and  Iran.  (M.  M.) 

Black  Anger.  By  Wulf  Sachs.  Little, 
Brown.  1947.  344  pp. 

In  the  Union  of  South  Africa  the  color 
line  is  drawn  perhaps  more  sharply 
than  in  any  other  part  of  the  world. 
The  blacks  not  only  are  segregated 
but  need  special  permits  to  enter  the 
city,  and  when  there,  innumerable  other 
permits  to  stay  out  after  dark,  to  enter 
street  cars,  to  show  that  they  have 
paid  their  taxes,  and  so  on.  They  are 
almost  entirely  illiterate;  live  in  their 
world  of  superstitions  and  taboos,  the 
thin  veneer  of  Christianity  extending 
to  no  more  than  their  given  names. 
The  only  contact  which  they  have  with 
the  white  man  is  as  servants,  and  through 
unbending  courts  and  the  brutal  police 
force.  It  was  a  bold  enterprise,  there- 
fore, that  the  author,  a  psychoanalyst 
at  Johannesburg,  set  before  himself — 
to  penetrate  the  mind  of  the  black 
man,  to  see  clearly  his  communal  life 
as  well  as  his  relationship  to  white 
people.  He  has  devoted  several  years 
to  the  task,  and  the  result  is  a  unique 
combination  of  an  anthropological  and 
a  psychological  study,  told  with  the 
skill  and  sensitiveness  of  a  novelist. 
It  was  by  accident  that  Dr.  Sachs  met 
John,  a  medicine  man  of  the  Manyika 
tribe,  who,  having  left  his  native  vil- 
lage, decided  to  try  his  fortune  in  the 
city.  He  explores  the  problems,  suffer- 
ings, and  perplexities  of  this  intelli- 


gent and  talented  man,  not  only  as  a 
doctor  but  also  as  a  sympathetic  friend. 
He  also  introduces  a  score  of  other 
personalities :  John's  lazy  and  indolent 
wife  Maggie;  Emily,  the  soothsayer; 
Mdlawini,  who  killed  his  best  friend 
David,  whom  he  mistook  for  a  ghost; 
and  their  relatives  in  Swartyard,  the 
filthy  slum  at  Johannesburg,  and  in 
the  kraals  of  the  tribes.  There  are  enough 
scientific  data  to  fill  several  mono- 
graphs ;  however,  the  painstaking  ob- 
servations are  deftly  absorbed  in  the 
narrative,  which  thus  carries  excep- 
tional power  of  suggestion.  The  book 
might  have  a  salutary  effect  at  Johan- 
nesburg. It  might  be  read  with  great 
profit  even  at  Atlanta,  Georgia.  (Z.  H.) 

Critics  and  Crusaders.  By  Charles  A. 
.Madison.  Holt.  1947.  572  pp. 
These  studies  of  eighteen  "frontiers- 
men of  freedom"  illustrate,  in  the  au- 
thor's phrase,  "a  century  of  American 
protest."  The  quest  for  freedom,  Mr. 
Madison  points  out,  has  been  a  basic 
characteristic  of  y\mericans  from  the 
beginning,  though  freedom  has  meant 
different  things  to  different  people.  To 
the  Abolitionists  —  Garrison,  John 
Brown,  Phillips  —  it  was  the  emanci- 
pation of  the  slaves.  Margaret  Fuller, 
Albert  Brisbane,  and  Edward  Bellamy, 
sought  social  liberty  in  real  or  imagined 
Utopias.  In  the  eyes  of  Henry  George 
and  Thorstein  Veblen,  industrialism 
and  economic  inequality  were  the  chief 
foes  of  the  free  spirit.  Militant  liberals 
like  John  P.  Altgeld,  Lincoln  Steffens, 
and  Randolph  Bourne  fought  for  politi- 
cal justice ;  and  the  final  section  of  the 
book  deals  with  the  leaders  of  Social- 
ism, De  Leon,  Debs,  and  John  Reed. 
Mr.  Madison  gains  in  warmth  and  vi- 
tality by  treating  his  essays  as  por- 
traiture rather  than  as  mere  chapters 
in  history.  Writing  with  ease  and  hu- 
mor, but  also  with  deep  admiration  for 
the  men  and  women  he  describes,  he 
has  analyzed  a  healthy  native  radical- 
ism which  still  persists.  (H.  McC.) 

Great  Adventures  and  Explorations. 
Edited  by  Vilhjalmur  Stefansson.  Dial. 
1947.  788  pp. 

Vilhjalmur  Stefansson  has  here 
brought  together  extracts   from  the 


io6 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


writings  of  men  who  have  made  the 
unknown  and  feared  regions  of  the  earth 
part  of  our  common  knowledge  and 
life.  From  the  voyage  of  Pytheas  of 
Massalia  (Marseilles)  about  330  B.C. 
to  distant  Thule,  down  to  the  dauntless 
Peary's  dash  to  the  North  Pole  in  1909. 
the  book  describes  men  performing 
heroic  deeds  as  part  of  the  day's  work. 
The  old  Greenland  republic  founded 
by  Eric  the  Red  is  one  of  the  mysteries 
of  history;  yet  there  is  evidence  to 
show  that  it  kept  up  contact  with 
Europe  as  late  as  1450.  In  the  vast 
Pacific,  from  the  twelfth  to  the  four- 
teenth century,  the  Polynesians  made 
long  canoe  journeys  between  islands 
two  thousand  miles  apart.  The  book 
moves  on  into  stories  of  Columbus's 
voyages,  and  interesting  sections  of 
Pigafetta's  account  of  the  circumnavi- 
gation of  the  globe  by  Magellan's  fleet. 
Throughout,  the  layman  is  amazed  by 
the  scientific  knowledge  and  skill  dis- 
played by  these  early  navigators.  Per- 
haps, however,  the  ability  of  James 
Cook  on  the  expedition  which  discov- 
ered Botany  Bay  and  the  east  coast  of 
Australia  impresses  one  most.  It  took 
ability  of  a  high  order  to  be  the  first 
to  brave  the  shoals  of  the  Great  Barrier 
Reef.  Stefansson's  introductory  com- 
ments and  other  discussion  make  the 
book  not  a  mere  anthology,  but  an 
original  work  which  the  scholar  will 
be  glad  to  use.  (S.  W  .  F.) 

The  Path  of  Science.  By  C.  E.  Kenneth 
Mees,  with  the  cooperation  of  John  R. 
Baker.  Wiley.  1946.  250  pp. 
Dr.  Mees's  book,  based  on  a  series  of 
lectures  at  the  University  of  California, 
aims  to  present  the  development  of 
modern  science  in  its  relation  to  his- 
tory. The  author  agrees  with  Dr.  Sarton 
that  the  most  ominous  conflict  of  our 
time  is  the  difference  of  outlook  be- 
tween the  so-called  humanists  on  one 
side  and  scientists  on  the  other.  Yet  it 
is  essential  that  each  see  and  under- 
stand the  other  in  the  light  of  human 
progress :  the  evolution  of  physics  and 
chemistry  from  Galileo  and  Lavoisier 
to  the  discovery  of  nuclear  fission  and 
the  release  of  atomic  energy ;  the 
growth  of  biology  from  Vesalius  to  the 


electron  microscope;  the  development 
of  scientific  method  from  the  alchem- 
ists' primitive  equipment  to  the  great 
industrial  and  college  laboratories  of 
today.  Dr.  Vannevar  Bush,  director  of 
the  Office  of  Scientific  Research  and 
Development,  has  proposed  a  National 
Research  Foundation,  supported  by 
public  funds,  but  utilizing  existing 
private  and  commercial  facilities.  Un- 
der no  circumstances,  however,  Dr. 
Mees  emphasizes,  must  such  research 
be  controlled  by  authority,  or  by  party- 
politics.  (L.  A.  S.) 

The  Commonwealth  of  Art.  By  Curt 
Sachs.  Norton.  1946.  404  pp. 
This  study  serves  to  clarify  and  syn- 
thesize the  bewildering  trends  in  the 
arts  and  to  relate  them  to  the  whole 
sweep  of  history.  While  the  work  is 
basically  theoretical,  it  uses  concrete 
material  throughout  —  indeed,  the  whole 
first  part  is  a  survey  of  the  fine  arts, 
music,  and  the  dance  from  prehistory 
to  the  present.  This  is  divided  into 
successive  periods  of  styles,  with  dates 
such  as  1230,  which  saw  the  rise  of 
the  great  Gothic  cathedrals,  or  1600 
when  "the  anti-polyphonic  road  that 
music  took  inevitably  led  to  opera." 
The  ever-changing,  tidal  movements 
of  the  art  forms  lead  to  the  recognition 
of  a  fundamental  dualism  in  all  the 
arts,  which  the  author  calls  ethos  and 
pathos.  The  former  is  comparatively 
static,  balanced,  and  serene  and  is  con- 
cerned with  essence  rather  than  ap- 
pearance ;  the  latter  is  dynamic,  indi- 
vidual, and  expressionistic.  Within  this 
broad  frame  Mr.  Sachs  discusses  sub- 
ordinate contrasts,  as  between  "tec- 
tonics" and  "atectonics"  —  architectural 
styles  which  either  do  or  do  not  show 
the  functional  purposes  of  their  struc- 
tures, like  the  Doric  capitals,  the  but- 
tresses of  Gothic  cathedrals,  or  the 
steel  ribs  of  Washington  Bridge.  He 
warns  against  the  misconceptions  of 
continuous  progress,  a  definite  transi- 
tional style,  and  the  intolerance  which 
seeks  to  eliminate  the  art-expression 
of  the  opposite  pole.  The  cycles  of  taste 
and  creativity,  he  points  out,  all  begin 
on  an  ethos  phase  and  end  on  a  pathos 
phase.  {M.  M.) 


Library  Notes 


International  Book  Illustration 

A STRIKING  exhibit  on  "Interna- 
tional Book  Illustration"  will  be 
held  in  the  Treasure  Room  from  March 
3  to  March  30.  Sponsored  by  the  Ameri- 
can Institution  of  Graphic  Arts  and 
circulated  by  the  American  Federation 
of  Arts,  the  exhibit  is  being  put  on  in 
Boston  under  the  auspices  of  the  Book- 
builders  and  Bookbuilders  Workshop. 

The  selection  covers  the  growth  and 
evolution  of  book  illustration  from 
1935  to  1945  in  the  United  States, 
Canada,  Latin  America,  Great  Britain, 
and  continental  Europe.  Its  wide  range 
shows  how  each  country's  publications 
reflected  in  these  years  the  cultural 
background,  the  national  tradition  of 
book  making,  and  the  difficulty  of 
work  under  war  conditions  in  both  oc- 
cupied and  unoccupied  territory. 

Missionary  Reports  from 
New  England 

STUDENTS  of  colonial  history  are 
familar  with  the  work  of  the  "Cor- 
poration for  the  Promoting  and  Propa- 
gating the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  in 
New  England,"  founded  in  1649  nY 
act  of  Parliament  to  support  missionary 
work  among  the  Indians.  The  act  men- 
tions "the  pious  care  and  pains  of  some 
godly  English"  among  the  heathen  — 
undoubtedly  a  reference  to  the  efforts 
of  John  Eliot  and  Thomas  Mayhew. 
Reorganized  in  1661  under  a  charter 
from  Charles  II  as  the  New  England 
Company,  the  Corporation  sent  money 
to  America  for  the  publication  of 
Eliot's  Indian  Bible  and  a  series  of 
tracts,  besides  the  salaries  of  several 
missionaries.  Then  in  1701  the  "So- 
ciety for  the  Propagation  of  the  Gospel 
in  Foreign  Parts"  was  founded  by  the 
Church  of  England.  For  a  century 
most  of  its  work  was  undertaken  in 
North  America,  but  success  there  was 
increasingly  hampered  by  anti-British 
feeling  and  by  1785  the  enterprise  was 
abandoned  in  the  new  United  States. 

On  the  third  Friday  in  February 
the  Society  held  its  annual  meeting, 


at  which  some  eminent  churchman 
preached.  In  1757  the  address  was  de- 
livered by  Edmund  Keene,  bishop  of 
Chester,  former  Master  of  Peterhouse 
College,  Cambridge.  A  copy  of  it  has 
recently  been  acquired  by  the  Library. 

More  interesting,  however,  than  the 
sermon  is  the  abstract  of  the  Proceed- 
ings of  the  Society  for  that  year.  This 
includes  enlightening  reports  from  mis- 
sionaries in  New  England,  New  York, 
New  Jersey,  Pennsylvania,  North  and 
South  Carolina,  and  Georgia,  besides 
Newfoundland  and  Nova  Scotia.  The 
Reverend  Dr.  Cutler,  the  Society's 
missionary  at  Christ  Church  in  Bos- 
ton, writes  that  "there  are  three  large 
Episcopal  Congregations  in  Boston, 
ten  Independent  ones,  one  small  Con- 
gregation of  Methodists,  two  small 
Anabaptist  ones,  which  sensibly  dim- 
inish ;  the  Papists  keep  much  out  of 
Sight,  nor  do  they  encrease."  Unfor- 
tunately, barely  three  months  after  he 
had  sent  in  his  letter,  Dr.  Cutler  "was 
struck  with  the  Palsy  on  his  right 
Side,"  and,  as  the  abstract  states,  "for 
some  time  his  Death  was  daily  expect- 
ed; but  by  the  last  Accounts  from  Bos- 
ton he  appears  to  be  yet  living,  and 
somewhat  better,  and  his  Church  is 
taken  Care  of  by  the  Neighbouring- 
Clergy." 

There  was  encouraging  news  from 
Stoughton,  where  the  parish  was  grow- 
ing, and  whose  minister  had  been  in- 
vited to  officiate  at  Dedham.  The  con- 
gregation of  the  mission  church  at 
Providence  thanked  the  Society  for 
sending  them  such  a  worthy  man,  who 
filled  his  church  with  throngs  and  also 
ministered  at  Taunton.  Nevertheless, 
the  work  did  not  go  equally  well  every- 
where :  Mr.  Hobley,  schoolmaster  at 
Halifax,  "having  been  very  negligent 
in  his  Duty,  and  having  much  misbe- 
haved," had  to  be  dismissed.    T.  C. 

The  Sarum  Missal,  London  1555 

A BEAUTIFUL  copy  of  the  rare 
Sarum  Missal  printed  by  John 
Kingston  and  Henry  Sutton  in  London 
in  1555  has  recently  been  added  to  the 


107 


io8  MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Benton  collection  of  Prayer  Books.  A 
quarto  of  144  leaves,  it  is  printed  in 
double  columns  in  a  large  gothic  type, 
with  the  rubrics  in  red,  and  with  many 
ornamental  initials.  The  date  appears 
on  the  title-page,  the  larger  part  of 
which  is  occupied  by  an  intricate  en- 
graving of  the  Tree  of  Jesse.  This  en- 
graving was  copied  with  small  varia- 
tions from  one  used  by  Antoine  Verard 
in  Paris  as  early  as  1500.  Under  it  is 
a  stanza  in  Latin  which,  roughly  trans- 
lated, reads: 

Priest,  who  are  wont  to  enter  the  Holy 

of  Holies, 
This  new  Missal,  if  vou  believe  me, 

buy ! 

There  you  find  the  Masses  arranged 

in  order. 
The  truer  use  of  Salisbury  it  has. 
Others  are  marred  by  scattered  ugly 

errors. 

This  Manual  gives  you  all  things  with- 
out fail. 

Preceding  the  Missal  proper  is  the 
customary  calendar,  with  four  lines  of 
Latin  hexameters  at  the  bottom  of  the 
page,  giving  health  rules  appropriate 
to  the  month.  A  second  engraving  ap- 
pears at  the  beginning  of  the  Canon  — 
a  Crucifixion,  with  numerous  figures 
compressed  into  a  small  space.  A  strik- 
ing feature  of  the  volume  is  the  abund- 
ance of  musical  notations  for  the  Gloria 
in  cxcelsis,  canticles,  and  sequences, 
some  filling  whole  pages. 

The  Sarum  or  Salisbury  rite  is  traced 
to  the  institutions  of  St.  Osmund,  who 
was  a  Norman  count  and  became 
Bishop  of  Sarum  in  1078  A.D.,  and  a 
resemblance  has  been  pointed  out  be- 
tween the  Sarum  use  and  that  of  Rouen 
in  Normandy.  While  other  native  uses 
developed  in  England,  the  Sarum  one 
became  predominant,  especially  after 
the  introduction  of  printing. 

It  was  in  1541  that  Henry  VIII  for- 
bade the  commemoration  of  St.  Thomas 
a  Becket,  who  had  defied  the  temporal 
order.  The  Library's  Missal  of  1555, 
belonging  to  the  Marian  period,  has 
the  feast-day  of  "Saint  Thomas  mar- 
tyr" (folio  xvii)  and  the  memorial  of 
his  translation  (folio  xxiv)  restored. 
As  it  is  likely  that  many  of  the  copies 
of  this  edition  were  destroyed  under 


Queen  Elizabeth,  the  volume  has  a 
special  historic  interest.  M.  M. 

Lectures  and  Concerts 

ART  —  Yesterday,  Today,  and  To- 
morrow. Ella  Munsterberg,  Senior 
Instructor  of  Art  History,  Massachu- 
setts School  of  Art.  8.00  Sun.,  Mar.  2. 

The  Lithographs  of  Henri  de  Toul- 
ouse-Lautrec. A  Gallery  Talk  in  con- 
nection zvith  the  exhibition  in  the  Albert 
H.  Wiggin  Gallery  through  March. 
Arthur  W.  Heintzelman,  N.A.,  Keeper 
of  Prints,  Boston  Public  Library. 

The  Music  of  Ireland.  Illustrated  by 
vocal  and  recorded  selections.  John  P. 
.  McGrail,    Supervisor,  Massachusetts 
Department  of  Education.  8.00  Mon., 
Mar.  3. 

Spring  Specials  in  the  World  of  Books. 
Edna  G.  Peck,  Chief  of  the  Book  Se- 
lection Department,  Circulation  Di- 
vision, Boston  Public  Library.  8.00 
Thurs.,  Mar.  6. 

Shadow  and  Rainbow  in  the  Philip- 
pines. Illustrated.  Reverend  Carl  Heath 
Kopf,  Minister  of  Mount  Vernon 
Church.  3.30  Sun.,  Mar.  9. 

The  Making  of  a  IV oodcut  and  a  Wood 
Engraving.  Illustrated.  Arthur  W. 
Heintzelman,  N.A.,  Keeper  of  Prints, 
Boston  Public  Library.  8.00  Mon., 
Mar.  10. 

The  Romance  of  Maps  and  Map 
Makers.  Illustrated.  Thomas  Macough- 
try  Judson,  Curator  of  the  Cicognara 
Collection  of  Rare  Atlases  and  Maps 
in  the  Vatican.  8.00  Thurs.,  Mar.  13. 

The  Electron  Microscope  hi  Scientific 
Research.  Illustrated.  Cecil  E.  Hall,  Re- 
search Associate  in  Biology,  Massa- 
chusetts Institute  of  Technology.  3.30 
Sun..  Mar.  16. 

Harnessing  the  Colorado  River.  Illus- 
trated. R.  A.  Kirkpatrick,  lecturer, 
author,  educator.  8.00  Thurs.,  Mar.  20. 

Chinese  Music.  Illustrated  with  piano 
selections.  Gladys  Stening,  world  traveler 
and  authority  on  ancient  stringed  in- 
struments. 8.00  Sun.,  Mar.  23. 

The  Making  of  a  Line  Engraving.  Il- 
lustrated. Arthur  W.  Heintzelman, 
X.  A.,  Keeper  of  Prints,  Boston  Public 
Library.  8.00  Mon.,  Mar.  24. 

New  England  Weather  and  the 
Weather  Bureau.  Illustrated.  Lyndon 


LIBRARY  NOTES 


T.  Rodgers,  meteorologist.  8.00  Thurs., 
Mar.  27. 

New  Books  from  Old  Ireland.  Rev. 
John  E.  Murphy,  S.J.,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 
of  the  Department  of  Gaelic  Literature, 
Boston  College  Graduate  School. 

Open  Garden  Gates  to  a  Flower  Para- 
disc.  Illustrated  with  kodachrome  slides 
and  motion  pictures.  Dr.  Marinus 
James,  poet  and  artist.  8.00  Mon., 
Mar.  31. 


Lowell  Lectures 

THE  course  of  eight  lectures  on 
Choral  Music  of  the  Renaissance 
and  the  Baroque,  by  G.  Wallace  Wood- 
worth,  A.M..  Professor  of  Music,  Har- 
vard University,  illustrated  by  a  chorus 
of  Harvard  and  Radcliffe  students  and 
members  of  the  New  England  Conser- 
vator}'' orchestra,  will  be  continued  on 
Mondays  and  Thursdays  at  five  o'clock 
in  the  afternoon,  as  follows : 

7.  Mon.,  Mar.  3.  Conflicting  Tides 
and  Cross  Rips  in  Baroque  Music.  The 
"affection"  vs.  architecture.  Opera,  ora- 
torio, cantata,  motet.  The  lamento. 
Monteverdi,  Carissimi,  Lully,  Purcell. 

8.  Thurs.,  Mar.  6.  The  Second  Italian- 
German  Convergence.  J.  S.  Bach.  Syn- 
thesis of  form  and  expression.  Monu- 
mental and  decorative  aspects.  The 
baroque  sound-ideal.  Illustrations  from 
the  B  minor  Mass. 

A  course  of  eight  lectures  on  The 
Federalist.  Its  Political  Philosophy  and 
Its  Place  in  American  Institutional  His- 
tory, by  Benjamin  Fletcher  Wright, 
Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Government  at 
Harvard  University. 

Tuesdays  and  Fridays  at  eight 
o'clock  in  the  evening,  beginning  Tues- 
day, March  4. 

1.  Tues.,  Mar.  4.  The  Crucial  De- 
bate of  1787. 

2.  Fri.,  Mar.  7.  The  Aims  of  a  More 
Perfect  Union. 

3.  Tues.,  Mar.  11.  The  Nature  of 
Political  Man. 

4.  Fri.,  Mar.  14.  A  Democracy  or 
a  Republic?  The  Theory  of  Repre- 
sentation. 

5.  Tues.,  Mar.  18.    The  Structure 


of  a  Free  Government. 

6.  Fri.,  Mar.  21.  Fundamental  Law 
and  Judicial  Guardianship. 

7.  Tues.,  Mar.  25.  The  Theory  of 
Modern  Federalism. 

8.  Fri.,  Mar.  28.  A  Comparative 
Evaluation. 

A  course  of  eight  illustrated  lec- 
tures on  Degeneration,  Necrosis,  and 
Fibrosis  of  the  Liver,  by  Harold  Perci- 
val  Hims  worth,  M.D.  (London), 
F.R.C.P.,  Professor  of  Medicine  in  the 
University  of  London,  Director  of  the 
Medical  Unit,  University  College  Hos- 
pital. 

Mondays  and  Thursdays  at  five 
o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  beginning 
Monday,  March  10,  and  omitting  Mon- 
day, March  17. 

1.  Mon.,  Mar.  10.  The  Types  of 
Liver  Injury  and  their  Structural  Con- 
sequences. Classification  and  defini- 
tion of  aetiological  factors. 

2.  Thurs.,  Mar.  13.  The  Circulatory 
Factor  in  Liver  Injury.  The  signifi- 
cance of  the  double  blood  supply  of  the 
liver.  "Streamlines"  in  the  portal  cir- 
culation and  their  influence  on  the  lo- 
calization of  lesions.  The  intrahepatic 
circulation  in  infiltration,  necrosis,  and 
fibrosis  of  the  liver.  Ischaemia  as  a 
determinant  of  chronicity. 

3.  Thurs.,  Mar.  20.  Nutritional  Fac- 
tors in  Liver  Injury.  Protein  defi- 
ciency. Experimental  dietetic  necrosis 
and  its  sequelae.  Dietetic  and  condi- 
tioned protein  deficiency  in  relation  to 
disease  of  the  liver  in  man. 

4.  Mon.,  Mar.  24.  Further  Nutri- 
tional and  Metabolic  Factors  in  Liver 
Injury.  The  effects  of  prolonged  in- 
filtration of  the  liver  with  lipoids  and 
glycogen.  Experimental  and  clinical 
diffuse  portal  fibrosis.  Mixed  lesions. 
Primary  carcinoma  of  the  liver. 

5.  Thurs.,  Mar.  27.  Noxious  Agents 
Causing  Liver  Injury;  the  Relation- 
ship of  Toxipathic  to  Trophopathic 
Hepatitis.  Living  organisms  and  chemi- 
cals damaging  the  liver.  The  signifi- 
cance of  immediate  or  delayed  toxic 
action.  Trophopathic  hepatitis  as  a 
complication  of  toxipathic  hepatitis. 

6.  Mon.,  Mar.  31.  Clinical  Types 
of  Liver  Disease.  Infiltration.  Necroses. 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 

Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

*  * 
* 

This  list  should  be  used  in  conjunction  with  Books  Current,  a 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
1943.  Books  Current  v;  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  and  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  arc  available  for  the  whole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  are  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  the 
Business  Branch;  however,  they  may  be  borrowed  through  the  various 
branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


General  Reference 
Books  in  Bates  Hall 

Allen,  Edward  Frank.  Allen's  dictionary  of 
abbreviations  and  symbols.  Coward-Mc- 
Cann.  [1946.]  189  pp.  Gen.  Ref.  PE1693.A4 

Annual  register,  The,  a  review  of  public 
events  for  the  year  1945.  New  York,  Long- 
mans. Green.  1945.       Gen.  Ref.  AYD2.A7 

Boston,  Mass.  Dept.  of  Municipal  Statistics. 
Municipal  register  for  1946.  Boston,  1946. 
147  pp.  Gen.  Ref.  JS601A13 

Foreign  office  list,  The,  and  diplomatic  and 
consular  year  book.  1946.  London.  [1946.] 
432  pp.  Gen.  Ref.JX1783.A2 

Mansfield,  T.  C.  Shrubs  in  colour  and  culti- 
vation. Dutton.  [1945.]  261pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  SB435.M3 

With   80  plates  in  colour  photography. 
"Transparent  visor"  laid  in. 

Register  and  manual  of  the  State  of  Connecti- 
cut. 1945-46.  Hartford.  1946. 

Gen.  Ref.  AYJK3331  1945-46 

Smith,  Hobart  Muir.  Handbook  of  lizards. 
Ithaca,  N.  Y..  Comstock  Pub.  Co.  1946. 
557  pp.  Gen.  Ref.  QL666.L2S63 

Snow,  Valentine.  Russian  writers;  a  biobib- 
liographical  dictionary.  International  Book 
Service.  1946.  222  pp.  Gen,  Ref.  Z2500.S6 
Contents.  —  [  v.  1]  From  the  age  of  Catherine  II 
to  the  October  revolution  of  191 7. 

Who's  who  in  thoroughbred  racing.  Washing- 
ton. Who's  Who  in  Thoroughbred  Rac- 
ing. [1946.]  385  PP. 

Gen.  Ref.  Closet  SF321.W45 

Bibliography 

Bechtold,  Grace.  Book  publishing.  Boston, 
Bellman  Pub.  Co.  [1946.]  24  pp.  Z278.B4 
Vocational  and  professional  monographs.  Xo  63. 

Burlingame,  Roger.  Of  making  many  books; 
a  hundred  years  of  reading,  writing  and 
publishing.  Scribner.  1946.  xii,  347  pp. 

Z473.Bg 

The  author,  long  associated  with  the  publishing 
bouse  of  Scribner,  gives  a  history  of  a  hundred 
years  of  the  firm's  relations  with  its  authors,  largely 
in  the  form  of  excerpts  from  the  authors'  letters. 


Catholic  writer  yearbook,  The  .  .  .  1946-  v. 
5-  A  comprehensive  directory  of  Catholic 
publications  and  their  manuscript  needs. 
Pence,  Wis.,  Marolla  Press.  [1946- 

*PNi6i.C37 

Farquhar,  Samuel  T.  Printing  the  United 
nations  charter.  Univ.  of  California.  1946. 
56  pp.  Facsims.  Z232.C15F3 

National  foundation  for  infantile  paralysis.  A 
bibliography  of  infantile  paralysis,  1789- 
1944,  with  selected  abstracts  and  annota- 
tions, prepared  under  the  direction  of  the 
National  foundation  lor  infantile  paraly- 
sis, inc.,  edited  by  Morris  Fishbein  .  .  . 
compiled  by  Ludvig  Hektocn  .  .  .  and  Ella 
M.  Salmonsen.  Lippincott.  1946.  672  pp. 

*Z6664.P3N3 

Includes  the  bibliography  of  the  periodical  litera- 
ture covering  the  clinical  and  investigative  work  r-n 
infantile  paralysis. 


Biography 

Single 

Abrahamsen,  David.  The  mind  and  death  of 
a  genius.  Columbia  Univ.  1946.  viii,  228 
pp.  Illus.  B3363.W54A5 

"This  book  is  an  interpretation  of  the  mind  and 
death  of  Otto  Weininger." — Prclace. 
Weiuinger  was  the  author  of  Sex  and  Character. 
who  committed  suicide  at  the  age  of  twenty-three. 
The  biographer  is  a  psychiatrist  of  reputation.^  who 
escaped  from  Norn-ay  and  came  to  the  United 
States  in  1940. 

Bullard,  Frederic  Lauriston.  Abraham  Lin- 
coln and  the  widow  Bixby.  Rutgers  Univ. 
1946.  xiii,  154  pp.  E457.96.1864.B8 

Dudley,  Dorothy.  Dreiser  and  the  land  of  the 
free.  New  York,  Beechhurst  Press.  [1946.] 
485  PP-  PS3507.R55Z6  1946 

This  sympathetic  biography  of  the  late  Theodore 
Dreiser  was  first  published  in  1932  under  the  title 
Forgotten  Frontiers:  Dreiser  and  the  Land  of  the 
Free. 

Hanna,  Alfred  Jackson.  A  prince  in  their 
midst;  the  adventurous  life  of  Achille 
Murat  on  the  American  frontier  .  .  .  with 
drawings  by  John  Rae.  Univ.  of  Oklahoma- 
1946.  xi.  275  pp.  DC216.95.M8H3 
Achille  Murat,  a  nephew  of  Napoleon  I,  was  for 
nearly  a  quarter  of  a  century  a  planter  and  lawyer 


110 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


in 


in  the  South  of  the  United  States. 
"At  seven  he  was  Crown  Prince  of  Naples;  at 
fourteen,  he  was  an  exile  in  Austria;  at  twenty- 
two,  he  immigrated  to  tht  United  States  and  applied 
for  citizenship ;  at  twenty-five,  he  married  a  great- 
grandniece  of  George  Washington ;  and,  at  thirty- 
two,  he  was  a  county  judge." — Preface. 

Lane,  Margaret.  The  tale  of  Beatrix  Potter. 
New  York,  Warne.  [1946.]  xii,  162  pp. 

PR6031.O  72Z6  1946 

Beatrix  Potter,  who  died  in  December  1943,  was 
the  creator  of  "Peter  Rabbit"  and  other  much  loved 
children's  tales. 

Mclntire,  Ross  T.,  Vice-Admiral.  White 
house  physician  ...  in  collaboration  with 
George  Creel.  Putnam.  [1946.]  vi,  244  pp. 

E807.M2 

An  intimate  memoir  of  President  Roosevelt  by  one 
who  was  for  more  than  twelve  years  the  White 
House  physician. 

Martin,  Ralph  G.  Boy  from  Nebraska;  the 
story  of  Ben  Kuroki.  Harper.  [1946.]  xii, 
208  pp.  D811.K75 

The  story  of  a  young  Nisei  who  served  in  the  war 
as  an  air-force  gunner  and  has  58  missions  to  his 
credit. 

Miller,  Lee  G.  An  Ernie  Pyle  album;  Indiana 
to  Ie  Shima.  New  York,  William  Sloane 
Associates.  [1946.]  159  pp.  Hhis. 

PN4874.P86M5 

Stoddard,  Henry  Luther.  Horace  Greeley, 
printer,  editor,  crusader.  Putnam.  [1946.] 
xiv,  338  pp.  Plates.  E415.9.G8S8 
"A  tale  told  in  his  twilight  years  by  one  news- 
paperman of  another  whose  challenging  spirit  gave 
to  American  journalism  its  first  independence  and 
sole  reliance  upon  'my  own  thoughts'.  .  .*' — P.  xii. 

Tansill,  Charles  Callan.  The  Congressional 
career  of  Thomas  Francis  Bayard,  1869- 
1885.  Washington,  Georgetown  Univ. 
1946.  362  pp.  E664.B3T28 

Troyat,  Henri.  Firebrand ;  the  life  of  Dostoev- 
sky  .  .  .  woodcuts  by  S.  Mrozewski.  New 
York,  Roy  Publishers.  [1946.]  438  pp. 

PG3328.T72 

"Translated  by  Norbert  Guterman." 

Collective 

Carlevale,  Joseph  William.  Leading  Ameri- 
cans of  Italian  descent  in  Massachusetts. 
Plymouth,  Mass.  [1946.]  861  pp. 

*F75.I  8C3 

Cohen,  Julius  Henry.  They  builded  better 
than  they  knew.  Messner.  [1946.]  viii,  376 
pp.  F124.C69 

Biographical  sketches  and  reminiscences  of  various 
men  and  women  who  have  made  significant  contri- 
butions to  American  pubic  life.  These  include 
Horace  E.  Deming,  trial  lawyer ;  Felix  Adler,  moral 
teacher;  Frank  Damrosch,  who  made  music  demo- 
cratic; Theodore  Roosevelt,  Alfred  E.  Smith; 
Eugenius  H.  Outerbridge  of  the  Port  of  New  York 
Authority ;  Louis  D.  Brandeis,  Morris  Hilkjuit,  and 
many  others. 

Holbrcok,  Stewart  Hall.  Lost  men  of  Ameri- 
can history.  Macmillan.  1946.  xiv,  370  pp. 

E176.H74 

Brief  biographies  of  Americans  who  have  made 
contributions  of  some  importance,  but  who  do  not 
loom   large   in   history  books. 

Memoirs.  Letters 

Richmond,  Bernice.  Right  as  rain,  the  story 
of  my  Maine  grandmother.  Random 
House.  [1946.]  be,  211  pp.  CT275.N44R6 

The  author  remembers  the  happy  home  life  in  a 
Maine  town  with  her  grandparents. 


Roosevelt,  Theodore.  Letters  to  Kermit  from 
Theodore  Roosevelt,  1902-1908,  edited, 
with  an  introduction  by  Will  Irwin.  Scrib- 
ner.  1946.  296  pp.  E757.R785 

Wagenknecht,  Edward,  editor.  When  I  was  a 
child;  an  anthology  .  .  .  with  an  intro- 
duction by  Walter  de  la  Mare.  Dutton. 
1946.  xxix,  477  pp.  PS509.C52W 

Reminiscences  of  childhood  by  thirty-nine  well- 
known  American  and  British  authors. 

Woodward,  Ernest  Llewellyn.  Short  journey. 
Oxford  Univ.  1946.  v,  243  pp. 

DA3.W6A3  1946 

The  reflective  memoirs  of  an  English  historian 
and  Professor  of  International  Relations  at  Oxford.. 

Business 

These  books  are  to  be  obtained  at  the 
Business  Branch,  20  City  Hall  Ave. 
Aeronautical  engineering  catalog.  3rd  edition. 
1946.  New  York,  Institute  of  the  Aero- 
nautical Sciences.  1946.  409  pp. 

**TLsi4.A25 

American  college  of  life  underwriters.  Sig- 
nificant developments  of  the  war  period  in 
corporation  finance,  banking  and  invest- 
ments. Philadelphia,  American  College  of 
Life  Underwriters.  1945.  118  pp.  NBS 

American  pulp  and  paper  mill  superinten- 
dents association,  inc.  Year  book.  1946. 
27th  annual  edition.  "New  York,  The  As- 
sociation. 1946.  356  pp.  *TSio8o.A5i 

Anglo-American  directory  of  Mexico.  1946. 
Mexico.  [1946.]  462  pp.  **Fi204.5A58 

Armstrong,  E.  Frankland  and  L.  Mackensie 
Miall.  Raw  materials  from  the  sea.  Lei- 
cester, England,  Constructive  Publications. 
[1943?]  164  pp.  NBS 

Baetjer,  Anna  M.  Women  in  industry:  their 
health  and  efficiency.  Philadelphia,  Saun- 
ders. 1946.  344PP-  NBS 

Commerce   clearing   house.   United  States 
master  tax  guide.  1947.  New  York,  Chi- 
_  cago.  1946.  383  pp.  H  J3252.C73 

Directory  of  shipowners,  shipbuilders,  and 
marine  engineers,  The.  1946.  v.  44.  Lon- 
don, Directory  Pub.  Co.  1946.  107  pp. 

**HE565.A3D59 

Foreign  bondholders  protective  council,  inc. 
Annual  report.  1945.  New  York.  125  pp. 

**HG4705.F7i 

Foreign  office  list  and  diplomatic  and  con- 
sular year  book,  The.  1946.  119th.  London, 
Harrison.  1946.  432  pp.  **JXi783.A2 

Foulke,  Roy  A.  Expansion  from  retained 
earnings,  1940-1944.  Dun  &  Bradstreet. 
1946.  79PP-  NBS 

Gift  and  art  buyers  directory.  1946.  New 
York,  Geyer  Publications.  1946.  282  pp. 

**TTi2.G45 

Gregory,  Charles  O.  Labor  and  the  law. 
Norton.  1946.  467  pp.  NBS 

Institute  for  training  in  municipal  admin- 
istration, Chicago.  Municipal  finance  ad- 
ministration. 3d  edition.  Chicago,  Inter- 
national City  Managers'  Ass'n.  1946.  427 
pp.  NBS 

International  green  book  of  cottonseed  and 
other  vegetable  oil  products  ...  v.  32. 
1946/47.  Dallas,  Texas,  Cotton  and  Cot- 
ton Oil  Press.  1946.  568  pp.  **TP68i.I6i 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Mackenzie,  Kenneth.  The  banking  systems 
of  Great  Britain,  France,  Germany,  and 
the  United  States  of  America.  3d  edition. 
London,  Macmillan.  1945.  284  pp.  NBS 

Marine  news  directory  .  .  .  22nd  edition. 
1946.  New  York,  New  York  Marine  News 
Co.  1946.  7/8pp.  **HE95i.M33 

National  cleaner  and  dyer;  guidebook  of  the 
dry-cleaning  industry.  Dec.  1946.  New 
York,  Reuben  H.  Donnelly  Corp.  292  pp. 

**TPg32.N27g 

Ott,  Elmer  F.  So  you  want  to  be  a  camp 
counselor.  New  York,  Association  Press. 
1946.  117  pp.  NBS 

Petroleum  almanac,  The;  a  statistical  record 
of  the  petroleum  industry  in  the  United 
States  and  foreign  countries.  1946.  National 
Industrial  Conference  Board.  1946.  420  pp. 

**TN870.N27 

Purchaser's  guide  to  the  music  industries, 

The.  50th  annual  edition.  1946.  New  York, 
Music  Trades  Corp.  1946.  298  pp. 

**HD9999.M8Pg8 

Railroad  committee  for  the  study  of  trans- 
portation, Subcommittee  on  economic 
study.  Economic  and  transportation  pros- 
pects. Washington,  Association  of  Ameri- 
can railroads.  1946.   I74PP-  NBS 

Ranson,  Jo,  and  Richard  Peck.  Opportunities 
in  radio.  Vocational  Guidance  Manuals. 
1946.  104  pp.  NBS 

Shosteck,  Robert.  Careers  in  retail  business 
ownership.  Washington,  B'nai  b'rith  Vo- 
cational Service  Bureau.  1946.  347  pp.  NBS 

Skinner's  cotton  trade  directory  of  the  world. 
1946.  London,  Skinner.  1946.  1344  pp. 

**TSi555-S62 

Smedley,  Doree.  Careers  for  women  in  real 
estate  and  in  life  insurance.  Greenberg. 
1946.  192  pp.  NBS 

Smith,  William  J.  Spotlight  on  labor  unions. 
Duell,  Sloan  and  Pearce.  1946.  150  pp. 

NBS 

Sweeney,  Mary  A.  Rehabilitation;  materials 
on  today's  problems  for  veterans  and 
civilians.  American  Library  Ass'n.  1946. 
32  pp.  **HF538i.S97 

Tax  institute,  inc.,  New  York.  Capital  gains 
taxation.  New  York,  The  Institute.  1946. 

NBS 

Theatre  catalog.  4th  annual  edition.  1945. 
Philadelphia,  Emanuel  Publications.  1946. 
583  pp.  **NA6828.T37 

Vreeland,  Frank.  Opportunities  in  acting. 
New  York,  Vocational  Guidance  Manu- 
als. 1946.  92  pp.  NBS 

Wheeler,  Joseph  L.  Progress  and  problems 
in  education  for  librarianship.  Carnegie 
Corp.  of  New  York.  1946.  107  pp.  NBS 

Williams,  Clement  C.  Building  an  engineer- 
ing career.  2d  edition.  McGraw-Hill.  1946. 
309  pp.  NBS 

Willkie,  H.  Frederick.  A  rebel  yells.  Van 
Nostrand.  1946.  311pp.  NBS 

Wire  &  wire  products;  buyers  guide  and 
year  book  of  the  wire  association.  19th 
annual  edition.  1946.  Stamford,  Conn., 
Quinn-Brown  Pub.  Corp.  1946.  214  pp. 

**TS203.W79 

Women's  wear  daily  coats  and  suits  directory. 
Winter,  1946.  Fairchild  Pub.  Co.  1946.  144 
pp.  **TT495.W87 


Drama.  Stage 


Agate,  May.  Madame  Sarah.  [London.] 
Home  &  Van  Thai.  1945.  223  pp. 

PN2638.B5A5 

Refers  to  Sarah  Bernhardt,  1844-1923.  The  book 
deals  largely  with  the  English  stage. 

Boas,  Frederick  S.  An  introduction  to  Stuart 
drama.  Oxford  Univ.  1946.  viii,  443  pp. 

PR671.B6 

O'Neill,  Eugene.  The  iceman  cometh,  a  play. 
Random  House.  [1946.]  viii,  260  pp. 

PS3529.N5  I  3 

The  play  was  written  in  1939,  but  appears  to  be 
now  published  for  the  first  time.  The  time  of  the 
action  is  191 2,  the  scene  of  the  play  a  bar  in  down- 
town West  End  New  York.  The  characters  are  bums 
and  "poor  pipe-dreaming  sinners." 

Economics 

Bauer,  Royal  D.  M.,  and  Paul  Holland  Darby. 
An  outline  of  elementary  accounting  .  .  . 
revised  edition.  New  York,  Barnes  & 
Xoble.  [1946.]  196  pp.  HF5635.B33  1946 

Durand,  John.  How  to  build  for  financial 
independence  in  a  new  age.  Magazine  of 
Wall  Street  and  Business  Analyst.  [1946.] 
5-144  pp.  9332.6A354 

Hirschman,  Albert  0.  National  power  and 
the  structure  of  foreign  trade.  Univ.  of 
California.  1945.  xiv,  170  pp.  9382.A97 

Kingsbury,  Laura  M.  The  economics  of 
housing  as  presented  by  economists,  ap- 
praisers, and  other  evaluating  groups. 
New  York,  King's  Crown  Press.  1946. 
ix,  177  PP-  933I-8373A77 
Bibliography:  pp.  [1651-169. 

Margolius,  Sidney.  The  fresh  start;  plain 
facts  about  small  business.  New  York,  B. 
Ackerman.  [1946.]  80  pp.  Illus.  9381.A168 

Mason,  Edward  S.  Controlling  world  trade; 
cartels  and  commodity  agreements.  Mc- 
Graw-Hill. 1946.  xvii,  289  pp.  9338.8A38 

Nevins,  Allan.  Sail  on;  the  story  of  the  A- 
merican  merchant  marine.  United  States 
Lines  Co.  [1946.]  103  pp.  Illus.  HE745.N4 
"A  sheet  of  nautical  boolcs":  pp.  103. 

Nicaragua,  Oficina  del  recaudador  general  dc 
aduanas.  Memoria  del  recaudador  general 
de  aduanas  y  Alta  comision  .  .  .  1943- 
Managua.  1944-  *HJ6786.A3 

Pollaczek,  G.  Rebuilding  the  European  trans- 
portation system.  [New  York.]  1945. 

*9338.giA64 

Xo.  5  of  Studies  in  Postwar  Reconstruction,  pub- 
lished by  the  American  Labor  Conference  on  In- 
ternational Affairs. 

U.  S.  Food  and  drug  administration.  Food 
and  drug  circular  no.  1-  [Washington. 
1944-  Illus.  *HDgooo.9.U5Ai74 

U.  S.  Office  of  price  administration.  Coordi- 
nation service.  Digests  of  interpretations 
of  specific  price  schedules  and  regulations. 
[Washington.  1944-  *9338-526 
Loose-leaf ;  reproduced  from  type-written  copy. 

U.  S.  Tariff  commission.  War  changes  in  in- 
dustry series.  Report  no.  6,  11,  2-17.  Wash- 
ington. 1945-  *9338-47 
Reproduced  from  type-written  copy. 

U.  S.  Treasury  dept.  Bureau  of  the  public 
debt.  Circulation  statement  of  United 
States  money.  Sept.  1,  1926-  Washington. 
[1926-45.]  20  v.  in  2.  *9332.A2i5 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


113 


Fine  Arts 

Architecture 

Capitol  publishing  company,  inc.,  Harrisburg, 
Pa.  The  49  capitol  buildings  of  the  United 
States;  pictorial,  historical,  educational. 
Harrisburg,  Pa.,  1938.  [100]  pp.  Illus. 

8112.01.109R 

Mason,  George  Canington.  Colonial  churches 
of  Tidewater  Virginia.  Richmond,  Va., 
Whittet  and  Shepperson.  1945.  xv,  381  pp. 
89  plates.  8105.02-m 

Summerson,  John.  Georgian  London.  Scrib- 
ner.  1946.  xi,  315  pp.  LXXIX  plates. 

8095.05-121 

Wills.  Royal  Barry.  Planning  your  home 
wisely!  New  York.  F.  Watts.  [1946.]  95 
pp.  Illus.  8117.05-162 

Art  History  and  Theory 

Mera,  Harry  Percival.  Cloth-strip  blankets 

of  the  Navajo.  [Santa  Fe.  1945.]   [7]  pp. 

6  plates.  4071.02-308 
Roe,  Frederic  Gordon.  The  nude  from  Cra- 

nach  to  Etty  and  beyond.  Leigh-on-sea, 

Essex,  Eng.,  F.  Lewis.  [1944.]  7-ii7pp. 

56  plates  on  28  leaves.  *4o8s.o2-2oo 
Stokes,  Adrian.  Venice,  an  aspect  of  art. 

Faber.  [I945-]  xi,  72  pp.  48  plates  on  -'4 

leaves.  4078.09-950 
Wilenski,  R.  H.  The  modern  movement  in 

art.  Faber.  [1946.]  210  pp.  Plates. 

"New  and  revised  edition,  1943."  4085.05— I03T 
Wingert,  Paul  S.  An  outline  guide  to  the  art 

of  the  south  Pacific.  Columbia  Univ.  1946. 

61  pp.  Plates.  4071.05-^603 

'"Selected  bibliography":  pp.   [451-S7.  "South  Pa- 
cific art  in  American  museums":  pp.  [50I-60. 
"Sources  for  reproductions":  pp.  6o-h5i. 

Biogra phy.  M emoirs 

Albany  institute  of  history  and  art,  Albany. 
The  Negro  artist  comes  of  age;  a  national 
survey  of  contemporary  American  artists. 
Albany  institute  of  history  and  art,  Janu- 
ary 3rd  through  February  nth,  1945. 
[Albany.  1945-]  vii,  [77]  PP.  Illus. 
Contains  biogiaphies.  4060.07-606 

Flagg,  James  Montgomery.  Roses  and  buck- 
shot. Putnam.  [1946.]  224  pp.  Plates. 
Autobiography.  8060.06—520 

Guggenheim,  Marguerite.  Out  of  this  cen- 
tury, the  informal  memoirs  of  Peggy  Gug- 
genheim. Dial  Press.  1946.  viii,  365  pp. 

4087.03-109 

Cartoons.  Illustrations 

Dahl,  Francis.  Dahl's  Boston;  cartoons  by 
Francis  W.  Dahl,  text  by  Charles  W. 
Morton.  Little,  Brown.  1946.  157  pp.  Illus. 

8144.07-433 

Dennis,  Morgan.  The  Morgan  Dennis  dog 

book   (with  some  special  cats).  Viking. 

1946.  [72]  pp.  4092.02-162 
Rose,  Carl.  One  dozen  roses.  Random  House. 

[1946.]  112  pp.  Illus.  8144.07.870 
Saturday  review  of  literature,  The.  Laughs 

from  the  Saturday  review  of  literature. 

introduction  by  Bennett  Cerf.  Vanguard. 

[1946.]    127  pp.  Illus.  8144.07-130 


Crafts.  Furniture 

Bendure,  Zelma,  and  Gladys  Pfeiffer.  Ameri- 
ca's fabrics;  origin  and  history,  manu- 
facture, characteristics  and  uses  .  .  .  photo- 
graphic layout  by  Crystal  Stephen,  fabric 
photographs  by  Nat  Messik.  Macmillan. 
1946.  xv,  688  pp.  Plates.  8186.02-106 
Each  colored  plate  accompanied  by  page  of  de- 
scriptive letterpress  on  vtrso  of  plate. 

Cherry,  Raymond.  General  leather  craft. 
Bloomington,  111.,  McKnight.  [1946.]  111 
pp.  Illus.  8186.01-127 

"First  edition,  January  1,  1940  .  .  .  Revised  edition, 
1946."' 

Cramlet,  Ross  C.  Fundamentals  of  leather- 
craft.  Bruce.  [1946.]  61  pp.  Illus. 

8186.01-116 

Jarvis,  Louise.  Huntington.  Buttons  are  art. 
[Grand  Rapids.  1945?]  Plates.  8161.09-176 
Locse-Ieaf. 

"The  object  of  this  booklet  is  to  show  as  nearly  as 
possible  how  many  button  designs  have  been  taken 
from  paintings,  sculpture,  and  architecture.  .  .  More 
pages  will  follow  as  material  becomes  available." 

Lichten,  Frances.  Folk  art  of  rural  Pennsyl- 
vania. Scribr.cr.  [1946.]  xiv,  276  pp.  Illus. 

8161.04-116 

Perry,  Mrs.  Evadna  Kraus.  Crafts  for  fun; 
with  photographs  by  Clarence  Perry.  Mor- 
row. 1940  [/.  c.  1946.]  278  pp.  8162.03-114 

V/right,  Florence  E.  Three  centuries  of  furni- 
ture. [Cornell  Univ.]- 1945.  66  pp. 

8185.01-131 

Engraving 

Diirer,  Albrecht,  1741-1528.  The  complete 
woodcuts  of  Albrecht  Diirer;  edited  by 
Dr.  Willi  Kurth.  New  York,  Crown  Pub- 
lishers. [1946.]  42  pp.  Plates.  8154.04-335J5 
Translated  by  Sylvia  M.  Dalsh. 

Okkonen,  Onni.  Suomen  taidegrafiikka,  finsk 
grafik.  graphic  art  in  Finland.  [Porvoo.] 
[1946.]  160  plates  on  80  leaves. 

^8152.08-180 

Painting.  Sculpture 

Birren,  Faber.  Selling  with  color.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1945.  x.  244  pp.  Ilhis.  8070.07-146 
"Annotated  bibliography":  pp.  229-233. 

Boston  Museum  of  fine  arts.  An  exhibition 
of  paintings,  drawings  and  prints,  by  J. 
M.  W.  Turner.  John  Constable  [and]  R. 
P.  Bonington.  March  21  to  April  28,  1946. 
Museum  of  fine  arts,  Boston.  Boston. 
1946.  [v]— viii,  79  pp.  16  plates  on  4  leaves. 

*8o6 1.07-50 

Chapman,  R.onald.  The  laurel  and  the  thorn; 
a  study  of  G.  F.  Watts.  Faber.  [1945  ]  184 
pp.  32  plates  on  16  leaves.  8062.02-968 

Dorival,  Geo.  Jorge  Larco.  69  reproducciones 
en  negro  y  4  en  color.  Buenos  Aires.  1945. 
101  pp.  Illus.  8060.09-209 

Florence,  R.  Galleria  degli  Uffizi.  Pittura 
italiana  del  duecento  e  trecento;  catalogo 
della  Mostra  giottesca  di  Firenze  del  1937, 
a  cura  di  Giulia  Sinibaldi  e  Giulia  Brunetti. 
Con  436  illustrazioni.  Firenze.  [1943.]  v- 
vii,  637  pp.  Plates.  *4i02.o6-ii2 

Kandnisky,  Wassily,  1S66-1944.  .  .  .  On  the 
spiritual  in  art.  First  complete  English 
translation  with  four  full  colour  page  re- 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


productions,  woodcuts  and  half  tones.  Hil- 
la  Rebay,  editor.  Published  by  the  Solo- 
mon R.  Guggenheim  Foundation,  for  the 
Museum  of  Non-objective  Painting.  1946. 
152  pp.  Plates.  8066.07-552 
Lydis,  Mariette.  Mariette  Lydis,  avec  une  in- 
troduction dc  l'artiste,  39  reproductions 
en  noir,  16  en  couleur.  Buenos  Aires. 
'945-  9-28,  [14]  pp.  55  plates.  *8o64.o8-7i2 
"Extrait  de  la  bibliographie  des  ouvrages  illustrcs 
par  Mariette  Lydis":  pp.  [ 1 1  —  1 5 ] . 

Merli,  Juan.  Juan  Del  Prete.  71  rcproduc- 
ciones  en  negro  v  4  en  color.  Bilenos  Aires. 
[1946.]  83  pp.  Plates.  8060.09-210 

Rubissow,  Helen.  The  art  of  Russia.  New 
York.  Philosophical  Library.  1946.  32  pp. 
164  plates  on  82  leaves.  8066.07-113 

Soby,  James  Thrall.  Salvador  Dali.  Museum 
of  Modern  Art  distributed  by  Simon  and 
Schuster.  [1946.]  3-108  pp.  8066.06-290R 

State  street  trust  company,  Boston.  Some 
statues  of  Boston;  reproductions  of  some 
of  the  statues  for  which  Boston  is  famous, 
with  information  concerning  the  personali- 
ties and  events  so  memorialized.  By  Allen 
Forbes  and  Ralph  M.  Eastman.  Boston, 
Mass.  [1946.]  75  PP-  8086.07-321 

Sweeney,  James  Johnson.  Marc  Chagall.  In 
collaboration  with  the  Art  institute  of  Chi- 
cago. Museum  of  Modern  Art,  distributed 
by  Simon  &  Schuster.  [1946.]  102  pp. 
Bibliography:    pp.    93-102.  8066.07-392 

—  Stuart  Davis.  [Museum  of  Modern  Art. 
1945  ]  40  pp.  Illus.  8060.06-450 

Contents.  —  Chronology.  —  Stuart  Davis,  by  J. 
J.  Sweeney.  —  Catalog  of  the  exhibition.  —  Work 
by  Davis  in  American  public  collections.  —  Prints 
by  Davis.  —  Murals  by  Davis.  —  Bibliography 
(PP-,  37-4o)  by  Hannah  B.  Muller.  Index  to 
Davis  quotations  in  text. 


Genealogy 

Howes,  Jennie  J.  Wight.  Ancestors  and  de- 
scendants of  Joseph  Couch  and  Deborah 
Adams.  Freeport,  Me.,  Dinglev  Press. 
[1945.]  22,  4  pp.  Plates.  *CS7i~.C858  1945 

—  Descendants  of  John  and  Mary  Howes  of 
Montgomery  county,  Maryland.  Freeport, 
Me.,  Dingley  Press.  [1945.]  56  pp. 

*CS7i.H859  1945 

Geography.  Ethnology 

Calahan,  Harold  Augustin.  Geography  for 
grown-ups  .  .  .  illustrated  by  Stephen  J. 
Voorhies.  Harper.  [1946.]  viii.  351  pp. 
Illus.  GB54.C25 

Hogbin,  H.  Ian.  Peoples  of  the  southwest 
Pacific,  a  book  of  photographs  and  intro- 
ductory text.  Day.  [1946.]  26,  [69]  pp. 
Illus.  GN662.H6 

History 

America 

Carey,  Mathew,  1760-1839.  Letters  on  the 
colonization  society;  and  on  the  probable 
results;  under  the  following  heads:  the 
origin  of  the  society;  increase  of  the  col- 
oured population;  manumissions  of  slaves 
in  the  country;  declarations  of  legislatures, 


and  other  assembled  bodies,  in  favour  of 
the  society;  situations  of  the  colonists  at 
Monrovia,  and  other  towns  .  .  .  Addressed 
to  the  Hon.  C.  F.  Mercer  ...  By  M.  Carey. 
.  .  .  Philadelphia.  1832.  32  pp. 

*E448.C27  1832 

Humphreys,  Robert  Arthur.  The  evolution  of 
modern  Latin  America.  Oxford  Univ. 
1946.  176  pp.  Illus.  F2236.H8 

Morley,  Sylvanus  Griswold.  The  ancient 
Maya.  Stanford  Univ.  [1946.]  xxxii,  520 
PP.  95  plates.  F1435.M75 
"Classified  bibliography"  pp.  407-503'. 

Ancient.  Biblical 

Finegan,  Jack.  Light  from  the  ancient  past; 
the  archaeological  background  of  the  He- 
brew-Christian religion.  Princeton  Univ. 
1946.  xxxiv,  500  pp.  Plates.  D59.F5 

White,  Ellen  G..  1827-1915.  The  story  of  pro- 
phets and  kings;  as  illustrated  in  the  cap- 
tivity and  restoration  of  Israel.  Mountain 
View,  Calif.,  Pacific  Press  Pub.  Ass'n. 
[1945  ]  7-753  PP.  Plates.  DS121.W6  1945 

General 

Collingwood,  Robin  George.  The  idea  of  his- 
torv.  Clarendon.  1946.  xxvi,  339  pp. 

D16.8.C6 

Jarvis,  H.  Wood.  Let  the  great  story  be  told; 
the  truth  about  British  expansion.  Lon- 
don, S.  Low,  Marston  [1946.]  xiv,  304  pp. 

DA16.J3 

Notestein,  W  allace.  The  Scot  in  history.  Yale. 
1946.  xvii,  371  pp.  DA772.N6 

Professor  Notestein  traces  the  development  of 
Scottish  character  in  the  course  of  the  history  of 
Scotland. 

Randall,  Henry  John.  The  creative  centuries, 
a  study  in  historical  development.  Long- 
mans, Green.  1945.  xxix,  410  pp.  Illus. 

CB67.R25  1945 

The  author's  interpretation  of  history  from  Greek 
antiquity  through  the  nineteenth  century,  with 
emphasis  on  the  distinction  between  creative  and 
uncreative  periods.  In  his  explanation  of  Christi- 
anity he  takes  the  view  "that  in  detail  the  gospel 
narrative  is  not  historical  at  all,  but  the  record  of 
a  cult  drama  .  .  ." 

World  War  I 

Lambie,  Margaret.  Verdun  experiences  .  .  . 
as  written  in  the  Vassar  quarterly  of  No- 
vember, 1919,  with  illustrations  added  and 
comments  through  World  war  II.  [Wash- 
ington, Courant  Press.  1945. 1  11-79  pp. 

D570.9.L28 

Zilliacus,  Kodne.  Mirror  of  the  past;  a  his- 
tory of  secret  diplomacy  .  .  .  with  an  intro- 
duction by  Max  Lerner.  Xew  York,  Cur- 
rent Books.  1946.  xx,  362  pp.  D511.Z56 

World  War  II  and  Alter 

Abaya,  Hernando  J.  Betrayal  in  the  Philip- 
pines .  .  .  with  an  introduction  by  Harold 
L.  Ickes.  New  York,  A.  A.  Wyn.  1946. 
272  pp.  DS686.4.A7 

A  description  of  the  return  to  power  of  the  col- 
laborationists who  held  oftice  under  the  Japanese 
during  their  occupation  of  the  Philippines  and 
an  explanation  of  how  the  American  military  and 
civil  authorities  contributed  to  this  unfortunate  turn 
of  affairs. 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


115 


Blum,  Leon.  A  l'echelle  liumaine.  [Paris. 
1945  ]  [/1-2I5PP-  D829.F8B53 

Bolitho,  Hector.  Command  performance;  the 
authentic  story  of  the  last  battle  of  Coastal 
command,  R.  A.  F.  Howell,  Soskin.  1946. 
262  pp.  Plates.  D786.B615 
The  well  known  writer  was  a  Squadron  Leader 
of  Coastal  Command,  R.  A.  F.  He  recorded  a 
"diary  of  .  .  .  three  months  of  prodigious  battle." 

Bowker,  Benjamin  Cushing.  Out  of  uniform. 
Norton.  [1946.]  xiii,  15-259  pp.  Illus. 

D769.1.B68 

Deals  with  the  veterans  of  the  late  war  —  their 
war  experiences,  education,  needs,  and  adjust- 
ment. 

Carlson,  John   Roy.   The  plotters.  Dutton. 

E743-5-D38 

"The  Plotters  is  a  personal  adventure  report  cover- 
ing America's  'first  year  of  peace,'  and  is  based 
almost  exclusively  on  undercover  activity  since  V— J 
Day  ...  I  have  written  this  book  primarily  to  ex- 
pose the  methods,  appeals  and  objectives  of  fanatical 
extremists  of  the  Right  and  Left  .  .  .  Their  most 
important  objective  is  to  capture  postwar  America's 
most  precious  prize:  the  mind  of  the  veteran."  - 
Author's  Preface. 

Craigie,  Sir  Robert  Leslie.  Behind  the  Japa- 
nese mask  .  .  .  With  28  illustrations.  New 
York,  Hutchinson.  [1945.]  172  pp.  Plates. 

DS889.C7 

Sir  Robert  Craigie  was  British  Ambassador  at 
Tokyo  from  1937  to  1942,  the  period  from  De- 
cember, 1941  to  July,  1942  being  spent  in  intern- 
ment. 

Ellsberg,  Edward,  Commander.  Under  the 
Red  Sea  sun.  Dodd,  Mead.  1946.  ix,  500 
pp.  Illus.  D811.5.E45 

Glueck,  Sheldon.  The  Nuremberg  trial  and 
aggressive  war.  Knopf.  1946.  xv,  121  pp. 

D804.G42G5 

Hersey,  John  Richard.  Hiroshima.  Knopf. 
1946.  ii/ pp.  D767.25.H6H4 

The  first  publication  in  book  form  of  the  already 
well  known  extraordinary  account  of  what  happened 
to  six  survivors  of  the  bombing  of  Hiroshima. 

Hirschmann,  Ira  A.  Life  line  to  a  promised 
land.  Vanguard.  [1946.]  xvi,  214  pp. 

D809.U5H5 

Treats  of  war  refugees  and  civilian  relief. 

Holman,  Gordon.  Stand  by  to  beach!  Hodder 
&  Stoughton.  1 1945.]  223  pp.  Plates. 

D771.H663  1945 

D  day,  before,  and  after  with  the  British  Navy. 

Kato,  Masuo.  The  lost  war.  a  Japanese  re- 
porter's inside  story.  Knopf.  1946.  264  pp. 

D742.J3K3 

An  American-educated  Japanese  journalist's  ac- 
count of  life  in  Japan  during  the  late  war,  written 
with  scant  respect  and  little  sympathy  for  Japan's 
conduct  of  the  war  or  her  nationnl  ambitions.  An 
excellent  piece  of  reporting. 

Malaparte,  Curzio.  Kaputt.  Translated  from 
the  Italian  by  Cesarc  Foligno.  Dutton. 
1946.  407  pp.  PQ4829.A515K32 

War  is  the  background  for  this  record,  acidly 
realistic,  full  of  macabre  irony,  of  the  author's  ex- 
periences and  conversations  with  characters  of  all 
kinds  in  the  various  countries  from  Sweden  to 
Croatia  and  the  Ukraine.  Malaparte  is  an  Italian 
author,  correspondent  and  diplomat. 

Martin,  David.  Ally  betrayed,  the  uncensored 
story  of  Tito  and  Mihailovich  .  .  .  foreword 
by  Rebecca  West.  Prentice-Hall.  1946. 
xviii,  372  pp.  Plates.  D802.Y8M3 
A  spirited  defense  of  Mihailovich. 

Middleton,  Drew.  Our  share  of  night,  a 
personal  narrative  of  the  war  years.  Vi- 
king. 1046.  380  pp.  D811.5.M44 


Moore,  Harriet  Lucy.  Soviet  Far  Eastern 
policy,  1931-1945.  Princeton  Univ.  1945. 
xv,  284  pp.  DS518.7.M66 

The  author,  who  is  research  director  of  the  Ameri- 
can-Russian Institute,  has  drawn  mainly  on  Soviet 
sources. 

"As  an  analysis  of  the  record,  and  as  a  guide  to 
the  alternatives  of  the  present  and  the  potentialities 
of  the  future,  Miss  Moore's  work  is  unique  in 
English.'"  Introduction  by  Owen  I.atimort. 

Oliver,  R.  Leslie.  Malta  besieged.  Hutchin- 
son. [1944.]  175  pp.  Plates.  D763.M3  O  42 
"I  have  endeavoured  to  present  a  picture  of  the 
actual  conditions  which  existed  in  Alalia  as  a  re- 
sult of  the  'tight'  air  blockade  which  the  enemy 
imposed  from  December,  1941,  until  November, 
ii)42.  I  have,  loo,  attempted  to  relate  the  experi- 
ences of  the  officers  and  men  of  the  ships  of  the 
convoys  .  .  ." — Foreword. 

Rauschning,  Hermann.  Time  of  delirium. 
Appleton-Century.  [1946.]  vii,  369  pp. 

CR424.R332 

The  author  of  The  Revolution  of  .\ihilism  diagnoses 
the  evils  of  our  Time  of  Delirium  —  title  taken 
from  Horace.  He  also  suggests  tasks  for  the  future, 
notably  "the  overcoming  of  ideological  perplexity  by 
intimate  experience  of  the  reality  of  spiritual  stand- 
ards."— P.  356. 

United  nations  relief  and  rehabilitation  ad- 
ministration .  .  .  Monthly  review,  no  6-13. 
Feb.  1945-  Sept.  1945.  Washington.  [1945- 

*9940.53A23 

Issued  by  the  Office  of  public  information. 
Reproduced  from  type-written  copy. 

Literature 

Essays 

Grayson,  David,  pseud,  18J0-1946.  More  ad- 
ventures with  David  Grayson.  Doubleday. 
1946.  x,  341  pp.  PS3503.A5448M6 

Contents.  —  Adventures  in  understanding.  - —  Ad- 
ventures in  solitude.  —  Great  possessions. 

Leacock,  Stephen,  1869-1944.  The  Leacock 
roundabout.  Dodd,  Mead.  1946.  vii,  422  pp. 

PR6023.E15A6  1946 

"A  treasury  of  the  best  works  of  Stephen  Leacock.'' 
Includes  reminiscent  sketches,  nonsense  novels,  de- 
tective stories,  talcs  of  fishing  and  other  sport,  dra- 
matic sketches,  lectures,  and  miscellaneous  essays. 
"The  world's  humour,  in  its  best  and  greatest 
sense,  is  perhaps  the  highest  product  of  our  civili- 
zation."— From   "Humour  as   I   see   it,"   p.  S. 

Wells,  H.  G.,  1866-1946.  Mind  at  the  end  of 
its  tether;  and.  The  happy  turning;  a 
dream  of  life.  New  York.  Didier.  [1946.] 
vii,  34,  50  pp.  CB425.W388  1946 

The  last  book  of  H.  G.  Wells,  who  died  on  August 
13.  1946. 


French  Fiction  - 

Benoit,  Pierre.  Seigneur,  j'ai  tout  prevu  .  .  . 

Roman.  Paris.  [1943. 1  9-261  pp. 

PQ2603.E583S4 
Bory,  Jean  Louis.  Mon  village  a  l'heure  alle- 

inande,  roman.  New  York,  Editions  de  La 

Maison  franchise.  [  194s  ]  [7]-309Pp. 

PQ2603.O  6264M6 
Cesbron,  Gilbert.  The  innocents  of  Paris,  a 

novel  .  .  .  translated  from  the  French  by 

Marguerite  Waldman.  Hou.srhton  Mifflin. 

1946.  212  pp.  PQ2605.E7  I  6 

Colette,  Sidonie  Gabrielle.  Gigi.  Paris.  1946. 

[7]-2Si  pp.  PQ3605.O  28G5 


n6  MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


History  of  Literature 

Baldensperger,  Fernand.  La  critique  et  I'his- 
toire  litteraires  en  France  au  dix-neuvieme 
et  au  debut  du  vingtieme  siecles,  en  col- 
laboration avec  H.  S.  Craig,  jr.  Brentano. 
[1945  ]  0-244  pp.  PQ282.B3 

Battistessa,  Angel  J.  Dos  poetas  argentinos: 
Enrique  Banchs,  por  Angel  J.  Battistessa; 
Fernandez  Moreno,  por  Vicente  Barbieri. 
Buenos  Aires.  [I945-]  7-3%  VP- 

PQ7797.B276Z6 

Bush,  Douglas.  English  literature  in  the 
earlier  seventeenth  century,  1600-1660. 
Clarendon.  1945.  vi,  621  pp.  PR431.B8 
Bibliography:  pp.  [4401-610. 

De  Groot,  John  Henry.  The  Shakespeares 
and  "the  old  faith.  New  York,  King's 
Crown  Press.  1946.  viii,  258  pp. 

PR3011.D41946 
Contents.  -  -  The  Religion  of  John  Shakespeare.  — 
The  Spiritual  Last  Will  and  Testament  of  John 
Shakespeare.  —  The  Religious  Training  of  William 
Shikespcarc.  —  Catholicism  in  the  Writings  of 
William  Shakespeare.  —  Bibliography. 

Godoy,  Armand.  Milosz;  le  poete  de  l'amour. 
[Fribourg  cn  Suisse.  1944.]  265,  [10]  pp. 

PQ2625.I  585Z62 

Gregory,  Horace,  and  Marya  Zaturenska.  A 
history  of  American  poetry.  1900-1940. 
Harcourt,  Brace.  [1946.]  xi,  524  pp. 

PS324.G7 
"A  descriptive  bibliography"  pp.  497-5°3- 

Kronacher,  Alvin.  Fritz  von  Unruh,  a  mono- 
graph. New  York,  R.  Schick  Pub.  Co. 
1946.  64  pp.  PT2643.N7Z7 
An  appreciation  and  biographical  sketch  of  the 
anti-militarist  German  poet  and  dramatist  Fritz 
von  Unruh.  Includes  an  excerpt  from  Unruh's 
novel  The  End  is  not  yet. 

"Fritz  von  Unruh  is  in  truth  an  inspiring  model 
for  all  mankind." — Introduction  by  Albert  Einstein. 

Mahieu,  Robert  Georges.  Sainte-Beuve  aux 
Etats-Unis.  Princeton  Univ.  1945.  xii,  161 
pp.  Illus.  PQ2391.Z5M25 

"Textes  scolaires" :  pp.  115-141.  "Bibliographic": 
pp.  142-155- 

Van  Doren,  Mark.  The  noble  voice;  a  study 
of  ten  great  poems.  Holt.  [1946.]  xviii,  328 
pp.  PN1111.V3 

Contents.  —  The  Iliad.  —  The  Odyssey.  —  The 
Aeneid.  —  Paradise  Lost.  —  Concerning  the  Nature 
of  Things  [Lucretius'  Dc  Return  Xatura]  —  The 
Divine  Comedy.  —  The  Faerie  Queene.  —  Troilus 
and  Criseyde.  —  Don  Juan.  —  The  Prelude. 

Walsh,  Gerald  G.  Dante  Alighieri,  citizen  of 
Christendom.  Bruce.  [1946.]  viii,  183  pp. 

PQ4422.W3 

Based  on  Lowell  lectures  delivered  in  the  Boston 
Public  Library,  November  and  December,  1945. 

Poems  and  Tales 

Astrov,  Margot,  editor.  The  winged  serpent, 
an  anthology  of  American  Indian  prose 
and  poetry;  edited  and  with  an  intro- 
ductory essay.  Dav.  [1946.]  xi,  366  pp. 

PM102.A8 

Includes  Eskimo,  Central  American  and  Mexican 
selections.  Bibliography :  pp.  345—359. 

Boas,  Frederick  Samuel.  Songs  and  lyrics 
from  the  English  playbooks,  collected  and 
edited  by  Frederick  S.  Boas,  decorated  by 
Hans  Tisdall.  London,  Cresset  Press. 
[1945.]  xviii,  258  pp.  Plates.  PR1187.B58 
Songs  drawn  from  plays. 

Contents.  —  Medieval.  —  Early  Tudor.  —  Eliza- 


bethan. —  Shakespeare,  Beaumont  and  Fletcher.  — 
Jacobean  and  Caroline.  —  Restoration.  —  Eight- 
eenth Century.  —  Nineteenth  Century. 

Coffin,  Robert  P.  Tristram.  People  behave 
like  ballads.  Macmillan.  1946.  x,  100  pp. 

PS3505-0  234P4 

Ballads  about  New  Englaudcrs  and  New  England 
folklore. 

De  La  Mare,  Walter  John.  Love.  Morrow. 
1946.  xxxii,  822  pp.  PN6110.L6D4 

A  curious  and  comprehensive  anthology  of  pro»c 
and  veise  treating  of  love.  The  arrangement  is  by 
topical  sections,  the  items  in  these  being  numbered, 
but  the  authors  from  whose  works  the  extracts  or 
verses  are  taken  appearing  only  in  the  table  of 
contents. 

Henrich,  Edith.  The  quiet  center.  William 
Sloane  Associates.  [1946.]  73  pp. 
Poems.  PS3515.E574Q5 

Marmion,  Shackerley,  1603-1639.  Cupid  and 
Psyche.  A  critical  edition:  with  an  ac- 
count of  Marmion's  life  and  works  .  .  . 
[by]  Alice  Jones  Nearing.  Philadelphia. 
1944.  202  pp.  PR3565.M9A65  1944 

The  poem  is  a  reproduction  of  the  1637  edition,  in 
the  Chapiu  library,  Williams  College. 

Morley,  Christopher.  Spirit  level  and  other 
poems.  Harvard.  1946.  x,  52  pp. 

PS3525.O  71S75 

Poe,  Edgar  Allan,  1809-1849.  The  complete 
poems  and  stories  of  Edgar  Allan  Poe, 
with  selections  from  his  critical  writings. 
With  an  introduction  and  explanatory 
notes  by  Arthur  Hobson  Quinn;  texts  es- 
tablished, with  bibliographical  notes,  by 
Edward  H.  O'Neill.  Illustrated  by  E.  Mc- 
Knight  Kauffer.  Knopf.  1946.  2  v. 

PS2601.Q5 

T'ang-shih  san-pai  shou.  Selections  from 
the  Three  hundred  poems  of  the  T'ang 
dynasty,  translated  by  Soame  Jenyns  .  .  . 
Dutton.  (i940.[  116  pp. 

PL3277.E3T37  1940 

Van  Doren,  Mark.  The  country  year;  poems 
.  .  .  New  York,  William  Sloane  Asso- 
ciates. [1946.]  x,  131pp.  PS3543.A557C6 
"The  seasons  group  the  poems,  though  often  in  but 
an  approximate  or  general  fashion." — Preface. 
Distinctive  pen  and  ink  drawings  by  John  O'Hara 
Cosgrave  II. 

Ycung,  Francis  Brett.  The  island.  Farrar, 
Straus.  1946.  viii,  451  pp. 

PR6047.O47  I  8  1946 

A  book-length  poem,  in  various  verse-forms  and 
partly  dramatic,  narrating  the  history  of  England 
from  prehistoric  beginnings  to  1944- 

Local  History 

Collins,  Frederick  Lewis.  Money  town,  the 
story  of  Manhattan  toe:  that  golden  mile 
which  lies  between  the  Battery  and  the 
fields.  Putnam.  [1946.]  viii,  327  pp.  Plates. 

F128.3.C7 

Norwich,  Eng.,  (Diocese)  Bishop  1595-1602. 
Diocese  of  Norwich,  Bishop  Redman's 
visitation  1597.  Presentments  in  the  arch- 
deaconries of  Norwich,  Norfolk,  and  Suf- 
folk. Edited  by  J.  F.  Williams.  Norfolk 
Record  Soc.  1946.  xv,  185  pp.  *25o6.ii7.i8 
Includes  list  of  members,  16th  annu.il  report,  rules, 
and  publications  of  the  Norfolk  record  society. 

Van  de  Water,  Frederic  Franklyn.  Lake 
Champlain  and  Lake  George.  Bobbs-Mer- 
rill.  [1946.]  17-381  pp.  Plates.  F127.C6V3 
The  American  Lakes  series. 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


117 


Manners  and  Customs 

Hole,  Christina.  English  custom  and  usage 
.  .  .  illustrated  from  prints  and  photo- 
graphs. a1  edition,  revised.  Scribner.  1946. 
viii,  151pp.  DA110.H64  1946 

Partridge,  Bellamy,  and  Otto  Bettmann.  As 
wc  were:  family  life  in  America,  1850- 
1900,  in  pictures  and  text.  McGraw-Hill. 
I1946.]  184  pp.  Ulus.  E161.P3 
"All  pictures  .  .  .  are  from  the  Bettmann  archive, 
New  York." 


Medicine.  Hygiene 

Robinson,  Victor.  Victory  over  pain,  a  his- 
tory of  anesthesia.  New  York,  H.  Schu- 
man.  [1946.]  xiv,  338  pp.  Illus.  RD79.R6 

A  history  of  anesthesia  from  antiquity  till  today, 
with  a  section  devoted  to  the  glorious  and  tragic 
story  of  "Long,  Wells,  Morton,  Jackson,  holding  in 
their  hands  America's  greatest  gift  to  mankind." 

Williams,  Roger  J.  The  human  frontier;  a 
new  pathway  for  science  toward  a  better 
understanding  of  ourselves.  Harcourt, 
Brace.  [1946.]  viii,  314  pp.  GN27.W53 

The  author  urges  the  development  of  a  new  branch 
of  applied  science  —  the  science  of  humanics  — 
which  will  undertake  a  comprehensive  study  of  in- 
dividuals. He  feels  that  the  present  practice  of 
conducting  intensive  studies  of  small  details  and 
minutiae  of  human  biology  and  psychology  is  waste- 
ful and  unproductive. 


Military  Science 

Eliot,  George  Fielding.  The  strength  we 
need,  a  military  program  for  America, 
pending  peace.  Viking.  1946.  261  pp. 

UA23.E46 

Fisher,  George  J.  B.  Incendiary  warfare.  Mc- 
Graw-Hill. 1046.  xi,  125  pp.  UF767.F5 

Contents.  —  The  Explosive  and  the  Incendiary.  — 
Propagation  of  Fire.  —  Incendiary  Agents.  —  In- 
cendiary Munitions.  —  -  Tactics  of  Incendiary 
Bombing.  —  Wartime  Fire  Defense.  —  Prepared- 
ness against  Incendiary  Attack.  —  Evolution  of 
Incendiary  Warfare. 


Music 

Abraham,    Gerald,    editor.    The    music  of 
Tchaikovsky.  Norton.  [1946.]  277  pp. 

ML410.C4A5  1946 

Firs:  American  edition.  Published  in  England  under 
the  title  "Tchaikovsky"  in  "Music  of  the  Masters" 
series. 

"Consists  of  chapters  on  various  aspects  of  Tchai- 
kovsky's music  contributed  by  well-know  n  critics." 
— Preface. 

Bibliography :  pp.  238—242.  "List  of  compositions"  : 

PP.  243-[252.] 

Geiringer,  Karl.   Haydn,  a  creative  life  in 

music.  Norton.   [1946. 1   342  pp.  Plates. 

Bibb"  ography :  pp.  326—331.  ML4IO.H4G4 
Graves,  Stella  Marie.  Min  river  boat  songs 

.  .  .  tunes  collected  by  Malcolm  F.  Farley. 

Day.  [1946.]  48  pp.  "  M1804.G73M5 

Songs  for  solo  voice  or  mixed  chorus  (with  piano 
accompaniment)  based  on  wordless  river  boat 
melodies.  Each  song  is  preceded  by  the  original 
melodies.  English  words  for  the  songs  are  princi- 
pally by  M.  F.  Farley. 
Koechlin,  Charles.  Gabriel  Faure  (1845-1924). 
London,  Dobson.  [1945.]  viii,  98  pp. 

ML410.F27K72 


Phillips,  C.  Henry.  The  singing  church;  an 
outline  history  of  the  music  sung  by  choir 
and  people.  Faber.  [1946.]  279  pp.  Music. 
Plates.  ML3000.P48 
"General  bibliography":  pp.  247-250. 

Sargeant,  Winthrop.  Jazz:  hot  and  hybrid. 
New  and  enlarged  edition.  Dutton.  1946. 
15-287  pp.  Music.  ML3561.J3S3  1946 
Bibliography:  pp.  267-274. 

Schoen,  Max.  The  understanding  of  music. 
Harper.  [I945-]  187  PP-  "ML3845S37 

Sheehy,  Emma  Dickson.  There's  music  in 
children.  Holt.   [1046  ]    120  pp.  Plates. 

ML3838.S5 

"Phonograph  records":  pp.   113- 118. 

"Composer  biographies  written  for  young  people" : 

p.  120. 


Philosophy 

Feibleman,  James  Kern.  An  introduction  to 
Peirce's  philosophy;  interpreted  as  a  sys- 
tem. Harper.  [1946.]  xx,  503  pp. 

B945.P44F4 

"Mr.  Feibleman  has  performed  a  most  valuable 
work  in  presenting  to  the  public  a  systematic  ex- 
position of  Charles  Peirce's  philosophy.  Pierce  him- 
self, like  Leibniz,  gave  to  the  world  only  fragments 
of  his  system,  with  the  result  that  he  has  been 
thoroughly  misunderstood,  not  least  by  those  who 
professed  to  be  his  admirers."- -Foreword  by  Bert- 
rand  Russell. 

Kayser,  Rudolf.  Spinoza;  portrait  of  a  spirit- 
ual hero  .  .  .  translated  by  Amy  Allen  and 
Maxim  Newmark.  New  York,  Philoso- 
phical Library.  [1046.]  xix,  326  pp. 

B3997.K32 

"The  author  views  Spinoza  not  so  much  with  the 
critical  eye  of  the  professional  philosopher  as  with 
that  of  the  sympathetic  historian  who  has  an  in- 
tuitive comprehension  of  the  motive  forces  operative 
within  that  pure  and  lonely  spirit.** — Introduction 
by  Albert  Einstein. 


Politics  and  Government 

Communism 

Communist  International.  Blueprint  for  world 
conquest,  as  outlined  by  the  Communist 
International,  with  an  introduction  by 
William  Henry  Chamberlin.  Washington, 
Chicago,  Human  Events.  1946.  263  pp. 

HX11.I  5A5  1946 

Contents.  —  Introduction.  —  The  theses  and  stat- 
utes of  the  Communist  International,  as  adopted  at 
the  second  world  congress,  July  17  to  August  7. 
1920,  Moscow.  —  The  programme  of  the  Com- 
munist International,  adopted  by  the  sixth  world 
congress,  September  1,  1928,  Moscow.  — ■  Consti- 
tution and  rules  of  the  Communist  International. 

Ingrim,  Robert.  After  Hitler  Stalin?  Bruce. 
[1946.]  xv,  255  pp.  D445-I  5 

Belongs  to  Science  and  Culture  series. 


Domestic  and  Foreign 

Amraon,  Lord.  Newfoundland,  the  forgotten 

island.     London.     Fabian  Publications. 

[1946.1  29  pp  9330.9718A1 
Arnall,  Ellis  Gibbs.  The  shore  dimly  seen. 

Lippincott.  [1946.]  312  pp.  E743.A7 
McCloy,  Shelby  T.  Government  assistance  in 

eighteenth-century    France.    Duke  Univ. 

1046.  xi,  496  pp.  9360.944 


n8 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Political  Science 

Ballinger,  Willis.  By  vote  of  the  people. 
Scribner.  1946.  xv,  381  pp.  JF31.B3 
The  author  surveys  historic  cases  of  the  demise  of 
democracy  "by  rote  of  the  people,"  and  warns  of 
a  similar  danger  at  hand  through  economic  evils. 
Part  I  deals  with  "Free  Governments  of  the  Past." 
and  Part  II  with  "The  Historical  Crisis  in  Ameri- 
ca." 

Browne,  Waldo  Ralph,  editor.  Leviathan  in 
crisis;  an  international  symposium  on  the 
state,  its  past,  present,  and  future,  by 
fifty-four  twentieth  century  writers.  Vi- 
king. 1946.  xvi,  430  pp.  JC249.B7 

Goble,  George  Washington.  The  design  of 
deniocracv.  Univ.  of  Oklahoma.  1946.  viii, 
248  pp.  JK271.G66 

Psychology 

Akhilananda,  Swami.  Hindu  psychology,  its 
meaning  for  the  West.  Harper.  [1046.] 
xviii,  241  pp.  BF755.H5A35 

"Swami  Akhilananda  makes  available  to  us  a  non- 
technical introduction  to  the  thought  of  the  East. 
He  does  so  in  a  direct  and  lucid  style."- — Intro- 
duction by  Gordon  \V.  Allport. 

Clawson,  Joseph.  Psychology  in  action.  Mac- 
millan.  1946.  xi,  289  pp.  Plates. 

BF.636.C575 

Case  studies  in  human  psychology  arranged  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  they  have  in  common  and 
"unified  in  a  new  theory  of  psychology  —  the  theory 
of  'value-situations'." 

"The  purpose  of  the  book  is  to  help  the  general 
reader  understand,  stimulate,  teach,  and  change 
other  people." —  Author's  Preface. 

Gray,  John  Stanley.  Psychology  in  human 
affairs  .  .  .  with  the  assistance  of  eleven 
contributors.  Mc-Graw-Hill.  1946.  viii,  646 
pp.  BF636.G58 

Harriman,  Philip  Lawrence,  editor.  Encyclo- 
pedia_  of  psychology  .  .  .  written  by  many 
contributors.  New  York,  Philosophical 
Library.  [1946. 1  vii,  897  pp.  *BF3i.H3 

Reik,  Thedore.  Ritual:  psycho-analytic  stu- 
ies.  With  a  preface  by  Sigmund  Freud. 
Translated  from  the  second  German 
edition  by  Douglas  Bryan.  Farrar,  Straus. 
1946.  367  pp.  Ulus.  GN473.R4  1946 

"The  Psychologcal  Problems  .if  Religion,"  I. 


Religion 

Gh6on,  Henri,  1875-1944.  St.  Martin  of  Tours. 
Sheed  and  Ward.  1946.  x,  180  pp. 

BX4700.M39G472 

A  life  of  the  fourth  century  saint  who  became 
Bishop  of  Tours. 

This  work  of  the  late  M.  Gheon  has  been  trans- 
lated by  F.  J.  Sheed. 

Hazelton,  Roger.  The  God  we  worship.  Mac- 
millan.  1946.  xiii,  160  pp.  BT101.H33 

Contents.  —  Worship  and  the  Truth.  —  The  Holi- 
ness of  God.  —  God  and  the  Good.  —  Is  God 
Almighty?  —  God  is  Love.  —  The  Christ  of  Wor- 
ship. —  The  Holy  Spirit  and  the  Church. 

Matsumoto,  Toru,  and  Marion  Olive  Lerrigo. 
A  brother  is  a  stranger.  Dav.  [  1 946. 1  xiii, 
3i8pp.  BV3457-M3A3 

The  life  story  of  a  Japanese  Christian  minister. 
"This  book  is  the  truest  and  most  complete  book 
of  life  in  Japan,  with  all  its  good  and  evil,  that  I 
have  ever  read.  It  also  contains  something  of  life 
in  the  United  States,  as  seen  through  generous 
Japanese  eyes." — Introduction  by  Pearl  S.  Buck. 


Russell,  Ralph,  Father,  editor.  Essays  in  re- 
construction. Sheed  &  Ward.  1946.  xi,  176 
pp.  D825.R88 

Contents.  —  Reconstruction  and  the  natural  man, 
by  Ralph  Russell.  —  The  leaven,  by  Ralph  Rus- 
sell. —  The  Catholic  action,  by  Illtyd  Trethowan. 

—  Christian  education,  by  Christopher  Butler.  — 
Catholicism  and  science,  by  F.  S.  Taylor.  —  Catho- 
licism and  English  literature,  by  Hilary  Steuert  and 
Sebastian  Moore.  —  The  reconstruction  of  philo- 
sophic thought,  by  Illtyd  Trethowan.  —  Catholics 
and  economic  reconstruction,  by  Michael  Fogarty. 

—  The  aims  of  youth  in  peace  and  war.  by  A.  I.yt- 
ton-Milbanlce.  —  Youth  and  the  young  Christian 
workers,  by  John  Fitzsiinons. 

Shepherd,  Massey  Hamilton,  Jr.  The  living 
liturgy.  Oxford  LTniv.  1946.  ix,  139  pp. 

BX5940.S45 

Most  of  the  contents  of  this  volume  appeared  in  the 
columns  of  The  Witness.  The  author  is  Professor 
at  the  Episcopal  Theological  School  of  Cambridge, 

Mass. 

Science 

Physics.  Chemistry 

Cooper,  Herbert  J.,  editor.  Scientific  instru- 
ments. Brookbm,  N.  Y.,  Chemical  Pub.  Co. 
1946.  [91-305  PP.  Ulus.  8205.5 

Crehore,  Albert  Cashing'.  Electrons,  atoms, 
molecules,  with  twenty-six  illustrations. 
Boston.  Christopher  Pub.  House.  [1946.] 
133  PP-  8216.73 

De  Ment,  Jack,  and  H.  C.  Dake.  Rarer 
metals.  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  Chemical  Pub. 
Co.  1946.  xiii,  392  pp.  Illus.  8282.7 

Ingalls,  Walter  Renton.  Systems  of  weights 
and  measures.  American  Inst,  of  Weights 
and  Measures.  1945.  51  pp.  8208.1 

Wcod,  Alexander.  The  Cavendish  laboratory. 
Cambridge  Univ.  1946.  58  pp.  VIII  plates. 

8205.4 

Zoology.  Biology 

Gibbings,  Robert.  Blue  angels  and  whales;  a 
record  of  personal  experiences  below  and 
above  water  .  .  .  with  illustrations  by  the 
author.  Dutton.  1946.  153  pp.  Illus. 

QL617.GS  1946 
A  description  of  coral  reefs  in  Tahiti,  Bermuda  and 
the  Red  Sea. 

Hogben,  Lancelot  Thomas.  An  introduction 
to  mathematical  genetics.  Norton.  [1946.] 
xii,  260  pp.  QH431.H583 

"Based  on  a  course  of  lectures  delivered  to  post- 
graduate students  in  the  Genetics  department  of 
the  University  of  Wisconsin  in  the  winter  of  1040." 
— Foreword. 

Pough,  Richard  H.  Audubon  bird  guide; 
eastern  land  birds  .  .  .  with  illustrations  in 
color  of  every  species,  by  Don  Eckelberry. 
Sponsored  by  National  Audubon  society. 
Doubledav.  1946.  xxxvii,  312  pp.  Colored 
plates.  QL681.P68 

Sociology 

Labor.  Vocations 

Chase,  Stuart.  For  this  we  fought;  guide  lines 
to  America's  future  as  reported  to  the 
Twentieth  century  fund.  Twentieth  Cen- 
tury Fund.  1946.  x,  123  pp.  Q338.91A79 

The  sixth  volume  of  reports  written  for  the  Twen- 
tieth Century  Fund. 

Contents.  —  Men  in  New  Suit3.  —  Service  Center. 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


119 


—  What  the  Veterans  want.  —  What  the  People 
want.  —  The  Five- Year  Miracle.  —  Let  down.  — 
Walk  along  Civvy  Street.  —  Atomic  Age— Year 
one.  —  Can  we  get  what  we  want?  —  The  Middle 
Road. 

Grant,  Eugene  Lodewick.  Statistical  quality 
control.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xii,  563  pp. 
Illus.  9310.2A174 

McGraw-Hill  industrial  organization  and  manage- 
ment series. 

Institute  for  research,  Chicago.  Special  re- 
search. No.  5,  6,  13-15.  Chicago.  1943-45. 
Illus.  *HF538i.Ai  I  52 

Treats  of  careers  and  vocations. 

Kuczynski,  Jiirgen.  Labour  conditions  in 
Great  Britain;  1750  to  the  present.  New- 
York,  International  Publishers.  [1946. 1 
[9]-i9i  pp.  Illus.  9331.842A5 

Labour  party  (Gt.  Brit.)  Report  of  the  annual 
conference  .  .  .  43d-  Dec.  1944-  London. 
[1945-  *933i.8o42A27 

Litchfield,  Paul  Weeks.  The  industrial  repub- 
lic; reflections  of  an  industrial  lieutenant 
.  .  .  illustrations  by  Fred  Ludekens.  [Cleve- 
land, Corday  &  Gross.  1946.]  201  pp. 

9331.113A112 

Largely  an  account  of  industrial  relations  at  the 
Goodyear  Tire  &  Rubber  Co.  of  Akron,  Ohio.  The 
first  part  is  a  reprint  of  a  book  with  the  same 
title  first  published  in  1919. 

Patterson,  William  F.,  and  M.  H.  Hedges. 

Educating  for  industry;  policies  and  pro- 
cedures of  a  national  apprenticeship  sys- 
tem. Prentice-Hall.  1946.  ix,  229  pp.  Illus. 
Bibliography:  pp.  [1531-184.  HD4885.U5P3 
U.  S.  Office  of  vocational  rehabilitation.  In- 
structions for  execution  of  closed  case  re- 
port or  supervised  employment  case  re- 
port. Form  R-9,  revised  June  1944.  [Wash- 
ington. 1944-1  7PP- 

*HD7256.U5A53  1944 

At  head  of  title:  Federal  security  agency.  Office 
of  vocational  rehabilitation. 


Social  Work 

Garrett,  Annette  Marie.  Interviewing,  its 
principles  and  methods.  Family  Welfare 
Ass'n  of  America.  [1945.]  123  pp. 

HV41.G34  1945 

Hamilton,  Gordon.  Principles  of  social  case 
recording.  Pub.  for  the  New  York  School 
of  Social  Work  by  Columbia  Univ.  1946. 
vii,  142  pp.  HV41.H276 


Miscellaneous 

Bacon,  Seldon  Daskam.  Sociology  .and  the 
problems  of  alcohol;  foundations  for  a 
sociologic  study  of  drinking  behavior.  New 
Haven,  Pub.  for  the  Section  of  Studies 
on  Alcohol  bv  Hillhouse  Press.  [1946.] 
[51-53PP-  *HV5oi5.Y3no.  1 

Chandrasekhar,  Sripati.  India's  population, 
fact  and  policy  .  .  .  with  an  introduction 
by  Warren  S.  Thompson.  Day.  [1946.I 
U7PP.  9312.954A2 

Contents.  —  Demographic  fact.  —  Public  health. 
—  Toward  a  national  population  policy. 
Part   1   and   2   are  based  on   the  author's  "The 
Population  Problem  of  India." 

Merton,  Robert  King.  Mass  persuasion;  the 
social  psychology  of  a  war  bond  drive,  by 


Robert  K.  Merton,  with  the  assistance  of 
Marjoric  Fiske  and  Alberta  Curtis.  Harper. 
[1946.]  xiii,  210  pp.  HJ8119.M4 

An  analysis  of  Kate  Smith's  war  bond  appeal 
broadcast  over  the  Columbia  broadcasting  system 
September  21,  1943. 


Technology 

Aeronautics 

McFarland,  Ross  A.  Human  factors  in  air 
transport  design.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xix, 
670  pp.   Illus.  4036K.16 

Zacharoff,  Lucien.  The  world's  wings;  what 
U.  S.  air  policy  for  world  peace  and  pros- 
perity? Duell,  Sloan  and  Pearce.  [1946.] 
310  pp.  TL552.Z24 

Electric  Engineering.  Radio 

Cameron,  James  Ross.  Basic  electronic  elec- 
tricity. Coral  Gables,  Fla.,  Cameron  Pub. 
Co.  [1946.I  [i5]-320pp.  Illus.  8017L.61 

Electronics'  Engineering  manual.  Vol.  III. 
Nfew]  Y[ork]  C[ity]  Electronics.  1045? 
250  pp.  Illus.  8017L.60 

Some  of  the  most  important  and  useful  articles 
published  in  recent  issues  of  Electronics.  —  cf. 
Foreword. 

Hughbanks,  Leroy.  Talking  wax;  or,  the 
story  of  the  phonograph,  simply  told  for 
general  readers.  New  York,  Hobson  Book 
Press.  194.-,.  142  pp.  8017K.26 
"Bibliography  of  the  phonograph":  pp.  135-143. 

Landry,  Robert  J.  This  fascinating  radio 
business.  Bobbs-Merrill.  [1946.]  343  pp. 
Plates.  TK6548.U6L28 

MacColl,  Le  Roy  A.  Fundamental  theory  of 
servomechanisms.  Van  Nostrand.  [1946.I 
xviii,  130  pp.  8019A.510 

Massachusetts  institute  of  technology,  Radar 
school.  Principles  of  radar,  by  members 
of  the  staff  of  the  Radar  school,  Massa- 
chusetts institute  of  technology.  2d  edition. 
McGraw-Hill.  1946.  Illus.  *8oi7D.4i 

Reproduced  from  type-written  copy ;  various  pag- 
ings. 

National  electrical  manufacturers  association. 
A  chronological  history  of  electrical  de- 
velopment from  600  B.  C.  National  Elec- 
trical Manufacturers  Ass'n.  [1946.I  106, 
[37]  pp.  *8oioE.59 

Nilson,  Arthur  R.,  and  J.  L.  Hornung.  Radio 
operating  questions  and  answers.  8th 
edition.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xi,  434  pp. 

8017.587X 

Selgin,  Paul  J.  Elecirical  transmission  in 
steady  state.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  ix,  427 
pp.  Illus.  8C14A.84 
"This  book  grew  out  of  a  set  of  mimeographed 
notes  prepared  by  the  author  for  a_  series  of 
lecture  courses,  offered  at  the  Polytechnic  Institute 
of  Brooklyn  in  1942  and  1943  under  the  sponsor- 
ship of  the  war  training  program." — Preface. 

Tarboux,  J.  G.  Electric  power  equipment.  3d 
edition.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xiii,  493  pp. 
Illus.  8011.261S 

Westinghouse  electric  corporation,  Better 
homes  department.  Westinghouse  home 
wiring  handbook,  by  A.  Carl  Bredahl. 
Pittsburgh,  Westinghouse  Electric  Corp. 
fi045-l  121  PP.  Ulus.  8014.389 


120 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Manufacture.  Chemical  Technology 

Crawford,  Morris  De  Camp.  5000  years  of 
fibers  and  fabrics  .  .  .  handbook  of  the  ex- 
hibition, January  22  through  March  31, 
19.46.  Brooklyn  Museum,  Brooklyn  Inst. 

61  Arts  and  Sciences.  [1946.]  34  pp.  Illus. 

8038M.1 

Fuchs,  Walter  M.  When  the  oil  wells  run  dry. 

Dover,  X.  II.,  Industrial  Research  Service. 

[1946.]  xiv,  447  pp.  Illus.  8033B.no 
McMillen,   Wheeler.   New  riches  from  the 

soil;  the  progress  of  chemistry.  Van  Nost- 

rand.  [1946.]  xii,  397  pp.  8030.153 
Sasso,  John,  editor.   Plastics  handbook  for 

product  engineers.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  ix. 

468pp.  Illus.  8031DD.55 
Vanderbilt,  (R.  T.)  company,  inc.  Building  a 

rubber  compound.  New  York.  1946.  81  pp. 

8030B.190 

First  published  in  1939  in  the  July-August  issue 
of  the  Vanderhih  news  (v.  9,  no.  4)  cf.  Preface 

M echanical  Engineering 

Allen,  John  Robins,  1869-1920,  and  others. 
Heating  and  air  conditioning  [by]  John  R. 
Allen,  James  Herbert  Walker  .  .  .  [and] 
John  William  James.  6th  edition.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1946.  vii,  667  pp.  Illus.  4037.22V 

Earlier  editions,  by  J.  R.  Allen  and  J.  H.  Walker, 
published  under  title:   "Heating  and  Ventilation." 

Brown  instruments  company.  Flow  meter; 
engineering  handbook,  compiled  and  edited 
by  Louis  Gess  and  R.  D.  Irwin  ...  2d 
edition.  Philadelphia,  Brown  Instrument 
Co.  [1946.I  viii,  151pp.  Illus.  4030.89 

Derse,  Joseph  C.  Machine  operation  times 
for  estimators;  standard  data  and  methods. 
Ronald  Press.  [1946.]  xi,  156  pp.  Illus. 

4039-129 

Green,  Paul  D.,  and  Ralph  Ritchen.  The  car 
owner's  handbook.  Xew  York,  Essential 
Books,  Duell,  Sloan  and  Pearce.  [1946.] 
xvi,  192  pp.  Illus.  4035B.92 

He'dt,  P.  M.  The  automotive  chassis  (with- 
out powerplant).  Nyack,  N.  Y.,  Heldt. 
I945-  vii,  583  pp.  Illus.  4035B.93 

Starbuck,  C.  W.  The  Starbuck  oil  burner 
manual,  a  complete  handbook  of  instruc- 
tion covering  the  most  modern  design  and 
installation  of  oil  burners.  2d  edition. 
Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  C.  W.  Starbuck.  1946. 
272  pp.  illus.  4032.204 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  ships.  Electric  generators  and 
voltage  regulators.    [Washington.    1945. 1 

62  pp.  * 4033.25 1 

Bureau  of  ships  manual.  Chapter  61. 

—  Gaskets  and  packings.  [Washington.  1945.] 
5  PP.  .  *4033.24gR 

Bureau  of  ships  manual.  Chapter  95. 

—  Instructions  relative  to  gaskets  and  pack- 
ings. Washington.  1944.  *4033.249 
Chapter  95  Bureau  of  ships  manual. 

—  Instructions  relative  to  steering  gear. 
Washington.  1944.  14  pp.  *4033.253 
"Chapter  22  Bureau  of  ships  manual. 

—  Piping.  Washington.  1945.  67  pp.  ^4033.250 
Bureau  of  ships  manual.  Chapter  48. 


Searchlights.  Washington.  [1945.]  34  pp. 

Bureau  of  ships  manual.  Chapter  66.  *4033.252 


Miscellaneous 

Howard,  J.  Harry.  Revised  lapidary  hand- 
book. Greenville,  S.  C,  J.  H.  Howard. 
1946.  [n]-22opp.  Illus.  802C.219R 
Designed  to  provide  practical  instruction  in  all 
kinds  of  gem  cutting  for  the  beginner  and  the 
advanced  amateur. 

Klaf,  A.  Albert.  Trigonometry  refresher  for 
technical  men.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  x,  629 
pp.  4010D.154 

"Answers  to  odd-numbered  problems":  pp.  571  — 
606. 

Sunset  magazine.  Sunset  barbecue  book.  Re- 
vised and  enlarged  July,  1945.  San  Fran- 
cisco, Lane  Pub.  Co.  [1946.]  96  pp.  Illus. 

4023B.37R 

Tupholme,  C.  H.  S.  Photography  in  engineer- 
ing. Faber  and  Hyperion  Press.  [1945.] 
xv,  276  pp.  Plates.  8029D.10 


Travel  and  Description 

Covarrubias,  Miguel.  Mexico  south,  the  isth- 
mus of  Tehuantepec  .  .  .  Paintings  and 
drawings  by  the  author,  photographs  by 
Rose  Covarrubias,  the  author,  and  others. 
Knopf.  1946.  xxviii,  [429].  viii  pp.  Plates. 
Bibliography:  pp.  412-427.  F1359.C6 

Daniels,  Jonathan.  Frontier  on  the  Potomac. 
Macmillan.  1946.  262  pp.  F19S.D25 

A  book  about  Washington  and  iis  inhabitants. 

Fergusson,  Erna.  Cuba.  Knopf.  1946.  ix,  308 
pp.  Plates.  F1765.F4 

Contents.  —  Cuba,  the  Key.  —  -  The  Interior.  — 
The  Colonial  Complex.  —  The  Revolutionary  Tra- 
dition. — -  Intervening  Uncle.  —  The  Price  of 
Sugar.  —  Two  Cubas. 

Mallowan,  Agatha  Christie.  Come,  tell  me 
how  you  live.  Dodd,  Mead.  1946.  xi,  225 

pp.  DS945C5 

A  "meandering  chronicle"  of  the  author's  expedi- 
tion to  Syria  with  her  archaeologist  husband,  and 
their  experiences  at  the  site  of  the  excavations.  The 
treatment  is  light  and  anecdotal. 

Moore,  Nathaniel  Fish,  1782-1872.  Diary;  a 
trip  from  New  York  to  the  falls  of  St. 
Anthony  in  1845;  edited  by  Stanley  Pargel- 
lis  and  Ruth  Lapham  Butler.  Pub.  for  the 
Newberry  Library  by  the  Univ.  of  Chi- 
cago. 1946.  xviii,  101  pp.  Plates.  F484.3.M6 
The  diary  has  been  identified  as  that  of  Nathaniel 
Fish  Moore,  president  of  Columbia  Collc-ee  of  New 
York. 

Nixon,  Herman  Clarence.  Lower  Piedmont 
country.  Duell,  Sloan  &  Pearce.  [1946.] 
xxiii,  244  pp.  F210.N5 

American  Folkways,  edited  by  Erskine  Caldwell. 
Wood,  John.  Quietest  under  the  sun:  foot- 
ways on  Severnside  hills  described  by 
John  Wood,  decorated  by  Donald  Foster. 
London,  Museum  Press.  [1946.]  224  pp. 
Illus.  DA630.W64 
Ramble;  in  West  Mercia  and  Mid-Wales. 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
Volume  XXII,  Number  4 


Contents 


Page 

LETTERS  BY  BULWER  LYTTON  (with  facsimile)  123 

By  Frederick  Gillen 

THE  STORY  OF  JOHN  EVERETT  137 

By  Juliet  Reeve 

ETCHINGS  BY  ANDERS  ZORN  139 
By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

GRAPHIC  ARTS  PROCESSES  141 
By  Muriel  C.  Figenbaum 

TEN  BOOKS :  SHORT  REVIEWS 

James  Burnham :  The  Struggle  for  the  IVorld  144 

Russell  Lord  :  The  Wallaces  of  Iowa  144 

Michael  Blankfort :  The  Big  Yankee  145 

Melvin  Hall :  Journey  to  the  End  of  an  Era  145 

John  A.  Lomax :  Adventures  of  a  Ballad  Hunter  145 

Philipp  Frank:  Einstein,  his  Life  and  Times  145 

Irwin  Edman :  Philosopher's  Quest  146 

Melville  J.  and  Frances  S.  Herskovits :  Trinidad  Village  146 

Mary  Colum  :  Life  and  the  Dream  147 

Joseph  Szigeti :  With  Strings  Attached  147 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

Buchanan  Sends  News  to  Russia  148 

Death  of  Miss  Connell  149 

Merlin's  Prophecies  149 

Lectures  and  Concerts  150 

Lowell  Lectures  150 

LIST  OF  RECENTLY-ACQUIRED  BOOKS  151 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17, 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library  15-17  Blagden  St.,  April,  1947,  Vol.  XXII,  No.  4 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees  >  for  free  distribution; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
APRIL,  1947 

Letters  by  Bulwer  Lytton 

By  FREDERICK  GILLEN 

A  graduate  of  the  University  of  Wisconsin,  Mr.  Gillen  was  a  Rhodes 
Scholar  and  received  his  doctorate  at  Harvard  (1942).  After  four  years' 
service  in  the  Navy,  he  is  now  Instructor  in  History  at  Princeton. 

NE  of  the  dominant  figures  in  nineteenth-century  English  letters  for 
nearly  fifty  years  was  Edward  Bulwer,  first  Lord  Lytton.  Today, 
when  he  is  remembered  at  all,  it  is  as  the  author  of  The  Last  Days  of  Pom- 
peii. Recently  Mr.  Edmund  Wilson  expressed  surprise  that  so  astute  a 
critic  as  George  Saintsbury  should  have  devoted  as  much  space  to  Lytton 
as  to  Dickens,  but  Saintsbury  wrote  fifty  years  ago  that  it  was  not  very 
certain  that  the  first  Lord  Lytton  was  keeping  any  great  place  even  with 
the  faithful  herd  of  uncritical  readers.  There  was  a  time,  however,  when 
Lytton  was  one  of  the  most  successful  and  widely-read  English  writers. 
His  first  novel,  Falkland,  appeared  anonymously  in  1824  and  was  fol- 
lowed by  Pelham,  which  was  published  with  his  name  and  which  estab- 
lished his  position  as  a  man  of  the  world  even  if  that  world  was  not  pri- 
marily one  of  letters.  Until  his  death  in  1873,  he  wrote  novels  of  fashion, 
crime,  and  history,  stories  of  the  occult,  poetry  and  plays,  and  even  a 
novel  of  the  future.  If  all  of  Lytton's  writings  were  collected,  few  if  any 
writers  of  the  nineteenth  century  could  equal  him  in  volume. 

In  spite  of  his  literary  popularity,  Lytton  was  on  the  whole  a  lonely 
and  somewhat  aloof  man.  Indeed,  in  his  own  lifetime  he  was  already  re- 
garded more  as  a  legend  than  as  a  human  being.  His  grandson  regards 
Disraeli  as  one  of  his  few  close  friends,  but  as  we  shall  see  there  is  reason 
to  doubt  the  warmth  of  this  attachment.  For  the  last  twenty  years  of  his 
life  Lytton  carried  on  a  correspondence  with  Charles  Kent,  a  poetaster, 
hack  writer,  and  unsuccessful  editor  of  the  London  Sun.  The  Boston  Pub- 
lic Library  has  a  collection  of  letters  written  by  Lytton  between  185 1 
and  1873.  Most  of  these  letters  are  short,  hastily  written,  and  often  non- 
committal, but  they  at  least  show  their  author  without  his  usual  post- 


123 


124 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Byronic  pose.  They  are  concerned  with  literary,  political,  and  health 
matters. 

William  Charles  Mark  Kent  was  a  man  who  did  his  best  to  cultivate 
the  great,  or  at  least  conspicuous,  literary  figures  of  his  day.  His  own 
pretensions  were  not  impressive.  He  was  born  in  London  in  1823  and 
was  educated  at  St.  Mary's  College,  Oscott.  From  his  earliest  childhood 
he  showed  an  aptitude  for  turning  out  quantities  of  prose  and  verse.  In 
1853  he  became  editor  of  the  Sun,  an  evening  paper  founded  in  1792  by 
the  younger  Pitt.  Kent  married  the  daughter  of  the  proprietor  and  then 
bought  him  out.  The  Sun  was  one  of  the  first  newspapers  to  make  a 
regular  practice  of  reviewing  books,  and  Kent  was  on  the  friendliest 
terms  with  many  of  the  authors  whose  works  were  criticized  in  its 
columns.  He  managed  to  form  a  large  literary  acquaintance  which  in- 
cluded Charles  Dickens,  Matthew  Arnold,  Robert  Browning,  George 
Meredith,  and  both  the  first  and  the  second  Lords  Lytton.  The  judgment 
of  Dr.  Johnson  on  the  poet  William  Walsh  may  perhaps  be  applied  to 
Kent:  "He  is  known  more  by  his  familiarity  with  greater  men,  than  by 
anything  done  or  written  by  himself." 

The  first  letter  in  the  collection  was  written  from  Lytton's  estate, 
"Knebworth,"  on  January  26,  185 1.  Sir  Edward  Bulwer-Lytton,  Bart., 
as  he  was  then  known,  was  a  successful  and  established  man  with  a 
respectable  career  already  behind  him.  Kent  ventured  to  send  him  a 
volume  of  his  poems.  He  received  the  following  reply: 

I  delayed  answering  yours  in  the  hope  to  find  leisure  to  read  your  Poems 
with  the  attention  I  wish  to  give  to  them.  But  I  have  been  so  engrossed 
with  business  and  taskwork  that  I  have  not  been  able  to  do  so.  And  I  think 
Poetry  requires  to  be  read  in  the  proper  frame  of  mind  for  it.  I  hope  how- 
ever in  a  few  days  to  obtain  a  pleasure  that  I  sincerely  long  for  and  will 
then  write  to  you  again.  Meanwhile  excuse  more  then  this  very  hurried 
line  to  say  how  much  I  thank  you  for  all  your  kindness  and  for  the  last  proof 
of  it .  . . 

Eighteen  years  before,  in  his  England  and  the  English,  Lytton  had 
made  some  very  cruel  remarks  about  the  sort  of  man  who  sends  his  books 
to  his  betters: 

Mr.  Nokes  is  the  prototype  of  the  small  gear ;  not  exactly  a  poet,  nor  a 
novelist,  nor  an  historian,  but  a  little  of  all  three ;  a  literary  man,  in  short  — 
homme  des  lettrcs.  In  France  he  would  enjoy  a  very  agreeable  station,  mix 
with  other  homines  des  lettres,  have  no  doubt  of  his  own  merit,  and  be  per- 
fectly persuaded  of  his  own  consequence.  Very  different  from  all  this  is 
Mr.  Nokes:  he  has  the  most  singular  distrust  of  himself;  he  liveth  in  per- 
petual suspicion  that  you  mean  to  affront  him  .  .  .  On  the  strength  of  a 
bare  introduction,  he  sendeth  you  in  manuscript  the  next  day  —  three 
plays,  two  novels,  and  thirty  poems,  which  he  bashfully  requesteth  you 
first  to  read;  secondly  to  correct;  and,  thirdly  to  interest  yourself  to  get 
published  .  .  .  You  may  have  served  him  essentially  today  —  tomorrow  you 


LETTERS  BY  BULWER  LYTTON 


125 


may  have  "wounded  his  feelings" ;  and  by  next  Saturday  be  sure  of  a  most 
virulent  anonymous  attack  upon  you.  But  Nokes  is  to  be  more  pitied  than 
blamed :  he  is  unfit  for  the  world  only  because  he  has  no  definite  position 
in  it. 

By  August  14,  1867,  however,  he  was  writing  to  Kent: 

If  you  see  Mr.  Bentley  again  please  say  that  I  find  it  will  not  do  to  re- 
publish England  and  the  English.  On  reperusing  it,  I  am  persuaded  that  it 
would  be  out  of  character  with  the  rest  and  would  not  bear  the  alterations 
and  abridgements  I  had  before  contemplated. 

Thus  England  and  the  English  has  not  been  republished,  although  it  is  an 
amusing  and  often  acute  description  of  the  period  of  the  1830's  when 
England  was  doing  her  best  to  get  back  to  "normalcy"  after  the  defeat 
of  the  man  she  insisted  upon  calling  "General  Bonaparte." 

At  any  rate  Kent  could  not  be  treated  like  Mr.  Nokes,  because  he 
published  book  reviews.  Many  of  Lytton's  letters  are  brief  letters  of 
thanks  for  some  of  the  reviews  he  got.  When  What  Will  He  Do  With  HI 
appeared  in  1857,  Lytton  expressed  his  appreciation  of  Kent's  comments, 
thanking  him  for  his  "warm  and  friendly  review."  In  i860  Lytton  pub- 
lished a  political  poem,  St.  Stephen's,  in  which  he  expressed  his  opinion 
of  the  orators  who  had  spoken  in  the  English  Parliament  from  the  time 
of  the  struggles  under  Charles  I  to  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  century. 
He  concluded  with  an  appreciation  of  Macaulay,  who  died  at  the  end 
of  1859: 

Not  thus  MACAULAY;  in  that  gorgeous  mind 
Colour  and  warmth  the  genial  light  combined ; 
Learning  but  glowed  into  his  large  discourse, 
To  heat  its  mass  and  vivify  its  force. 

The  poem  first  appeared  anonymously  in  Blackzvood's  Magazine  for  Janu- 
ary-March i860.  On  January  4  Lytton  wrote: 

.  .  .  Thanks,  many  and  warm  lor  what  you  have  been  kind  eno'  to  say 
about  St.  Stephen's.  We  shall  see  how  it  goes.  But  pray  keep  my  incognito 
as  well  as  you  can. 

Poor  Macaulay's  death  gave  me  a  very  severe  shock.  Indeed  I  feel  it 
still,  and  shall  long,  though  my  acquaintance  with  him  was  not  intimate. 
Your  article  was  excellent  in  every  way,  in  spirit  and  in  form.  Possibly 
just  at  the  moment  Ave  all  incline  to  eulogize  him  somewhat  lavishly  and 
to  suppress  his  defects.  —  I  say  defects  for  as  a  writer  he  had  very  few 
faults,  and  those  but  slight,  but  he  had  some  very  serious  deficiencies  of 
merit.  However  these  will  be  best  seen  later. 

There  is  another  letter  written  on  the  same  poem  after  it  was  reviewed 
four  months  later : 

Your  notice  in  the  Sun  reached  me  last  night,  from  Town.  Pray  accept 
my  warm  and  cordial  thanks  for  the  generous  and  hearty  praise  which  you 
have  given  to  St.  Stephen's  in  so  masterly  as  well  as  gracious  a  way  that 


126 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


it  must  be  of  essential  service  to  the  poem,  if  indeed  any  wing  can  be  given 
to  any  poetical  arrow  of  mine. 

Kent,  apparently,  did  not  always  lay  flattery  on  with  a  trowel.  In 
February  1865  Lytton  indulged  in  a  discussion  as  to  the  meaning  of 

sensuousness  in  poetry: 

I  am  very  much  gratified  and  touched  by  your  kind  and  friendly  notice 
of  me  and  "the  Poems"  —  nor  less  for  the  friendly  manner  in  which  you 
point  out  their  defects.  Some  day  or  other  I  will  ask  you  to  define  "sen- 
suousness" in  poetry,  for  I  own  I  find  it  difficult  to  say  what  is  and  what 
is  not  sensuous  in  poetry.  So  far  as  I  understand  it,  I  do  not  conceive  it 
to  be  the  popular  element  in  the  poetry  of  the  day.  And  I  do  not  remember 
one  remarkable  poet  in  any  age  in  whom  the  sensuous  attribute  was  con- 
spicuous. But  probably  I  do  not  rightly  understand  the  word. 

Fc  myself  it  is  quite  enough  to  have  the  verses  I  have  written  recog- 
nized as  poetry  of  some  kind  or.  other,  and  I  thank  you  very  much  for  such 
recognition. 

Lytton  was  a  contemporary  but  not  a  rival  of  both  Wordsworth 
and  Tennyson.  At  best  he  was  capable  of  slick  political  versifying  in  a 
manner  which  recalls  Alexander  Pope  in  his  weaker  passages.  He  could 
fill  a  whole  column  of  fine  print  in  the  London  Times  with  a  doggerel 
discussion  of  the  congress  of  the  powers,  meeting  to  attempt  a  solution 
of  the  Schleswig-Holstein  question  which  was  soon  to  lead  first  Denmark 
and  then  Austria  into  war  with  Bismarckian  Prussia.  On  November  18,  1863, 
he  wrote  from  Bath :  "Look  over  a  poem  called  The  Congress  in  today's 
Times.  It  is  mine.  There  is  a  misprint  stanza  2,  line  3  .  .  ." 

WE  also  find  Lytton  acting  as  literary  adviser  to  Kent.  Kent  thought 
of  writing  a  biography  of  Thomas  Chatterton,  the  eighteen-year- 
old  poet  who  killed  himself  in  1770  after  composing  a  remarkable  series 
of  poems  which  he  ascribed  to  an  imaginary  fifteenth-century  author 
named  Rowley.  Chatterton  was  an  appealing  figure  to  the  early  romantics, 
especially  in  France,  and  he  finally  attracted  Kent's  attention.  In  No- 
vember 1853  Lytton  offered  some  suggestions  and  the  promise  of  help 
from  the  library  at  Knebworth  : 

I  think  there  may  be  some  notes  in  my  Edition  of  Rowley  which  would 
be  useful  —  I  will  send  you  the  book  whenever  I  go  to  Kneb.,  but  Heaven 
knows  when  that  will  be.  No  one  now  in  the  House  can  get  it.  I  suspect 
you  will  find  the  Biography  of  Chatterton  difficult,  unless  you  have  col- 
lected some  new  facts.  Our  present  information  is  at  once  meagre  and 
familiar.  Still  talent  like  yours  may  create  new  interest  in  old  matter.  I 
should  much  like  to  look  over  your  work.  I  suppose  you  have  read  A.  De 
Vigny  (Stello)  —  worth  looking  at. 

There  is  a  way  of  treating  Chatterton  as  Goethe  treats  Tasso  —  by  a 
depiction  of  the  morbid  parts  of  the  Poetic  character.  But  this  might  only 
make  the  whole  thing  more  painful. 

Some  of  the  letters  are  more  explicit  concerning  Lytton's  own  works. 


LETTERS  BY  BULWER  LYTTON 


127 


In  September  1861,  he  gave  his  opinion  of  his  extraordinary  novel,  A 
Strange  Story:  "I  have  finished  my  Strange  Story  which  is  the  highest  and 
deepest  of  all  my  fictions  ...  I  think  it  a  great  vindication  of  Soul  as  dis- 
tinct from  mind  and  that  it  solves  many  riddles  in  the  Marvellous  thro' 
imagination." 

The  novel,  completely  forgotten  now,  is  a  fantastic  book  full  of 
mesmerism  and  spirits.  The  author  asserts  that  when  the  reader  lays  the 
book  down  he  will  detect  through  all  the  haze  of  Romance  certain  images. 
These  are:  first,  that  of  sensuous  soulless  Nature,  as  the  materialist  had 
conceived  it;  second,  that  of  Intellect,  obstinately  separating  all  its  in- 
quiries from  belief  in  the  spiritual  essence  and  destiny  of  man.  Finally, 
there  is  the  image  of  the  erring  but  pure-thoughted  visionary,  seeking 
over-much  on  this  earth  to  separate  soul  from  mind,  till  innocence  itself 
is  led  astray  by  a  phantom,  and  reason  is  lost  in  the  space  between  the 
earth  and  the  stars.  The  story  ends  with  a  quest  in  the  wilds  of  Australia 
for  the  vital  principle  which  will  give  physical  immortality,  a  quest  which 
is  successful  although  it  ends  in  disaster.  The  occult  world  was  a  study 
which  at  times  amounted  to  an  obsession  with  Lytton.  He  was  even  ac- 
quainted with  Daniel  Home,  the  extraordinary  American  medium,  whose 
feats  of  levitation  and  table-rapping  astounded  people  all  over  Europe 
and  who  inspired  Robert  Browning's  poem,  "Mr.  Sludge,  'The  Medium'  ". 
In  November  1851  he  wrote:  "I  am  truly  glad  to  see  that  Home  has,  as 
we  suspected,  been  unjustly  aspersed."  Six  years  later,  though,  he  appears 
a  little  more  skeptical.  He  refers  to  Home's  conversion  to  religious  or- 
thodoxy while  he  was  the  pet  of  the  Empress  Eugenie  and  the  court  of 
the  Second  Empire  in  France :  "Home's  conversion  is  of  old  date,  not 
the  other  day  but  2  years  ago  —  I  heard  all  the  particulars.  He  continues 
however  his  spirit  practices  as  much  as  ever  and  is  in  the  favouring  confi- 
dence of  the  Empress  of  France." 

Much  of  Lytton's  work  was  on  more  mundane  subjects.  In  August 
1867  he  wrote  about  a  collection  of  essays  on  very  different  historical 
and  literary  topics  from  the  Reign  of  Terror  in  the  French  Revolution 
and  the  attempt  of  Charles  I  to  intimidate  Parliament  to  the  youth  of  Pitt. 

I  find  that  there  are  critical  articles  of  mine  sufficient  to  make  a  volume 
of  320  pages  supposing  the  Type  not  to  be  too  close.  The  articles  are 

1.  The  Reign  of  Terror  and  its  Results 

2.  The  Arrest  of  the  Five  Members  (N.B.  The  Title  May  be  enlarged.) 

3.  Sir  Thomas  Browne 

4.  Grey 

5.  Goldsmith 

6.  Charles  Lamb  and  His  Companions 

7.  Walter  Scott 

8.  The  Youth  of  Pitt 

I  am  sorry  I  can't  have  Men  and  Books  as  a  general  title.  But  I  dare  say 
some  title  more  popular  than  that  of  Essays  may  be  found. 


128 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Lytton  even  had  leanings  toward  classical  scholarship.  He  published 
a  translation  of  the  odes  and  epodes  of  Horace,  and  wrote  at  the  end  of 

October  1869: 

I  thank  you  very  cordially  indeed  for  your  long  and  most  indulgent  and 
striking  review  of  the  Horace  which  gave  me  much  pleasure.  All  your  own 
preliminary  comment  connecting  Horace's  life  with  historical  events  is  ex- 
tremely striking,  full  of  interest,  originally  and  brilliantly  put. 

I  think  you  overestimated  Milman's  edition.  It  is  destitute  of  critical 
annotation,  and  the  text  is  not  always  correct  .  .  . 

One  of  Lytton's  last  works  was  the  Coming  Race.  It  was  published 
anonymously  because  the  author  felt  that  it  would  have  a  wider  circu- 
lation if  it  appeared  without  his  name.  The  secret  was  carefully  kept, 
and  the  book  was  a  success.  Five  editions  were  printed  between  the  spring 
of  1871  and  1872.  Kent  was  aware  that  Lytton  had  written  the  book,  but 
he  got  a  sharp  warning  to  remain  silent  in  a  letter  sent  in  the  middle 
of  May  1871 : 

Since  writing  I  have  looked  more  attentively  thro'  the  book  and  cannot 
conceive  how  you  could  ascribe  the  authorship  to  me  except  from  the  acci- 
dent of  seeing  on  my  table  some  proofs  of  a  work  that  was  submitted  to 
me  by  the  author.  I  can  only  repeat  how  much  annoyed  I  should  feel  if, 
either  publickly  or  privately,  any  friend  of  mine  were  to  ascribe  to  me  the 
authorship  of  so  singular  a  production. 

The  hero  of  the  Coming  Race  or  the  New  Utopia  is  an  American  of 
high  social  position  and  wealth  whose  father  once  ran  for  Congress  but 
was  signally  defeated  by  his  tailor.  Lytton,  of  course,  wants  to  show  the 
contrast  between  democratic  America,  where  a  gentleman  could  not  enter 
politics,  and  England,  where  one  could  sit  in  Parliament,  still  "the  best 
club  in  London."  This  elevated  American  falls  into  a  chasm  in  a  mine 
and  is  picked  up  by  some  members  of  a  curious  race  who  resemble  human 
beings  but  claim  descent  through  an  evolutionary  process  from  the  frog. 
The  most  striking  feature  of  their  civilization  is  their  possession  of  a 
force  called  "Vril,"  "which  Faraday  would  perhaps  call  'atmospheric  mag- 
netism.'" "  This  peculiar  force  enables  them  to  develop  a  highly  mechanized 
civilization  complete  with  robots  to  do  the  work  and  with  flying  machines 
and  portable  wings.  Above  all  "Vril"  enables  the  subterranean  race  to 
annihilate  its  enemies  with  the  greatest  of  ease.  However,  this  civiliza- 
tion discourages  real  creative  labor  and  has  such  a  despotic  and  uniform 
character  that  the  American  is  glad  to  return  to  his  democracy,  which 
the  underground  world  contemptuously  calls  "Koom-Posh"  or  "Hollow- 
Bosh"  in  the  English  slang  of  Lytton's  day.  The  novel  is  a  surprising 
anticipation  of  our  coming  atomic  age. 

Lytton  also  appears  as  the  friend  and  adviser  of  Kent.  The  latter's 
first  request  was  not  too  well  received.  At  the  beginning  of  November 
1851,  Lytton  wrote: 


A  Portrait  of  Edward  Bulzacr  Lytlon  in  1872 
Facsimile  Reduced 


129 


LETTERS  BY  BULWER  LYTTON 


I  do  not  quite  understand  from  your  letter  whether  you  ask  me  to  con- 
tribute to  your  friend's  proposed  biographical  dictionary.  If  so,  I  have  un- 
fortunately far  too  much  on  my  hands  to  allow  me  that  honour,  and  indeed, 
I  have  not  only  for  some  years  declined  contributing  to  any  work  of  a 
periodical  nature,  but  I  do  feel  so  much  constraint  in  speaking  critically  of 
my  own  contemporaries,  that  your  friend  will  hold  me  excused  from  par- 
ticipating in  his  somewhat  difficult  but  very  interesting  undertaking.  If 
you  mean  only  to  say  that  he  wishes  to  do  me  the  honour  to  give  me  a 
niche  in  his  Dictionary,  I  can  only  say  that  I  shall  be  much  flattered,  tho' 
there  is  nothing  in  my  Biography  that  can  afford  much  interest  to  the  reader. 

A  different  note  appears  in  later  letters,  at  some  times  one  of  counsel, 
at  others  of  exasperation.  Kent  felt  himself  after  a  few  years  to  be  on  a 
footing  sufficiently  familiar  for  him  to  ask  for  personal  advice.  He  was 
not  a  very  successful  man.  His  paper  did  not  make  much  money,  and  he 
thought  of  going  to  India  to  seek  his  fortune.  Lytton  gave  his  opinion 
in  the  middle  of  January  1858: 

I  take  it  that  your  grand  object  for  the  next  10  or  15  years  should  be  to 
lay  by,  to  secure  ease  for  age  and  something  for  children.  Only  in  that  view 
could  the  Indian  offer  be  looked  at.  With  the  high  rate  of  interest  of  money 
there,  if  you  could  lay  by  £300  a  year,  in  10  years  you  might  have  £5000. 

But  taking  all  pros  and  cons  into  consideration,  I  think  you  quite  justi- 
fied, even  prudentially,  in  declining  the  offer  and  taking  your  chance  in  the 
English  lottery. 

I  look  on  it  as  one  of  those  things  in  which  inclination  turns  the  scale. 
Had  you  strongly  liked  the  idea  of  seeing  India  —  Yes.  Not  like  it  —  No. 

Kent  stayed  in  England,  but  he  was  not  entirely  satisfied.  He  consulted 
with  Lytton  about  a  place  at  the  disposal  of  a  great  personage  at  the  end 
of  November  1859  and  was  told : 

I  think  your  interview  with  the  Duke  promises  as  well  as  could  be  ex- 
pected. It  is  much  that  the  place  is  not  given  away.  But  you  must  prepare 
for  a  rivalry  in  which  candidates  who  have  made  genealogy  etc  their  special 
study  will  appear,  and  this  renders  your  chance  uncertain.  I  have  no  doubt 
the  Duke's  choice  will  be  thoroughly  conscientious.  You  can  stir  no  far- 
ther. I  think  any  attempt  to  get  at  the  Duke  through  his  wife  would  be 
most  prejudicial.  The  influence  she  has  would  arise  from  her  never  allow- 
ing herself  to  let  others  seem  to  earwig  her,  so  that  her  judgement  may  be 
always  founded  on  the  data  the  Duke  offers  to  it. 

Ten  years  later  Kent  asked  for  Lytton's  intervention  with  Gladstone 
for  a  government  appointment.  Lytton's  reply  early  in  September  1869 
was  a  little  bit  chilling,  although  he  did  compliment  him  on  his  defense 
of  Byron  after  the  revelation  of  the  poet's  relationship .  with  his  half- 
sister,  Augusta  Leigh,  following  Lady  Byron's  indiscreet  confidences  to 
the  author  of  Uncle  Tom's  Cabin: 

It  would  be  against  all  the  proprieties  of  party  life  for  me  to  ask  a  Prime 
Minister  whose  government  I  oppose  for  a  piece  of  patronage,  much  more 
a  valuable  one,  for  which  candidates  will  be  many.  I  could  not  even  apply 


132 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


singly  to  a  minister  whom  I  did  not  support,  for  a  pension  to  a  literary  man. 
I  could  but  sign  a  general  memorial.  I  advise  you  however  to  apply  for 
this  yourself  and  ask  Dickens  to  back  you  with  Gladstone  or  any  Roman 
Catholic  member  of  Parliament  being  liberal  would  be  better  still. 

I  like  very  much  your  articles  in  defence  of  Byron  from  Mrs.  Stowe's 
libel. 

He  wrote  again  on  the  same  subject  on  September  19,  1869,  with  addi- 
tional advice  on  how  to  influence  Gladstone : 

It  did  not  strike  me  that  yours  required  an  answer,  as  you  said  that 
Dickens  who  had  applied  on  your  behalf,  considered  G's  letter  to  you  all 
that  could  be  expected.  The  only  additional  move  that  occurs  to  me,  is  if 
you  could  get  at  G's  private  secretary  (I  don't  even  know  his  name).  My 
experience  of  official  life  is  that  a  private  secretary  is  the  best  secondary 
interest  because  he  keeps  the  list  of  candidates  and  can  jog  his  chief's  mem- 
ory at  the  right  moment.  G.  intimated  a  doubt  whether  the  place  was  in 
his  gift.  I  should  think  you  might  easily  ascertain  this.  If  not  in  his  gift 
it  would  either  be  in  the  Lord  Chamberlain's  as  a  Court  office  or  the  Home 
Secretary's,  at  least  I  suppose  so. 

P.S.  Certainly,  if  you  can  back  up  your  application  by  any  iriend  of  G's 
politics,  do  so. 

Kent  was  disappointed,  but  the  really  warm  expression  of  sympathy 
came  in  a  letter  from  Charles  Dickens  on  October  7,  1869:  "You  cannot 
think  with  what  affection  and  sympathy  you  have  been  made  the  subject 
of  our  family  dinner  table  at  Gad's  Hill  these  last  three  days.  Nothing 
could  exceed  the  interest  of  my  daughters  and  my  sister-in-law,  or  the 
earnestness  of  their  feeling  about  it.  I  have  been  really  touched  by  its 
warm  and  genuine  Expression."  Dickens  concluded  with  the  admonition, 
"Cheer  up,  my  dear  fellow;  cheer  up,  for  God's  sake.  That  is,  for  the  sake 
of  all  that  is  good  in  you  and  around  you." 

The  Sun  was  uearing  its  end  when  Lytton  wrote  again  in  May  1870, 
mentioning  the  subject  of  a  government  appointment.  Lytton  also  made 
a  nasty  remark  about  Disraeli's  latest  novel: 

I  am  rejoiced  to  have  your  assurance  that  you  are  better.  It  is  certainly 
a  daring  Experiment  to  start  the  Sun  as  a  morning  paper.  You  ought  to 
have  some  one  to  do  the  heavy  work  especially  night  work. 

I  heartily  wish  I  had  interest  to  get  you  some  government  appointment 
but  alas  I  have  none. 

Lothair  seems  a  great  success  tho'  I  suspect  it  is  a  bad  novel  as  a  work 
of  art. 

Even  in  September  1872,  when  he  had  only  a  few  more  months  to  live, 
Lytton  was  bothered  by  his  friend's  importunities: 

I  have  received  yours  &  written  by  this  post  to  Lord  Penzance.  I  have 
taken  great  pains  with  the  letter  &  urged  every  point  that,  judging  from 
what  I  have  studiously  endeavoured  to  learn  of  his  character  from  his 
friends,  would  be  most  likely  to  tell. 


LETTERS  BY  BULWER  LYTTON 


133 


I  don't  like  to  be  sanguine  —  I  always  dread  being  so  —  &  advise  every 
friend  against  it  —  but  I  am  not  without  hope  that  my  letter  will  have 
weight  if  he  lias  a  vacant  registrarship  at  his  disposal.  I  am  amazed  that 
you  should  think  any  word  of  mine  had  I  not  been  prevented  by  official 
Etiquette  from  saying  it  —  or  that  any  word  from  my  deceased  brother 
Lord  Bailing  could  have  obtained  you  the  Chief  Justiceship  of  Bermuda  — 
amazed,  partly  because  Lord  Kimberley  distinctly  told  Dalling  that  he 
could  give  him  no  hope  of  it  whatever  —  amazed  principally  that  you  should 
not  see  how  little  the  united  influence  of  my  whole  family  can  do  with  Lord 
Kimberley  —  when  tho'  my  eldest  brother  is  the  most  powerful  Whig  pro- 
prietor in  Lord  K's  own  County  of  Norfolk  —  Dalling  a  Parliamentary  sup- 
porter of  the  Govt.  —  myself,  according  to  the  comity  of  office,  with  claims 
not  less  strong  because  not  asserted,  for  justice  to  a  near  relation  —  When, 
I  say,  in  spite  of  all  this  our  nephew  —  with  great  claims  of  his  own,  long 
service  —  acknowledged  abilities  in  it  —  is  sent  to  so  miserable  an  Exile 
as  Labuan. 

Kent,  however,  did  end  his  days  with  a  government  pension  for  his 
service  to  letters,  a  fact  which  the  London  Times  records  in  its  obituary 
notice  of  February  24,  1902.  The  unkind  Tunes  writer  also  remarks  that 
Kent  was  an  authority  on  Lytton  and  that  he  "produced  a  number  of 
books  of  which  even  the  names  are  scarcely  remembered." 

SOME  of  the  most  interesting  parts  of  this  correspondence  touch 
upon  political  affairs,  for  Lytton  hoped  to  play  the  part  of  a  nine- 
teenth-century writer-statesman  like  Disraeli  or  Lamartine.  He  entered 
public  life  at  a  very  disturbed  and  exciting  time.  In  1830  a  good  part  of 
the  continent  of  Europe  was  swept  by  revolution.  In  England  the  demand 
for  parliamentary  reform,  which  had  been  silenced  during  the  Wars  with 
France,  was  revived.  Lytton  became  active  in  politics  on  the  side  of  re- 
form and  was  elected  to  Parliament  as  the  representative  of  St.  Ives 
when  he  was  twenty-eight  years  of  age.  He  had  intended  to  stand  for  St. 
Albans,  but  his  mother  objected  to  his  being  a  reform  candidate  for  a 
borough  so  near  her  own  home,  and  he  needed  a  loan  from  her  to  pay 
his  campaign  expenses.  He  made  his  maiden  speech  in  the  House  of  Com- 
mons in  favor  of  the  Reform  Bill  of  1832.  He  sat  as  a  Liberal  and  even 
as  a  Radical  until  1841,  but  he  failed  to  obtain  a  seat  in  either  of  the  suc- 
ceeding Parliaments  which  distinguished  themselves  by  putting  the  Free 
Trade  system  into  operation."  However,  by  the  time  of  the  death  of  Wil- 
liam IV  in  1837  Lytton  had  done  enough  in  a  literary  and  political  way 
for  Lord  Melbourne  to  feel  justified  in  recommending  that  Queen  Vic- 
toria confer  the  title  of  baronet  upon  him  in  her  Coronation  Honors  List. 

After  a  ten-year  interval  Lytton  again  took  an  active  part  in  public 
affairs.  But  the  Liberal  of  the  1830's  was  now  the  Tory  of  the  1850's.  He 
had  always  been  a  Protectionist,  and  when  the  Liberals  went  over  to 
Free  Trade,  Lytton  had  no  further  use  for  them.  A  correspondence  with 
Disraeli  ensued,  and  the  most  brilliant  and  unusual  of  the  Conservative 


134 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


politicians  accepted  an  invitation  with  his  wife  to  Knebworth  in  the  early 
autumn  of  1850.  Both  Disraeli  and  Lytton  were  attracted  by  the  idea  of 
uniting  the  country  gentlemen  and  the  workingmen  of  the  great  indus- 
trial towns  in  an  attack  upon  the  middle-class  manufacturers  and  the  old 
Whig  aristocracy,  which  still  composed  the  backbone  of  the  Liberal 
Party.  In  185 1  Lytton  published  his  Letters  to  John  Bull,  Esq.,  advocating 
the  retention  of  duties  on  wheat.  In  the  conclusion  of  his  pamphlet  he 
describes  himself  as  "a  labourer  and  a  landlord."  With  Disraeli's  support 
he  appeared  as  the  Conservative  candidate  for  Hertfordshire.  On  June 
24,  1852,  he  wrote  a  most  unenthusiastic  letter  about  his  prospects: 

Many  and  hearty  thanks  to  you  for  your  kind  letter.  There  seems  all 
likelihood  of  winning  the  election.  But  you  anticipate,  I  fear,  much  more 
from  any  after  success  in  Parliament  than  is  at  all  probable.  I  never  felt  less 
ambition,  and  without  ambition  who  can  succeed  in  anything?  However, 
time  and  circumstance  are  mighty  agents.  I  shall  be  heartily  glad  when  the 
whole  is  over. 

A  month  later  when  he  was  safely  elected,  Lytton  replied  to  his 
friend's  congratulations : 

A  thousand  thanks  for  your  kind  letter. 

The  worse  part  is  now  to  begin  viz.:  the  House  of  Commons  itself!  If 
men  took  half  the  pains  to  secure  the  objects  of  their  Happiness  which  they 
do  to  obtain  those  of  their  discomfort,  philosophers  would  be  numerous  and 
politicians  few. 

I  hope  soon  to  be  quietly  settled  at  Knebworth  and  to  see  you  here. 

The  Conservative  government  which  Lytton  now  supported  was 
a  minority  government  largely  held  together  by  the  disagreements  of  its 
opponents.  It  was  headed  by  Lord  Derby  as  Prime  Minister  sitting  in 
the  House  of  Lords  and  had  the  brilliant  figure  of  Benjamin  Disraeli  as 
leader  of  the  House  of  Commons  and  Chancellor  of  the  Exchequer.  It 
was  very  much  distrusted  by  the  Free  Traders.  At  a  great  meeting  of  the 
Anti-Corn  Law  League  in  Manchester  on  November  2,  1852,  Richard 
Cobden,  the  greatest  opponent  of  agricultural  protection,  insisted  before 
an  apptoving  crowd  that  if  the  Derby  Ministry  were  to  remain  in  office 
it  must  begin  by  a  thoroughgoing  recantation  of  protectionism  and  an 
affirmation  of  Free  Trade  principles,  with  nothing  said  about  compensa- 
tion for  the  landlord  interest.  The  government  was  forced  to  pass  a  reso- 
lution, amended  by  Palmerston,  which  gave  a  most  grudging  recognition 
to  free-trade  principles.  Even  Lytton  voted  for  it.  He  played  only  the 
smallest  part  in  this  affair,  but  he  received  a  letter  from  his  constant  ad- 
mirer to  which  he  replied  on  November  26: 

1000  thanks  for  your  kindness.  But  I  had  no  prepared  speech,  and  the 
adoption  of  Palmerston's  amendment  really  settled  the  debate.  I  might  how- 
ever have  spoken  on  the  main  question,  but  I  am  suffering  so  severely  from 
the  return  of  an  old  complaint,  that  I  am  not  up  to  it. 


LETTERS  BY  BULWER  LYTTON 


135 


1  own  I  should  like  to  study  the  new  House  well  before  I  hazard  "a 
speech." 

Lytton's  first  real  speech  in  his  new  party  was  delivered  on  Decem- 
ber 1,  1852,  in  support  of  Disraeli's  financial  statement.  He  defended  a 
reduction  of  the  excise  tax  on  malt  as  a  step  in  the  right  direction,  a  direct 
benefit  to  the  consumer  and  an  indirect  one  to  the  farmer.  He  defended 
an  increase  in  the  house  tax,  quoting  Mill  to  the  effect  that  it  is  the  fairest 
of  all  possible  taxes  since  it  falls  upon  a  man  in  proportion  to  his  income. 
He  attacked  the  proposal  that  a  legacy  tax  on  real  property  should  be 
substituted  for  a  house  tax.  Lytton  did  not  live  to  see  the  day  when  death 
duties  would  be  used  as  a  matter  of  policy  by  the  British  Government  to 
break  up  large  holdings.  It  is  curious  to  note  that  while  his  arguments 
are  those  of  a  man  who  would  at  least  like  to  play  the  part  of  a  landed 
aristocrat,  he  is  careful  to  talk  as  if  he  were  defending  the  interests  of 
the  smaller  farmers.  Kent,  of  course,  immediately  congratulated  him. 

Many  thanks  for  your  friendly  "congratulations."  I  am  astonished  at 
what  the  House  is  kind  eno'  to  consider  a  decided  success,  for  I  was  not  up 
to  my  usual  mark  such  as  it  is  —  I  left  out  what  I  had  meant  to  say  as 
strongest  in  argument,  said  some  things  I  never  meant  to  say  —  was  dis- 
gusted with  my  own  manner  and  delivery  etc.  etc.  But  I  hope,  as  I  gain 
self  confidence  and  knowledge  of  the  House  that  I  shall  improve.  Mean- 
while I  have  a  right  to  be  satisfied  with  the  indulgence  received,  and  no 
congratulations  please  me  more  than  yours.  I  see  that  I  am  not  well  reported 
even  in  the  Times.  Wonderful  your  getting  out  the  Sun  so  soon. 

However,  Disraeli's  financial  proposals  required  stronger  backing 
than  Lytton's  speeches.  They  were  attacked  with  especial  vigor  by  Glad- 
stone. They  were  rejected,  and,  in  accordance  with  British  Parliamentar)' 
practice,  the  Derby  administration  resigned  to  be  replaced  by  a  new 
government  under  Lord  Aberdeen. 

Lytton  took  little  part  in  parliamentary  affairs  until  England  and 
France  became  embroiled  with  Russia  in  the  Crimean  War.  He  made  a 
number  of  speeches  which  increased  his  reputation  and  made  it  likely 
that  he  would  hold  office  in  the  next  Conservative  administration.  He 
spoke  in  the  House  of  Commons  on  May  15,  1854,  against  a  proposal  to 
increase  the  tax  on  malt  in  order  to  raise  money  for  the  Crimean  War. 
He  maintained  that  the  population  of  the  great  mercantile  and  manu- 
facturing towns  was  spared  the  most,  since  soldiers  were  drawn  from  the 
rural  population,  the  class  to  whom  the  Chancellor  of  the  Exchequer 
went  hand  in  hand  with  the  recruiting  sergeant,  the  one  asking  for 
money,  the  other  for  life.  He  ended  with  anti-Russian  sentiments  which 
could  very  well  be  uttered  by  a  modem  Tory.  He  spoke  of  a  war  being 
waged  on  behalf  of  posterity  to  check  the  ambition  of  Russia  and  to  pre- 
serve Europe  from  the  outlet  of  barbarian  tribes  which  required  only 


136 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


the  haven  of  the  Bosphorus  to  menace  the  liberty  and  civilization  of  races 
as  yet  unborn.  After  this  speech  Lytton  wrote  to  Kent : 

I  got  thro'  what  I  had  to  say  just  tolerably,  miles  away  from  the  exact 
right  mark,  but  the  subject  was  threadbare  and  the  House  so  reluctant  to 
hear  it  fairly  discussed  that  Dis.  told  me  afterward  he  had  scarcely  thought 
it  possible  to  master  so  unwilling  a  House. 

When  Derby  and  his  party  finally  returned  to  power  in  1858,  Lytton 
said  that  he  could  not  face  his  county  election.  Derby  wrote  to  Disraeli 
that  he  really  wanted  to  be  made  a  peer,  "which  I  will  not  do  for  him." 
Disraeli  replied,  "I  think  Lytton  too  impudent."  Lytton  was  left  out  of 
the  Cabinet  until  a  shake-up  in  May.  He  was  agreeable  to  seeking  re- 
election to  the  Commons,  the  only  place  where  Lord  Derby  felt  he  could 
be  of  use,  and  assumed  responsibility  for  the  Colonial  Office.  One  of  his 
colleagues  remarked  that  it  was  "something  to  have  the  name  of  a  Euro- 
pean celebrity  added  to  the  Cabinet."  Lytton  assured  Disraeli,  "On  ac- 
cepting office  I  have  no  sensation  so  pleasurable  as  that  of  sharing  in  any 
difficulties  that  may  beset  you,  and  in  the  easier  opportunities,  so  af- 
forded, of  removing  any  misconceptions  which  may  yet  leave  a  shadow 
on  that  affectionate  friendship  which  I  trust  to  carry  with  me  to  the 
grave." 

Lytton  wrote  at  the  beginning  of  May  1858:  "I  have  taken  the 
Colonies.  Am  to  be  opposed  I  hear  by  a  young  Mr.  Grosvenor  —  Lord 
Ebury's  son  .  .  .  Say  any  civil  word  you  can  have  of  me  in  the  Sun."  And 
a  month  later : 

I  went  down  to  Hitchin  to  canvass  today,  returned  at  6  and  heard  at  my 
committee  room  that  my  opponent  had  withdrawn. 

From  all  I  can  hear  there  will  be  now  no  opposition.  Indeed  I  believe  my 
success  would  have  been  triumphant.  A  thousand  grateful  thanks  to  you 
all  the  same  .  .  . 

(To  be  concluded.) 


The  Story  of  John  Everett  the  Highwayman 


1TH  the  late  William  Peterfield  Trent's  collection  of  works  by 
Daniel  Defoe,  now  in  the  Boston  Public  Library,  are  Trent's  pen- 
cilled notes  on  books  which  might  have  been  written  by  Defoe,  but  of 
which  he  could  not  secure  a  copy.  Among  these  notes  is  a  letter  from 
G.  A.  Aitken,  sent  from  London  on  January  12,  19 12,  which  brings  up  a 
problem  still  unsolved.  He  wrote  as  follows :  "Do  you  know  a  pamphlet 
about  John  Everett,  1730,  and  what  do  you  think  of  the  authorship? 
There  are  some  points  in  it  which  suggest  Defoe  to  me:  if  so,  it  is  one 
of  his  last  pieces."  After  a  discussion  of  other  Defoe  items  and  of  the 
Cambridge  History  of  English  Literature  (on  which  he  was  working),  Aitken 
added:  "If  you  have  not  got  the  Everett  pamphlet,  I  can  send  it  for  you 
to  see,  if  you  like." 

Apparently  he  did  so,  for  Trent  examined  the  pamphlet,  first  entering 
on  his  notes  the  title : 

A  Genuine  Narrative  of  the  Memorable  Life  and  Actions  of  John  Everett, 
Who  formerly  kept  the  Cock  Ale-House  in  the  Old-Bailey ;  and  lately  the 
Tap  in  the  Eleet-Prison,  and  was  Executed  at  Tyburn,  on  Friday  the  20th 
Day  of  February  1729-30  .  .  .  Written  by  Himself,  When  under  Condemna- 
tion, and  in  his  Cell  in  Newgate  and  Published  at  his  own  Request.  London  : 
Printed  and  Sold  by  John  Applebee,  in  Black-Fryers  .  .  .  MDCCXXX 

Then  he  proceeded  to  weigh  the  evidence.  By  page  seven  he  had  de- 
cided, "Certainly  Ev.  never  wrote  it."  But  Applebee,  the  publisher,  and 
Defoe  had  quarreled  before  1730;  the  book  might  then  be  the  work  of  a 
younger  man,  writing  in  imitation  of  Defoe.  Certain  phrases,  however, 
were  very  much  like  Defoe ;  the  "little  maxims  and  moralizing  touches" 
were  Defoe-like;  the  style  was  "hardly  sophisticated  enough  for  a  young- 
ster." Through  five  pages  of  penciled  notes  Trent  indicated  his  pros  and 
cons,  and  at  the  end  wrote,  "I  am  almost  sure  of  D  on  2d  reading." 

But  where  is  the  pamphlet  today?  It  is  not  in  Trent's  library  in 
Boston.  Nor  is  it  with  G.  A.  Aitken's  collection  in  the  Rare  Book  Room 
in  the  University  of  Texas  Library  at  Austin. 

"I  have  met  with  one  copy  only  of  this  work,  that  in  the  British 
Museum."  So  wrote  Reginald  Hine,  English  Quaker,  speaking  of  the 
Everett  pamphlet,  in  his  Hitchin  Worthies  (London  1932).  One  of  Hine's 
not-so-worthy  subjects  is  "John  Everett  the  Highwayman,  1690-1730," 
for  the  details  of  whose  life  Hine  drew  on  this  same  pamphlet  which 
Aitken  and  Trent  had  .discussed  in  1912.  Hine  assumed,  however,  that 
the  pamphlet  was  really  written  by  Everett  himself.  He  supplemented 
the  information  in  it  with  facts  from  Hitchin  records :  date  of  baptism ; 
status  of  the  family,  "who  with  this  one  melancholy  exception,  were  men 
of  worldly  substance  and  good  fame;"  school  attended:  and  so  on.  Ac- 


138 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


cording  to  Hine,  Everett  had  a  partner  "whom  for  some  curious  reason 
he  does  not  mention  in  his  Genuine  Narrative."  (If,  as  Aitken  and  Trent 
agree,  the  pamphlet  was  written  by  Defoe,  the  reason  is  not  so  curious.) 
Everett's  dealings  with  this  partner  make  the  sort  of  story  that  Defoe 
would  have  delighted  to  tell  had  he  ever  heard  it.  In  1725  Everett  filed  a 
bill  in  equity  against  Joseph  Williams  for  a  partnership  account,  "and 
so  instituted  the  only  highwayman's  case  known  to  the  English  Courts." 
Furthermore,  he  actually  received  a  verdict  for  £20,  until  the  nature  of 
the  "partnership"  came  out;  then  the  solicitors  engaged  on  either  side 
were  fined  £50  for  contempt  of  Court,  and  Everett's  counsel  was  made 
responsible  for  the  defendant's  costs.  An  English  Justice  doubted  the 
existence  of  the  "highwayman's  case,"  but  Hine  verified  the  particulars 
from  the  original  papers  in  the  Record  Office. 

The  last  two  paragraphs  of  "Hine's  account  are  worth  quoting.  One 
wonders,  as  one  reads,  how  he  could  have  thought  that  Everett  wrote 
the  book  himself;  still,  one  may  imagine  the  merry  highwayman  delight- 
ing in  reporting  his  own  death  before  it  took  place.  Or  perhaps  the  final 
details  purport  to  have  been  added  by  another  hand: 

And  last  of  all  came  'the  worthy  and  reverend  divine,  Mr.  Nicholson, 
whose  discourse,  so  edifying  and  well  adapted  to  our  unhappy  Circum- 
stances, drew  tears  from  my  fellow  supporters  in  the  cells.'  As  for  himself 
he  shed  no  tears.  He  went  out  to  die  that  morning  with  the  nonchalance 
of  one  who  has  long  made  death  his  familiar.  He  was  concerned  not  about 
his  soul  but  about  his  personal  appearance ;  how  to  die  like  the  gentleman 
he  was.  Had  not  his  well-to-do  people  for  generation  after  generation  been 
'haberdashers-of-hats'?  They  had  cast  him  off,  but  he  would  show  them 
that  he  could  make  his  last  bow  in  a  fashion  worthy  of  the  family.  This 
coffin  in  the  executioner's  cart,  this  'flannel  dress  for  the  corpse,'  this  'hempen 
cravat'  tied  in  advance  about  his  neck,  spoilt  the  effect  somewhat,  but  the 
rest  of  it,  his  white  gloves,  his  beaver  hat,  his  long-tail  wig,  his  silver  snuff- 
box, his  gold  watch,  and  his  nosegay,  were  all  u  la  mode. 

And  so,  sprucely  attired,  he  went  for  his  last  ride  along  Holborn, 
took  his  last  stirrup  cup  at  St.  Giles,  and  with  an  impenitent,  unchangeable 
countenance  'leapt  into  Eternity.' 

Did  Defoe  really  write  this  story  of  John  Everett,  Highwayman? 
And  has  Reginald  Hine,  in  searching  the  records  of  Hitchin  worthies,  un- 
wittingly proved  that  another  of  Daniel  Defoe's  "fictitious"  characters 
is  a  person  who  really  lived,  just  as  C.  N.  Firth  uncovered  the  characters 
in  The  True  Relation  of  the  Apparition  of  Mrs.  Veal,  while  perusing  some 
family  history  in  Kent?  It  looks  as  if  this  may  be  so,  for  Aitken's  and 
Trent's  joint  testimony  is  not  to  be  ignored  when  dealing  with  Defoe. 
Finally,  and  again,  where  is  the  pamphlet  which  Aitken  offered  to  lend 
Trent  back  in  January  1912? 

JULIET  REEVE 


Exhibitions  in  the  Print  Department 


Etchings  by  Anders  Zorn 

ANDERS  ZORN  occupies  a  unique  position  in  contemporary  print-making 
not  only  by  reason  of  his  great  art,  but  also  because  he  was  an  innovator 
in  double-lighting  effect,  and  in  a  technique  which  was  a  departure  in  the  use 
of  masses  rather  than  line  alone.  A  few  of  Zorn's  contemporaries,  James 
McNeill  Whistler  and  Jean-Louis  Forain,  showed  the  same  measure  of  origin- 
ality in  the  use  of  the  copper  plate  and  needle,  and  equal  understanding  of  the 
medium's  possibilities.  Whistler  was  a  sensitive  artist  who  with  a  light  touch 
produced  masterpieces  with  few  open  lines  through  the  power  of  suggestion, 
and  Forain  drew  plates  with  great  freedom  in  whipped  cross-lines  which  in 
their  seeming  carelessness  had  surprising  strength,  volume,  and  construction. 
Both  were  in  a  sense  Zorn's  masters,  but  he  stands  out  prominently  as  an  in- 
dividual in  his  handling. 

For  what  we  have  seen  and  studied  of  Zorn's  early  plates,  we  know  that 
the  lessons  contained  in  Rembrandt's  work  were  the  basis  of  his  extraordinary 
and  rapid  development.  However,  his  dominating  mind  and  talent  selected  and 
absorbed  what  they  required  for  growth.  He  followed  two  rules  throughout 
his  career :  first,  to  know  what  was  possible  within  the  limitations  of  his  medium 
and  to  probe  the  secret  of  his  subject,  to  know  his  people  and  background  and 
combine  their  environment  and  experiences  with  his  own;  second,  to  base  his 
own  work,  informed  by  his  fertile  imagination,  on  a  close  study  of  nature,  with 
thorough  knowledge  and  skilful  manipulation  of  his  tools  as  the  means  of  ful- 
filling his  conceptions. 

Zorn's  prints  can  be  classified  as  those  of  a  painter-etcher,  for,  with  the 
exception  of  his  earliest  plates,  they  suggest  color  in  full  value.  Such  plates 
as  "Zorn  and  His  Model,"  "The  Waltz,"  "Ida,"  and  "Vicke,"  among  others, 
are  excellent  examples  to  illustrate  this  point.  In  these  subjects  he  arrives  at 
form  without  the  use  of  line  in  the  pure  sense  —  rather  through  planes,  which 
with  their  carefully  studied  lost  and  found  edges  suggest  contour,  close  obser- 
vation of  the  movement  of  thought,  and  the  intricacies  of  light  and  shadow 
on  the  texture  of  flesh  and  materials.  In  many  plates  the  whole  composition 
is  pulled  together  with  long  diagonal  lines  as  a  painter  drags  a  tone  over  a  paint- 
ing to  give  a  richness  unobtainable  through  open  line  alone. 

For  these  reasons  an  exhibition  by  Zorn  is  an  experience,  for  each  print 
contributes  its  share  to  the  success  of  his  achievement.  Few  artists  have  issued 
so  many  prints  that  occupy  a  plane  of  such  high  standard,  and  even  these 
are  only  slightly  superior  to  his  work  as  a  whole,  which  numbers  nearly  three 
hundred  plates.  Those  chosen  for  this  exhibition  show  a  surprising  liveliness 
and  interest,  with  each  subject  well  adapted  to  illustrate  his  original  use  of 
parallel  lines.  When  studied,  they  are  seen  to  be  ingeniously  constructed  in 
such  a  way  as  to  create  in  our  minds  a  composition  of  greater  size  and  impor- 
tance than  the  actual  dimensions  of  the  plate. 

Many  of  Zorn's  etchings  made  from  his  paintings  became  famous  in  his 
own  day;  in  fact,  during  the  inflationary  period  of  the  late  1920's  his  work  was 

139 


140 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


more  in  demand  than  that  of  an}'  other  contemporary  etcher.  In  repeating  these 
same  subjects  on  copper  he  not  only  cast  off  the  trammels  which  are  usually 
associated  with  the  repetition  of  the  same  composition.  As  many  experts  have 
stated,  the  print  became  more  famous  than  the  painting,  and  Zorn  better 
known  as  an  etcher  than  a  painter.  Such  plates  as  "Madonna,"  "Dance  at 
Gopsmor,"  "The  Omnibus,"  "The  Musical  Family,"  "The  Bridesmaid,"  and 
"The  New  Ballad,"  all  humble  scenes  of  everyday  life,  present  truths  that  are 
both  interesting  and  lasting.  "Madonna,"  in  particular,  is  considered  one  of 
his  finest  works  and  is  a  masterpiece  of  tender  expression,  which  stirs  great 
depth  of  feeling. 

Zorn  reached  great  heights  in  several  of  his  portraits,  and  a  few  of  the 
following  have  been  mentioned  in  the  same  category  as  those  of  the  great 
Dutch  master:  "Ernest  Renan"  "Madame  Simon,"  "Mona,"  "Zorn  and  His 
Wife,"  "Skerri  Kulla,"  and  several  smaller  plates:  "Beadle,"  "Old  Soldier,"  and 
"Djos  Mats."  "Ernest  Renan"  is  without  a  doubt  the  best  of  Zorn's  portraits. 
The  celebrated  savant  consented  to  give  the  artist  but  one  sitting,  and  also 
demanded  that  the  plate  be  done  under  existing  conditions  at  his  desk  and  with- 
out too  much  fatigue  to  himself.  It  is  interesting  to  note  how  the  then  young 
Zorn  produced  this  most  spontaneous  of  all  his  portraits  under  pressure,  and 
with  what  naturalness  the  learned  Renan  sits  with  ease,  dignity,  and  authority 
before  his  cluttered  desk.  "Madame  Simon"  deserves  a  place  beside  this  great 
portrait  also.  The  composition,  which  reminds  us  somewhat  of  Rembrandt's 
"Mother,"  arrests  attention  by  the  natural  pose  and  the  fine  distribution  of 
vibrant  light  and  transparent  shadows,  expressing  to  a  remarkable  degree 
the  model's  impatience  and  agitation  over  the  whole  procedure.  In  all  the 
plates  there  is  an  extraordinary  swift  stroke  of  the  needle,  full  of  knowledge 
and  sure  in  effect.  The  brilliant  handling  of  color  value,  the  play  of  light  in 
the  modelling  of  flesh,  the  characterization  of  the  heads,  and  the  simple  ex- 
pression that  excludes  high  finish  and  painstaking  labor  are  qualities  that 
have  not  failed  to  impress  connoisseurs  of  two  continents.  It  is  interesting 
to  compare  Zorn's  early  plate,  "Grandmother,"  a  very  rare  print  in  the  first 
state  and  not  catalogued,  with  the  already  mentioned  "Mona."  It  is  not 
difficult  to  trace  his  progress;  as  he  developed  he  threw  aside  early  timidities 
and  limitations,  becoming  absorbed  more  and  more  in  the  investigation  and 
working  out  of  his  own  ideas  and  impulses,  which  finally  made  him  the  great 
interpreter  of  his  native  Sweden,  her  types  and  personalities.  In  "Mona," 
typical  of  his  best  etchings,  he  overstepped  recognized  theories  and  changed 
the  opinions  of  defenders  of  conventional  taste,  creating  in  them  a  desire  for 
his  work  at  a  time  when  there  were  a  number  of  great  printmakers  in  the 
field.  The  high  prices  paid  for  his  plates  are  now  print  history. 

It  is  obvious  that  in  his  later  plates  Zorn  made  fewer  and  fewer  alter- 
ations ;  his  accomplishment  does  not  lie  in  the  etching  but  in  the  knowledge 
and  experience  which  produced  it.  Once  he  had  found  his  path  it  was  simple 
for  him  to  follow  it,  and  in  only  a  few  of  the  great  etchers'  work  do  we  find 
so  much  solid  study,  individuality,  and  talent,  which  are  the  foundations  of 
all  that  is  important  and  lasting  in  art. 

ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 


Graphic  Arts  Processes 


/*"\  F  the  three  processes  discussed  here,  two,  aquatint  and  stipple  engrav- 
ing,  are  related  to  etching;  the  third,  mezzotint,  is  of  the  dry  point 
family.  However,  both  aquatint  and  mezzotint,  in  contrast  to  etching  and 
dry  point,  are  more  adaptable  to  design  in  tones  and  masses  than  in  line.  All 
these  media  reached  their  height  in  the  eighteenth  century  as  a  means  of 
reproduction,  and  were  especially  suited  to  printing  in  color.  Today,  with  the 
exception  of  stipple  engraving,  they  have  become  the  tools  of  the  creative 
artist. 

Aquatint 

Resin  is  the  material  most  commonly  used  for  making  the  porous  ground 
required  for  aquatint.  There  are  two  methods  of  getting  the  resin  on  the 
plate :  dusting  it  on  dry,  or  floating  it  on  with  a  solvent.  The  dust  ground  is 
the  most  common  and  may  be  laid  in  several  ways.  The  powdered  resin  may 
be  put  into  a  coarse  cloth  and  shaken  over  the  plate,  thus  distributing  the 
particles  on  the  copper.  A  more  even  ground  may  be  had  by  using  a  dust 
box,  in  which  powdered  resin  is  placed  and  blown  into  a  cloud  by  a  bellows ; 
the  plate  collects  the  dust  which  descends  in  a  coating  on  its  surface.  Then 
the  plate  must  be  heated  so  that  the  resin  will  adhere  to  the  copper.  Great 
delicacy  may  be  obtained  by  the  spirit  ground,  when  the  resin  is  dissolved 
in  pure  alcohol  and  the  solution  spread  over  the  surface  of  the  plate.  As  the 
liquid  evaporates  the  resin  is  left  in  an  even  grain  on  the  surface.  The  spirit 
ground  was  used  with  much  success  by  the  aquatinters  of  the  eighteenth 
and  nineteenth  centuries,  reproducing  almost  perfectly  the  effect  of  the  original 
wash  drawings.  If  the  whole  surface  were  bitten  and  inked,  it  would  print 
a  flat,  textured  tone,  the  value  depending  on  the  length  of  time  it  had  re- 
mained in  the  acid  and  on  the  coarseness  of  the  grain.  It  is  necessary,  then, 
to  stop  out  any  areas  that  are  to  remain  unetched  (that  is,  white  when 
printed).  As  soon  as  the  lightest  tones  are  etched  they  are  covered  with 
stopping-out  varnish,  and  the  plate  put  back  in  the  acid  bath  for  further  bit- 
ing. Gradations  of  tone  and  modeling  may  also  be  obtained  by  painting  the 
acid  on  the  plate  with  a  brush  or  feather  and  thus  controlling  the  amount  of 
acid  on  the  various  areas.  Pure  aquatint  involves  no  line  work,  but  most  artists 
etch  a  simple  line  drawing  into  the  plate  as  a  guide  or  as  an  integral  part  of 
the  design.  Often  dry  point  is  used  to  support  aquatint,  a  combination  used 
very  successfully  by  Mary  Cassatt. 

Overbitten  areas  may  be  reduced  in  value  with  the  burnisher,  but  the 
correction  of  underbiting  presents  more  of  a  problem.  If  the  kind  of  texture 
makes  no  difference,  the  area  may  be  merely  re-aquatinted.  If  a  certain  tex- 
ture is  desired,  the  underbitten  section  must  be  entirely  removed  and  a  new- 
ground  applied.  When  the  first  method  is  used,  the  second  ground  must  be 
coarser  or  finer  than  the  original,  so  that  the  earlier  texture  will  not  be  en- 
tirely neutralized.  Other  methods  of  correction  are  carefully  described  by 
B.  F.  Morrow  in  his  book  The  Art  of  Aquatint. 

141 


142 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Mezzotint 

Mezzotint  is  the  tonal  medium  corresponding-  to  dry  point,  as  aquatint 
corresponds  to  etching.  It  has  sometimes  been  called  negative  or  reversed,  as 
the  artist,  instead  of  building  up  darks,  works  from  dark  to  light.  The  copper 
plate  is  first  roughened  with  a  rocker,  thus  laying  a  ground  of  fine  dry  point 
burr.  The  rocker  has  a  curved  cutting  edge  of  from  fifty  to  two  hundred 
teeth  to  the  inch.  It  is  rocked  back  and  forth  over  the  plate,  cutting  narrow 
strips  of  dots  into  the  plate.  The  surface  is  covered  first  in  one  direction  and 
then  in  others  until  the  desired  even  texture  has  been  obtained.  If  the  plate 
were  printed  after  the  ground  had  been  laid,  it  would  be  a  solid  velvety  black. 
The  lights  are  then  taken  out  by  a  scraper,  flatter  than  that  used  by  etchers ; 
hurnishers  are  used  to  supplement  the  scraper  and  to  polish  the  plate  for  the 
lightest  areas.  The  values  of  the  composition  are  obtained  wholly  by  this 
scraping  process  and  no  line  work  is  involved.  Another  tool  legitimately  used 
by  mezzotinters  is  the  roulette,  a  small  toothed  wheel,  running  in  a  socket 
attached  to  a  handle.  It  is  used  to  regain  burr,  and  sometimes,  in  conjunction 
with  dry  point  or  etching,  to  build  up  certain  tonal  effects.  A  mezzotint  is 
inked  and  printed  in  the  same  manner  as  a  dry  point,  and  trial  proofs  and 
states  may  be  taken  whenever  needed.  It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that 
the  rich  but  delicate  burr  which  is  the  true  quality  of  a  mezzotint  will  wear 
down  as  quickly  as  that  of  a  dry  point,  and  that  few  rich  impressions  can  be 
taken,  unless  the  plate  is  steel  faced. 

Stipple  Engraving 

Engraving  in  stipple  is  again  a  tonal  process,  although  the  result  is  ob- 
tained by  dots  rather  than  by  a  grain  or  burr.  Stipple  is  not  an  art  practised 
today;  it  exists  for  the  most  part  in  the  magnificent  engravings  of  the  eigh- 
teenth century  after  the  great  English  painters.  In  the  early  days,  before 
the  use  of  steel  plates,  copper  was  used  exclusively.  The  plate  was  covered 
with  an  etching  ground  in  the  same  manner  as  today,  and  the  design  traced 
on  the  surface.  The  engraver  put  in  all  the  outlines  with  a  series  of  dots  or 
specks,  using  an  etching  needle.  He  then  worked  on  the  darker  portions  and 
shadows,  filling  them  in  with  dots  formed  in  groups.  The  size  of  the  dots  varies 
depending  on  the  texture ;  for  example,  strong  shadows  would  be  put  in  with 
a  coarse  point  and  the  dots  would  be  relatively  far  apart,  while  lighter  and 
more  delicate  parts,  such  as  flesh  tints,  would  be  composed  of  finer  and  closer 
dots.  In  later  times  the  graver  replaced  the  etching  needle,  as  the  latter  cast 
up  a  slight  burr  which  had  to  be  cut  off  with  the  scraper.  When  stipple  plates 
were  at  their  peak  many  engravers  employed  roulettes  to  hasten  production, 
as  well  as  many  apprentices  to  work  on  the  more  tedious  sections  of  the 
plate.  In  the  eighteenth  century,  instead  of  putting  the  plate  in  an  acid  bath, 
a  wall  of  wax  was  built  up  around  the  plate,  making  a  tray  with  the  plate 
itself  as  the  bottom,  and  the  nitric  acid  and  water  solution  was  poured  in. 
When  all  biting  was  completed  the  wax  border  and  the  ground  were  removed, 
and  the  plate  was  ready  for  further  work.  The  more  delicate  portions  were 
added  with  the  graver,  and  the  plate  as  a  whole  was  worked  over  to  produce 


GRAPHIC  ARTS  PROCESSES 


143 


a  delicate  and  even  finish.  When  the  stippling  was  satisfactory,  the  engraver 
added  a  few  lines  to  sharpen  up  areas  such  as  the  shadows  in  the  hair  and  the 
pupils  of  the  eyes.  The  plate  was  then  sent  to  the  printer  for  proving  and  the 
engraver  could  make  any  corrections  needed.  The  earliest  and  finest  type  of 
stipple  engraving  was  the  grained  or  peppered  style,  practiced  by  the  great 
engravers,  such  as  Bartolozzi.  In  later  years  the  method  of  grouping  clusters 
of  dots  came  into  being,  but  it  is  hard  and  cold  in  comparison  to  the  softness 
of  the  grained  style. 

In  addition  to  being  tonal  rather  than  linear  conceptions,  these  three 
media  are  linked  together  by  their  adaptation  to  color  printing.  The  majority 
of  stipple  engravings  were  made  for  color  printing,  using  just  one  plate  for 
all  the  colors.  The  printer  worked  with  a  pattern  before  him  sometimes 
with  the  original  painting  and  the  artist  himself  to  aid  him.  The  various 
inks  were  then  carefully  painted  into  the  copperplate  with  soft  stumps,  a 
separate  one  for  each  color.  This  work  was  so  laboriously  done  that  sometimes 
a  whole  day  was  needed  to  make  a  single  colored  impression.  Often  the  ap- 
pearance of  a  colored  print  was  achieved  by  making  a  black  or  sepia  im- 
pression and  then  tinting  it  with  water  color.  The  difference  between  these 
tinted  examples  and  a  true  color  print  may  be  seen  by  looking  carefully  at  the 
stippled  dots.  If  the  print  has  been  pulled  in  color,  the  background  will  remain 
white  and  each  dot  will  be  colored.  In  the  tinted  print,  the  background  will  be 
covered  by  the  paint,  and  the  black  or  brown  dots  of  the  original  monotone  will 
show  through.  Color  mezzotints  and  aquatints  may  be  printed  in  the  same  man- 
ner. The  very  early  experiments  in  color  mezzotinting  were  made  with  several 
plates,  but  the  results  were  not  satisfactory. 

In  aquatint,  as  in  stipple  engraving,  the  relative  coarseness  of  the  grain 
and  the  depth  of  the  biting  affect  color.  Color  aquatint  may  also  be  printed 
from  one  plate  as  a  single  impression,  or  by  superimposed  impressions  from 
either  one  or  several  plates.  In  the  first  method  all  colors  are  put  on  the  one 
plate  and  carefully  blended  and  wiped.  The  superimposed  impressions  may  be 
made  from  one  plate,  the  colors  being  applied  and  printed  separately.  If  more 
than  one  plate  is  used,  a  separate  one  is  made  for  each  color  and  the  impressions 
are  superimposed. 

MURIEL  C.  FIGENBAUM 


Ten  Books 


The  Struggle  for  the  World.  By  James 
Burnham.  John  Day.  1947.  248  pp. 
In  the  guise  of  cool,  objective  reason- 
ing, the  author  —  a  professor  of  phil- 
osophy at  New  York  University  and 
one  of  the  chief  contributors  to  the 
Partisan  Review  —  informs  us  that  the 
Third  World  War  has  already  begun ; 
and  his  thesis  is  equally  clear  —  that  the 
United  States  should  use  its  atomic 
weapons  without  much  delay  and  de- 
stroy its  only  antagonist,  Soviet  Russia. 
In  the  steps  which  lead  up  to  this  grand 
conclusion  Mr.  Burnham  employs  his 
relentless  "logic."  World  government  is 
an  illusion,  but  world  empire  is  a  prac- 
tical possibility  and  should  be  the  aim 
of  the  United  States.  There  are  only 
two  real  alternatives  in  the  present  situ- 
ation —  a  world  organization  under 
communistic  leadership  and  a  world  or- 
ganization under  United  States  leader- 
ship. The  invention  of  the  atomic  bomb 
makes  the  problem  incomparably  sharp- 
er and  more  immediate.  The  efficacy  of 
an  "atomic  commission"  is  out  of  the 
question ;  the  menace  can  be  eliminated 
only  by  monopoly  control.  And  since 
Russia  is  the  only  other  power  which 
could  produce  atomic  weapons,  the  task 
is  obvious.  The  attack  upon  Russia 
should  begin  before  she  has  actually 
started  production,  for  afterwards  United 
States  industry  and  social  structure  will 
be  more  vulnerable  than  Soviet  indus- 
try and  social  structure.  A  non-commu- 
nist world  federation  should  be  the  ob- 
jective of  United  States  foreign  policy 
in  the  meantime.  The  United  States  as 
well  as  England  has  committed  the 
worst  political  blunder  in  supporting 
Marshal  Tito  instead  of  Mikhailovitch ; 
in  favoring  the  Yugoslavs  in  their  bor- 
der settlements  with  Italy ;  and  in  not 
giving  more  support  to  the  government 
of  Chiang  Kai-shek  against  the  commu- 
nists. The  German  people  should  be  re- 
established. Turkey  and  Greece  should 
be  upheld  against  communist  pressure ; 
and  the  replacement  of  the  "trivial" 
Franco  government  by  a  communist  re- 
gime must  not  be  permitted.  As  ma)-  be 


observed,  Mr.  Burnham  is  hampered  by 
no  lack  of  self-assurance.  His  book,  in- 
deed, seems  to  be  one  of  the  most  arro- 
gant pronouncements  published  in  a 
long  time.  But  then,  he  is  accustomed 
to  being  right.  As  his  publishers  adver- 
tise, "during  the  1930's  he  was  active  . .  . 
in  the  attempt  to  build  a  new  revolu- 
tionary communist  party."  Only  ex- 
communists  can  be  so  certain  and  hate 
so  well.  (Z.  H.) 

The  Wallaces  of  Iowa.  By  Russell  Lord. 
Houghton  Mifflin.  1947.  615  pp. 
This  winner  of  the  "Life  in  America" 
award  is  the  history  of  a  family  which, 
though  of  a  markedly  Scotch-Irish  strain 
and  Presbyterian  tradition,  could  only 
have  developed  as  it  did  in  America, 
more  especially  in  the  corn-belt  of  the 
West.  At  the  same  time  the  book  is  a 
study  of  the  farmer's  problems.  Of  the 
three  Henry  Wallaces  —  the  first,  known 
as  "Uncle  Henry"  ;  his  son  Henry  Cant- 
well,  called  "Harry";  and  his  grandson 
Henry  Agard  —  it  was  the  oldest  who, 
born  in  Pennsylvania,  moved  to  Iowa. 
While  legend  has  it  that  "Uncle  Henry" 
was  the  "maker  of  Secretaries  of  Agri- 
culture," his  son  Harry  broke  with  the 
family  tradition  of  avoiding  public  of- 
fice and  became  Secretary  of  Agricul- 
ture in  the  Harding  administration.  He 
fought  valiantly  for  conservation,  and 
made  his  most  significant  contribution 
in  promoting  the  Farm  Bureau  move- 
ment. After  his  death  in  1924,  the  family 
devotion  to  the  farmers'  welfare  was 
energetically  continued  by  his  own  son 
Henry  Agard,  who  "as  a  plant  breeder 
and  economist  ranked  among  the  first 
in  the  country."  He  was  at  the  time 
preaching  the  restriction  of  corn  plant- 
ing in  favor  of  clover  for  the  improve- 
ment of  the  soil.  Having  attracted  the 
attention  of  the  then  Governor  Franklin 
D.  Roosevelt,  he  entered  the  cabinet  of 
his  first  administration.  The  author  nar- 
rates at  length  the  history  of  the  Agri- 
cultural Adjustment  Acts  and  other 
New  Deal  measures,  Wallace's  service 
as  Vice-President  and  his  controversy 


144 


TEN  BOOKS 


H5 


with  Jesse  H.  Jones,  which  ended  in  his 
dismissal  from  the  Board  of  Economic 
Warfare.  (M.  M.) 

The  Big  Yankee.  By  Michael  Blankfort. 
Little,  Brown.  1947.  380  pp. 
This  is  the  biography  of  Brigadier  Gen- 
eral Evans  F.  Carlson,  who  built  up  the 
famous  Raider  Battalion  of  the  United 
States  Marines.  At  the  age  of  sixteen  he 
joined  the  Army,  claiming  to  be  twenty- 
two.  When  the  war  in  Europe  broke 
out,  he  re-enlisted,  and  by  the  end  of 
the  war  was  a  captain  in  the  Field  Ar- 
tillery. Soon  after,  he  joined  the  Marine 
Corps  and  was  commissioned.  The  next 
years  were  the  formative  ones  in  which 
he  laid  the  foundation  for  his  magnifi- 
cent work  in  World  War  II.  His  most 
important  experience  at  this  time  was 
as  a  military  observer  in  China,  particu- 
larly with  the  Chinese  Eighth  Route 
Army.  His  contact  with  the  fighting 
Chinese  not  only  strengthened  his  hatred 
of  oppression  and  love  of  human  rights, 
but  taught  him  the  two  principles  which 
he  called  "Ethical  Indoctrination"  and 
"Gung  Ho."  From  the  first  he  learned 
that  a  soldier  fights  better  if  he  really 
knows  for  what  he  is  fighting,  and  the 
second  showed  him  the  value  of  coop- 
eration between  officers  and  men.  These 
lessons  he  applied  in  training  the  bat- 
talion of  one  thousand  Marines  known 
as  the  Raiders,  with  outstanding  re- 
sults. (S.  W.  F.) 

Journey  to  the  End  of  an  Era.  By  Mel- 
vin  Hall.  Scribner.  1947.  438  pp. 
The  interest  of  these  reminiscences  lies 
in  the  remarkable  endowment  of  the  au- 
thor. A  man  of  action,  who  as  a  boy 
hunted  wild  boars  and  as  a  young  man 
encircled  the  Baltic  Sea  by  automobile, 
he  is  also  an  artist,  with  a  felicity  in 
colorful  description,  and  a  rare 'under- 
standing of  human  nature.  The  narrative 
abounds  in  characterizations,  ranging 
from  Generals  "Billy"  Mitchell  and 
"Jimmy"  Doolittle,  Queen  Marie  of 
Roumania  and  Mustafa  Kemal  Pasha 
to  Provenqal  fishermen  and  Norman 
farmers.  During  the  five  years  that 
Colonel  Hall  spent  in  Persia  as  financial 
adviser  to  the  government,  he  acquired 
a  profound  love  for  that  unhappy  land 


and  gained  the  trust  of  the  people.  One 
of  his  most  memorable  feats  was  the 
adjustment  he  brought  about  in  a  riotous 
quarrel  between  nomadic  tribes  of  Per- 
sian Baluchistan  and  a  tactless  govern- 
ment official.  The  book  is  rich  and  con- 
tains records  of  early  travels  in  the 
Orient,  hilarious  art  student  life  in  Paris, 
business  and  diplomatic  missions  be- 
tween wars,  and  the  author's  active  par- 
ticipation in  both.  In  World  War  II  he 
first  reconnoitered  in  the  Pacific  theater 
of  war  and  the  Near  East,  making  in 
1942  an  aerial  circuit  of  the  world,  then, 
as  Assistant  Chief  of  Staff  of  the  Ninth 
Air  Force,  concentrated  on  the  West. 
He  took  part  in  the  Italian  campaign, 
and  in  the  invasion  of  Normandy.  (M.  M.) 

Adventures  of  a  Ballad  Hunter.  By  John 
A.  Lomax.  Macmillan.  1947.  302  pp. 
John  Lomax,  pioneer  collector  of  Ameri- 
can folksongs,  is  now  nearly  eighty,  but 
he  writes  of  his  long  career  with  the 
spirit  of  a  much  younger  man.  From 
his  earliest  years  as  son  of  a  Texas  far- 
mer and  a  student  struggling  for  an 
education,  he  has  been  driven  by  a 
single  purpose  —  to  recover  the  words 
and  music  of  America's  wealth  of  native 
ballads.  Conventional  scholars  sniffed, 
but  the  greater  men,  chief  among  them 
Wendell  and  Kittredge  of  Harvard,  en- 
couraged him  to  publish  his  first  book, 
Coivboy  Songs,  in  1910.  Thirteen  years 
later  came  American  Ballads  and  Folk- 
songs, on  which  his  son  Alan  —  now  an 
authority  in  his  own  right  —  worked 
with  him.  In  connection  with  this  they 
recorded  for  deposit  in  the  Library  of 
Congress  countless  tunes,  picked  up 
from  the  most  miscellaneous  sources. 
The  best  field  was  the  southern  peni- 
tentiaries, where  the  Negro  convicts 
gladly  sang  for  him  work  songs,  spiritu- 
als, and  "sinful  songs."  He  got  sea 
chanteys  from  a  retired  sailor  in  the 
Virginia  mountains;  canal  boat  songs 
from  the  last  of  the  Ohio  canal  cap- 
tains :  Ozark  ballads  from  a  blind  Arkan- 
sas woman  of  seventy-nine.  (H.  Mc.C.) 

Einstein,  his  Life  and  Times.  By  Philipp 

Frank.  Knopf.  1947.  298  pp. 

The  author  explains  Einstein's  specific 


12 


146 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


contributions:  his  "equivalence  prin- 
ciple" in  the  calculation  of  light  rays, 
his  revolutionary  concept  of  curved  or 
four-dimensional  space,  and  his  subse- 
quently so  momentous  interest  in  sub- 
atomic action,  and  gives  also  stimulating 
discussions  on  the  philosophy  of  science. 
Yet  he  manages  to  avoid  technical  lan- 
guage. Clearly  the  book  is  not  a  disser- 
tation on  speculative  physics,  but  the 
story  of  a  genius  and  the  world's  reac- 
tion to  his  ideas  —  enthusiastic  or  skep- 
tical, adulatory  or  persecuting,  according 
to  the  passions  of  the  time.  Essentially 
a  lonely  man,  who  "sought  the  harmony 
of  the  universe  in  music  as  well  as  in 
mathematical  physics,"  an  individualist 
who  hated  regimentation,  a  bohemian 
in  the  midst  of  bourgeois  surroundings, 
Einstein  is  at  the  same  time  kindly,  al- 
ways ready  to  help,  and  has  a  childlike 
directness  and  humor.  A  native  of  Ger- 
many, he  became  a  citizen  of  Switzer- 
land, where  he  studied  and  began  his 
professional  career.  In  1921,  mainly  to 
help  the  Zionist  movement,  he  made  his 
first  visit  to  the  United  States,  where 
the  lionizing  by  crowds  who  could  hard- 
ly understand  his  theories  presented  a 
curious  phenomenon.  When,  eleven 
years  later,  he  left  Berlin  to  go  as  visit- 
ing Professor  to  the  California  Institute 
of  Technology,  he  knew  that  he  would 
never  return  to  Germany  again.  For  al- 
ready the  Nazi  tide  was  rising,  and  soon 
even  prominent  scientists  would  smirch 
his  theories  with  racial  and  political 
hatred.  His  ideas  were  regarded  in  turn 
as  "Jewishly  abstract"  and  "Bolshevistic- 
ally  materialistic."  Finally  Einstein  ac- 
cepted an  invitation  of  the  Princeton  Insti- 
tute for  Advanced  Studies,  where  —  an 
American  citizen  since  1941  —  he  is 
working  on  the  construction  of  a  "uni- 
fied field  theory."  (M.  A/.) 

Philosopher's  Quest.  By  Irwin  Edman. 
Viking.  1947.  275  pp. 
This  series  of  essays,  light  and  witty 
but  with  an  underlying  seriousness, 
deals  with  some  modern  problems. 
"The  Philosophic  Neurosis"  points  out 
that  the  search  for  final  answers  can  be 
obsessive,  the  result  of  basic  insecurity 
or  other  psychological  maladjustments. 
To  the  really  inquiring  mind  no  system 


of  thought  is  completely  satisfying,  for 
all  must  assume  hypotheses  which  can- 
not be  demonstrated  and  must  ignore 
irreconcilable  fact  to  preserve  their  logic. 
Skepticism  is  not  an  adequate  philoso- 
phy, however,  nor  the  current  cults  of 
chaos  that  have  been  so  fashionable.  In 
"The  Private  Thinker  and  the  Public 
World"  the  author  tries  "to  say  some 
wholesome  and  sane  things"  to  those 
who  look  to  him  for  direction.  First  he 
would  comfort  them  for  loss  of  the 
Absolute  by  the  assurance  that  they 
will  make  better  human  beings  without 
it.  Devotees  of  a  system  frequently  be- 
come fanatics;  tolerance,  of  which  the 
world  is  so  much  in  need,  is  seldom 
found  in  those  who  can  define  the  In- 
finite. What,  then,  can  one  act  upon? 
In  "The  Unconvinced"  Professor  Ed- 
man  suggests  the  tentative  faith  of  the 
true  humanist.  Since  man  must  live  by 
fictions,  let  him  choose  from  that  noble 
tradition.  The  ideal  of  universal  brother- 
hood has  had  enough  support  to  sug- 
gest that  it  holds  some  aspect  of  truth ; 
the  dignity  of  the  individual  is  a  premise 
for  which  there  is  much  evidence  and 
which  calls  for  active  defense.  Some  of 
the  essays  are  purely  speculative.  "The 
Undistracted,"  a  fantasy  "induced  by 
aspirin  and  weakness  after  grippe," 
gives  imaginary  interviews  with  great 
thinkers  —  Plato,  Marcus  Aurelius,  St. 
Paul.  The  dialogue  is  amusing,  Profes- 
sor Edman's  eclecticism  apparent.  The 
book  offers  no  new  answers.  It  suggests 
rather  a  choice  among  the  old  ones 
which  may  be  helpful  to  some  and  in  a 
style  so  urbane  and  epigrammatic  that  it 
makes  good  reading  for  all.  (R.  E.) 

Trinidad  Village.  By  Melville  J.  &  Fran- 
ces S.  Herskovits.  Knopf.  1947.  317  pp. 
A  persistence  of  African  traditions  is 
the  curious  feature  of  Toco,  a  small 
settlement  in  northeastern  Trinidad.  The 
authors,  who  speak  creole,  visited  it  in 
1939  for  an  anthropological  study.  The 
Tocoans,  whose  forebears  had  immigrated 
mostly  from  other  West  Indian  islands 
at  the  close  of  the  eighteenth  century, 
have  adapted  themselves  to  British  rule, 
and  to  living  from  cocoa  plantations. 
But  African  customs,  revised  and  rein- 
terpreted, govern  their  family  life.  An 


TEN  BOOKS 


H7 


emotional  and  poverty-stricken  people, 
they  are  ardent  church  members,  who 
however  feel  obliged  to  curry  favor 
with  the  shades  of  their  ancestors.  Criti- 
cal events  require  special  observances — 
the  newborn  infant,  for  instance,  is  cere- 
moniously presented  to  relatives,  both 
the  living  and  the  dead,  a  fruit  tree  hav- 
ing been  planted  for  it ;  food  is  thrown 
away  from  the  wedding  table  for  ghost- 
ly eaters  ;  and  even  the  humblest  citizen 
receives  a  formal  funeral.  While  the 
men  provide  a  large  part  of  the  earn- 
ings, the  women  form  the  center  of  the 
family,  preserving  the  ancient  usages 
and,  when  aged,  counseling  their  kin. 
A  striking  characteristic  of  the  commu- 
nity is  its  diverse  forms  of  marriage. 
Although  impermanent  relationships  are 
abhorred,  a  church  wedding  is  regarded 
as  a  luxury.  (T.  C.) 

Life  and  the  Dream.  By  Mary  Colum. 
Doubleday.  1947.  466  pp. 
A  native  of  Dublin,  who  grew  up  in  the 
great  days  of  the  Abbey  Theater,  Mrs. 
Colum  came  to  America  before  the  first 
World  War  and  has  since  won  here  a 
distinguished  place  as  a  critic.  Her  book 
From  These  Roots,  first  published  ten 
years  ago,  showed  her  deep  understand- 
ing of  the  origins  and  growth  of  modern 
literature  ;  and  all  her  writings,  even  the 
slightest  book  reviews,  reflect  her  wide 
culture  and  many-sided  interests.  Both 
in  her  own  right,  and  as  the  wife  of 
Padraic  Colum,  the  Irish  poet  and  play- 
wright, Mrs.  Colum  has  come  to  know 
most  of  the  outstanding  writers  of  the 
day  —  Irish,  English,  French,  and 
American.  She  was  a  fervent  admirer 
of  William  Butler  Yeats,  whom  she  re- 
gards even  now  as  the  greatest  person- 
ality she  has  ever  met.  She  was  acquainted 
with  Lady  Gregory,  George  Moore,  A.E., 
Dr.  Sigerson,  and  other  leaders  Of  Dub- 
lin literary  life.  A  lecture  tour  in  Ameri- 
ca first  took  the  Colums  to  Pittsburgh. 
Later  they  became  friends  of  Edgar  Lee 
Masters,  Carl  Sandburg,  Sherwood  An- 
derson, and  Vachel  Lindsay.  Harriet 
Monroe,  who  had  already  started  her 
poetry  magazine,  soon  developed  into 
Mrs.  Colum's  pet  aversion.  There  have 
been  several  visits  to  Europe.  James 
Joyce  was  a  close  friend,  as  were  several 


American  and  English  writers  staying 
in  Paris  or  on  the  Riviera.  Of  all  the 
women  poets  Elinor  Wylie  made  the 
greatest  impression  upon  Mrs.  Colum; 
in  contrast,  Edna  St.  Vincent  Millay 
earns  from  her  little  appreciation.  All 
the  portraits  she  presents,  whether  in 
a  few  lines  or  in  a  few  pages,  are  as 
many  critical  estimates.  This  autobi- 
ography is  by  no  means  a  mere  collec- 
tion of  anecdotes.  It  is  a  rich  and  charm- 
ing book  ;  even  its  occasional  malice  and 
sharpness  have  their  uses.  (Z.  H.) 

With  Strings  Attached.  By  Joseph 
Szigeti.  Knopf.  1947.  341  pp. 
One  of  the  outstanding  violinists  of  our 
time,  Mr.  Szigeti  has  had  an  interesting 
career.  On  his  concert  tours,  which 
have  taken  him  around  the  globe  sev- 
eral times,  he  has  naturally  met  count- 
less personalities,  and  his  reminiscences 
are  full  of  shrewd  and  sensitive  obser- 
vations. In  his  very  first  paragraph  he 
quotes  G.  B.  Shaw,  who  told  him  on  a 
boat  crossing  the  ocean :  "You  fiddlers 
no  longer  look  the  part.  The  only  one 
who  does  look  the  part  is  —  Einstein! 
In  my  music  critic  days,  which  were  the 
days  of  Joachim,  Ysaye,  Remenyi,  Ole 
Bull,  it  was  very  different  .  .  ."  There 
is  nothing  of  the  esthete's  pose  in  Mr. 
Szigeti's  appearance,  and  his  story,  too, 
is  told  with  great  simplicity,  intelli- 
gence, and  charm.  He  is  a  native  of 
Hungary,  and  his  first  master  was  the 
famous  Jen'o  Hubay  in  Budapest,  while 
later  he  became  an  intimate  friend  of 
Bela  Bartok.  The  friendship  of  the  poet 
Milan  Fust  broadened  his  intellectual 
horizon.  (Curiously,  there  is  no  men- 
tion of  Andreas  Ady,  perhaps  the  great- 
est poet  that  Hungary  has  produced, 
who  has  exerted  the  deepest  influence 
upon  his  generation.)  During  the  first 
World  War  Mr.  Szigeti  was  teaching  at 
the  Conservatory  of  Geneva,  and  it  was 
in  Switzerland  that  Stokowski  "dis- 
covered" him.  His  reflections  upon  the 
difference  between  the  styles  of  American 
and  European  violinists  are  sound,  for 
violin-playing,  like  every  other  art, 
changes  with  periods  and  countries.  Mr. 
Szigeti  has  no  "message,"  except  that, 
as  one  who  has  seen  the  world,  he  feels 
"like  a  citizen  of  the  world."  (Z.  H.) 


Library  Notes 


Buchanan  Sends  News  to  Russia 

IN  1832-3  James  Buchanan  spent  four- 
teen months  in  St.  Petersburg  as 
American  Minister  to  Russia.  The  warm 
feeling  which  he  had  for  the  country- 
is  evident  from  a  letter  —  a  recent  ac- 
quisition of  the  Library  —  written 
about  a  year  after  his  return  to  his 
home  at  Lancaster,  Pennsylvania. 

His  correspondent  was  John  Ran- 
dolph Clay,  secretary  of  the  American 
legation,  and  then  serving  as  charge 
d'affaires.  The  immediate  reason  for 
the  letter  was  to  describe  Mahlon 
Dickerson,  the  new  candidate  for  the 
post  at  St.  Petersburg.  A  Democrat 
closely  associated  with  tariff  protec- 
tion, Dickerson  had  been  a  leading 
choice  for  the  vice-presidency  two 
years  before,  but  gave  way  to  his  friend 
Van  Buren.    Buchanan  remarks: 

"As  soon  as  I  understood  that  Gen- 
eral Dickerson's  nomination  had  been 
confirmed  by  the  Senate  I  addressed 
him  a  letter  in  your  behalf  and  invited 
him  to  pay  me  a  visit  on  his  way  to 
Washington.  He  left  here  on  Sunday 
last  after  spending  a  day  with  me.  I 
find  that  he  and  your  father  were  in- 
timate friends  and  he  is  very  much 
pleased  that  you  are  willing  to  continue 
Secretary  of  Legation. 

"I  have  long  been  intimately  ac- 
quainted with  Governor  Dickerson  and 
hesitate  not  to  say  you  will  find  him  to 
be  one  of  the  most  amiable  and  agree- 
able men  you  have  ever  known.  In 
early  life  he  was  the  Recorder  of  the 
City  of  Philadelphia ;  and  was  also  ad- 
jutant General  of  Pennsylvania  for 
several  years  under  Governor  McKean. 
He  afterwards  returned  to  New  Jersey 
his  native  State  where  he  has  been 
Governor.  You  are  no  doubt  acquaint- 
ed with  his  character  in  the  Senate  of 
the  United  States.  He  has  been  a 
member  of  that  body,  (I  think)  from 
fifteen  to  twenty  years.  He  is  a  man 
of  talents,  of  very  extensive  informa- 
tion and  of  great  simplicity  of  man- 
ners. I  have  no  doubt  but  that  he  will 
be  popular  in  St.  Petersburg:  as  well 


as  agreeable  to  the  Emperor  and  Count 
Nesselrode.  He  is  just  such  a  man  as 
I  could  have  desired  for  my  successor. 
He  is  a  good  French  scholar  but  has 
been  for  many  years  out  of  the  prac- 
tise of  speaking  that  language." 

The  writer  adds  as  an  afterthought : 
"I  forgot  to  tell  you  that  from  my  con- 
versations with  Gen.  D.  I  do  not  sup- 
pose he  will  arrive  at  St.  Petersburg 
before  October  .  .  ."  But  the  plan  took 
on  a  new  aspect  when  Dickerson  reached 
Washington.  He  refused  to  go  abroad, 
in  order  to  devote  himself  to  the  cause 
of  Van  Buren's  presidency  and,  only 
two  weeks  after  his  visit  to  Buchanan, 
took  office  as  Secretary  of  the  Navy. 

Apparently  Buchanan  was  on  inti- 
mate terms  with  the  secretary,  for  he 
jots  down  brief  messages  just  as  they 
occur  to  him :  "Will  you  be  good  enough 
to  inform  Col.  Jackson  that  I  have 
presented  one  copy  of  his  observations 
on  Lakes  to  the  American  Philosophi- 
cal Society  in  Philadelphia;  and  the 
other  I  shall  take  with  me  to  the  North 
this  summer  and  present  to  one  of  the 
learned  societies  either  in  New  York 
or  Boston?"  Julian  Jackson,  a  British- 
er, who  had  been  made  a  colonel  of 
the  Russian  imperial  suite,  later  re- 
tired and  become  commissioner  for  the 
Russian  department  of  manufactures 
in  London.  Among  his  numerous  sci- 
entific studies  was  An  Attempt  to  Ex- 
plain Lakes,  published  in  London  in 
1833.    The  letter  continues: 

"In  regard  to  politicks  I  have  not 
much  to  say.  Gen.  McKean  has  bolted : 
and  the  people  who  elected  him  ought 
to  have  known  that  he  would.  Steven- 
son's nomination  to  England  has  not 
yet  been  confirmed  by  the  Senate  and 
many  believe  he  will  be  rejected.  This, 
however,  is  not  my  opinion ;  though  I 
may  be  mistaken. 

"Mr.  Taney  will  certainly  be  re- 
jected by  the  Senate ;  and  there  are 
many  conjectures  on  the  subject  of  his 
successor.  The  situation  will  be  a  bed 
of  thorns  for  whoever  may  occupy  it. 

"Nothing  has  been  left  undone  by 
the  Bank  party  to  prostrate  General 


148 


LIBRARY  NOTES 


149 


Jackson  and  obtain  a  rechartcr.  The 
power  of  the  Institution  itself  has  been 
freely  used  to  accomplish  these  pur- 
poses. The  crisis  has,  I  think,  passed. 
I  am  happy  to  inform  you  that  the 
people  now  understand  the  subject  and 
the  Bank  is  becoming  more  unpopular 
every  day.  Although  always  opposed 
to  that  Institution  I  confess  I  had 
never  formed  any  adequate  idea  of 
how  dangerous  it  might  become  to  the 
purity  of  our  Republican  Institutions." 

The  future  of  the  second  United 
States  Bank  was  the  chief  problem  of 
the  day.  Since  its  founding  in  1816 
suspicion  had  arisen  of  malpractices 
aimed  at  weakening  the  smaller  banks, 
and  Jackson,  backed  by  his  attorney 
general,  Roger  Taney,  favored  its  dis- 
solution. A  recharter  had  been  due  in 
1836,  but  the  Bank  party,  hoping  to 
defeat  the  President  for  a  second  term, 
demanded  one  in  1832  and  made  it  the 
central  issue  of  the  election  that  year. 
When  Jackson  triumphed,  claiming 
that  the  Bank's  directors  used  public 
funds  to  campaign  against  him,  the  in- 
stitution was  doomed.  In  the  follow- 
ing year  Taney  was  named  Secretary 
of  the  Treasury  and  launched  a  scheme 
for  removing  government  deposits  to 
the  state  banks.  But  the  Bank  party 
was  still  strong  and  Taney's  appoint- 
ment failed  to  be  confirmed  in  June 
1834.  It  was  some  months  later  that 
Jackson  offered  him  the  position  on  the 
Supreme  Court  which  opened  his  emi- 
nent career  as  Chief  Justice.  Samuel 
McKean,  recently  elected  to  the  Sen- 
ate, irritated  both  sides  by  trying  to 
steer  a  middle  course  in  the  conflict. 
He  voted  for  Jackson  but  opposed  the 
removal  of  government  funds  from  the 
Bank.  This  seems  to  be  what  Buchan- 
an meant  by  saying  that  McKean  had 
"bolted."  It  may  be  noted  here  that 
the  Bank  was  closed  in  1836. 

"V.  B.  is  now  certainly  the  promi- 
nent candidate  of  the  D.  Party  for  the 
Presidency,"  the  letter  goes  on.  "The 
probability  is  he  will  be  nominated  by 
the  National  Convention.  The  opposi- 
tion is  at  present  powerful,  but  they 
are  composed  of  so  many  odds  and 
ends,  differing  so  widely  from  each 
other,  that  I  cannot  imagine  how  they 
will  unite  in  favor  of  any  candidate." 


Buchanan's  own  star  was  rising.  In 
the  autumn  of  1834  he  went  to  the  Sen- 
ate. After  fifteen  years  there  he  re- 
tired, was  sent  to  be  minister  to  Great 
Britain  and  then,  in  1856,  became  the 
fifteenth  president.  T.  C. 

Death  of  Miss  Connell 

THE  Library  regrets  to  announce 
the  sudden  death  of  Miss  Gertrude 
L.  Connell,  Branch  Librarian  at  the  Fan- 
euil  Branch  Library,  on  Februaiy  21. 
Miss  Connell  had  been  on  the  staff  for 
over  forty-three  years.  First  employed  at 
the  Roxbury  Branch  Library  —  now 
called  the  Fellowes  Athenaeum  —  in  1910 
she  became  second  assistant  at  the 
Brighton  Branch  Library.  She  left 
there  in  19 14  to  take  charge  of  a  new 
branch  library  in  the  Faneuil  section  of 
Brighton. 

Miss  Connell  always  took  a  keen 
interest  in  the  civic  affairs  of  the 
Brighton  district,  and  was  constantly 
helpful  in  the  Faneuil  Improvement 
Society,  the  Better  Homes  in  America 
organization,  and  other  community  pro- 
jects. In  the  Library,  she  was  also  con- 
cerned with  the  improvement  of  conditions 
for  the  staff,  working  as  a  member  of  the 
Personal  Service  Committee  of  the 
Branch  Librarians  group.  For  many 
years  she  was  active  in  the  Employees 
Benefit  Association. 

Merlin's  Prophecies 

MERLIN'S  Prophesies  and  Pre- 
dictions, printed  in  London  for 
Jasper  Emery  in  1651,  is  a  thick  quarto 
volume  of  thirty-five  leaves  and  375 
numbered  pages.  This  edition  is  identi- 
cal with  the  first  edition  printed  by  J. 
Oakes  in  1641,  except  for  the  replace- 
ment of  the  wording  on  the  title-page 
".  .  .  to  the  Reign  of  our  Royall  Sover- 
aigne  King  Charles"  with  .  .  to  the 
Reign  of  the  late  King."  Similarly,  a 
paragraph  on  the  last  page  referring  to 
"the  Reigne  of  the  high,  mighty  and 
invincible  Prince  Charles"  was  can- 
celled and  the  type  reset,  the  later  ver- 
sion ending  with  a  sober  statement  of 
the  succession  of  King  Charles  and  an 
account  of  the  funeral  of  King  James. 

This  curious  medley  ot  prophecy 
and  history,  including  the  life  of  the 
Celtic  thaumaturge  Merlin,  was  one  of 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


the  later  works  of  the  dramatist 
Thomas  Heywood,  who  admitted  al- 
ready in  1633  that  he  had  composed,  or 
at  least  had  had  a  "maine  finger,"  in 
two  hundred  and  twenty  plays.  As  the 
writer  of  the  Lord  Mayor's  pageants 
in  London,  it  was  natural  that  he 
should  have  meditated  on  the  legendary 
lore  and  history  of  his  country.  In  the 
preface  he  promises  the  reader  a  small 
manual  which  will  contain  the  "pith 
and  marrow"  of  Holinshed,  the  Poly- 
chronicon,  Fabian,  Speed,  and  other  his- 
torians. 

For  the  life  and  prophecies  of  Mer- 
lin-Ambrosius  the  author  probably  drew 
on  Geoffrey  of  Monmouth,  especially 
his  Prophetiae  Merlini.  The  barbaric 
legendary  history  of  the  pre-Saxon 
kings  is  the  most  memorable  part  of 
the  volume,  for  Merlin,  the  son  of  a 
princess  and  a  demon,  was  born  in  the 
reign  of  the  usurper  Vortigern,  who  was 
crowned  King  of  Britain  in  448.  Mer- 
lin's cryptic  prophecies  —  expressed  in 
symbols  of  the  red  dragon,  bloody  ser- 
pent, sea-wolf,  "Rose  of  the  World," 
and  the  like  —  are  given  in  verse 
throughout  the  book.  It  may  be  re- 
marked that  Heywood  has  not  sup- 
pressed his  own  views  while  interpret- 
ing the  prophecies,  for  his  comments 
are  emphatically  those  of  a  Protestant 
and  a  royalist.  M.  M. 

Lectures  and  Concerts 

THE  Making  of  a  Lbie  Engraving. 
Arthur  W.  Heintzelman,  N.A., 
Keeper  of  Prints,  Boston  Public  Li- 
brary. 8.00  Mon.,  Apr.  7. 

Britain  Today.  Illustrated  with  sound 
motion  pictures.  Muriel  Goodwin,  In- 
formation Officer  in  charge  of  British 
Information  Services  in  New  England, 
located  at  British  Consulate  General 
Office  in  Boston.  8.00  Thurs.,  Apr.  10. 

Modern  Methods  of  Weather  Fore- 
casting. Illustrated  with  slides  and 
demonstration.  James  Murdoch  Austin, 
Sc.  D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Meteor- 
ology, Massachusetts  Institute  of  Tech- 
nology. 3.30  Sun.,  Apr.  13. 


The  Etchings  and  Drypoints  of  Anders 
Zorn.  A  Gallery  Talk  in  connection  with 
the  exhibition  in  the  Albert  H.  Wiggin 
Gallery  through  April.  Arthur  W. 
Heintzelman,  N.A.,  Keeper  of  Prints, 
Boston  Public  Library.  3.00  Mon., 
Apr.  14. 

Modern  Literature  about  Ancient 
Saints.  Monsignor  John  J.  Wright,  sec- 
retary to  the  Catholic  Archbishop  of 
Boston.  8.00  Mon.,  Apr.  14. 

British  Colonies.  Illustrated  with 
sound  motion  pictures.  Bernard  Pon- 
sonby  Sullivan,  M.B.E.,  British  Consul 
General  in  Boston.  8.00  Thurs.,  Apr.  17. 

Concert.  Rita  Copel,  pianist.  Intro- 
duction by  Leo  Litwin,  pianist  and 
teacher.  8.00  Sun.,  Apr.  20. 

How  to  Read  the  Foreign  News. 
James  H.  Powers,  Foreign  Editor  of 
the  Boston  Globe.  8.00  Mon.,  Apr.  21. 

The  Art  of  Sculpture.  Lecture  demon- 
stration. Bashka  Paeff,  sculptor.  8.00 
Thurs.,  Apr.  24. 

Concert.  Choral  Society  of  the  Massa- 
chusetts State  Federation  of  Women's 
Clubs.  Natalie  Weidner,  conductor.  3.30 
Sun.,  Apr.  27. 

Britain's  Visual  Educational  Program. 
Illustrated  with  sound  motion  pictures. 
Thomas  Hodge,  Assistant  Director  of 
the  Film  Division,  British  Information 
Services,  New  York.  8.00  Mon.,  Apr.  28. 

Lowell  Lectures 

THE  course  of  eight  illustrated  lec- 
tures on  Degeneration,  Necrosis, 
and  Fibrosis  of  the  Liver,  by  Harold 
Percival  Himsworth,  M.  D.  (Lond.) 
F.  R.  C.  P.,  Professor  of  Medicine  in 
the  University  of  London,  Director  of 
the  Medical  Unit,  University  College 
Hospital,  will  be  continued  on  Mon- 
days and  Thursdays  at  five  o'clock  in 
the  afternoon,  as  follows : 

7.  Thurs.,  Apr.  3.  Clinical  Types  of 
Liver  Disease  (continued).  Fibroses. 
Vascular. 

8.  Mon.,  Apr.  14.  Clinical  Types  of 
Liver  Disease  (continued).  Biliary. 
Focal.  Neoplastic.  Clinical  classification 
of  diseases  of  the  liver. 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 

Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

*  ♦ 

* 

This  list  should  be  used  in  conjunction  with  Books  Current,  o 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
194.3.  Books  Current  is  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  and  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  are  available  for  the  whole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  are  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  the 
Business  Branch;  however,  they  may  be  borrowed  through  the  various 
branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


General  Reference 
Books  in  Bates  Hall 

Link,  Henry  C,  and  Harry  Arthur  Hopf. 
People  and  books,  a  study  of  reading  and 
book-buying  habits.  New  York,  Book 
Manufacturers'  Inst.  1946.  166  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  Z1003.L6 

National  committee  for  mental  hygiene.  Di- 
rectory of  psychiatric  clinics  in  the  United 
States  and  other  resources,  1946  .  .  .  New 
York.  [1946.]  78  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  RA790.A1N18 

National  Research  Council,  Washington, 
D.  C.  Doctoral  dissertations  accepted  by 
American  universities.  No.  13.  1945/46. 
Wilson.   1946.   71  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  Z5055.U49D6 

—  Research  Information  Service.  Industrial 
research  laboratories  of  the  United  States 
...  Washington.  [1946.]  415  pp. 
Bulletin  113.  Gen.  Ref.  T176.U6 

New  York  (State),  Secretary  of  state.  Manual 
for  the  use  of  the  legislature  of  the 
state  of  New  York.  1946.  Albany.  1946. 
1507  PP-  Gen.  Ref.  AY  JK3431  1946 

Orton,  Robert  Merritt.  Catalog  of  reprints 
in  series.  7th  edition.  Wilson.  1946.  168 
pp.  Gen.  Ref.Z1033.S5  O  8 

Patterson,  Homer  La  Feme.  Patterson's 
American  educational  directory.  1946. 
Chicago,  American  Educational  Co.  1946. 
1024  pp.  Gen.  Ref.  AY  L901.P3 

Self,  Margaret  Cabell.  The  horseman's  en- 
cyclopedia. New  York,  Barnes.  1946.  519 
pp.  Gen.  Ref.  SF278.S4 

Thomas,  Robert  Bailey.  The  old  farmer's 
almanac.  1947.  Dublin,  N.  H.  1946.  80  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  Desk 

U.  S.  Nautical  almanac  office.  Total  eclipse 
of  the  sun,  May  20,  1947.  Washington. 
1946.  48  pp.  Gen.Ref.  QB8U1  Suppl.  1947 


Bibliography 

Parsons,  Captain  E.  J.  S.  Manual  of  map 
classification  and  cataloguing,  prepared 
for  use  in  the  Directorate  of  military  sur- 


vey, War  office.  London.  1946.  439  pp. 
Loose-leaf.  *Z695.6.P3 
Shaw,  Thomas  S.  Index  to  profile  sketches  in 
New  Yorker  magazine.  Boston,  Faxon. 
1946.  100  pp.  *Z5305.U5S5 
"Covers  the  profile  sketches  .  .  .  from  volume  1, 
number  1,  February  21,  1925  to  volume  16,  number 
1,  February  17,  1940,  when  the  Reader's  guide  to 
periodical  literature  began  indexing  this  periodical." 
— Preface. 

United  States  cumulative  book  auction  re- 
cords 1940/45-  Five  year  volume  of  Ameri- 
can book  auction  prices.  New  York,  Book 
Trade  Weekly.  1946-  *Ziooo.U6a 

Reporting  all  books,  pamphlets,  manuscripts, 
periodicals,  autographs  and  other  literary  property 
selling  in  American  auction  rooms  for  $3.00  or 
more. 

Biography 

Single 

Hahn,  Emily.  Raffles  of  Singapore.  Double- 
day.  587  pp.  Plates.  DS646.26.R3H3 
The  life  of  Sir  Stamford  Raffles  (1781-1826), 
founder  and  administrator  of  Singapore. 

Thompson,  D.  G.  Brinton.  Ruggles  of  New- 
York;  a  life  of  Samuel  B.  Ruggles.  Co- 
lumbia Univ.  1946.  222  pp.  3563.110.524 
Samuel  B.  Ruggles  was  one  of  New  York's  greatest 
philanthropists  and  financiers. 

Van  Deusen,  Glyndon  G.  Thurlow  Weed, 
wizard  of  the  lobby.  Little,  Brown.  1947. 
xiv,  403  pp.  Plates.  E415.9.W39V3 
The  life  of  Thurlow  Weed  (1797-1882),  the  pioneer 
political  boss. 

"Politician,  journalist,  patriot,  millionaire,  brimful 
of  energy  and  action  .  .  .  his  career  came  close  to 
epitomizing  the  strengths  and  the  weaknesses,  the 
accomplishments  and  the  failures,  of  nineteenth-cen- 
tury America." — P.  347. 

Collective 

We  bear  witness;  a  tribute  by  Americans  to 
the  contribution  of  the  Jew  in  America. 
New  York,  Domesday  Press.  [i945-]  [94] 
pp.  West  End  Branch  E184.J5W4 

Who's  who  in  labor.  The  authorized  bio- 
graphies of  the  men  and  women  who  lead 
labor  in  the  United  States  and  Canada 
and  of  those  who  deal  with  labor,  together 


151 


152 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


with  a  glossary  of  labor  terminology, 
edited  by  Dr.  John  R.  Steelman.  1946- 
New  York,  Dryden  Press.  [1946- 

*933i.8Ai44 

Editors:   1946-  Marion  Dickerman,  Rum  Taylor. 

Memoirs 

Cox,  James  Middleton.  Journey  through  my 
years.  Simon  and  Schuster.  1946.  xi,  463 
pp.  E748.C88A3 
These  memoirs  of  the  former  Congressman,  Gov- 
ernor of  Ohio,  and  Presidential  Democratic  candi- 
date in  1920  constitute  an  intimate  chapter  in 
national  politics.  Included  are  letters  from  Frank- 
lin D.  Roosevelt  before  and  after  he  was  President. 

Lazaro,  Angel.  Retratos  familiares.  La  Ha- 
bana,  Cuba.  1945.  Ii-i37pp. 

PQ7389.L35R45 

Marshall,  Katherine  fupper.  Together,  an- 
nals of  an  army  wife.  Atlanta,  'i  upper  and 
Love.  1946.  292  pp.  E745.M37M3 

An  intimate,  anecdotal  narrative,  by  the  wife  of 
General  Marshall,  of  their  life  together  since  their 
marriage  in  1930. 

Michaelis,  Karin.  Little  Troll  ...  in  collabor- 
ation with  Lenore  Sorsby.  New  York, 
Creative  Age  Press.  [1946.]  viii,  310  pp. 

PT8175.M5Z52 

A  colorful  autobiography  of  the  famous  Danish 
novelist. 


Business 

These  books  are  to  be  obtained  at  the 
Business  Branch,  20  City  Hall  Ave. 
American  directory  of  collection  agencies  .  .  . 
F-W  1946.  Washington,  Service  Pub.  Co. 
1946.  272  pp.  **HFs558.A5i 
Biographical  encyclopedia  of  the  world.  3d 
edition.    1946.    New   York,   Institute  for 
Research  in  Biography.  1946.  1216  pp. 

**CTi03.B6i  1946 
Brin,   Joseph    G.   Help   yourself    to  better 
speech.  Boston,  Speech  Arts  Press.  1944. 

NBS 

Davison's  knit  goods  trade  .  .  .  1946.  Ridge- 
wood,  N.  J.,  Davison  Pub.  Co.  1046.  814 
pp.  **TT695-D26 

Directory  of  corporations  and  executives 
(Essex,  Middlesex,  Norfolk  and  Suffolk 
counties)  .  .  .  13th  edition.  Boston,  Di- 
rectory Pub.   Co.  955  pp. 

**HG4057-M4D59 

Export  directory  of  Denmark.  1946/47  .  .  . 
Copenhagen,  Krak's  Legat.  [1947?]  567 
pp.  **HF3643-K9i 

Hat  life  year  book  .  .  .  1947.  New  York, 
Publishers  of  Hat  Life.  1947.  296  pp. 

**TS2i82.H36 

Interior  decorators'  hand  bock  .  .  .  Fall,  1946. 
New  York,  Hall  Pub.  Co.  1946.  234  pp. 

**TTi2.H33 

International  labour  office,  Montreal.  The 
co-operative  movement  and  present  day 
problems.  Montreal,  International  Labour 
Office.  1945.  232  pp.  NBS 

Kelly's  directory  of  merchants,  manufacturers 
and  shippers  .  .  .  1947.  v.  60.  London, 
Kelly's  Directories.  1947.  2302  pp. 

**HF54.K29 

Leather  and  shoe  financial  statements,  v.  39. 
1946.  Manchester,  N.  H.,  Weekly  Bulletin 


Leather  Shoe  News  Co.  1946.  355  pp. 

**TS945.L43 

Maryland.  State  insurance  department.  Manu- 
al; questions  and  answers  for  examinations 
of  insurance  agents,  solicitors  and  brokers; 
2d  edition.  Baltimore.  1945.  79  pp.  NBS 

Mining  year  book  1946,  The  .  .  .  60th  year  of 
publication.  London,  Walter  E.  Skinner  & 
"Financial  Times."  1946.  472  pp. 

**TNi3-.M67 

National  association  of  supervisors  of  state 
banks.  Proceedings  of  the  annual  meeting. 
1946.  v.  45.  New  York.  1946.  187  pp. 

HG1507.N27 

National  industrial  conference  board.  Will 
the  guaranteed  annual  wage  work?  New 
York.  1946.  44  pp.  NBS 
Studies  in  business  economics,  no.  5. 

Paper  catalog.  New  England-New  York 
edition.  July  1946.  New  York,  Walden, 
Sons  &  Mo'tt.  1046.  **TSio88.P22 

Parker,  Amory.  Twenty  crucial  years;  the 
story  of  Incorporated  investors,  a  pioneer 
investment  company.  Boston,  Parker 
Corp.  1946.  126  pp.  NBS 

Printing  trades  blue  book.  Eastern  edition. 
2 1st  edition.  1946/47.  New  York,  A.  F. 
Lewis.  1946.  295  pp.  **Ziig.P95e 

Stearns,  Myron  M.  How  to  sell  what  you 
write.  Revised  edition.  New  York,  Senti- 
nel Books.  1945.  108  pp.  NBS 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  foreign  and  domestic  com- 
merce. Establishing  and  operating  a  res- 
taurant. Washington.  1946.  287  pp.  NBS 
Industrial  (small  business)   series  no.  39. 

U.  S.  Department  of  commerce.  Establish- 
ing and  operating  a  mail-order  business. 
Washington.  1946.  113  pp.  NBS 

Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  49. 

—  Establishing  and  operating  a  year-round 
motor  court.  Washington.  1945.  125  pp. 
Industrial  (small  business)   series  no.  50.  NBS 

—  Establishing  and  operating  an  air  con- 
ditioning and  refrigeration  business. 
Washington.  1946.84  pp.  NBS 
Industrial   (small  business)   series  no.  59. 

Who's  who  in  the  maritime  industry,  bio- 
graphical sketches  and  illustrations  of 
interest  to  and  concerning  people  in  the 
Merchant  seafaring  world.  New  York, 
74  Degrees  West  Co.  1946.  238  pp. 

**CT646o.W62 

Willing's  press  guide.  1946.  73rd  annual  issue. 
London,  Willing's  Press  Service.  1946.  420 
pp.  **Z6956.E5W73 

Domestic  Science 

De  Both,  Jessie  Marie.  Modern  household 
encyclopedia  .  .  .  With  over  two  hundred 
illustrations  by  Francis  Dayton.  Chicago. 
Ferguson.  1946.  347  pp.  Illus.  TX158.D4 

Hauser,  Bengamin  Gayelord.  The  Gayelord 
Hauser  cook  book,  good  food,  good 
health,  good  looks.  Coward-McCann. 
[1946.]  viii,  312  pp.  TX715.H36 


Drama.  Stage 

Bakshy,  Alexander,  compiler  and  translator. 
Soviet  scene;  six  plays  of  Russian  life. 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


i53 


translated  by  Alexander  Bakshy,  in  colla- 
boration with  Faul  S.  Nathan;  with  an  in- 
troduction by  Alexander  Bakshy.  Yale. 
1946.  348  pp.  PG3245.B3 

Contents.  —  The  Soviet  drama,  by  Alexander 
Bakshy.  —  Lyubov  Yarovaya,  by  Konstantin 
Trenyov.  —  The  chimes  of  the  Kremlin,  by  Nikolay 
Pogodin.  —  Father  unknown,  by  Vassily  Shkvar- 
kin.  —  Far  taiga,  by  Alexander  Afinogcnov.  — 
The  square  flowers,  by  Vassily  Ilyenkov.  —  Twelve 
months,  by  Samuel  Marshak. 
Henderson,  Archibald,  editor.  Pioneering  a 
people's  theatre,  edited  with  a  foreword 
by  Archibald  Henderson  .  .  .  Chapel  Hill, 
The  University  of  North  Carolina  Press. 
1045.  viii,  104  pp.  Ulus.  PN2267.H4 
The  volume,  one  of  the  University  of  North  Caro- 
lina's sesrjuicentennial  publications,  is  a  memorial 
to  Professor  Frederick  Henry  Koch,  founder  and 
leader  of  the  Carolina  Playmakers,  and  represents 
also  a  "survey,  summary,  and  appraisal  of  the 
labors  and  accomplishments"  of  that  organization. 


Economics 

Autz,  Hugo  G.  Establishing  and  operating  a 
sporting-goods  store.  Washington.  [1946.] 

iii,  48  pp.  Ulus.  :::938i.73a70.S4 
U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)   series  no.  54. 

Bendure,  Zelma.  Establishing  and  operat- 
ing an  apparel  store  .  .  .  Prepared  by  Zelma 
Bendure  ...  in  cooperation  with  Harvey 
Huegy,  under  the  direction  of  Walter  F. 
Crowder.  [Washington.  1946.]  viii,  269  pp. 
Illus.  938i.73A7ono.  32. 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  32. 

Brady,  George  Stuart.  Establishing  and 
operating  a  paint,  glass,  and  wallpaper 
store.  Washington.  [1946.]  iv,  59  pp. 

*938i-73a7°.5i 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  51. 

Bragg,  Henry  P.  Establishing  and  operating 
a  small  woodworking  shop.  Washington. 
[1946.]  iii,  44PP-  Ulus.  *938i.73a70.47 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  47. 

Bryan,  Alary  de  Garmo,  and  others.  Establish- 
ing and  operating  a  restaurant.  [Washing- 
ton. 1946.]  vi,  287  pp.  Illus.  *938i.73a70.39 
TJ.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  30. 

Cotton,  Anne  Dienstl.  Establishing  and 
operating  a  music  store.  Washington. 
[1946.]  iv,  83  pp.  Ulus.  *938i.73a70-57 
U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  57. 

Donnelley,  Dixon.  Establishing  and  operating 
a  weekly  newspaper.  Washington.  [1946.] 

iv,  52  pp.  Illus.  *938i.73a70.43 
TJ.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (smalll  business)  series  no.  43. 

Drayton,  Charles  D.  Transportation  under 
two  masters;  devitalizing  vital  agencies 
.  .  .  foreword  by  Bernard  M.  Baruch. 
Washington,  National  Law  Book  Co. 
[1946.]  xii,  210  pp.  9385-973A362 
"Deals  with  .  .  .  the  apparent  conflict  between 
the  Sherman  Antitrust  act,  as  administered  by  the 
Department  of  justice,  and  the  Interstate  com- 
merce act,  as  administered  by  the  Interstate  com- 
merce commission,  in  their  application  to  the 
transportation  agencies  of  the  country  ."--Foreword. 

Dudik,  George  F.  Establishing  and  operating 
a  confectionery-tobacco  store.  Washing- 


ton. [1946.]  v,  53  pp.  Illus.  *938i.73a70.48 
U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  48. 

Engle,  Nathanael  II.,  editor.  Marketing  in  the 
West.  Ronald  Press.  [1946.]  xii,  263  pp. 
Illus.  9381.04A118 

Gambs,  John  S.  Beyond  supply  and  demand; 
a  reappraisal  of  institutional  economics. 
Columbia  Univ.  1946.  105  pp.  9330.1A536 
"Selected  bibliography":   pp.  t93]-i»o. 

Gordon,  Edith  E.  Establishing  and  operating 
a  beauty  shop  .  .  .  Prepared  by  Edith  E. 
Gordon  under  the  direction  of  H.  B.  Mc- 
Coy. [Washington.  1946.]  vi,  135  pp.  Illus. 

*938i.73A70  no.  25 

TJ.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  .25. 

Gunsallus,  Brooke  L.,  and  others.  Manufactur- 
ing brick  and  tile  to  serve  your  community 
.  .  .  Washington.  1946.  iv,  S9  pp.  Illus. 

*938i-73a7o-54 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  49. 

Hahn,  Edwin.  Establishing  and  operating  a 
retail  shoe  business  .  .  .  Prepared  by  Ed- 
win Hahn  in  cooperation  with  J.  G. 
Schnitzer,  under  the  direction  of  H.  B. 
McCoy  .  .  .  Washington.  [1946.]  v,  180 
pp.  Illus.  9381.73A70  no.  34 

TJ.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  34. 

Harper,  Floyd  Sprague.  Mathematics  of 
finance.  International  Textbook  Co.  1946. 
ix,  327  pp.  Illus.  HF5691.H29 

Hickernell,,  Warren  Fayette.  Establishing 
and  operating  a  real  estate  and  insurance 
brokerage  business  .  .  .  Prepared  by  War- 
ren F.  Hickernell,  with  the  assistance  of 
Mary  R.  Lubig  and  Anne  E.  Corbett 
under  the  direction  of  H.  B.  McCoy. 
Washington.  [1946.]  vii,  137  pp.  Illus. 

:;:938i.73a7o  no.  26 
TJ.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  26. 

Hood,  Victor  E.  Establishing  and  operating  a 
retail  feed  and  farm  supply  store.  Wash- 
ington. [1946-]  iii.  38  pp.  *938i.73a7045 

TJ.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  43. 
Linderholm,  Clara  C.  Establishing  and  oper- 
ating a  stationery  and  office-supply  store. 
Washington.  [1946.]  30  pp.  *938i.73a70.44 
TJ.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  44. 

—  Establishing  and  operating  an  automatic 
merchandising  business.  Washington.  1946. 
v,  41  pp.  Illus.  *938i.73a70.58 

TJ.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  58. 
Loeb,  Harold.  Full  production  .without  war. 
Princeton  Univ.  1946.  xviii,  284  pp.  Illus. 

9330.1A540 

Mclsaac,  Archibald,  and  others.  Postwar 
prospects  for  American  textiles;  an  intro- 
ductory report,  by  Archibald  M.  Mclsaac, 
James  G.  Smith  [and]  John  W.  Cadman, 
jr.  of  the  Department  of  economics  and 
social  institutions,  Princeton  university. 
Washington,  Textile  Foundation.  [1946.] 
30  pp.  9338.415A20 

Miller,  Nelson  Alexander.  Establishing  and 
operating  a  variety  and  general  merchan- 
dise store  ...  By  Nelson  A.  Miller  .  .  . 
under  the  direction  of  Walter  F.  Crowder. 


154 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


[Washington,  1946.]  vi,  256  pp.  Illus. 

*938i-73a7°  no.  35 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  35. 

—  Grocery  store  ...  by  Nelson  A.  Miller, 
Harvey  W.  Huegy,  and  associates:  E.  R. 
Hawkins,  Charles  H.  Sevin  .  .  .  [and 
others]  under  the  direction  of  Walter  F. 
Crowder.  Washington.  [1946.]  vii,  375  pp. 
Illus.  *938i.73A70  no.  21 
U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  21. 

Mintz,  Sam.  Establishing  and  operating  a 
jewelry  store.  Washington.  [1936.]  v,  42 
pp.  Illus.  *938i-73a70.55 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  55. 

Muller,  Charlotte  F.  Light  metals  monopoly. 
Columbia  Univ.  1946.  279  pp.  *3563.no.5i9 

Mutter,  Lawrence  P.  Establishing  and  oper- 
ating a  heating  and  plumbing  business 
.  .  .  Prepared  by  Lawrence  P.  Mutter  and 
Kenneth  R.  Davis,  under  the  direction  of 
H.  B.  McCoy.  Washington.  [1946.]  vi,  139 
pp.  *938i.73A70  no.  36 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  36. 

Nelson,  James  C,  and  Knute  E.  Carlson.  Es- 
tablishing and  operating  a  trucking  busi- 
ness. Washington.   [1946.]  iv,  71pp. 

*938i-73a70.52 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  52. 

Parris,  Donald  Henry  Sherideu.  Establishing 
and  operating  an  electrical  appliance  and 
radio  shop  .  .  .  Prepared  by  Donald  S.  Par- 
ris and  associates,  under  the  direction  of 
H.  B.  McCoy.  Washington.  1946.]  vi,  199 
pp.  Illus.  *938i.73a70  no.  28 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  28. 

Peel,  Arthur  J.  Establishing  and  operating 
a  gift  and  art  shop.  Washington.  [1946.I 
v,  49  pp.  Illus.  ^9381.73370.63 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  53. 

Sevin,  Charles  H.  Establishing  and  operating 
a  bookkeeping  service.  Washington.  1946. 
5i  pp.  Illus.  *938i.73a7o.4i 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  41. 

—  Establishing  and  operating  a  service  sta- 
tion .  .  .  Prepared  by  members  of  the 
petroleum  industry  and  Charles  H.  Sevin, 
under  the  direction  of  Walter  F.  Crow- 
der. Washington.  [I945-]  vi,  198  pp.  Illus. 

*938i.73a70  no.22 
U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  22. 

Stamp  specialist  emerald  book,  The.  .  .  . 
[New  York,  H.  L.  Lindquist.  1946.]  136 
pp.  Illus.  HE6199.S8134 

Contents.  —  Confederate  states  of  America,  Some 
notes  on  the  postal  legislation,  Postal  rates.  Postal 
uses  and  earliest  known  dates  of  the  stamps  of 
the  general  issues,  by  Stanley  B.  Ashbrook.  — 
Trans-Atlantic  mails,  by  Major  F.  W.  Staff.  — 
Austria  and  Lombardy-Venetia,  The  re-engravings 
on  the  dotted  background  of  the  first  issue,  by 
Felix  Bruuner.  —  Puerto  Rico,  by  R.  B.  Pres- 
ton: A.  The  bogus  stamps  of  1897.  B.  Revenue 
stamps  used  for  postage.  —  The  development  of 
the  electric  eye,  by  Nathan  Goldstein  II.  —  Poland, 
The  postal  stationery,  by  Clement  A.  Pulaski:  A. 
The  stamped  envelope.  B.  The  letter  card  section. 

Stocking,  George  Ward,  and  others.  Cartels 
in  action;  case  6tudi«s  in  international 


business  diplomacy,  by  George  W.  Stock- 
ing and  Myron  W.  Atkins,  with  the  as- 
sistance of  Alfred  E.  Kahn  and  Gertrude 
Oxenfeldt.  New  York,  The  Twentieth 
Century  Fund.  1946.  vii-xii,  533  pp. 

9338.8A40 

Toboldt,  William  King.  Establishing  and 
operating  an  automobile  repair  shop  .  .  . 
Prepared  by  W.  K.  Toboldt,  in  cooper- 
ation with  William  H.  Myer,  Etteline 
Flehr,  and  O.  Schreiner.  jr.,  under  the  di- 
rection of  H.  B.  McCoy.  Washington. 
[1946.]  vi,  141pp.  Illus.  *938i.73a70  no.  24 
U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  24. 

Trimble,  Paul  C.  Establishing  and  operating 
a  dry  cleaning  business  .  .  .  Prepared  by 
Paul  C.  Trimble  with  the  assistance  of 
Donald  Layman,  Robert  H.  Johnson,  and 
Charles  H.  Sevin,  under  the  direction  of 
Walter  F.  Crowder.  [Washington.  1946.] 
vi,  210  pp.  Illus.  *938i.73A70  no.  33 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  33. 

U.  S.  Federal  power  commission.  Electric 
power  requirements  and  supply  in  the 
United  States  1940-1945;  war  impact  on 
electric  utility  industry.  (Class  I  electric 
utility  systems)  with  an  appendix  show- 
ing scheduled  increases  in  capacity,  1945 
and  1946.  Washington.  1945.  13  pp. 

*938i.0973Ai30 
Reproduced  from  type-v.  ritten  copy. 


Education 

Flexner,  Abraham.  Daniel  Coit  Gilman, 
creator  of  the  American  type  of  univer- 
sity. Harcourt,  Brace.  [1946.]  ix,  173  pp. 

LD2626.1876.F55 

A  biography  of  the  first  president  of  Johns  Hopkins 
University  from  the  point  of  view  of  his  influence 
on  American  education. 

Hobhouse,  Christopher,  d.  1940..  Oxford  as  it 
was  and  as  it  is  today.  Oxford  Univ.  [1946.I 
x,  120  pp.  Plates.  LF521.H6  1946 

Jones,  Howard  Mumford.  Education  and 
world  tragedy.  Harvard.  1946.  viii,  178  pp. 
The  Rushton  lectures  1946.  LA226.J64 

Kelly,  William  A.  Educational  psychology. 
3d  edition  revised  and  enlarged.  Bruce. 
[1946.]  xxiv,  597  pp.  Illus. 

LB1051.K37  1946 

"Intended  for  use  in  Catholic  colleges  and  teacher 
training  institutions." — 1st  Foreword. 

Leonard,  John  Paul.  Developing  the  secon- 
dary curriculum.  Rinehart.  [1946.]  xi,  560 
pp.  LB1628.L4 

Murphy,  Lois  Barclay,  and  Henry  Ladd. 
Emotional  factors  in  learning.  Columbia 
Univ.  1946.  x,  404  pp.  LB1073.M8 

Odell,  William  R.,  and  Esta  Ross  Stuart. 
Principles  and  techniques  for  directing  the 
learning  of  typewriting.  2d  edition.  Heath. 
[1945.]  v,  250  pp.  Illus.  Z49.A2  O  2  1945 

Peterson,  Houston,  editor.  Great  teachers; 
portrayed  by  those  who  studied  under 
them,  edited  with  an  introduction  .  .  .  New 
Brunswick,  Rutgers  Univ.  1946.  xxi,  351 
pp.  LA2301.P4 

Strang,  Ruth  May.  Group  activities  in  college 
and  secondary  school  .  .  .  revised  edition. 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


i55 


Harper.   [1946.]   xiii,  361  pp. 

LB1027.S832  1946 

"Selected  references'' :  pp.  302-350. 

Fine  Arts 

Architecture 

Hamlin,  A.  D.  F.,  1855-1926.  A  text-book  of 
the  history  of  architecture.  Longmans. 
Green.  [1946.]  xxviii,  493  pp.  Plates. 

8ogi.oi-4iW 

Holisher,  Decider.  The  house  of  God.  New 
York,  Crown  Publishers.  [1946.]  232  pp. 
Illus.  8104.02-106 

Descriptions  of  the  places  of  worship  in  America, 
illustrated  with  more  thnn  300  photographs  by  the 
author  and  others,  showing  both  exterior  and  in- 
terior views,  and  ceremonies  and  services  in  action. 

Art  History.  War  Damages 

Friedmann,  Herbert.  The  symbolic  goldfinch; 
its  history  and  significance  in  European 
devotional  art.  157  illustrations.  [Wash- 
ington, Published  for  Bollingen  Foun- 
dation by]  Pantheon  Books.  [1946.]  ix- 
xxix,  254  pp.  *4095.o2-i22 
"In  the  present  study  are  amassed  data  on  nearly 
five  hund  ed  .  .  .  devotional  paintings  containing 
goldfinches." — P.  4. 

The  great  majority  oi  the  artists  using  the  gold- 
finch symbol  were  Italian,  the  others  German, 
Flemish,  Spanish,  French,  etc.  The  Appendix  con- 
tains a  list  of  paintings  which  have  the  goldfinch 
symbol,  arranged  by  schools  and  giving  the  present 
locations.  The  plates  are  noteworthy. 

Howe,  Thomas  Carr.  Salt  mines  and  castles; 
the  discovery  and  restitution  of  looted 
European  art.  Bobbs-Merrill.  [1946.]  334 
pp.  Plates.  4087.08-103 

Ivins,  William  Mills.  Art  and  geometry  .  .  . 
a  study  in  space  intuitions.  Harvard.  1946. 
x,  135  PP-  4086.03-114 
A  study  of  the  diiierence  between  ancient  Greek 
metrical  geometry  and  modern  perspective  geo- 
metry, with  chapters  on  "Fifteenth-and  Sixteenth- 
Century  Perspective,"  "Cusaims  and  Kepler," 
"Desargues  and  Pascal,"  etc. 

La  Farge,  Henry  Adams,  editor.  Lost  trea- 
sures of  Europe;  427  photographs.  Pan- 
theon Books.  [1946.]  39,  [352]  pp. 

4087.08-105 

427  photographs,  collected  under  great  difficulties, 
of  city  views,  buildings  ■ —  largely  famous 
churches-,  interiors,  sculpture,  and  paintings  of 
Europe,  which  have  been  wholly  destroyed  or 
greatly  damaged,  showing  how  they  looked  before 
the  war.  In  some  cases,  pictures  of  ruins  have 
been  included. 

Crafts.  Antiques 
Chicago,  Art  institute,  Lucy  Maud  Bucking- 
ham collection.  Chinese  bronze  from  the 
Buckingham  collection  by  Charles  Fabens 
Kelley  and  Ch'n  Meng-Chia.  [Chicago,] 
Art  Institute.  1946.  164  pp.  84  plates. 

*8 1 79.06-1 15 

Descriptive  text  opposite  each  plate. 
Freer  gallery  of  art,  Washington,  D.  C.  A 
descriptive  and  illustrative  catalogue  of 
Chinese  bronzes  acquired  during  the  ad- 
ministration of  John  Ellerton  Lodge 
(with  50  plates).  Compiled  by  the  staff  of 
the  Freer  gallery  of  art  .  .  .  Washington. 
1946-  v,  108  pp.  *8i7gB.i02 
Most  of  the  plates  printed  on  both  sides. 


Halstead  directory  company,  Cortland,  .V.  Y. 
Halstead's  national  directory  of  antique 
dealers.  2d  edition.  Cortland,  N.  V.,  Hal- 
stead  Directory  Co.  [1945-     *8 161. 08-139 

[Index  of  American  design.]  [Silk  screen 
reproductions  of  southern  California  de- 
signs from  the  Index  of  American  design.] 
[Washington,  National  Gallery  of  Art. 
194-?]  10  colored  plates.  *8i63B.ios 
In  portfolio. 

McClinton,  Katharine  Morrison.  A  handbook 
of  popular  antiques.  Random  House.  1946. 
xii,  244  pp.  Plates.  8161.08-143 

Drawing.  Illustration 

Dickens  pictures  by  contemporary  artists  in 
Van  Dyke  gravure.  [n.  p.  191-?]  [233] 
plates.  *8i44.03-42 
In  box. 

Guptill,  Arthur  L.  Norman  Rockwell,  illus- 
trator .  .  .  biographical  introduction  by 
Jack  Alexander.  New  York,  Watson-Gup- 
till  Publications.  1946.  xxviii,  208  pp. 

~,  ,  ,         ,    •  8l43-03-875 

The  lite  and  work  of  the  popular  lliustiator. 
"In  a  period  when  wormwood  and  vinegar  are  the 
fashionable  flavorings,  it  Is  genuine  originality  for 
Rockwell  to  dip  his  brush  into  the  honey-pot  01 
lovableness  and  zest  in  living."—  Preface  by  Doro- 
thy Canfield  Fisher. 

Hogeboom,  Amy.  Familiar  animals  and  how 
to  draw  them.  New  York,  Vanguard.  1946. 
39  pp.   Illus.  8142.05-119 

Okubo,  Mine.  Citizen  13660;  drawings  and 
text  by  Mine  Okubo.  New  York,  Co- 
lumbia Univ.  1946.  209  pp.  Illus. 

8145.03-124 

Clever  black  and  white  illustrations  to  the  author's 
account  of  her  experiences  in  evacuation  centers  for 
Japanese  Americans. 

Williams,  Gurney,  editor.  I  meet  such  people! 
a  careful  collection  of  more  than  200  care- 
free cartoons.  Farrar,  Straus.  1946.  128 
pp.  Illus.  8144.07-131 

The  humor  editor  of  Collier's  explains  the  editorial 
principles  and  methods,  and  tells  of  his  experiences 
with  cartoon  artists  and  the  public. 

Furniture.  Decoration 

Miller,  Gladys.  Furniture  for  your  home  .  .  . 
illustrated  by  Harriet  Meserole.  New- 
York,  Barrows.  [1946.]  xiii,  290  pp. 

8184.05-121 

—  Your  decorating  A-B-C  .  .  .  illustrated  by 
Whit  Boynton.  New  York,  Malba  Books. 
Published  bv  Archway  Press.  [1946.  J  66 
pp.  Illus.  81 18.05-183 

Sheraton,  Thomas,  1751-1806.  Sheraton  furni- 
ture designed  from  the  Cabinet-maker's 
and  upholsterer's  drawing-book,  1791-94, 
with  a  preface  by  Ralph  Edwards.  London, 
Tiranti.  1945.  12  pp.  84  (1.  c.  74)  plates. 

8185.02-751 

Iconography 

Davids,  Arlette.  Flowers.  Drawn  by  Arlette 
Davids,  text  by  Princess  Bibesco,  Tulips, 
hyacinths,  narcissi.  Paris.  [1946.]  [7l  PP- 
[32]  colored  plates.  *4092B.no 

Look.  Look  at  America;  the  country  you 
know — and  don't  know.  Houghton  Miff- 
lin. [1946-  Illus.  *4098.02-uo 


156 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Painting 

Alger,  Joseph.  Get  in  there  and  paint  ...  il- 
lustrated by  Alfred  S.  Piane  and  Norman 
Tate.  Crowell.  [1946.]  59  pp.  Illus. 

8070.06-  103 

Brook,  Alexander.  Alexander  Brook.  New- 
York,  American  Artists  Group.  [1945.] 
[64]  pp.  8060.06-350 
Includes  53  pages  of  illustrations. 

Buffalo  fine  arts  academy.  Charies  Burch- 
field;  a  retrospective  exhibition  of  water 
colors  and  oils,  1916-1943.  April  14-  May 
15,  1944.  The  Buffalo  fine  arts  academy, 
Albright  art  gallery,  Buffalo,  New  York. 
[Buffalo,  Holling  Press.  1944.I  30pp.  54 
plates.  8060.06-354. 
Introduction  signed:  A.  C.  Ritchie. 

Chang,  Shu-chi.  Reproductions  of  paintings. 
1945?  8  colored  plates.  *Cab.8o.27g.i4 

Christ-Janer,  Albert.  Boardman  Robinson 
.  .  .  with  chapters  by  Arnold  Blanch  and 
Adolf  Dehn.  Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1946.] 
xv,  131pp.  Illus.  126  pp.  *8o6o.o6-67i 

Degenhart,  Bernard.  Pisanello.  [Torino.l 
[1941.]  84  pp.  163  plates  on  69  11.  VII 
colored  mounted  plates.  *4io3.04-832 

Grosz,  George.  A  little  yes  and  a  big  no; 
the  autobiography  of  George  Grosz,  illus- 
trated by  the  author,  translated  by  Lola 
Sachs  Dorin.  Dial  Press.  1946.  343  pp. 
Plates.  8064-05-570 
Grosz  is  a  German  illustrator  who  came  to  this 
country  after  the  rise  of  Hitler. 

Gruskin,  Alan  D.  Painting  in  the  U.  S.  A. 

Doubleday.  1946.  223  pp.  Illus.  8060.06-177 

Bibliography:  pp.  213-215. 
Karfiol,  Bernard.  Bernard  Karfiol.  New  York, 

American  Artists  Group.  [1945.]   [64]  pp. 

Illus.  8060.06-645 

Includes  51  pages  of  illustrations. 
McEacharn,  Neil.  Contemporary  Australian 

art.  Sydney.  [  1 945.]  50  pp.  incl.  plates. 

8062.08-103 

Contents.  —  Foreword  by  Neil  McEacharn.  — 
The  McEacharn  collection  by  S.  Vre  Smith.  — 
Illustrations.  —  Biographical  notes. 
Rewald,  John.  The  history  of  impressionism. 
New  York,  Museum  of  Modern  Art.  1946. 
474  pp.  Plates.  8063.06-1 1 1 

This  profusely  illustrated  history  extends  from  the 
Paris  World's  Fair  of  1855  to  1927. 

Riggs,  Arthur  Stanley.  Titian  the  magnifi- 
cent and  the  Venice  of  his  day.  Bobbs- 
Merrill.  [1946.]  390  pp.  Plates.  4104.07-908 

Solomon  R.  Guggenheim  foundation.  In 
memory  of  Wassily  Kandinsky.  The  Solo- 
mon R.  Guggenheim  foundation  presents 
a  survey  of  the  artist's  paintings  and  writ- 
ings arranged  and  edited  by  Hilla  Rebay 
.  .  .  [New  York.  1945.]  117  pp.  Plates. 

8066.07-  650 

Swarzenski,  Hanns.  The  Berthold  missal,  the 
Pierpont  Morgan  library  ms  710  and  the 
scriptorium  of  Weingarten  abbey.  New 
York,  Pierpont  Morgan  Library.  1943.  138 
pp.  *8o79.04-20o 

Tavant,  France.  The  frescoes  of  Tavant;  in- 
troduction by  P.  H.  Michel.  Studio  Pub- 
lications. [1944. J  11,  12  pp.  XIX  col.  plates. 
In  portfolio.  *4IOI.o6-8oi 

U.  S.  National  gallery  of  art.  Favorite  paint- 
ings from  the   National  gallery  of  art. 


Washington,  D.  C.  Fifteen  color  repro- 
ductions with  descriptive  notes  by  mem- 
bers of  the  National  gallery  staff.  New 
York,  Archway  Press.  [1946.]  79  pp. 

4061.05-207 

Ziircher,  Richard,  editor.  Italienische  Wand- 
malerei;  Meisttrwerke  des  Freskos  vom 
Mittelalter  bis  Tiepolo  Einfuhrung  und 
Bilderlauterungen  von  Richard  Ziircher. 
Zurich.  [1944.]  230  pp.  172  illus.  VI  colored 
plates.  *4i02.oi-io8 

Miscellaneous 

Chambers,  Bernice  Gertrude,  editor.  Keys  to 
a  fashion  career.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xvi, 
238  pp.  Illus.  8193.06-310 

Chase,  Edward  T.  The  etchings  of  the 
French  impressionists  and  their  contem- 
poraries. Paris  .  .  .  distributed  by  Crown 
Publishers,  New  York.  1946.  6  pp.  [71] 
plates.  *8i56.07-i02 

Loggins,  Vernon.  Two  romantics  and  their 
ideal  life:  Elisabet  Ney,  sculptor.  Ed- 
mund Montgomery',  philosopher.  New 
York,  Odyssey  Press.  1946.  385  pp.  16 
plates.  8083.04-787 

Smith,  Dan  E.  Square-serif  .  .  .  Introduction 
by  Douglas  C.  McMurtrie.  Chicago, 
Kroch.  1945.  [n]-io6pp.  Illus.  4099.02-132 


Folk-Lore.  Mythology 

Hole,  Christian.  Witchcraft  in  England  .  .  . 
London,  Batsford.  [1945.]  167  pp.  Plate*. 

BF1581.H6 

"I  have  attempted  only  to  give  a  general  impres- 
sion of  witchcraft  in  England  as  it  appeared  when 
all  believed  in  it  and  in  the  subsequent  period 
when  doubt  was  in  the  ascendant/' — Author's 
Preface. 

Striking  illustrations  by  Mevyn  Peake. 
Schwab,  Gustav,  1792-1850.  Gods  and  heroes; 
myths  and  epics  of  ancient  Greece.  [New 
York,]  Pantheon.  [1946.]  764  pp.  Illus. 

BL725.S32 

Translated  from  the  German  text  and  its  Greek 
sources  by  Olga  Marx  and  Ernst  Morwitz.  Intro- 
duction  by    Werner  Jaefrer. 

Translation  of  "Die  schonsten  Sagen  des  klassi- 
schen  Altertums." 


History 

Palestine 

Hitti,  Phillip  K.  Testimony  before  the  Anglo- 
American  committee  on  Palestine.  Wash- 
ington, Arab  Office.  1946.  2-14  numb.  11. 

Reproduced  from  type-written  copy.  DSl26.H5 

Jewish  agency  for  Palestine.  Memorandum 
submitted  to  the  Anglo-American  com- 
mittee, by  the  Jewish  agency  for  Pales- 
tine, Jerusalem,  March  1946.  [New  York, 
American  Zionist  Emergency  Council. 
1946.]  51  pp.  DS126.J39S 
"Reproduced  from  the  original,  published  in  Jeru- 
salem." 

Shibli,  Jabir.  Our  Palestine:  conflict — or  co- 
operation? [State  College,  Pa.]  1946.  40 
pp.  Illus.  DS126.S45 

Welles,  Sumner.  Palestine's  rightful  destiny. 
[New  York,  American   Christian  Pales- 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


*57 


tine  Committee.  1946.]  16  pp.  DS126.W45 
"Address  delivered  .  .  .  May  14,  1946  at  the 
Maryland  Christian  conference  on  Palestine  held 
in  Baltimore." 

World  War  II  and  After 

Dulles,  Allen  W.,  and  Beatrice  P.  Lamb. 
The  United  nations,  with  a  statement  by 
Edward  R.  Stettinius,  jr.  .  .  .  Foreign 
Policy  Ass'n.  [1946.]  06  pp.  Illus. 

*757i-96.59 

Kohs,  S.  C.  Jewish  war  records  of  world 
war  II,  by  S.  C.  Kohs  .  .  .  Jews  in  the 
armed  forces,  by  Louis  Kraft.  [New  York, 
National  Jewish  Welfare  Board.  1946.]  28 
pp.  D810.J4K6 
"Reprinted  from  the  American  Jewish  year  book, 
vol.  47" 

Koop,  Theodore  F.  Weapon  of  silence.  Univ. 
of  Chicago.  [1946.]  xi,  304  pp.  D799.U6K6 
An  account  of  wartime  civilian  censorship. 

Roberts,  Katharine.  And  the  bravest  of  these. 
Doubleday.  1946.  311pp.  D829.B4R6 
A  first-hand  account  of  conditions  in  post-war 
Belgium  with  light  thrown  on  what  occurred  dur- 
ing the  war. 

U.  S.  Office  of  naval  operations.  U.  S.  Navy 
at  war,  1941-1945.  Official  reports  to  the 
secretary  of  the  Navy,  by  Fleet  Admiral 
Ernest  J.  King,  U.  S.  Navy,  commander 
in  chief,  United  States  fleet  and  chief  of 
naval  operations.  Washington.  1946.  vii, 
305  pp.  Maps.  *D773.A53 
Part  II  of  the  annual  report,  1944/45,  of  the 
secretary  of  the  Xavy.  U.  S.  Xavy  dept. 


Miscellaneous 

Dowdey,  Clifford.  Experiment  in  rebellion. 
Doubleday  1946.  xxi,  4^5  pp.  Plates. 

E487.D6 

An  inside  history  oi  the  Civil  War  South,  with 
the  scene  laid  at  Richmond,  the  Confederate  capi- 
tal. 

Sciaky,  Leon.  Farewell  to  Salonica;  portrait 
of  an  era.  New  York,  Wyn.  1946.  241  pp. 

DR701.S3S35 

The  author  tells  of  his  boyhood  in  Salonica  when 
it  was  still  under  Turkish  rule  and  what  happened 
to  the  city  later  on  during  the  Balkan  and  first 
World  Wars. 


Literature 

Essays.  History  of  Literature 

Barea,  Arturo.  Lorca  the  poet  and  his  people, 
translated  from  the  Spanish  by  Usa  Barea. 
London,  Faber.  [1945.]  103  pp. 

PQ6613.A763Z55 

A  study  of  the  attitudes  expressed  in  the  poetry 
of  the  Spanish  poet  Federico  Garcia  Lorca. 

Kocher,  Paul  Harold.  Christopher  Marlowe, 
a  study  of  his  thought,  learning,  and  char- 
acter. Univ.  of  North  Carolina.  1946.  x, 
344  PP.  PR2673.K6 
"Marlow  stands  out,  it  seems  to  me,  as  one  of  the 
most  highly  subjective  playwrights  of  his  age  .  .  . 
Criticism  of  Christianity  .  .  .  appears  in  all  the 
biographical  documents  as  the  most  absorbing  in- 
terest of  his  life." — P.  4. 

Maurois,  Andre.  fetudes  Americaines.  New 
York,  Edition  de  la  liaison  franchise. 
1945.  9-316  pp.  PS103.M3 

wearing,  Homer.  English  historical  poetry. 


1 599-1641.  Philadelphia.  1945.  222  pp. 

PR508.H5N4 

"The  works  discussed  .  .  .  are  narrative  poems  on 
subjects  drawn  from  English  history  composed 
during  the  last  years  of  Elizabeth,  the  reign  of 
James  I,  and  the  first  decade  and  a  half  of  the 
reign  of  Charles  I." — Preface. 
Bibliography:  pp.  [206]-2i4. 

Starr,  Nathan  Comfort.  The  dynamics  of 
literature.  Columbia  Univ.  1945.  viii,  123 
pp.  '  PN85.S66 

''This  book  aims  to  develop  the  faculty  of  making 
judgments  about  literature." — Foreword. 

Van   Gelder,  Robert.  Writers  and  writing. 

Scribner.   1946.  x,  381  pp.  PN149.V33 

"These  interviews  first  appeared  in  the  New  York 
Times  book  review." 

Fiction  in  French  and  Spanish 

Albuquerque,  Matheus  de.  A  mulher  e  a 
mentira.  Rio  de  Janeiro.  [1946.]  [11I-206 
pp.  PO9697.A45M8 

Buhet,  Gil.  La  cache  dtt  golo;  roman.  Paris. 
[1946.]   [i3]-363  PP-  PQ2603.U53C3 

Camus,  Albert.  L'etranger.  Pantheon  Books. 
[1946.]  171  PP-  PQ2605.A3734E8 

Sechan,  Olivier.  Chemins  de  nulle  part; 
roman.  Paris.  [194=;.]  256  pp. 

PQ2637.E23C45 

Triolet,  Elsa.  Personne  ne  m'aime;  roman. 
Paris.  [1946.]  252  pp.  PQ2639.R57P4 

—  Lc  premier  accroc  coute  deux  cents  francs ; 
nouvelles.  Paris.  [Montreal.  1945-1  [9l- 
417  PP-  PQ2639.R57P7 
Contents.  — 1  Les  amants  d' Avignon.  —  La  vie 
privee  ou  Alexis  Slavsky.  —  Cahiers  enterres  sous 
un  pecher.  —  Le  premier  accroc  coute  deur  cents 
francs. 

Stories  and  Poems 
Aragon,   Louis.    Broceliande;   poeme  .   .  . 
Neuchatel.  [1945.]  "-55  PP- 

PQ2601.R2B7  1945 
Lohan,  Robert,  editor.  Christmas  tales  for 
reading  aloud.  Stephen  Dave.  [1946.]  Q- 
395  pp.  Illus.  PN6071.C6L6 
A  distiucm-e  anthology,  containing  the  Gospel 
accounts,  legends,  and  stories  serious  and  gay, 
marked  with  sentiment  or  humor.  A  final  section 
contains  "twelve  great  poems." 
Tolstoi,  Leo,  1828-igio.  Anna  Karenina,  trans- 
lated from  the  Russian  by  Constance 
Garnett,  illustrated  by  Laszlo  Matulay, 
introduction  by  James  T.  Farrell.  World 
Pub.  Co.  [1946.I  912  pp.  Illus. 

PG3366.A6G35  194& 
The  Living  Library'  edition. 


Local  History 

Andrews,  Wayne.  Battle  for  Chicago.  Har- 
court,  Brace.  [  1 946. 1  viii,  358  pp. 

F548.3A58 

The  story  of  Chicago's  great  fortunes  and  how 
they   were  made. 
Bibliography,  pp.  339-349- 

Cook,  Arthur  Malcolm.  Boston  goes  to  Mas- 
sachusetts .  .  .  with  an  introduction  by  the 
Right  Hon.  Earl  Halifax.  Boston  [Eng.]. 
Church  House.  1946.  44  pp.  Plates. 

DA690.B68C61 

Hooper,  Wilfred.  Reigate:  its  story  through 
the  ages ;  a  history  of  the  town  and  parish 
including  Redhill.  With  illustrations  and 


158 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


maps.  Guildford,  Surrey  Archaeological 
Soc.  1945.  217  pp.  Plates.  DA690.R36H6 

Pennsylvania,  Department  of  Commerce.  My 
Pennsylvania;  a  brief  history  of  the  com- 
monwealth's sixty-seven  counties.  Pub- 
lished by  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, prepared  and  produced  by  the 
State  dept.  of  commerce  with  the  assist- 
ance of  the  state  historical  and  museum 
commission  .  .  .  [Harrisburg.  1946.]  165 
pp.  Illus.  F149.P42 

Smith,  R.  A.  L.  d.  1944.  Bath  .  .  .  with  84  il- 
lustrations from  engravings,  paintings, 
and  photographs,  by  Paul  Fripp,  and 
others.  Scribner.  [1946.]  vii,  o-njpp. 

DA690.B3S54 

A  history  of  the  famous  English  watering-place, 
called  the  Queen  City  of  the  West,  from  Roman 
times  through  the  time  of  Jane  Austen,  with  an 
Epilogue  telling  of  its  fate  in  the  late  war. 
The  author.  Lieutenant  R.  A.  Lendon  Smith,  died 
on  April  28,  1944- 


Military  Science 

Gaulle,  Charles  de.  Vers  l'armee  de  metier. 
Paris.  1944.  230  pp.  UA700.G3 

U.  S.  Joint  board  on  scientific  information 
policy.  U.  S.  rocket  ordnance,  develop- 
ment and  use  in  world  war  II.  Released  by 
the  Joint  board  on  scientific  information 
policy  for:  Office  of  scientific  research 
and  development.  War  department  [andl 
Xavy  department.  [Washington.  1946.] 
57  pp.  IHus.  *UF767.U59  1946 


Music 

Literature 

Carmichael,  Hoagy.  The  Stardust  road.  Rine- 
hart.  [1946.]  156  pp.  ML410.C327A3 

Crosby,  Ted.  The  story  of  Bing  Crosby  .  .  . 
with  a  foreword  by  Bob  Hope.  World 
Pub.  Co.  [1946.]  239  pp.  Plates. 

ML420.C93C7  1946 
A  revised  edition  of  "Bing,  by  Ted  and  Larry 
Crosby,"  published  in  1937. 

"List  of  Bin?  Crosby's  motion  pictures":  pp.  227. 
"List  of  Bing  Crosby's  recordings" :  pp.  229—239. 

Emmanuel,  Maurice.  Antonin  Reicha.  Bio- 
graphie  critique,  illustree  de  douze  repro- 
ductions hors  texte.  Paris.  1937.  124  pp. 
Illus.  Music.  ML410.R28E5 

"Liste  des  cuvrages  d'Antoine  Reicha":  pp.  [113] 
-117. 

Garland,  Wallace  Graydon.  Popular  song- 
writing  methods;  the  unit  system  for 
composing  melody,  harmony,  rhythm  and 
lyrics  .  .  .  foreword  by  Sigmund  Spaeth. 
New  York,  American  Music  Guild.  1942. 
21-324  pp.  Illus.  MT67.G17P6 

Hindemith,  Paul.  Elementary  training  for 
musicians.  Mew  York,  Associated  Music 
Publishers.   [1946.I  xiii.  237  pp.  Illus. 

MT35.H6 

Leichtentritt,  Hugo.  Serge  Koussevitzky,  the 
Boston  symphony  orchestra  and  the  new 
American  music.  Harvard.  1946.  109  op. 

(*)ML422.K7L4 

McSpadden,  J.  Walker.  Operas  and  musical 
comedies    Crowell.    [1946]   xxvi.  607  pp. 


Illus.  Music.  *MT95.Mi54 
A  revision  of  the  author';,  previous  works  "Opera 
Synopses"  and  "Light  Opera  and  Musical  Come- 
dy." 

Scores 

Galilei,  Vincenzo,  d.  1591.  Contrapvnti  a  dve 
voci,  1584;  edited  by  Louise  Rood.  Smith 
College.  [1945  ]  59  PP-  *M484.753.8 

Smith  college  music  archives,  no.  VIII. 
With  reproductions  of  the  original  title-page  and 
dedication  cf  the  canto  part. 
Score :  canto  and  tenorc ;  without  words. 
"Re-published  in  modern  notation  ...  for  students 
of  counterpoint  or  for  violin  with  viola  or  'cello." 
Rachmaninoff,  Sergei.  1873-1943.  Album  of 
favorite    Rachmaninoff    piano  composi- 
tions. Chicago,  Cole  Pub.  Co.  [1944.!  192 
pp.  M22.R12B2 
Edited  by  John  Bach. 

Oratory.  Speech 

Butler,  Jessie  Haver.  Time  to  speak  up;  a 
speaker's  handbook  for  women.  Foreword 
by  Nancy  Astor  (the  Viscountess  Astor 
C.  H.)  Harper.  [1946.]  xxii,  264  pp. 

PN4121.B9 

"Representative  speeches  delivered  by  nationally 
important  women  during  the  war  years,  1940- 
1946":   pp.   21 1-253. 

Herendeen,  Jane  Effie.  Speech  quality  and 
interpretation,  theory,  method,  material. 
Harper.  [1946.]  xxiv,  382  pp.  PN4145.H4 

"Selections  listed  for  interpretation":  pp.  361-36^. 
Bibliography:  pp.  367-372. 

Psychology 

Horney,  Karen,  editor.  Are  you  considering 
psvchoanalysis?  Norton.  [1946.]  vi,  7-262 
pp.  RC343.H64 

Young.  Kimball.  Social  psychology  ...  2d 
edition.  Crofts.   1946.  viii.  578  pp. 

HM251.Y58  1946 


Religion.  Theology 

Considine,  John  J.  Call  for  forty  thousand. 
Longmans,  Green.  [1946.]  vi,  9-319  pp. 
Plates.  F1409.C74 
Father  Considine  takes  the  reader  through  Latin 
America,  especially  through  the  great  \-2lIeys  away 
from  urban  centers,  among  the  poor  natives.  His 
call  is  for  forty  thousand  priests  who  are  greatly 
needed  to  maintain  Catholic  lite  in  these  areas. 

Newman,  John  Henry,  Cardinal,  1801-1890. 
Apologia  pro  vita  sua,  being  a  history  of 
his  religious  opinions  .  .  .  with  an  intro- 
duction by  Maisie  Ward.  Sheed  &  Ward. 
1946.  xv,  232  pp.  BX4705.N5A3  1946 
Mai«ie  Ward,  in  her  Introduction,  reviews  the 
controversy  between  Cardinal  Newman  and  Charles 
Kingsley  out  of  which  the  Apolooia  grew. 

Scheeben,  M.  J.,  1835-1888.  Mariology  .  .  . 
translated  bv  Rev.  T.  L.  M.  J.  Geukers. 
Herder.  1946-  BT601.S252 
Matthias  Joseph  Scheeben  was  a  distinguished 
German  Catholic  theologian. 

"The  Mariology  is  generally  considered  the  most 
beautiful  and  original  part  cf  Scheeben's  Dogmatic 
Theoloay." — Translator's  Preface. 
Teresa,  Saint,  151 5-1 582.  The  complete  works 
of  Saint  Teresa  of  Jesus,  translated  from 
the  critical  edition  of  P.  Silverio  de  Santa 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


i59 


Teresa,  C.  D.,  and  edited  by  E.  Allison 
Peers.  Shced  &  Ward.  1946.  3  v. 

BX890.T352  1946 

Contents.  —  I.  General  introduction:  Life:  Spiri- 
tual relations.  —  II.  Book  called  Way  of  per- 
fection: Interior  castle:  Conceptions  of  the  love 
of  Coil :  Exclamations  of  the  soul  to  God.  — 
HI.  Book  of  the  foundations:  Minor  prose  works: 
Poems :   Documents  —  indices. 

Wagenknecht,  Edward,  editor.  The  story  of 
Jesns  in  the  world's  literature  .  .  .  with 
illustrations  by  Fritz  Kredel.  New  York, 
Creative  Age  Press.  [1946.]  473  pp. 

BT540.W3 

An  anthology  of  prose  and  verse,  including  the 
works  of  a  large  numher  of  contemporary  and 
near-contemporary  writers. 

"This  is  a  book  of  creative  literature  about  Jesus, 
not  a  book  of  opinions  .  .  .  or  of  theological 
speculations." — Editor's  Introduction. 
White,  Ellen  G.,  1837-1915.  The  story  of 
patriarchs  and  prophets ;  the  conflict  of  the 
ages  illustrated  in  the  lives  of  holy  men  of 
old.  Mountain  View,  Calif.,  Pacific  Press 
Puh.  Ass'n.  [1945.]  xi-xxvi,  793  pp.  Illus. 

BX6111.W58  1945 

Science 

Physics.  Chemistry 

Cork,  James  M.  Radioactivity  and  nuclear 
physics.  Ann  Arbor,  Mich.  1946.  x,  175  pp. 
Illus.  8255.12 

Glasstone,  Samuel.  The  elements  of  physical 
chemistry.  Van  Nostrand.  [1946.]  vii,  695 
pp.  Illus.  8290.50 

Heising,  Raymond  A.,  compiler.  Quartz 
crystals  for  electrical  circuits,  their  design 
and  manufacture.  Van  Nostrand.  1946. 
vii,  563  pp.  Illus.  8248.7 
Articles  by  various  authors. 

Jost,  Wilhelm.  Explosion  and  combustion 
processes  in  gases  .  .  .  Translated  by 
Huber  O.  Croft.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xv, 
621  pp.  Illus.  8295.13 

"Published  and  distributed  in  the  public  interest 
by  authority  of  the  Alien  property  custodian  un- 
der license  number  A— 953." 

Korff,  Serge  A.  Electron  and  nuclear  counters ; 
theory  and  use.  Van  Nostrand.  [1946.I  v- 
xi,  212  pp.  8254.19 

Miscellaneous 

Snyder,  Laurence  H.  The  principles  of  he- 
redity. 3d  edition.  Heath.  [1946.]  xvi,  450 
pp.  Illus.  QH431.S658  1946 

True,  Webster  P.  The  first  hundred  years  of 
the  Smithsonian  institution,  1846-1946. 
Washington.  1946.  viii,  64  pp.  Q11.S8T7 

Sociology 

Kotite,  Edward  A.  Jobs  and  small  businesses ; 
a  simple,  easy-to-understand  analysis  and 
guide  for  those  who  seek  careers  in  jobs 
or  in  small  businesses  of  their  own,  by 
Edward  A.  Kotite,  designed  by  John  De- 
Xero.  New  York,  Graphic  Enterprises. 
1946.  128  pp.  Illus.  9381.A169 

Morgan,  Arthur  Ernest.  Nowhere  was  some- 
where; how  history'  makes  Utopias  and 
how  Utopias  make  history.  Univ.  of  North 
Carolina.  1946.  234  pp.  HX806.M6 
The  author  believes  that  the  writers  of  the  great 


Utopias  have  been  gTeatly  influenced  by  societies 
which  have  actually  existed  and  also  by  Utopian 
legends  of  great  antiquity. 

[National  foremen's  institute,  inc.]  How  to 
handle  collective  bargaining  negotiations. 
[New  York.  1946.]  *933i.n63A44 

"This   is  a  confidential   manual    for  management 
prepared  by  C.  F.  Mugridge,  consultant  in  labor 
relations,  in  collaboration  with   the  editorial  staff 
of  Executive's  labor  letter." 
Loose-leaf.  Reproduced  from  type -written  copy. 

Peterson,  Elmer,  editor.  Cities  are  abnormal. 
Univ.  of  Oklahoma.  1946.  xvi,  263  pp. 

HT123.P4.S 

Various  specialists  discuss  the  problems  of  urbani- 
zation. 

Smith,  William  J.  Spotlight  on  labor  unions. 
Essential  Books,  Duell,  Sloan  and  Pearce. 
[1946.]    viii,   150  pp.  9331.8873A178 

A  middle-of-the-road  view  of  the  labor  situation. 
"A  total  reorganization  of  industry  itself,  as  an 
organic  society,   is  called  for."  P.  TjS. 


Technology 

Civil  Engineering 

Foell,  Charles  F.,  and  M.  E.  Thompson. 
Diesel-electric  locomotive.  New  York, 
Diesel  Publications.  [1946.]  viii,  54a,  658, 
659B-688B  pp.  Illus.     '  4025A.no 

Murphy,  Glenn.  Advanced  mechanics  of 
materials.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  ix,  307  pp. 
Illus.  4021.294 

Schoklitsch,  Armin.  Hydraulic  structures;  a 
text  and  handbook  .  .  .  translated  by 
Samuel  Shulits  .  .  .  translation  reviewed 
by  Lorenz  G.  Straub.  American  Soc.  of 
Mechanical    Engineers.    1937.   2  v.  Illus. 

*4028.203 


Electrical  Engineering.  Radio 

Coyne  electrical  school,  Chicago.  Electronics 
for  electricians  and  radio  men;  an  in- 
struction and  reference  book,  electronic 
controls,  measurements  and  processes  for 
manufacturing,  commercial  and  home  in- 
stallations, by  the  technical  staff  of  the 
Coyne  electrical  school.  Chicago.  1945.  xvi, 
426  pp.  Illus.  8017L.49R 
Earlier  edition  has  title:  Electronics  for  radio  men 
and  electricians. 

De  Weese,  Fred  C.  Transmission  lines;  de- 
sign, construction  and  performance.  Mc- 
Graw-Hill. 1945.  vii,  297  pp.  Hhis.  , 

8014A.82 

Jackson,  L.  C.  Wave  filters  .  .  .  with  64  dia- 
grams. 2d  edition.  London,  Methuen. 
T 1946.]  vii,  107  pp.  8017B.107 

McNtcol,  Donald.  Radio's  conquest  of  space; 
the  experimental  rise  in  radio  communi- 
cation. Murray  Hill  Books.  [1946.]  x,  374 
pp.  Illus.  8017.684 

Stout,  Wesley  W.  The  great  detective.  De- 
troit, Chrysler  Corp.  1946-  98  pp.  8017D.43 
The  story  of  radar  and  of  Chrysler  corporation's 
part  in  its  development. 

Williams,  Henry'  Lionel.  The  fundamentals 
of  electronics  and  their  applications  in 
modern  life.  Philadelphia,  Blakiston.  1947- 
xi,  231  pp.  incl.  illus.  8017L.62 


i6o 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Young,  Victor  J  a}'.  Understanding  micro- 
waves. New  York,  Rider.  [1946.]  xi,  385 
pp.  Illus.  8017D.44 

Manufacture.  Chemical  Technology 

Barnwell,  Mildred  Gwin.  Cotton  magic;  the 
elementary  principles  of  cotton  manu- 
facture. Clinton,  S.  C,  Jacobs  Press. 
[1945.]   112  pp.  Illus.  8038.83 

Dickey,  George  D.,  and  Charles  L.  Bryden, 
Theory  and  practice  of  filtration.  New- 
York,  Reinhold  Pub.  Corp.  1946.  v,  346 
pp.  Illus  8030H.56 

Johnson,  Thomas  H.  Tricot  fabric  design. 
McGraw-Hill.  1946.  vii.  124  pp.  8038J.39 

Simonds,  Herbert  R.,  and  Joseph  V.  Sher- 
man. Plastics  business.  Van  Nostrand. 
1946.  vii,  439  pp.  Illus.  8031D.56 

Wilson,  Charles  Morrow.  Oil  across  the 
world:  the  American  saga  of  pipelines. 
Longmans,  Green.  1946.  ix,  318  pp. 

8033B.111 

"Pipeline  manual,  by  William  G.  Heltzel" :  pp. 
270—300. 

Bibliography :  pp.  303-307. 

Mechanical  Engineering 

Crouse,  William  Harry.  Automotive  me- 
chanics. McGraw-Hill.  [1946.]  xii,  673  pp. 
Illus.  4035B.94 

—  Everyday  automobile  repairs.  McGraw- 
Hill."  [1946.]  x,  296  pp.  Illus.  4035B.95 

Graton  and  Knight  company.  Mechanical 
packing  manual;  a  handbook  on  leather 
and  synthetic  rubber  packings.  Worcester, 
Mass.,  Graton  &  Knight.  1945.  ix-xi,  321 
(»'•  e.  333)  pp.  Illus.  4030.90 
Bibliography:  pp.  251-254. 

Kuns,  Ray  Forest.  Automobile  fundamentals : 
chassis  and  power  transmission;  con- 
struction, care,  and  repair  of  automobile 
bodies  .  .  .  prepared  by  a  staff  of  automobile 
experts  under  the  supervision  of  Ray  F. 


Kuns  .  .  .  and  Tom  C.  Plumridge.  Chicago, 
American  Technical  Soc.  1946.  754  pp.  Illus. 

4035B.96 

Metallurgy.  Photography 

American  society  for  metals.  Magnesium  [bv] 
L.  M.  Pidgeon,  J.  C.  Mathes,  N.  E. 
Woldman  [and  others]  A  series  of  five 
educational  lectures  on  magnesium  pre- 
sented to  members  of  the  A.  S.  M.  during 
the  twenty-seventh  national  metal  con- 
gress and  exposition,  Cleveland,  Febru- 
ary 4  to  8,  1946.  [Cleveland.  1946.]  265 
pp.  Illus.  8027.232 

Neblette,  Carroll  Bernard.  Careers  in  photo- 
graph y.  Chicago,  Ziff-Davis.  [1946.]  viii, 
182  pp.  Illus.  '  TR190.N4 
"Selected  bibliography":  pp.  173-178. 

Parker,  Charles  M.  The  metallurgy  of  quality 
steels.  New  York,  Reinhold  Pub.  Corp. 
1946.  248  pp.  Illus.  8025.283 


Travel  and  Description 

Eparvier,  Jean.  Tunisie  vivante.  277  photos 
de  Pierre  Boucher.  36  photos  de  J.  D. 
Bossoutrot.   [Paris?]    [1946.]    155  pp. 

DT250.E63 

Hewitt,  Ray.  Along  western  trails  with  Ray 
Hewitt,  what  to  see,  where  to  play,  best 
accommodations  and  meals.  Hollywood, 
Calif.,  [Western  Travel  Associates.  1946.] 
226  pp.  Illus.  F595.H5  1946 

Puerto  Rico,  Institute  of  tourism.  Guidebook 
to  San  Juan,  Puerto  Rico.  U.  S.  A.  [San 
Juan.  1941.]  63  pp.  Illus.  F1981.S2A5  1941 
Descriptive  text  on  verso  of  folded  map. 
"Glossary  of  Spanish  words  and  phrases  com- 
monly  used   in   Puerto  Rico"':   pp.  61—63. 

Rejano,  Juan.  La  esfinge  mestiza;  cronica 
menor  de  Mexico.  Portada  e  ilustraciones 
de  Miguel  Prieto.  [Mexico.  1945  ]  9-292 
pp.  Illus.  F1215.R4 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 

Volume  XXII,  Number  5 


Contents 

Page 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON  163 
LETTERS  BY  BULWER-LYTTON  (concluded  from  the  April  issue)  175 

By  Frederick  Gillen 

ETCHINGS  AND  LITHOGRAPHS  BY  JOSEPH  PENNELL  183 

By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

GRAPHIC  ARTS  PROCESSES:  LITHOGRAPHY  185 

By  Muriel  C.  Figenbaum 

FIRST  EDITIONS  188 

TEN  BOOKS:  SHORT  REVIEWS 

William  L.  Langer:  Our  Vichy  Gamble  189 

Samuel  Eliot  Morison:  Operations  in  North  African  Waters  189 
Commission  on  Freedom  of  the  Press:  A  Free  and  Responsible  Press  190 

Richard  Crossman:  Palestine  Mission  190 

Maurice  Hindus :  The  Bright  Passage  190 

Henry  Adams:  The  Formative  Years  190 

Arnold  J.  Toynbee:  A  Study  of  History  191 

Ananda  K.  Coomaraswamy :  Am  I  My  Brother's  Keeper  .'  191 

Charles  P.  Curtis:  Lions  under  the  Throne  192 

Charles  Olson:  Call  Me  Ishmael  192 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

King  Charles  I  to  the  Scots  193 

The  Puritan  Family  193 

The  "Baptistes"  of  George  Buchanan  194 

LIST  OF  RECENTLY-ACQUIRED  BOOKS  195 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17, 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library  15-17  Blagden  St.,  May,  1947,  Vol.  XXII,  No.  5 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees ,  for  free  distribution; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 

MAY,  1947 

The  British  in  Boston 

A  MONG  the  most  interesting  documents  of  the  American  Revolution 
■^^■are  the  original  Orderly  Books  in  which  were  noted  all  orders  of 
the  day,  both  from  Headquarters  and  from  company  officers.  The  Li- 
brary has  a  fine  group  of  such  books,  including  a  nine-volume  series  kept 
by  Lieutenant  Colonel  Thomas  Grosvenor  from  1779  to  1782,  and  several 
others  which  have  been  described  in  earlier  issues  of  More  Books.  To 
these  it  has  now  added  the  Orderly  Book  of  General  Thomas  Gage,  kept 
at  the  British  headquarters  in  Boston  by  Lieutenant  Colonel  Stephen 
Kemble  from  December  10,  1774,  to  June  6,  1775.  It  extends  to  over  a 
hundred  pages. 

British  Orderly  Books  relating  to  the  siege  of  Boston  are  extremely 
rare,  and  this  one  is  particularly  important  because  it  reflects  the  grow- 
ing tension  between  the  troops  stationed  in  Boston  and  the  American 
revolutionists.  The  last  portion  of  the  manuscript  deals  with  the  out- 
break of  the  war.  Lieutenant  Colonel  Kemble,  who  took  down  these 
orders,  was  Deputy  Adjutant-General  of  the  British  Army  in  North 
America  under  General  Gage,  Sir  William  Howe,  and  Sir  Henry  Clinton. 
His  father,  Peter  Kemble,  was  for  thirty  years  a  member  of  the  gov- 
ernor's council  in  New  Jersey,  and  his  sister  Margaret  married  General 
Gage  in  1758.  Kemble  remained  in  his  official  post  until  1779,  when  he 
rejoined  his  own  regiment  in  the  West  Indies.  Several  years  later,  after 
Gage's  death,  he  took  over  the  management  of  his  late  commander's  es- 
tate. In  1805,  after  holding,  one  or  two  military  appointments,  he  re- 
turned to  America  and  lived  in  New  Brunswick,  New  Jersey,  until  his 
death  in  1829. 

Thomas  Gage  arrived  in  Boston  on  May  13,  1774,  as  Captain  Gen- 
eral and  Governor  of  Massachusetts.  Up  to  that  time  his  relations  with 
American  colonists  had  been  very  pleasant ;  but  they  deteriorated  rapid- 
ly. He  had  no  sympathy  with  the  rebel  notions  of  the  "despicable  rabble," 
and  was  convinced  from  the  beginning  that  it  was  impracticable  to  dis- 
arm the  provinces  "without  having  recourse  to  force,  and  being  master 


163 


164 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


of  the  country."  One  of  his  earliest  official  edicts  was  the  Boston  Port 
Bill  which  closed  the  harbor  until  the  East  India  Company  should  be  paid 
for  the  tea  destroyed  at  the  Boston  Tea  Party.  By  January  1775  he  had 
thirty-five  hundred  British  troops  in  the  city;  thereafter  resentment 
mounted  from  day  to  day,  until  the  final  explosion  at  Lexington. 

Gage  was  perfectly  aware  of  the  atmosphere.  On  December  30. 
1774,  he  made  very  specific  arrangements  for  alarm  signals  and  battle 
posts  in  case  of  sudden  emergency.  A  few  weeks  later  he  told  command- 
ing officers  of  regiments  to  "Assemble  their  Officers,  &  Shew  them  the 
impropriety  of  the  Conduct  of  some  of  them,  which  has  Afforded  the 
Kings  Enemys  the  very  Advantage  they  seek,  &  given  room  for  Reflec- 
tions which  Dishonour  the  Service."  On  February  16  he  warned  "the 
Patroles  from  the  Several  Guards  to  be  very  watchfull  in  going  their  Rounds 
&  if  they  observe  Numerous  Parties  of  People  Assembled  in  by  Lanes 
or  otherwise  they  will  immediately  Acquaint  their  Respective  Guards 
with  the  same." 

On  April  19  the  general  commanded,  "The  Troops  not  to  Straggle 
from  their  Quarters,  but  to  be  ready  to  turn  out  with  Arms,  Ammunition 
&  Provisions,  the  moment  they  are  ordered."  Next  day  came  the  grim 
entry,  "The  Corps  to  Send  immediately  to  the  D,  Adj1  Gen1  Returns  of 
their  Kill'd,  Wounded,  &  Missing";  this  was  followed  by  a  stiff  repri- 
mand on  the  twenty-second:  "As  by  the  Report  of  the  Earl  Percy,  &  the 
Officers  in  General,  the  Men  in  the  late  affair  (tho  they  behaved  with 
much  Courage  &  Spirit)  shewed  great  inattention  &  Neglect  to  the  Com- 
mands of  their  Officers,  which  had  they  observed,  fewer  of  them  Would 
have  been  hurt,  the  Gen1  expects  on  any  future  Occation,  that  they  will 
behave  with  more  Discipline,  &  in  a  more  Soldier  like  manner;  And  it 
is  his  most  possitive  Order  that  no  Man  quits  his  Rank  to  plunder  or 
Pillage,  or  enter  an  house,  unless  ordered  so  to  do  under  pain  of  Death." 
It  was  not  until  May  14,  however,  that  Gage  finally  locked  the  stable 
door  on  a  stolen  horse  by  directing:  "Officers  will  Observe  from  their 
different  Encampments,  or  Guards,  any  Signals  that  may  be  made  from 
the  Steples  of  Churches,  or  other  Buildings,  and  will  immediately  send 
to  the  place  to  enquire  into  the  Cause." 

Like  its  American  counterparts,  the  book  shows  up  all  the  harassing 
details  of  a  military  camp  —  Gage's  troubles  with  the  rum-sellers  and 
dram  shops  whose  liquor  poisoned  the  men;  his  repeated  attempts  to 
curb  desertion;  the  carelessness  of  troops  in  letting  powder  and  car- 
tridges get  wet;  and,  in  the  spring  of  1775,  order  after  order  for  the  care 
of  the  sick  in  the  epidemic  of  smallpox  which  swept  the  town.  The  notes  for 
the  last  day  —  June  6  —  mention  the  appointment  of  Generals  Howe, 
Clinton,  and  Burgoyne,  as  "Majors  Gen1  on  the  Staff  of  North  America." 
It  is  to  be  regretted  that  the  account  is  not  carried  at  least  as  far  as  June 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


165 


12,  when  Gage  issued  the  notorious  proclamation  of  martial  law  which, 
in  Abigail  Adams's  forthright  phrase,  superseded  even  "the  father  of 
lies."  It  would  be  interesting  also  to  know  what  references  would  have 
been  made  to  the  Battle  of  Bunker  Hill  on  June  17.  But  perhaps  by  that 
time  Colonel  Kemble  was  too  busy  to  keep  close  track  of  his  notebooks, 
for  the  manuscript  drops  off  in  the  middle  of  a  page. 

Because  of  the  unusual  value  of  this  Orderly  Book,  the  text  is  re- 
printed below  in  its  entirety. 

H.  McC. 


General  Orders  by  His  Excellency  the  Honble  Thomas 
Gage  General  &  Commander  in  Chief,  &c  &c  &c. 
From  10th  Decr  1774  to  6th  June  1775 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Saturday,  10th  Decr  1774. 
The  working  Parties  as  usual. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Sunday,  11th  Decr  1774. 
The  working  Parties  as  ordered  on  the  9,b  Ins*. 

The  Barrack  Master  during  the  course  of  the  first  week  in  every  Month, 
is  to  examine  the  state  of  the  Barracks,  &  the  Barrack  furniture,  &  the  Regts 
are  to  pay  for  all  things  that  are  broke,  Spoiled,  or  missing,  at  the  following 
Rates.  Sterlg. 


S 

d 

S 

el 

A  Bed  case 

7 

6 

A  Shovel 

5 

0 

A  Bolster  case 

1 

0 

A  Poker 

1 

6 

A  pair  of  Sheets 

13 

6 

Candlestick 

1 

0 

A  Blanckett 

9 

0 

Wood  Axe 

4 

8 

A  Rugg 

11 

0 

Buckett  Iron  bound 

4 

8 

Iron  Pott,  boiled 

5 

0 

Wooden  Buckett 

0 

9 

A  pair  Dog  Irons 

13 

0 

Beidle  &  Rings 

4 

0 

A  pair  of  Tongs 

6- 

6 

The  Men  for  the  future  to  Mount  Guard  with  their  Ligings. 
•  As  there  is  a  Gate  way  left  open,  for  the  Troops  to  March  into  the  Com- 
mon the  Regts  are  to  go  that  way  in  &  out,  without  breaking  down  the  Rails, 
which  have  been  repaired  by  order,  since  the  Encampment  broke  up. 


Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  12th  Decr  1774. 

The  Working  party  under  the  direction  of  Capt  Spry  to  be  Augmented 
to  2  Subs,  2  Sergts  2  Corpls  &  50  Privates  till  further  Orders. 


i66 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  13th  Decr  1774. 
The  Working  Party  as  ordered  Yesterday. 

As  Tools  are  missing  from  the  Guards  after  being  Supplyed,  the  Officers 
Commanding  Guards,  where  any  thing  is  lost  or  Damaged,  are  to  be  answer- 
able for  such  difficiencie,  &  that  every  thing  they  Receive,  is  delivered  over 
to  the  Relieving  Officer  who  will  be  Answerable  for  all  that  is  lost  during  the 
time  of  his  Guard. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Wednesday,  14th  Decr  1774. 
The  working  Party  as  usual. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Thursday,  15th  Decr  1774. 
The  working  Party  as  usual. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Friday,  16th  Decr  1774. 

The  Regts  will  make  Returns  of  their  bad  Flints,  that  good  ones  may  be 
given  in  lieu  of  them,  And  will  take  care  that  every  Soldier  have  at  least  two 
good  Flints  always  in  readiness  in  case  they  should  be  called  upon. 

The  Floors  in  all  the  Barracks  under  which  are  Cisterns  filled  with  Water 
are  at  the  first  convinient  Oppertunity  to  be  pulled  up,  the  Cisterns  cleaned 
&  Sweetned  &  filled  with  Sand,  or  Rubbish  if  Necessary,  but  if  it  can  be  done 
without  pulling  up  the  boards,  that  labour  may  be  saved. 

The  Body  of  the  late  Capt"  Maturine  of  the  31st  Reg1  to  be  interred  to 
morrow  at  two  O'Clock  in  the  afternoon,  the  Funeral  Party  to  Consist  of  1 
Capt,  2  Subalterns,  2  Serjts  2  Corp'8  2  Drum13  &  50  Private,  the  Officers  &  Men 
of  the  Ist  Brigade  off  duty,  are  requested  to  attend  the  funeral,  &  any  other 
Off"  who  were  Acquaintance  of  Capt  Maturines. 

After  Orders. 

The  working  Party  to  be  Reduced  to  1  Serj*  &  12  Men. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Saturday,  17th  Decr  1774. 

The  Regts  will  give  in  Returns  of  what  Ammunition  they  want  to  Com- 
pleat  them,  It  is  given  out  as  a  Standing  order  &  to  be  strictly  obeyed  that  the 
Regts  are  constantly  kept  Compleat  with  the  Numbers  of  Rounds  ordered 
without  any  Repertition  of  Orders  for  that  Purpose. 

The  Artillery  will  supply  the  Troops  with  good  Cartridges  at  the  rate  of 
forty  two  pr  Pound. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Sunday,  18th  Dec*  1774. 
The  3d  Brigade  takes  the  Guards  &  Working  Party  as  ordered  the  16th 

Ins*. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  19th  Decr  1774. 

A  General  Court  Martial  to  sit  tomorrow  Morning  at  10  O'Clock,  in  the 
orderly  Room  at  the  Main  Guard,  to  try  Wm  Ferguson  Private  Soldier  in  the 
10th  Reg*  &  such  other  Prisoners  as  may  be  brought  before  them. 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


167 


Major  Smelt  of  the  47th  Reg1  President. 

Members  Members 


Artillery  1  Capt  38th  1 

4th  2  47th  2 

5th  1  52d  2 

18th  1  59th  1 

23d  1 


Capt.  George  Harris  of  the  5th  Reg*  Depy.  Judge  Advocate  to  whom  the 
Names  &  Dates  of  the  Members  Commissions  the  Prisoners  Names  &  Crimes 
&  Evidinces  Names  to  be  given  immediately. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  20th  Decr  1774. 

The  Returns  of  Ammunition  &  Flints  wanting  to  compleat  the  several 
Regts  to  be  given  to  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  Royal  Reg1  of  Artillery 
every  Monday  Morning  at  Nine  &  the  following  Day  a  Person  will  attend  at 
the  Magazine  in  New  Boston,  to  deliver  the  same,  from  Ten  to  one. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Wednesday,  21st  Decr  1774. 

The  Several  Regts  to  make  up  their  half  Yearly  Returns  of  Provisions  & 
deliver  them  immediately  to  the  Dy  Qr  Mr  Gen1. 

A  Carefull  Subaltern,  1  Serj1  1  Corp'  1  Drumr  &  18  Private  to  be  reach- 
to  go  on  Board  one  of  the  Transports  immediately,  this  Detachment  will 
carry  their  Necessarys  with  them  &  the  Officer  will  receive  his  orders  from 
Head  Quarters. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Thursday,  22d  Decr  1774. 
The  Ist  Brigade  gives  the  Guards  &  other  Duties. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Friday,  23d  Decr  1774. 
The  working  Party  to  be  reduced  to  Six  Private. 

At  the  Gen1  Court  Martial  whereof  Major  Thomas  Smelt  of  the  47th 
Reg1  is  President. 

William  Ferguson  Private  Soldier  in  His  Majesty's  10th  Reg1  was  tryed 
for  Desertion,  &  found  guilty  of  the  same,  &  Sentenced  to  suffer  Death. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  approves  of  the  above  Sentence  &  orders  the 
same  to  be  put  in  execution  tomorrow  morning  at  Nine  O'Clock,  by  Shooting 
said  Wm  Ferguson  to  Death  by  a  Platoon  of  the  Reg*  to  which  he  belongs.  The 
Picquets  of  the  Several  Regts  Commanded  by  the  Field  Officer  of  the  Day, 
will  attend  the  execution,  which  will  be  Performed  on  some  proper  spot,  at 
the  back  part  of  the  Common  near  the  Water. 

The  above  Gen1  Court  Martial  is  Desolved. 

The  Picquets  to  Assemble  on  the  Grand  Parade  at  half  an  hour  past 
8  O'Clock. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Saturday,  24th  Decr  1774. 
During  the  Frosty  weather  to  prevent  any  Accident  from  Bayonett  by 
the  Men  falling  they  are  not  to  be  fixed  on  their  Firelocks  till  further  orders. 
This  order  does  not  Regard  Centinels. 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Sunday,  25th  Decr  1774. 
The  Ist  Brigade  takes  the  Guards  &  other  Duties. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  26th  Dec1"  1774. 

A  Guard  of  1  Serg'  1  Corp1  &  12  Private,  to  Parade  at  three  this  After- 
noon Near  the  Barrack  Office,  where  a  Serg'  will  attend  to  conduct  them  to 
the  New  Guard  at  the  Northend,  which  they  are  to  Protect  from  being 
Damaged  by  the  Rable  of  the  Town. 

The  Working  Party  at  the  Lines  to  be  Desolved. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  27th  Dec  1774. 
As  the  Guards  have  been  compleated  w*  every  convenience  allowed  by 
the  Barrack  Regulation,  any  diuiciency  that  may  hereafter  happen  will  be 
reported  immediately  to  the  Town  Major  who  will  order  them  to  be  Repleaced, 
but  should  those  difficiencies  be  found  to  proceed  from  carelessness,  or  will- 
fullness  such  Person  or  Persons  so  offending,  will  be  ordered  to  pay  for  the 
same,  And  for  the  immediate  execution  of  which  the  Officer  Commanding  the 
Guard  will  be  made  Accountable. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Thursday,  29th  Decr  1774. 
A  Qr  Master  of  the  Day  to  be  Appointed,  and  to  be  taken  from  the 
Brigade  on  Duty,  the  Qr  Mr  of  the  Day  with  the  Pioneers  of  the  Several  Reg,s 
to  be  employed  in  the  clearing  away  the  Snow  on  the  Parade,  that  the  Men 
&  Officers  may  stand  dry,  when  the  Guards  are  Assembled,  And  likewise  to 
open  a  Communication  with  the  Magazine  Guard,  &  between  the  Magazine 
&  the  Guard  on  the  Common,  this  to  be  done  after  every  fall  of  snow. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Friday,  30th  Decr  1774. 

The  Alarm  Guns  Will  be  Posted  at  the  Artillery  Barracks,  the  Common 
&  the  Lines,  the  Alarm  given  at  either  of  those  places,  is  to  be  repeated  at  all 
the  rest,  by  firing  three  Rounds  each. 

On  the  Alarm  being  given  the  52d  Reg1  is  immediately  to  Reinforce  the 
Lines,  leaving  a  Captain  &  50  at  the  Neck,  The  5th  Reg'  will  draw  up  between 
the  Neck  Guard  &  the  Liberty  Tree. 

The  4th  or  Kings  own  Reg1  will  Reinforce  the  Magazine  Guard  with  a 
Captain  &  50  and  with  the  Remainder  draw  up  under  Bartons  Point. 

The  43d  Reg*-  will  join  the  Marines  &  together  defend  the  Passage  be- 
tween Bartons  Point  &  Charles  Town  Ferry. 

The  47th  Reg*  will  draw  up  in  Hanover  Street  securing  both  the  Bridges 
over  Mill  Creek. 

The  59th  Reg1  will  draw  up  in  the  Front  of  the  Court  House. 

The  3  Companies  of  the  18th  Reg4  joined  by  those  of  the  65th  Reg'  the 
10th  23d  &  38th  Regts  will  draw  up  in  the  Street  between  the  Generals  House  & 
Liberty  Tree. 

Majors  Martins  Company  of  the  Royal  Reg*  of  Artillery  will  move  with 
expedition  to  the  Lines,  Reinforcing  the  Neck  with  one  Commission'd  Officer 
2  Non  Commission'd  &  12  Men  the  Remainder  of  the  Royal  Reg'  of  Artillery 

will  get  their  Guns  in  order  &  wait  for  orders. 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


If  any  Alarm  happens  in  the  Night,  the  Troops  will  March  to  their  Post 
without  Loading,  &  on  no  Account  to  Load  their  Firelocks,  it  is  forbid  under 
the  Severest  Penalty  to  fire  in  the  Night,  even  if  the  Troops  should  be  fired 
upon,  but  they  are  to  Oppose  &  Route  any  body  that  shall  dare  to  Attack  them 
(with  their  Bayonetts)  And  the  greatest  care  will  be  taken  that  the  Counter- 
sign is  well  known  to  all  the  Corps  &  Small  Parties,  Advanced,  that  in  case 
of  meeting  they  should  know  their  friends  &  not  Attack  each  other  in  the 
Night  thro'  Mistake. 

The  Officers  Commanding  Regts  will  Reconoiter  the  Streets  leading 
from  their  Quarters,  to  their  Respective  Alarm  Posts.  &  fix  upon  the  Streets 
they  intend  passing  thro',  each  taking  a  different  Route. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Saturday,  31st  Decr  1774. 

A  Guard  of  1  Serg1,  1  Corp1,  &  12  Men  to  mount  to  morrow  for  the  Pro- 
tection of  the  Wood  Yard,  &  will  Occupy  the  Guard  Room  left  by  the  i8lh 
Reg*  at  their  former  Barracks  in  Atkins  Street. 

As  it  is  expected  the  weather  will  come  on  more  severe,  whenever  that 
happens  the  Guard  will  Relieve  their  Centrys  every  hour,  or  every  half  hour 
as  the  Cold  is  more  or  less  intense. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  3d  Jan^  1775 

The  Barracks  Chimneys  to  be  Swept  at  least  once  every  Month,  it  is 
expected  the  fires  are  put  out  by  the  time  the  Sweepers  arrive,  that  they  may 
not  be  detained,  longer  than  is  Necessary,  the  Barrack  Master  will  give  notice 
the  Preceeding  Evening  of  the  day,  the  Chimneys  are  to  be  swept. 

When  Officers  want  their  Chimneys  Swept,  they  will  send  their  Names 
&  Places  of  abode  to  the  Barrack  Office. 

Two  Men  of  each  Corps  to  be  sent  tomorrow  morning  at  8  O'Clock  to 
the  Artillery  Barracks,  to  be  employed  in  making  up  Cartridges  for  the  use  of 
the  Troops. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Thursday,  5th  Jan*  1775. 

One  Serj1  &  one  Corp1  to  be  added  to  the  Main  Guard. 
When  working  Parties  are  ordered  the  Qr  Master  of  the  Day  to  Parade 
them  &  see  them  March  off. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Friday,  6th  Jany  1775. 

The  two  Men  of  each  Reg1  ordered  to  attend  the  Artillery  to  make  Car- 
on  that  Duty. 

tridges  for  the  use  of  the  Troops  are  not  to  be  changed  but  to  be  continued 
Notwithstanding  the  orders  that  have  been  given,  Several  Tools  & 
Utensils  are  taken  from  the  Guards,  no  Guard  for  the  future  to  be  Relieved 
till  they  have  made  good  all  that  they  Received  at  their  Mounting,  which 
shall  not  be  forthcoming  at  the  time  of  Relief. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  10th  Jan1"?  1775. 

Soldiers  are  not  to  wear  their  Watchcoats  except  on  Duty,  &  then  only 
when  Centry,  or  lying  down  to  Sleep. 


1 70 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Head  Quarters,  Boston,  11th  Janry  1775. 

The  Guard  at  the  Wood  Yard  to  be  Reduced  to  1  Serj4,  1  Corp1,  &  9 
Private. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  12th  Janry  1775. 

The  5th  &  38th  Regts  to  prepare  setls  of  Muster  Rolls,  commencing  the 
Day  they  came  on  the  British  Establishment  &  ending  the  24th  Septr. 

The  other  Regts  to  make  their  Rolls  for  183  days  from  25th  June  1774, 
to  the  24th  of  Dec1'  following. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  14th  Janry  1775. 

The  Troops  to  Receive  4  days  Salt  &  three  days  fresh  Provisions  till 
further  orders. 

On  Monday  the  4th  23d  43d  Royal  Artillery  &  Artificers. 

On  Tuesday  the  18th  38th  47th  59th  &  65th  Regiments.  And  on  Wednesdays 
the  5th  10th  &  52d  Regts. 

The  Issuing  hours  to  commence  at  9  in  the  morning,  &  an  hour  to  be 
Allowed  each  Reg1  to  receive  their  Provision,  the  Regts  will  attend  in  Rota- 
tion, that  the}'  may  all  Receive  their  Provisions  in  turn  at  the  earliest  hour, 
The  Regts  will  send  two  Different  parties  on  the  days  &  hours  proposed,  one 
to  receive  their  Salt,  &  the  other  to  receive  their  fresh  Provisions.  The  fresh 
to  be  received  at  Tilerton's,  &  the  Salt  at  Greens  Wharfs. 

The  Marrines  will  continue  to  receive  fresh  Provisions  till  further  orders, 
As  well  as  the  Regimental  Hospitals. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  16th  Jany  1775. 

The  four  days  Salt  Provision  the  Troops  receive  from  the  Commissary 
Gen1  will  be  in  all  Species,  the  three  days  fresh  drawn  from  the  Contractors, 
they  will  receive  in  Beef  &  Flour  only,  And  the  Several  Qr  Masters  are  to 
give  receipts  Accordingly. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  17th  Jan17  1775. 

Tomorrow  being  the  Annavirsary  of  the  Queens  Birth  Day,  The  Ar- 
tillery will  at  noon  fire  a  Royal  Salute  of  Twenty  one  Guns  which  will  be  fol- 
lowed by  three  Volleys  from  the  Picquets  of  the  Corps  in  Town. 

The  Picquetts  to  Assemble  on  the  Grand  Parade  &  the  Field  Officer  of 
the  day  will  march  them  to  King  Street,  draw  them  up  just  below  the  Town 
House  &  will  order  them  to  fire  as  soon  as  the  Royal  Artillery  have  done  firing. 

The  General  &  Field  Officers  are  requested  to  meet  the  Governor  & 
Council  tomorrow  at  12  O'Clock  in  the  Council  Chamber  to  Celebrate  the  day. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  18th  Janry  1775. 

A  Detachment  of  an  Officer  &  25  Grenadiers  of  the  4th  Reg1  will  fire 
this  afternoon  in  consequence  of  a  meeting  of  the  Blue  &  Orange  Sosiety. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  19th  Jany  1775. 
The  late  Lieut  Forlow  of  the  Royal  Welsh  Fuzileers  to  be  Buried  to 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


171 


morrow  at  One  O'Clock,  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  Reg'  will  give  proper 
directions  for  the  Funeral  Party  &  interment. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  20th  Jan?  1775. 

The  Battalion  of  Marines  under  the  Command  of  Major  Pitcairn,  to  do 
Duty  with  the  first  Brigade  till  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  21st  fan5'  1775. 

As  Riots  &  Disturbances  have  happened  last  Night  in  Town  between 
Offrs  &  the  Towns  Watch,  A  Court  of  enquiery  compos'd  of  five  Field  Officers 
to  sit  on  Monday  at  10  O'Clock  at  the  Main  Guard,  to  examine  into  the  cause 
&  Circumstance  thereof  &  Report  the  same  to  the  Commander  in  Chief.  For 
this  Duty  Lieu1  Col1  Maddison,  Major  Clerk,  Major  Cairncross,  L1  Col1  Bruce 
&  U  Col1  Hamilton. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  23d  Jany  1775. 

A  Detachment  of  1  Captain,  3  Subs,  4  Serjts  4  Corpls  2  Drum"  &  100 
Private  to  be  ready  to  embark  at  three  O'Clock  this  afternoon  taking  Seven 
days  Salt  Provisions,  &  the  Beding  with  them,  for  the  returning  of  which  into 
their  Barracks  they  will  be  Accountable  to  the  Barrack  Master,  giving  their 
Receipts  for  which  they  take  away.  The  Officers  to  take  only  such  part  of 
their  Baggage  as  will  be  Necessary  for  their  use,  for  the  course  of  Ten  days, 
or  a  fortnight,  this  Detachment  will  embark  at  the  Long  Wharf,  Putting  70 
Men  on  board  the  Sloop  Britainnia  &  the  remainder  on  Board  His  Majesty's 
Armed  Schooner  Diana,  the  Provisions,  Baggage  &  Beding  to  be  put  on  Board 
as  soon  as  Possible,  &  the  Captain  will  call  on  the  General,  at  2  O'Clock  for 
his  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  24th  Jany  1775. 

The  Commanding  Officers  of  Regts  will  Assemble  their  Officers,  &  Shew 
them  the  impropriety  of  the  Conduct  of  some  of  them,  which  has  Afforded  the 
Kings  Enemys  the  very  Advantage  they  seek,  &  given  room  for  Reflections 
which  Dishonour  the  Service,  They  will  point  out  to  them  that  ill  must  ar- 
rise  from  their  Assembling  to  game  &  Drink,  which  lays  a  foundation  for 
Quarrells  &  Riots.  That  Attacking  the  Watch  of  any  Town,  in  all  parts  of  tVie 
World,  must  be  attended  with  bad  Consequence,  for  as  they  are  Appointed 
by  Law,  the  Laws  will  protect  them,  &  no  Person  that  Quarrells  with  them, 
will  get  Satisfaction  for  Injuries  he  may  Receive,  but  on  the  Contrary  will  be 
Condemned.  That  the  Commander  in  Chief  is  Determined  to  make  the  Strict- 
est enquiery  into  the  Conduct  of  all  Officers  Concerned  in  Quarrells  &  Riots 
with  the  Towns  People,  &  to  Try  them  if  in  fault,  Reminds  the  Officers  of 
the  orders  already  given  out  in  that  Respect  &  the  Directions  to  the  Guards 
to  prevent  them. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  27th  Jany  1775. 
After  Orders. 

The  Field  Officer  of  the  Day  to  Visit  the  Main  Guard  &  to  be  received 
by  it,  in  the  same  manner  he  is  received  by  all  the  other  Guards. 


172 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Head  Quarters,  Boston,  28th  Janry  1775. 

The  Several  Corps  to  return  their  empty  Powder  Barrells  to  the  Ord- 
nance Store-keeper. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  29th  Jany  1775. 

The  Court  of  enquiery  ordered  to  sit  the  21st  Ins*  is  Desolved. 

Fourteen  Days  Salt  Provisions  to  be  put  on  board  the  Sloop  General 
Gage  early  to  morrow  morning-  for  the  Detachment  under  the  Command  of 
Captain  Balfour  at  Marshfield. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  31st  Jany  1775. 

A  Garrison  Court  Martial  to  sit  tomorrow  morning  at  10  O'Clock  in  the 
orderly  Room  at  the  Main  Guard,  to  try  Serj1  Mathews  of  the  38th  Reg*  on 
Suspicion  of  Selling  a  Firelock  belonging  to  said  Reg'.  And  such  other  Prison- 
ers as  shall  be  brought  before  them.  1  Captain  &  4  Subalterns  for  this  Duty. 
4th  Reg1  gives  the  Captain. 

A  Guard  of  1  Corp1  &  4  Private  Men  to  Mount  on  Board  a  Transport  for 
the  Protection  of  some  Powder  lodged  in  her,  the  Corp1  will  Receive  his  direc- 
tions from  the  Part}'  of  the  Royal  Artillery  when  he  relieves. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Ist  Febry  1775. 

The  Regts  that  have  not  sent  Subsistance  to  the  Detachment  at  Marsh- 
field  will  take  the  Oppertunity  to  send  a  fortnights  Subsisoe  by  Mr  Bowen. 
And  they  will  get  Necessarys  ready  to  send  their  Men  when  a  Conveyance 
offers,  of  which  they  will  have  notice. 

Six  Women  Wifes  of  the  Men  belonging  to  the  Detachment  to  be  sent 
at  the  same  time  the  Necessarys  go,  who  will  be  employ'd  in  washing  for  the 
Men,  that  they  may  be  kept  clean. 

The  General  having  Complaints  of  Officers  too  often  quiting  their 
Guards,  It  is  His  possitive  orders  th.it  if  any  Officer  is  found  absent  from  his 
Guard,  that  he  be  immediately  Relieved  &  put  in  Arrest. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  2d  Feby  1775. 

Altho  Canteens  have  been  allowed  to  the  Several  Regts  for  the  Con- 
venience of  the  Soldiers,  there  are  Notwithstanding  Complaints  of  Soldiers 
Wifes  keeping  Dram  Shops  in  different  parts  of  the  Town  where  Men  get 
intoxicated  in  a  very  extraordinary  manner,  &  two  Soldiers  killed  by  the 
poisonous  liquors  they  sell  in  one  Night. 

The  Commanding  Officers  will  make  enquiery  among  their  Regiments 
&  give  in  a  Return  of  the  Women  that  hire  Rooms  in  the  Town  to  sell  Drams, 
where  they  live,  &  of  whom  they  hire  their  Rooms. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  4th  Feb*  1775. 

Daniel  Chamberlain  Soldier  in  the  4th  Reg1  tryed  by  a  Garrison  Court 
Martial  of  which  Capt.  Webster  of  the  4th  Reg1  is  President  for  Disposing  of 
His  Majest}'S  arms,  is  found  guilty  &  is  Sentenced  to  receive  five  Hundred 
Lashes.  Serj'  Tho.  Mathews,  Thomas  Whitehead  &  James  McKenzie  all  of 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


i73 


the  38th  Reg'  tryed  by  the  said  Court  Martial  for  Selling-  Arms  &  locks  of 
Firelocks  are  Severally  Acquitted. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  Approves  of  the  above  Sentence,  but  remits 
three  Hundred  lashes  ordered  the  Prisoner  Chamberlain  &  orders  he  receives 
the  two  remaining  hundred  by  the  Drumrs  of  his  own  Reg1.  The  above  Gar- 
rison Court  Martial  is  Desolved. 

Whatever  Supernumerary  Arms  may  be  in  any  of  the  Regts  to  be  im- 
mediately Collected,  &  the  Commanding  Officers  will  order  them  to  be  put  in 
store  &  kept  there. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  5th  Feby  1775. 

A  Working  Party  of  1  Serj'  1  Corp1  &  12  Private  to  Parade  to  morrow 
morning  at  8  O'Clock.  the  Serjf  will  march  them  to  the  Lines  where  he  will 
receive  his  Directions. 

The  Necessarys  &  Women  ordered  for  the  Detachment  at  Marshfield  to 
be  put  on  Board  the  Sloop  Gen1  Gage,  lying  at  long  Wharf  tomorrow  morning 
at  Daybreak. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  6th  Feby  1775. 

As  four  Tents  &  Marquees  for  Field  Officers  &  26  for  Captains  &  Subalterns 
were  delivered  to  the  5th  &  38th  Reg45.  A  Return  to  be  made  of  the  Names  of 
the  Officers  who  Received  the  same,  which  is  to  be  transmitted  to  the  War 
Office. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  7th  Feby  1775. 

His  Majesty  has  been  pleas'd  to  make  the  following  Promotions  in  the 
Staff  in  North  America.  Viz1 

Quebec. 

Major  Gen1  James  Johnston  to  be  Governor  vice  Gen1  Murray  Removed  8th 
Novr  1774. 

St.  Johns  Newfoundland. 
Colonel  Wm  Amherst  to  be  Lieu1  Governor  vice  Bradstreet  Deceas'd  —  30th 
Novr  1774. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  10th  Feby  1775. 

When  Soldiers  are  found  frequenting  houses  Occupied  by  Soldiers  wifes 
who  sell  Liquor  without  license,  from  whence  the  greatest  Irregularitys  pro- 
ceed, &  the  liquor  Sold  in  such  houses  prove  fatal  to  many  Soldiers,  the  Com- 
manding Officers  will  Direct  such  Persons  to  be  carried  before  a  Magistrate 
with  proper  witnesses,  who  will  order  them  to  be  fined  &  proceed  against  in 
other  Respects  according  to  Law. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  11th  Feby  1775. 

A  Fortnights  Provision  &  Subsistance  to  be  sent  to  the  Detachment  at 
Marshfield,  the  Subsistance  to  be  delivered  to  a  carefull  Serj1  who  will  be  Ap- 
pointed to  receive  it,  &  to  take  care  of  any  thing  else  the  Regts  may  have  to 
send  to  the  Officers  or  Soldiers  at  Marshfield. 


i74  MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  13th  Feby  1775. 

A  Complaint  having  been  made  that  some  of  the  Regts  make  an  improper 
use  of  their  Sheets,  by  carrying  Bread  &c  in  them,  It  is  the  Commander  in 
Chief's  order,  that  no  part  of  the  Barrack  furniture  is  Apply'd  to  any  other 
purpose,  but  such  as  it  is  design'd  for,  or  taken  out  of  the  Barracks  on  any 
Account  whatever. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  16th  Feb*  1775. 
After  Orders. 

The  Patroles  from  the  Several  Guards  to  be  very  watchfull  in  going  their 
Rounds  &  if  they  observe  Numerous  Parties  of  People  Assembled  in  by  Lanes 
or  otherwise  they  will  immediately  Acquaint  their  Respective  Guards  with 
the  same. 

Nine  Private  to  be  added  to  the  Magazine  Guard,  at  Six  O'Clock  this 
Evening. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  17th  Feby  1775. 

A  Guard  of  1  Serj'  I  Corp1  &  Twelve  Private  to  mount  to  morrow  morning 
at  the  Artillery  work  house  near  the  Common. 

Two  Men  of  each  Brigade  to  be  sent  to  the  Royal  Reg4  of  Artillery  to 
do  Duty  with  that  Corps  till  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  18th  Feby  1775. 

The  two  Men  ordered  from  each  Brigade  to  do  duty  with  the  Royal 
Reg*  of  Artillery,  to  return  to  their  Respective  Regts  tomorrow,  &  Six  Men 
from  the  Brigde  for  Duty,  Conducted  by  a  Non  Commission'd  Officer,  to  be 
sent  every  Morning  at  1/2  past  Eight  O'Clock  to  the  South  Battery  where 
they  will  join,  &  do  duty  with  the  Barrack  Guard  of  the  Royal  Artillery. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  4th  March  1775. 

A  General  Court  Martial  to  sit  immediately  at  the  orderly  Room  at  the 
Main  Guard,  to  try  Rob*  Vaugham  Private  Soldier  in  the  52d  Reg1  And  such 
other  Prisoners  as  shall  be  brought  before  them. 

Major  Mitchell  President. 

Royal  Artillery  1  Capt. 

Ist  Brigade  5  d° 

2d       d°  4  d°  Members 

3d       d°  2  d° 

Capt.  Jos.  Ferguson,  Royal  Welsh  Fuzileers  Deputy  Judge  Advocate. 


(To  be  concluded.) 


Letters  by  Bulwer  Lytton 

By  FREDERICK  GILLEN 

(Continued  from  the  April  issue.) 

AT  this  point  something  must  be  said  about  Lytton's  unfortunate  mar- 
riage, since  it  now  has  a  direct  bearing  on  his  political  life.  At  the 
age  of  twenty-four  Lytton  married  the  beautiful  Rosina  Doyle  Wheeler, 
in  spite  of  the  opposition  of  his  mother  and  the  withdrawal  of  her  financial 
support.  The  marriage  was  happy  for  about  six  years.  Two  children  were 
born  —  Robert,  who  became  the  first  Earl  of  Lytton  and  who  wrote  under 
the  pen  name  of  "Owen  Meredith,"  and  Emily,  who  died  very  young. 
The  marriage  finally  broke  down  under  the  strain  of  the  work  Lytton 
had  to  do  in  order  to  support  a  fashionable  style  of  life.  His  wife  resented 
his  neglect  and  became  bitter  after  the  death  of  their  daughter.  There 
was  a  period  of  mutual  infidelity,  separation,  and  reconciliation. 

By  1858  Lytton's  romance  had  completely  soured.  Lady  Lytton  be- 
came obsessed  with  the  idea  that  she  was  being  hunted  and  persecuted. 
She  used  to  send  as  many  as  twenty  letters  a  day  to  Lytton  in  duplicate 
with  the  envelopes  covered  with  insulting  and  even  indecent  inscriptions. 
She  would  address  them  to  the  House  of  Commons,  or  to  country  houses 
and  hotels  where  she  was  sure  that  they  would  be  seen  by  others.  Similar 
letters  were  received  by  all  his  friends,  including  men  like  Dickens  and 
Disraeli.  She  even  took  to  writing  pamphlets  against  her  husband.  Lytton 
had  finally  begun  to  take  steps  to  have  his  wife  confined  when  the  most 
humiliating  experience  of  his  life  occurred.  When  Lord  Derby  invited 
Lytton  to  join  his  Cabinet  as  Secretary  of  State  for  the  Colonies,  he  had 
to  go  down  to  Hertford  on  June  7  to  meet  his  constituents  for  re-election 
to  the  House  of  Commons.  While  Lytton  was  thanking  the  electors  in 
a  field  outside  the  town  his  wife  pushed  her  way  through  the  crowd, 
shook  her  fist  at  her  husband,  and  declared  that  it  was  a  disgrace  to  make 
such  a  man  Minister  for  the  Colonies.  Lytton  fled,  leaving  the  field  to 
Rosina,  who  said  that  he  should  have  been  transported  to  the  colonies 
long  ago  and  that  he  had  murdered  her  child  and  tried  to  murder  her. 
Lytton  then  tried  to  have  her  certified,  but  she  had  defenders  in  the  op- 
position press.  The  poor  husband  was  only  too  glad  to  accept  his  son's 
offer  to  take  her  abroad  and  keep  her  out  of  the  way.  A  letter  written  at 
the  beginning  of  July  1858  reflects  his  worries: 

Heartfelt  thanks  to  you  for  remembering  me  so  kindly  and  writing.  Your 
biography  will  give  the  greatest  delight  to  the  few  who  like  me,  and  is  full 
of  talent  and  interest  for  the  world.  It  was  most  friendly. 

I  am  beset  with  trouble  and  business. 

A  month  later  he  writes:  "Thanks  and  pardon  for  any  seeming  want  of 

175 


176 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


sympathy.  I  fear  that  worry  has  made  me  very  egotistical.  Pray  come 
and  dine  with  me  tomorrow  at  7  o'c  tete  a  tete  in  Park  Lane." 

The  biography  to  which  Lytton  alludes  in  the  first  of  these  two 
letters  was  a  sketch  included  in  a  volume  entitled  The  Derby  Ministry:  A 
Series  of  Cabinet  Pictures,  which  Kent  published  under  the  pseudonym  of 
"Mark  Rochester."  His  praise  of  Lytton  was  rather  fulsome:  "Statesman, 
orator,  poet,  novelist  —  these  are  a  few  among  Sir  Edward  Bulwer 
Lytton's  securities  for  the  remembrance  of  posterity,  as  they  are  un- 
questionably foremost  among  his  manifold  claims  upon  the  attention, 
and  in  great  measure,  also,  upon  the  unstinted  admiration  of  his  con- 
temporaries." 

Lytton  mentions  the  book  again  in  December,  and  also  what  he  had 
done  for  his  old  friend  Miles  Gerald  Keon,  the  novelist,  another  unsuc- 
cessful literary  hanger-on  of  the  great  man: 

I  am  very  sorry  we  should  have  missed  each  other.  I  have  been  here  for 
some  days  and  think  of  going  to  Malvern  next  week  if  possible. 

I  hope  your  book  gets  on  well.  I  thought  it  very  serviceable  to  the  Govt, 
and  a  service  they  ought  not  to  forget. 

You  heard  from  Wolff  what  I  am  doing  for  Keon.  Colonial  secretaryship 
at  Bermuda,  beautiful  scenery  and  at  least  700  a  year.  I  take  it  for  granted 
he  will  accept  it.  My  last  letter  from  him  is  written  dejectedly. 

I  am  poorly,  jaded  and  overworked. 

In  July  1859  ne  writes  of  the  Keons :  "I  have  had  long  letters  from  the 
Keons.  They  seem  to  be  made  lions  of,  and  tho'  they  growl  a  little  at 
their  dens,  still  they  evidently  like  being  lions."  Keon  stayed  in  Bermuda 
until  his  death  in  1875. 

Lord  Derby's  second  administration  survived  less  than  a  year,  but 
the  careers  of  Lytton  and  Disraeli,  its  most  colorful  members,  present 
some  curious  parallels.  In  the  August  1868  issue  of  Blackwood's  Edinburgh 
Magazine  there  appeared  an  unsigned  article  which  purported  to  give  the 
details  of  the  early  acquaintance  of  the  two  authors.  According  to  this 
article  Disraeli  sent  a  copy  of  his  Vivian  Grey  to  Lytton  with  an  apolo- 
getic note  giving  the  reasons  for  the  liberty  he  had  taken.  Disraeli  was 
invited  to  dinner  next  day  and  sat  down  with  the  future  Chief  Justice 
Cockburn  and  an  unspecified  friend  of  Lytton's.  The  article  concludes  : 

The  two  brilliant  novelists  and  the  painstaking  lawyer  who  dined  to- 
gether some  forty  or  more  years  ago  comparatively  obscure  men,  have  all 
risen  to  positions  of  eminence  in  the  state.  Mr.  Cockburn  is  Lord  Chief 
Justice  of  England.  Mr.  Bulwer,  after  serving  as  Secretary  of  State  for  the 
Colonies,  has  become  a  peer  of  the  realm ;  and  Mr.  Disraeli,  on  more  than 
one  previous  occasion  Chancellor  of  the  Exchequer  and  leader  of  the  House 
of  Commons,  is  noAv  First  Lord  of  the  Treasury.  So  much  for  the  practical 
working  of  a  constitution  which  Mr.  Bright  denounces  as  repressive  of 
merit,  and  Mr.  Gladstone,  forgetful  of  what  it  has  done  for  himself,  seeks 
to  overthrow. 


LETTERS  BY  BULWER  LYTTON 


177 


Lytton's  comment  on  this  article  was  mailed  early  in  August  1868: 

The  article  on  Disraeli  is  incorrect  about  the  Dinner  as  well  as  elsewhere. 
In  the  first  place  Disraeli  was  an  author  some  time  before  me.  I  should 
think  Vivian  Grey  was  published  about  2  years  before  Pelliam,  tho'  half  of 
Pclhcun  was  written  before  (in  my  first  year  at  Cambridge).  Disraeli  did  not 
write  to  me  sending  his  book  —  He  wrote  a  few  lines  about  something  else. 
I  have  no  recollection  whom  he  met  at  dinner  the  1st  day  I  asked  him,  but 
believe  it  was  a  much  larger  party  than  4  and  that  Lord  Normanby  was  one. 

If  ever  there  was  this  dinner  of  4  it  would  probably  therefore  have  been 
at  a  later  period  of  acquaintanceship.  I  suspect  the  author  of  the  article  to 
be  S.  C.  Hall.  The  author  makes  a  singular  blunder  as  to  the  date  of  Dis's 
boast  that  the  time  would  come  when  the  House  "shall  hear  me."  He  refers 
it  probably  to  debates  in  long  subsequent  periods  of  his  career.  It  was  the 
last  sentence  of  his  maiden  speech  .  .  . 

In  any  case  the  acquaintance  of  the  two  novelist  politicians  was  an 
old  one.  After  his  marriage,  Bulwer  and  his  wife  set  out  to  conquer  Lon- 
don in  an  age  when,  as  a  fashionable  novelist,  Mrs.  Gore  wrote,  "it  was 
holiday  time  for  people  intent  on  promoting  the  great  happiness  of  the 
greatest  number."  Early  in  1832  the  young  Benjamin  Disraeli  wrote  en- 
thusiastically to  his  sister  about  "a  very  brilliant  reunion  at  Bulwer's 
last  night."  He  listed  the  famous  people  he  had  just  met,  for  he  was  then 
extremely  capable  of  being  impressed.  A  few  days  later  Disraeli  wrote 
again  to  his  sister  that  he  had  dined  with  Bulwer  and  had  met  a  French 
nobleman  of  the  Guizot  school  paying  a  visit  to  a  constitutional  country. 
He  found  his  host  "more  sumptuous  and  fantastic  than  ever" : 

Mrs.  B.  was  a  blaze  of  jewels,  and  looked  like  Juno;  only  instead  of  a 
peacock,  she  had  a  dog  in  her  lap,  called  Faery  and  not  bigger  than  a  bird 
of  paradise,  and  quite  as  brilliant.  We  drank  champagne  out  of  a  saucer  of 
ground  glass  mounted  on  a  pedestal  of  cut  glass. 

Of  course  Disraeli  as  a  novelist  could  not  refrain  from  using  such  good 
material,  and  Lytton  comes  into  his  novel  Endymion  as  "the  Hon.  Bertie 
Tremaine." 

Years  later  the  two  men  even  appeared  together  on  a  festive  aca- 
demic occasion.  Lord  Derby  succeeded  the  Duke  of  Wellington  in  the 
honorable  if  somewhat  empty  office  of  Chancellor  of  Oxford  University, 
and  recommended  both  for  honorary  degrees,  which  were  conferred  in 
the  Sheldonian  Theatre  in  the  presence  of  a  gathering  of  men  like  Mac- 
aulay,  Gladstone,  and  Grote,  the  historian  of  Greece.  Lytton  wrote  from 
Oxford  in  June  1863  to  describe  the  occasion: 

Dis.  is  idolized  by  the  undergraduates  at  Oxford.  My  own  reception  was 
civil  eno'  —  ditto  Alison's.  Warren's  was  more  a  party  affair  —  a  few  hisses 
drowned  out  the  reaction  of  applause.  The  undergraduates  of  Christ's  hooted 
Gladstone.  But  his  strength  is  immense  with. those  of  his  own  standing. 


14 


1 78 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


HOWEVER,  Disraeli  is  not  mentioned  very  much  in  the  remaining 
years.  As  we  shall  see,  he  is  occasionally  discussed,  not  without 
some  indirect  bitterness,  in  later  years  after  Lytton  had  retired  from  any 
very  active  part  in  politics.  As  he  grew  older  Lytton  tended  to  complain 

increasingly  about  his  health.  His  complaints  were  especially  justified  in 
the  case  of  the  increasing  deafness  which  afflicted  him  in  his  later  years. 
He  was  ready  to  grasp  at  any  straw.  On  September  12,  1865,  he  wrote 
from  Stevenage: 

In  the  Sun  of  yesterday  there  is  a  paragraph  of  the  cures  of  deafness  made 
by  a  Dr.  Turnbull.  Have  you  ascertained  if  the  said  Turnbull  be  still  living 
and  practicing  and  if  so  what  is  his  address?  The  test  named  in  the  para- 
graph of  curable  deafness  is  in  my  favour.  Viz :  I  hear  a  watch  tick,  placed 
at  the  forehead  with  the  ears  stopped  up.  But  I  never  heard  of  Turnbull  and 
fancy  he  must  be  dead. 

Lytton's  deafness  was  connected  with  his  elevation  to  the  peerage 
and  his  final  retirement  from  active  politics.  Lord  Derby  formed  his 
third  administration  in  1866  after  the  defeat  of  the  Liberal  Reform  Bill. 
He  offered  Lytton  the  peerage  for  which  he  had  refused  his  recommenda- 
tion to  the  Queen  in  1858.  Lytton  had  always  wanted  at  least  a  barony. 
On  his  elevation  he  wrote  to  his  son  to  remind  him  of  the  time  when 
he  remarked,  "We  must  have  the  Peerage.  I  can  be  but  a  Baron  —  higher 
grades  I  leave  to  you."  At  the  Same  time  he  realized  that  a  seat  in  the 
House  of  Lords  amounted  to  retirement  from  active  political  life,  as  it 
does  to  an  even  greater  extent  today. 

Lytton  wrote  to  acknowledge  Kent's  letter  of  congratulation  on 
July  14,  1866:  "A  thousand  thanks  for  your  affectionate  letter.  I  don't 
know  what  day  1  shall  take  my  seat  etc.  I  believe  there  are  horrid  robes 
to  buy.  I  don't  think  it  will  be  till  the  week  after  next."  Lytton  hoped 
that  he  would  be  able  to  make  speeches  in  the  Lords  on  important  sub- 
jects and  thus  be  of  some  service  to  his  party.  He  found,  however,  that 
he  could  hear  nobody,  not  even  Lord  Derby,  who  spoke  very  clearly. 
Kent  seems  to  have  supplied  him  with  the  address  of  Dr.  Turnbull,  for 
a  year  after  his  first  inquiry  he  was  in  Paris  under  the  care  of  the  "cele- 
brated aurist."  He  wrote  from  the  Hotel  du  Louvre  on  the  Rue  Rivoli 
in  the  middle  of  November  1866: 

Here  I  am  under  Dr.  Turnbull's  care.  He  remembered  you  —  said  he 
cured  you  of  something  in  eyesight.  I  said  it  was  your  father.  He  declared 
it  was  you,  "the  Poet."  He  is  either  a  marvelous  impostor  or  a  marvelous 
genius.  I  hope  the  latter.  He  says  he  shall  quite  cure  my  bronchitis,  and  it 
is  already  better  —  somewhat.  He  says  he  is  certain  of  restoring  perfect 
hearing  to  one  ear  and  greatly  improving  the  other.  He  tests  ears  and  bron- 
chia in  the  same  process,  which  is  distressing  for  the  time  but  not  painful  — 
makes  one's  eyes  water  and  upsets  one  for  an  hour.  He  is  very  positive  in 
his  assurance  and  I  think  I  do  feel  a  wee  bit  better.  So  I  am  going  to  give 


LETTERS  BY  BULWER  LYTTON 


179 


him  a  fair  trial,  and  perhaps  if  he  succeeds,  may  not  go  to  Nice  at  all.  At  all 
events  I  am  here  for  some  time  longer  .  .  . 

I  find  Paris  very  dull  and  don't  know  how  to  pass  the  day,  still  less  the 
evening. 

A  week  later  he  wrote :  "Turnbull  however  occupies  my  mornings.  He 
has  certainly  done  good  to  my  hearing." 

Either  Turnbull  helped  his  hearing  only  temporarily  or  Lytton,  as 
his  grandson  suggests,  "failed  to  overcome  the  nervousness  occasioned 
by  the  chilling  atmosphere  of  the  House  of  Lords,"  for  he  never  spoke 
in  the  Upper  House.  He  prepared  set  speeches  several  times  during  the 
next  few  years,  but  none  of  them  was  ever  delivered.  His  active  par- 
liamentary career,  such  as  it  was,  closed  in  1866.  Lytton  was  at  least 
present,  however,  as  an  observer  in  the  second  reform  period  of  1866.  In 
March  1866  the  great  Liberal  leader,  Gladstone,  introduced  a  moderate 
measure  of  electoral  reform  which  Lytton  at  first  expected  to  pass.  He 
wrote  at  the  beginning  of  April  1866: 

1  hope  you  are  well  and  malady  cured  ...  I  expect  to  be  busy  seeing  all 
sorts  of  people  for  the  next  seven  or  eight  days.  But  hope  to  have  a  talk 
with  you  after  the  second  reading  of  Reform  Bill  which  I  suppose  will  pass 
by  about  15  up  to  20  votes.  But  it  may  be  less. 

After  the  great  debates  on  April  26,  1866,  Lytton  wrote : 

2  fine  speeches  in  different  ways,  Dis's  and  Glad.  Dis  brought  out  quite 
a  new  feature  about  counties  and  was  very  good  about  Bright  —  too  coarse 
about  Glad,  and  unlucky  in  reference  to  an  Oxford  Union  speech.  But  how 
superbly  oratorical  Gladstone's  ending  Avas.  What  a  Delivery.  What 
hupocrisis  which  is  the  word  Demosthenes  I  think  uses,  and  Cicero  trans- 
lates as  Actio.  I  never  more  perceived  the  difference  between  the  eloquence 
of  a  speech,  and  the  oratory  of  a  speaker,  than  in  mentally  comparing  Lowe's 
speech  with  Glad's  speaking. 

Thank  Heaven  Lowe's  speech,  by  the  way,  was  not  made  by  one  of  us. 
I  never  heard  a  speech  more  clever  and  more  unwise  —  less  statesmanlike 
in  every  sense  —  injurious  to  himself  personally,  to  any  party  with  whom 
he  may  act  hereafter  and  by  whom  this  question  must  be  settled,  and  to  the 
true  cause  at  stake  .  .  . 

Lytton  was  acute  in  his  observation.  Robert  Lowe's  anti-democratic 
speech,  made  from  the  Liberal  benches,  against  his  own  party's  measure 
encouraged  the  Conservatives  to  attack  a  bill  which,  as  Lytton's  previous 
letter  indicates,  was  expected  to  pass.  One  sentence  may  indicate  its  na- 
ture: "Whatever  we  learnt  at  Oxford,  we  learnt  that  democracy  was  a 
form  of  government  in  which  the  poor  being  many,  governed  the  whole 
country,  including  the  rich,  who  were  few,  for  the  benefit  of  the  poor." 

The  coiaibination  of  the  Tories  and  the  dissident  Liberal  group 
headed  by  Lowe  led  to  a  parliamentary  crisis.  Gladstone  and  his  Cabinet 
handed  in  their  resignations.  In  the  interim  period  before  the  formation 
of  the  new  cabinet  in  June  1866  Lytton  wrote: 


i8o 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


I  came  here  Friday  for  a  breathing  pause  and  shall  return  to  Town  for 
the  Ministerial  announcement  Tuesday.  I  take  it  for  granted  there  can  be 
none  tomorrow. 

When  I  left  town,  the  impression  was  that  the  Queen  having  declined 
to  accept  the  tendered  resignations,  Ministers  then  suggested  "conditions" 
on  which  to  stay  on.  —  1st  liberty  to  announce  to  Parliament  the  Queen's 
express  command  that  they  should  remain,  2ndly  absolute  leave  to  dissolve. 
That  the  Queen  would  grant  these  conditions  —  that  Gladstone  would  make 
some  propositions  to  the  House,  either  as  to  soliciting  a  vote  of  confidence, 
or  a  pledge  as  to  renewal  of  Reform,  or  the  leading  provisions  of  the  Bill, 
and  gaining  these  would  not  dissolve  —  not  gaining  them,  dissolve. 

I  think  they  will  stay  on  and  not  dissolve.  But  it  is  impossible  to  say.  The 
Queen  is  averse  to  any  thing  that  adds  to  her  "troubles,"  and  I  presume 
will  give  her  present  Ministers  carte  blanche. 

If  Ministers  resigned  without  dissolving  I  think  Gladstone's  position 
would  be  strong  and  the  new  Government  in  a  very  difficult  position.  If 
Ministers  withdraw  the  bill  for  this  year,  stay  on  and  don't  dissolve,  they 
will  be  damaged.  If  they  dissolve  with  such  a  war  in  Europe  they  will  be 
almost  traitors  to  England,  and  the  split  in  their  party  be  irrevocable.  I 
think  the  certain  effect  would  be  their  speedy  overthrow  by  their  own  Par- 
liament. 

But  all  this  is  speculation  and  guesswork. 

Gladstone  and  his  colleagues  in  the  Cabinet  headed  nominally  by  Earl 
Russell  resigned,  and  the  Derby-Disraeli  combination  again  came  into 
power  for  a  short  time,  to  pass  a  reform  bill  giving  an  even  wider  ex- 
tension to  the  electorate  than  Gladstone  had  proposed. 

By  February  1868..  Lord  Derby's  health  had  become  so  bad  that  his 
replacement  as  Prime  Minister  by  Disraeli  seemed  likely.  The  prospect 
was  not  pleasing  to  Lytton.  He  had  confidence  neither  in  Disraeli  nor  in 
Derby's  son,  Lord  Stanley.  He  expressed  his  feeling  on  the  20th : 

How  mournful  is  all  we  hear  about  Lord  Derby.  I  sincerely  trust  he  may 
rally.  His  loss  to  the  Party  would  be  heavy  indeed  and  long  irreparable.  His 
death  placing  Stanley  in  the  Lords  would  necessitate  Dis's  premiership, 
Stanley  leading  the  Lords  as  Foreign  Minister.  But  I  doubt  if  Dis  could 
long  command  the  confidence  of  the  country  or  Stanley  manage  the  Dons 
in  the  Lords. 

By  March  12,  1868,  Lytton  was  more  confident  as  to  Disraeli's  future  as 
Prime  Minister,  but  he  was  completely  wrong  in  thinking  that  the  ques- 
tion of  the  disestablishment  of  the  Protestant  Church  in  Ireland  would 
give  Disraeli  no  trouble,  and  he  was  somewhat  tactless  in  his  reference 
to  "Jesuit  lights"  in  writing  to  a  devout  Roman  Catholic. 

I  think  Dis  has  a  good  chance  of  staying  in.  Any  premature  attempt  to 
turn  him  out  would  make  him  very  popular.  He  has  a  tractable  party  to 
deal  with  and  no  great  difficulties  at  present.  The  Irish  Church  will  I  pre- 
sume be  postponed  and  Parliament  will  not  hear  of  any  wild  schemes  which 
under  the  name  of  Jesuit  lights  confiscate  property. 


LETTERS  BY  BULWER  LYTTON 


181 


At  the  end  of  October  Lytton  realized  that  the  crisis  over  the  disestab- 
lishment of  the  state-supported  Protestant  Irish  Church  would  cause 
trouble  to  Disraeli :  "I  think  Dizz's  day  of  power  looks  drawing  to  a  final 
close.  If  the  elections  turn  out  as  I  suspect  they  must,  the  remnants  of 
his  party  will  be  very  mutinous  and  their  sole  chance  is  in  appointing 
another  leader." 

The  Conservative  Party  lost  the  elections  in  1868  and  a  new  Liberal 
Cabinet  headed  by  Gladstone  came  in.  As  a  retiring-  Prime  Minister  Dis- 
raeli could  have  had  a  peerage,  but  like  Mr.  Churchill  he  preferred  not 
to  give  up  his  leadership  of  the  opposition  in  the  House  of  Commons. 
Instead  he  followed  the  example  of  William  Pitt,  who  had  his  wife  made 
Baroness  Chatham.  Queen  Victoria  was  pleased  to  make  Mrs.  Disraeli 
the  Viscountess  Beaconsfield  in  her  own  right.  Disraeli  himself,  of  course, 
was  later  made  Earl  of  Beaconsfield.  Lytton's  comment  from  Torquay 
on  November  28,  1868,  was  slightly  bitter : 

I  don't  think  Dizz's  compliment  to  his  wife  means  anything  as  to  his  own 
future  hopes.  I  am  told  she  is  75  and  at  that  age  it  is  better  to  take  a  bird 
in  the  hand. 

I  do  hope  that  he  will  atone  for  his  manifold  sins  in  some  degree  by 
doing  a  good  act  towards  you  before  retiring  sub  umbras. 

Lytton  and  Disraeli's  wife  had  not  been  on  good  terms  for  many 
years.  In  February  1836,  Rosina  Bulwer  Lytton  had  made  a  raid  on  her 
husband's  rooms  and  found  a  tray  set  for  Lytton  and  his  friend  Frederick 
Villiers,  who  had  failed  to  come.  "I  went,"  she  said,  "to  visit  my  husband 
in  his  rooms,  which  he  kept  in  order  to  have  undisturbed  communion  with 
the  Muse.  I  found  the  Muse  in  white  muslin  seated  on  his  knee."  The 
story  was  a  good  one,  and  spread  even  into  the  columns  of  the  daily  news- 
papers. It  was  propagated  with  particular  zeal  by  the  very  gossipy  and 
indiscreet  Mrs.  Wyndham  Lewis.  Lytton  wrote  her  a  very  sharp  letter, 
warning  her  to  be  more  careful  in  her  statements.  After  this  incident  re- 
lations between  her  and  Lytton  were  never  very  cordial.  Three  years 
later  she  married  the  much  younger  Disraeli.  Michael  Sadleir,  the  most 
recent  student  of  Lytton's  early  career,  believes  that  the  hostility  of  Lady 
Beaconsfield  must  be  included  among  the  reasons  for  Lytton's  failure  to 
attain  the  rewards  to  which  his  ability  and  political  activity  entitled  him. 

In  May  1872  Lytton  had  occasion  to  write  to  his  ailing  friend  on  the 
death  of  his  brother,  Henry  Bulwer,  Lord  Dalling: 

I  am  much  grieved  to  hear  that  your  suffering  is  so  prolonged  and  that 
another  operation  is  considered  necessary  ...  I  conclude  that  you  will  take 
chloroform  or  other  anodyne. 

Yes,  I  guessed  the  touching  and  beautiful  articles  in  the  Post  to  be  from 
your  affectionate  and  friendly  pen.  I  was  met  in  the  streets  as  I  walked 
thro'  town  the  day  it  came  out  by  friends  who  spoke  of  it  with  great  eulogy 


182 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


as  by  far  the  most  striking  as  well  as  the  most  pleasing  tribute  to  my  dear 
brother's  memory  that  had  appeared. 

I  have  not  seen  the  Atheneum  and  shall  be  greatly  obliged  by  a  sight 
of  it.  The  one  in  the  Post  is  carefully  kept  as  a  family  record. 

Whenever  convalescent  enough  to  move  and  take  change  of  air  do  come 
and  bring  your  wife  or  any  of  your  children. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  next  year  Lytton  himself  died.  He  was  buried 
in  Westminster  Abbey.  His  funeral  sermon  was  preached  by  Benjamin 
Jowett,  Master  of  Balliol  College,  Oxford,  and  translator  of  Plato,  who 
said,  "And  so  with  deep  and  affectionate  remembrances,  as  we  believe 
he  would  have  wished,  and  not  with  formal  panegyric,  we  bid  farewell 
to  one  of  England's  greatest  writers,  and  one  of  the  most  distinguished 
men  of  our  time  —  and  leave  him  to  rest,  where  his  hope  was,  in  the 
mercy  of  God." 


Exhibitions  in  the  Print  Department 


Etchings  and  Lithographs  by  Joseph  Pennell 

THE  career  of  Joseph  Pennell  was  one  of  great  activity,  and  his  many  ac- 
complishments placed  him  in  an  enviable  position  as  a  creative  artist, 
illustrator,  lecturer,  newspaper  writer,  and  author  of  many  books.  He  was 
particularly  distinguished  in  the  graphic  arts,  in  which  he  gained  a  high  de- 
gree of  attainment  both  in  etching  and  lithography.  He  did  much  for  the  re- 
birth of  the  copper  plate  medium  of  etching  and  the  stone  medium  of  lithogra- 
phy in  America,  insisting  upon  those  principles  that  he  thought  right  in  art. 

Frederick  Keppel  writes  in  his  booklet  on  the  artist :  "Joseph  Pennell  — 
like  Whistler,  Abbey  and  other  famous  artists  of  American  birth  —  won  name 
and  fame  in  Europe  before  American  recognition  came  to  him.  He  came  of 
good  old  Quaker  stock  and  was  born  at  Philadelphia  on  the  fourth  of  July, 
i860.  He  was  the  son  of  the  late  Larkin  Pennell,  who  was  an  eminent  member 
of  the  Society  of  Friends,  and  whose  first  American  ancestor  came  to  our 
shores  in  company  with  William  Penn  when  the  latter  made  his  second  voy- 
age from  England  to  the  Province  of  Pennsylvania."  From  his  early  boyhood 
Pennell  was  determined  to  become  an  artist;  and  with  that  indomitable  drive 
which  was  characteristic  of  him  all  his  life,  he  laid  a  foundation  for  his  art 
both  by  study  and  association  with  other  artists,  as  well  as  through  travel 
and  endless  experimentation.  In  his  youth  he  admired  the  work  of  Edwin  A. 
Abbey  and  Frank  Duveneck,  and  the  accomplished  pen  and  ink  drawings  of 
Fortuny  and  Martin  Ricco,  whose  works  of  brilliant  light  and  contrasting 
black  and  white  made  a  lasting  impression  on  him. 

At  this  time  Duveneck  and  Abbey  were  working  in  what  was  then 
thought  a  most  modern  spirit.  This  seems  difficult  to  believe  considering  the 
trends  of  today.  Perhaps  the  innovations  and  new  thought  referred  to  a  loosen- 
ing of  technique,  and  the  abandonment  of  the  beiief  that  a  composition  must 
be  carried  to  a  high  degree  of  finish  from  one  margin  of  the  plate  to  the  other. 
A.  W.  Drake,  wood  engraver,  collector,  and  Art  Director  of  the  Century  Maga- 
zine was  friend  and  patron  to  a  number  of  young  artists,  among  whom  were 
Bumn,  Brennan,  and  Lungren.  His  interest  and  guidance  were  to  be  shared 
by  the  young  Pennell  also,  and  to  him  the  artist  owed  his  first  inspiration. 

In  1883,  when  Pennell  went  abroad  to  illustrate  Howell's  "Tuscan  Cities'' 
(and  his  first  etchings  date  from  that  year),  he  showed  the  first  indication  of 
his  full  development  and  individuality.  From  this  period  he  was  established 
as  a  mature  artist,  with  authority  and  originality  rapidly  becoming  evident 
in  his  work.  His  first  important  drawings  —  the  "English  Cathedrals''  —  done 
at  the  age  of  twenty-three,  showed  that  he  was  an  accomplished  craftsman 
and  artist  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  his  training  had  been  limited.  Although 
these  early  drawings  had  too  much  detail  and  widely  separated  values,  these 
were  the  errors  of  conscious  effort  —  a  good  fault  in  any  beginner's  work, 
since,  given  the  proper  artistic  equipment,  there  is  no  limit  to  the  development 
of  his  talent.  Later  there  was  a  tremendous  step  forward  in  the  "French 
Cathedrals,"  and  a  comparison  with  the  English  series  will  show  a  greater 


183 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


freedom  of  line  and  better  value  relationships.  However,  Pennell  seemed  to 
think  in  line  almost  entirely,  and  his  graphic  work  bears  out  this  theory.  In 
most  of  his  work  he  used  all  the  black  and  white  mediums,  pen,  pencil,  char- 
coal, wash,  etching,  and  lithography,  interchangeably,  and  was  successful  with 
them  all.  Certain  subjects  seemed  to  lend  themselves  to  a  particular  medium, 
and  as  his  work  progressed  the  power  of  massed  rich  black  and  luminous  lights 
became  an  established  accomplishment. 

The  present  exhibition  is  a  selection  from  the  New  York  and  London 
plates,  with  a  few  examples  in  lithography  of  Greek  temples  and  war  work 
in  America  and  England.  "The  Cliffs,"  "The  Canyon,"  Nos.  i,  2,  and  3,  "Forty- 
Second  Street,"  "Flatiron  Building,"  "Wall  Street,"  and  "Golden  Cornice, 
No.  1"  are  among  the  fine  examples  of  the  "unbelievable  city."  The  towering 
splendor  of  New  York  is  one  of  the  architectural  marvels  of  the  world  and 
Pennell  is  one  of  the  very  few  artists  who  have  been  able  to  capture  and  con- 
vey to  the  copper  the  mysteries  of  the  great  city  looming  through  the  last 
rays  of  the  sun  or  through  the  morning  mists,  which  by  their  great  bulk  give 
the  impression  of  tremendous  power.  The  London  series  is  admirably  rep- 
resented by  "The  Tower  Bridge,"  "St.  John's,  Westminster,"  "St.  Paul's  Build- 
ing," and  "Rossetti's  House."  It  has  been  said  that  Pennell  loved  the  spires 
and  towers  of  Wren's  City,  where  be  found  endless  subjects  by  day  and  by 
night,  and  his  desire  was  to  spend  the  rest  of  his  working  days  there. 

Four  lithographs  of  Greece  are  "From  Temple  to  Temple,  Girgenti," 
"Columns  of  the  Temple  of  Juno,  Girgenti,"  "The  Propylaea,  Athens,"  and 
"Aegina,  the  Black  Forest."  It  is  interesting  to  record  several  notes  written 
by  Pennell  on  these  prints.  Concerning  "From  Temple  to  Temple,  Girgenti," 
he  says:  "Not  only  are  the  lines  of  the  hills,  looking  toward  the  sea,  perfect, 
but  the  builders  of  these,  as  of  all  the  temples,  took  advantage  of  the  lines  in 
the  landscape,  making  the  temple  the  focus  of  a  great  composition;  an  art  no 
longer  practised ;  but  the  temples  of  the  gods  of  Greece  were  more  important 
than  the  notions  of  local  politicians  and  landowners  and  architects."  Then  of 
"Aegina,  the  Black  Forest,"  he  states:  "Only  at  Aegina,  so  far  as  I  have  seen, 
is  there  a  real  —  yet  it  is  so  beautiful  it  seems  unreal  —  forest  in  Greece.  No- 
where in  the  world  do  the  trees  in  dense,  deep  shade  so  cover  the  slopes  that 
lead  down,  almost  black,  to  the  deep  blue  sea;  and  where  have  I  ever  seen  such 
a  contrast  between  the  bosky  woods  and  the  barren  cliffs  that  tower  above 
them?  And  all  this  is  but  a  background  for  one  of  the  most  beautiful  temples 
in  this  beautiful  land,  placed  perfectly,  by  the  greatest  artists  of  the  past,  in 
the  most  exquisite  landscape.  Yet  the  guardian  told  me  I  was  the  third  per- 
son who  had  visited  Aegina  between  January  and  April  last  year." 

"Making  Pig  Iron,"  "The  Riveters,"  and  "The  Flying  Locomotive"  are 
among  the  plates  that  typify  great  work  shops  full  of  mystery,  where  fur- 
naces glow  and  great  machines  rivet  or  hammer  plates  and  bars  to  the  rhythm 
of  the  "Hymn  of  Work." 

Joseph  Pennell  is  a  great  name  in  American  print  making,  not  only  an 
artist  who  lived  and  loved  his  art,  but  one  who  did  much  to  encourage  and 
develop  our  present  school  of  American  Graphic  Arts. 

ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 


Graphic  Arts  Processes 


This  is  the  last  of  a  series  of  articles  on  "Graphic  Arts  Processes."  Earlier 
articles  on  "Woodcut  and  Wood  Engraving,"  "Line  Engraving,"  "Etching," 
"Dry  Point,"  and  "Aquatint,  Mezzotint,  and  Stipple  Engraving"  appeared 
in  the  issues  from  December  1946  to  April  1947. 

Lithography 

A LITHOGRAPH  is  sometimes  called  a  planographic  print,  as  it  is  printed 
from  a  surface  that  is  perfectly  flat.  The  artist  is  able  to  make  a  print 
because  of  chemical  reactions  affecting  the  properties  of  the  stone  in  absorb- 
ing and  retaining  grease.  It  is  the  antipathy  of  grease  and  water,  plus  the 
affinity  of  grease  and  ink,  which  is  the  key  to  an  understanding  of  lithography. 

A  lithograph  is  drawn  upon  a  type  of  limestone  found  in  Bavaria,  which 
is  quarried  in  slabs  three  or  four  inches  thick.  This  stone,  a  carbonate  of  lime, 
immediately  absorbs  any  grease  with  which  it  may  come  in  contact.  Because 
of  this  attraction,  the  crayons  and  inks  used  on  the  stone  include  soap  and 
tallow,  to  which  is  added  a  black  pigment,  usually  lampblack,  for  visibility 
when  the  artist  is  drawing.  The  stone  is  prepared  by  grinding  two  lithograph 
stones  together  with  an  abrasive  and  water  between  them,  obtaining  various 
textures  of  grain  by  using  different  abrasives.  A  stone  which  has  been  used 
can  be  cleaned  and  regrained  in  this  way  and  used  any  number  of  times.  The 
artist  may  draw  directly  on  the  stone,  or  he  may  first  prepare  a  tracing  from 
a  previously  studied  drawing.  If  the  main  lines  are  drawn  with  red  conte 
crayon,  the  tracing  can  be  laid  face  down  and  the  design  rubbed  off  onto  the 
stone.  By  this  method  the  tracing  on  the  stone  will  be  in  reverse,  and  will 
print  as  in  the  original  drawing.  Since  conte  crayon  contains  no  grease,  it 
does  not  affect  the  stone,  and  surplus  lines  may  easily  be  brushed  off  the 
surface. 

Most  lithographs  are  drawn  with  a  crayon,  either  in  pencil  or  in  stick 
form.  The  pencil,  of  course,  restricts  the  artist  to  a  pencil  technique,  whereas 
the  square  crayon  is  adaptable  to  any  sort  of  stroke,  using  the  side  of  the  cray- 
on for  wide,  sweeping  lines,  or  the  point  for  sharp,  fine  lines.  The  crayon  can 
also  be  rubbed  all  over  the  surface  and  the  lights  and  modelling  scraped  out 
with  a  knife  or  razor  blade.  To  obtain  an  even  tone  a  cloth  or  chamois  is 
charged  with  crayon  and  then  rubbed  lightly  on  the  stone,  repeating  until 
the  desired  value  is  reached.  All  rubbed  tones  print  much  darker  than  they 
appear  on  the  stone  itself.  Pen  and  brush  techniques  may  also  be  used 
in  lithography  by  employing  a  lithographic  ink  called  tusche.  It  can  be 
brushed,  stippled,  or  drawn  on  with  a  pen,  giving  many  interesting  effects. 
Tusche  prints  a  solid  black  if  used  as  purchased,  but  it  is  possible  to  make 
washes  and  obtain  tones  varying  from  light  to  dark  by  diluting  the  liquid 
with  a  solvent.  There  is  no  way  of  knowing  (when  the  ink  is  diluted)  exactly 
how  much  grease  is  present,  so  that  one's  first  results  are  apt  to  be  surprising. 
These  wash  drawings  on  stone  are  called  lithotints,  and  the  methods  for  etch- 
ing and  preparing  the  stone  are  somewhat  different  from  the  usual  way, 
which  is  described  here. 

15  lg3 


1 86 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


After  the  drawing  has  been  made  with  the  lithographic  crayon,  the  stone 
must  be  prepared  for  printing.  To  do  this,  a  mixture  of  gum  arabic  and  nitric 
acid  is  used,  the  gum  arabic  crystals  having  been  dissolved  in  water  until  the 
consistency  is  that  of  heavy  cream.  To  a  pint  of  this  solution  the  nitric  acid 
is  added  and  mixed  thoroughly.  The  amount  of  nitric  acid  varies,  and  only 
experience  and  testing  on  the  margin  of  the  stone  will  tell  the  artist  when 
the  correct  proportion  of  gum  and  acid  has  been  reached.  It  should  not,  how- 
ever, react  violently  upon  the  stone. 

This  etch  is  brushed  on  and  generally  allowed  to  remain  overnight.  The 
acid  neutralizes  itself  quickly,  but  more  time  is  necessary  for  the  gum  to  pene- 
trate. It  must  be  emphasized  that  the  acid  does  not  eat  into  the  stone.  The 
stone  is  still  perfectly  flat  and  level  after  having  been  treated  with  the  etch. 
The  action  of  the  acid  changes  the  part  of  the  stone  untouched  by  crayon 
from  a  surface  that  is  sensitive  to  grease  to  one  that  is  not  —  chemically 
speaking,  from  a  carbonate  of  lime  to  a  nitrate  of  lime.  It  also  changes  the 
crayon  from  a  soluble  substance  to  an  insoluble,  so  that  it  cannot  spread  when 
the  stone  is  being  dampened  for  printing.  The  gum  arabic,  in  addition,  pene- 
trates the  stone  and  forms  a  wall,  resistant  to  grease,  around  each  area  of 
crayon,  holding  the  area  to  its  original  size.  As  to  the  relative  importance  of 
the  acid  and  gum,  every  artist  has  his  own  opinion,  and  the  various  treatises 
on  lithography  deal  more  fully  with  this  aspect.  The  etch  is  washed  off  with 
water  and  the  stone  immediately  gummed  with  a  solution  of  gum  arabic  and 
water,  prepared  as  before.  It  is  now  necessary  to  remove  the  crayon,  as  the 
design  has  penetrated  the  stone  and  exists  in  an  insoluble  chemical  spot.  The 
gum  protects  the  undrawn  surfaces  of  the  stone  while  the  crayon  is  removed 
with  turpentine.  The  gum  arabic  is  removed  with  water  after  the  turpentine 
has  dried. 

The  stone  is  now  ready  for  printing,  and  one  should  remember  that  the 
principle  of  lithography  is  that  moisture  is  repelled  by  grease.  The  surface  of 
the  stone  must  be  kept  damp  during  the  printing,  but  this  moisture  will  not 
adhere  to  the  drawing,  which  consists  of  grease.  A  roller  charged  with  print- 
ing ink,  when  passed  over  the  stone,  will  deposit  ink  on  the  greasy  area  of 
the  design,  leaving  the  damp,  clean  stone  perfectly  untouched  with  ink.  The 
stone  must  be  rolled  up  several  times  to  obtain  the  true  values  of  the  drawing, 
and  when  fully  inked  is  ready  for  printing.  The  stone  is  placed  on  the  bed  of 
the  lithographic  press,  face  up,  and  the  dampened  paper  is  laid  on  the  design. 
The  mechanics  of  the  lithographic  press  are  quite  different  from  the  etching 
press,  and  the  pressure  is  a  sliding  rather  than  a  rolling  one.  After  the  stone 
lias  been  run  through,  the  print  is  removed,  and  allowed  to  dry. 

If  possible,  corrections  should  be  made  before  the  stone  has  been  etched, 
but  one  can  make  corrections  and  additions  after  the  stone  has  been  printed. 
Drawn  areas  may  be  removed  from  the  stone  by  scraping  out  with  a  razor 
blade  or  sharp  tool,  by  cleaning  with  snake  slip,  or  grinding  out  with  an  abra- 
sive. This  destroys  the  gum  arabic  protection,  and  the  corrected  parts  are 
again  receptive  to  grease.  They  must  be  resealed  with  an  etch  stronger  than 
that  used  originally,  in  order  to  make  the  cleaned  area  repel  ink.  Gum  arabic 
is  used  to  protect  the  drawn  areas  from  the  etch.  When  the  artist  wishes  to 
redraw  certain  sections  that  have  been  scraped  out,  that  part  of  the  stone 


GRAPHIC  ARTS  PROCESSES 


187 


must  be  regrained  to  the  original  texture.  In  order  to  make  additions  on  an 
undrawn  area  a  counter-etch  is  used,  made  of  weak  acetic  or  citric  acid,  which 
dissolves  the  gum  and  allows  the  crayon  to  come  into  direct  contact  with  the 
original  stone  surface.  After  the  new  lines  are  drawn  the  stone  must  again  be 
sealed  with  gum  arabic  and  the  new  lines  etched.  If  an  area  has  been  merely 
lightened  by  scraping,  gum  arabic  is  poured  over  the  section  and  the  etch 
carefully  applied  with  a  brush  to  the  lines  that  have  been  scraped. 

Because  of  the  size  and  weight  of  lithograph  stones,  several  substitutes 
have  been  developed.  One  is  the  transfer  lithograph,  by  which  means  the  draw- 
ing is  made  on  paper  and  later  transferred  to  the  stone.  Another  is  the  use 
of  metal  plates  such  as  zinc  or  aluminum.  In  theory  the  process  for  preparing 
transfer  lithographs  and  metal  plates  for  printing  is  the  same  as  that  described, 
although  there  are  certain  variations  in  the  individual  steps.  However,  there 
is  no  real  substitute  for  stone,  and  comparison  of  prints  will  reveal  the  stone 
impression's  full  rich  values,  with  none  of  the  limitations  encountered  in  the 
use  of  the  other  methods. 

MURIEL  C.  FIGENBAUM 


First  Editions 


A  First  Edition  of  St.  Leon 

ALTHOUGH  he  started  in  life  as 
a  dissenting  minister,  William 
Godwin  soon  turned  to  a  literary  ca- 
reer. In  1793,  at  the  age  of  thirty-seven, 
he  produced  his  famous  Enquiry  Con- 
cerning Political  Justice,  which  at  once 
made  him  the  center  of  English  radical- 
ism. In  the  excitement  caused  by  the 
French  Revolution  Godwin's  work  was 
read  and  discussed  all  over  England. 
He  exerted  a  particularly  great  influ- 
ence upon  the  younger  writers  — 
Wordsworth  and  Coleridge  among 
them.  Curiously  enough,  in  a  few  years 
his  reputation  almost  entirely  vanished, 
partly  because  his  domestic  burdens 
forced  him  to  do  literary  hack  work. 

Political  Justice  was  followed  by  two 
novels,  Caleb  Williams,  published  in 
1794  and  St.  Leon,  1799.  Copies  of  St. 
Leon  had  been  offered  for  sale  at  the 
Leipzig  fair  even  before  its  appearance 
in  London.  Both  books  were  popular 
and  were  reprinted  in  pirated  editions. 
After  the  turn  of  the  century  Godwin 
wrote  a  number  of  works  —  including 
a  history  of  the  British  Commonwealth, 
fables  for  children,  and  a  few  biographies 
—  but  none  of  these  equaled  his  earlier 
successes. 

The  Library  has  recently  acquired  a 
copy  of  the  first  edition  of  St.  Leon, 
once  owned  by  the  Marquess  of  Lothian. 
The  four  small  volumes  are  bound  in 
marbled  calf. 

"When  we  perform  the  most  be- 
nevolent action,"  Godwin  wrote  in 
Political  Justice,  "it  is  with  a  view  only 
to  our  own  advantage,  and  with  the 
most  sovereign  and  unreserved  neglect 
of  that  of  others."  The  preface  to  St. 
Leon  contains  the  statement:  "Some 
readers  of  my  graver  productions  will 
perhaps,  in  perusing  these  little  vol- 
umes, accuse  me  of  inconsistency ;  the 
affections  and  charities  of  private  life 
being  every  where  in  this  publication 
a  topic  of  the  warmest  eulogium  .  .  . 
I  apprehend  domestic  and  private  af- 
fections inseparable  from  the  nature  of 
man,  and  from  what  may  be  styled  the 


culture  of  the  heart."  What  Godwin 
does  not  mention  is  that,  in  the  mean- 
time, his  brief  but  happy  marriage  to 
Mary  Wollstonecraft  had  enlarged 
his  sympathies.  T.  C. 


"The  Way  of  All  Flesh" 

THIS  famous  story  of  revolt  against 
Victorian  pieties  and  proprieties 
Samuel  Butler  began  as  early  as  1872 
and,  after  re-writing  it  several  times, 
finished  it  in  1884.  However,  he  did  not 
publish  the  book  in  his  life-time,  partly 
because  he  intended  to  revise  it  further, 
and  partly,  no  doubt,  because  of  its 
autobiographical  nature  and  the  thin 
disguise  of  the  characters  taken  from 
the  circle  of  his  family  and  acquaintances. 
The  novelist  died  on  June  18,  1902,  and 
the  book  was  finally  published  in  Lon- 
don by  Grant  Richards  in  1903.  In  a 
note  R.  A.  Streatfeild  states  that  on 
his  death-bed  Butler  gave  him  "clearly 
to  understand  that  he  wished  it  to  be 
published  in  its  present  form."  As  the 
fourth  and  fifth  chapters  were  missing, 
these  had  to  be  restored  from  manu- 
script notes. 

The  first  edition  contains  a  typo- 
graphical error  to  which  A.  J.  Hoppe 
calls  attention  in  his  bibliography. 
When  Ernest,  the  hero,  suddenly  finds 
to  his  joy  that  he  has  never  been  really 
married  to  his  supposed  wife,  who  has 
taken  to  drink,  his  philosophical  men- 
tor says  to  him  mischievously :  ".  .  .  is 
it  not  Tennyson  who  has  said :  'Tis 
better  to  have  loved  and  lost,  than 
never  to  have  lost  at  all'?"  This  is  what 
Butler  intended  and  this  is  how  the 
passage  stands  in  the  later  editions ; 
but,  as  Mr.  Festing  Jones  has  explained, 
"some  cultured  printer's  reader,  who  had 
too  seriously  taken  to  heart  Lord  Salis- 
bury's recommendation  to  verify  your 
references,  'corrected'  it  after  the  last  re- 
vise had  been  passed."  So,  on  page  352  of 
the  first  edition  one  reads  properly  (but 
contrary  to  Butler's  manuscript)  :  "  'Tis 
better  to  have  loved  and  lost,  than 
never  to  have  loved  at  all'?"  M.  M. 


188 


Ten  Books 


Our  Vichy  Gamble.  By  William  L. 
Langer.  Knopf.  1947.  398  pp. 
This  is  an  extremely  interesting  and 
valuable  book,  whether  one  agrees  with 
the  author  or  not.  It  is  the  first  fully- 
documented  history  of  our  relations 
with  the  Vichy  regime  and  our  occu- 
pation of  North  Africa,  based  upon 
official  reports  and  its  data  checked  by 
President  Roosevelt  himself,  as  well  as 
by  Secretary  Hull,  former  Ambassador 
Bullitt,  Admiral  Leahy,  Robert  D. 
Murphy,  General  Donovan,  and  other 
chief  representatives  in  the  transactions. 
Yet  Mr.  Langer  —  a  professor  of  his- 
tory at  Harvard  and  Chief  of  the  Re- 
search and  Analysis  Branch  of  the 
OSS  during  the  war  —  makes  it  clear 
that  he  writes  as  an  independent  his- 
torian and  that  no  one  has  attempted 
to  sway  his  opinions.  And  he  is  con- 
vinced that  our  gamble  with  Vichy  was 
worth  taking,  that  under  the  circum- 
stances it  was  the  only  wise  course 
open  to  us.  With  the  collapse  of  France 
the  greatest  problem  for  England  and 
America  was  the  fate  of  the  French 
fleet.  Had  the  Nazis  seized  the  French 
warships,  the  invasion  of  England 
might  have  been  possible ;  and  with  the 
fleets  of  the  two  countries  in  German 
hands  America  would  have  been  utter- 
ly defenceless.  It  was  our  interest,  there- 
fore, to  bolster  up  the  Petain  govern- 
ment; to  make  it,  by  threats  and  cajol- 
ing, stand  out  against  the  Nazi  demands 
as  long  as  possible.  The  Vichy  regime 
itself  was  a  mixture ;  besides  the  worst 
collaborationists  it  included  also  some 
genuine  patriots  who  helped  the  resist- 
ance movements.  Whereas  Laval  al- 
ways wanted  to  collaborate  with  Ger- 
man}-, Petain  hoped  to  guide  his -people 
through  the  occupation  period  with 
some  national  freedom.  Until  the 
spring  of  1942  the  strength  and  temper 
of  the  resistance  groups  could  never  be 
estimated  and,  although  DeGaulle  had  a 
substantial  following  by  that  time,  he 
himself  could  not  easily  be  dealt  with. 
Darlan  was  of  course  a  scoundrel,  but 
because  he  rallied  the  French  authori- 
ties in  North  Africa  —  loyal  to  Petain 
—  to  our  side,  the  tremendous  "Torch" 


operation  was  made  possible.  For  over 
two  years  we  had  to  work  with  a  man 
whom  his  subordinates  often  kept  un- 
informed, who  was  vain  and  authori- 
tarian, but  who  prized  American  good- 
will. (T.C.) 

Operations  in  North  African  Waters, 
October  1942-June  1943.  By  Samuel 
Eliot  Morison.  Little,  Brown.  1947. 
Early  in  1942  Mr.  Morison,  Professor 
of  History  at  Harvard,  was  commis- 
sioned in  the  Naval  Reserve  with  the 
sole  duty  of  preparing  a  history  of  the 
United  States  naval  operations  during  the 
war.  From  that  time  to  the  end  he,  or  one 
of  the  officers  on  his  staff,  took  part  in 
every  major  enterprise.  He  also  had 
access  to  all  official  documents,  with 
freedom  to  discuss  these  with  the  naval 
authorities.  Yet  his  work,  as  Secretary 
Forrestal  states,  is  in  no  sense  an  of- 
ficial history.  When  completed  the  record 
will  consist  of  thirteen  volumes,  begin- 
ning with  the  battle  of  the  Atlantic  and 
ending  with  the  liquidation  of  the 
Japanese  Empire.  The  present  book  is 
the  second  volume  of  the  series,  though 
the  first  to  appear.  As  a  member  of  the 
ship's  company  in  U.  S.  S.  Brooklyn, 
Captain  Morison  participated  in  Oper- 
ation '"Torch" ;  he  writes  as  an  eye-wit- 
ness, who  also  obtained  oral  information 
from  numerous  officers  and  men.  The 
work  is  divided  into  two  parts  —  the 
expeditions  against  French  Morocco  and 
against  Algeria  and  Tunisia.  The  first 
tells  of  the  preliminaries,  then  describes 
the  crossing,  the  landing  at  Fedhala, 
the  naval  battle  at  Casablanca,  the 
northern  and  southern  attacks,  and  how 
Morocco  was  secured.  The  second  part 
relates  the  winning  of  Algiers,  the  cap- 
ture of  Oran,  the  navy's  part  in  the 
Tunisian  campaign,  and  finally  the  oc- 
cupation of  Pantelleria.  The  author's 
task  was  a  difficult  one ;  it  has  required 
all  the  art  of  an  experienced  narrator 
to  absorb  the  innumerable  details,  with- 
out clogging  the  flow  of  the  story.  In 
sketching  the  diplomatic  contest  over 
North  Africa,  Professor  Morison  —  like 
Professor  Langer  —  is  convinced  that 
our  dealings  with  Admiral  Darlan  were 


189 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


justified;  without  winning"  him  over, 
the  landings  in  North  Africa  would  have 
been  incomparably  more  costly.  (Z.  H.) 

A  Free  and  Responsible  Press.  Report 
of  the  Commission  on  Freedom  of  the 
Press.  Univ.  of  Chicago.  1947.  139  pp. 
Financed  chiefly  by  a  grant  of  $200,000 
from  Time,  Inc.,  some  three  years  ago, 
the  Commission  on  Freedom  of  the 
Press  was  formed,  including,  under  the 
chairmanship  of  Chancellor  Hutchins 
of  the  University  of  Chicago,  such  men 
as  Professors  Zechariah  Chafee,  Jr., 
Arthur  M.  Schlesinger,  William  E. 
Hocking,  Harold  D.  Lasswell,  Rein- 
hold  Niebuhr,  and  others.  Is  freedom 
of  the  press  in  danger?  the  commission 
asks.  And  its  answer  is :  Yes.  Three 
reasons  are  given:  "First,  the  import- 
ance of  the  press  to  the  people  has 
greatly  increased  with  the  development 
of  the  press  as  an  instrument  of  mass 
communication.  At  the  same  time  this 
development  .  .  .  has  greatly  decreased 
the  proportion  of  the  people  who  can 
express  their  opinions  and  ideas  through 
the  press.  Second,  the  few  who  are  able 
to  use  the  machinery  of  the  press  .  .  . 
have  not  provided  a  service  adequate 
to  the  needs  of  the  society.  Third,  those 
who  direct  the  machinery  of  the  press 
have  engaged  from  time  to  time  in 
practices  which  the  society  condemns." 
The  commission  suggests  five  remedies, 
but  does  not  believe  that  they  are 
completely  attainable.  (Z.  H.) 

Palestine  Mission.  By  Richard  Cross- 
man.  Harper.  1947.  210  pp. 
Mr.  Crossman  was  appointed  to  the 
Anglo-American  Committee  of  Enquiry 
on  the  Jewish  question  as  an  experi- 
enced journalist  and  a  Labor  Member 
of  Parliament.  His  book  is  not  an  of- 
ficial report,  but  a  remarkably  inform- 
ing statement  of  his  own  opinions.  Be- 
ginning as  an  anti-Zionist  and  pro-Arab, 
he  ended  by  becoming  definitely  pro- 
Zionist.  He  still  appreciates,  however, 
the  Pan-Arab's  desire  for  an  indepen- 
dent Arab  civilization  in  the  Middle 
East,  and  his  resentment  at  the  attempt 
of  the  West  to  solve  at  the  expense  of 
the  Arabs  a  problem  created  entirely  by 
itself.  Mr.  Crossman  is  naturally  familiar 
with  the  British  attitude ;  he  has  learned 
the  opposing  American  sentiment  by 


harsh  experience;  he  knows  the  un- 
happy position  of  Jews  in  Germany  and 
Central  Europe  thoroughly.  It  is  all  the 
more  impressive,  therefore,  that,  under- 
standing intelligently  the  impossible 
conflicts  involved  in  the  Palestine  dis- 
pute, he  feels  that  partition  is  the  only 
solution,  and  even  that  is  no  cure-all. 
Palestine  as  a  nation  is  an  accomplished 
fact;  but  it  cannot  take  in  all  the  Jew? 
of  the  dispersal,  and  the  fate  of  these  "is 
bound  up  with  the  success  or  failure  of 
the  United  Nations."  (H.  McC.) 

The  Bright  Passage.  By  Maurice  Hin- 
dus. Doubleday.  1947.  370  pp. 
Maurice  Hindus  considers  Czecho- 
slovakia tlie  most  interesting  and  chal- 
lenging- nation  in  Europe  today.  In 
spite  of  its  small  size,  it  is  the  only 
country  to  attempt  successfully  a  re- 
conciliation of  ideas  between  Slav, 
Teuton,  Anglo-Saxon,  and  Latin,  be- 
tween communist  and  capitalist.  This 
is  due  to  a  combination  of  historical 
and  other  forces.  For  generations 
Czechoslovakia  has  been  essentially 
middle-class,  wthout  extremes  of  wealth 
or  poverty.  It  is  also  heir  to  the  Hus- 
site tradition,  which  has  made  for  in- 
dependence of  thought  and  a  wide 
distribution  of  education.  Today  it  is 
a  country  of  small  but  economically 
independent  peasant  farms  and  cities. 
Politically  Czechoslovakia  is  trying  an 
experiment  in  socialism  which  should 
be  a  focus  of  attention  for  leaders  else- 
where. Heavy  industry  and  banking 
have  been  nationalized.  Though  the  re- 
gime is  strongly  touched  with  com- 
munism, it  is  not  Marxist.  A  Slav  country, 
it  looks  to  Russia  as  the  leader  of  Slav- 
dom ;  a  small  country,  it  considers 
Russia  the  guardian  of  its  interests, 
especially  since  Munich.  This  attitude 
is  not  to  be  construed  in  any  sense  as 
dependence,  but  rather  as  a  feeling  of 
family  relationship.  Even  the  Roman 
Catholic  clergy  have  stressed  the  value 
of  "the  great  social  realitv  symbolized 
by  the  Soviet  Union."  (S.  W.  F.) 

The  Formative  Years.  By  Henry 
Adams.  Condensed  and  edited  by  Her- 
bert Agar.  Houghton  Mifflin.  1947.  2  v. 
1067  pp. 

Henry  Adams's  History  of  the  United 
States,   1801-1817,  published  between 


TEN  BOOKS 


1889  and  1891  in  nine  volumes,  un- 
questionably deserves  a  wide  range  of 
readers;  the  present  skillful  conden- 
sation, therefore,  is  a  much-needed 
publication.  Adams  spent  ten  or  a  dozen 
years  on  this  history,  delving-  in  the 
Foreign  Office  arcbives  of  London, 
Paris,  and  Madrid  tor  documents.  He 
himself  found  his  material  "wildly  in- 
teresting." His  objectivity  was  not 
coldly  abstract,  but  rather  a  penetrat- 
ing insight  which  enabled  him  to  sec 
the  young  republic  and  her  citizens 
with  an  almost  uncanny  understanding 
of  political  and  spiritual  passions.  The 
chief  dramatic  theme  in  the  history  of 
the  Jefferson  and  Madison  administra- 
tions is,  of  course,  the  assertion  of  Re- 
publican (the  old  democratic)  principles 
over  the  Federal,  while  the  very  Re- 
publicanism underwent  a  strange  sea- 
change  from  the  original  insistence  on 
states'  rights  to  increased  centralization, 
notably  in  such  transactions  as  the 
Louisiana  Purchase,  the  acquisition  of 
Western  Florida,  and  the  admission  of 
Ohio  into  the  Union.  Particularly  sig- 
nificant, as  Mr.  Agar  points  out,  is  "the 
first  long-drawn-out  effort  on  the  part 
of  a  nation,  in  the  midst  of  violence  and 
in  spite  of  heavy  wrongs,  to  prove  that 
'peace  is  our  passion.'  "  (M.  M.) 

A  Study  of  History.  By  Arnold  J. 
Toynbee.  Abridgement  of  Volumes  I- 
VI.  By  D.  C.  Somervell.  Oxford  Univ. 
Press.  1947.  617  pp. 
This  condensation  of  Mr.  Toynbee's 
monumental  work  is  most  welcome, 
since  the  length  of  the  original  study 
prevents  the  general  public  from  reading 
it.  yet  its  conclusions  are  of  great  sig- 
nificance for  our  time.  Historical  cau- 
sation is  the  subject ;  in  a  comparative 
analysis  of  civilizations  past  and  present 
the  author  points  out  similarities  and 
notes  certain  recurring  patterns.  The 
common  factor,  it  appears,  in  the  genesis 
of  all  societies  beyond  the  primitive 
stage  is  some  kind  of  adversity  which 
aroused  unprecedented  response.  Con- 
tinued growth  seems  to  depend  on 
creative  individuals,  who  first  conceive 
something  new  and  then  persuade  the 
majority  to  accept  it.  Growth  does  not 
consist  in  political  or  military  expansion 
or  technological  improvement,  but  in 
"etherialization,"    the   overcoming  of 


material  obstacles  in  such  a  way  as  to 
release  the  energies  of  society  for  in- 
ternal and  spiritual  challenges.  Hellenic 
society  at  its  height  best  represents  this 
achievement.  All  civilizations  have  de- 
clined and  our  own,  too,  shows  symp- 
toms of  disintegration :  failure  in  lead- 
ership of  the  creative  minority,  which 
becomes  merely  a  ruling  class;  with- 
drawal of  allegiance  of  the  majority, 
and  consequent  loss  of  social  unity. 
The  philosophy  of  such  times  is  marked 
by  extremes  of  abandon  or  asceticism, 
by  fatalism,  martyrdom,  and  vulgarity. 
Various  remedies  have  been  tried,  such 
as  the  creation  of  a  strong  universal 
state,  political  reaction,  revolution, 
philosophic  detachment,  and  the  trans- 
formation of  society  through  religion. 
Mr.  Toynbee  prefers  the  last  as  the 
most  effective.  Rejecting  the  deter- 
minist  conception  of  history,  particu- 
larly Spengler's  organic  theory,  he 
hopes  that  our  civilization  can  produce 
a  creative  minority  sufficiently  inspired 
with  Christian  idealism  to  convert  the 
majority  and  thus  repeat  the  pattern. 
However,  a  brief  outline  fails  to  do 
justice  to  this  eminent  historian's 
erudition  and  the  wealth  of  his  ideas.  The 
treatment  of  Western  civilization  as 
only  one  of  twenty-one  in  recorded 
history  indicates  the  immense  range  of 
his  view.  (R.  E.) 

Am  I  My  Brother's  Keeper?  By  Ananda 
K.  Coomaraswamy.  Day.  1947.  no  pp. 
To  those  who  are  not  acquainted  with 
the  author's  longer  scholarly  works 
these  brief  essays,  reprinted  from 
periodicals,  will  open  a  vista  of  a 
thought-world  which  differs-  radically 
from  that  of  most  Western  educators 
and  philosophers.  But  it  is  precisely 
this  difference  which  Dr.  Coomaraswamy 
seeks  to  eliminate  by  showing  that  our 
Western  industrial  civilization  is  merely 
a  perversion  of  the  universal  wisdom 
known  to  Plato.  St.  Augustine,  and  St. 
Thomas  Aquinas  and  dominant  in  pre- 
Renaissance  Europe,  which  the  West 
may  yet  learn  from  the  East.  It  was 
Cain,  the  fratricide,  who  built  himself 
a  city  and  "prefigures  modern  civili- 
zation." There  is  need  for  a  new  study 
of  comparative  religion,  which  shall  be 
neither  aridly  scientific  nor  aimed  at 
proselytizing;  for,  if  they  study  the 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


scriptures  written  in  Arabic,  Persian, 
and  Sanskrit  as  well  a6  those  in  Latin 
and  Greek,  scholars  will  find  a  uni- 
versality in  the  essentials  of  religion 
under  the  varying  forms.  The  contrast 
between  East  and  West  is  not  geo- 
graphical but  spiritual.  "The  backward 
East  is  very  much  happier,  calmer,  and 
less  afraid  of  life  and  death  than  the 
'forward'  West  has  ever  been."  (M.  M.) 

Call  Me  Ishmael.  By  Charles  Olson. 
Reynal  &  Hitchcock.  1947.  119  pp. 
Mr.  Olson,  who  has  devoted  more  than 
a  dozen  years  to  the  study  of  Melville, 
gives  here  some  of  the  results  of  his 
researches  and  speculations.  The  tone 
of  the  book  is  baffling.  Imitating  Mel- 
ville, who  imitated  Shakespeare,  the 
author  tries  to  talk  the  language  of 
genius,  and  his  effort  becomes  irksome. 
One  feels  that  the  substance  of  the  vol- 
ume could  have  been  communicated 
just  as  well,  and  perhaps  better,  in  a 
simple  and  unaffected  way.  Yet  the 
substance  is  valuable.  Mr.  Olson  has 
found  that  there  were  two  versions  of 
Moby  Dick;  the  first  had  no  Ahab,  very 
little  of  the  white  whale,  was  in  fact 
an  adventure  story  without  the  epic 
quality  of  the  second  version.  He  has  a 
good  deal  to  say  about  the  mythic  ele- 
ment in  Melville  and  his  obsession  with 
space,  linking  him  with  Homer  and 
Dante.  In  the  Odyssey  Ulysses  is  al- 
ready pushing  toward  the  West,  "seek- 
ing a  way  out";  and  in  the  Inferno  he 
speaks  of  the  "unpeopled  world  behind 
the  sun";  finally  with  Ahab  the  "West 
returned  to  East."  As  Mr.  Olson  puts 
it,"  The  Pacific  is  the  end  of  the  Un- 
known which  Homer's  and  Dante's 
Ulysses  opened  men's  eyes  to."  Earlier 
the  author  points  out  the  break  in  Mel- 
ville's work  which  followed  Moby  Dick. 
That  Pierre  is  of  a  much  lower  order 
is  apparent  to  anyone.  Without  the 
impact  of  Shakespeare,  whom  Melville 
first  read  when  approaching  thirty,  the 
present  Moby  Dick  would  never  have 
been  written.  Few  can  escape  Shake- 
speare's influence;  in  a  man  of  Mel- 
ville's talent  and  experience  the  virus 


worked  with  incomparably  greater  power 
■ —  for  a  few  years  he  became  truly  an 
Elizabethan.  But  even  he  could  not  keep 
it  up  long;  the  strain  was  probably  the 
chief  cause  of  his  ensuing  illness.  Yet 
Melville  was  one  of  our  greatest  writers, 
whose  work  deserves  the  fullest  scholarly 
and  imaginative  analysis.  It  may  come 
at  last,  now  that  the  rediscovery  of 
Henry  James  seems  complete.  (Z.  H.) 

Lions  under  the  Throne.  By  Charles 
P.  Curtis,  Jr.  Houghton  Mifflin.  1947. 
368  pp. 

Tuis  brilliant  essay  on  the  Supreme 
Court  takes  its  title  from  Bacon's  say- 
ing in  his  "Of  Judicature":  "Let  judges 
remember  that  Solomon's  throne  was 
supported  by  lions  on  both  sides.  Let 
them  be  lions,  but  yet  lions  under  the 
throne."  Combining  wide  legal  experi- 
ence with  philosophical  penetration, 
the  author  subjects  the  Supreme 
Court  to  searching  analysis.  It  began  as 
a  regular  law  court,  judging  ordinary 
suits;  by  1925  private  litigation  had 
been  greatly  reduced,  and  in  1945  it  was 
gone  altogether,  leaving  the  Court  the 
arbiter  of  the  validity  of  legislation 
and  matters  of  public  concern.  Mr. 
Curtis  examines  the  dealings  of  the 
"Old  Court"  with  the  New  Deal  in 
various  cases,  such  as  the  famous 
Lochner  case,  involving  maximum 
work  hours,  in  which  Justice  Holmes 
gave  "the  great  dissent."  In  the  Par- 
rish  case  of  1936,  he  points  out  the  de- 
cisive alignment  of  Justice  Roberts 
with  the  liberal  four  —  Hughes,  Brandeis, 
Stone,  and  Cardozo  ---  forming  a  new 
majority.  By  the  time  it  sustained  the 
Wagner  Act,  the  Court  was  on  the 
point  of  surrendering  to  the  New  Deal. 
In  cases  concerning  personal  liberty, 
notably  those  brought  by  Jehovah's 
Witnesses,  the  increase  of  dissenting 
votes  upholding  the  plaintiffs  is  also 
significantly  noticeable.  In  character- 
izing the  Court  of  the  present  decade, 
the  author  emphasizes  its  "reorient- 
ation away  from  the  Legal  Tradition 
and  conceptual  thinking  .  .  .  towards 
the  pertinence  of  facts."  (A/.  M.) 


Library  Notes 


King  Charles  I  to  the  Scots 

TO  the  materia]  already  in  the  Li- 
brary on  the  subject  of  the  British 
Wars  of  Rebellion,  now  has  been  added 
a  proclamation  of  King  Charles  I  to 
the  people  of  Scotland,  issued  on  June 
28,  1638.  It  is  in  the  form  of  a  broad- 
side sheet,  printed  at  Edinburgh  by  R. 
Young,  with  the  King's  coat-of-arms 
above  and  with  two  ornamental  initials. 
The  specimen  is  very  rare:  the  Short 
Title  Catalogue  records  only  two  copies 
in  British  and  three  in  American  li- 
braries. 

"Forasmeikle  as  Wee  are  not  igno- 
rant of  the  great  disorders,"  the  procla- 
mation begins,  "which  have  happened 
of  late  within  this  our  ancient  King- 
dome  of  Scotland,  occasioned,  as  is  pre- 
tended, upon  the  introduction  of  the 
Service  book,  book  of  Canons,  and  High 
Commission,  thereby  fearing  innovation 
of  Religion  and  Laws  .  .  ."  Through 
the  efforts  of  William  Laud,  Arch- 
bishop of  Canterbury,  to  establish  the 
Episcopal  liturgy  throughout  the  realm, 
the  Book  of  Canons  regulating  the  Scot- 
tish Church  had  been  published  in  1636, 
and  the  use  of  the  new  Scottish  Prayer 
Book  enforced  in  May  1637.  The  Pres- 
byterian Scots,  attached  to  Knox's 
Book  of  Common  Order,  were  indig- 
nant, and  when  the  prescribed  liturgy 
was  read  in  the  Church  of  St.  Giles,  a 
riotous  mob  broke  up  the  service.  By 
the  beginning  of  1638,  resistance  had 
been  systematically  organized  and  a 
National  Covenant  signed  by  the 
people. 

It  was  to  quiet  these  outraged  feel- 
ings that  the  King  in  the  broadside 
"thought  fit  to  declare,  and  hereby  to 
assure  all  our  good  people,  that  We 
neither  were,  are,  nor  by  the  Grace  of 
God  ever  shall  be  stained  with  Popish 
superstition:  But  by  the  contrarie,  are 
resolved  to  maintain  the  true  Protestant 
Christian  Religion  .  .  ."  Further  he  as- 
sured them  "that  We  will  neither  now 
nor  hereafter  presse  the  practice  of  the 
foresaid  Canons  and  Service  book,  nor 
any  thing  of  that  nature,  but  in  such  a 


fair  and  legall  way,  as  shall  satisfie  all 
our  loving  subjects  .  .  ." 

But  this  attempt  at  pacification 
was  only  a  lull  before  the  storm,  and 
in  the  spring  of  1639  the  First  Bishops' 
War  in  Scotland  broke  out,  a  prelude  to 
the  coming  series  of  conflicts,    m.  M. 

The  Puritan  Family 

IN  1944  the  Library  published  a  re- 
print of  Mr.  Edmund  S.  Morgan's 
The  Puritan  Family,  from  the  February 
1942-May  1943  issues  of  More  Books, 
for  sale  at  one  dollar.  Copies  are  still 
available  for  purchase. 

These  essays  have  met  with  very  great 
appreciation  —  particularly  from  students 
of  colonial  history  —  and  have  also 
stirred  up  a  good  deal  of  discussion.  The 
latest  is  a  review  in  the  September  1940 
Journal  of  Modem  History,  which  is 
partially  quoted  below : 

"In  the  six  essays  contained  in  this 
volume  the  author  has  made  a  valuable 
contribution  to  knowledge.  He  has  not 
been  content  merely  to  formulate  the 
teachings  of  ministers  and  other  guides 
to  good  conduct  —  a  task  that  is  labor- 
ious rather  than  difficult.  He  has  also 
essayed  the  more  onerous  work  of  com- 
paring precept  with  practice,  and  within 
limitations  he  has  succeeded  admirably. 
The  limits  are  set  by  the  nature  of  the 
materials  used,  which  are  literary  for 
the  most  part.  Hence  it  follows  that 
little  or  no  light  is  thrown  upon  the 
unlettered  except  when  their  misbe- 
havior brought  them  before  the  courts. 

"This  raises  the  question  common  to 
social  studies  in  general  —  is  not  the 
author  concerned  with  a  select  group, 
in  this  case  with  men  of  substance? 
However  probable  it  may  be  that  the 
underprivileged,  hearing  the  same  ser- 
mons, pursued  the  same  ideals  as  their 
superiors  in  fortune,  some  positive 
proof  would  be  most  welcome.  Probably 
only  a  survey  of  all  surviving  court 
records  would  enable  an  answer,  per- 
haps tentative  at  that,  to  be  given. 
Morgan  has  used  ably  a  number  of  such 
records   and   fully   demostrates  their 


193 


i94 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


utility  for  a  social  history,  especially 
in  the  chapter  on  masters  and  servants, 
but  mttch  remains  to  be  done  in  edit- 
ing and  publishing  before  a  complete 
investigation  can  be  made. 

"Perhaps  the  most  novel  essay  is 
the  last,  on  Puritan  tribalism.  One  of 
the  most  debatable  subjects  in  the 
whole  book  is  the  reason  assigned  for 
the  Puritan  migration  —  that  it  was 
not  to  propagate  the  gospel  among  the 
heathen  but  to  perpetuate  it  among 
their  own  posterity  .  .  ." 

The  "Baptistes"  of 
George  Buchanan 

GEORGE  BUCHANAN,  the  Scot- 
tish humanist,  pedagogue,  Latin 
poet,  and  historian,  whom  Dr.  Samuel 
Johnson  called  "the  only  man  of  genius 
his  country  ever  produced,"  wrote  in 
an  early  period  of  his  long  career  four 
Latin  tragedies.  They  were  intended 
for  performance  at  the  College  de 
Guyenne  in  Bordeaux,  where  he  taught 
from  1539  on  for  about  three  years. 
Montaigne,  in  the  first  book  of  his 
Essays,  remembers  "George  Buchanan, 
that  great  Scottish  poet"  among  his 
tutors,  and  also  how,  as  a  boy,  he  acted 
parts  in  "the  Latin  tragedies  of  Bucan- 
an,  de  Guerente,  and  de  Muret  which 
were  performed  in  our  College  of  Guy- 
enne with  dignity."  The  acting  of 
Latin  plays  was  encouraged  not  only 
lor  the  acquirement  of  perfection  in 
Latin,  but  also  to  draw  youth  away 


from  the  popular  mystery  plays.  Two 
of  Buchanan's  tragedies  were  transla- 
tions from  Euripides,  while  the  original 
ones  —  the  Baptistes  and  the  Jephthcs 
—  were  based  on  Biblical  themes. 

Composed  probably  in  1 541 ,  the 
Baptistes  was  printed  by  Thomas  Vau- 
trollier  in  London  in  1577,  in  a  small 
octavo  of  sixty-four  pages.  Of  this 
rare  edition  the  Library  has  recently 
acquired  one  of  the  two  copies  recorded 
as  in  American  libraries.  In  the  quater- 
centenary  memorial  volume  on  Bu- 
chanan, published  in  1907  by  the  Uni- 
versity of  St.  Andrews,  J.  Maitland 
Anderson  states  that  the  drama  was 
first  published  in  1578,  when  an  Edin- 
burgh and  a  London  edition  appeared 
simultaneously.  Apparently  copies  of 
the  real  first  edition  have  come  to 
light  only  within  the  last  forty  years. 

The  dedication,  dated  from  Stirling 
Castle,  November  1576,  is  to  James 
VI,  King  of  Scotland,  who  was  then 
Buchanan's  ten-year-old  pupil.  The 
play,  modelled  on  the  Senecan  pattern, 
represents  the  intrigues  against,  and 
the  death  of,  St.  John  the  Baptist.  In 
view  of  the  long  persecution  Buchanan 
suffered  as  a  suspected  heretic,  and  of 
his  open  espousal  of  Protestantism  on 
his  return  to  Scotland  in  1561,  the  work 
has  been  variously  interpreted.  Bu- 
chanan himself  stated  that  in  the  trage- 
dy he  had  represented  "the  death  and 
accusation  of  Thomas  More  and  set 
before  the  eyes  an  image  of  the  tyranny 
of  that  time.''  m.  M. 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 

Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

•« 

This  IL<1  should  be  used  in  conjunction  zvith  Books  Current,  a 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
1943.  Books  Current  is  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  am!  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  are  available  for  the  whole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  arc  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  llie 
Business  Branch;  however,  they  may  be  borrozved  through  the  various 
Branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


General  Reference 
Books  in  Bates  Hall 

American  Book-Prices  Current.  Index.  1941- 
45.  Bowker.  1126  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  Closet  Z1000.A51 
Martindale-Hubbell  law  directory  (annual). 

79th  year.  1947.  2  v.  Gen.  Ref  Center  Desk 
National  Catholic  Almanac.  1947.  Paterson, 
N.  T.,  St.  Anthony's  Guild.  1947. 

Gen.  Ref.  AY81.R6N3 

Anthropology 

Densmore,  Frances.  Music  of  the  Indians 
of  British  Columbia.  [Washington.  1943.] 
99  PP-  9  plates.  *436o.66  Bull.  136 

Smithsonian  institution.  Bureau  of  American  eth- 
nology. Bulletin  136.  Anthropological  papers,  no. 
27.  Includes  music. 

Swanton,  John  Reed.  The  Indians  of  the 
southwestern  United  States.  Washington, 
xiii,  943  pp.  107  (i.  e.  109)  plates. 

*436o.66  Bull.  137 

Smithsonian  Institution.  Bureau  of  ethnology. 
Bibliography:    pp.  832-S56. 

Bibliography 

Biography  index,  a  cumulative  index  to  bio- 
graphical material  in  books  and  maga- 
zines. Sept.  1946-to  date.  Wilson.  [1946- 
to  date.  *Z530i.B55 
Quarterly. 

Gt.  Britain,  British  council.  British  civilization 
and  institutions;  a  book  list,  compiled  by 
the  British  council.  American  Library 
Ass'n.  1946.  75  pp.  :::Z20i6.G4 

Muzzy,  Adrienne  Florence,  compiler.  Clan- 
destine periodicals  of  World  war  II. 

:::Z6947.U5 

Biography.  Letters 

Bathe,  Greville.  Citizen  Genet,  diplomat  and 
inventor.  Philadelphia,  [Press  of  Allen, 
Lane  and  Scott.]  1946.  55  pp.  Plates. 

E313.B3 

Edmond  Charles  Genet,  who  was  appointed  French 


Minister  to  America  in  1793  and  became  an  Ameri- 
can citizen  in  1804,  was  greatly  interested  in  aero- 
station, science,  and  industry. 
Calkins,  Earnest  Elmo.  "And  hearing  not — " 
Scribner.  1946.  xiii,  387  pp.  Plates. 

HF5813.U6C3 

The  well  known  advertising  expert  and  essayist 
in  the  preface  advertises  his  memoirs  as  "A 
Manual  for  the  Deaf  — -  A  Text-book  on  Advertis- 
ing —  A  Financial  Primer  --  An  Introduction  to 
Public  Speaking  —  A  Hand-book  on  Hobbies  • — 
Some  advice  on  Contributing  to  Magazines  —  A 
Tract  on  Religion  —  A  Guide  Book  to  Travel  — 
A  Recipe  for  Happiness."  The  title  refers  to  his 
own  deafness  with  which  he  had  to  contend  since 
his  sixth  year. 

Capdevila,  Arturo'  Cordoba  del  recuerdo. 
Buenos  Aires.  [1944.]  [9]-i52pp. 

PQ7797.C28C6  1944 

Cresson,  William  Perm,  1873-193;.  James 
Monroe.  Univ.  of  Nortli  Carolina.  [1946.I 
xiv,  577  pp.  Plates.  E372.C7 
The  late  Mr.  Cresson,  diplomat  and  scholar,  had 
nearly  completed  this  work  at  the  time  of  his 
death  in  May,  1932.  The  final  revision  was  done 
by  Mr.  S.  H.  Paradise  and  others.  Cf.  Introduction 
by  M.  A.  De  Wolfe  Howe. 

Feuillerat,  Albert.   Baudelaire  et   sa  mere. 
Montreal,  Les  Editions  varietes.  [1944.] 
PQ2191.Z5F435 

Geigel  Polanco,  \  icente.  \  alorcs  de  Puerto 
Rico.  San  Juan  de  Puerto  Rico.  1943. 

F1955.G4 

Gorky,  Maxim.  1808-1936.  Reminiscences. 
Mew  York,  Dover  Publications.  1946.  215 
pp.  PG3465.A37  1946 

Contents.  Introduction  by  Mark  Van  Horen.  — 
Reminiscences  of  Anton  Chekhov.  —  Reminiscences 
of  Leonid  Andreyev.  -  -  A  letter  to  Constantin 
Stanislavsky.  —  Reminiscences  of  -Alexander  Blok. 

Humboldt,  Wilhelm,  Freiherr  von,  1767-1835. 
Wilhelm  von  Humboldls  Briefe  an  Karl 
Gustav  von  Brinkmann,  herausgeben  .  .  . 
von  Albert  Leitzmann.  Leipzig  .1939.  264 
pp.  *B4225. 1.288 

Morton,  Eleanor,  pseud.  Josiah  White,  prince 
of  pioneers.  Stephen  Dave.  [1046]  300  pp. 

CT275.W537S8 
The  story  of  the  founder  of  the  anthracite  coal  in- 
dustry in  Pennsylvania. 

Vercors,  pseud.  La  marche  a  Tetoilc.  Pan- 
theon Books.   [1946  ]   13-77  PP- 

PQ2603.R924M3  1946 

The  story  of  Thomas  Muritz  and  his  love  for 
France. 

195 


ig6 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Business 

These  books  are  to  be  obtained  at  the 
Business  Branch,  20  City  Hall  Ave. 
B.  A.  law  list,  The.  v.  48,  no.  128.  1947.  Mil- 
waukee, B.  A.  Law  List  Co.  1947.  282  pp. 

**K3.B7i 

Boston  Herald-Traveler  corporation,  Re- 
search Department.  Boston;  America's 
fifth  market.  Boston  Herald-Traveler 
Corp.  1947.  64  pp.  **HF54is.B74 

Crouse,  William  H.  Everyday  automobile 
repairs.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  287  pp.  NBS 

Editor  and  publisher.  International  year 
book  number  1947.  New  York,  Editor  and 
Publisher  Co.  1947.  352  pp.    **Z6g47 .E23 

Fairchild's  fabrics,  trimmings,  and  supplies 
directory,  v.  40,  no.  2.  Spring,  1947.  Fair- 
child  Pub.  Co.  1946.  448  pp.  **TSi3i2.Fi6f 

Foulke,  Roy  Anderson.  Security  exchanges 
in  world  finance.  Dun  and  Bradstreet. 
1947.  81  pp.  NBS 

General  motors  corporation,  New  departure 
division.  Tale  of  the  tremendous  trifle. 
Bristol,  Meriden  and  Guilford,  Conn.. 
General  Motors  Corp.  1944.  210  pp.  NBS 

Municipal  index,  1946.  21st  annual  edition. 
New  York,  American  City  Magazine. 
1946.  751  PP.  **TDi.Mg6 

National  paint,  varnish  and  lacquer  associ- 
ation, inc.  Year  book,  1946.  Washington, 
The  Association.  1946.  159  pp. 

;i=--i=TP934.N27 

National  research  council.  Industrial  research 
laboratories  of  the  United  States,  includ- 
ing consulting  research  laboratories.  8th 
edition.  1946.  Washington,  National  Re- 
search Council.  1946.  **Ti76.N27 

National  restaurant  association.  Addresses 
and  discussions  of  the  third  national  war- 
time conference.  Chicago,  Lecture  Report- 
ing Service.  1944.  200  pp.  NBS 

Newspaper  press  directory.  The.  .  .  .  1945. 
96th  issue.  London,  Mitchell.  1945.  369 
pp.  **Z6956.E5N55 

Pearson,  Haydn  S.  Success  on  the  small 
farm.  McGraw-Hill.   1946.  286  pp.  NBS 

Robert  D.  Fisher  manual  of  valuable  and 
worthless  securities,  v.  11.  1946.  New 
York,  Robert  D.  Fisher.  1946.  953  pp. 

**HG4927.M39 

Snider,  Joseph  L.  The  guarantee  of  work 
and  wages.  Harvard,  Graduate  School  of 
Business  Administration.  1947.  181  pp 

NBS 

Thrum's  Hawaiian  annual  and  standard 
guide  combined  with  all  about  Hawaii. 
72d  year.  1945/46.  Honolulu  Star-Bulle- 
tin. 1946.  **HA4007.H3.H38 

Underwriters'  laboratories,  inc.  List  of  in- 
spected fire  protection  equipment  and  ma- 
terials. Jan.  1947.  Chicago,  Underwriters' 
Laboratories.  1947.  189  pp.  **THg245.U56 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  foreign  and  domestic  com- 
merce. Establishing  and  operating  a 
laundry.  1946.  213  pp.  NBS 
Industrial  (small  business)  series  no.  37. 

U.  S.  Office  of  domestic  commerce,  Market- 
ing division.  Merchandise  display  for 
simplified  service  in  department  and 
specialty  stores,  by  E.  R.  Hawkins  and 


Carl  E.  Wolf,  jr.  Office  of  Domestic 
Commerce.  1946.  92  pp.  NBS 
Industrial  scries  no.  61. 


Drama.  Stage 


Benet,  Stephen  Vincent,  iSyS-1943.  Prayer. 
A    Child   is   born.    Farrar   &  Rinehart. 

[I944-]  PS3503.E5325P7 

The  Prayer  of  one  page  was  written  as  The  United 
Nations  Prayer  and  incorporated  into  President 
Roosevelt's  Flag  Day  speech  in  June,  1942. 
This  precedes  a  modern  drama  in  verse  of  the 
Nativity,  written  for  the  program  "Cavalcade  of 
America,"  and  broadcast  in  December  1942  and 
1943- 

Dolman,  John.  The  art  of  play  production. 
Revised  edition.  Harper.  [1946.]  xix,  421 
pp.  Plates.  PN2053.D6  1946 

Bibliography:  pp.  383-391. 

Nicoll,  Allardyce.  A  history  of  late  nineteenth 
century  drama,  1850-1900.  Cambridge 
Univ.  1946.  2  v.  PR731.N5 
Contents.  —  Vol.  I.  The  Theatre.  Contemporary 
Dramatic  Conditions.  Boucicault  and  Taylor :  Plays 
of  the  Fifties.  Robertson  and  Byron:  Plays  of  the 
Sixties.  Gilbert  and  Albery:  Plays  of  the  Seventies. 
Jones  and  Pinero :  Plays  of  the  Eighties.  Wilde 
and  Shaw :  Plays  of  the  Nineties.  Appendix  A.  The 
Theatres,  1 850-1 900.  —  Vol.  II.  Hand-List  of 
Plays  produced  between  1S50  and  1900. 

Selden,  Samuel,  editor.  Organizing  a  com- 
munity theatre  .  .  .  Authors:  Frederic 
McConnell  [and  others]  .  .  .  Cleveland, 
O.,  National  Theatre  Conference,  1945.  127 
pp.  PN2267.S4 
Contents.    —   Foreword,   by   Frederic  McConnell. 

—  The  idea  of  community  theatre,  by  Edward 
Reveaux.  —  Organizing  the  support,  by  R.  E. 
Welles.  — ■  Organizing  the  working  group,  by  B. 
W.  James.  —  Housing  the  theatre,  by  Arch 
Lauterer.  —  Organizing  the  audience,  by  T.  B. 
Humble.  —  The  box  office,  by  Marcella  Cisney.  — 
Good  theatre  as  good  business,  by  Talbot  Pearson. 

—  The  director  as  community  citizen,  by  R.  N. 
Gage.  —  Typical  budgets.  —  Typical  constitutions 
and  by-laws.  —  Helpful  books  on  the  theatre  (pr. 
[i22]-i27.)  —  An  advisory  service  for  returning 
service  men  and  •women. 


Economics 

Goldenthal,  Irving.  How  to  buy  and  merchan- 
dise profitably.  New  York,  Better  Mer- 
chandising Institute.  [1946.]  [7]-24i  pp. 
Illus.  9381.04A120 

Tennessee  valley  authority.  The  Hiwassee 
project;  a  comprehensive  report  on  the 
planning,  design,  construction,  and  initial 
operations  of  the  Hiwassee  project.  Wash- 
initon.  1946.  Illus.  *4028B.43.5 

Tucker,  Gilbert  Milligan.  The  self-supporting 
city.  New  York,  Robert  Schalkenbach 
Foundation.  1946.  n-io8pp.  9336.226A2 


Education 

Miel,  Alice.  Changing  the  curriculum,  a  social 
process.  Appleton-Century.  [1946.I  xii, 
242  pp.  LB1570.M52 
"Selected  bibliography":  pp.  231-233. 

Slavson,  Samuel  Richard.  Recreation  and 
the  total  personality.  New  York.  Associa- 
tion Press.  1946.  x,  205  pp.  GV14.S53 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


197 


Fine  Arts 

Drawing.  Engraving 

Daumier,   Honore   Victorin,   1808-1879.  240 
lithographs.  Reynal  &  Hitchcock.  [1946.] 
[22,  8]  pp.  incl.  ilhis.  240  plates. 
Introduction  by  Benianl  Lemann.  *8l57B.2o6 

Moore,  Anne  Carroll.  A  century  of  Kate 
Greenaway.  New  York,  Warne.  [1946.] 
15  pp.   Colored   plates.  8143.03-444 

Painting.  Modern  Art 

Breton,  Andre.  Yves  Tanguy  .  .  .  English 
translation  by  P.ravig  Imbs.  New  York, 
Pierre  Matisse  Editions.  [1946.]  0-94 
pp.  Plates.  *8o63.o8-<)35 
French  text  followed  by  English  translation. 

Castellanos,  Carlos  Alberto.  America  tropi- 
cal; diaz  cuadros  en  citrocraniia.  [Monte- 
video. 1944.]  ro  mounted  colored  plates, 
in  portfolio.  *8o6oB.6o 

Garavito,  Humberto.  6  pinturas  de  Chichi- 
castenango;  originales  de  II.  Garavito. 
Album  no,  2.  Guatemala.  [194-?  1  6  colored 
plates.  *8o6oB.5i 
Issued  in  portfolio. 

Matisse,  Henri.  Matisse;  seize  peintures. 
1 939-1943;  introduction  de  Andre  Lejard. 
Paris.  6  pp.  XVI  colored  mounted  plates. 

*8o63B.74o 

Picasso,  Pablo.  Picasso;  seize  peintures 
I939-i943.  Introduction  de  Robert  Des- 
nos.  Paris.  1943.  6  pp.  X\TI  mounted 
colored  plates.  *8o63B.sss 

Issued  in  portfolio. 

Whitney   museum    of   American   art,  New 

York.  Pioneers  of  modern  art  in  America, 
April  9-  May  19,  1946,  Whitney  museum 
of  American  art.  New  York.  [1946.]  29 
pp.  Plates.  *4077.oi-i24 

History 

World  War  II 

Allied  forces.  Report  by  the  supreme  com- 
mander of  the  Combined  chiefs  of  staff 
on  the  operations  in  Europe  of  the  Allied 
expeditionary  force,  6  June  1944,  to  8 
May  1945.  [Washington.  1946.]  x,  123  pp. 
Illus.  *D756.A24 

Signed :  Hw  ight  D.  Eisenhower,  supreme  com- 
mander, Alllied  expeditionary  force. 

Howard,  Clive,  and  Joe  Whitley.  One 
damned  island  after  another  .  .  .  Prepared 
by  HQ,  AAF,  AFIPR,  Personnel  nar- 
ratives division;  Norman  S.  Weiser,  di- 
rector. University  of  North  Carolina. 
[1946.]  xviii,  403  pp.  Plates.  D790.H7 
The  "dammed  islands"  are  the  islands  of  the  Pacific 
in  this  official  combat  history  of  the  Seventh  Air 
Force  from  Pearl  Harbor  to  victory.  The  authors 
consider  especially  the  contributions  of  all  kinds 
of  men  —  not  only  the  celebrated  heroes. 

U.  S.  Strategic  bombing  survey.  The  allied 
campaign  against  Rabaul.  [Washington,] 
Naval  analysis  division,  Marshalls-Gil- 
berts-New  Britain  Party.  1946.  ix,  273 
pp.  incl.  illus.  D767.99.N4U5  1946 

"List  of  reports":  pp.  269—273. 

—  The  campaigns  of  the  Pacific  war.  United 


States  strategic  bombing  survey  (Pacific) 
Naval  analysis  division.  [Washington. 
1946.]  xv,  389  pp.  *D767.Usi  1946 


Miscellaneous 
Arab  office,  Washington,  D.  C. 
of  Arab  states.  [Washington, 
incl.  illus. 

Arab  news  bulletin,  v.  1,  April  15 
8  and  9. 

Galmdez,  Bartolome.  Historia 
gentina:  la  revolucion  del 
Aires.  1945.  [9]-38;  pp. 


The  league 
1946.I  50  pp. 
DS36.2.A8 

1946,  nos.  7, 

politica  ar- 
80.  Buenos 
F2846.G14 


Language 


Hedberg,  Johannes.  The  syncope  of  the  Old 
English  present  endings;  a  dialect  cri- 
terion. Lund,  Gleerup.  [1945.]  310  pp. 

*PE25.L8  v.  12 

Lund  studies  in  English.  Editor :  Professor  Olof 
Amgart.  XII. 

Bibliography:   pp.  [299I-395. 

Ibarra,  Francisco,  and  Nicholas  Orloff.  Mod- 
ern Russian,  self-taught.  Random  House. 
[1947.]  viii,  337  pp.  Illus.    PG2129.E5  I  2 

Literature 

History  of  Literature 

Dufrenoy,  Marie  Louise.  L'Orient  romanes- 
que  en  France,  1704-1789.  Etude  d'his- 
toire  et  de  critique  litteraires.  Montreal, 
Editions  Beauchemin.  1946.  [9]-38o  pp. 

PQ648.D8 

Gomez  de  la  Serna,  Ramon.  Don  Ramon 
Maria    del    Valle-Inclan.    Buenos  Aires. 
.  [I944-]    [9]-2i6pp.  PQ6641.A47Z7 

Linden,  Walther.  Geschichte  der  deutschen 
Literatur  von  den  Anfangen  bis  zur 
Gegenwart.  Leipzig.  [1942.]  528  pp. 

*PT8s.L74  1942 

NBC  university  of  the  air.  The  world's  great 
novels;  a  broadcast  series,  presented  by 
the  NBC  university  of  the  air  as  a  public 
service  feature  of  the  National  broadcast- 
ing company.  Handbook,  v.  1-  1944/45- 
New  York,  Pub.  for  the  National  Broad- 
casting Co.  by  Columbia  Univ.  Press. 
1944-  PN3491.N2 

Brief  critical  descriptions  of  famous  novels,  from 
Don  Quixote  to  works  by  James  Joyce,  Willa 
Cather,  and  Sinclair  Lewis  —  twenty-five  in  all, 
besides  two  collective  surveys  at  the  end. 

Oelsen,  Herbert,  Frcihcrr  von.  Till  Eulen- 
spiegels  Erben,  der  Humor  deutscher 
Landschaften,  mit  36  Federzeichnungen 
des  Verfassers.  Oldenburg.  1943.  210  pp. 
Illus.  :::PTi358.0  4 

"Sammlungen   deutschen  Humors":    pp.  210. 

Ribera  Chevremont,  Evaristo.  La  naturaleza 
en  "Color".  San  luan  de  Puerto  Rico. 
1943.  54PP-  PQ7439.R49C63 

Modern  Literature  in  French 
Portgamp.    Annie.    Les    cabotins;  roman. 

Paris.  [1946.]  7-255  PP-  PQ2631.O657C3 
Troyat,  Henri.   Du  philanthrope  a  la  rou- 
quine.  Paris.  [1945  ]  220  pp. 

PQ2639.R78D8 


ig8  MORE  BOOKS: 

Modern  Literature  in  German 

Blunck,  Hans  Friedrich.  Bootsmann  Elbing; 
mit  Zeichnungen  von  Olaf  Gulbransson. 
Wien.  [1943  ]  75PP-  *PT26o3.L75B6s 
Dominik,    Hans,   1872-1946.   Konig  Laurins 
Mantel,  Roman.  Berlin.  [1943.]  321pp. 

*PT2607.O  53K7  1943 
Haacke,   Wilmont,   editor.   Das  Ringelspiel, 
kleine  Wiener  Prosa.  Berlin.  1941.  456  pp. 

*PT3828.V5H3 

Jansen,  Werner.  Das  Buch  Leidenschaft, 
Amelungenroman.  Berlin.  1943.  298  pp. 

*PT26ig.A6gB7 

—  Das  Bueh  Treue,  Nibelungenroman.  Ber- 
lin. 1943.  331pp.  *PT26i9.A6gB8 

Kammerer,  Ernst,  d.  1941.  Amazone  bis  Zi- 
tone ;  ein  nenes  kleines  Lexikon  von  A  bis 
Z.  Frankfurt  a.  M.  [1941.I  378,  [6]  pp. 
Sketches  and  reminiscences.  *PT262I.AsA72 

Kunzemann,  Gertrud.  Wiedergeboren ;  Roman. 
Miinchen.  [1943.]  407  pp. 

*PT262i.U69Ws  1943 
Langer,  Georg.  Die  Liebespost,  ein  heiterer 
Roman.  Breslau.  [1943.]  153! pp.  Illus. 

*PT2623.A57L5 
Lobsien,  Wilhelm.  Segnende  Erde,  Roman 
ans  Deutschlands  dunklen  Tagen.  Heide 
in  Holstein.  [1943.]  2^8  pp. 

*PT2623.0  18P5  1943 
"Der  vorliegende  Roman  'Segnende  Erde'  ist  eine 
Umarheitung  der  Erzahlung  'Der  Pilger  im  NebeF." 

Luserke,  Martin.  Ein  Mann:  Sechs  Geschich- 

ten  vom  Abenteuer  des  I.ebens.  Potsdam. 

[1943.]  435  PP-  *PT2623.U7M3 
Nebe,  Boris.  Tuans  Sohne.  Hamburg.  [  1 943 . 1 

453  PP-  *PT2627.Ei47J8 
Planner-Petelin,  Rose,  pseud.  Und  dennoch 

bliiht  die  Erde,  Roman.  Hamburg.  [1942.I 

393PP-  *PT2653.0  38U5  1942 

Pongratz,  Alfons.  Xeuverl,  Roman  .  .  .  Miin- 

chen.  [1941.]  207  pp.  *PT263i.0  6X4 
Quarnstedt,  Hildegard  Agnes.  Johan  Hauk, 

Roman.  Niirnberg.  [1943.]  384  pp. 

*PT2633-U3J6 

Modern  Literature  in  Spanish 

Gallegos,  R6mulo.  Sobre  la  misma  tierra. 
Buenos  Aires.  [1944. 1 

PQ8549.G24S6  1944 
Tapia   y   Rivera,   Alejandro.    1S26-1882.  La 
antigua  sirena.  San  Juan,  P.  R.  1944. 

PQ7439.T3A7  1944 

Poetry 

Bodtke,  Richard  E.  Shadow  of  a  dream. 
Glenolden,  Pa.,  Interboro  Press.  1946. 
24  pp.  XZ46.10-1 

Spring,  Henry  Powell.  The  steep  ascent. 
Winter  Park,  Fla..  Orange  Press.  1945. 
17-140  pp.  XZ46.10-3 

Wagner,  Charles  L.  II.  Let's  make  a  garden; 
poems  inspired  by  nature's  garden  mira- 
cles. Boston.  Thompson  Press.  [1045.]  39 
pp.  XZ46.10-2 

Music 

Literature 

Music  library  association,  Committee  on  in- 
dexes. Preliminary  draft  of  a  check-list  of 


A  BULLETIN 

thematic  catalogues,  prepared  for  the 
Music  library  association  by  the  Commit- 
tee on  indexes  (1942-1946)  Leonard 
Burkat,  Scott  Goldthwaite  [and]  Helen 
Joy  Sleeper.  Wellesley  College  Library. 
1946.  19  numb.  11.  :<MLi28.TsM8 
Mimeographed. 

Tanabe,  Hisao.  Japanese  music  .  .  .  trans- 
lated by  Shigeyoshi  Sakabe.  Tokyo.  1946. 
33  pp.  Music.  IX  plates.  *ML340.Ti6j2 

Van  de  Wall,  Willem.  Music  in  hospitals. 
Russell  Sacre  Foundation.  1946.  86  pp. 

ML3920.V18M88 

Scores 

Beethoven,  Ludwig  van,  1770-1827.  German 
dances,  for  the  piano;  arranged  by  Isidor 
Seiss;  edited  and  fingered  by  August 
Fraemcke.  Schirmer.  1915.  17  pp. 

M35.B4G4 

Lourie,  Arthur.  Dithyrambes,  for  flute  solo. 
Schirmer.  [1942.]  7  pp.  M62.L68D5 

Contents.  —  i.  Le  sacrifice  An  miel.  —  2.  Plainte 
d'Ariane.  —  3.  Lahyrintbe. 

Revueltas,  Silvestre,  1890-1940.  Cuauhnahuac. 
Schirmer.  [1946.]  36  pp.  M1045.R49C8 

"Duration :  about  1 1  minutes." 

Siegmeister,  Elie.  Johnny  Appleseed.  New 
York,  [Maxwell  Weaner  Publications. 
1941.]  4  pp.  M1621.S54J6 

Voice  and  piano. 

Words  by  Rosemary  Benet. 

Stravinskil,  Igor'  F.  Sonata  for  two  pianos. 
Xew  York,  Associated  Music  Publishers. 
[1945.]  24,  24  pp.  M214.S87S6 

Two  scores  for  piano  1-2. 

Politics  and  Government 

Domestic  Affairs 

Garrett,  Caret.  The  revolution  was.  Caxton 
Printers.   1945.   5-51  pp.      E806.G4  1945 

A  bitterly  critical  representation  cf  the  Xew  Deal 
as  the  revolution  that  has  taken  place. 

Pound,  Roscoe.  Administrative  agencies  and 
the  law.  [New  York,  National  Industrial 
Conference  Board.  1946.]  26  pp.  JK421.P6 
An  abridgement  of  this  paper  was  printed  in 
the  spring  number  of  American  Affairs  under  title 
"What  is  happening  to  the  Law?" 

The  New  World 

Dean,  Vera  Micheles.  Russia  —  menace  or 
promise?  Foreign  Policy  Ass'n.  1946.  96 
pp.  Illus.  *757i-96  No.  58 

Murray,  Gilbert.  "Victory  and  after."  Leeds. 
1945.  15  PP-  JXi395.M6  3d 

Trinker,  Frederick  William,  d.  1944.  The 
anatomy  of  world  order;  or,  A  glimpse 
at  a  multifold  world  organization.  Mexi- 
co. 1946.  132  pp.  JC362.T77 

United  nations.  United  nations  handbook; 
General  assembly  supplement.  Lake  Suc- 
cess, United  Nations.  1946.  59  pp. 

*JXi977.A47  1946 

Religion 

Goodspeed,  Edgar  J.  How  to  read  the  Bible. 
Winston.  [1946.]  ix,  244  pp.  BS617.G6 
An  authoritative  scholar  guides  the  general  reader 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


i99 


in  his  reading  of  the  Bible  by  explaining  tlic  his- 
torical background  and  pointing  out  the  beauties 
and  meaning  of  the  different  books.  The  arrange- 
ment is  topical,  with  chapters  like  "Biographies," 
"Speeches,  Orations,  and  Sermons,"  "  "The  Out- 
line of  History:  I.  Human  Origins  and  the  Birth 
of  a  Nation,"  "Popular  Religious  Poetry,"  etc. 
Includes  valuable  chronological  tables. 

Job;  with  Hebrew  text  and  English  transla- 
tion. Commentary  by  Rabbi  Dr.  Victor 
E.  Reichert.  Hindhcacl,  Surrey,  Soncino 
Press.  1946.  xx,  233  pp.  BS1415.R4 
The  English  text  is  that  of  the  Jewish  Publication 
Society  of  America.  — cf.  Publishers'  note. 

MacDonald,  Fergus.  The  Catholic  church 
and  the  secret  societies  in  the  United 
States  .  .  .  edited  by  Thomas  J.  Mac- 
Mahon.  United  States  Catholic  Historical 
Soc.  1946.  220  pp.  *346oA.i3  v.  22 

United  States  Catholic  Historical  Society.  Mono- 
graph series  22. 

Martyrologium  romanum.  The  Roman  mar- 
tyrology,  published  by  order  of  Gregory 
XIII,  revised  by  authority  of  Urban  VIII 
and  Clement  X,  augmented  and  corrected 
in  1749  by  Benedict  XIV.  The  3d  Turin 
edition,  according  to  the  original,  complete 
with  the  proper  eulogies  of  recent  saints 
and  offices.  Translated  by  Rev.  Raphael 
Collins  .  .  .  introduction  by  Rev.  Joseph 
B.  Collins.  Westminster,  Md.,  Newman 
Bookshop.  1946.  xiv,  352  pp. 

*BX466o.A3  1946 

Science 

Chemistry.  Physics 

Dow  chemical  company,  Physical  research 
laboratory.  Table  of  vapor  pressure  — 
temperature  charts ;  a  reference  volume  for 
reading  directly  the  boiling  point  corre- 
sponding to  the  pressures  generally  used 
in  vacuum  distillaton  for  seventeen  fami- 
lies of  organic  chemical  compounds.  Com- 
piled from  Cox  charts,  by  R.  R.  Dreis- 
bach.  Midland.  Mich.  1946.  8200B.10 
Reproduced  from  type-written  copy. 
Second  edition. 

Rochow,  Eugene  G.  An  introduction  to  the 
chemistry  of  the  silicones.  Wiley.  [1946.] 
x,  137  PP-  Illus.  8288.10 

Strong,  Ralph  K.  Chemistry  for  the  executive, 
a  layman's  guide  to  chemistry  .  .  .  original 
drawings  executed  by  Paul  E.  Mead  from 
sketches  by  the  author.  Reinhold  Pub. 
Corp.  1946.  445  pp.  Plates.  8263.137 

Miscellaneous 

Cooper,  Chalmer  L.  Pennsylvanian  ostra- 
codes  of  Illinois.  Urbana,  111.  1946.  177 
pp.  Illus.  *386s.i84  Bull.  70 

Epling,  Carl.  The  living  mosaic.  Univ.  of 
California.  1944.  26  pp.  Illus.  *QH40i.E6 
"It  is  my  intention  to  examine  briefly  the  causes 
which  are  known  to  produce  these  changes  [in  the 
individual  organisms  and  species]  and  their  signifi- 
cance for  the  systematist  .  .  ." — P.  2. 

Mees,  C.  E.  Kenneth,  and  John  R.  Baker. 
The  path  of  science.  Wiley.  [1946.]  xii, 
250  pp.  Illus.  Q125.M43 

Moncrieff,  R.  W.  The  chemical  senses.  Wiley. 
[1946.]  vii,  424  pp.  Illus.  QP431.M6  1946 


Porter,  Jolm  Roger.  Bacterial  chemistry 
and  phvsiologv.  Wiley.  [1946.]  x.  1073  pp. 

QR84.P84 

Sociology 

Firey,  Walter  Irving.  Land  use  in  central 
Boston.  Harvard.  1947.  XV,  367  pp.  Illus. 

HD268.B7F5 

Harvard  sociological   studies,  vol.  iv. 
Bibliography:  pp.  [3411-353- 

Koos,  Earl  Lomon.  Families  in  t rouble.  With 
a  preface  by  Robert  S.  Lyiid.  New  York, 
King's  Crown  Press.  1946.  xvi,  134  pp. 

HV43.K64 

A  case  study  of  a  group  of  low  income  urban 
families,  made  during  the  years  1 040-1943.  The 
chapter  on  "The  Troubles  of  these  Families"  con- 
tains many  direct  quotations  from  talks  with  the 
people   in  trouble. 

[Patman,  Wright.]  Handbook  for  veterans 
of  world  war  II  and  their  dependents, 
including  rights  and  benefits  of  veterans 
of  world  war  I  and  their  dependents. 
Washington.  1946.  iii,  57  pp. 

*UA24.P3  1946 

Stewart,  Bryce  M.,  and  Walter  J.  Couper. 
Fact  finding  in  industrial  disputes.  New 
York,  Idustrial  Relations  Counselors. 
1946.  61  pp.  933i-i55Ai25 

Industrial  relations  monograph  no  II. 

Wells,  John,  pseud.,  and  Enid  Wells,  pseud. 
The  job  that  fits  you  —  and  how  to  get 
it.  Prentice-Hall.  1946.  xiii,  423  pp.  Illus. 

HF5381.K35 

Includes  basic  aptitude  tests  and  self-analysis  charts. 


Technology 

Aeronautics.  Mechanical  Engineering 
Arnold,  Schwinn  and  co.,  Chicago.  Fifty 
years  of  Schwinn-built  bicycles;  the  story 
of  the  bicycle  and  its  contributions  to 
our  way  of  life,  1805-1945.  Chitago, 
Arnold,  Schwinn.  [1945. |  7-90  pp.  Illus. 

4030B.216 

Hawkins,  George  A.  Thermodynamics.  Wiley. 
[1946.]  xii,  436  pp.  4032E.45 

Jordanoff,  Assen.  Dials  and  flight.  Harper. 
[1947.]  vi,  359  PP-  11111s-  4036E.187 

Stout,  Gerald  John.  The  home  freezer  hand- 
book .  .  .  with  drawings  and  sketches  by 
Philip  F.  Hallock.  Van  Nostrand.  1947- 
xiii,  345  pp.  inch  illus.  40378.102 

Manufacture.  Chemical  Technology 

Mason,  J.  Philip,  and  Joseph  F.  Manning. 
The  technology  of  plastics  and  resins.  Van 
Nostrand.  [  1947-1  viii,  493  pp.  Illus. 

8031D.57 

"Based  upon  a  college  course  in  the  chemistry  of 
plastics  and  resins  offered  at  Boston  university  by 
one  of  the  authors." — Preface. 

Sadtler,  Samuel  Schmucker.  Chemistry  of 
familiar  things.  8th  edition  revised.  Lip- 
pincott.   [1946.]   xii,  310  pp.  Plates. 

8030D.64 

Williams,  Clement  C.  Building  an  engineer- 
ing career.  2d  edition.  McGraw-Hill.  1946. 
xiii,  309  pp.  Illus. 

TA157.W5    1946- 8034A.33R 


200  MORE  BOOKS: 

Miscellaneous 

Corrosion  of  metals  [by]  C.  W.  Borgmann, 
C.  P.  Larrabee,  W.  O.  Binder  [and 
others].  A  series  of  five  educational 
lectures  on  corrosion  of  metals  presented 
to  members  of  the  A.  S.  M.  during  the 
twenty-seventh  national  metal  congress 
and  exposition,  Cleveland.  February  4  to 
8,  1946.  [Cleveland.  1946.]  181  pp.  Illus. 

4017.520 

McManigal,  J.  W.  Marketing  your  pictures; 
how  and  where;  a  book  on  selling  free 
lance  photography.  [New  York,  Maloney. 
1946.]  63  pp.  incl.  illus.  8029A.452 

Rosenberg,  Robert.  Electric  motor  repair,  a 
practical  book  on  the  winding,  repair,  and 
troubleshooting  of  A-C  and  D-C  motors 
and  controllers.  New  York,  Murray  Hill 


A  BULLETIN 

Books.  1946.  2  v.  in  1.  8012.446 
Contents.  —  [v.  1]  Text.  —  [v.  z]  Illustrations. 


Travel  and  Description 

Leiter,  K.  H.  Auf  Filmfahrt  in  Bulgarien. 
Budweis-  Leipzig.  [1944.]  384  pp.  Plates. 

*DR6o.L4 

Only  an  ocean  between.  Three  volumes  in 
one.  Essential  Books,  Duell  Sloan  and 
Pearce.  [1946.]  9-183  pp.  E169.A493 

"This  is  an  omnibus  of  three  volumes  that  ap- 
peared in  Britain  during  the  later  years  of  the 
war." — Editor's  Preface. 

Contents.  —  Only  an  Ocean  between.   By  Letla 
Secor  Florence.  —  Our  Private  Lives.  By  Leila 
Secor    Florence.    —    Our   Two    Democracies  at 
Work.  By  K.  B.  SmeUie. 
Xitmerous  photogrrar-hs  and  colored  charts. 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 

Volume  XXII,  Number  6 


Contents 

Page 


MELVILLE  DEFENDS  TYPEE  203 

By  Zoltan  Haraszti 
THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON:  General  Gage's  Orderly  Book, 

December  1774-June  1775  (ivith  facsimile)  209 

PRINTS  OF  CHILDREN  {with  facsimile)  225 

By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

TEN  BOOKS :  SHORT  REVIEWS 

Edgar  Snow:  Stalin  Must  Have  Peace  229 

John  Fischer :  Why  They  Behave  Like  Russians  229 

Norman  Thomas  :  Appeal  to  the  Nations  230 

A.  J.  Liebling,  editor:  The  Republic  of  Silence  230 

Maurice  R.  Davie :  Refugees  in  America  230 

Howard  W.  Odum :  The  Way  of  the  South  231 

John  Erskine  :  The  Memory  of  Certain  Persons  231 

Alfred  McKinley  Terhune :  The  Life  of  Edward  FitzGerald  231 

Townsend  Scudder:  Concord:  American  Town  232 

Trent  E.  Sanford :  The  Story  of  Architecture  in  Mexico  232 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

The  Newfoundland  and  Plantation  Acts  233 

Retirement  of  Miss  Cufflin  233 

Look  at  New  England  234 

LIST  OF  RECENTLY-ACQUIRED  BOOKS  235 


*• 
* 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17, 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library  15-17  Blagden  St.,  June,  1947,  Vol.  XXII,  No.  6 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees  >  for  free  distribution; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 

JUNE,  1947 

Melville  Defends  Typee 

SOON  after  his  return  from  his  four  years'  voyage  in  the  South  Seas, 
Melville  set  himself  to  write  his  first  book,  Typee:  A  Peep  at  Polynesian 
Life,  During  a  Four  Months'  Residence  in  a  Valley  of  the  Marquesas.  A  year 
later,  in  December  1845,  he  sold  the  manuscript,  which  he  had  unsuc- 
cessfully offered  to  several  American  publishers,  to  John  Murray  in 
London.  It  was  his  eldest  brother  Gansevoort,  since  1844  secretary  to 
the  American  Legation  in  London,  who  negotiated  the  transaction.  The 
work  appeared  in  two  parts  —  the  first  on  February  26,  and  the  second 
on  April  1,  1846;  soon  afterwards,  by  arrangement  with  the  London 
publisher,  it  was  also  issued  by  Wiley  and  Putnam  in  New  York. 

"Gratefully  inscribed"  to  Lemuel  Shaw,  Chief  Justice  of  Massachu- 
setts and  the  author's  future  father-in-law,  Typee  was  presented  as  a  true 
story.  All  the  adventures  which  he  had  among  the  cannibals  after  his 
escape  with  his  shipmate  Toby  from  the  whaler  Acushnet,  Melville  de- 
scribed in  fascinating  detail.  Typee  Valley,  with  its  lush  vegetation,  its 
calm,  strong  men  and  lovely,  innocent  women,  its  peace  and  friendliness, 
was  an  earthly  paradise.  Realizing  that  his  experiences  might  appear 
to  some  readers  "strange,  or  perhaps  entirely  incomprehensible,"  the 
novelist  hopefully  trusted  that  "his  anxious  desire  to  speak  the  unvar- 
nished truth"  would  find  credence. 

Typee  achieved  instantaneous  success  in  both  England  and  America. 
The  reviewers  heaped  extravagant  praise  upon  its  exquisite  style,  ele- 
gance, and  charm,  comparing  jt  to  Chateaubriand's  Atala,  Dr.  Johnson's 
Rasselas,  and  Defoe's  Robinson  Crusoe.  It  was  called  "one  of  the  most 
agreeable,  readable  books  of  the  day,"  "as  genial  and  natural  as  the 
spontaneous  fruits  of  the  island."  Adjectives  like  "captivating,"  "wonderful," 
"exciting,"  and  "bewitching"  were  used  with  the  utmost  lavishness.  "Few 
can  read  without  a  thrill,"  a  New  York  critic  remarked,  "the  glowing 
pictures  of  scenery  and  luxuriant  nature  —  the  festivities  and  amuse- 
ments, the  heathenish  rites  and  sacrifices  and  battles  of  these  beautiful 
islands."  The  English  writers,  if  anything,  were  even  more  generous. 


203 


204 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


"Nothing  but  pure  delight;  sunny  days,  bright  skies,  absence  of  care, 
presence  of  lovely  woman.  Fayaway  —  who  gave  her  that  name  ?  —  is 
in  herself  sufficient  to  enchain  a  human  heart  to  a  dungeon  for  life  .  .  .  ," 
the  reviewer  for  the  London  Times  wrote.  All  the  magazines  and  news- 
papers were  nostalgic  about  "this  garden  of  Eden,  from  which  man  is 
not  yet  an  exile." 

There  was,  however,  an  essential  difference  between  the  attitudes 
of  the  English  and  American  critics:  while  the  former  were  ready  to 
accept  the  truthfulness  of  the  narrative,  most  of  the  latter  positively  de- 
nied it.  "Had  this  work  been  put  forward  as  the  production  of  an  English 
common  sailor,"  the  London  Spectator  wisely  commented,  "we  should 
have  had  some  doubts  of  its  authenticity  in  the  absence  of  distinct  proof. 
But  in  the  United  States  it  is  different.  There  social  opinion  does  not 
invest  any  employment  with  discredit;  and  it  seems  customary  with 
young  men  of  respectability  to  serve  as  common  seamen,  either  as  a  pro- 
bationership  to  the  navy  or  as  a  mode  of  seeing  life.  Cooper  and  Dana 
are  examples  of  this  practice  .  .  ."  At  most  they  thought  that  the  coloring 
of  the  scenes  may  have  been  "overcharged,"  but  "the  minuteness  and 
novelty  of  the  details  could  only  have  been  given  by  one  who  had  before 
him  nature  for  his  model."  Herman  Melville,  as  another  English  maga- 
zine suggested,  "has  either  employed  a  Daniel  Defoe  to  describe  his 
adventures,  or  is  himself  both  a  Daniel  Defoe  and  an  Alexander  Selkirk." 
Chambers's  Edinburgh  Journal  devoted  a  whole  essay  —  seven  closely- 
printed  columns  —  to  the  book,  giving  a  factual  account  of  all  its  inci- 
dents. Evidently  the  London  Times  was  the  only  English  paper  to  which 
the  existence  of  such  unalloyed  felicity  in  any  part  of  the  planet  ap- 
peared too  much.  Most  of  the  American  papers,  on  the  other  hand,  were 
violent  in  their  denunciation  of  Melville's  mendacity.  In  its  April  17 
issue  the  Morning  Courier  and  New  York  Enquirer  printed  this  piece: 

We  have  accidentally  omitted  to  notice  "Typee,  or  a  Peep  at  Polynesian 
Life,"  a  work  recently  published  by  Messrs.  Wiley  &  Putnam,  in  their  series 
of  American  books.  The  author  is  Herman  Melville,  and  this,  we  believe, 
is  his  first  published  production.  It  is  written  in  an  exceedingly  racy  and 
readable  style,  and  abounds  in  anecdote  and  narrative  of  unusual  interest. 
We  should  not  express  our  candid  opinion,  however,  did  we  omit  to  say 
that  in  our  judgment,  in  all  essential  respects,  it  is  a  fiction,  —  a  piece  of 
Munchausenism,  —  from  beginning  to  end.  It  may  be  that  the  author 
visited,  and  spent  some  time  in,  the  Marquesas  Islands ;  and  there  may  be 
foundation  for  some  portions  of  the  narrative.  But  we  have  not  the  slightest 
confidence  in  any  of  the  details,  while  many  of  the  incidents  narrated  are 
utterly  incredible.  We  might  cite  numberless  instances  of  this  monstrous 
exaggeration ;  but  no  one  can  read  a  dozen  pages  of  the  book  without  de- 
tecting them. 

This  would  be  a  matter  to  be  excused,  if  the  book  were  not  put  forth  as 
a  simple  record  of  actual  experience.  It  professes  to  give  nothing  but  what 


MELVILLE  DEFENDS  TYPEE 


205 


the  author  actually  saw  and  heard.  It  must  therefore  be  judged,  not  as  a 
romance  or  a  poem,  but  as  a  book  of  travels,  —  as  a  statement  of  facts ;  — 
and  in  this  light  it  has,  in  our  judgment,  no  merit  whatever.  Parts  of  the 
work  claim  to  be  historical,  in  giving  an  account  of  the  missionary  labors 
in  the  Islands,  the  proceedings  of  the  French,  &c  ;  but  the  spirit  of  fiction 
in  which  the  whole  is  written  deprives  these  of  all  reliability. 

Melville  was  infuriated,  and  decided  to  combat  the  mischief.  His  re- 
action to  the  obtuseness  and  arrogance  of  his  American  critics  may  be 
judged  by  a  hitherto  unpublished  letter  of  his,  now  in  the  Boston  Public 
Library.  The  letter,  which  covers  three  quarto  pages,  bears  no  address; 
however,  from  the  compliments  sent  to  "Mrs.  Bradford"  it  is  obvious 
that  it  was  written  to  Alexander  Warfield  Bradford,  the  New  York  law- 
yer and  a  close  friend  of  the  family.  It  was  Alexander's  father,  John  W. 
Bradford,  who  had  married  Melville's  parents  in  Albany;  and  Alexander 
himself  had  been  a  schoolmate  of  Gansevoort  Melville  at  Albany  Acade- 
my, the  school  which  Herman  Melville  too  attended  before  he  had  to 
leave  on  account  of  poverty.  Gansevoort,  in  fact,  was  Bradford's  partner 
in  Newr  York  before  he  took  his  diplomatic  post  in  London;  and  so  it 
was  natural  for  Melville  to  turn  to  Bradford  in  trying  to  make  a  connec- 
tion with  a  New  York  newspaper.  Besides  being  a  lawyer,  Bradford  was 
also  a  man  of  literary  and  scholarly  ability,  who  a  few  years  earlier  had 
published  an  important  work  on  The  Origin  and  History  of  the  Red  Race. 
(He  was  to  become  later  one  of  the  chief  authors  of  the  civil  code  of 
the  state  of  New  York.) 

Here  is  Melville's  letter,  written  at  Lansingburgh,  ten  miles  north 
of  Albany.  The  spelling  of  the  original  has  been  preserved : 

Lansingburgh  —  May  23,  1846 
Dear  Sir  —  Herewith  you  have  the  article  we  spoke  of.  I  have  en- 
deavored to  make  it  appear  as  if  written  by  one  who  had  read  the 
book  &  beleived  it  —  &  moreover  —  had  been  as  much  pleased  with  it 
as  most  people  who  read  it  profess  to  be.  Perhaps,  it  may  not  be  ex- 
actly the  right  sort  of  thing.  The  fact  is,  it  was  rather  an  awkard  under- 
taking any  way  - —  for  I  have  not  sought  to  present  my  own  view  of 
the  matter  (which  you  may  be  sure  is  straitforward  enough)  but  have 
only  presented  such  considerations  as  would  be  apt  to  suggest  them- 
selves to  a  reader  who  was  acquainted  with,  &  felt  freindly  toward  the 
author.  —  Indeed,  I  have  modelled  some  of  my  remarks  upon  hints 
suggested  by  some  reviews  of  the  book.  —  By  the  by,  I  received  to 
day  among  other  papers,  a  number  of  Chambers's  Edinburgh  Journal 
containing  an  abridged  account  of  the  adventuie  —  &:  I  could  not 
but  feel  heartily  vexed,  that  while  the  intelligent  Editors  of  a  publica- 
tion like  that  should  thus  endorse  the  genuineness  of  the  narrative  — 
so  many  numskulls  on  this  side  of  the  water  should  heroically  avow 


206 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


their  determination  not  to  be  "gulled"  by  it.  The  fact  is,  those  who 
do  not  beleive  it  are  the  greatest  "gulls"  —  full  fledged  ones  too.  — 

What  I  have  written  embodies  some  thoughts  which  I  think  will 
tell  with  the  public  if  they  are  introduced  thro'  the  proper  channel.  — 
That  channel  is  the  C  &  Enquirer,  as  it  contained  the  obnoxious  re- 
view. —  I  feel  confident  that  unless  something  of  this  kind  appears  the 
success  of  the  book  here  as  a  genuine  narrative  will  be  seriously  im- 
paired. I  am  told  that,  that  malicious  notice  (for  it  certainly  has  that 
sort  of  edge  to  it)  has  been  copied  into  papers  in  the  Western  part  of 
the  state.  —  It  will  do  mischief  unless  answered.  —  But  I  need  say  no 
more  on  this  head,  since  you  are  as  well  aware  of  this  as  I  can  be. 
You  have  been  so  kind  as  to  express  your  willingness  to  do  what  you 
can  in  this  matter,  &  I  rely  so  fully  upon  you  having  the  ability  to  do 
all  that  is  requisite  that  I  will  not  add  a  word  more.  —  Now  that  I 
think  of  it,  however,  if  they  should  demur  at  inserting  the  accompany- 
ing article  on  account  of  its  contradicting  a  previous  notice,  you  might 
in  that  case  procure  its  insertion  as  a  communication.  But  you  under- 
stand how  to  manage  it  best. 

Will  you  have  the  kindness  to  write  me  a  single  line  as  soon  as 
you  shall  make  any  arrangements?  Present  my  renewed  compliments 
to  Mrs  Bradford  for  the  honor  of  her  letter,  and  beleive  me  to  be 

Yours  Truly 

Herman  Melville 

As  you  know  best  in  what  sort  of  style  such  an  article  as  is  needed 
ought  to  be  written  —  I  beg  of  you,  that  you  will  make  any  alterations 
you  see  fit  in  the  accompanying  document.  —  I  am  wholly  unused 
to  this  sort  of  work  —  &  therefore,  if  it  be  not  asking  too  much,  I 
hope  you  will  prepare  it  to  suit  yourself.  —  But  what  I  have  written 
contains  the  substance  of  what,  I  think,  ought  to  appear 

H  M. 

What  happened  to  Melville's  article?  A  search  through  the  files 
of  the  Morning  Courier  and  New  York  Enquirer  has  failed  to  reveal  it, 
even  in  the  form  of  a  "communication."  The  newspaper  evidently  stuck 
to  its  guns. 

Then  a  strange  thing  happened.  The  Buffalo  Commercial  Advertiser, 
which  had  some  time  before  published  a  note  about  Typee,  regarding  it 
as  "the  offspring  of  a  lively  inventive  fancy,  rather  than  a  veritable  nar- 
rative of  facts,"  received  an  endorsement  of  the  book  from  no  less  a  person 
than  Toby,  Melville's  companion  among  the  gentle  cannibals !  The  man 
was  living  in  that  very  city,  working  as  a  house  and  sign  painter.  "His 
verbal  statements,"  the  Advertiser  penitently  reported,  "correspond  in 
all  essential  particulars  with  those  made  by  Mr.  Melville  respecting  their 
joint  adventures,  and  from  the  assurances  we  have  received  in  regard  to 


MELVILLE  DEFENDS  TYPEE 


207 


Toby's  character,  we  have  no  reason  to  doubt  his  word."  The  deposition 
followed : 

In  the  New  York  Evangelist  I  chanced  to  see  a  notice  of  a  new  publica- 
tion in  two  parts,  called  "Typee  a  residence  in  the  Marquesas,"  by  Herman 
Melville.  In  the  book  he  speaks  of  his  comrade  in  misfortune,  "Toby,"  who 
left  him  so  mysteriously,  and  whom  he  supposed  had  been  killed  by  the 
Happar  natives.  The  Evangelist  speaks  rather  disparagingly  of  the  book  as 
being  too  romantic  to  be  true,  and  as  being  too  severe  on  the  missionaries. 
But  to  my  object:  I  am  the  true  and  veritable  "Toby,"  yet  living,  and  I  am 
happy  to  testify  to  the  entire  accuracy  of  the  work,  so  long  as  1  was  with 
Melville,  who  makes  me  figure  so  largely  in  it.  I  have  not  heard  of  Melville, 
or  "Toramo,"  since  I  left  him  on  the  island,  and  likewise  supposed  him  to 
be  dead ;  and  not  knowing  where  a  letter  would  find  him,  and  being  anxious 
to  know  where  he  is,  and  tell  him  my  "yarn"  and  compare  "log  books,"  I 
have  concluded  to  ask  you  to  insert  this  notice,  and  inform  him  of  my  yet 
being  alive,  and  to  ask  you  to  request  New  York,  Albany,  and  Boston  papers 
to  publish  this  notice,  so  that  it  may  reach  him.  My  true  name  is  Richard 
Green,  and  I  have  the  scar  on  my  head  which  I  received  from  the  Happar 
spear,  and  which  came  near  killing  me.  I  left  Melville  and  fell  in  with  an 
Irishman,  who  had  resided  on  the  island  for  some  time,  and  who  assisted 
me  in  returning  to  ship,  and  who  faithfully  promised  me  to  go  and  bring 
Melville  to  our  ship  next  day,  which  he  never  did,  his  only  object  being 
money.  I  gave  him  five  dollars  to  get  me  on  board,  but  could  not  return  to 
Melville.  I  sailed  to  New  Zealand,  and  thence  home :  and  I  request  Melville 
to  send  me  his  address,  if  this  should  chance  to  meet  his  eye.  —  Mortarkce 
was  the  word  1  used  when  I  heard  of  his  being  alive. 

"Toby." 

The  Albany  Argus  not  only  complied  with  Toby's  request  but  re- 
printed also  the  comments  of  the  Buffalo  Commercial  Advertiser,  adding 
on  its  own  that  it  had  received  a  letter  "from  a  highly  respectable  citizen 
of  Buffalo"  vouching  for  the  identity  of  Toby.  Melville  must  have  read 
the  news  in  the  Albany  papers.  The  July  6  issue  of  the  Albany  Evening 
Journal  contained  a  note  : 

Mr.  Melville,  the  author  of  "Typee,"  who  was  in  town  on  Saturday,  says 
that  he  had  no  doubt  that  the  Buffalo  Sign  Painter  is  his  veritable  ship- 
mate and  companion  "Toby."  If  this  be  so,  it  furnishes  a  strong  exemplifica- 
tion of  the  seeming  contradiction  that  "Truth  is  stranger  than  fiction." 

At  last  even  the  Morning  Courier  and  New  York  Enquirer  had  to  give 
in.  In  its  issue  for  July  9  it  copied  the  accounts  of  both  Albany  news- 
papers, with  the  following  introductions : 

In  our  notice  of  this  work  we  expressed  very  serious  doubts  as  to  its 
authenticity.  The  question  whether  or  not  it  contains  a  veritable  account 
of  the  travels  and  adventures  of  the  author  in  the  Marquesas,  has  met  with 
some  discussion  and  difference  of  opinion.  In  England,  so  far  as  we  can 
judge  from  the  criticisms  of  the  press,  the  general  opinion  seems  to  be 
favorable  to  its  accuracy.  In  this  country,  its  strange  narratives  have  not 
received  such  ready  and  general  credence.  We  feel  bound  to  say,  however, 


208 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


that  no  doubt  is  entertained  of  its  truth  by  many  persons  whose  intimacy 
with  the  author,  and  general  acquaintance  with  the  subject,  peculiarly  fit 
them  to  form  an  intelligent  opinion  on  this  disputed  point  .  .  . 

It  is  not  impossible  to  detect  a  reference  to  Bradford  in  the  last 
sentence  —  an  echo  of  the  article  which  Melville  had  prepared.  Unfor- 
tunately, the  article  itself  was  never  printed. 

But  Melville  now  had  other  things  to  do.  He  got  in  touch  with  his 
former  shipmate  and  from  his  relation  composed  "The  Story  of  Toby," 
to  add  as  a  sequel  to  his  own  narrative.  Dating  it  "New  York,  July, 
1846,"  he  recorded  in  a  note  that  he  had  heard  the  story  from  Toby  him- 
self "not  ten  days  since."  By  that  time  he  was  preparing  a  revised  edition 
of  the  work.  "The  reception  given  to  Typee  has  induced  the  author  to 
believe  it  worthy  of  revision,"  he  began  his  new  preface.  "And  as  the 
interest  of  the  book  chiefly  consists  in  its  being  the  history  of  a  remark- 
able adventure,  in  revising  it,  several  passages,  wholly  unconnected  with 
that  adventure,  have  been  rejected  as  irrelevant.  Such,  for  example,  as 
those  referring  to  Tahiti  and  the  Sandwich  Islands,  which,  critically 
speaking,  have  nothing  to  do  with  the  narrative.  Here  and  there  some 
slight  modifications  of  style  have  also  been  added  .  .  ."  The  new  edition 
appeared  before  the  month  of  July  was  over. 

A  comparison  of  the  revised  and  original  texts  shows  that  the 
changes  were  far  more  substantial  than  a  casual  reading  of  the  new  pre- 
face might  suggest.  They  involve  the  omission  of  the  entire  third  chap- 
ter, also  long  sections  from  Chapters  IV,  XVII,  XXIV,  and  XXVI,  and 
the  whole  appendix  —  all  the  attacks  on  the  missionaries,  the  French, 
and  the  misery  which  civilization  had  spread  among  the  savages.  In  first 
publishing  his  book,  these  passages  appeared  to  Melville  far  from  being 
"irrelevant" ;  on  the  contrary,  he  dwelt  upon  them  with  a  fervor  which 
was  an  integral  part  of  his  moral  attitude  toward  the  people  of  the  South 
Seas.  To  be  sure,  these  passages  were  viciously  attacked  as  proofs  of 
the  author's  "sneering  wit  and  perfect  want  of  heart"  —  but  was  this  a 
reception  that  made  the  work,  as  the  new  preface  puts  it,  "worthy  of 
revision"?  Nor  are  the  modifications  of  style  as  "slight"  as  one  would 
suspect  them  to  be  from  the  preface.  They  include  the  expurgation  of 
many  sections  about  the  sexual  life  of  the  savages.  Here,  too,  Melville 
yielded  to  his  accusers  —  to  the  charges  that  he  had  drawn  "voluptuous 
pictures,  and  with  cool  deliberate  art  always  breaking  off  at  the  right 
point,  so  as  without  offending  decency,  he  may  stimulate  curiosity  and 
excite  unchaste  desire."  As  there  have  been  few  writers  less  prurient  than 
Melville,  the  mutilations  resulted  in  a  real  loss. 

Unfortunately,  all  later  editions  —  and  there  have  been  many  — 
have  been  reprints  of  the  revised  edition. 

zoltAn  haraszti 


The  British  in  Boston 


General  Gage's  Orderly  Bock,  December  17 74- June  1775 

(Continued  from  the  May  issue.) 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  8th  March  1775. 

Robert  Vaugham  Private  Soldier  in  the  52d  Reg1  tryed  for  Desertion  by 
the  General  Court  Martial  of  which  Major  Mitchell  is  President,  is  found 
guilty  &  Sentenced  to  Suffer  Death. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  Approves  of  the  Sentence  &  orders  it  to  be 
put  in  execution  tomorrow  Morning  at  7  O'Clock,  by  Shooting  the  said  Rob* 
Vaugham  to  Death  by  a  Platoon  of  the  Reg'  to  which  he  belongs.  The  place 
of  Execution  to  be  near  the  Water,  below  the  Guard  on  the  Common. 

The  Picquetts  of  the  Several  Regts  to  be  on  the  Parade  at  1/2  past  6 
O'Clock  tomorrow  morning  to  attend  the  Execution. 

The  above  Gen1  Court  Martial  is  Desolved. 

A[s]  Provisions  go  soon  to  Marshfield,  the  Reg13  will  take  that  Opper- 
tunity  to  send  three  weeks  Subsistance  to  their  Men,  &  a  carefull  Serj'  will 
be  Appointed  to  go  with  it. 

After  Orders.  7  O'Clock  in  the  Evening. 

The  Execution  of  Rob1  Vaugham  Private  Soldier  in  the  52d  Reg1  is 
Respited  till  further  Orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  9th  March  1775. 

A  Return  to  be  given  in  immediately  to  the  Depy  Adj'  Gen1  of  the  Num- 
ber of  Wheelrights  in  the  Several  Corps. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  10th  March  1775. 

The  Serj.ls  Guard  at  the  Artillery  workhouse  near  the  Common  to  be 
Augmented  to  15  Private  till  further  orders. 

The  Guards  for  the  future  to  Parade  with  fixed  Bayonetts. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  14th  March  1775. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  flattered  himself  that  the  instance  of  Mercy 
shewn  to  Robert  Vaugham  of  the  52d  Reg1  would  be  most  Elegible  means  to 
bring  the  Soldiers  to  a  sence  of  their  Duty  to  their  King  &  Country,  &  to  re- 
flect more  Seriously  on  the  Sin  they  committed  in  Deserting  the  Service  of 
both,  He  is  greatly  Mortified  to  find  that  Clemoncy  is  so  little  regarded,  & 
Assures  the  Regts  that  this  is  the  last  Man  he  will  pardon  who  shall  be  Con- 
demned for  Desertion. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  i6lh  March  1775. 

A  Working  Party  Consisting  of  1  Serj1  1  Corp1  &  20  Private  to  Parade 
tomorrow  morning  at  7  O'Clock,  the  Serj'  will  march  his  Party  to  the  Lines, 
where  he  will  Receive  further  directions  from  Capt.  Montresor. 


209 


210 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Head  Quarters,  Boston,  17th  Mar.  1775. 

The  working  party  to  be  continued  as  ordered  Yesterday. 
The  Regts  will  return  to  the  Engineer  all  the  intrenching  &  other  tools, 
According  to  the  Receipts  they  have  given. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  20th  March  1775. 

The  Regts  that  were  encamped  last  Summer  &  Delivered  their  Tents  to 
the  Qr  Mr  General  will  send  to  the  Store  for  them  &  repair  them  immediately. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  21st  March  1775. 

A  Gen1  Court  Martial  to  sit  tomorrow  morning  at  10  O'Clock,  at  the 
Main  Guard  to  try  such  Prisoners  as  shall  be  brought  before  them.  L*  Col1 
Cleaveland  of  the  Royal  Reg1  of  Artillery  President 

Royal  Artillery  1  Capt. 

Ist  Brigade  5  d° 

2d        d°  2  d°  Members 

3d        d°  4  d° 

Ensign  Simpson  to  Act  as  Depy  Judge  Advocate,  to  whom  the  Names 
&  Dates  of  the  Members  Commissions  the  Prisoners  Names  &  Crimes  to- 
gether with  the  Names  of  the  Evidences  are  to  be  sent  as  soon  as  Possible. 

The  working  party  to  be  discontinued,  &  20  Private  Men  to  be  Added 
to  the  Guard  at  the  Lines  till  further  orders. 

The  Officer  Commanding  will  order  20  Men  of  his  Guard  to  be  employed 
in  the  works,  as  Capt.  Montresor  shall  Direct,  which  20  Men  shall  be  Relieved 
by  a  like  Number  every  hour  or  every  two  hours  as  he  shall  think  proper. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  22d  March  1775. 

The  Guard  at  the  Artillery  Work  house  Next  the  Common  to  be  Aug- 
mented to  20  Private  till  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  23d  March  1775. 

The  Artillery  not  being  able  to  make  up  Cartridges  sufficient  to  supply 
the  Several  Regts,  such  Corps  as  want  Cartridges  will  apply  to  L*  Col1  Cleave- 
land who  will  order  that  a  proper  proportion  of  Powder,  Ball  &  Paper  &c,  is 
Delivered,  &  the  Regts  must  make  Cartridges  for  their  immediate  use  them- 
selves, which  they  will  do  without  delay. 

The  Qr  M"  of  the  Several  Corps  will  Apply  to  the  Commissary  Gen1 
for  a  form  of  their  Receipts  they  are  to  give  in  the  issuing  Provisions,  &  are 
hereby  informed  that  they  are  to  give  always  two  of  the  said  Receipts,  One 
for  the  Commissary  Gen1  &  one  for  the  Contractors. 

Head  Quarter s:  Boston,  26th  March  1775. 

A  Gen1  Court  Martial  to  sit  tomorrow  morning  at  11  O'Clock,  at  Con- 
sort Hall  to  try  such  Prisoners  as  shall  be  brought  before  them.  Colonel 
Pigott  Acting  Brig1"  Gen1  President  Field  Officers  U  Col1  Smith,  Major  Milward 

Ist  Brigade  4  Capts 

2d        d°  4  d°  Members 

3d        d°  2  d° 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


211 


Lieu1  Jos.  Knight  of  the  4th  Reg1  will  Act  as  Depy  Judge  Advocate,  to 
whom  the  Names  &  Dates  of  the  Members  Commissions,  &  the  Evidences 
Names  to  be  given  as  soon  as  possible. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  28th  Mar.  1775. 

Four  Armourers  of  the  Different  Corps  to  be  sent  to  the  Artillery  work 
shop  Near  the  Neck  Guard  for  the  purpose  of  Repairing  the  Mens  Arms  2d 
Brigade  will  begin  &  send  theirs  tomorrow  morning  at  7  O'Clock. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  29th  Mar  1775. 

The  Guard  at  the  Lines  to  be  Reduced  to  its  former  Number  of  One 
Hundred  &  Twenty  Private.  The  working  party  of  1  Subn  1  Serj1  1  Corp1  & 
20  Private  to  Parade  tomorrow  Morning  at  7  O'Clock,  The  Officer  will  March 
his  Party  to  the  Lines,  &  take  his  Directions  from  Capt.  Montresor  Engineer. 

Fourteen  Days  Salt  &  Seven  days  fresh  Provisions  to  be  sent  to  the 
Detachment  at  Marshfield,  A  Carefull  Serj4  to  be  ordered  to  take  charge  of 
it,  &  to  receive  three  weeks  Subce  which  the  Several  Regts  are  to  send  to  their 
Men  belonging  to  that  Detachment. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  2d  April  1775. 

The  working  Party  as  ordered  before  Ensign  Sumervill  Murray  of  the 
43d  Reg1  tryed  by  the  Gen1  Court  Martial  whereof  L*  Col1  Cleaveland  is  Presi- 
dent for  behaving  unbecoming  the  Character  of  an  Officer  &  a  Gent"  is  not 
found  guilty  of  the  Crime  alledged  against  him,  &  is  therefore  Honorably 
Acquitted. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  Approves  of  the  Sentence  &  orders  the  above 
Gen1  Court  Martial  to  be  Desolved. 

The  Regts  that  had  Camp  Kettles  &  Flasks  Delivered  out  to  them  to 
examine  &  repair  the  same,  in  the  best  manner  they  can,  in  case  they  should 
be  Suddenly  wanted  before  others  Arrive. 

The  late  Ll  Jackson  of  the  5th  Reg*  to  be  buried  tomorrow.  The  Com- 
manding Officer  of  the  Reg1  will  give  directions  for  the  Funeral  Party  & 
interment. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  4th  April  1775. 

Those  Regts  that  have  not  given  in  Returns  of  their  Camp  Kettles  & 
Flasks  to  do  it  immediately  Specifying  the  Number  of  good,  Repairable  & 
Unserviceable. 

The  Working  party  as  usual. 

After  Orders. 

Major  Cairncross  being  unwell  Lt.  Colonel  Hamilton  Field  Officer  of  the  Day 
to  Morrow. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  6th  April  1775. 

A  Return  to  be  given  in  to  the  Commands  Officer  of  the  Artillery  from 
every  Reg1  of  the  N°  of  Arms  that  wants  Repairing,  No  Bayonetts  or  New 
Gun  Stocks  can  be  made. 


212 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Head  Quarters,  Boston,  y'h  April  1775. 

As  Regts  are  often  ordered  to  take  Marches  into  the  Country,  And  Con- 
tinue out  too  long  to  get  their  Dinner  drest,  at  proper  hours,  &  may  hereafter 
be  more  frequently  ordered  either  by  Reg'  or  Brigade,  every  Corps  will  at  all 
times,  have  one  days  pork  ready  Cook'd,  which  the  Men  may  carry  out  with 
them  in  their  Knapks  or  Haversacks  with  bread  in  Proportion. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  10th  April  1775. 

A  Detachment  of  1  Sub"  1  Serj1,  1  Drumr  &  25  Rank  &  file  of  the  64th 
Reg'  to  Embark  this  Evening  on  board  a  Vessel  prepared  to  Receive  them, 
and  to  proceed  according  to  the  Instructions  sent  to  the  Officer  Commanding 
the  sd  Detachment. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  12th  April  1775. 
When  the  Guards  are  made  up  &  the  Rear  Ranks  ordered  to  Close  to  the 
front,  the  Officers  to  Advance  their  Arms,  &  at  the  word  March  to  fall  back 
three  Paces. 

The  Officers  to  provide  themselves  with  Baggage  Saddles  at  least  three 
pr.  Compy.  one  for  the  Captain,  one  for  the  Compys  Tents,  &  one  between 
the  two  Subalterns. 

The  Staff  of  the  Regt6  will  make  the  usual  Provision  for  themselves. 

As  Pack  Saddles  cannot  be  had  in  this  Country,  the  best  Substitute  is 
Sunks  &  Sodds,  the  Patterns  of  which  are  to  be  seen  at  the  Dy  Qr  Mr  Gen1s 
and  are  to  be  made  up  without  delay. 

The  Qr  Mr  Gen1  has  Purchased  by  order  of  the  Commander  in  Chief, 
proper  Stuff  for  making  the  Saddles,  from  whom  they  will  be  supplyd  if  they 
chuse  it. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  14th  April  1775. 

As  the  Contractors  decline  giving  fresh  meat  for  the  Present,  the  Troops 
will  receive  Salt  Provisions  till  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  15th  April  1775. 

The  Commanding  Officers  of  the  different  Corps  are  Particularly  de- 
sired to  send  all  the  Men  Capable  of  Assisting  in  making  the  Sunks  &  Sodds, 
to  the  Qr  Mr  Genls  Office  at  8  O'Clock  on  Monday  Morning. 

The  Gen1  Court  Martial  of  which  Brigr  Gen1  Pigot  is  President  for  the 
Tryal  of  Ll  Col1  Walcot  &  Ensign  Patrick  of  the  5th  Reg1  of  Foot,  for  Quar- 
relling, at  the  Consequences  that  ensued,  which  were  reported  to  be  blows 
given  &  a  Challange  to  fight,  is  of  Opinion,  that  the  said  L4  Col1  Walcott  is 
guilty,  first  of  Quarrelling  with  Ens.  Patrick,  Secondly  of  making  use  of 
Menaceing,  Reproachfull  and  Abusive  Language,  thirdly  of  giving  a  blow  to 
&  drawing  his  Sword  on  the  said  Ens  Patrick  on  the  Publick  Parade  in  presence 
of  the  Officers  of  the  Reg1  when  Addressing  the  former  as  Commanding  Of- 
ficer, which  Conduct  the  Court  considers,  as  highly  prejudicial  of  good  order 
&  Military  Discipline,  as  will  well  [sic]  as  ungentleman  like,  which  the  Court 
finds  to  be  a  breach  of  the  Ist  Article  of  the  7th  Section,  &  of  the  3d  Article  of 


A  Page  from  General  Gage's  Orderly  Book 
Facsimile  in  Original  Size 


213 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


215 


the  20th  Section  of  the  Articles  of  War,  therefore  Sentence  the  said  L4  Col1 
Walcott  to  ask  Ensign  Patrick's  Pardon,  at  the  head  of  the  5th  Reg1  (the  2d 
Brigade  under  Arms)  for  the  insult  given  him,  &  then  &  there  to  be  Rep- 
remanded  for  the  unmilitary  &  ungentleman  like  behavior,  &  also  to  be  Sus- 
pended for  the  Space  of  three  Months.  The  Court  Acquits  L4  Col1  Walcott  of 
giving  Ens.  Patrick  a  Challange  to  fight,  It  is  further  the  Opinion  of  the  Court 
Martial,  that  Ens.  Rob1  Patrick  is  not  guilty,  either  of  Quarrelling  with  L4 
Col1  Walcott  on  the  Evening  of  the  23d  of  March,  or  of  giving  a  blow,  And  it 
Appearing  also  to  the  Court,  that  the  evidence  produced  does  not  prove  Ens. 
Patrick  guilty  of  giving  L4  Col1  Walcott,  a  Challange  to  fight. 

The  said  Ensign  Patrick  is  Acquitted  of  every  part  of  the  Charge  ex- 
hibited against  him. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  Approves  of  the  above  Sentence. 

The  above  Gen1  Court  Martial  is  Desolved. 

The  2d  Brigade  to  be  under  Arms  on  Monday  Morning  at  1 1  O'Clock  on 
the  Common  when  the  Brigadier  Commanding  the  2d  Brigade  will  repremand 
L4  Col1  Walcott  Agreeable  to  the  Sentince  of  the  General  Court  Martial. 

As  the  Grenadiers  &  light  Infantry  will  be  ordered  out  to  Learn  Grena- 
dier Exercise,  &  some  new  Evolutions  for  the  Light  Infantry,  they  are  to  be 
off  all  Dutys  till  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  16th  April  1775. 

The  2d  Brigade  to  be  under  Arms  tomorrow  Morning  at  1/2  After  Nine 
O'Clock  on  the  Common  when  the  Sentence  of  the  Gen1  Court  Martial  will  be 
put  into  Execution. 

The  Majors  &  Adjutants  will  begin  to  instruct  the  Grenadiers  of  their 
own  Corps  with  the  Grenadier  Exercise,  to  Morrow  at  the  most  convenient 
place  near  their  Barracks. 

The  Light  Companys  will  be  instructed  in  the  New  Manoeuvres  by  L4 
McKenzie  Adj*  to  the  23d  Reg*  who  will  fix  the  time  of  Assembling  with  the 
Respecting  Captains  to  morrow  morning  at  Guard  Mounting. 

His  Majesty  has  been  pleas'd  to  make  the  following  Promotions  in  the 
Army  in  North  America  Viz1. 

Major  George  Clerk,  to  be  Lieu4  Col1  vice  Remington  who  Retires  8th 
Feby  1775.  Major  Roger  Spendlove  to  be  Major,  vice  Clerk  8th  Feby  1775. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  17th  April  1775. 

Lieu1  Charles  Sherreff  late  of  the  45th  Reg*  to  be  Fort  Adj4  &  Barracks 
Master  of  St.  Augustine,  Vice  Wooldridge  Retird  on  half  Pay  31st  Jany  1775. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  18th  April  1775. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  is  pleas'd  to  take  off  the  Suspension  ordered 
upon  L4  Col1  Walcott  from  this  Day  inclusive;  It  having  having  [sic]  Ap- 
peared thro'  the  course  of  the  tryal,  that  Ens.  Patrick  did  behave  disrespect- 
full  to  his  Commanding  Officer,  but  it  not  being  inserted  in  the  Crime,  the 
Court  did  not  proceed  upon  it,  &  L4  Col1  Walcott  now  excuses  it,  And  will  not 
bring  it  to  a  Tryal ;  but  the  Commander  in  Chief  thinks  proper  to  Warn  En- 


2l6 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


sign  Patrick  to  behave  with  more  respect  for  the  future  to  his  Commanding 
Officer. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  19th  April  1775. 

The  Troops  not  to  Straggle  from  their  Quarters,  but  to  be  ready  to  turn 
out  with  Arms,  Ammunition  &  Provisions,  the  moment  they  are  ordered. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  20th  April  1775. 

The  Corps  to  send  immediately  to  the  D,  Adj*  Gen1  Returns  of  their 
Kill'd,  Wounded  &  Missing. 

The  Grenadiers  &  Light  Infantry  to  do  Duty  with  their  Corps  till  fur- 
ther orders,  &  the  Officers  to  lye  in  their  Barracks. 

All  former  Orders  Respecting  Alarm  Posts  to  be  Cancel'd,  &  the  Reg4* 
to  form  in  their  Barracks. 

Commanding  Officers  of  Corps  to  be  at  Head  Quarters  at  Nine  this 
Evening. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  21st  April  1775. 

The  Guards  to  Mount  at  4  O'Clock  in  the  Afternoon  till  further  orders. 

Orderly  hour  for  the  future  at  5  O'Clock  in  the  Afternoon. 

The  Surgeon  of  the  Hospital  to  Visit  the  Regimental  Hospitals,  And 
make  a  Report  thereof  to  the  Commander  in  Chief. 

The  Corps  to  send  in  Returns  to  the  D.  Adj1  Gen1  as  soon  as  possible 
of  the  Number  of  Arms  Lost  &  Broke,  Mentioning  those  belonging  to  other 
Corps  they  may  have  got  by  Accident. 

The  Rolls  to  be  call'd  at  least  once  between  each  of  the  usual  hours ;  and 
as  much  Oftner  as  Commanding  Officers  of  Corps  shall  think  proper. 

Late  Lieu1  Knight  of  the  4th  Reg1  to  be  interred  in  the  usual  Manner, 
between  the  hours  of  one  &  two  O'Clock  this  Afternoon. 

The  Pay  Masters  of  Reg,s  to  send  in  their  Abstracts  of  Subsistance  to  the 
Secretary's  office  on  the  25th  in  the  morning,  when  they  will  Receive  Warrants 
for  the  Same. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  22d  April  1775. 

The  Troops  to  be  Compleated  to  Sixty  Rounds  a  Man,  And  a  Report  to 
be  given  in  every  morning  of  the  Number  of  Cartridges  made  by  each  Corps. 

A  Working  party  of  1  Capt,  3  Subs,  4  Serjts  4  Corp18  2  Drum™  &  100 
Private  w'  arms  &  Ammunition  to  Parade  this  Afternoon  at  2  O'Clock,  & 
March  to  the  Blockhouse,  where  he  will  Receive  Orders  from  Capt  Montresor 
Engineer. 

Five  Serjls  5  Corpls  &  100  Private  with  Arms  and  Ammunition,  to  be  im- 
mediately sent  to  do  Duty  with  the  Royal  Artillery  'till  further  orders,  they 
are  to  be  such  Men  as  have  been  instructed  in  and  are  most  expert  at  the 
use  of  the  Great  Guns. 

As  by  the  Report  of  the  Earl  Percy,  &  the  Officers  in  General,  the  Men 
in  the  late  affair  (tho  they  behaved  with  much  Courage  &  Spirit)  shewed 
great  inattention  &  Neglect  to  the  Commands  of  their  Officers,  which  had 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


217 


they  observed,  fewer  of  them  Would  have  been  hurt,  the  Gen1  expects  on  any 
future  Occation,  that  they  will  behave  with  more  Discipline,  &  in  a  more 
Soldier  like  manner;  And  it  is  his  most  possitive  Order  that  no  Man  quits 
his  Rank  to  plunder  or  Pillage,  or  enter  an  house,  unless  ordered  so  to  do 
under  pain  of  Death.  And  each  Officer  will  be  made  Answerable  for  the 
Platoon  under  his  Command. 

A  Working  party  of  2  Capts  6  Subs,  6  Serj'3  6  Corpls  3  Drum"  &  150 
Private  with  Arms  &  Ammunition  to  Parade  at  5  O'Clock  tomorrow  morning 
where  he  will  Receive  his  orders  from  Capt.  Montresor  Engineer. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  23d  April  1775. 

One  Field  Officer,  5  Capts  10  Subalterns  10  Serjts  5  Drumrs  &  250  Private 
from  the  3d  Brigade  to  March  this  Afternoon,  at  1/2  past  Six  as  a  Reinforce- 
ment to  the  Lines,  leaving  a  Capt,  &  30  Men  at  the  Neck  Guard. 

A  Surgeon  of  the  3d  Brigade  to  attend  this  Detachment. 

The  same  Number  for  work  as  ordered  Yesterday. 

Morning  Orders,  24th  April  1775. 

Capt.  McKan  R.W.  Fuzileers  &  Ll  Barron  of  the  4th  Reg1  to  be  employed 
as  overseers  of  the  Works  till  further  orders,  and  will  immediately  attend 
Capt.  Montresor  Engineer,  from  whom  they  will  Receive  their  directions. 

Major  Brigade  Moncrieff  to  do  the  Duty  of  an  Assistant  to  the  Dy  Adj1 
General  till  further  orders. 

The  10th  Reg1  to  receive  106  Stand  of  Arms,  at  2  O'Clock  this  Day  which 
the  Commanding  Officer  of  Artillery  will  order  to  be  Delivered  them  from 
the  Stores  at  the  South  Battery. 

The  Guard  at  the  Artilleiy  workhouse  to  Consist  of  1  Serj1  one  Corp1 
&  Twelve  Private  only  till  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  24th  Apr  1774  [sic]. 

One  Field  Officer  five  Captains,  Ten  Subalterns  ten  Serjts  ten  Corp'5 
5  Drum"  &  250  Private  from  the  Ist  Brigade  to  March  this  Afternoon  at  1/2 
past  Six  O'Clock,  as  a  Reinforcement  to  the  Lines,  leaving  one  Capt,  & 
thirty  Men  at  the  Neck.  L*  Col1  Nesbitt  for  this  Duty. 

A  Surgeon  from  the  Ist  Brigade  to  Attend  this  Detachment. 

Evening  orders  1/2  After  8 

The  4th  Reg1  to  Encamp  tomorrow  upon  Mount  Whorwom.  the  Ground 
will  be  shewn  them  by  the  D.  Qr  Mr  Gen1. 

The  Marines  will  Encamp  on  the  Common,  &  the  23d  on  Fort  hill,  the 
ground  for  them  will  be  marked  out  by  the  Qr  Mr  G,  &  they  will  Encamp  at 
12  O'Clock. 

The  Qr  Masters  &  Camp  Colour  Men,  to  Attend  the  Qr  Mr  Gen1  at  10 
O'Clock. 

No  Officers,  Men  or  Women  to  be  suffered  to  go  beyond  the  Lines,  un- 
less on  Duty,  or  by  Permission  from  the  General. 

The  working  party  to  Consist  of  one  Capt,  4  Subs,  4  Serjts  4  Corpls  2 


17 


2l8 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Drum"  and  100  Private,  who  are  to  be  at  the  Block  house  Precisely  at  7 
O'Clock.  It  is  expected  the  Men  take  their  Breckfasts  before  they  leave  their 
Barracks. 

All  Working  partys  for  the  future  to  Parade  with  Arms  unless  otherwise 
ordered. 

Morning  orders,  11  O'Clock,  25th  Apr1  1775. 

One  Field  Officer  5  Capts  10  Subs,  10  Serjts  10  Corp,s  5  Drumrs  &  250 
Private  from  the  2d  Brigade  to  March  this  Afternoon  at  1/2  After  6  O'Clock 
as  a  Reinforcement  to  the  Lines,  leaving  1  Capt,  &  thirty  Men  at  the  Neck. 

Major  Bassett  for  this  Duty. 

A  Surgeon  from  the  2d  Brigade  to  Attend  this  Detachment. 

The  Troops  who  are  to  Encamp  are  to  Deliver  the  Barrack  Bedding  & 
Furniture  to  the  Barrack  Master,  The  Qr  Mr  Gen1  will  Deliver  to  each  Reg' 
a  Blankett  a  Man,  and  three  Paliasses  for  each  Tent. 

Orders,  3  O'Clock. 

An  Officer  &  30  Men  of  the  47th  Reg1  to  take  Post  immediately  on  the 
Hight  behind  the  Common,  where  the  Hospital  of  the  4th  was  in  the  Summer. 
On  Application  to  Major  Pitcairn  he  will  lend  them  Tents  for  tonight. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  25th  Apr.  1775. 
The  working  Party  as  ordered  for  this  day. 

Morning  Orders,  26th  April  1775. 

The  47th  Reg1  to  Encamp  immediately  they  will  Receive  their  Tents  at 
the  Qr  Mr  Gen!s  Store  on  the  Long  Wharf,  who  will  shew  them  their  Ground. 
The  Ist  Brigade  to  take  the  following  Guards  till  further  Orders  Viz1 
Main  Guard 
Common 
Magazine 

Artillery  work  house 

Wood  Yard,  &  furnish  Centinels  for  the  Brigadiers,  Pigot  and  Jones. 

The  2d  &  3d  Brigade  the  following  Guards,  Line  Guard  Block  House  & 
Neck,  And  the  Evening  Reinforcement,  Now  to  Consist  of  200  Private  with 
Officers  &  Non  Commissioned  Offrs.  in  Proportion.  Brigr  Gen1  Jones  con- 
tinues for  this  Day. 

The  first  Brigade  for  the  future  to  furnish  the  Field  Officer  of  the  Day. 

For  this  Duty  Ll  Col.  Nesbitt  F.  Offr  for  the  Advanced  works  Major 
Milward  F.  Offr  for  the  Reinforcement  L1  Col1  Hamilton  A  Surgeon  from  the 
3d  Brigade  to  Attend  the  Reinforcement. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Wednesday,  26th  Apr.  1775. 

The  2  Brigade  takes  all  Duties,  taken  by  the  3d  in  this  Days  Morning 
orders,  including  the  working  party  ordered  last  night. 

The  Several  Corps  to  Compleat  themselves  to  Sixty  Rounds  Pr  Man  & 
to  give  in  a  Return  of  all  the  Cartridges  they  have  made  beyond  that  Number, 
to  morrow  morning  at  9  O'Clock. 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


219 


Each  Corps  likewise  to  give  in  a  Return  of  the  Number  of  their  Women 
&  Children. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  has  been  pleas'd  to  order  One  Hundred  Days 
Bat  and  Fonage  Money  to  the  Army,  the  Corps  will  therefore  Respectively 
give  in  Returns  immediately  of  their  Officers  Present  to  the  Depy  Qr  Mr 
General. 

Morning  Orders,  27th  April  1775. 

It  is  the  Gen,s  possitive  orders  that  the  Men  take  no  Boards  from  their 
Barracks,  or  any  part  of  their  Births  except  the  bottoms  to  lay  in  Camp,  And 
the  Offrs  will  be  Answerable  that  this  order  is  Punctually  obeyed. 

The  Regts  who  are  or  may  Encamp  are  to  Deliver  all  the  Barrack  furni- 
ture excepting  the  Beds,  to  the  Barrack  Master  &  to  take  up  their  indents. 

A  Sufficient  Number  of  Blanketts  will  afterwards  be  Delivered  to  each 
Reg1  for  which  they  will  give  Receipts  to  the  Q1'  Mr  Gen1. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Thursday,  27th  Apr.  1775. 

The  Several  Corps  to  send  all  their  Ammunition  exclusive  of  60  Rounds 
Pr  Man,  to  the  Ordnance  Office  to  morrow  morning  at  9  O'Clock,  conformable 
to  the  Returns  given  in  this  Day,  and  the  Commander  in  Chief  expects  the 
Off"  Commanding  Corps,  will  order  the  Men  to  be  employed  in  makeing  more, 
Returns  of  which  will  be  given  to  the  Majors  of  Brigade,  on  Tuesdays  &  Fri- 
days at  9  in  the  Morning. 

Morning  Orders,  28th  April. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  is  pleas'd  to  order  Another  hundred  days  For- 
rage  money  to  the  Army,  which  with  the  hundred  days  ordered  on  the  26th 
makes  two  Hundred  days  forrage  to  the  whole. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Friday,  28th  April  1775. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  is  pleas'd  to  allow  the  Men  employed  in  the 
Works  two  Jills  of  Rum  pr  Day,  One  to  be  given  them  in  the  morning  the 
other  in  the  Evening. 

A  Hogshead  of  Rum  will  be  given  in  Charge  to  each  Reg1  for  the  above 
purpose,  And  the  Officers  Commanding  will  direct  their  Qr  Mrs  to  Distribute 
it,  who  will  keep  a  Particular  Account  of  the  Number  of  Men  Served  each 
Day,  &  Settle  with  the  Dy  Qr  Mrs  Gen1  for  the  same  as  soon  as  empty. 

The  Regts  will  Apply  to  the  Dy  Qr  Mr  Gen1  to  morrow  morning  at  9 
O'Clock,  when  a  Hogshead  of  Rum  will  be  Delivered  to  each  Corps.  - 

Morning  Orders,  29th  April  1775. 

Ensign  Simpson  of  the  59th  Reg*  is  Appoind  an  overseer  of  the  Works. 

Soldiers  of  some  Regts  having  begun  to  Demolish  Fences  Wantingly,  it 
is  the  Commander  in  Chief's  orders  that  no  kind  of  Property  whatever  shall  be 
touch'd  ot  Damag'd  without  orders  for  so  doing. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Saturday,  29th  Apr.  1775. 
The  Regts  who  have  not  Recd  their  Baggage  &  Batt  money  are  imme- 


220 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


diately  to  Apply  to  the  D*  Qr  Mr  Gen1  for  the  same. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  Ist  May  1775. 

The  Men  to  mount  Guard  in  half  Gaiters  for  the  future,  but  to  carry  their 
Leggings  with  them,  that  they  may  be  put  on  if  a  Change  of  Weather  require 
it  (Especially  at  Night. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  2d  May  1775. 

The  working  Party  to  Consist  of  1  Capt,  2  Subs,  2  Serjts  2  Corp'3  2  Drum" 
&  50  Private,  till  further  orders.  The  Ist  Brigade  to  take  the  working  Party  to 
morrow  morning. 

The  late  Ll  Hull  of  the  43d  Reg1  to  be  Buried  tomorrow  morning  at 
11  O'Clock,  the  Officer  Commanding  the  Reg1  will  give  orders  for  the  Funeral 
Party  &  Interment. 

L*  Col1  Abercrombie  is  Appointed  Adj*  General  in  N.  America,  &  is  to 
be  obeyed  as  such. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Friday,  5th  May  1775. 

The  Officer  Commanding  at  the  Lines  will  take  care  that  the  Centinels 
are  Posted  properly  and  not  Advanced  further  than  they  us'd  to  be,  so  that 
they  may  have  no  converse,  or  other  intercourse  with  the  Rebells  on  any  Ace* 
And  will  order  that  the  Water  in  the  W ell  in  the  Right  Bastion,  to  be  pump'd 
out,  till  it  becomes  sweet,  &  the  Men  not  Suffer'd  to  go  beyond  the  Lines 
for  Water. 

Morning  Orders,  6th  May  1775. 

Every  Man  able  to  do  his  Duty,  is  to  do  it  in  his  proper  turn,  no  Taylor 
or  others  to  be  excused,  nor  any  Man  to  be  expressly  Appointed  to  make 
Cartridges  but  such  as  are  off  Duty  to  be  employed  in  that  Service,  As  the 
Officers  Commanding  Corps  will  Direct. 

As  the  Commander  in  Chief  finds  by  the  Returns  that  there  are  many 
Women  who  have  more  than  one  Child,  &  some  Orphants  in  the  Different 
Corps,  He  is  pleas'd  to  make  the  following  Alterations  in  Victualling  them, 
and  to  order  y2  a  Ration  of  Provisions  to  every  Soldiers  Wife  &  *4  of  a 
Ration  to  every  Soldiers  Child. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Sunday,  7th  May  1775. 

The  3d  Brigade  Relieves  the  2d  &  gives  a  working  party  of  1  Capt,  2  Subs, 
3  Serjts  3  Corpls  2  Drum"  and  60  Private,  to  Parade  tomorrow  morning  at 
after  6  &  March  to  the  Battery  at  Copp's  Hill  Near  Charles  Town  Ferry,  where 
they  will  Receive  Directions  from  O  Montresor  Engineer. 

The  2  Brigade  gives  2  Subs,  2  Serjts,  2  Corpls  1  Drumr  &  40  Private  for 
work  at  the  Lines,  at  the  usual  hour. 

The  Ammunition  made  by  the  several  Corps  agreeable  to  the  Returns 
given  in  on  friday  last,  to  be  Delivered  at  the  Artillery  Office,  tomorrow  morn- 
ing at  9  O'Clock. 

Notwithstanding  the  orders  given,  the  Commander  in  Chief  is  informed 
that  Officers  are  permitted  to  go  beyond  the  Lines,  &  even  to  the  Advanced 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


221 


Centincls,  It  is  therefore  His  Possitive  orders,  that  no  Persons  are  Suffered 
to  go  without  the  Works,  on  any  Account  whatever  except  those  whose  Duty 
makes  it  Necessary  or  who  have  passes.  And  the  Officer  Commanding  will 
take  care  that  these  orders  are  Punctually  obeyed. 

It  has  been  Reported  to  the  General  that  the  Guard  Boats  from  the 
Ships  of  War,  have  been  improperly  Accosted,  &  in  one  place  fired  upon  by 
Centinels  near  the  South  Battery  &  on  the  Right  of  the  10th  Reg4  The  Com- 
mander in  Chief  expects  Officers  will  be  at  pains,  to  explain  to  their  Men  their 
Duty  in  this  Respect. 

The  Companys  of  the  65th  Arrived  from  Halifax  will  Disembark  tomorrow 
at  12  O'Clock.  The  Adj*  of  the  Incorporated  Corps  will  attend  to  shew  them 
their  Barracks. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  8th  May  1775. 

The  4  Companys  of  the  65th  to  Join  the  Incorporated  Corps  &  do  Duty 
with  them  till  further  orders. 

The  Ist  Brigade  gives  a  Working  party  tomorrow  of  1  Capt,  2  Sub.  3 
Serjts  3  Corpls  2  Drumrs  &  70  Private.  The  Capt,  1  Sub.  &  40  to  the  Lines,  One 
Sub,  &  30  to  Copps  Hill. 

Morning  Orders,  9th  May  1775. 

As  there  are  many  Complaints  of  most  Scandalous  Drunkenness  at  this 
Critical  time  among  the  Troops,  &  that  Women  of  Different  Corps,  in  Difience 
of  all  order,  Sel  Rum  &  other  Spirituous  Liquors  to  the  Soldiers,  It  is  the 
Commander  in  Chief's  Possitive  orders  that  the  Officers  Commanding  Regts 
do  examine  into  those  Complaints,  And  those  Women  who  do  Not  pay  Obedi- 
ence to  order,  to  be  Immediately  Seiz'd  &  put  on  Board  Ship. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  9th  May  1775. 

The  Working  Party  to  Consist  of  the  same  Numbers  as  Yesterday. 

The  2rt  Brigade  gives  a  Capt,  2  Subs,  &  40  for  the  Lines,  the  3d  Brigade 
1  Sub,  &  30  for  Copp's  Hill. 

Guards  &  Centinels  Posted  for  the  Protection  of  any  of  the  Works,  are 
not  to  Suffer  Persons  to  go  in  or  inspect  them,  except  Officers  or  those  whose 
Duty  make  it  Necessary. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Morning  Orders,  10th  May  1775. 

The  43d  Reg1  to  Prepare  to  Encamp  as  soon  as  they  can,  Seven  Compys 
on  Corps  Hill,  The  Grenadiers  &  Light  Infantry  Compy  with  one  Battn  Compy 
on  Bartons  Point,  The  Deputy  Qr  Mr  General  will  shew  them  their  Ground. 

Notwithstanding  the  orders  given  that  the  Troops  should  not  pull  down 
Fences,  it  has  been  Reported  to  the  Commander  in  Chief,  that  the  4th  &  47th 
Regts  have  not  Complyed  with  the  same,  It  is  the  Generals  Possitive  orders 
therefore  that  no  property  whatsoever  shall  be  touched.  And  the  Officers 
Commanding  those  Corps  will  if  Necessary  post  Guards  to  prevent  Complaints 
of  the  like  Nature. 

The  10th  Reg1  to  prepare  to  Encamp  as  soon  as  Possible. 


222 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Wednesday,  10th  May  1775. 

The  Working  party  to  Consist  of  1  Capt,  2  Subs,  3  Serjts  3  Corpls  2  Drum" 
&  70  Private,  Capt.  Montresor  will  be  on  the  Parade  to  Regulate  the  work 
they  are  to  be  Employed  in. 

Morning  Orders,  11th  May  1775. 

The  Duty  for  the  future  to  be  done  by  Detachments  from  the  three 
Brigades. 

The  Guards  to  Mount  at  6  in  the  Evening  till  further  orders. 

The  Reinforcement  to  parade  at  the  same  time  on  the  Left  of  the  Guards. 

The  same  Number  for  work  tomorrow  as  ordered  Yesterday,  Capt. 
Montresor  or  his  Assistant  will  attend  to  Receive  them  on  the  Parade. 

The  10th  Reg1  to  Encamp  at  the  Lines  tomorrow,  the  Qr  Mr  Gen.  will 
shew  them  their  Ground,  &  Supply  them  with  Tents. 

After  Orders,^  after  6  O'Clock 

The  working  party  to  Consist  of  1  Sub,  2  Serjts  2  CorpIs  1  Drumr  &  40 
Private,  to  Parade  at  the  usual  hour  &  March  to  the  Lines. 

The  General  Parade  will  for  the  future  be  on  the  Common,  the  Dep*  Adj. 
General  will  fix  on  the  Proper  Ground. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Saturday,  12th  May  1775. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  having  Received  advice  that  three  Soldiers  of 
the  Royal  Welsh  Fuzileers,  &  twelve  Marines  are  Prisoners  in  the  Goal  at 
Worcester,  &  have  Nobly  despised  the  Offers  &  defyed  the  Threats  of  the 
Rebels,  who  have  tryed  to  seduce  them  to  take  Arms  against  their  King,  & 
fight  against  their  brother  Soldiers.  It  is  the  Genls  orders  that  money  be  given 
by  said  Corps  to  Major  Brigade  Moncrief,  who  has  an  Oppertunity  of  Convey- 
ing it  to  the  above  Men,  to  prevent  such  brave  Spirited  Soldiers  from  Suffering. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Sunday,  14th  May  1775. 
The  working  party  as  usual. 

The  Officers  for  Duty  to  March  the  Men  of  their  Several  Corps  from  the 
Regimental  to  the  General  Parade. 

One  Sub,  1  Serj1  1  Corp1  1  Drum1"  and  20  Private  of  the  10th  Reg1  to  Join 
the  Neck  Guard  every  Evening  till  further  orders. 

The  Picquet  of  the  10th  Reg1  to  be  always  ready  to  March  into  the  Lines 
at  a  moments  warning. 

The  whole  of  the  Reinforcement  to  March  into  the  Lines,  &  not  to  leave 
any  Man  at  the  Neck  as  has  been  Practised. 

The  Guards  to  be  on  the  Parade  at  l/2  after  5,  &  be  ready  to  march  off 
exactly  at  6. 

The  Marines  lately  arrived  to  have  every  thing  in  Readiness  to  Disem- 
bark &  Encamp  as  early  as  Possible  tomorrow  morning.  Major  Pitcairn  will 
shew  them  their  ground  which  the  Qr  Mr  Gen1  will  mark  out  for  them. 

After  Orders,  6  O'Clock 
Officers  will  Observe  from  their  different  Encampments,  or  Guards,  any 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


223 


Signals  that  may  be  made  from  the  Steples  of  Churches,  or  other  Buildings, 
and  will  immediately  send  to  the  place  to  enquire  into  the  Cause,  &  if  Possible 
secure  the  Persons  Concern'd  all  which  they  will  Report  as  soon  as  they  Con- 
veniently can,  at  Head  Quarters. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  15th  May  1775. 
The  working  party  as  usual. 

Several  bad  and  ill  intended  persons  having  boasted  that  pernisious 
Spirits  had  been  made  in  order  to  Sell  to  the  Troops  of  which  they  will  soon 
feel  the  Consequences,  this  notice  is  given  that  the  Troops  may  be  Cautious 
of  Drinking  it. 

Wherever  the  Commanding  Officers  of  Regts  find  houses,  where  Soldiers 
are  permitted  to  Drink  &  Debauch,  they  will  immediately  Seiz  the  Rum,  & 
put  it  under  lock  &  key  till  such  time  as  orders  may  be  given  for  the  further 
disposing  of  it. 

Th  Advanced  Guards  &  Advanced  Centinels  to  pay  no  Compliment  to 
any  Officers,  the  Centinels  to  stand  with  Shoulder'd  Arms. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  16th  May  1775. 
The  working  party  as  usual. 

The  Commanding  Officers  of  Corps  will  take  care  that  their  Mens  Am- 
munition is  frequently  inspected  &  that  the  Cartridges  which  cannot  be  put  in 
their  Pouches  or  Cartridge  Boxes,  be  carefully  pack'd  in  Dozens  &  Wrapp'd 
up  in  Bladder  if  it  is  to  be  had,  or  in  Leather  in  the  best  manner  they  can,  the 
Men  to  be  carefull  not  to  lay  on  their  Cartridges  at  any  time.  The  Officers  of 
the  Different  Guards  to  be  watchfull  over  their  Men  &  see  that  they  comply 
with  this  order,  And  the  same  care  to  be  taken  in  their  Tents  in  Camp. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Wednesday,  17th  May  1775. 
The  working  party  as  usual. 

In  case  of  Fire  either  by  Day  or  Night,  the  Troops  are  not  to  go  to  it  on 
any  account,  but  immediately  to  get  under  Arms  &  form. 

The  Marines  Arrived  under  the  Command  of  Major  Short  will  Land  as 
soon  as  they  are  ready. 

When  the  Guards  are  assembled  on  the  Parade,  the  Officers  for  Duty  to 
repair  to  the  front  of  the  Main  Guard  on  the  beating  a  long  Roll,  when  the 
Town  Major  will  assign  them  their  Respective  Guards. 

To  prevent  interruption  either  in  making  up,  or  Marching  off  the  Guards, 
No  Person  whatever  to  Approach  nearer  the  Troops  for  Duty,  than  Twenty 
Paces,  Except  General  &  Publick  Officers. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Thursday,  18th  May  1775. 

The  working  party  to  Consist  of  1  Sub,  1  Serj1  1  Corp1  1  Drum1'  &  20 
Private  till  further  orders.  Two  men  from  each  Corps  to  March  with  the 
Guards  to  the  Gen1  Parade,  The  Town  Major  to  dispose  of  them  in  such  a 
manner  as  will  Effectually  keep  all  Spectators  at  a  proper  Distance,  that  the 
Guards  may  not  be  interrupted  when  they  March  off,  &  as  soon  as  they  have 
pass'd  these  Men  will  return  to  their  Several  Corps. 


224 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


When  Officers  are  ordered  for  Duty  no  excuse  will  for  the  future  be 
taken  for  their  not  appearing  on  the  Parade,  Sickness  or  unavoidable  Accident 
excepted. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Friday,  19th  May  1775. 

The  10th  Reg1  to  give  the  working  party  at  the  Lines  of  1  Sub,  1  Serj* 
1  Corp1  1  Drumr  &  20  Private  till  further  orders. 

The  Commander  in  Chief  thanks  the  Troops  that  were  employed  at  the 
fire  on  the  Night  of  the  17th  for  their  Alertness  and  Activity  on  the  Occation, 
but  reminds  them  of  the  order  of  that  Day  respecting  fire,  which  it  is  expected 
will  on  all  Occations  be  Complyed  with,  &  no  Man  to  leave  his  Barracks,  or 
Camp  unless  ordered  so  to  do. 

The  Regts  in  Camp  are  to  clear  their  Barracks  of  every  thing  they  have 
in  them,  &  Deliver  them  up  to  the  Barrack  Master. 

The  Purveyor  of  the  Hospital  will  immediately  go  &  examine  the  Bar- 
racks of  the  4th  Reg1  &  see  what  is  Necessary  to  be  done  to  fit  it  up  for  an 
Hospital. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Saturday,  20th  May  1775. 

A  Detachment  of  1  Sub  1  Serj1  1  Corp1  1  Drumr  &  30  Private,  with  three 
Days  Provision  to  Parade  this  Afternoon  at  4  O'Clock,  &  follow  such  Di- 
rections as  they  shall  Receive  from  L*  Col1  Cleaveland. 

The  Several  Corps  to  give  in  all  their  Cartridges  above  the  Compliment, 
at  60  Rounds  Pr.  Man,  this  Afternoon  at  three  O'Clock,  L*  Col'  Cleaveland 
will  give  orders  for  their  being  Received  at  the  Artillery  office. 

A  Pair  of  Oxen  having  been  taken  out  of  a  Barn  last  Night,  at  the  North 
end.  The  Gen1  directs  that  the  strictest  enquiery  should  be  made  among  the 
Troops,  to  discover  the  Authors.  And  the  officers  Commanding  Corps,  will  give 
immediate  orders  for  the  same. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Sunday,  21st  May  1775. 

The  Reg,s  in  Town  who  have  Officers  &  Recruits  Arrived  in  the  Venus 
Transport,  to  Land  them  immediately. 

Complaint  having  been  made  to  the  Commander  in  Chief  by  People 
who  privately  bring  Provisions  into  Town,  that  Officers  at  the  Lines,  stop 
them  &  take  by  force  what  they  please,  &  unless  a  stop  is  put  to  it,  no  Pro- 
visions will  be  brought  into  Town,  It  is  therefore  the  Genls  orders,  that 
nothing  of  the  kind,  shall  be  done  for  the  future,  &  the  Officer  Command- 
ing at  the  Lines  will  be  answerable  that  this  order  is  obeyed. 

A  working  Party  of  a  Serj'  Corp1  &  12  Private  to  Parade  tomorrow 
morning  at  7  O'Clock.  The  Serj1  to  march  his  Party  to  the  Manufacturing 
House,  where  he  will  Receive  orders  from  the  Purveyor  of  the  Hospital. 

(To  be  concluded.) 


Exhibitions  in  the  Print  Department 


Prints  of  Children 

I  f  EW  have  attempted  to  portray  children  in  the  graphic  arts,  for  the  reason, 
J-  perhaps,  that  they  call  for  a  special  understanding  and  treatment  of  the 
medium.  We  are  speaking,  of  course,  from  the  creative  standpoint.  The  inter- 
preter works  upon  the  theory  that  childhood  is  not  to  he  understood  or  ex- 
plained, but  rather  experienced  and  felt.  He  will  come  nearer  to  a  true  and 
spontaneous  result  by  suggestion. 

In  presenting  this  interesting  exhibition  of  children  —  and  in  most  cases 
the  subjects  are  to  be  considered  little  more  than  infants  —  it  is  fascinating 
to  see  how  much  character  there  is  in  their  faces,  when  the  features  are  so 
little  formed.  They  are  definite  personalities,  although  the  artist  has  had  little 
to  grasp  because  of  the  absence  of  the  definite  planes  found  in  the  faces  of  older 
people.  For  this  reason  one  must  be  somewhat  of  an  interpreter,  and  surely  an 
impressionist,  to  convey  through  one's  medium  a  keen  and  penetrating  record 
of  a  fleeting  likeness  or  experience.  Lines  become  mere  symbols,  and  the  artist, 
by  the  manner  in  which  he  sets  them  down  upon  the  copper  plate  or  stone,  in- 
vents as  he  develops  his  subject.  His  strength  and  success  lie  in  his  ability  to 
draw  with  such  clarity  of  meaning  that  there  is  no  chance  of  his  being  mis- 
understood. Childhood,  which  would  seem  the  simplest  of  subjects,  is  most 
difficult  because  of  this  very  simplicity.  A  good  print  of  a  child  should  convey 
a  deliberate  yet  detached  feeling,  removed  from  actuality ;  otherwise,  there  is 
danger  of  sentimentality  and  commonplaceness. 

Drypoint  and  lithography  more  than  any  of  the  other  graphic  art  mediums 
seem  to  convey  the  artist's  thoughts  best,  for  they  are  direct  and  sensitive  — 
drypoint  because  of  its  wide  range  from  strong  to  delicate  line,  and  lithography 
by  the  possibilities  of  painting  values  from  a  silvery  grey  to  the  richest  of 
blacks.  The  fact  that  the  artist  can  see  his  drawing  develop  as  he  works, 
makes  these  two  methods  especially  adaptable  in  conveying,  through  variation 
of  touch,  that  which  lies  hidden. 

The  prints  displayed,  it  would  be  safe  to  say,  were  not  done  for  exhibition 
purposes.  They  are  too  intimate,  and  one  has  only  to  contrast  these  impressions 
with  other  subjects  in  recent  exhibitions  to  know  that  children  have  a  special 
niche  in  the  oeuvre  of  only  a  few  artists.  It  is  interesting  to  see  George  W. 
Bellows's  powerful  lithographs  of  his  own  children  beside  those  of  John  Cop- 
ley, whose  interpretations  are  sensitive  and  warm  in  comparison.  Both  are  the 
work  of  great  artists,  although  their  methods  of  approach  are  very  different. 
Bellows  reaches  his  result  by  a  direct  and  almost  instantaneous  attack  on 
his  subject,  whereas  Copley  seems  to  caress  and  build  up  through  tone 
and  color  value.  One  can  say  that  Bellows's  lithographs  are  linear,  while 
Copley's  are  tonal.  Compare  the  delicate  drypoints  by  Muirhead  Bone  with 
the  more  calculating  etchings  of  Gerald  Brockhurst.  In  the  former  we  are 
conscious  of  a  fleeting  moment,  the  work  of  one  sitting;  the  latter  evince 
much  work  and  careful  study,  with  a  controlled  technique.  Here  again  we 
have  great  records  on  copper,  and  as  we  have  said  on  numerous  occasions,  it 


226 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


does  not  matter  what  is  the  method  or  the  technique,  as  long  as  the  result 
is  obtained.  The  freedom  of  the  needle  is  readily  seen  in  the  work  of  Mary 
Cassatt;  and  of  special  interest  is  the  combination  of  aquatint  and  drypoint. 
Miss  Cassatt's  interpretations  of  mother  and  child  in  these  combined  mediums 
are  among  the  finest  achievements  on  copper  since  the  renaissance  of  en- 
graving. 

Concerning  "Le  Gamin  de  Borgio"  by  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman,  John 
Taylor  Arms  writes :  "One  of  the  artist's  finest  portraits  of  children.  Italy 
is  full  of  just  such  delightful  youngsters,  but  this  particular  one,  in  the 
little  village  perched  high  on  its  hill  overlooking  the  Mediterranean,  was 
especially  amenable,  and  furnished  a  perfect  subject  for  the  exercise  of 
Heintzelman's  skill.  There  is  a  great  freedom  in  the  modeling  of  the  head, 
and  a  charming  simplicity  of  execution,  yet  the  portraiture  is  impeccable. 
The  texture  of  the  hair  and  of  the  lightly  suggested  shirt  is  very  convincing, 
and  the  body  and  hands  are  admirably  felt.  Here  we  have  a  maximum  of  ex- 
pression with  a  minimum  of  means,  one  of  the  most  potent  secrets  of  the 
etcher's  art." 

There  are  interesting  comparisons  to  be  studied  in  the  work  of  Eugene 
Higgins  in  "A  Cool  Drink"  and  "Toy  Boat";  McBey's  "Margot  as  Lopokova" 
and  "Moray  Firth";  and  the  carefully-done  lithographs  of  Alphonse  Legros, 
"Tete  de  Jeune  Fille"  and  "Jeune  Paysanne."  Whistler  is  represented  by  four 
famous  prints,  "Annie  Haden,"  "Arthur  Haden,"  "Bibi  Lalouette,"  and  "Fum- 
ette."  These  impressions  speak  for  themselves,  and  are  among  the  finest 
plates  of  children  ever  done.  The  handling  of  the  drypoint  needle  seems  perfect, 
and  these  prints  demand  much  study.  It  will  be  remembered  that  Whistler 
once  said  that  if  he  had  to  place  his  reputation  on  any  one  print,  it  would  be 
that  of  "Annie  Haden." 

There  are  a  number  of  prints  in  which  children  are  more  or  less  inci- 
dental in  the  composition.  In  several  children  are  at  play,  as  in  Eileen  Soper's 
"Donkey  Race,"  "Flying  Swing,"  and  "The  Race."  There  are  also  outstanding- 
examples  by  John  W.  Winkler  and  Auguste  Brouet. 

ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 


Anne,  1924,"  a  Lithograph  by  George  W .  Bellows 
Facsimile  Reduced 


227 


Ten  Books 


Stalin  Must  Have  Peace.  By  Edgar 
Snow.  Random.  1947.  184  pp. 
Three  of  the  four  essays  included  in 
this  small  volume  originally  appeared 
in  The  Saturday  Evening  Post,  so  one 
may  hope  that  they  will  have  a  quiet- 
ing effect  on  the  hysterical  war  talk. 
In  his  first  paper  Mr.  Snow  points  out 
that  much  of  the  misunderstanding 
with  Russia  is  a  matter  of  simple  se- 
mantics, as  certain  expressions  have 
different  meanings  in  English  and  in 
Russian.  There  are,  however,  also  ex- 
amples of  inexcusable  misinterpretation. 
In  his  speech  of  February  1946  Stalin 
called  for  "a  new  mighty  upsurge  in 
national  economy,"  but  he  was  quoted 
by  even  such  a  commentator  as  Walter 
Lippmann  in  the  words,  "Russia  is 
going  to  organize  'a  new  mighty  up- 
surge' of  power  for  military  ends."  We 
should  understand  that  Russia  is  a 
great  nation  and  that  she  has  vital  in- 
terests which  would  be  the  same  under 
any  regime.  Victory  to  the  Soviet  citi- 
zen meant  that  the  Red  Army  had 
withstood  all  Europe,  excluding  Britain. 
He  hoped  that  the  "remnants  of  feudal- 
ism" in  the  enemy  states  would  be 
eliminated;  assumed  that  the  world 
would  recognize  that  socialism  was  a 
workable  form  of  society ;  and  remem- 
bered the  frightful  price  which  Russia 
paid  for  her  survival.  It  is  too  much  to 
expect  Russians  to  worry  about  whether 
the  Rumanians  had  "absolutely  free 
elections."  We  brought  the  countries 
of  South  and  Central  America  into  al- 
liance with  us,  and  the  Russians  cannot 
see  that  anything  is  wrong  when  they 
make  alliances  with  Czechoslovakia  and 
Yugoslavia.  America  is  seeking  a  mono- 
poly to  exploit  the  oil  of  Saudi  Arabia,  and 
Britain  one  to  control  that  of  Mesopo- 
tamia, but  it  is  "Red  Imperialism"  and 
"a  threat  to  the  foundations  of  civili- 
zation" if  the  Russians  want  oil  con- 
cessions in  Northern  Iran.  To  under- 
stand the  Russians'  feeling,  Mr.  Snow 
goes  on,  one  has  to  imagine  that  the 
Soviets  have  bases  in  Mexico  and 
Canada,  the  world's  largest  navy  and 
biggest  long-range  bombers,  and  the 
atomic  bomb.  "Suppose  we  were  com- 


munists and  they  were  capitalistic 
Russia.  Would  we  feel  safe  just  be- 
cause Russians  believed  in  private  en- 
terprise?" The  Soviets  have  not  given 
up  Marxism,  but  they  know  that  the 
logic  of  facts  calls  for  "peaceful  co- 
operation." Their  new  fifteen-year-plan 
is  actually  a  return  to  schedules  laid 
down  in  1941,  and  to  realize  it  they 
need  all  their  manpower  and  productive 
ability.  Soviet  defense  expenditure  has 
been  reduced  by  half,  and  sixty  per 
cent  of  the  army  has  been  demobilized. 
Far-reaching  agreements  with  the  Soviets 
have  worked  in  the  past,  and  there  is  no 
need  to  doubt  the  possibility  of  mutual 
compromise  for  the  future.  (Z.  H.) 

Why  They  Behave  Like  Russians.  By 

John  Fischer.  Harper.  1947.  262  pp. 
As  a  member  of  the  UNRRA  mission, 
in  the  spring  of  1946  the  author  spent 
two  months  in  Russia,  travelling  mainly 
in  the  Ukraine.  His  book  is  thus  based 
partly  on  observation,  partly  on  specu- 
lation. Under  an  exterior  of  toughness, 
advocating  a  firm  policy  instead  of 
"appeasement,"  Mr.  Fischer  is  really 
displaying  a  surprising  understanding 
of  Russian  ways.  At  times  one  even 
suspects  that  his  jaunty  manner  is  as- 
sumed to  conceal  his  reasonableness 
toward  the  Soviets.  He  condemns,  for 
example,  the  opportunists  of  the  Com- 
munist Party,  but  adds  that  most  of 
the  Party  members  with  whom  he 
worked  impressed  him  "as  sincere  and 
honest  men  —  idealists."  There  is  bu- 
reaucracy, but  the  day-to-day  perform- 
ance of  the  men  seemed  to  him  "about 
as  good  as  any  I've  ever  seen  in  the 
last  fifteen  years."  He  wants  America 
to  be  ready  for  any  emergency,  but 
asks,  "Is  it  absolutely  necessary  to 
spend  for  defense  eleven  billion  dollars 
a  year  —  nearly  three  times  the  total 
federal  budget  in  normal  pre-depres- 
sion  years?"  And,  "Do  we  have  an}' 
good  reason  to  keep  on  manufacturing 
and  stock-piling  atomic  bombs?"  Mr. 
Fischer  believes  that  we  can  get  along 
with  the  Russians.  He  recommends  a 
wiser  occupation  policy  which  would 
demonstrate  that  we  are  not  trying  to 


229 


230 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


preserve  the  control  of  reactionary  in- 
dustrialists in  Germany  and  Japan ;  that 
we  are  not  backing  the  fascist  rem- 
nants in  Poland,  Rumania,  and  Hungary. 
Above  all,  he  sees  the  chief  guaranty 
of  peace  in  the  strengthening  of  de- 
mocracy at  home.  (Z.  H.) 

Appeal  to  the  Nations.  By  Norman 
Thomas.  Holt.  1947.  175  pp. 
Although  defeated  six  times  as  a  Presi- 
dential candidate,  Mr.  Thomas  always 
deserves  attention.  In  this  book  his  con- 
cern is  for  a  world  organization  that  will 
ensure  the  interest  of  the  "plain  people" 
with  due  regard  for  individual  liberty. 
He  examines  and  dismisses  as  unworkable 
many  proposals  that  have  had  current 
popularity.  Permanent  peace  cannot  be 
secured  by  a  pile  of  bombs,  or  by  ap- 
peasement of  aggressor  nations.  The 
Security  Council  as  it  stands  is  based 
on  the  balance  of  power  theory  and  in 
a  crisis  will  be  ineffective.  What,  then, 
can  be  done?  The  author  offers  what 
he  calls  "a  minimum  plan  for  peace." 
Most  recent  wars  have  been  caused  by 
the  clash  of  rival  imperialisms  backed  by 
military  force.  To  avoid  them  in  the 
future,  nations  must  abandon  imperial- 
ism and  disarm.  The  United  States  has 
missed  the  opportunity  to  lead  the  way, 
and  Mr.  Thomas  condemns  the  support  of 
undemocratic  forces  in  China  and  else- 
where. He  denounces  even  more  bit- 
terly what  he  considers  Stalin's  betrayal 
of  the  cause  of  labor  for  a  nationalist  and 
expansionist  program.  To  Americans 
concretely  he  suggests  an  appeal  to  the 
world  to  follow  their  lead,  first,  in  the 
renunciation  of  militarism  as  a  national 
policy  and,  secondly,  in  the  affirmation 
of  the  rights  of  small  states  to  inde- 
pendence and  self-determination.  Ma- 
chinery must  be  devised  for  security, 
and  Mr.  Thomas  favors  an  international 
police  force,  with  an  active  contingent 
from  small  nations  and  with  reserves, 
to  be  used  only  in  emergencies,  from  the 
large  powers.  Ultimately,  he  believes, 
small  nations  might  federate  with  neigh- 
boring states  for  mutual  interests.  The 
author  does  not  stress  his  usual  social- 
ist theme,  the  need  for  a  planned  eco- 
nomy in  industrial  nations,  although 
this  is  implicit  in  his  discussion  of  the 
natural  sequence  of  unemployment, 
military  expenditure,  fascism,  aggression, 


and  war.  His  immediate  aim  is  to  arrest 
the  nations  in  their  suicidal  course  toward 
World  War  III.  (R.  E.) 

The  Republic  of  Silence.  Compiled  and 
edited  by  A.  J.  Liebling.  Harcourt,  Brace. 
1947.  522  pp. 

This  remarkable  compilation  of  the 
clandestine  literature  of  the  French  re- 
sistance movement  has  been  selected 
from  a  large  number  of  newspapers, 
copies  of  Lc  Franc-tireur,  Liberation. 
Paroles  Francaises,  Combat,  Le  Gaullois, 
etc.  Editions  de  Minuit  started  with  the 
secret  printing  of  a  famous  story  The 
Silence  of  the  Sea  by  Bruller,  who  wrote 
under  the  pseudonyms  of  Vercors,  San- 
terre,  and  Dolee.  His  sketch  "Despair 
is  Dead"  and  Vladimir  Posner's  "The 
Edge  of  the  Sword"  express  the  be- 
wilderment of  French  patriots  at  the 
disintegration  of  the  army  and  the  de- 
sertion of  the  officers.  Jacques  Decour. 
a  young  professor  and  translator  of 
Goethe,  was  tortured  and  shot  to  death 
for  his  share  in  the  founding  of  one  of 
these  journals.  His  farewell  letter  to 
his  parents  is  one  of  the  most  moving 
documents  in  the  volume.  Jean  Paul- 
hain's  essay  "The  Bee,"  first  printed  in 
a  confiscated  organ  of  the  Lyon  intel- 
lectuals, and  the  realistic  story  of  search 
and  inquisition,  "Good  Neighbors,"  by 
the  poet  Louis  Aragon  are  other  poig- 
nant contributions.  Claude  Roy,  Charles 
Vildrac,  and  Francois  Mauriac.  and 
Jean-Paul  Sartre  (one  of  whose  articles 
has  given  the  title  to  the  book)  were 
among  the  most  courageous.  (M.  M.) 

Refugees  in  America.  By  Maurice  R. 
Davie.  Harper.  1947.  404  pp. 
Sponsored  by  the  Committee  for  the 
Study  of  Recent  Immigration  from 
Europe,  this  work  has  been  undertaken 
by  a  staff  of  researchers  under  the  di- 
rection of  Professor  Davie  of  Yale 
University.  The  recent  refugee  movement, 
the  report  emphasizes,  contrasted  sharply 
with  earlier  immigration  movements  in- 
asmuch as  it  was  composed  primarily 
of  middle-  and  upper-class  persons. 
Since  a  majority  of  the  refugees  were 
Jews,  it  provided  a  basis  for  anti-Se- 
mitic agitation ;  the  newcomers  were 
either  hailed  as  a  group  enriching 
American  life  or  decried  as  a  destructive 
element.    The   authors'    findings  are 


TEN  BOOKS 


231 


favorable.  The  total  immigration  during 
the  twelve  years  from  1933  to  1945  was 
only  a  little  over  half  a  million,  less 
than  what  the  quota  allows;  and  Jews 
made  up  an  estimated  two-thirds  or 
more  of  the  number.  Whereas  earlier 
arrivals  were  primarily  of  young  people 
of  little  or  no  education  and  no  financial 
means,  the  recent  influx  has  been  mostly 
of  the  middle-aged,  nearly  half  of  them 
with  the  equivalent  of  a  college  edu- 
cation, and  many  financially  independent. 
The  study  examines  the  reactions  of  the 
various  occupations  and  professions 
and  finds  that  the  refugee  physicians 
have  aroused  the  greatest  opposition, 
stemming  primarily  from  economic 
motivations.  (T.  C.) 

The  Way  of  the  South.  By  Howard  W. 
Odum.  Macmillan.  1947.  341  pp. 
The  author,  a  distinguished  Southern 
sociologist  and  novelist,  has  in  this  origi- 
nal appeal  summarized  the  results  of 
forty  years'  study.  He  begins  in  a  pic- 
turesque style  as  he  interprets  the 
character  and  folkways  of  his  people ; 
but  as  he  progresses,  he  submits  a  re- 
markably judicious  analysis  of  the  cul- 
tural and  moral  credit  and  debit  in 
Southern  life,  and  finally  makes  specific 
suggestions  for  regional  planning.  With 
great  candor  he  handles  the  race-caste 
problem,  particularly  in  consideration 
of  the  recent  flood  of  criticism  from  the 
North.  The  paradox  of  a  strictly  re- 
ligious people,  with  a  high  sense  of 
honor  and  chivalry,  condoning  exploit- 
ation and  brutality  toward  Negro  men 
and  abuse  of  Negro  women  can  be 
better  understood  in  the  light  of  Co- 
lonial history  and  the  "American  will  to 
exterminate  or  exploit  the  American 
Indian."  The  comparatively  low  standard 
of  education  in  the  South  is  due  to  the 
dual  white  and  Negro  education,  the 
"male-female  dichotomy  of  colleges 
.  .  .  the  state-church  dichotomy,"  and 
the  separation  of  technical  and  agricul- 
tural institutions  from  state  universities. 
But  particularly  in  Negro  education 
the  author  notes  decided  improvements, 
largely  brought  about  by  Federal  help  to 
land-grant  colleges,  grants  from  foun- 
dations for  Negro  education,  and  most 
significantly  through  Negro  teachers 
trained  in  other  regions  and  now  at 
work  in  the  South.  (M.  M.) 


The  Memory  of  Certain  Persons.  By 

John  Erskine.  Lippincott.  1947.  439  pp. 
Professor  Erskine  has  played  a  fruit- 
ful part  in  American  intellectual  life  in 
his  multiple  capacity  as  teacher,  literary 
critic,  novelist,  and  musician.  A  vivid 
memory,  a  keen  curiosity  about  all 
sorts  and  conditions  of  men,  warm 
friendship  and  appreciation  for  his  col- 
leagues and  associates,  and  an  amiable 
sense  of  humor  make  these  memoirs 
stimulating.  At  Columbia  University 
Mr.  Erskine  studied  music  under  Mac- 
Dowell  and  literature  under  Wood- 
berry,  that  rare  spirit  who  had  "fantastic" 
success  in  the  class  room  because  for 
him  "literature  was  life  itself."  Having 
given  up  "the  doubtful  fortunes  of  a 
pianist  for  the  assured  indigence  of  a 
college  professor,"  he  began  his  academic 
activity  at  Amherst  College.  As  a  teacher, 
both  at  Amherst  and  six  years  later  at 
his  Alma  Mater,  he  aimed  to  promote 
scholarship  and  creative  writing.  His  own 
The  Private  Life  of  Helen  of  Troy, 
which  made  his  fame  as  a  novelist,  was 
inspired  by  the  footnotes  to  an  article 
on  the  Trojan  lady  in  the  17th-century 
encylopedia  of  Pierre  Bayle.  Literature 
alone,  however  successful,  did  not 
satiate  the  author's  thirst  for  expression, 
and  comparatively  late  he  added  active 
piano  playing  in  public  to  his  writing 
and  extensive  lecturing,  until  an  auto- 
mobile accident  put  an  end  to  his  per- 
formances. His  presidency  of  the  Juilliard 
School  of  Music,  his  work  in  organiz- 
ing an  American  University  at  Beaune 
in  France  after  the  first  World  War, 
his  recent  lecture  tour  in  South  America, 
and  many  other  activities  and  interests 
cannot  be  detailed  in  so  brief  a  note, 
but  all  contribute  to  the  synthesis  of  an 
extraordinarily  zestful  life.  (M.  M.) 

The  Life  of  Edward  FitzGerald.  By 

Alfred  McKinley  Terhune.  Yale  Univ. 
1947-  345  PP- 

Here  is  the  first  fully  documented  bio- 
graphy of  the  translator  of  Omar 
Khayyam.  Mr.  Terhune,  a  professor 
of  English  at  Syracuse  University,  has 
visited  every  scene  of  FitzGerald's  life, 
interviewed  his  surviving  acquaintance, 
and  having  obtained  more  than  a  thousand 
unpublished  letters,  is  now  preparing  a 
complete  edition  of  his  correspondence. 
FitzGerald  has  been  ignored,  partly  be- 


232 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


cause  he  himself  ignored  the  world ;  he 
poked  about  the  countryside,  read 
widely  for  pleasure,  and  cultivated 
kindred  minds.  One  day  in  1856  a  friend 
showed  him  a  strange  manuscript.  "We 
read  some  curious  Infidel  and  Epicurean 
Tetrastichs  by  a  Persian  .  .  .,"  he  wrote 
to  Tennyson.  Soon  he  began  to  make 
translations  of  them  in  order  to  strengthen 
his  knowledge  of  a  new  language,  as 
he  had  done  earlier  with  plays  by  Cal- 
deron.  Three  years  later,  in  1859,  he  had 
the  work  printed  in  250  copies.  Priced 
at  a  penny  by  Quaritch,  no  one  cared  to 
buy  them,  until  Rossetti  (some  say, 
Swinburne)  discovered  them.  The  price 
went  up  to  two  pennies,  then  to  guineas; 
and  a  few  years  ago  a  copy  sold  for 
$9,500.  The  author's  identity  was  es- 
tablished only  in  1876.  Married  at  the 
age  of  forty-eight,  FitzGerald  lived 
with  his  wife  only  for  a  short  time ;  his 
friendships  were  his  chief  resource. 
Among  them  were  Carlyle,  the  Tennyson 
brothers,  Thackeray,  John  and  Fanny 
Kemble,  and  the  younger  George 
Crabbe.  Having  ample  means  and  no 
ambition,  FitzGerald  supported  several 
of  his  friends  financially  before  they  were 
established.  (T.  C.) 

Concord:  American  Town.  By  Town- 
send  Scudder.  Little,  Brown.  421  pp. 
Seeking  a  "human  approach"  to  Ameri- 
ca's history  within  a  small  compass, 
Mr.  Scudder  has  written  the  biography 
of  Concord,  Massachusetts.  Concord's 
three  hundred  years  of  self-reliance 
have  stretched  from  pioneer  days  to 
the  aftermath  of  World  War  II.  In 
1688  the  town  went  on  record  as  will- 
ing to  fight,  if  necessary,  for  the  restor- 
ation of  the  Massachusetts  Charter. 
Its  part  ifi  the  Revolution  needs  no  re- 
telling; but  its  practical  methods  of  deal- 
ing with  post-Revolution  problems  were 
perhaps  more  important  in  the  long  run. 
Concord  town  meeting  steered  its  way 
prudently  through  constitutional  de- 
bates, heated  campaigns,  and  educational 
and  religious  arguments..  The  turmoil 
of  the  abolitionist  movement  and  the 
Civil  War  engulfed  this  town  as  it  did 
the  whole  United  States ;  and  both  then 
and  later  many  of  the  European  immi- 


grants who  were  crowding  Eastern 
ports  moved  inland,  bringing  strange 
ways  and  faces,  and  softening  some  of 
the  Puritan  strictness.  But  whether  in 
the  seventeenth  or  the  twentieth  cen- 
tury, Concord  held  to  its  own  basic 
principles,  and  the  good  of  the  many 
prevailed.  (H.  McC.) 

The  Story  of  Architecture  in  Mexico. 

By  Trent  E.  Sanford.  Norton.  1947. 
363  PP. 

Many  books  have  been  published  in 
recent  years  about  Mexico,  some  of 
them  mere  travel  books  and  others, 
scholarly  studies  of  its  art  and  arche- 
ology. The  present  volume  stands  out 
from  the  group  by  presenting  a  vast 
amount  of  information  in  an  easy, 
readable  manner.  The  author,  a  prac- 
ticing architect,  spent  years  in  Mexi- 
co and  knows  its  architectural  trea- 
sures from  the  time  of  the  Aztecs  and 
Mayas  to  the  present  day.  The  larger 
part  of  the  book  is  devoted  to  the 
Colonial  period  —  to  the  description  of 
the  innumerable  cathedrals  and  palaces 
built  in  the  sixteenth,  seventeenth,  and 
eighteenth  centuries.  From  Mexico  City 
to  Oaxaca,  from  Guadalajara  to  Cuerna- 
vaca,  scores  of  cities  and  even  villages 
have  churches  which  are  among  the 
finest  monuments  of  Baroque  art.  No- 
where in  the  world  are  more  impressive 
examples  of  the  Plateresque  and  Churri- 
gueresque  styles,  made  possible  by  the 
incredible  wealth  of  the  newly  opened  gold 
and  silver  mines.  The  motto  of  Jose  de 
la  Borda,  a  French-Spanish  adventurer, 
was  "God  gives  to  Borda  and  Borda 
gives  to  God" ;  and  the  church  which 
he  built  at  Taxco  cost  him  seven  mil- 
lion pesos.  The  fortune  of  the  Coude 
del  Rul,  which  is  supposed  to  have  ex- 
ceeded eight  hundred  million  pesos, 
was  responsible  for  the  Church  of  San 
Cayetano,  built  in  the  small  town  of 
Valenciana,  Morelia,  with  its  magnifi- 
cent cathedral  and  charming  boulevard, 
is  one  of  the  most  beautiful  cities  of  its 
size  to  be  found  anywhere.  Mr.  San- 
ford's  succinct  descriptions  bring  out 
the  character  of  all  the  buildings  and 
places,  and  the  many  photographs  add  to 
the  interest  of  his  narrative.  (Z.  H.) 


Library  Notes 


The  Newfoundland  and 
Plantation  Acts 

TWO  acts  of  the  British  Parliament 
issued  in  the  reign  of  William  and 
Mary  have  recently  been  acquired  by 
the  Library.  They  cover  respectively 
seventeen  and  nineteen  folio  pages,  and 
are  printed  in  large  gothic  type. 

An  Act  to  Iucourage  the  Trade  to 
Newfoundland,  published  in  London  in 
1699,  is  of  special  historic  interest.  For 
the  status  of  Newfoundland  differed 
from  that  of  the  New  England  or  other 
plantations  in  that  its  whole  life  was 
of,  for,  and  by  fishing  —  notably  cod 
fishing-.  As  Professor  Ralph  G.  Louns- 
bury  explains  in  his  British  Fishery  at 
Newfoundland  1634-1763,  two  conflict- 
ing interests  struggled  to  impose  their 
policies :  on  the  one  hand,  the  "adven- 
turers" from  Western  England,  who 
stressed  the  return  of  their  fishermen 
to  British  home  ports  and  insisted  on 
their  rights  to  facilities  for  the  salting, 
drying,  and  storing  of  fish  against  the 
claims  of  native  inhabitants,  and,  on 
the  other,  the  settlers  and  planters  in 
Newfoundland,  who  had  the  support 
of  the  London  merchants.  A  charter 
from  Charles  I  known  as  the  "first 
Western  Charter"  of  1634  which  was 
generally  favorable  to  the  West  Coast 
interests,  was  reissued  in  1661  by 
Charles  II,  and  again,  with  eighteen 
additions,  in  1671.  The  war  with  France, 
competition  from  "by-boatmen"  or  in- 
dependent fishermen  who  used  native 
labor,  and  emigration  of  seamen  to 
New  England  necessitated  new  regu- 
lations —  this  time  not  by  royal  charter, 
but  by  an  act  of  Parliament. 

The  overseas  fisheries  were  con- 
sidered excellent  training-schools  for 
seamen  who  could  be  impressed  into 
the  Navy.  This  accounts  for  the  pro- 
vision in  the  Act :  "That  every  Master 
of  a  By-Boat  .  .  .  shall  carry  with  him 
at  least  Two  Fresh  Men  in  six  (viz.) 
one  Man  that  hath  made  no  more  than 
one  Voyage,  and  one  Man  who  hath 
never  been  at  Sea  before  .  .  .  And  be  it 
further  enacted  .  .  .  That  every  Master 
or  Owner  of  any  Fishing  Ship,  going 


to  Newfoundland  shall  have  in  his 
Ships  Company  every  Fifth  Man  a 
Green-Man." 

The  other  pamphlet  is  An  Act  for 
Preventing  Frauds,  and  regulating  Abuses 
in  the  Plantation  Trade,  printed  in  Lon- 
don in  1696.  Confirming  acts  passed 
in  the  reign  of  Charles  II,  it  requires 
that  merchandise  be  imported  and  ex- 
ported only  in  ships  built  in  England. 
Ireland  or  the  plantations ;  that  of  f  icers 
for  the  inspection  of  plantation  trade 
shall  be  empowered  to  search  ships ; 
and  particularly  it  forbids  the  discharge 
of  cargo  directly  in  ports  of  Scotland 
or  Ireland  without  first  landing  in  Eng- 
land, Wales  or  the  town  of  Berwick 
upon  Tweed.  m.  M. 

Retirement  of  Miss  Cufflin 

MISS  M.  Florence  Cufflin,  Branch 
Librarian  of  the  Allston  Branch, 
retired  at  the  end  of  April  after  more 
than  fifty-four  years  in  the  service  of 
the  Library. 

She  began  in  1892  in  the  Lower  Hall 
of  the  Boylston  Street  Building.  When 
the  Copley  Square  building  was  opened 
she  worked  in  the  Issue  Department, 
becoming  Inspector  of  the  Stacks  after 
a  short  while.  A  number  of  employees 
in  the  Central  Library  today  testify 
warmly  to  the  benefits  of  training" 
under  Miss  Cufflin  in  the  early  days  of 
their  employment.  Though  she  was 
considered  strict,  her  enthusiasm  for 
her  work  and  her  unfailing  interest  in 
her  girls  made  her  a  popular  supervisor. 

After  a  brief  period  in  the  Catalogue 
Department  in  1913,  Miss  Cufflin  be- 
gan her  career  in  branch  library  work 
in  1914.  Since  then  she  has  been  one 
of  the  leaders  among  the  branch  li- 
brarians. Her  experience  in  the  Central 
Library  has  made  her  especially  valu- 
able when  serving  on  committees  to 
discuss  inter-branch  and  branch  and 
central  library  relationships.  After 
three  years  at  Codman  Square  Branch 
Library,  she  left  to  take  charge  of  the 
busier  branch  in  South  Boston,  where 
she  spent  the  longest  part  of  her  time, 
from  1917  to  1937.  At  that  date  she 


233 


234 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


went  to  the  Allston  Branch  Library, 
where  she  remained  until  her  retire- 
ment. 

In  the  years  before  the  establish- 
ment of  in-service  training  in  classes, 
Miss  Cufflin's  branch  was  one  of  a  few 
where  new  members  of  the  staff  were 
trained.  Her  knowledge  of  the  branch 
library  system  has  been  of  great  value 
to  the  administrative  offices  with  which 
she  came  in  contact  and  her  advice  on 
branch  matters  has  been  sought  by  her 
colleagues. 

A  luncheon  was  held  in  her  honor  at 
the  Myles  Standish  Hotel  on  May  3. 
Mrs.  Ada  A.  Andelman,  Supervisor  of 
Work  with  Branches,  acted  as  mistress 
of  ceremonies  at  the  after-luncheon 
speeches,  when  Mr.  Lord,  Miss  Edith 
Guerrier,  former  Supervisor  of  Branch 
Libraries,  Miss  Bessie  Doherty  of  the 
Branch  Issue  Department,  and  Miss 
Fanny  Goldstein,  Branch  Librarian  of 
the  West  End  Branch  Library,  paid 
tribute  to  her  valuable  years  of  work 
in  the  Library. 

Look  at  New  England 

THE  newest  volume  in  the  Look  at 
America  series  is  devoted  to  New 
England.  Intended  as  a  pre-view  for  the 
traveller  and  a  source  of  delight  for  the 
born  New-Englander,  the  book  begins 
with  a  preface  by  Mary  Ellen  Chase. 


"Every  one  of  the  six  New  England 
states,  alike  in  so  many  aspects,"  Miss 
Chase  writes,  "preserves,  nevertheless, 
its  own  proud  and  peculiar  loyalties." 
The  truth  of  her  comment  is  borne  out 
by  the  beautiful  color  plates  which  il- 
lustrate the  introduction  itself,  as  well 
as  the  hundreds  of  black-and-white 
photographs  which  make  up  the  main 
text. 

With  almost  absolute  fidelity  of 
color,  the  opening  pages  show  a  Maine 
lighthouse  on  a  brilliant  day,  Vermont 
farm  buildings  red  against  the  snow. 
Connecticut  apple  trees  in  bloom,  and 
a  covered  bridge  in  New  Hampshire  in 
a  warm  autumn  sun.  The  rest  of  the 
volume  includes  all  the  variety  of  New 
England  atmosphere,  from  the  Vic- 
torian magnificence  of  Newport's  sum- 
mer estates  to  lumber  camps  on  the 
Penobscot.  The  section  on  Windsor, 
Connecticut,  provides  a  nearly  com- 
plete pictorial  history  of  native  archi- 
tecture from  1620  to  1850  —  the  salt 
box  and  the  Greek  revival.  Local  in- 
dustries —  the  maple  sugar  harvest, 
the  fishing  fleets,  the  pulpwood  drives, 
and  the  huge  potato  fields  —  are 
shown  in  detail,  and  there  are  delight- 
ful shots  of  fishing,  ski  parties,  game 
animals,  and  gatherings  such  as  Tun- 
bridge  Fair.  The  quality  of  the  purely 
scenic  photographs  in  this  series  is  al- 
ready famous.  H.  McC. 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 

Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

*  * 
« 

This  list  should  be  used  in  conjunction  with  Books  Current,  a 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
1943.  Books  Current  is  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  and  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  are  available  for  the  whole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  are  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  the 
Business  Branch;  however,  they  may  be  borrozved  through  the  various 
Branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


General  Reference 
Books  in  Bates  Hall 

Essay  and  General  Literature  index.  1946. 

Wilson.  1947.  424  pp.  Gen.  Ref.  A13.E75 
[Graham,  Bessie.]  Literary  prizes  and  their 

winners.  Bowker.  1946.  vii,  119  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  Desk  PN171.P75G7 
Miller,   William.   The   Dickens   student  and 

collector:   a  list  of  writings  relating  to 

Charles  Dickens  and  his  work.  Harvard. 

1946.  351  pp.  Gen.  Ref.  Z8230.M65 

Bibliography 

Chamberlin,  Willard  Joseph.  Entomological 
nomenclature  and  literature.  [Ann  Arbor, 
Mich.]   1946.  xi,   135  pp.  *Z5856.C5  1946 

Second  edition. 

Landa,  Louis  A.,  and  James  Edward  Tobin. 
Jonathan  Swift,  a  list  of  critical  studies 
published  from  1895  to  1945  ...  to  which 
is  adtled.  Remarks  on  some  Swift  manu- 
scripts in  the  United  States  by  Herbert 
Davis.  New  York.  Cosmopolitan  Science 
and  Art  Service  Co.  1945.  :::Z88s6.Li8 

McNamara,  Katherine,  and  Caroline  Shil- 
laber.  The  Boston  metropolitan  district; 
its  physical  growth  and  governmental  de- 
velopment, a  bibliography.  Cambridge, 
Bureau  for  Research  in  Municipal  Govern- 
ment. *Zi2g6.B7M25 

Reproduced    from    typewritten  copy. 

Ragatz,  Lowell  Joseph.  A  bibliography  for 
the  study  of  European  history,.  1815  to 
T939-  Ann  Arbor,  Mich.  [1946.]  v-xiv, 
272  pp.  *Z6204.R3 
Lithoprinted. 


Biography 

Hamilton,  Sir  Ian.  Listening  for  the  drums. 
London,  Faber.  [1945.]  280  pp.  Ulus. 

DA88.1.H25A24  1945 

First   published   in  1944. 

Military  and  other  experiences  in  Egypt,  India. 
Burma,  etc.,  extending  from  1873  to  1916.  These 
memoirs  include  a  chapter  on  Kipling  and  one  on 
Winston  Churchill. 


Trent,  Josiah  Charles.  Benjamin  Watcrhouse 
(1754-1846).  [Lansing,  Mich.  1946?]  357- 
364  pp.  R154.W28T7 

"Reprinted  from  Journal  of  the  history  of  medicine 
and  allied  sciences,  v.  1,  no.  3." 


Business 

These  books  ore  to  be  obtained  at  the 
Business  Branch,  20  City  Hall  Ave. 
American   cement   directory,    1947.  Boston, 
Bradlev  Pulverizer  Co.  1947.  149  pp. 

**TP876.A5i 

Association  of  bank  women.  Year  book. 
1947.  Los  Angeles,  Hutson.  1937.  83  pp. 

**HGi507-A84 

Backman,  Jules,  and  M.  R.  Gainsborough. 
Economics  of  the  cotton  textile  industry. 
National    Industrial    Conference  Board. 

1946.  244  pp.  NBS 
Branham  atuomobile  reference  book,  showing 

in  illustrated  form  the  location  of  motor 
and  serial  numbers  on  all  passenger  cars 
and    trucks.  1947.  Chicago.  1947.  502  pp. 

**TLi5i.B82 

Canadian  almanac  and  legal  and  court  di- 
rectory for  the  year  1937.  v.  100.  Toronto. 
772  pp.  :::*HA.745.C2i 

Davison's  rayon  and  silk  trades  including 
nylon  and  other  synthetic  textiles;  the 
standard  guide.  Ridgewood,  N.  J.,  Davison 
Pub.  Co.  1947.  472  pp.  **TSi643.D26 

Distribution  and  warehousing  directory.  Chil- 
ton Co.  1947.  366  pp.  **HF5488.D6ia 

Hamilton,  S  W.  Profitable  turkey  manage- 
ment; 6th  edition.  Cayuga,  N.  Y.,  Beacon 
Milling  Co.  1946.  104  pp.  NBS 

Lockwood's  directory  of  the  paper  and  allied 
trades.  72nd  edition.  1947.  New  York, 
Lockwood  Trade  Journal  Co.  1947.  1324  pp. 

**TSio88.L8i 

Mennonite  yearbook  and  directory.  1947- 
Scotidale,    Pa..    Mennonite    Pub.  House. 

1947.  ii2pp.  **BX8i07.M54 
Printing    trades    blue    book.  Metropolitan 

edition,  Greater  New  York  and  New  J'er- 
sey.  32d  annual  edition.  1947.  New  York, 
Lewis.  1947-  703  PP.  **Ziig.P95m 


235 


236 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Radio  daily,  New  York.  The  1947  radio  annu- 
al. New  York.  194".  1120  pp. 

**TK6555-Ri2 

Ready  reference  fur  industry  telephone  di- 
rectory. New  York,  Ready  Reference 
Pub.  Co.  1946.  592  pp.  **TSio66.R28f 

Security  dealers  of  North  America.  1947. 
New  York,  Seibert.  1947.  1222pp. 

**HG4gc7.S44 

Smith,  Wilbur  S.,  and  Charles  S.  LeCraw. 
Saugatuck,  Conn.,  The  Eno  Foundation 
for  Traffic  Control.  1946.  119  pp.  NBS 

Tax  foundation,  New  York.  Facts  and 
figures  on  government  finance.  1946/47. 
New  York,  Tax  Foundation.  1946.  144 
pp.  *:iHj2052.T23 

Turnbow,  Grover  D.,  and  others.  The  ice 
cream  industry.  2d  edition.  Wiley.  1947. 
654  PP.-.  .    .  .  NBS 

World  citizens  association,  Executive  com- 
mittee. The  world  at  the  crossroads.  Chi- 
cago, World  Citizens  Ass'n.  1946.  160  pp. 

NBS 

Economics 

American   institute   for  economic  research. 

The  background  of  investment,  by  Donald 
G.  Ferguson,  Robert  L.  Blair,  and  Re- 
search assistants  .  .  .  Cambridge,  Mass., 
American  Inst,  for  Economic  Research. 
[1946.I  24  pp.  9332.6 A360 

Atkins,  Willard  Earl,  and  others.  The  regu- 
lations of  the  security  markets,  by  Wil- 
iard  E.  Atkins,  George  W.  Edwards  [and] 
Harold  G.  Moulton.  Brookings  Inst.  1946. 
vii,  126  pp.  *9332-6c73A37 

Be  Chazeau,  Melvin,  and  others.  Jobs  and 
markets;  how  to  prevent  inflation  and  de- 
pression in  the  transition,  by  Melvin  Dc 
Chezeau,  Albert  G.  Hart,  Gardiner  C.  Means 
[and  others]  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  xi,  143 
PP-  9332-573A64 

Massachusetts,  Development  and  industrial 
commission.  The  facts  concerning  in- 
dustrial advantages  in  Massachusetts. 
Boston.  1946.  45  pp.  Illus.  9338.4744A18R 

Parker,  Amory.  Twenty  crucial  years;  the 
story  of  incorporated  investors,  a  pioneer 
investment  company,  inc.,  1925-1945. 
Boston,  Parker  Corp.  [1946?]  126  pp. 

9332.6A353 

South  Africa,  Government  information  office. 
This  is  South  Africa.  New  York,  Union 
of  South  Africa  Government  Information 
Office.   1946.   52  pp.   Illus.  *93i6.8A5 

Spriegel,  William  R.,  and  Ernest  Coulter 
Davies.  Principles  of  business  organi- 
zation. Prentice-Hall.  1946.  xii,  564  pp. 
Illus.  9381.A177 

Bibliography :  pp.  5*1-53'- 

Stettinius,  Edward  R.  Le  pret-bail;  arme  de 
victoire:  origine  et  developpement  de  la 
loi  de  pret-location.  New-York,  Les 
Editions  transatlantiques.  1944.  [9]-4i5PP- 
Plates.  9336.3I73A37 
A  translation  of  "Lend-lease,  Weapon  for  Victory." 

U.  S.  Federal  power  commission.  Summary 
of  industrial  electric  power  in  the  United 
States,  1939-1946.  [Washington.]  Federal 
Power  Commission.  1946.  xviii,  78  pp. 

9381.0973A141 


Education 

Hildreth,  Gertrude,  and  others.  Easy  growth  in 
reading:  Moving  ahead,  by  Gertrude  Hil- 
dreth .  .  .  Allie  Lou  Felton,  Alice  Meighen 
[and]  Marjorie  Pratt,  illustrated  by 
Corinne  Malvern  and  Mary  Highsmith. 
Winston.  [1945.]  vi,  440  pp.  PE1121.H493 
Reader  for  the  6th  grade. 
"Books  to  read":  pp.  423-425. 

McCormick,  Patrick  Joseph.  History  of  edu- 
cation; a  survey  of  the  development  of 
educational  theory  and  practice  in  ancient, 
medieval  and  modern  times  .  .  .  with  an 
introduction  by  Edward  A.  Pace  .  .  .  re- 
vised by  Frank  P.  Cassidy.  Washington. 
Catholic  Education  Press.  1946.  xxv,  649 
pp.  LA13.M14  1946 

Mackie,  Romaine  Prior.  Crippled  children  in 
American  education,  1939-1942.  Columbia 
Univ.  1945.  v-viii,  144  pp. 

Bibliography:  pp.  133-135.     *35g2.220  No.  913 

Smith,  Nila  Banton.  [Learning  to  read;  a 
basic  reading  program.]  Teachers'  guide 
for  beginning  reading  experiences.  Silver 
Burdett  Co.  [1945-46.]  4  v.  Illus. 

*LBi572.S65 

Fine  Arts 

Braque,  Georges.  Braque.  Preface  de  Stanis- 
las Fumet.  Paris,  New  York,  Braun. 
[1945.]  [14]  pp.  24  colored  plates. 

*8o63.07-34i 

Cellini,  Benvenuto.  1500-1571.  The  autobio- 
graphy of  Benvenuto  Cellini,  translated  by 
John  Addington  Symonds,  illustrated  by 
Salvador  Dali.  Doubleday.  1946.  442  pp. 
Illus.  Colored  plates.  8084.05-228R 

Fasoia,  Cesare.  The  Florence  galleries  and 
the  war;  history  and  records,  with  a  list  of 
missing  works  of  art.  Illustrated  with  30 
plates.  Firenze.  [1945.]  /-122  pp.  [30] 
plates  on  15  11.  ^4087.08-102 

Grandgerard,  Lucien.  L'art  de  peindre;  con- 
fidences d'un  artiste.  Montreal.  1945.  79 
pp.   Colored   plates.  8070.05-118 

Harvard  university,  William  Hayes  Fogg 
art  museum.  French  painting  since  1870. 
Lent  by  Maurice  Wertheim,  class  of  1906. 
June  I  through  September  7,  1946.  [Cam- 
bridge, Mass.?  1946.]  76  pp.  *8o63.oi-ii6 

"The  articles  are  signed  with  the  initials  of  the 
contributors:  F.  B.  D.,  Frederick  B.  Deknatel; 
A.  M.,  Agnes  Mongan ;  J.  K.,  John  Rewald ;  F. 
S.  W..   Frederick  S.  Wight. 

Lord,  Margaret.  Interior  decoration,  a  guide 
to  furnishing  the  Australian  home.  [Syd- 
ney,] Ure  Smith.  [1946.]  110  pp.  Illus. 
Colored  plates.  8118.05-575 

McBride,  Henry.  Florine  Stettheimer.  New 
York,  Museum  of  Modern  Art,  distributed 
by  Simon  and  Schuster.  [1946.]  55  PP- 
Colored  plates.  :|:8o6o.o6-920 

History  and  Geography 

World  War  II  and  After 

Allied  forces.  Report  by  the  supreme  allied 
commander,  Mediterranean,  to  the  Com- 
bined chiefs  of  staff  on  the  Italian  cam- 
paign, 8  January  1944  to  10  May  1944. 
[Washington.   1946.]   34  pp.  *D763.I  8A6 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


237 


La  Cerda,  John.  The  conqueror  comes  to  tea ; 
Japan  under  MacArthur.  Rutgers  Univ. 
1946.  224  pp.  D829.J3L3 

A  first-hand  account  of  various  phases  of  the 
occupation  of  Japan  and  Japanese  life  under  it,  in- 
cluding the  trial  of  war  criminals,  the  Imperial 
family,  the  press,  the  black  market,  labor,  im- 
morality, etc. 

Mendelssohn,  Peter.  Design  for  aggression; 
the  inside  story  of  Hitler's  war  plans. 
Harper.  [1946.]  270  pp.  D751.M44  1946a 
Published  in  England  under  the  title  of  "The 
Nuremberg  Documents." 

"A  list  of  of  principal  captured  German  documents 
quoted  or  referred  to  in  this  book1':  pp.  261—264. 

Pratt,  Fletcher.  Front  de  nier,  Pacifique: 
1941-1942  .  .  .  avec  une  introduction  par 
Frank  Knox.  New-York,  Les  Editions 
Transatlantiques.  1945.  viii,  330  pp.  Illus. 

D773.P712 

U.  S.  Office  of  naval  operations.  The  Navy's 
air  war,  a  mission  completed,  by  the 
Aviation  history  unit,  OP-519B,  DCNO 
(air).  Edited  by  A.  R.  Buchanan  .  .  . 
With  a  foreword  by  Admiral  Marc  A. 
Mitscher.  Illustrated  with  official  U.  S. 
Navy  photographs.  Harper.  [!946.]  xiv, 
432  pp.  Plates.  D790.A5  i94.6d 

U.  S.  War  relocation  authority.  Token  ship- 
ment, the  story  of  America's  war  refugee 
shelter.  United  States  Department  of  the 
interior,  J.  A.  Krug,  secretary,  War  re- 
location authority,  D.  S.  Myer,  director. 
Washington.  [1946.]  104  pp. 

*JV66oi.R4A5  1946 

"Prepared  by  Edward  B.  Marks,  jr." — P.  5. 

Vercors,  pseud.  Le  sable  du  temps.  Paris 
[1946.]  [i3]-ioopp.  D802.F8B7 
Tells  about  the  German  occupation. 

Woodward,  C.  Vann.  The  battle  for  Leyte 
gulf.  Macmillan.  194".  xii,  244  pp.  Plates. 

D773.W6 

Miscellaneous 

Duhamel,  Georges.  Civilisation  franchise. 
[Paris.  1944.]  72  pp.  DC33.D83 

Hammond  (C.  S.)  and  company.  Hammond's 
Illustrated  library  world  atlas,  with  po- 
litical and  resourse-relief  maps,  illustrated 
descriptive  gazetteers,  pictorial  history  of 
world  war  II,  illustrated  world  geography, 
races  of  mankind,  new  indexes.  New 
York,  Hammond.  1947.  xvi,  312,  [32]  pp. 
incl.  maps.  Illus.  *Gioi9.H3  1947 

Swanton,  John  Reed.  The  Indians  of  the 
southeastern  United  States.  Washington. 
1946.  xiii,  943  pp. 

*E78.S55S9=*43oo.66  No.  137 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  American  ethnology.  Bulletin  137. 
Bibliography,  pp.  832-856 


Literature 

Essays.  History  of  Literature 

Brenner,  Emil.  Deutsche  Literatur-  Geschichte. 
Wels  und  Leipzig.  [1943.]  x,  440  pp. 
.  *PT96.B7  1943 

Marti,  Jose,  1833-1895.  Trincheras  de  papel. 
Publicaciones  del  Ministerio  de  educacion, 
Direccion  de  cultura.  La  Habana.  194V 
254  PP.  PQ7389.M2T7 
Grande8  periodistas  cubanos,  5. 


Reiff,  Paul  Friedrich,  1870-1924.  Die  Asthetik 
der  deutschen  Friihromantik.  Herausgege- 
ben  von  Theodor  Geissendoerfer.  Univ.  of 
Illinois.  1946.  305  pp.  *449i. 186.31  Nos.  1-2 

German  and  French  Literature 

Bartels,  Adolf.  Wilde  Zeiten  (Rolves  Kars- 
ten)  eine  Erzahlung  aus  der  Dithmar- 
scher  Geschichte.  Stuttgart.  [1944.]  201  pp. 
Illus.  *PT26o3.A57W5 

Fernet,  Andre.  La  cosaque.  Montreal,  f  1945.1 
M-227  pp.  PQ3919.F45C6 

Hoffmann,  Ernst  Theodor  Amadeus,  1774- 
1822.  Tales  of  Hoffmann,  edited  by  Chris- 
topher Lazare;  illustrated  by  Richard 
Lindner.  New  York,  Wyn.  1946.  509  pp. 

PT2361.E4A14'  1946 

"This  is  the  first  publication  in  modern  translation 
of  Hoffman's  famous  tales." — Introduction. 
Includes  a  Biographical  Note  on  E.  T.  A.  Hoff- 
mann. 

Lammle,  August,  editor.  Das  Herz  der  Hei- 
mat;  eine  Aussteuer  aus  dem  schwabischen 
Hausgut  fur  unsere  Sonne  und  Tochter 
daheim  und  draussen.  Mit  Bildern  von 
Conrad  Weitbrecht.  Stuttgart.  [1942.]  368 
pp.  Plates.  *PT3804.5.L3  1942 

Rohleder,  Rudolf.  Der  Weg  des  Alexander 
Borg,  Roman  .  .  .  Miinchen.  [1943.]  263 
pp.  "  *PT2635.0  466W4 

Schmuckle,  Georg.  Die  rote  Maske;  Geschich- 
ten  und  Anekdoten.  Stuttgart.  [I943-] 
259  pp.  *PT2638.M95R6 

Schreiber,  Use.  Die  Flucht  ins  Paradies.  Ham- 
burg. [194-]  373PP.  *PT2638.R396Fs 

Taut,  Franz,  pseud.  Verschollenes  Gold,  Ro- 
man. Berlin.   [1943-1  223  pp. 

*PT2642.A8V4 

Widmann,  Ines.  Beate  Krafft;  Roman  einer 
Heimkehr.  Miinchen.   [1942.]   301  pp. 

*PT2647.I  24B4  1942 


Music 

Literature 

Benn,  Frederick  Christopher,  1912-1941. 
Mozart  on  the  stage  .  .  .  with  an  introduction 
by  Richard  Capell  and  illustrations  by 
Kenneth  Green.  Coward-McCann.  [1946.] 
178  pp.  ML410.M9B34 
Contents.  —  Le  nozzi  di  Figaro.  —  Don  Giovanni. 
—  Cosi  fan  tutte.  — ■  Die  Zauberflote.  —  Appendix  : 
Lorenzo  da  Ponte.  Emanuel  Schikaneder. 
Bibliography    (p.  178). 

Doorslaer,  Georges  van.  La  vie  et  les  oeuvres 
de  Philippe  de  Monte.  [Bruxe-lles.]  1921. 
309  pp.  Illus.  ML410.M78D6 

"Bibliographic  des  oeuvres  de  Philippe  de  Monte" 
pp.  90-208. 

"Index  bibliographique"  pp.  [209-216.] 
"Annexes"    (pp.    [2i7]-3o.<0    include    letters  by 
Philippe  de  Monte. 

Helm,  Everett  H.  Music.  Boston,  Bellman 
Pub.  Co.  [1946.]  24  pp.  ML379S.H44 

Vocational  and  professional  monographs,  no.  6. 

Scores 

Gluck,  Christoph  Willibald  Rittcr  von,  1714- 
1787.  The  favorite  songs  in  the  opera  call'd 
Artamene,  by  Sigr.  Gluck.  London,  Printed 


238 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


for  I.  Walsh.  [1746.]  18  pp. 

Words  in  Italian.  *Ml5CO.G48A7 

Score  with  figured  bass. 

Hoist,  Gustav  Theodore,  1874-1934.  First 
suite  in  E  flat.  Boosey  &  Hawkes.  [1921.] 
54  pp  *)Mi203.H64  no.  1 

Full  band  score. 

Lully,  Jean  Baptiste  de,  1632-1687.  Suite  of 
instrumental  pieces  from  the  opera  "Ar- 
mide  et  Renaud."  Schirmer.  [1936.]  11  pp. 
and  6  pts.  *Mii03.L84A7 

Juilliard  intermediate  series  of  music  for  string 
orchestra,  with  piano  (ad  libitum),  selected  and 
edited  by  Albert  Stoessel  .  .  .  Set.  3,  no.  1. 
Parts  for  violin  I,  violin  II,  violin  III  or  viola, 
violas,  violoncellos  and  double  basses  and  piano  ad 
libitum. 

Manfredini,  Francesco,  b.  1688-  Weihnachts- 
konzert  (concerto  grosso  per  il  santissimo 
natale)  .  .  .  Fur  2  Solo-Violinen,  Streich- 
quartett  und  Klavier  (Orgel  oder  Har- 
monium) .  .  .  Leipzig.  [1904.]  15  pp. 

*Mii05.M35W4 

Marshall,  John  P.,  1877-1941.  O  salutaris 
hostia.  O  holy  Father.  Boston,  Stevens 
Co.  1895.  7  pp.  M2114.L72M3 

Song  for  medium  voice  with  piano  accompaniment. 
Words  in  Latin  and  English. 

Milhaud,   Darius.    The   household   muse. La 
muse  menag«re.  A  suite  of  15  pieces  .  .  . 
Complete  in  1  vol.  Philadelphia,  Elkan- 
Vogel  Co.  [1945.]   19  pp.  Illus. 
For  the  piano.  M24.M68M8  1945 

Mozart,  Wolfgang  Amadeus,  1756-1791.  Ten 
quartets  for  two  violins,  viola,  and  vio- 
loncello, by  W.  A.  Mozart;  authentic  text 
established  from  the  composer's  auto- 
graphs in  the  British  museum  by  Andre 
Mangeot.  Schirmer.  [1942.I  4  pts. 

M452.M6M3 

Paganini,  Niccolo,  1782-1840.  Concerto  in  D 
major  (complete  in  three  movements)  .  .  . 
Edited  by  Enrique  Diaz  and  T.  J.  Gerald. 
New  York,  Paragon  Music  Publishers. 
[1944.]   39  pp.  and  pt.       M1013.P35  op.6 

Score:  violin  and  piano,  and  part. 

Torelli,  Giuseppe,  1650  (ca)  -  1708.  Weih- 
nachtskonzert  (concerto  a  4,  in  forma  di 
pastorale  per  il  santissimo  natale)  aus  op. 
8,  Bologna  1709.  Fur  2  Violinen  (solo 
und  tutti),  Viola,  Violoncello  (Kontra- 
bass)  und  Klavier  (Orgel  oder  Harmo- 
nium) .  .  .  Leipzig.  [1926.]  11  pp. 

*Mii05.T67W4 

Tschaikowsky,  P.,  1840-1893.  Arioso  des 
Lenski,  aus  der  Oper  "Eugen  Onegin" 
.  .  .  fiir  Gesang  und  Orchester  .  .  .  Parti- 
tur.  Moskau.  1928.  11  pp.  *Mi505.C4sE8 

Vivaldi,  Antonio,  1680  (ca)  -  1743.  Violin- 
konzert  (A  dur)  nach  dem  Autograph 
herausgegeben  und  fiir  den  Konzertge- 
brauch  eingerichtet  von  Ludwig  Lands- 
hoff.  Partitur.  Leipzig.  [1935.]  18  pp. 

(*)Mno5.V55  A  maj.  .L3 

On  label  mounted  under  imprint :  Broude  bros. 
music,  New  York. 


Periodicals 

American  antiquity;  a  quarterly  review  of 
American  archaeology,  v.  11,  no.  1-  July, 
1045-  Menasha,  Wisconsin.  *Esi.As2 


Bell,  The.  v.  12-  April,  1946-  Dublin. 

*AP4.B47 

An  Irish  literary  review  edited  by  Peadar  O'Don 
nell. 

Boston  Public  Library.  Lecture  Hall  News, 
v.  i—  October  1946.  Boston.  *Z753.B7sL 

British  plastics,  v.  16,  no.  179-  April,  1944- 
London.  80308263 

Chicago  Sun  book  week.  v.  4,  no.  27-  Janu- 
ary 26,  1947-  Chicago.  *Zi2ig.C55 

Columbia,  v.  26,  no.  6-   January,  1947- 

*756o.8i 

Catholic   magazine  published   by   the   Knights  of 

Columbus. 

Debater's  magazine;  a  quarterly  journal  of 
debate  and  speech  activities,  v.  3-  March, 
1947-  Redlands,  Cal.  *PN4i77.D37 

Electronic  industries  and  electronic  instru- 
mentation, v.  1—  January,  1947-  New  York. 

8oioa2go 

Far  eastern  survey,  v.  16,  no.  1-  January 
15,  1947-  New  York,  Inst,  of  Pacific  Re- 
lations. *DUi.F3 

Federal  science  progress,  v.  1-  February, 
1947-  Washington.  *Qi.F4S 

An  illustrated  monthly  report  for  the  businessman 
on  the  scientific  and  technical  activities  of  the 
United  States  Government. 

Harvard  library  bulletin,  v.  1,  no.  1-  Winter, 
1947-  *Z88i.H34B8 

Holiday,  v.  2,  no.  1-  January,  1947-  Phila- 
delphia. *Gi49.H6 
Integrity,  v.   1,  no.  4  —  January,  1947  — 

New  York. 

"Integrity  is  published  by  lay  Catholics  and  dedi- 
cated to  the  task  of  discovering  the  new  synthesis 
of  Religion  and  Life  for  our  times." 

National  Grange  monthly  ...  v.  43,  no.  3- 
March,  1946-  Springfield,  Mass. 

*HDi48s.P2A35 

National  reconstruction  journal,  v.  7,  no.  1- 
July,  1946-  New  York.  *DS70i.N3 

A  literary  and  sociological  review  published  by  the 
China  Institute  in  America. 

Netherlands  news  letter;  published  by  the 
Netherlands  information  bureau,  an  agency 
of  the  Kingdom  of  the  Netherlands,  no.  1- 
February  15,  1946.  New  York.  DJ1.N44 

Poland  of  today.  Monthly  bulletin  of  infor- 
mation, v.  1—  March,  1946-  New  York. 

*DK4oi.P45 

Profitable  hobbies,  v.  3,  no.  1-  January,  1947- 
Kansas  City,  Mo.  *GVi2oi.AiP7 

Revue  generale  beige,  no.  1-  to  date.  Novem- 
bre  1945-  to  date.  Bruxelles.  [1945-  to 
date]  *AP22.R52 
Absorbed  La  Revue  beige  published  from  1924- 

Tele-tech,  formerly  the  tele-communications 
technical  section  of  Electronic  industries, 
v.  6,  no.  i—  January,  1947-  New  York. 

8oioa.2gi 

Temps  modernes,  Les.  ire-  anee.  no.  1-5. 
ier  oct.  1945  -  ier  fev.  1946.  [Paris.  1945- 
46.]  *AP20..T4 

United  nations.  Weekly  bulletin,  v.  2-  Janu- 
ary 14,  1947-  New  York.     *JX  1977.A35 

United  nations  world,  v.  i,  no.  1-  February, 
1946-  New  York.  *D4ioUs 

Voice  of  India,  v.  1-  September,  1944-  Wash- 
ington. *DS40i.V6 
Published  by  National  Committee  for  India's  free- 
dom. 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


239 


Politics  and  Government 

United  nations,  Atomic  energy  commission. 
Scientific  and  technical  aspects  of  the  con- 
trol of  atomic  energy;  the  full  text  of  the 
First  report  of  the  Scientific  and  techni- 
cal committee  of  the  Atomic  energy  com- 
mission, the  background  of  the  report,  a 
glossary  of  scientific  terms  and  biographi- 
cal notes.  Lake  Success,  N.  Y.,  United 
Nations.  1946.  v,  42  pp.  *HDg6g8.A2U4 

—  United  nations  handbook,  [no.  5]-6.  June 
1946-Oct.  1946.  New  York.  1946-  2  v. 

*JXi977.A38 

Warburg,  James  P.  Germany,  nation  or  no- 
man's-land,  with  an  article  by  George  N. 
Sinister.  Foreign  Policy  Ass'n.  [1946.I  162 
pp.  Illus.  *757i.96  v.  60 


of  industrial  conflict,  by  F.  H.  Harbison.  — 
Industry  and  society.  —  About  the  authors.  — 
Working  bibliography  (pp.  203-207.) 

Wilkie,  H.  Frederick.  A  rebel  yells.  Van 
Xostrand.  [1946.]  xiv,  311pp.  9338.01A15 

Veterans 

Gurwell,  John  K.  Veterans'  information 
centers;  a  survey  of  their  operation  and 
services.  Chicago,  Public  Administration 
Service.  1945.  49  pp.  UB357.G87 

Public  administration  service,  Chicago.  Publication 
no.  94. 

Reproduced  from  type  written  copy. 
U.   S.   National  housing  agency.  Veterans 
emergency   housing  program,  v.   1-  June 
1946-  to  date.  [Washington.  1946- 

*933i-8373A82 


Science.  Philosophy 

Ficino,  Marsilio,  1433-1499.  Marsilio  Ficino's 
Commentary  on  Plato's  Symposium;  the 
text  and  a  translation,  with  an  intro- 
duction, by  Sears  Reynolds  Jayne  .  .  . 
University  of  Missouri.  1944.  247  pp. 

*449oa.22o.ig  No.  1 
The  University  of  Missouri  studies,  vol.  XIX,  no. 
1. 

Lee,  Rudolph  T.  The  universal  mechanism; 
facts  and  theories  concerning  the  basic 
mechanism  of  the  physical  universe,  with 
emphasis  on  the  ether-displacement  theory. 
[Poulsbo,  Wash.  1946.]  11-177PP. 

8216.77 

Luder,  William  Fay,  and  Saverio  Zuffanti. 
The  electronic  theory  of  acids  and  bases. 
Wiley.  [1946.]  ix,  165  pp.  8292.9 

Thiessen,  Alfred  Henry,  compiler.  Weather 
glossary.  Washington,  Weather  Bureau. 
[1946.]  iv,  299  pp.  *QC854.Ts 

U.  S.  Coast  and  geodetic  survey.  Magnetic 
observations  in  the  American  republics, 
1941-44;  a  project  under  the  sponsorship 
of  the  Interdepartmental  committee  on 
scientific  and  cultural  cooperation,  Depart- 
ment of  state.  Washington.  1946.  95  pp. 

*QC82S.3.Us  1946 

Sociology 

Industrial  Relations 

Moore,  Wilbert  E.  Industrial  relations  and 
the  social  order.  Macmillan.  1946.  xii,  555 
pp.  9331. 1A68 

Nathan,  Robert  Roy,  and  Oscar  Gass.  A 
national  wage  policy  for  1947.  Washing- 
ton. 1946.  71  pp.  9331.2A131 

"This  study  was  prepared  by  Robert  R.  Nathan 
associates,  inc.,  at  the  request  of  the  Congress  of 
industrial  organizations." —  P.  [2]  of  cover. 

Whyte,  William  Foote,  editor.  Industry  and 
society.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  211pp. 

HD6961.W45 

Contents.  Human  relations  in  industry.  —  The 
factory  as  a  social  system,  by  B.  B.  Gardner.  — 
The  factory  in  the  community,  by  W.  L.  Garner 
and  J.  O.  Low.  ■ —  Functions  and  pathology  of 
status  systems  in  formal  organizations,  by  C.  I. 
Barnard.  —  The  motivation  of  the  underprivileged 
worker,  by  Allison  Davis.  —  Race  relations  in 
industry,  by  E.  C.  Hughes.  —  When  workers  and 
customers  meet,  by  W.  F.  Whyte.  —  Role  of 
union  organization,  by  Mark  Starr.  —  The  basis 


Miscellaneous 
Columbia  University,  Bureau  of  applied 
social  research.  The  people  look  at  radio; 
report  on  a  survey  conducted  by  the 
National  opinion  research  center,  Univer- 
sity of  Denver.  Harry  Field,  director,  an- 
alyzed and  interpreted  by  the  Bureau  of 
applied  social  research,  Columbia  Univer- 
sity, Paul  F.  Lazarsfeld,  director.  Univ.  of 
North  Carolina  Press.  [1946.]  ix,  158  pp. 

HE8698.C65 

Includes   a    study   of   advertising,    as    well    as  of 
programs,  and  a  consideration  of  criticism. 
"The  average  man  listens  to  the  radio  almost  three 
hours  and  the  average  woman  listens  almost  four 
hours  a  day  to  the  radio." — Preface. 

Corwin,  E.  H.  L.  The  American  hospital. 
New  York,  Commonwealth  Fund.  1946.  xi, 
226  pp.  Illus.  RA981.A2CC 

Studies  cf  the  New  York  Academy  of  medicine. 
Committee  on  medicine  and  the  changing  order. 

Davis,  Harry  E.  A  history  of  freemasonry 
among  negroes  in  America.  [Cleveland? 
1946.1  334  PP-  HS883.D35 

"Published  under  the  auspices  of  the  Unites  su 
preme  council,  ancient  and  accepted  Scottish  rite 
of  freemasonry.  Northern  jurisdiction,  U.  S.  A. 
(Prince  Hall  affiliation),  incorporated." 

Greater  Boston  community  council.  Boston 
house  numbers  by  census  tracts.  Greater 
Boston  Community  Council.  1946.  vii,  49 
pp.  *93i7.446A22 

Somerville,  John.  Soviet  philosophy;  a  study 
of  theory  and  practice.  New  York,  Philoso- 
phical Library.  1946.  ix-xi,  269  pp. 

HX314S6 

A  logical  exposition  of  Soviet  social,  economic, 
political,  and  ethical  ideas,  by  an  expert  in  the 
field,  who  has  made  first-hand  studies  in  Russia. 

Technology 

Electric  Engineering.  Radio 

Associated  factory  mutual  fire  insurance  com- 
panies. Protection  of  electric  circuits  and 
machines,  by  C.  F.  Hedlund  .  .  .  [andl 
A.  L.  Brown  .  .  .  January  1946.  Boston. 
[1946.]  [7]~7o  pp.  IHus.  8013.38-' 
Reproduced   from   type-written  copy. 

Kramer,  Andrew  W.  Elementary  engineer- 
ing electronics,  with  special  reference  to 
measurement  and  control.  Pittsburgh, 
Instruments  Pub.  Co.  1945.  iv.  340  pp. 
Illus.  8017L.63 


24o  MORE  BOOKS: 

Wellman,  William  R.  Elementary  radio  ser- 
vicing. Van  Nostrand.  1947.  xi,  260  pp. 

8017B.108 

Mechanical  Engineering.  Manufacture 

Chutorash,  Gustave.  Automobile  body  en- 
gineering and  surface  development,  intro- 
ducing tbc  "replicator  method."  Detroit, 
Technical  Copywriters  of  America.  1946. 
74  pp.  Illus.  4035D-7 

Morrison,  Ivan  Gregg.  Farm  tractor  main- 
tenance. Danville,  111.,  The  Interstate. 
1946.  202  pp.  Illus.  4035K.5 

Nordhoff,  W.  A.  Machine-shop  estimating. 
McGraw-Hill.  1947.  xv,  486  pp.  Illus. 

4039.130 

Sherman,  Joseph  V.,  and  Sigue  Lidfeldt 
Sherman.  The  new  fibers.  Van  Nostrand. 
1946.  ix,  537  pp.  Plates.  8038G.19 
"Appendix:  Patents  section":  pp.[375]-52i. 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  ships.  Diesel  engine  main- 


A  BULLETIN 

tenance  training  manual.  U.  S.  Navy- 
February  1946.  Prepared  by  the  Bureau  of 
ships  for  Standards  and  curriculum  di- 
vision, training,  Bureau  of  navy  personnel. 
[Washington.  1946.]  xvi,  344  pp.  Illus. 

4034A.84 

Travel  and  Description 

Buck,  Paul  Herman.  The  evolution  of  the 
National  park  system  of  the  United  States. 
Washington.  1946.  74  pp.  *SB482.A438 

Reprinted  for  official  use  only. 
Bibliography :  pp.  69-74. 

Miralles  Bravo,  Rafael  .  .  .  Hacia  donde  va 
Rusia?  Mexico.  1946.  7-246  pp.  Plates. 

DK273.MS 

Tanghe,  Raymond.  Itineraire  canadien. 
Lettre-preface  par  Andre  Siegfried.  Mon- 
treal. 1945.  252  pp.  F1015.T2 

"Les  textes  remanies  d'une  serie  de  causeries  don- 
nees  sous  les  auspices  de  Radio  college." 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
Volume  XXII,  Number  7 


Contents 


Page 

W.  H.  MALLOCK:  A  NEGLECTED  WIT  (with  facsimile)  243 

By  Carl  R.  Woodring 

THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON  (continued  from  the  June  issue)  257 

ETCHINGS  BY  FREDERICK  L.  GRIGGS  263 

By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

TEN  BOOKS:  SHORT  REVIEWS 

Louis  Hacker:  The  Shaping  of  the  American  Tradition  265 

John  Gunther:  Inside  USA  265 

Emmet  John  Hughes :  Report  from  Spain  266 

Ouincy  Wright:  A  Foreign  Policy  for  the  United  States  266 

Edmond  Taylor:  Richer  by  Asia  266 

William  Beard :  Government  and  Liberty  267 

Josephus  Daniels:  Shirt-Sleeve  Diplomat  267 

Israel  Epstein:  The  Unfinished  Revolution  in  China  267 

V ance  Randolph  :  Ozark  Superstitions  268 

Nicolas  Slonimsky:  Roads  to  Music  268 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

Mr.  Woodring  269 

A  Thesaurus  of  Scales  269 

Advice  on  Autographs  from  William  Cullen  Bryant  269 

LIST  OF  RECENTLY-ACQUIRED  BOOKS  271 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17, 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library  15-17  Blagden  St.,  September,  1947,  Vol.  XXII,  No.  7 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees y  for  free  distribution ; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
SEPTEMBER,  1947 

W.  H.  Mallock:  A  Neglected  Wit 

By  CARL  R.  WOODRING 
I 

THE  work  of  W.  H.  Mallock  has  been  forgotten.  This  is  unfortunate, 
for  we  need  to  hear  again  much  that  he  said.  His  best  books  are  not 
at  all  hard  to  read,  but  they  are  hard  to  get.  The  Boston  Public  Library 
is  fortunate  in  having  a  complete  set  of  his  works  from  The  New  Republic 
in  1877  to  Memoirs  of  Life  and  Literature  in  1920. 

Mallock's  first  reviewers  found  his  dialogues  "almost  as  coarse"  as 
those  written  by  his  friend  Ouida.  More  fundamentally,  his  critics  in  both 
Britain  and  the  United  States  were  irritated  by  his  challenge  to  their 
scientific  optimism.  A  writer  in  the  Atlantic  Monthly  in  1878  was  forced 
to  deplore  The  Nezv  Republic's  "futile  brilliancy,  sad  hollowness.  and  per- 
verted power."  A  dozen  years  later,  however,  Norman  Hapgood  could 
eulogize  Mallock  as  "the  first  and  last"  effective  opponent  of  the  scien- 
tific materialists.  Why  has  he  then  —  once  the  cleverest  writer  in  Eng- 
land ■ —  fallen  into  complete  neglect?  Among  the  reasons  are  the  general 
eclipse  of  Victorian  literature  in  the  first  third  of  our  century;  the  burial 
of  his  best  work  under  forty  years  of  economic  theorizing;  the  limitation 
of  his  views  as  well  as  the  unhappy  fulfillment  of  many  of  his  predictions; 
and,  finally,  the  impatience  of  literary  commentators  with  exponents  of 
complacent  conservatism. 

William  Hurrell  Mallock  was  born  near  Torquay,  Devonshire,  a 
popular  watering  place,  in  1849.' He  grew  up  little  impressed  by  his  uncles, 
Hurrell  and  James  Anthony  Froude.  His  father  and  his  maternal  grand- 
father, the  Venerable  Archdeacon  Froude,  had  both  been  more  energetic 
as  squires  than  as  clergymen.  They  provided  his  early  years  with  four 
roofs:  Cockington  Court,  Dartington  Parsonage,  Dartington  Hall,  and 
Denbury  Manor.  At  fourteen,  studying  Pope  at  home,  he  wrote  couplets 
in  the  eighteenth-century  manner,  in  order  to  reform  the  tastes  of  readers 
corrupted  by  romanticism.  He  disliked  his  tutor,  who  leaned  toward 


243 


244 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Kingsley's  Christian  Socialism.  Upon  matriculation  at  Oxford,  in  1870, 
he  began  immediately  to  share  a  mutual  antipathy  with  Benjamin  Jowett, 
the  master  of  Balliol.  In  his  second  year,  he  won  the  Newdigate  Prize  for 
poetry  which  Arnold  and  John  Addington  Symonds  had  won.  Jowett, 
little  suspecting  what  lay  ahead,  introduced  him  to  several  authors,  in- 
cluding Swinburne  and  Browning.  The  two  poets  were  among  those 
snapped  at  by  young  Mallock  in  1872  in  Every  Man  his  Own  Poet,  a  collec- 
tion of  squibs  "by  a  Newdigate  Prizeman." 

Only  a  fair  student,  and  upset  by  the  liberalization  of  Oxford  thought 
since  his  father's  college  days,  Mallock  left  Balliol  without  a  degree  in 
1873.  Social  engagements  during  the  next  four  years  left  him  a  few  hours 
each  morning  to  work  leisurely  on  his  best  book,  which  he  had  begun 
at  Oxford.  The  New  Republic  was  published  anonymously  at  the  beginning 
of  1877.  By  Easter,  Mallock  was  discovered  and  lionized  as  the  author 
of  this  conversational  novel  parodying  and  satirizing  contemporary  in- 
tellectual leaders.  Jowett  and  the  Broad  Churchmen,  Huxley  and  the 
scientists,  were  impaled  with  Arnold,  Pater,  and  Ruskin.  The  next  year 
he  struck  again  at  the  proponents  of  "exact  thought"  with  a  blunter 
weapon,  The  New  Paul  and  Virginia;  or,  Positivism  on  an  Island.  Henry 
James,  writing  to  a  friend,  agreed  with  those  who  characterized  Mallock 
as  impudent.  Immediately,  however,  Is  Life  Worth  Living?,  an  essay 
pleading  for  a  revival  of  Christian  faith,  demanded  and  received  serious 
attention  in  England,  France,  the  United  States,  and  elsewhere.  His  next 
novel,  A  Romance  of  the  Nineteenth  Century,  188 1,  was  a  specific  illustra- 
tion that  loss  of  religious  belief  leads  to  seduction  and  murder. 

Through  conversation  during  visits  in  the  Highlands,  Mallock 
became  aware  of  the  social  unrest  which  threatened  the  British  aris- 
tocracy. From  statistical  information  issued  by  the  Board  of  Trade  and 
the  Registrars  General,  he  made  large  graphs  which  swung  about  him  on 
lecture  platforms  as  he  defended  landholders  in  England  and  Scotland. 
From  this  time  forward  his  novels  contained  a  fusion  of  social  and  re- 
ligious theories.  Most  of  his  non-fictional  books  attacked  Socialist  theses. 
From  this  time  to  his  death,  he  attempted  to  refute  Henry  George,  Karl 
Marx,  William  Hyndman,  John  Bright,  Joseph  Chamberlain,  the  Fabians, 
and  all  challengers  of  the  landed  aristocracy.  In  1884  he  stood  tentatively 
for  Parliament  from  a  Highland  borough,  but  stepped  aside  in  favor  of 
a  native  candidate.  It  was  perhaps  his  statistical  studies,  rather  than 
other  social  interests,  which  directed  him  toward  gambling.  During  the 
next  few  months  he  lost  a  friend's  money  by  working  a  promising  but 
only  temporarily  successful  system  at  Monte  Carlo. 

Mallock's  later  life  seems  to  fit  nicely  within  the  decay-of-vigor 
formula  which  Lytton  Strachey  has  provided  for  lives  of  the  nineteenth 
century.  He  has  considered  diplomacy  and  Parliament  as  careers;  he  has 


W.  H.  MALLOCK:  A  NEGLECTED  WIT 


245 


philandered.  He  is  a  dilettante,  a  member  of  the  Bachelor's  Club.  As  a  house 
guest  in  London  and  elsewhere  in  manor,  castle,  and  chateau,  he  spends  his 
mornings  assiduously  writing  essays  and  novels  in  defense  of  orthodoxy  and 
landowners.  In  his  novels  of  purpose,  with  unsewn  plots  and  obtruding  coin- 
cidences, he  described  the  fashionable  society  which  consumed  his  after- 
noons and  evenings.  The  Old  Order  Changes,  1886,  included  untimely  cari- 
catures of  Bright  and  Chamberlain  just  when  they  were  on  their  way  to 
power.  Although  his  clarity  of  style  and  trenchancy  of  wit  and  epigram 
continued  in  the  rest  of  his  nine  novels,  his  humor  declined.  Readers  fell 
away.  In  1904,  with  The  Veil  of  the  Temple,  he  returned  to  the  symposium 
form  of  The  New  Republic.  His  sobriety  too  nearly  approached  dullness. 
With  An  Immortal  Soul,  1908,  his  novel-writing  ceased. 

In  1903,  in  Religion  as  a  Credible  Doctrine,  he  recommended  three 
stand-or-fall  beliefs  to  religious  bodies :  personal  immortality,  freedom 
of  the  individual  will,  and  divine  revelation.  His  clerical  allies,  too  cau- 
tious to  be  willingly  represented  by  a  doctrine  so  definite  and  restrictive, 
deserted  him.  The  Conservative  Party  stayed  with  him.  In  1907  he  lec- 
tured, by  invitation  of  the  Civic  Federation  of  New  York,  at  five  Ameri- 
can universities,  among  them  Harvard.  The  audience  at  Philadelphia 
gained  his  respect  by  applauding.  In  these  years,  he  was  a  joint  founder, 
with  Claude  Lowther,  of  the  Anti-Socialist  Union,  and  with  Herbert 
Jessel,  of  the  School  of  Anti-Socialistic  Economics.  The  Parliamentary 
reports  on  uneven  distribution  of  wealth,  issued  in  1909,  provided  official 
contradiction  of  half  Mallock's  life  preaching. 

Even  more  vigorously  than  in  early  years,  he  combined  his  articles 
into  books,  and  broke  his  books  into  articles.  His  friends  died;  his  patri- 
mony vanished.  Although  more  knowledge  about  Mallock's  personal  life 
might  change  one's  view,  it  is  more  likely  that  he  lost  his  fortune  at  Monte 
Carlo  than  that  he  gave  it  away.  In  191 5  he  was  awarded  a  Civil  List  pen- 
sion of  one  hundred  and  fifty  pounds  "in  consideration  of  his  distinguished 
literary  work  and  of  his  straitened  circumstances."  A  septuagenarian,  he 
issued  in  1920  his  Memoirs  of  Life  and  Literature,  more  entertaining  than 
any  of  his  last  seven  novels.  He  appears  here  vain  to  the  degree  of  numb- 
ness, but  probably  his  decline  in  vigor,  wealth,  and  influence  was  to 
blame.  He  died  in  Somerset  in  1923  —  satirist,  novelist,  social  philosopher, 
poet,  and  translator  of  Lucretius.  He  may  or  may  not  have  had"  a  death- 
bed conversion,  long  delayed,  to  Catholicism. 

II 

1\  IT  ALLOCK  first  reached  a  wide  public  as  winner  of  the  Newdigate 
-LVJL  Prize  in  1871.  The  prescribed  subject  was  the  Suez  Canal,  a  French 
project  in  which  England  was  beginning  to  admit  interest.  Mallock  took 


246 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


up  at  once  his  lasting  theme.  The  poem,  concerned  with  the  long  separa- 
tion of  the  Red  Sea  and  the  Mediterranean,  closes : 

Since  then 

The  sundered  twain  have  met  and  mixed  again ; 
Yea,  they  have  kissed  and  met.  But  when  will  ye, 
Ye  warring  spirits  of  the  bond  and  free? 
What  power  or  knowledge  is  there,  to  unite 
The  never-mingled  seas  of  faith  and  sight? 

Shall  we,  he  asks,  stand  on  "either  desolate  shore"  until  "all  faiths  fail, 
and  knowledge  fades  away?" 

Every  Man  his  Ozvn  Poet  went  through  eleven  editions  in  the  United 
States  between  1878  and  1885,  and  was  still  being  reprinted  in  1912.  Al- 
though his  strokes  were  at  least  fresh,  the  anonymous  author  would 
seem  to  be  a  thwarted  rather  than  a  budding  parodist.  He  jabs  at  the 
"priggishness"  of  Tennyson's  Arthurian  idyls,  which  were  then  being 
issued;  he  assaults  both  D.  G.  Rossetti  and  Robert  Buchanan  just  when 
they  are  beginning  to  attack  each  other;  he  mocks  Kingsley.  Swinburne 
is  a  "blaspheming  patriot" ;  Browning  is  accountable  for  his  "coarseness" 
and  "unintelligibility."  The  recipe  for  writing  a  poem  in  Arnold's  manner, 
Mallock's  favorite  target,  begins:  "Take  one  soulful  of  involuntary  un- 
belief, which  has  been  previously  well  flavoured  with  self-satisfied  des- 
pair." 

Arnold  is  the  only  one  of  these  poets  to  enter  the  thoughtful  com- 
pany gathered  in  The  New  Republic.  In  his  Memoirs,  Mallock  cited  as  his 
models  Plato's  dialogues,  the  Satyricon,  and  Peacock's  "so-called  novels." 
It  was  Peacock  who  contributed  most.  Mallock's  skill  in  parody  is  the 
most  important  ingredient  in  making  the  work  a  better  novel  than  Pea- 
cock's Headlong  Hall  and  Nightmare  Abbey.  His  book  is  basically  a  col- 
loquy in  which  intellectual  leaders  of  the  time,  under  aliases  but  not  dis- 
guised, are  allowed  to  carry  their  religious  and  social  ideas  along  paths 
of  subtle  logic  to  absurd  extremes. 

The  characters,  it  is  true,  discuss  an  ideal  state,  but  Mallock  included 
Plato's  dialogues  among  his  models  because  The  New  Republic  is  directed 
mainly  against  Jowett,  whose  translation  of  Plato  first  appeared  in  1871. 
Mallock  is  too  busy  ridiculing  the  Greek  scholar's  liberal  theology  and 
the  style  of  his  sermons  to  tarry  with  the  dialectic  of  the  Republic,  as  Beer- 
bohm  was  to  tarry  in  Zuleika  Dobson;  but  "Dr.  Jenkinson"  is  unmistakably 
Jowett.  (It  was  Dr.  Jenkyns,  master  of  Balliol  from  1819  to  1854,  who 
had  been  responsible  for  Jowett's  first  appointment  at  the  college.)  In 
the  midst  of  his  sermon,  spoken  from  a  stage  decorated  with  nudes, 
Muses,  fauns,  and  bacchantes,  Dr.  Jenkinson  pronounces  in  a  soft  ethereal 
voice : 

Seeing,  then,  that  this  is  the  state  of  the  case,  we  should  surely  learn  hence- 


IV.  H.  Mattock,  from  the  December  1882  issue  of  the  London  "Vanity  Fair1 

247 


W.  H.  MALLOCK:  A  NEGLECTED  WIT 


249 


forth  not  to  identify  Christianity  with  anything-  that  science  can  assail,  or 
even  question.  Let  us  say  rather  that  nothing  is  or  can  be  essential  to  the 
religion  of  Christ  which,  when  once  stated,  can  be  denied  without  absurdity. 

Walter  Pater,  portrayed  as  "Mr.  Rose,"  was  sorely  wounded.  De- 
siring to  work  quietly,  certainly  without  the  notoriety  which  Mallock  and 
the  aesthetes  were  to  bring  him,  Pater  had  apparently  not  perceived  that 
his  books  were  written  in  a  more  intimate  tone  than  he  cared  to  use  in 
private  conversation : 

*'I  have  good  trust  that  the  number  of  such  men  is  on  the  increase  —  men 
I  mean,"  said  Mr.  Rose,  toying  tenderly  with  an  exquisite  wine-glass  of  Sal- 
viati's,  "who  with  a  steady  and  set  purpose  follow  art  for  the  sake  of  art, 
beauty  for  the  sake  of  beauty,  love  for  the  sake  of  love,  life  for  the  sake 
of  life." 

Lady  Ambrose,  the  horrible  example  which  Mallock  set  forth  to  show 
what  liberal  and  positivistic  thought  could  do  to  an  everyday  mind,  re- 
marks of  the  languorous  Mr.  Rose  that  "he  always  seems  to  talk  of  every- 
body as  if  they  had  no  clothes  on";  and  Mr.  Rose  himself  sighs  over  the 
"true  and  tender  expression  of  the  really  Catholic  spirit  of  modern  aesthe- 
ticism,  which  holds  nothing  common  or  unclean." 

Arnold's  "Dover  Beach,"  which  had  provided  Mallock  with  the 
simile  closing  The  Isthmus  of  Sues,  meets  with  no  gratitude  when  it  is 
hauntingly  parodied  in  The  New  Republic.  When  Mr.  Luke,  the  author  of 
this  melancholy  poem,  protests  that  "these  are  emotions  scarcely  worth 
describing,"  Storks,  the  character  representing  Huxley,  mutters:  "Cer- 
tainly not."  Arnold's  influence  on  Pater  is  shown  by  Mallock  as  clearly 
as  by  T.  S.  Eliot  later. 

"Culture,"  said  Mr.  Luke,  "is  the  union  of  two  things  - —  fastidious  taste 
and  liberal  sympathy.  These  can  only  be  gained  by  wide  reading  guided  by 
sweet  reason.  ...  It  is  true  that  culture  sets  aside  the  larger  part  of  the 
New  Testament  as  grotesque,  barbarous,  and  immoral;  but  what  remains, 
purged  of  its  apparent  meaning,  it  discerns  to  be  a  treasure  beyond  all 
price." 

It  is  unwise  to  conclude  from  this  sort  of  ridicule  that  Mallock  did  not 
understand  the  foundations  of  the  positions  which  he  attacked.  His  con- 
stant purpose  was  to  show  that  the  positions  of  his  enemies  did  not  stem 
logically  from  any  foundation.  Ruskin,  the  only  writer  whom  Mallock 
met  at  Oxford  and  liked,  is  the  least  caricatured  figure  in  the  book.  He, 
as  Mr.  Herbert  —  flushed  with  the  good  news  that  many  hideous  factories 
are  closing  —  is  allowed  to  preach  the  final  lay-sermon  denouncing  all 
those  who  are  tinged  with  scientific  materialism  or  liberal  theology 
("Atheism"),  and  who  yet  speak  complacently  of  their  faith  and  virtue. 

What  lifts  the  book  above  parody  is  not  the  details  of  the  elaborate 
house-party,  in  which  Mallock  reveled,  but  the  interaction  between  the 


250 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


characters.  To  call  them  by  their  real  names,  Jowett  groans  at  the  sight 
of  "that  illiberal  apologist  of  superstition,"  Dr.  Pusey.  Again,  Jowett  as- 
sures Arnold  that  he  cannot  know  Christianity  until  he  has  sufficiently 
compared  it  to  the  great  religions  of  the  East:  "No  religion,"  says  this 
Anglican  divine,  "can  be  understood  by  its  own  light  only."  Ruskin  be- 
comes uneasy,  and  asks  Jowett  if  his  religion  has  a  place  for  life  after 
death : 

"Dear  me!  dear  me!"  said  Dr.  Jenkinson  petulantly  to  himself.  "These  sort 
of  questions  ought  never  to  be  asked  in  that  hard  abrupt  way.  You  can't 
answer  them." 

The  "sentimental  materialist"  assures  the  company  that  he  can  answer 
them.  The  more  anti-spiritual  materialist  fortunately  refuses  to  consider 
such  foolishness.  Thus  the  torch  is  passed,  singeing  as  it  goes.  Jowett 
called  Ruskin's  lay-sermon  "very  poor  taste  —  very  poor  taste,"  but 
Lady  Ambrose  was,  as  always,  more  tolerant: 

"Now  that,  you  know,  I  think  is  all  very  well  in  a  sermon,  but  in  a  lecture, 
where  things  are  supposed  to  be  taken  more  or  less  literally,  I  think  it  is  a 
little  out  of  place." 

Mallock  intensely  disliked  the  Broad  Church,  the  industrialists,  and 
the  scientists;  but,  fundamentally,  his  defense  of  orthodoxy  is  a  literary 
and  logical  exercise.  The  New  Republic  was  written  in  a  spirit  of  mockery. 
Its  theme,  beyond  the  bedeviling  which  the  characters  give  each  other, 
is  that  life  is  absurd.  The  title-page  contains  a  quotation  to  this  effect 
from  the  Greek  Anthology.  The  nominal  hero  is  Otho  Laurence,  a  typical 
Mallockian  sceptic;  the  most  original  contributions  to  the  party  are 
flights  of  wit  written  by  his  cynical  uncle.  One  of  these,  concluding  that 
the  middle  class  "will  soon  have  made  vice  as  vulgar  as  they  long  ago 
made  virtue,"  demonstrates  that  Christianity,  before  science  destroyed 
it,  provided  the  sauce  piquante  of  life,  that  is  to  say,  provided  puppets  for 
wit  and  humor  to  knock  down.  (Oscar  Wilde  got  more  than  his  protagon- 
ists from  Mallock.)  When  old  Laurence  died,  he  requested  that  the  burial 
area  for  him  and  his  mistress  be  never  tended,  with  the  explanation  that 
"I  do  not  choose,  as  Christians  do,  to  rest  forever  under  a  lie." 

An  even  more  striking  paradox  is  the  dedication  of  the  book  to 
"Violet  Fane,"  the  pseudonym  of  one  of  Mallock's  closest  friends  —  both 
at  the  time  of  the  dedication,  when  she  was  Mrs.  Singleton,  and  later 
when  she  became  Lady  Currie.  Yet  she  reappears  within  the  novel,  and 
would  seem  to  be  abusively  caricatured  as  Mrs.  Sinclair,  who  is  the 
author  of  better  poems  than  any  of  Violet  Fane's  many  efforts,  but  acts 
in  a  manner  below  Victorian  standards  of  decency.  The  coquette  who 
flirts  with  other  guests  at  a  house  party  has  become,  in  today's  fiction, 
a  nymphomaniac ;  but  a  coquette  who  flirts  in  a  single  week-end  with 


W.  H.  MALLOCK:  A  NEGLECTED  WIT 


Benjamin  Jovvett,  Matthew  Arnold,  and  mustachioed  Walter  Pater,  in 
the  presence  of  twelve  other  Victorians,-  is  still  capable  of  raising  eyebrows. 


LEST  the  advocates  of  the  new  science  feel  that  they  had  got  off 
lightly  in  The  New  Republic,  Mallock  returned  immediately  with  The 
New  Paul  and  Virginia;  or.  Positivism  on  an  Island,  in  which  "positivism" 
includes  not  only  Frederic  Harrison,  Harriet  Martineau,  and  other  Com- 
tists,  but  all  proponents  of  "exact  thought,"  particularly  Huxley,  John 
Tyndall,  and  Kingdon  Clifford.  The  story  opens  aboard  the  Australasia,  at 
sea.  Just  when  Professor  Paul  Darnley  is  preaching  a  lay-sermon  to  the 
passengers  on  the  ever  brighter  future  of  civilization,  in  which  men  will 
have  "unspeakably  significant  happiness,"  and  on  the  value  of  conforming 
to  natural  law,  the  ship  conforms  to  natural  law  and  sinks.  In  this  way, 
throughout  the  brief  farce,  Mallock  places  the  published  words  of  his 
victims  in  the  most  absurd  contexts  he  can  fashion.  Debts  to  Candide  and 
Rasselas  are  apparent. 

Among  the  few  survivors  of  the  Australasia  is  a  curate  converted  to 
scientific  thought  because  he  was  almost  drowned  by  his  "robes  of  super- 
stition." When  he  attempts  to  kiss  Virginia,  who  is  more  or  less  com- 
mitted to  Paul,  Paid  assures  him  lhat  he  cannot  wish  to  do  that  which 
is  manifestly  immoral,  because  Professor  Huxley  has  said  that  morality 
is  strong  enough  to  hold  its  own.  The  enlightened  curate  nevertheless 
desists  only  because  Paul  is  larger  and  makes  him  fear  the  consequences 
of  natural  law. 

The  logic  upon  which  this  scene  is  based  formed  the  basis  also  for 
the  advance  against  "positivists"  in  Is  Life  Worth  Living?.  Accepting  the 
Benthamite  dictum  that  the  social  happiness  of  all  is  merely  the  accumu- 
lative personal  happiness  of  each,  and  believing  very  much  in  original 
sin,  Mallock  concludes  that,  in  order  to  make  virtue  attractive  to  those 
who  would  never  seek  it  for  itself,  a  dogma  is  necessary,  especially  for 
the  masses  —  preferably  a  dogma  which  promises  rewards  and  severe 
punishments.  In  the  Protestant  churches  men  cry,  "What  shall  we  do  to 
be  saved?"  Their  clergymen  murmur  back,  "Alas!  what  shall  you  do?" 
Affairs  are  different  in  the  Catholic  Church.  She  holds  herself  infallible, 
Mallock  explains,  through  her  link  with  divinity: 

But  she  knows  too  that  this  divinity  is  at  present  protected  by  its  vague- 
ness; nor  is  she  likely  to  expose  it  more  openly  to  its  enemies,  till  some 
plan  of  defence  has  been  devised  for  it.  .  .  .  She  may  then  consider  what 
views  of  the  Bible  are  historically  tenable,  and  what  not;  and  may  faith- 
fully shape  her  teaching  by  the  learning  of  this  world. 

Churchmen  —  even  Anglicans  —  feeling  that  Mallock  had  delivered  them 


III 


252 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


from  the  necessity  of  answering  materialists,  accepted  his  aid.  He  was 
unorthodox,  but  he  was  modernizing  the  arguments  which  Bishop  Butler 
had  successfully  urged  against  the  Deists. 

The  Positivists  answered,  but  Mallock  kept  the  issue  alive  for  several 
years.  In  A  Romance  of  the  Nineteenth  Century,  employing  a  negative  ap- 
peal to  the  religious  emotions,  he  showed  the  tragic  results  of  loss  of 
faith,  leading  in  the  woman  to  loss  of  chastity  and  in  the  man  to  loss  of 
the  power  of  love  by  which  he  could  save  her.  Helped  by  his  opponents 
to  a  clearer  statement  of  his  position,  Mallock  presented  his  most  im- 
portant warning  to  modern  man  in  Atheism  and  the  Value  of  Life,  1884. 
Positivism,  he  there  states,  can  only  make  virtue  a  quality  to  be  desired 
in  other  people.  Yet  positivistic  theorists  agree  that  each  man  must  re- 
ceive pleasure  from  his  own  altruistic  acts.  Theists  insist  that  this  pleas- 
ure in  altruism  can  result  only  from  conformity  with  the  will  of  God.  It 
therefore  equals  virtue,  or  holiness,  of  which  science  is  robbing  man. 

The  most  elaborate  edition  of  Mallock's  highly  derivative  Poems 
appeared  in  1880.  Together  with  the  novels,  his  verse  suggests  that  his 
bachelorhood,  like  his  religion,  was  founded  on  a  double  standard.  The 
early  religious  poems  contain  the  same  sense  of  spiritual  guilt  that  the 
heroes  of  the  novels  express.  His  parodies,  as  might  be  expected,  are  the 
best  of  all.  Saintsbury  liked  the  line  in  which  Swinburne,  as  the  burlesqued 
author,  is  embracing  Freedom :  "Doing  to  her  divers  and  disgusting 
things."  Mallock's  most  skillful  verse  is  contained  in  two  metrical  trans- 
lations of  Lucretius.  The  second  (and  better  known)  employs  FitzGer- 
ald's  Rubaiyat  stanza.  This  poem,  entitled  Lucretius  on  Life  and  Death, 
provides  an  eminently  readable  version  of  passages  in  De  Rerum  Natura 
bearing  upon  evolution,  religion,  and  mortality.  "In  writing  this  poem," 
Mallock  later  confessed,  "I  experienced  the  full  sensation  of  having  be- 
come a  convert  to  the  Lucretian  gospel  myself,  against  which  throughout 
my  life  it  had  been  my  dominant  impulse  to  protest." 

When  Property  and  Progress  appeared  in  1884,  primarily  as  a  refuta- 
tion of  Henry  George's  Progress  and  Poverty,  Mallock's  reviewers  told 
him  that  he  had  not  distinguished  his  opponents  from  his  friends;  that, 
while  attempting  to  defend  landholders,  he  had  answered  William  Hynd- 
man  and  the  Democratic  Association,  who  opposed  only  capitalists.  Mal- 
lock did  not  fully  understand.  In  The  Old  Order  Changes,  two  years  later, 
his  caricature  of  Joseph  Chamberlain,  the  Conservative,  is  more  stinging 
than  his  caricature  of  Hyndman,  the  Socialist.  (He  makes  them  sons  of 
the  same  father.)  Further  indicating  his  bewilderment,  his  hero  and 
heroine  accept  socialistic  charges  against  industrialists  and  capitalists, 
and  have  "visions  of  great  works  to  be  done  among  the  toiling  masses." 
This  novel  was  intended  to  challenge  comparison  with  Disraeli's  Sybil. 
It  resembles,  in  its  dreamy  fascination  with  revolutionary  rumblings, 


W.  H.  MALLOCK:  A  NEGLECTED  WIT 


253 


James's  The  Princess  Casamassima,  also  published  in  1886.  Mallock  never 
again  supported  movements  against  privileged  groups,  like  the  manu- 
facturers, with  which  he  and  the  landed  aristocrats  had  no  sympathy.  He 
argued  thereafter  that  landlords  held  little  of  the  nation's  wealth.  His 
opponents  replied  that  if  landlords  held  as  small  a  share  of  the  wealth  as 
he  said  they  did,  then  their  share  in  political  and  cultural  privilege  was 
doubly  disproportionate. 

Mallock  did  not  worry  until  he  saw  Bernard  Shaw's  attack,  "Social- 
ism and  Superior  Brains,"  in  the  Fortnightly  Review  of  April  1894.  Shaw 
did  not  actually  bear  down  on  him  until  1909.  Mallock  had  written  a  letter 
to  the  London  Times  advancing  his  favorite  thesis  that  the  rich  are  rich 
because  they  are  able.  Shaw  retorted  that  "the  interest  on  railway  stock 
in  this  country  is  paid  mostly  to  people  who  could  not  invent  a  wheel- 
barrow, much  less  a  locomotive."  To  insist,  he  continued,  that  those  who 
invest  their  ability  in  enterprises  should  keep  all  the  profit  made  possible 
by  that  investment  indicates  a  difference,  not  between  the  Socialist  and 
the  Anti-Socialist,  but  "between  the  gentleman  and  the  cad." 

The  climate  of  religious  opinion  was  changing,  too.  The  Vatican 
decrees  of  1871  had  jolted  the  Oxford  students'  attitude  toward  Jowett, 
Maurice,  and  other  Broad  Churchmen.  The  Catholic  declaration  of  infalli- 
bility seemed  wiser  than  the  Anglican  method  of  selling  the  church  to 
Huxley.  Mallock  had  been  only  one  of  many  to  move  away  from  intellec- 
tualism  toward  faith.  During  his  Oxford  years  Thomas  H.  Green,  the 
most  eminent  Hegelian  in  England,  had  gathered  many  disciples  for  Ger- 
man idealism.  But  Mallock  went  along  his  own  path,  far  from  the  mysti- 
cism of  Joseph  H.  Shorthouse's  novel,  John  Inglesant,  and  clung  to  it 
long  after  the  general  movement  had  died.  Mrs.  Ward's  attack  on  Broad 
Churchmen  in  Robert  Elsmere,  1888,  had  been  ideally  timed,  but  Mallock 
was  now  living  in  an  age  indifferent  to  his  pleas. 

The  people  on  the  wrong  side  were  no  longer  suitable  for  parody. 
In  The  Veil  of  the  Temple,  1904,  his  chief  contribution  was  his  analysis  of 
fallacies  in  various  popular  opinions,  particularly  of  the  "attitudinarians, 
latitudinarians,  and  platitudinarians"  of  the  Anglican  Church.  Frederic 
Harrison,  Trade  Unionist  and  Positivist,  still  irritated  him,  but  the  only 
portrait  in  the  novel  was  that  of  Herbert  Spencer,  with  whom  he  had  been 
bickering  for  twenty-five  years.  Spencer,  as  Cosmo  Brock,  clouds  the 
room  with  ponderosity  as  he  explains  that  the  Unknowable  exists,  but 
that  it  is  dissociated  from  human  life,  except  for  a  vague  quality  of  uplift. 
Brock,  too,  would  seem  dissociated  from  human  life  if  it  were  not  that 
he  steals  repeated  glances  at  his  fair  young  companion.  When  the  two 
have  gone,  the  house  guests  agree  that  religion  adopted  only  "so  long  as 
we  resolutely  refuse  to  associate  it  with  an  assent  to  any  moral  or  theo- 
logical propositions"  is  incapable  of  providing  an  acceptable  code  of 
human  action. 


254 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


IV 

IN  his  standing  account  for  Who's  Who,  Mallock  explained  that  his 
books  were  all  written  to  prove  that  science  alone  is  unable  to  establish 
satisfactory  values  for  human  life,  and  that  socialist  claims  were  inaccurate 
and  untrue.  His  general  thesis  against  the  Socialists  is  that  wealth  can- 
not be  accumulated  without  the  services  of  those  who  possess  extra- 
ordinary ability,  and  that  when  these  few  are  deprived  of  their  wealth, 
they  will  not  employ  their  ability  at  all.  This  contention,  perennially  alive, 
is  frequently  discussed  over  the  radio  today. 

Mallock  could  reason,  and  expound,  clearly  from  one  point  to  an- 
other. As  his  conclusions  were  predetermined,  his  primary  contribution 
was  the  exposure  of  logical  fallacies  in  the  arguments  of  opponents.  Al- 
though he  thought  of  literature  as  a  form  of  action,  he  resembled  Matthew 
Arnold  in  providing  solutions  to  social  problems  which  did  not  commit 
him  to  positive  action.  His  endorsement  of  the  Catholic  Church  was  a 
warning  to  the  liberalizing  Anglican  Church  that  they  were  not  providing 
the  services  of  religion. 

Despite  his  forty  years  as  self-appointed  champion  of  orthodoxy, 
Mallock  was  riddled  with  skepticism.  He  admitted  evolution  by  natural 
selection  and,  in  general,  the  mechanistic-materialistic  premises  of  King- 
don  Clifford.  He  complained  early  that  "there  is  no  boy  now,  but  can 
throw  stones  at  the  windows  which  Bishop  Colenso  has  broken,"  but  he 
had  no  sympathy  with  the  churchmen  who  tried  to  deny  that  the  windows 
were  out.  Social  evolution  he  rejected.  He  agreed  with  Tennyson  in  his 
attitude  toward  the  "red  fool-fury  of  the  Seine"  and  toward  "Nature  red 
in  tooth  and  claw";  but  he  could  not  believe  with  Meredith  that  "Change 
is  on  the  wing  to  bud."  His  opinion  of  man  was  low.  Accepting  the  hy- 
potheses of  contemporary  science  himself,  he  did  not  believe  that  civiliza- 
tion could  afford  to  accept  them.  In  his  contentions  with  Huxley,  Clifford, 
and  Tyndall  he  did  not  deny  their  truth;  he  denied  the  sacredness  of  truth. 

Mallock's  published  views  drifted  more  and  more  toward  the  premi- 
ises  of  science  as  a  solution  to  what  was  called  his  balance  between 
Catholicism  and  Atheism.  This  represented  not  so  much  an  evolution  of 
thought  as  a  gradual  turning  over  of  all  the  cards  which  he  had  been 
holding  from  the  beginning.  His  one  unbending  insistence  was  that  super- 
natural religion  is  implicit  in  all  civilized  life.  No  faith,  no  civilization.  His 
lack  of  confidence  in  Western  morality  led  him  to  anticipate,  and  even  to 
influence,  the  collapse  of  belief  in  material  progress.  What  he  did  believe 
in  was  Fashion  and  that  kind  of  Society  which  gathered  and  conversed  on 
large  estates.  In  A  Romance  of  the  Nineteenth  Century,  Lord  Surbiton,  one 
of  Mallock's  best  characters,  explains  what  he  means  by  the  word: 

...  it  is  only  in  the  world,  or  in  what  we  call  society,  that  intercourse  with 


W.  H.  MALLOCK:  A  NEGLECTED  WIT 


255 


our  fellows  is  really  a  completed  fine  art.  It  there  is  what  elsewhere  it  only 
tends  to  be.  Men  who  profess  to  think  gravely,  or  to  have  grave  ends, 
speak  of  society  as  the  type  of  what  is  vain  and  frivolous.  Perhaps  they  are 
right  —  who  knows?  Yet  society  is  the  logical  end  of  the  whole  of  this 
world's  civilization;  and  of  all  the  follies  that  I  ever  set  any  store  by,  fashion 
is  the  one  I  could  still  find  most  to  say  for.  Fashion  ...  is  the  daintiest 
form  of  fame,  and  sometimes  of  power  also ;  and  were  it  only  as  wide  and 
lasting  as  it  is  delicate,  it  would  unite  in  itself  the  objects  of  all  human 
ambitions. 

Troubles  with  Russia,  in  the  Sudan,  and  again  with  the  Boers  — 
none  of  these  concerned  Mallock  except  when  Socialists  mentioned  them 
in  relation  to  the  nation's  economy.  In  1918  he  published  a  book  with  the 
significant  title,  Capital,  War,  and  Wages.  After  a  trip  to  Cyprus  in  search 
of  a  valuable  green  marble,  he  remembered  with  most  delight  the  peasant- 
ry which  lived  in  squalor  without  having  been  forced  to  it  by  rich  plunder- 
ers. His  first  impressions  of  America  were  that  the  oysters  were  excellent, 
customs  officials  were  incorruptible,  Long  Island  shrubbery  was  un- 
trimmed,  and  few  diamonds  sparkled  in  the  boxes  at  the  Metropolitan  Opera ; 
his  final  comment  was  that  society  in  the  Eastern  States  had  been  able 
to  treat  him  in  the  manner  to  which  he  was  accustomed. 

V 

IN  the  novels  of  his  middle  period,  love  between  man  and  woman  was 
closely  allied  with  religion ;  successful  love  was  possible  only  for  those 
couples  who  united  themselves  with  the  "guiding  cosmic  Force."  His 
heroines,  more  varied  than  his  heroes,  are  usually  seductive,  witty,  in- 
tuitive, and  artistic.  They  do  not  illustrate  the  unfortunate  tendencies  of 
modern  life  any  more  often  than  the  men.  To  woman's  moral  and  intellec- 
tual force  Mallock  was  respectful.  When  he  burlesqued  feminism  in  The 
Individualist,  he  explained  that  he  was  merely  once  more  exposing  mis- 
placed religious  zeal.  His  conservatism  was  so  ingrained  that  he  was 
pained  by  any  change  in  the  social  structure. 

Mallock's  heroes  are  combinations  of  what  Mallock  was  and  what 
he  wished  to  be.  They  are  of  good  family  and  of  entrenched  position  in 
society.  They  are  sophisticated,  skeptical,  and  gifted.  They  are  about  to 
enter  the  Catholic  Church.  In  the  early  novels,  they  are  about  to  enter 
Parliament  or  the  diplomatic  service;  in  the  later  ones,  they  either  have 
recently  become  members  of  Parliament,  or  have  decided  that  they  can 
best  assume  leadership  by  writing  statistical  volumes.  Mallock  envied 
Disraeli.  Happy  the  man,  his  heroes  say,  who  can  serve  both  literature 
and  politics.  These  young  men  pour  out  the  anguish  of  their  sinfulness  in 
the  manner,  and  often  in  the  words,  of  St.  Augustine.  The  elements  of 
wit  and  disillusion  in  the  early  novels  gradually  diminished,  owing  in 


256 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


part  to  Mallock's  belief  that  he  entered  a  worthy  sphere  of  action  in  1882 
when  he  began  his  attacks  on  Socialists,  and  in  part  to  the  distaste  he  ac- 
quired for  his  own  type  when  it  was  taken  up  by  Wilde  and  other 
aesthetes.  Mallock  always  considered  himself,  at  least  in  temperament, 
an  "instinctive  poet."  Quite  likely  he  made  a  deliberate  choice  of  litera- 
ture, which  he  described  as  action  and  "speech  made  permanent,"  rather 
than  of  politics. 

Few  prose  parodists  have  rivaled  Mallock.  In  religion,  he  was  a 
rationalist  at  war  with  reason.  A  writer  rather  than  a  thinker,  he  was 
more  attracted  to  logic  than  to  ideas.  This  prevented  his  contribution 
from  being  any  more  constructive  than  the  razing  of  hazardous  towers. 
He  could  not  defend  spirituality  with  the  lucid  integrity  of  a  Whitehead, 
but  the  intelligence  of  his  diagnosis  is  now  obvious.  The  values  broadly 
recognized  in  civilization  today  are  precious  few.  The  New  Republic  can 
always  say  something  provocative  to  readers  of  Arnold,  Pater,  and  Huxley. 


The  British  in  Boston 


General  Gage's  Orderly  Book,  December  1774-June  1775 

(Continued  from  the  June  issue.) 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  23d  May  1775. 

The  Surgeons  of  the  Different  Corps,  to  give  in  Returns  immediately 
to  the  Purveyor  of  the  Hospital,  of  the  Number  of  Men,  by  Name  in  their 
Respective  Hospitals. 

Mr  Burton  Merchant  in  Boston,  having  suffered  greatly  by  the  late 
fire,  offers  a  Reward  of  one  Dollar,  to  any  Soldier,  Wife  or  others,  who  will 
inform  where  any  of  his  goods,  sav'd  from  the  Flames  may  be  found,  and 
promises  to  give  such  further  Reward  on  the  Discovery  of  any  part  of  his 
Effects,  As  the  Officer  Commanding  the  Reg1  (to  which  the  Informant  if 
a  follower  of  the  Army  belongs)  shall  think  just  &  Reasonable. 

The  following  Recruiting  Partys  &  Recruits  arrived  in  the  Royal  Char- 
lotte to  join  their  Corps  immediately.  Their  Respective  Commanding  Officers 
will  send  for  them.  Viz  — 

Serj4    C     Dr     P      Rts  Dism 
4th  Reg1            . .       1       1       1  11 
43d                   ..       1      ..       1  5 
52d    1 

59th                  3      3      2      2  24 
60th    1 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Wednesday,  24th  May  1775. 
The  working  Party  as  usual. 

A  Guard  of  1  Serj'  1  Corp1  &  12  Private  to  Mount  this  Afternoon  at 
Brindleys  Distillery. 

The  Recruits  of  the  14th  Reg1  formed  into  two  Companys,  with  their 
proper  officers,  will  go  down  to  Castle  William,  where  they  will  fit  their 
Cloathing  &  make  themselves  ready  for  Service,  as  soon  as  Possible. 

As  fast  as  Recruits  Arrive  they  are  to  be  taken  on  shore  by  the  Regts 
they  belong  to,  to  be  Cloathed  &  Arm'd,  &  made  fit  for  Service,  without 
any  delay. 

After  Orders,  6  O'Clock. 

A  working  part  of  1  Serj1  1  Corp1  &  20  Private  to  Parade  tomorrow 
morning  at  7  O'Clock  and  to  march  to  the  Long  Wharf,  where  they  will  Re- 
ceive orders  from  Captain  Delancy  of  the  17th  Regt1  of  Light  Dragoons. 

A  Detachment  of  1  Capt,  2  Subs,  3  Serjts  3  Corpls  2  Drum"  &  50  Private 
to  Parade  immediately,  this  Detachment  will  take  one  Days  Provision  with 
them,  &  March  from  their  Respective  Encampments  or  Barracks  to  the  Long 
Wharf  where  they  will  Assemble.  The  Officer  Commanding  will  obey  such 
orders  as  he  shall  receive  from  Major  Sherriff  Dep*  Qr  Mr  Gen1. 


20 


257 


258 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


A  Detachment  of  I  Capt,  2  Subs,  3  Serjts  3  Corp1"  2  Drum"  &  50  Private 
with  two  Days  Provisions  to  Parade  tomorrow  at  4  O'Clock  on  the  Long 
Wharf.  The  Officer  Commanding  the  Detachment  will  also  receive  his  orders 
from  the  Dep-V  Or  Mr  General. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Thursday,  25th  May  1775. 

The  working  party  at  the  Manufacturing  House  as  usual. 

The  Field  Officers,  Captains  &  Subalterns  who  want  Tents,  to  give  in 
their  Names  to  the  DJ-  Or  Mr  Gen1  The  Officers  who  have  Recd  Horsemens 
Tents  to  Deliver  them  in. 

After  Orders,  6  O'Clock. 

The  Royal  Reg1  of  Artillery  to  encamp  to  Morrow  morning  at  8  O'Clock. 

The  Guard  on  Beacon  Hill  to  be  Augmented  to  36  Private,  that  at 
Hotches  Wharf  to  20  Private  &  the  Guard  at  the  Wood  Yard  to  12  Private 
till  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Friday,  26th  May  1775. 
The  working  party  as  usual. 

A  Guard  of  1  Serj*  1  Corp1  &  18  Private  to  mount  this  afternoon  at  the 

Artillery  Park. 

The  Or  Guard  of  the  23d  or  Royal  Welsh  Fuzileers  to  furnish  three 
Centinells  at  the  South  Battery  as  soon  as  the  Royal  Artillery  call  for  them. 

After  Orders,  27th  May  1775,  6  O'Clock. 

The  Centinells  over  the  fire  Engines  to  let  the  Inhabitants  take  them 
away  without  further  orders  in  case  of  fire,  if  any  Troops  should  be  ordered 
out,  to  Assist  in  the  Extinguishing  Fires,  No  Officer  to  Interfer  in  the 
Direction  of  the  Engins,  which  is  to  be  left  entirely  to  the  Management  of 
the  fire  wards,  and  Officers  will  take  their  advice  in  the  direction  of  the 
Soldiers  for  supplying  of  Water. 

In  time  of  Fire  the  Guards  &  Centinells  not  to  empade  the  Inhabitants 
giving  the  Alarm  of  Fire  in  the  Streets  &  going  to  the  Place  of  fire  to  ex- 
tinguish it. 

The  Troops  are  Acquainted  that  the  Recruits  of  the  14th  Reg1  will  at 
Intervals  Practice  firing  of  Small  Arms  at  Castle  Wm. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Sunday,  28th  May  1775. 

The  working  Party  as  usual,  at  the  Manufacturing  House. 
When  Picquetts  or  other  Detachments  are  ordered  out  either  by  Day 
or  Night,  it  is  to  be  done  with  order  &  Regularity  &  without  Noise. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday,  the  29th  May  1775. 

The  working  Party  at  the  General  Hospital  (formerly  call'd  the  Manu- 
facturing House)  as  usual. 

A  working  Party  of  1  Serj1  1  Corp1  and  20  Private  to  Parade  to  Morrow 
Morning  at  8  O'Clock,  at  the  D*  Qr  Mr  Genls  Office,  where  the  Serj1  will  Re- 
ceive his  orders. 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


259 


The  Troops  to  be  Acquainted  that  the  Battalions  of  Marines  will  fire 
Ball  to  Morrow  morning  at  6  O'Clock,  at  the  Barracks  lately  occupyed  by 
the  R  .W.  Fuzileers. 

Any  Women  who  may  be  wanted  as  Nurses  at  the  Hospital,  or  to  do 
any  other  business  for  the  Service  of  the  Garrison,  and  shall  refuse  to  do 
it  will  immediately  be  Struck  off  the  provision  list. 

When  Regts  are  Encamp'd  no  Officers  to  lay  out  of  Camp  on  any 
Account  whatever. 

The  5th  38th  &  52d  Reg,s  &  the  incorporated  Corps,  to  encamp  to  morrow 
morning  as  early  as  they  can.  The      Qr  Mr  Gen1  will  shew  them  their  ground. 

The  Qr  Masters  of  the  different  Regts  who  have  Recd  Tents  for  their 
Officers  to  give  Receipts  for  them  to  the  Dy  Qr  Mr  Gen1. 

Four  Serjts  4  Corpls  &  80  Private  from  the  Different  Corps  to  join  & 
do  Duty  with  the  Royal  Artillery  till  further  orders. 

It  is  expected  the  Commanding  Offrs  of  Corps  will  send  well  behaved 
Men  &  the  most  expert  in  the  use  of  the  Great  Guns. 

The  Light  Infantry  Companys  of  all  the  Corps  to  Parade  immediately 
under  the  shade  of  the  Trees  in  the  Common,  where  they  will  remain  till 
they  receive  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  30th  May  1775. 
A  Discreet  Active  Woman  from  each  Corps  to  be  ordered  to  attend  the 
sick  of  their  Respective  Corps  in  in  [sic]  the  Gen1  Hospital,  where  they  are  to 
be  sent  to  morrow  morning  at  6  O'Clock  to  prepare  the  Rooms  for  the  Recep- 
tion of  the  Sick. 

The  following  Regts  will  Receive  two  days  fresh  Beef  tomorrow,  be- 
tween the  hours  of  6  &  12  in  the  Morning,  at  Mr  Bryans  Slaughter  House 
near  the  Common  Viz1  5th,  10th,  18th,  38th,  47th,  59th  &  65th. 

On  Thursday  between  the  same  hours,  &  at  the  same  place  the  follow- 
ing Corps  will  also  Receive  two  days  fresh  Beef  Viz  R.  Artillery,  4th,  23d 
52d  64th  &  two  Battns  of  Marines. 

Those  Corps  that  have  not  since  Yesterday  been  Victualled  with  a 
weeks  Salt  Provisions,  will  receive  only  five  Days  allowance  fom  the  Con- 
tractors &  those  who  have  already  been  Victualled  for  7  Days  with  salt 
Species,  will  next  week  receive  2  days  less  from  the  Contractors,  in  lieu  of 
the  2  days  fresh  which  they  are  to  Receive. 

After  Orders,  6  O'Clock. 
As  the  Gen1  finds  proper  care  is  not  taken  of  the  Ammunition,  He  di- 
rects the  Commanding  Officers  of  Corps  to  order  the  Mens  Cartridges  to 
be  examined  every  Day,  and  for  every  Cartridge  missing  not  Accounted  for, 
such  Soldier  to  be  charged  a  penny. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston  Wednesday  31st  May  1775. 
The  Guard  on  Beacon  Hill  to  be  Reduced  to 

S    S    C    D  P 
1    1    3    1  18 

The  Guard  on  Hatches  Wharf         1    1    1    1  20 

The  Guard  on  the  Hospital  Hill       .  .   1    1    .  .   15  till  further  orders 


260 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


The  47th  Reg1  to  send  a  Centinell  from  their  Rear  Guard,  to  the  Granary 
Opposite  the  Gen1  Hospital. 

All  the  Troops  now  in  Camp,  or  under  orders  to  encamp,  are  to  Deliver 
to  the  Barrack  Master,  all  the  Barrack  Beding,  Utensils,  &  Furniture,  Pay 
for  the  Difficiencys  &  take  up  their  Indents. 

Two  Regts  Barracks  will  be  Assign'd  for  the  Accomodation  of  the 
Women  &  Children  of  the  Army  &  a  place  will  be  Assigned  as  an  Hospital 
for  Convalescents  all  the  other  Barracks  are  to  be  clear'd  Immediately  and 
quitted  by  the  Troops. 

After  Orders,  6  O'Clock. 

When  the  Regts  want  to  Practice  their  Recruits  in  firing  at  Marks,  or 
in  the  Platoon  Exercise,  they  will  do  it  between  the  hours  of  7  &  9  in  the 
Morning. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Thursday,  Ist  June  1775. 
The  working  Party  as  usual. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Friday,  2d  June  1775. 
The  working  party  as  usual. 

The  Sick  &c  in  the  Regimental  Hospital  to  be  sent  to  the  Gen1  Hospital, 
tomorrow  if  the  weather  is  good. 

All  the  Cradles  good  &  bad  made  for  the  Different  Regts  last  Winter 
to  be  Delivered  to  the  Purveyor  of  the  Hospital,  such  as  can  be  Spared  to  be 
sent  there  this  Day  &  the  remainder  with  the  Men  tomorrow. 

It  is  again  recommended  to  send  a  good  Nurse  from  each  Reg1  with 
the  Men,  such  as  are  incumbred  with  Children,  are  by  no  Means  proper  for 
that  Duty. 

The  Depy  Qr  Mr  Gen1  will  look  out  for  proper  Ground  for  the  Grenadiers 
&  Light  Infantry  to  Encamp  on,  as  vacancies  will  be  made  by  this  Means  in 
the  Encampments  of  Corps,  the  Regts  are  to  close  in  order  to  make  Room. 

Any  Persons  brought  into  the  Lines,  who  give  intiligence,  or  are  Sus- 
pected people,  the  Commanding  Officer  is  not  to  Suffer  them  to  be  examined 
there,  but  to  send  them  to  Head  Quarters  with  a  Line  explaining  his  reasons 
for  so  doing. 

After  Orders,  6  O'Clock. 

The,  Qr  Mrs  of  the  Different  Corps,  to  be  at  the  Barrack  Office,  tomorrow 
morning  at  11  O'Clock,  in  order  to  make  a  Division  of  2  Barracks  allotted  for 
the  Women  of  the  Army. 

Morning  Orders,  1/2  after  9,  3d  June  1775 

The  Grenadier  &  Light  Infantry  Comys  to  Encamp  immediately,  The 
Ass1  Dy  Mr  Gen1  will  be  on  the  Common  to  shew  them  their  Ground. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Saturday,  3d  June  1775. 
The  Troops  will  Draw  up  two  Deep  on  their  Regimental  Parades,  as  well 


THE  BRITISH  IN  BOSTON 


261 


as  on  the  Gen1  Parade,  the  Light  Infantry  when  by  themselves  to  be  Accus- 
tomed to  draw  up  in  open  order. 

The  Grenadier  &  Light  Infantry  Companies  not  to  Encamp  till  Monday. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Sunday,  4th  June  1775. 

The  Working  Party  for  the  Qr  Mr  Gen1  to  Consist  of  1  Sub,  1  Serj* 
1  Corp1  1  Drumr  &  30  Private,  to  Parade  at  5  O'Clock  tomorrow  Morning  at 
the  Usual  Place. 

The  working  Party  at  the  General  Hospital  as  usual. 

After  Orders. 

The  Barracks  of  the  23d  Reg1  is  allotted  for  the  Women  &  Children  of  the 
23d  4th  5th  43d  &  59th  Regts  The  38th  Regts  Barracks  for  the  38th  10th  47th  52* 
18th  &  65th  &  the  two  Battns  Marines  The  Qr  Mrs  will  make  a  proper  Division 
of  the  Women  According  to  their  Numbers,  &  move  them  into  the  Barracks 
assigned  them  tomorrow. 

As  Hospitals  are  provided  for  the  Sick,  it  is  expected  the  Barracks  are 
immediately  clear'd,  the  Glass  broke,  mended,  or  paid  for,  &  the  Barracks  de- 
livered over  to  the  Barrack  Master,  as  Soon  as  Possible. 

To  Morrow  will  be  kept  as  the  Annivarsary  of  His  Majestys  Birth  Day, 
The  Artillery  to  fire  a  Royal  Salute  of  One  &  Twenty  Guns  from  the  Lines  & 
Artillery  Park  at  twelve  O'Clock,  followed  by  three  Volleys  from  the  Picquets 
of  the  Army. 

The  Field  Officer  of  the  Day  will  March  the  Picquets  to  King  Street, 
Draw  them  up  in  an  Oblong  Square,  below  the  Town  House,  &  will  order  them 
to  fire,  as  soon  as  the  Royal  Artillery  has  done  firing. 

The  Gen1  &  Field  Officers  are  expected  to  meet  the  Commander  in  Chief, 
to  Morrow  at  Noon,  to  Drink  the  King's  Health. 

As  Milk  is  not  to  be  had,  the  Regts  that  had  Cows  Distributed  to  them, 
are  required  to  send  what  Milk  th'ey  can  Spare  to  the  General  Hospital.  Four 
orderly  Men  to  be  sent  to  the  Gen1  Hospital  till  further  orders. 

No  Soldier  to  be  sent  to  the  Gen1  Hospital  for  triffling  Complaints,  Com- 
plaints [sic]  but  to  be  taken  care  of  as  usual  by  their  own  Surgeons. 

The  Grenadiers  &  Light  Infantry  to  Encamp  tomorrow  morning. 

Lieu1  Col1  Abercrombie  is  Appointed  to  the  Command  of  the  Grenadiers. 
Ll  Cristie  of  the  38th  Reg1  will  Act  as  Adj1  to  said  Corps. 

A  Field  Officer  to  be  Appointed  hereafter,  to  the  Command  of  the  Light 
Infantry,  in  the  meantime  the  Eldest  Capt,  to  take  the  Command.  Capt  Batt, 
late  of  the  18th  Reg1  is  appointed'  Adj1  to  the  Light  Infantry. 

Evening  Orders,  8  O'Clock. 

The  Grenadiers  &  Light  Infantry  to  Encamp  tomorrow  Morning  at 
9  O'Clock,  The  Adjuts  of  these  Corps  to  give  in  Returns  of  their  Strength  to 
the  D>"  Adj1  Gen1  at  Eleven. 

Morning  Orders,  5th  June,  1/2  After  Ten. 
Such  of  the  Sick  &c  that  cannot  be  properly  be  taken  care  of  in  Camp, 


262 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


&  are  not  Objects  of  a  Gen1  Hospital,  to  be  put  into  the  Late  Barracks  of  the 
4th  Reg*  &  be  attended  by  the  Regimental  Surgeons  till  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Monday  5th  June  1775. 

The  Regts  for  the  future  will  mount  only  a  Picquet  of  1  Sub,  1  Serj*  1  Corp1 
1  Drum1"  and  24  Private,  except  the  Corps  of  Grenadiers  &  Light  Infantry,  who 
will  mount  the  usual  Picquet  of  1  Capt,  2  Subs,  2  Serjts  2  Corpls  1  Drumr  & 
40  Private. 

Lt.  Sutherland  of  the  38th  Reg1  is  Appointed  to  do  the  Duty  of  Qr  Master 
to  the  Corps  of  Grenadiers,  &  Mr  England  Volunteer,  to  the  Light  Infantry. 
The  Reinforcement  of  1  Sub  Serj*  Corp1  Drum'  &  20  Private,  sent  from  the 
10th  Reg1  to  be  Discontinued  by  that  Corps,  &  20  Men  to  be  Added  to  the  Re- 
inforcement on  the  General  Parade,  which  the  Officer  Commanding  will  leave 
at  the  Neck,  as  has  been  Practised. 

The  Guard  at  the  Hay  Magazine  to  be  increas'd  to  1  Serj1  1  Corp1  &  12 
Private,  till  further  orders. 

Head  Quarters,  Boston,  Tuesday,  6th  June  1775. 

The  working  party  as  ordered  Yesterday.  His  Majesty  has  been  pleas'd  to 
appoint  Majors  Gen1  Howe,  Clinton  &  Burgoyne,  Majors  Gen1  on  the  Staff  of 
North  America.  Colonel  Carl  Percy,  Col1  James  Robertson  Colonel  Pigot,  Col1 
Jones,  &  Col1  Prescott  are  Appointed  Brigrs  Gen1  in  North  America. 

Capt  Sherwin  of  the  67th  Reg'  as  Aid  de  Camp  to  Major  Gen1  Howe.  Capt. 
Drummond  of  the  Royal  Reg*  of  Artillery  Aid  de  Camp  to  Major  Gen1  Clinton, 
&  Capt  Gardiner  of  the  16th  Dragoons,  Aid  de  Camp  to  Major  General  Bur- 
goyne, &  are  to  be  obeyed  as  such. 

Ll  Col1  Clerk  of  the  43d  Reg4  is  appointd  to  the  Command  of  the  Corps  of 
Light  Infantry. 

Major  Butler  of  the  65'  is  appd  Major  to  said  Corps  Major  Smelt  of  the 
47th  is  appointed  to  the  Corps  of  Grenadiers. 

The  Regts  who  Chuse  to  Cut  their  old  Hatts  after  the  manner  the  4th  have 
done,  may  do  it,  but  are  not  to  cut  any  of  their  New  Hatts. 

Notwithstanding  the  care  that  has  been  taken  to  Provide  the  Women 
with  proper  places  to  stay  in,  some  of  them  have  broke  into  houses  &  Buildings 
that  were  infected  with  the  Small  Pox,  by  which  there  is  Danger  of  its  Spread- 
ing thro'  the  Town,  Particularly  a  place  that  was  shut  up  at  the  North  end  on 
Account  of  that  Disorder,  during  the  Winter.  The  Gen1  therefore  desires  the 
Offrs  Commanding  Corps  to  have  the  Strictest  enquiery  immediately  made, 
to  discover  the  Women  Concern'd,  whom  he  is  detirmined  to  order  on  Board 
Ship  &  Send  away. 


Exhibitions  in  the  Print  Department 


Etchings  by  Frederick  L.  Griggs 

TO  appreciate  the  full  significance  of  Griggs's  etchings,  it  is  necessary  to 
know  something  about  the  motives  which  stimulated  his  work.  His 
prints  are  the  results  of  extensive  travel  and  research  on  the  village  churches, 
cathedrals,  and  ruined  abbeys  in  England  and  Wales.  Mr.  Harold  J.  L.  Wright 
said  of  him  in  The  Etched  Work  of  F.  L.  Griggs,  in  reference  to  liis  love  and 
knowledge  of  these  subjects: 

His  memory  was  saturated  to  crystallisation  point  with  the  beauties  of 
the  Gothic,  the  Perpendicular,  and  the  Early  English  styles,  whilst  for  the 
Saxon  and  Norman  also,  he  had  ever  an  affectionate  and  appreciative  regard. 
By  the  beauty  and  significance  of  all  Gothic  art  he  was  specially  stirred, 
recognising  it  as  the  truest  expression  of  all  that  mediaeval  England  stood 
for  —  that  England  which,  in  his  opinion,  showed  in  many  important  ways 
the  nearest  approach  to  perfection  which  civilization  has  yet  seen.  Constant 
evidence  of  this  appears  in  his  etched  work.  His  etchings  are  his  monuments 
to  that  more  gracious  past,  his  laments  for  its  passing,  his  expressions  of  his 
sympathy  with  the  spirit  that  inspired  its  builders ;  and  there  seems  every 
probability  it  is  by  them  he  will  be  longest  remembered' and  his  artistic 
achievement  judged.  They  show  the  fine  clear  edge  of  his  own  character, 
as  one  of  his  friends  has  well  said. 

Although  Griggs's  subject  matter  was  almost  entirely  architectural  it 
was  never  marred  by  any  degree  of  sameness,  but  rather  created  with  each 
new  undertaking  a  display  of  his  seemingly  limitless  capacities  for  inventive- 
ness. The  titles  of  these  prints  would  suggest  that  they  were  intended  to  appeal 
primarily  to  historians,  but  the  connoisseur  and  collector  have  long  since 
known  that  he  definitely  committed  himself  to  the  highest  ideals  in  art.  Griggs's 
work  was  well  conceived  beforehand  and,  one  might  say,  built  upon  a  ground 
plan.  However,  his  reconstructions  could  never  be  classified  as  a  series  of  views 
from  any  single  area  or  locality,  or  any  particular  building  or  remains. 

Griggs  was  both  an  enthusiast  and  a  thorough  craftsman,  which  is  a  rare 
combination,  for  the  one  is  usually  associated  with  spontaneous  creative  ability, 
while  the  other  denotes  the  careful  technician.  His  work  is  held  in  high  esteem 
by  his  fellow  etchers,  for  they  find  in  his  efforts  fine  composition  and  a  beauti- 
ful sense  of  proportion.  They  admire  his  handling  of  surfaces  and  planes,  which 
with  their  large  simple  masses  and  beautifully  designed  areas  give  full  effect 
to  light  and  volume.  With  a  life  so  full  of  rich  experiences  and  so  much  ma- 
terial ready  for  visual  development  the  success  of  his  plates  can  be  well  under- 
stood. It  is  obvious  that  he  had  no  patience  with  mere  cleverness  either  in  life 
or  art.  He  endeavored  to  apprehend  the  constructive  force  of  both  man  and 
nature,  and  employ  in  his  art  those  principles  which  he  thought  to  be  true : 
in  fact,  there  is  something  of  the  dramatic  in  the  great  force  and  weight  of 
his  prints,  in  the  lighting  arrangements  and  handling  of  color  value.  Then 
there  is  the  repose  which  is  always  an  indication  of  excellence,  also  an  in- 


263 


264 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


dependence  so  complete  that  each  subject  conveys  its  own  message  without 
relying  upon  any  past  reference  or  description. 

A  number  of  the  prints  chosen  for  this  exhibition  are  recent  acquisitions. 
Among  them  is  "The  Minster,"  of  which  Mr.  Wright  writes: 

Many  of  us  will  always  think  of  it  as  "Griggs's  Cathedral,"  and  whenever  we 
see  it  we  shall  regret  afresh  that  his  talents  and  imagination  were  never 
given  their  chance  to  design  and  build  a  stately  edifice  like  this  somewhere  in 
England ;  for  one  cannot  think  of  any  designer  who  would  have  fulfilled  such 
a  commission  more  attractively,  since,  to  Griggs,  it  would  have  been  a  com- 
mission after  his  own  heart.  Into  "The  Minster"  he  has  introduced  many  of 
his  favorite  architectural  styles;  yet  what  a  harmonious  impressive  whole  the 
design  forms,  how  firmly,  spaciously,  and  nobly  the  buildings  stand. 

"Potters'  Bow,"  one  of  Griggs's  important  plates,  is  an  architectural  cre- 
ation of  the  artist's  imagination,  which  gets  its  name  from  "bow,"  the  old 
mason's  name  for  arch  or  bridge.  Griggs  has  been  quoted  as  saying  that  he 
imagined  a  potters'  guild  could  have  provided  funds  for  the  building.  Another 
important  plate  is  "The  Almonry,"  which  contains  some  of  his  finest  work 
technically,  and  is  appreciated  by  connoisseurs  and  print  collectors  alike. 

This  exhibition  also  includes  states  of  such  well-known  plates  as :  "The 
Ford'-  (artist's  working  proof),  "The  Cresset,"  "St.  Mary's,  Nottingham," 
"The  Maypole,"  "Cross  Hands,"  and  "Chartres."  The  favorable  reception  of 
these  plates  during  his  lifetime,  although  he  was  a  modest  man,  must  have 
made  him  realize  that  success  was  his.  He  must  have  felt  the  impetus  of  grow- 
ing accomplishment,  and  known  himself  to  be  the  equal  of  any  contemporary 
architectural  etcher.  His  great  wealth  of  ideas,  many  of  which  were  yet  un- 
tried, kept  his  eyes  and  hands  straining  toward  other  subjects  that  unfortunately 
were  never  recorded. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  understand  that  many  of  his  plates  took  years  of 
work  before  they  were  considered  ready  for  publication.  As  long  as  the  plate 
progressed  the  subject  was  carried  further:  if  it  was  not  improved,  it  was 
either  abandoned  or  brought  back  to  its  most  successful  state.  In  a  number  of 
instances  plates  were  cut  down  and  given  different  titles.  This  is  true  of  "The 
Pool"  and  "The  Cresset."  "The  Pool,"  etched  in  1915  and  published  under 
that  name,  was  later  taken  up  again  in  1922,  cut  down  at  the  ends,  and  re- 
worked in  the  central  portion  of  the  composition.  An  improvement  was  ef- 
fected by  this  afterthought,  and  was  given  to  the  art  world  under  the  title  of 
"Linn  Bridge."  "The  Cresset,"  1915,  which  depicts  a  bridge  and  fortified 
gateway  at  an  entrance  to  a  walled  town  with  a  cresset  on  one  of  the  angle- 
turrets  of  the  gateway,  was  also  cut  down  and  reworked.  This  plate,  after  the 
changes,  was  published  as  "The  Barbican."  It  would  be  interesting  to  note 
the  development  of  the  various  states  of  other  plates  in  the  Albert  H.  Wig- 
gin  Collection,  but  students  and  visitors  have  the  privilege  of  studying  these 
rare  impressions  side  by  side  on  the  walls  of  the  gallery. 

A  review  and  note  on  Griggs's  life  was  published  in  More  Books  on  the 
occasion  of  his  exhibition  in  October  1942. 

ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 


Ten  Books 


The  Shaping  of  the  American  Tra- 
dition. By  Louis  M.  Hacker.  Columbia 
Univ.  Press.  1947.  2  vol.  1247  pp. 
Among  the  many  elements  which  have 
contributed  to  American  civilization  Pro- 
fessor Hacker  distinguishes  four  domi- 
nant traditions:  freedom  of  worship 
and  freedom  from  church  authority;  free- 
dom of  enterprise;  the  principle  of 
the  weak  state  (as  opposed  to  the 
strong  government  control  from  which 
many  colonists  were  refugees)  ;  and 
the  ideal  of  equality  of  social  and 
economic  opportunity.  To  show  how 
our  ideas  and  institutions  have  de- 
veloped, he  has  gathered  a  wealth  of 
contemporary  documents,  to  which  his 
own  text  serves  as  a  series  of  intro- 
ductions. Each  of  the  eleven  sections 
is  sub-divided  into  four  headings,  "The 
American  Mind,"  "The  American 
Scene,"  "American  Problems,"  and  The 
United  States  and  the  World."  The 
work  could  easily  have  been  just  an- 
other anthology ;  but  the  author's  deep 
knowledge  and  freshness  of  approach 
have  made  it  a  stimulating  selection, 
which  throws  light  on  well-known  his- 
tory by  quoting  the  unfamiliar  as  well. 
Thus  the  pages  on  the  settlement  of 
America  include  not  only  John  Smith's 
Description  of  Virginia  but  a  matter-of- 
fact  letter  home  from  an  Irish  Quaker 
who  came  over  in  1725  and  found  the 
new  land  "the  best  country  for  working 
folk  and  tradesmen  of  any  in  the  world." 
Franklin's  Autobiography  is  matched  by 
Turgot's  and  Price's  views  on  the  Revo- 
lution. The  Civil  War  period  is  repre- 
sented by  reports  from  travelers  in  the 
South  as  well  as  by  Horace  Greeley's 
famous  letter  to  the  President  and 
Lincoln's  reply.  The  last  section,  "The 
Third  American  Revolution,"  contains 
material  as  various  as  extracts  from 
Gardner  C.  Means's  Industrial  Prices, 
Roosevelt's  campaign  address  at  the 
Commonwealth  Club,  Lilienthal's  TV  A, 
the  Four  Freedoms  message,  and  Will- 
kie's  One  World.  Throughout,  Pro- 
fessor Hacker  inserts  criticisms  by  dis- 
tinguished foreigners  from  Adam  Smith 
to  Andre  Siegfried,  and  he  has  chosen 
many  documents  especially  to  point  up 
"the  staples  of  American  foreign  policy" 


—  for  instance,  the  Monroe  Doctrine 
and  the  Panama  Canal.  (H.  McC.) 

Inside  USA.  By  John  Gunther.  Harper. 
T947-  979  PP-  " 

Having  discussed  Asia,  Europe,  and 
South  America,  Mr.  Gunther  now  aims 
"to  show  this  most  fabulous  and  least 
known  of  countries,  the  United  States 
of  America,  to  itself."  It  is  a  tremen- 
dous undertaking,  but  he  has  succeeded 
as  well  as  any  one  man  is  likely  to 
succeed.  Beginning  with  California,  he 
traces  his  course  north,  east,  and  south 
through  the  forty-eight  states,  back  to 
the  youngest,  Arizona.  Only  Washing- 
ton, D.  C,  is  reserved  for  another  vol- 
ume. Half  guide,  half  political  survey, 
the  book  analyzes  with  a  journalist's 
skill  the  basic  factors  which  distinguish, 
one  section  from  another.  It  highlights 
the  eternal  conflict  over  water  in  the 
south  and  west,  the  difficulties  of  trans- 
portation in  New  England,  the  tension 
between  labor  and  management  in  in- 
dustrial areas.  Reporting  conversations 
with  hundreds  of  people  in  key  positions, 
the  author  shows  what  the  farmer,  the 
miner,  the  cattle  rancher,  the  manu- 
facturer, or  the  stockbroker  considers 
important.  Though  he  has  deliberately 
left  a  number  of  national  figures  for 
the  Washington  volume,  his  quick- 
sketches  of  various  prominent  men  — 
for  instance.  Senator  Taft,  Senator 
Saltonstall,  Governor  Dewey,  and  Mayor 
La  Guardia  —  are  incisive  and  really 
illuminating.  Mr.  Gunther  is  no  easy 
optimist.  He  is  amazed  at  the  extrava- 
gant contradictions  of  a  land  in  which, 
for  all  the  talk  of  public  health,  40  per 
cent  of  all  draftees  were  rejected  as 
physically  unfit ;  for  all  the  size  of  the 
national  income,  over  50  per  cent  of 
families  have  a  monthly  income  of  less 
than  $122 ;  and  no  resident  of  the 
national  capital  is  allowed  to  vote.  And 
he  loses  no  opportunity  to  stress  the 
appalling  urgency  of  the  negro  situ- 
ation, "the  most  controversially  acute 
of  all  domestic  problems  in  the  United 
States."  But  he  stresses  also  the  enor- 
mous vitality  of  the  country,  and  the 
"diversity  within  unity"  which  is  its 
chief  strength.  (H.  McC.) 


21 


265 


266 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Report  from  Spain.  By  Emmet  John 
Hughes.  Holt.  1947.  323  pp. 
Mr.  Hughes  served  as  Press  Attache  at 
the  American  Embassy  in  Madrid  from 
August  1942  to  May  1946,  and  thus  had 
an  excellent  opportunity  to  observe 
Spanish  affairs  from  the  first  Allied 
plan  to  invade  North  Africa  until  the 
Tripartite  Note  suggesting  Franco's 
"withdrawal"  in  March  1946.  He  has 
written  an  uncompromising  indictment 
of  the  whole  Falangist  regime.  Open- 
ing with  a  succinct  history  of  the  Fal- 
ange  and  its  relations  —  not  always 
cordial  —  with  General  Franco,  he  goes 
on  to  discuss  the  attitude  of  the  Church 
in  Spain.  Himself  a  Catholic,  he  can  ap- 
proach the  question  with  understanding 
and  yet  make  it  clear  how  so  many  Span- 
iards can  be  "at  once  profoundly  Catho- 
lic and  acidly  anticlerical."  Another 
subject  which  he  handles  particularly  well 
is  the  activity  of  the  Falangist  propa- 
ganda machine  and  the  "security  system" 
under  which  a  man  may  be  imprisoned 
and  tortured  in  secret  for  days,  merely 
for  reading  an  official  American  press 
bulletin.  At  the  beginning  of  1946,  Mr. 
Hughes  estimated  the  number  of  political 
prisoners  at  a  minimum  of  225,000,  not 
including  labor  battalions  amounting 
to  perhaps  10,000.  Yet  the  power  of  the 
Falange  is  secondary  to  that  of  the 
Army,  whose  position  today  is  unchal- 
lenged. It  is  a  dreary  picture  of  per- 
petual surveillance,  poverty,  and  hope- 
lessness; meanwhile,  though  the  prestige 
of  Communism  grows  daily,  the  forces 
of  opposition  (both  right  and  left)  are 
not  sufficiently  united  to  overthrow  a 
government  which  is  nevertheless  feared 
and  despised  by  most  of  the  people, 
whatever  their  political  creed.  The 
only  constructive  policy  for  the  West- 
ern democracies  to  follow,  Mr.  Hughes 
believes,  is  to  invoke  economic  sanctions 
against  Franco.  This  course  he  admits 
has  its  dangers,  but  the  consequences 
of  further  delay  would  be  worse.  Spain 
must  have  a  chance  to  work  out  her 
own  form  of  democracy,  no  matter  how 
difficult  the  process  may  be.  (H.  McC.) 

A  Foreign  Policy  for  the  United  States. 

Edited  by  Quincy  Wright.  Univ.  of 
Chicago.  1947.  405  pp. 
Tins  collection  of  lectures  and  discus- 
sions represents  the  views  of  fifteen 


scholars  and  specialists  who  led  a  fo- 
rum held  at  the  University  of  Chicago 
in  July  1946.  It  takes  up  the  United 
States's  relations  with  the  other  Great 
Powers ;  the  problems  of  the  United 
\Tations ;  policies  toward  the  Near  and 
the  Far  East ;  the  position  of  German)' 
and  Eastern  Europe;  and  finally  the 
Good  Neighbor  attitude  toward  Latin 
America.  One  preoccupation,  however, 
overshadows  all  other  interests :  the 
Soviet  Union  and  the  avoidance  of  war. 
Professor  William  Fox  points  out  the 
helplessness  of  any  system  of  collective 
security  against  opposition  by  either  of 
its  two  largest  members;  following  Mr. 
Joseph  Ballantine's  exposition  of  the  Far 
Eastern  situation,  the  discussion  brings 
out  alarm  because  Communist  areas  in 
China  have  grown,  while  Kuomintang 
areas  have  shrunk ;  Professor  Alex 
Dragnich  interprets  the  position  of  Ger- 
many as  a  "crucial  intermediate  zone"  be- 
tween the  Western  democratic  powers 
and  the  Communists ;  and  finally,  Mr. 
Alan  Haden,  speaking  of  the  Balkan 
policy,  states  flatly  that  "the  central 
problem  of  American  policy  now  is  avoid- 
ance of  war  with  Russia."  Professor 
John  A.  Wilson  of  the  Oriental  Institute, 
Chicago,  offers  a  valuable  analysis  of  the 
situation  in  Palestine,  and  recommends 
the  reception  into  the  United  States  of 
displaced  refugees  over  and  above  im- 
migration quotas.  The  final  section 
deals  with  the  expansion  of  world  trade 
and  employment ;  the  cultural  relations 
program ;  international  communications ; 
and  freedom  of  the  press.  (M.  M.) 

Richer  by  Asia.  By  Edmond  Taylor. 
Houghton  Mifflin.  1947.  432  pp. 
The  author,  having  served  nearly 
three  years  in  the  Southeast  Asia  Com- 
mand, had  exceptional  opportunities 
for  close  observation  of  Orientals.  His 
adventures,  however,  form  merely  the 
background  to  his  record  of  how  his 
own  mind  and  soul  became  "richer  by 
Asia"  —  how  his  eyes  were  opened  to 
certain  delusions  common  to  both  East 
and  West,  and  to  certain  attributes  of 
Eastern  thought  which  the  W est  would 
do  well  to  understand  and  at  times  to 
adopt.  The  first  delusion  that  struck 
him  in  India  was  "the  sickness  of  being 
a  Sahib,"  the  master-race  delusion  of 
the  British  rulers  who,  having  intimate 


TEN  BOOKS 


267 


contact  only  with  their  hearer-valets, 
continually  offended  the  dignity  of 
Indians.  Nevertheless,  even  at  that 
time  he  hoped  that  "the  doctrine  of  le- 
gitimate oppression  that  we  call  im- 
perialism" was  about  to  he  cured.  Mr. 
Taylor  describes  the  Moslem-Hindu 
feud,  till  1946  still  supported  by  the 
British,  as  well  as  the  Congress  move- 
ment, which  he  considers  a  genuine 
cultural  revolution  influenced  by  West- 
ern ideas.  The  leaders  of  the  Indian 
revolution,  he  thought,  were  in  jail 
"precisely  because  they  were  anti-fas- 
cists." In  the  Buddhist  religion  he  saw 
an  affirmation  of  life,  and  in  the  anim- 
ism of  the  Hindu  religion  a  diffused 
compassion  unattained  by  the  West. 
Mr.  Taylor  recommends  adding  India 
to  the  world's  Big  Five  and  treating 
the  peoples  of  Asia  as  equals.  His 
Oriental  experiences  converted  him  to 
the  conviction  that  contribution  to  the 
forging  of  "one  world"  is  all  that  mat- 
ters —  is  indeed  the  alternative  to  ex- 
tinction of  the  human  race.  (M.  M.) 

Government  and  Liberty.  By  William 
Beard.  Halcyon  House.  1947.  362  pp. 
The  underlying  plan  of  the  book  is  to 
explain  the  functions  of  government  at 
the  various  levels  and  the  operation  of 
the  system  of  checks  and  balances. 
After  a  brief  historical  introduction,  the 
author  discourses  on  the  party  system, 
then  explains  the  local,  the  state,  and 
the  federal  organization  and  adminis- 
tration, as  well  as  the  financial  and  in- 
dustrial enterprises  and  judicial  sys- 
tems of  these  governmental  units.  In 
municipal  affairs,  Professor  Beard  notes 
that  "the  strong  mayor  type  of  ex- 
ecutive is  gaining  in  popularity."  Simi- 
larly, he  maintains  that  "the  modern 
trend  is  in  favor  of  concentrating  in 
the  hands  of  the  Governor  more  au- 
thority." This  strengthening  of  the 
gubernatorial  power  seems  also  a  re- 
sistant to  that  of  the  national  govern- 
ment. On  the  federal  level  the  author's 
field  is  immense,  and  only  some  of  the 
issues  discussed  are  the  rights  of  Con- 
gress, the  function  of  Congressional 
committees,  the  Supreme  Court's  atti- 
tude toward  New  Deal  legislation,  the 
various  administrative  commissions, 
federal  land  holdings  and  conservation, 
and  finally  the  conduct  of  foreign  af- 


fairs. In  a  final  section  Mr.  Beard  points 
out  the  constitutional  and  legislative 
safeguards  of  civil  liberty,  and  the 
problem  of  responsibility  in  govern- 
ment, a  healthy  sign  of  which  is  the 
1946  legislation  authorizing  congress- 
ional review  of  its  own  agencies.  (M.  M .) 

Shirt-Sleeve  Diplomat.  By  Josephus 
Daniels.  Univ.  of  North  Carolina.  1947. 
547  PP- 

This  fifth  volume  of  Mr.  Daniels's  auto- 
biography covers  the  nine  years  be- 
tween 1933  and  1942,  when  he  acted  as 
United  States  Ambassador  to  Mexico. 
He  started,  many  critics  believed,  with 
a  handicap ;  for  it  was  he  who  as  Sec- 
retary of  the  Navy  in  1914  had  ordered 
the  landing  at  Vera  Cruz  which  resulted 
in  the  death  of  126  Mexicans.  Within  a 
short  time,  however,  his  own  evident 
sincerity  and  friendliness  had  conquered 
all  resentment.  It  was  the  beginning  of 
the  New  Deal  in  the  United  States,  and 
of  the  Six- Year  Plan  in  Mexico  —  a 
difficult  period  for  both  countries.  Mr. 
Daniels  had  to  cope  with  basic  issues 
which  had  aroused  bitter  discord  even 
before  he  arrived:  water  disputes  on 
the  Colorado  and  the  Rio  Grande, 
financial  claims  of  all  sorts,  and  the 
thorny  religious  situation.  In  1938  the 
long-standing  controversy  over  Ameri- 
can oil  fields  in  Mexico  came  to  a 
climax  with  the  Mexican  decree  expro- 
priating all  properties  of  American  and 
British  oil  companies  in  the  republic, 
and  accusing  the  owners  of  a  conspiracy 
against  Mexico.  The  conflict  lasted 
until  1941,  and  Ambassador  Daniels 
was  largely  responsible  for  its  peaceful 
settlement.  His  story  is  naturally  a  per- 
sonal one,  but  so  modest  and  reason- 
able that  it  shows  why  this  particular 
"shirt-sleeve  diplomat"  was  the  right 
choice  to  demonstrate  the  Good  Neighbor 
policy.  (H.  McC.) 

The  Unfinished  Revolution  in  China. 

By  Israel  Epstein.  Little,  Brown.  1947. 
442  pp. 

Mr.  Epstein  has  lived  in  China  for 
twenty-eight  years,  and  has  worked  for 
the  New  York  Times,  Time,  and  Life,  and 
as  news  editor  for  the  OWI  in  Chung- 
king. In  addition  to  his  wide  experience 
of  urban  and  village  China,  his  personal 
acquaintance  with  Gen.  Stillwell  and 


268  MORE  BOOKS: 

other  officials  has  given  him  a  good 
view  of  American  policy.  He  opens 
with  a  brief  outline  of  American  re- 
lations with  China  during  the  last  cen- 
tury, which  expands  into  a  review  of 
events  since  the  death  of  Sun  Yat-sen. 
His  title,  indeed,  is  taken  from  the  key 
sentence  in  Sun's  will,  "The  Revolution 
is  not  )ret  finished"  —  which,  Mr.  Ep- 
stein states,  is  as  true  today  as  in  1925. 
The  conflict  between  the  Chinese  Com- 
munist-led forces  and  the  Kuomintang 
under  Chiang  Kai-shek,  suspended  in 
1935  for  the  sake  of  joint  resistance  to 
Japan,  continued  underground  until 
civil  war  broke  out  openly  in  1940.  After 
the  attack  on  Pearl  Harbor,  though 
China  became  a  valued  ally  of  Britain 
and  the  United  States,  the  internal  situ- 
ation became  increasingly  desperate 
under  the  onslaught  of  famine  and  a 
feudal  war  economy  for  which  the 
author  explicitly  blames  Chiang  Kai- 
shek  and  the  Chungking  government. 
Under  this  system  the  peasant  in  the 
Chungking-controlled  area  is  still  at  the 
mercy  of  his  landlord,  whereas  the 
Communist  administration  has  been  at 
pains  to  reduce  excessive  rents  and 
taxes.  Mr.  Epstein  praises  Secretary 
Marshall's  withdrawal  of  American 
mediation  in  China,  but  sees  danger  for 
the  future  in  the  continuation  of  less 
formal  intervention  on  the  part  of 
American  leaders.   (H.  AfcC.) 

Ozark  Superstitions.  By  V ance  Ran- 
dolph. Coumbia  Univ.  1947.  339  pp. 
The  author,  a  leading  authority  on  the 
Ozark  people,  has  lived  among  them 
for  twenty-five  years.  Having  found 
them  ashamed  to  answer  direct  questions 
about  their  beliefs  and  practices,  he 
settled  in  the  region,  the  hill  country  of 
Missouri  and  Arkansas,  and  gathered 
his  material  bit  by  bit.  The  Ozarks  are 
nearly  all  of  British  stock;  some  speak 
of  Indian  inheritance  but  they  have  no 
Negro  blood.  Their  forebears  came 
from  the  Southern  Appalachians  in  the 
early  nineteenth  century,  and  have 
stayed  in  isolation  ever  since.  This  fact, 
together  with  their  poverty,  explains 
their  continued  faith  in  strange  notions. 
Tndeed,  until  recently  they  were  the 
"most  deliberately  unprogressive  people 
in  the  United  States."  Mr.  Randolph 


A  BULLETIN 

points  out,  however,  that,  in  spite  of 
their  reliance  on  folklore,  they  are  no 
simple  hillbillies.  Suspicious  of  modern 
scientific  ways,  they  govern  their  be- 
havior by  conforming  to  a  mesh  of 
omens  and  auguries.  The  book  includes 
hundreds  of  specimens  of  these  tra- 
ditions, arranged  under  subject  head- 
ings such  as  Weather  Signs,  Mountain 
Medicine,  Ghost  Stories,  Animals  and 
Plants,  Courtship  and  Marriage,  Ozark 
Witchcraft,  and  so  on.  The  charms  and 
safeguards  described  are  sometimes 
startling:  in  planting  peach  trees,  old 
shoes  should  be  buried  near  the  roots ; 
if  a  traveler  passes  geese,  he  will  be 
well  received,  whereas  hogs  mean  that 
he  is  unwelcome ;  small  children  will 
grow  up  hard-hearted  if  they  sit  on 
rocks ;  when  a  good  man  is  dying,  the 
feathers  in  his  pillow  will  form  them- 
selves into  a  crown.  The  volume,  be- 
sides being  a  valuable  contribution  to 
anthropology,  is  very  readable.  (T.  C.) 

The  Road  to  Music.  By  Nicolas  Slon- 
imsky.  Dodd,  Mead.  1947.  178  pp. 
To  Mr.  Slonimsky,  learning  the  funda- 
mentals of  music  is  a  joyous  task.  His 
present  book  brings  together  a  series  of 
articles  for  young  people  which  ap- 
peared in  the  Christian  Science  Monitor, 
and  covers  a  surprising  number  of  sub- 
jects relating  to  the  technique  and  to 
the  history  of  music.  The  touch  is  light, 
humorous,  and  charmingly  original, 
with  verbal  and  diagrammatic  illustra- 
tions to  instruct  and  amuse  both  chil- 
dren and  their  elders.  Mr.  Slonimsky  is 
ambitious  for  his  pupils ;  before  the  first 
page  is  turned,  he  has  composed  an 
eight-bar  composition  entitled  "The 
Cabbage  Waltz,"  built  on  the  letters 
CABGE  with  an  "oom-pah-pah"  bass. 
Notation,  rhythm,  the  mysteries  of  har- 
mony and  counterpoint  —  all  the  major 
devices  used  in  music  —  are  then  ex- 
plained with  gusto,  although  with  sim- 
plicity. There  are  two  or  three  chapters 
on  musical  form,  and  others  on  the  dif- 
ferent instruments  used  in  an  orchestra. 
Then,  having  surveyed  the  technique, 
the  author  appends  a  thimble-history 
of  music  in  all  its  branches.  In  this  exe- 
gesis it  is  edifying  to  observe  how  the 
simple  and  the  profound  unfold  their 
secrets  with  equal  clarity.  (H.  E.  J.) 


Library  Notes 


Mr.  Woodring 

MR.  CARL  R.  WOODRING,  the 
writer  of  "W.  H.  Mallock:  A 
Neglected  Wit,"  the  leading  article  in 
the  present  issue  of  More  Books,  is  work- 
ing for  his  doctorate  at  Harvard.  A 
graduate  o-  the  Rice  Institute  at  Hous- 
ton, Texas  ('40),  he  served  for  four 
years  in  the  Navy. 

A  Thesaurus  of  Scales 

THE  present-day  composer  finds 
at  hand  a  wealth  of  resources  un- 
recognized by  his  predecessors.  Pushed 
back  are  barriers  which  would  limit 
him  to  two  or  three  scale  patterns ; 
tonality  as  well  as  the  bar  line  is  re- 
leased from  the  narrow  conventions 
sanctioned  by  long  usage.  A  heightened 
skill  is  therefore  requisite  to  assimilate 
and  apply  these  musical  materials. 

In  an  effort  to  classify,  arrange,  and 
present  new  concepts  of  scale  form- 
ations, Nicolas  Slonimsky  has  compiled 
his  Thesaurus  of  Scales  and  Melodic 
Patterns,  a  monumental  work  in  the 
field.  Much  of  the  author's  research 
was  done  in  the  Music  Room  of  the 
Boston  Public  Library.  The  plan  is 
simple :  there  are  1330  numbered,  and 
hundreds  of  unnumbered,  brief  musical 
phrases  in  the  form  of  piano  scales  and 
melodic  studies.  They  are  not  all  created 
by  atonalists  and  "modernists,"  but 
often  derive  from  folk-lore,  from  the 
Greek  and  ecclesiastical  modes,  and 
from  exotic  music  the  world  over.  In 
short,  musicians  have  been  living  with 
them  for  years  without  recognizing 
their  possibilities. 

Obviously  the  musical  scale  has  a 
new  and  broader  meaning  for  Mr.  Slon- 
imsky. He  terms  a  scale  "a  progression 
of  tones  changing  its  direction  only  at 
terminal  points,"  that  is,  a  progression 
proceeding  uniformly  in  one  direction 
until  a  terminal  point  is  reached.  This 
opens  the  way  to  inclusion  of  progress- 
ions, not  hitherto  considered  as  scales, 
which  may  contain  only  four  notes  or 
may  run  into  a  great  many  and  cover 
several  octaves.  A  melodic  pattern  "may 
be  formed  by  any  group  of  notes  that 


has  melodic  plausibility."  As  for  then- 
number,  there  is  no  limit. 

The  breaking-up  of  conventional  pat- 
terns sacred  to  the  nineteenth  century 
began  earlier  than  is  generally  recog- 
nized, although  the  effect  on  sound  has 
been  more  striking  in  works  from  De- 
bussy to  Schoenberg.  Busoni  found  113 
different  scales  of  seven  notes ;  Glinka 
and  Rimsky-Korsakov  frequently  used 
unconventional  melodic  progressions, 
and  Wagner's  melodic  patterns  struck 
the  ear  as  very  strange.  Today  the  pre- 
cise theories  of  Schoenberg,  Berg,  and  the 
atonalists  are  by  no  means  clear  to  the 
average  musician,  but  the  substance  of 
their  melodic  processes  is  given  in  the 
Thesaurus. 

These  increased  resources,  now  sys- 
tematized, often  necessitate  new  ter- 
minology. Such  terms,  logically  derived 
from  Greek  and  Latin  names,  may  in- 
clude "sesquiquadritone  and  sesquiquin- 
quetone  progressions,"  "autochordal 
harmonizations,"  and  "palindromic  can- 
ons" ;  but  every  contemporary  composer 
will  discover  in  them  fresh  ideas  both  es- 
sential and  incidental  to  his  craft.  The 
Thesaurus  will  also  stimulate  the  thought 
of  musicians  whose  special  field  of  in- 
terest is  other  than  that  of  composition. 
Mr.  Slonimsky  has  provided  elementary 
harmonizations  for  the  majority  of 
scales,  and  has  appended  a  series  of 
chord  formations.  H.  E.  J. 

Advice  on  Autographs 
from  William  Cullen  Bryant 

WILLIAM  CULLEN  BRYANT 
is  remembered  chiefly  as  the 
poet  of  "Thanatopsis" ;  fewer  people 
know  that  he  was  a  great  editor  who 
for  half  a  century,  from  1829  011  to  the 
end  of  his  life,  directed  the  policies  of 
the  New  York  Evening  Post.  He  was 
also  a  scholar,  devoted  to  literary  leis- 
ure and  travel.  In  1843  ne  bought  an 
old  farmhouse  on  Long  Island,  where 
he  collected  a  library  of  great  variety ; 
he  made  wide  tours  of  the  country  and 
took  several  trips  to  Europe,  publish- 
ing his  experiences  in  Letters  of  a  Trav- 
eller in  1850. 


269 


270 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


In  spite  of  his  known  aversion  to 
slavery,  Bryant  found  himself  wel- 
comed in  many  Southern  homes.  At 
Savannah  he  was  entertained  by  J.  K. 
Tefft.  an  autograph  collector,  with 
whom  he  evidently  had  much  in  com- 
mon. On  his  return  to  New  York  on 
June  27,  1843,  ne  wrote  the  following 
letter  to  the  Southerner: 

My  dear  Sir, 

I  was  diligent  in  looking  up  Profes- 
sor Robinson  on  my  return  to  New 
York  that  I  might  secure  the  auto- 
graph of  Luther  for  you,  but  he  had  al- 
ready disposed  of  it.  It  was  a  paper 
which  contained  the  handwriting  both 
of  Luther  and  Melanchthon. 

He  said,  however  that  he  would  look 
up  for  me  the  autographs  of  some  emi- 
nent modern  German  scholars  which 
he  possesses  and  give  them  to  me  for 
you.  I  accepted  his  offer  of  course,  and 
last  evening  I  called  in  hopes  of  getting 
the  autographs,  but  he  was  not  in,  and 
Mrs.  Robinson  told  me  that  he  had 
been  too  busy  to  look  for  them.  I  hope 
to  have  the  pleasure  of  forwarding 
them  to  you  hereafter. 

Your  son  called  upon  us  the  other 
day  in  good  health.  He  dines  with  us 
tomorrow. 

My  best  regards  to  Mrs.  Tefft.  My 
wife  desires  to  be  kindly  remembered 
to  both  of  you.  We  often  talk  of  the 
pleasant  visit  we  made  to  Savannah, 
and  of  your  many  kindnesses 

Yrs  trulv 
W.  C.  Bryant 

In  1873  Bryant,  then  seventy-nine 
years  old,  made  another  excursion  in 
the  South,  this  time  to  observe  the 
progress  of  reconstruction  after  the 
Civil  War.  Again  he  made  many  friends; 
among  them  was  the  Reverend  Dr.  G. 
W.  Porter  of  Wilmington,  North  Caro- 
lina, who  had  started  a  school  for  poor 
whites  in  his  town.  The  doctor  wanted 
to  sell  some  autographs  and  documents 
and  it  is  about  these  that  Bryant  wrote 
to  him  two  years  later  from  Cumming- 


ton,  Massachusetts.  The  letter,  dated 
September  13.  1875,  reads: 

Dear  Doctor  Porter, 

You  must  think  me  very  uncivil  for 
not  having  earlier  replied  to  your  let- 
ter. If  you  do,  I  agree  with  you  very 
fully.  At  my  time  of  life  time  passes  so 
rapidly  that  when  we  begin  to  neglect 
a  duty  we  often  find  to  our  astonish- 
ment that  the  time  for  performing  it 
has  passed  away  before  we  are  aware. 

That  is  not  wholly  the  case  in  this 
instance.  I  shall  make  a  point  on  get- 
ting back  to  the  neighborhood  of  New 
York,  which  I  left  in  July,  to  inquire 
what  can  be  done  in  disposing  of  your 
autographs  and  documents,  unless  you 
inform  me  beforehand  that  you  have 
found  a  purchaser.  There  is  nothing 
which  occurs  to  me  at  present  favor- 
able to  your  design,  but  there  are  doubt- 
less persons  who  would  like  to  possess 
the  curiosities  of  which  you  speak.  I 
have  said  nothing  occurs  to  me  —  but 
I  must  correct  myself  in  regard  to  that 
matter.  I  now  recollect  that  soon  after 
receiving  your  letter  I  made  inquiries 
with  the  intent  to  write  to  you  imme- 
diately, and  the  result  of  them  was 
this  —  that  it  would  be  of  no  use  to  try 
to  look  up  a  private  purchaser,  but  that 
the  best  way  was  to  put  them  up  at 
auction.  This  is  the  way  they  do  in 
England,  and  I  believe  it  has  some- 
times been  done  here. 

I  should  have  given  you  this  infor- 
mation at  the  time  and  probably  with 
more  particularity  than  I  now  remem- 
ber it,  but  something  put  it  out  of  my 
head  and  a  delay  followed  which  I 
greatly  regret.  Trusting  that  you  will 
forgive  an  old  man's  forgetfulness  — 
and  remember  me  kindly  to  Mrs.  Por- 
ter. I  will  write  to  you  again. 

I  am,  dear  sir  .  .  . 

Cummington  was  Bryant's  birth- 
place and  the  summer  home  of  his  last 
years.  In  1872  he  presented  a  building 
and  6,000  volumes  to  the  town.     x.  C. 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 
Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

** 

This  list  should  be  used  in  conjunction  with  Books  Current,  a 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
1943.  Books  Current  is  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  and  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  are  available  for  the  whole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  are  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  the 
Business  Branch  ;  however,  they  may  be  borrozved  through  the  various 
Branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


General  Reference 
Books  in  Bates  Hall 

Bibliography 

American  book-prices  current.  1946.  Bovvker. 
1946.  685  pp.  Gen.  Ref.  Closet 

Book  Review  Digest,  The.  Forty-second 
annual  cumulation.  March  1946  to  Feb- 
ruary 1947  inclusive.  Wilson.  1947.  1345 
pp.  Gen.  Ref.  821.10 

Kaplan,  Louis.  Research  materials  in  the 
social  sciences;  annotated  guide  for  gradu- 
ate students.  Univ.  of  Wisconsin.  1939.  36 
pp.  Gen.  Ref.  AA40.5-27 

U.  S.  Library  of  Congress,  Catalog  mainten- 
ance division.  Cumulative  catalog  of  Lib- 
brary  of  Congress  printed  cards.  Jan. 
1947-  Apr.  '47.  Washington,  f  1947-1 

Gen.  Ref.  Z881.A1C323 

Directories.  Handbooks 

American  Bar,  The.  The  professional  di- 
rectory of  the  leading  lawyers  of  the 
United  States  and  Canada  .  .  .  1947. 
Minneapolis,  Fifield.   [1947.]  1311pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  AYKUS.A5 
Batchelder,    Marjorie    Hope.    The  puppet 
theatre  handbook  .  .  .  Harper.  [1947.]  293 
Gen.  Ref.  PN  1972.B3 
Canadian    Almanac   and   Legal  and  Court 
Directory,  The.  Toronto.  [1947.I  772  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  AY414.C2 
Directory  of  the  Social  Agencies  of  the  City 
of  New  York.  1946/47.  [1947.I 

Gen.  Ref.  HV99.N59N5 
Political  handbook  of  the  world.  1947-  Har- 
per. [1947.I  214  pp.  Gen.  Ref.  AYJF37.P6 


Language 

Funk  &  Wagnalls.  New  college  standard 
dictionary  of  the  English  language.  Em'- 
pha-type  edition.  Funk  &  Wagnalls.  1947. 
1404  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  Center  Desk  PE1628.S586 
Measures,    Howard.    Styles    of   address,  a 
manual  of  usage  in  writing  and  in  speech. 


Crowell.  [1947.I  209  pp. 

Gen.  Ref.  GT3050.M4 


Biography 

Collective 

Aspinall-Oglander,  Cecil.  Nunwell  symphony. 
With  photographs  by  Hans  Wild.  Lon- 
don, Hogarth  Press.  1945  [i.  c.  1946I.  x, 
1 1-233  PP-   Plates.  CS439.O48  1946 

A  history  of  the  Oglander  family  on  Nunwell,  its 
ancient  estate  on   the   Isle  of  Wight. 

Madison,  Charles  Allan.  Critics  and  crusa- 
ders; a  century  of  American  protest.  Holt. 
[1947.]  xii,  572  pp.  E176.M22 

Contents.  —  The  Abolitionists.  —  The  Utopians. 

—  The   Anarchists.  —  The  dissident  Economists. 

—  The  militant  Liberals.  —  The  Socialists.  —  A 
final  Note. 

Tebbel,  John  William.  An  American  dynasty. 
Doubleday.  1947.  x,  363  pp.  Plates. 

PN4899.C4T83 

A  history  of  the  McCormick,  Patterson,  and  Med- 
ill  families,  as  it  bears  upon  the  management  and 
policies  of  the  Chicago  Tribune,  the  New  York 
Daily  News,  and  the  Washington  Times-Herald. 


Single 

Almedingen,  Martha  Edith  von.  Dom  Ber- 
nard Clements,  a  portrait.  London,  Lane. 
[1946.]   I44PP-  BX5199.C54A7 

Aubry,  Octave,  1891-1946.  The  private  life 
of  Napoleon.  Lippincott.  [1947.]  432  pp. 
Plates.  DC203.A8753 

Translated  from  the  French  by  Elisabeth  Abbott. 

Beasley,  Norman.  Knudsen,  a  biography. 
McGraw-Hill.  [1947.]  xii,  397  pp. 

E748.K74B4 

A  narrative  of  forty-seven  years  of  Mr.  William 
S.  Knudsen's  career  in  the  United  States,  from 
his  arrival  as  a  Danish  immigrant  through  his 
achievement  as  Director  of  War  Production.  The 
Introduction  is  by  Knudsen  himself. 

Bonner,  Willard  Hallam.  Pirate  laureate,  the 
life  and  legends  of  Captain  Kidd.  Rutgers 
Univ.  1947.  xvi,  239  pp.  G537.K5B6 

Feiling,  Keith  Grahame.  The  life  of  Neville 
Chamberlain.  London,  Macmillan.  1946. 
ix,  475  pp.  Portraits.  DA585.C5F4 


271 


272 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Frye,  William.  Marshall,  citizen  soldier. 
Bobbs-Merrill.  [I947-]  397  PP- 

E745.M37F7 

Mathew,  David,  Bishop.  Acton,  the  formative 
years.  London,  Eyre  &  Spottiswoode. 
[1946.]  viii.  196  pp.  Plates.  D15.A25M3 

A  study  of  Lord  Acton  (1834-1902),  "the  most 
learned  of  all  English  historians." 

Norwood,  Hayden.  The  marble  man's  wife, 
Thomas  Wolfe's  mother.  Scribner.  1947. 
200  pp.  CT275.W622N6 

The  mother  of  the  novelist  Thomas  Wolfe  died  in 
1946  in  her  86th  year. 

Sanceau,  Elaine.  Henry  the  Navigator;  the 
story  of  a  great  prince  and  his  times.  Nor- 
ton. [1947  ]  3i8pp.  G286.H5S32  1947 
Bibliography :  pp.  309-3 '2. 

Strakhovsky,  Leonid  Ivan.  Alexander  I  of 
Russia,  the  man  who  defeated  Napoleon. 
Norton.  [  194/.]  302  pp.  DK191.S75 

Bibliography:  pp.  274-292. 
Sumner,  G.  Lynn.  Meet  Abraham  Lincoln; 
profiles  of  the  prairie  president.  Harper. 
[1946.]   9-78  pp.   Illus.        E457.S95  1946 


Memoirs.  Letters 

Blackford,  Susan  Leigh,  compiler.  Letters 
from  Lee's  army,  or  Memoirs  of  life  in 
and  out  of  the  army  in  Virginia  during 
the  war  between  the  states.  Compiled  by 
Susan  Leigh  Blackford  from  original  and 
contemporaneous  memoirs,  correspondence 
and  diaries,  annotated  by  her  husband. 
Charles  Minor  Blackford,  edited  and 
abridged  for  publication  by  Charles  Minor 
Blackford  III.  Scribner.  1947.  vii,  312pp. 

E605.B63 

Campbell,  Sir  Gerald.  Of  true  experience. 
Dodd,  Mead.  1947-  *i,  259  PP-  DA46.C3A3 

The  reminiscences  of  a  British  diplomat. 

Hall,  Melvin.  Journey  to  the  end  of  an  era, 
an  autobiographv.  Scribner.  1947-  x,  438  pp. 

CT275.H2854A3 

Kersten,  Felix.  The  memoirs  of  Doctor  Felix 
Kersten,  edited  by  Herma  Briffault,  trans- 
lated by  Dr.  Ernst  Morwitz.  Doubleday. 
1947.  xlvii,  300  pp.  Illus.  DD244.K42 

Dr.  Kersten,  a  physiotherapist,  treated  Himmler 
for  more  than  five  years  and  received  his  confi- 
dences. 

"The  notes  of  Mr.  Felix  Kersten  are.  so  far  as 
is  known,  the  first  collection  of  intimate  recol- 
lections that  have  reached  the  public  from  the 
clique  of  the  supreme  Nazi  leaders." — Introduction 
by  Konrad  Heiden. 

Mary  Stuart,  Queen  of  the  Scots.  1542-1587, 
supposed  author.  Letters  and  poems,  by 
Alary  Stuart,  queen  of  Scots;  now  mod- 
ernised or  translated  with  an  introduction 
by  Clifford  Bax.  New  York,  Philosophical 
Library.  [1947.]  71  pp. 

DA787.A36A5  1947 

English  edition  has  title  The  Sik-er  Casket. 

Kantor,  MacKinlay.  But  look,  the  morn;  the 
story  of  a  childhood.  Coward-McCann. 
[1947.]  PS3521.A47Z5 
Childhood  reminiscences  of  the  author. 

Stevens,  W'alter  J.  Chip  on  my  shoulder, 
autobiography  of  Walter  J.  Stevens.  Bos- 
ton, Meador.  [1946.]  315  pp. 

Ei85-97-S82A3 


Business 

These  books  are  to  be  obtained  at  the 
Business  Branch,  20  City  Hall  Ave. 
Aircraft  yearbook,  v.  29.  1947.  New  York,  Lan- 
ciar  Publishers.   [1947.]  511pp. 

**TLsoi.A29 

American  television  directory  [and  official 
yearbook  of  the  American  television  so- 
ciety, inc.]  1946.  1st  annual  edition.  New 
York,  The  Society.    1946.  142  pp. 

**TK6630.A5i 

Bell,  Harrie  A.  Getting  the  right  start  in  di- 
rect advertising.  New  York,  Graphic 
Books.  1946.  161  pp.  NBS 

Blankenship,  Albert  B.,  editor.  How  to  con- 
duct consumer  and  opinion  research;  the 
sampling  survey  in  operation.  Harper. 
[1946.]  3I4PP-  NBS 

Published  under  the  sponsorship  of  American 
council  on  public  relations. 

Caldwell,  J.  B.  Introducing  Alaska.  Putnam. 
206  pp.  NBS 

Caples,  John.  Tested  advertising  methods; 
how  to  profit  by  removing  guesswork. 
Harper.  [1947.]  276  pp.  NBS 

Carlevale,  Joseph  W.  Leading  Americans  of 
Italian  descent  in  Massachusetts.  Ply- 
mouth, Mass.,  Memorial  Press.  1946.  861 
pp.  **CTgg8o.C28 

Chain  store  guide;  buyers'  edition.  1946.  New 
York,  Chain  Store  Business  Guide.  1946. 
201  pp.  **HF5463.C44 

Clayton,  Charles  C.  Newspaper  reporting  to- 
day. Odyssey  Press.  [1947.]  422  pp.  NBS 

Denmark,  Udenrigsministeriet.  Denmark 
1947.  Published  by  the  Royal  Danish 
Ministry  for  foreign  affairs  and  the  Danish 
Statistical  department.  Copenhagen.  1947. 
280  pp.  **HAi473.A3 

Dewey.  Edward  R.,  and  E.  F.  Dakin.  Cycles, 
the  science  of  prediction.  Holt.  1947-  -55 
pp.  NBS 

Directory  of  frozen  food  processors  of  fruits, 
vegetables,  seafoods,  meats,  poultry, 
specialties.  1946/47.  New  York,  E.  W. 
Williams  Publications,  1946.  536  pp. 

**TX6io.5.D59 

Doremus,  William  L.  Advertising  for  profit; 
a  guide  for  small  business.  Pitman.  1947. 
130  pp.  NBS 

Dun  &  Bradstreet,  inc.  Trade  index  of  U.  S. 
manufacturers.  1947.  Dun  &  Bradstreet. 
[1947  ]  385  pp.  **HF30ii.D8g 

Ezekiel,  Mordecai,  editor.  Toward  world  pros- 
perity, through  industrial  and  agricultural 
development  and  expansion.  Harper.  1947. 
455  PP-  NBS 

Gilbreth,  Lillian  M.  and  A.  R.  Cook.  The 
foreman  in  manpower  management. 
McGraw-Hill.  1947.  199  pp.  NBS 

Gordis,  Phillip.  How  to  buy  insurance.  Nor- 
ton. 1947.  352  pp.  NBS 

Hayes  druggists'  directory  and  commercial 
reference  book.  1947.  Detroit,  Hayes.  1947- 
861  pp.  **HDg665-8.H4i 

Henrici,  Stanley  B.  Standard  costs  for  manu- 
facturing. McGraw-Hill.   1947.  289  pp. 

NBS 

Hoebreckx,  O.  S.  Management  handbook  for 
collective  bargaining.  Commerce  Clearing 
House.  1947.  208  pp.  NBS 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


273 


Hotchkiss,  George  B.  and  Edward  J.  Kilduff. 
Advanced  business  correspondence.  4th 
edition.  Harper.  [I947-]  571  PP-  NBS 

Hyde,  George  G.  Fundamentals  of  successful 
manufacturing.  McGraw-Hill.  1946.  201 
pp.  NBS 

Interior  decorators'  hand  book.  1947.  New 
York,  Hall  Pub.  Co.  1947.  244  pp. 

**TTi2.H23 

Johnson,  Arnold  Waldcmar.  Elementary  ac- 
counting. Rinehart.  [1946.]  842  pp.  NBS 

Lesley,  Philip,  editor.  Public  relations  in 
action;  case  studies  from  First  annual 
awards  competition  of  the  American  pub- 
lic relations  association.  Chicago,  Ziff- 
Davis.  [1947.]  280  pp.  NBS 

Monual  of  electrical  undertakings  and  di- 
rectory of  officials,  v.  44.  1946/47.  London. 
Electrical  Press.  1946.  1050  pp. 

**TKi2.M2g 

Metal  statistics,  1947.  New  York,  American 
Metal  Market.  [1947.]  816  pp. 

**HDg5o6.M58 

Metz,  H.  W.  and  M.  Jacobstein.  A  national 
labor  policv.  Brookings  Inst.  1947.  164  pp. 

NBS 

Negro  handbook,  The.  1946/47.  New  York, 
Current  Books.  1947.  392  pp. 

**Ei8s.5-N33 

Paul,  Randolph  E.  Taxation  for  prosperity. 
Bobbs-Merrill.  1947.  448  pp.  NBS 

Pearson.  Frank  A.,  and  Edmund  E.  Vial. 
Prices  of  dairy  products  and  other  live- 
stock products.  Ithaca,  N.  Y.,  Cornell  Univ. 
1946.  154  pp.  NBS 

Petroleum  register.  25th  edition.  1947.  New- 
York,  Mona  Palmer.  [1946-7.]  439  pp. 

**TN867.P49 

Plackard,  D wight  H.  and  C.  Blackmon.  Blue- 
print for  public  relations.  McGraw-Hill. 


1947-  355  PP-  NBS 

Robinson,    Lura,   editor.    Outdoor  jobs  for 

men,    by   Vocational    guidance  research. 

Vanguard.    [1947.]  273  pp.  NBS 


Stocking,  George  W.  Cartels  in  action;  case 
studies  in  international  business  diplomacy. 
Twentieth  Centurv  Fund.  1947.  =i33  pp. 

NBS 

Sugar  reference  book  and  directory.  1946. 
New  York,  Palmer.  1946.  180  pp. 

**HDgi02.S94 

Tottle,  Harry  King.  Employees  are  people; 
what  management  owes  them  and  what  it 
does  for  them.  McGraw-Hill.  1947.  350  pp. 

NBS 

White,  Joseph  L.  Analysis  of  railroad  oper- 
ations. 2d  edition.  Simmons-Boardman. 
[1946.]  306  pp.  NBS 

Who's  who  in  commerce  and  industry;  the 
international  business  who's  who.  5th 
edition.  Chicago,   Marquis.  1946.   1416  pp. 

**CT647o.W63 

Who's  who  in  labor;  the  authorized  bio- 
graphies of  the  men  and  women  who 
lead  labor  in  the  United  States  and  Cana- 
da and  of  those  who  deal  with  labor.  1946 
edition.  New  York,  Dryden  Press.  1946. 
480  pp.  **CT6435.W62 

Wiesenberger,  Arthur.  Investment  com- 
panies. 1947.  New  York,  Wiesenberger. 
[1947.]    312  pp.  **HG4497-W65 


Wilson,  Charles  N.  Empire  in  green  and 
gold,  the  story  of  the  American  banana 
trade.  Holt.  1947.  303  pp  NBS 

Wood,  G.  L.  Ed.  Australia,  its  resources  and 
development.    Macmillan.     1947.     334  pp. 

NBS 

Domestic  Science 

Good  housekeeping  institute,  Nciv  York.  The 
Good  Housekeeping  housekeeping  book, 
edited  by  Helen  W.  Kendall,  Good  House- 
keeping institute.  Philadelphia,  McKay. 
[I947-]  3-491  PP-  Illus.  TX158.G66 

Rorty,  James,  and  N.  Philip  Norman.  To- 
morrow's food;  the  coming  revolution  in 
nutrition.  Prentice-Hall.  1947.  xiv,  258  pp. 

TX5SI.R65 

"Bibliography  of  recommended  books":  pp.  241- 
244. 

Economics 

Banning,  W  illiam  Peck.  Commercial  broad- 
casting pioneer;  the  WEAF  experiment, 
1922-1926.  Harvard  Univ.  Press.  1946. 
xxxiii,  308  pp.  Plates.  HE8698.B3 

The  author,  the  former  assistant  vice-president  of 
the  American  Telephone  and  Telegraph  Company, 
tells  mainly  of  this  company's  experiments  with 
and  development  of  radio  broadcasting. 

Bodin,  Jean,  1550-/596.  The  response  of  Jean 
Bodin  to  the  paradoxes,  translated  from 
the  French,  second  edition,  Paris:  Jacques 
du  Puys,  1578,  by  George  Albert  Moore 
.  .  .  Washington,  The  Country  Dollar 
Press.  [1947.]  xiv,  xvii-xviii,  90  pp. 

HG221.B5745 

Dewey,  Edward  R.,  and   Edwin   F.  Dakin. 

Cycles,    the  science  of  prediction.  Holt. 

[1947.]  xi,  255  pp.  9332.75Ai74 
Gordis,  Philip.  How  to  buy  insurance;  the 

complete  guide   to  better  protection  for 

less  money.  Norton.  [1947.]  xviii,  352  pp. 

9368.A61 

Mantoux,  fitienne,  1913-1943.  The  Cartha- 
ginian peace;  or,  The  economic  conse- 
quences of  Mr.  Keynes.  With  an  intro- 
duction by  R.  C.  K.  Ensor  and  a  foreword 
by  Paul  Mantoux.  Oxford  Univ.  1946. 
xvii,  210  pp.  9330.940A54 

Montgomery,  Robert  H.,  and  others.  Mont- 
gomery's Federal  taxes  —  corporations 
and  partnerships,  1946-1947  [by]  Robert 
H.  Montgomery  .  .  .  Conrad  B.  Taylor 
.  .  .  [and]  Mark  E.  Richardson.  Ronald 
Press.   [I947-]  2  v.  9336.2473A133 

National  association  of  manufacturers  of  the 
United  States  of  America.  The  American 
individual  enterprise  system,  its  nature, 
evolution,  and  future  ...  by  the  Eco- 
nomic principles  commission  of  the 
National  association  of  manufacturers. 
McGraw-Hill.  1946.  2  v.  9330.15A7 

Robert,  Daphne.  The  new  trade-mark  manu- 
al, a  handbook  on  protection  of  trade- 
marks in  interstate  commerce.  Washing- 
ton, Bureau  of  National  Affairs.  1947- 
xxi,  375  pp.  T223.V2R6 

Shaw,  A.  G.  L.  The  economic  development 
of  Australia.  Longmans,  Green.  [1946.] 
193  PP-  9330.994AI3 

"First  published,   1944.  Revistrd  edition,  1946-" 


274 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Vickrey,  William.  Agenda  for  progressive 
taxation.  Ronald  Press.  [1947.]  xi,  406  pp. 

HJ226.V5 

"The  chief  frame  of  reference  for  this  book  is 
the  present  federal  income  tax  in  the  United 
States." — Preface. 

Education 

Ccon,  Horace.  Columbia,  colossus  on  the 
Hudson.  Dutton.  1947.  13-388  pp.  Plates. 

LD1248.C6 

American  College  and  University   series,  v.  f. 

Dale,  Edgar.  Audio-visual  methods  in  teach- 
ing. New  York,  Dryden  Press.  [1947.] 
xviii,  546  pp.  Illus.         LB1044.D3  1947 

"Sources  of  teaching  materials":  pp.  310-313. 

Horner,  Harlan  Hoyt.  Dental  education  to- 
day. Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1947.]  vi,  420  pp. 
Illus.  RK91.H6 

Johnson,  Roy  Ivan,  editor.  Explorations  in 
general  education;  the  experiences  of 
Stephens  college.  Harper.  [1947.]  ix,  262  pp. 

LD7251.C66S85 

Refers  to  Stephens  College,  Columbia,  Missouri. 

Kingsley,  Howard  L.  The  nature  and  con- 
ditions of  learning.  Prentice-Hall.  1946. 
xvi,   579  pp.    Illus.  LB1051.K58 

Skinner,  Charles  E.,  editor.  Educational  psy- 
chology. Revised  edition.  Prentice-Hall. 
1947.  xv,  622  pp.  Illus.  LB1051.S58  1947 

Smith,  Nils  Banton,  editor.  Learning  to  read, 
a  basic  reading  program.  Silver  Burdett. 
1945-47.  8  v.  Colored  illus.  *LBi572.S64 

Thayer,  Vivian  Trow.  Religion  in  public  edu- 
cation. Viking.  1947.  xi,  212  pp.  LC111.T5 

Westover,  Frederick  Lowell.  Controlled  eye 
movements  versus  practice  exercises  in 
reading;  a  comparison  of  methods  of  im- 
proving reading  speed  and  comprehension 
of  college  freshmen.  Teachers  College, 
Columbia  Univ.  1946.  vii-viii,  99  pp. 

♦3592.220  No.  917 


Fine  Arts 

Architecture 

Crossley,  Fred.  H.  English  church  design, 
1040-1540  A.  D.,  an  introduction  to  the 
study  of  mediaeval  building.  London, 
Batsford.  [1945.]  viii,  120  pp.  Plates. 

8105.04-105 

Fallani,  Giovanni,  and  Mario  Escobar, 
editors.  Vaticano.  Firenze.  [1946.]  xiii,  715 
pp.  48  plates.  *8ii6.05-202 

Gropius,  Walter.  Rebuilding  our  communi- 
ties. Chicago,  P.  Theobald.  1945.  61  pp. 

8122.03-134 

"A  lecture  held  in  Chicago  February  23rd  1945 
under  the  joint  auspices  of  the  Institute  of  design, 
the  Chicago  association  of  commerce  and  the  Chi- 
cago plan  commission." — P.  [5.] 

Hamlin,  Talbot.  Architecture,  an  art  for  all 
men.  Columbia  Univ.  1947.  xxii,  279  pp. 
xxxii  plates.  8100.05-81S 

A  complete  rewriting  of  the  author's  The  En- 
joyment of  Architecture. 

Howe,  M.  A.  DeWolfe.  Boston  landmarks 
.  .  .  with  photographs  by  Samuel  Chamber- 
lain and  reproductions  of  old  prints.  New 
York,  Hastings  House.  [1946.]  133  pp. 

♦8094.03-506 


Reid,  Marshall,  pseud.,  editor.  When  you 
build.  McBride.  [1946.]  160  pp.  Illus. 

8117.05-158 

Sitwell,  Sacheverell.  British  architects  and 
craftsmen,  a  survey  of  taste,  design,  and 
style  during  three  centuries,  1600  to  1830. 
With  200  illustrations  from  photographs, 
prints  and  drawings.  Scribner.  1946.  vii, 
196  pp.  Plates.  8095.08-104 

Contents.  —  Part  I.  Elizabethan  and  Jacobean 
Building.  —  Inigo  Jones.  —  Sir  Christopher  Wren. 
—  The  Craftsmen.  —  Sir  John  Vanbrugh.  — 
Hawksmoor  and  the  Baroque.  —  Part  II.  Gibbs 
and  the  Rococo.  —  Kent  and  the  Palladians.  — 
Adam.  —  Non-Adam.  — ■  The  Regency. 

Thorpe,  William.  Opportunities  in  archi- 
tecture. New  York,  Vocational  Guidance 
Manuals.  [1946.]  vi,  92  pp.  8101.01-108 

Art  History 

Bachhofer,  Ludwig.  A  short  history  of 
Chinese  art.  Pantheon.  ^4082. 02-109 

Bloch,  Herbert.  Monte  Cassino,  Byzantium, 
and  the  WTest  in  the  earlier  middle  ages. 
In  Dumbarton  Oaks  papers.  Cambridge, 
Mass.  1946.  No.  3,  pp.  [1631-224.  Plates. 

*4075a.38.3 

France  lives.  Paris,  London,  [etc.]  Hyperion. 
[1946.]  120  pp.  *4077B.502 

Hermanin,  Federico.  L'arte  in  Roma  dal  sec. 
VIII  al  XIV.  Bologna.  [1945.]  [31-515 
pp.  exeii  plates.  *4076.03-350 

Kitzinger,  Ernst.  The  horse  and  lion  tapestry 
at  Dunbarton  Oaks;  a  study  in  Coptic  and 
Sassanian  textile  design.  In  Dumbarton 
Oaks  papers.  Cambridge,  Mass.  1946.  No. 
3  PP-  1 1 1-72.  Plates.  *4075a.38.3 

—  A  survey  of  the  early  Christian  town  of 
Stobi.  In  Dumbarton  Oaks  papers.  Cam- 
bridge, Mass.  1946.  No.  3,  pp.  [8]-[  162.I 

Bibliography:  pp.  [154]  161.  *4075a.38.3 

New  York,  Museum  of  modern  art.  Fourteen 
Americans.  Edited  by  Dorothy  C.  Miller, 
with  statements  by  the  artists  and  others. 
Museum  of  Modern  Art,  distributed  by 
Simon  and  Schuster.  [1946.]  80  pp.  Illus. 

4077.01-125 

Puma,  Fernando.  Modern  art  looks  ahead. 
.  .  .  containing  122  half-tone  plates  and  5 
plates  in  full  color.  New  York,  Beechhurst 
Press.  [1947.]  60,  [6]  pp.  Plates. 

4076.07-129 

Smith,  Bernard.  Place,  taste  and  tradition,  a 
study  of  Australian  art  since  1788.  Syd- 
ney. [1945.]  287  (t.  e.  291),  [4]  pp.  Colored 
plates.  4077.05-403 

Costume 

McPharlin,  Paul.  Life  and  fashion  in  Ameri- 
ca, 1650-1900,  pictured  and  annotated. 
New  York,  Hastings  House.  [1946.]  40 
pp.  Illus.  8192.01-114 

Tilton,  Floy  White.  How  to  design  and  make 
smart  clothes.  New  York,  Watts.  [1946.I 
93  pp.   Illus.  8193.06-127 

Crafts.  Furniture 

Osburn,  Bernice  F.  Home  craft  course  in 
Pennsylvania  German  spinning  and  dye- 
ing .  .  .  drawings  by  Burl  N.  Osburn.  Ply- 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


mouth  Meeting,  Pa.,  Mrs.  C.  N.  Keyser. 

1945.  [53]  PP-  Ulus.  8186.07-250 
Symonds,   Robert  Wemyss.   Veneered  wal- 
nut furniture,  1660-1760.  London,  Tiranti. 

1946.  3-2  PP-  5^  (*'.  e.  48)  plates. 

English,  French  and  Spanish.  8185.02— 127 

Volbach,  Wolfgang  Friedrich.  Early  Chris- 
tian mosaics  from  the  fourth  of  the 
seventh  centuries;  Rome,  Naples,  Milan, 
Ravenna;  fourteen  plates  in  color.  Pre- 
face by  Ricarda  Huch,  introduction  by 
W.  F.  Volbach.  Iris  Books,  Oxford  Univ. 
Press.  1946.  13  pp.  14  col.  mounted  plates. 

*8i6sB.ioi 

Drawing,  Engraving,  Photography 

Cartier-Bresson,  Henri.  The  photographs  of 
Henri  Cartier-Bresson.  Text  by  Lincoln 
Kirstein  and  Beaumont  Newhall.  New 
York,  Museum  of  Modern  Art,  distributed 
by  Simon  and  Schuster.  [1947.]  56  pp. 

8147.04-104 

Geiger,  Beinio.  I  disegni  del  Magnasco.  [Pa- 
dova.]  [1945.]  ix-lxxxvi  pp.  12=;  plates  on 
63  II  Illus.  *8i4iB.503 

Gericault,  Jean  Louis  Andre  Theodore, 
isQi-1824.  Gericault :  drawings  and  water- 
colors.  By  Klaus  Berger.  New  York,  H. 
Bittner.  1946.  34  pp.  52  plates.  *8i4i.c6-no 

Haight,  Anne  Lyon,  editor.  Portrait  of  Latin 
America  as  seen  by  her  print  makers. 
New  York,  Hastings  House.  [1946.]  viii. 
180  pp.  Plates.  8152.08-190 

Watson,  Ernest  W.  Outdoor  sketching,  pre- 
senting some  fundamental  principles  for  the 
guidance  of  students  of  outdoor  sketching 
and  picture  making.  New  York,  Watson- 
Guptill  Publications.  1946.  101  pp.  Plates. 

8142.06-  113 

Iconography 

Beaton,  Cecil.  Chinese  album.  [London.] 
Batsford.  [1946.]  77  pp.  4098.04-153 

A  supplementary  volume  to  the  auhor's  Far  East, 
published  1045. 

Hoyningen-Huene,  Georg.  Mexican  heritage ; 
photographs  by  Hoyningen-Huene  with 
Alfonso  Reyes.  New  York,  Augusthi. 
[1946.  136  pp.  Plates.  4098.04-118 

Museums 

Frankfurter,  Alfred  M.  Supplement  to  the 

Kress  collection  in  the  National  gallery. 

New  York,  Art  Foundation.  1946.  68  pp. 

Plates.  *406i.05-2o8 
Moore,  Bernice  Starr.  Art  in  our  community. 

Caxton  Printers.  1947.  186  pp.  Illus. 

4061.07-  859 

Painting.  Sculpture 
Alschuler,  Rose,  and  La  Berta  Weiss  Hatt- 
wick.  Painting  and  personality,  a  study  of 
young  children.  Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1947.I 
2  v.  Plates.  4084.07-909 

An  experimental  study  oi  children's  choice  oi 
materials  and  usage,  with  observation  of  their  work 
with  crayon,  clay,  blocks,  etc.,  besides  their  paint- 
ing. 

Barbeac,  Charles  Marius.  Painters  of  Quebec. 
Toronto,  Ryerson.  [1946.]  48  pp.  Illus. 

8062.09-103 


275 

Berenson,  Bernhard.  A  Sienese  painter  of  the 
Franciscan  legend  .  .  .  twenty-six  illus- 
trations in  collotype.  London,  Dent.  1909. 
xii,  74  pp.  4102.07-61R 

Originally  published  in  the  Burlington  Magazine. 
A  comparison  of  Sassetta's  and  Giotto's  paintings 
of  Saint  Francis. 

Bustanoby,  Jacques  Henri.  Principles  of 
color  and  color  mixing.  McGraw-Hill. 
1947.  xi,  131  pp.  Plates.  8070.07-147 

Includes  blank  spaces  for  mounting  pigment  and 
color  samples. 

Cogniat,  Raymond.  Soutine,  par  Raymond 
Cogniat.  Paris.  [1945.]  11-36  pp.  Plates. 

*8o63.o8-9ii 

The  work  of  Haim  Soutine,  1894-1943. 

Delpy,  Egbert.  Fritz  Klimsch;  Geleitwort 
von  Egbert  Delpy.  Mit  siebenundsechzig 
Abbildungen.  Berlin.   [1942.]   [72]  pp. 

*8o83.o8-670 

Ernst,  Max,  and  Paul  Elvard.  Misfortunes  of 
the  immortals.  [New  York,]  The  Black- 
Sun  Press.  1943.  44  pp.  Plates. 

In  English  and  French.  *4I09.O7— 112 

Feibusch,  Hans.  Mural  painting  .  .  .  with  an 
introduction  by  Sir  Charles  Reilly  and 
fifty-eight  illustrations.  London.  Black. 
1946.  92  pp.  Plates.  8078.02-104 

Huyghe,  Rene.  La  peinture  frangaise;  la 
peinture  actuelle.  Notices  biographiques 
par  Yves  Sjoberg  . -.  .  Paris.  [1945.]  14, 
[10]  pp.  60  plates.  *8o63.o8-i23 

At  head  of  title :  Germain  Bazin,  Jacques  Combe, 
Michel  Florisoone,  Rene  Huyghe,  Charles  Sterling. 

Janis,  Harriet,  and  Sidney  Janis.  Picasso, 
the  recent  years,  1939-1946.  Doubleday. 
xii,  211  pp.  Illus.  8063.07-847 

Laprade,  Jacques.  Georges  Seurat.  Monaco. 
[Paris.  1945.]  xiii,  96pp.  Plates. 

*8o63. 06-893 

Rouault,  Georges.  Soliloques.  Avant-propos 
de  Claude  Roulet.  Neuchatel  [Zurich.] 
1944.  13-207  pp.  Plates.  *8o63.o8-867 

Taubes,  Frederic.  The  amateur  painter's 
handbook  .  .  .  photographs  by  Walfred 
Moore.  Dodd,  Mead.  1947.  xxiv,  114  pp. 
Illus.  8070.06-104 


History 

America 

Haring,  Clarence  Henry.  The  Spanish  empire 
in  America.  Oxford  Univ.  1947.  viii,  388 
pp.  F1410.H25 

"This  bcok  had  its  inception  in  a  series  of  twelve 
lectures  delivered  in  the  spring  of  1934  at  the  In- 
stitute hispano-cubano  of  the  University  of  Seville 
in  Spain." 

Bibliography  pp.  349-376. 

Jones,    Richard   Seelye.   A   history   of  the 
American  Legion.  Bobbs-Merrill.  [1946.] 
.  393  PP-  Plates.  D570.A1J6 
Kincaid,  Robert  Lee.  The  Wilderness  road. 
Bobbs-Merrill.  [1947  ]  392  pp.  Plates 

F452.K5 

Colonization,  trailblazing,  Indian  fighting,  and  in; 
dustrial  development  along  the  Wilderness  Road  oi 
Virgina,  Tennessee  and  Kentucky. 
"From  1775  to  1800  it  was  the  principal  overland 
entry  into  the  limitless  reaches  of  the  West  .  .  . 
During  the  Civil  War  it  was  of  strategic  import- 
ance in  the  movement  of  armies." — Foreword. 


276  MORE  BOOKS: 

Livezey,  William  E.  Mahan  on  sea  power. 
Univ.  of  Oklahoma.  1947.  xiii,  334  pp. 

E182.M254 

"Books  and  articles  by  Mahan":  pp.  301-311. 
"Selected  bibliography":    pp.  312-326. 

Europe 

Ault,  Warren,  Europe  in  modern  times. 
Heath.  [1946.]  xvi,  859  pp.  D209.A85 

"For  further   reading":   pp.  [82i]-S3S. 

Brogan,  Denis  William.  French  personalities 
and  problems.  Knopf.  1947.  ix.  240  pp. 

DC33.7.B84  1947 

Includes  articles  on  Maurice  Barres,  Charles  Maur- 
ras,  De  Gaulle,  "The  Case  of  Darlan,"  etc. 

Dorjahn,  Alfred  P.  .  .  .  Political  forgiveness 
in  old  Athens;  the  amnesty  of  403  B.  C. 
Northwestern  Univ.  1946.  56  pp. 

*36oo  A. 162.13 

Manning,  Clarence  Augustus.  The  story  of 
the  Ukraine.  New  York,  Philosophical  Li- 
brary. [1947.]  326  pp.  DK508.M28 

Deals  chiefly  with  the  long  struggle  of  the  Ukrain- 
ian people  for  freedom. 

Soloveytchik,  George.  Russia  in  perspective. 
Norton.   [1947.]   244  pp.  DK41.S672 

Palestine.  Near  and  Far  East 
Barbour,  Nevill.  Palestine:  star  or  crescent? 
New  York,  Odyssey  Press.  1947.  x.  310 
pp.  Illus.  DS149.B325  1947 

London  edition  has  title:  "Nisi  dominus;  a  Survey 
of  the  Palestine  Controversy." 

Chiang,  Kai-shek.  China's  destiny  and  Chi- 
nese economic  theory.  .  .  with  notes  and 
commentary  by  Philip  Jaffe.  New  York, 
Roy  Publishers.  [1947.]  347  pp. 

DS740.Cs  1947 
Crossman,  Richard.  Palestine  mission,  a  per- 
sonal record.  Harper.  1947.  viii,  210  pp. 

DS126.4.C7 

A  brief  study  of  the  problems  of  Palestine  from 
many  angles.  The  author  includes  descriptions  of 
the  Jews  in  Europe  and  accounts  of  the  political 
efforts  of  the  Jews  to  open  Palestine  to  further 
Jewish  immigration. 

Crum,  Bartley  C.  Behind  the  silken  curtain, 
a  personal  account  of  Anglo-American 
diplomacy  in  Palestine  and  the  Middle 
East.  Simon  and  Schuster.  1947.  xiv,  297 
pp.  DS126.4.C75 

The  author  was  appointed  one  of  the  six  American 
members  of  the  Anglo-American  Committee  of  In- 
quiry on  Palestine.  He  describes  conditions  and 
opinions  in  respect  to  displaced  Jews  and  Zionism 
which  he  discovered  in  Europe,  as  well  as  the 
situation  in  Palestine. 

"What  our  American  forebears  fought  for  in  the 
eighteenth  century,  the  Jewish  pioneers  are  fight- 
ing for  today." — Preface. 

Parkes,  James.  The  emergence  of  the  Jewish 
problem,  1878-1939.  Issued  under  the 
auspices  of  the  Royal  institute  of  inter- 
national affairs.  Oxford  Univ.  1946.  xxiv, 
259  pp.  DS141.P318 
"Bibliographical  notes,"  pp.  245-252. 

Roth,  Cecil.  The  history  of  the  Jews  of  Italy. 
Philadelphia,  Jewish  Publication  Soc.  of 
America.  5706-1946.  xiv,  575  pp.  Plates. 

DS135  I  8R6 

Smith,  Robert  Aura.  Divided  India.  McGraw- 
Hill.    [1947.]   vi,   259  pp.  DS480..83.S6 

An  explanation  of  the  Indian  problem  written  for 
an  American  audience. 


A  BULLETIN 

Speiser,  E.  A.  The  United  States  and  the 
Near  East  .  .  .  Maps  prepared  under  the 
cartographic  direction  of  Arthur  H.  Rob- 
inson. Harvard.  1947.  xvi,  263  pp.  Illus. 

DS63.S6 


World  War  II 

Bernstein,  Victor  H.  Final  judgment;  the 
story  of  Nuremberg  .  .  .  with  an  intro- 
duction by  Max  Lerner.  New  York,  Boni 
&  Gaer.  1947.  xii,  289  pp.  D804.G42B4 

Browder,  Earl  Russell.  War  or  peace  with 
Russia?  New  York,  Wyn.  1947.  190pp. 

E744.B77 

Ciechanowski,  Jan.  Defeat  in  victory.  Double- 
day.  1947.  xvi,  397  PP-  D754.P7C5 

The  inside  story  of  the  betrayal  of  Poland  to  the 
Russians  during  and  after  the  War. 

Cornish,  Louis  C.  Transylvania,  the  land  be- 
yond the  forest.  Philadelphia,  Dorrance. 
[1947.]   vi,  [7]-258  pp.  D821.T7C6 

Appendix  (pp.  [i97]-258)  :  The  Moscow-Rou- 
manian armistice.  —  The  British-French  proposed 
union.  —  The  Saxons,  reprinted  from  "Erdely," 
Budapest,  1940,  ...  —  The  Hungarian  minorities, 
by  Hon.  Tibor  Eckhardt,  an  address  delivered  to 
the  League  of  nations.  —  Transylvania's  situation 
in  Hungary  and  Europe,  by  Count  Paul  Teleki. 

Dark  side  of  the  moon,  The.  Scribner.  1947. 
xvii,  299  pp.  D754.P7D3  1947 

"The  manuscript  of  this  book  came  into  my  hands 
over  a  year  ago.  The  book  is  the  story  of  what 
happened  to  Poland,  and  of  what  happened  to  in- 
numerable Poles,  between  1939  and  1945.  It  is  also 
a  book  about  the  U.S.S.R.  It  is  incidentally  a 
book  about  Europe  .  .  ." — Preface  by  T.  S. 
Eliot. 

Deane,  John  Russell.  The  strange  alliance; 
story  of  our  efforts  at  wartime  co-oper- 
ation with  Russia.  Viking.  1947.  viii, 344 
.  PP-  D754.R9D4 

Gibson,  Guy.  Enemy  coast  ahead,  with  an 
introduction  by  Marshal  of  the  Royal  air 
force  Sir  Arthur  Harris  .  .  .  London. 
Joseph.    [1946.]    302  pp.    D786.G52  1946 

Personal  experiences  of  an  R.A.F.  heavy  bomber 
pilot.  Includes  a  thrilling  account  of  the  bombing 
of  the  Mohne  and  Elder  dams. 

Keith,  Agnes  Newton.  Three  came  home  .  .  . 
sketches  by  the  author  and  Don  Johnston. 
Little,  Brown.  1947.  [xi]-xv,  316  pp. 

D805.B6K4 

Experiences  of  the  author  and  her  family  in  Japa- 
nese concentration  camps  in  Borneo. 

Hansen,  Harold  Albert,  editor.  Fighting  for 
freedom;  historic  documents,  selected  and 
edited,  with  interpretive  comments  [by] 
Harold  A.  Hansen,  John  G.  Herndon 
[and]  William  B.  Langsdorf.  Winston. 
[1947-]   x,  502  pp.  D735.H3 

Hough,  Frank  Olney.  The  island  war;  the 
United  States  Marine  corps  in  the  Pacific. 
Lippincott.  [1947.]  xv,  413  pp.  Plates. 

D769.369.H6 

Monaghan,  Forbes  J.  Under  the  Red  Sun;  a 
letter  from  Manila.  New  York,  The  Dec- 
Ian  X.  McMullen  Co.  1946.  279  pp. 

D802.P5M6 

Schlabrendorff,  Fabian  von.  They  almost 
killed  Hitler,  based  on  the  personal  ac- 
count of  Fabian  von  Schlabrendorff  pre- 
pared and  edited  by  Gero  v.  S.  Gaevernitz. 
Macmillan.  1947.  x,  150  pp.  DD256.S3415 
Mr.   Gaevernitz,  as  assistant  to  the  Chief  of  the 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


277 


American  Office  of  Strategic  Services  Mission  to 
Switzerland,  found  anions  the  German  political 
prisoners,  held  by  SS  guards  \n  Italy  and  liberated 
by  American  forces,  Fabian  von  Schlabrendorff, 
prominent  in  the  secret  German  Resistance  move- 
ment by  high-ranking  army  officers. 
A  German  version,  with  variations  in  the  text,  was 
published  in  Zurich  in  1946  under  the  title. 
"Offiziere  gegen  Hitler." 


Language 


Fries,  Charles  Carpenter.  Teaching  and  learn- 
ing English  as  a  foreign  language.  Univ. 
of  Michigan.  1945.  vii,  153  pp. 
"Lithoprinted."  *PE-2S.MS3  no.  I 


Literature 

Drama 

Dunkin,  Paul  Shaner.  Post-Aristophanic 
comedy  studies  in  the  social  outlook  of 
middle  and  new  comedy  at  both  Athens 
and  Rome.  Univ.  of  Illinois.  1946.  192  pp. 

*449i.  186.31  No.  3-4 

Bibliography:   pp.    1 77—18 1 . 

Job,  Thomas.  Therese,  a  tragedy  in  two 
acts.  S.  French.  [1947.]  102  pp.  Plates. 

PQ2521.T42J6 

From  "Therese  Raquin,"  by  Emile  Zola. 

Sartre,  Jean  Paul.  No  exit  (Huis  clos)  a 
play  in  one  act,  and  The  flies  (Les 
mouches)  a  play  m  three  acts.  English 
versions  by  Stuart  Gilbert.  Knopf.  1947. 
3-166  pp.  PQ2637.A82H82  1947 

Published  in  Great  Britain  under  the  title  The 
flies  and  In  camera  in  1946. 

History  of  Literature 

Beyer,  Werner  W.  Keats  and  the  daemon 
king.  Oxford  Univ.  1937.  xii,  414  pp. 

PR4837.B48  1947 
Brooks,   Cleanth.   The   well   wrought  urn; 
studies  in  the  structure  of  poetry.  Reynal 
&   Hitchcock.    [  1947.  ]   xi,  270  pp. 

PR502.B7 

"The  new  criticism"  used  in  ten  essays,  each  in- 
terpreting a  poem  respectively  by  Donne,  Shake- 
speare, Milton,  Herrick,  Pope,  Gray,  Wordsworth, 
Keats,  Tennyson,  and  Yeats. 

Flores,  Angel,  editor.  The  Kafka  problem. 
New  Directions.  [1946.]  xii.  468  po.  lllus. 

PT2621.A26Z7 

"An  effort  has  been  made  to  include  analyses  of 
the  literary,  philosophical  and  social  factors  which 
left  their  mark  on  Kafka's  work,  as  well  as  the 
reasons  for  his  continuing  and  growing  influence  in 
the  literature  and  thought  of  today." — Introduction. 
By  numerous  critics. 

Grierson,  J.  C.  and  J.  C.  Smith.  A  critical 
history  of  English  poetry.  Oxford  Univ. 
1946.   viii,   593  pp.         PR502.G76  10/16 

"A  select  bibliography":  pp.  571-585. 

Harding,  Davis  P.  Milton  and  the  renais- 
sance: Ovid.  Univ.  of  Illinois.  1946.  105 
pp.  *449i.i86.so.No.  4 

Bibliography:  pp.  100-105. 

Hinkley,  Laura  L.  Ladies  of  literature.  New 
York,  Hastings  House.  [1946.]  374  pp. 

PR115.H5 

At   head   of   title:    Fanny    Burney.    Jane  Austen, 
Charlotte    and    Emily    Bronte,    Elizabeth  Barrett 
Browning,  George  Eliot. 
Bibliography:   pp.  362-365. 


Lavrin,  Janko.  Dostoevsky,  a  study.  Mac- 
millan.  1947.  161  pp.  PG3328.Z6L3  1947 

Nykl,  Alois  Richard.  Hispano- Arabic  poetry, 
and  its  relations  with  the  old  Provencal 
troubadours.  Baltimore.  1946.  xxvii,  416 
pp.  Plates.  PJ7755-N8 

Winters,  Yvor.  Edwin  Arlington  Robinson. 
Norfolk,  Conn.,  New  Directions  Books. 
[1946.]  162  pp.  PS3535.O  25Z94 

A  study  of  Robinson's  poems. 

Local  History 

Atherton,  Gertrude.  My  San  Francisco,  a 
wayward  biography.  Bobbs-Merrill.  1946. 
334  pp.  Plates.  F869.S3A85 

Informal  memories  of  life  in  San  Francisco  are 
added  to  accounts  of  its  history  and  descriptions. 
Includes  chapters  on  "San  Francisco  Bookstores," 
"A  Few  of  Our  Illustrious  Dead,"  "Our  Literati," 
"Clubdom,"  etc. 

Jennings,  John  Edward.  Boston,  cradle  of 
Liberty,  1630-1776.  Jennings.  Doubleday- 
1947-  x,  335  pp.  Plates.       F73.4.J4  1947 

A  popular  history  of  Boston  written  by  the  author 
of  Salem  Frigate. 

Jones,  Herbert  G.  The  isles  of  Casco  bay  in 
fact  and  fancy  .  .  .  with  pen  and  ink 
sketches  by  the  author.  Portland,  Me., 
Jones  Book  Shop.  1946.  141  pp.  Plates. 

F27.C9J6 

Morgan,  Dale  Lowell.  The  Great  salt  lake. 
Bobbs-Merrill.  [1947.]  432  pp.  Plates. 

F832.G7M6 

"Bibliographical  note":  pp.  411—422. 

Nelson,  Bruce  Opie.  Land  of  the  Dacotahs. 
Univ.  of  Minnesota.  [1946.]  354  pp.  Plates. 

F598.N42 

Wright,  William,  1820-18Q9.  The  big  bonanza ; 
an  authentic  account  of  the  discovery,  his- 
tory, and  working  of  the  world-renowned 
Ccmstock  lode  of  Nevada,  including  the 
present  condition  of  the  various  mines 
situated  thereon,  sketches  of  the  most 
prominent  men  interested  in  them,  inci- 
dents and  adventures  connected  with  min- 
ing, the  Indians,  and  the  country;  amusing 
stories,  experiences,  anecdotes,  etc.,  etc., 
and  a  full  exposition  of  the  production  of 
pure  silver,  by  Dan  De  Quille  (William 
Wright).  Introduction  by  Oscar  Lewis. 
Knopf.  1947.  [vii]-xli.  439,  viii  pp.  Ulus. 

TN.413.N25W8  1947 

First  edition,  1876,  has  title:  "History  of  the  big 
Bonanza." 

Introduction  includes  hitherto  unpublished  letters 
of  Samuel  Langhorne  Clemens. 


Music 

Literature 

Carson,  William  G.  B.  St.  Louis  goes  to  the 
opera,  1837-1941.  [Saint  Louis,]  Missouri 
Historical  Soc.  1946.  44  pp.  Illus. 

ML1711.8.S15C3 

Dexter,  Dave.  Jazz  cavalcade,  the  inside  story 
of  jazz  .  .  .  with  a  foreword  by  Orson 
Welles.  New  York,  Criterion.  1946.  xi,  258 
pp.  ML3561.J3D48 

"A    selected   bibliography":    pp.  238-246. 

Piston,  Walter.  Counterpoint.  Norton.  [1947I 
Piston.  Norton.  [1947.]  235  pp.  MT55.P67 
"Musical  illustrations  drawn  by  Mario  Carmosino." 


278 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Planta,  Phyllis  Virginia.  How  to  make  music 
on  the  harmonica.  New  York,  Sentinel 
Books.  [1945.]  109  pp.  Ulus.. 

MT682.P71H7  1945 

Includes  music. 

"Books  of  songs  arranged  for  harmonica  playing": 
pp.  107—109. 

"Harmonica  phonograph  recordings":  pp.  73-74. 

Slonimsky,  Nicolas.  The  road  to  music.  Dodd, 
Mead.  1947.  ix,  178  pp.  MT6.S6 


Scores 

Appel,  Richard  Gilmore.  [Collection  of 
choruses.  1914-36.]  5  pts.  in  1  v. 

*Mi495.A65 

Contents.  —  [pt.  1]  Blessed  is  the  man.  —  [pt.  2] 
In  Flanders  fields;  poem  by  John  McCrae.  — 
[pt.  3]  Benedicite,  omnia  opera  Domini.  —  [pt.  4] 
Benedicite,  omnia  opera  Domini ;  unison  setting  in 
D.  —  [pt.  5]  The  office  of  Holy  Communion,  set 
to  music  by  Bach. 

Diamond,  David.  Five  songs  by  David  Dia- 
mond. From  the  Margaret  Webster  pro- 
duction, The  tempest,  by  William  Shake- 
speare, presented  by  Cheryl  Crawford. 
Chapptll.    [1945.]    3-1 1  pp.  M1518.D53F5 

For  solo  voice  with  piano  accompaniment. 
Contents.  —  Come  unto  these  yellow  sands.  —  Full 
fathom  five.  —  While  you  here  do  snoring  lie.  — 
No  more  dams  I'll  make  for  fish.  —  Where  the 
bee  sucks. 

Gaul,  Harvey.  Songs  of  the  early  patriots; 
built  on  themes  by  William  Billings  and 
freely  treated.  [Fischer.]  1943.  7  pp. 

For  organ.  M1I.G38S6 

Gems  of  melody.  Part  two  ...  A  collection 
of  old  Irish  melodies  with  accompaniment 
for  piano  or  harp.  Gaelic  and  English 
words.  Dublin,  Cork,  Pigott.  [194-?]  39  pp. 

M1744.G45 

Translations  and  arrangements  by  Carl  G.  Harde- 
beck. 

Locatelli,  Pietro  Antonio,  1695-1764.  Concerto 
grosso  nr.  8  (F-moll)  mit  Pastorale  aus 
Op.  1,  1721;  fur  2  Solo-Violinen,  2  Solo- 
Violin,  Solo-Violoncello,  Streichquintett 
u.  Klavier  (auch  mit  einfacher  Besetzung 
ausfiihrbar).  Leipzig.  [1910.]  21  pp. 

*Mno5.L63  no.  8 

Milhaud,  Darius.  Four  sketches.  New  York, 
Mercury  Music  Corp.  [1942.]  12,  10,  13. 
[11]  pp.  *Mio45.Ms4F6 

Orchestral  score  reproduced  from  manuscript  copy. 
Contents.  —  Eglogue.  —  Madrigal.  ■ —  Alemeda.  — 
Sobre  la  loma. 

Mittler,  Franz,  editor  and  arranger.  Great  bal- 
let music.  New  York,  Musicord  Publi- 
cations.   1945.   32  pp.  M33.5.M58G7 

For  piano  solo. 

Mohaupt,  Richard.  Die  Wirtin  von  Pinsk, 
Oper  in  drei  Akten  von  Richard  Mohaupt ; 
Text  von  Kurt  Naue  (frei  nach  Goldonis 
"Mirandolina") ;  Klavier-Auszug  mit  Ge- 
sang  von  Felix  Greissle.  Wien.  1937.  316 
pp.  *Mi503.M75Ws 

Rodgers,  Richard.  Carousel,  a  musical  play 
based  on  Ferenc  Molnar's  "Liliom"  as 
adapted  by  Benjamin  F.  Glaser;  music  by 
Richard  Rodgers;  book  and  lyrics  by 
Oscar  Hammerstein,  2nd  .  .  .  Vocal  score 
(edited  by  Dr.  Albert  Sirmay).  New 
York,  Williamson  Music.  1945.  190  pp. 

*Mi503.R63C3 

Vocal  score  with  piano  accompaniment. 


Saminsky,  Lazare.  The  daughter  of  Jephta, 
cantata-pantomine  [sic]  op.  37.  Paris. 
1937.  63  pp.  M2023.S35D3 

Vocal  score  with  piano  accompaniment. 
Text  in  English  and  French :  pp.   [3-7]  ;  words  to 
a  part  of  the  music  in  transliterated  Hebrew ;  the 
rest  in  English  and  French. 

Simon,  Henry  W.,  editor.  A  treasury  of 
grand  opera  .  .  .  edited,  with  the  stories, 
history,  and  music  described  in  detail  .  .  . 
Piano  arrangements  by  Albert  Simay, 
translations  by  George  Mead,  illustrations 
by  Rafaello  Busoni ;  music  supervisor:  Wil- 
liam Steinberg.  Simon  and  Schuster. 
[1946.]  403  pp.  M1507.S6T7 

For  solo  voices  and  piano. 

Contents.  —  Don  Giovanni.  —  Lohengrin.  —  La 
traviata.  —  Faust.  — -  Aida.  —  Carmen.  —  Pag- 
liacci. 

Navigation 

George,  Albert  Joseph.  The  cap'n's  wife,  the 
diary  of  Didama  Kelley  Doane  of  West 
Harwick,  Massachusetts,  wife  of  Cap'n 
Uriel  Doane,  on  a  two-year  voyage  with 
her  husband  aboard  the  ship  Rival,  1866- 
1868,  and  the  log  of  the  clipper  Granger, 
Uriel  Doane,  master  ...  by  Albert  Joseph 
George.  Syracuse  University.  1946.  [7]- 
130  pp.  Illus.  G530.G36 

Stefansson,  Vilhjalmur,  editor.  Great  adven- 
tures and  explorations  from  the  earliest 
times  to  the  present,  as  told  by  the  ex- 
plorers themselves;  edited,  with  an  intro- 
duction and  comments,  by  Vilhjalmur 
Stefansson,  with  the  collaboration  of 
Olive  Rathbun  Wilcox;  maps  designed  by 
Richard  Edes  Harrison.  Dial  Press.  1947. 
xii,  788  pp.  G80.S78 

Philosophy 

D'Arcy,  Martin  Cyril.  The  mind  and  heart 
of  love,  lion  and  unicorn;  a  study  in  eros 
and  agape.  Holt.  [1947.]  333  PP- 

BF575.L8D3  1947 

The  author  considers  many  historical  manifestations 
and  expressions  of  passionate,  romantic,  and  Chris- 
tian love  or  charity,  from  those  of  the  Gnostics,  to 
those  of  contemporary  artists  and  writers. 

Howard,  Delton  Thomas.  Analytical  syllog- 
istics;  a  pragmatic  interpretation  of  the 
Aristotelian  logic.  Evanston.  1946.  ix,  181 
pp.  3600a. 162. 15 

Needham,  Joseph.  History  is  on  our  side,  a 
contribution  to  political  religion  and 
scientific  faith.  Macmillan.  1947.  226  pp. 

QH31.N4A3  1947 

A  physiologist's  plea  for  a  Christian  materialism, 
with  a  good  word  for  the  Russian  Communist  sys- 
tem. Includes  also  chapters  on  "The  Gist  of  Evo- 
lution," and  "The  Nazi  Attack  on  International 
Science." 

Schultz-Naumburg,  Paul.  Das  Gliick  der 
Landschaft,  von  ihrem  Verstehen  und 
Geniessen.  Berlin.  1942.  104  pp. 

*BH30i.L3S4 

Williams,  Donald.  The  ground  of  induction. 
Harvard.   1947.  ix,  213  pp.  BC91.W5 

Politics  and  Government 

Dewey,  Thomas  E.  Public  papers  of  Thomas 
E.  Dewey,  fifty-first  governor  of  the  State 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


279 


of  New  York.  1944.  Albany.  1946.  840  pp. 

*J87.N7i7  1944 

At  head  of  title:  State  of  New  York. 

—  Public  papers  of  Thomas  E.  Dewey,  fifty- 
first  governor  of  the  state  of  New  York. 
10-15-  Albany.  1946.  741  PP 

*J87.N7i7  1945 

Hankey,  Lord.  Diplomacy  by  conference; 
studies  in  public  affairs,  1920-1946.  Put- 
nam.   [1946  ]    1/9  PP-     JX1543.H3  1946 

Holdsworth,  Sir  William  Searle,  1874-1944. 
Essays  in  law  and  history  .  .  .  Edited  by 
A.  L.  Goodhart  and  H.  G.  Hanbury. 
Clarendon.  1946.  xv,  302  pp.  JF432.G8H7 

Maclver,  R.  M.  The  web  of  government. 
Macmillan.    194".   ix,   498  pp.  JC251.M2 

Contents.  —  The  Emergence  of  Government.  — 
The  Bases  of  Authority.  —  The  Forms  of  Govern- 
ment. —  The  Transformations  of  Government.  — 
Conclusions  on  the  Theory  of  Government. 

Schlesinger,  Rudolf.  Soviet  legal  theory,  its 
background  and  development.  London, 
K.  Paul,  Trench,  Trubner.  [1946.I  viii,  299 
pp.  JF432.R9S3  1946 

Watson,  Paul  Barron.  Our  Constitution,  as 
adopted  by  the  Constitutional  convention 
and  ratified  by  the  thirteen  original  states. 
Cambridge,  Mass..  Univ.  Press.  1946.  v, 
166  pp.   '  JK146.W3 

Woodlock,  Thomas  Francis,  1866-1945. 
Thinking  it  over,  edited,  and  with  an  in- 
troduction, by  James  Edward  Tobin.  New 
York,  McMullen.   1947.  iii-xvi,  292  pp. 

AC8.W86 

A  selection  of  papers  from  the  column  published 
by  the  author  in  the  Wall  street  journal  from  1931 
to  1945- 

Science 

Physics.  Chemistry 

Bunn,  Charles  William.  Chemical  crystallo- 
graphy; an  introduction  to  optical  and 
x-ray  methods.  Clarendon.  [1946.]  xii,  422 
pp.  Illus.  XIII  plates.  *8299.ig 

Campbell,  John  W.  The  atomic  story.  Holt. 
[I947-]  297  pp.  Plates.  8216.78 

Frisch,  Otto  Robert.  Meet  the  atoms ;  a  popu- 
lar guide  to  modern  physics.  New  York, 
Wyn.  1947.  xiv,  226  pp.  8216.79 

Jansen,    Alfred.    Applied    engineering  me- 
chanics. McGraw-Hill.  1947.  xi,  316  pp. 
Hill.  1947.  xi,  316  pp.  8212.28 

Mattauch,  Josef.  Nuclear  physics  tables  .  .  . 
And  an  introduction  to  nuclear  physics, 
by  S.  Fluegge  .  .  .  Translated  from  the 
German  by  Eugene  P.  Gross  and  S.  Barg- 
mann.  New  York,  Intersctence  Publishers. 
,1946.  ['■  c.  1947.]  173  pp.  IHus.  *82i6.8o 

Millikan,  Robert  Andrews.  Electrons  (+  and 
— ),  protons,  photons,  neutrons,  meso- 
trons, and  cosmic  rays.  Revised  edition. 
1947-  Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1947.]  x,  642  pp. 
Plates.  8256.8S 

"Published  January  1935:  second  edition  January 
'947." 

Miscellaneous 

Conant,  James  Bryant.  On  understanding 
science;  an  historical  approach.  Yale.  1947. 
xv,  145  pp.  Illus.  Q181.C56 

"Notes  and  bibliography":  pp.  [m]-i42. 


Flint,  Richard  Foster.  Glacial  geology  and 
the  Pleistocene  epoch.  Wiley.  [147.I  xviii, 
589  pp.  Illus.  QE696.F55 
"References":  pp.  536-575- 

Hoel,  Paul  G.  Introduction  to  mathematical 
statistics.  Wiley.  [1947.]  x,  258  pp. 

QA276.H79 

Nordenmark,    N.    V.    E.    Marten  Stromcr. 

Stockholm.  [1944.]  90pp.  *39i2.64  1944 
—  Olof    Hiorter,    Observator    regius,  1696- 

1750.  Stockholm.  [1942.]  102  pp. 

*39i2.64  1942 


Sociology 


Colcord,    Joanna   C.    Your   community;  its 
provision  for  health,  education,  safety,  and 
welfare  .  .  .  revised  by  Donald  S.  Howard. 
Russell  Sage  Foundation.  1947.  263  pp. 
Third  edition.  HN29.C6  1947 

"Your  Community"  is  successor  to  an  earlier  work, 
"Whit  social  Workers  should  know  about  their 
own    Communities,"   by   Margaret   F.  Byington. 

Edgerton,  Alanson  H.  Readjustment  or  revo- 
lution? A  guide  to  economic,  educational, 
and  social  readjustment  of  war  veterans, 
ex-war  workers,  and  oncoming  youth. 
McGraw-Hill.  [1946.]  x,  238  pp.  HN18.E3 

Knight,  Frank  H.  Freedom  and  reform;  es- 
says in  economics  and  social  philosophy. 
Harper.  [1947.]  vii,  409  pp.  HN18.K5 

Essays  selected  by  Hubert  Bonner  and  others,  cf. 
Preface. 

"In  a  sense  a  sequel  to  .  .  .  [the  author's]  Ethics 
of  competition,  published  in  1935." 
Contents.  —  Freedom  as  fact  and  criterion.  — 
Social  science  and  the  political  trend.  ■ —  Pragma- 
tism and  social  action.  —  Ethics  and  economic 
reform.  —  Socialism:   the  nature  of  the  problem. 

—  Religion  and  ethics  in  modern  civilization.  — 
The  meaning  of  democracy :  its  politico-economic 
structure  and  ideals.  —  Science,  philosophy,  and 
social  procedure.  —  Fact  and  value  in  social  science. 

—  Some  notes  on  the  economic  interpretation  of 
history. 

Lesley,  Philip,  editor.  Public  relations  in 
action;  case  studies  from  First  annual 
awards  competition  of  the  American  pub- 
lic relations  association  .  .  .  with  a  fore- 
word by  Robert  E.  Harper.  Ziff-Davis. 
]i947.]  xxi,  280  pp.  Illus.  HM263.L47 

Look.  The  story  of  the  FBI,  by  the  editors 
of  Look,  with  an  introduction  by  J.  Edgar 
Hoover.  Dutton.  1947.  286  pp.  HV8141.L6 

"The  official  picture  history  of  the  Federal  Bureau 
of  Investigation." 

Odum,  Howard  W.  The  way  of  the  South; 

toward  the  regional  balance  of  America. 

Macmillan.  1947.  vi,  350  pp.  HN79.A2  O  4 
Vocational  guidance  research.  Outdoor  jobs 

for  men.  Project  editor:  Lura  Robinson. 

Vanguard.  [1947. 1  xiv,  274  pp.  Plates. 

HF5381.V564 


Technology 

Electrical  Engineering 

Lauer,  Henri.  Servomechanism  fundamentals) 
by  Henri  Lauer,  Robert  Lesnick,  and 
Leslie  E.  Matson.  McGraw-Hill.  1947.  xi, 
277pp.  Illus..  *8oi9.A.5ii 

Mooers,  Calvin,  and  Charlotte  Mooers.  Elec- 
tronics;   what    everyone    should  know. 


280 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Bobbs-Merrill.  [1947.]  231pp.  Plates. 

8017L.64 

General  Engineering 

King,  Charles  H.  Supervisor}'  development 
technique,  by  Charles  H.  King,  manager  of 
manufacturing  Clark  equipment  company, 
Buchanan,  Michigan.  Buchanan.  [1946.] 

Reproduced  from  typewritten  copy.  4ClIoB.2I3 

Michal,  Aristotle  D.  Matrix  and  tensor  cal- 
culus, with  applications  to  mechanics, 
elasticity,  and  aeronautics.  Wiley.  [1947.] 
xiii,  132  pp.  4010D.155 

"Based  on  a  series  of  lectures  .  .  .  given  under 
the  sponsorship  of  the  Engineering,  science,  and 
management  war  training  (ESMWT)  program, 
from  August  1942  to  March  19*3." — Preface. 

Manufacture.  Chemical  Technology 

Armstrong,  E.  Frankland,  and  L.  Mackenzie 
Miall.  Raw  materials  from  the  sea.  Brook- 
lyn, N.  Y.,  Chemical  Pub.  Co.  1946  [i.  e. 
1947.]  xiii,  196  pp.  Illus.  *8o39j.2 

First  published  in  1945  by  Constructive  Publications 
limited.  Leicester,  England. 

Brown,  Derek  Warburton.  Handbook  of  en- 
gineering plastics;  a  reference  book  for 
engineers  and  others  interested  in  plastics 
as  applied  in  the  engineering  and  allied 
industries.  London,  Newnes.  [1946.]  viii, 
336  pp.  Illus.  8031D.58 

"First  published  1943  .  .  .  Third  edition  1946." 

Michelman,  Joseph.  Violin  varnish,  a  plausible 
re-creation  of  the  varnish  used  by  Italian 
violin  makers  between  the  years  1550  and 
1750,  A.  D.  Cincinnati,  Michelman.  1946. 
xi,  185  pp.  8032A.138 

Mechanical  Engineering 

Crook,  W.  Melvin.  Power  for  the  small  boat. 
Dodd,  Mead.  1947.  xi,  169  pp.  Illus. 

4033-256 

Raber,  B.  F.,  and  F.  W.  Hutchinson.  Panel 
heating  and  cooling  analysis.  Wiley.  1947. 
vii,  208  pp.  *4037.203 

Replinger,  John  G.  The  jewelry  repairer's 
handbook.  Peoria,  111.,  Bradley  Polytechnic 
Inst.  1946.  1 10  pp.  *8o35B.65 

Steele,  Jack.  How  to  tune-up  your  automobile. 
New  York,  Norman  W.  Henley  Pub.  Co. 
1947.  xii,  239  pp.  Ulus.  4035B.98 

"Written  as  a  companion  book  to  'How  to  find 
a  short'." — Preface. 

Photography 

Epstein,  Samuel,  and  David  W.  DeArmand. 

How  to  develop,  print  and  enlarge  pic- 
tures. New  York,  Watts.  [1947.]  95  PP- 

8020B.59 

Milner,  C.  Douglas.  Mountain  photography, 
its  art  and  technique  in  Britain  and  abroad. 


New  York,  Focal  Press.  [1946.]  238  pp. 
Plates  *8o2gA.454 
Soubiran,  Julien  J.  The  art  and  technique 
of  photo-engraving.  New  York,  Horan  En- 
graving Co.  1946.]  88  pp.  Illus.  8029D.58 
Revised  edition. 

Miscellaneous 

Du  Val,  Miles  Percy.  And  the  mountains  will 
move;  the  story  of  the  building  of  the 
Panama  canal.  Stanford  Univ.  [1947.]  xvi, 
374  pp.  Plates.  4028C.5 

Li,  K.  C.,  and  Chung  Yu  Wang.  Tungsten; 
its  history,  geology,  ore-dressing,  metal- 
lurgy, chemistry,  analysis,  applications,  and 
economics  ...  2d  edition  reviseed  and  en- 
larged. New  York,  Reinhold  Pub.  Corp. 
1947.  xx,  430  pp.  riates.  8027.223R 

Seibert,  E.  C.  How  to  design  small  sailboats. 
Dodd,  Mead.  1947.  69  pp.  4019C.71 

Travel  and  Description 

Brenner,  Aniu.  Your  Mexican  holiday,  a 
modern  guide.  Maps  and  illustrations  by 
Carlos  Merida,  Jcse  Gardufio  and  Robert 
Winslow.  1947.  revised  edition  with  com- 
plete motor  maps  and  directory.  Putnam. 
[1947.]  xi,  449  pp.  Plates. 

F1209.B82  1947 

Burke,  Thomas,  1887-1945.  Travel  in  England, 
from  pilgrim  and  pack-horse  to  light  car 
and  plane.  London,  Batsford.  [1946.]  vi, 
154  pp.    Plates.  DA600.B8  1946 

Carington,  Dorothy.  The  traveller's  eye.  New 
York,  Pilot  Press.  1947.  381  pp.  XXXII 
plates.  G242.C3 

Includes  excerpts  from  the  writings  of  English 
travellers  from  Tudor  times  to  the  present  day. 

Herron,  Edward  A.  Alaska,  land  of  tomorrow. 
McGraw-Hill.  [1947.]  232  pp.  Plates. 

F909.H55 

Hinkson,  Pamela.  Irish  gold.  Knopf.  1947. 
xxi,   326  pp.  DA925.H5  1947 

"This  book  follows  a  wandering  road  ...  It  tells 
of  Irish  country'  and  people  and  animals  and  birds 
and  of  Irish  skies  and  water  and  history  anil 
dreams  and  hopes  and  of  Irish  saints,  and  of  sin- 
ners also  .  .  ." — Introduction. 

Jesse,  F.  Tennyson.  The  story  of  Burma. 
London,  Macmillan.  1946.  xiii,  206  pp. 

DS485.B81.J4 

"The  object  of  this  book  is  to  present  the  problem 
of  Burma,  a  brief  outline  of  her  people,  her  politics, 
her  religion,  and  her  history." — P.  1. 

Le  Clair,  Robert  Charles.  Three  American 
travellers  in  England:  James  Russell 
Lowell,  Henry  Adams,  Henry  James. 
Philadelphia.  1945.  ix,  223  pp.  PS159.G8L4 

Yeager,  Dorr  Graves.  Your  western  national 
parks,  a  guide.  Dodd,  Mead.  1947.  xiii,  275 
pp.  Plates.  E160.Y4 
"A  selected  bibliography  of  western  national 
parks":   pp.  259-264. 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
Volume  XXII,  Number  8 


Contents 


Page 

A  MUNIFICENT  GIFT  283 

THE  PLAYS  OF  RICHARD  BROME  (with  facsimiles)  285 
By  Elizabeth  Cook 

FRENCH  PRINTS,  1830-1930  302 

By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

REDEDICATION  WEEK  304 

TEN  BOOKS:  SHORT  REVIEWS 

Walter  Johnson  :  William  Allen  White's  America  305 

Hernane  Tavares  de  Sa :  The  Brazilians:  People  of  Tomorrow  305 

Agnes  Rogers  and  Frederick  Lewis  Allen :  /  Remember  Distinctly  306 

Robert  E.  Merriam :  Dark  December  306 
David  J.  Dallin  and  Boris  I.  Nicolaevsky  :  Forced  Labor  in  Soviet  Rtissia  306 

Aubrey  F.  G.  Bell :  Cervantes  307 

Henry  Seidel  Canby:  American  Memoir  307 

Andre  Gide :  The  Journals  of  Andre  Gide  308 

Herbert  Faulkner  West :  The  Mind  on  the  Wing  308 

John  Kieran :  Footnotes  on  Nature  308 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

Dumas  Fils  Purchases  Works  of  Art  309 

A  Puritan  Challenge  to  Richard  Hooker  309 

Edifying  Works  by  T.  S.  Arthur  310 

LIST  OF  RECENTLY-ACQUIRED  BOOKS  311 


* 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17, 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library  15-17  Blagden  St.,  October  194",  Vol.  XXII,  No.  8 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees,  for  free  distribution; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 


OCTOBER,  1947 


A  Munificent  Gift 


THE  Trustees  of  the  Boston  Public  Library  announce  with  great  pleasure 
the  establishment  of  THE  JOHN  DEFERRARI  FOUNDATION  as 
an  irrevocable  trust  for  the  benefit  of  the  Library.  This  has  been  estab- 
lished by  Mr.  John  Deferrari  of  Boston,  a  lifelong  resident  and  business 
man  in  the  city  of  Boston,  to  perpetuate  his  ideals  for  the  solid  develop- 
ment of  character  and  successful  accomplishment  in  life  on  the  part  of 
young  people,  and  particularly  young  men,  of  the  City  of  Boston. 

The  Foundation  has  been  set  up  with  himself  and  the  National  Shaw- 
mut  Bank  of  Boston  as  co-trustees  during  the  donor's  lifetime,  and  with 
the  latter  continuing  as  sole  trustee  following  his  decease. 

At  the  present  time  the  amount  of  the  trust  is  well  over  $1,000,000. 
The  provisions  of  the  Foundation  contemplate  the  accumulation  of  the 
income  of  the  trust  until  the  principal  amount  reaches  the  sum  of  $2,000,000. 
At  that  time  the  amount  of  $1,000,000  is  to  be  paid  to  the  Trustees  of  the 
Boston  Public  Library  for  the  construction  of  an  additional  wing  to  the 
present  Central  Library  building  now  in  Copley  Square  or  to  a  new  Cen- 
tral Library  building  which  may  be  constructed  elsewhere,  said  addition 
or  wing  to  be  named  "The  John  Deferrari  Wing."  Thereafter  the  remain- 
ing $1,000,000  is  to  be  allowed  to  accumulate  once  again  to  the  sum  of 
$2,000,000.  When  that  point  has  been  reached,  the  Foundation  is  to  pay 
the  income  of  the  principal  amount  quarterly  to  the  Trustees  of  the  Pub- 
lic Library,  to  be  used  in  whatever  manner  the  Trustees  shall  see.  fit  for 
the  purpose  of  carrying  on  the  work  of  the  Public  Library.  The  arrange- 
ments of  the  Foundation  further  provide  that  if,  when  the  principal 
amount  of  the  Foundation  has  first  reached  the  sum  of  $2,000,000,  the 
Library  is  not  then  in  need  of  an  additional  wing,  the  Trustees  will  in- 
stead establish  in  the  then  existing  Central  Library  building  a  "John  De- 
ferrari Room." 

The  Trustees  of  the  Public  Library  will  commemorate  in  either 
"The  John  Deferrari  Wing"  or  "The  John  Deferrari  Room"  the  munifi- 


283 


284 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


cent  gift  of  Mr.  Deferrari  with  a  portrait  of  the  donor  and  a  plaque  setting 
forth  the  purpose  of  the  Foundation. 

Mr.  Deferrari's  gift  will  eventually  bring  to  the  Public  Library  a 
total  gift  in  the  sum  of  $3,000,000,  of  which  the  amount  of  $2,000,000  will 
be  in  the  nature  of  a  principal  sum  from  which  the  income  will  be  avail- 
able without  restriction  for  the  general  purposes  of  the  Library.  This  will 
constitute  one  of  the  ranking  gifts  in  the  entire  history  of  the  Library. 

Mr.  Deferrari  was  born  eighty-four  years  ago  in  the  North  End  and 
attended  school  in  Boston.  As  a  young  man  he  began  in  the  fruit  business, 
graduating  from  a  fruit  stand  to  a  small  fruit  store.  Subsequently  he  went 
into  real  estate  and  has  continued  in  this  activity  up  to  the  present  time. 

Mr.  Deferrari  has  been  an  active  user  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
from  his  early  days.  One  of  his  stores  was  next  to  the  old  Boston  Public 
Library  when  it  was  located  on.Boylston  Street,  near  where  the  Colonial 
Theatre  now  stands.  His  few  spare  hours  were  put  to  good  use  in  study 
and  in  enjoyment  through  the  great  opportunities  offered  by  the  Library. 
As  time  went  on  there  developed  in  Mr.  Deferrari's  heart  and  mind  a 
great  respect  for  and  devotion  to  the  Boston  Public  Library  and  the  great 
opportunities  that  it  offers  to  young  men,  regardless  of  race,  creed,  or 
fortune.  With  the  development  of  his  business  and  his  interests,  he  never 
forgot  the  Library,  and  continued  his  interest  in  it  with  its  removal  to 
its  present  central  location  in  Copley  Square. 

The  Trustees  of  the  Public  Library  gratefully  acknowledge  this  fine 
and  far-reaching  gift,  of  which  Mr.  Deferrari's  own  life  well  exemplifies 
the  importance  and  value.  As  a  gift  it  is  aimed  to  inspire  the  young  people 
of  his  native  city  to  move  from  simple  beginnings  to  wide  and  successful 
accomplishment  by  dint  of  application  and  by  sturdy  development  of 
character. 

To  Mr.  Deferrari  the  Trustees  extend  the  deep  gratitude  of  the  Li- 
brary and  the  citizens  of  Boston  whom  it  serves. 


The  Plays  of  Richard  Brome 

By  ELIZABETH  COOK 
I 

THE  dramatic  historians  of  the  seventeenth  century  recorded  that 
Richard  Brome  was  poor  and  that  he  was  Ben  Jonson's  servant; 
nothing'  more  was  said  about  his  life.  A  few  episodes  in  his  later  career 
have  been  discovered  recently,  but  even  the  dates  of  his  birth  and  death 
are  unknown  and  his  character  is  hidden  from  conjecture.  His  plays  are 
all  that  he  has  left. 

Most  of  the  dramatists  who  made  their  living  by  the  theatre  did  not 
care  about  perpetuating  their  fame,  and  the  players  tried  to  stop  thern 
from  publishing  their  work  in  prosperous  years.  As  it  is,  five  of  Brome's 
plays  are  lost,  and  the  plays  which  have  survived  appeared  sporadically 
when  the  theatres  were  in  difficulties  or  during  the  long  silence  of  the 
Commonwealth.  The  most  popular  of  his  early  plays,  The  Northern  Lasse, 
was  printed  in  1632  during  a  visitation  of  the  plague.  The  Sparagus  Garden 
and  The  Antipodes  came  out  in  1640,  not  long  before  the  theatres  were 
closed  by  order  of  Parliament.  Twelve  years  later  Brome  published  A 
JoviaU  Crew;  a  quarto  like  the  previous  first  editions,  but  much  more 
handsomely  printed  in  larger  type.  He  died  before  the  end  of  1653,  for 
in  the  course  of  that  year  Alexander  Brome  edited  and  published  a  post- 
humous volume,  Five  New  Playes,  in  octavo,  which  includes  A  Mad  Couple 
Well  Match' d,  The  Novella,  The  Court  Bcgger,  The  City  Wit,  and  The  Damoi- 
selle.  Opposite  the  general  title-page  he  inserted  a  crudely  engraved  por- 
trait of  the  author  which  scarcely  illuminates  his  account  of  him.  In  1657 
another  namesake,  the  stationer  Henry  Brome  —  again  no  relation  to  the 
dramatist  —  published  The  Queen's  Exchange  in  quarto  with  a  small 
double-column  text,  and  promised  another  collected  volume  if  this  play 
sold  well.  He  brought  out  the  second  Five  Nezv  Playes  in  octavo  in  1659, 
containing  The  English  Moor,  The  Love-sick  Court,  The  Covcnt-Garden 
Weeded,  The  Nezv  Academy,  and  The  Queen  and  Concubine. 

These  books  are  rare  and  it  is  unusual  to  find  a  complete  set.  The 
Barton  Collection  of  the  Boston  Public  Library,  which  possesses  a  mag- 
nificent series  of  early  playbooks,  has  copies  of  all  the  first  editions  of 
Brome  except  for  The  Northern  Lasse,  and  it  has  a  copy  of  the  second  edi- 
tion of  this  play  published  in  1663.  The  volumes  are  in  very  fine  condition. 

The  information  on  the  title-pages  of  these  first  editions  is  the  only 
real  evidence  about  the  dates  of  Brome's  plays.  (The  statement  that  The 
Court  Begger  was  "Acted  at  the  Cock-pit,  by  his  Majesties  Servants,  Anno 
1632"  has  been  proved  to  be  false,  but  the  mistake  occurred  through 


285 


286 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


mechanical  transcription  of  the  previous  title-page  in  the  1653  volume.) 
They  give  fairly  reliable  dates  of  performance  for  The  Antipodes,  A  Joviall 
Crew,  and  The  Novella.  The  Covent-Garden  Weeded  must  have  been  written 
at  about  the  same  time  as  Thomas  Nabbes's  play  of  1632,  because  his  pro- 
logue shows  that  there  were  charges  of  plagiarism  current,  and  he  says 
that  he  discovered  the  idea.  But  the  conjectural  dates  of  the  other  plays 
create  a  problem  which  is  too  complicated  to  be  discussed  adequately  here, 
especially  since  Brome  wrote  for  more  than  one  company  at  first.  The 
Court  Beggcr  and  A  Mad  Couple  Well  Match' d  are  known  to  have  belonged 
to  Beeston's  Boys  and  were  presumably  acted  during  Brome's  term  at  the 
Cockpit  from  1639  to  1642.  The  English  Moor  belonged  to  the  new  Queen 
Henrietta's  Company  and  must  have  been  acted  after  1637,  when  they 
moved  into  the  Salisbury  Court.  The  Queen  and  Concubine  is  evidently  a 
Revels  play  and  must  be  prior  to  1637.  It  seems  possible  that  The  Love- 
sick Court  is  the  play  licensed  as  The  Brothers  on  4  November  1626  and 
wrongly  ascribed  to  Shirley.1 

In  1873,  during  the  heyday  of  antiquarian  devotion  to  the  minor 
dramatists  of  the  seventeenth  century,  R.  H.  Shepherd  edited  Brome's 
plays  for  the  series  of  Pearson  reprints  in  London,  following  the  text  of 
the  first  editions  in  punctuation  and  orthography,  except  for  some  slight 
variants  which  may  mean  that  he  used  a  different  issue.  References  are 
given  here  to  his  edition  for  the  sake  of  convenience.  After  this  revival 
two  American  scholars  dealt  with  Brome's  work  —  H.  F.  Allen  in  A 
Study  of  the  Comedies  of  Richard  Brome,  1912;  and  C.  E.  Andrews  in 
Richard  Brome:  A  Study  of  his  Life  and  Works,  191 3,  which  traced  his 
dramatic  career  and  assigned  his  un-Jonsonian  passages  to  the  influence 
of  other  Jacobean  dramatists.  Of  course  Swinburne's  essay,  published  in 
1919  in  his  Contemporaries  of  Shakespeare,  interprets  the  plays  much  more 
enjoyably,  and  in  a  perceptive  paragraph  at  the  end  he  noticed  the  mo- 
dernity of  Brome's  style. 

It  is  more  inviting  to  follow  this  path  now,  especially  since  an  inter- 
est in  the  archetypes  of  Restoration  comedy  is  abroad;  and,  because  Brome 
is  not  a  highly  individual  writer,  it  is  easier  to  see  how  he  deflected  Jon- 
son's  comedy  of  humors  into  a  more  "refined"  comedy  of  manners,  and 
conversely  how  he  brought  the  realism  of  Jonson  and  Dekker  into  the 
new  tragicomedy.  But  his  plays  are  not  mere  specimens  of  the  period: 
his  theatrical  workmanship  is  unusually  good,  and  at  his  best  he  writes 
with  grace  and  competence. 

Brome  stayed  on  as  servant  to  Ben  Jonson  long  after  he  had  served 
his  apprenticeship.  He  was  never  quite  free  of  the  Tribe  of  Ben;  he 
was  too  poor  and  too  plebeian  to  associate  with  the  wits  who  paid 
homage  to  the  Laureate's  dramatic  theories  and  embroidered  upon  them 
the  flourished  patterns  of  Caroline  classicism.  More  than  one  gentleman 


THE  PLAYS  OF  RICHARD  BROME 


287 


revived  Jonson's  irritated  pun  on  Brome's  "sweepings"  from  his  table, 
ten  years  after  The  New  Inn  quarrel  was  over  and  Jonson  had  emended 
the  unkind  line.  There  is  nothing  to  show  that  Brome  enjoyed  any  distin- 
guished literary  connections  besides  the  friendship  of  his  namesake  Alex- 
ander. "The  English  Maecenas,"  the  Duke  of  Newcastle,  might  condescend 
to  a  hack  playwright  and  fish  for  a  compliment  without  implying  famili- 
arity on  either  side. 

Brome  spent  his  years  of  service  at  the  Globe  and  the  Blackfriars, 
where  Jonson  pointed  at  him  crouching  behind  the  arras,  in  the  Induction 
to  Bartholomew  Fair.  His  first  independent  ventures  were  plays  written 
for  the  Red  Bull  and  for  the  Revels  Company,  and  he  continued  to  work 
for  the  King's  Men.  In  1635  he  signed  a  contract  with  the  Salisbury  Court, 
one  of  the  three  private  theatres,  which  was  by  no  means  a  rival  of  the 
Blackfriars  or  the  Cockpit,  to  which  he  moved  in  1639.  Thomas  Randolph, 
who  was  chosen  and  favored  as  Jonson's  successor,  had  tried  out  the 
position  at  the  Salisbury  Court  during  hard  times;  and,  finding  the  com- 
pany unrewarding  and  intractable,  he  fled  back  to  Cambridge  to  take  up 
his  fellowship  at  Trinity  as  soon  as  the  plague  abated  there.  Brome  had 
to  remain  at  the  Salisbury  Court.  Here  he  wrote  plays  on  the  model  of 
Jonson's  because  they  came  readiest  to  hand,  and  his  literary  obedience 
was  still  menial.  He  learned  the  craft  not  from  Jonson's  principles  but 
from  his  practice;  and  his  own  practice  changed  to  accommodate  the 
taste  of  his  audience  and  the  exigencies  of  his  stage.  His  work  reflects 
the  dramatic  age  fairly,  since  he  had  to  mix  old  and  new  wine  without  a 
connoisseur's  scruples;  and  it  is  unusually  open  to  examination  because 
he  did  not  need,  like  a  courtier  or  scholar,  to  pretend  that  his  plays  were 
the  sport  of  idle  moments  and  an  unlabored  brain.  Like  Jonson,  he  was 
not  ashamed  to  show  the  marks  of  his  file,  and  his  acquaintance  ranged 
from  high  to  low  in  life  and  language.  It  was  no  disparagement  to  either 
poet,  Alexander  Brome  reminded  the  scornful  Reader: 

It  seems  (what  ere  we  think)  Ben  thought  it  diminution  for  no  man  to 
attend  upon  his  Muse.  And  were  not  already  the  Antients  too  much  trod 
on,  we  could  name  famous  wits  who  served  far  meaner  Masters  than  Ben 
Johnson.  For,  none  vers'd  in  Letters  but  know  the  wise  Aesop  was  born  and 
bred  a  wretched  slave  .  .  .  and  (which  for  our  purpose  is  most  of  all)  our 
Authors  own  Master  handled  the  Trowel  before  he  grew  acquainted  with 
Seianns  or  Cataline.2 

Brome  always  protested  that  he  was  conscientiously  upholding  the 
old  Jonsonian  drama  against  the  absurd  refinements  of  the  new  stage. 
Many  commendatory  verses  confirmed  his  own  declaration: 

Opinion,  which  our  Author  cannot  court, 

(For  the  deare  daintinesse  of  it)  has,  of  late, 

From  the  old  way  of  Playes  possest  a  Sort 


288 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Only  to  run  to  those,  that  carry  state 
In  Scene  magnificent  and  language  high  .  .  . 
. . .  But  it  is  knowne  (peace  to  their  Memories) 

The  Poets  late  sublimed  from  our  Age, 
Who  best  could  understand,  and  best  devise 

Workes,  that  must  ever  live  upon  the  Stage, 
Did  well  approve,  and  lead  this  humble  way, 

Which  we  are  bound  to  travaile  in  tonight  .  .  .3 

He  writes  as  though  he  were  on  his  guard  against  the  sneers  of  the  courtly 
clique  where  each  had  written  his  "brace  of  plays."  He  has  a  grudge  against 
their  gilt-edged  folios,  lavish  scenes,  and  impossible  fables  of  platonic  love. 
He  is  too  impatient  in  his  censure  of  the  dilettante  romancer;  and  there  is 
some  animus  in  his  denunciation  of  bad  acting  and  "fibulating''  with  the 
bandstring  in  the  University  plays.  Brome  knew  London  better  than 
Sicily,  but  he  was  ready  to  try  an  unprepared  hand  at  romantic  tragi- 
comedy. Even  in  his  London  comedies  the  stock  figures  are  dressed  so 
differently  from  Jonson's  that  the  fashion  shows  that  Brome  was  not  ob- 
serving his  master's  critical  precepts. 

Of  course  the  flavor  of  Brome's  comedy  is  produced  in  part  by  in- 
filtration from  the  other  Jacobean  dramatists ;  however  humble  a  plagia- 
rist he  may  have  been,  the  proportions  of  the  mixture  would  be  his  own. 
But  he  acquired  something  from  the  romanticism  of  his  own  nobler  con- 
temporaries, and  his  wit  begins  to  ape  the  good-breeding  and  good-sense 
of  a  new  day.  His  comedy  is  external,  and  it  is  sometimes  sterile  and 
sometimes  naive ;  it  wavers  between  a  dying  imagery  and  a  growing  de- 
scriptiveness.  The  agreeable  plays  of  the  decade  before  the  Civil  War  are 
slight,  and  the  weakness  and  vulgarity  of  decadence  are  certainly  apparent 
in  many  of  them ;  but  they  are  also  written  in  a  mode  which  survives  and 
is  established  at  the  Restoration.  In  comedy  it  holds  the  stage  for  a 
while;  in  its  counterpart,  hardly  (o  be  called  tragedy,  it  passes  into  the 
novel. 

II 

THE  core  of  discussion  upon  Caroline  comedy  has  naturally  been  Jon- 
son's picture  of  Humors.  Not  that  Jonson  was  the  inventor  of  a  doc- 
trine or  an  exile  from  the  wider  Elizabethan  world;  but  he  took  apart  one 
of  the  frames  in  which  the  Elizabethan  saw  men  and  women  and  turned 
it  into  a  methodical  dramatic  structure.  Whether  the  neoclassicism  or  the 
English  ancestry  of  his  technique  has  been  turned  uppermost,  his  critics 
have  agreed  that  the  personification  of  a  dominant  idea  is  his  manner  of 
characterization,  and  the  interplay  of  conflicting  ideas  is  the  groundwork 
of  his  plotting.  In  the  Induction  to  Every  Man  Out  of  His  Humour  he  gives 
his  warning  to  all  the  poetasters  who  might  turn  his  outward  conventions 


TLeadet;  Io  beere  tlou  wilt  two  _facej  J^iruLt } 
Out  of  the.  body,  t'other  of  the   Vlmle^-  ; 
This  by  the  (Jrxwtx-Joj  thativith  much Jlrtfe 
Wee  thinke  Qrxmic  dead-jbeej  dranmtfo  to  the  life 
That  iy  s  cmme  pen!s  lent  Jo  trujeincntflij 
That  -who  recuU  it,  muft:  thinke  hee  nerejhallti^  . 


A 


Portrait  of  Richard  Drome,  Engraved  by  T.  Cross 
Frontispiece  of  "Five  Nciv  Playcs,"  London  165s 


289 


THE  PLAYS  OF  RICHARD  BROME 


into  an  easy  gradus  ad  Parnassian.  Evidently  he  expected  theft,  and  he  was 
justified : 

.  .  .  Johnson  is  decryed  by  some  who  fleece 

His  Works,  as  much  as  he  did  Rome  or  Greece: 

They  judge  it  lawfull  Prize,  doing  no  more 

To  him,  than  he  to  those  that  dy'd  before  .  .  . 

.  .  .  These  East-and-West  Translators,  not  like  Ben. 

Do  but  enrich  Themselves,  He  other  men.4 

At  first  sight  Brome  seems  to  flock  with  the  other  magpies.  His 
plays  are  often  pushed  arbitrarily  within  the  borders  of  comedy  by  the  ad- 
dition of  a  "humorous"  character  or  a  "humorous"  by-plot,  and  his  comic 
figures  are  scarecrows  made  out  of  a  physical  habit  and  a  conversational 
tag.  There  is  an  ample  population  of  shadows,  like  the  hearty  squires  in 
A  Joviall  Crew  and  the  touchy  justices  who  acknowledge  their  descent 
from  Jonson's  Adam  Overdoe.  Certainly  some  of  these  whimsical  persons 
are  allowed  to  control  the  intrigue  :  Lady  Strangelove,  the  contrary  widow 
of  The  Court  Begger,  happens  to  reverse  the  ordinary  dramatic  motivation, 
but  neither  she  nor  any  of  the  others  are  the  embodiments  of  human  de- 
sires. None  the  less  they  do  catch  a  trick  of  speech  and  behavior  which 
is  true  to  the  passages  of  average  existence;  they  are  accurate  as  the 
figures  of  domestic  tragedy  were  never  meant  to  be  accurate.  Brome  is 
beginning  to  work  on  a  situation  from  its  setting  and  social  tone.  His 
shop  scene  in  A  Mad  Couple  Well  Match'd  opens  with  a  parade  of  small 
talk  which  is  not  there  to  particularize  a  poetic  impression  of  wealth  and 
wit  —  Jonson  would  have  made  it  contrapuntal  between  the  citizen's 
clumsiness  and  the  lady's  flippancy.  Here  the  detail  is  to  insinuate  Sale- 
ware's  worldly  wisdom  and  Lady  Thrivewell's  nonchalance,  so  that  their 
conversation  is  exactly  what  might  be  expected  at  such  a  place  and  time. 
The  same  reaction  is  invited  by  Lady  Strangelove's  open-eyed  jeers  upon 
her  young  mercenary  suitors.  She  is  not  the  Lady  Fortune  of  a  morality 
play;  she  speaks  in  a  cynical  phrase  which  makes  it  likely  that  she  would 
fall  in  love  with  the  Court  Puritan  and  marry  the  converted  rake. 

Brome's  characters  are  not  often  so  recognizable;  they  may  be  in- 
consistent like  Erasmus  and  Sir  Stephen  Whimblie  in  The  New  Academy, 
who  vacillate  between  sense,  scheming,  and  affection;  more  often  they 
are  quite  empty.  On  the  other  hand  these  persons  do  speak  and  act  recog- 
nizably according  to  circumstances  and  their  own  breeding,  and  a  good 
part  of  the  pleasure  sought  in  a  comedy  of  manners  is  a  pleasure  of  recog- 
nition. Brome  was  aware  that  he  did  not  portray  Humors  as  the  past 
generation  saw  them;  he  uses  the  word  in  senses  which  show  that  its 
meaning  is  shifting  to  express  a  momentary  whim  or  an  individual  style  : 

I  would  their  extream  qualities  could  meet  each  other  at  half-way,  and 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


so  mingle  their  superfluities  of  humour  unto  a  mean  betwixt  'hem  .  .  .  What 
dirty  dogged  humour  was  I  in  when  I  got  him  troe  ? 

I  will  not  lose 
An  haires  breadth  o'  my  humour  .  .  .  [of  baby-talk] 

This  is  one  of  his  un-to-be-examin'd  hastie  Humours,  one  of  his  starts  .  .  .s 

Brome's  plotting  has  been  complicated  and  sophisticated  to  accom- 
modate the  dramatis  personae.  The  intrigue  indeed  seems  to  determine  the 
comedy;  but  it  is  usually  made  upon  a  stock  model,  and  both  the  develop- 
ment of  the  story  and  the  behavior  of  the  persons  reflect  a  modern  mood. 
They  produce  the  effect  as  independently  as  Inigo's  scaffolding  and  Vitru- 
vian  ornaments  made  up  a  "Scene."  Most  of  Brome's  material  is  lifted 
straight  off  an  earlier  stage.  He  presents  time  after  time  the  gulling  of  a 
country  bumpkin,  the  academy  of  roarers,  January  and  May,  averted  in- 
cest and  such  well-tried  devices  of  Jonson  and  Fletcher.  But  he  is  not 
often  content  with  one  of  them  singly;  and  the  component  parts  of  his 
plot  tend  to  fall  into  a  design  akin  to  the  structure  of  our  present  detective 
novel.  The  wedding-night  takes  the  place  now  held  by  the  murder  —  it 
may  happen  at  the  beginning,  as  it  does  in  The  English  Moor  or  at  the  end 
as  in  The  Northern  Lasse  —  and  to  and  from  this  scene  lead  all  the  relation- 
ships of  persons  in  various  sub-plots,  all  the  errors  of  mistaken  children, 
disguised  fathers,  and  masquerading  strumpets,  until  the  parson  ties  and 
unties  the  knots.  Epicoene  provides  an  obvious  "source"  for  the  wedding- 
mystery,  but  the  nature  of  Jonson's  plot  is  entirely  different,  because  it 
grows  from  the  unnatural  selfishness  of  Morose  and  the  normal  world's 
revenge  upon  him.  The  "Labyrinth"  of  Brome's  The  Sparagus  Garden  af- 
fords an  exercise  in  the  discovery  of  "true  proportion."  It  is  a  maze  com- 
posed of  various  walks  of  life  which  are  all  rather  crooked  and  rather 
quaint,  filled  with  figures  propelled  to  meet,  cross,  and  interchange  part- 
ners; and  the  interest  of  the  performance  lies  in  the  neat  execution  of  the 
steps  and  the  disposition  of  the  final  tableau. 

Brome's  friends  defended  the  moral  purpose  of  his  plays,  but  his 
comedy  is  not  meant  to  cure  excesses.  He  could  not  have  seen  an  image 
of  universal  folly  in  the  fripperies  of  Bartholomew  Fair,  nor  aroused  the 
echo  of  "vanity  of  vanities"  that  rings  through  that  play.  He  presents  a 
society  made  up  like  a  jig-saw  puzzle,  so  that  nearly  all  the  parts  are  ir- 
regular, and  he  may  elicit  laughter  or  sentiment  as  he  fits  them  together; 
both  responses  are  tempered  by  his  clever  indifference. 

The  author's  weakest  play  is  The  Novella.  It  is  'prentice-work  in 
every  sense;  and  he  chose  an  unsuitable  fable.  But  his  mistakes  show  the 
compulsion  of  the  rising  drama.  An  Italian  scene  and  a  simple  elopement 
are  the  essentials  of  this  play,  and  these  are  characteristically  Elizabethan. 
They  are  not  improved  by  Brome's  elaboration  of  a  doubly  crossed  mar- 
riage, a  spurned  lady  disguised  as  a  strumpet,  a  substituted  bedfellow, 


THE  PLAYS  OF  RICHARD  BROME 


293 


and  the  other  set  moves  of  his  comic  game.  His  one  attempt  at  a  poetic 
surrender  to  the  theme  of  gold,  which  in  its  beauty  and  viciousness  was 
an  Elizabethan  obsession,  is  decidedly  prosaic.  This  Italy  is  no  more  the 
glittering  rank  palace  of  a  Machiavel  grown  legendary ;  Venice  is  a  curious 
place  that  the  latest  traveller  described.  Dress,  balconies,  gondolas,  all  re- 
ceive the  attention  which  an  observer  of  style  would  give  to  foreign  pe- 
culiarities. In  his  Trappolin  Sir  Aston  Cockain  filled  two  play-book  pages 
with  a  versified  guide  to  his  European  tour.  Italy  had  been  spoiled  for  the 
hero  and  the  villain,  and  romancers  escaped  to  Greece  and  the  "Persian 
scene." 

Brome  turned  the  same  inquisitive  eye  upon  England  and  London. 
His  remarks  upon  the  architectural  novelties  are  too  long  to  be  concealed 
stage-directions.  Beyond  illustrating  the  temper  of  London  life,  his  allu- 
sions betray  an  interest  in  local  color  for  its  own  sake.  His  two  "original" 
characters,  the  "country-thing"  Constance  and  the  reclaimed  vagabond 
Springlove,  are  nostalgic  studies  in  rustic  custom.  Indeed  Brome's  collec- 
tion of  rusticities  is  the  only  excuse  for  A  Joviall  Crew,  which  was  made 
into  an  opera  in  the  next  century  and  continued  to  satisfy  .an  appetite  for 
antiquarian  folklore.  The  studiously  picturesque  scenes  written  in  gypsy 
cant  are  scarcely  related  to  the  slight  framing  plot  in  which  young  ladies 
of  the  country  try  out  the  joys  of  a  roving  life  with  their  lovers  in  Shakes- 
perian  fashion,  and  admit  that  Touchstone  was  right  about  Arden.  Middle- 
ton's  Spanish  Gypsy  has  been  accepted  as  the  "source"  of  Brome's  play, 
but  there  is  no  born  gypsy  in  it.  The  exiled  courtiers  who  are  thus  dis- 
guised feel  the  necessities  and  the  beauties  of  their  state  much  more  ro- 
mantically than  Brome's  heroines  remember  their  night  in  the  straw;  so 
do  the  vagabonds  of  Fletcher's  Beggars  Bash,  another  "source."  Perhaps 
it  is  no  accident  that  A  Joviall  Crew  is  reminiscent  of  As  You  Like  It,  in- 
stead of  the  gypsy  plays  of  Middleton  and  Fletcher. 

Ill 

HILE  Brome  among  the  humbler  Sons  of  Ben  was  diverting  Jon- 
sonian  comedy  into  fresh  channels,  he  was  ready  to  adapt  the 
tragicomedy  of  "neat  Fletcher"  cultivated  by  his  aristocratic  rivals.  The 
two  masters  are  not  far  apart,  for  the  slippery  versification  and  thin  con- 
ceits in  Fletcher's  plays  were  affected  by  the  courtier's  verse  which  he 
wrote  on  the  model  of  Jonson's,  who  confessed  that  "next  to  himself  he 
(Fletcher)  could  make  a  masque."  Brome  however  inherited  not  one  lyric 
grace,  and  The  Love-sick  Court  is  a  dull  play,  lacking  all  the  ethereal  hyper- 
bole that  carries  heroic  contests  of  love  and  friendship  into  a  favorable  cli- 
mate. The  sub-plot  of  gentlemen's  gentlemen  belongs  to  the  higher  Lon- 
don world  which  he  knew  better.  In  the  midst  of  a  movement  to  refine  the 


294  MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 

stage,  Brome  tried  to  write  graceful  poetry  and  he  speaks  as  awkwardly 
as  the  would-be  gentlemen  in  his  own  plays.  In  The  Love-sick  Court  there 
is  at  least  a  geometrical  story  which  Beaumont  might  have  approved;  but 
The  Queen's  Exchange  and  The  Queen  and  Concubine  belong  to  the  later 
school  of  Fletcher,  where  theatrical  intrigue  is  obscured  in  a  series  of 
wonders  and  discoveries.  Brome  is  happier  even  in  the  "sugry"  scene  of 
the  latter  play  in  Queen  Eulalia's  village-school  than  in  a  soliloquy  upon 
the  delights  of  pastoral  solitude.  The  Queen's  Exchange  is  patched  up  from 
late  Shakespearian  themes  which  have  lost  their  enchantment;  and  where 
a  courtly  amateur  would  have  given  his  time  to  the  conflict  of  love  and 
duty,  Brome  is  distracted  by  buried  treasure  in  the  cellar  and  amours  in 
the  butler's  pantry. 

By  inclination  a  dramatist  of  the  minutiae  and  the  temper  of  daily 
life,  he  found  at  the  end  of  his  career,  not  long  before  the  closing  of  the 
theatres,  that  romance  and  refinement  had  banished  "merry  jigges"  : 

We  wish  you,  then,  would  change  that  expectation, 

Since  Joviall  Mirth  is  now  grown  out  of  fashion. 

Or  much  not  to  expect :  For,  now  it  chances, 

(Our  Comick  Writer  finding  that  Romances 

Of  Lovers,  through  much  travell  and  distresse, 

Till  it  be  thought,  no  Power  can  redresse 

Th'  afflicted  Wanderers,  though  stout  Chevalry 

Lend  all  his  aid  for  their  delivery ; 

Till,  lastly,  some  impossibility 

Concludes  all  strife,  and  makes  a  Comedie) 

Finding  (he  saies)  such  Stories  bear  the  sway, 

Near  as  he  could,  he  has  compos'd  a  Play, 

Of  Fortune-tellers,  Damsels,  and  their  Squires  .  .  .6 

The  play  thus  introduced  is  refined  in  Brome's  own  way,  and  it  affords 
the  earliest  example  of  the  word  "genteel"  in  its  present  sense.  Whereas 
Brome  fails  to  create  romantic  illusions  just  as  he  failed  to  recreate  Dek- 
ker's  pathos,  in  his  comedy  he  can  reach  the  level  of  aristocratic  conver- 
sation. In  A  Joviall  Crew  he  catches  the  accent  of  the  country  gentry  as 
successfully  as  Shirley  set  down  the  gossip  of  fashionable  London: 

Vincent:  .  .  .  Shall  we  project  a  journey  for  you?  your  Father  has 
trusted  you,  and  will  think  you  safe  in  our  company ;  and  we  would  fain 
be  abroad  upon  som  progress  with  you.  Shall  we  make  a  fling  to  London, 
and  see  how  the  Spring  appears  there  in  the  Spring-Garden;  and  in  Hide- 
park,  to  see  the  Races,  Horse  and  Foot ;  to  hear  the  Jockics  crack ;  and  see 
the  Adamites  run  naked  afore  the  Ladies? 

Rachel:    We  have  seen  all  already  there,  as  well  as  they,  last  year. 

Hilliard:    But  there  ha'  been  new  Playes  since. 

Rachel:    No:  no:  we  are  not  for  London  .  .  . 

Vincent:    .  .  .Will  you  up  to  the  hill  top  of  sports,  then,  and  Merriments, 

Dovors  Olimpicks  or  the  Cotswold  Games. 


THE  PLAYS  OF  RICHARD  BROME 


295 


Meriel:  No,  that  would  be  too  publique  for  our  Recreation.  We  would 
have  it  more  within  our  selves.7 

The  banter  of  the  ladies  with  their  lovers  sustains  the  light  "anti-roman- 
tic" drift  of  the  whole  escapade.  Brome  had  raised  his  witty  women  above 
the  monotony  of  City  talk  before,  especially  in  The  Court  Beggcr  of  a  year 
or  so  earlier.  Lady  Strangelove's  dialogue  with  her  suitors  and  their  back- 
chat  with  Philomel  in  the  lobby  are  thoroughly  urbane.  (Brome  tends  to 
enter  great  houses  through  servant's  quarters.)  Millamant's  voice  is  au- 
dible in  the  early  thirties  behind  the  mask  of  Widow  Fitchow: 

...  let  me  studie  my  remembrance  for  after  Marriage.  Imprimis.  To  have 
the  whole  sway  of  the  house,  and  all  domestical  affairs,  as  of  accounts  of 
household  charges,  placing  and  displacing  of  all  servants  in  general ;  To 
have  free  liberty,  to  go  on  all  my  visits ;  and  though  my  Knights  occasions 
be  never  so  urgent,  and  mine  of  no  moment,  yet  to  take  from  him  the  com- 
mand of  his  Coach.  .  .  .8 

There  are  more  glimpses  of  genteel  nonchalance  in  A  Mad  Couple 
Well  Match' d,  rough  contemporary  with  The  Court  Begger.  The  two  suitors 
in  this  play  are  equally  remarkable  for  polish  and  inconsiderateness.  Jon- 
son's  Truewit  and  Alamode  in  Epicoene  were  the  first  of  a  succession  of 
young  men-about-town  to  have  more  distinguished  manners  than  First 
and  Second  Gentlemen,  but  they  dealt  in  harmlessly  poetical  compliments. 
The  portrait  of  an  attractive  rake  is  an  innovation,  and  it  is  interesting  to 
compare  it  with  the  much  more  unflattering  picture  which  Brome  painted 
seven  years  earlier  in  The  Covent-Garden  Weeded. 

IV 

THE  population  of  Caroline  drama  is  changing.  In  Brome's  world  a 
gentleman's  wit  is  worth  more  than  a  poet's  and  the  value  of  good 
sense  is  rising  fast.  A  sensible  woman  rarely  appeared  on  the  Jacobean 
stage  with  the  exception  of  Shakespeare's  Beatrice  and  her  kind.  The 
sober  good  sense  with  which  Brome  endowed  Mrs.  Fitchow  is  character- 
istic of  the  Caroline  woman;  and  the  study  stands  in  relief  against  his  skit 
upon  the  ridiculous  stage  widow  in  The  City  Wit.  Mrs.  Fitchow  is  matched 
by  his  benevolent  and  endearingly  eccentric  Lafoy  and  his  sensible  fathers 
and  country  squires.  The  subject  of  enforced  marriage  takes  a  new  turn 
through  the  contrast  between  these  liberal  parents  and  the  old  discipli- 
narians. It  is  no  longer  a  source  of  individual  ruin  or  an  opportunity  for 
showing  how  to  tame  a  shrew;  the  lovers  are  not  star-crossed  and  only  a 
miserly  father  would  interfere  with  their  choice.  A  tribe  of  pampered 
idiots  proposed  as  eligible  husbands  render  the  misers  even  more  dis- 
agreeable. Of  course,  the  outwitting  of  the  old  by  the  young  is  a  Plautine 
staple,  and  the  University  dramatists  must  have  refreshed  the  London 


2g6 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


stage  from  its  springs  in  Rome.  When  various  Jonsonian  drinking  acade- 
mies turn  into  covert  brothels  in  The  Sparagus  Garden  and  The  New  Acade- 
my, Brome's  transformation  may  be  ascribed  to  the  same  influence. 

Brome's  contribution  of  wit,  sense,  and  refinement  was  made  in 
prose  or  in  an  unobtrusive  colloquial  verse.  He  twinkles  in  a  constellation 
of  lesser  dramatists  who  prepare  for  the  Restoration  stars.  The  novelty 
of  his  technique  is  important,  because  apart  from  their  style  some  of  his 
plays  seem  closer  to  Elizabethan  court  comedy  than  to  the  serious  carica- 
ture of  Jonson  or  the  serious  hyperbole  of  Fletcher.  In  A  Joviall  Crew  he 
pricks  bubbles  as  lightly  as  Shakespeare;  there  is  no  comedy  so  clear  be- 
tween Shakespeare  and  the  younger  disciples  of  Jonson.  The  whole  chasm 
between  poetry  and  prose  divides  the  new  comedy  from  the  old,  but  in 
both  the  essence  of  a  play  is  its  style  and  shape.  It  is  not  governed  by  the 
passions  which  dominate  the  Jacobean  stage,  and  which  finally  break  the 
mould  of  Jonsonian  comedy  and  of  tragedy.  The  style  is  new  and  the  in- 
cidents are  Jonsonian,  but  there  is  an  Elizabethan  touch  even  to  comedies 
like  The  Court  Begger  and  A  Mad  Couple  Well  Match' d.  It  can  be  felt  dis- 
tinctly in  The  Antipodes,  where  Brome  has  invented  a  lunar  world;  only 
his  regions  are  below  the  earth,  and  they  mirror  not  man's  intellect  and 
senses  but  the  absurdities  of  his  outward  habits.  Bypassing  the  whipping 
satire  of  the  Jacobeans,  Brome's  inversion  of  the  classical  myth  seems  to 
carry  him  back  to  the  Elizabethans  and  the  ancients.  Craftsmanship  and 
sophistication  go  to  make  the  last  scenes,  where  one  lunacy  invades  an- 
other and  the  theatrical  illusion  vanishes  like  a  last  bubble. 

The  Antipodes  is  also  a  throwback  to  Tudor  design.  The  sequence  of 
sketches  is  patterned  upon  the  entrances  of  characters  in  an  interlude; 
the  persons  are  mouthpieces  of  topical  fads  and  fancies.  The  play-within- 
a-play  allowed  the  Elizabethans  to  relate  their  characters  to  the  outer 
world,  because  it  simplified  the  main  action  by  reflecting  it  in  miniature. 
The  infatuation  of  the  "audience"  and  the  foolery  of  the  "actors"  in  The 
Antipodes  produce  a  parallel  development  of  "matter"  and  "mirth" ;  a 
movement  which  belongs  to  the  form  of  the  morality,  and  often  appears 
in  Brome's  last  plays.  In  The  Court  Begger  Mendicant  is  outwitted  like  an 
orthodox  Plautine  legacy  hunter,  but  his  downfall  is  presented  as  the  fate 
of  a  sinner,  and  his  progress  is  diversified  by  the  antics  of  apes  and  fools, 
who  are  stripped  of  their  vanities  in  turn. 

The  return  of  the  interlude  is  sponsored  by  Jonson's  last  plays, 
where  his  systematization  of  character  has  run  its  course  and  come  round 
to  simplicity  again.  His  favorite  "son,"  Thomas  Randolph,  took  up  his 
allegorical  method  and  found  that  it  mixed  easily  with  the  conventions  of 
the  Latin  Show  in  which  he  was  trained.  In  The  Muses  Looking-Glass  he 
wrote  a  moral  play-within-a-play  that  is  constructed  much  like  The  Anti- 
podes. In  both  plays  the  substance  of  an  interlude  is  presented  in  the  style 


THE 

ANTIPODES 


<l4  COMEDIE. 


A&edintheyeare  1638.  by  theQueenes 

Maiefties  Servants,  at  Salisbury 
Court  in  Fleet-ltreer. 


The  Author  Richard  Brome. 


HictotusvolorideatLibtllttf.  Mart. 


LON  D  ON: 

Printed  by  /.  Okes^  for  Francis  Conftab!ey  and 
are  to  be  fold  at  his  (hops  in  Kings- 
ftreet  at  the  figne  of  the  Goat, 
andinWeftminfter-hall.  1640. 

Title-page  of  one  of  Bronte's  Best-known  Comedies 
From  First  Edition  in  the  Boston  Public  Library 


23 


297 


THE  PLAYS  OF  RICHARD  BROME  299 

of  natural  conversation,  more  conspicuous  in  Brome's  because  his  verse 
is  more  unstressed  and  prosaic.  But  the  revival  of  Tudor  techniques  in 
this  period  spreads  beyond  the  imitations  of  Jonson's  "dotages."  Brome 
repeatedly  introduces  a  masque  to  epitomise  the  social  implications  of 
his  London  comedies,  and  John  Ford  uses  dance  and  dumbshow  to  crys- 
tallize the  mood  which  is  the  meaning  of  his  tragedy.  Since  the  writing 
of  light  comedy  had  lapsed  for  more  than  two  decades,  some  likenesses  in 
the  construction  of  Elizabethan  and  Caroline  plays  are  inevitable;  both 
are  characterized  by  the  pervasive  style  indispensable  to  comedy. 

The  real  tragedy  of  the  Caroline  stage  is  made  out  of  the  same  mat- 
ter;  it  springs  from  an  attitude  and  a  situation,  instead  of  passion  and  will. 
The  imagery  of  Ford  throws  out  ideas  instead  of  enlarging  or  defining 
them;  the  poet's  grip  begins  to  loosen  in  Webster,  last  of  the  Jacobeans, 
who  instils  a  single  note  into  all  his  emotions.  Their  metaphor  is  a  corol- 
lary of  the  neat  colloquial  wit  practised  by  Jonson's  followers. 


V 

TOUCHING  moral  intention,  there  has  been  more  recent  argument 
about  Brome.  It  has  turned  upon  his  observation  of  poetic  justice, 
or  rather  his  violation  of  it,  in  A  Mad  Couple  Well  Match 'd.  There  is  really 
a  confusion  of  two  standards  in  his  time,  precipitated  by  the  Puritan  at- 
tacks upon  any  exhibition  of  vice.  The  early  Tudor  plays  were  so  purely 
imaginative,  or  so  didactic,  that  the  first  neoclassicists  could  profess  that 
poetry  showed  virtue  and  vice  in  brighter  colors  besides  distributing  re- 
wards and  punishments  justly.  The  growing  tragedy  was  on  the  contrary 
expressive,  not  instructive;  and  so  were  the  deeper  scenes  of  Jonsonian 
comedy.  Jonson  accordingly  adopted  the  medicinal  theory  of  satire,  which 
claimed  to  purge  vice  by  making  it  ridiculous :  a  theory  that  could  be 
used  to  justify  the  grossest  exhibition  as  the  most  moral.  This  position 
was  undermined  by  the  courtier-dramatists  as  doggedly  as  by  their  Puri- 
tan enemies.  They  wanted  to  expunge  barbarities,  and  display  an  exalted 
virtue  triumphant.  The  doctrine  of  poetic  justice  was  equally  open  to 
abuse;  it  allowed  an  opportunist  like  James  Shirley  to  invent  scenes  of 
exquisite  pruriency  and  reveal  in  the  last  act  that  they  were  meant  as  a 
trial  of  pure  virtue. 

Brome  was  an  uncritical  writer  and  his  plays  fall  between  two  stools. 
Inasmuch  as  he  frequented  the  City  more  than  the  Court,  his  tavern  and 
brothel  scenes  bear  the  Jonsonian  moral  stamp  and  usually  end  in  the 
discomfiture  of  the  customers.  On  the  other  hand,  in  the  romances,  and 
even  in  a  London  play  like  The  English  Moor,  he  is  intent  upon  achieving 
the  reward  of  virtue  and  the  ruin  of  villainy.  Sometimes  these  conclusions 
are  awkwardly  mixed,  and  the  machinations  that  tested  the  heroine's  vir- 


3oo 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


tue  are  dissipated  into  absurdity.  Valentine  in  A  Mad  Couple  Well  Match' d 
is  a  rake  whom  Brome  could  neither  punish  nor  cheat,  because  he  had  to 
save  him  for  his  denouement.  Brome  was  apparently  associated  with  the 
aristocratic  school  in  moral  questions;  Alexander  Brome  refers  to  the 
cleanness  of  his  page  in  opposition  to  the  obscenities  of  an  earlier  age : 

/  love  thee  for  thy  neat  and  harmlcsse  wit, 

Thy  Mirth  that  does  so  cleane  and  closely  hit  .  .  .9 

Another  compliment  that  occurs  in  innumerable  commendatory 
verses  praises  the  author's  clarity;  and  Alexander  Brome  duly  paid  it: 

No  stradling  Tetrasyllables  are  brought 
To  fill  up  room,  and  little  spell,  or  nought. 
No  Bumbast  Raptures,  and  no  lines  immense, 
That's  call'd  (by  th'  curtesie  of  England)  sence. 
But  all's  so  plaine,  that  one  may  see,  he  made  it 
T*  inform  the  understanding,  not  invade  it.10 

The  renewal  of  comic  writing  may  well  be  encouraged  by  such  grumb- 
ling dissatisfaction  with  turgid  verse.  The  lyricists  were  tired  of  inarticu- 
late Donnish  conceits,  and  the  playwrights  found  the  tragedies  which  re- 
tained them  primitive  and  preposterous.  The  clowning  was  silly  and  the 
rant  was  vulgar.  Even  Brome,  the  maker  of  "merry  jigges,"  deplored  the 
bad  old  days  in  1638 : 

...  in  the  dayes  of  Tarlton  and  Kcmpe 
Before  the  stage  was  purg'd  from  barbarisme, 
And  brought  to  the  perfection  it  now  shines  with. 
Then  fooles  and  jesters  spent  their  wits,  because 
The  Poets  were  wise  enough  to  save  their  own 
For  profitabler  uses  ..." 

One  spring  of  that  casual  indifference  which  is  the  breath  of  a  comedy 
of  manners  rises  from  the  parody  of  tragic  seriousness.  It  is  faintly  per- 
ceptible in  the  Jacobean  tragedies;  the  flippancies  which  Chapman  inter- 
spersed among  political  issues  cast  a  skeptical  pettiness  over  great  actions. 
Skepticism  grows  into  the  political  themes  of  Beaumont  and  Fletcher  and 
into  the  tragicomedies  of  Shirley.  The  manoeuvres  of  first  ministers  and 
favorites  and  the  miry  smartness  of  servants  alternate  with  dialogue 
rarefied  above  all  apparent  meaning.  The  pastoral  illusion  destroys  itself. 
When  nobility  is  banished  into  Arcadia,  the  first  touch  of  cynical  realism 
makes  Arcadia  itself  vanish.  These  plays  are  fundamentally  divided,  and 
they  do  really  provide  comic  relief.  Brome  already  felt  the  artificialities 
of  disillusion :  his  songs  have  the  usual  operatic  burden, 

The  frantique  mirth 
And  false  Delights  of  frolique  earth.12 

Ford  was  alone  in  seeing  tragedy  within  the  death  of  tragedy.  To  all 


THE  PLAYS  OF  RICHARD  BROME  301 

the  rest  of  Brome's  immediate  contemporaries  it  was  a  source  of  amuse- 
ment. Randolph  mimicked  poetic  bombast  and  Puritan  outlandishness  in 
the  same  breath,  and  Field  made  his  tragic  poet  a  Ninny  who  filled  his 
emptiness  with  "Newington  conceits";  as  he  said,  he  had  been  "vexed 
with  vile  plays"  himself  a  great  while.  The  garret  poet  enters  the  Caroline 
stage  alongside  the  antiquary;  both  are  cranks  who  live  outside  the 
world  of  affairs,  and  cultivate  one  recondite  faculty  at  the  expense  of  so- 
ciability. Brome's  pompous  Bounce  and  his  lachrymose  Sir  Stephen 
Whimblie  are  near  ancestors  of  the  Augustan  hack  and  virtuoso.  In  his 
simulated  tragic  raptures  there  is  a  dash  of  the  next  age's  flair  for  mock- 
heroic. 

Some  of  the  Caroline  poets  were  quite  aware  of  the  trends  of  the 
times.  Brome  was  Jonson's  servant  in  nothing  more  truly  than  in  incor- 
porating ghosts  of  the  past  and  wraiths  of  the  future  into  his  dramatis 
personae.  The  comedy  of  manners  is  more  securely  grounded  by  the  labors 
of  Brome  and  Nabbes  and  Shirley  than  it  would  have  been  if  the  Killi- 
grews  and  Carliles  had  written  unrivalled.  Between  them,  the  two  dra- 
matic clans  began  to  draw  the  fine  taste  and  accuracy  which  were  always 
admired  in  Jonson's  comedy  out  of  the  image  and  into  the  remark;  out  of 
poetry  into  prose. 


Notes 

1.  The  plays  of  certain  date  are:  A  Fault  in  Friendship,  1623  (lost);  The  Lovesick 
Maid,  1628  (lost);  The  Novella,  1632;  The  Sparagits  Garden,  1635;  The  Antipodes,  1638;  A 
Joz'iall  Crexv,  164 1. 

Approximate  dates  can  be  given  for:  The  Love-sick  Court,  c.  1626;  The  Northern  Lasse, 
before  1632;  The  Covent-Garden  Weeded,  c.  1632;  The  Late  Lancashire  Witches  (revision  of 
Hey  wood's  play),  before  1634;  The  Queen's  Exchange,  before  1635;  The  Life  and  Death  of 
Sir  Martin  Skink  and  The  Apprentices  Prize  (lost  revisions  of  Hcywood),  before  1635.  The 
Queen  and  Concubine,  1629-1637;  The  English  Moor,  1637-1639;  The  Court  Begger  and  A  Mad 
Couple  Well  Match'd,  1639-1642. 

No  dates  are  known  for:  The  Damoiselle,  The  Nezv  Academy,  and  The  City  Wit;  or 
for  Wit  in  a  Madness,  Christianctta,  and  The  Jewish  Gentleman  (lost  plays).  They  were  not 
protected  for  the  King's  Men  in  1641  or  for  Beeston's  Boys  in  1639,  and  are  probably  the 
missing  Salisbury  Court  and  Cockpit  plays  for  1635-1639;  possibly  they  are  earlier  plays 
for  the  Blackfriars  or  the  Red  Bull. 

2.  II,  Air.  3-     Ill,  (230). 

4.  William  Cartwright,  Comedies,  1651,  4*3r  (cancellans). 

5.  II,  29  (The  Covent-Garden  Weeded);  22  (The  New  Academy)  ;  21  (The  Queen 
and  Concubine) . 

6.  Ill,  (351).  7.  II,  3/2-73-  8.  Ill,  14. 
9.     Ill,  (349).                      10.     I,  vii.                             11.  III,26o. 

12.     II,  1  v.  (The  Queen  and  Concubine). 


Exhibitions  in  the  Print  Department 


French  Prints,  1 830-1 930 

Tl  I  H  revival  of  French  etching  was  due  in  great  part  to  the  efforts  of  Charles 
Jacque  (1893-94).  Greatly  influenced  hy  the  seventeenth-century  Dutch 
masters,  and  applying  his  talent  to  subjects  of  provincial  life  and  scenes,  he 
brought  print  making  into  favor  with  artists  again.  Jacque  had  been  etching 
for  ten  years  before  he  began  to  paint,  which  is  quite  the  opposite  of  the  usual 
procedure  in  the  development  of  an  etcher.  A  typical  print,  "La  Bergerie 
Bcarnaise,"  considered  by  many  as  one  of  his  best  plates,  is  on  view. 

Although  it  was  through  Jacquc's  influence  that  Millet  took  up  the  etch- 
ing needle,  his  compositions  were  more  subjective  in  character.  His  land- 
scapes were  massive  and  his  figures  statuesque  in  comparison  with  those  of 
Jacque,  and  in  studying  the  ocuvres  of  the  two  artists  it  is  not  difficult  to  dis- 
cover that  Millet,  in  turn,  influenced  Jacque.  The  association  was  mutually 
beneficial.  We  feel  contact  with  the  soil  of  Barbizon  in  Millet's  "Les  Gla- 
neuses,"  "La  Baratreuse,"  "Le  Paysant  Rcntrant  du  Fumier,"  "Le  Depart 
pour  le  Travail,"  "Des  Becheurs."  All  the  deep  meaning  of  peasant  life  at  the 
Foret  de  Fontainebleau  can  be  enjoyed  and  analyzed.  These  homely  scenes 
of  toil  and  repose  in  the  fields  of  Barbizon  give  us  an  insight  into  Millet's  es- 
timation of  simplicity.  A  study  of  his  plates  will  reveal  that  he  added  no  un- 
necessary details  that  might  weaken  the  direct  expression  of  his  idea  or  motive. 
J  lis  free  and  sculpturesque  method  of  handling  values  in  one  light  and  shadow 
was  developed  by  his  constant  habit  of  drawing. 

The  ruggedness  of  Millet's  etchings  is  complemented  by  yet  another 
interpretation  of  Barbizon  and  the  Foret  de  Fontainebleau  in  the  work  of 
Corot,  who  drew  his  subjects  with  the  same  quality  of  tone  in  massed  line  that 
characterized  his  brushwork  in  painting.  In  other  plates  the  result  was  ob- 
tained by  flowing  line,  giving  the  print  unusual  atmosphere  and  light.  Corot 
is  one  of  the  few  men  who  seriously  started  etching  late  in  life  and  attained 
lasting  greatness.  His  work,  like  that  of  Seymour  Haden,  Jean-Louis  Forain, 
and  Frank  W.  Benson,  was  accomplished  after  he  had  passed  middle  age. 
"Paysage  d' Italic,"  "Solitude,"  "Souvenir  d'ltalie,"  and  "Souvenir  de  Toscane" 
are  all  stamped  with  individualism  and  personality.  Yet  with  all  his  originality, 
he,  apart  from  the  rest,  respected  the  conventions  which  the  ages  had  approved. 

Daubigny,  with  his  careful  preparation  in  art,  brought  proper  equipment 
and  thorough  understanding  to  the  copper  plate.  This,  with  his  knowledge  and 
love  of  nature,  has  resulted  in  a  number  of  masterly  prints,  among  which  are 
"Les  Corbeaux,"  "Le  Cue,"  "La  Pecherie,"  and  "Le  Petit  Pare  a  Moutons." 
We  may  see  an  indication  of  his  studies  of  the  masters  of  landscape,  but  there 
is  a  freshness  of  vision  that  distinguishes  him  as  one  of  the  most  accomp- 
lished landscape  etchers  of  the  nineteenth  century. 

Charles  Mcryon  has  left  us  his  famous  scries  of  architectural  monuments 
of  old  Paris.  That  he  was  a  devoted  lover  of  Paris  is  demonstrated  in  "Le  Petit 
Pont,"  "La  Morgue,"  "La  Galerie  de  Notre  Dame,"  "Le  Stryge,"  "La  Tour 
de  VI I orloge,"  and  "Tourelle,  Rue  de  la  Tixeranderie."  These  prints  have  been 
302 


EXHIBITIONS  IS  THE  PRINT  DEPARTMENT 


303 


chosen  from  his  portfolio  "Eaux  Fortes  sur  Paris,"  to  exhibit  his  great  achieve- 
ment in  architectural  etching,  which  will  probably  never  be  surpassed. 

Notwithstanding  Felix  Bracquemond's  academic  methods,  he  has  taken 
his  place  among  print  makers  as  a  great  technician.  "Les  Hirondelles," 
"Roseaux  et  Sarcelles,"  "Sarcelles,"  and  "Vanneaux  et  Sarcelles,"  among 
others  chosen  for  this  exhibition,  show  a  generous  quality  of  the  etcher's  art. 
They  are  intimate  studies  of  nature  in  a  well-balanced  union  of  line  and  mass. 
The  draftsmanship  is  impeccable,  and  the  composition  satisfying  in  both  ar- 
rangement of  pattern  and  movement. 

To  come  closer  to  our  contemporaries,  such  men  as  Manet,  Degas,  Lepere, 
Buhot,  Pissarro,  Rodin,  Forain,  and  Besnard  are  well  represented  in  the  ex- 
hibit. 

Manet's  contribution  of  "Berthe  Morisot,"  "La  Convalescente,"  "Les 
Gitanos,"  and  "Lola  de  Valence"  can  be  classified  as  painter's  etchings,  and 
in  fact  some  are  copies  from  his  paintings.  Manet  brought  a  new  note  to  etch- 
ing in  the  application  of  an  impressionistic  technique.  His  handling  of  line 
was  often  enhanced  by  a  simplicity  of  background,  which  focuses  our  attention 
to  the  figures  without  any  laborious  effort.  The  use  of  aquatint  recalls  Goya, 
yet  the  work  is  intensely  personal. 

Degas's  work  was  developed  through  a  thorough  training.  The  Ecole 
des  Beaux-Arts  gave  him  a  fine  foundation  in  drawing  and  composition,  and, 
after  a  few  years  of  painting  historical  pictures,  at  the  age  of  thirty  he  met  a 
group  of  naturalistic  painters  and  novelists  in  the  Batignolles  quarter  of  Paris. 
These  men,  later  to  be  known  as  "Impressionists,"  in  revolt  against  academic 
teachings  and  fake  literary  idealism,  were  considered  Bohemians  by  the  cor- 
rect and  reserved  Degas.  Among  them  Zola  and  Manet  were  perhaps  the  most 
combative  figures  of  the  new  movement.  Monet,  Renoir,  Legros,  Fantin- 
Latour,  and  Stevens  were  also  breaking  away  from  old  traditions.  Degas  ac- 
cepted their  criticisms  in  silence ;  with  a  freer  development  through  experi- 
mentation he  was  later  to  be  included  in  their  group.  "Au  Louvre  la  Peinture 
(Mile.  Cassatt),"  "Chanteuse  de  Cafe  Concert,"  "Femme  Nue  debout  a  sa 
Toilette/'  "Manet  Assis  Tourne  a.  Gauche,"  and  "La  Toilette"  are  excellent 
examples  of  his  graphic  expression  cn  stone  and  copper. 

Pissarro,  whose  work  is  very  varied,  holds  a  prominent  place  among  the 
print  makers  of  the  Impressionistic  School.  Self-taught,  his  knowledge  of  the 
art  was  formed  through  studying  the  work  of  Rembrandt,  Goya,  Corot,  Millet, 
and  Manet.  No  wonder  that  his  prints,  of  which  there  are  190  etchings  and 
lithographs,  are  so  original  and  varied.  "Crepuscule  avec  Meules,"  "Baigneuses 
sous  les  Berges  Boisees,"  and  "Camille  Pissarro  par  lui-meme"  give  a  general 
idea  of  his  etched  work. 

The  plates  of  Buhot,  Forain,  Rodin,  and  Lepere  have  been  reviewed  in 
previous  articles.  Representative  plates  by  them  can  be  compared  with  others 
new  in  this  exhibition.  There  are  excellent  prints  by  Albert  Besnard,  among 
them  "Cardinal  Mercier,"  "Le  Dejeuner,"  and  "La  Misere."  No  introduction 
for  Adolphe  Beaufrere's  "A  Kerliezec,"  "Bords  de  la  La'ita,"  and  the  religious 
plates  "La  Fuite  en  Egypte,"  "Jesus  et  la  Samaritane,"  and  Les  Pelerins  d'Em- 
maiis"  is  necessary. 

ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 


Rededication  Week 


REDEDICATION  Week  —  October 
5-12  —  will  be  observed  through- 
out the  Library  system  by  exhibitions  of 
books  and  manuscripts  reflecting  the 
ideals  of  democracy.  About  a  hundred 
precious  items  have  been  placed  on 
view  in  the  Treasure  Room.  Only  a  few 
may  be  mentioned  here : 

The  first  draft  of  the  Freemen's  Oath 
in  the  handwriting  of  Governor  Win- 
throp  will  certainly  attract  attention. 
It  was  the  form  by  which  the  inhabi- 
tants of  the  Commonwealth  swore  to 
submit  their  persons  and  estates  "to  be 
protected,  ordered,  and  governed,  by 
the  Laws  and  Constitutions  thereof." 
As  may  be  remembered,  the  Freemen's 
Oath  was  the  first  piece  of  printing  ex- 
ecuted by  the  first  press  established  in 
the  Colonies,  but  unfortunately  no  copy 
of  the  broadside  exists  today.  A  copy 
of  the  Bay  Psalm  Book,  the  first  book 
produced  by  the  press,  has  been  placed 
on  display.  Next  to  it  is  a  contemporary 
copy  of  the  Bay  Colony  Records. 

A  number  of  books  and  manuscripts 
illustrate  the  rebellion  against  Sir  Ed- 
mund Andros.  In  December  1688  King 
James  II  fled  from  London,  and  in  the 
following  February  William  and  Mary 
proclaimed  themselves  sovereigns.  Copies 
of  the  proclamation  reached  Boston  on 
April  4.  Naturally,  great  was  the  excite- 
ment in  the  town.  Andros  tried  to  seize 
the  papers,  which  merely  increased  the 
ferment.  The  revolt  broke  out  on  the 
18th.  "The  people  in  arms"  captured 
several  of  Andros's  followers,  and  in 
the  evening  of  the  same  day  the  gov- 
ernor himself  was  under  arrest.  The 
next  day  fifteen  gentlemen  met  in  the 
council  chamber,  constituting  them- 
selves a  provisional  government.  Their 
ultimatum  to  the  captive  Andros  may 
be  seen  in  the  exhibit. 

The  reaction  against  the  Stamp  Act 
is  commemorated  by  a  broadside  Poem 
and  by  the  Address  to  a  Provincial  Ba- 
shaw directed  to  Governor  Bernard. 
Paul  Revere's  plan  of  the  scene  of  the 
Boston  Massacre,  together  with  his  en- 
graving, are  other  distinguished  items. 


One  may  see  also  John  Adams's  origi- 
nal notes  taken  at  the  trial  of  Captain 
Preston  and  the  British  soldiers,  whom 
he  courageously  defended.  Another 
group  of  books  and  manuscripts  bears 
on  the  Boston  Tea  Party. 

On  two  boards  the  autograph  sig- 
natures of  the  officers  of  the  battles  of 
Lexington  and  Bunker  Hill  are  shown. 
The  proclamation  by  the  King  "for  the 
Suppressing  of  Rebellion  and  Sedition" 
was  counteracted  by  the  proclamation 
of  the  Great  and  General  Court  of  the 
Colony.  The  angry  royal  manifesto  is 
answered  by  the  solemn  sentences  of  the 
patriots..  The  one  ends  with  "God  Save 
the  King !"  and  the  other  with  "God  Save 
the  People !"  A  copy  of  the  first  issue 
of  the  Declaration  of  Independence  fol- 
lows, as  also  a  later  edition  with  auto- 
graph signatures  of  all  the  Signers  at- 
tached to  it!  There  are  orderly  books 
of  the  Siege  of  Boston  and  of  many 
battles  of  the  Revolution.  A  unique 
item  is  the  Washington  Medal,  struck 
in  celebration  of  the  evacuation  of  Bos- 
ton by  the  British  forces  on  March  17, 
1776  —  the  only  gold  medal  given  by 
Congress  to  the  Commander-in-Chief 
of  the  Armies.  Copies  of  the  Articles  of 
Confederation  and  the  Constitution  are 
also  on  display,  both  with  autograph 
signatures  of  all  the  Signers. 

The  Abolitionist  movement  is  rep- 
resented by  letters  by  William  Lloyd 
Garrison,  Wendell  Phillips,  John  Brown, 
and  others.  There  are  many  pictures 
about  the  Civil  War,  among  them  photo- 
graphs of  the  First  Massachusetts  Cav- 
alry and  lithographs  showing  Massa- 
chusetts volunteers  in  the  Battle  of  the 
Wilderness.  A  copy  of  the  Emancipa- 
tion Proclamation  and  a  portrait  of 
Lincoln  complete  the  group.  Finally 
there  are  a  number  of  pictures  of  the 
two  World  Wars. 

Books  discussing  freedom  and  de- 
mocracy will  be  displayed  in  the  Puvis 
de  Chavannes  Gallery  of  the  Central 
Library  and  in  various  Branch  Libraries. 
Lists  of  suitable  books,  one  for  adults 
and  another  for  juveniles,  will  be  issued. 


304 


Ten  Books 


William  Allen  White's  America.  By 

Walter  Johnson.  Holt.  1947.  621  pp. 
Even  after  his  spacious  autobiography, 
published  only  a  year  ago,  this  book 
about  the  late  Kansas  editor  commands 
interest.  The  author,  a  professor  of  his- 
tory at  Chicago  University,  has  worked 
on  it  for  years  —  first  in  cooperation 
with  White  himself  and,  after  the  lat- 
ter's  death  in  1944,  with  members  of 
the  family.  As  editor  of  the  Selected 
Letters  of  William  Allen  White,  he  also 
had  access  to  an  enormous  file  of  cor- 
respondence. The  result  is  a  very  satis- 
fying work  —  a  sympathetic  yet  candid 
biography.  "The  Emporia  editor,"  Mr. 
Johnson  writes,  "was  not  an  original 
nor  creative  thinker.  He  was  no  great 
iconoclast,  no  revolutionary,  no  risky 
radical  .  .  .  He  was  only  slightly  less 
confused  than  his  neighbors  from  coast 
to  coast  about  the  major  problems  fac- 
ing American  life.  But  he  did  seem  to 
them  to  be  an  interpreter  who  spoke 
from  a  small-town,  agrarian  area  in 
such  judicious  and  clear  terms  that  he 
offered  understanding  and  insight  into 
their  problems."  In  an  age  when  his 
generation  was  being  lured  to  the  city, 
White  had  reversed  the  process ;  leav- 
ing the  Kansas  City  Star,  he  became 
editor  of  the  Emporia  Gazette.  "Basically 
a  shrewd  and  canny  human  being,"  Mr. 
Johnson  comments,  "he  had  realized  that 
he  was  unusual  in  his  generation." 
White's  newspaper  was  published  in 
only  seven  thousand  copies,  but  his 
opinions  were  more  often  quoted  than 
those  of  any  other  journalist  of  his  time. 
To  be  sure,  he  made  his  influence  felt 
not  so  much  as  a  small-town  editor 
than  as  a  contributor  to  national  maga- 
zines. During  his  long  career,  he  took 
an  active  part  in  most  national  events. 
Although  a  lifelong  Republican,  he  fol- 
lowed an  entirely  independent  course. 
Perhaps  he  stood  closest  to  Theodore 
Roosevelt,  and  played  an  important  part 
in  the  Progressive  movement.  He  was 
opposed  to  Wilson  in  many  ways,  yet 
he  was  in  despair  at  the  wrecking  of  the 
League  of  Nations.  He  was  loyal  to 
Harding  and  Coolidge,  as  well  as  to 
Hoover,  yet  he  saw  with  anxious  eyes 


the  immense  growth  of  the  political  and 
economic  power  of  the  great  industri- 
alists. He  eagerly  supported  the  New 
Deal,  yet  he  voted  for  Landon  and  Will- 
kie.  He  was  also  among  the  founders 
of  the  Committee  to  Defend  America 
by  Aiding  the  Allies.  The  Sage  of  Em- 
poria was  a  man  of  many  inconsistencies. 
It  was  his  warmth  and  charm,  his  cour- 
age and  simplicity,  that  won  for  him 
the  affection  of  his  countrymen. (  Z.  H.) 

The  Brazilians:  People  of  Tomorrow. 

By  Hemane  Tavares  de  Sa.  Day.  1947. 
248  pp. 

Having  lectured  widely  here,  the  author 
is  familiar  enough  with  the  United 
States  to  realize  what  Americans  do  not 
know  —  and  what  they  should  know 
—  about  his  native  Brazil.  In  nearly  a 
hundred  short,  brilliant  sketches,  he 
describes  the  life  of  the  people,  cover- 
ing, besides,  everything  from  history, 
economics,  and  sociology  to  geography. 
Beginning  with  an  amusing  account  of 
forms  of  address  in  Brazil,  the  thorough 
knowledge  and  serious  purpose  of  the 
author  gradually  become  evident.  He 
discusses  the  great  Brazilian  institutions 
of  Church  and  Family,  and  some  of  the 
social  customs.  In  his  account  of  "the 
great  experiment  in  miscegenation,"  Dr. 
Tavares  admits  that  there  is  racial  dis- 
crimination, especially  among  the  upper 
classes,  yet  "there  is  less  of  it  than  in 
any  other  country  in  the  world."  Inter- 
marriage is  not  merely  taken  as  a  mat- 
ter of  course,  but  is  expected  of  the  vari- 
ous racial  groups.  Intellectual  life  flour- 
ishes in  the  large  cities,  but  sixty-five  per 
cent  of  the  population  is  illiterate.  Edu- 
cational plans  are  among  the  world's 
best,  but  are  never  carried  out ;  there  is 
only  one  government-supported  high 
school  in  all  Rio  dc  Janeiro.  Standards 
of  living  even  in  the  capital  are  scan- 
dalously low ;  two-thirds  of  the  coun- 
try's population  continuously  suffers 
from  hunger,  and  one  child  in  five  dies 
in  its  first  year.  No  real  efforts  are  being 
made  to  penetrate  and  settle  the  wilder- 
ness, the  richest  and  largest  unused 
land  in  the  world.  The  exploitation  of 
natural  resources   is   done   by  firms 


24 


305 


306  MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


whose  philosophy  of  economy  is  to  make 
a  lifetime's  profit  in  a  year  or  two  — 
a  part  of  the  Brazilian  taste  for  gam- 
bling. The  taxation  is  grossly  unfair,  the 
government  run  by  the  spoils  system. 
Yet  the  Brazilian  is  idealistic,  in  spite 
of  his  cynicism.  At  the  end  of  his  frank, 
incisive  criticism,  Dr.  Tavares  ex- 
presses his  hopes  in  "the  Brazil  of  tomor- 
row." (/.  D.  L.) 

I  Remember  Distinctly.  By  Agnes  Rog- 
ers and  Frederick  Lewis  Allen.  Harper. 
1947.  251  pp. 

This  "Family  Album  of  the  American 
People"  from  1918  to  1941  is  a  picture 
book,  with  running  commentary.  Prac- 
tically nothing  of  importance  has  been 
omitted ;  it  was  compiled  less  for  the 
nostalgically-minded  than  for  those  seek- 
ing documentary  history.  Beginning 
with  the  Armistice  Day  crowds  on 
Fifth  Avenue  and  with  Woodrow  Wil- 
son triumphantly  sailing  for  Europe 
to  make  peace,  it  ends  with  the  Japanese 
envoys'  last  call  at  the  White  House  and 
the  destruction  at  Pearl  Harbor.  The 
careers  of  some  of  our  "great"  are 
sketchily  traced,  such  as  Charles  Lind- 
bergh, from  his  1927  flight  to  his  1941 
isolationist  speeches.  There  are  photo- 
graphs of  the  young  MacArthur,  the 
Duke  of  Windsor,  and  a  fascinating 
picture  of  Harry  Truman  in  his  haber- 
dashery store.  Many  pictures  of  Roose- 
velt on  his  way  to  fame  are,  of  course, 
included.  Sport  fans  will  find  Red 
Grange,  Bill  Tilden,  Babe  Ruth,  and 
even  Man  o'War.  Also  shown  are  the 
development  of  radio  and  stills  from 
Mary  Pickford,  Douglas  Fairbanks,  and 
Rudolph  Valentino  movies.  Popular 
books  are  not  forgotten,  from  Alice 
Adams  to  Gone  with  the  Wind.  Advertise- 
ments of  ladies'  clothing  and  the  first 
Atlantic  City  bathing-beauty  contests 
are  the  most  amusing  parts  of  the  col- 
lection. But  the  story  is  not  gay.  Pic- 
tures of  the  stock  market  crash,  bread- 
lines, strikes,  the  Dust  Bowl,  and  graphs 
of  unemployment  remind  one  of  the 
awful  economic  crisis  of  the  early  thir- 
ties. The  partial  success  and  the  more 
frequent  failure  of  public  relief  are  dra- 
matically portrayed,  with  the  concise 
commentary  of  Mr.  Allen.  The  pictures 
collected  by  Agnes  Rogers  are  well- 
chosen.  (/.  D.  L.) 


Dark  December.  By  Robert  E.  Merri- 
am.  Ziff-Davis.  1947.  234  pp. 
This  story,  written  by  a  former  combat 
reporter  of  the  War  Department,  is  a 
factual  account  of  all  that  concerns  the 
Battle  of  the  Bulge.  Hitler's  camouflage 
was  so  successful  that  no  one  on  the 
Allied  side  suspected  the  time  of  his  at- 
tack, although  Eisenhower  had  predicted 
it  in  a  letter  to  Montgomery  in  Septem- 
ber, saying,  "We  may  get  a  nasty  little 
Kasserine  if  the  enemy  chooses  the 
right  place  to  concentrate  his  strength." 
The  author  explains  Allied  unawareness 
of  the  situation  by  the  cleverness  of  the 
German  plan,  lack  of  aerial  reconnais- 
sance, poor  interpretation  of  intelligence, 
and  above  all,  by  our  excess  of  optimism. 
Under  the  leadership  of  Peiper  and 
"butcher  boy"  Dietrich,  whom  Hitler  had 
selected  for  their  fanaticism,  the  attack 
was  launched  on  the  morning  of  De- 
cember 16,  1944.  The  American  soldiers, 
supposed  to  be  in  a  rest  area,  wrere 
awakened  by  roaring  cannons  along  an 
eighty-mile  front.  On  December  21  the 
enemy  succeeded  in  attacking  and  over- 
whelming the  garrison  at  St.  Vith,  re- 
sulting in  a  huge  mass  surrender  of 
Allied  arms,  which  the  American  press 
did  not  mention.  But  at  Bastogne  the 
defenders  proved  that  Americans  could 
stand  up  against  the  strongest  attacks 
of  World  War  II.  At  the  end,  Mr.  Merri- 
am  summarizes  ten  "myths"  about  the 
battle,  the  most  curious  of  which  existed 
in  Hitler's  mind.  The  latter  believed  that 
Churchill  and  Roosevelt  really  com- 
manded the  Allied  troops.  The  author 
minimizes  Patton's  share  in  the  vic- 
tory, and  exonerates  Montgomery  from 
the  charges  raised  against  him  by  vari- 
ous war  correspondents.  (R.  F.  N.) 

Forced  Labor  in  Soviet  Russia.  By  Da- 
vid J.  Dallin  and  Boris  I.  Nicolaevsky. 
Yale.  1947.  331  pp. 
This  volume  is  a  compilation  of  material 
received  from  many  sources,  including 
the  writings  of  former  Soviet  officials 
and  prisoners.  The  first  section  deals 
with  forced-labor  camps  of  the  present 
day.  Mr.  Dallin  maintains  that  slave 
labor  is  a  basic  element  of  Soviet  economy, 
and  that  production,  not  human  life,  is 
the  important  consideration.  Criminals,  po- 
litical prisoners,  and  general  "offenders 
against  the  mode  of  life"  are  confined 


TEN  BOOKS 


307 


in  the  camps.  The  authors  have  com- 
piled a  list  of  the  camps,  indicating-  the 
various  forced-labor  projects  of  farming, 
mining-,  lumbering,  and  railway  build- 
ing. Mr.  Dallin  presents  many  estimates 
as  to  the  number  of  prisoners  and  con- 
cludes that  the  total  is  between  7  and 
15  million  —  a  group  as  large  as  that 
of  the  free  industrial  workers.  The  sec- 
ond part  considers  the  development  his- 
torically. The  camps  were  begun  with 
the  lofty  ideals  of  Marx  and  Lenin.  In- 
tended as  a  means  of  rehabilitating  vic- 
tims of  capitalist  exploitation,  they  soon 
became  convenient  means  of  disposal 
for  all  troublesome  elements.  With  the  in- 
auguration of  the  Five  Year  plans,  all 
ideas  of  rehabilitation  were  forgotten  in 
the  concern  with  economic  goals.  The 
authors  also  show  the  frantic  attempts 
of  the  government  to  prevent  news  of 
the  camps  from  reaching  the  outside 
world  and  even  the  masses  of  Soviet 
citizens.  Particularly  striking  are  the  re- 
ports of  prisoners  of  war  who  labored 
in  Soviet  Russia,  and  those  of  the  Rus- 
sian prisoners  of  war  who  returned  to 
their  country  to  find  themselves  labelled 
"socially  dangerous."  (M.  R.) 

Cervantes.  Bv  Aubrey  F.  G.  Bell.  Univ. 
of  Oklahoma  Press.  1947.  ?.\o  pp. 
It  is  appropriate  that  for  +he  four-hun- 
dredth anniversary  of  Cervantes's  death, 
there  should  be  produced  a  penetrating 
and  scholarly  appreciation.  The  most 
important  chapter  of  the  book  deals 
with  the  great  novelist's  purpose  in 
writing  Don  Quixote.  Mr.  Bell  disposes 
of  the  notion,  first  suggested  by  By- 
ron, that  Cervantes  "smiled  Spain's 
chivalry  away" ;  the  novel  is  an  attack 
on  the  misuse  of  chivalry  only,  and  a 
warning  against  the  gulf  that  lies  be- 
tween theory  and  practice.  The  multi- 
plicity of  episodes  should  be  excused, 
for  they  are  unified  by  the  pervading 
humor  of  the  story.  Cervantes's  success 
is  largely  attributed  to  his  use  of  popu- 
lar tradition ;  when  he  neglected  that 
rich  source,  his  works  —  as  for  instance 
Galatea  and  Pcrsiles  —  are  failures.  Cer- 
vantes knew  the  peasantry  from  his  life- 
long contact  with  them  as  a  soldier  and 
as  a  public  commissioner.  In  addition, 
he  employs  the  epic  theme  so  as  to 
heighten  the  significance  of  common 
things.  There  is  a  trinity  of  qualities  in 


Don  Quixote  that  are  closely  interrelated, 
namely,  sincere  religious  beliefs,  a  deep 
understanding  of  human  nature,  and 
rich  humor.  The  author  cites  numerous 
passages  to  show  Cervantes's  strong 
manifestation  of  a  Catholic  viewpoint, 
and  explains  that  unconventional  al- 
lusions to  sacred  matters  are  a  sign  of 
familiarity,  not  of  irreverence.  The  book 
opens  with  a  discussion  of  the  form  that 
the  Renaissance  took  in  Spain.  Cer- 
vantes, Mr.  Bell  writes,  "helped  to  keep 
the  Renaissance  broad  and  sane  by  re- 
bridging  the  gap  between  the  new  cul- 
ture and  the  people."  (R.  F.  N.) 

American  Memoir.  Bv  Henry  Seidel 
Canby.  Houghton  Mifflin.  1947.  420  pp. 
This  book  reflects  the  changing  values 
in  American  life  and  literature  from  the 
nineties  to  the  present  day.  It  is  an 
autobiography,  yet  the  author  has  suc- 
ceeded in  achieving  a  measure  of  objec- 
tivity. He  divides  his  recollections  into 
three  periods.  The  first,  "The  Age  of 
Confidence,"  is  that  of  his  boyhood.  Like 
H.  L.  Mencken  in  his  Happy  Days,  Mr. 
Canby  describes  the  era  with  an  un- 
mistakable nostalgia,  yet  he  is  able  to 
turn  a  critical  eye  upon  its  Victorian 
values.  The  next  division  deals  with  the 
author's  student  and  teaching  days. 
Yale  life  was  then  emotionally  vigorous 
but  intellectually  naive.  The  specialized 
scholarship  of  the  time  was  concerned 
with  fact  rather  than  spirit,  and  litera- 
ture was  studied  apart  from  the  forces 
which  shaped  it.  Mr.  Canby  became  in- 
creasingly critical  of  ivory-tower  aca- 
demicians, and  it  was  this  feeling,  along 
with  the  onset  of  World  War  I,  which 
led  him  to  accept  an  editorial  position 
in  New  York.  This  step  marks  the  be- 
ginning of  the  final  section.  As  corre- 
spondent during  the  war  in  Lngland,  as 
editor  of  the  Saturday  Reviezv  of  Litera- 
ture, and  as  chairman  of  the  Selection 
Committee  for  the  Book-of-the-Month 
Club,  Mr.  Canby  was  brought  into  con- 
tact with  most  of  the  important  literary 
figures  of  the  twenties  and  thirties.  He 
discusses  the  leading  writers  who  "were 
summing  up  magnificently  the  results 
for  our  day  of  the  Great  American  Ex- 
periment." American  Memoir  contains 
many  vignettes  of  the  writers  Mr.  Can- 
by  has  known,  from  Willa  Cather  to 
Sinclair  Lewris  and  from  Robert  Frost 


308 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


to  Thomas  Wolfe.  Apart  from  some  lin- 
gering timidity,  his  appraisals  are  shrewd, 
incisive,  and  often  felicitous.  (M.  R.) 

The  Journals  of  Andre  Gide.  Translated 
by  Justin  O'Brien.  Knopf.  1947.  376  pp. 
Ever  since  1891  when  his  first  book  ap- 
peared, Andre  Gide  has  been  in  the  fore- 
front of  French  literary  life.  As  one  of 
the  group  of  Symbolists  gathered  around 
Mallarme,  he  achieved  distinction  by 
several  volumes  of  verse  and  various 
plays  and  novels.  In  this  country  he  has 
become  known  chiefly  as  the  author 
of  The  Counterfeiters,  The  Immoralist, 
Straiglit  is  the  Gate,  of  books  on  Dos- 
toevsky  and  Montaigne,  and  through  his 
travels  in  the  Congo  and  Soviet  Russia. 
Perhaps  none  of  Gide's  works  is  a  "mas- 
terpiece," yet  through  his  restless,  search- 
ing spirit  he  has  exerted  a  greater  in- 
fluence on  the  younger  generation  than 
anyone  else.  At  the  age  of  seventy-six, 
he  still  belongs  to  the  avant  garde.  The 
present  volume,  the  first  of  a  projected 
three-volume  series,  covers  the  years 
1889-1913.  It  consists  of  notes  on  the 
progress  of  his  works,  on  books  read 
—  and  he  reads  enormously,  especially  in 
English  literature  —  and  of  fragments 
of  conversations  with  literally  hundreds 
of  writers  and  painters.  For  one  who 
professes  to  be  a  recluse  by  nature, 
Gide  certainly  spent  a  considerable  part 
of  his  life  in  company.  From  Verlaine 
to  Pierre  Louys,  and  from  Maeterlinck 
to  Valery,  he  has  known  everybody. 
The  book  is  beautifully  translated  by 
Justin  O'Brien,  professor  of  French  at 
Columbia  University,  who  has  also  pre- 
pared useful,  concise  notes  about  the 
books  and  persons  mentioned  in  the 
text.  (Z.  H.) 

The  Mind  on  the  Wing.  By  Herbert 
Faulkner  West.  Coward-McCann.  1947. 
308  pp. 

Professor  West  is  an  enthusiastic  book 
collector,  and  his  volume  is  designed 
for  beginners  in  the  field  and  for  the 
general  reader.  The  first  chapter  ex- 
plains terms  like  "edition"  ar.d  "impres- 
sion," and  suggests  subjects  for  collect- 
ing. A  section  on  mountaineering  opens 
a  new  field  in  adventure  stories,  al- 
though the  recapitulations  of  the  narra- 
tives can  hardly  enhance  one's  interest 
in  the  books  themselves.  The  account 


of  nature  writers  includes  of  course 
Walton,  Thoreau,  and  W.  H.  Hudson, 
and  mentions  other  less  famous  but  ex- 
cellent naturalists,  while  the  list  of 
books  on  travel  and  exploration  enlarges 
the  part  devoted  to  the  oat-of-doors. 
Mr.  West  offers  a  biographical  sketch 
of  Robert  Frost,  with  information 
about  the  poet's  rare  editions  and  ex- 
cerpts from  his  work.  There  are  several 
other  useful  bibliographies:  that  on  H. 
L.  Mencken,  which  continues  the  work 
of  Carroll  Frey ;  and  that  of  the  "best" 
books  on  World  War  II.  Finally,  the 
author  lists  a  hundred  of  his  favorite 
books,  with  random  bibliographical 
data  and  descriptive  notes.  (/  D.  L.) 

Footnotes  on  Nature.  By  John  Kieran. 
Doubleday.  1947.  268  pp. 
This  is  a  charming  book  by  Mr.  Kieran, 
whose  inexhaustible  fund  of  knowledge 
on  all  sorts  of  subjects  is  a  constant 
wonder  to  listeners  to  "Information 
Please."  Starting  from  the  account  of 
his  boyhood  rambles,  he  describes  his 
country  walks,  most  of  tnem  in  the 
immediate  neighborhood  of  New  York 
—  or  in  the  parks  of  the  city  itself.  Often 
he  was  accompanied  by  friends,  the 
Dramatic  Critic,  the  Artist,  the  Ma- 
gician, and  the  Astronomer.  There  is  a 
chapter  for  almost  every  month  of  the 
year.  In  a  leisurely,  reminiscent  way  he 
describes  some  two  hundred  birds,  lin- 
gering with  fondness  over  some  of 
them,  such  as  the  Great  Black-backed 
Gulls  on  the  ice  floes  of  the  Hudson, 
the  Snowy  Owls  near  Jones  Beach,  and 
the  ducks  and  scoters  in  Long  Island 
Sound.  Sometimes  even  the  most  regu- 
lar birds  are  unpredictable :  during  an 
April  night  in  the  woods  a  migrating 
Hermit  Thrush  appeared  and  sang  its 
magnificent  summer  song.  The  best 
time  for  the  bird-watcher  seems  to  be 
September.  Seated  on  the  dunes  at  Fire 
Island,  Mr.  Kieran  and  his  friends  have 
seen  hordes  of  them  on  their  way  south : 
Red-breasted  Nuthatches,  Nighthawks, 
and  various  species  of  warblers  were 
their  favorites.  Observing  butterflies, 
trees,  and  fruits  is  no  less  rewarding. 
The  author,  as  one  might  expect,  in- 
cludes quotations  from  Shakespeare  to 
express  his  delight  in  the  out-of-doors. 
Nora  Unwin's  wood  engravings  are  ex- 
cellent. CT.  C.) 


Library  Notes 


Miss  Elizabeth  Cook 

MISS  ELIZABETH  COOK,  the 
author  of  "The  Plays  of  Richard 
Brome,"  the  leading  article  in  the  pres- 
ent issue  of  More  Books,  is  a  graduate 
of  Girton  College,  Cambridge  Universi- 
ty. She  was  Augustus  Anson  Whitney 
Fellow  last  year  at  Radcliffe  College. 

Dumas  Fils  Purchases 
Works  of  Art 

ALEXANDRE  DUMAS  FILS, 
author  of  La  Dame  aux  Camellias, 
Le  Pcre  Prodigiie,  and  other  extremely 
successful  plays,  was  a  zealous  art  col- 
lector, who  brought  together  a  whole 
gallery  of  paintings  and  sculpture  in 
his  house  at  Puys,  near  Dieppe.  This 
letter  to  his  agent,  translated  from  the 
original  now  in  the  Library,  refers  to  a 
number  of  contemporary  works : 

Dear  Monsieur  Louty  — 

Thank  you  for  your  great  readiness 
to  render  me  service.  I  really  thought 
that  the  "Peste"  had  been  purchased  by 
the  government.  Only  they  or  I  could 
have  had  such  a  good  idea.  Unfortunately, 
they  are  richer  than  I  am,  and  I  have 
not  the  means  to  outbid  them,  although 
I  know  how  to  be  frugal.  I  should  not 
therefore  be  able  to  offer  more  than 
6000  francs,  which  is  still  a  large  sum  in 
the  present  state  of  things,  where  one 
does  not  know  whether  the  pictures 
one  buys  today  will  not  be  destroyed 
tomorrow  by  universal  suffrage. 

Express  all  my  regrets  to  M.  Delaunay. 
Be  sure  to  tell  him  that  in  offering  this 
still  higher  sum  than  that  which  the 
government  had  offered  him,  I  do  not 
in  the  least  intend  to  lessen  his  fame 
nor  to  bargain  with  him.  It  is  one  of 
these  works  which  is  worth  all  that  its 
author  can  ask  for  it,  and  all  that  the 
amateur  can  give  for  it;  but  when  one 
is  not  buying  pictures  to  resell  them, 
one  is  forced  to  hold  back. 

As  for  the  Lepics,  do  not  think  any 
more  about  it.  When  he  comes  to 
Dieppe,  let  him  go  on  to  Puys ;  I  shall 
be  very  happy  to  make  his  acquaintance. 

For  the  Flahaut,  I  shall  offer  800 


francs,  1000  at  the  most.  Write  him  that 
it  is  for  an  artist,  but  above  all  do  not 
let  him  suspect  that  it  is  for  me;  that 
would  embarass  him  too  much.  As  for 
the  Brillouin,  I  gave  it  up.  I  asked  Ber- 
trand  for  a  reduction  on  "Virginie"  — 
2000  francs  —  and  Cambos  for  a  re- 
duction on  "La  Femme  Adultere"  — 
1800  francs.  I  bought  Rousseau's  "Om- 
brelle"  —  4000. 

I  have  cleared  my  account.  Thanks 
again  for  all  this  trouble,  and  send  my 
warmest  regards  to  all. 

A.  Dumas  Fils 

The  first  picture  discussed  is  La 
Peste  a  Rome,  by  Elie  Delaunay.  Other 
works  mentioned  are  the  Mort  de  Vir- 
ginie, by  Jean  Baptiste  Bertrand,  painted 
in  1869;  a  sculpture  by  Jean-Jules 
Cambos,  La  Femme  Adultere;  and 
L'Etc  on  VOmbrelle  Bleue,  by  Philippe 
Rousseau,  painted  in  1878.  Several  other 
painters  of  the  time  are  also  mentioned: 
Louis-Georges  Brillouin  portrayed  six- 
teenth- and  seventeenth-century  life ; 
Ludovic-Napoleon  Lepic  painted  mostly 
fishing  scenes ;  and  Leon-  Charles  Fla- 
haut, a  pupil  of  Corot,  specialized  in 
landscapes. 

The  letter  is  undated.  However,  it  must 
have  been  written  between  1878,  when 
Rousseau  painted  his  Ombrelle,  and 
1889,  the  year  of  Lepic's  death.   J.  S. 

A  Puritan  Challenge  to 
Richard  Hooker 

A CHRISTIAN  Letter  of  certainc 
English  Protestants  [0.389^184] 
bears  on  the  title-page  the  date  1599 
but  no  place  of  printing.  The  author- 
ship is  now  attributed  to  Thomas  Cart- 
wright,  the  leader  of  the  Puritan  party 
in  the  Church  of  England  in  Elizabeth's 
reign ;  and  the  publisher  is  assumed  to 
have  been  R.  Schilders  of  Middelburg, 
a  town  in  the  Netherlands,  where  Cart- 
wright  was  pastor  at  the  church  of 
English  merchants  during  his  exile. 
The  letter  was  directed  to  Richard 
Hooker,  whose  Lawes  of  Ecclesiastical 
Politic  is  a  classic  of  English  theology. 
Hooker's  work  grew  out  of  contro- 


309 


3io 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


versy  in  which  he  was  engaged,  when 
Master  of  the  Temple  in  London,  with 
Walter  Travers,  a  Puritan  minister, 
whom  Cartwright  had  ordained  in 
Antwerp.  In  eight  books  Hooker  set 
forth  the  principles  of  conservative 
church  policy  against  the  claims  and 
criticisms  of  the  Puritans.  The  first 
four  books  were  published  in  1594;  the 
fifth,  which  deals  with  the  liturgy  and 
the  sacraments,  in  1597;  and  the  last 
three  were  completed  from  his  drafts 
and  printed  after  his  death  in  1600. 

Cartwright's  pamphlet  attacks,  of 
course,  only  the  first  five  books.  It 
takes  the  extreme  Puritan  position  of 
salvation  by  faith  and  the  sole  authori- 
ty of  Scripture.  The  challengers,  some- 
what paradoxically,  fall  back  on  the 
teachings  of  the  "reverent  Fathers," 
who  turn  out  to  be  Cranmer,  Ridley, 
Hooper,  Latimer,  and  the  like.  Accom- 
panying their  zeal  is  a  fanatical  hatred 
of  "the  Antichristian  sinagogue  of 
Rome" ;  and  they  reproach  Hooker  for 
having  written  about  Catholics  that  in 
respect  to  the  main  parts  of  Christian 
truth,  "we  gladlie  acknowledge  them 
to  be  of  the  familie  of  Jesus  Christ." 
"Mai.  Hoo.  is  verie  arrogant  and  pre- 
sumptuous to  make  himself  the  onelie 
Rabbi,"  they  write. 

The  Christian  Letter  is  the  tenth  of 
Cartwright's  Latin  and  English  pam- 
phlets in  the  Library.  M.  M. 

Edifying  Works  by  T.  S.  Arthur 

TIMOTHY  SHAY  ARTHUR  be- 
gan his  long  literary  career  at 
Baltimore  in  the  early  1830's,  when  Ed- 
gar Allan  Poe  was  influencing  younger 
writers  there.  His  aim  was  to  educate 
the  public,  and  temperance  became  his 
special  topic;  but  he  also  considered 


such  subjects  as  extravagance,  do- 
mestic relations,  and  religion.  Before 
his  death  in  1885,  at  the  age  of  seventy- 
five,  he  produced  some  one  hundred 
books,  besides  editing  a  series  of  minor 
periodicals. 

No  later  work  of  the  author  ever 
rivalled  Ten  Nights  in  a  Barroom,  which 
appeared  in  1854  with  enormous  success, 
but  there  were  other  favorites.  Among 
those  in  the  Library's  possession  are 
Arthur's  Home  Stories,  The  Snowflake, 
Our  Little  Harry,  and  a  dozen  others, 
mostly  in  the  original  editions.  Recently 
the  Library  has  acquired  copies  of 
Family  Pride,  1848  (which  includes  a 
second  title,  Pride  or  Principle),  Lessons 
in  Life,  1851,  and  The  Good  Time  Com- 
ing, 1855. 

Family  Pride  is  the  story  of  Emily 
Watson,  a  young  woman  whose  par- 
ents, ashamed  of  her  marriage,  kid- 
nap her  child  and  drive  her,  as  a  widow, 
into  the  poorhouse.  No  opportunity  is 
given  to  ponder  legal  responsibilities, 
for  behold !  no  sooner  has  the  agitated 
mother  found  that  she  can  trust  in  the 
Lord,  than  fate  —  in  the  form  of  a  car- 
riage and  an  obliging  driver  —  whisks 
her  away  to  a  neat  establishment  with 
"handsomely  furnished  parlours,"  and 
her  child,  restored,  grows  up  to  marry 
a  rich  southern  planter.  In  Pride  or 
Principle  Arthur  uses  his  favorite  de- 
vice of  contrasts  to  show  the  folly  of 
exaggerating  the  importance  of  eti- 
quette. Lizzy,  a  girl  just  up  from  a  sick- 
bed, walks  across  town  to  call  on  her 
friend  Helen.  Because  the  footman  is 
upstairs  when  she  rings  and  the  mother 
is  unwilling  to  demean  herself  by  open- 
ing her  own  door,  Lizzy  goes  home  with- 
out sitting  down  and  this  "shatters"  her 
constitution.  Helen,  a  noble  character 
representing  "Principle"  as  opposed  to 
her  mother,  who  is  "Pride,"  receives  the 
love  of  a  refined  young  man.    T.  C. 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 

Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

** 

This  list  should  be  used  in  conjunction  zvitJi  Books  Current,  a 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
1943.  Books  Current  is  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  and  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  are  available  for  the  whole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  are  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  the 
Business  Branch;  however,  they  may  be  borrotved  through  the  various 
Branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


Bibliography 

Greenough,  Chester  Noyes,  1874-1938.  A  bib- 
liography of  the  Theophrastan  character 
in  English,  with  several  portrait  charac- 
ters .  .  .  prepared  for  publication  by  J. 
Milton  French.  Harvard.  1947.  xii,  347  pp. 

*Z2oi4.C5G7 

Harvard  studies  in  comparative  literature. 

Hirshberg,  Herbert  S.,  and  Carl  H.  Melinat. 
Subject  guide  to  United  States  govern- 
ment publications.  American  Library 
Assn.  1947.  vii,  228  pp.  *9oi6.353A52 
"Bibliography  of  United  States  government  publi- 
cations" :  pp.  7-12. 


Biography.  Letters 

Bred,  Max.  .  .  .  Franz  Kafka.  New  York, 
Schocken  books.  [1947.]  3-236  pp.  Plates. 

PT2621.A26Z62  1947 
Translated  from  the  German  by  G.  Humphreys 
Roberts. 

Budenz,  Louis  F.  This  is  my  story.  McGraw- 
Hill.  [I947-]  xv,  379  PP-  9335-4A5I 

The  story  of  an  American  communist's  return  to 
Catholicism. 

Burton,  Katherine.  Difficult  star;  the  life  of 
Pauline  Jaricot.  Longmans,  Green.  1947. 
x,  239  pp.  BX4705.J37B8  1947 

Pauline  Jaricot  was  the  founder  of  the  Society  for 
the  Propagation  of  the  Faith. 

Clapp,  Margaret  A.  Forgotten  first  citizen: 
John  Bigelow.  Little,  Brown.  1947.' x,  390 
PP.  E664.B55C5 
Bigelow  was  consul  to  France  during  the  Civil  War, 
an  early  founder  of  the  Republican  Party,  and  po- 
litical adviser  to  Tilden. 

Colvin,  Fred  Herbert.  60  years  with  men  and 
machines,  an  autobiography  in  collabora- 
tion with  D.  J.  Duffin.  McGraw-Hill.  1947. 
ix,  297  pp.  Illus.  4030E.24 

Dana,  Julian.  A.  P.  Giannini,  giant  in  the 
West.  Prentice-Hall.  1947.  v,  345  pp. 

9332.01A67 

Root,  E.  Merrill.  Frank  Harris.  Odyssey 
Press.  1947.  324  pp.    PR4759-H37Z77  *947 


Singmaster,  Elsie.  I  speak  for  Thaddeus 
Stevens.  Houghton  Mifflin.  1947.  vi,  446 
pp.  E415.9.S84S5 

Terhune,  Alfred  McKinley.  The  life  of  Ed- 
ward FitzGerald,  translator  of  the  Ru- 
baiyat  of  Omar  Khayyam.  Yale  Univ. 
Press.  1947.  xi,  373  pp.  Illus.  PR4703.T4 

Van  Loon,  Hendrik  Willem,  1882-1944.  Re- 
port to  Saint  Peter,  upon  the  kind  of 
world  in  which  Hendrik  Willem  van  Loon 
spent  the  first  years  of  his  life.  Simon  and 
Schuster.  1947.  xiv,  220  pp.  PS3543.A58Z5 

Illustrated  with  characteristic  drawings  by  the 
author. 

White,  William  Allen,  1868-1944.  Selected  let- 
ters .  .  .  edited,  with  an  introduction,  by 
Walter  Johnson.  Holt.  [1947.]  viii,  460  pp. 

PN4874.W52A4  1947 


Business 

American  bureau  of  metal  statistics.  Year 
book.  26th  annual  issue.  1946.  New  York. 
[1947.]  112  pp.  **HDg5o6.A5i 

American  institute  of  accountants.  Yearbook. 
1945-1946.  New  York,  American  Institute 
of  Accountants.  [1947.]  562  pp. 

**HF56oi.A5i 

Baten,  Charles  E.,  and  others.  The  law  sten- 
ographer. Gregg.  1946.  312  pp.  NBS 

Burns,  Arthur  P.,  and  W.  C.  Mitchell.  Meas- 
uring business  cycles.  National  Bureau  of 
Economic  Research.  1946.  506  pp.  NBS 

Business  year  book.  An  annual  survey  of  mar- 
ket data  featuring  the  economic  areas, 
provinces,  cities  and  towns  of  Canada  .  .  . 
1947.  Montreal,  MacLean-Hunter  Pub. 
Co.  1947.  **HA745Bg7 

Canada.  Laws,  statutes,  etc.  Income  war  tax 
act  .  .  .  The  full  text  of  the  Income  war 
tax  act,  with  all  amendments  .  .  .  New 
York,  Commerce  clearing  house,  inc.  1940. 
225  pp.  **Hj466i.A5 

Canfield,  Bertrand  R.  Sales  administration; 
principles  and  problems;  revised  edition. 
Prentice-Hall.  1947.  606  pp.  NBS 


311 


312 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Canning  trade.  .  .  .  Almanac  of  the  canning 
industry,  1047.  Compiled  by  the  Canning 
trade.  Baltimore.  1947.  290  pp. 

**TX59g.C22 

Cornish,  Newel  H.  Small  scale  retailing.  Tort- 
land,  Oregon.  Binforis  &  Mort.  1946.  397 
pp.  NBS 

Crews,  Albert.  Professional  radio  writing. 
Houghton  Mifflin.  1946.  473  pp.  NBS 

Cummins,  Earl  E.,  and  Frank  DeVyver.  The 
labor  problem  in  the  United  States.  3d  edi- 
tion. Van  Nostrand.  1947.  587  pp.  NBS 

Electronics.  Buyers'  guide  [including  a  direc- 
tory of  electronic  and  allied  products]. 
June,  1947.  McGraw-Hill.  1947. 

**TK6565.E38 

Finney,  Harry  A.  Principles  of  accounting, 
advanced.  3rd  edition.  Frentice-Hall.  1046. 
802  pp.  NBS 

Graff,  Raymond  K.,  and  others.  The  prefab- 
ricated house;  a  practical  guide  for  the 
prospective  buyer.  Doubleday.  1947.  J32 
pp.  NBS 

Harvard  University.  Graduate  school  of  busi- 
ness administration.  Bureau  of  business  re- 
search. Operating  results  of  department 
and  specialty  stores.  1946.  Harvard.  1947- 

HF5463.H33 

Howard,  Frank  A.  Buna  rubber,  the  birth  of 
an  industry.  Van  Nostrand.  1947-  3f>7  PP- 

NBS 

Jacoby,  Neil  H.,  and  Raymond  J.  Saulnier. 
Business  finance  and  banking.  [New 
York],  National  Bureau  of  Economic  Re- 
search. [I947-]  241  pp.  NBS 

Jewelers'  buyers  guide.  1047.  New  York, 
Sherry  Pub.  Co.  1947.  390  pp.  **TS758.J57 

Kimber,  Albert  W.  Latin  American  indus- 
trialization. New  York,  White,  Wold  & 
Co.  [1946.]  54  pp.  NBS 

Leonard's  guide,  universal  edition.  Freight, 
express  and  parcel  post  rates  and  routing. 
Xew  York,  G.  R.  Leonard  &  Co.  1947. 

**HE2ioi.L58 

Manual  of  the  textile  industry  of  Canada. 

1946.  Montreal,  Canadian  Textile  Journal 
Pub.  Co.  196  pp.  **TSi326.K29 

Patterson,  Ernest  M.  An  introduction  to 
world  economics.  Macmillan.  1947-  7°4  PP- 

NBS 

Political  handbook  of  the  world;  parliaments, 
parties  and  press.  January  1,  1947.  New 
York,  Pub.  for  Council  on  Foreign  Ref- 
lations, inc.,  Harper.  1947.  214  pp. 

**JF37-P76 

Prime,  John  Henry.  Investment  analysis. 
Prentice-Hall.  1946.  442  pp.  NBS 

Rand  McNally  list  of  bank  recommended  at- 
torneys. March  1947.  Rand  McNally.  1947- 
112  pp.  **HGis?6.Ri8 

Read,  Charles  R.,  and  Samuel  Marble.  Guide 
to  public  affairs  organizations.  Washing- 
ton, D.  C,  Public  Affairs  Press.  1946.  129 
pp.  **ASi8.R28 

Robinson,  O.  Preston.  How  to  establish  and 
operate  a  retail  store.  Prentice-Hall.  1946. 
379  PP-  NBS 

Schlatter  Charles  F.  Cost  accounting.  Wiley. 

1947.  699  pp.  NBS 


Shultz,  William  J.  Credit  and  collection  man- 
agement. Prentice-Hall.  1947.  814  pp.  NBS 

Sulsbach,  Walter.  German  experience  with 
social  insurance.  National  industrial  con- 
ference board.  1947.  134  pp.  NBS 

Theatre  catalog,  v.  5  1946/47.  Philadelphia, 
J.  Emanuel  Publications.  [1947.]  584  pp. 

**NA6828.T37 

Williams,  Harry  L.,  compiler.  Casey  Jones 
cyclopedia  of  aviation  terms.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1946.  346  pp.  NBS 

Wool  year  book.  1946.  Manchester,  Textile 
Mercury  Limited.  [1946.]  641  pp. 

**TSi6oi.W9i 

Year  book  of  the  Northern  Baptist  conven- 
tion. 1946.  Philadelphia,  American  Baptist 
Publication  Society.  [1946.]  657  pp. 

**BX62i3.A5i 


Economics 

Bellamy,  Francis  Rufus.  Blood  money,  the 
story  of  the  U.  S.  Treasury  secret  agents. 
Dutton.  1947.  257  pp.  JX5313.U6B4 

Berge,  Wendell.  .  .  .  Economic  freedom  for 
the  West.  Lincoln,  Univ.  of  Nebraska 
Press.  1946.  168  pp.  Illus.  Maps.  9330.978 

Brett,  R.  Dallas.  Usury  in  Britain.  London, 
St.  Botolph  Pub.  Co.  [1946.]  144  pp. 

9332.8A75 

Enke,  Stephen,  and  Virgil  Salera.  Interna- 
tional economics.  Prentice-Hall.  1947.  xii, 
731  pp.  Tables.  Forms.  Diagrs.  9330.073A76 

Evitt,  Herbert  Edwin.  A  manual  of  foreign 
exchange.   3d   edition.   London,  Pitman. 

1946.  v,  434  PP-  9332-45A64 

Consists  mainly  of  Part  2  oi  the  author's  original 
volume,  Practical  Banking,  Currency  and  Exchange. 
Forms  a  companion  volume  to  Part  1 ,  now  sepa- 
rately issued  as  Practical  Banking. 

Gordon,  David  L.,  and  Royden  Dangerfield. 
The  hidden  weapon;  the  story  of  economic 
warfare  .  .  .  foreword  by  Thomas  K.  Fin- 
letter.  Harper.  [1947.]  xii,  238  pp.  D800.G6 

Hansen,  Alvin  H.  Economic  policy  and  full 
employment.  McGraw-Hill.  [1947.]  xii  340 
pp.  9330.1A545 

"Companion  volume  to  .  .  .  [the  author's]  Fiscal 
Policy  and  Business  Cycles." — Preface. 

Hobman,  Joseph  Burton,  editor.  .  .  .  Pales- 
tine's economic  future,  a  review  of  pro- 
gress and  prospects,  with  a  message  from 
Field  Marshall  Smuts.  London,  P.  L. 
Humphries  and  Co.  1946.  310  pp.  Illus. 

933°-°56Ai7 

MacKay,  Kenneth  Campbell.  The  progressive 
movement  of  1924.  Columbia  Univ.  Press. 

1947.  298  pp.  Illus.  Maps.  *3563.i  10.527 
Bibliography,  pp.  279—291. 

McMichael,  Stanley  L.  Leases;  percentage, 
short  and  long  term.  4th  edition.  Prentice- 
Hall.  1947.  ix,  585  PP-  Ulus.  9333-3AI29 

Bibliography  on  percentage  leases,  pp.  572-574- 

Marlio,  Louis.  The  aluminum  cartel.  Wash- 
ington, Brookines  Institution.  1947-  xi,  130 
pp.  9338.88 

Paul,  Randolph  E.  Taxation  for  prosperity. 
Bobbs-Merrill.  [1947-]  448  pp.  9336.2A82 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


3i3 


Pigou,  A.  C.  Income;  an  introduction  to 
economics.  London,  Macmillan.  1946.  vii, 
II7PP-  9330.1  A542 

"Based  on  and  in  the  main  reproduces  seven  lec- 
tures given  in  Cambridge  ...  in  the  Lent  term 
of  1945." — Prefatory  Note. 

Raymond,  Fred  Ingalls.  The  limitist.  Norton. 

[1947.]  166  pp.  9330.1  A547 

Sasuly,  Richard.  IG  Farben.  Boni  &  Gaer. 

1947-  x,  312  pp.  g338.41.2A23 

Education 

Ahl,  Frances  Norene.  Audio-visual  materials 
in  the  high  school,  with  special  applica- 
tions to  the  social  studies.  Boston,  Chris- 
topher Pub.  House.  [1946.]  165  pp. 

LB1044.A4 

American  council  on  education.  Commission 
on  teacher  education.  The  improvement  of 
teacher  education,  a  final  report.  Washing- 
ton, D.  C,  American  Council  on  Educa- 
tion. 1946.  xvi,  283  pp.  LB1175.A672 

''Publications,"  pp.  277—283. 

Bristol,  Eng.  University.  Calendar,  1946/47. 
Bristol,  J.  W.  Arrowsmith  Ltd.  *LF62.A3 

Cressman,  George  R.  A  digest  of  Pennsyl- 
vania school  laws,  for  students  in  teachers 
colleges  and  schools  of  education,  for  teach- 
ers in  service,  and  for  school  directors. 
4th  edition.  Prentice-Hall.  1947.  xiv,  144 
pp.  LB2529.P4C7  1947 

Jersild,  Arthur  T.,  and  others.  Child  develop- 
ment and  the  curriculum,  by  Arthur  T. 
Jersild,  in  collaboration  with  Mary  E. 
Chayer,  Charlotte  Fehlman,  Gertrude  Hil- 
dreth  [and]  Marian  Young.  New  York, 
Teachers  college,  Columbia  Univ.  1946.  xi, 
274  pp.  LB1570.J45 

Bibliography,  pp.  239—266. 

Kaback,  Goldie  Ruth.  Vocational  personali- 
ties; an  application  of  the  Rorschach  group 
method.  New  York,  Teachers  college,  Col- 
umbia Univ.  1946.  1 16  pp.  *3592.220.924 

Bibliography,  pp.  85-91. 

Lewis,  C.  S.  The  abolition  of  man;  or,  Reflec- 
tions on  education  with  special  reference 
to  the  teaching  of  English  in  the  upper 
forms  of  schools.  Macmillan.  1947-  61  pp. 

LB41.L665  1947 

Wahlquist,  John  T.  An  introduction  to  Amer- 
ican education.  New  York,  Ronald  Press. 
[1947.]  xii,  333  PP-  LA210.W25 

Ward,  Phebe.  Terminal  education  in  the 
junior  college.  Prepared  for  the  Adminis- 
trative committee  of  the  Commission  on 
terminal  education  of  the  American  asso- 
ciation of  junior  colleges.  Harper.  [1947  ] 
xii,  282  pp.  Illus.  LB2328.W3 

Witner,  Helen  Leland,  editor.  Psychiatric  in- 
terviews with  children  .  .  .  New  York, 
Commonwealth  fund.  1946.  vii,  443  pp.  Il- 
lus. RJ499.W52 

Fine  Arts 

Architecture 

Cochran,  Gifford  A.  Grandeur  in  Tennessee; 
classical  revival  architecture  in  a  pioneer 


state  ...  in  collaboration  with  F.  Burrall 
Hoffman.  New  York,  J.  J.  Augustin.  1946. 
xi,  132  pp.  Illus.  *8og4.04-875 
Le  Corbusier,  pseud.  When  the  cathedrals 
were  white;  a  journey  to  the  country  of 
timid  people.  Reynal  &  Hitchcock.  1 1947. 1 
xxii,  217  pp.  Illus.  8121.01-130 
Translated  from  the  French  by  Francis  E.  Hyslop. 
jr. 

Drawing 

Benesch,  Otto.  Venetian  drawings  of  the 
eighteenth  century  in  America.  New  York, 
H.  Bittner  &  co.  1947.  41  pp.  *8i4i.04-i04 

Gaudier-Brzeska,  Henrin,  1891-1915.  Gaudier- 
Brzeska  drawings;  introduction  by  Hor- 
ace Brodzky.  London,  Faber.  [  1946.]  8  pp. 
92  plates.  8141.06-111 

Kent,  Norman,  editor.  Drawings  by  American 
artists,  selected  &  edited  by  Norman  Kent, 
with  an  introduction  by  Rockwell  Kent. 
New  York,  Watson-Guptill.  1947.  xi,  158 
pp.  Illus.  8141.05-105 

Lorenzetti,  Giulio.  Le  cahier  de  dessins  des 
Ticpolo  au  Musee  Correr  de  Venise.  Ve- 
nczia,  D.  Guarnati.  [1946.]  17,  87,  86  pp. 
Plates.  *8i4iB.i07 

Tieize,  Hans.  European  master  drawings  in 
the  United  States.  New  York,  J.  J.  Augus- 
tin. [1947.]  xi,  326  pp.  *8i40.os-io6 

Flower  Arrangement 

Biddle,  Dorothy,  and  Dorothea  Blom.  Flower 
arrangement  for  everyone.  New  York,  M. 
Barrows  and  Co.  1947.  192  pp.  4092.08-137 

Ishimoto,  Tatsuo.  The  art  of  flower  arrange- 
ment. New  York,  Crown  Publishers. 
[1947.]  125  pp.  Illus.  4092.08-136 

Illustration 

Newcomb,  Covelle.  The  secret  door;  the 
story  of  Kate  Greenaway  .  .  .  [with]  draw- 
ings after  Kate  Greenaway  by  Addison 
Burbank.  Dodd,  Mead.  1946.  162  pp.  Col- 
ored illus.  8143.03-445 

Pitz,  Henry  C,  editor.  A  treasury  of  Ameri- 
can book  illustration.  New  York,  Watson- 
Guptill.  [1947.]  128  pp.  Illus.  8143.03-118 

Watson,  Ernest  W.  Forty  illustrators  and 
how  they  work.  New  York,  Watson-Gup- 
till. 1946.  318  pp.  Illus.  8143.03-117 

Painting 

Berman,  Eugene.  Eugene  Berman,  edited 
and  with  an  introduction  by  Julien  Levy. 
New  York,  American  studio  books.  [1947.] 
xv,  80  pp.  XCVIII  plates.  *8o66.o7-3i2 

Blanch,  Arnold.  Arnold  Blanch.  New  York, 
American  Artists  Group.  [1946.]  64  pp. 
Illus.  8060.06-324 

Includes  55  pages  of  illustrations. 

Bonnard,  Pierre.  .  .  .  Bonnard;  introduction 
by  Jacques  de  Laprade.  New  York,  Tudor 
Pub.  Co.  1946.  16  pp.  24  colored  plates. 

8063.08-330 


3i4 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Braque,  Georges.  .  .  .  Braque;  introduction 
by  Stanislas  Fumet.  New  York,  Tudor 
Pub.  Co.  1946.  16  pp.  24  colored  plates. 

*8o63.o7-34iR 

Buffalo  fine  arts  academy.  .  .  .  British  con- 
temporary painters  .  .  .  Introduction  by 
Andrew  C.  Ritchie.  [Buffalo,  Holling 
Press.  1946.]  97  pp.  *8o62.04-io3 

Carr,  Emily,  1871-1945.  Growing  pains;  the 
autobiography  of  Emily  Carr,  with  a  fore- 
word by  Ira  Dilworth.  Toronto,  Oxford 
Univ.  Press.  1946.  xiv,  381  pp.  8062.09-375 

Cheney,  Russell,  1881-1945.  Russell  Cheney 
...  a  record  of  his  work,  with  notes  by  F. 
O.  Matthiessen.  New  York,  Oxford  Univ. 
Press.  1947.  124  pp.  Ulus.  8060.06-395 

Reproductions  of  the  artist's  work  from  1916  on, 
accompanied  by  a  selection  of  passages  concerning 
his  paintings  from  letters  to  Mr.  Matthiessen  and 
other  friends. 

Rowley,  George.  Principles  of  Chinese  paint- 
ing, with  illustrations  from  the  Du  Bois 
Schanck  Morris  collection.  Princeton  Univ. 
Press.  1947.  in  pp.  48  plates.  *8o68.oi-ii4 

Taubes,  Frederic.  Frederic  Taubes.  New 
York,  American  Artists  Group.  [1946.] 
64  pp.  Illus.  8060.06-930 
Includes  59  pages  of  illustrations. 

Miscellaneous 

Amberg,  George.  Art  in  modern  ballet.  Pan- 
theon. [1946.]  115  pp.  Plates.  *4og-8.o5-4oi 
"Ballet  index    1909-1945,"  pp.  37-104. 

Knight,  Charles  Robert.  Animal  anatomy  & 
psychology  for  the  artist  and  layman.  Mc- 
Graw-Hill. [1947.]  vii,  149  pp.  8142.05-120 

With  illustrations  by  the  author. 

Labovitcb,  Mark.  Clothes  through  the  ages. 
.  .  .  London,  Quality  Press  Ltd.  [1944.]  127 
pp.  XXVII  colored  plates.  8192.02-119 

History 

United  States 

Faulkner,  Harold  Underwood,  and  Tyler 
Kepner.  .  .  .  America,  its  history  and 
people.  Harper.  [1947.]  xvi,  949  pp.  Illus. 

E178.1.F28  1947 

Kip,  Leonard,  1826-1906.  California  sketches, 
with  recollections  of  the  gold  mines:  with 
an  introduction  by  Lyle  H.  Wright.  Los 
Angeles,  N.  A.  Kovach.  1946.  xi,  58  pp. 
Plates.  F865.K57  1946 

McLeod,  Alexander.  Pigtails  and  gold  dust. 
Caldwell,  Idaho,  Caxton  Printers.  1947. 
326  pp.  Plates.  F869.S3M2 
"A  panorama  of  Chinese  life  in  early  California.'' 

Scudder,  Townsend.  Concord :  American  town. 
Little,  Brown.  1947.  421  pp.  F74.C8S35 

Udell,  John,  b.  1795.  John  Udell  Journal,  kept 
during  a  trip  across  the  plains,  containing 
an  account  of  the  massacre  of  a  portion 
of  his  party  by  the  Mojave  Indians  in  1859. 
Introduction  [by]  Lyle  H.  Wright.  Los 
Angeles,  N.  A.  Kovach.  1946.  87  pp.  Illus. 

F593.U22  1946 
A  reprint,  including  a  facsimile  reproduction  of 
the  original  title-page  of  the  Huntington  Library 


copy  of  the  author's  journal  of  his  overland  trip 
to  California,  by  the  Santa  Fe  trail,  in  1S58— 59, 
published  in  1868. 

Ware,  Ethel  Kime.  A  constitutional  history 
of  Georgia.  Columbia  Univ.  Press.  1947. 
210  pp.  *3563. 1 10.528 

Bibliography,  pp.  190—206. 

Windolph,  Charles  A.  I  fought  with  Custer; 
the  story  of  Sergeant  Windolph,  last  sur- 
vivor of  the  battle  of  the  Little  Big  Horn, 
as  told  to  Frazier  and  Robert  Hunt,  with 
explanatory  material  and  contemporary 
sidelights  on  the  Custer  fight.  Scribner. 
1947.  xiv,  236  pp.  Illus.  E83.876.W5 

World  War  II 

Andreas-Friedrich,  Ruth.  Berlin  under- 
ground, 1938-1945  .  .  .  translated  by  Bar- 
rows Mussey,  with  an  introductory  note 
by  Joel  Sayre.  Holt.  [1947.]  xiv,  312  pp. 

DD256.A6 

Dewey,  A.  Peter.  As  they  were  .  .  .  epilogue 
by  Geoffrey  T.  Hellman.  New  York, 
Beechhurst  Press.  [1946.]  233  pp.  D761.D4 

A  first-hand  account  of  France  in  1939—40,  and  the 
effect  of  the  German  invasion  upon  individual  lives. 
The  author,  formerly  a  Paris  correspondent  for  the 
Chicano  Daily  News,  was  killed  in  action  in  Saigon 
in  1945. 

Keith,  Agnes  Newton.  Three  came  home  .  .  . 

sketches  by  the  author  and  Don  Johnston. 

Little,  Brown.  1947.  316  pp.  D805.B6K4 
Matthews,  Allen  R.  The  assault.  Simon  and 

Schuster.  [1947.]  vii,  216  pp.  D767.99.I  9M3 
Morgenstern,  George  E.  Pearl  harbor;  the 

story  of  the  secret  war.  Devin-Adair.  1947. 

xv,  425  pp.  Maps.  D767.92.M6 
Shomon,  Joseph  James.  Crosses  in  the  wind. 

New  York,  Stratford  House.  [1947.]  191 

pp.  Illus.  D810.D4S5 
Spender,  Stephen.  European  witness.  Reynal 

&  Hitchcock.  [1946.]  246  pp. 

DD43.S65  1946 

A  travel  book  giving  the  author's  experiences  in 
Germany  and  France  immediately  following  the 
War.  Of  particular  interest  are  the  accounts  of  the 
many  interviews  the  author  had  with  people  in  all 
walks  of  life  in  both  countries. 

Werth,  Alexander.  The  year  of  Stalingrad, 
a  historical  record  and  a  study  of  Russian 
mentality,  methods,  and  policies.  Knopf, 
xviii,   475.  vi  pp.   Illus.  D764.W49  1947 

Zacharias,  Ellis  M.  Secret  missions;  the  story 
of  an  intelligence  officer.  Putnam.  [1946.] 
viii,  433  pp.  D810.S8Z3 

Miscellaneous 

Coniston,  Ralph.  The  future  of  freedom  in  the 
Orient.  Norton.  1947.  233  pp.  DS518.1.C6 

Du  Bois,  W.  E.  The  world  and  Africa;  an 
inquiry  into  the  part  which  Africa  has 
played  in  world  history.  Viking.  1947-  xii, 
276  pp.  Illus.  DT21.D8 

Ekrem,  Selma.  Turkey,  old  and  new.  Map  by 
Raymond  Lufkin.  Scribner.  1947.  186  pp. 
Illus.  DR432.E33 

Elbogen,  Ismar,  1874-1943.  A  century  of 
Jewish  life  .  .  .  translated  bv  Mcses  Hadas. 
Philadelphia,  The  Jewish  Publication  Soc. 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


3i5 


of  America.  5707-1946.  xliii,  823  pp. 

DS125.E4  1946 

"Ismar  Elbogen :  an  appreciation  by  Alexander 
Marx,''    pp.    xi— xx.    Bihliogi  aphy,    pp.  771—786. 

Keen,  Benjamin.  David  Curtis  DeForest  and 

the  revolution  of  Buenos  Aires.  Yale  Univ. 

Press.  1947.  186  pp.  *4494.4i5  v.46 

Latourette,  Kenneth   Scott.  The  history  of 

Japan.  Macmillan.  1947.  vi,  290  pp.  Illus. 

Maps.  DS835.L3  1947 

"A  revised  edition  of  .  .  .  [the  author's]  The  de- 
velopment of  Japan." 


Law 

Angoff,  Charles.  Handbook  of  libel,  a  prac- 
tical guide  for  editors  and  authors.  Duell, 
Sloan  and  Pearce.  [1946.]  ix,  410  pp. 

*PN4738.A6 

Berle,  Alf  Keyser,  and  L.  Sprague  de  Camp. 
Inventions  and  their  management.  2d  edi- 
tion .  .  .  Scranton,  Pa.,  International  Text- 
book Co.  1947.  xvi,  742  pp.  Illus. 

T212.B43  1947 

Literature 

Journalism 

Jones,  Robert  W.  Journalism  in  the  United 
States.  Dutton.  1947.  xvi,  728  pp.  Facsims. 

PN4801.J6 

The  only  history  of  American  journalism  to  in- 
clude the  period  of  the  second  World  War. 

Roosevelt,  Franklin  Delano,  1882-1945.  F.  D. 
R.,  columnist;  the  uncollected  columns  of 
Franklin  D.  Roosevelt.  Foreword  by 
Eleanor  Roosevelt.  Chicago,  Pellegrini  & 
Cudahy.  [1947.]   180  pp.  E742.5.R57 

A  collection  of  newspaper  columns  written  for 
the  Macon  (Georgia'1  Daily  Telegraph  in  1925  ami 
for  the  Beacon  (New  York)    Standard  in  1928. 

General 

Barea,  Arturo.  The  clash  .  .  .  translated  from 
the  Spanish  by  Ilsa  Barea.  London,  Faber. 
[1946.]  332  pp.  DP269.B313 

A  continuation  of  the  author's  The  Foryc  and  The 
Tiacb. 

Beer-Hofmann,  Richard,  1866-1945.  Jacob's 
dream;  a  prologue  .  .  .  translated  from  the 
German  by  Ida  Bension  Wynn.  Philadel- 
phia, Jewish  Publication  Society  of  A- 
merica.  5707-1946.  188  pp. 

PT2603.E27J32.  1946 

Bloy,  Leon,  1842-1917.  Pilgrim  of  the  abso- 
lute; selection  by  Raissa  Maritain,  intro- 
duction by  Jacques  Maritain.  Pantheon. 
[I947-]  358  pp.  PQ2198.B18A62 

Translated  by  John  Coleman  and  Harry  Lorin 
Binsse. 

Burgum,  Edwin  Berry.  The  novel  and  the 
world's  dilemma.  Oxford  Univ.  Press. 
1947-  352  pp.  PN3503.B8 

Carpenter,  Rhys.  Folk  tale,  fiction  and  saga 
in  the  Homeric  epics.  Univ.  of  California 
Press.  1946.    198  pp.  *PA25.'S25  v.20 

Columbia  dictionary   of   modern  European 


literature;  Horatio  Smith,  general  editor. 
Columbia  Univ.  Press.  1947.  xvi,  899  pp. 

*PrJ4i.C6 

Gibran,  Kahlil,  18S3-1931.  Spirits  rebellious 
.  .  .  translated  from  the  Arabic  by  An- 
thony Rizcallah  Ferris,  edited  by  Martin 
L.  Wolf.  New  York,  Philosophical  Li- 
brary. [1947.]  vi,  120  pp.  BR1616.G5 

Moreau  de  Saint-Mery,  Mederic  Louise  £lie, 
1750-1819.  Moreau  de  St.  Mery's  American 
journey  (1793-1798),  translated  and  edi- 
ted by  Kenneth  Roberts  [and]  Anna  M. 
Roberts.  Preface  by  Kenneth  Roberts.  In- 
troduction by  Stewart  L.  Minis.  Double- 
day.  1947.  xxi,  394  pp.  E164.M832 

Morgan,  Charles.  Reflections  in  a  mirror. 
Second  series.  Macmillan.  1947.  vii,  228 
pp.  PR6025.O  645R42  1947 

"[Most]  of  these  papers  are  taken  from  a  weekly 
series.'' 

Owen,  Eric  Trevor.  The  story  of  the  Iliad, 
as  told  in  the  Iliad.  Oxford  Univ.  Press. 
1947-  248  pp.  PA4037.O  68  1947 

Pindar.  English.  The  odes  of  Pindar,  trans- 
lated by  Richmond  Lattimore.  Chicago, 
111.,  Univ.  of  Chicago  Press.  [1947.]  xii, 
169  pp.  PA4275.E5L24 

Snell,  George  D.  The  shapers  of  American 
fiction,  1798-1947.  Dutton.  1947.  316  pp. 

PS37I-S5 

Analyzes  the  four  dominant  strains  —  "romantic, 
apocalyptic,  temperamcntist,  and  realist"  —  from 
Cooper  to  Dos  Passes. 

Stebbins,  Lucy  Poate.  A  Victorian  album; 
some  lady  novelists  of  the  period.  Colum- 
bia Univ.  Press.  1946.  226  pp.  PR115.S8 

Contents.  —  A  lady's  miscellany.  —  Charl<  tte 
Bronte. —  Elizabeth  Gaskell.  —  George  Eliot.  — 
Margaret  Oliphant.  —  Homckeeping  hearts.  — 
Bibliographical  notes,  (pp.  203—215). 

Tindall,  William  York.  Forces  in  modern 
British  literature,  1885-1946.  Knopf.  1947. 
xiii,  385,  xviii  pp.  PR736.T5 

Tuve,  Rosemond.  Elizabethan  and  metaphy- 
sical imagery;  renaissance  poetic  and 
twentieth-century  critics.  Univ.  of  Chicago 
Press.  [I947-]  xiv,  442  pp.  PR535.F5T8 

Bibliography,  pp.  429-434. 

Valmiki.  Quest  for  Sita.  Of  Ravana,  the  dark 
angel  and  his  paradise  at  Lanka.  Of  Hanu- 
man  and  the  divine  vultures,  Jatayus  and 
Sampati.  Drawings  by  Mervyn  Peake. 
Day.  [1947.]  x,  162  pp.  Illus. 

PK3653.A2C6  1947 

A  modern  retelling  of  the  central  bection  of  the 
Sanskrit  epic,  the  Ramayana. 

Wirbitzky,  Wilhelm.  In  zwei  Welten,  Roman. 
Berlin.  [i945-]  255  pp.     *PT2657.I  745  15 

Poetry  and  Stories 

Benet,  Stephen  Vincent,  1898-1943.  The  last 
circle,  stories  and  poems.  New  York, 
Farrar,  Straus.  1946.  viii,  309  pp. 

PS3503.E5325L3 

Mainly  short  stories.  A  few  short  poems  are  in- 
cluded. Compiled  by  Rosemary  Carr  Benet. 

Bynner,  Witter.  Take  away  the  darkness. 
Knopf.  1947.  xv,  176pp.  PS3503-Y45T3 
Poems. 

Cullen,  Countee.  On  these  I  stand;  an  an- 
thology of  the  best  poems  of  Countee 


316 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Cullen.  Selected  by  himself  and  including 
six  new  poems  never  before  published. 
Harper.  [I947-]  x,  J97  PP- 

PS3505.U287A6  1947 
Gibran,  Kahlil,  1883-1931.  Tears  and  laughter 
.  .  .  translated  from  the  Arabic  by  An- 
thony Rizcallah  Ferris,  edited  by  Martin 
L.  Wolf.  New  York,  Philosophical  Li- 
brary. [IQ47-]  xi,  in  pp.  PJ7741.G54T42 
Verse  and  prose.  An  early  book  by  the  Lebanese 
poet   and  moralist. 

Spender,  Stephen.  Poems  of  dedication.  Ran- 
dom House.  [1947.]  60  pp. 

PR6037-P47P65  1947 

Thcmas,  Dylan.  Selected  writings.  Intro- 
duction by  John  L.  Sweenev.  New  Di- 
rections.  [1946.]   184  pp.  PR6039.H52A6 

Medicine.  Hygiene 

Henrici,  Arthur  Trautwein,  1889-1943.  Hen- 
rici's  Molds,  yeasts,  and  actinomycetes,  a 
handbook  for  students  of  bacteriology-  2d 
edition.  By  Charles  E.  Skinner  .  .  .  Chester 
W.  Emmons  .  .  .  [and]  Henry  M.  Tsuchi- 
ya.  Wiley.  [1947.]  xiv,  409  pp.  Illus. 
Diagrs.  QK604.H55  1947 

Maximow,  Alexander  A„  1874-1928,  and  Wil- 
liam Bloom.  A  textbook  of  histology.  2d 
edition  completely  revised,  with  530  illus- 
trations, some  in  colors.  Philadelphia  and 
London,  W.  B.  Saunders  Co.  1935.  xiv, 
662  pp.  Illus.  QM551.M3  1935 

Military  Science 

Hardin,  James  N.  Xew  York  to  Oberplan  .  .  . 

with  a  foreword  by  Major  General  W.  S. 

Paul.  Nashville,  Tenn.,  McQuiddy  Press. 

1946.  ix,  172  pp.  D811.H34 
Karr,  Charles  Lee,  and  Carroll  Robbins  Kerr. 

.  .  .  Remington  handguns.  Harrisburg,  Pa., 

The  Militarv  Serv  ice  Publishing  Co.  1947. 

125  pp.  Illus'.  TS537.K3 

Bibliography,  p.  125. 

Levert,  Lee  J.  Fundamentals  of  naval  war- 
fare .  .  .  Sketches  by  William  T.  Brady. 
Macmillan.  1947.  xii,  488  pp.  V103.L43 

Bibliography,  pp.  469-471. 

Liddell  Hart,  B.  H.  The  revolution  in  war- 
fare. Yale  Univ.  Press.  1947.  x,  125  pp. 

U102.L63  1947 

"Published  on  the  foundation  established  in  memo- 
ry of  Oliver  Baty  Cunningham  of  the  Class  of 
1917,  Yale  College." 

Simmons,  Richard  F.  Wildcat  cartridges;  in- 

trod.  by  Harvey  A.  Donaldson.  Morrow. 

1047.  xiii,  333  pp.  Illus.  UF740.S5 
U.  S.  Army  air  forces.  Historical  office.  The 

official    pictorial    history    of    the  AAF. 

Duell,  Sloan,  and  Pearce.  [1947.]  213  pp. 

Illus.  UG633.A46  1947 

Music 

Literature 

Baldwin,  Samuel  Atkinson.  The  story  of  the 
American  guild  of  organists.  H.  W.  Gray 
Co.  [1946.]  80  pp.  ML27.U5A794 


Einstein,  Alfred.  Music  in  the  romantic  era. 
Norton.  [I947-]  371  PP-  ML196.E35 

Contents.  —  Antecedents,  concepts  and  ideais.  — 
The  history.  —  The  philosophy. 

—  A  short  history  of  music  .  .  .  translated 
from  the  German.  Knopf.  1947.  xi,  438, 
xii  pp.  ML160.E462  1047 

Third  American  edition,  revised. 

"The  translation  is  the  work  of  several  hands." 

Musical  examples,  pp.  255-411. 

Fields,  Victor  Alexander.  Training  the  sing- 
ing voice,  an  analysis  of  the  working  con- 
cepts contained  in  recent  contributions  to 
vocal  pedagogy.  New  York,  King's  Crown 
Press.  1947.  x,  337  pp.  MT820.F43 

Annotated  bibliography,  pp.  [2671-328. 

Goffin,  Robert.  Horn  of  plenty;  the  story  of 
Louis  Armstrong  .  .  .  translated  from  the 
French  by  James  F.  Bezou.  New  York, 
Allen,  Towne  &  Heath.  1947.  304  pp. 

ML419.A75G6 

Greenewalt,  Mary  Hallock.  Nourathar,  the 
fine  art  of  light  and  color  playing.  Phila- 
delphia, Westbrook  Pub.  Co.  [1946.]  412 
pp.  Illus.  *ML384o.G73 

Heinsheimer,  Hans  W.  Menagerie  in  F 
sharp.  Doubleday.  1947.  275  pp.  Illus. 
Music.  ML427.H4A3 

Kahn,  E.  J.,  Jr.  The  Voice,  the  story  of  an 
American  phenomenon.  Harper.  [1947.] 
xvii,  125  pp.  Plates.  ML420.S656K3 
A  sfudy  of  Frank  Sinatra  reprinted  from  the  New 
Yorker. 

Morris,  R.  O.  The  Oxford  harmony.  Oxford 
Univ.  Press.  1946.  v.  Music.  MT50.M7  O  9 

Newlin,  Dika.  Bruckner,  Mahler,  Schoenberg. 
New  York,  King's  Crown  Press.  1047.  x, 
293  pp.  Music.  ML390.N55 

Schumann,  Robert  Alexander,  1810-1856. 
On  music  and  musicians.  Pantheon.  [1946.] 
274  pp.  Music.  ML410.S4A134 

A  translation  of  Ge.'cmmcltc  Sehriften  uber  Musik 
find  MusiMer.  with  a  rearrangement  of  material  and 
some  omissions:  edited  by  Konrad  Wolff,  trans- 
lated by  Paul  Rosenfeld. 

Shaw,  Harold  Watkins,  editor.  Musical  edu- 
cation, a  symposium  by  Yvonne  Adair,  B. 
W.  Appleby,  John  Barbirolli  [and  others]. 
London,  Hinrichsen.  1946.  259  pp.  Music. 

MT1.S5 

Who's  who  among  the  contributors,  pp.  255-258. 

S'.onimsky,  Nicolas.  .  .  .  Thesaurus  of  scales 
and  melodic  patterns.  New  York,  Coleman- 
Ross.  1947.  viii,  243  pp.  *MT45.S55 

Smith,  Moses.  Koussevitzky.  Allen,  Towne 
&  Heath.  1947.  x,  400  pp.  ML422.K7S5 

"Koussevitsky  recordings,"  pp.  378-382. 

Tibaldi  Chiesa,  Mary.  .  .  .  Cimarosa  e  il  suo 
tempo.  Con  16  tavole.  [Milan,]  A.  Gar- 
zanti.  [1939  ]  3  PP-  L,  331,  [1]  p.,  2  1.  front., 
Illus.  Music.  ML410.C57T5 

Westerman,  Kenneth  N.  Emergent  voice. 
[Ann  Arbor,  Mich.,  1947.]  xii,  156  pp. 
Illus.  Music.  MT821.W34 
"Bibliography  of  American  folk  songs,"  pp.  142- 
146. 

Scores 

Bergman,  Marion.  The  Russian-American 
song  and  dance  book.  Barnes.  [1947.]  95 


LIST  OF  NEW  ROOKS 


3i7 


pp.  Illus.  M1756.B47R8 

With  music. 

Taylor,  Alary  Catherine.  Rounds  &  rounds. 

New   York,    William  Sloane  associates. 

[1946.]   144pp.  Ulus.  M1578.T23R6 

"The  drawings  in  this  book  are  I  y  Richard  Er_ 
does." 

Philosophy 

Carre,  Meyrick  H.  Realists  and  nominalists. 
[London,]  Oxford  Univ.  Press.  1946.  vi, 
128  pp.  B731.C35 

Contents.  —  Saint  Augustine.  —  Peter  Abaclard. 
—  Saint  Thomas  Aquinas.  —  William  of  Ockham. 

Horkheimer,  Max.  .  .  .  Eclipse  of  reason. 
Oxford  Univ.  Press.  1947.  vii,  187  pp. 

B3279.H8473E3 

Contends  that  industriil  civilization,  with  its  em- 
phasis on  practical  means,  has  undermined  the 
objective  ideals  formerly  at  the  core  of  Western 
philosophy.  The  author  is  director  of  the  Institute 
of  Social   Research  at  Columbia. 

Kean,  Charles  Duell.  The  meaning  of  exist- 
ence. Harper.  1947.  xiv,  222  pp.  BL51.K37 

Keith,  Sir  Arthur.  Evolution  and  ethics  .  .  . 
with  a  preface  by  Earnest  A.  Hooton. 
Putnam.  [1947J  246  pp.  QH367.K44  1947 

"Published  in  England  [1946]  under  the  title  Es- 
says on  human  evolution." 

Maritain,  Jacques.  Formal  logic  .  .  .  trans- 
lated by  Imelda  Choquette.  Sheed  & 
Ward.  1946.  xii,  300  pp.  BC111.M32  1946 

Smith  A.  H.  Kantian  studies.  Oxford,  Clar- 
endon Press.  1947.  vi,  196  pp.  B2798.S75 

Politics  and  Government 

Allen,  Robert  S.,  editor.  Our  fair  city.  Van- 
guard. [1947  ]  vii,  387  pp.  JS323.A6 

Contents.  —  Introduction:  Still  "Corrupt  and  con- 
tent," by  Robert  S.  Allen.  —  Boston :  study  in 
inertia,  by  Louis  M.  Lyons.  —  New  York: 
"Greatest  city  in  the  world."  by  Paul  Crowell  and 
A.  H.  Raskin.  —  Philadelphia:  Where  patience 
is  a  vice,  by  Thomas  P.  O'Neil.  —  Mismi:  Heaven 
or  honky-tonk?,  by  Henning  Heldt.  —  Birming- 
ham: Steel  giant  with  a  glass  jaw,  by  Irving  Bei- 
man.  —  Cleveland:  Study  in  political  paradoxes, 
by  Richard  L.  Maher.  —  Detroit :  City  of  Con- 
flict, by  Leo  Donovan.  —  Chicago:  Unfinished 
anomaly,  by  Warren  H.  Pierce.  —  Milwaukee: 
Old  lady  thrift,  by  Richard  S.  Davis.  —  Memphis: 
Satrapy  of  a  benevolent  despot,  by  Dr.  Gerald 
M.  Capers.  —  St.  Louis:  Boundary-bound,  by  Car- 
los F.  Hurd.  —  Kansas  City:  Gateway  to  what?, 
by  W.  G.  Clugston.  —  Denver:  Civic  schizophre- 
nic, by  Roscoe  Fleming.  —  Butte:  City  with  a 
"kick"  in  it,  by  Joseph  Kinsey  Howard.  — 
Seattle:  Slave  and  master,  by  Richard  L.  Neu- 
berger.  —  San  Francisco :  The  beldam  dozes,  by 
Charles  Raudebaugh.  —  Los  Angeles:  Rainbow's 
end,  by  Maury  Maverick  and  Robert  E.  C.  Harris. 

Borg,  Dorothy.  American  policy  and  the  Chi- 
nese revolution,  1925-1928.  New  York, 
American  Institute  of  Pacific  relations, 
Macmillan.  1947.  x,  440  pp. 

DS740.5.U5B6  1947 

Coffin,  Tristram.  Missouri  compromise. 
Little,  Brown.  1947.  315  pp.  E813.C6 

Corwin,  Edward  S.  Total  war  and  the  Con- 
stitution; five  lectures  delivered  on  the 
William  W.  Cook  foundation  at  the  Uni- 
versity of  Michigan,  March  1946  .  .  .  with 
an  introduction  by  E.  Blythe  Stason. 
Knopf.  1947.  xiii,  182,  vi  pp.  JK560.C6 


Epstein,  Israel.  The  unfinished  revolution  in 
China.  Little,  Brown.  1947.  viii,  442  pp. 

DS777.53.E63 

Ewmg,  A.  C.  The  individual,  the  state  and 
world  government.  Macmillan.  1947.  viii, 
322  pp.  JC571.E9 

"Dr.  Ewing  believes  that  fascism  has  made  im- 
perative a  new  analysis  of  the  relations  between 
man  and  his  government.  His  book  is  concerned 
with  the  fundamental  ideas  of  political  philosophy." 

Robinson,  Edgar  Eugene.  They  voted  for 
Roosevelt,  the  presidential  vote  1932-1944, 
by  Edgar  Eugene  Robinson  .  .  .  Stanford 
Univ.  [1947.]  x,  207  pp.  Ulus.  JK1967.R6 

"General   note  on   sources,"  pp.  186—207. 

A  scholarly  analysis  of  the  elections  of  1932,  1936, 

1940,  and  1944,  with  statistical  surveys. 

Roosevelt,  Franklin  Delano,  1882-1945.  War- 
time correspondence  between  President 
Roosevelt  and  Pope  Pius  XII,  with  an  in- 
troduction &  explanatory  notes  by  Myron 
C.  Taylor,  personal  representative  of  the 
President  of  the  United  States  of  America 
to  His  Holiness  Pope  Pius  XII.  Macmil- 
lan. 1947.  127  pp.  D753.R69 

Sharp,  Sir  Henry.  Good-bye  India.  Oxford 
Univ.  Press.  1946.  viii,  244  pp.  DS428.S45 

Snow,  Edgar.  Stalin  must  have  peace  .  .  . 
with  an  introduction  by  Martin  Sommers. 
Random  House.  1947.  184  pp.  DK273.S56 

"The  introduction  and  chapters  I,  II  and  III  .  .  . 
originally  appeared  as  articles  in  the  Saturday 
Evening  Post." 

Timasheff,  Nicholas  S.  Three  worlds:  liberal, 
communist,  and  fascist  society.  Milwau- 
kee, Bruce.  [1946.]  xi,  263  pp.  JC423.T53 

Trueta  Raspall,  Jose.  .  .  .  The  spirit  of  Cata- 
lonia. Oxford  Univ.  Press.  1946.  198  pp. 
Illus.  DP302.C62T7 

"Bibliography  and  notes,"  pp.  169-189.  The  author 
is  a  famous  CataUn  surgeon. 

Van  Valkenburg,  Samuel.  Whose  promised 
lands?  A  political  atlas  of  the  Middle  East 
and  India.  Foreign  Policy  Ass'n.  1946.  96 
pp.  Maps.  *757i-95-57 

Ypsilon,  pseud.  Pattern  for  world  revolution. 
Ziff-Davis.  [1947.]  v,  479  pp.  HX40.Y6 

Contents.  —  General  staff  in  Moscow.  —  Pro- 
fessional revolutionaries.  Decline  of  world  revo- 
lution, the  end  of  the  Comintern.  —  Stalintern. 
A  history  of  the  altered  strategy  of  the  inter- 
national Communist  movement.  The  pseudonym 
purports  to  be  that  of  Johann  Rindl  and  Julian 
Gumperz,  formerly  closely  connected  with  the 
Comintern. 

Psychology 

Benedek,  Therese.  Insight  and  personality 
adjustment,  a  study  of  the  psychological 
effects  of  war.  New  York,  Ronald  Press. 
[1946.]  xi,  307  pp.  BF698.B32 

Bibliographical  foot-notes. 

Sherif,  Muzafer,  and  Hadley  Cantril.  The  psy- 
chology of  ego-involvements,  social  atti- 
tudes &  identifications  .  .  .  Wiley.  [1947.] 
viii,  525  pp.  Diagrs.  BF698.S515 

Religion.  Theology 

Albright,  William  Foxwell.  From  the  stone 
age  to  Christianity;  monotheism  and  the 


3x8  MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


historical  process.  Baltimore,  Johns  Hop- 
kins Press.  1946.  367  pp.  BL221.A47  1946 
Bibliographical  references  in  "Notes,''  pp.  313-34.;. 
Attwater,  Donald,  editor.  Modern  Christian 
revolutionaries;  an  introduction  to  the 
lives  and  thought  of:  Kierkegaard,  Eric 
Gill,  G.  K.  Chesterton,  C.  F.  Andrews 
[and]  Berdyaev.  Devin-Adair.  1947.  xiii, 
390  pp.  Ports.  BR1700.A8 

Contents.  —  S<5ren  Kierkegaard,  by  Melville  Chan- 
ing-Pearce.  —  G.  K.  Chesterton,  by  F.  A.  Lee.  — 
Eric  Gill,  by  Donald  Attwater.  —  C.  F.  Andrews, 
by  Nichol  Macnichol.  —  Nicolas  Berdyaev,  by 
Evgueny  Lampert.  —  Bibiography,  pp.  [3831-390. 

Bell,  G.  K.  A.  The  church  and  humanity 
(1939-1946).  Longmans,  Green.  [1946.] 
viii,  252  pp.  D743.9.B36 

Broderick,  James.  The  progress  of  the  Jesuits 
(1556-79).  Longmans,  Green.  TI947-1  vii, 
337  pp.  BX3706.B72 

Sequel  to  the  author's  "The  Origin  of  the  Jesuits"; 
based  largely  on  the  letters  of  the  Jesuits  them- 
selves, cf.  Preface. 

Lamsa,  George  M.  New  Testament  origin. 
Ziff-Davis.  [1947.]   ix,  104  pp.  BS2375.L3 

Maintain?  that  the  New  Testament  war-  fi; st  writ- 
ten in  Aramaic  and  only  later  translated  into 
Greek. 

Maeterlinck,  Maurice.  The  great  beyond. 
New  York,  Philosophical  Library.  [1947.] 
226  pp.  PQ2625.A4A732 

Translated  by  Marta  K.  Neufeld  &  Renee  Spod- 
heim. 

Niemoeller,  Martin.  ...  Of  guilt  and  hope. 
New  York,  Philosophical  Library.  [1947.] 
79  pp.  BX8020.N52 

"Translated  by   Renee  Spodheim." 

Contents.  —  Of  guilt  and  hope.  —   A  letter.  — 

Advent.  —  An  interview  with  Martin  Niemoeller. 

Reschi,  Peter  A.  Autobiography  of  the  Blessed 

Virgin.  Milwaukee,  Bruce.  [1947. 1  125  pp. 

BT605.R48 

Taylor,  Alfred  Edward,  1869-1945.  Does  God 
exist?  Macmillan.  1947.  vii.  172  op. 

BL200.T36  1947 

The  late  Dr.  Taylor  was  President  of  Moral  Phil- 
osophy in  Edinburgh  University,  and  author  of 
"The    Problem    of   Evil,"   and   other  works. 

Wilson,  Alfred,  CP.  Pardon  and  peace.  Sheed 
&  Ward.  1947.  257  pp.  BX2265.W55 

A  book  on  the  practice  and  psychology  of  con- 
fession, written  for  laymen. 

Zeitlin,  Joseph.  Disciples  of  the  wise;  the  re^ 
ligious  and  social  opinions  of  American 
rabbis.  New  York,  Teachers  college,  Col- 
umbia Univ.  1947.  233  PP-  BM652.Z4  1047 

Science 

Botany 

Harding,  T.  Swann.  Two  blades  of  grass,  a 
history  of  scientific  development  in  the 
U.  S.  Department  of  Agriculture.  Norman, 
Okla.,  Univ.  of  Oklahoma  Press.  1947.  xv, 
352  pp.  Plates.  S21.C9H3 

Hausman,  Ethel  Hinckley.  The  illustrated 
encyclopedia  of  American  wild  flowers  .  .  . 
illustrated  by  Tabea  Hofman  and  the  au- 
thor. Garden  City  Pub.  Co.  [1947.]  lxxii, 
534  PP-  Ulus.  QK115.H38 


Standley,  Paul  C,  and  Julian  A.  Steyermark. 
Flora  of  Guatemala.  Chicago,  Natural  His- 
tory Museum.  1946.  2  v.  *78i3.ig.24  pt.  4,5 

"The  flora  of  Guatemala,  as  here  considered,  in- 
cludes that  of   British   Honduras." — Introduction. 

General 

Andrews,  Edmund,  1892-1941.  A  history  of 
scientific  English;  the  story  of  its  evolu- 
tion, based  on  a  study  of  biomedical  ter- 
minology. R.  R.  Smith.  1947.  ix,  342  pp. 
Illus.  PE1583.A5 

Knedler,  John  Warren.  Masterworks  of  sci- 
ence; digests  of  13  great  classics.  Double- 
day.   1947.  ix,  637  pp.  Ulus.  Q111.K47 

Contents  —  The  elements,  by  Euclid.  —  On 
floating  bodies,  and  other  propositions,  by  Archi- 
medes. —  On  the  revolutions  of  the  heavenly 
spheres,  by  Nikolaus  Copernicus.  —  Dialrgues 
concerning  two  new  sciences,  by  Galileo.  —  Princi- 
pia,  by  Isaac  Newton.  —  The  atomic  theory,  by 
John  Dalton.  —  Principles  of  geology,  by  Charles 
Lydell.  — -  The  origin  of  species,  by  Charles  Dar- 
win. —  Experimental  researches  of  electricity,  by 
Michael  Faraday.  —  Experiments  in  plant-hybridi- 
zation, by  G.  J.  Mendel.  —  The  periodic  law,  by 
D.  I.  Mendeleyev.  —  Radioactivity,  by  Marie 
Curie.  —  Relativity:  the  special  and  general 
theory,  by  Albert  Einstein. 

Mathematics 

Hughes,  Howard  K.,  and  Glen  T.  Miller. 
Trigonometry.  2d  edition.  Wiley.  [1946.] 
vii,  175  pp.  Diagrs.  QA531.H685 

With  this  is  bound:  Simmons,  H.  A.  IViley  trigo- 
nometric tables,   New  York  [1945.] 

Parke,  Nathan  Grier,  III.  Guide  to  the  liter- 
ature of  mathematics  and  physics  includ- 
ing related  works  on  engineering  science. 
McGraw-Hill.  1947.  xv,  205  pp.  *8202.6 

Simmons,  Harvey  Alexander.  Wiley  trigon- 
ometric tables.  2d  edition.  Wiley.  [1945] 
117  pp.  QA531.H685 

Physics.  Electronics 

Bendz,  Waldemar  I.  Electronics  for  industry 
.  .  .  with  the  assistance  of  C.  A.  Scarlott. 
Wiley.  [1947  ]  x,  501pp.  Illus.  TK7815.B4 

Chase,  Carl  Trueblood.  The  evolution  of 
modern  physics.  Van  Nostrand.  1947-  ix, 
203  pp.  Plates.  8201.25 
"Based  on  [the  author's]  A  History  of  Experi- 
mental Physics." 

Cosmic  radiation,  fifteen  lectures  edited  by 
W.  Heisenberg,  translated  by  T.  H.  John- 
son. New  York,  Dover  Publications.  1946. 
192  pp.  Illus.  *823g.29 

A  series  of  symposia,  held  in  the  years  1941  and 
1942  in  the  Kaiser  Wilhelm  Institute  for  physics 
and  published  in  Berlin  in  1943  in  commemoration 
of  the  75th  birthday  of  Arnold  Sommerfeld. 
Contents.  —  Introduction;  Review  of  the  present 
state  of  our  knowledge  of  cosmic  radiation,  by 
W.  Heisenberg.  —  Cascades :  The  cascade  theory, 
by  W.  Heisenberg.  The  large  air  showers,  by  G. 
Moliere.  —  Mesons :  The  creation  of  mesons,  by 
K.  Wirtz.  Showers  with  penetrating  particles,  by 
A.  Klemm  and  W.  Heisenberg.  The  absorption 
of  mesons,  by  H.  Voltz.  Burst  excitation  by  me- 
sons, by  C.  F.  v.  Weizsacker.  Radioactive  decay 
of  the  meson,  by  W.  Heisenberg.  The  decay  elec- 
trons of  mesons,  by  F.  Bopp.  Theory  of  the  me- 
son, by  C.  F.  v.  Weizsacker.  Meson  theory  of  the 
deuteron,  by  S.  Flugge.  Theory  of  explosion-like 
showers,  by  W.  Heisenberg.  —  Nuclear  particles: 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


Nuclear  disruptions  and  heavy  particles  in  cosmic 
radiation,  by  E.  Bagge.  On  the  excitation  of  neu- 
trons by  cosmic  rays  and  their  distribution  in  the 
atmosphere,  by  S.  Fliigge.  —  Geomagnetic  ef- 
fects :  Cosmic  rays  and  the  magnetic  field  of  the 
earth,  by  J.  Meixner.  —  References  to  the  litera- 
ture, pp.  1 8 1- 1 86. 


Sociology 

Hivale,  Shamrao.  The  Pardhans  of  the  upper 
Narbada  valley  .  .  .  with  a  foreword  by 
Verrier  Elwin.  Oxford  Univ.  Press.  1946. 
xvi,  230  pp.  Illus.  Maps.  DS432.G6H5 

Kluckhohn,  Clyde,  and  Dorothea  Leighton. 
The  Navaho.  Harvard.  1947.  xx,  258  pp. 
Illus.  Plates.  E99.N3K54  1947 

"Written  as  a  part  (if  the  Ii.dian  education  re- 
search project  undertaken  jointly  by  the  Commit- 
tee on  Human  Development  of  the  University  of 
Chicago  and  the  United  States  Office  of  Indian 
affars."— preface 

Leighton,  Dorothea,  and  Clyde  Kluckhohn. 
Children  of  the  people.  Harvard.  1947.  xi, 
277  pp.  Maps.  Egg.N3L58 

"The  Nnvalie  ...  is  a  companion  volume  by  the 
same  writers." — Pretice. 

"References    and    bibliography:"    pp.  [26^-270. 

Lips,  Julius  Ernst.  .  .  .  The  origin  of  things; 
illustrations  by  Eva  Lips,  with  contribu- 
tions by  A.  Kameny.  A.  A.  Wyn.  1947. 
496  pp.  Illus.  GN400.L75 

Bibliography,  pp.  [4S51-488. 

Labor 

Board  of  arbitration  appointed  to  arbitrate 
certain  differences  between  the  Brother- 
hood of  locomotive  firemen  and  engine- 
men.  Chicago.  1946.  *933i.2856An 

Boyer,  Richard  Owen.  The  dark  ship.  Little, 
Brown.  1947.  306  pp.  933i-8873Ai8s 

Published  originally  in  different  form  in  the  Nezv 
Yorker  under  the  titles  "The  Dark  Ship"  and 
"Union  President."  Deals  with  the  National  Mari- 
time Union. 

Brown,  Alvin.  Organization  of  industry. 
Prentice-Hall.  1947.  370  pp.  9338.7A179 

Ehrmann,  Henry  W.  French  labor  from  pop- 
ular front  to  liberation.  Oxford  Univ. 
Press.  1947.  x,  329  pp.  9331.18844A11 

Bibliographical  references  included  in  "Notes,"  (np. 
287-316). 

Fitzpatrick,  Brian.  A  short  history  of  the 
Australian  labor  movement.  Melbourne, 
Rawson's  Bookshop.  1944.  221  pp. 

9331.8394A6 

"First  published  in  November,  1940.  New  enlarged 
edition,  1944." 

Greenman,    Russell    L.,    and    Elizabeth  L. 

Greenman.   Getting   along  with  unions. 

Harper.  [1947.]  ix,  158  pp.  9331.1163A50 
Gualtieri,  Humbert  L.  The  labor  movement 

in  Italy.  New  York,  S.  F.  Vanni.  [1946.] 

ix,  326  pp.  9331.8845 

Bibliography,  pp.  308-315. 

McGregor,  Alexander  Grant.  Collective  bar- 
gaining and  decadence;  the  solution  of 
Britain's  gravest  problem.  London,  Pit- 
man. 1946.  79  pp.  Diagr.  9331.1163A48 

Mathews,  Basil,  editor.  Essays  on  vocation, 
by  H.  Walford  Davies,  Sir  William  Osier 


319 

[and  others].  First  series.  Oxford  Univ. 
Press.  1919.  128  pp.  HF5381.M38 
Millholland,  Ray.  Pay  day;  labor  and  man- 
agement in  the  American  system  of  free 
enterprise.  Morrow.  1946.  xii,  240  pp. 

9331.155A112 

Tootle,  Harry  King.  Employees  are  people; 
what  management  owes  them  and  what 
it  does  for  them.  McGraw-Hill.  1947.  xi, 
35opp.  9331.113A117 

Miscellaneous 

Cabot,  P.  S.  de  Q.,  compiler.  Juvenile  delin- 
quency, a  critical  annotated  bibliography. 
H.  W.  Wilson.  1946.  166  pp.  *Z5ii8.CgC3 

Davie,  Maurice  R.,  and  others.  Refugees  in 
America,  report  of  the  Committee  for  the 
study  of  recent  immigration  from  Europe. 
Harper.  [1947.]  xxi,  453  pp.  Diagrs.  Plates. 

D809.U5C6 

Hentig,  Hans  von.  Crime;  causes  and  condi- 
tions. McGraw-Hill.  1947.  xii,  379  pp. 

HV6025.H45 

Hinshaw,  David.  An  experiment  in  friend- 
ship. Putnam.  [1947.]  xi,  147  pp.  Plates. 

DSoq.FsHs 

An  account  of  the  work  of  the  American  Friends 
Service   Committee   in  Finland. 

Lafitte,  Francois.  Britain's  way  to  social  se- 
curity. [London,]  Pilot  Press.  1945.  no 
pp.  Illus.  9368.4A193 

Stone,  Isidor  F.  .  .  .  Underground  to  Pales- 
tine. Boni  &  Gaer.  [1946.]  xiv,  240  pp. 
Illus.  D808.S75 


Technology 

Building  and  Construction 

Adlam,  T.  Radiant  heating;  a  practical  trea- 
tise on  American  and  European  practices 
in  the  design  and  installation  of  systems 
for  radiant,  panel,  or  infra-red  heating, 
snow  melting  and  radiant  cooling.  Indus- 
trial Press.  [1947.]  472  pp.  Illus.  *4037.20S 

Architectural  record.  Time-saver  standards, 
a  manual  of  essential  architectural  data, 
for  architects,  engineers,  draftsmen,  build- 
ers and  other  technicians.  An  Architec- 
tural record  book.  New  York,  F.  W. 
Dodge.  [1946.]  648  pp.  Illus.  *8ioi.o4-io6 

"First  complete  edition  in  book  form  of  the  series 
of  Time-saver  Standards  published  monthly  i-.i  the 
Architectural  Record." 

Graff,  Raymond  K.,  and  others.  The  prefab- 
ricated house,  a  practical  guide  for  the 
prospective  buyer.  Doubleday.  1947.  132 
pp.  Illus.  8117.08-302 

Lee,  Donovan  H.  Sheet  piling,  cofferdams, 
and  caissons.  London,  Concrete  Publica- 
tions. [1946.]  viii,  191pp.  Illus.  *402iA.27 

Merrill,  Anthony  F.  The  rammed-earth 
house  .  .  .  with  an  introduction  by  the 
Hon.  Clinton  P.  Anderson.  Harper.  [1047.] 
xviii,  230  pp.  Plates.  4023B.44. 

Seely,  Fred  B.  Resistance  of  materials.  3d 
edition.  Wiley.  [1947.]  xiv,  486  pp.  Illus. 
Diagrs.  4021.201S 


320  MORE  BOOKS: 

Photography 

Karsh,  Yousuf.  Faces  of  destiny,  portraits 
bv  Karsh.  Ziff-Davis.  [1946.]  158  pp.  Illus. 

TR575.K3  1946 
Whiting,  John   R.   Photography   is  a  lan- 
guage. Ziff-Davis.  [1946.]  142  pp.  Illus. 

8029A454 

Plastics.  Rubber 

Ball,  John  McNickle.  Reclaimed  rubber;  the 
story  of  an  American  raw  material.  With 
a  foreword  by  William  Welch,  and  an  epi- 
logue by  Fred  E.  Traflet.  New  York  Rub- 
ber Reclaimers  Assn.  1947.  248  pp.  Illus. 
Maps.  Facsims.  8039.350 

A  history  of  the  Rubber  Reclaimers  Association. 
Bibliography,  pp.  222-237. 

Howard,  Frank  A.  Buna  rubber,  the  birth  of 
an  industry.  Van  Nostrand.  1947.  xii,  307 
pp.  Diagrs.  9338.1 16A38 

Marchionna,  Frederick.  Butalastic  polymers; 
their  preparation  and  applications,  a  trea- 
tise on  synthetic  rubbers.  New  York, 
Reinhold  Pub.  Corp.  1946.  vii,  642  pp. 
Tables.  Diagrs.  *8o3g.34g 

Smith,  Paul  I.  Plastics  for  production.  With 
thirteen  plates.  2d  edition  revised.  London, 
Chapman  &  Hall.  1946.  xvi,  216  pp.  Plates. 
Diagrs.  8031D.59 

Radar.  Radio 

Fink,  Donald  G.  Radar  engineering.  Mc- 
Graw-Hill. 1947.  xii,  644  pp.  *8oi7D45 

Rose,  Oscar,  editor.  Radio  broadcasting  and 
television,  an  annotated  bibliography.  H. 
W.  Wilson.  1947.  120  pp.  *Z722i.R6 

Tyler,  Kingdon  S.  Telecasting  and  color.  Il- 
lustrated with  drawings  by  James  Mac- 
donald  and  with  photographs.  Harcourt, 
Brace.  [1946.]  vii,  213  pp.  Plates.  Diagrs. 
"Books  on  television,"  pp.  202-204.  8017J.74 

Miscellaneous 

Davidson,  Martin,  editor.  The  gyroscope  and 
its  applications.  Martin  Davidson.  Hut- 
chinson's  Scientific  and  Technical  Pub. 

[1946.]    256  pp.  IIIUS.  *82I0.27 

Contents.  —  General  theory,  by  Martin  Davidson. 
—  Marine  applications,  by  J.  A.  Wells  and  A. 
P.  Glenny. 

Delmonte,  John.  The  technology  of  adhe- 
sives.  Reinhold  Pub.  Corp.  1947.  viii,  516 
pp.  Illus.  *8o3iB.50 

Graham,  Frank  D.  Audel's  oil  burner  guide; 
installing,  servicing,  repairing.  T.  Audel 
&  Co.  [1947  ]  364  pp.  Illus.  *4037.204 

Hankerson,  Fred  Putnam.  The  cooperage 
handbook.  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  Chemical 
Pub.  Co.  1947.  vi,  182  pp.  Illus.  *8o36A.20 

Karg,  Henry.  Shoe  repairing.  Bruce.  [1947.] 
vi,  138  pp.  Illus.  8037B.30 

Johnson,  Frederick.  Metal  working  and  heat- 
treatment  manual.  London,  P.  Elek. 
[1945  -  ]  Illus.  Diagrs.  *8o23.253 


A  BULLETIN 

Theater 

Clark,  William  Smith,  editor.  Chief  patterns 
of  world  drama,  Aeschylus  to  Anderson, 
with  introductions  on  the  history  of  the 
drama  and  the  stage.  Houghton  Mifflin. 
[1940  ]   1152  pp.  Illus.  PN6112.C55 

Dent,  Edward  J.  A  theatre  for  everybody; 
the  story  of  the  Old  Vic  and  Sadler's  Wells 
.  .  .  illustrated  by  Kay  Ambrose.  London 
and  New  York,  T.  V.  Boardman  and  Co. 
1946.  167  pp.  Illus.  PN2596.L7  O  73  1946 

Egri,  Lajos.  The  art  of  dramatic  writing; 
its  basis  in  the  creative  interpretation  of 
human  motives  .  .  .  with  an  introduction 
by  Gilbert  Miller.  Simon  and  Schuster. 
1946.    xxii,   294  pp.        PN1661.E5  1946 

Kracauer,  Siegfried.  From  Caligari  to  Hitler, 
a  psychological  history  of  the  German 
film.  Princeton  Univ.  Press.  1947.  xii.  361 
pp.  Plates.  PN1993.5.C3K7 

Liss,  Joseph,  editor.  Radio's  best  plays.  New 
York,  Greenberg.  [1947.]  xiv,  383  pp. 

PN6120.R2L55 


Travel  and  Description 

Caldwell,  J.  B.  Introducing  Alaska.  Putnam. 

[1947.]  xii,  202  pp.  Plates.  Fgog.Ci7 
Coupland,  Sir  Reginald.  Livingstone's  last 

journey.    Macmillan.    1947.   271  pp.  Illus. 

Maps.  DT731.L8C65  1947 

"Most  of  this  book  was  written  several  years  ago 
as  a  sequel  to  Kirk  on  the  Zambesi." — Preface. 

Day,  Donald.  Big  country:  Texas.  Duell, 
Sloan  &  Pearce.  [1947.]  x,  326  pp.  F386.D3 
American  Folkways  Series. 

Ehrenburg,  Il'ia.  European  crossroad;  a 
Soviet  journalist  in  the  Balkans  .  .  .  trans- 
lated from  the  Russian  by  Anna  Markov. 
Knopf.  1947.  176  pp.  DR48.5.E353 

Hard,  Walter  R.  The  Connecticut  .  .  .  illus- 
trated by  Douglas  W.  Gorsline.  Rinehart. 
x,  310  pp.  Illus.  F12.C7H3 
Bibliography,  pp.  299—301.  Rivers  of  America 
Series. 

Korean  American  cultural  association.  The 
culture  of  Korea,  racial  background, 
sketch  of  geography,  history  of  Korea,  re- 
ligion, literature,  art,  science,  music,  eco- 
nomic background,  and  history  of  revolu- 
tionary movement.  Edited  by  Changsoon 
Kim.  [Honolulu,  1946.]  xii,  334  pp.  Illus. 

DS904.K6 

Russell,  Carl  Parcher.  One  hundred  years  in 
Yosemite;  the  story  of  a  great  park  and 
its  friends  .  .  .  with  a  foreword  by  Newton 
B.  Drury.  Berkeley  and  Los  Angeles, 
Univ.  of  California  Press.  1947.  xviii,  226 
pp.  Plates.  F868.Y6R8  1947 

Bibliography,   pp.  197—213. 

Steel,  Byron.  Let's  visit  our  national  parks,  a 
practical  motor  guide  to  the  national  parks 
and  principal  tourist  cities  of  the  United 
States.  McBride.  [1947.]  vii,  224  pp.  Maps. 

E160.S7 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
Volume  XXII,  Number  9 


Contents 


Page 

GEORGE  GISSING  TO  HIS  SISTER  323 
By  Jacqueline  Steiner 

A  LOYALIST  IN  SPITE  OF  HIMSELF  337 

By  Zoltan  Haraszti 

WOOD-ENGRAVINGS  BY  ASA  CHEFFETZ  341 

By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

A  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  AMERICAN  NEWSPAPERS  343 

ILLUSTRATORS  OF  CHILDREN'S  BOOKS  344 

TEN  BOOKS  :  SHORT  REVIEWS 

Ellery  Sedgwick,  editor:  Atlantic  Harvest  345 

John  Hope  Franklin:  From  Slavery  to  Freedom  345 

William  L.  Shirer :  End  of  a  Berlin  Diary  346 

Major-General  Sir  Francis  de  Guingand :  Operation  Victory  346 

Burton  Rascoe:  We  Were  Interrupted  346, 

Olivia  Howard  Dunbar:  A  House  in  Chicago  346 

William  Seagle :  Men  of  Law  347 

Thomas  Jefferson  Wertenbaker:  The  Puritan  Oligarchy  347 

Elizabeth  Gilmore  Holt,  editor :  Literary  Sources  of  Art  History  348 

Janet  Whitney:  Abigail  Adams  348 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

A  First  Edition  of  "Emma"  349 

The  Astrolabes  of  the  World  349 

Francis  Parkman  to  a  Fellow-Historian  350 

"Adam  in  Eden,"  an  English  Herbal  351 

Lectures  and  Concerts  351 

LIST  OF  NEWLY-ACQUIRED  BOOKS  352 


EDITOR:  ZOLTAN  HARASZTI 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17, 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library  15-17  Blagden  St.,  November  1947,  Vol.  XXII,  No.  9. 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees,  for  free  distribution; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
NOVEMBER,  1947 

George  Gissing  to  his  Sister 

THERE  are  not  many  today  who  read  the  works  of  George  Gissing, 
but  his  reputation  among-  students  of  the  novel  is  very  high.  His  ATezv 
Grab  Street  is  a  classic  in  its  way,  and  represents  something  unique  in  the 
main  stream  of  English  literature.  He  wrote  in  the  latter  part  of  the  Vic- 
torian period;  his  work  expresses  the  economic  unrest  of  a  time  when 
the  Fabian  socialists  were  growing  in  numbers,  and  when  two  such  op- 
posite natures  as  John  Ruskin  and  William  Morris  were  setting  forth 
their  solutions  to  the  problems  of  society.  Gissing  was  a  contemporary 
of  Zola,  and  he  introduced  a  new  realism  into  English  writing.  But  where- 
as Zola's  realism  is  bold  and  powerful,  that  of  Gissing  is  rather  staid,  im- 
personal, and  precise.  His  subjects  are  in  the  tradition  of  Dickens,  whom 
he  greatly  admired,  but  he  is  not  as  sentimental  or  melodramatic,  nor  one 
whit  as  humorous.  Gissing  was  a  divided  personality  —  on  the  one  hand, 
he  was  drawn  toward  the  working  classes  and  what  was  termed  at  the 
time  "low  life";  on  the  other,  he  aspired  toward  a  life  of  culture,  in  which 
he  might  study  the  history  and  writings  of  ancient  Rome  and  Greece  in 
quiet  solitude.  His  working  people  are  for  the  most  part  portrayed  with 
a  cold  objectivity;  his  warmth  was  reserved  for  the  past.  Nevertheless, 
his  books  show  a  scrupulous  intellectual  integrity,  combined  with  great 
energy  and  earnestness.  Interestingly  enough,  they  had  much  greater  in- 
fluence in  America  than  in  England;  Frank  Norris,  Upton  Sinclair,  Theo- 
dore Dreiser,  and  others  are  indebted  to  him. 

Gissing,  who  died  in  1903  at  the  age  of  forty-six,  produced  about 
thirty  volumes  (five  of  them  published  posthumously).  This  is  a  consider- 
able number,  especially  since  it  does  not  include  his  hack  articles,  and  the 
novels  or  portions  of  novels  which  he  destroyed.  The  same  care  that 
characterizes  his  fiction  also  appears  in  his  letters.  Some  of  these  were 
published  in  Letters  of  George  Gissing,  1927,  arranged  by  Algernon  and 
Ellen  Gissing,  his  brother  and  sister,  and  they  extend  from  his  school  days 
to  his  'eath.  The  collection  is  far  from  satisfactory.  The  editors  have 


323 


324 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


made  a  conscious  effort  to  conceal  all  their  brother's  marital  difficulties, 
even  though  these  had  a  crucial  effect  on  his  life.  Under  such  circum- 
stances, one  cannot  entirely  dispense  with  The  Private  Life  of  Henry  M ait- 
land,  a  disguised  biography  by  Morley  Roberts,  published  in  1912.  The 
book  has  been  attacked  as  "malicious"  because  it  contains  some  shocking 
details  about  the  novelist;  however,  the  author,  who  had  been  his  friend 
since  their  college  days,  writes  of  him  with  great  regard.  Gissing  did  bril- 
liant work  at  Owens  College,  Manchester,  from  1872  to  1875,  when  his 
career  was  suddenly  terminated  by  a  scandal  with  a  prostitute.  Roberts 
suggests  that  he  had  been  stealing  from  coats  and  lockers  of  fellow  stu- 
dents in  order  to  obtain  money  for  the  girl's  support.  He  was  imprisoned 
and,  some  time  after  his  release,  friends  sent  him  to  America,  where  he 
stayed  about  a  year. 

He  landed  in  New  York  in  the  fall  of  1876,  and  soon  came  to  Boston. 
His  first  extant  letter  from  this  city  was  written  to  his  brother  Willie 
from  a  boarding  house  at  71  Bartlett  Street.  He  mentions  that  he  has  no 
employment,  but  speaks  of  his  hopes.  "My  principal  friend  here  is  Mr. 
Garrison.  He  knows  the  editor  of  the  Atlantic  Monthly  —  one  of  our  best 
periodicals  —  very  well,  and  thinks  he  can  perhaps  get  me  a  place  on  its 
staff  in  some  capacity.  I  have  just  written  an  essay  on  Burns  and  Heine 
as  song-writers,  and  it  is  going  to  be  shown  to  the  editor."  Roberts  men- 
tions Lloyd  Garrison,  a  poet,  who  knew  Gissing  in  America,  from  which 
one  may  gather  that  this  was  William  Lloyd  Garrison,  the  younger,  who 
wrote  principally  on  economic  and  political  subjects,  and  collaborated  on 
a  book  with  Henry  George,  but  who  also  published  a  book  of  thirteen  son- 
nets. The  editor  of  the  Atlantic  was  at  that  time  W.  D.  Howells.  It  is  un- 
certain whether  he  saw  any  of  the  young  author's  work;  if  he  did,  he  did 
not  accept  it  for  publication.  In  his  next  letter  of  November  13,  Gissing 
tells  his  youngest  brother,  Algernon,  that  he  was  "doing  a  little  writing 
for  newspapers  and  periodicals."  After  reporting  on  his  reading  of  Goethe, 
George  Eliot,  and  Thackeray,  and  giving  an  account  of  the  presidential 
elections,  he  goes  on:  "We  have  a  glorious  public  library  here.  It  is  free 
to  all  to  use  and  I  can  assure  you  it  is  excellently  patronized ;  for  here,  you 
know,  everybody  reads.  There  are  very  few  books  that  one  would  be  at 
all  likely  to  want  that  it  does  not  contain.  Altogether  Boston  is  a  splendid 
place.  I  should  be  very  sorry  ever  to  leave  it  for  good."  At  the  time  the 
Library  was  housed  in  a  building  on  Boylston  Street.  Soon  afterwards, 
on  January  28,  1877,  the  young  Englishman  wrote  from  Waltham,  Massa- 
chusetts, where  he  was  living  with  a  private  family.  He  had  at  last  ob- 
tained a  place  as  assistant  teacher  in  the  high  school,  teaching  German, 
French,  and  English  at  a  salary  of  eight  hundred  dollars.  Gissing  was  de- 
lighted with  the  order  displayed  in  the  school,  and  the  respect  with  which 
the  teachers  were  treated.  He  even  had  a  visit  from  a  newspaper  reporter, 


GEORGE  GISSING  TO  HIS  SISTER 


325 


which  indicated  to  him  that  a  high  school  teacher  was  "an  important  per- 
son" in  America. 

It  is  not  clear  why  he  left  his  position  in  Waltham  to  live  in  Chicago, 
where  he  had  no  security.  H.  G.  Wells,  who  was  his  life-long  friend,  sug- 
gests in  an  article  written  shortly  after  his  death,  that  it  was  the  result 
of  his  "curious  inability  to  do  the  sane,  the  secure  thing."  Whatever  the 
reason,  Gissing  left  for  Chicago  shortly  after  his  last  Waltham  letter,  and 
during  his  few  months'  stay  there  contributed  several  short  stories  to  the 
Chicago  Tribune  and  other  papers.  Some  of  these  were  published  under 
the  title  Brownie  in  193 1  by  the  Columbia  University  Press.  They  are 
sketchy  and  sensational,  but  show  definite  talent.  In  the  fall  of  1877  he 
returned  to  England,  and  married  the  girl  from  Manchester.  In  the  fol- 
lowing year  he  had  completed  a  novel  which  he  tried  in  vain  to  sell,  and 
in  1880  he  published,  practically  at  his  own  expense,  Workers  in  the  Dawn. 
After  another  unsuccessful  novel,  Mrs.  Grundy's  Enemies,  The  Unclassed 
appeared  in  1884,  and  after  that  the  way  was  fairly  clear. 

^TA  HE  Boston  Public  Library,  which  possesses  twenty-one  works  by 


■*•  Gissing  in  first  editions,  has  recently  acquired  a  group  of  seventeen 
letters  by  him,  all  written  to  his  sister  Nelly  (Ellen).  Only  a  few  of  these 
are  included,  and  only  in  part,  in  the  Letters  of  George  Gissing.  The  letters 
extend  from  1885  to  the  year  before  his  death,  1902,  and  some  of  them 
run  to  more  than  a  thousand  words.  The  subject  matter  ranges  over  a 
number  of  topics,  not  the  least  of  which  is  Gissing's  affectionate  solicitude 
for  his  sister,  who  was  ten  years  younger  than  he.  The  first  letter,  where 
he  instructs  her  about  her  costume  for  coming  down  to  London,  displays 
a  tender  care  and  interest.  Other  letters  concern  the  progress  of  his  writ- 
ing, his  married  life,  his  friends,  and  contain  much  about  his  feelings  and 
general  outlook. 

On  March  14,  1888,  he  asks  his  sister,  "Do  you  think  it  comes  from 
the  fact  of  my  release  from  that  long  burden  that  I  feel  my  loneliness 
more  than  hitherto?"  The  question  undoubtedly  refers  to  the  recent  death 
of  his  wife,  who  had  drained  all  his  resources  and  caused  him  much  misery 
in  the  ten  years  of  their  marriage.  His  second  marriage  was  no  better. 
It  was  undertaken  impulsively,  in  desperate  loneliness.  (Maitland  ex- 
plains in  Morley  Robert's  book:  "T  could  stand  it  no  longer,  so  I  rushed 
out  and  spoke  to  the  very  first  woman  I  came  across.")  Passages  from 
the  letters  in  the  Library  testify  to  the  small  regard  which  Edith,  whom 
he  married  in  1891,  elicited  from  him.  "Of  course,  Edith  will  never  learn 
foreign  languages  .  .  .  ,"  he  writes  of  the  difficulties  they  faced  in  travel- 
ling on  the  continent.  This  must  have  been  a  grave  fault  for  him,  for  he 
valued  learning  very  highly  in  women  as  well  as  in  men  ;  he  was  always 
advising  his  sisters  about  literary  matters.  And  again :  "Edith  does  very 


326 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


well  —  improves  much  in  every  way.  I  am  more  than  satisfied  with  her. 
The  house  is  orderly,  everything  punctual.  She  has  many  very  good  quali- 
ties." Gissing  wrote  often  of  servants  in  that  vein;  in  fact,  Edith  herself 
may  have  been  a  servant  before  her  marriage.  In  the  letter  of  December 
30,  1895,  there  are  hints  of  a  perilous  domestic  situation:  "No  doubt  it 
will  seem  strange  to  her  [a  Miss  Maddison]  that  she  is  not  invited  to 
come  here;  but  so  does  it  seem  strange  to  various  other  people,  whom  I 
shall  never  be  able  to  ask.  We  see  but  one  visitor  —  Miss  Collet;  who 
knows  the  extraordinary  circumstances  of  the  establishment,  &  puts  up 
with  everything."  The  difficulty  could  not  have  been  mere  poverty.  Gis- 
sing had  sent  his  two  young  sons,  Walter  and  Alfred,  away,  because,  ac- 
cording to  Roberts,  he  was  afraid  of  the  dangerous  influence  their  mother 
might  have  upon  them.  In  January  1898,  when  it  is  no  longer  certain  that 
he  was  living  with  his  wife,  he  writes :  E's  latest  statement  is  that  she 
will  go  before  a  magistrate,  &  declare  that  I  have  'deserted  my  family' ! 
I  am  really  afraid  she  will  end  in  the  lunatic  asylum."  Thus  twice  Gissing 
plunged  headlong  into  disaster,  and  then  made  it  a  point  of  honor  to  serve 
his  term  of  wretched  unhappiness. 

He  kept  up  a  steady  correspondence  with  Willie,  who  died  in  1880, 
with  Algernon,  who  himself  achieved  a  small  reputation  as  a  writer,  and 
with  his  sisters,  Madge  and  Nelly,  who  started  a  school  in  Wakefield, 
Yorkshire,  where  they  were  born.  Nelly  appears  to  have  been  his  favorite. 
His  first  letter  to  her  was  addressed  from  his  school  at  Alderley  Edge, 
when  he  was  fourteen  and  she  only  four.  In  September  1888.  before  his 
marriage,  he  wrote  to  her :  "And  with  what  delight  should  I  visit  that 
house  —  the  house  where  sister  Nelly  was  ruler!  ...  It  is  little  likely 
that  I  shall  ever  have  a  fixed  home  of  my  own,  but  that  would  matter 
little  if  you  had  —  in  your  own  abode  —  a  room  always  waiting  for  me." 
It  is  a  singular  commentary  on  his  relations  with  women  that  he  scarcely 
looked  forward  to  a  life  of  his  own,  with  his  own  wife  and  family,  but  in- 
stead looked  back  —  to  his  sister,  whom  he  so  rarely  saw.  This  was  as 
much  true  after  he  was  married  as  before. 

From  his  novels,  one  would  gather  that  most  of  Gissing's  life 
was  spent  in  great  poverty.  Frank  Swinnerton  and  May  Yates  in  their 
respective  studies,  deny  this,  and  claim  that  after  1882  he  was  able  to 
get  along.  But  he  could  never  free  himself  from  the  near  presence  of  pov- 
erty, and  he  was  continually  a  victim  of  illness.  One  result  of  his  need 
was  that  he  took  a  considerable  interest  in  socialism  in  his  youth.  But  he 
was  too  much  of  a  misanthrope  to  remain  a  rebel  for  long.  He  regarded 
the  fact  that  he  was  poor  as  a  personal  affront.  Throughout  these  letters 
as  well  as  others,  he  complains  of  having  to  associate  with  vulgar  people. 
"If  I  cannot  get  society  of  an  equal  kind,"  he  writes  on  March  14,  1888, 
"I  suppose  I  sh#ll  have  to  make  acquaintances  among  my  inferiors.  That 


GEORGE  GISSING  TO  HIS  SISTER 


327 


has  always  been  my  lot."  Again,  on  April  29,  1891.  he  remarks,  "We  make 
no  acquaintances,  &  seem  unlikely  ever  to  do  so.  The  people  in  the  house 
do  not  at  all  suit  us  &  we  merely  keep  on  civil  terms  with  them."  This  re- 
pulsion for  the  "people  in  the  house"  is  singular  in  the  light  of  Gissing's 
marriages. 

In  spite  of  his  personal  unhappiness,  he  continued  to  write  furiously. 
In  his  spare  hours  he  tutored  in  classics  and  languages,  and  turned  out 
articles  for  the  current  reviews.  In  these  letters  he  mentions  several  of 
his  novels,  among  them  Demos,  1886,  his  first  book  to  win  him  recogni- 
tion, and  Thyrza,  1887,  one  of  his  finest  works.  Most  of  his  novels  up  to 
that  time  dealt  with  working  people.  But  Demos  and  Thyrza  cannot  quite 
be  called  working  class  books,  because  the  principal  relationships  por- 
trayed are  those  of  upper  and  middle  class  people  with  a  few  "exceptional" 
working  men.  In  Demos,  a  worker  who  is  a  socialist  becomes  exceptional 
by  inheriting  a  fortune,  which  he  uses  to  set  up  a  model  iron  works,  in  a 
fashion  that  seems  to  have  more  in  common  with  paternalism  than  with 
socialism.  In  Thyrza,  there  is  another  reformer  who  failed,  this  time  a 
member  of  the  upper  class,  who  wishes  to  take  workers  away  from  the 
sordid  things  of  this  world  and  interest  them  in  literature.  One  of  the 
chief  characters  is  a  worker  of  unusually  quiet,  meditative,  and  literary 
temperament.  But  that  which  makes  Thyrza  a  good  novel  is  quite  di- 
vorced from  all  these  stage  props.  It  is  the  characterization  of  Thyrza 
herself  which  distinguishes  the  book.  She  is  a  strange  being  out  of  a 
dream  (again,  an  exceptional  working  girl)  who  falls  hopelessly  in  love 
with  Egremont,  the  literary  reformer,  far  above  her  in  class,  but  very 
like  her  in  spirit.  This  is  one  of  the  few  places  in  Gissing's  work  where 
human  passions  are  the  central  force,  supported  by  several  warm  and  en- 
gaging portraits  of  working  people.  The  Emancipated,  1890,  is  a  departure 
from  the  earlier  novels  of  poverty.  Gissing's  sister  was  shocked  —  and 
much  upbraided  by  him  for  it  —  on  account  of  his  unfavorable  picture  of 
Miriam,  an  excessively  pious  and  puritanical  woman.  There  is  much  dis- 
cussion about  the  book  in  this  group  of  letters,  and  there  are  many  indi- 
cations that  it  produced  a  severe  strain  in  their  relationship,  something 
which  distressed  Gissing  considerably.  Nelly  appears  to  have  been  a  fairly 
conservative  and  provincial  person,  whereas  Gissing  affirms :  "My  part 
is  with  the  men  &  women  who  are  clearing  the  ground  of  systems  that 
have  had  their  day  &  have  crumbled  into  obstructive  ruin."  As  to  the 
literary  merit  of  the  work,  George  Meredith,  already  a  famous  novelist 
and  a  reader  for  Chapman  &  Hall,  had  warned  Gissing  a  few  years  back 
that  he  had  better  keep  to  "low  life"  scenes,  because  that  was  what  he 
could  do  best.  The  advice  was  given  about  Isabel  Clarendon,  1886,  but  it 
applies  as  well  to  The  Emancipated,  where  cold  logic  and  explanation  play 
far  too  great  a  role. 


328 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


A LETTER  of  April  1891  refers  to  a  book  as  pleasing  even  to  Edith,  as 
well  as  to  Nelly  and  others.  That  book  was  Nezv  Grub  Street.  It 
marked  the  peak  in  Gissing's  career,  for  in  it  he  united  all  his  intellectual 
and  creative  powers.  Perhaps  he  was  able  to  do  this  because  the  subject 
was  so  close  to  him.  The  novel  —  in  three  volumes  —  was  written  in  eight 
weeks,  and  yet  is  the  most  closely  knit  of  any  of  his  works.  It  cost  him  a 
good  deal  of  pain :  "Writing  it,  I  believed  it  trash,  for  it  was  wrung,  page 
by  page,  from  a  sluggish  and  tormented  brain."  It  was  named  after  the 
London  street  inhabited  by  starving  journalists  and  made  famous  by 
Swift  and  Pope.  Edwin  Reardon,  the  character  most  like  Gissing  himself, 
was  a  man  who  could  not,  even  though  he  half-desired  it,  write  for  the 
popular  taste.  Finally,  he  was  no  longer  able  to  write  at  all  and  took  a 
job  as  a  clerk,  whereupon  his  wife  abandoned  him.  In  sharp  contrast  to 
him  is  Jasper  Milvain,  whose  w.ork  is  accepted  by  all  the  periodicals  be- 
cause of  his  ability  to  meet  the  right  people.  Money  is  the  central  theme. 
The  destinies  of  all  the  characters  are  controlled  by  legacies  and  wages, 
and  in  the  end  it  is  the  mercenary  who  live  and  are  happy;  the  poor  and 
the  noble  die  and  are  forgotten. 

Gissing's  temperament  was  anything  but  joyous.  "The  outlook,"  he 
comments  in  the  above  letter,  "is  not  very  cheerful ;  impossible  for  me  to 
see  the  world  in  a  rosy  light.  At  the  best  it  looks  to  me  only  not-intoler- 
able. As  for  human  aspirations,  I  know  not  their  meaning,  &  can  conceive 
no  credible  explanation."  This  dry  and  gloomy  view  is  borne  out  by  the 
reflections  in  the  semi-autobiographical  Private  Papers  of  Henry  Ryecroft. 
"I  am  no  friend  of  the  people,"  he  declares  and  goes  on  to  express  his  dis- 
trust of  democracy,  and  to  speak  of  his  belief  that  worth  lies  in  the  indi- 
vidual, but  never  in  the  class  or  crowd,  where  human  beings  are  vulgar- 
ized. Gissing  thus  shows  himself  akin  to  the  older  Victorians,  to  Carlyle, 
Ruskin,  and  Arnold.  They  were  well  aware  that  something  was  wrong 
with  the  social  order ;  but  since,  for  them,  culture  —  "sweetness  and  light" 
—  was  the  highest  ideal,  they  believed  that  its  dissemination  was  the  first 
step  toward  improving  the  lives  of  the  working  class.  Who  workingmen 
were,  what  they  wanted  in  immediate  terms,  the  Victorians  neither  saw 
nor  wished  to  see.  It  was  somewhat  the  same  for  Gissing.  His  feelings 
for  workers  were  a  mixture  of  sympathy  and  repulsion.  Without  doubt, 
he  was  more  intimately  acquainted  with  poor  people  than  Ruskin,  and  he 
had  known  hunger,  but  their  "vulgarity"  oppressed  him. 

It  was  in  Italy  that  he  spent  his  happiest  days.  He  wrote  many  long 
letters  to  his  family  and  friends,  describing  the  air,  the  sea,  the  towns,  all 
of  which  recalled  to  him  most  vividly  the  culture  of  the  Romans.  His  book 
By  the  Ionian  Sea,  1901,  deals  with  his  stay  there,  and  the  novel  Veranilda, 
on  which  he  was  working  when  he  died,  is  a  romance  of  fifth-century 
Rome.  One  of  his  most  pleasant  experiences  in  England  was  his  visit  to 


GEORGE  GISSING  TO  HIS  SISTER 


329 


Shakespeare's  home,  which  he  spenks  of  in  one  of  these  letters:  "What  a 
clay  I  bad  yesterday  at  Stratford!  .  .  .  For  two  hours  I  lay  on  the  edge  of 
the  churchyard,  looking  over  the  Avon ;  innumerable  were  the  pipes  I 
smoked,  deep  were  my  meditations."  But  something  always  came  along 
to  spoil  his  happiness.  In  Italy  it  was  the  climate,  which  was  ruinous  to 
his  health:  "Italy  is  a  splendid  country  for  the  young  &  the  strong;  for 
invalids,  it  offers  little  comfort  &  many  dangers."  As  for  Stratford,  his 
visit  there  was  disturbed  by  the  presence  of  garrulous  old  women  who 
followed  him  throughout  Shakespeare's  house  "bent  on  explaining  the 
meaning  of  'quarto'  and  'folio.'  " 

He  lived  in  Southern  France  during  the  last  part  of  his  life,  when  he 
was  suffering  continually  from  a  lung  disturbance.  His  third  wife,  a  cul- 
tured Frenchwoman,  with  whom  he  at  last  found  real  companionship, 
cared  for  him  devotedly.  He  died  in  St.  Jean  Pied  de  Port,  near  the  Pyre- 
nees, having  long  been  parted  from  his  children  and  England,  but  in  the 
presence  of  his  friends. 

In  a  note  Gissing  defined  realism  as  signifying  "nothing  more  than 
artistic  sincerity  in  the  portrayal  of  contemporary  life."  The  phrase  is 
vague,  but  it  meant  something  definite  to  him  —  freedom  from  merely 
pleasing  people  by  keeping  disagreeable  facts  out  of  sight  and  always 
ending  the  story  on  a  cheerful  note.  His  characters,  as  individuals  and  as 
groups,  act  on  neutral  ground.  One  is  never  carried  away  by  them  ;  rather, 
one  examines  them  with  interest.  Gissing  possessed  neither  an  easy  grace, 
nor  a  soaring  imagination,  but  his  intelligence  and  truthfulness  give  his 
works  a  lasting  value. 

JACQUELINE  STEINER 


Letters  of  George  Gissing 

7.K.  Cornwall  Residences 
Friday  [May  1885 1 

My  Dear  Nelly, 

It  is  twelve  o'clock,  &  I  am  just  back  from  a  delightful  dinner-party  at 
Craven  Hill;  but  I  had  better  reply  to  yours  to-night.  Mrs.  Gaussen  suggested 
white  cashmere  for  the  evening  dress,  but,  if  you  object  to  white,  then  how 
would  blue  do,  —  unless,  of  course,  you  prefer  black,  which  1  myself  like.  Never 
mind  how  simple  the  dress  is,  but  let  it  be  of  good  stuff  &  well  made.  It  must 
be  pretty  low,  I  think ;  dresses  are  worn  so  at  present.  A  nice  pair  of  shoes  for 
evening  wear  will  be  essential,  I  think.  Also  yanls  de  suede,  but  wait  &  get 
these  in  London ;  they  cost  next  to  nothing.  I  don't  know  what  boxes  you  are 
bringing,  but  I  should  suggest  that  you  have  them  cased  in  brown  holland,  — 
you  know  the  way  I  mean. 


33° 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


I  am  tokl  that  annus  is  much  worn  for  morning  and  afternoon.  What 
this  means  I  don't  exactly  know.  Have  a  nice  afternoon  dress. 

I  saw  about  walking  costume.  Doubtless  you  understand  this,  but  ladies 
seem  to  dress  so  elaborately  of  a  morning.  However,  don't  let  everything  be 
new ;  that  is  to  be  avoided.  Gloves,  don't  buy  till  you  get.  here.  Unless  you  are 
quite  sure  about  it,  I  would  also  come  up  in  an  old  hat,  &  get  a  new  one  here; 
you  will  see  the  kinds  that  are  worn.  Tn  fact  you  can  leave  all  the  small  things, 
if  you  like. 

Bring  some  of  your  favourite  music,  &  have  a  few  things  by  heart ;  no 
doubt  you  have  already. 

I  hope  to  come  on  the  Friday  before  Whitsunday,  &  bring  you  back  on 
the  Monday  morning;  cannot  afford  longer  time  than  that.  I  think  you  will 
be  a  week  with  me,  &  then  a  week  at  Craven  Hill.  You  will  find  the  Gaussens 
admirably  easy  to  get  along  with ;  Ella  Gaussen  is  almost  as  nice  as  her  mother, 
which  is  saying  a  great  deal.  She  has  been  singing  well  to-night.  By  the  bye, 
you  must  sing  if  possible.  Practise  Das  Fischermadchen. 

You  will  be  up  for  the  Academy,  Grosvenor,  &c,  &  be  able  to  see  Irving 
in  Hamlet,  I  believe.  I  hope  it  will  all  do  you  good. 

With  love,  dear  Nelly, 
George 

7.K.  Corn.  Residences 
Saturday  [May  1885] 

Dear  Nelly, 

I  have  commissioned  Mrs.  Gaussen  to  buy  the  material  for  your  evening 
dress,  &  it  shall  be  sent  to  you.  I  believe  it  will  be  of  "Canvas",  &  full  directions 
(diall  accompany.  So  the  afternoon  dress  must  be  something  different.  I  tele- 
graphed for  fear  you  should  be  taking  irrevocable  steps,  yet  I  fear  you  won't 
get  the  message  much  before  to-night. 

Aftectionaielv. 
G.  G. 


7.K.  March  14."  "88. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

Your  letter  cheered  me,  as  your  letters  always  do.  I  am  still  far  from  be- 
ginning to  work.  I  remember  no  time  when  I  felt  such  great  persistent  bodily 
weakness,  with  corresponding  inability  to  exert  my  mind.  I  took  up  a  pen  on 
Monday,  but  could  not  frame  a  sentence;  in  blank  misery  I  sat  for  half  an 
hour  staring  at  the  sheet  of  paper,  then  turned  to  stare  for  hours  at  the  fire. 

I  begin  to  think  that  the  air  of  this  part  of  London  is  proving  fatal  to  me. 
Everybody  draws  attention  to  the  fact  that  the  fumes  of  Baker  Street  Station 
must  be  poisonous,  &  I  daresay  there  is  something  in  that.  Perhaps  I  did  a 
very  wrong  thing  in  renewing  my  lease.  I  may,  after  all,  be  forced  to  abandon 
the  place. 


GEORGE  GISSING  TO  HIS  SISTER 


33i 


Yes,  I  should  do  this.  I  should  look  about  for  lodgings  toward  Hamp- 
stead.  They  would  have  to  be  unfurnished  rooms,  &  in  a  house  where  I  could 
have  not  only  common  attendance,  but  cooking.  Immensely  difficult  to  find 
such  a  place,  with  suitable  people.  And  then  the  frightful  difficulty  of  dis- 
missing Mrs  King,  —  I  fear  I  should  have  to  pay  her  a  pension,  —  don't  you 
think  so?  Still,  it  would  make  my  life  vastly  easier:  110  trouble  about  parcels, 
&c,  &  there  might  even  be  some  kind  of  human  intercourse  possible. 

I  speak  very  seriously  when  I  say  that  I  feel  to  be  growing  weaker  & 
weaker.  I  cannot  reconcile  myself  to  the  thought  that  my  life's  work  is  over  — 
there  is  so  much  I  still  want  to  do:  I  have  so  much  to  say.  It  is  useless  to  ask 
advice ;  I  must  act  on  my  own  responsibility,  of  course. 

Do  you  think  it  comes  from  the  fact  of  my  release  from  that  long  burden, 
that  I  feel  my  loneliness  far  more  than  hitherto?  Hitherto  I  have  reconciled 
myself  to  it  as  being  meritable ;  now  I  fail  before  the  prospect  of  months  & 
months,  years  perhaps,  of  absolute  -olitude.  I  cannot  leave  London,  both  on 
account  of  my  work  &  of  Grahame. 

Yet,  on  the  other  hand,  the  fault  I  am  finding  with  the  air  of  this  place 
may  be  imaginary.  Still,  in  any  case,  it  would  be  a  vast  improvement  to  have 
attendance  in  a  house.  But  the  terrible  difficulty  of  finding  a  quiet  place. 

I  suppose  I  must  inevitably  remain  here  till  I  have  a  book  to  sell.  But 
when  I  shall  be  equal  to  work  I  know  not.  My  cold  is  very  bad,  &  a  cough  has 
added  itself.  —  I  have  got  another  bottle  of  oil,  &  shall  continue  taking  it 
steadily. 

Will  it  be  better  when  days  of  sunshine  come?  Perhaps  so;  I  must  just 
wait  &  see.  But  another  winter  I  cannot  face  here ;  seriously  I  do  not  think 
I  should  live  through  it. 

All  day  long  I  do  absolutely  nothing,  —  I  do  not  even  read.  Goodness 
knows  how  I  get  through  the  hours. 

It  did  me  good,  mentally,  to  talk  with  you  for  those  few  days,  — ■  but 
they  were  so  few.  Wonderful  how  you  have  matured  in  mind  these  last  two 
or  three  years ;  I  think  we  should  soon  understand  each  other,  if  we  only  had 
opportunities.  But  the  opportunity  will  never  come,  never.  Thus  life  —  short 
as  it  is  —  is  thrown  away :  we  act  &  think  as  though  we  had  a  literal  eternity 
before  us.  —  1  am  delighted  by  the  Jiving  interest  you  take  in  such  things  as 
Browning's  poetry ;  it  is  such  a  sign  of  health.  At  present  I  cannot  interest 
myself  in  anything:  I  do  not  live,  but  merely  support  existence. 

You  will  get  so  used  to  this  kind  of  querulousness  that  you  will  pay  no 
attention  to  it  —  which  perhaps  will  be  the  best  thing  that  could  happen.  What 
is  the  use  of  complaining,  when:  there  is  no  remedy  ?  Yet  it  seems  so  miserable 
that  a  man  at  my  age,  with  my  (I  suppose  I  may  say)  reputation,  &,  now,  with 
absolute  freedom,  should  be  so  utterly  companionless.  What  I  want  is  do- 
mestic society ;  I  want  to  know  a  family  of  people,  with  whom  to  have  restful 
intercourse.  If  that  were  gained,  it  would  matter  little  where  I  lived.  It  will 
never  benefit  me  to  take  change  of  air,  or  anything  of  the  kind,  so  long  as  I 
am  a  hermit  wherever  I  go:  I  merely  carry  a  desert  with  me. 

If  I  cannot  get  society  of  an  equal  kind,  I  suppose  I  shall  have  to  make 
acquaintances  among  my  inferiors.  That  has  always  been  my  lot.  If  I  take 


332 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


lodgings,  I  shall  have  to  make  friends  of  the  people  who  keep  the  house.  I 
had  rather  go  &  sit  at  Howhold's  fireside  than  be  absolutely  alone.  Yet  that 
is  practically  impossible,  for  such  people  cannot  foot  themselves  on  equal 
terms  with  me. 

When  I  am  writing,  I  can  partly  forget  myself  in  the  worlds  I  create. 
Write  I  must ;  it  is  the  only  refuge.  Surely  when  my  cold  goes  I  shall  feel 
stronger.  By  the  bye,  there  is  no  doubt  that  I  got  much  harm  during  those 
weeks  at  Eastbourne;  it  weakened  my  chest  sadly.  I  am  now  taking  the  oil 
three  times  a  day,  &  am  careful  to  have  a  good  dinner. 

Strangely,  I  manage  to  sleep  very  well.  Though  I  do  nothing.  T  go  to 
bed  at  ten  o'clock  utterly  tired. 

Yes,  you  too  have  your  daily  difficulties,  &  I  dare  say  you  make  much 
less  of  them  than  most  people  would.  There  must  be  few,  very  few  —  if  indeed 
there  is  anyone  —  who  understand  you  &  value  you  aright.  The  commonplace 
consolation  is:  "Remember  what  multitudes  of  people  are  in  the  same  posi- 
tion." That  is  no  solace  at  all ;  it  merely  intensifies  the  misery  of  the  particular 
case  by  making  it  seem  more  hopeless.  That  yours  is  hopeless  I  cannot  for  a 
moment  bring  myself  to  think.  Happily  you  are  very  young  yet :  the  future  is 
alive  with  possibilities.  But  I  only  wish  you  and  I  could  make  the  present 
more  endurable  to  each  other  by  an  hour's  talk  now  &  then. 

Well,  here  is  a  great  abundance  of  dreariness,  —  you  will  scarcely  get 
the  end  of  it.  My  best  love  to  you,  dearest. 

George 

I  am  much  pleased  by  receiving  this  evening  a  letter  from  a  French- 
woman, from  Paris,  asking  if  she  may  translate  ''Demos"!  She  says  that  she 
has  published  translations  of  many  novels  in  the  Revue  des  deux  Mondes,  &c. 
Also  she  speaks  with  much  interest  of  "A  Life's  Morning."  It  rejoices  me  that 
I  have  readers  in  Paris] 

Thursday 

My  cold  is  no  better,  but  I  am  somewhat  more  cheerful  this  morning.  An 
idea  or  two  have  come  to  me.  —  Please  thank  mother  for  her  letter.  There  is 
no  snow  here. 

I  suppose  you  have  seen  last  Saturday's  Free  Press.  The  Editor  sent  me 

a  copy. 

G.  G. 


Smallbrook  Cottage.  Broadway. 
Sept.  13th  1888. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

Your  rainy  news  astonishes  me.  There  was  not  even  a  threat  of  rain  on 
my  journey,  &  since  my  arrival  here  the  weather  has  been  perfect  —  absolute- 
ly perfect.  What  a  day  had  I  yesterday  at  Stratford !  From  dawn  to  sunset  an 
unclouded  sky ;  warmth  of  the  most  genial  kind,  just  tempered  by  a  breeze 
you  only  felt  in  walking  on.  For  two  hours  I  lay  on  the  edge  of  the  church- 


GEORGE  GISSING  TO  HIS  SISTER 


333 


yard,  looking  over  the  Avon ;  innumerable  were  the  pipes  I  smoked,  deep  were 
my  meditations.  Without  any  effort  of  recollection,  scraps  of  William  kept 
coming-  into  my  mind ;  &  the  one  which  recurred  most  frequently,  &  which 
was  of  most  soothing  efficacy,  was: 

"We  are  such  stuff 
As  dreams  are  made  on,  &  our  little  life 
Is  rounded  with  a  sleep." 

The  House  I  did  not  enjoy.  If  I  could  have  wandered  from  room  to  room 
alone!  But  to  be  pestered  by  garrulous  old  women,  bent  on  explaining  to  you 
the  meaning  of  "quarto"  &  "folio",  &  gravely  reminding  you  that  Sir  Walter 
Scott  was  "the  celebrated  novelist"  —  no,  this  disabled  me  from  really  looking 
at  a  single  thing.  For  one  sees  not  with  the  bodily  eye  alone ;  the  spirit  must 
be  unruffled  &  able  to  reflect  external  things  like  a  still  lake ;  otherwise,  profit 
of  gazing  there  is  none. 

Shottery  was  another  matter.  Save  that  children  ran  forth  from  the  gar- 
den of  Anne's  Cottage,  holding  flowers  which  you  were  expected  to  pay  for, 
there  is  nothing  to  offend.  And  the  village  is  very  beautiful,  —  old,  quiet,  in- 
tersected with  lanes  &  pathways,  surrounded  with  undulating  meadow  & 
cornland.  Here  without  all  doubt  William  has  often  &  often-  rambled  in  days 
when  he  had  little  foresight  of  Hamlet.  "Who's  that  just  gone  by?"  some  cot- 
tager would  ask  in  the  evening;  &  the  answer  would  be  —  "Why,  I  believe 
it  was  young  Will  Shakespeare,  but  I  didn't  quite  catch  his  face." 

On  Tuesday  morning,  Aunt  &  Mary  came  hither  to  pay  a  formal  call. 
They  were  seemingly  nervous  &  aunt  appeared  to  be  in  low  spirits.  The  same 
evening,  Katie  &  I  went  to  have  tea  with  them.  We  had  a  pleasant  evening. 
Mary  is  simple  &  agreeable  &  full,  I  should  think,  of  bright  possibilities.  But 
1  am  told  that  she  is  going  to  marry  an  utter  clown,  —  a  deplorable  thing,  & 
not  easily  to  be  understood.  Yet  I  suppose  her  sphere  of  knowledge  &  reflec- 
tion is  painfully  restricted.  The  possibility  of  better  things  seems  to  be  there, 
however,  &  a  removal  into  the  midst  of  life  for  a  time  might  do  wonders.  Any- 
thing of  the  kind  is  little  likely  to  happen,  seeing  that,  according  to  Katie,  the 
man  she  is  to  marry  was  made  miserable  by  a  night's  absence  from  Broadway. 

Well,  well ;  I  know  that  resignation  is  a  virtue,  &  I  know  that  it  is  foolish 
to  wish  disturbance  to  people  whose  life  runs  smoothly  in  a  narrow  current. 
But  the  frustration  of  possibilities  in  human  nature  is  none  the  less  grievous. 
To  think  of  the  thousand  instances  in  which  such  frustration  is  daily  being 
accomplished.  Especially  in  the  case  of  girls'  marriages  does  this  come  to  pass.  I  be- 
lieve it  to  be  very,  very  seldom  that  a  girl  is  elevated  by  her  husband ;  I  believe  it 
to  be  rarer  yet  for  a  girl  to  raise  her  husband's  moral  &  intellectual  tone.  The 
latter  is  a  thing  that  happens  in  the  most  exceptional  cases.  Commonly,  the 
two  people  adopt  each  other's  weaknesses,  &  by  this  dolorous  process  —  in- 
stead of  by  the  higher  one  of  mutual  aid  —  grow  assimilated. 

All  this,  partly  apropos  of  Mary  Bedford,  partly  of  Ella  Gaussen ;  for  I 
had  a  letter  from  Ireland  the  other  day.  I  suppose  it  is  all  but  certain  that  Ella 
will  some  day  marry  a  man  of  very  limited  capabilities.  Yet  on  the  whole  it 
will  be  better  for  her  to  do  so,  I  dare  say,  seeing  that  she  has  a  strong  turn 


334 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


for  the  commonplace  enjoyments  &  interests  of  society.  She  will  not,  in  such 
case,  exercise  an  elevating  influence ;  for  that,  she  is  not  strong  enough.  With 
no  little  interest  I  shall  watch  the  course  of  her  existence. 

To  speak  of  the  state  of  things  here.  I  cannot  after  a  good  deal  of  obser- 
vation, at  all  enter  into  mother's  view  of  the  case.  That  she  found  insufficient 
supplies  of  food,  surprises  me ;  but  perhaps  they  had  some  special  reason  for 
sparing  just  then.  At  present  I  find  nothing  of  the  sort.  Then  again,  she  seems 
strangely  to  have  had  eyes  for  nothing  but  a  few  defects  of  kitchen  manage- 
ment. Now  I  certainly  have  had  no  opportunity  of  examining  kitchen,  larder, 
&  scullery.  It  might  happen  that  I  should  find  there  an  occasional  speck  of 
dirt,  a  something  undusted,  a  something  unscoured,  &  so  on.  But  in  the  house 
at  large,  what  do  I  find?  The  bedrooms  are  beautifully  clean,  &  arranged  with 
really  noteworthy  taste.  The  lower  rooms  are  very  comfortable  indeed,  &  their 
appointments  testify  everywhere  to  culture  &  a  sense  of  the  beautiful.  There 
can  be  very  few  cottages  in  England  that  present  so  remarkable  a  testimony 
to  the  intellectual  enlightenment  of  the  occupiers.  Well,  &  the  servants?  A 
rosy-cheeked,  healthy,  clean-clad  girl,  willing  in  manner,  cheerful  in  speech. 
She  is  always  addressed  with  kindness,  always  replies  becomingly.  Now  what 
I  have  to  say  is  this.  If  man  does  not  live  by  bread  alone,  still  less  does  he 
live  by  the  sole  observation  of  kitchen  &  scullery.  Even  if  there  were  a  little 
less  than  perfection  of  spotlessness  in  unseen  places  of  the  house,  I  maintain 
that  such  matter  is  of  less  than  no  account  where  all  else  is  so  excellent.  Never 
do  I  hear  a  word  about  household  concerns ;  never  is  a  meal  discussed ;  never 
is  the  servant  referred  to  in  our  conversation.  Evreything  of  that  nature  comes 
to  pass  merely ;  it  is  not  wearisomely  laboured  over.  In  the  parlour  &  the  study, 
the  life  is  that  of  reasonable  human  beings  —  as  it  should  be.  Now,  is  it  worth 
sacrificing  this  human  progress  &  peace  for  the  sake  of  making  sure  that 
there  is  nothing  in  the  kitchen  that  miglit  not  be  better?  Is  it,  really?  —  No, 
but  then  of  course  the  inhabitants  of  a  house  must  unite  in  recognizing  that 
the  mind  is  of  more  account  than  the  body.  Mother  would  grant  you  that, 
hypothetically ;  but  we  know  sadly  enough  that  her  practise  is  in  precisely  the 
opposite  direction.  It  is  a  sad,  sad  thing  that  anyone  would  be  rendered  in- 
capable of  spiritual  activity  by  ceaseless  regard  for  kitchen-ware  &  the  back- 
door steps. 

I  hope  you  clearly  understand  me.  Cleanliness  there  should  be,  &  here 
there  is.  But  in  no  case  can  it  be  right  to  pursue  perfection  in  the  hidden  part 
of  a  house  at  the  cost  of  ruin  to  the  places  wherein  one  lives  &  moves  &  has 
one's  being. 

You  once  said  that  in  your  house  such  things  would  be  otherwise.  I  be- 
lieve it.  I  believe  things  would  work  with  you  as  they  do  here.  And  with  what 
delight  should  I  visit  that  house  —  the  house  where  sister  Nelly  was  ruler! 
I  live  in  hope  &  trust  that  I  may  do  so  some  day.  It  is  little  likely  that  I  shall 
ever  have  a  fixed  home  of  my  own,  but  that  would  matter  little  if  you  had  — 
in  your  own  abode  —  a  room  always  waiting  for  me. 

Well,  this  is  a  Bertzian  sort  of  letter,  &  I  must  close.  Mrs  King  sends 
the  Star  —  which,  by  the  bye,  I  found  for  sale  at  Stratford  station.  The  Spec- 
tator I  can  get  at  Evesham,  I  find,  &  you  shall  have  it  in  the  course  of  next  week. 


GEORGE  GISSING  TO  HIS  SISTER 


335 


I  have  a  letter  from  Plitt.  He  thinks  he  may  spend  the  winter  in  Paris, 
but  rather  tends  to  Naples.  Heavens!  Living-  there  costs  only  half  what  it 
does  in  Paris,  &,  by  roughing  it,  you  can  get  there  for  £5.  But  I  dare  not. 
The  place  is  very  unhealthy,  &  I  am  not  strong  enough  to  face  risks. 

With  much  love,  my  dearest.  It  is  a  great  pity  that  you  should  spend 
this  week  in  such  a  gloomy  place.  I  am  just  going  to  write  to  Payn,  &  shall  give 
the  Wakefield  address. 

George 
7.K.  April  i.  '90 

My  dear  Nelly, 

It  does  not  surprise  me  that  the  spirit  of  the  book  is  distasteful  to  you, 
but  I  certainly  am  rather  surprised  that  you  find  nothing  to  like  in  it.  The 
general  opinion  here  is  that  the  book  makes  a  great  advance  on  my  others.  I 
myself  think  that  it  is  the  best  yet  in  style  &  characterization. 

Well,  you  see,  we  look  at  these  matters,  not  only  from  different,  but 
from  opposing,  points  of  view.  There  is  no  use  in  expressing  oneself  harshly ; 
that  helps  nothing.  But  the  fact  is,  of  course,  that  my  intellectual  &  moral 
world  have  scarcely  one  point  in  common  with  that  wherein  you  live.  I  am 
afraid  you  do  not  even  suspect  how  true  this  is.  The  books  I  read,  &  the  people 
with  whom  I  converse,  have  a  view  of  life  which  to  you  is  either  meaningless, 
or  else  highly  repugnant ;  &  we,  on  the  other  hand,  find  it  impossible  to  ac- 
cept a  single  one  of  the  positions  which  to  you  are  axiomatic,  indisputable. 

The  one  thing  that  grieves  me  is  the  thought  that,  owing  to  lack  of  ex- 
perience, you  imagine  me  singular  in  my  way  of  thinking.  Whereas  the  fact  is 
that  I  only  represent  the  prevalent  views  of  our  day.  You  do  not  know  that, 
because  you  are  so  carefully  shut  in  on  every  hand ;  so  much  so,  that  you  will 
even  shake  your  head  in  incredulity  at  what  I  say.  Yet  it  is  so  simple  a  truth 
that  I  wonder  at  having  to  state  it. 

Some  day  perhaps  your  opportunities  will  increase,  &  then,  like  Miriam, 
you  will  be  amazed  to  find  people  of  admirable  personal  qualities  holding 
views  which  seem  to  you  utterly  incompatible  with  such  respectability. 

In  very  deed,  there  is  a  satiric  vein  in  "The  Emancipated"  which,  to 
those  conservatives  who  understand  it,  will  make  the  book  rather  acceptable 
than  otherwise.  (This  you  evidently  missed.)  It  comes  of  the  fact  that  I  am 
able  to  look  at  both  sides,  &  to  laugh  at  the  weaknesses  of  both.  This  is  why 
the  conservative  organs  have  frequently  spoken  of  me  as  if  I  were  of  their 
party.  The  uncompromising  party  of  radicalism  still  regard  me  with  doubt; 
1  do  not  go  far  enough  for  them,  or  at  all  events  do  not  speak  with  sufficient 
intolerance.  Now  these  things  being  recognized  facts,  it  is  a  little  painful  to 
me  that  you  should  be  less  discerning  than  critics  who  are  strangers  to  me. 

But  no,  you  will  not  like  my  future  books.  I  have  been  waiting  until  my 
position  with  the  publishers  enabled  me  to  write  with  freedom.  Even  you 
must  recognize  that  hypocrisy  in  literature,  however  mild,  is  not  admirable. 
My  part  is  with  the  men  &  women  who  are  clearing  the  ground  of  systems 
that  have  had  their  day  &  have  crumbled  into  obstructive  ruin.  To  those  who 
live  in  quiet  corners  of  the  earth,  where  those  systems  still  seem  solid  edifices, 


336 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


&  who  know  nothing  of  the  true  state  of  things  in  the  greater  part  of  the 
world,  we  seem  mere  reckless  destroyers.  This  is  an  inevitable  misconception. 
Short  of  ceasing  altogether  to  write,  I  have  no  choice  but  to  present  myself 
before  your  imagination  in  this  distorted  fashion. 

To  be  sure,  the  mistake  is  for  you  to  read  my  books  without  at  the  same 
time  reading  other  books  of  the  day.  Therefore  I  seem  to  you  isolated. 

Well  now,  let  me  know  as  soon  as  you  can  the  exact  date  on  which  you 
will  be  ready  to  come  here.  I  think  it  would  be  well  if  that  could  be  a  Monday, 
but  that  may  not  be  possible.  You  will  soon  know,  I  suppose. 

I  have  not  heard  from  Alg.  at  his  new  abode  yet.  I  hope  they  are  com- 
fortable. It  is  at  all  events  extremely  cheap. 

I  am  working  from  morning  to  night ;  a  walk  round  the  park  at  mid-day. 
Shall  be  very  glad  of  a  rest  before  long. 

I  suppose  you  have  definitely  taken  the  new  house?  It  seems  to  me  ad- 
mirable in  every  way. 

With  much  love,  yours,  dear  Nelly, 
George 

Yes,  we  will  speak  of  any  points  you  wish  to  touch  on,  when  we  meet. 

On  second  thoughts  I  will  enclose  the  copy  of  a  letter  from  a  German 
authoress  to  Bertz,  which  the  latter  has  recently  sent  me.  Perhaps  you  will 
return  it  presently.  One  needs  this  kind  of  thing  to  help  one  in  face  of  diffi- 
culties. 

(To  be  continued.) 


A  Loyalist  In  Spite  Of  Himself 


HISTORIANS  estimate  that  about  one-third  of  the  Colonists  were 
on  the  side  of  the  British  during  the  Revolutionary  War.  In  Massa- 
chusetts the  proportion  of  the  Loyalists  was  perhaps  smaller,  whereas 
in  New  York  it  outweighed  that  of  the  Patriots  and  kept  an  even  balance 
in  several  other  states.  But  everywhere  there  were,  in  addition,  people 
who  did  not  wish  to  take  definite  sides,  and  whose  position  became  more 
or  less  determined  by  circumstances.  Such  seems  to  have  been  the  case 
of  John  Amory,  a  prominent  merchant  in  Boston,  who,  his  property  con- 
fiscated, was  sent  into  banishment  and  was  allowed  to  return  only  after 
the  conclusion  of  peace.  A  Loyalist  in  spite  of  himself,  on  February  12, 
1788  Amory  wrote  a  long  letter  to  James  Lovell,  Congressman  from  Bos- 
ton and  an  influential  member  of  the  Committee  for  Foreign  Affairs,  re- 
counting his  story  and  asking  help. 

John  Amory  was  the  youngest  of  the  three  sons  of  Thomas  Amory, 
a  native  of  Limerick,  who  settled  in  Boston  in  1721.  The  elder  Amory 
must  have  been  a  considerable  person,  since  a  portrait  of  him  exists  painted 
by  John  Singleton  Copley  after  an  original  that  had  been  attributed  to 
Sir  Godfrey  Kneller.  John  himself  was  married  in  1757  to  Katharine,  the 
daughter  of  Rufus  Greene.  In  his  younger  years  he  counted  for  a  Patriot, 
for  in  1760  he  was  one  of  the  fifty-eight  memorialists  who  took  a  stand 
against  the  officers  of  the  Crown.  There  are  no  traces  of  later  public  ac- 
tivities on  his  part.  John  Amory  was  a  good  family  man,  who  by  the  time 
of  Lexington  had  no  less  than  six  sons  and  four  daughters.  He  too  be- 
came a  substantial  citizen,  as  Copley's  portraits  of  him  and  his  wife  testify. 

The  cause  of  his  trouble  was  the  trip  which  he  made  to  England 
within  a  month  of  the  battle  of  Lexington  —  although,  as  he  insists  to 
James  Lovell,  he  had  determined  on  the  voyage  before  that  event.  He 
left  behind  in  Boston  all  his  belongings  as  well  as  his  ten  children.  Far 
from  wanting  to  run  away  from  the  war,  he  states,  he  wished  to  return 
as  soon  as  possible.  He  goes  on  saying  that  in  the  summer  of  1776  they 
engaged  passage  for  America,  but  his  wife's  illness  prevented  them  from 
traveling;  and  that  soon  after  her  death  in  April  1777,  he  came  back  alone. 

After  a  short  stay  in  New  York  and  Newport,  where  he  visited  Gen- 
eral Howe  and  General  Pigot  (the  latter  was  the  British  commander  at 
Bunker  Hill),  Amory  landed  in  Boston,  where  he  v/as  promptly  hauled 
before  the  Committee  of  Inspection.  At  the  hearing  he  acknowledged 
that  in  New  York  he  had  taken  the  Oath  of  Allegiance  to  the  British; 
and  while  he  was  willing  to  take  the  Oath  of  Allegiance  to  the  States,  he 
could  not  consent  to  bear  arms  against  the  King  of  England.  The  Boston 
Court  took  no  chances  with  those  suspected  of  treachery;  it  resolved  to 
send  Amory  to  Providence,  where  General  Spencer  had  command  of  the 
26  337 


338 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Revolutionary  Army,  and  from  there  to  transfer  him  to  Newport,  held  by 
General  Pigot.  Indeed,  Amory's  name  was  on  the  list  appended  to  the 
Banishment  Act  of  Massachusetts,  passed  in  September  1778,  forbidding 
the  return  of  the  exiles  under  the  "pains  of  death  without  benefit  of 
clergy";  and  the  later  Confiscation  Act,  passed  in  April  1779,  was  also 
applied  against  him. 

Amory's  letter  to  Lovell  is  worth  printing  in  full.  Apart  from  the 
vicissitudes  of  an  individual,  it  shows  the  temper  of  the  time: 

Providence  feby.  12.  1778 

As  I  cannot  believe,  that  the  prejudice  which  Party  Warmth  commonly 
creates  in  little  minds,  has  so  far  effected  yours,  as  to  make  you  forget  an 
old  acquaintance,  I  must  still  address  you  as  my  friend,  and  will  make  no 
apology  for  writing  you  on  a  Subject,  the  most  interesting  to  me.  It  is  prob- 
able that  before  you  may  receive  this,  you  will  have  heard  of  my  going  to 
Boston,  my  being  rejected  by  my  countrymen  &  sent  back  an  Exile,  to  the 
place  from  whence  I  came.  As  the  Circumstances  of  this  matter  may  be 
misrepresented,  I  take  the  freedom  to  relate  to  you  the  whole  of  my  conduct 
since  my  leaving  home,  not  doubting  your  readiness  to  do  all  the  justice  to 
my  character  which  truth  may  call  for. 

Prior  to  the  19th  April  1775,  I  had  determined  on  a  Voyage  to  England 
&  about  a  week  after  that  period,  engaged  a  passage  for  myself  and  wife, 
on  board  Capt.  Callahan  for  London,  leaving  behind  me  all  my  effects  and 
a  family  of  ten  children.  Upon  my  arrival  there,  finding  the  troubles  in 
America  not  subsided,  as  I  had  hoped,  I  determined  on  returning  home  as 
soon  as  possible,  but  no  convenient  opportunity  offr'd  by  which  my  Wife 
could  come,  'till  the  Summer  1776,  when  I  engaged  a  passage,  but  unhap- 
pily at  that  time,  she  was  taken  ill,  &  languished  till  the  next  April,  when 
she  died.  I  then  took  passage  for  New  York,  in  my  way  home,  where  I  ar- 
rived in  July  last.  Immediately  on  my  going  on  shore,  I  was  told  that  it 
was  expected  that  the  Passangers  should  wait  on  the  Mayor,  to  give  in 
their  names.  &  Soon  after  passing  with  a  friend  by  the  Mayor's  Office,  he 
proposed  I  should  step  in  there,  which  I  did,  when  to  the  surprise  of  my 
friend  as  well  as  myself,  after  giving  in  my  name,  the  Oath  of  Allegiance 
was  tender'd  me,  which,  being  thus  circumstanced  I  took.  After  tarrying  at 
Xew  York,  a  month  or  two  with  Brother  Taylor,  I  went  to  Newport  and 
immediately  on  my  arrival,  apply'd  to  General  Pigot,  for  leave  to  go  to  my 
family,  but  was  told  that  as  I  left  New  York  with  that  intent,  I  ought  to 
have  got  leave  of  General  Clinton,  and  advised  me  to  write  to  him  for  that 
purpose,  which  1  did  but  not  having  any  answer,  after  having  spent  two 
months  at  Newport,  I  went  back  to  New  York,  when  hearing  that  Lord 
Howe  was  going  to  Newport,  I  returned  back  there,  and  obtaining  leave,  I  em- 
barked in  a  flag  going  to  Howland's  Ferry,  when  we  arriv'd  the  next  day 
&  having  had  leave  from  the  Council  at  Providence,  I  landed,  &  with  the 
permission  of  Coll.  Hawkins,  the  Commanding  Officer  there,  I  proceeded 
to  Boston  &  got  there  on  Wednesday  the  28th  of  Jany.  Immediately  on  my 
getting  to  town  1  made  my  arrival  known  to  the  president  of  the  Council, 


A  LOYALIST  IN  SPITE  OF  HIMSELF 


339 


and  the  next  day  was  called  first  before  the  Committee  of  Inspection,  then 
before  the  House  of  Representatives,  and  afterwards  before  a  Committee  of 
both  Houses,  and  was  questioned. 

Whether  I  had  been  Addresser  to  Govr.  Hutchinson  or  General  Gage? 

Whether  I  had  since  my  absence,  receiv'd  any  favor  or  support  from  the 
Government  of  Great  Britain? 

Whether  I  had  since  my  leaving-  Boston,  been  concerned  in  the  importa- 
tion of  any  goods  into  New  York  or  Newport? 

To  which  questions  I  answer'd  in  the  negative.  I  was  then  ask'd  if  I  had 
not  brought  a  letter  to  Lord  Howe  —  to  which  I  answer'd  that  having  had  a 
long  correspondence  in  the  mercantile  way,  with  Mr.  Mark  Huish  of  Not- 
ingham,  who  was  honor'd  with  his  Lordships  friendship,  I  brought  a  Letter 
from  him,  mentioning  me  as  his  friend  and  desiring  in  case  I  should  ask  any 
favor  of  him,  not  inconsistent  with  his  Office,  he  would  grant  it  to  me.  I 
took  this  Letter,  because  I  expected  to  have  to  ask  his  Lordship's  permis- 
sion to  return  home.  After  this  I  was  ask'd,  Whether  I  had  taken  an  Oath 
of  Allegiance  to  the  King  of  Great  Britain?  To  which  I  answer'd  that  I  had, 
&  related  the  Circumstances  of  my  taking  it.  Upon  which  I  was  ask'd, 
whether  I  would  renounce  that  Oath,  and  take  an  Oath  of  Allegience  to  the 
States.  I  answer'd  that  I  was  ready  to  take  an  Oath  or  give  any  Security  for 
my  peaceable  behavior,  to  submit  to  all  Laws  &  pay  every  tax  or  fine  that 
might  be  imposed  upon  me,  &  that  I  should  hold  myself  bound,  both  in 
honor  &  conscience,  not  to  machinate  or  conspire  against  a  State,  which 
should  receive  me  into  its  protection,  but  that  I  could  not  with  a  quiet  con- 
science, let  the  consequence  be  what  it  might,  take  an  Oath  that  I  would 
bear  Arms  against  the  King  of  Great  Britain,  to  whom  I  had  already 
sworn  Allegiance.  I  then  prayed,  that  I  might  be  suffer'd  to  remain  with  my 
numerous  family  of  Children,  now  deprived  of  their  mother  —  but  I  was 
told  that  unless  I  would  swear  that  I  would  bear  Arms,  I  must  not  expect 
to  be  suffer'd  to  stay.  The  Court  then  passed  a  Resolve,  that  I  should  be 
immediately  sent  to  General  Spencer  at  Providence,  with  a  desire  that  he 
would  send  me  back  to  Newport.  Thus  my  friend,  am  I  going  an  Exile  into 
a  Country  where  I  have  nothing  to  support  me,  banished  from  my  Children 
&  friends  whom  I  may  never  see  again. 

Since  my  coming  to  this  place,  I  have  heard  that  Mr.  Russel,  who  lives 
in  my  house,  has  been  forbid  to  pay  me  any  more  rent,  from  which  I  appre- 
hend my  Estate  is  to  be  forfeited.  I  will  not  comment  on  this  treatment,  I 
am  sure,  your  own  feelings  will  suggest  all  I  could  say.  Should  it  be  in  your 
power  to  point  out  any  way,  by  which  I  might  be  restored  to  my  family,  I 
will  make  no  doubt  of  your  readiness  to  do  it.  Any  thing  you  may  write  to 
Brother  Jonathan  or  Brother  Payne  will  find  its  way  to  me.  If  you  think  a 
Memoriall  to  the  Congress,  founded  on  the  relation  I  have  given  will  an- 
swer a  good  purpose,  I  should  esteem  it  a  favor  if  you  would  put  one  in, 
in  my  name. 

I  am  my  friend,  with  Affection 

Your 
John  Amory 


340 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


We  may  have  an  interesting  picture  of  the  lives  of  the  Amorys  in 
England  through  the  diary  of  Mrs.  Amory,  privately  printed  in  Boston 
in  1923.  Mrs.  Amory  was  no  talkative  woman ;  most  of  her  entries  briefly 
record  the  names  of  those  with  whom  they  breakfasted,  went  to  chapel, 
drank  tea,  and  had  dinner.  But  it  is  a  telling  list  of  names  —  the  Amorys 
lived  entirely  within  the  circle  of  the  Loyalist  refugees.  More  than  half 
of  the  members  of  the  New  England  Club,  formed  on  February  1,  1776 
and  holding  its  weekly  meetings  at  the  Adelphi  Tavern  in  London,  were 
constant  visitors  in  their  house  —  as  John  Amory  himself  was  an  original 
member  of  the  Club. 

The  diary  reveals  also  their  cultural  interests.  Once  in  a  while  the  Bos- 
tonians  went  to  Drury  Lane,  where  they  saw  Othello;  they  also  enjoyed 
Burgoyne's  Zaro,  about  the  time  it  was  played  in  Faneuil  Hall  in  Boston; 
they  did  sightseeing  at  Blenheim  House,  and  other  great  places;  visited 
Oxford,  with  its  colleges  and  libraries;  went  through  Canterbury,  and 
spent  an  hour  in  the  Cathedral.  In  the  spring  of  1776  the  Amorys  took 
a  trip  to  France,  staying  there  through  April  and  May,  marvelling  at  the 
many  palaces  and  churches.  One  night  they  saw  Moliere's  L'Avare.  "I 
was  pleas'd  with  the  dancing,"  Mrs.  Amory  noted,  "but  tired  out  with 
the  Play  as  I  could  not  understand  one  word." 

It  was  on  August  29,  back  in  London,  that  she  first  recorded  her  ill- 
ness; and  from  then  on,  much  of  the  time,  she  was  "very  slow  and  week" 
with  recurring  fevers.  Her  last  note,  on  March  7,  1777,  states  that  they 
were  to  London  "to  prepare  for  our  Voyage  —  having  taken  our  passages 
on  the  Ceres."  The  rest  was  added  in  her  husband's  hand:  "Soon  after 
this  time,  she  grew  so  much  worse,  that  we  were  oblig'd  to  lay  aside  all 
thoughts  of  going  out,  &  continued  to  decline  till  nth  April  when  it 
pleased  God  to  take  her  from  me,  I  trust,  to  the  Mansions  of  the  Blessed." 

It  must  have  taken  no  little  time  for  John  Amory  to  re-establish  him- 
self after  his  final  return  to  Boston  in  1783.  The  Boston  City  Directory 
of  1796  (none  were  published  in  the  preceding  seven  years)  was  the  first 
to  mention  him.  The  last  was  that  of  1798,  in  which  year  he  was  living 
with  his  son  John  Jr.  on  Newbury  Street. 

zoltAn  haraszti 


Exhibitions  in  the  Print  Department 


Wood-Engravings  by  Asa  Cheffetz 

HEN  wood-engraving  called  for  a  faithful  transcript  of  another  artist's 
work,  usually  for  reproduction  in  magazines  or  book  illustration,  the 
method  had  to  be  expressive  of  the  manner  and  intent  of  the  original  in  texture, 
tone,  and  technique.  John  G.  Smithwick  and  Timothy  Cole  were  instrumental 
in  founding  what  was  then  known  as  the  New  School  of  Wood-Engraving. 
They  were  forerunners  of  a  long  list  of  able  and  accomplished  engravers, 
whose  works  are  now  collectors'  items.  These  artists  had  little  to  think  about 
other  than  technique,  for  the  difficulties  of  color  value  and  drawing  were  con- 
tained in  the  original  from  which  the  engraving  was  made.  Pure  line  was  their 
dominating  purpose.  Cross-hatch  and  stipple  were  regarded  as  a  misuse  of  the 
medium  until  introduced  by  Timothy  Cole  late  in  his  work. 

With  the  general  use  of  mechanical  means  of  reproduction  at  the  turn 
of  the  century,  wood-engraving  was  little  practiced  until  quite  recently.  A  few 
artists  realized  that  it  could  be  employed  as  a  creative  and  interpretive  medium 
also;  that  with  its  great  possibilities  it  could  take  its  place  beside  etching, 
copper-engraving,  and  lithography.  Now  that  wood-engraving  is  no  longer 
used  for  reproduction  and  has  come  into  its  own  as  an  original  artistic  expres- 
sion, its  excellence  lies  primarily  in  the  personal  employment  of  the  artist's 
resources.  The  modern  method  recognizes  no  limitations,  and  the  artist  works 
with  utter  freedom.  The  consideration  accorded  to  line  is  the  same  as  in  any 
other  of  the  graphic  arts.  Bold  lines  give  sparkle  and  brilliance,  and  fine  ones 
give  half-tone  and  warmth. 

Enough  time  has  elapsed  since  the  rebirth  of  wood-engraving  as  a  fine 
art  to  accept  it  as  belonging  in  the  same  category  as  other  fields  of  creative 
art.  Forceful  and  permanent  results  testify  that  it  has  not  only  come  to  stay 
but  will  develop  as  time  goes  on.  Prominent  among  the  names  who  have  con- 
tributed to  the  recent  development  of  wood-engraving  is  Asa  Cheffetz,  ex- 
amples of  whose  work  have  been  chosen  for  the  November  exhibition. 

Cheffetz  was  born  in  Buffalo,  New  York,  on  August  16,  1897.  He  is  self- 
taught  in  wood-engraving;  he  had,  however,  an  excellent  foundation  in  draw- 
ing and  painting  before  he  turned  his  attention  to  engraving  as  a  life's  work. 
Matters  of  technique  present  no  hard  and  fast  rules  to  him,  as  he  has  discov- 
ered that  there  are  variations  of  lines  in  nature.  His  lines  are  tributary  to  his 
subject,  and  his  use  of  them  depends  upon  the  mood  in  rendering  a  particular 
effect.  To  what  extent  he  is  reliant  on  technique  can  be  studied  in  this  selection 
of  his  work.  One  is  not  conscious  of  bondage  either  to  the  wood  or  graver, 
but  rather  of  the  liberty  the  artist  takes  in  interpreting  nature.  It  is  interesting 
to  consider  the  carrying  quality  of  these  prints.  When  seen  from  a  little  dis- 
tance, the  fine  arrangement  of  lines  produces  the  vital  moment  of  the  artist's 
thought.  The  contours  of  the  clouds,  distance,  middle  distance,  and  foreground 
become  well-formed  masses  of  color  value  and  atmosphere. 

It  is  to  Cheffetz's  accomplished  series  of  New  England  subjects,  particu- 
larly of  Vermont,  that  he  owes  his  finest  achievements.  Losing  himself  com- 

341 


342 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


pletely,  he  captures  the  real  character  of  the  picturesque,  rolling  country  sil- 
houetted against  broad  expanses  of  calm  or  clouded  skies.  "As  regards  the 
major  portion  of  my  subject  matter,''  he  writes,  "for  years  I  have  had  an  abid- 
ing affection  for,  and  sympathy  with  the  Vermont  scene,  with  the  rugged 
dignity  of  its  hills,  its  farmlands  and  farmhouses."  Taking  the  exhibition  as  a 
whole,  one  recognizes  at  once  that  Cheffetz  has  rediscovered  for  himself  the 
full  artistic  possibilities  in  each  new  effort.  His  blocks,  with  their  change  from 
broad  sweeping  lines  to  short  staccato  strokes  and  even  stipple,  produce  amaz- 
ing renditions  of  texture  in  a  newly  mown  field,  ploughed  earth,  or  thickly 
wooded  areas. 

Perhaps  in  no  other  medium  does  indifferent  work  reveal  itself  so  com- 
pletely. Power  to  produce  vivid  contrasts  of  light  and  shade,  manual  dexterity, 
and  freedom  of  touch  are  not  enough  without  genuine  artistic  perception.  That 
Cheffetz  possesses  all  the  necessary  qualities  of  the  creative  artist  is  demon- 
strated in  "Up  North."  Such  subjects  win  our  admiration  by  the  originality 
of  composition  and  method  of  expression.  "Spring  Rains,"  unlike  most  of 
Cheffetz's  prints  so  full  of  vibrant  light,  is  more  tonal  with  a  leaden  sky,  the 
whole  enveloped  in  rain.  The  effect  is  of  a  gloomy  day  with  high  wind,  almost 
magical  in  its  effect.  Quite  different  is  "Summertide,  Vermont,"  which  pro- 
duces the  sparkle  and  vivacity  of  midday.  Contrast  this  with  the  tranquil 
"Peaceful  Valley,"  with  stormy  sky  and  mysterious  light  bathing  the  whole. 
The  long  parallel  lines  of  the  sky  and  clouds  are  offset  by  small  characteristic 
forms  representing  tree  tops  on  the  distance  hills.  Then  compare  the  stipple 
in  the  trees  of  the  middle  distance  and  the  short  staccato  notes  in  the  fore- 
ground. In  "Late  Afternoon"  there  is  strong  individualization  in  treatment 
of  tone  and  color.  "Pastoral"  was  a  real  inspiration.  The  troubled  sky,  distant 
mountains,  and  middle  landscape,  with  a  cool  light  enveloping  the  scene  is 
typical  of  the  elevated  environs  of  Vermont.  The  reflections  in  the  water  of 
the  foreground  act  as  a  perfect  balance  to  the  composition. 

Cheffetz  seems  to  blaze  a  new  trail  in  many  of  the  engravings  included 
in  the  exhibition.  Prints  like  "Break  of  Day,"  "Abandoned  Farmhouse,"  "Down 
Montgomery  Way,"  "Drifting  Shadows,"  "May  Sunlight,"  and  "Noon  Shad- 
ows" should  be  especially  studied.  Each  is  an  individual  subject  with  colorful 
possibilities.  Vermont,  with  its  beauty  and  unique  character,  seems  perfectly 
suited  to  Cheffetz's  temperament. 

No  success  can  be  attained  by  the  half-trained  artist  or  by  an  inferior 
hand  in  this  difficult  medium.  How  well-balanced  the  artist's  talent  is,  may 
be  measured  by  the  recognition  accorded  his  work  by  important  museums  and 
libraries.  Asa  Cheffetz  has  received  numerous  prizes  and  awards  from  the 
leading  print  societies  of  America;  and  representation  in  the  Honolulu  Acade- 
my of  Fine  Arts  and  the  Art  Collection  of  the  Polish  Government  show  that 
his  reputation  has  reached  beyond  the  limitation  of  our  shores. 

ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 


The  Bibliography  of  American  Newspapers 


DR.  CLARENCE  S.  BRIGHAM, 
Director  of  the  American  Anti- 
quarian Society,  has  completed  his  in- 
valuable work,  the  History  and  Biblio- 
graphy of  American  Newspapers,  i6go- 
1820,  published  by  the  Society  in  two 
large  volumes,  numbering  more  than 
fifteen  hundred  pages.  The  undertaking 
grew  out  of  a  suggestion  made  in  191 1 
by  William  MacDonald,  at  one  time 
professor  of  history  at  Brown  Univer- 
sity, who  deplored  that  the  importance 
of  newspapers  as  historical  sources  had 
been  "if  not  underestimated,  at  least 
scantily  recognized,  by  historians."  Dr. 
Brigham  believes  that  the  same  mis- 
take is  still  made  by  libraries :  "Since 
they  are  difficult  to  acquire  and  since 
they  take  up  considerable  shelf  room, 
they  are  frequently  rejected  in  favor  of 
source  material  not  nearly  so  useful." 

The  author  began  on  his  monumen- 
tal task  in  1913  and  made  numerous 
journeys,  exploring  the  libraries  of  about 
four  hundred  towns  and  cities  east  of 
the  Mississippi.  He  published  the  re- 
sults in  instalments  in  the  Proceedings 
of  the  American  Antiquarian  Society 
till  1927.  After  that  time  began  the  meti- 
culous revision,  the  re-examination  of 
newspaper  files,  and  the  discovery  of 
new  ones.  The  work,  as  it  now  stands, 
is  arranged  alphabetically  by  states.  It 
gives  a  detailed  history  of  each  paper, 
recording  changes  of  title  and  supplying 
the  full  names  of  editors  and  proprie- 
tors. Then  follow  the  holdings  of  the 
various  libraries,  listed  in  the  order  of 
importance,  the  earlier  files  generally 
given  first. 

Dr.  Brigham  presents  some  illumi- 
nating statistics.  In  the  period  covered 
by  the  bibliography,  2120  different 
newspapers  were  published,  of  which 
447  belonged  to  the  New  England 
states.  New  York  had  the  largest  num- 
ber —  183.  The  next  largest  number, 
107,  belonged  to  Philadelphia,  and  the 
third,  73,  to  Boston.  The  six  greatest 
newspaper  collections  are  those  of  the 
American  Antiquarian  Society,  the  Li- 
brary of  Congress,  Harvard,  the  New 
York  Historical  Society,  the  New  York 


Public  Library,  and  the  Wisconsin 
Historical  Society.  Newspapers  which 
are  known  to  have  existed  but  of  which 
no  copy  could  be  tracked  number  194, 
while  unique  issues  represent  196 
papers.  More  than  half  of  the  news- 
papers died  before  they  were  two  years 
old.  The  Pennsylvania  Gazette  had  the 
longest  life  —  eighty-seven  years;  the 
Maryland  Gazette,  seventy-five  years; 
and  the  Boston  News-Letter,  seventy- 
two  years.  It  is  noteworthy  that  all  but 
three  on  the  honor-list  of  longevity  were 
New  England  papers. 

If  the  Boston  Public  Library  does 
not  rank  among  the  holders  of  the 
largest  newspaper  collections,  it  has 
nevertheless  a  fair  representation  of 
New  England  papers  and  certainly  a 
considerable  number  of  Boston  journals. 
The  Boston  News-Letter,  the  first  news- 
paper proper  printed  in  the  American 
colonies,  is  represented  in  the  Library 
by  a  scattered  but  rich  file.  Of  the 
Boston  Gazette  the  Library  has  an 
equally  large  file,  beginning  with  the 
week  of  April  25,  1720,  and  ending  with 
its  last  year  of  1798.  The  April  number 
gives  the  printer's  name  as  J.  Franklin, 
the  August  number  as  S.  Kneelaud.  The 
Nczv-England  Courant,  published  by 
James  Franklin,  was  established  on 
August  7,  1771,  but  the  first  issue  lo- 
cated is  no.  17,  for  November  27,  1721. 
James  Franklin  gave  frequent  offense 
to  the  General  Court,  which  suppressed 
the  paper  and  imprisoned  the  publisher. 
With  the  issue  of  February  II,  1723,  the 
paper  was  printed  under  the  name  of 
Benjamin  Franklin,  seventeen-year  old 
brother  of  the  publisher.  The  Library 
has  only  a  single  copy  of  the  news- 
paper. 

Among  other  early  Boston  papers  in 
the  Library  are  the  Boston  Chronicle, 
nearly  complete  from  1767  to  1770,  with 
its  varied  features,  and  rising  protests 
against  Parliament ;  the  lively  Conti- 
nental Journal,  ijjG-ij&j;  the  delight- 
ful, culture-conscious  American  Apollo; 
and  The  Idiot,  or,  Invisible  Rambler, 
181 7-19,  published  in  quarto  size  but 
containing  current  news.        M.  M. 


343 


Illustrators  of  Children's  Books 


THE  long-awaited  Illustrators  of 
Children's  Boohs  has  now  appeared, 
and  well  worth  the  waiting  it  is.  Com- 
piled by  such  experts  as  Bertha  E.  Ma- 
hony,  Louise  Payson  Latimer,  and 
Beulah  Folmsbec.  it  is  an  authoritative 
and  vital  study.  The  volume,  a  large 
quarto  of  over  five  hundred  pages,  has 
been  designed,  with  taste  and  ingenui- 
ty, by  Miss  Folmsbee,  and  beautifully 
printed  on  ivory-colored  paper,  with 
marginal  notes  in  a  second  color.  It  is 
fully  illustrated,  and  covers  two  cen- 
turies, from  1744  to  1945. 

The  compilers  have  divided  the  book 
into  four  parts.  The  first  and  largest  is 
devoted  to  "History  and  Development." 
and  contains  ten  articles  by  outstand- 
ing authorities.  The  smaller  half  of  the 
book  consists  of  the  second  part,  which 
includes  brief  biographies  of  over  three 
hundred  and  fifty  living  illustrators; 
of  the  third  part,  a  bibliography  of  il- 
lustrators and  their  works,  and  a  bibli- 
ography of  authors ;  and  of  a  fourth 
part,  an  appendix  of  "Sources"  and 
"Notes  and  References." 

Of  unusual  interest  and  importance 
is  the  initial  article  written  by  Anne 
Thaxter  Eaton,  nationally  known  edi- 
tor and  reviewer  of  children's  books. 
Her  "Illustrated  Books  for  Children 
before  1800"  discusses  the  subject  from 
the  early  tenth-century  Latin  school- 
books  and  later  horn-books  and  chap- 
books  to  John  Newbery.  "the  philan- 
thropic bookseller  of  St.  Paul's  Church- 
yard." After  this  beginning  in  the  art 
of  book  illustration  for  children,  Thom- 
as Bewick,  the  first  great  illustrator, 
appeared.  Thomas  Stothard,  John  Flax- 
man,  and  others  followed,  until  the  cen- 
tury closed  with  a  blaze  of  glory  in  the 
work  of  William  Blake.  Jacqueline 
Overton  continues  the  history  with  a 
chapter  on  "Illustrators  of  the  Nine- 
teenth Century  in  England."  This  im- 
portant period  includes  such  masters 
as  George  Cruikshank,  to  whom  much 
attention  is  given  by  the  writer.  This 
was  the  era  of  the  many  popular  illus- 
trations for  the  novels  of  Dickens,  and 
for  the  famous  Tenniel  drawings  for 


Alice  in  Wonderland.  Miss  Overton  also 
treats  of  the  development  of  color,  es- 
pecially in  the  works  of  the  artist  Wal- 
ter Crane  and  the  printer  Edmund 
Evans.  The  drawings  of  Randolph 
Caldecott  and  Kate  Greenaway  began 
to  appear  at  this  time. 

American  illustration  has  been  handled 
with  genuine  appreciation  by  Miss  Ma- 
hony  and  Robert  Lawson,  who  have 
written  respectively  on  "Early  Ameri- 
can Illustrators"  and  "Howard  Pyle 
and  His  Times."  Maria  Cimino  has  pre- 
pared an  interesting  presentation  of 
"Foreign  Picture  Books  for  Children," 
noteworthy  because  of  the  influence  of 
foreign  picture  books  upon  American 
children's  books.  Helen  Gentry,  author 
and  editor,  analyzes  the  "Graphic  Pro- 
cesses in  Children's  Books."  The  devel- 
opment of  reproduction  from  the  early 
woodcut,  through  lithography,  to  the 
latest  four-color  half-tone  printing  have 
been  treated  briefly  and  well. 

A  valuable  contribution  has  been 
made  by  Philip  Hofer  on  the  "Illustra- 
tors of  Children's  Classics."  Mr.  Hofer, 
in  presenting  this  personal  selection  of 
illustrations,  points  out  that  children 
have  a  real  appreciation  of  literary  style 
and  have  done  their  own  preliminary 
singling  out  of  the  great  from  the  in- 
ferior. 

"Animated  Drawing"  by  Hellmut 
Lehmann-Haupt  is  particularly  apro- 
pos to  contemporary  life.  It  gives  a 
new  understanding  of  the  background 
and  growth  of  our  comic  books  and 
animated  cartoons.  May  Massee  has 
written  on  "Developments  of  the  Twen- 
tieth Century,"  dealing  with  the  Euro- 
pean and  American  illustrators  Arthur 
Rackham,  Willy  Pogany,  the  Peter- 
shams, and  many  other  familiar  names. 

In  "The  Book  Artist :  Yesterday  and 
Tomorrow"  Lynd  Ward  stresses  the 
heritage  of  the  American  illustrator 
from  the  earlier  periods  of  experimenta- 
tion and  the  traditions  of  Western 
Europe.  He  emphasizes  that,  because 
of  accident  of  geography  and  political 
currents,  America  has  become  the  stew- 
ard of  a  great  trust.  M.  C.  F. 


344 


Ten  Books 


Atlantic  Harvest.  Compiled  by  Ellery 
Sedgwick.  Little,  Brown.  1947.  682  pp. 
Following  close  upon  his  The  Happy 
Profession,  Mr.  Sedgwick,  for  thirty 
years  editor  of  the  Atlantic  Monthly,  has 
compiled  an  anthology  of  essays  and 
articles  selected  from  issues  covering 
three  generations.  To  choose  the  forty- 
seven  pieces  which  make  up  the  volume 
from  the  many  thousand  published 
during  that  time  was  no  easy  task.  Un- 
derstandably enough,  the  larger  part 
dates  from  the  period  of  Mr.  Sedg- 
wick's editorship ;  and  a  count  may  re- 
veal that  more  than  half  are  by  Ameri- 
cans and  the  rest,  with  few  exceptions, 
by  Englishmen.  Each  selection  is  pre- 
ceded by  a  note  extending  from  a  para- 
graph to  several  pages  - —  little  master- 
pieces of  apt  characterization ;  and  there 
is  a  general  introduction  which  could 
be  another  chapter  in  The  Happy  Pro- 
fession, one  of  the  most  enjoyable  books 
of  its  kind  for  many  years.  The  roster 
of  authors,  ranging  from  Mark  Twain, 
William  Tames,  and  Sarah  Orne  Jewett 
to  Jean  Cocteau,  Ernest  Hemingway, 
and  Bartolomeo  Vanzetti,  is  really  im- 
pressive. What  has  decided  the  editor 
in  his  choices?  "It  is  no  use  pretending," 
Mr.  Sedgwick  writes,  "that  all  the  forty- 
seven  contributions  are  protected  by 
style  from  the  ravages  of  Time"; 
yet  style  was  an  important  consider- 
ation. Originality  was  another,  and  the 
editor  believes  that  six  of  his  con- 
tributors "can  lay  fair  claim"  to  genius. 
However,  great  names  were  not  the 
main  attraction ;  nor  was  the  number 
of  appearances  in  the  magazine.  Gama- 
liel Bradford  had  published  no  less  than 
twenty-six  of  his  "psychographs"  in  the 
Atlantic,  and  Dallas  Lore  Sharp  nearly 
as  many  articles  on  nature,  yet  neither 
of  them  is  included.  Evidently  Mr.  Sedg- 
wick took  what  was  nearest  his  heart. 
He  edited  the  book  on  the  same  prin- 
ciple which  he  prescribes  for  editing  a 
magazine :  "If  one  thing  is  more  es- 
sential than  the  rest,  it  is  that  the  editor's 
shadow  should  rest  squarely  on  the 
magazine.  The  magazine  should  reflect 
not  always  his  opinions  but  invariably 
things  he  cares  about."  The  editor's 


shadow  is  on  this  volume;  and,  for  all 
its  diversity  and  wide  range  in  time, 
Atlantic  Harvest  has  unity  to  a  remark- 
able degree.  (Z.  PI.) 

From  Slavery  to  Freedom.  By  John 
Hope  Franklin.  Knopf.  1947.  622  pp. 
Mr.  Franklin,  a  professor  at  Howard 
University,  relates  in  detail  the  history 
of  the  American  Negroes,  with  chapters 
on  those  of  Canada  and  South  America 
as  well.  Beginning  with  an  account  of 
Negro  civilizations  in  Africa  —  the 
medieval  kingdoms  of  Ghana,  Songhay, 
etc.  —  he  traces  the  slave  trade  with 
Europe  from  its  origin  in  the  fifteenth 
centurv  through  the  American  Civil 
War.  In  the  early  eighteenth  century 
the  British  traders  imported  too  many 
slaves  into  the  Southern  colonies,  which 
led  to  increasingly  drastic  measures  for 
their  control.  The  Northern  colonies 
had  restricted  the  slave  importations. 
By  the  order  of  George  Washington, 
Negroes  were  at  first  excluded  from 
the  Revolutionary  Army;  however, 
when  large  numbers  ran  away  to  join 
the  British,  he  had  to  rescind  the  order, 
and  many  made  distinguished  records 
of  bravery.  After  the  war  many  anti- 
slavery  societies  were  formed,  and  the 
gradual  disappearance  of  slavery  seemed 
possible.  By  1790  Vermont  and  Massa- 
chusetts reported  no  slaves  at  all ;  how- 
ever, the  author  is  sure  only  of  Boston : 
"all  of  Boston's  761  Negroes  were  free." 
He  also  quotes  the  passage  condem- 
ning slave  trade  and  slavery,  which 
Jefferson  intended  to  include  in  the 
Declaration  of  Independence,  but  which 
the  Southern  delegation  refused  to  ac- 
cept. The  development  of  the  South  as 
a  cotton-growing  territory  found  a  new 
use  for  slave  labor.  In  1807  the  first 
Federal  laws  prohibiting  the  African 
slave  trade  were  passed,  but  went  un- 
enforced. Washington,  D.  C.  was  a  no- 
torious seat  of  domestic  slave  trade 
until  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  cen- 
tury !  Mr.  Franklin  discusses  at  length 
the  changing  political  affiliations  of  the 
Negroes  since  the  Civil  War,  also  giv- 
ing excellent  accounts  of  the  Negro 
churches  and  education.  (/.  D.  L.) 


27 


345 


346 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


End  of  a  Berlin  Diary.  By  William  L. 
Shirer.  Knopf.  1947.  369  pp. 
Tins  book  is  the  conclusion  of  the 
author's  well-known  Berlin  Diary.  In 
the  fall  of  1945  Mr.  Shirer  revisited  Ger- 
many and  had  access  to  a  good  part  of 
the  fourteen  hundred  tons  of  secret 
documents  that  the  Allies  had  captured 
intact.  Of  particular  interest  is  the  sworn 
statement  of  a  certain  Erich  Kempa,  ac- 
cording to  which  Hitler  committed  suicide 
by  shooting  himself  through  the  mouth. 
The  author  cites  an  item  from  the  Ger- 
man press  that  tells  of  the  testimony  of 
a  fifteen-year-old  boy,  son  of  a  former 
commander  of  a  concentration  camp: 
"For  my  birthday,  my  father  put  forty 
inmates  at  my  disposal  to  teach  me  how 
to  shoot.  I  took  shots  at  them  until  they 
were  all  lying  around  dead."  General 
Haider's  discussion  of  the  German  at- 
tack on  Russia  destroys  once  and  for 
all  the  Nazi  myth  that  Hitler  was  a  mili- 
tary genius.  There  is  a  detailed  account 
of  the  Nuremberg  trials.  Justice  Jack- 
son in  particular  is  lauded  for  his  efforts 
to  have  the  Nazi  culprits  summoned  to 
an  international  tribunal,  thereby,  help- 
ing to  establish  the  principle  that  a  war 
of  aggression  is  a  crime.  The  opinion 
of  American  economic  and  industrial 
experts  should  have  a  bearing  upon 
the  problem  of  Germany.  "German  in- 
dustry," they  stated,  "is  virtually  in- 
tact .  .  .  Germany  could  in  five  years 
make  herself  stronger  industrially  than 
she  was  when  she  marched  off  to  war 
in  1939."  (R.  F.  N.) 

Operation  Victory.  By  Major-General 
Sir  Francis  de  Guingand.  Scribner. 
1947.  488  pp. 

The  author,  Chief-of-Staff  for  Field 
Marshall  Montgomery  from  the  time 
the  latter  took  over  control  of  the  Eighth 
Army  until  the  German  surrender,  has 
written  an  account  of  the  events  of  the 
war  which  came  under  his  observation. 
There  is  a  discussion  of  the  Greek  cam- 
paign, which  de  Guingand  felt  was 
doomed  to  failure  from  the  start ;  and 
there  is  an  exciting  description  of  the 
battle  of  El  Alamein.  However,  the 
chapter  holding  the  most  interest  is 
that  in  which  the  character  and  abilities 
of  Montgomery  are  analysed.  De  Guin- 
gand has  a  very  high  opinion  of  his 
chief,  and  answers,  among  others,  In- 


gersoll's  criticisms  of  his  conduct  of  the 
battle  around  Caen.  The  British  were 
fully  appreciative  of  the  difficulties  of 
the  Bocage  country,  and  no  one  prom- 
ised to  take  the  city  by  a  certain  day. 
Differences  of  opinion  did  occur  be- 
tween Eisenhower  and  Montgomery, 
but  no  more  than  natural  in  planning  a 
campaign.  The  book  is  enlivened  by 
thumbnail  sketches  of  the  German 
officers  encountered  during  the  surrender. 
It  also  pays  tribute  to  the  qualities  of 
the  American  armies.  (5".  W.  F.) 

We  Were  Interrupted.  By  Burton  Ras- 
coe.  Doubleday.  1947.  342  pp. 
In  this  sequel  to  his  Before  I  Forget,  the 
author  —  a  well-known  book  reviewer, 
dramatic  critic,  and  editor  —  has  gathered 
together  his  reminiscences  of  the  twenties. 
In  editorial  offices,  restaurants,  speak- 
easies, at  parties  and  interviews,  Mr. 
Rascoe  met  innumerable  writers,  artists, 
and  men-about-town.  From  Cabell  and 
Mencken  to  Hemingway  and  Miss  Lowell, 
from  Texas  Guinan  to  Gilda  Gray, 
there  are  literally  hundreds  of  names, 
not  counting  the  visiting  celebrities, 
such  as  Somerset  Maugham,  Joseph 
Conrad,  James  Stephens,  and  others. 
Mr.  Rascoe  was  still  in  college  when  he 
met  John  Galsworthy.  Yet  the  book  is 
not  mere  gossip ;  in  a  simple,  unpre- 
tentious way,  the  author  contributes 
bits  of  information  and  sound  criticism. 
There  is  nothing  revelatory  about  any 
of  the  men  and  women,  yet  the  stories 
and  observations  have  an  intimate  touch. 
Most  people  look  back  on  the  twenties 
as  a  wild  era,  when  the  disillusionment 
following  the  war  found  expression  in 
recklessness.  Mr.  Rascoe  is  more  toler- 
ant in  his  retrospection,  and  reminds 
us  that  during  that  same  decade  the 
first  old-age  pension  laws  were  passed 
and  labor  made  tremendous  gains.  He 
frankly  admits  that  he  had  "fun."  He 
certainly  had  plenty  of  gusto  and  en- 
thusiasm —  useful  qualities  in  a  liter- 
ary journalist.  (Z.  H.) 

A  House  in  Chicago.  By  Olivia  Howard 
Dunbar.  Univ.  of  Chicago.  1947.  288  pp. 
Poetry  had  already  become  a  dominant 
interest  in  the  life  of  Harriet  Tilden 
when,  in  1899,  she  met  William  Vaughn 
Moody,  then  a  professor  of  English  at 
the  University  of  Chicago  and  rapidly 


TEN  BOOKS 


347 


adding  to  his  reputation  with  The  Firc- 
Bringer  and  his  play  The  Great  Divide. 
Emerging  from  the  wreck  of  an  un- 
fortunate marriage,  she  had  seen  her 
family's  fortune  evaporate,  had  taught 
in  the  Chicago  public  schools,  had 
launched  a  successful  business  venture, 
and  was  dispensing  lavish  hospitality 
at  her  house  on  Groveland  Avenue  by 
the  time  that  Moody  appeared  among 
her  guests.  It  was  his  death  in  1910, 
following  the  brief  interval  of  their 
marriage,  which  served  to  weld  her  pre- 
vious enthusiasms  into  a  single  vocation. 
Henceforth,  she  was  to  be  a  benefac- 
tress of  poets,  and  the  story  of  what  she 
was  able  to  do  is  a  valuable  contribution 
to  American  literary  history.  Among 
the  signatures  to  the  letters  which 
form  the  larger  part  of  the  volume  are 
the  names  of  Tagore,  Edwin  Arling- 
ton Robinson,  V achel  Lindsay,  John 
Masefield,  James  Stephens,  and  many 
others.  Her  death  in  1932,  at  the  age 
of  seventy-five,  was  mourned  by  in- 
numerable friends.  The  author,  who  has 
herself  known  many  of  the  group  sur- 
rounding Mrs.  Moody,  has  written  her 
book  with  a  singular  delicacy.  (C.  H.) 

Men  of  Law.  By  William  Seagle.  Mac- 
millan.  1947.  355  pp. 
In  fifteen  chapters,  each  devoted  to 
the  work  of  a  great  jurist,  the  author 
describes  the  growth  of  law.  He  begins 
with  Hammurabi,  king  of  Babylon, 
whose  code  provided  the  first  surviv- 
ing written  statement  of  laws ;  then, 
skipping  Moses,  he  considers  Solon  of 
Athens ;  anatyses  the  values  of  Roman 
law  as  they  appear  in  Gaius's  Institutes 
and  in  Justinian's  great  code ;  again 
jumping  over  the  canon  law  of  the  Mid- 
dle Ages,  he  discusses,  through  Coke 
and  Blackstone,  the  development  of 
common  law  in  England ;  has  chapters 
on  Beccaria's  contribution  to  criminology 
and  on  that  of  Grotius  to  international 
law;  and  he  ends  up  with  John  Mar- 
shall, "the  demiurge  of  judicial  review," 
and  Oliver  Wendell  Holmes,  "the  per- 
fect constitutional  censor."  The  author 
is  interested  primarily  in  the  chang- 
ing significance  of  law.  Whereas  early 
peoples  regarded  it  as  a  fixed  set  of 
rules  governing  daily  life,  the  Eliza- 
bethans expanded  its  scope  to  include 
equity.  The  book  concludes  by  posing 


the  question  of  the  future  of  law.  Mr. 
Seagle  envisages  it  as  a  "scheme  of  re- 
conciling interests  in  accordance  with 
the  dictates  of  some  social  end" ;  but  as 
long  as  individuals  cannot  always  be 
forced  to  respect  it,  nations  remain 
dangerously  free.  (T,  C.) 

The  Puritan  Oligarchy.  By  Thomas  Jef- 
ferson Wertenbaker.  Scribner.  1947. 
359  pp. 

The  author,  professor  of  history  at 
Princeton,  follows  up  his  The  Middle 
Colonics  and  The  Old  South  with  this 
study  of  the  "Massachusetts  Bible  State." 
In  it  he  attacks  "the  many  common 
misconceptions"  of  the  Puritan  experi- 
ment. The  title  suggests  his  point  of 
view :  the  Bay  Colony  is  a  striking  ex- 
ample of  oligarchical  rule  of  the  many 
by  the  few,  according  to  an  inflexible 
philosophy.  It  is  Mr.  Wertenbaker's  be- 
lief that  Plymouth  is  not  the  birthplace 
of  the  nation;  that  the  Puritans  did  not 
come  to  America  as  champions  of  re- 
ligious freedom  ;  and  that,  in  short,  they 
were  not  the  founders  of  American  de- 
mocracy. After  a  preliminary  chapter 
on  the  English  background  of  New  Eng- 
land Congregationalism,  he  describes 
Puritan  civilization,  remarkable  for  the 
intolerance  of  its  religious  orthodoxy  and 
the  close  alliance  of  Church  and  State. 
Completing  the  surveys  are  chapters 
on  the  expression  of  the  Puritan  spirit 
in  art,  architecture,  literature,  and  music. 
Through  many  quotations  from  diaries 
and  sermons,  the  reader  gains  an  in- 
sight into  the  Puritan  mind  —  its  cre- 
ativity and  its  limits,  the  forces  which 
shaped  it,  and  those  against  which  it 
fought.  The  question  which  the  author 
poses  and  attempts  to  answer  is  that  of 
the  reasons  for  the  fall  of  the  oligarchy. 
He  considers  the  forces  of  disintegration 
— -  the  development  of  commerce  and 
agriculture,  the  advancement  of  science 
and  the  growth  of  rationalism,  the  al- 
tered political  situation ;  and  he  con- 
cludes that  the  germs  of  failure  were 
inherent  in  the  Bible  State  from  its  in- 
ception. In  man's  desire  for  freedom 
and  his  hatred  of  restraint  lay  the  cause 
of  the  fall  of  the  Puritan  Old  Guard.  Re- 
ligious freedom  and  democracy  were 
furthered  only  by  the  contributions  of 
those  who  rebelled  against  the  Puritan 
oligarchy.  (M.  R.) 


348 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Literary  Sources  of  Art  History.  Edited 
by  Elizabeth  Gilmore  Hclt.  Princeton. 
1947-  555  PP- 

Contemporary  literary  sources  convey 
the  sense  of  the  development  of  arts 
more  forcefully  than  can  critical  studies 
of  a  later  period ;  however,  language 
barriers  and  inaccessibility  present  obsta- 
cles for  most  students.  Now  Miss  Holt, 
with  the  help  of  Dr.  Panofsky,  has  as- 
sembled translations  of  significant  ex- 
cerpts from  more  than  fifty  famous  es- 
says and  correspondences,  from  the 
tenth  century  to  the  nineteenth.  The 
book  thus  complements  Robert  Gold- 
water's  compilation  Artists  on  Art.  Widely 
diverse  viewpoints  and  subjects  have 
been  skilfully  welded,  by  arrangement 
and  editorial  comment,  into  coherent 
sequence,  from  a  paragraph  of  the  monk 
Raul  Glaber  on  cathedrals  to  Goethe's 
anticipation  of  the  principles  of  modern 
functional  architecture.  Ecclesiastical 
documents  provide  us  with  medieval 
opinions  on  art,  sometimes  with  St. 
Bernard's  dour  opposition,  or  Abbot 
Suger's  bubbling  enthusiasm.  The  well- 
known  Renaissance  texts  of  Alberti, 
Leonardo,  Michelangelo,  Diirer,  Vasari, 
etc.,  do  not  break  as  sharply  with  the 
medieval  manuals  of  Theophilus  and 
Cennini  as  might  be  expected ;  but  a 
drive  to  experiment  and  a  love  of  an- 
cient works  mark  the  impetus  of  the 
new  period.  Critics  seek  for  definitions 
and  categories  in  the  following  centuries. 
French  work  stems  from  the  Italian 
baroque ;  the  Germans  maintain  the  fresh 
literalness  of  Diirer;  Rubens's  varied 
activities  indicate  the  geographic  spread 
of  art ;  and  the  Spaniards  must  prove 
painting  an  honorable  profession  be- 
fore their  masters  are  recognized.  In 
the  eighteenth  century  Hogarth's  pre- 
cision and  Reynolds's  grand  manner, 
Diderot's  moral  convictions,  Winckel- 
mann's  popularization  of  the  antique 
pave  the  way  for  the  Romantic  period. 
In  the  sweep  of  art  history  ideas  of  one 
period  merge  into  the  next,  yet  the  in- 
trinsic qualities  of  each  stand  out  in 
the  writings  of  the  time.  (K.  D.) 

Abigail  Adams.   By  Janet  Whitney. 
Little.  Brown.  1947.  357  pp. 
Abigail  Adams,  wife  of  the  second  and 
mother  of  the  sixth  President,  was  a 
truly  remarkable  woman.  The  puritani- 


cal virtues  of  will,  devotion,  and  patri- 
otism she  had  abundantly ;  but  she  also 
possessed  an  uncommonly  strong  mind, 
fully  deserving  the  name  of  "Portia," 
as  her  husband  called  her.  It  is  her  let- 
ters, vivacious  and  shrewd,  that  best 
reveal  her  character.  Most  of  them 
were  written  to  John  Adams,  during 
the  latter's  absence  at  Congress  in 
Philadelphia,  and  then  as  American 
minister  in  France,  Holland,  and  Eng- 
land. Others  are  addressed  to  friends 
and  family,  during  the  four  years  she 
spent  with  her  husband  abroad  and 
during  the  years  when  she  lived  in 
Philadelphia  and  Washington  as  the 
wife  of  the  Vice-President  and  later  the 
President.  The  daughter  of  Parson 
Smith  of  Weymouth,  Abigail  Adams 
was  twenty  when  she  married  the  young 
lawyer  of  Braintree ;  and  in  their  long, 
happy  marriage  she  developed  into  the 
powerful  personality  she  was.  The  early 
letters  from  Ouincy  are  invaluable  records 
of  life  in  a  small  New  England  town 
during  the  Revolutionary  War,  with  all 
its  cares,  anxieties,  and  excitements; 
and  the  letters  from  France  and  Eng- 
land reflect  the  impact  of  Europe  upon 
the  American  mind  in  the  eighteenth 
century.  The  French  villages  Mrs.  Adams 
found  wretched,  and  she  thought  that 
Boston  was  as  superior  to  Paris  as  Lon- 
don was  to  Boston.  She  was  amazed  at 
the  manners  of  the  ladies  and  gentle- 
men, especially  at  those  of  Mme.  Hel- 
vetius,  who  flung  her  arms  around  Dr. 
Franklin  and  unashamedly  kissed  him 
in  company.  Her  delicacy  was  wounded 
by  the  ballet,  by  the  sight  of  "girls 
clothed  in  the  thinnest  of  silk  and  gauze," 
although  she  soon  found  pleasure  in 
the  show.  The  reception  at  St.  James's 
exasperated  her.  "Never  again  would 
I  set  my  foot  there  if  the  etiquette  of 
my  country  did  not  require  it!"  she 
wrote.  In  Paris,  Jefferson  was  a  favorite 
with  her,  but  she  relentlessly  turned 
against  him  when  he  —  as  she  thought 
from  personal  vindictiveness  —  dis- 
missed John  Quincy  Adams  from  his 
judgeship.  Miss  Whitney  has  used 
ample  quotations  from  the  letters,  in- 
cluding some  unpublished  material  in 
this  Library.  At  times  she  seems  to 
identify  herself  with  her  heroine  too 
much.  However,  this  is  a  good,  read- 
able, and  much-needed  book.  (Z.  H.) 


Library  Notes 


A  First  Edition  of  "Emma" 

EMMA  was  the  fourth  of  Jane 
Austen's  novels  to  be  published 
awl  the  last  to  appear  in  her  lifetime. 
All  came  out  anonymously.  Although 
there  is  ground  for  believing  that  Em- 
ma was  developed  from  "The  Watsons," 
a  sketch  written  some  years  before,  it 
was  begun  only  in  January  1814.  It 
was  completed  by  March  181 5  and  pub- 
lished twelve  months  later  by  John 
Murray  in  London.  A  copy  of  the  first 
edition  has  recently  been  acquired  by 
the  Library,  heretofore  lacking  the 
original  issues  of  all  Miss  Austen's 
works  except  the  posthumous  North- 
anger  Abbey  and  Persuasion. 

One  enthusiast  described  the  book 
as  "handsome,"  and  the  three  volumes 
in  contemporary  boards,  with  gilt- 
tooled  calf  back,  have  a  pleasing  ap- 
pearance. They  were  dedicated  to  the 
Prince  Regent.  The  writer  happened 
to  be  in  London  while  the  manuscript 
was  in  the  press,  and  His  Royal  High- 
ness, an  admirer  of  her  talents,  sent 
word  offering  permission  to  attach  his 
name  to  a  new  production.  She  was 
gratified  and  indeed  quite  upset  her 
publisher  by  asking  to  have  the  dedi- 
cation placed  on  the  title-page.  But 
after  Mr.  Murray  informed  her  that 
this  would  not  do  she  quickly  agreed, 
and  so  the  dedication  was  relegated  to 
its  proper  position. 

At  first  the  public  took  only  a  mild 
interest  in  Miss  Austen's  works.  In  a 
letter  of  December  1815,  written  to 
the  Prince  Regent's  librarian,  she  ex- 
pressed her  concern  about  the  recep- 
tion of  Emma:  "I  am  very  strongly 
haunted  with  the  idea  that  to  those 
readers  who  have  preferred  Pride  and 
Prejudice  it  will  appear  inferior  in  wit, 
and  to  those  who  have  preferred  Mans- 
field Park,  inferior  in  good  sense."  But 
a  little  later  she  was  more  confident: 
"Your  kind  disposition,"  she  told  a 
friend,  "encourages  me  to  depend  on 
the  same  share  of  general  good  opinion 
which  'Emma's'  predecessors  have  ex- 
perienced, and  to  believe  that  I  have 
not  yet,  as  almost  every  writer  of  fan- 


cy docs  sooner  or  later,  overwritten 
myself."  She  need  not  have  worried. 
The  story,  which  deals  with  the  so- 
cial difficulties  of  an  over-confident 
young  girl  in  a  village,  is  considered 
by  some  critics  to  be  her  best  writing. 

In  all  her  lifetime  Miss  Austen 
earned  less  than  £700.  Yet  today 
first  editions  of  her  novels  are  rare, 
and  fine  copies  of  Pride  and  Prejudice 
and  Sense  and  Sensibility  fetch  close  to 
a  thousand  dollars.  Emma  is  less  popu- 
lar, but  a  copy  in  good  condition,  such 
as  the  one  now  in  the  Library,  is  a 
coveted  possession.  t.  C. 

The  Astrolabes  of  the  World 

THE  Astrolabes  of  the  World  by 
Robert  T.  Gunther,  Curator  of  the 
Lewis  Evans  Collection  in  the  Old 
Ashmolean  Museum  at  Oxford,  is  a 
comprehensive  work  on  these  ancient 
instruments  for  taking  the  altitudes  of 
sun,  moon,  and  stars.  Printed  in  two 
large  quarto  volumes  by  the  Oxford 
University  Press  in  1932,  the  work  con- 
tains descriptions  of  more  than  three 
hundred  astrolabes,  from  the  early 
Christian  era  through  the  seventeenth 
century,  accompanied  by  some  hun- 
dred and  fifty  plates. 

The  Greek  word  astrolabon  means 
the  taking  of  a  star,  and  Hipparchus 
of  Bithynia  of  the  second  century  B.  C. 
is  regarded  as  the  inventor  of  the  plani- 
spheric  astrolabe.  However,  the  first 
volume  of  Dr.  Gunther's  work,  which 
describes  Eastern  astrolabes,  begins  with 
the  Chaldeans,  from  whom  the  Greeks 
may  have  derived  their  scientific  ideas. 
Byzantine,  Persian,  Indian,  Arabian, 
Moorish,  and  Jewish  astrolabes  are  here 
considered.  The  oldest  dated  portable 
scientific  instrument  known  as  the  as- 
trolabe of  Ahmad  and  Mohamad  of 
Isfahan,  Persia,  made  in  984  A.  D.,  now 
in  the  Evans  Colllection.  Another  Per- 
sian astrolabe,  made  much  later  —  in 
1 71 2  —  for  Shah  Husain,  King  of  Per- 
sia, excells  all  others  in  beauty,  accord- 
ing to  William  Morley,  whose  article 
on  it  stands  at  the  beginning  of  the 
volume. 


349 


35° 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


The  second  volume  is  devoted  to 
Western  astrolabes :  Spanish,  Italian, 
French,  Flemish  and  Dutch,  German, 
and  English,  ranging  from  the  middle 
of  the  fourteenth  century  on.  It  also  in- 
cludes articles  by  Theodore  Wahlin  on 
astrolabe  clocks  and  on  the  use  of  the 
astrolabe  in  the  construction  of  sun- 
dials, besides  the  texts  of  Latin  trea- 
tises by  the  eleventh-century  Herman- 
nus  Contractus  and  facsimile  pages 
from  R.  Tenner's  The  Travailcrs  Joy  and 
F elicit e,  printed  in  1587. 

Among  the  English  astrolabes  con- 
siderable space  is  given  to  the  instru- 
ment of  John  Blagrave,  described  in 
the  inventor's  The  Mathemetical  Jewel, 
London,  1585.  The  Library,  in  its  Bow- 
dilch  Collection,  lias  a  first-edition 
copy  of  the  work,  as  well  as  one  of  Blun- 
deville's  tits  Exercises,  London  1594,  in 
which  Blagrave's  "Jewel"  is  discussed. 
Indeed,  the  Bowditch  Collection  is  ex- 
tremely rich  in  rare  books  on  the  astro- 
labe, including  many  of  the  works 
listed  in  Dr.  Gunther's  bibliography. 
The  following  few  may  be  mentioned : 

The  oldest  item  is  an  anonymous 
Latin  work  entitled  Astrolabii  quo  primi 
mobilis  motus  deprehenduntur  Canones, 
printed  by  Peter  Liechtenstein  in  Ven- 
ice in  1 5 12.  The  first  important  work  on 
the  astrolabe  in  the  Italian  language, 
according  to  Dr.  Gunther,  was  the 
Trattato  dell'  Uso  dell  Astrolabio  by  the 
Dominican  monk  Egnatio  Danti.  The 
Library  has  this  fine  illustrated  work 
in  the  first  dated  edition  of  Florence, 
1569.  The  earliest  and  best  German  book 
was  the  Elucidatio  Fabricae  Ususqtte 
Astrolabii  by  Johannes  Stoeffler,  which 
the  Library  has  in  the  first  edition  printed 
by  Jacob  Kobel  in  Oppenheim  in  15 12. 
Another  important  German  work  which 
includes  a  treatise  on  the  astrolabe  is 
the  Gnomonice  by  Andreas  Schoner, 
which  the  Library  has  in  the  first 
edition  of  Nuremberg,  1562.  The  Astro- 
labium,  Das  ist :  Grundliche  Bcschreibung 
.  .  .  by  Franciscus  Rittcr,  containing 
numerous  engraved  plates  (shown  in 
Gunther's  work)  is  in  the  Library  in 
an  undated  edition  of  Nuremberg  which 
has  been  designated  as  of  1613.  A  beauti- 
ful French  first  edition  is  the  Para- 
phrase  de  I' Astrolabe  by  J.  Focard, 
printed  in  italic  type  by  Jean  de  Tournes 
at  Lyon  in  1546.  John  de  Roias  Sarmi- 


ento's  Commcntarium  in  Astrolabium  is 
in  the  Library  in  an  edition  of  Paris, 
I550.  M.  M. 

Francis  Parkman  to  a 
Fellow-Historian 

THIS  note  by  the  great  historian 
of  the  French  and  Indian  wars  to 
Dr.  E.  B.  O'Callaghan  was  written  dur- 
ing one  of  his  worst  periods.  Though 
only  thirty-five  years  of  age,  Parkman 
had  for  a  long  time  been  suffering  from 
an  obscure  neurological  disease,  which 
seriously  affected  his  eyesight  and 
powers  of  concentration;  and  his  wife 
and  son  had  just  died  within  a  year  of 
each  other.  Nevertheless,  the  letter  in- 
dicates that  he  had  already  undertaken 
his  series  France  and  England  in  North 
America,  published  in  seven  parts  from 
1865  to  1892.  The  letter  —  dated  "Bos- 
ton, March  17,  1858"  —  follows: 

"Let  me  thank  you  once  more  for 
the  publication,  invaluable  to  me,  of 
the  Paris  documents,  of  which  I  have 
just  received  the  last  vol.  &  to  which 
your  notes  &  illustration  add  so  much 
that  is  useful.  The  debt  I  owe  to  the 
liberality  of  the  State  of  New  York  & 
to  the  devoted  labors  of  the  editor,  is 
such  that  I  could  not  too  emphatically 
express  my  obligation.  I  can  only  trust 
that  your  services  will  be  as  warmly 
appreciated  elsewhere  as  with  me. 

"My  historical  labors  have  met  with 
very  serious  interruption,  but  still  ad- 
vance, though  slowly.  I  am  in  search  of 
the  vol.  of  maps  published  in  connection 
with  the  Documentary  Plist.  of  N.  Y. 
but  have  not  found  one  here  for  sale. 
Can  vou  tell  me  of  anvone  who  has 
one?" 

Dr.  O'Callaghan,  a  native  of  Ireland 
and  a  physician,  came  to  the  United 
States  in  1837,  at  the  age  of  forty.  His 
principal  work  was  the  Documentary  His- 
tory of  New  York,  published  in  four 
volumes,  1849-51.  He  was  employed 
by  that  state  to  edit  Documents  relative 
to  the  Colonial  History  of  the  State  of 
New  York,  of  which  the  Paris  documents 
constitute  the  ninth  volume.  The  papers 
to  which  Parkman  refers  consisted  princi- 
pally of  correspondence  to  and  from  the 
Marquis  de  Beauharnois,  Governor  of 
New  France  in  the  1740's,  about  his  nego- 
tiations with  the  Indian  tribes.  J.  S. 


LIBRARY  NOTES 


35i 


"Adam  in  Eden," 
an  English  Herbal 

TO  the  Library's  distinctive  col- 
lection of  herbals  a  work  has 
been  added  which  is  both  historically 
interesting  and  entertaining.  Adam  in 
Eden:  or  Natures  Paradise  [**L.2I.I2], 
by  William  Coles,  was  printed  by  J. 
Streater  in  London  in  1657.  It  is  a  folio 
volume  of  nearly  seven  hundred  pages. 
Annotations  in  an  old  hand  appear  in 
the  Library's  copy  in  various  places. 
Only  two  other  copies  are  recorded  as  in 
American  libraries. 

William  Cole,  whose  name  is  incor- 
rectly spelled  Coles  on  the  title-page, 
was  born  at  Adderbury  in  1626,  became 
a  Fellow  of  New  College,  Oxford,  and 
pursued  his  botanical  studies  in  Putney. 
At  the  Restoration  he  was  appointed 
secretary  to  Dr.  Brian  Duppa,  Bishop 
of  Winchester,  a  prominent  royalist 
divine,  whom  he  served  till  his  death, 
at  the  age  of  thirty-six.  The  best  hours  of 
his  life,  he  writes  in  the  preface,  were 
spent  "in  the  Fields  and  in  Physick 
Gardens,  more  especially  in  that  Fam- 
ous One  at  Oxford,  where  I  made  it  a 
great  part  of  my  study  to  be  experi- 
enced in  this  laudable  art  of  Simpling, 
of  which  I  have  already  published  a 
Treatise  .  .  ."  This  was  The  Art  of 
Simpling,  published  in  1656. 

The  seventeenth  century,  in  England 
as  well  as  on  the  continent,  saw  the  be- 
ginning of  systematic  botany,  which 
led  to  the  summary  system  of  Linnaeus. 
Cole,  however,  belongs  rather  in  the 
line  of  medieval  and  renaissance  herba- 
lists. His  interest  was  focused  on  the 
healing  virtues  of  the  plants,  and  the 
book  is  arranged  according  to  the  parts 
of  the  body  for  which  they  may  be 
used  as  cures.  Furthermore,  the  manual 
is  an  excellent  exponent  of  the  Doctrine 
of  Signatures,  which  originated  with 


Paracelsus.  According  to  this  belief 
the  resemblances  between  plants  and 
organs  of  the  human  body  signified 
that  these  plants,  or  parts  of  them,  had 
a  healing  effect  on  the  organs  they  re- 
sembled. For  example:  "Wall-nuts  have 
the  perfect  Signature  of  the  Head :  The 
outer  husk  or  green  Covering,  repre- 
sent the  Pericranium,  or  outward  skin 
of  the  skull,  whereon  the  hair  growth, 
and  therefore  salt  made  of  those  husks 
or  barks,  are  exceeding  good  for  wounds 
in  the  head."  m.  M. 

Lectures  and  Concerts 

THE  entrance  to  the  Lecture  Hall 
is  from  Boylston  Street  only.  The 
doors  zvill  be  open  one-half  hour  before 
each  lecture  or  concert. 

The  Wood  Engravings  of  Asa  Chef- 
fetz.  A  Gallery  Talk  in  connection  with 
the  exhibition  in  the  Albert  H.  Wiggin 
Gallery  through  November.  Arthur  W. 
Hcintzelrnan,  N.  A.,  Keeper  of  Prints. 
Boston  Public  Library.  3.30  Mon.  Nov.  3. 

France  as  We  Found  It.  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Carl  De  Suze.  Illustrated.  Introduced 
by  Monsieur  Albert  Chambon,  French 
Consul  at  Boston.  8.00  Thurs.  Nov.  6. 

Jcwisli  Book  Month  Meeting.  Pro- 
gram to  be  announced.  8.00  Sun.  Nov.  9. 

Tlie  Baltic  States  and  Russia.  Oscar 
M.  Poeld,  Director  of  the  Board  of  the 
Baltic-American  Society  of  New  Eng- 
land. 8.00  Thurs.  Nov.  13. 

Meet  the  Author.  Dr.  Tehyi  Hsieh. 
Author.  Director  of  the  Chinese  Service 
Bureau  in  Boston.  3.30  Sun.  Nov.  16. 

Notes  on  the  Wood-Cut.  Asa  Cheffetz, 
Wood  Engraver.  8.00  Mon.  Nov.  17. 

Nonvay  Today.  Ingolf  V.  Bockmann, 
Lecturer.  Illustrated.  8.00  Thurs.  Nov. 
20. 

Concert.  Ruth  Olive,  Soprano ;  Harold 
T.  Pierson,  Bass-Baritone;  and  Grace 
B.  Davis,  Accompanist.  8.00  Sun.  Nov. 
23- 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 

Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

** 

This  list  should  be  used  in  conjunction  with  Books  Current,  a 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
1943.  Books  Current  is  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  and  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  are  available  for  the  whole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  are  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  the 
Business  Branch;  however,  they  may  be  borrozved  through  the  various 
Branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


Bibliography 

Brigham,  Clarence  Saunders.  History  and 
bibliography  of  American  newspapers, 
1600-1802.  American  Antiquarian  Society, 
1947.  2  v.  *Z6o5i.BS6 
A  revision  of  a  work  first  issued  in  18  parts  in 
the  Proceedings  of  the  American  Antiquarian  So- 
ciety, 1913  to  1927,  under  title:  Bibliography  of 
American   Newspapers,  1090—1820. 

Encyclopedia  of  the  Negro,  preparatory 
volume  with  reference  lists  and  reports. 
Phelps-Stokes  Fund.  1946.  215  pp. 

*HTi58i.E5  1946 

By  W.  E.  B.  Du  Bois  and  Guy  B.  Johnson, 
prepared  with  the  cooperation  of  E.  Irene  Diggs, 
Agnes  C.  L.  Donohugh,  Guion  Johnson  [and 
others].  Introduction  by  Anson  Phelps  Stokes. 
Rev.  and  enl.  edition. 

Johnson,  John  de  Monins.  Print  and  privilege 
at  Oxford  to  the  year  1700.  Oxford.  1946. 
viii,  212  pp.   Illus.       *Z232.0  98J6  1946 

Miller,  William.  The  Dickens  student  and 
collector.  Harvard.  1946.  xii,  351  pp. 

*Z823o.M6s 

A  list  of  writings  relating  to  Charles  Dickens  and 
his  works,  1836-1945. 

Biography 

Bcehmer,  Heinrich.  Road  to  Reformation: 
Martin  Luther  to  the  year  1521.  Phila- 
delphia. Muhlenberg  Press.  1946.  xiii,  449 
pp.  BR325.B552 

"This  is  a  translation,  with  minor  revisions  to 
bring  it  up  to  date,  from  the  second  German  edi- 
tion of  Heinrich   Boehmer's  Dcr  junge  Luther." 

Caughey,  John  Walton.  Hubert  Howe  Ban- 
croft, historian  of  the  West.  University  of 
California.  1946.  ix,  422  pp.  Plates. 

E175.5B22 

Daniels,  Josephus.  Shirt-sleeve  diplomat. 
Chapel  Hill.  1947.  xix,  547  pp.  Plates. 

E183.8.M6D3 

Frank,  Philipp.  Einstein,  his  life  and  times. 
Translated  from  a  German  manuscript  by 
George  Rosen,  edited  and  revised  by  Shui- 
chi  Kusaka.  Knopf.  1947.  xi,  298,  xii  pp. 
Ports.  QC16.E5F7 

Grazebrook,  Owen  Francis.  Nicanor  of  Athens  ; 
the  autobiography  of  an  unknown  citizen. 


Macmillan.  1947.  xviii,  359  pp. 

PR6013.R39N7  1947 

Hatch,  Alden.  Franklin  D.  Roosevelt,  an  in- 
formal biography.  Holt.  [1947.]  viii,  413 
pp.  Plates.  E807.H35 

Hcppe,  Emil  Otto.  Hundred  thousand  ex- 
posures; the  success  of  a  photographer, 
introduced  by  Cecil  Beaton.  London  and 
New  York,  Focal  press.  [1946.]  229  pp. 
Plates.  TR145.H6 
"First  published  October  1945.  Reprinted  January 

1946.  " 

Lester,  Muriel.  It  so  happened.  Harper.  [1947.] 
xiv,  240  ;ip.  HV247.L4A35 

Continuation  of  the  autobiography  begun  in  It 
Occurred  to  Me. 

Marberry,  M.  Marion.  The  golden  voice;  a 
biography  of  Isaac  Kalloch.  Farrar, 
Straus.  1947.  x,  376  pp.  Illus. 

CT275.K322M3 

Middleton,  George.  These  things  are  mine; 
the  autobiography  of  a  journeyman  play- 
wright. Macmillan.  1947.  448  pp.  Illus. 

PS3525.I  27Z5 

More,  Sir  Thomas,  Saint,  1478-1535.  The  cor- 
respondence of  Sir  Thomas  More,  edited 
by  Elizabeth  Frances  Rogers.  Princeton. 

1947.  xxii,  584  pp.  PR2322.A3 
Bibliography:  pp.  567-374. 

Morris,  Ira  Nelson,  1875-1942.  Heritage  from 
my  father,  an  autobiography.  New  York, 
Priv.  print.  1947   vii,  263  pp.  E744.M7 

Noyes,  Alfred  Horace:  a  portrait.  Sheed  & 
Ward.  1947.  xiii,  292  pp.  PA6411.N6 

Palencia,  Isabel  de.  Alexandra  Kollontay,  am- 
bassadress from  Russia.  Longmans,  Green. 
I947-  3-309  pp.  Ports.  DK258.K56P3 

Randal!,  J.  G.  Lincoln  the  liberal  statesman. 
Dorid,  Mead.  1947.  xv,  266  pp.  E457.4.R24 
Bibliographical  r<  feiences  in  Annotations,"  pp.  207- 
251. 

Read,  Herbert  E.  The  innocent  eye.  Holt. 
[1947  ]  xi,  268  pp.  PR6C35.E24Z54  1947 
Autobiography  of  a  well-known  English  critic. 

Robinson,  Bradley.  Dark  companion.  Mc- 
Bride.  [1947.]  xviii,  266  pp.  G635.H4R6 
The  life  of  Matthew  Henson,  first  Negro  explorer, 
who  accompanied  Peary  to  the  Arctic. 

Robinson,  Charles  Alexander.  Alexander  the 


352 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


353 


Great;  the  meeting  of  East  and  West  in 
world  government  and  brotherhood.  But- 
ton. 1947.  252  pp.  DF234.R65 
A  popular  biography  by  a  professor  of  classics  at 
Brown  University. 

Stryker,  Lloyd  Paul.  For  the  defense: 
Thomas  Erskine,  the  most  enlightened 
liberal  of  his  times,  1750-1823.  Doubleday. 
1947.  xi,  624  pp.  Ports.  DA483.E7S8 

Business 

Eggleston,  De  Witt  Carl.  Auditing  procedure ; 

3d.  ed.  Wiley.  [1947.]  438  pp.  NBS 
Gold  book,  tiie  national  directory  of  apparel. 

1947.  New  York,  Reporter  Publications. 

[1047.I  786  pp.  **TT495G6i  1947 

Heilperin,  Michael  A.  The  trade  of  nations. 

Knopf.  1947.  234  pp.  NBS 
International  exporter  buyer's  guide  ...  v. 

4,  no.  1.  1947.  New  York,  Latin  American 

Buyer's  Guide  Co.,  1947.  192  pp. 

**TT495.I6i 

Kaplan,  Abraham  D.  N.  Guarantee  of  an- 
nual wages.  Brookings  Institution.  1947. 
269  pp.  NBS 

Kitson,  Harry  Dexter.  How  to  find  tlie  right 
vocation.  3d  rev.  ed.  Harper,  [c'947.]  163 
pp.  NBS 

Kohler,  E.  Auditing;  an  introduction  to  the 
work  of  the  public  accountant.  Prentice- 
Hall.  1947.  258  pp.  NBS 

Paper  catalog.  New  England-  New  York  ed. 
Jan.  1947.  A  combined  catalog  and  price 
hst  of  the  paper  merchants  and  manu- 
facturers. New  York.  Walden,  Sons  & 
Mott.  1947.  Various  pagings.  **TSio88P22 

Saward's  annual;  a  standard  statistical  re- 
view of  the  coal  trade.  [New  York.]  1947. 
200  pp.  **TN8oo.S27 

Stone,  Robert.  Profitable  direct  mail  methods. 
Prentice-Hall.   1947.  452  pp.  NBS 

Vickrey,  William.  Agenda  for  progressive 
taxation.  Ronald  Press  [ci.947.]  496  pp. 

NBS 

Walker's  manual  of  Pacific  coast  securities, 
with  which  is  incorporated  Walker's  manual 
of  California  securities.  39th  annual  num- 
ber. 1947.  San  Francisco,  Walker's  Manu- 
al, inc.  1947.  964  pp.  **HG5i27Wi7 

Wright,  Wilson.  Forecasting  for  profit;  a 
technique  for  business  management.  Wiley. 
[C1947.]   173  pp.  NBS 

Economics 

Brown,  Leo  Cyril.  Union  policies  in  the 
leather  industry.  Haivard.  1947.  jcviii,  246 
pp.  9331.8S73A107 

"The  original  version  of  this  study,  submitted  as 
a  doctoral  dissertation  [at  Harvard  University]  in 
1940,  was  limited  to  unions  in  the  leather  in- 
dustry   in    Massachusetts." — Author's  preface. 

Bubin,  Louis  Israel,  and  Alfred  J.  Lotka.  The 

money  value  of  a  man.  Rev.  ed.  Ronald 
Press.   [1946.]  xvii,  214  pp.  Biaers. 

9368.3A106R 

Fanning,  Leonard  M.  American  oil  oper- 
ations. McGraw-Hill.  1947.  270  pp.  Plus. 

9338.22A118 

"Based  upon  the  report  of  the  Group  on  American 
petroleum  interests  in  foreign  countries  to  the 
Special  Committee  Investigating  Petroleum  Resour- 


ces, Senator  Joseph  C.  O'Mahaney,  chairman". — 
Preface. 

Lurie,  Sa  muel.  Private  investment  in  a  con- 
trolled economy;  Germany,  i'j33-39.  Co- 
lumbia.  1947.  xi,  243  pp.  "  9339-043Ai02 

Metz,  Harold  William,  and  Meyer  Jacob- 
stein.  A  national  labor  policv.'  Brookings 
Institution.  1947.  ix,   164  pp.  9331.155A134 

Shapiro,  Eli.  Credit  union  development  in 
Wisconsin.  Columbia  Univ.  Press.  1947. 
174  pp.  Biagrs.  *3563-no.525 

Snider,  Joseph  Lyons.  The  guarantee  of  work 
and  wages.  Boston,  Bivision  of  research, 
Graduate  school  of  business  administra- 
tion, Harvard  University.  1947.  xi,  191  pp. 

„     ,     .  933i-2Ai35 

bouthard,  Frank  A.,  jr.  The  finances  of  Euro- 
pean liberation,  with  special  reference  to 
Italy.  New  York,  Published  for  the  Car- 
negie endowment  for  international  peace 
by  King's  Crown  Press.  1946.  ix,  206  pp. 
Facsims.  Biagr.  9332. A223 

Twentieth  Century  Fund.  America's  needs 
and  resources,  a  Twentieth  century  fund 
survey  which  includes  estimates  for  1950 
and  i960.  By  J.  Frederick  Bewhurst  and 
associates.  New  York,  The  Twentieth 
Century  Fund.  1947.  xxviii,  812  pp.  Tables. 

*933o.i73A450 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  census.  ...  A  chapter  in  pop- 
ulation sampling.  Washington,  B.  C,  U.  S. 
Govt.  Print.  Off.  v,  141  pp.  *93i2.2A64 

Walker,  E.  Ronald.  The  Australian  economy 
in  war  and  reconstruction.  Issued  under 
the  auspices  of  the  Royal  Institute  of  In- 
ternational Affairs.  New  York,  Oxford 
Univ.  Press.  1947.  ix,  426  pp.  9330.994A15 

Wilson,  G.  Lloyd.  Interstate  commerce  and 
traffic  law.  Prentice-Hall.  1947.  xxiii,  677 
PP-  9381.73A82 
A  selection  of  leading  cases  and  guiding  principles 
in  transportation  and  traffic  manapement  adminis- 
tration and  law. 


Education 

Adams,  Evelyn  C.  American  Indian  edu- 
cation; government  schools  and  eco- 
nomic progress.  New  York,  King's  Crown 
Press.  1946.  xiii,  122  pp.   Ilhis.  E97.A3 

Betts,  Emmett  Albert.  Foundations  of  read- 
ing instruction,  with  emphasis  on  differ- 
entiated guidance.  American  Book  Com- 
pany. [1946.]  xiii,  757  pp.  Illus. 

LB1573.B44 

Erickson,  Clifford  E.,  and  Marion  C.  Happ. 
Guidance  practices  at  work.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1946.  325  pp.  LB1027.E713 

Mase,  Barrel  J.  Etiology  of  articulatory 
speech  defects;  a  comparison  of  the  inci- 
dence of  six  selected  factors  in  children 
having  articulatory  speech  defects  with 
the  incidence  of  the  same  factors  in  chil- 
dren not  having  speech  defects.  New  York, 
Teachers  college,  Columbia  Univ.  1946. 

85PP.  *3592.220.92I 

Melvin,  A.  Gordon.  Education,  a  history. 
John  Bay.  [1946.]  vi,  374  pp.  Illus. 

LA13.M3 

McMurry,  Borothy.  Herbartian  contributions 
to  history  instruction  in  American  ele- 


354 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


mentary  schools.  New  York,  Teachers 
college,  Columbia  Univ.  1946.  viii,  172  pp. 

Bibliography,  pp.    137-172.  *3592.220.920 

Minio-Paluello,  Lorenzo.  Education  in  fas- 
cist Italy  .  .  .  with  a  foreword  by  Sir  W. 
D.  Ross.  Issued  under  the  auspices  of  the 
Royal  Institute  of  International  Affairs. 
Oxford  Univ.  Press.  1946.  xiv,  236  pp. 
"Bibliographical  note,"  pp.  227-231. LA791.8.M5 

Pooley,  Robert  C.  Teaching  English  usage. 
Appleton-Century.  [1946.]  xi,  265  pp. 

PE1065.F65 

Rakestraw,  C.  E.  Training  high-school  youth 
for  employment.  Chicago,  American  Tech- 
nical Society.  1947.  xi,  217  pp.  LC1045.R3 

Ulich,  Robert,  editor.  Three  thousand  years 
of  educational  wisdom;  selections  from 
great  documents.  Harvard.  1947.  x,  614 
pp.  LA5.U4 

Contents.  —  Asia :  India.  China.  —  Greek  and 
Roman  antiquity:  Plato.  Aristotle.  Plutarch.  Quin- 
tillian.  - —  Ancient  and  medieval  Christianity:  The 
Bible.  Tatian.  Saint  Augustine.  Saint  Basil.  Saint 
Jerome.  Hrabanus  Maurus.  John  Gerson.  —  Islam: 
Al-Ghazall.  Ibn  Khaldoun.  —  The  humanist  evo- 
lution :  Aenea  Silvio.  Martin  Luther.  Desiderius 
Erasmus.  The  Jesuit  order.  Michel  de  Montaigne. 
—  The  new  method  of  thinking:  Francis  Bacon. 
Rene  Descartes.  Galileo  Galilei.  —  The  develop- 
ment of  modern  education :  Johann  Amos  Comeni- 
us.  Sir  William  Petty.  John  Locke.  Jean  Jacques 
Rousseau.  Benjamin  Franklin.  Thomas  Jefferson. 
Johann  Heinrich  Pestalozzi.  Johann  Friedrich  Her- 
bart.  Friedrich  Wilhelm  Froebel.  Ralph  Waldo 
Emerson. 

Vergara,  Allys  Dwyer.  A  critical  study  of  a 
group  of  college  women's  responses  to 
poetry.  Columbia.  1946.  x,  159  pp. 

*3592.220.g23 

Fine  Arts 

Art  History 

Gammell,  R.  H.  Ives.  Twilight  of  painting; 

an  analysis  of  recent  trends  to  serve  in  a 
period  of  reconstruction.  Putnam.  [1946.] 
133  pp.  Plates.  4086.02-iog 
Landsberger,  Franz.  A  history  of  Jewish 
art.  Cincinnati,  The  Union  of  American 
Hebrew  Congregations.  1946.  ix,  369  pp. 
Illus.  4070.04-109 
Commission  on  Jewish  education  of  the  Union  of 
American  Hebrew  congregations  and  Central  con- 
ference of  American  rabbis. 

Panofsky,  Erwin,  editor.  Abbot  Suger  on  the 
abbey  church   of  St.  Denis   and  its  art 
treasures.  Princeton.  1946.  xiv,  250  pp. 
Latin  and  English.  8106.08— 862 

Salet,    Francis.    La  tapisserie  franchise  du 
moyen-age  a  nos  jours.   Paris,  Vincent 
Freal.   1946.  xxiii  pp.   101  plates. 
Issued  in  portfolio.  *8l88.03— 400 

Painting.  Drawing 

Colacicchi,  Giovanni,  editor.  Antonio  del  Pol- 
laiuolo.  Firenze,  Chessa,  1943.  xxxiv  pp. 

*4i03-C2-835 

Fiocco,  Giuseppe.  Giovanni  Antonio  Porden- 
one.  [Padova],  "Le  Tre  venezie,"  [1943.] 
149  PP.  *4i04.o6-82i 

Giotto  di  Bondone,  J226?-i^j.  Giotto,  la 
Cappella  degli  Scrovegni.  Milano,  A  Pizzi. 


[0946.]   XXIX  plates.  *4io2B.56o 

Tcsto  di  Carlo  Carra. 

Goris,  Jan  Albert,  and  Julius  S.  Held.  Rubens 
in  America.  Pantheon.  [1947.]  59  pp.  120 
plates.  *4io6.05-no 

Contents.  —  Rubens  in  America,  a  study  on  the 
appreciation  of  his  art  in  the  U.  S.  A.,  by  J.  A. 
Goris.  —  Catalogue  of  paintings  and  drawings  by 
Rubens  in  American  collections,  by  J.  S.  Held. 

Keller,  Harald.  Giovanni  Pisano,  mit  152 
bildern.  Wien,  A.  Schroll  &  Co.  [1942'.] 
71  pp.  130  plates.  *8c84.03-763 

Kroll,  Leon.  Leon  Kroll.  New  York,  Ameri- 
can Artists  Group.  [1946.]  64  pp.  Illus. 
Includes  58  pages  of  illustrations.  8060.06-673 

Lee,  Doris.  Doris  Lee.  New  York,  American 
Artists  Group.  [1946.]  64  pp.  8060.06-690 
Includes  56  pages  of  illustrations. 

Longhi,  Roberto.  Viatico  per  cinque  secoli  di 
pittura  veneziana.  Firenze,  Sansoni.  1946. 
93  PP-  166  plates.  *4io2.o3-goo 

MacColl,  Dugald  S.  Life,  work  and  setting 
of  Philip  Wilson  Steer  .  .  .  with  a  full 
catalogue  of  paintings  and  list  of  water- 
colours  in  public  collections  by  Alfred 
Yockney.  London,  Faber.  [1945.]  xvi,  240 
pp.  Plates.  8062.02-879 

Moses,  Anna  Mary.  Grandma  Moses,  Ameri- 
can primitive;  forty  paintings  with  com- 
ments by  Grandma  Moses,  together  with 
her  life's  history;  introduction  by  Louis 
Bromfield.  Edited  by  Otto  Kallir.  Double- 
_  day.  1947.  136  pp.  40  plates.  8060.06-761 

Picasso,  Pablo.  Paintings  and  drawings  of 
Picasso,  with  a  critical  survey  by  Jaime 
Sabartes.  New  York,  Tudor  Publishing 
Co.  1946.  16  pp.  24  colored  plates. 

*8o63.07-848 

Paniscig,  Leo.  Luca  della  Robbia.  Wieii,  A. 
Schroll.  [1940.]  38  pp.  112  plates. 

*8o84.o3-8n 

Miscellaneous 

Laufer,  Berthold,  1S74-1934.  Jade;  a  study  in 
Chinese  archaeology  and  religion.  South 
Pasadena.  Calif.,  P.  D.  &  I.  Perkins.  1946. 
370  pp.  LXVIII  plates.  *8i67.04-n8 

Lewis,  Wilmarth  S.  The  Yale  collections. 
Yale  Univ.  xv,  54  pp.  Plates.  *4o6i.o7-7oo 

Contents.  —  The  library.  —  The  art  gallery.  — 
The  Peabody  museum.  —  The  anthropology  mu- 
seum. 

McCausland,  Elizabeth,  editor.  Work  for  art- 
ists; what?  where?  how?  a  symposium  by 
Walter  Baermann,  S.  L.  Barlow,  Thomas 
Hart  Benton  [and  others]  with  summaries 
of  three  questionaires.  New  York,  Ameri- 
can Artists  Group.  [1947.]  194  pp. 

4087.01-105 

O'Neale,  Lila  M.  Textiles  of  highland  Guate- 
mala. Washington,  1945.  x,  319  pp.  Plates. 

F1465.3.T4  O  57 
Patmore,  Derek.  Colour  schemes  and  mod- 
ern  furnishing.  New  York,  The  Studio. 
[1947  ]  73  plates.  8118.08-110 
Pepper,  Stephen  C.  The  basis  of  criticism  in 
the  arts.  Harvard.  1945.  viii,  177  plates. 

4086.01-120 

Pictrowska,  Irena.  The  art  of  Poland.  New 
York,  Philosophical  Library.  1947.  xiv, 
238  pp.  Illus.  4078.06-209 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


Putnam,  Brenda.  Animal  X-rays,  a  skeleton 
key  to  comparative  anatomy.  Putnam. 
[1047.]  96  pp.  Illus.  8142.05-121 

Rand',  Paul.  Thoughts  on  design  .  .  .  intro- 
duction by  E.  McKnight  Kauffer;  illus- 
trations from  the  author's  work.  New 
York,  Wittenborn.  1947-  *59PP-  Ulus. 

4099.02-133 

Regamey,  R.  P.  Anges.  Texte  du  R.  P.  Re- 
gamey,  O.  P.  avec  des  notices  analytiqucs 
par  Renee  Zeller.  Paris,  P.  Tisne.  [1946.] 
60,  29  pp.  152  plates.  *4094.o8-5oo 

The  Arts  Enquiry.  The  visual  arts.  Oxford 
Univ.  Press.  1946.  182  pp.  4077-°3-5°4 
A  report  sponsored  by  the  Dartington  hall  trus- 
tees. Published  on  behalf  of  the  Arts  enquiry  by 
PEP  (Political  and  economic  planning),  London, 
New  York  [etc.] . 

Tschichold,  Jan.  Schatzkammer  der  schreib- 
kunst  Basel.  1945.  199  plates.  *409g.o7-soo 

"Meisterwerke  der  Kalligraphie  aus  vier  Jahrhun- 
derten  auf  zweihundert  Tafeln." 
Views  of  the  several  parts  of  the  palace  or 
castle  of  Versailles.  London,  H.  Overton 
and  I.  Hool.  1740?  16  plates.  *8ii5.o8-i24 
"As  likewise  of  all  the  fountains,  basins,  groves, 
parterras,  and  other  the  most  beautiful!  parts  of  the 
gardens.  Wherein  are  represented  whatever  are  re- 
markable; as  statues,  groups,  of  figures,  water- 
falls, &c.  Drawn  on  the  spot,  by  order  and  with 
ye  approbation  of  the  French  king." 

Webster,  James  Carson.  The  labors  of  the 
months  in  antique  and  mediaeval  art  to 
the  end  of  the  twelfth  century.  Princeton 
Univ.  Press.  1938.  185  pp.  *4og3.05-ioi 

Princeton  Monographs  in  Art  and  Archaeology., 
XXI.  Bibliography,  pp.  [ii7l-i74- 

Genealogy 

Black,  George  F..  The  surnames  of  Scotland ; 
their  origin,  meaning,  and  history.  New 
York  Public  Library.  1946.  lxxi.  838  pp. 

*CS2435-B55 

Reprinted   from   the   Bulletin   of   the   New  York 
Public  Library  August  1943-September  1946. 
"Glossary  of  obsolete  or  uncommon  Scots  words": 
PP-  835-838. 

Campbell,  Glenn  Harold.  The  Campbells  are 
coming.  Dodd,  Mead.  1947.  xiii,  333  pp. 
Plates.  DA758.3.C25C3 

Jones,  Annie  Stevens.  Stevens — Washburn, 
with  related  lines;  particularly  the  ante- 
cedents, relatives,  and  descendants  of  Cap- 
tain James  Holmes  Stevens  and  of  Dr. 
Abner  Standish  Washburn.  Lonsdale, 
Ark.,  Ozark  Guide  Press.  [1946.]   195  pp. 

*CS7i.S844  1946 

Slawson,  George  C.  The  Slason,  Slauson, 
Slawson,  Slosson  family.  [Waverly,  N.  Y., 
Printed  by  the  Waverly  Sun.  Inc.  1946. 1 
xiii,  453  pp.  *CS7i.S63i45  1946 

Withycombe,  E.  G.  The  Oxford  dictionary 
of  English  Christian  names,  compiled  by 
E.  G.  Withycombe.  Oxford  Univ.  1947. 
xxxviii,  142  pp.  CS2375.G7W5  1947 

First  American  edition. 


History 

Europe 

Mitchell,  John  Hewitt.  The  court  of  the  Con- 
nctablie.  Yale.  1947.  166  pp.  *4494.4i5  v.  47 


355 

"A  study  of  a  French  administrative  tribunal  dur- 
ing the  reign  of  Henry  IV." 

Pcwicke,  F.  M.  King  Henry  III  and  the 
Lord  Edward;  the  community  of  the  realm 
in  the  thirteenth  century.  Oxford,  Claren- 
don press.  1947.  2  v.  Maps.  DA227.P6 

Pratt,  Helen  Gay,  and  Harriet  L.  Moore. 
Russia,  a  short  history.  Issued  under  the 
auspices  of  American  Council,  Institute  of 
Pacific  Relations.  John  Day.  [1947.]  vi, 
282  pp.  DK32.P7  1947 

"A  revised  and  enlarged  edition  of  Russia:  from 
tsarist  empire  to  socialism,  by  Helen  Pratt,  pub- 
lished in  1937  .  .  .  The  ast  two  and  a  half  chap- 
ters are  by  Harriet  L.  Moore." 

Roberts,  Penfield.  The  quest  for  security, 
1715-1740.  Harper.  1947.  300  pp.  D6.R5  v.8 

Fifty-four  illustrations  drawn  from  unusual  sources. 

Miscellaneous 

Longrigg,  Stephen  Hemsley.  A  short  history 
of  Eritrea.  Oxford,  Clarendon  press.  1945. 
vi,  188  pp.  Maps.  Plates.  DT395.L65 

MacKay,  Robert  Alexander,  editor.  New- 
foundland; economic,  diplomatic,  and  stra- 
tegic studies  .  .  .  with  a  foreword  by  Sir 
Campbell  Stuart.  Toronto,  Oxford  Univ. 
Press.  1946.  xiv,  577  pp.  9330.9718A4 

Issued  under  the  auspices  of  the  Royal  Institute 
of  International  Affairs: 

Reischauer,  Edwin  O.  Japan,  past  and  pres- 
ent. Foreword  by  Sir  George  Sansom. 
Knopf.  1947.  x,  192  pp.    DS835.R4  1947 

Stern,  Bernhard  J.,  and  Samuel  Smith,  edi- 
tors. Understanding  the  Russians,  a  study 
of  soviet  life  and  culture.  Barnes  and 
Noble.  [1947.]  iv,  246  pp.  Plates.  DK4.S8 

Articles  by  51  authorities  assembled  from  variou; 
sources.  1 

Thompson,  Charles  O.  F.  A  hiscory  of  the 
Declaration  of  Independence.  Bristol,  R.  I., 
the  author.  1947.  xiv,  132  pp.  JK128.T5 

"A  story  of  the  American  patriots  who  brought 
about  the  birth  of  our  nation." 

Language 

Baker,  Sidney  J.  The  Australian  language; 
an  examination  of  the  English  language 
and  English  speech  as  used  in  Australia, 
from  convict  days  to  the  present,  with 
special  reference  to  the  growth  of  indi- 
genous idiom  and  its  use  by  Australian 
writers.  Sydney,  London,  Angus  and  Rob- 
ertson. 1945.  xii,  425  pp.  Iilus.  PE3501.B3 

Wemyss,  Stanley,  and  Kanae  Akiyama. 
Short  cuts  to  Japanese,  a  primer  of  the 
Japanese  language.  New  York,  Padell 
Book  Co.  1945.  94  pp.  PL535.W53 

Literature 

Drama 

Gassner,  John,  editor.  Best  plays  of  the  mod- 
ern American  theatre,  second  series,  with 
an  introduction.  Crown.  1047.  xxx,  776  pp. 

PS634.G28 

First    series,    published    1939,    has    title:  Twenty 
best    plays   of   the   modem   American  theatre. 
Contents.  —  The  glass  menagerie,  by  Tennessee 


356  MORE  BOOKS: 

Williams.  —  The  time  of  your  life,  by  William 
Saroyan.  —  I  lemember  mama,  by  John  Van 
Druten.  —  Life  with  father,  by  Howard  Lindsay 
and  Russel  Crcuse.  —  Born  yesterday,  by  Carson 
Kanin.  —  The  voice  of  the  turtle,  by  John  Van 
Druten.  —  The  male  animal,  by  James  Thurber 
and  Elliott  Nugent.  —  The  man  who  came  to 
dinner,  by  G.  S.  Kaufman  and  Moss  Hart.  — 
Dream  girl,  by  Elmer  Rice.  —  The  Philadelphia 
story,  by  Philip  Barry.  —  Arsenic  and  old  lace, 
by  Joseph  Kesselring.  —  The  hasty  heart,  by  John 
Patrick.  —  Home  of  the  brave,  by  Arthur  Lau- 
rents.  —  Tomorrow  the  world,  by  James  Gow  and 
Arnaud  d'Usseau.  —  Watch  on  the  Rhine,  by 
Lillian  Hellman.  —  The  patriots,  by  Sidney  Kings- 
ley.  —  Abe  Lincoln  in  Illinois,  by  R.  E.  Sher- 
wood. 

Fiction 

Deledda,  Grazia.  Romanzi  e  novelle.  |.Mi- 
lano]  A  Mondadori,   [1941-1945.]   2  v. 

PQ481T.E6R6 

Contents.  — -  v.  I.  Elias  Portolu.  Columbi  e  spar- 
vieri.  Canne  al  vento.  Chiaroscuro.  Marianna  Sirca. 
La  madre.  Annalena  Bilsini.  —  v.  II.  Cenere.  La 
via  del  male.  II  Fanciullo  nascosto.  L'incendio  nell 
'oliveto.  II  segreto  deH'uomo  solitario.  Ii  flauto 
nel  bosco.  La  danza  della  collana.  A  sinistra.  * 

Hesse,  Hermann.  Steppenwolf  .  .  .  translated 
from  the  German  by  Basil  Creighton. 
Holt.  [1947.]  309  pp.  PT2617.E85S72  1947 

Kafka,  Franz.   Gesammelte  sennftcn.  [New 
York,  Sehocken  books.  1946.]   5  v. 
Edited  by   Max  Brod.         PT2621.A26  1945 
Contorts.  —  bd.  I.  Erziihlungen  und  kleine  prosa. 

—  bd.  II.  Amerika,  roman.  —  bd.  III.  Der  pro- 
zess,  roman.  —  bd.  IV.  Das  schloss,  roman.  ■ — 
bd.  V.  Beschreibung  eines  kampfes,  novellen,  skiz- 
zen,  aphorismen  aus  dem  nachlass. 

Levi,  Carlo.  Christ  stopped  at  Eboli,  the 
story  of  a  year.  Farrar,  Straus,  1047.  26S 
pp.  DG975.L78L43  1947 

Author's  reminiscences  of  a  year  spent  in  Lucania 
as  a  political  prisoner. 

Translated  from  the  Italian  by  Frances  Frenaye. 
Voigt,   Bcnhard.    Die    farmer    vom  Seeis- 
rivier,  roman.  Potsdam,  L.  Voggenreiter. 
[I943-]  440  pp.  Maps. 

*PT2645-  O  46F3  1943 

History  of  Literature.  Essays 

Bronson,  Bertrand  H.  Johnson  Agonistes,  & 
other    essays.    Cambridge    Univ.  Press. 

1946.  156  pp.  PR3553.B85  194S 
Contents.  —  Johnson  Agonistes.  —  BoswelPs  Bos- 
well.  —  Johnson's  'Irene.' 

Campbell,  Lily  Bess.  Shakespeare's  "His- 
toiies";  mirrors  of  Elizabethan  policy. 
San  Marine,  Calif.,  The  Huntington  Li- 
brary. 1947.  xi,  346  pp.  PR2982.C29 

Fcwlie,  Wallace.  Jacob's  night ;  the  religious 
renascence   in    France.    Sheed    &  Ward. 

1947.  116  pp.  DC365.F6 

Contents.  —  Peguy:    The   presence  of  a  prophet. 

—  Rouault:  The  art  of  a  painter.  —  Maintain: 
The  message  of  a  philosopher.  —  Myths  of  modern 
poetry. 

Muchnic,  Helen.  An  introduction  to  Russian 
literature.  Doubleday.  1947.  272  pp. 

PG2951.M8 

Saurat,  Denis.  Modern  French  literature, 
1870-1940.  Putnam.  [1947.]  192  op. 

PQ296.S35  1947 
Shackford,  Martha  Hale.  Studies  of  certain 
nineteenth  century  poets.  Natick,  Mass., 
The  Suburban  Press.  [1946.]  95  no. 

PR583.S45 


A  BULLETIN 

Spring,  Powell.  Novalis,  pioneer  of  the  spirit. 
Winter  Park,  Ha,,  The  Orange  Press. 
1946.  XZ47.8-1 

Poetry 

Eilis,  Vivian  Locke,  Collected  lyrical  poems. 

Introduction  by  Walter  De  La  Mare.  Mac- 

miilan  1947.  136  pp.  PR6009.L846A17 
Ferrero,    Felice    Giovanni.    Felice.  Ferrero's 

Abehrd.  Annapolis,  Md.,  F.  L.  Ferrero. 

[1946.]  149  pp.  Illus.,  music. 

PQ4815.E674A72 

Translated  from  the  Italian  original  with  editorial 
notes  and  essays  by  Frances  L.  Ferrero. 
"Dramatic    poem."-  —Introduction. 

Frost,  Robert.  Steeple  bush.  Holt.  [  1947.]  62 
PP-  .        PS3511.R94S7  1947 

Hay,  John.  A  private  history.  New  York, 
Duell,  Sloan  &  Pearce.  [  1947.]  61  pp. 

PS3515A9318P7 

Housman,  A.  E.  A  Shropshire  lad.  Water- 
ville,  Me.,  Colby  College  Libary.  1946.  133 
pp.  PR4809.H15A7  1946 

With  iWes  and  a  bibliography  by  Carl  J.  Weber. 
"Revised." 

Juan  de  la  Cruz,  Saint.  1542-1591.  The  com- 
plete works  of  Saint  John  of  the  Cross, 
doctor  of  the  church.  Westminister,  Md., 
The  Newman  Bookshop.  1946.  3  vols. 

BX890.J617  1964 

TransHtcd  from  the  critical  edition  of  P.  Silverio 
de  Santa  Teresa,  C.  D.  and  edited  by  E.  Allison 
Peers. 

Contents.  —  1.  General  introduction.  Ascent  of 
Mount  Carmel.  Dark  night  of  the  soul.  —  II.  Spir- 
itual canticle.  Poems.  —  III.  Living  flame  of  love. 
Cautions.  Spiritual  sentences  and  maxims.  Letters. 
Sundry  documents,  etc.  Appendices. 

Lowell,  Robert.  Lord  Weary's  castle.  Har- 
court,  Brace.  [1947.]  ix,  69  pp. 

PS3523.O  89L6  1947 

Maynard,  Theodore.  Collected  poems.  Intro- 
duction   by    Alfred    Noyes.  Macmillau. 

1946.  xvii,  222  pp.  PR6025.A95A17  1946 
Murray,  Joan.  Poems.  Foreword  by  W.  H. 

Auden.  Yale.  1947.  145  Pp. 

PR6025.U743A17  1947 
The  Yale  series  of  younger  poels. 

Warren,  Robert  Penn.  Selected  poems,  1923- 
1943.  Harcourt,  Brace.  [1947.]  viii,  12  pp. 

PS3545.A748S4  1947 

General 

Bulfinch,  Thomas,  1796-1867.  Bulfinch's  my- 
thology. Crowell  [1947  ]  xv,  957  pp. 

BL310.B76  1947 
The  age  of  fable ;  the  age  of  chivalry ;  legends  of 
Charlemagne.  With  dictionary  index ;  illustrated  by 
Elinore  Blaisdell. 

Cabell,  James  Branch.  Let  me  lie,  being  in 
the  main  an  ethnological  account  of  the  re- 
markable commonwealth  of  Virginia  and 
the  making  of  its  history.  Farrar,  Straus. 

1947.  xvi,  286  pp.  F227.C213 
Contents.  —  Quiet  along  the  Potomac.  —  The 
first  Virginian.  —  Myths  of  the  Old  Dominion. 
—  Colonel  Esmond  of  Virginia.  —  Concerns  heirs 
and  assigns.  —  Mr.  Ritchie's  Richmond.  —  Almost 
touching  the  Confederacy.  —  General  Lee  of  Vir- 
ginia. —  Is  of  Southern  ladies.  —  "Published  in 
Richmond,  Virginia."  —  Miss  Glasgow  of  Vir- 
ginia. —  As  to  our  life  and  letters. 

Giatzer,  Nahum  N.,  editor.  In  time  and  eter- 
nity, a  Jewish  reader.  New  York,  Schock- 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


357 


en  Books.  [1946.]  255  pp.  PN6067.G45 

An  anthology  of  post-Biblical  Jewish  literature. 
"The  greater  part  of  this  book  was  rendered  into 
English  by  Olga  Marx." 

Gregory,  Isabella  Augusta,  Lady,  1849-1932. 
Lady  Gregory's  journals,  1016-1030,  edited 
by  Lennox  Robinson.  Macmillan.  1947. 
341  PP-  PR4728.G5Z52 

Hoagland,  Kathleen,  editor.  1000  years  of 
Irish  poetry,  the  Gaelic  and  Anglo-Irish 
poets  from  pagan  times  to  the  present. 
Devin-Adair.  1947.  liv,  830  pp.  PB1424.K6 

"Notes  on  the  poets,  the  translators  and  the  great 
books,"  pp.  773-803- 

Humphrey,  Zephine.  A  book  of  New  Eng- 
land. Howell,  Soskin.  [1947.]  292  pp. 

Illustrated  by  Thomas  P.   Robinson.  F6.H6 

Kafka,  Franz.  Great  wall  of  China;  stories 
and  reflections.  New  York,  Schocken  Books. 
[1946.]  xix,  315  pp.  PT2521.A26B32  1946 

"Translated  from  the  German  by  Wilia  and  Ldwi.i 
Muir." 

Lanier,  Sidney,  1842-1881.  The  centennial 
edition  of  the  works  of  Sidney  Lanier. 
[Baltimore,  Johns  Hopkins  Press.  1945.] 
10  v.  Illus.  PS2200.1945 

Bibliography,  compiled  by  Philip  Graham  and 
Frieda  C.  Thies,  v.  6,  pp.  [3771—412. 
Contents.  —  I.  Poems  and  Poem  outlines,  edited 
by  C.  R.  Anderson.  —  II.  The  sciences  of  Eng- 
lish verse  and  Essays  on  music,  edited  by  P.  F. 
Baum.  —  III.  Shakespeare  and  his  forerunners, 
edited  by  Kemp  Malone.  —  IV.  The  English 
novel  and  Essays  on  literature,  edited  by  Clarence 
Gohdes ;  and  Kemr>  Malone.  —  V.  Tiger-lilies  and 
Southern  prose,  edited  by  Garland  Greever,  assisted 
by  Cecil  Abernethy.  —  VI.  Florida  and  miscellane- 
ous prose,  edited  by  Philip  Graham.  —  VII. 
Letters,  i8<;7-i86S,  edited  by  C.  R.  Anderson  and 
A.  H.  Staike.  —  VIII.  Letters.  1869-1S73,  edited 
by  C.  R.  Anderson  and  A.  H.  Starke.  —  IX, 
Letters,  1 874-1 S77.  edited  by  C.  R.  Anderson  and 
A.  H.  Starke.  —  X.  Letters,  1S78-1S81.  Appendi- 
ces, calendar  of  letters  (pp.  379-400)  and  index, 
edited  by  C.  R.  Anderson  and  A.  H.  Starke. 

Lemonnier,  Leon.  Par  ici  l'Amerique.  Paris, 
Ariane.  [1946.]  269  pp.  E169.L52 

Paul,  Elliot.  Linden  on  the  Saugus  Branch. 
Random  House.  [1947.]  401  op. 

PS3531A852L5 

Military  Science 

Burchett,  Wilfred  G.  Wingate's  phantom 
army.  London,  F.  Mullen  [1046.]  195  pp. 
Plates.  D767.fj.B82 

Critchell,  Laurence.  Four  stars  of  hell.  With 
a  foreword  by  Lieutenant  General  Lewis 
Brereton.  New  York,  D.  X.  McMullen 
Co.  [1947.]  xii,  353  PP.  Maps.  D769.347.C7 

"Story  of  the  501st  Parachute  Infantry  Regiment." 
— Foreword. 

Field,  James  A.  The  Japanese  at  Leyte  Gulf; 
the  Sho  operation.  Princeton.  1947.  xiv, 
162  pp.  Plates.  D777.F5 

Jacobs,  James  Ripley.  The  beginning  of  the 
U.  S.  Army,  17S3-1812.  Princeton.  1947. 
ix,  410  pp.  Illus.  E181.J2 

Shores,  Louis.  Highways  in  the  sky;  the 
story  of  the  AACS.  New  York,  Barnes  & 
Noble.  1947.  269  pp.  Illus.  D790.S52 

Stout,  Wesey  W.  "Tanks  are  mighty  fine 
things."  Detroit,  Chrysler  Corp.  1946.  144 
pp.  Illus.  UG446.5.S7 

A  discussion  of  the  tanks  and  other  weapons  de- 
signed by   the  Chrysler  corporation. 


Music 

Abbiati,  Franco.  Storia  della  musica.  Milano, 
Garzanti,  [1944-1946.]  5  vols.  Illus. 

*MLi6o.Ai2S8 

Bauer,  Marion,  and  Ethel  R.  Peyser.  Music 
through  the  ages;  a  narrative  for  student 
and  layman.  Rev.  ed.  Putnam.  [1946.]  xiii, 
632  pp.  Illus.  Music.  ML160.B334  1946 

Korte,  Werner.  Robert  Schumann.  Potsdam, 
Akademische  verlagsgesellschaft  Athena- 
ion.  [1937.]   123  pp.  Illus.  Music. 

*ML4io.S4K66 

Krenek,  Ernst,  editor.  Hamline  studies  in 
musicology.  St.  Paul,  Hamline  University. 
1945-47.  2  vols.  ML174.K74H3 

Contents.  —  [v.  1]  An  analysis  of  the  design  of 
the  "Caput"  masses  by  Dufay  and  Okeghem  in 
their  metric  and  rhythmic  aspects,  by  R.  G.  Har- 
ris. A  contribution  to  the  problem  of  mode  in  me- 
diaeval music,  by  Virginia  Seay.  A  study  of 
linear  design  in  Gregorian  chant  and  music  writ- 
ten in  the  twelve-tone  technique,  by  Martha  John- 
son. —  v.  2.  A  discussion  of  the  treatment  of 
dissonances  in  Okeghem's  masses  is  compared  with 
the  contrapuntal  theory  of  Johannes  Tinctoris,  by 
Ernst  Krenek.  A  study  of  conflicting  key-signa- 
tures in  Francesco  Landini's  music,  by  Martha 
Johnson. 

McCoy,  Guy,  editor.  Portraits  of  the  world's 
best-known  musicians.  Philadelphia,  Theo- 
dore Presser.  [19.16.]  251  pp.  Ports. 

*ML87.E78 

"An  alphabetical  collection  of  notable  musical  per- 
sonalities of  the  world  covering  the  entire  history 
of  music." 

McHose,  Allen  Irvine.  The  contrapuntal  har- 
monic technique  of  the  iSth  century. 
Crofts.  1947.  xvi,  433  pp.  Illus.  Music. 

MT50.M153 

Seashore,  Carl  E.  In  search  of  beauty  in  mu- 
sic, a  scientific  approach  to  musical  esthe- 
tics. New  York,  Ronald.  [1947.]  xvi.  380 
pp.  Illus.  ML3845.S308 

Stefan-Gru^nfeldt,  Paul.  Franz  Schubert. 
Wien,  Ullstein  verlag.  [1Q47.I  278  pp. 

ML410.S3S8  1947 


Philosophy 


Rand,  Edward  Kennard.  Cicero  in  the  court- 
room of  St.  Thomas  Aquinas.  Milwaukee, 
Marquette  Univ.  Press.  1946.  11.5  pp. 

B765.T54R25 

Sartre,  Jean  Paul.  Existentialism.  New  York. 

Philosophical  Library.  [T047.]  02  pp. 

BD355.S322  1947 
V/hitehead,  Alfred  North.  Essays  in  science 

and    philosophy.    Philosophical  Library. 

[1947.]  vi,  348  PP-  -  Q175AV62 


Politics  and  Government 

Aristoteles.  Politica.  Oxford.  Clarendon  Press. 
1946.  lxxvi,  411  pp.        JC71.A41B3  1946 

Translated,  with  an  introduction,  notes,  and  appen- 
dices, by  Ernest  Barker. 

Atiyah,  Edward.  An  Arab  tells  his  story,  a 
study  in  loyalties.  London,  J.  Murray, 
viii,  229  pp.  Plates.     DS98.5.A85A3  IQ47 

Binkley,  Wilfred  E.  President  and  Congress. 
Knopf.  1947.  viii,  312  pp.  JK516.B5  1947 
First  published  in  1937  as  The  powers  of  the  presi- 
dent. This  edition  has  been  rewritten  and  expanded. 


358  MORE  BOOKS: 

Cassirer,  Ernst.  The  myth  of  the  state.  Yale, 
xii,  303  PP-  JC251.C3  1946 

Coale,  Ansley  J.  The  problem  of  reducing 
vulnerability  to  atomic  bombs.  Princeton. 
1947.  xvi,  116  pp.  UF767.C6 

Eggleston,  Wilfred.  The  road  to  nationhood: 
a  chronicle  of  Dominion-Provincial  re- 
lations. Toronto,  1946.  JL15.E4  1946 
An  account  of  Canada's  attempt  to  change  from  a 
confederation  to  a  unified  nation. 

Ferguson,  John  H.  and  Dean  E.  McHenry. 
The  American  federal  government.  Mc- 
Graw-Hill. 1947.  viii,  818  pp.  Illnc. 

JK274.F36 

Franklin,  William  McHenry.  Protection  of 
foreign  interests,  a  study  in  diplomatic 
and  consular  practice.  Washington,  D.  C, 
U.  S.  Govt.  Print.  Off.  [  194/1  vii.  328  pp. 

JX1683.F6F7 

Halifax,  Edward  Frederick  Lindley  Wood, 
1st  carl  of.  The  American  speeches  of  the 
Earl  of  Halifax,  with  a  preface  by  Ham- 
ilton Fish  Armstrong.  Oxford  Univ.  Press. 
1047.  xiii,  449  pp.  D743.9.H28 

Gass-Pleshing,  Max.  Liberation  from  yester- 
day, by  Max  Glass.  New  York,  Beech- 
hurst  Press.  [1947.]  672  pp.  Illus. 

On  the  problems  of  peace.  CB425-G57 

Heimann,  Eduard.  Freedom  and  order,  les- 
sons from  the  war.  Scribner.  1947-  xiv,  344 
pp.  JC423.H465 

Dr.  Heimann  is  now  Dean  of  the  Graduate  Schoo! 
of  the  New  School  for  Social  Research. 

Hegedus,  Adam  de.  Patriotism  or  peace? 
Scribner.  1947.  266  pp.  JC311.H384 

Hocking,  William  Ernest.  Freedom  of  the 
press,  a  framework  of  principle.  Chicago 
Univ.  Press,  f  1947-1  xi,  242  pp.  Z657.H7 
A  report  from  the  Commission  on  Freedom  of  the 
Press. 

Hughes,  Emmet  John.  Report  from  Spain. 
Holt.  [  1947  I  323  pp.  DP?7o.H8 

Institute  for  religious  and  social  studies.  Jew- 
ish Theological  seminary  of  America.  Foun- 
dations of  democracy,  a  series  of  addresses, 
edited  by  F.  Ernest  Johnson.  New  York 
and  London,  Published  by  the  Institute 
for  Religious  &  Social  Studies.  [1947. 1  ix, 
278  pp.  JC423.I  5 

Contents.  —  The  crisis  in  modern  democracy,  by 

F.  E.  Johnson.  - — Classical  origins,  by  Irwin  Ed- 
man.  —  Hebrew  sources:  Scriptures  and  Talmud, 
by    Louis    Finkelstein.   —   Mediaeval    sources,  by 

G.  N.  Shuster.  —  Reformation  sources,  by  J.  T. 
McNeill.  —  Humanistic  sources,  bv  H.  M.  Kal- 
len.  —  Literary  sources,  bv  A.  N.  Wilder.  — 
The  founding  fathers,  by  M.  F.  X.  Millar.  — 
Democracy  and  economic  liberalism,  by  G.  H. 
Houston.  —  The  role  of  economic  groups,  by  A.  J. 
Muste.  —  Democracy  in  a  collective  aee.  by 
G.  B.  Watson.  —  Education  for  freedom,  by  Soort 
Buchanan.  —  Democracy  in  educational  practice, 
by  H.  S.  Elliott.  —  Democratic  conceptions  of 
authority,  revelation,  and  pronbecy,  by  F.  E. 
Johnson.  —  Democracy  and  ethical  realism,  by  J. 
W.  Nixon.  —  Organized  religion  and  the  practice 
of  democracy,  by  H.  P.  Douglass.  —  Democracy 
and  Zionism,  by  M.  M.  Kap'?n. 

Isaacs,  Harold  Robert.  .  .  .  No  peace  for 
Asia.  Macmillan.  1947.  x.  295  pp.  DS35.I  8 

Jackson,  Robert  H.  The  Xiirnberg  case  as 
presented  by  Robert  H.  Jackson,  chief 
counsel  for  the  United  States,  together 
with  other  documents.  Knopf.  1947.  xviii, 
268  pp.  Plates.  D804.G42J32 


A  BULLETIN 

Karaka,  Dosoo  Framjee.  I've  shed  my  tears, 
a  candid  view  of  resurgent  India.  Apple- 
ton-Century.  [1947.]  280  pp.  DS423.K3 

Kelley,  Douglas  M.  22  cells  in  Nuremberg;  a 
psychiatrist  examines  the  Nazi  criminals. 
New  York,  Greenberg.  [1047.]  x.  245  pp. 

DD253.K38  1947 

Langer,  Robert.  Seizure  of  territory,  the 
Stimson  doctrine  and  related  principles  in 
legal  theory  and  diplomatic  practice. 
Princeton.  1947.  viii,  313  pp.  JX4053.L3 

McCallum,  Ronald  Buchanan,  and  Allison 
Readman.  The  British  general  election  of 
1945.  Oxford  Univ.  Press.  1947.  xv,  311 
pp.  Illus.  JN061.M15 

McCune,  Wesley.  The  nine  young  men.  Har- 
per. [1947.I  viii,  299  pp.  Illus.  JK1561.M3 

A  study  of  the  past  ten  years  in  the  history  of  the 
Supreme  Court,  with  profiles  of  the  new  Justices. 

McNeill,  William  Hardy.  The  Greek  dilem- 
ma; war  and  aftermath.  Lippincott.  1947- 
291  pp.  Illus.  Maps.  DF849.M3 

Oneal,  James,  and  G.  A.  Werner.  American 
communism,  a  critical  analysis  of  its  ori- 
gins, development  and  programs.  Rev.  ed. 
Dutton.  1947.  416  pp.     HX86.O  5  1947 

Pollard,  James  E.  The  presidents  and  the 
press.  Macmillan.  1947.  xiii,  866  pp, 

PN4888.P7P6 

Roucek,  Joseph  S.,  editor.  Governments  and 
politics  abroad.  Funk  &  Wagnalls.  1947- 
xi.  585  pp.  *JFSi.R58 

Strohm,  John  L.  Just  tell  the  truth.  Scribner. 
1947.  xii.  250  pp.  Plates.  DK32.S87 

The  uncensored  story  of  how  the  common  people 
live  behind  the  Russian  iron  curtain. 

Wheare,  Kenneth  C.  Federal  government.  Ox- 
ford Univ.  Press.  1947.  278  pp.  9353.A42 

Issued  under  the  auspices  of  the  Royal  Institute  of 
International  Affairs. 

Psychology 

Anspacher,  Louis  K.  Challenge  of  the  un- 
known; exploring  the  psychic  world.  New- 
York,  Current  Books.  1047.  327  op. 

BF.1031.A5 

Probst,  John  B.  Measuring  and  rating  em- 
ployee value.  New  York,  Ronald.  [1047.] 
xi,  166  pp.  g331.113A1.19 

U.  S.  Army  air  forces.  Aviation  psychology 
program  research  reports.  Report  no.  3. 
U.  S.  Govt,  print,  off.,  1947.  Illus. 

*UG633.A375 

Religion.  Theology 

Albright,  William  F.  Archaeology  and  the 
religion  of  Israel.  Baltimore,  The  Johns 
Hopkins  Press.  1946.  xii,  2"?8  pp. 

BStt8o  A4  ioa6 

Cicognani,  Amleto  Giovanni  archbishop.  Can- 
on law.  I.  Introduction  to  the  study  of  can- 
on law.  II.  History  of  the  sources  of  can- 
on law.  III.  A  commentary  on  book  I  of 
the  code  ...  2d  revised  edition.  Author- 
ized English  version  by  the  Rev.  Joseph 
M.  O'Hara  .  .  .  and  the  Rt.  Rev.  Msgr. 
Francis  J.  Brennan.  Westminster,  Md., 
Newman  bookshop.  [1947. 1  xiv,  892  pp. 

BX1935.C5  1947 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


359 


Cocmaraswamy,  Ananda  K.  Am  I  my  broth- 
er's keeper?  With  an  introduction  by  Rob- 
ert Allerton  Parker.  John  Day.  [1947.] 
xiii,  1 10  pp.  Illus.  CB251.C63 

Am  I  my  brother's  keeper?  —  The  bugbear  of 
literacy.  Paths  that  lead  to  the  same  summit.  — 
Eastern  wisdom  and  western  knowledge.  —  East 
and  West.  —  "Spiritual  paternity"  and  the  "puppet 
complex."  —  Gradation,  evolution,  and  reincar- 
nation. 

Dodd,  C.  H.  The  Bible  to-day.  Macmillan. 
1947.  ix,  168  pp.  BS511.D568  1946 

"  'Open  lectures'  Riven  tinder  the  auspices  of  the 
Divinity  faculty  of  the  University  of  Cambridge." 
— Preface. 

Dunlap,  Knight.  Religion;  its  functions  in 
human  life,  a  stud}'  of  religion  from  the 
point  of  view  of  psychology.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1946.  xi,  362  pp.  BL48.D8 

"Important  references  on  religion  and  religions:" 
PP.  345-358. 

Eddy,  Sherwood.  God  in  history.  New  York, 
Association  Press.  1947.  283  pp.  D16.9.E26 

Jones,  Rufus  M.  The  luminous  trail.  Macmil- 
lan.  1947.  ix,   165  pp.  BR1702.J6 

The  distinguished  Quaker  theologian  interprets  the 
contributions  of  saints  and  other  spiritual  inno- 
vators, including  Erasmus,  William  Law,  and  the 
New  England  divine  Horace  Bushnell. 

Jurji,  Edward  J.,  editor.  The  great  religions 
of  the  modern  world;  Confucianism,  Tao- 
ism, Hinduism,  Buddhism,  Shintoism,  Is- 
lam, Judaism,  Eastern  Orthodoxy,  Roman 
Catholicism,  Protestantism.  Princeton, 
Princeton  University  Press.  1947.  387  pp. 

BL80J87 

Kennedy,  Hugh  A.  Studdert,  1877-1943.  Mrs. 

Eddy,  her  life,  her  work  and  her  place  in 

history.   San  Francisco,   Farallon  Press. 

[1947.]  xiv,  507  pp.  BX69Q5.K43 
Miller,  Alexander.  The  Christian  significance 

of  Karl  Marx.  Macmillan.  1047.  117  pp. 

9335.4A53 

Maclver,  R.  M..  editor.  Unity  and  difference 
in  American  life,  a  series  of  addresses  and 
discussions.  Harper.  [1947.]  168  op. 

E184.A1  1  5 

Contents.  —  The  common  ground:  Three  oaths  to 
the  common  good  [by]  Louis  Finkclstein.  The  rise 
of  an  American  culture  [by]  Allan  Nrvirs.  What 
common  ground  has  America  won?  IByl  L.  K. 
Frark.  —  The  dividing  issues:  The  racial  issues 
[by  E.  F.  Frazier.  The  ethnic  issue  fbvl  Vflhial- 
mur  Stefansson.  The  economic  issue  [hv  Eli  Gins- 
berg. The  religious  issue  [by]  R.  W.  Sockman.  — 
What  can  we  do  about  them:  What  the  schools 
can  do  [by!  C.  R.  Miller.  What  the  press  can 
do  [by!  G.  W.  Johnson.  What  business  can  do  [hvl 
E.  L.  Beraays.  What  the  courts  can  do  fbvl  W. 
H.  Hamilton.  What  we  al!  can  do  [bv]  R.  M. 
Maclver. 

Rail,  Harris  Franklin.  According  to  Paul. 
Scribner.  1947.  xv,  272  pr>. 

BS-26si.R?8  1947 

Sherjherd,  Massey  H..  Jr.  and  Sherman  E. 
Johnson,  editors.  Munera  studiosa.  Cam- 
bridge, Mass.,  The  Episcopal  th^nlocriral 
school.  1946.  ix.  182  pp.  BS/U3.M8 
Contents.  -  The  Psalms,  by  C.  L.  Tavlor.  jr.  — 
A  twice-buried  apocalypse,  bv  C.  C.  Torrey.  — • 
Superfhirus  kai  in  the  Lord's  prayer  and  else- 
where, bv  H.  J.  Cadbury.  —  The  sources  of  Paul- 
ine mysticism,  by  C.  C.  McCown.  —  Post-Pauline 
Panlinism.  by  B.  S.  Easton.  —  A  venture  in  the 
source  analysis  of  Acts,  by  M  H.  Shepherd,  jr.  — 
A  subsidiary  motive  for  the  writing  of  the  Did- 
ache,  by  S.  E.  Johnson.  —  Archaic  crucifixion  ico- 
nography, by  H.  R.  Willoughbv.  -  Notes  on  book- 
burning,   by  A.    S.   Pease.    Religion   and  poetry. 


by  F.  C.  Grant.  —  Bibliography  of  the  writings  of 
William  Ilenrv  Paine  Hatch,  compiled  by  Professor 
Hatch  (p.  [1791-182). 

Walsh,  William  Thomas.  Our  Lady  of  Fa- 
tima.  Macmillan.  1947.  ix,  227  pp. 

BT650.F3W33 

Science 

Mathematics 

Allen,  Edward  S.  Six-place  tables.  McGraw- 
Hill.   1947.  xxiii,  232  pp.  Plus. 

QA47A5  1947 

"A  selection  of  tables  of  squares,  cubes,  square 
roots,  cube  roots,  fifth  roots  and  powers,  circum- 
ferences and  areas  of  circles,  common  logarithms  of 
numbers  and  of  the  trigonometric  functions,  the 
natural  trigonometric  functions,  natural  logarithms, 
exponential  and  hyperbolic  functions,  and  integrals, 
with  explanatory  notes." 

Smith,  Edward  S.,  Meyer  Salkover,  and 
Howard  K.  Justice.  Unified  calculus. 
Wiley.  [1947.]  x,  507  pp.  QA303.S62 

Companion  volume  to  the  authors'  Calculus. 

Miscellaneous 

DeMille,  John  B.  Strategic  minerals,  a  sum- 
mary of  uses,  world  output,  stock  piles, 
procurement.  McGraw-Hill.  1947.  viii,  626 
pp.  Tables.  TN153.D43 

Beals,  Ralph  Leon.  Archaeological  studies 
in  northeast  Arizona.  Univ.  of  California 
Press.  1945.  x,  235  pp.  Illus. 

2331.64  v.  44  no.i 

A  report  on  the  archaeological  work  of  the  Rain- 
bow hridge-Mcnnment  valley  expedition,  by  Ralph 
L.  Beals.  George  W.  Brainerd.  and  Watson  Smith. 
With  appendices  by  John  T.  Hack  and  Volney  H. 
Jores." 

Mann,  Wilfred  Basil.  The  cyclotron.  With 
a  foreword  by  Professor  E.  O.  Lawrence. 
London,  Methuen.  [1940.]  xi,  92  pp.  Illus. 

8247.1 

Potter,  Raph  K.,  George  A.  Kopp,  and  Har- 
riet G.  Green.  Visible  Speech.  New  York, 
Van  Nostrand.  1947.  xvi,  441  po.  Illus. 

TK6500.P65 

Sociology 

Underhill,  Ruth  Murray.  Papago  Indian  re- 
ligion. Columbia.  1946.  vi,  350  pp.  Dinars. 

E99.P25U518 

Wheelwright,  Mary  C.  Hail  chant  and  water 
chant.  Santa  Fe,  N.  M.,  Museum  of  Nava- 
jo Ceremonial  Art.  1946.  237  pp.  Col. 
plates.  *407i.02-i32 

Technology 

Building  and  Construction 

Carr,  Aute  Lee.  A  practical  guide  to  pre- 
fabricated houses.  Harper.  [i947  ]  viii,  in 
pp.  Illus.,  plans  8117.08-303 

Hann,  George  R.  The  book  of  150  low  cost 
homes.  Sydney,  Australia.  Building  Pub- 
lishing Co.   [1946?]   170  pp.  Illus. 

8117.05-576 

"For  the  individualistic  home  owner,  with  enough 
of  variety  to  meet  the  tastes  of  all  who  dis'ike 
being  ster»otyped."  Edited  and  prepared  by  Flor- 
ence M.  Taylor. 


360 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Miscellaneous 

May,  Earl  Chapin.  Century  of  silver,  1847- 
1947;  Conneclicut  Yankees  and  a  noble 
metal.  New  York,  R.  M.  McBride.  [  1947.] 
xi,  388  pp.  XI  plates.  8176.05-129 

Hollomon,  John  H.,  and  Leonard  D.  Jaffe. 
Ferrous  metallurgical  design;  design  prin- 
ciples for  fully  hardened  steel.  New  York, 
Wiley.   [1947.]  x,  346  pp.  Illus.  8025.284 

Brown,  Samuel  P.  Air  conditioning  and  ele- 
ments of  refrigeration.  McGraw-Hill.  1947. 
McGraw-Hill.  1947.  ix,  644  pp.  Illus. 

4037.206 

Christie,  Hugh  Kidd.  and  James  McKinney. 

The  railway  foreman  and  his  job.  Chicago, 

American  Technical  Society.  1947.  28=;  pp. 

Illus.  TF518.C47 
Dunlap,  Orrin  E.,  Jr.  The  future  of  television. 

Rev.  ed.  Harper.  [1947.]  xi,  194  pp.  Plates. 

8017J.75 

Ley,  Willy.  Rockets  and  space  travel;  the 
future  of  flight  beyond  the  stratosphere. 
Viking.  1947.  viii,  374  pp.  4036D.36R 

''Revised  and  enlarged  edition  of  Rockets."  Bib- 
liography, pp.  357-365. 

Newcomb,  Rexford,  Jr.  Ceramic  whitewares; 
history,  technology  and  applications.  Pit- 
man. [1947-]  xii,  3I3PP-  Illus.  *8o33.i58 

Pratt,  Fletcher,  and  Robeson  Bailey.  A  man 
and  his  meals  .  .  .  illustrated  by  Inga. 
Holt.  [1947.]  xx,  251pp.  Illus.  TX715.P9 

U.  S.  Coast  Guard.  Shipyard  management 
for  welding.  [Washington,  U.  S.  Govt. 
Print.  Off.]  1946.  iv,  12  pp.  Tables. 

TS227.U54  1946 

Vogel,  Edward  H.,  Jr.,  and  others.  The  prac- 
tical brewer,  a  manual  for  the  brewing  in- 
dustry, by  Edward  H.  Vogel,  jr.  .  .  .  Frank 
H.  Schwaiger  .  .  .  Henry  G.  Leonhardt 
.  .  .  [andl  J.  Adolf  Merten  .  .  .  Assisted  by 
editorial  board:  Phil  Berkes,  F  .P.  Brog- 
niez,  M.  G.  Gabler  [and  others]  .  .  .  [New 
York,  Master  Brewers'  Ass'n  of  America. 
1946.]  228  pp.  Illus.  8031L.60 

Yost,  Don  M.,  and  others.  The  rare-earth  ele- 


ments and  their  compounds,  by  Don  M. 
Yost  .  .  .  Horace  Russell,  Jr.  .  .  .  and  Clif- 
ford S.  Garner.  Wiley.  [1947.]  ix,  92  pp. 
Tables.  Diagrs.  *8282.8 

Electronics 

Richter,  Walther.  Fundamentals  of  industrial 
electronic  circuits.  McGraw-Hill.  1947. 
xviii,  569  pp.   Illus.  8017L.67 

Ryder,  John  Douglas.  Electronic  engineering 
principles.  Prentice-Hall.  1947.  ix,  397  pp 
Illus.  8017L.68 

Harrison,  Arthur  Edward.  Klystron  tubes. 
McGraw-Hill.  1947.  x,  271  pp.  Illus. 

8017L.66 

A  complete  revision  of  a  pamphlet  first  published 
in  1042  under  i!-e  title  Klystron  Technical  Manu- 
al, and  included  in  a  book  of  the  same  title  dis- 
tributed by  the  Sperry  Gyroscope  Co.,  in  1044. 

Pratt,  Lyde  Stuart.  The  chemistry  and  physics 
of  organic  pigments.  Wiley.  [1947.]  vii, 
359  PP-  Illus.  *8o?2A.i40 

Procter,  Robert  Videtto,  and  T.  L/White. 
Rock  tunneling  with  steed  supports. 
Youngstown,  O.  [The  Commercial  shear- 
ing &  stamping  co.]  1946.  271  pp.  Illus. 

4025.215 

With  an  introduction  to  tunnel  geology,  by  Karl 
Terzaghi. 


Travel  and  Description 

Doughty,  Charles  M.  Travels  in  Arabia  De- 
serta,  with  an  introduction  by  T.  E.  Law- 
rence. Random  House.  [1947.]  674  pp. 

DS207.D73  1947 

New  and  definitive  edition  in  one  volume. 

Mitchell,  Dorothy.  Along  the  Maine  coast. 
Whittlesey  House,  McGraw-Hill.  [1947.] 
97  pp.  Illus.,  col.  plates.  F25.M52 

"Pictured  by  W.  N.  Wilson,  text  by  Dorothy 
Mitchell." 

Thompson,  Laura.  Guam  and  its  people. 
Princeton.  1947.  xiii,  367  pt>.  Plates. 

DU647.T5  1947 

"With  a  village  journal  by  Jesus  C.  Barcinas." 


More  Books 

The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
Volume  XXII,  Number  10 


Contents 


THE  QUATER-CENTENARY  OF  CERVANTES  363 
By  Zoltan  Haraszti 

THE  WATERCOLOR  DRAWINGS  OF  ROWLANDSOX  367 
(with  facsimile) 
By  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman 

LETTERS  BY  GEORGE  GISSING  376 

TEN  BOOKS:  SHORT  REVIEWS 

James  F.  Byrnes :  Speaking  Frankly  387 

Allan  Nevins:  Ordeal  of  the  Union  387 

Bernard  DeV oto :  Across  the  Wide  Missouri  388 

Louis  B.  Wright :  The  Atlantic  Frontier  388 

James  Duncan  Phillips :  Salem  and  the  Indies  388 

Ralph  Roeder:  Juarez  and  his  Mexico  389 

Sir  Osbert  Sitwell :  Great  Morning!  389 

Emil  Ludwig:  Doctor  Freud  389 

Van  Wyck  Brooks:  The  Times  of  Melville  and  Whitman  390 

F.  O.  Matthiessen  :  The  James  Family  390 

LIBRARY  NOTES 

Thomas  Rowlandson  391 

Avellaneda's  Don  Quixote  in  Dutch  391 

Ouida  Denies  an  American  Rumor  391 

Lectures  and  Concerts  392 

Lowell  Lectures  392 

LIST  OF  NEWLY- ACQUIRED  BOOKS  393 


** 
* 


EDITOR:  ZOLTAN  HARASZTI 


More  Books  is  published  monthly,  except  in  July  and  August,  by  the  Trustees 
of  the  Public  Library  of  the  City  of  Boston  at  230  Dartmouth  Street,  Boston  17, 
for  free  distribution  at  the  Library  and  its  Branches,  and  at  a  subscription  price  of 
fifty  cents  a  year  by  mail.  Entered  as  second-class  matter,  March  16,  1926,  at 
the  Post  Office  at  Boston,  Mass.,  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912.  Printed  at 
the  Boston  Public  Library,  15-17  Blagden  St.,  December  1947,  Vol.  XXII,  No.  10 


Issued  monthly  by  the  Trustees,  for  free  distribution ; 
by  mail,  fifty  cents  a  year. 


More  Books 


The  Bulletin  of  the  Boston  Public  Library 
DECEMBER,  1947 

The  Quater-Centenary  of  Cervantes 

THE  four-hundredth  anniversary  of  the  birth  of  Miguel  de  Cervantes 
is  being-  celebrated  this  year  throughout  the  world.  The  Boston  Pub- 
lic Library,  whose  Ticknor  Collection  is  extremely  rich  in  first  and  rare 
editions  of  the  great  Spanish  novelist,  poet,  and  playwright,  has  arranged 
therefore  an  exhibition  of  his  works  in  its  Treasure  Room. 

The  Library  has  a  set  of  the  first  edition  of  Don  Quixote,  the  first 
part  printed  in  1605  and  the  second  in  161 5  by  Ivan  de  la  Cuesta  in  Ma- 
drid. Ticknor,  following  Martin  Navarrete's  biography,  thought  that  he 
possessed  the  first  issue  of  Part  I.  One  variation  makes  it  easy  for  the 
collector  to  know  which  copy  he  has :  the  words  "de  Castilla,  Aragon, 
y  Portugal,"  after  "Con  privilegio,"  occur  only  on  the  title-page  of  the 
second  issue.  Unfortunately,  the  Library's  copy  lacks  the  title-page!  Two 
other  editions  were  published  in  1605,  one  at  Lisbon  and  another  at  Valen- 
cia. The  Library  owns  a  copy  of  the  latter.  It  also  has  the  two  volumes 
of  the  Brussels  edition,  printed  respectively  in  1607  and  1616. 

These  editions  of  Part  I  appeared  before  Cervantes  even  thought  of 
correcting  the  many  errors  of  printing;  his  emendations  were  first  given 
in  the  Madrid  edition  of  1608.  "Having  received  the  final  corrections  of 
Cervantes,"  Ticknor  wrote  in  his  copy,  "this  edition  has  been  followed 
ever  since  and  is  the  one  most  sought  for  and  valued."  The  Library  also 
has  several  other  early  editions.  In  161 1  one  was  published  at  Brussels, 
the  last  edition  of  Part  I  before  the  appearance  of  Part  II.  "There  is  no 
lack  of  errors  of  the  press,"  Ticknor  again  comments,  "as  usual  in  Brus- 
sels reprints  of  Spanish  books."  The  plates  in  the  1672-73  edition  were 
the  first  ever  made  for  Don  Quixote,  though  they  had  been  used  be- 
fore in  the  edition  of  1662.  The  first  volume  contains  the  inscription: 
"Presented  to  Mr.  George  Ticknor  by  his  friend  Jas.  Freeman."  Ticknor 
himself  added,  "in  1806."  He  was  fifteen  years  old  at  the  time.  There  is 
also  a  set  of  the  Paris  edition  of  1814.  On  the  first  leaf  of  the  first  volume 
is  written :  "Geo.  Ticknor,  Perpignan,  29  April,  1818."  To  this  was  added 


363 


364 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


later  in  pencil :  "Just  entering  Spain.  Most  of  the  notes  were  made  the 
following-  summer  when  I  read  the  D.  Quixote  with  Conde,  in  Madrid." 

Few  literary  forgeries  have  become  as  famous  as  the  alleged  Second 
Part  of  Don  Quixote,  published  under  the  pseudonym  of  Avellaneda  in 
1614,  before  Cervantes  had  finished  writing  his  own  story.  "This  work," 
Ticknor  writes,  "if  not  without  merits  in  some  respects,  is  generally  low 
and  dull,  and  would  now  be  forgotten,  if  it  were  not  connected  with  the 
fame  of  Don  Quixote."  Cervantes  helped  to  immortalize  the  book.  En- 
raged by  the  imposture,  in  the  last  chapters  of  his  work  he  let  himself 
loose  upon  Avellaneda.  The  Library's  copy  is  of  the  first  edition.  "It  is 
expurgated  in  the  other  editions,"  Ticknor  remarks,  "and  this  volume  has 
become  one  of  the  'rarest'  Spanish  books." 

Innumerable  editions  of  Don  Quixote  have  been  printed  in  Spain  and 
in  foreign  countries.  The  Library  owns  dozens  of  them.  Only  a  few  are 
mentioned  here:  the  Tonson  edition,  published  in  London  in  1738  in  four 
large  quartos,  with  sixty-eight  splendid  plates  drawn  by  John  Vander- 
bank  and  engraved  by  Vander  Gucht;  the  beautiful  edition  by  the  Span- 
ish Academy,  Madrid  1780,  with  illustrations  by  Joseph  del  Castillo,  An- 
tonio Carnicero,  Joseph  Brunete,  and  others;  the  three-volume  edition 
published  at  Salisbury,  England,  in  1781  with  notes  by  the  Reverend  John 
Bowie,  who  devoted  fourteen  years  of  unwearied  labor  to  the  task;  the 
one  edited  by  Juan  Antonio  Pellicer,  Madrid  1797-98,  with  notes  that 
Ticknor  regarded  as  "curious  and  often  irrelevant";  and  finally  the  edi- 
tion by  Diego  Clemencin,  Madrid  1833-39,  which  contains,  in  Ticknor's 
estimation,  "one  of  the  most  complete  commentaries  that  has  been  pub- 
lished on  any  author,  ancient  or  modern."  Ticknor  too  prepared  notes 
for  Don  Quixote,  probably  in  connection  with  his  lectures  at  Harvard. 
The  manuscript,  never  published,  deserves  close  study. 

The  first  English  translation  of  Don  Quixote  is  by  Thomas  Shelton. 
printed  by  E.  Blount  in  1620  in  London.  The  work  is  highly  valued,  but 
among  the  English  versions  Ticknor  considered  the  one  by  Motteux 
as  "the  best  and  most  agreeable,  though  somewhat  too  free."  The  trans- 
lation by  John  Phillips,  the  nephew  of  Milton,  on  the  other  hand,  he  called 
"very  vulgar,  unfaithful,  and  coarse."  Charles  Jarvis's  version,  published 
in  1824,  contains  twenty-four  illustrations  by  George  Cruikshank. 

The  first  French  translation  of  Part  I  —  Le  Valeureux  Don  Quixote 
dc  la  Manchc  —  was  made  by  Cesar  Oudin  and  was  published  in  1620  in 
Paris.  Part  II  was  translated  by  F.  de  Rosset  and  was  printed  in  1633. 
Both  parts  of  the  Library's  set  are  of  1633.  There  is  in  the  Library  an- 
other extremely  interesting  little  book  containing  the  Spanish  text  and 
the  French  version  of  selections  from  Part  I.  Le  Meurtre  de  la  Fidelitc  el  la 
Defense  de  I'Honneur  runs  the  French  title.  The  volume,  prepared  perhaps 
to  help  French  people  learning  Spanish,  was  issued  in  1609  in  Paris.  Then 


CERVANTES  QUATER-CENTENARY 


365 


there  is  Ludwig  Tieck's  German  translation,  Berlin  1830-32.  "Tieck  once 
showed  me  several  passages  in  this  translation,"  Ticknor  noted  on  a  fly- 
leaf, "where  he  had  rendered  corresponding  phrases  with  more  freedom 
than  exactness,  and  I  thought  he  was  justified  in  it.  But  sometimes  he 
went  very  far.  His  translation,  however,  is  a  work  of  genius  .  .  ." 

The  number  of  foreign  versions  is  very  great  indeed;  there  is  hardly 
a  country  in  Europe  and  the  Americas  where  "the  Knight  of  the  lean  visage 
and  vigorous  countenance"  has  not  been  a  familiar  figure.  Don  Quixote's 
adventures  have  given  pleasure  to  the  youth  of  every  nation,  ever  since 
he  bravely  sallied  forth,  mounted  upon  his  famous  steed  Rosinante,  from 
the  ancient  Plain  of  Montiel  to  undo  the  wrongs  of  the  world  and  thus 
win  the  favor  of  his  beauteous  lady,  the  Princess  Dulcinea. 

Cervantes's  satire  so  completely  destroyed  the  passion  for  novels  of 
chivalry  that  after  its  appearance  no  more  such  books  were  written.  It  is 
a  pity,  for  these  exploits  of  arms  and  amours,  winding  through  half  a 
dozen  volumes,  are  delightful  reading.  Happily,  the  Boston  Public  Li- 
brary possesses  a  large  collection  of  them.  It  has,  in  fact,  two-thirds  of 
the  titles  which  once  comprised  Don  Quixote's  own  library!  It  was  in 
the  sixth  chapter  of  the  First  Part  that  "the  pleasant  and  grand  scrutiny" 
of  these  books  took  place.  The  collection  included  "about  one  hundred 
volumes  in  folio,  besides  a  great  many  small  ones."  Thirty-two  are  named 
by  titles  in  the  chapter;  and  of  these  the  Boston  Public  Library  has  no 
less  than  twenty-two,  besides  other  editions  of  the  works.  Readers  of  this 
bulletin  may  recall  the  admirable  article  contributed  by  Miss  Esther  B. 
Sylvia  to  the  April  1940  issue,  describing  all  the  books  —  after  quoting 
the  sage  observations  of  the  curate,  the  barber,  the  niece,  and  the  house- 
keeper about  them. 

A  whole  row  of  cases  is  filled  with  these  volumes,  each  profusely 
illustrated  with  quaint  woodcuts.  A  copy  of  the  1533  edition  of  the  Amadis 
de  Gaida.  archetype  of  all  novels  of  chivalry,  is  perhaps  the  most  attrac- 
tive item  ;  it  was  printed  at  Venice  by  Juan  Antonio  de  Sabia.  The  author, 
language,  and  time  of  the  original  publication  of  the  first  four  books  of 
the  Amadis  are  not  definitely  known  ;  they  are  generally  ascribed  to  Vasco 
de  Lobeira,  who  is  said  to  have  written  them,  in  Portuguese,  about  1390. 
But  no  copy  of  this  Portuguese  text  exists;  the  first  known  edition  is  a 
Spanish  translation  published  in  1508.  The  Library  has  also  the  four  large 
folios  of  the  French  translation,  made  at  the  order  of  King  Francis  I  of 
France,  and  published  in  Paris  in  1541-48.  It  has  Las  Sergas  de  .  .  .  Esplan- 
dian,  printed  at  Burgos  in  1587,  the  title-page  embellished  with  a  large 
woodcut  of  a  mounted  knight.  As  Miss  Sylvia  reminds  us.  the  word  Cali- 
fornia was  first  used  in  Esplandian;  and  that  it  is  from  the  description  of 
this  imaginary  place  that  California  is  supposed  to  have  received  its  name. 
The  Jardin  de  Floras  Curiosas,  printed  at  Salamanca  in  1570,  consists  of 


366 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


marvellous  stories  told  by  three  young  men.  The  work  also  became  ex- 
tremely popular  in  Italy,  France,  and  England,  as  the  many  early  trans- 
lations testify.  The  Library  has  over  a  half  dozen  editions.  However, 
the  rarest  of  all  these  famous  books  is  the  first  edition  of  Montemayor's 
Diana,  the  earliest  and  best  of  the  Spanish  pastoral  romances.  The  title- 
page  gives  1542,  instead  of  1559,  as  the  date  of  printing  —  the  result  of  a 
clever  forgery  which  led  Ticknor  and  others  to  all  sorts  of  speculations. 
The  Library's  early  editions  of  this  work  alone  could  fill  a  show-case! 

Cervantes  himself  tried  his  hand  at  such  a  romance.  His  Galatea,  "the 
first  fruit  of  my  poor  genius"  as  he  called  it,  was  written  and  published 
in  1584,  a  few  years  after  his  return  from  Moorish  captivity.  "The  shep- 
herds and  shepherdesses  of  the  romance  are  such  only  in  their  dress,"  he 
confesses  in  the  Preface.  This  work,  too,  comes  in  for  an  amusing  criti- 
cism in  the  sixth  chapter  of  Don  Quixote.  "But  what  book  is  the  next  one?" 
the  curate  asks  the  barber.  "The  Galatea  of  Miguel  de  Cervantes,"  the 
latter  answers.  "This  Cervantes,"  the  curate  continues,  "has  been  a  great 
friend  of  mine  these  many  years ;  and  I  know  that  he  is  more  skilled  in 
sorrows  than  in  verse.  His  book  is  not  without  happiness  in  the  inven- 
tion; it  proposes  something,  but  finishes  nothing.  So  we  must  wait  for 
the  second  part,  which  he  promises ;  for  perhaps  he  will  then  obtain  the 
favor  that  is  now  denied  him ;  and,  in  the  mean  time,  my  good  gossip,  keep 
it  locked  up  at  home."  The  second  part,  however,  was  never  written.  The 
Library's  copy  is  of  the  Cordova  edition  of  1617. 

Next  to  Don  Quixote,  the  Novelas  Excmplares  are  Cervantes's  best- 
known  work.  These  "instructive  moral  tales,"  twelve  in  number,  were 
published  in  1613.  Some  of  them  were  printed  years  before;  the  "Curioso 
Impertinente,"  for  instance,  was  inserted  in  the  First  Part  of  Don  Quixote. 
The  Library  owns  several  early  editions,  among  them  the  one  issued  at 
Milan  in  161 5.  The  first  English  translation,  the  Exemplarie  Novells:  in 
sixe  books,  was  published  in  1640. 

How  many  plays  Cervantes  wrote,  nobody  knows.  "Some  twenty  or 
thirty  pieces  of  mine  were  performed  with  great  success,"  he  tells  in  his 
careless  way.  The  Ocho  Comcdias,  almost  all  composed  in  verse  and  printed 
in  Madrid  in  1 61 5,  are  full-length  plays.  The  Viage  del  Parnaso  appeared 
in  1614.  It  is  an  account  of  a  summons  by  Apollo,  requiring  all  good  poets 
to  come  and  help  drive  away  the  bad  poets  from  Parnassus.  The  work  is 
"extremely  rare."  The  Persilesy  Sigismunda,  a  romance  which  Cervantes  re- 
garded as  a  counterpart  to  Don  Quixote,  was  published  posthumously  by 
his  widow.  "This  is  the  well-known  first  edition,"  Ticknor s  note  reads, 
"prepared  by  Cervantes  April  18,  1616.  He  died  April  23  .  .  ." 

April  23,  1616  —  the  greatest  genius  of  Spanish  literature  died  on 
the  same  day  as  Shakespeare. 

zoltAn  haraszti 


The  Watercolor  Drawings  of  Rowlandson 


By  ARTHUR  W.  HEINTZELMAN 

THOMAS  ROWLANDSON  was  greatly  appreciated  by  his  genera- 
tion; yet,  perhaps  because  of  the  nature  of  his  work,  there  are  few 
known  facts  concerning  his  life.  His  three  score  and  ten  years  covered 
the  most  colorful  and  eventful  periods  of  war  and  peace  in  English  his- 
tory —  the  reign  of  George  III,  and  the  period  in  which  George  IV  was 
Prince  of  Wales.  His  personality  and  work  coincide  perfectly  with  the 
temperament  of  the  people  and  the  transitions  in  their  art  and  literature. 

Since  the  artist  and  writer  walk  hand  in  hand  as  critics  and  ap- 
praisers of  political  and  social  life,  it  seems  important  to  review  the  trends 
as  expressed  by  Rowlandson's  contemporaries  in  the  field  of  literature. 
He  was  born  in  the  midst  of  the  Augustan  Age  which  developed  from 
and  revolted  against  the  Restoration  Period. 

In  the  early  1700's,  during  the  reign  of  Queen  Anne,  the  so-called 
"New  Morality''  saw  a  general  reaction  against  the  extreme  licentious- 
ness of  the  previous  age,  just  as  the  latter  had  reacted  to  Puritanism. 
Order  and  measure  and  propriety  were  to  become  the  essential  qualities 
of  this  Neo-Classic  Period.  Gentle  manners  and  courteousness  became 
fashionable  in  society.  The  expansion  of  the  British  Empire  and  the  rise 
of  commercialism  caused  the  metropolitan  and  suburban  areas  to  become 
the  centers  of  business  and  social  life.  We  can  conceive  of  Rowlandson 
rubbing  shoulders  with  famous  authors  and  with  men  in  all  walks  of  life 
in  such  well-known  houses  as  Lloyd's,  Jonathan's,  Child's,  and  Dolly's 
Chop  House. 

The  writers  endeavored  to  imitate  the  characteristics  of  Virgil,  Hor- 
ace, Cicero,  and  Lucretius.  Throughout  the  century  reason  and  critical 
habit  continued  to  take  precedence  over  imagination  and  the  creative 
spirit.  The  rationalism  and  formalism  founded  upon  the  philosophy  of 
Descartes  were  the  tenets  of  everyday  life.  Yet,  in  the  midst  of  this  Uto- 
pian dream,  Rowlandson  took  note  of  the  filthy  streets  of  London,  unsafe 
after  dark  from  the  lawlessness  of  thieves;  of  the  dangerous  traveling 
on  muddy  highways;  and  of  the  degradation  and  poverty  in  the  slums. 
The  criminal  law  was  cruel  and  unfair,  the  prisons  were  a  disgrace,  and 
education  limited. 

Authors  as  well  as  artists  were  aware  of  the  mixture  of  good  and  bad 
taste.  In  their  famous  Spectator  Papers  Joseph  Addison  and  Richard  Steele 
made  an  effort  to  bring  "philosophy  out  of  the  closets  and  libraries, 
schools  and  colleges,  to  dwell  in  clubs  and  assemblies,  at  tea  tables  and 
in  coffee  houses."  Jonathan  Swift  wrote  his  immortal  satires  —  works  for 
which  Rowlandson  made  s.ome  illustrations.  Daniel  Defoe,  one  of  the 

367 


368 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


first  great  realistic  writers  in  English,  pioneered  in  the  field  of  the  his- 
torical novel.  John  Gay,  the  writer  of  shallow  heroic  couplets,  reached  the 
heights  in  his  brilliant  Beggar's  Opera.  After  Alexander  Pope's  pure 
rhetoric,  the  epitome  of  Augustan  poetry,  appears  the  ponderous  per- 
sonage of  Samuel  Johnson,  whose  likeness  Rowlandson  recorded  in  sev- 
eral of  his  coffee  house  scenes.  Oliver  Goldsmith's  works,  also  illustrated 
by  Rowlandson,  reveal  touches  of  Romanticism  as  he  deals  with  country 
folk,  yet  he  remains  Augustan  in  his  sparkling  wit.  Samuel  Richardson 
discovers  the  novel  of  sentiment;  Henry  Fielding  achieves  realism  and 
fundamental  sympathy;  while  Tobias  Smollett's  and  Lawrence  Sterne's 
characters  become  apt  subjects  for  Rowlandson's  illustrations. 

Though  Rowlandson  is  but  slightly  influenced  by  the  new  Romantic 
trends,  his  freedom  of  expression  is  in  line  with  the  movement  which  saw 
its  beginnings  as  also  its  triumph  during  his  lifetime.  Already  in  both 
poetry  and  prose  dissenters  were  revolting  against  the  classic  tradition, 
asserting  their  individuality  and  turning  from  the  city  to  the  country. 
However,  the  torch  of  Romanticism  was  carried  only  by  the  few,  and 
Rowlandson,  who  was  definitely  the  artist  of  the  people,  continues  in  the 
spirit  of  the  eighteenth  century.  His  position  at  this  historic  juncture 
places  him  as  one  of  the  great  satirists  and  universally  recognized  drafts- 
men in  the  history  of  art.  Records  of  celebrations  and  rejoicings  on  one 
side  and  food  riots  and  scenes  of  terror  on  the  other  supplied  unending 
material  for  his  prints,  pen  sketches,  and  water-color  drawings. 

ROWLANDSON'S  youth  and  early  training  were  reviewed  in  Mork 
Books  of  September  1943.  However,  it  is  well  to  point  out  again  that 
his  Uncle  Thomas's  widow  generously  invited  him,  in  1772,  to  live  with 
her  and  study  art  in  Paris.  Although  only  sixteen  years  old,  his  burning 
desire  to  express  himself  found  form  in  concentrated  study  of  the  early 
masters  in  the  Louvre  and  the  Bibliotheque  Nationale.  After  two  years  of 
steady  development  on  the  Continent,  he  returned  to  London  to  resume 
his  studies  at  the  Royal  Academy,  where  his  work  attracted  immediate 
attention  by  its  advanced  technique  and  excellence  in  construction.  His 
drawings  now  possessed  a  change  of  pace,  a  variety  of  line,  and  an  en- 
thusism  that  they  hitherto  lacked.  He  experienced  for  the  first  time  the 
ability  to  wed  his  thoughts  to  his  brush  and  pencil,  and  seemed  ready  to 
burst  through  the  barrier  of  academic  training  into  the  full  possession  of 
his  creative  powers.  At  this  time,  1775,  we  have  the  first  record  of  his 
exhibitions.  At  nineteen,  his  oils  and  watercolors  hung  on  the  same  walls 
with  the  masterpieces  of  Reynolds,  Gainsborough,  and  Romney. 

In  1776  he  had  taken  a  studio  in  Wardour  Street,  remaining  there 
until  1 781.  He  worked  hard  and  seriously  on  portraits,  mostly  of  beautiful 
women  and  a  few  personages  of  royalty.  He  shows  little  promise  as  a 
routine  painter,  yet  several  of  his  biographers  believe  that  had  he  chosen 


THE  WATERCOLOR  DRAWINGS  OF  ROWLANDSON  36., 


portrait  painting-  as  a  career  he  might  have  shared  fame  with  the  great 
English  masters.  It  is  difficult  to  imagine  him  in  such  a  role,  for  his  love 
of  freedom  as  well  as  his  dual  personality  of  coarseness  and  refinement 
could  not  possibly  have  been  contained  by  portrait  painting,  always  a 
conscious  and  limiting  task.  Evidently  the  success  of  his  drawings  and 
watercolors  at  the  Academy  in  the  early  1780's  opened  new  vistas  and 
turned  him  away  from  the  conventional  form  of  art. 

An  inheritance  of  £7000  from  his  French  aunt  brought  a  period  of 
inactivity.  The  artist  abandoned  his  studio  for  new  adventures  on  the 
Continent.  Earnest  work  was  no  doubt  often  interrupted  by  gambling, 
a  disposition  already  fixed  upon  him  even  before  he  went  to  Europe.  Yet 
his  travels  through  France  and  Germany  produced  many  sketches  of 
town  and  country  people,  showing  the  traveling  noblemen  and  their  at- 
tendants, peasants  about  their  work,  incidents  of  the  highway,  scenes  of 
the  post  roads,  and  life  at  the  inns.  The  wanderings  continued  for  about 
five  years,  and  whether  Rowlandson  squandered  his  fortune  at  the  gam- 
ing table  or  through  bad  investments,  is  of  no  consequence  artistically; 
because,  as  a  result  of  his  rich  experiences  of  travel,  he  definitely  decided 
to  abandon  painting  for  draftsmanship  and  watercolor  which,  he  felt, 
were  especially  fitted  to  his  temperament. 

Back  in  London,  he  was  occupied  with  political  cartoons  of  the  fa- 
mous Westminster  election  of  1784.  These  hack  caricatures  were  inter- 
spersed with  potboiler  copies  in  etching  of  the  work  of  Henry  Bunbury. 
Meanwhile,  his  drawings  executed  for  illustrations  in  various  magazines 
and  for  the  works  of  Fielding,  Smollett.  Goldsmith,  and  Sterne  were  begin- 
ning to  arouse  interest. 

In  1800  Rowlandson  entered  into  a  business  arrangement  with  Ru- 
dolph Ackerman.  publisher  and  color  printer,  a  new  arrival  in  London 
from  Vienna.  The  Repository  of  Arts  was  their  first  venture,  and  it  imme- 
diately became  a  collector's  item.  Then  followed  in  the  next  decade  The 
Tour  of  Dr.  Syntax  in  Search  of  the  Picturesque.  The  illustrations,  made 
from  extended  journeys  in  the  English  countryside,  supported  the  unin- 
spired verse  of  William  Combe.  Rowlandson's  ramblings  over  little- 
traversed  roads,  by  thatched-roofed  huts,  where  the  only  strangers  were 
itinerant  tinkers  and  vendors,  supplied  rich  material  for  his  pencil.  Need- 
less to  say,  he  made  friend's  wherever  he  went,  with  his  free  spending 
and  generosity.  The  drawings  in  the  crowded  sketch  books,  surpassing 
any  of  his  previous  efforts,  were  etched  upon  the  copper  plate  to  be  pub- 
lished in  a  series  of  prints  entitled  An  Artist  in  Search  of  the  Picturesque. 
Many  of  these  and  other  subjects  taken  from  the  sketch  books  served  in 
later  years  to  illustrate  the  Dr.  Syntax  publications. 

Connoisseurs  agree  that  the  drawings  for  the  Dance  of  Death,  1820, 
and  the  Dance  of  Life,  1821,  indicate  a  point  in  Rowlandson's  powers  that 
was  rarely  surpassed  in  his  later  work.  Previously  he  had  illustrated  other 


37° 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


books;  important  among  them  was  The  Microcosm  of  London,  1810,  yet 
not  considered  one  of  his  best  works.  The  plates  were  not  entirely  his : 
he  supplied  the  figures,  while  Augustus  Charles  Pugin,  a  Frenchman  re- 
cently arrived  at  London,  meticulously  drew  in  dull  architectural  back- 
grounds. Also,  The  Vicar  of  Wakefield,  1817,  and  The  World  in  Miniature. 
1816,  were  rich  in  specimens  of  his  work. 

ROWLANDSON'S  drawings,  many  of  which  are  his  greatest  achieve- 
ments, are  the  subject  of  the  December  exhibition  in  the  Wiggin 
Gallery.  Here  we  have  bold  technique;  the  lines  are  swept  upon  the  paper 
with  a  pliable  reed  pen  and  India  ink  which  is  varied  in  warmth  according 
to  the  artist's  choice  of  color  scheme.  Upon  these  loosely  drawn  com- 
positions, possessing  fine  third-dimensional  and  color  value,  a  foundation 
of  either  warm  or  cool  grey  is  washed  over  even  before  the  application 
of  color.  In  the  master's  hands  this  gives  increased  modeling  strength  and 
an  immediate  atmospheric  quality.  Local  colors  are  now  added  in  heavier 
tints  of  balanced  and  neutralized  reds,  blues,  and  yellows,  resulting  in  a 
symphony  of  color  that  is  amazingly  satisfying  in  depth,  texture,  and 
solidity.  Rowlandson  instinctively  knew  the  limits  of  his  materials.  He 
had  an  innate,  natural  feeling  for  tone,  knowing  what  could  be  achieved 
within  these  boundaries. 

How  did  Rowlandson  achieve  his  color  harmonies?  We  have  at  least 
glimpses  of  preliminary  steps  by  simply  looking  at  the  back  of  some  of 
the  drawings.  When  he  wanted  to  try  out  effects,  he  would  casually 
turn  his  drawing  over,  dip  his  brush,  and  experiment  then  and  there. 
This  is  a  fascinating  study,  since  it  brings  us  into  intimate  touch  with 
Rowlandson's  small  trials  and  errors  in  regard  to  color.  On  the  reverse 
side  of  some  of  the  drawings  there  are  saturated  Mendings,  sometimes 
of  opposites  in  the  spectrum,  which  produced  the  color  vibrations  so  fre- 
quently found  in  the  drawings.  The  mixing  of  various  hues  while  the  area 
was  still  wet  accounts  for  some  of  the  pleasing  nuances.  It  is  interesting 
to  note  the  frequent  combinations  of  vermilion,  cobalt  blue,  and  yellow 
ochre  which  produce  grey-greens,  violets,  and  oranges  in  both  warm  and 
cool  tones,  neutralized  with  the  proper  amounts  of  sepia.  Gradations  and 
color  value  are  carefully  worked  out  according  to  the  demands  of  the 
particular  composition.  On  the  drawings  themselves,  the  color  was  not 
always  applied  from  a  mixture.  In  some  of  the  freer  ones  it  was  mixed 
directly  on  the  drawing.  This  accounts  for  the  exhilarating  freshness  of 
their  color  and.  even  in  neutral  tones,  for  the  absence  of  dullness. 

The  uninitiated  layman,  although  insensitive  to  the  hidden  qualities 
of  Rowlandson's  art,  finds  in  these  drawings  a  revelation  of  real  men  and 
women  with  their  habits,  appetites,  joys,  absurdities,  sufferings,  faults, 
and  vices.  He  sees  in  them  human  beings,  exaggerated  perhaps,  but  never 
'dealized  —  people  whose  r-obust  humor  and  bitter  cynicism  the  artist  has 


THE  WATERCOLOR  DRAWINGS  OF  ROWLANDSON 


captured  through  his  sure  and  subtle  know  ledge  of  human  nature. 

The  watercolor  drawings  shown  in  the  exhibition  have  been  care- 
fully selected  to  form  an  evaluation  of  Rowlandson's  place  among  the 
great  masters.  By  their  varied  treatment  and  subject  matter,  they  give  a 
most  valuable  index  to  the  proper  understanding  of  the  man  and  the 
artist.  Included  are  representative  examples  of  all  periods,  beginning 
with  some  of  his  earliest  efforts  and  ending  with  diawings  made  shortly 
before  his  death.  These  records,  illustrating  his  varying  points  of  view 
and  moods,  offer  an  endless  source  of  inspiration.  Rowlandson  studied 
life  as  a  scientific  experimenter,  absorbed  in  the  problems  of  how  best  to 
produce  his  every  idea  and  thought.  From  the  beginning,  he  was  pre- 
occupied with  the  inventiveness  of  line  and  chiaroscuro,  and  he  used  color 
in  his  own  way.  He  studied  what  was  to  him  a  natural  medium  with  in- 
dividual expression,  in  a  manner  which,  at  its  highest  development,  was 
never  equalled  by  any  of  his  contemporaries. 

It  is  obvious  that  for  the  most  part  Rowlandson  regarded  landscapes 
as  valuable  material  for  backgrounds.  There  is  no  doubt  that  in  their  style 
he  modeled  himself  on  Claude  Lorrain's  principles,  with  an  occasional 
glance  at  Rembrandt.  Showing  greater  restraint  than  in  his  other  sub- 
jects, he  developed  less  in  landscape  drawing  than  in  the  wide  range  of 
his  other  compositions.  Here  the  statement  of  fact  is  more  poetic,  even 
sentimental,  with  changes  in  clear  washes  of  grey-greens  as  the  predom- 
inating color  and  supported  by  rich  tones  and  deeper  harmonies.  Leafage 
and  contours  are  executed  in  masses,  with  the  edges  well  studied  to  sug- 
gest character.  In  his  later  treatment  his  touch  broadened,  and  a  more 
impetuous  use  of  chiaroscuro  produced  luminous  shadows,  with  a  sense 
of  atmosphere  verging  on  the  Romantic.  In  some,  figures  are  mere  de- 
tails in  successive  planes,  indicating  receding  distances  and  giving  scale 
to  the  composition.  One  is  almost  reminded  of  a  tapestry  by  his  handling 
of  rich  foliage,  shadows  and  light,  background  and  sky,  a  stretch  of  land- 
scape with  river,  cascade,  bridge,  or  animal  life. 

THIS  great  artist  could  arrest  an  action  imprinted  upon  the  memory 
so  accurately  as  to  make  a  living  record  of  movement  and  excite- 
ment. Witness,  for  example,  the  comic  tragedy  in  "The  Disaster,"  "The 
Runaway,"  "The  Double  Disaster,"  "Ghost  in  the  Wine  Cellar,"  "Escape 
from  a  Fire,"  "The  Overturned  Coach,"  and  the  ludicrous  "Taking  a  Five 
Barred  Gate  Flying."  Each  must  have  been  inspired  by  actual  experience ; 
then  perfected  through  a  sense  of  vision,  analysis,  and  a  choice  of  only 
those  elements  that  were  necessary.  Whether  or  not  these  drawings 
spring  from  artificial  prodding  is  unimportant,  for  the  results  are  vital, 
even  though,  according  to  social  standards  of  today,  the  subject  is  not 
always  acceptable.  Rowlandson  was  a  realist,  and  he  could  give  us  trage- 


374 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


dy,  unrelieved  by  humor.  "The  Suicide"  is  an  exception  —  its  deliberate 
effort,  however,  is  not  uninspired,  for  the  fine  result  is  an  understanding 
of  the  human  drama. 

In  his  drawing  of  the  country,  market,  and  fair,  Rowlandson  never 
fails  to  create  interest.  His  ability  to  capture  the  action  of  the  crowds  is 
unsurpassed.  In  "Market  Day,"  "This  Fair  Near  the  Village  Church," 
"Bodmin,  Cornwall,"  and  "The  Village  Fair"  there  is  no  labore  effort. 

"Discomforts  of  an  Epicure"  is  most  certainly  a  self-portrait,  for  it 
answers  every  description  of  Rowlandson,  who  was  pictured  as  a  huge 
man  with  large  soft  eyes,  strong  nose,  and  a  protruding  lower  lip.  Henry 
Angelo  mentions  in  his  Reminiscences,  London  1823-30,  that  he  could  have 
been  the  model  for  many  of  his  own  types.  Here  we  have  a  typical  gour- 
mand, a  man  independent  of  mind  and  outlook.  Contrast  "Colonel  Sea- 
ham"  with  the  picture.  What  a  beautiful  and  complete  record  of  a  gentle- 
man of  society!  This  is  an  exquisite  personage,  in  dress  and  actions,  down 
to  the  small  after-dinner  brandy  glass,  in  which  we  can  suppose  is  some 
famous  aged  fine  champagne.  No  discomfort  is  depicted  in  this  veritable 
impressionistic  study;  and  as  for  its  being  an  excellent  portrait,  it  con- 
veys a  profundity  of  character,  even  though  the  facial  expression  is  slight- 
ly sardonic. 

The  three  drawings  "Taking  a  Mean  Advantage,"  "Marshalsea  Pris- 
on," and  "Double  Disaster"  show  influences  of  Boucher,  reminding  us 
that  Rowlandson  did  many  such  subjects  for  the  collections  of  the  Prince 
of  Wales  and  other  royal  patrons.  For  the  virtuosity  of  a  facile  pen  and 
brush,  they  are  little  masterpieces.  But  the  artist's  temperament  is  per- 
haps most  vividly  revealed  in  the  freely  executed  "French  Camp  Prepar- 
ing to  Dine  off  Horseflesh,"  "Cockney  Sportsmen,"  "Suitors,"  "Pig  in  a 
Poke,"  "The  Morning  Dram,"  "Men  of  Fashion,"  and  "Preaching  to  No 
Purpose."  A  few  powerful,  essential  lines,  in  combination  with  slight 
washes,  constitute  their  framework. 

The  study  of  "The  Rivals,"  with  a  squawking  parrot  behind  the 
three  figures  and  an  inquisitive  imp  on  the  window  sill,  is  one  of  the  most 
remarkable  watercolor  drawings  of  all.  This  composition,  drawn  with 
pen  and  bistre  and  heightened  by  strong  contrasts  of  color,  may  serve  as 
an  object  lesson  to  all  interested  in  Rowlandson's  work.  Through  the  ar- 
rangement of  the  figures  in  relation  to  the  supporting  furniture  and  in- 
terior runs  a  fine  decorative  feeling,  illustrating  how  well  the  artist  real- 
ized his  intention.  Other  pieces  in  this  category  are :  "Jealousy,  the 
Rival,"  "Mr.  Bannister  and  Miss  Orser,"  "The  Oyster  Woman,"  and 
"Wulgar  Language." 

At  times  Rowlandson  reminds  us  of  Guardi,  as  in  the  monumental 
little  drawing  "Poets'  Corner,  Westminster  Abbey."  The  treatment  of 
the  funeral  procession  with  mourners  and  visitors,  which  gives  fine  scale 


THE  WATERCOLOK  DRAWINGS  OF  ROWLANDSON 


to  the  detailed  architectural  background,  is  reminiscent  of  the  Italian 
master.  Another  influence  is  felt  in  "The  Poet  at  Market."  This  time  the 
similarity  is  with  Rembrandt's  "Rat  Catcher."  It  may  be  just  a  coinci- 
dence, for  there  is  certainly  no  likeness  in  the  types.  Rowlandson  also  did 
a  print  of  one  of  the  cries  of  London  called  "Buy  a  Rat  Trap,  a  Rat  Trap, 
Buy  My  Rat  Trap,"  which  proves  further  his  having-  studied  the  Dutch 
master's  compositions. 

That  one  must  pay  the  penalties  of  high  living  and  overindulgence 
is  humorously  recorded  in  the  gouty  and  dyspeptic  gentlemen,  who  jour- 
neyed to  the  baths  for  relief  and  rehabilitation,  or  to  make  themselves 
ready  for  the  next  bout  of  roast  beef  and  heavy  port.  The  "Scene  at  Bath" 
was  no  doubt  in  the  series  called  Comforts  of  Bath.  "French  Prisoners  on 
Board  an  English  Ship"  does  not  arouse  sympathy  for  the  two  French 
officers;  they  appear  at  ease,  jolly,  and  contented,  even  though  closely 
guarded.  "The  Parsonage"  and  "College  Dons"  are  drawings  of  pious 
men  and  college  professors  with  bloated  faces,  exaggerated  in  color  by 
being  framed  by  wigs.  The  artist  pokes  fun  at  their  excess  of  eating  and 
drinking. 

Rowlandson  was  the  inventor  of  a  new  treatment  in  cartooning,  a 
revolt  against  decaying  and  unimaginative  academic  styles.  We  need  go 
no  further  to  seek  proof  of  his  greatness  than  to  mention  a  few  of  the 
artists  whom  he  influenced.  Delacroix  made  copies  of  Rowlandson's 
drawings;  and  there  is  a  resemblance  in  certain  of  Gericault's  details, 
particularly  in  his  horses.  Although  Goya  may  never  have  seen  his  work, 
it  is  quite  possible  that  Rowlandson's  prints  found  their  way  to  Spain, 
for  some  of  the  great  Spaniard's  subjects  were  amazingly  similar  in  both 
choice  and  treatment.  Daumier  and  Gavarni  must  also  be  included  in  this 
group.  Daumier  in  his  lithographs  used  the  grease  crayon  in  the  same 
forthright  manner  as  Rowlandson  did  the  etching  needle,  to  record  simi- 
lar subjects  and  not  too  dissimilar  ideas.  Gavarni,  who  knew  England  and 
Scotland  well,  produced  records  of  French  and  English  life  on  stone 
which  inevitably  call  up  Rowlandson's  drawings.  Constantin  Guys  was 
the  last  of  the  inheritors.  His  horse-drawn  vehicles,  from  gig  to  coach, 
were  directly  inspired  by  Rowlandson. 

Although  he  suffered  prolonged  illness  toward  the  end  of  his  life, 
Rowlandson  remained  an  eager  and  insatiable  personality.  His  crayon, 
which  he  termed  his  "divining  rod,"  continued  to  produce  results  of 
power.  He  died  in  London  in  1827  at  the  age  of  seventy-one.  As  the  his- 
tory of  art  swings  its  pendulum  over  successive  periods,  his  work  will 
doubtlessly  be  studied,  and  sought  after,  by  connoisseurs  and  collectors 
everywhere. 


Letters  by  George  Gissing 


(Continued  from  the  November  issue) 

7.  K.  Ap.  3,  'go. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

First  of  all,  it  is  a  delusion  to  suppose  that  I  identify  you  with  Miriam. 
Nothing  of  the  kind.  You  have  grown  up  in  a  far  more  liberal  atmosphere.  Her 
like  I  have  known,  &  the  type  is  not  uncommon ;  but  you  have  never  been,  as 
far  as  I  know,  in  that  extreme  phase.  Then  again,  I  by  no  means  attack  all 
people  who  hold  a  supernatural  faith.  The  object  of  my  onslaught  is  formalism, 
—  an  obstinate  belief  in  things  that  were  disproved  by  sheer  arithmetic  long 
ago,  which  even  such  an  old-fashioned  book  as  Newman's  "Phases  of  Faith" 
(I  only  wish  you  could  read  it)  rendered  forever  untenable.  I  mean,  of  course, 
Sabbatarianism,  &  everything  connected  with  it,  —  which,  as  you  are  aware, 
has  never  existed  anywhere  but  in  England,  (putting  aside  the  Swiss  puritans 
&  the  Pharisees).  —  If  you  think  over  the  book,  you  will  see  that  formalism 
alone  is  spoken  of  as  deadening;  mere  spiritual  belief,  never.  That  is  simply 
not  dealt  with  at  all.  It  did  not  enter  into  my  purpose.  I  should  simply  have 
been  repeating  the  work  of  such  books  as  "Robert  Elsmere". 

If  you  doubt  the  existence  of  such  people  as  Miriam,  it  surprises  me. 
Kingsley  knew  the  type,  as  you  will  see  in  the  beginning  of  "Alton  Locke". 
But  perhaps  you  don't  &  were  merely  hurt  because  you  misconceived  my  pur- 
pose. 

No;  minus  a  little  faith  in  forms,  you  would  be  broad-minded.  Nay,  you 
are  broad-minded,  in  many  ways  &  directions.  And  of  your  true  enjoyment  of 
art  in  various  shapes  I  never  entertained  a  moment's  doubt.  That  is  all  mis- 
conception on  your  part.  You  have  read  &  studied  probably  more  than  most 
girls  of  your  age.  It  would  be  monstrously  unjust  if  I  closed  my  eyes  to  all 
this,  &  you  would  be  right  to  feel  angry  with  me.  Again  &  again  I  have  told 
you  how  I  admire  your  persistency  in  working  under  so  many  disadvantages. 
Never  should  I  ridicule  you,  however  savagely  I  strike  at  the  worn-out  fetters 
which  here  &  there  hang  heavily  on  you. 

You  will  find  it  always  the  same  with  me.  I  never  attack  spiritual  faith 
in  itself,  —  but  I  shall  never  cease  to  use  all  my  power  against  such  illusions 
as,  for  instance,  that  which  imagines  Sunday  to  be  different  from  any  other 
day  (in  plain  defiance  of  the  New  Testament  &  ecclesiastical  history,  as  strong 
Christians  have  again  &  again  pointed  out). 

If  only  you  would  read  "Phases  of  Faith",  —  a  most  minute  history  of 
spiritual  slow  emancipation,  written  by  Cardinal  Newman's  brother  long 
years  ago.  It  would  enable  you  to  understand  the  all  but  frenzy  with  which  1 
regard  forms  whose  persistence  is  due  to  literal  &  absolute  ignorance,  &  noth- 
ing else.  Suppose  I  lived  in  a  country  where  it  was  a  grave  article  of  faith  that 
all  men  in  New  Zealand  had  but  one  eye ;  &  then,  after  a  visit  to  New  Zealand, 
when  I  came  back  &  declared  that  such  was  not  the  case,  I  found  everybody 
foaming  against  me  for  my  heresy?  What  would  be  my  state  of  mind?  Pre- 


376 


LETTERS  BY  GEORGE  GISSING 


377 


cisely  what  it  now  is,  when  I  encounter  belief  (not  in  the  existence  of  God.  or 
anything  of  that  kind),  but  in  supposed  facts  which  have  been  plainly  demon- 
strated not  to  be  facts,  but  mistakes. 

I  do  not  even  feel  strongly  impatient  with  a  literal  belief  in  the  New 
Testament.  Let  me  repeat :  I  quarrel  only  with  people  who  will  believe  all  the 
New  Testament  except  that  part  which  declares  that  the  burden  of  the  old  law 
was  thenceforth  done  away  with. 

Newman,  a  man  of  vast  learning,  who  devoted  many  years  to  the  elabo- 
rate study  of  these  things  (being  actually  in  orders,  T  think),  would  put  all 
this  far  more  clearly  &  authoritatively  before  you  than  I  can. 

You  had  better  not  exert  yourself  to  come  on  the  Wednesday.  Come  on 
Thursday;  then  we  will  have  Friday  at  the  National  Gallery,  &  on  the  same 
evening  leave  England.  I  think  that  will  do. 

Well,  let  the  book  rest.  As  you  say,  such  things  matter  very  little  indeed. 
The  only  people  who  will  read  it  attentively  are  those  already  prepared  to 
sympathize  with  it. 

You  know  that  Alg.  has  again  had  to  move !  Most  serious,  this.  But  the 
lodgings  he  finds  are  astoundingly  cheap. 

With  love  always,  dear  Nelly, 
George 

7.K.  Ap.  15th  '90 

Dear  Nelly, 

Yesterday  afternoon  I  had  a  visit  from  Grahame.  One  of  the  first  things 
he  said  was :  "My  aunts  &  sister  have  just  read  'The  Emancipated' ;  they  are 
delighted,  think  it  better  than  any  of  the  other  books  S" 

I  just  tell  you  this,  not  to  revive  quarrel,  but  to  induce  you  to  reflect 
very  seriously  whether  your  own  judgment  was  not  premature.  These  people 
are  almost  orthodox,  &  yet  they  find  nothing  whatever  to  offend  them  in  the 
book,  &  are  able  to  enjoy  thoroughly  its  literary  merits.  No,  no ;  your  first 
impulse  has  misled  you.  In  a  little,  you  will  see  that  the  book  strikes  you  in 
quite  a  different  way. 

I  could  not  help  writing,  —  it  rejoiced  me  so  much  to  hear  that  news. 
Knowing  the  limitations  of  Miss  Grahame  &  her  aunt,  I  had  been  a  little  un- 
certain as  to  what  they  would  think.  But  now  I  know  that  my  own  view  of 
the  matter  is  right.  —  Come,  come !  If  intimate  friends  of  the  Dean  of  West- 
minster can  speak  thus,  you  will  see  that,  even  from  your  standpoint,  con- 
demnation was  too  hasty. 

No,  there  must  be  an  end  of  this  strained  relation  between  us.  I  cannot 
allow  you  to  be  blind  &  deaf  to  all  the  best  influences  of  the  time.  Away  with 
all  this  conventionalism!  I  speak  strictly  of  conventionalism,  for  I  know  that, 
if  you  were  to  talk  with  Miss  Grahame  for  instance,  you  would  find  that  her 
spiritual  views  were  in  reality  the  very  same  as  your  own.  And  yet  she  enjoys 
"The  Emancipated" ;  speaks  of  it  "with  enthusiasm,"  Grahame  tells  me.  And 
why  not?  There  is  not  a  syllable  that  should  offend  either  her  or  you.  It  is  a 
mere  question  of  art.  And  I  kno-jj  this  book  is  good,  &  shall  not  be  satisfied 
till  you  also  enjoy  it. 


29 


378 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


So  no  more  gross  absurdity,  old  Nelly !  or  rage  will  follow. 
I  will  be  at  King's  X  at  6:50  to-morrow,  &  hope  to  see  you  both  exultant. 
Will  provide  a  supper  of  bad  sausag-es  &  yellow  potatoes. 

Always  yours,  dearest, 
G.  G. 

24  Prospect  Park,  Exeter. 
Ap.  29.  1891 

My  dear  Nelly, 

This  letter  of  your  contains  criticism ;  laudatory,  to  be  sure,  but  with 
discrimination.  You  appear  to  have  taken  in  very  much  of  my  meaning,  — 
more  than  most  readers  will.  I  rejoice  that  you  like  the  book.  Writing  it,  I 
believed  it  trash,  for  it  was  wrung,  page  by  page,  from  a  sluggish  &  tormented 
brain.  Strange !  I  find,  however,  that  the  reviews  are  going  to  take  your  atti- 
tude with  regard  to  it.  Bertz  thinks  it  my  maturest  &  most  interesting  book. 
It  amuses  &  astonishes  me  that  another  should  care  so  much  about  it ;  &  then 
again,  Edith  declares  it  the  most  pleasing  book  she  ever  read.  So  it  seems  to 
contain  something  which  appeals  to  a  great  variety  of  readers. 

As  for  your  comments  on  the  philosophical  tone  of  the  book,  well,  it  is 
too  late  for  me  to  change  my  views  of  the  universe.  I  do  not  dogmatize,  re- 
member ;  my  ideas  are  negative,  &  on  the  whole  I  confine  myself  to  giving  pic- 
tures of  life  as  it  looks  to  my  observation.  The  outlook,  certainly,  is  not  very 
cheerful ;  impossible  for  me  to  see  the  world  in  a  rosy  light.  At  the  best  it 
looks  to  me  only  not-intolerable.  As  for  human  aspirations,  I  know  not  their 
meaning,  &  can  conceive  no  credible  explanation  —  even  as  I  am  unable  to 
understand  what  is  called  the  instinct  of  animals.  The  problem  does  not 
trouble  me,  either;  I  have  reached  the  stage  at  which  one  is  content  to  be 
ignorant.  The  world  is  to  me  mere  phenomenon  (which  literally  means  that 
which  appears)  &  1  study  it  as  I  do  a  work  of  art  —  but  without  reflecting 
on  its  origin. 

I  have  finished  Vol.  I  of  "Godwin  Peak,"  &  to-morrow  morning  Ave  start 
for  a  three  days'  holiday  at  Budleigh  Salterton,  some  fifteen  miles  away.  The 
weather  is  sunny  &  warm ;  it  ought  to  be  pleasant  on  the  sea-shore.  Reports 
of  Influenza  in  Yorkshire  make  me  uneasy  now  &  then  about  you  &  those  at 
Wakefield.  Madge  writes  to  me  that  she  is  far  from  well.  I  hope  you  may  all 
escape  that  noisome  epidemic. 

I  am  uneasy  about  Alg.,  also.  He  seems  to  have  had  a  difficulty  in  finding 
suitable  lodgings;  indeed  I  should  have  thought  Jersey  anything  but  a  place 
for  economy.  Tobacco  &  spirits  are  probably  the  sole  cheap  things,  &  there 
is  too  great  a  demand  for  lodgings  to  allow  of  their  being  low  in  price.  It  is 
a  lamentable  thing  that  they  cannot  find  a  permanent  abode.  It  is  to  him  or 
to  Katie  that  his  wandering-Jew  life  is  attributable?  I  fear  that  they  are  merely 
trying  to  run  away  from  themselves.  They  cannot  accept  the  fact  that  a  great 
many  disagreeables  have  to  be  faced  in  whatever  locality.  The  ideal  lodgings 
they  will  never  find.  This  perpetual  outlay  on  needless  iravel  merely  makes 
life  harder  for  them  ;  stability  is  the  first  essential  for  people  so  situated.  I  am 
in  dread  lest  dire  calamity  should  some  day  declare  itself. 


LETTERS  BY  GEORGE  GISSING 


379 


My  own  health  is  admirable  ;  for  years  I  have  not  been  so  well.  I  botanize 
for  a  couple  of  hours  every  afternoon.  Primroses  are  very  abundant  about 
here,  &  still  more  so  the  Avild  strawberry.  It  enrages  me  that  I  cannot  identify 
many  flowers.  But  for  the  first  time  I  have  seen  the  Blackthorn,  &  learn  its 
distinction  from  May-blossom.  By  the  bye,  I  find  that  the  Lesser  Celandine 
is  generally  a  very  dwarfish  plant  with  only  three  sepals;  but  yesterday  I  found 
several  that  had  long  stems  &  five  sepals  (I  don't  mean  petals).  What's  the 
meaning  of  this?  Never  before  have  1  noticed  it,  though  I  have  gathered  very 
many  Celandines.  It  can't  be  a  buttercup  of  any  kind  —  at  least  I  suppose  not, 
for  the  leaf  is  distinctly  that  of  the  Celandine,  &  root  also. 

We  make  no  acquaintances,  &  seem  very  unlikely  ever  to  do  so.  The 
people  in  the  house  do  not  at  all  suit  us.  &  we  merely  keep  on  civil  terms  with 
them.  Intellectual  converse  is  of  course  wholly  out  of  the  question. 

I  hope  you  will  return  in  good  health.  Don't  trouble  to  write,  save  when 
you  have  leisure  &  the  disposition. 

Always  affectionately,  dear  Nelly, 
George 

24  Prospect  Park,  Exeter. 
June  21,  r89i. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

At  last  we  have  summer.  The  heat  is  overpowering,  but  the  sky  mag- 
nificent. Instead  of  waiting  till  the  end  of  July,  we  have  decided  to  go  to  Ilfra- 
combe  a  fortnight  to-morrow.  I  shall  then  still  have  half  my  last  volume  to 
write.  If  decent  lodgings  are  procurable,  we  shall  stay  at  Ilfracombe  for  at 
least  a  month.  Of  course  you  shall  have  address  as  soon  as  we  get  there. 

The  country  is  very  rich  with  foliage  &  flowers.  Yesterday  we.  brought 
home  an  armful  of  enormous  foxgloves.  I  gathered,  too,  a  single  spray  of 
briar,  scarcely  more  than  a  foot  long,  on  which  were  forty-eight  rose-buds,  and 
it  looks  as  if  nearly  all  would  come  out.  Surely  this  is  extraordinary. 

Things  go  on  very  well  with  us,  except  that  there  is  no  possibility  of 
associating  with  the  people  downstairs,  who  are  extremely  vulgar  &  selfish 
beyond  belief. 

I  suppose  I  shall  manage  to  sell  my  new  book  late  in  the  summer,  so 
that  a  new  supply  of  money  will  come  in  long  before  the  old  is  finished.  But 
before  starting  to  Ilfracombe,  I  shall  of  course  have  to  send  you  for  cash. 

Yes,  it  is  altogether  wrong  &  foolish  that  we  are  not  able  to  see  more  of 
each  other.  I  do  hope  this  will  some  day  be  remedied. 

By  the  bye,  if  ever  you  hear  of  any  decent  English  people  established  any- 
where on  the  Continent  I  wish  you  would  let  me  know.  Only  by  having  such 
acquaintances  will  it  be  possible  for  us  to  go  abroad  for  any  length  of  time, 
as  of  course  Edith  will  never  learn  foreign  languages. 

I  am  sorry  to  say  that  I  don't  possess  "La  Petite  Fadette".  Ages  ago, 
I  lent  it  to  Willie,  &  I  have  a  sort  of  idea  that  it  is  still  somewhere  at  Wake- 
field —  perhaps  in  the  box  where  sundry  other  of  my  books  are  stored. 

S.  &  E.  [Smith  &  Edler]  have  sent  me  a  copy  of  "Thyrza",  which  is 
being  well  advertised. 


380 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Your  reports  about  singing  are  very  satisfactory.  It  is  admirable  to  get 
on  in  tliis  solid  way.  I  lament  that  I  cannot  hear  you. 

Alg.  tells  me  he  is  established  in  the  cottage.  But  so  much  depends  on 
Katie ;  it  will  be  grievous  if  she  cannot  manage  affairs.  I  am  glad  to  tell  you 
that  Edith  does  very  well  indeed  in  housekeeping  matters.  We  have  a  great 
deal  of  cleanliness  &  comfort  —  though  of  course  only  the  plainest  &  meanest 
food. 

Bye  the  bye,  butter  now  costs  iod  a  lb.  The  best  fresh. 
Yes,  I  hope  Madge  will  get  away  with  you  at  the  end  of  July.  It  will  be 
delightful  in  Scotland.  I  should  think  she  needs  that  northern  air. 

I  hope  mother  is  well.  What  about  her  holiday  this  year?  Would  it  be 
quite  impossible  for  her  to  come  to  Ilfracombe  early  in  August?  I  suppose 
the  journey  would  be  too  serious?  Yet  it  is  no  distance  after  Bristol. 

Love  always,  dear  Nelly, 
George 

i.  St.  Leonard's  Terrace,  Exeter. 

Nov.  7,  '91. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

I  certainly  ought  to  have  written  before  this.  But  I  am  toiling  day  & 
night  to  finish  "The  Rad.  Candidate".  It  will  be  done  next  week.  Here  is  speed 
for  you.  The  length  of  a  2-vol.  novel. 

Yesterday  evening  I  dined  with  A.  H.  Bullen  (of  Lawrence  &  Bullen) 
at  a  hotel,  he  being  here  on  business.  A  young  fellow,  wholly  unlike  a  publisher. 
Spoke  very  encouragingly.  "Your  name  is  on  all  men's  lips"  &c.  They  will 
reprinl  this  story  of  mine  in  America,  as  well  as  England,  &  hope  to  have  it 
out  by  New  Year. 

He  asked  me  if  I  was  a  relative  of  Algernon  Gissing,  &  added  "He  has 
a  public,  distinctly." 

Not  a  bit  of  business  reserve  about  him.  "We  want  to  give  you  as  much 
as  ever  we  can,  consistently  with  reserving  a  small  profit  for  ourselves." 

I  am  very  glad  indeed  that  your  public  singing  came  off  so  well.  How  I 
should  have  liked  to  hear  you!  Oh  for  a  breath  of  music! 

For  the  Latin  book,  no  doubt  Smith's  Principia  will  do  as  well  as  any- 
thing. The  progress  of  Gladys  in  French  is,  I  should  say,  remarkable.  Good 
that  you  have  done  for  a  time  with  Cicero.  Yes,  you  ought  certainly  to  be 
able  to  read  a  few  odes  of  Horace,  &  they  would  delight  you.  I  should  advise 
you  to  get  Horace  Odes  Book  I,  in  "Macmillan's  Elementary  Classics",  price 
1/6.  It  has  Introduction,  notes  &  vocabulary.  If  you  get  it,  I  will  tell  you 
which  poems  are  best  to  begin  with. 

As  for  Chiaroscuro.  In  Italian,  the  ch  is  invariably  pronounced  as  k  — 
never  as  in  English.  The  i  that  follows  you  must  pronounce  as  if  it  were  y. 
Thus :  Kyaro-scuro.  It  represents  the  Latin  /  in  darn.1;.  For,  as  you  know, 
chiaroscuro— c\\\2lto  (clear)  &  oscuro. 

Your  time  is  very  fully  taken  up.  You  don't  say  whether  you  have  been 
keeping  well,  but  I  hope  so.  As  for  me,  I  was  never  in  better  health  —  not  for 
years  in  anything  like  so  good. 


LETTERS  BY  GEORGE  GISSING 


3»1 


I  hope  soon  to  write  a  long  book  called:  "Nondescripts."  Bullen  thought 
the  title  good.  Also  I  have  a  vol.  of  short  stories  in  view. 

"Godwin  Peak"  seems  to  be  going  from  house  to  house  —  sheer  begging. 
I  don't  quite  understand  it.  But  I  am  less  concerned  now  that  I  feel  pretty  sure 
of  Bullen's  hundred  pounds. 

I  have  writing  (sic)  to  Alg.,  in  consequence  of  a  dolorous  letter,  urging 
him  very  strongly  to  transfer  himself  to  a  little  house  near  Exeter.  I  shall  be 
here  at  least  for  another  couple  of  years :  &  why  should  he  &  I  (both  without 
society)  live  in  different  part  of  England.  Here  he  would  have  books  &  papers. 
I  hope  the  thing  may  be  feasible  early  next  year. 

Edith  does  very  well  —  improves  much  in  every  way.  I  am  more  than 
satisfied  with  her.  The  house  is  orderly,  everything  punctual.  She  has  many 
very  good  qualities. 

Best  love  to  Mother  &  Madge.  And  to  yourself  always,  dear  Nelly. 

Ever  affectionately, 
George 

A  German  publisher  is  bringing  out  the  transl.  of  Demos,  &  probably,  I 
am  told,  will  want  my  portrait  to  put  in  his  Catalogue. 

Eversley,  Worple  Road,  Epsom. 

Dec  30,  95. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

I  am  glad  you  liked  the  little  book.  I  could  not  write  names,  because  I 
had  the  vols,  made  into  parcels  by  the  shopman  —  saving  much  time  &  trouble. 

You  or  Margaret  mentioned  that  Lena  Maddison  is  living  here.  Now  it  is  pos- 
sible that  she  might  come  to  see  us,  but  not  yet ;  a  few  months  hence  we  shall  be 
better  able  to  receive  people.  But  I  want  to  ask  you  what  she  is  doing.  Would 
she  ever  be  able  to  take  an  engagement  for  a  daily  hour  or  two  of  teaching? 
If  so,  I  think  it  might  be  the  way  out  of  a  difficulty  for  the  boy.  The  school 
he  went  to  is  impossible  —  fourteen  children  in  a  room  ten  feet  square.  It 
brought  on  his  illness.  No  other  school  within  his  reach.  So,  when  you  write 
again,  tell  me  something  about  Miss  Maddison's  circumstances.  In  any  case, 
such  engagement  could  not  begin  until  early  summer.  No  doubt  it  will  seem 
strange  to  her  that  she  is  not  invited  to  come  here ;  but  so  does  it  seem  strange 
to  various  other  people,  whom  I  shall  never  be  able  to  ask.  We  see  but  one 
visitor  —  Miss  Collet;  who  knows  the  extraordinary  circumstances  of  the 
establishment,  &  puts  up  with  everything. 

Our  last  three  servants  (wages  £20-  £25)  have  stayed  one  month  each, 
&  all  declare  there  is  work  for  three  strong  women  &  a  boy !  We  are  now 
going  to  have  back  a  loutish  creature  who  was  here  a  year  ago;  the  only  one 
who  ever  did  her  work  (however  badly)  without  grumbling  or  insult.  Her 
tart-crust  had  to  be  broken  with  hammers  —  but  we  can't  help  that. 

Love  to  all  of  you,  &  best  hopes  for  '96. 

Affectionately,  dear  Nelly, 
George 


382 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Budley  Salterton 
May  2,  '97. 

My  clear  Nelly, 

The  matter  of  Latin  pronunciation  is  troublesome,  but  there  is  no  doubt 
that  it  would  be  better  if  the  boys  could  manage  it  in  the  new  way.  There  is  a 
little  book  on  the  subject,  but  I  don't  know  where  it  is  to  be  got.  However, 
all  you  have  to  do  is  to  pronounce  all  the  vowels  as  if  they  were  German,  very 
carefully  attending  to  difference  of  long  &  short.  The  c  is  pronounced  always 
hard.  Thus  you  would  read  the  first  line  of  the  ^Eneid : 

Anna,  veeroomque  cano  Troiae  quee  preemoos  ab  orees. 

J  (by  the  bye)  you  must  pronounce  as  y.  The  dipthong  <r  is  pronounced 
like  Germ,  a  (ay).  Thus  Caesar  becomes  Kasar. 

Of  course  they  would  have  to  relearn  declensions  &c  in  the  new  way. 

I  wish  we  had  had  a  better  report  of  your  health.  My  cold  is  steadily 
going,  &  I  am  much  cheered  by  the  companionship  of  the  brave  Wells.  Please 
tell  M.  that  he  has  given  me  his  new  book,  &  I  will  send  it  shortly  to  Wakefield. 

I  hope  the  journeying  was  well  got  over  by  all  of  you  yesterday.  This 
morning  there  is  a  little  rain. 

So  you  will  be  getting  to  work  again.  I  only  wish  I  could  say  the  same. 
Love  to  all  of  you. 

Affectionately, 
G.  G. 

Ask  the  little  man  to  tell  you  about  the  elephant's  font. 

Budley  Salterton 
May  19,  '97. 

Dear  Nelly, 

Your  inability  to  pick  up  strength  is  very  lamentable.  I  constantly  think 
about  you,  &  hope  things  may  improve. 

In  the  meantime,  I  will  say  one  thing  to  ease  your  mind.  If  the  stress  of 
teaching  becomes  impossible,  &  you  are  obliged  to  give  up  your  school,  I  think 
there  is  no  doubt  that  I  shall  be  able  to  supply  the  small  additional  sum,  every 
year,  which  would  make  your  joint  income  —  competency.  I  feel  sure  I  can 
do  this ;  so  don't  worry  about  material  things.  Of  course  I  am  always  trembling 
about  Alg's  prospects,  but  really  one  is  obliged  to  reflect  that  he  has  health  & 
strength,  &  therefore  should,  somehow  or  other,  support  himself.  There  can 
be  no  doubt  that  you  at  Wakefield  have  the  prior  claim,  &  it  will  rejoice  me 
if  I  can  lighten  your  burdens. 

Tell  M.  there  is  no  hurry  about  H.  G.'s  book.  Read  it  yourself.  He  is  a 
good  old  scoundrel  —  about  the  most  respectable  man  I  know,  all  things  con- 
sidered. You  must  meet  him  some  day.  You  would  really  like  Mrs.  H.  G.  — 
the  nicest  little  woman. 

I  have  just  had  an  offer  of  £  16.  16  (16  guineas)  for  a  story  of  3500  words, 
&  have  refused  it.  I  could  do  the  thing  in  2  hours.  But  I  must  let  the  news- 
paper people  know  that  my  terms  are  now  considerably  higher. 

Take  things  quietly  &  —  look  you  —  do  not  stint  in  the  matter  of  diet. 


LETTERS  BY  GEORGE  GISSING 


383 


You  must  have  a  decent  variety  of  food.  A  little  extra  expense  now  may  mean 
economy  for  the  future. 

Much  love,  dear  Nelly, 
Yours, 

G.  G. 

Via  del  Boschetto,  41.  A.  Rome. 
Jan.  23,  '98. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

1  grieve  over  your  school  troubles.  Yes,  it  is  a  monstrous  thing  that  you 
should  work  so  hard  for  so  little  —  a  ludicrous  thing.  Yet  I  suppose  people 
will  not  pay  more.  But  for  my  hateful  troubles,  &  all  the  consequent  expenses, 
I  should  often  be  sending  you  a  little  cheque.  Well,  I  may  be  able,  even  as  it 
is,  to  help,  some  day. 

Colles  has  disapopinted  me  over  that  book  "The  Town  Traveller."  He 
said  there  would  be  no  difficulty  at  all  about  serializing  it,  &  now  he  says 
there  is  no  opening  anywhere  till  1899.  If  Methuens  offer  a  decent  sum,  I 
think  I  shall  take  it. 

Walter's  letter  is  very  good.  I  am  sure  the  little  man  is  as  well  off  as  if 
he  could  be  anywhere,  &  at  that  age  one  does  not  trouble  about  one's  parents. 
I  hope  to  see  him  again  some  day,  but  how  I  am  to  see  poor  little  Alfred  I 
really  don't  know.  Mrs.  Orme  is  having  terrible  trouble.  I  shall  send  you  all 
her  letters  some  time.  E's  latest  statement  is  that  she  will  go  before  a  magis- 
trate, &  declare  that  I  have  "deserted  my  family" !  I  am  really  afraid  she  will 
end  in  the  lunatic  asylum. 

You  will  be  pleased  to  hear  that  Wells  &  his  wife  hope  to  reach  Rome 
at  the  end  of  Feb.,  &  to  stay  for  a  month.  This  will  be  cheering.  Margaret  will 
be  able  to  picture  them  on  their  travels. 

The  sky  here  is  glorious.  Five  days  out  of  the  week,  not  a  cloud  from 
sunrise  to  sunset.  But  there  is  danger  in  this.  The  hot  sun  makes  one  perspire. 
&  at  the  same  time  a  very  cold  wind  may  be  blowing.  Moreover  all  the  Italian 
towns  are  built  with  a  view  of  excluding  the  sun,  which  in  summer  is  intoler- 
able. Thus,  many  streets  never  get  any  sun  at  all,  &  they  are  positive  ice- 
houses to  pass  through.  My  experience  is  that  people  with  a  weak  chest  should 
not  come  to  Italy.  I  believe  that  many  a  one  has  lost  money  &  life,  who  would 
have  saved  both  by  simply  going  to  South  Devon  or  the  Isle  of  Wight.  Italy 
is  a  splendid  country  for  the  young  &  the  strong;  for  invalids  it  offers  little 
comfort  &  many  dangers.  To  send  Keats  to  Rome  was  the  height  of  folly.  It 
resulted  from  ignorance,  of  course,  but  might  have  been  a  deliberate  plan  fur 
shortening  his  life. 

By  the  bye,  Keats's  rooms,  in  the  Piazza  di  Spagna,  are  now  occupied 
by  a  medical  man.  A  tablet  on  the  front  tells  people  that  here  Keats  died.  So, 
in  the  Corse,  a  tablet  on  a  house-front  tells  one  that  here  Shelley  wrote  the 
Cenci  &  Prometheus  Unbound.  Another,  proclaims  the  residence  of  Goethe. 
These  tablets  abound  in  Italy. 

I  rejoice  to  hear  that  Mother  is  better.  But  she  will  have  to  be  very  care- 


384 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


ful  through  the  spring-.  What  a  pity  that  so  lovely  a  country  as  England  has 
only  one  month  of  real  summer  weather. 

I  had  a  ticket  to  a  Mass  at  S.  Peter's  where  the  Pope  would  officiate.  I 
should  like  to  see  him,  but  alas !  a  bad  cold  prevented  me.  He  never  appears 
in  public,  &  it  is  really  difficult  to  get  sight  of  him. 

Much  love  to  all  of  you.  I  will  write  to  M.  next.  No  rage,  I  beg! 

Ever  yours,  dear  Nelly, 
G.  G. 

Eversley,  Worple  Road,  Epsom. 

Feb.  22,  '98. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

This  seems  to  me  a  very  good  idea,  &  I  heartily  hope  it  may  succeed. 
I  want  you  to  let  me  contribute  £5  to  the  initial  expenses.  &  herewith  send 
the  money. 

As  for  prospectus,  should  it  not  be  something  like  this : 

"The  Misses  Gissing,  after  some  years'  experience  in  private  teaching, 
are  about  to  open  a  Preparatory  Day-School. 

"Their  course  of  instruction  will  comprise  the  usual  English  subjects, 
(grammar,  history,  geography,)  arithmetic,  French  &  Latin.  Extra  subjects : 
Music  &  Drawing. 

"In  all  their  teaching,  the  Misses  Gissing  will  aim  at  the  thoroughness 
&  method  which  are  of  prime  importance  in  the  education  of  children.  It  will 
be  their  endeavor  to  lay  the  foundations  of  a  sound  intellectual  training. 

"The  year  will  be  divided  into  three  terms  [name  them].  School  hour:-, 
9.20  to  12,  &  2.30  to  4. 

"Fee  for  the  ordinary  course,  £2.  .2  a  term,  payable  in  advance.  Music 
  Drawing  . 

"Reference  is  kindly  permitted  to  the  following  ladies  &  gentlemen: 

I  don't  think  that  you  want  more  than  this ;  the  briefer  the  better.  At  the 
foot  must  stand  your  signatures,  address  &  date.  The  printer  will  suggest  type 
&c.  Let  me  see  a  proof.  It  ought  to  be  in  Italics,  I  think,  &  spread  so  that  the 
list  of  people  goes  onto  an  inner  page.  But  ask  Hick  about  these  matters. 

By  the  bye,  xdiere  is  your  school  to  be? 

It  will  probably  be  after  Easter  that  I  come  north. 

Love  to  all  of  you. 

Yours,  dear  Nelly, 
George 

Mother  can  pay  the  cheque  into  the  bank,  &  draw  the  money  for  you 
with  a  cheque  of  her  own. 

Villa  Souvenir,  Arcachon. 
March  29,  1902. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

I  must  not  let  you  make  a  sacrifice  of  this  kind  on  my  account.  Already 
I  am  really  in  your  debt  from  last  quarter.  Your  school  is  large,  &  a  splendid 


LETTERS  BY  GEORGE  GISSING 


385 


result  of  the  intelligence  &  hard  work  you  have  both  devoted  to  it;  but  it  is 
far  from  profitable,  &  you  have  burdens  enough  of  your  own.  So  I  send  here- 
with a  cheque  for  £3.  I  don't  think  this  can  leave  any  surplus ;  but.  if  it  should, 
pass  it  on  to  the  next  account. 

I  am  delighted  to  hear  that  the  boy  is  getting-  big  &  strong.  Ilkley  must 
be  splendid  for  young  lungs.  By  the  bye,  I  don't  know  whether  Miss  Richards 
is  disposed  to  go  on  with  the  old  arrangement;  of  course  you  will  tell  me  as 
soon  as  there  is  any  suggestion  of  increased  terms.  What  most  worries  me 
is  the  thought  of  what  Walter  is  ultimately  to  do.  I  am  so  hopelessly  remote 
(in  ever)'  sense  of  the  word)  from  the  practical  world,  that  the  future  in  that 
direction  seems  to  me  full  of  unspeakable  difficulties.  Of  course  the  time  has 
not  yet  come,  but  it  will  come  so  very  soon. 

I  hear  that  Alfred  is  delighted  with  his  farm  life.  He  goes  riding  about 
with  the  farmer  on  his  gig —  one  imagines  a  child's  enjoyment  of  all  this,  after 
London  by-streets.  The  place  is  called  Mabe ;  situated  half  way  between  Fal- 
mouth &  Penryn.  Miss  Orme  says  it  is  very  beautiful.  If  ever  I  am  able  to 
come  &  live  in  England  —  my  one  hope  —  I  shall  most  likely  have  to  make  a 
home  in  that  region,  for  the  climate  is  very  mild.  I  fear  it  will  be  a  long  time 
before  the  boys  can  be  brought  together,  but  some  day,  I  hope. 

I  was  very  glad  to  have  Mother's  letter.  It's  good  that  she  had  got  so 
well  through  the  winter. 

Wretched  weather  here ;  a  gale  which  has  lasted  ten  days,  with  heavy 
rain;  true  Bay  of  Biscay  weather.  I  wait  impatiently  for  the  return  of  the  sun. 

Love  to  Mother  &  Margaret.  Try  to  get  a  rest  in  the  Easter  holidays  — 
though  I  suppose  you  stay  at  Wakefield. 

Ever  affectionately,  dear  Nelly 
G. 

Villa  Lannes,  Ciboure,  S.  Jean  de  Luz. 
Oct.  18.  1902. 

My  dear  Nelly, 

Most  unfortunately,  Alg's  letter  reached  me  whilst  I  was  suffering  from 
an  attack  of  bronchitis;  I  fear  I  replied  very  despondently.  But  alas!  there  is 
no  hope  of  his  finding  a  place  —  at  his  age.  He  has  no  choice  but  to  struggle  on. 
Again  &  again  in  the  hopeful  years  gone  by  I  tried  to  turn  him  into  other  direc- 
tions. It  is  now  too  late.  And  indeed  I  cannot  understand  why  he  should  not 
earn  at  least  £200  a  year.  That  is  made  by  numbers  of  silly  men  and  women, 
with  no  means  at  all.  To  be  sure,  his  monotonous  life  takes  the  spring  out  of 
him.  It  is  very  dreary  &  miserable  —  but  I  know  not  how  to  help. 

I  am  well  again,  but  have  to  be  very  careful.  By  the  bye,  my  bronchitis, 
says  the  doctor,  came  simply  from  being  too  much  on  the  shore  of  the  sea.  In 
England,  there  is  a  disposition  to  think  sea  air  good  for  everybody,  &  in  all 
circumstances ;  but  the  French  doctors  —  whom  I  find,  in  general,  remarkably 
good  —  are  much  more  cautious  in  this  matter.  It  seems  that  sea  air  always 
promotes  a  tendency  to  congestion  —  where  that  tendency  exists.  Henceforth 
I  have  to  take  my  walks  inland.  Indeed,  I  am  much  better  in  every  way  since 
I  ceased  to  go  to  the  shore. 


30 


386 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


I  mention  this,  thinking-  of  Mother.  At  her  age,  T  have  a  grave  doubt 
whether  she  ought  to  go  to  the  seaside  at  all ;  an  inland  holiday-place  would 
probably  suit  her  far  better.  Of  course,  she  might  have  caught  her  cold  any- 
where, but  I  fear  the  sea-air  inclined  her  throat  &  chest  to  the  state  of  con- 
gestion. I  am  told  that  it  is  very  seldom  indeed  that  the  sea  air  (at  all  events, 
that  powerful  sea-air  of  the  north)  is  good  after  the  age  of  sixty.  It  zvhips  the 
blood,  —  whereas  in  such  cases  the  blood  needs  (&  can  bear)  only  the  gentlest 
stimulants.  With  young  people,  it  is  a  totally  different  thing,  of  course. 

Your  letter  is  full  of  good  news  —  in  spite  of  your  anxieties.  Splendid, 
the  Grammar  School  scholarship !  You  are  doing  wonderful  things.  The  work 
must  be  most  severe  for  both  of  you  —  but  you  face  it  in  a  magnificent  spirit. 
Your  life  is  worth  living.  Of  course  your  powers  have  grown  with  the  demand 
upon  them. 

I  fear  Enid  is  at  your  charge.  This  is  wrong,  of  course.  But  what  can 

one  say? 

I  hope  soon  to  hear  from  Walter.  He  must  learn  to  work  hard.  Oh,  if  / 
could  work  now,  as  I  used  to !  But  the  doctor  says  that  I  ought  never  to  be  at 
my  desk  more  than  2  hours  a  day ! 

Did  Mother  receive  the  copy  of  my  edition  of  Forster  which  I  sent  two 
days  ago?  No  doubt. 

Be  very  careful  about  the  new,  damp  bedroom.  Nothing  is  more  danger- 
ous ■ —  nothing'. 

Mother  is  quite  right  to  go  to  bed  early.  Let  her  never  sit  up  when  she 
feels  at  all  tired.  And  a  few  days  completely  in  bed  now  &  then  would  do  her 
nothing  but  good.  The  more  she  rests,  the  longer  she  will  keep  her  average 
health. 

Love  to  Margaret,  love  to  all  of  you.  Rain,  rain,  rain;  but  not  cold. 

Ever  affectionately, 
George 


Ten  Books 


Speaking  Frankly.  By  James  F.  Byrnes. 
Harper.  1947.  324  pp. 
With  simple  frankness  Mr.  Byrnes 
sets  down  the  experiences  of  his  serv- 
ice as  Secretary  of  State.  A  complete 
stenographer,  he  draws  not  only  upon 
the  documents  and  his  memories  but 
also  upon  his  shorthand  notes.  The 
story  goes  back  to  the  Yalta  Confer- 
ence, to  which  he  accompanied  Presi- 
dent Roosevelt.  It  deals  in  separate 
chapters  with  the  Potsdam  meeting, 
the  setback  at  London,  the  Moscow 
negotiations  which  ended  in  an  im- 
passe, and  the  Paris  Peace  Conference 
and  its  New  York  finale.  There  are 
many  intimate  details  about  Roosevelt, 
Churchill,  and  Stalin;  but  the  largest 
space  is  devoted  to  Molotov.  It  is  the 
Russian  foreign  minister  who  is  the 
hero  (or  villain)  of  the  piece.  The  ex- 
asperation— and  amazement — which  Mr. 
Byrnes  has  felt  at  the  Russian's  stub- 
borness  is  still  present  on  every  page. 
All  along  Molotov  has  been  playing  his 
"delaying  tactics."  For  the  Soviets  can 
be  quick  when  they  want  to  be ;  their 
pact  with  Hitler  was  concluded  in  nine 
days  after  the  German  ambassador  had 
made  the  first  approach.  "The  speed 
with  which  they  reached  agreement," 
Mr.  Byrnes  writes,  "impresses  me  be- 
cause I  spent  fifteen  months  trying  to 
get  Soviet  agreement  to  five  treaties  of 
lesser  importance."  It  was  in  vain  also 
that  Mr.  Bevin  and  Mr.  Byrnes  offered 
a  twenty-five  year  demilitarization  treaty 
both  for  Germany  and  Japan ;  Mr.  Mol- 
otov first  wanted  to  extend  the  treaty 
to  forty  years,  but  when  his  recom- 
mendation was  welcomed  he  quietly 
dropped  the  matter.  The  reason  for  the 
Soviets'  determined  resistance  to  an 
effective  control  of  atomic  energy  has 
been  stated  clearly  by  Mr.  Gromyko : 
they  are  afraid  of  interference  in  their 
internal  life.  "It  is  unfortunate,  but  ap- 
parently true,"  Mr.  Byrnes  comments, 
"that  the  Soviets  think  Capitalistic  in- 
terference is  more  to  be  feared  than 
atomic  bombs."  According  to  Mr.  Gro- 
myko, the  veto  is  necessary  to  protect 


the  sovereignty  of  the  states.  "The  So- 
viet leaders  do  not  yet  appreciate,"  Mr. 
Byrnes  again  remarks,  "that  civiliza- 
tion and  not  state  sovereignty  is  at 
stake."  Mr.  Byrnes  has  not  lost  hope ; 
yet  he  emphasizes  that  our  policy  must 
be  one  of  firmness  and  patience.  (Z.  H.) 

Ordeal  of  the  Union.  By  Allan  Nevins. 
Scribner.  1947.  2  vols.  1183  pp. 
Covering  the  years  1846  to  1857,  these 
are  the  first  two  of  a  projected  three- 
volume  history.  In  1846  the  prevailing 
political  atmosphere  was  one  of  com- 
promise ;  by  1857  the  country  was  di- 
vided between  two  extremes :  the  South 
seeking  to  preserve  slavery  and  the 
North  naively  unaware  of  the  funda- 
mental problem  of  two  races  living  side 
by  side.  It  is  this  shift  in  political  situ- 
ation which  the  author  describes  in  his 
remarkably  impartial  account.  Mr.  Nev- 
ins's  pages  reveal  a  youthful,  exuber- 
ant, and  optimistic  America.  This  was 
the  age  which  witnessed  vast  numbers 
of  immigrants  flocking  to  American 
shores,  a  rising  industrialism,  and  the 
"fruits  of  Manifest  Destiny."  America 
doubled  in  size  in  this  decade ;  and  the 
question  of  the  status  of  the  new  West- 
ern territories  was  the  controversial  is- 
sue of  the  day,  resulting  in  the  bordi'r 
states,  such  as  Kansas,  becoming  battle- 
grounds. Mr.  Nevins  gives  an  insight 
into  the  basic  economic  conflict  be- 
tween the  agricultural  South  and  the  in- 
dustrial North,  the  political  connivings, 
the  conditions  of  education  and  learn- 
ing, and  the  life  of  the  masses.  Against 
this  background  appear  magnificent 
portraits  of  the  great  nineteenth-cen- 
tury triumvirate :  Clay,  Calhoun,  and 
Webster.  The  controversial  Seventh  of 
March  Speech  is  discussed  with  fairness. 
The  decade  which  witnessed  the  deatli 
of  these  statesmen  also  saw  the  elec- 
tion of  "three  singularly  incompetent 
chieftains"  —  Taylor,  Pierce,  and  Bu- 
chanan —  whose  lack  of  policy  was  so 
fatal.  Mr.  Nevins  has  written  the  his- 
tory of  a  period  which  showed  great 
promise  yet  ended  in  tragedy.  (M.  R.) 


387 


388 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Across  the  Wide  Missouri.  By  Bernard 
DeVoto.  Houghton  Mifflin.  1947.  483  pp. 
This  history  of  the  early  West  had  its 
inception  in  the  discovery  of  water- 
colors  by  Alfred  Jacob  Miller,  who,  in 
1837-38,  painted  the  only  on-the-spot 
pictures  of  Rocky  Mountain  fur  trap- 
pers and  the  first  scenes  of  the  terri- 
tory. The  81  plates,  some  in  color,  re- 
produce mam*  of  these  paintings  for 
the  first  time.  However,  the  book  goes 
much  farther  than  the  fur  trade  in  the 
1830's;  it  is  a  brilliant  account  of  the 
American  frontier,  relating  the  lives 
of  the  fur  traders,  their  travels  and  re- 
lations with  the  Indians,  and  the  thrill- 
ing buffalo  hunts  and  Indian  warfare. 
It  is  written  almost  like  a  novel,  with 
the  same  characters  throughout.  There 
is  Sir  William  Drummond  Stewart,  a 
Scotchman  seeking  adventure  in  the 
We>t,  and  paying  Miller  for  western 
scenes  to  be  hung  in  his  castle  in  Scot- 
land. There  is  Nathaniel  Wyeth,  a 
"greenhorn"  from  Cambridge,  who  am- 
bitiously set  out  to  undercut  the  tre- 
mendous monopolies  of  Astor's  Ameri- 
can Fur,  the  Rocky  Mountain  Fur,  and 
the  Hudson's  Bay  companies.  De  Bonne- 
ville, an  experienced  prairie  traveller 
with  a  similar  design,  and  Maximilian. 
Prince  of  Wied-Neuwied,  an  amateur 
scientist  collecting  data  among  the  In- 
dians, appear,  along  with  the  old  hands 
the  Sublettes,  Jim  Bridger,  and  Joe 
Walker.  Mr.  DeVoto's  dynamic  style 
is  enhanced  by  frequent  quotations 
from  contemporary  sources,  complete 
with  the  "enthusiastic"  spellings  of  the 
-emi-literate  trappers.  (/.  D.  L.) 

The  Atlantic  Frontier.  By  Louis  B. 
Wright.  Knopf.  1947.  354  pp. 
This  volume  is  the  record  of  the  growth 
of  the  American  Colonies  from  1607  to 
1763.  Predominant  in  America's  heritage 
was  a  love  of  learning  combined  with  a 
practical  ability  for  success.  Contrasted 
with  the  agrarian  society  of  Tidewater 
Virginia  and  Maryland,  which  produced 
a  ruling  plantation  class,  was  the  culture 
of  New  England,  an  urban  society  en- 
gaged in  trade  and  commerce.  The 
trading  posts  along  the  Hudson  and 
Delaware,  on  the  other  hand,  formed  a 
culture  composed  of  many  nationali- 


ties. The  Holy  Experiment  in  Pennsyl- 
vania was  also  prosperous,  and  the 
author  draws  an  interesting  portrait  of 
William  Penn.  '"honest  Quaker  preach- 
er" and  successful  courtier  of  two  Eng- 
lish kings.  Philadelphia  was  the  metropolis 
of  colonial  America.  A  consideration  of 
the  civilization  of  the  Carolinas  con- 
tinues the  survey,  revealing  a  sophisti- 
cated society  centered  about  Charles 
Town.  The  author  also  considers  Georgia, 
a  failure  as  a  colony  for  distressed  debt- 
ors, but  of  strategic  importance  as  Bri- 
tain's southern  outpost  in  the  Colonies. 
The  reader  catches  a  glimpse,  too,  of 
"the  movement  into  the  foothills  of  the 
Alleghenies  and  beyond,  which  .  .  .  was 
a  Drang  nach  H'cstcn  of  tremendous  im- 
port for  the  future  history  of  the  whole 
of  English  America."  (M.  R.) 

Salem  and  the  Indies.  By  James  Dun- 
can Phillips.  Houghton  Mifflin.  1947. 

468  pp. 

This  third  volume  in  the  author's  series 
on  Salem  begins  with  the  years  imme- 
diately following  the  Revolution  and 
continues  through  the  War  of  18 12. 
From  its  pages  emerges  the  picture  of 
a  coastal  town  astir  with  Yankee  en- 
ergy and  drive,  and,  at  the  same  time, 
containing  an  almost  exotic  flavor. 
Salem  was  a  mixture  of  the  provincial 
and  the  co.-mopolitan.  Out  of  her  pri- 
vateering activities  during  the  Revo- 
lution, she  built  up  her  fabulously  suc- 
cessful trade  with  Europe,  the  West 
Indies,  China,  and  India.  Worldly  >uc- 
cess  was  attended  by  an  active  interest 
in  culture  and  education,  a  love  of 
beautiful  homes,  and  a  gracious  way  of 
living.  Many  famous  Massachusetts 
names  appear  in  Mr.  Phillips's  pages. 
Much  of  the  material  is  of  local  inter- 
est only,  but  the  general  picture  of  the 
town  in  its  relation  to  the  world  is  of 
wider  interest.  The  finances  of  the  voy- 
agers are  thoroughly  discussed,  and 
the  author  traces  the  effect  of  national 
developments  and  foreign  affairs  011 
Salem's  trade.  The  undeclared  naval 
war  with  France  in  1797  through  1801 
is  included,  as  well  as  the  Napoleonic 
Wars  and  the  War  of  1812,  "Mr.  Madi- 
son's War."  Mr.  Phillips  is  undoubted- 
ly right  for  blaming  Jefferson  for  his 


TEN  BOOKS 


389 


failure  to  see  New  England  as  a  center 
of  rising-  industry  and  commerce,  yet 
he  is  lacking-  in  appreciation  of  the 
great  Virginian's  idealism.  Whatever 
the  reader's  political  beliefs,  however, 
he  will  agree  that  Salem's  "intelligent, 
courageous,  industrious  people"  made 
her  a  unique  town  in  America.  (M.  R.) 

Juarez  and  his  Mexico.  By  Ralph  Roc- 
der.  Viking.  1947.  2  vols.  765  pp. 
The  life  story  of  Pablo  Benito  Juarez, 
Indian  peasant  boy  who  rose  to  become 
President  of  Mexico,  forms  the  frame- 
work for  this  account  of  Mexican  history 
during  the  turbulent  middle  years  of 
the  last  century.  It  is  in  his  chronicle 
of  the  Mexican  movement  for  freedom 
rather  than  in  the  portrait  of  Juarez 
himself  that  the  author  has  been  most 
successful.  Mexico's  struggle  was  two- 
fold :  on  one  hand  she  was  trying  to 
sever  her  European  bonds,  and  on  the 
other,  she  was  trying"  to  establish  a  re- 
publican government.  He  was  exiled 
to  New  Orleans  in  1852  by  a  decree  of 
Santa  Anna,  the  military  adventurer 
who  temporarily  seized  the  govern- 
ment. After  acting  as  head  of  the  na- 
tion from  1858,  Juarez  became  Mexico's 
constitutional  president  in  1861.  Al- 
ways at  the  mercy  of  rivalries  of  Euro- 
pean powers,  the  country  was  invaded  by 
French  and  Spanish  armies,  and  the 
government  was  forced  to  find  refuge 
in  the  North.  The  Austrian  archduke 
Afaximilian  and  his  wife  Carlota,  pup- 
pets of  Napoleon  III,  "ruled"  for  three 
years.  In  1867  the  emperor  was  exe- 
cuted and  Juarez  was  reelected.  The 
"Mexican  Lincoln,"  however,  outlived 
his  mission,  and  toward  the  end  was  at- 
tacked for  his  moderation.  (A$.  R.) 

Great  Morning!  By  Sir  Osbert  Sitwell. 
Little,  Brown.  1947.  360  pp. 
Tins  book  follows  Left  Hand,  Right 
Hand!  and  The  Scarlet  Tree  as  the  third 
in  the  author's  five-volume  autobiogra- 
phy. Here  we  find  young  Sitwell  reach- 
ing his  twenties  just  before  the  first 
world  war.  He  concentrates  on  a  few 
figures,  in  particular  that  of  his  father. 
Sir  George  Sitwell  seemed  to  live  in 
the  thirteenth  century  even  to  the  mat- 
ter of  his  son's  allowance,  which  he 


granted  according  to  the  amount  given 
to  eldest  sons  of  the  family  at  the  time 
of  the  Black  Death.  He  spent  thous- 
ands of  pounds  remodeling-  his  estate 
in  antique  style,  yet  rebuked  his  son 
for  spending  too  much  for  opera  tickets. 
Defying  the  strict  tradition  that  an  en- 
sign must  never  spend  his  leave  in 
London,  Sir  Osbert  bought  a  ticket 
for  Stravinsky's  Fire-Bird,  at  Covent 
Garden.  "I  was  aware  that  for  the  first 
time  I  had  been  given  the  opportunity 
of  seeing  presented  a  work  of  art  .  .  . 
Now  I  knew  where  I  stood.  I  would  be, 
for  so  long  as  I  lived,  on  the  side  of  the 
arts."  There  are  numerous  sketches  of 
prominent  people :  Sir  Thomas  Beecham. 
Richard  Strauss,  Sergei  Diaghilev,  Mrs. 
Asquith,  Mrs.  George  Keppel,  and  others. 
The  author's  brother,  Sacheverell,  and  sis- 
ter, Edith,  enter  the  story;  Edith's  trip 
to  the  Isle  of  Wight  to  place  bay  leaves, 
a  honeycomb,  and  roses  upon  the  grave 
of  Swinburne  provoked  a  family  up- 
roar. The  precise  but  rambling  style, 
which  at  times  recalls  Proust,  requires 
a  leisurely  audience  for  its  full  appre- 
ciation. (/.  D.  L.) 

Doctor  Freud.  By  Emil  Ludwig.  Hell- 
man,  Williams.  1947.  317  pp. 
This  is  a  bitter  assault  upon  Dr.  Freud 
and  his  followers,  "the  underworld  of 
sexomaniacs,"  as  the  author  puts  it.  He 
intends  his  book  also  as  a  warning 
against  the  ravages  which,  he  thinks, 
psychoanalysis  is  inflicting  upon  the 
whole  generation.  Freud's  "discover- 
ies," proclaimed  as  dogmatic  truths, 
have  never  been  proven  scientifically; 
his  "facts,"  derived  from  the  observa- 
tion of  a  few  patients,  are  wild  exag- 
gerations and  generalizations.  The  psy- 
choanalysts do  not  recognize  any  dif- 
ference between  neurotic  .  and  normal 
persons,  and  often  they  themselves  in- 
troduce their  "vagaries''  into  people's 
minds.  Quoting  the  dream  interpreta- 
tions of  Freud  and  his  leading  pupils, 
Mr.  Ludwig  caricatures  the  Oedipus 
and  other  complexes ;  and  in  his  presenta- 
tion the  jargon  of  the  celebrated  doctors 
looks  ludicrous  and  horrible  enough, 
indeed.  Ambitious  psychoanalysists 
have  also  "explored"  many  historical 
personages  —  Napoleon,  Leonardo  da 


390 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Vinci,  Bismarck,  Goethe,  Homer,  and 
others ;  and  their  "weird"  conclusions 
appear  to  the  author  perhaps  the  most 
damning.  Mr.  Ludwig,  himself  free  from 
excessive  shyness,  is  particularly  en- 
raged at  "their  arrogance  in  professing 
to  see  deeper  than  did  the  greatest 
thinkers  of  mankind."  The  study  of  the 
soul,  and  especially  of  the  memories  of 
childhood,  has  always  been  the  province 
of  poets,  writers,  and  artists ;  yet  the 
psychoanalysts,  "ignorant  of  the  art  and 
literature  of  the  world,"  expropriate  the 
whole  domain  for  themselves.  (Z.  H.) 

The  Times  of  Melville  and  Whitman. 

By  Van  Wyck  Brooks.  Dutton.  1947. 
489  pp. 

In  a  review  of  the  book  George  F. 
Whicher  has  made  the  observation: 
"The  technique  that  Mr.  Brooks's  man- 
ner of  presentation  most  nearly  re- 
sembles is  that  of  the  producer  of  histori- 
cal pageants.  Each  chapter  that  he 
composes  is  like  an  artfully  designed 
float,  on  which  ride  a  group  of  person- 
alities tactfully  chosen  to  make  up  a 
unit  in  the  procession.  For  the  adorn- 
ment of  his  colorful  tableaux  the  author 
has  painted  scenic  backgrounds,  as- 
sembled a  representative  collection  of 
actual  relics  in  the  form  of  quotations, 
attended  to  all  details  of  period  furni- 
ture and  costume,  posed  the  actors,  and 
provided  an  incidental  music  of  ca- 
denced  sentences  .  .  ."  There  are,  to  be 
sure,  some  "floats"  and  "pageants," 
yet  the  description  fits  Mr.  Brooks's 
earlier  books,  The  Flowering  of  New 
England  and  New  England:  Indian  Sum- 
mer, better  than  the  present  one.  Here 
the  subject  is  too  large  for  such  nos- 
talgic treatment.  Instead  of  interwoven 
in  the  text,  most  of  the  quotations  are 
given  in  footnotes;  in  fact,  the  text 
sometimes  reads  like  a  catalog  of  the 
innumerable  minor  writers  who  worked 
in  New  York,  Philadelphia,  Baltimore, 
Charleston,  Hannibal,  and  San  Fran- 
cisco. Among  them  tower  Melville  and 
Whitman,  without  however  focusing 
the  scene  around  themselves.  The  vol- 
ume is,  in  a  way,  a  compromise  between 
the  bitterness  of  Mr.  Brooks's  early 
period  when  he  was  spokesman  of  the 
"expatriates"  and  the  sweetness  of  his 
late  attempts  to  create  a  literary  pano- 


rama on  a  national  scale.  His  attitude 
toward  Mark  Twain,  whose  "ordeal" 
he  lamented  in  one  of  his  early  books, 
shows  perhaps  best  Mr.  Brooks's  trans- 
formation ;  although  still  regretting 
the  lack  of  "artistic  responsibility"  in 
the  author  of  Huckleberry  Finn,  he  is 
now  satisfied  to  regard  him  as  "the 
greatest  American  folk-writer  of  the 
time."  Mr.  Whicher,  who  appreciates 
Mr.  Brooks's  purpose  and  method, 
also  warns  that  the  book  must  not  be 
used  "as  a  substitute  for  literary  his- 
tory informed  by  a  stronger  grasp  of 
literary  fundamentals."  In  view  of  the 
general  adulation  which  Mr.  Brooks's 
conversion  has  aroused,  the  warning- 
seems  justified.  Yet  Mr.  Brooks — earn- 
est, searching,  and  industrious  as  he  is 
—  is  able  to  put  his  finger  at  the  root 
of  things.  {Z.  H.) 

The  James  Family.  By  F.  O.  Matthies- 
sen.  Knopf.  1947.  706  pp. 
This  is  an  unusual  book  —  "the  biogra- 
phy not  of  an  individual  but  of  a  family, 
and  of  a  family  of  minds,"  as  Mr.  Mat- 
thiessen  writes.  Henry  James,  Sr.  and 
three  of  his  children  —  William,  the 
psychologist,  Henry,  Jr.,  the  novelist, 
and  Alice  —  are  the  chief  participants, 
and  they  were  a  close  group.  "They 
have  scrutinized  and  'placed'  one  an- 
other, just  as  they  feasted  upon  and 
scrutinized  and  'placed'  every  book  and 
character  and  event  that  came  their  way." 
The  brothers  were  most  of  the  time  sep- 
arated by  the  Atlantic,  but  their  fre- 
quent correspondence  records  all  the 
more  fully  their  mutual  reactions.  Mr. 
Matthiessen  delights  in  dovetailing  their 
letters  and  contrasting  their  views. 
More  than  that,  he  includes  many  selec- 
tions from  their  writings,  some  of  which 
have  not  been  printed  before,  while  the 
rest  are  widely  scattered  in  books  most 
of  which  are  out  of  print.  "Since  the 
James  family's  essential  biography  is 
internal  rather  than  external  .  .  .  ,"  he 
defends  his  procedure,  "it  can  be  pre- 
sented best  in  their  own  language." 
Thus  this  biography  of  the  Jameses  is 
is  also  a  comprehensive  anthology.  The 
volume  is  rich  in  Mr.  Matthiessen's 
acute  observations  and  interpretations  ; 
unfortunately,  it  is  unwieldy  by  its 
sheer  length  and  complexity.  {Z.  H.) 


Library  Notes 


Thomas  Rowlandson 

THE  leading-  article  in  the  present 
issue  of  More  Books  is  an  abridg- 
ment of  Mr.  Heintzelman's  introduction 
to  The  Watercolor  Drawings  of  Thomas 
Rowlandson,  a  volume  soon  to  be  pub- 
lished by  Watson-Guptill  Publications 
and  containing"  reproductions  of  some 
fifty  Rowlandson  drawings  from  the 
Albert  H.  Wiggin  Collection  of  the 
Boston  Public  Library.  Tbere  are  nearly 
three  hundred  Rowlandson  drawings 
in  the  Wiggin  Collection  ;  the  most  im- 
portant will  be  on  display  during  De- 
cember. 

Avellaneda's  Don  Quixote 
in  Dutch 

THE  rare  first  Dutch  translation 
of  Avellaneda's  continuation  of 
Cervantes's  epic  has  lately  been  added 
to  the  Avellaneda  items  already  in  the 
Ticknor  Collection.  These  include  the 
exceedingly  rare  first  Spanish  edition 
of  the  work,  printed  in  Tarragona  in 
1614;  the  first  English  translation 
(made  from  the  French)  by  Captain 
John  Stevens,  London  1705;  the  French 
translation  by  Le  Sage,  the  author  of 
Gil  Bias,  London  1707;  and  a  German 
translation  published  at  Weimar  and 
Leipzig  in  1777. 

The  title-page  of  the  anonymous 
Dutch  translation — printed  by  William 
Broedelet  at  Utrecht  in  1706  —  reads 
Nieuwe  Avantuuren  van  den  Vroomcn  en 
Wijzcn  Don  Quichot  dc  la  Mancha  (New 
Adventures  of  the  Pious  and  Wise  Don 
Quixote  de  la  Mancha).  It  is  a  small, 
stout  octavo  of  687  pages,  the  chief  at- 
traction of  which  is  the  series  of  six- 
teen copper  plates  with  lively,  humor- 
ous scenes  and  charming  landscape 
backgrounds.  The  frontispiece  presents 
Don  Quixote  and  Sancho  Panza  with 
their  steeds  ready  for  high  adventure. 
One  plate  shows  the  dauntless  knight 
sprawling  on  the  ground  from  the  blow 
of  the  melon  farmer  whom  he  has  at- 
tacked as  the  "Raving  Roland" ;  an- 
other depicts  his  entry  in  Saragossa, 


where  he  champions  a  pickpocket  whom 
he  takes  for  an  abused  noble  knight; 
still  another  reveals  him,  lance  held  up- 
right, approaching  a  woman  tied  to  a 
tree,  whom  he  hails  as  the  Queen  Zeno- 
bia  —  and  so  on. 

Cervantes  published  the  first  part  of 
Don  Quixote  in  1605,  but  delayed  com- 
posing the  second  part.  In  1614  ap- 
peared a  continuation  made  apparently 
by  an  Aragonese  whose  identity  was 
hidden  behind  the  pseudonym  of  Alon- 
so  Fernandez  de  Avellaneda.  Cervantes 
felt  very  bitter,  and  when  he  published 
his  own  sequel  at  the  end  of  the  follow- 
ing year,  he  found  room  in  it  for  gibes 
against  his  presumptuous  rival. 

The  Preface  of  the  Dutch  edition 
states  that  copies  of  Avellaneda's  work 
were  rare  in  Spain.  Some  say  that  the 
followers  of  Cervantes  burnt  most  of 
the  copies ;  the  prefacer,  however,  in- 
clines to  think  that  the  Spaniards  neg- 
lected to  reprint  the  work  because  the 
Aragonese  language  of  Avellaneda  was 
not  as  pure  as  the  Castilian  of  Cer- 
vantes, "What  does  it  matter  to  us," 
he  asks,  "that  the  Aragonese  does  not 
speak  Spanish  as  well  as  the  Castilian 

—  if  he  is  wittier  and  offers  us  more 
amusement  than  the  others?"      M.  M. 

Ouida  Denies  an  American 
Rumor 

IN  this  imperious  letter  to  her  Ameri- 
can publisher,  J.  B.  Lippincott  of 
Philadelphia,  Ouida  (Louise  de  la  Ra- 
mee),  the  English  writer  of  romantic 
novels,  insists  upon  a  public  denial  of 
American  reports  that  she  is  mentally 
ill.  She  had  actually  been  a  victim  of 
peritonitis  the  previous  year,  and  had 
not  wholly  recovered  when  she  wrote 
the  note.  At  that  time  —  July  13,  1883 

—  she  was  forty-four  years  old,  living 
in  Florence,  and  passionately  in  love 
with  an  Italian  courtier,  the  Marchese 
Delle  Stufa,  who  apparently  had  long 
since  spurned  her.  There  are  no  indica- 
tions, however,  that  the  American  ru- 
mor was  justified. 

"As  I  hear  there  are  statements  in 


391 


392 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


your  American  papers  that  I  am  ill 
with  'a  mental  malady'  ( !)  will  you  be 
so  good  as  to  state  publicly  that  I  am 
perfectly  well,  and  that  any  report  of 
this  kind  is  a  slanderous  lie  for  which 
I  should  suppose  the  Law  would  give 
due  redress  if  there  be  any  justice  in 
your  country.  Make  any  use  you  choose 
of  this,  and  the  wider  publication  you 
can  give  to  it  the  better." 

Ouida,  the  daughter  of  a  French 
father  and  an  English  mother,  was  born 
at  Bury  St.  Edmunds.  She  attained  suc- 
cess in  her  early  twenties,  having  pub- 
lished Under  Two  Flags,  perhaps  her 
best  book,  in  1867.  All  in  all  she  wrote 
some  fifty  novels,  and  was  much  in  the 
public  eye ;  but  her  work  is  flashy  and 
sentimental,  and  on  the  whole  of  little 
literary  value.  J.  S. 

Lectures  and  Concerts 

THE  entrance  to  the  Lecture  Hall  is 
from  Boylston  Street  only.  The 
doors  wM  be  open  one  half  hour  before 
cadi  lecture  or  concert. 

The  Problem  of  the  Chinese  People. 
John  King  Fairbank,  Associate  Pro- 
fessor of  History  at  Harvard  Univer- 
sity, and  Mrs.  Fairbank.  Illustrated. 
8:00  Thurs.,  Dec.  4. 

Story  Hour  for  Children.  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  John  J.  Cronan  and  Mrs.  Mar- 
garet Powers,  Boston  Public  Library 
Story  Tellers.  4:00  Fri.,  Dec.  5. 

Christinas  Concert.  Elna  Sherman. 
Lecturer-Recitalist  and  Composer.  3  -.30 
Sun.,  Dec.  7. 

The  Watercolor  Drawings  of  Thomas 
Rowlandson.  A  Gallery  Talk  in  connec- 
tion with  the  exhibition  in  the  Albert 
H.  Wiggin  Gallery  through  December. 
Arthur  W.  Heint/.elman,  N.A.,  Keeper 
of  Prints,  Boston  Public  Library,  3:00 
M011.,  Dec.  8. 

What  Books  Shall  I  Give  for  Christ- 
mas:' Elizabeth  M.  Gordon,  Deputy 
Supervisor,  Work  with  Children,  and 
Edna  G.  Peck,  Chief  of  the  Book  Selec- 
tion Department.  Circulation  Division, 


Boston  Public  Librarv.  8:00  Mon.. 
Dec.  8. 

Britain  Now.  Ruth  Landa,  British 
Radio  Producer  and  Writer.  8:00  Thurs.. 
Dec.  11. 

Story  Hour  for  Children.  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  John  J.  Cronan  and  Mrs.  Mar- 
garet Powers,  Boston  Public  Library 
Story  Tellers.  4:00  Fri.,  Dec.  12. 

The  Watercolor  Drawings  of  Thomas 
Rowlandson.  Arthur  W.  Heintzelman. 
N.A.,  Keeper  of  Prints,  Boston  Public 
Library.  Illustrated.  8:00  Mon..  Dec.  15. 

Story  Hour  for  Children.  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  John  J.  Cronan  and  Mrs..  Mar- 
garet Powers,  Boston  Public  Library 
Story  Tellers.  4:00  Fri.,  Dec.  19. 

Dickens'  Christmas  Carol.  Edward  F. 
Payne,  Author  and  Cartoonist.  3 130 
Sun.,  Dec.  21. 

Lowell  Lectures 

A COURSE  of  eight  illustrated  lec- 
tures on  City  Planning  in  a  Demo- 
cratic Society,  by  Frederick  Johnstone 
Adams,  B.  Arch.,  Head  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  City  and  Regional  Planning  at 
the  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Tech- 
nology, began  on  November  13.  It  is 
given  on  Mondays  and  Thursdays  at 
five  o'clock.  The  December  lectures  in- 
clude : 

6.  Mon.,  Dec.  1.  City  and  Regional 
Planning  in  the  Western  Hemisphere. 
Examples  of  effective  community  plan- 
ning and  zoning;  regional  and  state 
planning;  problems  of  urban  redevel- 
opment. 

7.  Thurs..  Dec.  4.  City  Planning 
and  the  Citizen.  Planning  as  a  political 
and  social  art ;  necessity  of  citizen  in- 
terest and  participation:  the  place  of 
the  planning  commission  in  the  city 
government. 

8.  Mon.,  Dec.  8.  The  Future  of  City 
Planning  in  the  United  States.  Pros- 
pects of  improvement  in  techniques 
and  standards ;  integration  of  the  plan- 
ning process  with  governmental  pro- 
cedures at  regional  and  local  levels. 


A  Selected  List  of  Books 

Recently  Added  to  the  Library 

** 
* 

This  list  should  be  used  in  conjunction  with  Books  Current,  a 
quarterly  list  the  publication  of  which  the  Library  began  in  October 
ip4S-  Books  Current  is  meant  for  the  Branch  Libraries  and  for  the 
Open  Shelf  and  Young  People's  Departments  of  the  Central  Library; 
but  the  books  listed  in  it  are  available  for  the  zvhole  library  system.  The 
books  listed  in  More  Books  are  in  the  Central  Library  and  in  tin- 
Business  Branch;  however,  they  may  be  borrowed  through  the  various 
Branch  Libraries.  Fiction  is  listed  in  Books  Current  only. 


General  Reference 

Caliaham,  Ludmilla  Ignatiev.  Russian-Eng- 
lish technical  and  chemical  dictionary. 
Wiley.  [1947.]  xvii.  794  pp.  *8262.24 

Commission  on  Freedom  of  the  Press.  A 
free  and  responsible  press.  Univ.  of  Chi- 
cago Press.  Ii947  ]  x".  I38pp.  PN4735.C6 
"A  general  report  011  mass  communication:  news- 
papers, radio,  motion  pictures,  magazines,  and 
books." 

Information  please  almanac.  Doubleday. 
[1947.]  Illus.,  maps,  diagrs.     *AY&4.I  55 

"Planned  and  supervised  by  Dan  Golenpaul  as- 
sociates." 

Palazzi,  Fernando.  Novissimo  dizionario  della 
lingua  italiana.  Milano,  Ceschina.  [1946.] 
xvi,  1358  pp.  Illus.  *PCi625.Pi7  1946 
Con  75  paradigm  di  nomenclature,  20  illustrazione 
e  tre  appendici. 

Read,  Charles  R.,  and  Samuel  Marble.  Guide 
to  public  affairs  organizations,  with  notes 
on  public  affairs  informational  materials. 
[Washington.]  Public  Affairs  Press, 
.American  Council  on  Public  Affairs.  1946. 
vi,  129  pp.  *AS8.R4 

Special  Libraries  Association.  Committee  on 
microfilming  and  documentation.  Directory 
of  microfilm  services  in  the  United  States 
and  Canada.  Revised  edition.  New  York. 
Special  Libraries  Association,  1947.  xv,  30 
PP.  *Z265.S7  1947 

"Based  on  the  Directory  of  microfilm  sources, 
compiled    by    Rose    C.    Cibella." — Preface. 

Wilson,  Margery.  The  new  etiquette;  the 
modern  code  of  social  behavior.  Com- 
pletely revised.  Lippincott.  1947.  xvi,  612 
pp.   Illus.,  diagrs.  BJ1853W56  1947 

Young,  Ross  Newman.  Personnel  manual 
for  executives.  1st  ed.  McGrawHill.  1947. 
xi,  207  pp.   Diagrs.  9331.113A120 


Bibliography 

British  museum.  Dept.  of  printed  books.  The 
British  museum  catalogue  of  printed 
books,  1881-1900.  Published  under  the 
auspices  of  a  committee  of  the  Associa- 


tion of  Research  Libraries.  Ann  Arbor, 
T.   W.   Edwards,  1946.  *Zg2i.B86  1881a 

Photographic  reprint  of  the  University  of  Toronto 
copy  of  the  original  edition,  which  has  general 
title:  Catalogue  of  the  printed  books  in  the  library 
of  the  British  museum  .  .  .  London:  Printed  by 
VV.  Clowes  and  sons,  limited.   1881  -1900. 

Rader,  Jesse  Lee.  South  of  forty,  from  the 
Mississippi  to  the  Rio  Grande,  a  biblio- 
graphy, [ist  cd.J  Norman,  Univ.  of  Okla- 
homa Press.   1947.  336  pp.  *Zi25i.S83R3 

Weingarten,  Joseph  A.,  compiler.  Modern 
American  playwrights.  1918-1945;  a  bib- 
liography. New  York,  1946.  *Zi23i.D7W3 

Biography.  Letters 

Brooke,  Audrey.  Robert  Gray,  first  bishop 
of  Cape  Town.  Cape  Town,  G.  Cumber- 
lege,  Oxford  Univ.  Press.  1947.  158  pp. 
Ports.  BX5700.G7B7 

Brooks,  Eric  St.  John.  Sir  Christopher  Hat- 
ton,  Queen  Elizabeth's  favourite.  London, 
J.  Cape.  [1947  ]  408  pp.  DA358.H3B7 

Franklin,  Benjamin,  1706-1790.  Letters  and 
papers  of  Benjamin  Franklin  and  Richard 
Jackson  1 753-1 785  .  .  .  Edited  and  anno- 
tated with  an  introduction  by  Carl  Van 
Doren.  Philadelphia,  The  American  Philo- 
sophical Society,  1947.  ix,  222  pp. 

*5393-i6.24 

Hole,  Myra  Cadwalader.  Bartolome  Mitre: 
a  poet  in  action.  New  York,  Hispanic  In- 
stitute in  the  United  States.  [i947-]  206  pp. 

F2846.M6858  1947 

Jefferson,  Thomas,  1743-1826.  Correspondence 
of  Thomas  Jefferson  and  Francis  Walker 
Gilmer,  1814-18.26  .  .  .  Edited,  with  an  in- 
troduction, by  Richard  Beale  Davis.  Co- 
lumbia, Univ.  of  South  Carolina  Press, 
1946.   163  pp.  E332.J447 

Kimball,  Marie  (Goebel).  Jefferson,  war  and 
peace,  1776  to  1784.  Coward-McCann. 
[1947-]  ix,  398  pp.  E332.K52 

Bibliographical  references  included  in  "Xotes" 
(pp.  363-390)  • 

Marcuse,  Ludwig.  Plato  and  Dionysius;  a 
double  biography  .  .  .  tr.  by  Joel  Ames 
[pseud.]  from  the  German,  [ist  ed.]  New 
York,  Knopf.  1947-  xix,  243  pp.  B393.M35 


393 


394 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Sellers,  Charles  Coleman.  Charles  Willson 
Peale.  Philadelphia,  The  American  Philo- 
sophical Society,  1947.  2  v.  5393-16.23 

[Memoirs  of  the  American  philosophical  society, 
v.  23.] 

Contents.  —  I.  Early  life  (1741-1790.)  —  2.  Later 
life  (1790-1827). 

Business 

Airport  reference.  6th  annual  edition.  1946/ 
47.  California,  Occidental  Publishing  Co., 

1946.  104  pp.  ^*TL725.A29r 
B:ue  Book,  1947.  An  annual  buyers  guide, 

directory  and  reference  volume  for  manu- 
facturers and  distributors  of  soaps,  insecti- 
cides, disinfectants,  polishes,  cleaners  and 
allied  chemical  specialties.  19th  edition. 
New  York,  MacNair-Dorland  Co.  [1947.] 
228  pp.  **TP99i.B65 
Davison's  textile  blue  book,  United  States 
and  Canada,  v.  82.  1947.  Ridgewood,  N.  J., 
Davison  Pub.  Co.  1947.  1462  pp. 

**TSi3i2.D26 

Hansen,  Alvin  H.  Economic  policy  and  full 
employment.  McGraw-Hill,  1947.  340  pp. 

NBS 

Kaye,  S.  Leon.  The  production  and  proper- 
ties of  plastics.  Scranton,  Penna.,  Inter- 
national Textbook  Co.  1947.  612  pp.  NBS 

Levi,  Wendell  M.  Making  pigeons  pay;  a 
manual  of  practical  information  on  the 
management,  selection,  breeding,  feeding 
and  marketing  of  pigeons.  N.  Y.„  Orange 
Judd  Publishing  Co.,  1946.  263  pp.  NBS 

Literary  market  place.  1947  edition.  New 
York,  Bowker.  [1947.]  207  pp. 

**PNi6i.L77 

McMichael,  Stanley  L.  How  to  operate  a 
real  estate  business.  Prentice-Hall,  1947. 
455PP-  NBS 

Metal  industries  catalog.  5th  edition.  1947. 
New  York,  Reinhold  Publishing  Corpo- 
ration. [1947.]  55ipp.  **TS>2i6.M58 

Modern  plastics  encyclopedia.  1947.  New 
York,     Plastics     Catalogue  Coporation, 

1947.  3v.  **TP986.M88 
National    office    management  association. 

Manual  of  practical  office  short  cuts. 
McGraw-Hill.  1947.  272  pp.  NBS 

Poliak,  Saul.  Rebuilding  the  sales  staff; 
practical  techniques  for  the  selection  and 
training  of  salesmen.  McGraw-Hill.  1947- 
503  PP-  NBS 

Register  of  defunct  and  other  companies  re- 
moved from  the  Stock  Exchange  official 
year-book.  2nd  issue.  1046.  [London] 
Stock  Exchange  Official  Year  Book  Pub- 
lishing Co.,  Ltd.  365  PP-  **HG543i-R33 

Riley,  John  J.  Organization  in  the  soft  drink 
industry.  Washington,  D.  C.  American 
Bottlers  of  Carbonated  Beverages,  1946. 
357  PP-  NBS 

Scoville,  John  W.  Labor  monopolies  or  free- 
dom. New  York,  Committee  for  Consti- 
tutional Government,  Inc.  [1946.]  167  pp. 

NBS 

South  American  handbook,  1947.  24th  annu- 
al edition.  London,  Trade  and  Travel 
Publications.  [I947-]  802  pp.  **HAg35.S72 

Statistics,  fraternal  societies  .  .  .  covering 
the  records,  plans  and  rates  of  practically 


all  fraternal  insurance  societies  .  .  .  194". 
Rochester,  New  York,  The  Fraternal 
Moniter,  1947.  240  pp.  **HG226.S79 
Tasmania.  Bureau  of  census  and  statistics, 
Statistics  of  the  state  of  Tasmania  for  the 
year  1945/46.  Hobart,  H.  H.  Pimblelt, 
Government  Printer,  1947.  9  pts. 

**HA3U3.A3 

Untermeyer,  Louis.  A  century  of  candymak- 
ing,  1847-1947;  the  story  of  the  origin  and 
growth  of  the  New  England  confectionary 
company,  which  parallels  that  of  the  candy 
industrv  in  America.  Boston,.  The  Barta 
Press.  [I947-]   84  pp.  NBS 

Wilson,  Elizabeth  W.  Compulsory  health 
insurance.  National  Insurance  Conference 
Board,  Inc.  U947.]   138  pp.  NBS 

Economics 

Abrams,  Charles.  The  future  of  housing. 
Harper.  [1946.]  xix,  428  pp.  9331.8373A88 

Backman,  Jules,  and  M.  R.  Gainsbrugh.  Eco- 
nomics of  the  cotton  industry.  New  York, 
National  Conference  Board.  [1946.]  xv, 
244  pp.  Tables,  diagrs.  *9338.H5A95 

Cadbury,  Lawrence  J.  This  question  of  pop- 
ulations; Europe  in  1970.  London,  "News 
chronicle"  publications  dept.  [1945.]  24 
pp.  9312.940A3 

Clark,  George  N.  The  wealth  of  England 
from  1496  to  1760.  New  York,  G.  Cumber- 
logc,  Oxford  Univ.  Press.  1946.  199  pp. 

9330.942A98 

Ezekiel,  Mordecai,  editor.  Towards  world 
prosperity,  through  industrial  and  agri- 
cultural development  and  expansion.  Har- 
per. [1947.]  xiv,  455  PP-  9330.940A56 
Contributors:  Nathan  M.  Becker,  Eugen  M. 
Braderman,    Miron   Burgin    [and  others]. 

Foner,  Philip  S.  History  of  the  labor  move- 
ment in  the  United  States.  New  York,  In- 
ternational Publishers.  [1947.] 

933i.8o73Ais6 

Fowler,  Bertram  Baynes.  The  co-operative 
challenge.  Little,  Brown.  1947.  265  pp. 

9334.A84 

Fryer,  Leland  N.  The  American  farmer;  his 
problems  &  his  prospects  .  .  .  Foreword 
by  James  G.  Patton  .  .  .  Illustrations  by 
Lloyd  Hoff.  Harper.  [I947-]  172  pp. 

9338-i73Ai82 

Gruchy,  Allan  Garfield.  Modern  economic 
thought:  the  American  contribution.  Pren- 
tice-Hall, 1947.  xiii,  670  pp.  9330.173A463 
Bibliography:  pp.  631-655. 

Harvard  University.  Business  research  stud- 
ies. No.  33.  Boston.  [I944-] 

9336.2473A140  no.  33 

Isaac,  Julius.  Economics  of  migration.  New 
York,  Oxford  Univ.  Press.  1947-  *ii,  285 
pp.  9325-13 
With  an  introduction  by  Sir  Alexander  Carr- 
Saunders. 

Iserman,  Theodore  R.  Industrial  peace  and 
the  Wagner  act;  how  the  act  works  and 
what  to  do  about  it  .  .  .  with  a  foreword 
bv  Leo  Wolman.  McGraw-Hill,  1947.  91 
pp.  933LI55AI32 

Jones,  Marvin.  How  food  saved  American 
lives;  addresses  and  statements.  Wash- 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


395 


ington,  National  Capital  Press.  [1947.]  159 
pp.  HD9005.J6 
Kimmell,  Lewis  H.  Depreciation  policy  and 
postwar  expansion.  Washington,  D.  C, 
The  Brookings  Institution.  1946.  66  pp. 

9335.24A17 

Lerner,  Abba  P.,  and  Frank  D.  Graham. 
editors.  Planning  and  paying  for  full  em- 
ployment. Princeton  Univ.  Press,  1946. 
222  pp.  9331.9  A 1 49 

Contributors,  Alfred  Braunthul,  Norman  S.  Bucha- 
nan, Frank  D.  Graham   [and  others]. 
Symposium  of  papers  submitted  by  participants  in 
a  conference  called  in  1944  by  the  American  Labor 
Conference  on   International  Affairs. 

Massachusetts.  General  court.  Special  commis- 
sion studying  the  Boston  city  charter.  Re- 
port. April  1,  1947.  Boston,  Wright  & 
Potter.    1947.   71  pp.  *9352.i744A8i 

National  Industrial  Conference  Board,  Inc. 
Compulsory  sickness  compensation  for 
New  York  state;  proposals,  alternatives, 
costs.  Prepared  for  the  Associated  In- 
dustries of  New  York  State,  Inc.  New 
York.  [1947.]  vi,  184  pp.  *933i.82Ag4 

Peterson,  Florence.  Survey  of  labor  eco- 
nomics.  Harper.  [1947.]  xix,  843  pp. 

933I-073A94 

Price,  John.  British   trade  unions  and  the 
war.   London,   Ministry  of  Information. 
.[1945  ]  55  PP-  9331.8842A33 
Slichter,  Sumner  Huber.  Trade  unions  in  a 
free   society.  Harvard,   1947.  36  pp. 

9331.88A44 

U.  S.  Office  of  price  administration.  OPA 

handbook  of  basic  economic  data.  2d  ed. 
[Washington.]  1946.  253  pp.  *933°-973A24 
U.  S.  President.  The  economic  report  of  the 
President  to  the  Congress  .  .  .  1947.  Wash- 
ington, U.  S.  Govt.  Print.  Off.,  1947. 
Tables,,  diagrs.  *9330.g73A22 

Submitted  at  the  beginning  of  each  regular  session 
of  Congress  as  required  under  the  Employment 
act  of  1946. 

Zeisel,  Hans.  Say  it  with  figures  .  .  .  with 
an  introduction  by  Paul  F.  Lazarsfeld. 
[1st  ed.]  Harper.  [1947.]  xvii,  250  pp. 
Diagrs.  9310.2A194 
(Publications  of  the  Bureau  of  Applied  Social 
Research.   Columbia  University.) 


Education 

Blair,  Glenn  Myers.  Diagnostic  and  remedial 
teaching  in  secondary  schools.  Macmillan. 
1947.  xv,   422  pp.       LB1029.R4B5G  1947 

Cole,  Luella.  The  elementary  school  sub- 
jects. New  York,  Rinehart  &,  Company, 
Inc.  [1946-]  xxi,  455  pp.  Illus.  LB1570.C63 

Ericson,  Emanuel  E.  Teaching  the  industrial 
arts.  Peoria,  111.,  The  Manual  Arts  Press. 
[1946.]  384  pp.  Ulus.  TT168.E72 

Higher  Education,  v.  1-  Jan.  1,  1945-  to  date. 
Washington,  D.  C,  Higher  education 
division,  U.  S.  Office  of  Education,  Fed- 
eral Security  Agency.  *LB2300.Hs 

Hoban,  Charles  F.,  jr.  Movies  that  teach. 
New  York,  Dryden  Press.  [1946.]  xiii,  189 
pp.  Diagrs.  LB1044.H385 

Thorpe,  Louis  P.  Child  psychology  and  de- 
velopment. The  Ronald  Press.  [1947.] 
xxvi,  781  pp.  Illus.         BF721.T47  1947 


Fine  Arts 

Architecture 

Davis,  Deering.  Annapolis  houses,  1 700-1775. 
.  .  .  Foreword  by  Joseph  Mullen.  [New 
York.]  Architectural  Book  Pub.  Co.  1947. 
124  pp.  Illus.  8094.04-466 

Early  history  of  Annapolis.  —  Architecture  of 
Annapolis.  ■ —  William  liuckland.  —  Houses  and 
their  histories.  —  Bibliography  (p.  121.)  — 
Annapolis  structures. 

Marlowe,  George  Francis.  Churches  of  old 
New  England,  their  architecture  and  their 
architects,  their  pastors  and  their  people 
.  .  .  illus.  with  photographs  by  Samuel 
Chamberlain.  Macmillan.  1947.  vii,  222  pp. 

8105. 02-1 16 

May,  Ralph.  Among  old  Portsmouth  houses. 
Boston,  Mass.,  Wright  &  Potter  Printing 
Co.  1 1946.]  39  PP-  Plates.  8094.03-795 

Pain,  William,  17 jof-i^o?  Decorative  de- 
tails of  the  eighteenth  century  .  .  .  with  a 
preface  by  Prof.  A.  E.  Richardson.  Lon- 
don, A.  Tiranti.  1946.  Plates.  8102.01-8 

Proskouriakcff,  Tatiana.  An  album  of  Maya 
architecture.  Washington,  D.  C.  1946.  36 
plates  (incl.  map).  *4o7iB.ios 

U.  S.  Federal  public  housing  authority.  Public 
housing  design;  a  review  of  experience 
in  low-rent  housing,  [Washington]  National 
Housing  Authority,.  Federal  Public  Hous- 
ing Authority,  1946.  vii,  294  pp.  Illus. 

8122.02-  118 

Ballet 

Beaumont,  Cyril  William.  Ballet  design:  past 
&  present.  New  York,  Studio  Publications, 
1946.  xxxii,  216  pp.  Illus.  4098.05-402 

"In  this  volume  I  have  combined  and  extended 
my  two  previous  works  on  this  subject,  Five  Cen- 
turies of  Ballet  and  Design  for  the  Ballet." 

Gregor,  Joseph.  Kulturgeschichte  des  bal- 
letts,.  seine  gestaltung  und  wirksamkeit  in 
der  gsechichte  und  unter  den  kiinsten. 
Zurich,  Scientia  ag.  [1946.]  356  pp.  Plates 
(part  col.;  incl.  music).  GV1787.G7 

Mit  20  Farbtafelu  im  text  und  mit  269  Ahbildungen 
im  Bilderteil. 

Crafts 

Dragunas,  Andrew.  Creating  jewelry  for  fun 
and  profit.  Harper.  [1947.]  146  pp.  Illus. 

8177.08-106 

Haggar,  Reginald  G.  Recent  ceramic  sculp- 
ture in  Great  Britain.  London,  J.  Tiranti, 
ltd.,   1946.  Illus.  8172.04-600 

Honey,  William  B.  The  art  of  the  potter,  a 
book  for  the  collector  and  connoisseur. 
London,  Faber  and  Faber.  [1946.]  xvi,  m 
pp.  160  plates.  8168.05-102 

Thompson,  Robert  L.  Leathercraft.  D.  Van 
Nostrand.  1947.  140  pp.  Illus.  8186.01-128 

Thorn,  C.  Jordan.  Handbook  of  old  pottery 
&  porcelain  marks:  foreword  by  John 
Meredith  Graham  II.  Tudor  Pub.  Co. 
[1947.]  xiii,  176  pp.  Plates.  817C.08-10O 

Woodforde,  Christopher.  Stained  glass  in 
Somerset,  1250-1S30.  Oxford  Univ.  Press, 
G.  Cumbcrlege.  1946.  xii,  314  pp.  Ulus. 

8174.03-  107 


396 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


History 

Berenson,  Bernhard.  Sassetta,  un  pittore  sen- 
ese  della  leggenda  francescana.  Firenze, 
Electa  Editrice.   [1946.]    125  pp.  Plates. 

*4i03.04-882 

"Prima    traduzione    italiana    dall' originate  inglese, 
a  cura  del  dott.  Acbille  Malavasi." 
A  comparison  of  Sassetta  and  Giotto  as  painters 
of  Franciscan  legend. 

Cresson,  Margaret  (French).  Journey  into 
fame;  the  life  of  Daniel  Chester  French 
.  .  .  with  a  foreword  hy  Walter  Prichard 
Eaton.  Harvard.  1947.  xv,  316  pp.  Piates. 

8083.04-526 

Goldwater,  Robert  John,  editor  and  translator. 
Artists  on  art  from  the  XIV  to  the  XX 
century.  100  illustrations.  [New  York] 
Pantheon  Books.  [I947-]  xii,  499  pp.  100 
illus.  4086.08-102R 

Compiled  and  edited  by  Robert  Goldwater  and 
Marco  Treves. 

"We  have  translated  into  English  for  the  first 
time  nearly  one-half  of  the  artists'  writing  quoted, 
and  have  reworked  other  selections  for  this  book." 

Museum  of  Modern  Art.  Fantastic  art,  Dada, 
Surrealism,  edited  by  Alfred  H.  Barr,  jr.; 
essays  by  Georges  Hugnet.  New  York, 
The  Museum  of  Modern  Art,,  distributed 
by  Simon  and  Schuster.  [I947-]  27i  PP- 
Illus.  4109.07-IC4S 

Contents.  —  Acknowledgements.  —  Preface  to  the 
first  edition,  by  A.  H.  Barr,  jr.  ■ —  Introduction 
by  A.  H.  B.,  jr.  —  Dada,  by  Georges  Hugnet.  — 
In  the  light  of  surrealism,  by  Georges  Hugnet. 
—  Brief  chronology,  by  Elodie  Courter  and  A.  H. 
B.,  jr.  ■ —  A  list  of  devices,  techniques,  media,  by 
A.  H.  B.,  jr.  —  Artists  and  works  of  art.  — 
Fantastic  and  surrealist  films  in  the  Museum  of 
Modern  Art  film  library-  (P-  ^62.)  —  Brief  biblio- 
graphy   (pp.    263-167).    —  Index. 


Interior  Decoration 

Hardy,  Kay.  How  to  make  your  house  a 
home.  New  York,  Funk  &  Wagnalls  Co. 
[1947.]  viii,  185  pp.  Illus.  8118.05-185 
Illustrations  by  the  author,  decorative  spots  by 
Virginia  Whitney. 

Symonds,  Robert  D.,  and  T.  H.  Ormsbee. 
Antique  furniture  of  the  walnut  period. 
New  York.  R.  M.  McBride.  1947-  T44  PP- 
Illus.  8185.02-128 


Painting.  Drawing 

Botticelli,  Sandro,  1447  ?-i  510.  Drawings  for 
Dante's  Inferno.  New  York,  Lear,  1947. 
60  pp.  Illus.  *8i40.c8-330 

Contains  facsimiles  of  all  the  extant  drawings  of 
Botticelli  for  the  Inferno,  and  nine  engravings 
designed  by  Botticelli,  from  the  1481  Landino 
edition  of  Dante,  with  quotations  from  the  cantos 
of  Longfellow's  translation  and  a  commentary  by 
the  publishers. 

Cairola,  Stefano,  editor.  Arte  italiana  del 
nostro  tempo.  100  tavole  a  colori — 200 
tavole  in  nero.  Saggi  critici  di :  Luciano  An- 
ceschi.  Sandro  Angeiini,  Umbro  Apollo- 
nio.  Bergamo,  Istituto  Italiano  d'Arti 
Grafiche.  [1946.]  *4078.o8-soi 

Hcagland,  Clayton.  The  pleasure  of  sketch- 
ing outdoors.  Viking  Press,  1947.  xi,  164 
pp.  Illus.  8142.06-114 


Legendre,  Maurice.  El  Greco  (Domenico 
Theotocopuli).  New  York,  The  Hyperion 
Press.  [01947.]  70  pp.  Plates.  4108.07-610 

Museum  of  modern  art.  Modern  painters  and 
sculptors  as  illustrators,  by  Monroe  Whfiel- 
er.  New  York,  The  Museum  of  Modern 
Art,  distributed  by  Simon  &  Schuster. 
[1947.]  Plates.  8143.01-105R 

Based  on  the  catalog  of  the  exhibition  held  at  the 
Museum  of  Modem  Art  from  April  7  to  September 
2,  1936. 

Paget,  Guy.  Sporting  pictures  of  England. 
With  12  plates  in  colour,  and  21  illus- 
trations in  black  &  white.  London,  Col- 
_  lins,  1945.  47  pp.  Col.  plates.  8153.05-107 

Pierard,  Louis.  Manet  l'incompris  .  .  .  avec 
16  reproductions  de  tableaux  et  un  fron- 
tispice.  Paris,  Sagittaire.  [1944.]  190  pp. 
Plates.  8063.06-548 

Russell,  Charles  M.  Pen  and  ink  drawings. 
Pasadena,  Calif.,  Trail's  End  Pub.  Co. 
[1946.J   2v.  Plates  8142.07-257 

Tschichcld,  Jan.  Chinesische  farbendrucke 
der  gegenwart;  sechzehn  faksimiles  in  der 
originalgrosse.  Basel,  Holbeinverlag.  [1945.] 
16  col.  plates.  *8i54.og-io2 

Printed    on    double   leaves,    Chinese  style. 


Miscellaneous 

Blum,  Andre.  Le  costume  en  France.  [Lau- 
sanne,] Guilde  du  Livre,  1944.  143  pp. 
Illus.  8192.03-702 

Hiscock,  Walter  G.  A  Christ  church  miscel- 
lany; new  chapters  on  the  architects, 
craftsmen,  statuary,  plate,  bells,  furniture, 
clocks,  plays,  the  library  and  other  build- 
ings. Oxford,  Printed  for  the  author  at 
the  University  Press,  1946.  xix,  260  pp. 
Illus.  (incl.  music).  8112.06-113 


History 

America 

Beverley,  Robert,  ca.  1675-ca.  1722.  The  his- 
tory and  present  state  of  Virginia  .  .  . 
edited  with  an  introduction  by  Louis  B. 
Wright.  Cbapel  Hill,  Pub.  for  the  Insti- 
tute of  Early  American  History  and  Cul- 
ture at  Williamsburg,  Va.  by  The  Univ. 
of  North  Carolina  Press,  1947.  xxxv,  366 
pp.  Illus.  F229.B593 

Cleland,  Robert  Glass.  California  in  our  time 
(1900-1940).  [1st  ed.]  Knopf.  1947.  viii, 
320,  xx  pp.  Plates.  F866.C62 

A  companion  volume  to  the  author"s  From  Wilder- 
ness to  Empire. 

Dumond,   Dwight   Lowell.  America  in  our 
time,  1896-1946.  Holt.  [1047.]  xi,  715  PP- 
Bibliography:  pp.  677-702.  E741.D847 

Heizer,  Robert  F.  Francis  Drake  and  the 
California  Indians,  1579-  Berkeley  and  Los 
Angeles,  Univ.  of  California  Press,  1947. 
251-301  pp.  Illus.  *233i.64 v.42,no.3 

Loescher,  Burt  Garfield.  The  history  of 
Rogers  rangers  .  .  .  with  colored  plates 
by  Helene  Loescher.  San  Francisco,  1946. 
Illus.  E199.L8 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


397 


Paul,  Rodman  Wilson.  California  gold;  the 
beginning  of  mining  in  the  far  W  est.  Har- 
vard. 1947.  xvi,  380  pp.  Maps.  F865.P25 

World  War  II  and  After 

Hill,  Russell.  Struggle  for  German}-.  Harper. 
[  194".]  x,  260  pp.  Maps.  D802.G3H53 

International  Military  Tribunal.  Trial  of  the 
major  war  criminals  before  the  Interna- 
tional Military  Tribunal,  Nuremberg,  -4 
Xoveniber  1945-  1  October  1946.  Vol  1- 
Nurcmberg,   Germany,  1947- 

*D8o4.G42  I  55 

Lengyel,  Olga.  Five  chimneys;  the  story  of 
Auschwitz.  Ziff-Davis.  [1947.]  213  pp. 

D805.P7L42 

Proehl,  Carl  W.,  editor.  The  Fourth  marine 
division  in  World  War  II.  Washington, 
Infantry  Journal  Press.  [1947.]  237  pp 
Illus.,  maps.  D769.37  4th. P7 

"The  narrative  was  written  by  Master  Technical 
Sergeant  David  Dempsey,  former  combat  corres- 
pondent." 

Rousset,  David.  The  other  kingdom  .  .  .  tr. 
and  with  an  introd.  by  Ramon  Guthrie. 
Reynal  &  Hitchcock.  [1947.]  I73PP- 

D805.G3R6415 

Sclater,  William  Haida  .  .  .  with  an  intro- 
duction by  Rt.  Hon.  A.  V.  Alexander  .  .  . 
and  twenty-four  drawings  in  colour  by 
Grant  MacDonald.  Toronto,  Oxford  Univ. 
Press.  [1947.]  xvi,  221pp.  D779.C2S3 

The  Canadian  destroyer  Haiila  in  World  War  II. 

Standard  Oil  Company.  Ships  of  the  Esso  fleet 
in  World  War  II.  [New  York]  Standard 
Oil  Companv  (New  Jersey).  1946.  530pp. 
Illus.  D773.S8 

"The  records  of  135  ocean  tankers  of  the  Stan 
dard  Oil  Company  (New  Jersey)  and  the  Panama 
Transport  Company." — Foreword. 

Syrkin,  Marie.  Blessed  is  the  match;  the 
story  of  Jewish  resistance.  Knopf,  1947. 
361  pp.  D810.J4S9  1947 

The  War  Reports  of  General  of  the  Army 
George  C.  Marshall  .  .  .  General  of  the 
Army  H.  H.  Arnold  .  .  .  Tand]  Fleet  Ad- 
miral Ernest  J.  King  .  .  .  Foreword  by 
Walter  Millis.  Lippincott.  [1947.]  801  pp. 
Illus.  (incl.  maps).  *D76g.W34 

Zink,  Harold.  American  military  government 
in  Germany.  Macmillan.  1947.  272  pp. 
Illus..  maps,  diagrs.  D802.G3Z5 


General 

Chadwick,  Norah  (Kershaw).  The  beginnings 
of  Russian  history:  an  enquiry  into 
sources.  Cambridge  Univ.  Press,  1946.  xi, 
180  pp.  DK70.A2C5 

Davidson,  David,  and  H.  Aldersmith.  The 
great  pyramid,  its  divine  message;  an 
original  co-ordination  of  historical  docu- 
ments and  archaeological  evidences,  mth 
ed.  London,  Williams  and  Norgate,  Ltd., 
1946.    Illus.   Maps.  DT63.5.D3  1946 

Einstein,  Lewis  D.  Historical  change.  Cam- 
bridge Univ.  Press.  1946.  132  pp. 

D16.9E52  1946 

Current  problems.  General  editor:  Sir  Ernest  Bar- 
ker. 


Eversull,  Harry  Kelso.  The  temples  in 
Jerusalem.  Cincinnati,  O.,  Masonic  Me- 
morial Chapel  Assoc.  1946.  68  pp.  Illus. 

8091.08-105 

Hyde,  Walter  Woodburn.  Ancient  Greek 
mariners.  Oxford  Univ.  Press,  1947.  x, 
360  pp.  G84.H9 

Vambery,  Rusztcm.  Hungary  —  to  be  or  not 
to  be.  New  York,  Frederick  Ungar  Pub- 
lishing Co.  [1946.1   208  pp.  D829.H8V3 


Hobbies 

Curie,  Richard.  Stamp-collecting,  a  hand- 
book. Knopf.  1947.  xvii,  174  pp.  Plates. 

HE6215.C8  1947 

Storm,  Colton,  and  Howard  Peckham.  In- 
vitation to  book  collecting,  its  pleasures 
and  practices,  with  kindred  discussions  of 
manuscripts,  maps,  and  prints.  New  York, 
R.  R.  Bowkcr,  1947.  281  pp.  Z987.S78 

White,  Charles  D.  Handbook  of  sailing  .  .  . 
illustrated  by  the  author.  New  York, 
Thomas  Y.  Crowell  Company.  [1947.] 
xiv,  370  pp.  Illus.,  diagrs.  GV811.W47 


Literature 

Drama 

Anderson,  Maxwell.  Off  Broadway,  essays 
about  the  theater.  W.  Sloane.  [1947.]  91 
pp.  PN2021.A54 

Contents.  —  Thoughts  about  the  critics.  —  St. 
Bernard.  —  Off  Broadway.  —  Whatever  hope  we 
have.  — ■  Poetry  in  the  theater.  — ■  The  essence  of 
tragedy.  — -  "Cut  is  the  branch  that  might  have 
grown  full  straight."  —  Compromise  and  keeping 
the  faith.  —  The  politics  of  Knickerbocker  holi- 
day. —  The  uses  of  poetry. 

Ehrensperger,  Harold  A.  Conscience  on  stage. 
New  York,  Abingdon-Cokesbury  Press. 
[1947.]  238  pp.  PN2049.E45 

Kelly,  George.  The  fatal  weakness;  a  comedy. 
New  York,  S.  French.  1947.  214  pp. 

PS3521.E425F3  1947 

Thompson,  Alan  Reynolds.  The  anatomy  of 
drama.  Berkeley  and  Los  Angeles,  Univ. 
of  California  Press.  1946.  xxiv,  417  pp. 

PN1661.T5  1946 

Schroder,  Ernst.  Der  rutenbinder ;  drama  in 
drei  aufziigen.  Berlin,  Minerva-verlag. 
1946.  51  pp.  :|:PT2538.R72R8 

General 

Ade,  George.  The  permanent  Ade;  the  living 
writings  of  George  Ade  .  .  .  edited  by 
Fred  C.  Kelly,  Indianapolis,  Bobbs-Mer- 
rill  Co.  [1947]  347  PP-     PSico6.A6  1947 

Betjeman,  John.  Slick  but  not  streamlined; 
poems  and  short  pieces  .  .  .  selected  & 
with  an  introd.,  by  W.  H.  Auden.  Double- 
day.  1947.  185  pp.  PR60C3.E77S6 

Clough,  Benjamin  Crocker.  The  American 
imagination  at  work;  tall  tales  and  folk 
tales.  Knopf.  1947.  xix,  707  PP-  GR105.C55 

Crawford,  Nelson  Antrim.  Cats,  in  prose  and 
verse  .  .   .  drawings  by   Diana  Thorne. 


398 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Coward-McCann.  [1947.]  xxvii,  387  pp. 
lllus.  PN6071.C3C7 

Fclton,  Harold  W.,  editor.  Legends  of  Paul 
liunyan  .  .  .  illustrated  by  Richard  Ben- 
nett. Knopf.  1947.  xxi,  418  pp.  PS461.B8F4 

Goodman,  Paul.  Kafka's  prayer.  New  York, 
Vanguard  Press.  [1947.]  xiii,  265  pp. 

PT2621.A26Z74 

Johnson,  Samuel,  1709-1784.  Doctor  John- 
son's prayers  .  .  .  edited  by  Elton  True- 
blood.  Harper.  [1947.]  xxxv,  66  pp. 

BV260.J55  1947 

Nemerov,  Howard.  The  image  and  the  law. 
Holt.    [I947-]   69  pp.  PS3527.E5  I  5 

Saintsbury,  George.  A  Saintsbury  miscel- 
lany; selections  from  his  essays  and  scrap 
books.  New  York,  Oxford  Univ.  Press. 
1947.  x,  246  pp.  PR5294.A1  1947 

Contents.  —  George  Saintsbury,  by  Oliver  Elton. 
—  Some  persona)  memories,  by  Sir  Herbert  Crier- 
son.  —  Recollections  of  Saintsbury,  by  John  Pur- 
ves.  —  The  professor,  by  J.  W.  Oliver.  —  A  bio- 
graphical memoir,  by  A.  B.  Webster.  —  Essays 
and  studies  by  George  Saintsbury:  John  Dryden.  the 
dramatist.  FitzGerald's  'Omar  Khayyam*.  Journal- 
ism fifty  years  ago.  The  poetry  of  Herrick.  The 
authorized  version  of  the  Bible.  Irony.  Robert 
Browning.  Oxford  sights  and  scenes.  The  two 
tragedies.  Oliver  Goldsmith  and  'The  vicar  of 
Wakefield.'  Disraeli:  a  portrait.  Eighteenth-cen- 
tury poetry.  Inaugural  address  at  Edinburgh.  — 
A  Saintsbury  scrap  book:  <The  master  of  Ballan- 
trac.'  The  qualities  of  wine.  On  Ben  Jonson.  On 
the  teaching  of  English.  Personal  sketches.  Some 
notes  on  Coleridge.  John  Stuart  Blackie.  Lectures 
on  living  writers.  R.  L.  S.,  Henley,  and  Sir  Walter 
Raleigh.  Men  of  letters  as  milch  cows.  Scottish 
literature.  —  Address  to  George  Saintsbury  on  his 
seventy-seventh  birthday  and  his  reply. 

Courlander,  Harold,  and  George  Herzog.  The 
cow-tail  switch,  and  other  West  African 
stories  .  .  .  drawings  by  Madye  Lee  Chas- 
tain.  Holt.  [1947.]  143  pp. 

PS3505.O  885S6  1947 

Thompson,  Stith.  The  folktale.  New  York, 
Dryden  Press.  1946.  x,  510  pp.  PN1001.T5 


History  of  Literature.  Essays 

Balakian,  Anna  E.  Literary  origins  of  sur- 
realism; a  new  mysticism  in  French 
poetry.  King's  Crown  Press,  1947.  ix,  159 
PP.  PQ.43g.B3 

Boege,  Frederick  W.  Smollett's  reputation 
as  a  novelist.  Princeton  Univ.  Press.  1947- 
175  PP-  PR3697.B6 

Farrell,  James  T.  Literature  and  morality. 
[New  York,]  Vanguard  Press.  F  TQ47-] 
xv,  304  PP-  .  PN49.F3 

Hackett,  Francis.  On  judging  books,  in  gen- 
eral and  in  particular.  Day.  [194?.]  293  pp. 

PN511.H22 

Essays  and  reviews  reprinted  from  the  New  York 
Times  and  other  periodicals. 

Harbage,  Alfred.  As  they  liked  it;  an  essay 

on  Shakespeare  and  morality.  Macmillan. 

[1947.]  xii,  299  pp.  PR6019.O  9U67 

Kam,  Richard  Morgan.   Fabulous  voyager; 

James  Joyce's  Ulysses.  Univ.  of  Chicaero, 

[1947.]  299  pp.  Plates.  PR6019.O  9U67 
South-worth,  James  Granville.  The  poetry  of 

Thomas   Hardy.   Columbia   Univ.  Press. 

1047.  ix,  250  pp.  PR4754.S6 
Strich,  Fritz.   Goethe  und  die  weltliteratur. 

Bern,  A.  Francke.  [1946.I  408  pn. 

PT2166.S75 


Poetry 

Baudelaire,  Charles,  1S21-1867.  One  hundred 
poems  from  Les  fleurs  du  mal  .  .  .  trans- 
lated by  C.  F.  Maclntyre.  Berkeley  and 
Los  Angeles,  Univ.  of  California  Press, 
1947.  xiv,  400  pp.        PQ2191.F6E5  1947 

Benet,  Laura.  Is  morning  sure?  Poems.  New 
York,  Odvssey  Press.  1947.  x,  64  pp. 

PS3503E528  18 

Benet,  William  Rose.  The  stairway  of  sur- 
prise. Knopf.  1947.  ix,  365  pp. 

PS3503.E533S6 

Omar  Khayyam.  Rubaiyat  of  Omar  Khay- 
yam, translated  into  English  quatrains  by 
Edward  FitzGerald.  Random  House. 
[1947.]  xxii,  149  pp.  Col.  illus. 

PK6513.A1  1947 

A  complete  reprint  of  the  first  edition  and  the 
combined  third,  fourth  and  fifth  editions,  with  an 
appendix  containing  FitzGerald's  prefaces  and 
notes.  Edited  with  an  introduction  by  Louis  Un- 
termeyer. 

Illustrated  by  Mahmoud  Sayah. 
Stork,  Charles  Wharton,  translator.  A  second 
book  of  Danish  verse  .  .  .  with  a  foreword 
by  Johannes  V.  Jensen.  Princeton  Univ. 
Press  for  the  American-Scandinavian 
Foundation,  New  York.  1947.  xvii,  155 
pp.  PT7P,8?.EsS7 

"Supplements  and  brings  up  to  date  A  Book  of 
Danish  Verse  translated  by  S.  Foster  Damon  and 
Robert  Silliman  Hillyer  .  .  .  now  out  of  print." 

Music 

Alton,  Robert.  Violin  and  'cello  building  and 
repairing  .  .  .  with  3  half-tones  and  82 
other  illustrations.  London,  Cassell  and  Com- 
pany, Ltd.   [1946.1    182  pp.  ML802.A4 

Britten,  Benjamin.  The  rape  of  Lucretia, 
opera  in  two  acts.  Boosey  and  Ha'wkes, 
Ltd.  [1946.]  56  pp.  ML50.B8686R3  1946 
Libretto  after  Andr£  Obey's  play  "Le  viol  de 
Lucreee,"  by  Ronald  Duncan.  Music  by  Benjamin 
Britten. 

Cluzeau  Mortet,  Luis.  Mar  de  luna  (canto 
y  piano).  Montevideo,  LTruguay,  Editorial 
Cooperativa  Interamericana  de  Compo- 
sirores.   [1941.]  *Mi.Isv.2 

Dorian,  Frederick.  The  musical  workshop. 
Harper.  [1947.]  xvi,  368  pp.  Illus.  Music. 

ML3830.D7 

Horton,  John.  The  chamber  music  of  Men- 
delssohn. London,  G.  Cumberlege.  Ox- 
ford Univ.  Press.  1946.  65  Pp.  Illus.  Music. 

MT145.M5H6 

Marmelszadt,  Willard.  Musical  sons  of  Aes- 
culapius .  .  .  foreword  by  Victor  Robin- 
son, M.  D.  New  York,  Froben  Press.  1046. 
112  pp.  Illus.  R707.M37 

Rinaldi,  Mario.  Catalogo  numerico  tematico 
delle  composizioni  di  Antonio  Vivaldi,  con 
la  definizione  delle  tonalita,  l'indicazione 
dei  movimenti  e  varie  tabelle  illustrative. 
Roma,  Editrice  Cultura  Moderna.  [I045-] 
307  pp.  *MLi34-V7A3 

The  "Premessa,"  Criteri  seguiti  nella  cataloga- 
zione"  and  the  "Osservazioni  e  commenti"  are  in 
Italian,  French.  English  and  German.  Parts  of  the 
two  latter  sections  are  also  in  Russian. 

Scott,  Thomas  Jefferson.  Sing  of  America: 
folk  tunes  collected  and  arr.  by  Tom  Scott ; 


LIST  OF  NEW  BOOKS 


399 


text  by  Joy  Scott,  wood  engraving's  by 
Bernard  Brussel-Smith.  [New  York,  T. 
Y.  Crowell  Company.  1947.]  82  pp.  Illus. 

M1629.S33S5 

Vallas,  Leon.  Vincent  d'Indy.  Paris.  A.  Mi- 
chel. [1946.]  Music.  ML410.I  7V3 


C.  Colliy.  —  Discussion  of  international  economic 
policies.  —  United  States  policy  concerning  inter- 
national information  and  cultural  relations,  by 
Kenneth  Holland.  —  Relations  of  idcalogies  and 
communications  to  foreign  policy,  by  R.  D.  Leigh. 
—  Freedom  of  the  press  and  American  foreign 
policy,  by  Seymour  Bcrkson.  —  Discussion  of  in- 
ternational   informational  policies. 


Philosophy 

Frankfort,  Henri.  The  intellectual  adventure 
of  ancient  man;  an  essay  on  speculative 
thought  in  the  ancient  Near  East  ...  by 
H.  and  H.  A.  Frankfort,  John  A.  Wilson, 
Thorkild  Jacobscn  [and]  William  A.  Ir- 
win. Univ.  of  Chicago.  [1946.]  vii,  401  pp. 

BL96.F8 

"Contains  lectures  given  as  a  public  course  in 
the  humanities  of  the  University  of  Chicago." 
Includes  bibliographies. 

Contents.  —  Introduction:  Myth  and  reality,  by  H. 
and  H.  A.  Frankfort.  Egypt:  The  nature  of 
the  universe.  The  function  of  the  state.  The 
values  of  life.  By  J.  A.  Wilson.  —  Mesopotamia: 
The  cosmos  as  a  stale.  The  function  of  the  state. 
The  good  life.  By  Thorkild  Tacobson.  —  The 
Hebrews:  God.  Man.  Man  in  the  world.  Nation, 
society,  and  politics,  by  W.  A.  Irwin.  Conclusion: 
The  emancipation  of  thought  from  myth,  by  H. 
and    H.    A.  Frankfort. 


Politics  and  Government 

Beard,  William.  Government  and  liberty;  the 
American  system.  Garden  City,  New  York, 
Halcyon  House.  [1047.]  x,  362  pp.  Map, 
diagrs.  JK274.B428 

Huxley,  Julian  S.  UNESCO:  its  purpose 
and  its  philosophy.  [Washington,]  Fublic 
Affairs  Press.   [I947-]  62  pp.  AS4.U83H8 

King,  William  B.,  and  Frank  O'Brien.  The 
Ralkans,  frontier  of  two  worlds.  Knopf. 
1947.  viii,  278  pp.  Map.  DR48.5.K5 

Tn    Basic  English. 

Richards,  Ivor  Armstrong.  Nations  and  peace 
.  .  .  pictures  by  Ramon  Gordon.  Simon 
and  Schuster.  1947.  159  pp.  PE1073.5.R54 

U.  S.  Dcpt  of  stale.  The  international  con- 
trol of  atomic  energy,  growth  of  a  policy. 
An  informal  summary  record  of  the  of- 
ficial declarations  and  proposals  relating 
to  the  international  control  of  atomic 
energy  made  between  August  6,  1945  and 
October  15,  1946.  Washington,  D.  C,  The 
Dept.  of  State.  [1946.1  xvii,  281pp.  Dia- 
grams. HDQ698.A3U5  1946 

Wright,  Quincy,  editor.  A  foreign  policy  for 
the  United  States.  Univ.  of  Chicago  Press, 
x.  404  pp.  E744.W7 

Contents.  —  The  United  States  and  The  other 
great  powers,  by  W.  T.  R.  Fox.  —  The  United 
States  and  the  United  Kingdom,  by  C.  W.  de 
Kie-.viet.  —  The  United  States  and  the  Soviet 
Union,  by  J.  N.  Hazard.  —  Discussions  of  great- 
power  relationships.  ■ —  The  United  States  and 
the  United  nations,  by  Leo  Pasvolsky.  —  The 
security  problem  in  the  light  of  atomic  energy, 
by  Bernard  Brodie.  —  Discussion  of  general  se- 
curity. ■ —  The  Far  East,  by  J.  W.  Ballantine.  — 
Discussion  of  the  Far  East.  —  The  Near  Fast,  by 
J.  A.  Wilson.  —  Discu"ion  of  the  Near  East.  _ — 
Eastern  Eurone,  by  A.  N.  Dragnich.  —  Discussion 
of  eastern  Europe.  —  Latin  America,  by  Al'cn 
Haden.  —  Discussion  of  Latin  America.  —  The 
expansion  of  world  trade  and  employment,  by 
Clair  Wilcox.  —  Free  enterprise  and  commercial 
policy,  by  Herbert  Feis.  —  Adjustment  of  great- 
power  rivalries  for  raw  materials  and  trade,  by  C. 


Psychology 

Joad,  Cyril  E.  M.  How  our  minds  work. 
New  York,  Philosophical  Library.  [1947.] 
"6  pp.  BF161.J53 

Morris,  Charles  W.  Signs,  language  and  be- 
havior. Prentice-Hall.  1946.  xii,  365  pp. 

BF458.M6 

Religion 

Baughan,  Raymond  John.  Undiscovered 
country;  morning  thoughts  to  brace  the 
spirit  of  the  common  man.  Macmillan. 
1946.  401  pp.  BV48^2.B355 

Cannon,  William  Ragsdale.  The  theology  of 
John  Wesley,  with  special  reference  to  the 
doctrine  of  justification.  New  York,  Abing- 
don-Cokesbury  Press.  [1946.]  284  pp. 
Bibliography:  pp.  257-273.  BX8495.W5C3 

Eustace,  Cecil  John.  An  infinity  of  questions; 
a  study  of  the  religion  of  art,  and  of  the 
art  of  religion  in  the  lives  of  five  women 
.  .  .  With  an  introduction  by  Michael  de 
la  Bedoyere.  Longmans.  Green.  1946.  170 
pp.  BV5095.A1E8  1946 

Kelly,  Gerald.  Modern  youth  and  chastity. 
St.  Louis,  Mo.,  The  Queen's  Work,  Inc. 
[■1946.]    104  pp.  BJ1533.C4K45  1946 

Formerly  printed  under  the  title  "Chastity  and 
Catholic  youth."  A  book  for  college  men  and 
women,  prepared  under  the  auspices  of  the  Insti- 
tute of  religious  education,  in  collaboration  with 
B.  R.  Fulkerson  .  .  .  and  C.  F.  Whitford. 


Science 

Miscellaneous 

Griffiths,  Lois  Wilfred.  Introduction  to  the 
theory  of  equations.  2d  ed.  Wiley.  [1947.] 
ix,  278  pp.  QA211.G7  1947 

Michener,  William  Henry.  Physics  for  stu- 
dents of  science  and  engineering.  Wiley. 
[1947.]  x,  646  pp.  8203.114 

Simon,  Leslie  E.  German  research  in  World 
War  II,  an  analysis  of  the  conduct  of  re- 
search. Wiley.   [1947.]  .  Q127.G3S5 

Natural  Sciences 

Boulenger,  E.  G.,  and  others.  Wild  life  the 
world  over,  comprising  twenty-seven  chap- 
ters written  by  nine  distinguished  world- 
traveled  specialists.  New  York,  Wise. 
[1947.]  624  pp.  Col.  plates.  QL50.W68 

Sinnott,  Edmund  W.  Botany;  principles  and 
problems.  4th  ed.  McGraw-Hill.  1046.  xvii, 
726  pp.   Illus.,   Diagrs.        QK47.S6  1946 

Wahlstrom,  Ernest  E.  Igneous  minerals  and 
rocks.  Wiley.  [1947.]  ix,  367  pp.  Illus., 
tables,  diagrs.  QE461.W23 


400 


MORE  BOOKS:  A  BULLETIN 


Wolf,  Frederick  A.,  and  Frederick  T.  Wolf. 
The  Fungi.  Wiley.  [1947-1  QK603.W6 

Sociology 

Archaeology 

Bennett,  Wendell  C.  Excavations  in  the 
Cuenca  region,  Ecuador.  Pub.  for  the 
Dept.  of  Anthropology,  by  the  Yale  Univ. 
Press.  1946.  84  pp.  *382oa.i38  No.  35 

Gotze,  Albrecht.  Old  Babylonian  omen  texts. 
Yale  Univ.  Press.  1947.  ix,  16  pp.  138 
plates.  3030A.31 
(Yale  oriental  series.  Babylonian  texts,  v.  10.) 
Plates  are  autographed  texts. 

Osgood,  Cornelius.  British  Guiana  archaeology 
to  1945.  Pub.  for  the  Dept.  of  Anthro- 
pology, by  the  Yale  Univ.  Press.  1946.  65 
pp.  Illus.,  maps.  *382o.a.i38  N0.36 

Miscellaneous 

Mannheim,  Hermann.  Criminal  justice  and 
social  reconstruction.  New  York,  Oxford 
Univ.  Press.  1946.  x,  290  pp.  HV7407.M3 

International  library  of  sociology  and  social  re- 
construction;  editor:   Dr.   Karl  Mannheim. 

Thibon,  Gustave.  What  ails  mankind?  An 
essay  on  social  phvsiology  .  .  .  Tr.  by 
Willard  Hill.  Sheed  &  Ward.  1947.  136 
pp.  HN17.T422 

Technology 

Chemical  Engineering 

Fox,  M.  R.  Vat  dyestuffs  and  vat  dyeing. 
London,  Chapman  &  Hall,  Ltd.,  1946. 
323  PP-  Illus..  diagrs.  8032.249 

Mantel],  Charles  L.  Industrial  carbon,  its 
elemental,  adsorptive.  and  manufactured 
forms.  2d  ed.  Van  Nostrand.  1946.  x,  472 
pp.  Tables,  diagrs.  8031. 198R 


Food  Technology 

Adams,  Harold  S.  Milk  and  food  sanitation 
practice.  New  York,  The  Commonwealth 
Fund.  1947.  xi,  311  pp.  Illus.  SF257.A4 

Turnbow,  Grover  Dean,  Paul  Hubert  Tracy, 
and  Lloyd  Andrew  Raffetto.  The  ice 
cream  industry.  Wiley.  [1947.]  ix,  654  pp. 
Illus.,  diagrs.  8031N.1R 

General  Engineering 

Berger,  (C.  L.)  &  sons,  Boston.  Pocket  edition 
of  field  adjustments  of  the  Berger  engin- 
eering &  surveying  instruments.  Roxbury, 
Mass.,  C  L.  Berger  &  Sons,  Inc.  [1946.] 
viii,  106  pp.  Illus.  4020.250 

Harlow,  Alvin  Ray.  The  road  of  the  Cen- 
tury; the  story  of  the  New  York  Central. 
New  York,  Creative  Age  Press,  f  1947-1 
447  pp.  Illus.  4025D.9 

Lewitt,  Ernest  H.  Hydraulics  and  the  me- 
chanism of  fluids;   a   textbook  covering 


the  syllabuses  of  the  B.  Sc.  (Eng.)  Inst. 
C.  E.,  and  I.  Mech.  E.  examinations  in 
this  subject.  7th  ed.  London,  Sir  I.  Pit- 
man &  Sons,  Ltd.  1946.  601  pp.  4028.21S 
Sporn,  Philip,  E.  R.  Ambrose,  and  Theodore 
Baumeister.  Heat  pumps.  Wiley.  1947.  vii, 


IMS  pp. 


'•4037.207 


Stcut,  Wesley  Winans.  Great  engines  and 
great  planes.  Detroit,  Chrysler  Corp.. 
1947-  J33  PP-  IHus.,  (part,  col.)  4036B.166 
Thompson,  James  Edgar.  Engineering  or- 
ganization and  methods.  1st  ed.  McGraw- 
Hill.  1947.  x,  337  pp.  Diagrs.  4012.58K 
Wells,  A.  Wade.  Hail  to  the  jeep;  a  factual 
and  pictorial  history  of  the  jeep.  Harper. 
[1946.]  120  pp.  Illus.  UC343.W4 

Metallurgy 

Aluminum  Company  of  America.  Alcoa 
aluminum  in  automatic  screw  machines. 
Pittsburgh,  Pa.,  Aluminum  Company  of 
America.   1946.  95  pp.  8027.233 

—  Casting  Alcoa  alloys.  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 
Aluminum  Company  of  America.  1947. 
140  pp.  8027  A. 18 

—  Forming  Alcoa  aluminum  and  magnesium. 
Pittsburgh,  Pa.,  Aluminum  Company  of 
America.  1947.  88  pp.  8027.215R 

Winslow,  Mabel  E.,  and  Hazel  J.  Stratton, 
com f>!lers.  Bureau  of  mines  papers  pub- 
lished in  the  technical  press,  January  1, 
1938  to  January  1,  1946.  [Washington, 
1946.]   230  pp.  *Z6736.W68 


Travel  and  Description 

Beaton,  Cecil  W.  H.  Indian  album.  [Lon- 
don,] B.  T.  Batsford,  Ltd.  [1946.I  77  pp. 

4098.04-200 

A  supplementary  volume  to  the  author's  Far  East, 
1945- 

Butcher,  Devereux.  Exploring  our  national 
parks  and  monuments.  Prepared  under 
the  auspices  of  the  National  Parks  As- 
sociation. New  York,  Oxford  Univ.  Press. 
1947.   160  pp.   Illus.  E160.B8 

Chamberlain,  Samuel.  Behold  Williamsburg, 
a  pictorial  tour  of  Virginia's  colonial  capi- 
tal. Pub.  in  cooperation  with  Colonial 
Williamsburg.  New  York,  Hastings  House. 
[1947J    176  pp.   Illus.  8094.04-119 

Chiang,  Monlin.  Tides  from  the  west;  a  Chi- 
nese autobiography.  Yale  Univ.  1947.  vi, 
282  pp.  DS778.C58A3 
"This  book  is  issued  by  the  Yale  University  Press 
in  co-operation  with  the  China  Institute  of  Pacific 
Relations  .  .  ." 

Grattan,  Clinton  Hartley.  Introducing  Aus- 
tralia. Day.  [1947.]  xvi,  357  pp.  Plates. 

DU104.G66  1947 

Terry,  T.  Philip.  Terry's  guide  to  Mexico; 
the  new  standard  guidebook  to  the  Mexi- 
can republic,  with  chapters  on  the  rail- 
ways, airways,  bus  lines,  and  ocean  routes 
to  Mexico,  and  the  automobile  roads  in 
the  republic  .  .  .  (Revised  by  Robert  C. 
Terry.)  Hingham,  Mass.  [Boston,  Rapid 
Service  Press. 1    1947.  932  pp.  Maps. 

F1209.T33  1947 


i 


BOSTON  PUBLIC  LIBRARY 


3  9999  08541  503  0